UBRARf 7 DAY 3s, Thermal Springs of the ___United States and Other Countries of the World— A Summary L iTHERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLDOLD FAITHFUL GEYSER IN ERUPTION, YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK, WYO. Photographed in 1872 by William H. Jackson, official photographer of the Hayden Survey, 1870-79Thermal Springs of the United States and Other Countries of the World— A Summary By GERALD A. WARING Revised by REGINALD R. BLANKENSHIP and RAY BENTALL GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 492 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE, WASHINGTON : 1965UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR STEWART L. UDALL, Secretary The U.S. Geological Survey Library has cataloged this publication as follows : Waring, Gerald Ashley, 1883- Thermal springs of the United States and other countries of the world; a summary. Revised by Reginald R. Blankenship and Ray Bentall. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1965. ix, 383 p. front., maps, tables. 30 cm. (U.S. Geological Survey. Professional paper 492.) Bibliography: p. 251-383. 1. Springs. 2. Geysers. 3. Water, Underground. I. Blankenship, Reginald R II. Bentall, Ray, 1917- III. Title. (Se- GEOLOGICAL SURVEY Thomas B. Nolan, Director ries). For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office Washington, D.C., 20402 - Price $2.75 (paper cover)CONTENTS Abstract______________________________________________ Introduction__________________________________________ Personnel and acknowledgments____________________ Bibliographic sources____________________________ Features of some springs_________________________ Conversion factors___________________j----------- Abbreviations____________________________________ Thermal springs_______________________________________ Distribution_____________________________________ Origin___________________________________________ Mineral constituents_____._______________________ Deposits_________________________________________ Organic associations_____________________________ Boiling temperatures.____________________________ Description of thermal springs________________________ United States____________________________________ Other North American countries___________________ Canada_______________________________________ Mexico_______________________________________ Central America (Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Nicaragua, and Panama)_____________________ West Indies______________________________________ South America____________________________________ Argentina____________________________________ Bolivia______________________________________ Brazil_______________________________________ Chile........................................ Colombia and Venezuela_______________________ Ecuador______________________________________ Peru_________________________________________ Atlantic region__________________________________ Azores_______________________________________ Greenland____________________________________ Iceland______________________________________ Minor islands—Canary, Cape Verde, Faroe (Faeroe), Jan Mayen, and Spitsbergen (Svalbard) _______________________________________ Other small islands__________________________ Europe___________________________________________ Austria______________________________________ Belgium and Luxembourg_______________________ British Isles________________________________ Bulgaria ____________________________________ Czechoslovakia_______________________________ France_______________________________________ Germany and Poland___________________________ Greece and Albania___________________________ Hungary______________________________________ Italy----------------...--------------------- Portugal_____________________________________ Rumania (Romania)____________________________ Spain________________________________________ Sweden_______________________________________ Switzerland__________________________________ Yugoslavia___________________________________ Description of thermal springs—Continued Page Africa---------------------------------------------- 139 Algeria and Tunisia____________________________ 139 Angola_________________________________________ 144 Belgian Congo (Republic of the Congo) and Ruanda-Urundi (Republic of Rwanda and Kingdom of Burundi)__________________________ 146 Egypt, Libya, and Sudan________________________ 147 Eritrea, Ethiopia, French Somaliland, an 1 Somali Republic_____________________________________ 150 French Equatorial Africa, French West Africa, and Nigeria__________________________________ 153 Morocco________________________________________ 154 Southern Africa (Bechuanaland Protectorate, Kenya, Mozambique, Northern and Southern Rhodesia, Nyasaland, Tanganyika, and Uganda). 154 South West Africa and Union of South Africa.. 158 Indian Ocean______________________________ _________ 162 Madagascar (Malagasy Republic)_________________ 162 Minor islands—-Kerguelen, Reunion, Rodriguez, and Saint Paul_______________________________ 163 Asia______________________________________________ 165 Afghanistan__________________________________ 165 Arabian Peninsula______________________________ 165 China______________________________________ 167 Eastern China______________________________ 167 Formosa (Taiwan)___________________________ 171 Manchuria__________________________________ 173 Sinkiang and Tibet_________________________ 174 India and adjacent areas_______________________ 176 Indo-China (Cambodia, Laos, and Viet Nam).. 186 Iran (Persia)__________________________________ 189 Iraq___________________________________________ 190 Israel and Jordan______________________________ 191 Japan__________________________________________ 193 Korea (Chosen)_________________________________ 205 Lebanon and Syria______________________________ 206 Malaya (Federation of Malaya)__________________ 207 Mongolia_______________________________________ 207 Thailand (Siam)_______________________________ 208 Turkey and Cyprus______________________________ 208 Union of Soviet Socialist Republics____________ 215 Pacific region_____________________________________ 223 Australia______________________________________ 223 Bismarck Archipelago and eastern New Guinea. 226 Borneo (North Borneo, Brunei, Sarawak, and Kalimantan)________________________________ 228 Celebes________________________________________ 230 Fiji........................................ 230 Gal&pagos Islands______________________________ 232 Java._________________________________________ 232 Page 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 8 8 9 9 9 54 54 57 62 65 72 72 80 82 87 88 91 93 96 96 97 98 104 105 107 107 109 109 111 114 115 119 123 126 127 133 134 136 137 137 138 *715VI CONTENTS Description of thermal springs—Continued Pacific region—Continued Kermadec Islands____________________________ Molucca Islands_____________________________ New Caledonia_______________________________ New Hebrides________________________________ New Zealand_________________________________ Philippine Republic_________________________ Samoa_______________________________________ Solomon Islands----------------------------- Sumatra_____________________________________ Tonga Islands_______________________________ Volcano Islands_____________________________ Antarctic region (Balleny Islands, Ross Island, and South Shetland Islands)_______________________ Bibliographic references_____________________________ General references_______________________________ United States____________________________________ General references________________*_________ Alaska______________________________________ Arizona__________________.__________________ Arkansas____________________________________ California__________________________________ Colorado------------------------------------ Florida_____________________________________ Georgia_____________________________________ Hawaii______________________________________ Idaho_______________________________________ Massachusetts_______________________________ Montana_____________________________________ Nevada______________________________________ New Mexico__________________________________ New York____________________________________ North Carolina________________________________ Oregon...................................... Pennsylvania________________________________ South Dakota________________________________ Texas_______________________________________ Utah...........................-............ Virginia____________________________________ Washington..________________________________ West Virginia_______________________________ Wyoming_____________________________________ Other North American countries___________________ Canada______________________________________ Mexico______________________________________ Central America (Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Nicaragua, and Panama)____________________ West Indies____________________________'_________ Greater Antilles____________________________ Lesser Antilles_____________________________ South America____________________________________ Argentina___________________________________ Bolivia_____________________________________ Brazil______________________________________ Chile....................................... Colombia and Venezuela______________________ Ecuador_____________________________________ Peru________________________________________ Atlantic region__________________________________ Azores______________________________________ Greenland___________________________________ Iceland_____________________________________ Bibliographic references—Continued Atlantic region—Continued Minor islands—Canary, Cape Verde, Faroe (Faeroe), Jan Mayen, and Spitsbergen (Sval- p«e bard)_______________________________________ 299 Europe____________________________________________ 300 General references____________________________ 300 Austria_______________________________________ 300 Belgium and Luxembourg________________________ 302 British Isles_________________________________ 302 Bulgaria______________________________________ 306 Czechoslovakia________________________________ 306 France._______________________________________ 308 Germany and Poland______________________—... 315 Greece and Albania___________________________ 321 Hungary_______________________________________ 321 Italy_________________________________________ 323 Portugal______________________________________ 328 Rumania (Romania)_____________________________ 329 Spain_________________________________________ 330 Sweden________________________________________ 331 Switzerland___________________________________ 331 Yugoslavia_________________________________- 332 Africa____________________________________________ 333 General references____________________________ 333 Algeria and Tunisia___________________________ 833 Angola______________________________________ 336 Belgian Congo (Republic of the Congo) and Ruanda-Urundi (Republic of Rwanda and Kingdom of Burundi)_________________________ 336 Egypt, Libya, and Sudan_______________________ 336 Eritrea, Ethiopia, (Abyssinia), French Somaliland, and Somali Republic_____________________ 337 French Equatorial Africa, French West Africa, and Nigeria_________________________________ 338 Morocco_______________________________________ 338 Southern Africa (Bechuanaland Protectorate, Kenya, Mozambique, Northern and Southern Rhodesia, Nyasaland, Tanganyika, and Uganda)_____________________________________ 339 South West Africa and Union of South Africa_ 340 Indian Ocean______________________________________ 342 Madagascar__________________________________ 342 Minor islands—Kerguelen, Reunion, Rodriguez, and Saint Paul______________________________ 343 Asia______________________________________________ 343 Afghanistan__________________________________ 343 Arabian Peninsula_____________________________ 344 China_________________________________________ 344 General references and eastern part of China___________________________________ 344 Formosa (Taiwan)__________________________ 344 Manchuria_________________________________ 345 Sinkiang and Tibet________________________ 345 India and adjacent areas______________________ 346 Indo-China (Cambodia, Laos, and Viet Nam).. 349 Iran (Persia)_________________________________ 349 Iraq__________________________________________ 350 Israel and Jordan.____________________________ 350 Japan_________________________________________ 350 Korea (Chosen)________________________________ 363 Lebanon and Syria_____________________________ 364 Malaya (Federation of Malaya)_________________ 364 Page 237 237 239 239 239 246 248 248 250 250 250 251 251 251 255 255 257 258 259 259 263 264 264 264 265 266 266 267 270 270 270 270 271 271 271 272 272 273 273 274 279 279 280 282 284 284 284 286 286 288 288 290 290 291 292 293 293 293 294CONTENTS VII Bibliographic references—Continued Asia—Continued Pag* Mongolia_______________________________________ 364 Thailand (Siam)________________________________ 364 Turkey and Cyprus__________________________. 364 Union of Soviet Socialist Republics____________ 366 Pacific region_____________________________________ 372 Australia______________________________________ 372 Bismarck Archipelago and eastern New Guinea,. 373 Borneo (North Borneo, Brunei, Sarawak, and Kalimantan)__________________________________ 373 Celebes________________________________________ 374 Fiji___________________________________________ 374 Galdpagos Islands______________________________ 375 Java___________________________________________ 375 Bibliographic references—Continued Pacific region—Continued Page Kermadec Islands______________________________ 376 Molucca Islands_______________________________ 376 New Caledonia_________________________________ 376 New Hebrides__________________________________ 376 New Zealand___________________________________ 376 Philippine Republic___________________________ 381 Samoa_________________________________________ 383 Solomon Islands_______________________________ 383 Sumatra________________________________________ 383 Tonga Islands__________________________________ 383 Volcano Islands________________________________ 383 Antarctic region (Balleny Islands, Ross Island, and South Shetland Islands)_________________________ 383 MAPS Page Figure 1. The world showing principal volcanic belts and areas____________________ 6 2. Western part of the conterminous United States showing location of thermal springs_________________________________________________________ 12 3. Eastern part of the conterminous United States showing location of thermal springs------------------------------------------------------ 13 4. Part of Idaho showing location of thermal springs--------------------- 14 5. Yellowstone National Park, Wyo., showing location of thermal springs, geysers, and mud pools__________________________________________________ 15 6. Oregon sho wing location of thermal springs___________________________ 16 7. Utah showing location of thermal springs______________________________ 17 8. California and Nevada showing location of thermal springs_____________ 18 9. Alaska showing location of thermal springs and volcanoes__________________ 51 10. Hawaii showing location of thermal springs and thermal wells,_____________ 54 11. Part of southwestern Canada showing location of thermal springs_______ 55 12. Mexico showing location of thermal springs and principal volcanoes____ 63 13. Central America showing location of thermal springs and principal volcanoes_______________________________________________________________ 66 14. Part of the West Indies showing location of thermal springs in the Antilles________________________________________________________________ 67 15. Northern parts of Argentina and Chile showing location of thermal springs------------------------------------------------------------- 76 16. Southern parts of Argentina and Chile showing location of thermal springs......................................................... 77 17. Rfo Hondo area, Santiago del Estero Province, Argentina, showing location of springs---------------------------------------------------- 78 18. Copahue area, Neuqu6n Territory, Argentina, showing location of springs------------------------------------------------------------ 79 19. Western Bolivia and central and southern Peru showing location of thermal springs and principal volcanoes_________________________________ 82 20. Brazil showing location of thermal springs________________________________ 83 21. Colombia and Venezuela showing location of thermal springs and solfataric volcanoes____________________________________________________ 90 22. Ecuador showing location of thermal springs and principal volcanoes___ 91 23. Azores showing location of thermal springs________________________________ 96 24. Sao Miguel Island, Azores, showing location of thermal springs____________ 96 25.. Springs at Furnas, Sao Miguel Island, Azores---------------------------- 96 26. Greenland showing location of thermal springs___________:_________________ 98 27. Iceland showing location of principal thermal springs and geysers_____ 99 28. Hengill-Olfus area of thermal springs, Iceland___________________________ 100 29. Geysir group, Haukadalur, Iceland______________________________________ 100 30. Canary Islands showing location of thermal springs_______________________ 105VIII CONTENTS Figure 31. Austria, Czechoslovakia, and Hungary showing location of thermal Page springs and thermal wells_____________________________________________ 106 32. Belgium, France, and Luxembourg showing location of thermal springs. 108 33. Part of the British Isles showing location of thermal springs and thermal wells_________________________________________________________________ 110 34. Bulgaria showing location of thermal springs___________________________ 112 35. Germany and western Poland showing location of thermal springs and thermal wells_________________________________________________________ 120 36. Greece and Albania showing location of thermal springs__________________ 126 37. Italy and Switzerland showing location of thermal snrings_______________ 128 38. Tuscany area, Italy, showing fumarole localities________________________ 129 39. Ischia Island, Italy, showing location of thermal springs_______________ 129 40. Portugal and Spain showing location of thermal springs__________________ 133 41. Rumania and Yugoslavia showing location of thermal springs______________ 135 42. Northern part of Algeria showing location of thermal springs____________ 140 43. Northern part of Tunisia showing location of thermal springs____________ 141 44. Part of southern Africa showing location of thermal springs in Angola, Bechuanaland Protectorate, Burundi, Kenya, Mozambique, Northern and Southern Rhodesia, Nyasaland, Republic of the Congo, Rwanda, Tanganyika, and Uganda________________________________________________ 145 45. Northern Africa showing location of thermal springs in Egypt, French Equatorial Africa, French West Africa, Libya, Morocco, and Sudan.. 149 46. Eritrea, Ethiopia, French Somaliland, and Somali Republic showing location of thermal springs___________________________________________ 151 47. Part of southern Africa showing location of thermal springs and thermal wells in South West Africa and the Union of South Africa______________ 159 48. Madagascar (Malagasy Republic) showing location of thermal snrings and principal lava areas______________________________________________ 164 49. Minor islands in the southern Indian Ocean showing location of thermal springs on Kerguelen, Reunion, Rodriguez, and Saint Paul__________________________________________________________________ 165 50. Kerguelen Archipelago, Indian Ocean, showing location of fumaroles, mofettes, and thermal springs_________________________________________ 166 51. Reunion Island, Indian Ocean, showing location of thermal springs and fumaroles_____:___________________________________________________ 167 52. St. Paul Island, Indian Ocean, showing location of thermal springs and fumaroles_________________________________________________________ 167 53. Afghanistan, Baluchistan, and Iran showing location of thermal springs. 168 54. Arabian Peninsula, Iraq, Lebanon, and Syria showing location of thermal springs______________________________________________________ 169 55. China, Korea, and Mongolia showing location of thermal springs_ 171 56. Southern Manchuria showing location of thermal springs____________._ 172 57. Part of southern Tibet showing location of thermal springs______________ 175 58. India, Ceylon, Nepal, Sikkim, Burma, East Pakistan, and West Pakistan showing location of thermal springs__________________________ 177 59. Indo-China, Federation of Malaya, and Thailand showing location of thermal springs_______________________ _______________________________ 187 60. Dead Sea region of Israel and Jordan showing location of thermal springs______________________________________________________________ 192 61. Japan and the Kuril Islands showing location of thermal springs and principal volcanoes___________________________________________________ 194 62. Hakone area, Kanagawa Prefecture, Japap, showing location of thermal springs_______________________________________________________________ 195 63. Aso caldera, Kumamoto Prefecture, Japan, showing location of hot springs/ and craters__________________________________________________ 195 64. Beppu area, Oita Prefecture, Japan, showing location of thermal springs_______________________________________________________________ 195 65. Izu Peninsula, Shizuoka Prefecture, Japan, showing location of thermal springs_______________________________________________________________ 196 66. Nasu area, Tochigi Prefecture, Japan, showing location of thermal springs.__________________________________________________________ 196 67. Shiobara area, Tochigi Prefecture, Japan, showing location of thermal springs______________________________________________________________ 196 68. Turkey and Cyprus showing location of thermal springs__________________ 210CONTENTS IX Page Figure 69. Union of Soviet Socialist Republics showing location of thermal springs, 216 70. Kamchatka Peninsula showing location of thermal springs_______________ 217 71. Australia showing location of thermal springs and thermal wells_______ 224 72. Part of the Pacific region showing location of Volcano Islands, Bismarck Archipelago, Solomon Islands, New Hebrides, New Caledonia, Fiji, Samoa, Tonga Islands, and Kermadec Islands__________________________ 226 73. Bismarck Archipelago and eastern New Guinea showing location of thermal springs and volcanoes_____________________________’_________ 227 74. Part of the East Indies showing location of thermal springs and principal chains of volcanoes in Borneo, Celebes, Molucca Islands, and Sumatra, 229 75. Fiji showing location of thermal springs_________________________________ 232 76. Java and nearby islands showing location of thermal springs, volcanoes, and main lava areas____________________________________________________ 233 77. New Zealand showing location of geysers, thermal springs, and main lava areas_____________________________________________________________ 240 78. Rotorua-Taupo area, New Zealand, showing location of thermal spring groups_________________________________________________________________ 242 79. Rotorua and Whakarewarewa districts, New Zealand, showing main springs and geysers____________________________________________________ 243 80. Philippine Republic showing location of thermal springs and principal volcanoes (all solfataric)_____________________________________________ 249 81. Part of the South Polar region showing location of Balleny Islands and Ross Island____________________________________________________________ 251 82. Ross Island area, Antarctica, showing location of volcanic mountains.. 251THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD A SUMMARY By Gerald A. Waring. Revised by Reginald R. Blankenship and Rat Bentall ABSTRACT Thermal springs are widely distributed throughout the world but are most numerous in areas in which there has been volcanic activity in late geologic time. A review ot the available literature has revealed much information on the location of the springs, the temperature of the water, the rate of flow, the chemical character of the water and evolved gases, and the uses made of the water. All such information has been tabulated by countries or geographic areas and is presented in the first part of this report. Accompanying the tabulated data for each country or geographic area is a brief description of the geology and a map showing the location of the springs. The second part of the report consists of a list of references, some annotated briefly, to the literature on thermal springs. The references are grouped by countries or geographic areas and within each group are arranged in alphabetical order by author. However, for ease of citation throughout the report, the references have been assigned consecutive numbers. INTRODUCTION During his early work with the U.S. Geological Survey, the author was assigned to studies of the mineral and thermal springs of California and Alaska. Later he assisted in the compilation of data on thermal springs throughout the United States. These studies stimulated his interest in the distribution and character of thermal springs in other parts of the world, and during 1954-58 he examined available literature on the subject and compiled an extensively annotated bibliography. Although he planned originally that the bibliography, complete with annotations, would be reproduced in this report, it grew to such size that its publication in full was not feasible. Accordingly, it was decided to place the bibliography in the open file of the U.S. Geological Survey in Washington, D.C., where it may be examined by persons interested, and to publish in this report the titles of the references together with brief annotations of selected references. As published herein, annotations accompany only those titles that either do not of themselves reveal their relevance to the subject of thermal springs or seem not to indicate adequately the scope of the information contained in the publications. Although numbered consecutively (from 1 to 3733) to facilitate citation in the tables of springs and elsewhere, the references are grouped ac- cording to the geographic area or political unit to which they pertain, and within each group they are arranged alphabetically by author. Much information on thermal springs was obtained through examination of the available literature. For ease of presentation in this report, the data on springs have been arranged in tables, each table for a country or a geographic area. Numbers assigned to the individual springs or groups of springs correspond to the numbered locations on the appropriate maps. The boundaries of a few countries may have changed somewhat since the maps were compiled and those shown are not necessarily the political boundaries now recognized officially. Given for each spring or group of springs, if known, are the name or location and information on the temperature of the water, the flow, the chemical character of the water, and the associated rocks. Other pertinent information also is given, and those references that contain data on a spring or group of springs are identified in the tables by their serial numbers. PERSONNEL AND ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Most of the reports and articles cited in the present bibliography were examined in the libraries of Stanford University at Palo Alto, Calif., and the University of California at Berkeley, to which access was courteously granted. Through the kindness of Mrs. Florence Yao Chu, of the Stanford library, many publications were borrowed from other university libraries and from the Library of Congress. Many other books and journals were obtained from the library of the U.S. Geological Survey. Assistance in the translation of a number of Russian publications was given by Dr. Siemon W. Muller, Professor of Geology at Stanford. Articles in Turkish were translated by Miss Sakina Berengian, of the Hoover Institute and Library at Stanford. Articles in German, French, and Spanish were translated with the help of Kathryn Kip (Mrs. G. A.) Waring. Many of the abstracts in the original bibliography were adapted from the “Bibliography and Index of 12 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Geology Exclusive of North America,” issued annually by the Geological Society of America, and from the “Annotated Bibliography of Economic Geology,” issued semiannually by the Society of Economic Geologists. Many abstracts of articles on the chemistry of foreign thermal springs, especially in Japan, were adapted from “Chemical Abstracts” of the American Chemical Society. Each of these societies kindly gave permission for its abstracts to be reproduced in the original bibliography, which is in the open file of the Geological Survey. Specific data on a number of springs in California and Nevada were supplied by Mr. Donald E. White, of the U.S. Geological Survey, and information on several springs in southeastern Oregon was furnished by Mr. Frederick D. Trauger, also of the Survey. The bibliographic titles were verified by Mr. Blankenship, assisted by Miss Barbara Coate, Mrs. Mollie S. JablowT, Miss Susan D. Smith, and Mrs. Mary Ann Zimmerman, all of the U.S. Geological Survey in Washington, D.C. Mr. Blankenship reviewed the entire manuscript and gave it a preliminary editing; he also rearranged parts of the text and supplied several additional references. To Mr. Bentall fell the major task of making the final revision, shortening the manuscript, and preparing the brief annotations that are included. Mrs. Frances G. Thompson, of the Washington office, made the final rearrangement of the order in which the countries are covered and did the renumbering and crosschecking that were necessary at this stage. Other crosschecking during preparation of the final manuscript was done by Mrs. Mildred P. Martin and Mrs. Dorothy Lamar in the Menlo Park, Calif., office of the Geological Survey, and by Miss Guila C. Darling in the Lincoln, Nebr., office. As revised, the bibliography unavoidably still contains a few errors and inconsistencies, but these should not detract substantially from its usefulness as a guide to published information on the thermal springs of the world. BIBLIOGRAPHIC SOURCES Various geological and chemical bibliographies, some of them annotated, were the source of most of the references listed in this report. The author examined as many of the original publications as were available, abstracted therefrom the pertinent data on thermal springs, and verified the name of the author, date of publication, title, and other bibliographic data. From some of these original publications he obtained references to others, which were similarly examined. The bibliographies consulted are listed below. American Chemical Society, Chemical Abstracts, 1907-58, 52 v. American Geophysical Union, Transactions, 1920-57, 38 v. Geological Society of America, Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, 1933-56, 21 v. Geological Society of London, Geological Literature Added to the Society’s Library, 1894-1933, 37 v. Royal Society of London, Catalogue of Scientific Papers, 1800-1900, 20 v. Society of Economic Geologists, Annotated Bibliography of Economic Geology, 1928-56, 29 v. U.S. Geological Survey, Bibliographies of North American Geology : Bulls. 746 and 747, for 1785-1918; Bull. 823, for 1919-1928; Bull. 937, for 1929-1939; Bull. 1049, for 1940-1949; Bull. 985, for 1950; Bull. 1025, for 1951; Bull. 1035, for 1952-1953; Bull. 1054, for 1954; and Bull. 1065, for 1955. Publications concerning the therapeutic use of thermal mineral waters deal chiefly with the various spas of Europe. Some of these publications contain analyses of the waters, and most include information on the development and use of the springs. Many pamphlets have been issued by the principal resorts to describe their springs and the bathing and medical facilities, but only a few such publications are included in the geological or chemical bibliographies. The association of algae and other low’ forms of plant life with natural thermal waters has received considerable study. The presence of certain types of animal life in thermal springs also has been investigated. Some papers on these subjects, which have been published in journals of botany and of biology, are cited in the bibliography. The geographic coverage of published information on thermal springs is uneven. Many commercially developed springs at spas and health resorts have been described in great detail, but other springs that may be of equal geological and geochemical interest—but are in remote places—seem to be mentioned only in early books of travel and exploration or in the accounts of missionaries. Many of these rather casual references have been listed in the geological and other bibliographies or have been referred to by later writers. However, an attempt has been made not to extend the present bibliography unduly by including reports that contain only casual mention of springs that are described in detail in other reports. Most technical papers on specific thermal springs have been published in journals in the countries where the springs are located. The literature on the thermal springs of Europe is the most extensive, for many of the springs there have been developed and used since early medieval times and some were bathing and health resorts as early as the Roman period. The Comptes rendus of the Academy of Sciences, Paris, contain many articles on the thermal and mineral springs of France and her colonies. The principal springs and spas of Germany, Austria, and Czechoslovakia are discussed in the Sitzungsberichte and the Anzieger, Mathematisch-INTRODUCTION 3 Naturwissenschaftliche Klasse, Akademie der Wissen-schaften, Wien. Many papers on the geology and geography of parts of Asia and Africa, published in the “Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society of London” and in the “Geographical Journal of the Royal Geographical Society, London,” contain descriptions of thermal springs in remote regions. Articles in many other journals and magazines contain significant information and are therefore cited in the present compilation. Some of the listed books and articles were not available for examination but were included in the bibliography because they were thought likely to contain pertinent data on thermal springs. Also included in the bibliography are citations to published abstracts of many of the references. Most of the books and periodicals cited in the present bibliography are in the library of the U.S. Geological Survey and the Library of Congress, both in Washington, D.C. Most of them are also in the library of the University of California at Berkeley or in the library of Stanford University. Some rare books and periodicals are in the libraries of the U.S. Department of Agriculture, the Catholic University of America, the Smithsonian Institution, and the National Library of Medicine, all in Washington, D.C., and in the libraries of Yale University, New Haven, Conn., and Duke University, Durham, N.C. FEATURES OF SOME SPRINGS Many hot springs have been described as remarkably uniform in temperature, flow, and mineral content. Arago (ref. 8) postulated that the temperature of the earth in Algeria had not decreased more than 4° C. in 2,000 years, because the springs near Bone had supplied ancient baths and in 1785 still had a temperature higher than 96.0°C. Little other evidence has been presented to explain why many springs are so constant in character. Some intriguing areas, especially in Asia, have been brought to notice. For example, Fuchs (ref. 43) mentions the solfatara of Urumchi, in the northeastern part of Sinkiang Province of China, but no additional information on this solfatara has been found in the available literature. No good description of the geysers or spouting springs in southern Tibet, or specific information on the numerous hot springs thought to be in the mountains of Mongolia, seems to be available. Several thermal springs are reported in the Himalayas of Bhutan, but they also do not seem to be described in publications. Marek (ref. 3280) describes the general belief that the site of ancient Troy was near the present village of Bunarbashi in western Turkey and suggests that the springs near that village may be the hot springs mentioned in the Iliad of Homer (ref. 3272). However, no other available literature contains a discussion of the evidence afforded by those springs as to the site of ancient Troy. The hot springs of Tiberias near the Sea of Galilee doubtless were used in ancient times for their healing qualities. In early Biblical times the town near them was called Hammath (meaning “warm springs”) and was mentioned as one of several fenced cities (Joshua 19:35). The town was known later as Emmaus (meaning “hot springs”), but no mention of the medicinal use of these or any other hot springs in the valley of the Jordan River and Dead Sea is found in Biblical or other early records. The construction during 1919-27 of a siphon and drainage-tunnel system to divert the occasional overflow of hot acid water from the lake in Keloed crater of Kawah Idjen volcano in eastern Java is mentioned by Tazieff (ref. 94) and is also mentioned and illustrated in the “Bulletin of the Netherlands East Indian Voleanological Survey” (ref. 3724); but no detailed account of the difficulties that must have been encountered in such a project seems to have been published. CONVERSION FACTORS On the basis that 1 U.S. gallon equals 3.785 liters and that 1 hectoliter equals 26.420 U.S. gallons, a flow of 1,000 liters per minute is equivalent to 264.20 U.S. gallons per minute, and a flow of 1,000 hectoliters per day (24-hr) is equivalent to 69.444 liters per minute, or 18.347 U.S. gallons per minute. In each table of this report the water temperature of the springs is shown according to a single scale, either centigrade or Fahrenheit. Any temperatures recorded in the original publications in degrees Reaumur have been changed to centigrade (1°R=1.25°C). Degrees centigrade can be converted to degrees Fahrenheit by multiplying by % and adding 32; conversely, degrees Fahrenheit can be converted to degrees centigrade by subtracting 32 and multiplying by %. The equivalence of the centigrade and Fahrenheit scales within the normal range of thermal wTaters is given below. ° c ° F ° C O F ° C O F 15 59 45 113 75 167 20 68 50 122 80 176 25 77 55 131 85 185 30 86 60 140 90 194 35 95 65 149 95 203 40 104 70 158 100 212 In early chemical analyses of mineral waters the constituents commonly were reported as concentrations of hypothetical salts, and the concentrations of the constituents generally were expressed in grains per U.S. s4 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD gallon or imperial gallon, in grams per kilogram, or in grams per liter. In the annotations prepared originally, most of the analyses are reproduced as given by the author of the article, although a few that were given in grams per kilogram or grams per liter were converted to milligrams per liter. In most reports published since about 1900, results of analyses are stated in parts per thousand, per hundred thousand, or per million, by weight, or in grains per gallon; 1 grain per U.S. gallon (231 cu. in.) is equivalent to 17.12 ppm (parts per million) by weight and 1 grain per imperial gallon (277.41) cu. in., or 1.201 U.S. gallons) is equivalent to 14.25 ppm by weight. Water containing less than about 7,000 ppm of dissolved solids has a density close to unity, and the concentration values, for practical purposes, are the same whether expressed in parts per million by weight or in milligrams per liter. However, water containing more than about 7,000 ppm of dissolved solids has a density appreciably above unity, and the concentration values expressed in one unit cannot be equated to those expressed in the other. For example, ocean water, which has a density of about 1.026, has a dissolved-solids concentration of about 35,000 ppm, and the concentration values expressed in milligrams per liter are about 2.6 percent greater than if expressed in parts per million by weight. ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviations used for citations and for scientific and engineering terms in this report are those listed in “Suggestions to Authors of the Reports of the U.S. Geological Survey,” Washington, D.C. (U.S. Govt. Printing Office, 5th ed., 1958). THERMAL SPRINGS Strictly defined, any spring or well water whose average temperature is noticeably above the mean annual temperature of the air at the same locality may be classed as thermal. Among European springs that are developed commercially, only those whose temperature is higher than about 20°C are classed as thermal. In the United States, only those springs are called thermal whose temperature is at least 15°F above the mean annual temperature of the air at their localities. In areas where the mean annual air temperature is low, some springs that do not freeze in winter because of natural protective conditions are considered to be thermal ; in tropical areas some springs that are only a few degrees warmer than the temperature of the air may be considered thermal. DISTRIBUTION The most notable feature of the distribution of thermal springs is their close association with the main belts and areas of volcanoes of present or geologically recent activity. (See fig. 1.) Thermal springs are common in extensive areas of lava flows of Tertiary and later geologic age—for example, in Yellowstone National Park in Wyoming and in the great lava-covered areas of Idaho, eastern Oregon, and northern California. In the lava of the Auvergne region in France and in areas of volcanic rocks in Italy, thermal springs are more common than in other parts of those countries. Thermal springs are common also in areas where rocks, regardless of their character and age, have been faulted and intensely folded in geologically recent time. The close relation of thermal springs to structure in such intensely deformed mountain regions as the Alps and the Pyrenees has been commented upon by many writers. In regions of faulted block mountains in the western United States, many thermal springs issue along or close to the fault zones. ORIGIN Most investigators of thermal springs believe that almost all the water is of meteoric origin but that some of it may be magmatic. However, few studies have been made of the origin and movement of ground water in areas of thermal springs. As most observations of the temperature and flow of thermal springs have been made at intervals of many years, no trends in their changes have been established. Many thermal springs have been described as artesian, the water rising from deep strata along faults and fissures. Allen (ref. 120) concluded that steam given off by magma is the source of the heat in all the hot springs he had studied, chiefly in Yellowstone National Park and Lassen Volcanic National Park. He further concluded that the mineral content of the water is derived partly from the adjacent rock and partly from magmatic sources. Intensive studies by Day (ref. 29) seem to prove that volcanoes, hot springs, and mud geysers are phases of one and the same kind of terrestrial activity. Because nearly all thermal springs are associated with volcanic rocks, most writers on the origin of such springs have tended to assume that the heat was of volcanic origin. However, some writers have suggested that other possible sources of the heat are chemical reactions underground—such as the oxidation of iron pyrite and a few other minerals—and the disintegration of radioactive substances. Many thermal springs, especially in the Alps and Pyrenees, issue in areas of granitic or sedimentary rocks, and probably the water is hot because of the great depth from which it rises. Observations in deep mines and borings indicate that inTHERMAL SPRINGS 5 regions of comparatively uniform and undisturbed rocks the temperature generally increases at the rate of about 1°F for each 50 to 100 feet of depth. Thus, the temperature of artesian water in some areas may indicate the approximate depth from which the water rises. It may be concluded, then, that thermal springs are of two main classes—those that issue in areas where the geothermal gradient is abnormally high because of igneous activity and those that issue where the geothermal gradient is “normal.” However, there is a complete gradation between the two classes. The presence of slight amounts of boron and certain other constituents in thermal water is considered to indicate that the water has come into contact with magma. This hypothesis has received increasing attention during the past half century. Near many commercially developed thermal springs, borings have been made to supplement the supply of water. It is not always easy to distinguish between the natural and the artificial outlets, and both generally are classed as springs. Many artesian wells and unsuccessful test wells for oil or gas yield thermal water. MINERAL CONSTITUENTS The principal mineral substances dissolved in water of thermal springs are the same as are common in other natural waters. Their characteristics have been discussed in numerous publications and are summarized by Collins and others (ref. 129). Sodium (Na) and potassium (K) are common constituents of many minerals, chiefly the sodium and potassium feldspars. Because many of their compounds are highly soluble, these constituents may be present in considerable amounts in highly mineralized water. In natural water, sodium is much more plentiful than potassium. Lithium (Li) is similar to sodium in chemical action but rarely is present in large amounts. When lithium is determined, it generally is reported as lithium chloride or carbonate. Calcium (Ca) and magnesium (Mg) are derived mostly from limestone and dolomite and some feldspars. In water from springs the content of calcium generally is two to five times that of magnesium, but in sea water and other very saline water the magnesium content generally exceeds that of calcium. Calcium and magnesium cause most of the hardness of water. Hardness caused by calcium and magnesium equivalent to the bicarbonate (HC03) in the water is called “carbonate hardness”; the remainder is called “noncarbonate hardness.” These terms are approximately equivalent to the old terms “temporary” and “permanent,” which were based on the fact that carbonate hardness is partly removed by boiling the water. Water having noncar- bonate hardness may contain in solution the sulfates and chlorides of calcium and magnesium. Barium (Ba) and strontium (Sr) are similar in action to calcium and magnesium, but if present, the amounts are very small. Except in acid solutions, iron (Fe) and aluminum (Al) are only slightly soluble. The water of many springs contains several parts per million of iron. Generally, the aluminum content is less than that of iron and often is not determined separately. In many analyses the content of both is reported as the oxides Fe203 and A1203. An iron concentration higher than 0.5 to 1.5 ppm can be tasted. Manganese (Mn) is not common, but in natural water it may be present in association with iron in amounts of a few parts per million. Manganese dioxide (Mn02) has been deposited by a few thermal springs in quantities sufficient to be worked commercially. Rarely is arsenic found in measurable quantity in natural water, but it has been identified in a few mineral springs, both cold and thermal, and usually is reported as arsenic (As), as arsenic trioxide (As203), or as arsenic pentoxide (As206). Also, some thermal waters have been reported to contain minute amounts of gold, silver, copper, lead, zinc, and other metals. Chloride (Cl) is one of the commonest and most plentiful constituents in solution. It is derived in large part from common salt, sodium chloride (NaCl), and to a lesser extent from magnesium chloride (MgCl2), which is present in small amounts in some rocks. Sulfate (S04) results from the solution of gypsum and anhydrite and is present in considerable amounts in many natural waters. It may be derived also from the oxidation of sulfide minerals, chiefly pyrite and marcasite. A sulfate drinking water is sometimes called a “bitter water.” High concentrations of sodium sulfate (Glauber’s salt) or magnesium sulfate (Epsom salt) in drinking water are laxative. Several different forms of sulfides are present in many “sulfur” waters. They are derived principally from the reduction of the sulfate ion (SO.,) and sulfate and sulfide minerals, a process that produces hydrogen sulfide (H2S); they may be derived also from the solution of natural sulfides. Complex sulfides may give the water a clear greenish-yellow color. “White sulfur” water may contain a finely divided allotropic form of sulfur in suspension. “Blue sulfur” and “black sulfur” water may have slight amounts of iron sulfide in suspension or solution. Bicarbonate (HC03), resulting from the action of dissolved carbon dioxide (carbonic acid) on limestone and dolomite and many other rocks, forms most of the anion content of many waters. Carbonate (C03), resulting from the solution of the more soluble carbonates6 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 180° 120° thermal springs 735-914 0—65-----28 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD or from the decomposition of bicarbonate, rarely is present. Bicarbonate and carbonate are reported in many analyses as “alkalinity,” which is expressed as calcium carbonate (CaCo3). Bromide (Br) and iodide (I) are present in very small amounts in a few saline spring waters that are mineralized by solution of marine deposits. Boron (B) is present in appreciable amounts in many natural wTaters. As borate (B203) it is common in vapors from fumaroles and other volcanic vents. Fluoride (F) is present in small amounts, generally less than 2 ppm, in the water from many springs and wells. However, most early analyses do not record its concentration. A concentration of fluoride between 0.6 and 1.2 ppm is beneficial in reducing the incidence of tooth decay in children, but more than this amount may cause mottling of the tooth enamel.1 Phosphate (P04) is uncommon but may be taken into solution from phosphate minerals, perhaps chiefly apatite. Generally, the amount present does not exceed a few parts per million. Ammonium (NH4) and nitrate (N03) maybe derived from organic matter and therefore may indicate pollution of the water. However, because they may be derived from inorganic salts also, they are not necessarily evidence of direct contamination. Silica (Si02) is present in nearly all rocks. It is not easily dissolved in water, but generally is present in soluble or colloidal form in comparatively small amounts, ordinarily less than 100 ppm. In the colloidal form it may make the water opalescent. (The same color effect may be caused also by finely divided calcium carbonate in suspension.) In some water analyses the silica is reported as silicate (Si03) or as metasilicic acid (H2Si03). Most mineral-spring water that tastes sour contains free sulfuric acid (H2S04). Nearly all such water contains relatively large amounts of sulfates of iron and aluminium (alums), which give an astringent taste. Water from a few springs contains free hydrochloric acid (HC1). The water from many springs contains dissolved gases. One of the principal gases given off is carbon dioxide (C02). It makes the water slightly acid and gives it a pleasant taste. The carbon dioxide may be derived from the atmosphere or the soil or from chemical action on limestone. Next in importance among the gases is hydrogen sulfide (H2S), which may be produced by reduction of gypsum and other sulfates or by decomposition of organic matter. This gas accounts 1 Welsh, G. B., and Thomas, J. F., 1960, Significance of chemical limits in USPHS drinking water standards : Am. Water Works Assoc. Jour., v. 52, no. 3, p. 289-300. for the odor that characterizes many “sulfur” waters. Both hydrogen sulfide and carbon dioxide are common in volcanic exhalations. Nitrogen (N2), probably derived from air dissolved in the water, has been noted as the chief constituent of the gas evolved by some springs. Similarly, oxygen (02) may be present as a constituent of the dissolved air. Slight amounts of argon (A2) and some other rare inert gases have been found in many thermal springs. Also methane (CH4), or marsh gas, is given off from some warm springs whose wTater rises through rocks containing organic matter. The hydrogen-ion concentration, expressed as the pH, of a water is an index to the possible corrosiveness of the water. The pH is the negative logarithm of the concentration of hydrogen ions, in moles per liter. (A mole, or gram molecule, is the quantity of a compound or element that has a weight in grams numerically equal to its molecular weight.) A solution having a pH of 7.0 is said to be neutral. Progressively lower values of pH indicate increasing concentrations of hydrogen ions (acidity), whereas progressively higher values of pH indicate decreasing concentrations of hydrogen ions or increasing concentrations of hydroxyl ions (alkalinity). Physicochemical studies of mineral waters, including determinations of their electrical resistivity and radioactivity, are the subject of many papers published during the past half century. DEPOSITS Many thermal and some cold springs deposit large amounts of calcium carbonate as hard tufa or travertine, and some springs form similar deposits of siliceous sinter. In places, a mixture of the two forms a silico-calcareous sinter. Numerous papers describe tufa deposits and their method of formation. The deposition of other minerals has been discussed by White (ref. 109), and the formation of siliceous deposits has been studied by White and others (ref. 112). OKGANIC ASSOCIATIONS Organic matter, which generally occurs as an impurity derived from vegetal matter, is reported in many water analyses. Reported in some early analyses is the organic substance crenic acid, a pale-yellow uncrystal-lizable substance believed to be present in vegetable mold and in ocherous material. By oxidation it forms apocrenic acid, which in “chalybeate” waters appears as a brown amorphous deposit. These oxidation products are reported in some early analyses as crenates and apo-crenates of sodium, potassium, and iron. Baregine (named from its first recognition at Bareges in France), or hydrosin, is a brownish-yellow residue of nitrogenized organic matter obtained on the evaporation of some sulfur waters. Glairine, or glarin, is aDESCRIPTION OF soft, unctuous amorphous deposit occasionally found in basins where spring water collects. It contains nitrogen and on ignition leaves a siliceous residue. Sulfur-secreting bacteria, sometimes referred to under the general name “sulfuraria,” are minute vegetable organisms and are conspicuous in some thermal springs. Generally, they are green and are common in sulfur waters not hotter than 122°F. They probably secrete silica in addition to sulfur. Bacteria commonly known as Crenothrix form the rust-colored gelatinous material found in the water of some cold iron springs, but they seem not to live in distinctly thermal water. These bacteria are colored brownish by iron oxide deposited in their sheaths. The microscopic siliceous remains of various species of diatoms have been found in and near some hot springs, but it is not certain whether this type of algae actually lives in the water. The most common types of algae found in thermal springs are filamentous. Green species flourish in water having a temperature of about 120° to 140°F (49°-60°C), orange and red kinds in water of about 140° to 160°F (60°-71°C), and white kinds in hotter water. In Yellowstone National Park, Weed (ref. 695) observed algae in spring water having a temperature as high as 185°F (85°C). Some writers refer to certain green filamentous algae as “Confervae.” Several observers have recorded the presence of animal life in thermal springs. In springs of Hammam Meskoutine in Algeria, Blanchard (ref. 2437) noted crabs, frogs, and tadpoles in water at a temperature of 31°C, small fish at 39°C, and ostracodes at 51°C. Brues (refs. 125, 126) examined the fauna of 154 thermal springs in the western United States and found the upper limit for animal life to be about 122°F (50°C), which is about 18°F (10°C) above their normal limit. He found also that the upper limit for plant life is about the same as for animal life. In the hot springs of Iceland, Tuxen (ref. 1260) found animal life in 37 thermal springs or groups of springs. Of the 6 species found in water above 40° C, only 3 were common. In thermal springs of lower temperature, 46 species were found. BOILING TEMPERATURES The boiling point of water decreases with increased elevation above sea level. The rate of decrease is not quite constant, but below altitudes of about 5,000 meters (16,400 ft) the boiling point decreases 1°C for each 303-meter increase in altitude, or 1°F for each 550-foot increase. The approximate boiling point at a few alti- THERMAL SPRINGS 9 tudes, as given below, was derived by comparing tables of altitude-atmospheric pressure.2 Altitude________ Boiling point Meters Feet °c ° F 0 0 100 212 1, 000 3, 280 96. 7 206. 1 2, 000 6, 560 93. 4 200. 1 3, 000 9, 840 90. 1 194. 2 4, 000 13, 120 86. 8 188. 2 5, 000 16, 400 83. 5 182. 3 Below a water surface the boiling point increases rapidly with depth, owing to the increase in pressure resulting from the weight of the overlying water. The boiling point belov 7 a water surface at sea level was cal- culated by Mr. Donald E. White, of the Geological Sur- vey, to be approximately as follows: Depth below the water surface Approximate boiling point Meters Feet °C op 0 0 100 212 50 164 155 311 100 328 180 356 150 492 196 385 200 656 210 410 Gases in solution lower the boiling point slightly, whereas mineral substances in solution raise the boiling point slightly. Therefore, the effect of gases dissolved in moderately mineralized water is hardly noticeable. The boiling point of ocean water, which has an average mineral content of about 35,000 ppm, is only about 1°F above the boiling point of pure water. DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS UNITED STATES Geologic formations of nearly all ages and types of rocks are present within the 48 conterminous States. Although thermal springs are most numerous in areas of geologically young igneous rocks, some rise from much older rocks of sedimentary origin. The paragraphs that follow are a series of thumbnail sketches of the geologic situations with which thermal springs are associated in the United States. The Atlantic and Gulf Coastal Plains are underlain chiefly by sands, silts, and clays of Cretaceous and Tertiary ages. In the extreme southeast, much of Florida is underlain by nearly horizontal strata of Tertiary limestone from which many large springs rise in deep pools. In nearly all of them the water is only slightly above the normal ground-water temperature, but at Warm Salt Springs near the west coast, as indicated on figure 3, the water is about 12°F above mean annual temperature. 2 Hodgman, C. D., editor in chief, 1944, Handbook of chemistry and physics : 28th ed., Cleveland, Ohio, Chemical Rubber Publishing Co., p. 1449-1451.10 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD The Appalachian Mountains and subsidiary ranges extend from western Georgia northward beyond Massachusetts. They are composed chiefly of folded and faulted sedimentary rocks ranging in age from Pre-cambrian through Permian. In an area of faulted Precambrian quartzite in western Georgia several warm springs rise, the most noted group being at Warm Springs. The Appalachian ranges that form the boundary between Virginia and West Virginia are composed largely of folded and faulted Cambrian and Devonian limestone and sandstone. Several of the numerous thermal springs in this general area have been developed as resorts, one of the most noted being that at Hot Springs, Va. North of the main Appalachians, in areas of ancient schist or limestone, only three small warm springs are reported. The Mississippi Valley and the bordering plains are, in general, underlain by gently dipping strata of Paleozoic and Mesozoic ages. No thermal springs are reported in this region. In the Ozark uplift in southwestern Missouri and parts of Arkansas and Oklahoma and the Arbuckle Mountains farther southwest, the exposed rocks are mainly Paleozoic limestone. The Ouachita Mountains in western Arkansas and southeastern Oklahoma are also composed of Paleozoic strata which are intensely folded and faulted. Thermal springs at Hot Springs, Ark., issue from Mississippian sandstone on a plunging anticline. A large area in eastern South Dakota and southeastern North Dakota is underlain by an artesian aquifer. The aquifer, which lies at depths of about 900 to 1,100 feet below the surface, is the Dakota Sandstone of Early Cretaceous age. Since about 1890 several thousand wells of small diameter have been drilled in this area for domestic and farm water supply. The water is distinctly warm, being 20° to 25° above the temperature of the shallow ground water, but no natural thermal springs are present. The Black Hills in southwestern South Dakota, as indicated on figure 2, have been lifted high above the plains of the Missouri River. The rocks form a broad anticlinal fold, from the higher parts of which the beds have been largely eroded, leaving hogbacks of Carboniferous strata nearly encircling the hills. In the eastern part a core of granite is exposed. No thermal springs break out in the hills, but in the plains near their southern end there are large flows of warm water at the town of Hot Springs. In northern Montana the Rocky Mountains consist of several nearly parallel ranges, but farther west they are more irregular. They are separated by wide valleys and plains. The rocks are chiefly granite, schist, and other crystalline types overlain by sedimentary strata of Paleozoic through Mesozoic ages. The principal hot springs of Montana are in this region in areas of fractured granite or schist. Several warm springs issue from folded and faulted Paleozoic strata, and others from Cretaceous beds. Warm Springs Creek, which has a water temperature of 68°F and discharges 80,000 gpm, may be the largest natural stream of thermal water in the United States. A few warm springs rise in valleys bordered by Tertiary or Quaternary lava. The mountains of central Idaho are of granite and ancient sedimentary rocks and contain numerous hot springs, as indicated on figure 4. Most of southwestern Idaho is underlain by basalt of the Snake River Group (Pleistocene and Recent), which is mantled in some places by lake beds of the Payette Formation (Miocene and Pliocene?). In the valley of the Bruneau River, a southern tributary to the Snake, many warm springs rise through overlying lake sediments or directly from the lava. The Yellowstone National Park in the northwest corner of Wyoming (fig. 5) embraces a great lava plateau largely of rhyolitic rocks. Detailed geologic studies have shown that the geysers and hot springs of this region derive their heat from magma that underlies the thick lava beds. Central Wyoming is a region of high plains and small isolated mountains underlain by nearly horizontal Cretaceous and Tertiary strata. There are also hills of eruptive rocks. Several minor thermal springs issue from faulted sedimentary rocks. Other thermal springs are in areas of older rocks. The Big Horn, or Thermopolis, springs issue from faulted Permian and Triassic red beds, but their water probably rises from the Tensleep Sandstone (Pennsylvanian and early Permian). These springs probably rank as the largest hot springs in the country. According to Burk (ref. .575), the largest spring at Thermopolis discharges 12,-600 gpm and has a water temperature of 135°F. Outliers of the Rockies in southern Wyoming are composed largely of Mesozoic and older strata in which there are few springs. The Rocky Mountains have their greatest development in Colorado. The Dakota Sandstone and other formations of Mesozoic age are uplifted along parts of the eastern front, but most of the Rockies are of Paleozoic strata. There are also many areas of granite and other ancient crystalline rocks, and many small areas of Tertiary lava. Thermal springs occur mainly in faulted Paleozoic and Cretaceous rocks. The southward extensions of the Rockies in New Mexico are largely of ancient crystalline and sedimentary rocks. The Jemez Plateau, farther south, is cov-DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS ered largely by Tertiary lava, which overlies faulted Permian and Triassic strata. Several warm saline springs issue from these beds. Southwestern New Mexico is covered in part by Tertiary lava, from which many warm springs issue. The Quitman Mountains, largely of Cretaceous rocks, border the Rio Grande in western Texas. Small warm springs issue from Lower Cretaceous sandstone near the south base of these mountains and also 75 miles farther downstream. The plains of eastern Washington are underlain mainly by the Columbia River Basalt (Miocene and Pliocene?). No prominent thermal springs have been noted in this area. The western part of the State is dominated by the Cascade Mountains, which are composed of granite and ancient sedimentary rocks partly covered by flows of Tertiary lava and are surmounted by a chain of volcanic peaks. In this region are several well-known thermal springs, but none are very hot. Some issue from granite, others from basalt. The Olympic Peninsula of northwestern Washington is composed mainly of metamorphic and sedimentary rocks of complex structure. In this region two warm springs rise in areas of crushed and altered rocks. The Blue Mountains in northeastern Oregon consist of ancient metamorphic and sedimentary rocks which are much folded and faulted. Several hot springs issue in this area. (See fig. 6.) The plateau region of southeastern Oregon is covered largely by the Columbia River Basalt. Many lava flows have been somewhat folded and are broken by faults that have produced extensive tilted block mountains. In the Harney Basin near Bums, and also near Malheur and Harney Lakes, numerous warm and hot springs rise through lake beds or the valley alluvium, probably along faults in the underlying lava. Farther east, warm springs also rise along the valleys of the Malheur and Owyhee Rivers, which are bordered for long distances by basaltic cliffs. The Cascade Mountains extend southward from Washington, .through western Oregon, and include many lava flows and lava peaks. Small warm springs rise at the base of Mount Hood in the north, and small fumaroles issue from Quaternary lava near its summit. Farther south, scalding springs are present at several places in the Tertiary lava. A large region in southern Utah, northern Arizona, and adjoining parts of Colorado and New Mexico consists of plateaus that are deeply cut by stream canyons. These uplands are composed chiefly of gently dipping strata that range from Paleozoic through Tertiary in age. The principal thermal springs in the region are in the upper part of the Sevier River Valley in Utah 11 along the faulted front of the Sevier Plateau, as indicated on figure 7. The Wasatch Mountains in northeastern Utah consist largely of Paleozoic strata from Cambrian through Carboniferous in age. The western front of the mountains is traversed by the Wasatch fault which extends northward and southward from Salt Lake City. On or near this fault are several large saline thermal springs, including Utah hot springs, which issue from Cambrian quartzite, and Ogden hot springs, which issue from syenite. -'A In the plateau region of rtorthern Arizona no important thermal springs are reported. The central and southern parts of the State are occupied largely by mountains composed of crystalline rocks and by folded and faulted ancient marine strata. In many areas these older rocks are covered by Tertiary volcanics, which may account for the heat of some springs. Most of Nevada is within the Basin and Range province, a region of detached mountains separated by desert valleys. Many of the ranges are composed of granite and ancient metamorphic and sedimentary rocks; others are composed chiefly of lava of Tertiary age. The structure includes much complex folding, but in many places it is dominated by block faulting. As shown in figure 3, many thermal springs are scattered throughout the State. The locations of the springs are shown in more detail on figure 8. Most of these springs are of moderate temperature and small flow and are closely related to faults. In the northeastern part of Nevada there are several mountain areas of limestone and shale of Paleozoic age from which several hot springs issue. Near the northwest border, several warm to hot springs issue from intrusive granite. The western side of the Black Rock Desert is bordered mainly by hills and plains of Tertiary lava where numerous warm and hot springs rise in close relation to local faults. Farther south, Pyramid and Win-nemucca Lakes are partly surrounded by lava hills, and hot springs rise near their bases. The valley of the Humboldt River east of Winnemucca is bordered largely by hills of lava. In the valley alluvium small warm springs rise at several places and possibly are artesian. In several areas of faulted Triassic or Jurassic strata south of Humboldt River valley, scalding springs deposit much tufa. Boiling springs also issue in several lava areas south of this valley. In an area of granodiorite and metamorphic rocks a few miles southeast of Reno, the Steamboat springs rise at nearly boiling temperature. Their water has formed extensive layers of siliceous sinter and is noted for the presence of metallic sulfide minerals which are still being deposited.,wn OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES and uixx14 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Figure 4.—Part of Idaho showing location of thermal springs. From ref. 148. The Big Smoky Valley in the central part of Nevada is enclosed by mountains that consist largely of strata of Paleozoic age, covered in part by Tertiary lava. Hot springs issue from both kinds of rocks, along the valley border, but probably all rise from Paleozoic strata. Similar conditions are present in Diamond, Steptoe, and White Pine Valleys. Near the south end of the State several wide flat valleys are bordered by mountains of Paleozoic strata, but warm springs in the valley lands may be of comparatively shallow ground water rising under artesian pressure. Northeastern California is a region largely of Tertiary lava flows. Surprise Valley, on the northeast border of the State, is partly surrounded by lava mountains.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 15 Figure 5.—Yellowstone National Park, Wyo., showing location of thermal springs, geysers, and mud pools. From refs. 148, 561, 566. and 637. Several thermal springs rise in the valley alluvium, probably along buried faults. Other hot springs, some at boiling temperature, are in the Honey Lake Valley farther south, as indicated in figure 8. The Cascade Mountains of Washington and Oregon extend south into California as far as the Pit River. In California they consist largely of eroded volcanic mountains that do not form a distinct range. Mount Shasta is the most prominent of the lava masses. Near its summit are small hot springs and vapor vents. South of the deep canyon of the Pit River, the Sierra Nevada forms a great mountain block. Its northern16 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Figure 6.—Oregon showing location of thermal springs. Chiefly from ref. 148. part is composed mainly of lava, and within this region Lassen Peak had a period of explosive steam activity during 1914-17. This activity did not appreciably affect the large hot springs on its southern slopes. The crestal part of the Sierra Nevada is composed mostly of granite, and its profoundly faulted eastern front rises steeply from desert valleys of the Great Basin region. Along the east front of the Sierra, hot springs rise chiefly in lava areas near the base of the range. On the western slope of the Sierra Nevada, wide bands of ancient sedimentary rocks overlie the granite, but there are minor areas of Tertiary lava. No important thermal springs issue on this great slope, but in the southern part of the Sierra warm springs issue at several places from faulted granite or gneiss. In the coastal ranges of Cretaceous or older rocks north of San Francisco Bay there are many warm springs. These springs generally have a high mineral content but only a small flow. Some of them rise closeDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 17 0 50 100 KILOMETERS I—l l l l I___________I Figure 7.—Utah showing location of thermal springs. From ref. 148. COLORADO18 THERMAL SPRINGS OF *THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Figure 8.—California and Nevada showing location of thermal springs. Chiefly from ref. 148.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 19 r to faults or near volcanic rocks. About 75 miles north of San Francisco an area of faulted metamorphic rocks contains a noted group of hot springs and fumaroles known as “The Geysers,” which deposit sulfate minerals. The coastal ranges south of San Francisco Bay consist largely of granite and of serpentine and marine sedimentary rocks of the Franciscan Formation of Jurassic and Cretaceous age. In large areas these rocks are overlain by Tertiary sandstone and shale. Several warm springs that issue from the serpentine contain considerable quantities of magnesium salts; others from granite or from Tertiary strata are of more usual character. The San Bernardino and San Jacinto Mountains of southern California are composed largely of granite, which is extensively faulted. On the western slope of the San Bernardino Mountains, Arrowhead hot springs issue at a scalding temperature from fractured granite. Along the western base of these mountains several warm springs rise through Tertiary deposits that overlie the granite. From Tomales Bay north of San Francisco, the great San Andreas fault extends more than 600 miles southward into the basin of the Salton Sea, and probably beyond. There are no well-known thermal springs along the main part of this fault, but near the southeast border of the Salton Sea are fumaroles and boiling mud pots that are considered to be on a buried extension of the San Andreas fault. About 1,185 spring localities are given in the following table. Three States—California, Idaho, and Nevada—have about 200 localities each. Of the 140 spring localities listed for Wyoming, all but 21 are within the Yellowstone National Park. Oregon has 126 thermal springs or groups, and there are several dozen in each of the States of Colorado, Montana, New Mexico, and Utah. There is only one thermal spring in each of the States of Florida, Massachusetts, New York, North Carolina, and Pennsylvania. The remaining thermal springs listed in the table are scattered through eight other States—Arizona, Arkansas, Georgia, South Dakota, Texas, Virginia, Washington, and West Virginia. Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii) [Data chiefly from ref. 148 and files of U.S. Qeol. Survey] No. on figure Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (gallons per minute) Associated rocks References on chemical quality Remarks and additional references Arizona (See fig. 2.) 100 Hot 89 6,700 Warm 72 50 104 75 74 2 115-122 280 Warm 65 99-104 90 6 81-118 300 Warm Hot Small 127-160 Warm 130 40 90 50 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Pakoon (Pahgun) Spring, on tributary of Grand Wash, 18 miles north of Colorado River. Sec. 23, T. 30 N., R. 23 E., 5 miles south of Hoover (Boulder) Dam. Lava Warm Springs, near Lava Falls Rapids in the Grand Canyon of the Colorado River. Sec. 33, T. 18 N., R. 19 W., 25 miles southwest of Kingman. Sec. 32, T. 15 N., R. 6 E., 10 miles northeast of Camp Verde. Verde Hot Springs, 0.5 mile northwest of Childs. 6 miles south of St. Johns- __......... Castle (Monroe) Hot Springs, in sec. 3, T. 7 N., R. 1 W., on Castle Creek, 50 miles south of Prescott. Salt Banks, in sec, 33, T. 6 N., R. 17 E., 30 miles west of Whiteriver. Soda Warm Spring, in sec. 13, T. 6 N., R. 19 E., 23 miles west of Whiteriver. Agua Caliente Springs, in sec. 19, T. 5 S., R. 10 W., 15 miles northeast of Palomas. Sec. 35, T. 5 S., R. 19 E., 3 miles north of Aravaipa. Near Gila River, 3 miles north of Fort Thomas. Indian Hot Springs, 8 miles northwest of Pima. Near Bonito Creek, in T. 4 S., R. 27 E., 25 miles east of Fort Thomas. T. 4 S., R. 28 E., 10 miles west of Morenci. Clifton Hot Springs.................... Aguajito (Quitabaquito), near Mexican border. Hooker’s Hot Springs, in sec. 6, T. 13 S., R. 21 E., 10 miles northeast of Cascabel. Agua Caliente Spring, in sec. 13, T. 20 S., R. 13 E., 5 miles east of Amado. Sec. 7, T. 18, S., R. 31 E., 6 miles southwest of Paradise. Lava (late Tertiary). Lava (Tertiary). Granite........... Lava (Tertiary).............. Lava (Tertiary) overlying sandstone (Permian). Lava (Tertiary).............. Sandstone (Triassic). Lava (Tertiary)-------- Sandstone (Cambrian)..... Limestone of Supai Formation (Pennsylvanian and Permian). Lava (Quaternary)........ Lava (Tertiary)....... Lake beds (Pliocene). ....do_________________ Lava (Tertiary)_______ .do. _do_. Alluvium near schist.. Faulted granite... Gravel (Quaternary) over-lying red shale and sandstone (Cretaceous?). Quartzite dike near lava (Tertiary). 133, 137.. 137, 192.. 189, 190.. 137, 191.. Ref. 138. Several springs. Refs. 138, 144. 3 springs. Water used locally. Several springs. Resort. Deposit of tufa. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 144, 187, 194. Large group of springs. Water used locally. Several springs. Resort. Water used for bathing. Do. 5 springs and 1 well 600 ft deep. Resort. Ref. 191. 4 springs. Resort. Refs. 188, 328. Water used for village supply and irrigation. Ref. 186. 2 main springs. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. Refs. 138,184,193. Water used locally.20 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United, States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references figure water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Arkansas (See fig. 3.) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Rice’s Spring, on Mud Creek Hot Springs................... 102-147 Big Chalybeate Spring, 5.5 miles northeast of Hot Springs. Sec. 17, T. 4 S., R. 27 W., near the Little Missouri River. Sec. 19, T. 4 S., R. 24 W.. in bed of Caddo River at Caddo Gap. Sec. 12, T. 5 S., R. 26 W., at Redland Mountain. 79 74 96-100 77 165 185 Hot Springs Sandstone (Mississippian) overlying Arkansas Novaculite (Devonian and Mississippian). Chert and shale (Ordovician). Arkansas Novaculite (Devonian and Mississippian). 20,137,199, 201-204, 207,209. 210. Resort. Ref. 144. 46 springs in area of 20 acres. Hot Springs National Park. Army and Navy General Hospital, sanitariums. Refs. 148, 195-198, 205, 206, 208. Water used locally. Ref. 197. Ref. 197. Several springs. Refs 197, 205, Ref. 197. California (See fig. 8.) 1 2 2A 3 3A 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18A 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 29A 30 31 32 33 Sec. 29, T. 15 N., R. 8 E., 14 miles southeast of Happy Camp. Klamath Hot Springs (Shovel Creek Springs), 20 miles northeast of Ager. 4.5 miles northeast of Ager _ ........... Near top of Mount Shasta, 11 miles northeast of Sisson. North of Big Glass Mountain.............. Pothole Spring, 35 miles northwest of Al-t uras. Near Rattlesnake Creek, 9 miles west to Alturas. Essex Springs, in sec. 10, T. 42 N., R. 11 E. Warm Spring Valley, 15 miles west of Alturas. Kelly’s Hot Spring, in sec. 29, T. 42 N., R. 10 E., 4 miles northeast of Canby. Near Canyon Creek, 15 miles southwest of Alturas. 1.5 miles southeast of Alturas........... Little Hot Spring Valley, 25 miles northwest of Bieber. Near Bidwell Creek, 1 mile northwest of Fort Bidwell. Boyd Spring, on east side of Upper Lake, 12 miles southeast of Fort Bidwell. Near southwest side of Upper Lake, 4 miles north of Lake City. Near south end of Upper Lake, 12 miles northeast of Cedarville. Sec. 12, T. 43 N., R. 18 E., near north end of Middle Lake, 12 miles northeast of Cedarville. Leonard Springs, in sec. 7. T. 43 N., R. 17 E., 11 miles northeast of Cedarville. Sec. 1, T. 42 N., R. 16 E., and sec. 6, T. 42 N., R. 17 E., 5 miles east-northeast of Cedarville. Cedar Plunge, 5 miles northeast of Cedarville. Benmac Hot Springs, in sec. 18, T. 42 N., R. 17 E., 5 miles east of Cedarville. Menlo Warm Springs, in sec. 7, T. 39 N., R. 17 E., 5 miles south-southeast of Eagleville. Near southwest side of Lower Lake, 8 miles south-southeast of Eagleville. Bare Ranch, 12 miles south-southeast of Eagleville. Kosk Creek, 65 miles northeast of Redding. Big Bend Hot Springs, in sec. 36, T. 37 N., R. 1 W. Uprer Mill Creek, 1 mile northwest of Tophet Hot Springs (No. 26). Tophet (Soupan, Supan) Hot Springs, on southwest side of Lassen Peak, 53 miles northeast of Red Bluff. Bumpas Hot Springs, on south side of Lassen Peak, 60 miles northeast of Red Bluff. Bassett Hot Springs, 2.5 miles east-north-east of Bieber. Stonebreaker Hot Springs, 6 miles east-southeast of Bieber. Tipton Springs..........................- Shaffer (Branbecks) Hot Springs, near north shore of Honey Lake. Amedee Hot Springs, near Amedee railroad station. Highrock Spring, 10 miles east-southeast of Amedee. Morgan Hot Springs, 53 miles northeast of Red Bluff. , 180; 208 120 (117-125 120 70 100 (100-180"' 120-150 175 to boiling Boiling 173 110-165 70 160-204 178-204 86 90-200 2 25 6 5 ’""16" 10 700 275 325 100 1 225 75 1,000 100 80 225 50 500 115 200 425 100 5 5 90 3 5 100 175 125 925 250 700 525 85 Granite.................... Faulted lava (Pliocene)____ Lava overlying Cretaceous strata. Lava (Tertiary)............ Altered volcanic ash....... Lava (Tertiary)............ ____do..................... ----do..................... ____do..................... Alluvium near faulted lava.. Faulted (?) lava........... Alluvium overlying lava____ Basalt..................... Faulted lava............... Alluvium................... ....do...................... Faulted Cretaceous strata near andesite dike. Alluvium near faulted lava.. ....do...................... ....do...................... ....do...................... ....do...................... ....do...................... Faulted lava............... Alluvium................... Pornhyritic quartz diorite dike in sedimentary strata. ----do..................... Lava (Tertiary)............ ....do..................... ....do...................... Tuffaceous sandstone (late Tertiary). ....do...................... Basalt (Tertiary).......... Faulted (?) alluvium....... ....do...................... Basalt (Tertiary).......... ....do...................... .................... Water used for bathing. 297................ 7 springs. Resort. Ref. 284. .................... Deposit of tufa. Water supply for cattle. .................... 2 springs. Ref. 306. .................... Vapor vents. Ref. 302. .................... Ref. 297. .................... Do. .................... 5 springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Ref. 297. 297................ Water used for domestic supply and irriga- tion. .................... Water used for domestic supply and irrigation. Ref. 297. .................... Do. .................... Water supply for cattle. Ref. 297. ............... 2 springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 297. ................... 5 springs. Water used for domestic supply, bathing, and irrigation. Ref. 297. .................... Water used for irrigation. .................... Several springs at site of spectacular mud eruption in March 1951. Refs. 264, 265, 279. 293, 297, 304. ............... 4 springs. Water used for sheep dipping. Ref. 297. ............... 3 springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 297. 297. 297. 297. 297. 3 springs. Water used locally. 5 main springs. Water used for bathing. 2 wells. Water used for bathing. Ref. 302. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 297. 5 springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Refs. 283, 297. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 283, 297. Refs. 283, 297. 2 springs. Ref. 297. 6 springs. Resort. Ref. 297. 3 springs. Refs. 239, 307. About 10 springs and mud pots. Deposits of sulfur. Refs. 213, 238, 239, 297, 307, 660. About 20 springs. Refs. 213, 239, 240, 258, 297, 307, 660. Water used for bathing and irrigation. 9 springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 297. Water used for irrigation. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 128, 252, 413, 441, 526. 7 springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 125, 256, 441. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 297. 26 springs. Campground. Refs. 239, 307.34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 41A 42 43 44 44A 45 45A 45 B 46 47 48 48 A 49 50 51 61A 52 53 54 54A 55 56 57 58 59/ 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 67 A 68 69 70 71 DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 21 Thermal springs and wells in the United States {excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references water (°F) per minute) chemical quality California—Continued Devil’s Kitchen, 1.5 miles west of Drake Hot Springs (No. 36). Hot Srring Valley, 0.5 mile west of Drake Hot Springs (No. 36). Drake Hot Springs, 6 miles southeast of Lassen Peak and 70 miles northeast of Red Bluff. Boiling Spring (Tartarus) Lake, 1 mile south of Drake Hot Springs (No. 36). Terminal Geyser, 3.5 miles southeast of Drake Hot Springs (No. 36). Kruger Springs, 1 mile east of Greenville.. Sec. 13, T. 25 N., R. 8 E., 2 miles northeast of Twain. Sec. 14, T. 25 N., R. 8 E., on Indian Creek, 1 mile east of Twain. Marble Hot Wells, 5 miles south-southeast of Beckwourth. McLear Sulphur Springs, 5 miles southwest of Beckwourth. Campbell (Upper Soda, Freys) Hot Springs, 2 miles south of Sierraville. Brockway (Carnelian) Hot Springs, on north shore of Lake Tahoe and 13 miles southeast of Truckee. Wentworth Springs_______________________ Orrs Hot Springs, 16 miles northwest of Ukiah. 0.5 mile north of Laytonville____________ Tuscan (Lick) Springs................... Vichy Springs, 3 miles northeast of Ukiah. Point Arena Hot Springs, 15 miles southeast of Point Arena. Crabtree Springs, 38 miles north-northeast of Lakeport. Fouts Springs......................... Sec. 35, T. 16 N., R. 8 W., 2 miles northwest of Bartlett (cold) Springs. Newman (Soap Creek) Springs, 45 miles west of Williams. Complexion Springs, 28 miles west of Wiliams. Chalk Mountain.......................... Highland Springs, 6 miles southwest of Kelseyville. England (Elliott) Springs, 8 miles south-southwest of Kelseyville. Carlsbad Springs, 5 miles south of Kelseyville. Kelseyville____________________________ Soda Bay Springs, at base of Mount Ko-nocti. Near southwest shore of Clear Lake, 10 miles east of Kelseyville. Sulphur Bank (Hot Bolata) Hot Springs, 10 miles north-northwest of Lower Lake. Howard Springs, 28 miles north-northwest of Calistoga. Seigler Springs, 30 miles north-northwest of Calistoga. Gordon Hot Spring, 28 miles north-northwest of Calistoga. Spiers (Copsey) Springs, 24 miles north-northwest of Calistoga. Castle (Mills) Hot Springs, 25 miles north-northwest of Calistoga. Anderson Springs, 22 miles north-northwest of Calistoga. Harbin Springs, 20 miles north-northwest of Calistoga. Deadshot Springs, 28 miles west-southwest of Williams. Blancks Hot Springs, 27 miles southwest of Williams. Jones Hot Springs, 26.5 miles southwest of Williams. Manzanita Quicksilver Mine............... Wilbur (Simmons) Hot Springs, 26 miles southwest of Williams. Elgin Quicksilver Mine, 30 miles west-southwest of Williams. Hoods (Fairmount) Hot Springs, 15 miles west-northwest of Cloverdale. Skagg’s Hot Springs, 9 miles west-southwest of Geyserville. 150-205 83 123-148 50 8 20 Basalt (Tertiary) 297. do. do. About 30 springs. Refs. 213, 239, 240, 307, 660. Water is carbonated. Used for drinking. Ref. 297. 4 springs. Resort. Ref. 239, 297. 170-190 120-205 Intermit- tent 8 do. do. 90-106 94 8 20 Alluvium overlying faulted granite. Slate (Carboniferous)...... 80-98 35 do. 10 springs. Refs. 213, 239, 240, 297, 307, 660. 6 springs. Refs. 239, 297, 307. 5 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 297. 7 springs. 125-161 86 65-111 120-140 60-75 63-104 70 86 50-90 110-112 350 140 Lake Beds (Pleistocene) 80 150 Faulted andesite. Andesite overlying faulted granodiorite. 137. Small 25 200 50 30 4.5 Granite-slate contact...... ............ Franciscan Formation 263________________ (Jurassic and Cretaceous). ____do................................... ____do................................... Sandstone (Franciscan For- 263,284,297. mation )near lava. Basalt (Tertiary)....................... 3 wells. Water used for domestic purposes, bathing, and irrigation. Ref. 297. 8 springs. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Refs. 292, 297. 11 springs. Resort. Refs. 284, 297. 6 springs. Resort. Ref. 297. 2 groups of springs. Water is carbonated. Deposits of tufa. Campground. 7 springs. Resort. Ref. 297. Water contains HjS. Used for bathing. 20 springs. Water is saline, contains H*S. Natural gas. Resort. Ref. 306. 7 springs. Resort. 2 springs. Resort. Ref. 297. 68-105 60-75 90 15 Sandstone (Franciscan Formation) . 20 Serpentine (Franciscan Formation) . 5 .....do...................... 4 springs. Campground. Ref. 297. 4 springs. Water is saline and carbonated. Resort. Water used for bathing. 70-92 74 25 1 do. do. 297. 9 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 297. 30 springs. 67-70 52-82 56-76 66-76 3 20 8 4 Altered lava............................. Serpentine (Franciscan For- 137,253,297. mation). Sandstone (Franciscan For- ______________ mation). ____do....................... 297_________ 3 springs. Water is saline and carbonated. Deposit of tufa. 11 springs. Resort. 7 springs. Water used for drinking. Ref. 297. 4 springs. Water used locally. 78 80-87 10 400 Lava (Quaternary) 297. 3 wells. Water used for irrigation. 5 springs. Resort. Ref. 253. 70-100 83-120 48-110 58-126 92 78; 84 65; 164 63-145 90-120 65-79 120 125 110-142 65-140 140-153 5 Andesite (Tertiary) Basalt near faulted Lower Cretaceous strata. 20,128, 297, 306. 135 35 5 15 7 10 11 4 2 4 Sandstone and serpentine (Franciscan Formation). Serpentine (Franciscan Formation) . Lava overlying sandstone (Franciscan Formation). Serpentine (Franciscan Formation) . Schist (Franciscan Formation). Lava and schist (Franciscan Formation). Schist (Franciscan Formation). Serpentine (Franciscan Formation). Sandstone (Franciscan Formation) . Serpentine (Franciscan Formation) . ----do..................... 137,297. 284, 297. 284, 297. 297__________ 297........... 137, 284, 297. 35 Serpentine and sandstone (Franciscan Formation). .25 _____do....................... 297. 297. 10 springs. Water used for drinking. Ref. 297. 10 springs. Deposits of cinnabar and sulfur. Refs. 214 , 225, 244, 245 , 252, 260, 274-277, 288, 293, 303, 400, 401, 426. 26 springs. Resort. Ref. 284. 13 springs. Resort. Ref. 253. Water used locally. Ref. 216. 2 springs. Water is bottled for drinking. Ref. 297. 2 springs. Resort. Ref. 253. 9 springs. Resort. Refs. 216, 253, 284, 286. 3 springs. Resort. Refs. 216, 253, 284. 4 springs. Water used for drinking. Ref. 297. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 246, 297. Well that flows intermittently. Former resort. Refs. 246,297. 3 springs. Water is saline and sulfurous. Used for bathing. Ref. 246. 12 springs. Resort. Refs. 137, 246, 284. 3 springs. Refs. 109, 216, 246. 100 120-135 5 15 Fractured sedimentary 297. strata (Franciscan Formation) near schist. Fractured sedimentary 266 strata (Franciscan Formation) . 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref 297. 3 springs. Resort. Refs. 284, 297.22 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on figure Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references per minute) chemical quality California—Continued 72 The Geysers, 18 miles east-southeast of 140 to 30-50 Clover dale. boiling 73 Sulphur Creek, 21 miles southeast of Cloverdale. Little Geysers, 22 miles east, southeast of 120 5 8 74 110-160 Cloverdale. 75 Mark West Warm Springs, 7 miles north- 60-82 30 east of Fulton. 76 Los Guilicos Warm Springs, 3.5 miles southwest of Glen Ellen. McEwan Ranch, 3 miles southwest of 78;82 5 50 77 80 Kenwood. Eldridge State Home, 6 miles north-north- 78 72 10 west of Sonoma. Ohms and Boyes Hot Springs, 2 miles northwest of Sonoma. 114-118 79 Fetters Hot Springs, 2.75 miles northwest of Sonoma. 100 Agua Caliente (Aqua Rica) Springs, 3 97-llS 10 miles northwest of Sonoma. 80 Aetna Springs, 17 miles north of St. Helena. 63-92 20 81 Calistoga Hot Springs, 225 yds. east of depot. 126-173 8 82 83 83A St. Helena White Sulphur Springs, 2 miles southwest of St. Helena. Napa Rock (Priest) Soda Springs, 15 miles east-northeast of St. Helena. 69-90 6 15 79 68; 76 10 84 Rocky Point Spring, 6 miles northeast of 100 Point Bonita. 85 Sulphur Springs, 2 miles northeast of Walnut Creek (town). 75-81 5 86 Byron Hot Springs, 2 miles south of Byron. 72-120 15 87 Warm Springs, 2 miles northeast of Warm 85-90 15 Springs (town). 88 Alum Rock Park Springs, 7 miles north- 62-87 15 west of San Jose. 89 Gilroy Hot Spring, 14 miles northeast of 110 15 Gilroy. 89A San Benito Mineral Well, 4 miles southeast of Hollister. 75 90 North Fork of Little Sur River, 30 miles (by road) south of Monterey. 103; 114 91 Tassajara Hot Springs, in sec. 32, T. 19 S., R. 4 E. 100-140 100 92 Paraiso Hot Springs, 8 miles south-south- 65-in 10 west of Soledad. 93 Slate’s Hot Springs, in sec. 9, T. 21 S., R. 3 E. 100-121 50 94 Dolan’s Hot Springs, 7 miles from Slate’s 100 95 Hot Springs. Paso de Robles Mud Bath Springs, 2.5 100 55-118 miles north of Paso Robles. 96 Paso de Robles Hot Springs, in southwest 105 1,700 part of Paso Robles. 97 Santa Ysabel Springs, 4 miles southeast of 94 150 Paso Robles. 98 Cameta Warm Spring, 30 miles southeast 74 3 of Paso Robles. 98A San Luis (Sycamore) Hot Spring, 8 miles 107 50 south-southwest of San Luis Obispo. 99 Pecho Warm Springs, 15 miles southwest 72; 95 17 of San Luis Obispo. 100 Newsom’s Arroyo Grande Warm Springs, 98 15 2.5 miles east of Arroyo Grande. 101 Las Cruces Hot Springs, 4 miles north of 67-97 60 Gaviota station. 102 San Marcos (Mountain Glen, Cuyama) 89-108 45 Hot Springs, 20 miles northwest of Santa Barbara. 103 Montecito (Santa Barbara) Hot Springs, 6 111-118 50 miles northeast of Santa Barbara. 104 Sec. 4, T. 5 N„ R. 25 W., 1 mile east of 90 15 Mono Creek and 12 miles northeast of Santa Barbara. 105 Sec. 1, T. 5 N., R. 25 W., 4 miles north of Santa Ynez River and 15 miles north- 90 10 east of Santa Barbara. 106 Vicker’s Hot Springs, in Matilija Canyon, 118 9 miles northwest of Nordhoff. 107 Stingley’s Hot Springs, 8.5 miles north- 76; 100 west of Nordhoff. Fractured sedimentary strata (Franciscan Formation). 137, 278, 297 Lava and pre-Tertiary sedimentary strata. 297 266, 297 270, 297 Sandstone (Franciscan Formation) . Altered sandstone and shale (Franciscan Formation). Serpentine (Franciscan Formation) . Sandstone (Franciscan Formation) . Faulted sandstone (Tertiary). Sedimentary strata (upper Miocene). Faulted sedimentary strata (Teritary). Folded sedimentary strata (Teritary). Faulted(?) Franciscan Formation. 297 297 284, 297 297 297 297 270, 272, 297 Sedimentary strata (Upper Cretaceous). Sedimentary strata (Pliocene). 297 270, 272, 284, 297.--270, 297 Faulted gravel (Quaternary). Fractured siliceous shale (Miocene). Sandstone (Miocene) faulted (?) against upper Eocene strata. Faulted sandstone (Miocene) . Sandstone (upper Eocene).. 270, 297 297 T Faulted(?) sandstone (upper Eocene). 297 About 30 springs, including Iron, Witches’ Cauldron, I evil's Teakettle, and Acid. Water is bottled for drinking. Resort. Also wells produce steam for generation of electricity. Refs. 19, 75, 130, 211, 212, 220, 221, 223, 224, 226-230, 233, 237, 241, 242, 267, 284, 285, 288, 296, 306, 400. Several springs. Ref. 212. 10 springs. Campground. Refs. 137, 212, 228, 230, 288, 297. 9 springs. Resort. Ref. 297. 2 springs. Resort. Ref. 297. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 297. Do. Pumped wells at site of springs which stopped flowing in 1906. Water bottled for table use. Resort. Ref. 284. 4 pumped wells. Resort. Refs. 284, 297. 5 flowing wells. Resort. Ref. 297. 6 springs. Water used for drinking. Resort. Refs. 216, 284, 311. 4 springs and several flowing wells. Water used for bathing. Refs. 212, 267, 276, 284, 285. 5 springs. Resort. Refs. 144, 216. 2 springs. Water used for drinking. Ref. 284. 2 springs. Deposit of MgC03. Ref. 297, 299. 6 springs. Water used for domestic purposes. Ref. 297. 7 springs. Resort. Refs. 137, 216, 253. 4 springs. Water used for domestic purposes and watering garden. Ref. 297. 17 springs. Water used for drinking and bathing. Water bottled for table use. Resort. Refs. 216, 284. Pumped well. Water bottled for table use. 2 springs. Ref. 297. 17 springs. Resort. 5 springs. Resort. Refs. 216, 282. 10 springs. Resort. Refs. 247, 272, 297. 3 springs. Water bottled for table use; also used for bathing. Ref. 216. 1 main spring and flowing well. Resort. Ref. 216. 2 springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Water used for bathing. Ref. 297. Well. Resort. Refs. 217, 284, 400. 2 springs. Water used for drinking and bathing. Refs. 217, 297. Resort. Ref. 216. 4 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 297. 6 springs. Campground. Refs. 262, 297. 11 springs. Resort. Source of part of Montecito water supply. Refs. 219, 262, 306. 3 springs. Do. 3 springs. Ref. 234. 2 springs. Water used for domestic purposes and bathing. Ref. 297.108 109 110 111 112 112A 112B 112C 113 113 A 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 127A 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 139 A 140 140A 141 141A 142 DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 23 Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references water (°F) per minute) chemical quality California—Continued Matilija Hot Springs, 6 miles northwest of Nordhoff. Wheeler’s Hot Springs, 7.5 miles north-northwest of Nordhoff. Willett Hot Spring, in sec. 31, T. 6 N., R. 20 W., 24 miles north-northwest of Fillmore. Sespe Hot Springs, in sec. 21, T. 6 N., R. 20 W., 22 miles north-northwest of Fillmore. Elizabeth Lake Canyon, 13 miles north-northeast of Castiac station. Encino Ranch (Seminole) Hot Springs_____ Radium Sulphur Spring, in northwestern part of Los Angeles. Bimini Hot Spring, in northern part of Los Angeles. Grover’s Hot Springs, 4 miles west of Markleeville. Valley Springs.......................... Fales’ Hot Springs, in sec. 24, T. 6 N., R. 23 E., 13 miles northwest of Bridgeport. Buckeye Hot Spring, in sec. 3, T. 4 N., R. 24 E., 5.5 miles west-southwest of Bridgeport. Sec. 27, T. 5 N., R. 25 E., 1.5 miles southeast of Bridgeport. 1.5 miles south-southeast of Bridgeport_ Warm Springs Flat, 5 miles southeast of Bridgeport. Sec. 20, T. 4 N., R. 26 E., near Mormon Creek, 7 miles southeast of Bridgeport. Paoha Island in Mono Lake............... Mono Basin Warm Spring, on east edge of Mono Lake. Sec. 13, T. 3 S., R. 28 E., 5 miles northeast of Casa Diablo Hot Springs (No. 123). Casa Diablo Hot Springs, in sec. 32, T. 3 S. , R. 28 E., on U.S. Highway 395. Casa Diablo Hot Pool, in sec. 35, T. 3 S., R. 28 E., 3 miles northeast of Casa Diablo. The Geysers, in sec. 30, T. 3 S., R. 29 E... Whitmore Warm Springs, in sec. 18, T. 4 8., R. 29 E. Benton Hot Springs, in sec. 2, T. 2 8., R. 31 E., 300 yd northwest of Benton post office. Bertrand Ranch........................... Reds Meadows Hot Springs, 10 miles southwest of Mineral Park. Fish Creek Hot Springs, in sec. 9, T. 5 S., R. 27 E., at head of Fish Valley. Sec. 16, T. 7 S., R. 27 E., on South Fork of San Joaquin River. Blaney Meadows Hot Springs, in sec. 10, T. 8 8., R. 28 E. Mercey Hot Springs, 25 miles south of Dos Palos. Fresno Hot Springs, on branch of Waltham Creek, 18 miles west of Coalinga. South Fork of the Middle Fork of Tule River, 27.5 miles east-northeast of Porters ville. Jordan Hot Springs, 65 miles north of Kern ville. Monache Meadows, 14 miles southwest of Olancha. California (Deer Creek) Hot Springs______ Keough Hot Springs. 8 miles south of Bishop. Saline Valley, 10 miles northeast of Saline Valley Borax Mine. Skinner Ranch............................ Staininger Ranch (Grapevine) Springs, in Grapevine Canyon, 50 miles northeast of Keeler. Keene Wonder Spring, at west base of Funeral Range. Nevares and Texas springs are farther south. 14 miles southeast of Haiwee............. Devil’s Kitchen, 2 miles northeast of Coso Hot Springs (No. 142). Coso Hot Springs, 20 miles northeast of Little Lake. 65-116 62-102 120 45 40 50 Sandstone and shale (upper 234, 297 Eocene). ____do..................... 234, 297. ___do............................... 4 springs. Resort. Ref. 128. 4 springs. Resort. Water used for bathing. 97-191 125 Faulted granite 4 springs. Campground. Refs. 262, 297. 100 5 ......do. Ref. 297. 85 80 104 128-146 100 100 Shale (Miocene). 262.. Faulted granite. 2 springs. Water is carbonated. Used for domestic purposes and bathing. Refs. 297, 306. Pumped well. Water used for bathing. Ref. 297. Flowing well. Water used for bathing. Ref. 297. 12 springs. Campground. Ref. 297. 75 97-141 1 300 Miocene(?) strata near contact with Upper Jurassic strata. Lava near granite.......... 140 25 Faulted granite 2 springs. Water slightly saline. Bottled for table use. Several springs. Deposit of tufa. Resort. Refs. 125, 297. Water used for bathing. Refs. 282, 297. 121-148 70-105 100 100 176 90 170 115-194 180 120-202 90 135 70 90-120 110 100-112 100-110 79- 109 88-97 77 95-123 100 105-126 130 100 Warm 75 80- 93 150-203 180 to boiling 140 to boiling 10 Fissured andesite 297. 25 5 ____do.......... Lava (Tertiary) 5 ......do. 3 main springs. Water used for bathing and sheep dipping. Quarries in onyx marble and travertine nearby. Refs. 235, 236, 251, 282, 302. 20 springs. Refs. 282, 297, 305. Water used for cattle supply. Refs. 282, 297. Water used for cattle supply. Ref. 297. 100 10 5 Lava (Recent)........ ____do................ Faulted lava (Recent) 128^137," "282, 297, 409. Several springs. Refs. 275, 282, 297,305, 306. Refs. 282, 297. Intermit- Faulted(?) lava (Quater- tent nary) 306 Faulted lava (Quaternary). 20 springs. Small deposit of sinter. Water used for vapor baths. Refs. 282, 297, 305. Ref. 297. 5 main springs and 2 stream vents. Large deposit of tufa. Ref. 305. 2 main springs. Resort. Ref. 125. 400 Granite near Tertiary volcanic tuff. Water used for irrigation. Refe. 262, 297, 305, 310. 100 10 Alluvium....... Granite near lava. 297. Water used for irrigation. 5 springs. Campground. 5 Granite. 2 springs. Ref. 297. 25 do. 4 springs. Campground. Ref. 297. 40 Gneiss 297. 8 springs. Campground. 6 20 25 Fractured greenstone near Francisian Formation. Faulted sandstone and shale (Miocene?). Granite____________________ 215, 297— 3 springs. Water is brackish. Used for bathing. 5 springs. Resort. Refe. 250, 297. Water is carbonated. Used for drinking. Ref. 297. 75 2 50 825 10 30 Tertiary strata overlying Paleozoic strata. Small Small Lava (Recent) overlying granite. 14 springs. Large deposit of tufa. Campground. Ref. 297. Water is carbonated. Used for drinking. Ref. 297. 7 springs. Resort. Refs. 284, 297. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. Resort. Ref. 297. Ref. 297. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Several springs. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Refs. 297,' 399. 1 main and several minor springs. Water contains 3,630 ppm of dissolved solids. Extensive deposit of tufa. 20 pools and vapor vents. Deposits of sulfur and alum. Refs. 262, 297. Several small springs and vapor vents. Small deposits of cinnabar. Refe. 248, 275. 3 main springs. Steam baths. Resort. Refe. 248, 252, 266, 275, 280, 308. T35-91424 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and, wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references figure water (°F) per minute) chemical quality California—Continued 143 Near Little Lake, 18 miles south of Haiwee. 144 Panamint Valley, 4 miles north of Ballarat. 145 146 Yeoman Hot Springs, in sec. 1, T. 21 N„ R. 7 E., 5 miles northeast of Zabriskie. 2 miles north of Tecopa................. 147 148 Resting Spring, 5.5 miles northeast of Tecopa. 2 miles northeast of Kernville........... 149 150 151 152 153 Neills Hot Spring (Agua Caliente), 7 miles south-southwest of Kernville. Clear Creek (Hobo) Hot Springs, in sec. 25, T. 27 S., R. 32 E. Delonegha Springs, 45 miles northeast of Bakersfield. Democrat Springs, 40 miles northeast of Bakersfield. Williams Hot Springs, 16 miles northeast of Caliente. 154 Saratoga Springs, 15 miles west of Sperry railroad station. 155 Paradise Springs, 25 miles north of Daggett. 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 162 A 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 172 A Soda Station Springs, in sec. 14, T. 12 N., Newberry Spring, in sec. 32, T. 9 N., R. 3 E., 600 yd south of Newberry railroad station. Tylers Bath Springs, in Lytle Canyon, 15 miles northwest of San Bernardino. Sec. 15, T. 3 N., R. 3 W., in Deep Creek Canyon, 16 miles southeast of Victorville. Sec. 14, T. 3 N., R. 3 W., in Deep Creek Canyon, 15 miles southeast of Victorville. Harlem Hot Spring, 5 miles north-north-east of San Bernardino. Waterman Hot Springs, 6.5 miles north-northeast of San Bernardino. Arrowhead Hot Springs, 7 miles north-northeast of San Bernardino. Urbita Hot Springs, 1 mile south of San Bernardino. Sec. 34, T. 1 N., R. 2 W., in Santa Ana Canyon, 12 miles east-northeast of San Bernardino. Near Baldwin Lake, 40 miles southeast of Victorville. Fairview Hot Spring, 7 miles southwest of Santa Ana. San Juan Capistrano Hot Springs, 13 miles northeast of San Juan Capistrano. Glen Ivy (Temescal) Hot Spring, 11 miles south-southeast of Corona. Wrenden (Bundys Elsinore) Hot Springs, 225 yd north of Elsinore depot. Elsinore Hot Springs, 50 yd north of Elsinore depot. Murrieta Hot Springs, 4 miles east-northeast of Murrieta. Pilares Hot Spring, 8 miles northeast of Perris. Eden Hot Springs, 9 miles southwest of Beaumont. Highland Springs_________________________ 173 Gilman (San Jacinto, Relief) Hot Springs, 6 miles northwest of San Jacinto. 174 Soboba (Ritchey) Hot Springs, 2.5 miles northeast of San Jacinto. 174A Desert, in sec. 30, T. 2 S., R. 5 E 174B Lucky Seven, 2 miles southeast of Desert. 175 176 176A Palm Springs, 6 miles south of Palm Springs station. Dos Palmas Spring, on northeast side of Salton Sink, 6 miles east of Salton railroad station. Hot Mineral Well.......................... 177 178 179 180 Deluz Warm Springs, 20 miles north-northeast of Oceanside. Agua Tibia Spring, 30 miles northeast of Oceanside. Warner (Las Aguas Calientes) Hot Springs, in sec. 36, T. 10 S., R. 3 E. Agua Caliente Springs, in secs. 18 and 19, and 19, T. 14 S., R. 7 E. 80 80 80 108; 109 80 98; 113 131 119 104-112 100-115 60-100 82 85-106. 5 75 77 92 80-100 80-100 120 123 110-187 80-106 90 88 96 121-124 102 118 125 134-136 100 90-110 112 (max) 83-116 70-111 112-116 200 100 80 186 84-88 92 131-139 90 1 1 100 225 260 4 115 20 25 25 20 125 30 30 300 5 5 5 5 50 250 3 5 15 35 15 75 3 30 20 25 5 25 900 5 10 150 20 297 Alluvium near Tertiary lava. Faulted quartzite (Cambrian). Faulted intrusive diorite 290 290 Faulted (?) limestone (Pre-cambrian). Alluvium (Quaternary) near tuffaceous lava (Tertiary). 290.. Fractured granite and gneiss. 297 137,268, 284,297 297 291, 298 291, 297, 298 Quaternary deposits near faulted Mesozoic rocks. 137, 298 284, 291, 297, 298... 298 Alluvium overlying faulted bedrock. 291, 298 Granite near San Andreas fault. Alluvium overlying gneiss. _ Faulted gneiss Alluvium near San Andreas fault. 291 291, 297, 298 291 Faulted granite 232 291, 297 232 282, 297 Alluvium overlying Tertiary strata. 297 137, 232, 297 Ref. 262. Water supply for prospectors. Refs. 261, 297. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Refc. 289, 290. 2 springs. W'ater supply for railroad. Ref. 297. W'ater used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 297. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 262, 297. W'ater used for domestic purposes, bathing, and irrigation. Refs. 262, 297. 3 springs. Water used locally. Ref. 297. 3 springs. Resort. Ref. 297. 5 springs. Resort. Ref. 297. 5 springs. Water contains HjS. Used for domestic purposes, bathing, and irrigation. Ref. 297. 4 springs. Water supply for prospectors. Refs. 271, 289, 297. Several springs. Water supply for prospectors. Refs. 269, 289, 297. 2 springs. Water used for drinking. Pumped. Water supply for railroad. Refs. 289, 290, 297. Refs. 262, 297. Several small springs. 6 springs. Pumped well. Water used for bathing. Refs. 268, 297. Several small springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 262, 284. 2 groups of springs. Resort. Ref. 262. 6 wells. Water used for bathing. Refs. 268, 297. Water used for bathing. Ref. 297. Water bottled for table use. Resort. Ref. 297. 6 springs. Visited by Francisan friars and mentioned in their records. Ref. 262. 1 main and several minor springs. Resort. Ref. 297. Originally flowed, now pumped. Resort. 3 springs which originally flowed but now are pumped. Resort. Ref. 297. 3 springs. Resort. Water used for bathing. Also drilled well nearby. Ref. 297. 8 springs. Resort. Refs. 268, 297. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 236, 253. 6 springs. Resort. Ref. 268. 6 springs. Water bottled for table use; also used for irrigation. Resort. Ref. 268. 8 wells about 300 ft deep. Water used for bathing. Drilled well. Water used for bathing. Ref. 302. 2 springs. Resort. Refs. 231, 255, 284. Water supply for prospectors. Ref. 262. 300 ft deep. Water used for bathing. Refs. 249, 302. 3 springs. Water used locally. Refs. 262, 297. Water used for bathing and irrigation. 6 springs. Water used for irrigation. Resort. Ref. 218, 222, 243, 255. 287. 784. Several springs. Campground. Refs. 232, 269, 297.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 25 Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references water (°F) per minute) chemical quality California—Continued 181 Jacumba Springs, in secs. 7 and 8, T. 18 S., R. 8 E. Fish Springs, on west side of Salton Sea, 13 miles south of Mecca. 94; 96 90 15 2 springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Refs. 232, 297. Several springs, also wells 260-850 ft deep. Water supply for prospectors. Refs. 269, 297. 182 280 232 182A 100 to Small boiling 2.5 miles long. Refs. 249, 254, 255, 257, 259, 270, 294, 300, 304, 746. Colorado (See fig. 2.) 1 Juniper Hot Springs, in sec. 16, T. 6 N., R. 94 W. 2 2A Routt Hot Springs, 7 miles north of Steamboat Springs (No. 2A). Steamboat Springs...................... 3 Hot Sulphur Springs. 4 Moffat (Eldorado) Spring, 12 miles south- west of Boulder. 5 Hot Soda Springs at Idaho Springs______ 6 Glenwood Springs....................... 7 Big Dotsero Spring, on north bank of Colorado River 1.5 miles downstieam from Dotsero. 8 Avalanche Springs, near Avalanche... 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 22A 23 24 25 26 27 28 Conundrum Spring, 16 miles south of Aspen. Alkali Springs, near north end of bridge over the Gunnison River at Austin. Sec. 21, T. 13 S., R. 89 W., 10 miles east of Somerset. Ranger (Cement Creek) Spring, 1.5 miles above mouth of Cement Creek. Sec. 18, T. 14 S., R. 84 W., 2.5 miles above mouth of.Cement Creek. Waunita (TomicM) Hot Springs, on Hot Springs Creek, 28 miles east of Gunnison. Cebolla (Powderhorn) Hot Springs (Ojo de los Caballos), 6 miles south of Powder-horn. Rhodes Spring, 8 miles southwest of Fairplay. Hartsell Hot Springs, 25 miles east of Leadville. Mound Soda (Currant Creek) Spring, 20 miles northwest of Paikdale. Cottonwood (Buena Vista Hot) Springs, 6 miles west of Buena Vista. Mount Princeton (Heywood Hot, Chalk Creek Hot) Springs, 3 miles west of Nathrop. Poncha Springs........................ Wellsville Warm Spring, 5 miles northwest of Howard. Canon City: Near east end of Royal Gorge of Arkansas River. Fremont Natatorium................. Chamberlain (Mineral) Hot Springs, in sec. 12, T. 45 N., R. 9 E., 6 miles south of Villa Grove. Valley View (Orient) Hot Springs, in sec. 31, T. 46 N., R. 10 E.. 7 miles southeast of Villa Grove. Red Creek (Siloam, Parnassus) Springs, 12 miles southwest of Pueblo. Geyser Warm Spring, at Placerville..... Orvis (Ridgway, Uncompahgre) Hot Spring, 2 miles southeast of Ridgway. Ouray Hot Springs...................... 29 30 31 32 33 Sec. 33, T. 41 N., R. 1) W., 200 yd southeast of Dunton Store. Iron Spring, 0.75 mile north of Rico.. Wagon Wheel Gap Springs.. Sec. 26, T. 38 N., R. 1 W., 26 miles northeast of Pagosa Springs. Shaw’s Spring, 6 miles north of Del Norte. 102-105 25 322 148-150 130 Fractured gneiss near contact vith granite. 103-150 2,000 Faulted sandstone (Dakota?). 137, 322.... - 90-118 40 Cretaceous strata near granite. 137, 322..- - 70 10 322 98-108 50 Fractured syenite near gneiss. 137,322,335- 106-150 3,000 Faulted Cretaceous strata... 137,322 84 400 Limestone (Carboniferous).. 322 112-134 200 Diorite intrusion in Carboniferous strata. 322. 100 25 Decomposed granite 322 72 5 322 90 3 83 100 350 322 1,800 Limestone (Cretaceous) 140-160 1,000 Sandstone (Paleozoic?) 137 79-114 100 79 300 322 105-134 68 120-144 10 Mesozoic strata near granite. 137,322 150 Granite near monzonite in trusion. 322 98-150 80-168 94 50 500 137 150 322 101 100 140 116-133 50 Lava overlying sedimentary strata. 72-99 200 Quartzite near granite 332 59-73 5 Contact of UDper Cretaceous strata and gneiss. 322, 328 94 5 322 132 300 Alluvium overlying faulted Pennsylvanian strata. 100-158 200 Faulted Hermosa Formation (Pennsylvanian). 137, 316. ---- 110 82 20 30 Sandstone and shale (Permian) . 322 132-150 100 Granite cut by dikes 137, 318, 319, 328— 100; 120 88 50 10 Sandstone (Tertiary) near igneous rock. 322 - Several spiings. Resort. Ref. 323. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. 150 springs. Deposit of tufa. Resort. Refs. 313, 325-327. 25 springs. Strong odor of sulfur. Deposit of tufa. Resort and sanitarium. Refs. 317, 325-327, 513. Refs. 325, 327. Several springs. Resort. Refs. 140, 317, 325, 327, 333, 334. Many springs issuing from bank and bed of Colorado River. Resort. Refs. 325, 326, 334. Water used for bathing. 5 springs issuing along Rock Creek (Crystal River). Water used for bathing. Ref. 324. Several small springs. 4 springs. Deposit of tufa. 2 groups of springs totaling more than 100 individual springs. Resort. Refs. 144, 322. 2 groups of springs totaling about 20 individual springs. Resort. Refs. 322, 330. Water used locally. 5 springs. Resort. Refs. 138, 317. Refs. 138, 335. 5 springs. Campground. 4 main and about 30 other springs. Resort. Refs. 322, 325, 335. About 100 springs. Water contains 12 ppm of fluorine. Resort. Deposit of tufa. Refs. 109, 315, 317, 322, 325, 326, 331. Water used locally. Ref. 138. Pumped well 10 ft deep. Ref. 317 Flowing well 1,665 ft deep. 30 springs. Deposit of tufa. Resort. Refs. 322, 332. 5 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 322. 5 springs. Water used locally. Deposit of tufa. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Refs. 31G, 317, 322, 330. 3 groups of springs. Water supply for 2 sanitariums and municipal swimming pool. Resort. Refs. 312, 317, 322, 332. Water used locally. Deposit of limonite. 3 springs. Large deposit of tufa. Resort Refs. 109, 128, 315, 317, 322, 325. 2 springs. Water used locally. 26 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Colorado—Continued 34 35 36 37 38 40 41 42 43 44 Pinkerton Springs, in sec. 26, T. 37 N., R. 9 W., 14 miles north of Durango. Tripp Springs, 10 miles north of Durango. Trimble Springs, 9 miles north of Durango. Sec. 8, T. 35 N., R. 4 W., 30 miles west of Pagosa Sr rings (town). 12 miles northeast of Pagosa Springs (town). Pagosa Springs (town): Pagosa Hot Springs................... Well............................... 3 miles southeast of Pagosa Srrings (town). Warm Sulphur Spring, on the South Fork of the Navajo River, 7 miles east of Chromo. Agua Caliente Spring, in T. 35 N., R. 8 E., 2 miles southwest of Capulin. McIntyre (Los Ojos) Warm Springs, in sec. 13, T. 35 N., R. 10 E., 8 miles east of La Jara. Dexter Spring, in sec. 9, T. 35 N., R. 11 E., 12 miles east of La Jara. 87-95 8 90-95 50 90-110 50 120 78 110-160 3 600 140 100 120 Small 80 Small 90 50 62 100 71 5 Sandstone (Paleozoic). Sandstone (Cretaceous)______ Folded and fractured Paleozoic and Mesozoic strata. Limestone (Carboniferous?). Lava overlying shale (Colorado Group). Fractured shale (Colorado Group). Shale (Colorado Group).... Lava overlying Cretaceous strata. Alluvium near lava (Quaternary). Lava (Quaternary)......... 5 Lava (Tertiary). 322.. 322. 139, 328.. 144, 328.. 332. 5 main and several small springs. Resort. Several springs. Water used for bathing. 5 springs. Large deposit of tufa. Resort. Refs. 322, 325. 5 small springs. Campground. Ref. 138. Several springs. Much evolved HjO, COi Large deposit of tufa. Resort. Refs. 317, 319, 322, 325, 326, 335, 526. Flowing well. Ref. 138. Refs. 328, 332. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 322, 332, 526. Ref. 322. Florida (See fig. 3.) 1 Warm (Big) Salt Spring, 8 miles northwest of Murdock. 86 4,900 337, 338 Rises in deep pool 250 ft in diameter Water used for bathing. Georgia (See fig. 3.) 1 Lifsey (Pine Mountain) Spring, 6 miles south of Zebulon. 77 2 Taylor Spring, 2 miles east of Lifsey (Pine Mountain) Spring (No. 1). 75 3 Thundering Springs, near Thunder station, 3 miles south of Molena. 74 4 500 yd south of Thundering Springs (No. 3). 69-72. 5 5 Barker Spring, 8 mies south-southeast of Molena. 73 6 Warm Springs, 0.5 mile west of Warm Springs (town). 87 7 Parkman Spring, 3 miles southeast of Warm Springs (No. 6). 77 8 Tom Brown Spring, 2.5 miles northeast of Chalybeate. 69 Faulted quartzite and schist (Cambrian or Precam-brian). 137, 341, 344, 543... 341.... 137, 341, 344, 543... 341 341— Contact of schist and quartzite. 137, 341, 343, 344, 543. 341 341.. Water used for bathing. Supplies pool. 2 springs. Water used locally. Ref. 339. Water used for bathing. Do. 1 main spring. Resort and sanitarium. Refs. 339, 340, 342. Supplies mill pond. Supplies pond. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Wier Creek Hot Springs, in sec. 13, T. 36 N., R. 11 E. Colgate Springs, in sec. 9, T.36 N., R. 12 E. Jerry Johnson’s Hot Springs, in sec. 7, T. 36 N., R. 13 E. Horse Creek, 4 miles southeast of Jerry Johnson’s Hot Springs. Stanley Hot Spring, in sec. 6, T. 34 N., R. 10 E., near Boulder Creek 4 miles upstream from junction with Lochsa River. Stuart Hot Spring, in sec. 4, T. 32 N., R. 11 E., on Link Creek 5 miles upstream from junction with Selway River. Sec. 4, T. 33 N., R. 14 E., 11 miles southwest of Elk Summit ranger station. Martin Creek Hot Springs, in sec. 25, T. 31 N., R. 11 E., 3.5 miles west of Wylies Peak Sec. 14. T. 29 N., R. 12 E., 2 miles south of Grouse Peak. Red River Hot Springs, in sec. 10, T. 28 N., R. 10 E., 10 m'les northeast of Red River ranger station. Barht’s Hot Springs, in sec. 13, T. 25 N., R. 11 E., on Salmon River 200 yds below mouth of Hot Springs Creek. Sec. 7, T. 24 N., R. 4 E., 2 miles north of Salmon River. Riggins Hot Spring, in sec. 13, T. 24 N., R. 2 E., 10 miles east of Riggins. Burgdorf Hot Spring, in sec. 1, T. 22 N., R. 4 E. Sec. 13, T. 21 N., R. 1 E., on east side of Little Salmon River 3 miles north of Round Valley. Idaho (See fig. 4.) Hot 105-120 100-130 80 Hot Hot Warm Hot Hot 120 Hot 110 Hot 113 Hot 5 20 450 200 2 35 40 15 10 15 200 10 150 6 springs. Do. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. 383. Ref. 383. 2 springs. 6 springs and seeps. 4 springs. Resort. Ref. 3S3. Several springs. Water used locally. Water used for bathing. Water used locally. Resort. Water smells of H2S. Ref.16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 27 Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Idaho—Continued Yoghann Hot Sulphur Spring, in sec. 26, T. 20 N., R. 1 E., on west side of Little Salmon River 10 miles northwest of Meadows. Sec. 22, T. 19 N., R. 2 E., 3 miles northeast of Meadows. Sec. 2, T. 15 N., R. 1 E., 1.25 miles north of mouth of Warm Spring Creek. Sec. 33, T. 16 N., R. 2 E., 15 miles east of Cottonwood. T. 17 N., R. 5 W., in Snake River Canyon upstream from mouth of Brownlee Creek T. 11N., R. 5 W., on Monroe Creek 6 miles northeast of Weiser. Sec. 11, T. 21 N., R. 5 E., 12 miles west of Shiefers. Sec. 15, T. 20 N., R. 5 E., 15 miles southwest of Shiefers. Sec. 35, T. 20 N., R 7 E., on South Fork of Salmon River 7 miles south of Shiefers. Sec. 25, T. 18 N., R. 6 E., on South Fork of Salmon River 25 miles north of Knox. Sec. 17, T. 18 N., R. 8 E., near mouth of Riordan Creek. T. 15 N., R. 3 E., 10 miles north of Cascade. T. 16 N., R. 4E., on Gold Fork River 25 miles north of Cascade. Sec. 1, T. 16 N., R. 6 E., on South Fork of Salmon River 15 miles north of Knox. Sec. 17, T. 15 N., R. 6 E., 6 miles north of Knox. Sec. 14, T. 15 N., R. 6 E., 6 miles northeast of Knox. Sec. 11, T. 14 N., R. 6 E., 4 miles east of Knox. Sec. 14, T. 14 N., R. 6 E., 4 miles southeast of Knox. T. 14 N., R. 3 E., 0.25 mile from Cascade. Sec. 2, T. 12 N., R. 5 E.. on Middle Fork of Payette River 12 miles east of Alpha. Sec. 11, T. 12 N., R. 5 E., near Middle Fork of Payette River. Sec. 15, T. 12 N., R. 5 E., near Middle Fork of Payette River. Boiling Springs, in sec. 22, T. 12 N., R. 5 E., near Middle Fork of Payette River. Sec. 28. R. 13 N„ R. 6 E., near Bull Creek 15 miles east of Alpha. Sec. 31, T. 12 N., R. 6 E., near Silver Creek 15 miles southeast of Alpha. Sec. 23, T. 13 N., R. 10 E., 0.5 mile southwest of mouth of Bear Valley Creek. Sec. 30, T. 14 N., R. 10E.. 0.25 mile from mouth of Dagger Creek. Sec. 13, T. 14 N., R. 9 E., on Sulphur Sec. 34, T. 15 N., R. 10 E., near mouth of Sulphur Creek. Sec. 26, T. 15 N., R. 10 E., near Middle Fork of Salmon River. Sec. 17, T. 16 N., R. 10 E., on branch of Indian Creek near Chinook Mountain. Sec. 20, T. 16 N., R. 12 E., 10 miles north of Greyhound. Sec. 15, T. 17 N., R. 11 E., 8 miles south of Roosevelt. Sec. 28, T. 17 N., R. 13 E.. on Middle Fork of Salmon River, 2 miles upstream from mouth of White Creek. Sec. 17, T. 25 N., R. 17 E., on Horse Creek 25 miles northwest of Shoup. Sec. 32, T. 24 N., R. 17 E., 17 miles west of Shoup. T. 22 N., R. 18 E., on west side of Copper King Mountain. Sec. 22, T. 23 N., R. 22 E., 5 miles north of Carmen. Sec. 26, T. 19 N.. R. 14 E., 1 mile east of Mormon Ranch. Sec. 19, T. 17 N., R. 14 E., near Cache Creek 4 miles upstream from its mouth. Sec. 10, T. 15 N., R. 14 E., on Warm Spring Sec. 1, T. 15 N., R. 15 E.. 5 miles northwest of Parker Mountain. Sec. 15, T. 15 N., R. 16 E., near Parker Mountain. Salmon Hot Springs, in sec. 3, T. 20 N., R. 22 E., 7 miles south of Salmon. Sec. 34, T. 20 N., R. 24 E., 7 iriles northeast of Tendoy. T. 18 N., R. 22 E., 27 miles south of Salmon. T. 17 N., R. 21 E., in Kronk Canyon of Salmon River 40 miles south of Salmon. Hot (Tertiary). 100 50 Hot 100 Hot 25 Hot (Tertiary). Payette Formation (Tertiary). Hot 100 5 90-136 100 Hot 15 90 2 Hot Hot Hot 2 Hot 100 Hot 250 Hot 450 Hot 100 Hot 20 Hot 35 100 15 90 15 Hot 150 Faulted granite Hot 15 90 250 Hot 10 2 80-110 7 25 Hot 3 Hot 10 Lava (Tertiary) overlying granite. Hot 40 Hot 50 Lava (Tertiary) overlying granite. Hot 10 110 10 25 Hot Hot 80 40 10 80-190 400 75 200 400 Hot 200 Hot 200 Hot 100 Water used for bathing. 6 springs. 8 springs. Water smells of HjS. Ref. 482. Several springs. Ref. 492. 10 springs. ■ Water smells of H2S. Ref. 483. About 25 springs in 40-acre area. 10 springs. Several springs. Do. 2 springs. 2 springs, 0.5 mile apart. 6 springs. 2 springs, 0.25 mile north and 0.25 mile south of Cascade. Water supply for town. 18 springs. Water supply for Forest Service station. 3 springs. 4 springs. 3 springs. Do. 2 springs. 4 springs. 2 springs. 10 springs. 3 springs. Ref. 383. 5 springs. 14 springs. 9 springs. 4 springs. 7 springs. Several springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. 2 springs.63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Idaho— Coutinued Sec. 18, T. 16 N., R. 21 E., at upper end of Kronk Canyon of Salmon River 3 miles downstream from mouth of Pahsimeroi River. Warm Spring Creek, 4 miles southwest of Lemhi Indian Agency. Sec. 4, T. 15 N., R. 25 E., 10 miles west of Leadore. Sec. 9, T. 7 N., R. 1 E., 1 mile southwest of Sweet. T. 1 N., R. 3 W., on east side of Snake River 1 mile east of Enterprise. T. 4 N., R. 2 E., on west bank of Squaw Creek 3 miles north of Boise. T. 3 N., R. 2 E., on Cottonwood Creek 1 mile west of Boise. Boice Hot Springs, in T. 3 N., R. 2 E., 4.5 miles southeast of Boise. Sec. 29, T. 5 S., R. 4 E., near Grand View.. Sec. 20, T. 10 N., R. 3 E., 14 miles north of McNish ranger station. Sec. 32, T. 10 N., R. 4 E., 3 miles northwest of Garden Valley. Sec. 6, T. 8 N., R. 5 E., on South Fork of Payette River 10 miles east of Garden Valley. Sec. 2, T. 8 N., R. 5 E., 0.5 mile west of Danskin Creek. Sec. 11, T. 8 N., R. 5 E., 1.5 miles east of Boston & Idaho power plant. Sec. 31, T. 9 N., R. 6 E., 0.25 mile west of Pine Flat. Sec. 31, T. 9 N., R. 8 E., on north side of South Fork of Payette River. Kirkham Hot Springs, in sec. 32, T. 9 N., R. 8 E., on South Fork of Payette River. Bonneville Hot Sprints, in sec. 31, T. 10 N., R. 10 E., on Warm Spring Creek. Sacajawea Hot Springs, in sec. 30, T. 10 N., R. 11 E., near mouth of Bear Creek. T.5N.,R.5E.,6 miles southwest of Idaho City. Nevin Spring, sec. 1, T. 3 N., R. 5 E., near mouth of Cottonwood Creek. Twin Springs, on north side of Middle Fork of Boise River downstream from mouth of Browns Creek. Bassett Hot Spring, upstream from Logging Gulch, on north side of Middle Fork of Boise River. Sec. 1, T. 14 N., R. 11 E., 2 miles northwest of Greyhound. Sec. 2, T. 12 N., R. 13 E., 6 miles east of Cape Horn. Sec. 33, T. 14 N., R. 13 E., 10 miles southwest of Casto. Sec. 15, T. 10 N., R. 12 E., near Stanley... Sec. 36, T. 11 N., R. 13 E., near mouth of Yankee Fork of Salmon River. Sec. 20, T. 11 N., R. 14 E., 4 miles east of mouth of Yankee Fork of Salmon River. Secs. 22 and 27, T. 11 N., R. 14 E., 6 miles east of mouth of Yankee Fork of Salmon River. Sec. 19, T. 11 N., R. 15 E., on Salmon River 1 mile upstream from Sunbeam Dam. Sec. 3, T. 10 N., R. 13 E., 2 miles south of mouth of Yankee Fork of Salmon River. Robinson Bar Ranch Hot Springs, in sec. 34, T. 11 N., R. 15 E., at mouth of Warm Spring Creek. T. 10 N., R. 15 E., near mouth of Hot Creek. Loon Creek Hot Springs, in T. 11 N., R. 15 E. T. 10N., R. 15 E., near head of Loon Creek. Sec. 19, T. 10 N., R. 16 E., on Slate Creek 6 miles upstream from its mouth. Sullivan Hot Springs, in sec. 27, T. 11 N., R. 17 E., on Sullivan Creek 3 miles west of Clayton. Sec. 18, T. 9 N., R. 14 E., on the Salmon River. Pierson Hot Spring, in sec. 27, T. 8 N., R. 14 E. Secs. 30 and 31, T. 8 N., R. 17 E., on East Fork of Salmon River. Sec. 6, T. 7 N., R. 17 E., on East Fork of Salmon River. Beardsley Hot Springs, in sec. 23, T. 14 N., R. 19 E., on east bank of Salmon River. Sulphur Creek Spring, in sec. 26, T. 14 N., R. 21 E., 15 miles northwest of Goldberg. Hot Warm 87 Hot 67 Hot Warm 90-140 109 Warm Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Warm 90 100 100 110-115 Hot Hot Hot Warm Warm Warm Hot Hot Hot Warm 168 Warm 130 134-147 115-136 Hot Hot 107 105 120 70-120 75-110 123 (max) 57 100 Lava (Tertiary) overlying Precambrian strata. 3 Lava (Tertiary) overlying granite. Payette Formation (Tertiary). Large 255 Faulted Payette Formation (Tertiary). 100 30 20 8 15 30 40 150 200 200 900 200 350 30 4 200 3 200 250 200 5 200 400 40 700 200 Lava (Tertiary) overlying slate (Carboniferous). Contact of lava (Tertiary) with limestone (Carboniferous) . 5,000 150 300 450 Limestone (Carboniferous) near lava.. 300 1.500 1.500 quartzite (Paleozoic). 365.. 6 springs. Several springs. Ref. 144. Water used for bathing. Refs. 364, 371. Water used locally. Ref. 363. Do. About 16 springs. Resort. Refs. 113, 150, 363, 370, 371. Water used for irrigation. 2 springs. Campground. 2 springs. Water used locally. Campground. 5 springs. 6 springs. 3 springs. 6 springs. Water used locally. Refs. 133, 144. 2 main and several smaller springs. 2 springs. 5 springs. 10 springs. 6 springs. 5 springs. 3 springs. Resort. Also other springs along Warm Spring Creek. Several springs along line 0.5 mile long. 20 springs. Water smells strongly of H2S. Several springs. 10 springs in 2-acre area. Water used locally. Smells strongly of II2S. Resort. Ref. 375. 8 springs. 6 springs. Several springs. Resort. Water used for irrigation.107 108 109 no 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 131J 1311 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 29 Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Idaho—Con tinued Remarks and additional references T. 13 N., R. 20 E., on Warm Springs Creek 10 miles southeast of Challis. T. 9 N., R. 27 E., in Little Lost River Valley. South side of Middle Fork of Boise River, 0.25 mile downstream from mouth of Sheep Creek. Sheep Creek Bridge Spring, on Middle Fork of Boise River at Sheep Creek Bridge. Reed Spring, on Sheep Creek near its mouth. Smith Cabin Springs, on both sides of Middle Fork of Boise River upstream from junction with North Fork. Loftus Spring, on north side of Middle Fork of Boise River downstream from mouth of Loftus Creek. Crevice Spring, on north side of Middle Fork of Boise River downstream from mouth of Vaughn Creek. Vaughn Spring, on south side of Middle Fork of Boise River upstream from mouth of /aughn Creek. Ninemeyer Springs, on south side of Middle Fork of Boise River downstream from mouth of Big Five Creek. Pool Creek Spring, on north side of Middle Fork of Boise River upstream from mouth of Pool Creek. South side of Middle Fork of Boise River upstream from mouth of Straight Creek. Dutch Frank’s Springs, on south side of Middle Fork of Boise River downstream from mouth of Dutch Frank’s Creek. Granite Creek Springs, on Middle Fork of Boise River, in sec. 4, T. 5 N„ R. 9 E., 8 miles east of Narton. T. 5 N., R. 9 E„ on both sides of Middle Fork of Boise River, 0.25 mile upstream from mouth of Granite Creek. Sec. 36, T. 6 N., R. 9 E., on south side of Middle Fork of Boise River, 0.5 mile downstream from mouth of Granite Sec. 32, T. 6 N., R. 12 E., 2 miles east of Atlanta. Sec. 10, T. 3 N., R. 10 E., 0.5 mile northeast of Featherville. Sec. 9, T. 3 N., R. 11 E., 7 miles east of Featherville. Sec. 24, T. 4 N., R. 11 E., on Willow Creek, 10 miles northeast of Featherville. Sec. 13, T. 3 N., R. 11 E., on South Fork of Boise River 10 miles east of Featherville. Sec. 5, T. 2 N., R. 10 E., 6 miles south of Featherville. Sec. 33, T. 3 N., R. 10 E., 4.5 miles south of Featherville. Sec. 5, T. 1 N., R. 10 E.. north of Fishing Falls. Hot (Ranch) Springs, in sec. 16, T. 3 S., R.SE., 10 miles east of Mountain Home. Daugherty’s (Lattie’s) Hot Spring, 15 miles north of Glenns Ferry. Hot Spring, 1 mile east of King Hill____ Sec. 1, T. 4 N., R. 14 E.. on Big Smoky Creek 8 miles north of Carrietown. Sec. 32, T. 4 N., R. 14 E., on Big Smoky Creek 8 miles northwest of Carrietown. Sec. 18, T. 3 N., R. 13 E., on South Fork of Boise River near mouth of Bear Creek. Sec. 30, T. 3 N., R. 14 E., on Little Smoky Creek 8 miles southwest of Carrietown. Wasewick Hot Springs, in sec. 28, T.3N., R. 14 E., 6 miles southwest of Carrietown. Wardrop Hot Springs, in sec. 29, T. 1 N., R. 13 E., on Corral Creek 2 miles north of Corral. Sec. 14, T. 1 N., R. 15 E., 5 miles north of Blaine. Sec. 34, T. 1 S., R. 13 E., 5 miles south of Corral. Russian John Hot Springs, in sec. 33, T. 6 N„ R. 16 E., near Wood River 18 miles northwest of Ketchum. Easly Warm Springs, in sec. 11, T. 5 N., R. 16 E., on south side of Wood River 16 miles northwest of Ketchum. Guyer Hot Springs, in sec. 15, T. 4 N., R. 17 E., 2.5 miles west of Ketchem. Warm 80 Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Warm Hot Hot 130 (max) Hot 130 (max) 100-130 Warm Warm Hot Hot Hot 128 164 (max) 103-167 146 125 Warm Hot Warm Warm 125-150 Hot Warm Hot 102 160 100 200 100 900 100 20 200 900 50 180 1,800 50 200 30 50 45 45 30 50 45 144 900 500 20 10 20 15 10 250 100 15 25 50 Lava (Tertiary) overlying Paleozoic strata. 100 450 Faulted black limestone 376. Several springs. Ref. 365. Several springs in 2-acre area. 10 springs. Many springs in 3-acre area. 7 springs. About 40 springs in 2-acre area. Several springs in 1-acre area. Water used for bathing. 6 springs. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. Several springs. 4 springs. 12 springs in 5-acre area. Water used for bathing. 12 springs in 1 acre area. Water used for bathing. Campground. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 138. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 370, 371. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Also a drilled well. Water used for bathing and irrigation. About 30 springs. 15 springs. Ref. 144. About 50 springs. Water used locally. Ref. 375. About 25 springs. Resort. 20 springs. 4 springs. Ref. 375. Do. Several springs. Resort. Deposit of tufa.143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 159 A 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 169i 1691 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Idaho—Continued Sec. 36, T. 4 N., R. 16 E., on Warm Spring Creek 11 miles southwest of Ketchum. Clarendon Hot Springs, in sec. 26, T. 3 N., R. 17 E., on Deer Creek 6 miles west of Hailey. Hailey Hot Springs, in sec. 18, T. 2 N., R. 18 E., 2.5 miles southwest of Hailey. Lava Creek Hot Spring, in sec. 24, T. 1 S., R. 17 E., near Magic Reservoir. Condie Hot Springs, in sec. 14, T. 1 S., R. 21 E., near Carey. Sec. 25, T. 11 N., R. 32 E., 10 miles south of Edie. Sec. 34, T. 10 N., R. 33 E., 18 miles west of Dubois. Lidy Hot Springs, in sec. 2, T. 9 N., R. 33 E., 16 miles west of Dubois. Sec. 6, T. 9 N., R. 44 E., near Warm River. Heise Hot Sprine, in sec. 25, T. 4 N., R. 40 E., on South Fork of Snake River at Heise. Pincock (Lime Kiln) Hot Spring, in sec. 6, T. 5 N., R. 43 E., 6 miles south of Canyon City. Sec. 29, T. 1 N., R. 43 E.. on Fall Creek 4 miles northwest of Irwin. Alpine Hot Springs, in secs. 18 and 19, T. 2 S., R. 46 E., on east side of South Fork of Snake River 5 miles northwest of Alpine. Secs. 13 and 24, T. 2 S., R. 45 E., on west side of South Fork of Snake River 3 miles southwest of Blowout. Lincoln Valley Warm Springs, in sec. 36, T. 3 S., R. 37 E., 3 miles south of old Fort Hall. Enterprise, in T. 1 N., R. 3 W.......... Given’s Hot Springs, in T. 1 S., R. 3 W., on south side of Snake River near mouth of Reynolds Creek. Toy Ranch, in sec. 29, T. 5 S., R. 1 E-- Sec. 14, T. 6 S., R. 3 E., on Shoofly Creek near Grand View. Rosebrier Spring, in sec. 32, T. 6 S., R. 5 E., on Little Valley Creek 10 miles southeast of Comet. Sec. 24, T. 7 S., R. 4 E., near head of Little Valley Creek. Bruneau Hot Spring, in sec. 21, T. 7 S., R. 6 E, near Hot Springs post office on west side of Bruneau Valley. Sec. 22, T. 7 S., R. 6 E., in Bruneau Valley.. Trammel’s Hot Springs, in sec. 22, T. 7 S., R. 6 E., in Bruneau Valley. Sec. 35, T. 7 S., R. 6 E., on east bank of Bruneau River. Hot Creek Springs, in sec. 3, T. 8 S., R. 6 E., 11 miles south of Bruneau. Sec. 3, T. 8 S., R. 6 E., in Bruneau Valley downstream from mouth of Hot Creek. Sec. 29, T. 8 S., R. 7 E., 100 yd downstream from Buckaroo diversion dam in Bruneau Valley. Indian (Bat) Hot Springs, in sec. 33, T. 12 S. , R. 7 E., on West Fork of Bruneau River. Kitty’s Hot Hole, 10 miles southwest of Three ^^reek White Arrow Hot Springs, in sec. 31, T. 4 S., R. 13 E., near Blanche. Blanche Crater Warm Springs, 1.5 miles northeast of White Arrow Hot Springs (no. 170). Tschannen Warm Springs, 2 miles southeast of White Arrow Hot Springs (no. 170). Sec. 30, T. 8 S., R. 14 E., on island in Salmon Falls Creek near Austin. Ring’s Hot Spring, in sec. 31, T. 8 S., R. 14 E., on south side of Snake River. Banbury Hot Springs, in sec. 33, T. 8 S., R. 14 E., on south bank of Snake River 4 miles upstream from mouth of Salmon River. Poison Spring, in T. 9 S., R. 13 E., in canyon of Salmon River 8 miles upstream from mouth of river. Sec 10, T. 13 S., R. 18 E., on Rock Creek 10 miles south of Strieker. Artesian City Hot Springs, in sec. 6, T. 12 S., R. 20 E. Hot 125-150 146 96 124 80 Hot 124 Warm 120 Hot Warm 120-150 88-144 69-87 128 98 115-120 Warm 68 99 105 111 114 Warm 94-98.5 100 105 145-158 Hot 149 80 110 130 125 131 Warm 90 100 450 Lava (Tertiary) overlying Paleozoic strata. Black limestone (Paleozoic). 100 376 50 376 130 Snake River Group (Quaternary overlying rhyolite.) 450 3,000 Lava (Tertiary) overlying limestone (Carboniferous). Faulted rhyolite overlying carboniferous strata. 300 50 400 65 25 Faulted limestone (Carboniferous’) . Limestone (Carboniferous?). 3,000 35 Payette Formation (Tertiary). Miocene sediments near Tertiary lava. 50 300 Payette Formation (Tertiary). Alluvium near fault in Payette Formation (Tertiary). Small 135 Payette Formation (Tertiary). 1,200 35 1,000 Large 1,800 Basalt (Eocene) overlying tuff. Payette Formation (Tertiary). 2,000 Basalt (Tertiary) overlying rhyolite. 1,200 5 Lake beds (Tertiary) over-lying lava. 200 600 do Small Lava (Tertiary) 1,300 do Small 6 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 144. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Water piped to baths and hotel in Hailey. 2 springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. 2 springs. Several springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. 3 springs. Resort. Ref. 373. Resort. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 373. 2 main and several small springs. Water smells of HjS. Deposit of tufa. Resort. 6 springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 372, 373, 667. 5 springs. Water used locally. Refs. 138, 144. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Refs. 364, 371. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 133, 137, 144. Several springs. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for irrigation. Deposit of tufa. Also a drilled well. Water used locally. Ref. 368. Also 5 drilled wells. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 368. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Refs. 368, 370, 371. Water used locally. Ref. 368. Several springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Ref. 368. Ref. 368. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 368. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 368. Ref. 368. 2 main springs in deep canyon. Water used for bathing. Refs. 148, 377. Water used for bathing. Ref. 148. 4 springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Maintains Soda (Lye) Lake having area of of 3 acres. Nearby artesian well flows 200 gpm. Water used locally. Water used for bathing. Forms pool bubbling with odorless gas. Water used locally. 2 springs and flowing drilled well. Ref. 370. Ref. 370. 3 springe Also several flowing wells discharging 500 gpm. Water used for bathing and irrigation.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 31 Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on figure Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (gallons per minute) Associated rocks References on chemical quality Remarks and additional references Idaho—Con ti nued 179 180 181 182 183 184 186 186 187 189 190 190A 191 191A 192 193 194 195 196 Poulton Warm Spring, in sec. 6, T. 13 S., R. 21 E., 9 miles northwest of Oakley. Land Spring, in sec. 7, T. 13 8., R. 23 E., 6 miles northeast of Oakley. Thoroughbred Springs, in sec. 21, T. 16 S., R. 19 E. Oakley Warm Spring, in sec. 27, T. 14 S., R. 22 E., 5 miles south of Oakley. Sec. 6, T. 14 S., R. 25 E., 1 mile southwest of Elba. Frazier Hot Spring, in sec. 23, T. 15 S., R. 26 E., 5 miles southwest of Bridge. Bridger Hot Spring, in sec. 11, T. 11 S., R. 25 E., 6 miles northeast of Albion. Sec. 22, T. 11 8., R. 25 E., 4 miles northeast of Albion. Sec. 19, T. 9 S., R. 28 E., near Lake Walcott. Fall Creek Warm Springs, in sec. 29, T. 9 S., R. 29 E., 8 miles northeast of Yale. Indian Hot Springs, in sec. 19, T. 8 S., R. 31 E., on south side of Snake River. Lava Hot Springs, in T. 9 S., R. 38 E., on both sides of Portneuf River 2 miles south of Lava. 6 miles northwest of McCammon........... T. 10 S., R. 40 E., on west side of Bear River at south end of Gentile Valley. Downata Hot Springs, 4 miles southeast of Downey. T. 6 S., R. 42 E., in canyon of Blackfoot River. Bear River Soda (Beer) Springs, in T. 9 S., R. 42 E. T. 14 S., R. 36 E., 2 miles southwest of Malad. T. 16 S., R. 36 E., 12 miles southeast of Malad. Bear Lake Hot Springs, near northeast shore of Bear Lake and 16 miles south of Montpelier. 72 367 60 2,000 Faulted rhyolite (Tertiary). Miocene strata overlying faulted Paleozoic strata. Quartzite (Carboniferous?).. 367 69 200 114 10 367 Warm 204 120 120 4 boniferous strata. Faulted lake beds (Bridger Formation). 100 3 70 700 62 9,000 Lake beds (Eocene) faulted against limestone (Carboniferous). Faulted limestone (Paleozoic). Faulted quartzite (Paleozoic). 140 1,000 4,200 100-144 Warm Small 125 Lava overlying Paleozoic strata. 362? . 112 470 82 Small Limestone and shale (Carboniferous). 76-88 85 Warm 83-134 150 Also flowing wells. Water used locally. Water used for irrigation. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 367. Also flowing well. Water used locally. Also well 400 ft deep. Water used for irrigation. Also 3 flowing wells. Water supply for cattle. Water supply for cattle. 5 springs. Several springs. Deposit of tufa. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Resort. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Resort. Ref. 374. Water used for bathing. 5 springs rising in pools. Ref. 144. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Deposit of tufa. Refs. 366, 374. Several springs, of which the main spring is Steamboat Spring. Resort. Refs. 366, 374, 413, 625, 666. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 144. Do. 3 springs. Resort. Ref. 124. Massachusetts (See fig. 3.) 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 Sand Spring, 2 miles south of Williamstown. 76 400 Schist (Precambrian) 137, 378. Montana (See fig. 2.) Camas Hot Springs, in sec. 3, T. 21 N., R. 24 W. Sec. 4, T. 21 N., R. 24 W., 1 mile west of Sec. 9, T. 18 N., R. 25 W., 4 miles south of Paradise. Granite (Lolo)Hot Springs, 8 miles southwest of Woodson. Warm Springs Creek, 6 miles north of Garrison. Sun River (Medicine) Hot Springs, on North Fork of Sun River 30 miles by road west of Augusta. Helena Hot Springs, 2 miles west of Helena. Big Warm Springs, in sec. 24, T. 26 N., R. 25 E., 6 miles south of Lodgepole. Little Warm Springs, in sec. 32, T. 26 N., R. 26 E., 9 miles south of Lodgepole. Warm Spring, in sec. 19, T. 17 N., R. 18 E., on Warm Spring Creek 12 miles north of Lewistown. Sec. 19, T. 12 N., R. 23 E., on Durphy Creek, 3 miles south of Tyler. Medicine Rock (Weeping Child) Hot Springs, on Weeping Child Creek, 15 miles southeast of Hamilton. Sec. 31, T. 1 S., R. 22 W., 4 miles east of Slate Creek station. Gallogly (Ross’ Hole, Medicine) Hot Springs, in sec. 15, T. 1 S., R. 19 W., 4 miles south of Camp Creek station. Warm Springs, near Warm Springs railroad station, 10 miles northeast of Anaconda. Anaconda Hot Springs, 3 miles east of Anaconda. Gregson Hot Springs, 15 miles west of Butte. IIO-I14 Warm 114 135 Warm 84 122;l4l 72-86 Warm 68 71 Hot Warm 110-125 Warm Warm 500 30 10,000 3.500 80,000 15,000 4.500 330 150 Diorite sill in Belt Series (Precambiian). Belt Series (Precambrian)... ____do..................... Granite................. Folded Cretaceous strata. ----do.................. Lower Paleozoic strata..... Shale and limestone (Cretaceous). ____do...................... Faulted Kootenai Formation (Early Cretaceous). Folded Ellis Formation (Jurassic). Granite...................... .do.. .do.. Tertiary strata overlying granite. Travertine overlying limestone (Jurassic). Lava (Tertiary) overlying granite. 137, 385.. 385....... 128, 137 409. 137- Water bottled for table use. Also used in manufacture of soft drinks. Refs. 135, 144, 378. 7 springs. Resort. Ref. 391. Water used locally. Ref. 391. 7 springs. Water used for bathing. 3 springs. Resort. Refs. 144, 383. Water used locally. Refs. 144,148. Resort. Refs. 144, 395. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 133, 393. 7 springs. Water used locally. Water used locally. Water used for mining and milling, also for irrigation. Large deposit of tufa. Refs. 141, 379, 397. 8 springs in area of several acres. Water used for irrigation. Several springs. Resort. Refs. 382, 383. 5 springs. 3 springs. Resort. Ref. 144. Resort. Ref. 144. Several springs. Water used locally. Refs. 388, 395. Several springs. Water used to heat greenhouse. Refs. 144,395.32 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references figure water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Montana—Continued 18 10 20 21 22 22A 23 24 25 26 27 28 20 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 30 40 Alhambra Hot Springs, 17 miles south of 00-134 Helena. Boulder Hot Springs, 3 miles southeast of 125-187 Large Boulder. Pipestone Springs, 20 miles southeast of Hot Butte. Bedford Springs, on north side of Indian Creek 3.5 miles northwest of Townsend. Kimpton (Warner) Warm Springs, on branch of Crow Creek, 7 miles west of Toston. Big Spring, on east bank of Missouri 74 1,400 65 100 50 20,000 River 4 miles southeast of Toston. Plunket's (Mockel, Nave’s Warm) 62 4,000 Spring, at head of Warm Creek, 10 miles southwest of Toston. White Sulphur (Brewer’s) Springs 05-125 500 Big Hole Hot Springs, at Jackson 132 (max) 120-150 1,500 Elkhorn Hot Springs, in sec. 20, T. 4 S., 110 R. 12 W., on Miller Creek 6 miles north of Polaris. Hot Lovell Springs, in sec. 21, T. 8 S., R. 0 W., 72 1,125 0 miles southwest of Dillon. Brown (Ryan Canyon) Springs, in sec. 30, 72 360 T. 8 S., R. 0 W., 11 miles southwest of Dillon. Barkel’s Hot Springs, at Silverstar Hot 50 Clark’s Warm (Potosi Hot) Springs, on 100-120 550 south branch of Willow Creek, 5 miles south of Pony. Hapgood (Norris) Hot Springs, on Hot 80-122 50 Spring Creek near Norris. Puller’s Hot Springs, on upper Ruby 05; 108 150 Creek, 10 miles northwest of Virginia City. Sec. 18, T. 12 S., R. 1 E., 3 miles south- Warm 100 west of Cliff Lake. Bozeman (Ferris, Matthews) Hot Springs, 137 250 on West Gallatin River, 7 miles west of Bozeman. Hunter’s Hot Springs, 20 miles northeast 148-168 1,500 of Livingston. Emigrant Gulch Warm Springs (Chico 102 240 Spring), on Emigrant Creek near Chico. Corwin Hot Springs, in sec. 25, T. 8 S., > 120 R. 7 E. (max) Bear Creek Springs, in sec. 10, T. 0 S., R. 00 30 0 E., 3 miles south of Gardiner. Anderson’s Spring, in sec. 20. T. 3 S., R. 70 00 13 E., near Boulder Creek 3 miles southwest of Hubble. 137 133, 137, 303 137 Gravel overlying Tertiary strata. 384, 387 384, 387 Madison Limestone (Mis-sissippian). 384, 387 384, 387 Lake beds (Miocene) over-lying Belt Series (Precam brian). Tertiary strata overlying Belt Series (Precambrian). 128, 133, 380, 302, 306. Lava (Tertiary) overlying limestone (Carboniferous). Lake beds (Tertiary) over-lying granite. Schist and gneiss (Pre-cambrian). 128, 133, 137, 144, 380. 128?, 133, 137, 400?. 128, 144, 400 Faulted Livingston Formation (Upper Cretaceous and Paleocene). Lava (Quaternary) overlying Precam brian rocks. Lava overlying schist (Pre-cambrian). Lava (Quaternary) overlying Precambrian rocks. 22 springs. Resort. Refs. 133, 303. Many springs. Resort. Refs. 100, 305. Several springs. Resort. Refs. 303, 305. 3 main and several other springs. Water used for irrigation. 2 springs. Water used locally. Ref. 144. Water used for irrigation. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. 0 springs. Resort. About 100 springs. Resort. Refs. 144, 386. 7 springs. Resort. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 301. 4 springs. Water used locally. 6 springs. Water used locally. 4 springs. Water used for bathing. About 10 springs. Refs. 133, 380. 5 springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 138. 388, 380. 2 springs. Resort. Refs. 133,144. Resort. Ref. 380. 3 groups, totaling about 25 individual springs. Deposit of gypsum. Resort. Refs. 100. 380, 304. 305. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Resort. Ref. 301. 2 springs. Water used locally. Water used for bathing. Ref. 300. 1 2 3 4 5 6 6A 7 10 10A 11 11A 12 T. 46 N., R. 27 E., 12 miles west of Pine Forest Range. Bog Ranch Hot Springs, on north side of Thousand Creek Valley 6 miles southwest of Denio, Oregon. T. 47 N., R. 31 E., south of Steens Mountain. T. 45 N., R. 32 E., 12 miles north of Mason’s Crossing of Quinn River. T. 45 N., R. 32 E., 11 miles north of Quinn River (town). T. 45 N., R. 33 E., on west side of King River valley. Cordero Mine........................... T.45N., R.41 E., at head of North Fork of Little Humboldt River. T. 40 N., R. 25 E., at Soldier Meadows, 15 miles south of old Camp McGarry. T. 40 N., R. 28 E., west of sink of Quinn River, at west edge of Black Rock Desert. T. 43 N., R. 31 E., 7 miles west of Mason’s Crossing of Quinn River. Near south bank of Quinn River--------- T. 41 N., R. 41 E., on bank of Little Humboldt River, 12 miles southeast of Paradise Valley post office. Near North and South Forks of Little Humboldt River, 25 miles east of Paradise Valley Double Hot Springs, in T. 37 N., R. 24 E., on west flank of Black Rock Range. Nevada (See fig. 8.) 108 130; 100 20 Intrusive granite (Jurassic) - 118 130 150 118;138 Hot Hot 60 155 130 Hot 165-101 5 Faultedf?) lava (Tertiary) overlying granite. Ref. 441. 2 springs. Refs. 144, 403, 441. 2 springs. Refs. 144, 441. Deposit of siliceous sinter. Ref. 440, also field notes by O. A. Waring. 2 springs. Water used locally. Refs. 144, 441. 2 pumped wells, 550and 580ft deep. Water used at mine. Ref. 451. Ref. 144. Several springs. Ref. 144. 2 springs. Water supply for prospectors. Refs. 144, 418. Several springs. Ref. 144; also field notes by O. A. Waring. Data from field notes by O. A. Waring. Several springs. Refs. 144, 418, 451.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 33 Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references figure water (°F) per minute) chemical quality 12A 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 19A 19B 19C 19D 19E 19F 19G 20 21 22 22A 22B 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30A Near base of west flank of Black Rock Range. T. 37 N., R. 25 E., on southeast side of Black Rock Range. T. 37 N., R. 26 E., In arm of Black Rock Desert. Van Riper, in T. 36 N., R. 24 E., on southwest side of Black Rock Range. T. 36 N., R. 25 E., at south end of Black Rock Range, 10 miles southeast of Division Peak Secs. 16, 21, 24, 34, T. 36 N., R. 26 E., on west border of Black Rock Desert. 2 miles north of Winnemucca___ _______ Golconda Hot Springs, in T. 36 N., R. 40 E. Blossom Hot Spring, in sec. 10, T. 35 N., R. 43 E., 8 miles north of Valmy. Humboldt River Valley. T. 39 N., R. 40 E., at head of South Fork of Little Humboldt River. Sec. 30, T.45N., R.54 E., 5 miles southeast of Mountain City. Sec. 23, T. 46 N., R, 56 E., 15 miles east of Mountain City. 1.5 miles north of Contact............. Mineral (San Jacinto) Spring........... Sec. 22, T. 47 N., R. 68 E., on west side of Nile Spring, in' sec. 30, T. 47 N., R. 70 E., on east side of Goose Creek. Gamble’s Hole, in sec. 10, T. 46 N., R. 69 E., on east side of Goose Creek. Sec. 26, T. 46 N., R. 69 E., at head of main fork of Spring Creek. T. 41 N., R. 69 E., at south end of Thousand Springs Valley. Hot Creek mining district in T. 39 N., R. 60 E., on Marys River 15 miles north of Cress Ranch, in sec. 14, T. 38 N., R. 59 E., 8 miles north of Deeth. Sec. 21, T. 38 N., R. 62 E., in Emigrant Canyon, 4.2 miles north of Wells. 5.5 miles north of Wells.______________ 30B Metropolis. 30C 30D 31 32 33 34 34A 35 35A 35B 35C 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Johnson Ranch........................... H. D. Ranch............................ Hot Sulphur Springs, T. 33 N., R. 53 E., 9 miles northwest of Carlin. Elko Hot Springs, in T. 34 N., R. 55 E., 1 mile west of Elko. T. 33 N., R. 58 E., 8 miles southwest of Fort Halleck. T. 34 N., R. 62 E., near Warm Creek in Independence Valley Near east side of Ruby Lake............. Miller’s Hot Springs, in T. 30 N., R. 59 E., at northeast end of Franklin Lake. Hill’s Warm Spring, in sec. 18, T. 44 N., R. 20 E., 10 miles north of Vya. Hill’s Spring, in sec. 11, T. 43 N., R. 19 E., 5 miles north of Vya. Twin Springs, in sec. 4, T. 42 N., R. 19 E., T. 38 N., R. 18 E., at south end of Surprise Valley. Wards’ (Fly Ranch) Hot Springs, in T. 34 N., R. 23 E., at northwest end of Alkali Flat and 5 miles northeast of Granite Peak. Gerlach Hot Springs, 1 mile northwest of Gerlach. Mud Springs, 2 miles west of Gerlach___ Deep Hole Spring, in sec. 25, T. 33 N., R. 22 E., at north end of Smoke Creek Desert. Wall Spring, in sec. 3, T. 32 N., R. 21 E., on northwest side of Smoke Creek Desert Buffalo Spring, in T. 31 N., R. 20 E., on west side of Smoke Creek Desert. Nevada—Continued 130-150 Hot Hot 145 Hot Hot Hot 120-150 107 Warm Hot 104-106 104 133 78-126 57 106 103 62 Boiling 110-122 Hot 98 113-122 102 73 142-154 98 192 Warm Warm Hot 170 83 66 70 Hot 60 to boiling 188-194 Hot 62 Warm Warm 3 Faulted (?) lava (Tertiary) overlying granite. 50 Lava (Tertiary) overlying granite. Alluvium (Quaternary) near lava (Tertiary). Small 250 70 Small Small 20 55 5 1,200 850 6 8 200 Lake beds (Tertiary) over-lying Paleozoic strata. Cherty limestone (Paleozoic) . 30 Small 50 10 800 30 600 15 Faulted quartzite (Carboniferous) . 137 250 Small Alluvium (Quaternary) near Carboniferous strata. Alluvium (Quaternary) near lava. 10 8 200 128 144, 409 30 3 springs, 1-2 miles apart. Ref. 451. Several springs. Ref. 441. Ref. 441. 3 springs. Ref. 144. Several springs. Ref. 144. Several springs. Refs. 144, 438. Water used locally. Ref. 386. About 12 springs. Resort. Refs. 109, 144, 422, 437. Rises in broad deep pool. Water supply for cattle. Data from field notes by G. A. Waring. Ref. 144. 4 springs. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Water used locally. Several springs and shallow wells. Water used for bathing. Water used locally. Forms boggy area at edge of Goose Creek Meadow. Do. Several springs in 1-acre area. Ref. 144. 4 springs. Water used for sheep dipping. Large mound of tufa. Refs. 138, 430; also field notes by G. A. Waring. Data from field notes by G. A. Waring. Water contains much H2S. Used for bathing. Ref. 144, also field notes by G. A. Waring. 3 main springs. Large deposit of tufa. Water supply for cattle. Data from field notes by G. A. Waring. Several springs in canyon. Water used for irrigation. Data from field notes by G. A. Waring. Water used for domestic supply and for irrigation. Ref. 451. Many springs. Deposit of tufa. Ref. 451. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 138, 144; also field notes by G. A. Waring. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 138. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 144. Water used locally. Refs. 138, 421. Several springs. Refs. 415, 418, 424. Several springs. Refs. 144, 418. Water irrigates meadow. Do. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 441. Many springs in 75-acre area. Largest hot springs in northwestern part of Nevada. Water used for irrigation. Sandy mounds and deposits of tufa. Refs. 144, 409, 418. Many springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 436. Several springs. Ref. 441. Also several flowing wells. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 441. Do. Ref. 441.34 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on figure Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (gallons per minute) Associated rocks References on chemical quality Remarks and additional references N evada—Continued 43 44 46 47 48 49 60 51 52 53 54 55 55A 55B 55 C 55D 55E 55F 56 57 58 59 59A 60 61 62 63 63A 64 65 66A 67 68 70 71 71A 72 73 74 74 A Buckbrush Spring, in T. 29 N., R. 19 E.‘, on west side of Smoke Creek Desert. Rotten Egg Spring, in T. 29 N., R. 19 E., on southwest side of Smoke Creek Desert. Round Hole Spring, in sec. 31, T. 29 N., R. 19 E., on southwest side of Smoke Ross Spring, in T. 28 N., R. 20 E., at south end of Smoke Creek Desert. T. 28 N., R. 21 E., near north end of Pyramid Lake. Fish Spring, in T. 26 N., R. 19 E., 10 miles northwest of Pyramid railroad station. T. 26 N., R. 20 E., on northwest side of Pyramid Lake. T. 27 N., R. 23 E., on northwest shore of Winnemucca Lake. T. 26 N., R. 23 E., on west shore of Winnemucca Lake. T. 24 N., R. 22 E., on Anaho Island in Pyramid Lake. Cottonwood Spring, in sec. 26, T. 23 N., R. 21 E., in Warm Spring Valley 3 miles south of Dewey. T. 21 N., R. 24 E., in Dead Ox Canyon 12 miles south of Dixon. Lawton Hot Springs, 6 miles west of Reno. Moana Springs, 2 miles south of Reno... Huffaker Springs, 5 miles southeast of Moana bathing resort. Zoleggi Springs, 3 miles southwest of Huffaker Springs (no. 55B). Da Monte Springs, 1.5 miles east of Zoleggi Springs. Mount Rose, 10 miles south of Reno_____ Reno Hot Springs, 10.5 miles south of Reno. Steamboat Springs, in sec. 33, T. 18 N., R. 20 E., 11 miles south of Reno. Bowers M anslon (Franktown Hot) Spring; 10 miles north of Carson City. T. 19 N., R. 23 E., 10 miles southwest of Wadsworth. Carson (Swift’s, Shaw’s) Hot Springs, 2 miles north of Carson City. Nevada State Prison................... Walley’s (Genoa) Hot Springs, 6 miles northwest of Minden. Hind’s Hot Springs, in sec. 16, T. 12 N., R. 23 E., near Simpson. Wabuska Springs, in T. 15 N., R. 25 E., 1 mile north of Wabuska. Butte Spring, in T. 33 N., R. 26 E., at north end of Hot Springs Butte, 25 miles southwest of Sulphur. Near Humboldt River, 2 miles north of Mill City. Leach’s (Pleasant Valley) Hot Springs in sec. 35, T. 32 N., R. 38 E., in Grass Valley 25 miles south of Winnemucca. Guthrie (Nelson) Springs, in sec. 36, T. 32 N., R. 38 E., 25 miles south of Winnemucca. Kyle’s Hot Springs, in sec. 2, T. 39 N., R. 36 E., 25 miles southeast of Humboldt. Miller Ranch............................. Sec. 1, T. 25 N.. R. 36 E., near north end of Salt Marsh (Osobb) Valley. Sou (Gilbert’s) Hot Springs, in sec. 29, T. 26 N., R. 38 E., near north end of Salt Marsh (Osobb) Valley. Cone Spring, in sec. 26, T. 25 N., R. 38 E., in Salt Marsh (Osobb) Valley. Sec. 35, T. 25 N., R. 38 E., 0.25 mile from Cone Spring, in Salt Marsh (Osobb) . Valley. T. 24 N., R. 36 E., on northwest side of Salt Marsh (Osobb) Valley. T. 23 N., R. 35 E., on northeast side of Pah Ute Mountains. 5 miles south-southwest of spring No. 71... Springer’s (Brady’s, Femley) Hot Springs, in sec. 12, T. 22 N., R. 26 E., on U.S. Highway 40. Eagle Salt Works Springs, in T. 20 N., R. 27 E., 15 miles northwest of Fallon. Borax Spring, in T. 17 N., R. 30 E., 3 miles east of South Carson Lake. Lee Springs, 18 miles south of Fallon--- Warm 92 Warm Hot Hot Warm 206-208 Warm Warm 120 Warm 178 172 120 250 100-200 7&-81 10 103 125 130 40 167-203 300 115-118 75 73 120 75 136-160 Large 60-143 550 138-162 182 20 Warm Small 158-202 200 139-204 250 100-160 Small 58-61 900 160-185 125 Small Warm Small Hot Small Warm Small 158-209 50 Lake beds (Quaternary). ----do------------------ .do.. Lava (Tertiary)., ----do........... .do.. Faulted lava (Tertiary). Lava (Tertiary).......... .do.. .do.. Lava (Tertiary) overlying granite. Lava (Tertiary). Faulted granite.. Metamorphic rocks. Alluvium_________ .do.. .do.. Metamorphic rocks. ___do............. Granite........... Faulted Granite-Lava (Tertiary).. Metamorphic rocks. Lake beds (Pleistocene). Faulted granite.......... Alluvium overlying granite- Lava (Tertiary) overlying granite (?). Granite.................... Alluvium................... Alluvium overlying Mesozoic strata. Alluvium near basalt (Quaternary). Alluvium. ....do____ Contact of Mesozoic strata with underlying granite. Faulted(?) lava (Tertiary). Lava (Tertiary). Lava (Tertiary) overlying granite. Alluvium near granite...... Granite................... Lake beds (Quaternary) near lava (Tertiary). 137. 20, 128, 137, 427, 452, 562. 137. 137....... 133, 137." 412.. Alluvium. Alluvium near lava (late Tertiary). ----do______________________ Ref. 441. Water smells strongly of HjS. Ref. 441. Also several flowing wells. Ref. 441. Refs. 144, 441. Several springs. Refs. 144, 441. Ref. 441. Several springs. Refs. 144, 441, Several springs. Ref. 441. Do. Several springs. Water used locally. 2 main springs. Water used for bathing. Resort. Wells. Water used for bathing. Ref. 451. Several springs on bank of creek. Ref. 451. Several springs. Ref. 451. On bank of creek. Ref. 451. Erupting wells. Resort. Ref. 451. Drilled wells. Resort. Ref. 451. Many springs, including 3 small geysers. Resort and sanitarium. Refs. 400, 401, 404-406, 413, 417, 418, 420, 424, 426, 436, 448-450, 453-456. Resort. Ref. 144. Water used locally Refs. 144, 418. Water used for bathing. Resort. Ref. 144. Water used locally. Many springs. Resort. Refs. 125, 144, 428. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Resort. Refs. 144, 429. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 144. Refs. 144, 441. Several springs. Several springs. Water used locally. De- Eosit of siliceous sinter. Ref. 424; also eld notes by G. A. Waring. 8 pools in 1-acre area; also several other springs. Water is sulfurous. Used for irrigation. Deposits of tufa and siliceous sinter. Ref. 144 and field notes by G. A. Waring. Several springs. Deposit of sinter. Former resort. Ref. 144. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Data from field notes by G. A. Waring. Ref. 438. Several springs issuing from tufa mounds in 12-acre area. Refs. 144, 418, 438, 442. Ref. 441. Several springs. Several springs. Deposit of siliceous sinter. Water used for bathing. Also as water supply for auto station. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 144. Deposit of siliceous sinter. Also a well. Ref. 451.75 76 77 77A 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 88A 89 90 99A 91 91A 91B 91C 91D 92 93 93A 93B 93C 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 102A 103 DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 35 Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Nevada—Continued Sec. 6, T. 16 N., R. 32 E., 20 miles southeast of Fallon. Izzenhood Ranch Springs, in T. 36 N.f R. 45 E.,25 miles north of Battle Mountain. White Rock Spring, in sec. 8, T. 33 N., R. 47 E., 2 miles west of Rock Creek. Beowawe Geysers, in sec. 5, T. 31 N., R. 48 E., in Whirlwind Valley 8 miles west of Beowawe. Sec. 24, T. 29 N., R. 41 E., in Buffalo Valley 25 miles southwest of Battle Mountain (town). Mound Spring, in sec. 7, T. 28 N., R. 44 E., in Reese River valley 25 miles south of Battle Mountain (town). Sec. 23, T. 27 N., R. 43 E., 1 mile north of Hot Spring Ranch in Reese River valley. Sec. 26, T. 27 N., R. 43 E., at Hot Spring Ranch. T. 27 N., R. 47 E., 10 miles south of Lander. T. 22 N., R. 47 E., near north end of Grass Valley. T. 18 N., R. 39 E., in Smith Creek valley 6 miles north of Hot Springs. Sec. 25, T. 17 N., R. 40 E., on west side of Smith Creek valley. Spencer Hot Springs, in T. 17 N., R. 46 E., 18 miles southeast of Austin. Sec. 14, T. 16 N., R. 45 E., 20 miles southeast of Austin. Horseshoe Ranch Springs, 1 mile northeast of Beowawe. Sec. 2, T. 29 N., R. 48 E., in Crescent Valley 12 miles south of Beowawe. Sec. 12, T. 28 N., R. 52 E., at head of Hot> Creek, 14 miles north of Mineral. Carlotti Ranch Springs, in sec. 24, T. 28 N., R. 52 E., 10 miles north of Mineral. BrufFey’s (Mineral Hill) Hot Springs, in sec. 14, T. 27 N., R. 52 E., 7 miles northeast oi Mineral. Flynn Ranch Springs, in sec. 5, T. 25 N.t R. 53 E., in Diamond Valley. Siri Ranch Spring, in sec. 6, T. 24 N., R. * 53 E., in Diamond Valley. Sadler (Big Shipley) Springs, in sec. 23, T. 24 N., 52 E., in Diamond Valley. Sulphur Springs, in sec. 36, T. 23 N., R. 52 E., on Sulphur Springs Ranch in Diamond Valley. Jacobson Ranch Springs, on east side of Diamond Valley. Sec. 15, T. 24 N., R. 47 E., on west side of Grass Valley. Sec. 33, T. 24 N., R. 48 E., on east side of Grass Valley. Bartine Hot Springs, in sec. 5, T. 19 N., R. 50 E., in Antelope Valley 35 miles west of Eureka. Clobe Hot Spring, in sec. 28, T. 18 N., R. 50 E., in Antelope Valley, 45 miles southwest of Eureka. Sara Ranch Springs, in see. 7, T. 16 N., R. 53 E., at head of Fish Creek. Collar and Elbow Spring, in sec. 27, T. 26 N., R. 65 E., near north end of Steptoe Valley. Cherry Creek (Young’s) Hot Springs, in T. 23 N., R. 63 E., 1.2 miles southwest of Cherry Creek (town) in Steptoe Valley. Shellbourne Hot Springs, in T. 23 N., R. 63 E., about 100 ft from Cherry Creek (Young’s) Hot Springs (No. 95). Borchert John Spring, in sec. 16, T. 22 N., R. 63 E., in Steptoe Valley. Monte Neva (Goodrich, Melvin) Hot Springs, in sec. 24, T. 21 N., R. 63 E., 1 mile northwest of Warm Springs railroad station in Steptoe Valley. T. 21 N., R. 70 E., at east base of Kern Mountains. Sec. 5, T. 19 N., R. 63 E., 10 miles northwest of McGill. McGill Warm Springs, in sec. 21, T. 18 N., R. 64 E., 0.75 mile west of McGill. Ely Warm Spring, in sec. 10, T. 16 N., R. 63 E., 1.5 miles northeast of Ely. Moore’s Ranch Springs, in T. 23 N., R. 56 E., in Newark Valley. Big Blue Spring, in sec. 23, T. 14 N., R. 56 E., near the north end of White Pine Valley. Hot Warm 120 to boiling 130 110 124 122 Hot 181 Warm Hot 117- 144 Hot 125-132 122 84 95; 102 108-152 69-78 87 103-106 74 71-75 Hot Hot 105; 108 142 66 92 118- 135 124; 135 66 173-193 Warm 58-76 76-84 85 65-70 Warm 1,000 100 5 3 450 50 Faulted basalt (Tertiary)... 435, 562 446 446 446 Lava intrusive (Tertiary) in Carboniferous strata. Small 6 5 30 40 5,900 100 50 10 300 5.000 20 900 Small Small 10 100 4.000 20 40 432 Lava (Tertiary) overlying Paleozoic strata. Lake beds (Pliocene) over-lying Paleozoic strata. Alluvium near faulted Paleozoic strata. Lake beds (Tertiary) near faulted Tertiary strata. Alluvium near hills of faulted lava. 406, 408 Alluvium near Paleozoic strata. 406, 408 408 800 625 408 Alluvium near Paleozoic strata. 406, 408 200 450 23 200 408 Alluvium near Paleozoic strata. 406,408.. 406 144 Several springs. Water smells of HjS. Ref. 144. Water level lowered 4 ft by trenching, thus doubling original discharge. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 425. Water used locally. Refs. 144, 434. About 50 springs and mud pools on hillside tufa terrace 0.75 mile long, also 3 springs in nearby lowland. 2 or 3 springs show true geyser action, 1 spouting to height of 30 ft. Refs. 410, 414, 434, 435. Several springs. Ref. 438. Water used for roadside watering. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 418. Several springs. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 418. Water used locally. Refs. 138, 435. Water used locally. Refs. 144, 424. Water used locally. Refs. 128, 144, 409, 441. Several springs. Ref. 144. Several springs. Water used locally. Refs. 433, 447. 7 springs. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. 2 springs. Water supply for cattle. 6 springs. Water used for irrigation. 2 springs, 0.25 mile apart. Water used for irrigation. 6 springs. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 144. Deep pool and minor springs. Water used for irrigation. Water used for irrigation. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 138, 144. 2 main springs. Water used for irrigation. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Several springs. Water supply for cattle. Several springs. 2 springs issuing from large mound of tufa. Also a flowing well. Water used locally. Water supply for cattle. About 20 deep pools in area 0.5 mile in diameter. Water used for irrigation. Deposit of tufa. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Water used for irrigation. 6 springs issuing from mound of siliceous sinter. Ref. 138. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. 3 main springs. Water used for irrigation. Water used for bathing. Ref. 408. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Water used for bathing.104 105 106 107 107A 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 134J 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references water (°F) per chemical quality minute) Nevada—Continued Williams Hot Sprines, in sec. 33, T. 13 N., R. 60 E., 12 miles northwest of Preston. Preston Springs, in sec. 1, T., 12 N., R. 61 E. Lund Spring, in sec. 33, T. 12 N., R. 62 E-. Warm Sulphur Springs, in T. 11 N., R. 65 E., at head of Warm Creek. Big Spring, in T. 11 N., R. 69 E.. in Snake Valley, 15 miles south of Baker. Sec. 30, T. 10 N., R. 70 E., at head of Big Springs Creek. Double Spring, in T. 13 N., R. 29 E., 3 miles north of Walker Lake. Sec. 4, T. 7 N., R. 27 E., on East Walker River, 20 miles west of Hawthorne. T. 6 N., R. 35 E., at Sodaville......... Waterworks Springs, in sec. 22, T. 2 S., R. 39 E., at Silver Peak. Alkali Spring, in sec. 26, T. 1 S., R. 41 E., 11 miles northwest of Goldfield. Wedell Springs, in sec. 7. T. 12 N., R. 34 E., 12 miles southeast of Rawhide. T. .14 N., R. 43 E., 1 mile east of McLeod’s Ranch in Big Smoky Valley. Gendron Spring, in T. 14 N., R. 43 E., near Millett in Big Smoky Valley. Charnock (Big Blue) Springs, in T. 13 N., R. 44 E., near Charnock Ranch. Sec. 14, T. 11 N., R. 42 E., in Big Smoky Valley, 14 miles south of Millett. Darrough Hot Springs, in sec. 17, T. 11 N. , R. 43 E., on Darrough Ranch in Big Smoky Valley. Sec. 1, T. 14 N., R. 47 E., 2 miles southeast of Potts. Diana’s Punch Bowl, in sec. 22, T. 14 N., R. 47 E., 5 miles south of Potts. Fish Springs, in secs. 26 and 35, T. 11 N., R. 49 E., in Fish Creek valley. Sec. 32, T. 13 N., R. 56 E., 5 miles north of Duck water Indian Springs, in T. 7 N., R. 42 E., near San Antonio. T. 7 N., R. 51 E., on Hot Creek 8 miles northeast of Tybo. T. 4 N., R. 50 E., near south end of Hot Creek valley. Lock’s Springs, in sec. 15, T. 8 N., R. 55 E., on west side of Railroad Valley 20 miles southwest of Currant. Chimney Springs, in sec. 16, T. 7 N., R. 55 E., in Railroad Valley 6 miles south of Lock’s Springs (No. 126). Blue Eagle Springs, in sec. 11, T. 8 N., R. 57 E., on east side of Railroad Valley 18 miles south of Currant. Kate Spring, in sec. 14, T. 8 N., R. 57 E., O. 75 mile south of Blue Eagle Springs (No. 128). Butterfield Springs, in sec. 27, T. 8 N., R. 57 E., on east side of Railroad Valley. Bacon Springs, in sec. 34, T. 8 N., R. 57 E., on east side of Railroad Valley. Bullwhacker Spring, in sec. 28, T. 7 N., R. 57 E., on east side of Railroad Valley. Willow Springs, in sec. 5, T. 6 N., R. 57 E., on east side of Railroad Valley. Mormon Springs, in sec. 33, T. 9 N., R. 61 E., 5 miles west of White River. Moon Ri' er Springs...................... Riordan Ranch (Emigrant) Springs, in T. 9 N., R. 62 E., near White River. White River Valley (Flag, Sunnyside) Springs, in secs. 28, 31, and 32, T. 7 N., R. 62 E., on Whipple and Hendricks Ranches. Hot Creek Ranch Springs, in sec. 18, T. 6 N., R. 61 E., in White River valley 8 miles southwest of Sunnyside. Hicks Hot Springs, in T. 11 S., R. 47 E., 5 miles north of Beatty. Ash Meadow Springs, in sec. 22, T. 17 S., R. 50 E. Pahrump Springs, in sec. 14, T. 20 S., R. 53 E., on Pahrump Ranch. Manse Springs, in sec. 3, T. 21 S., R. 54 E., on Manse Ranch. Geyser Ranch Springs, in T. 8 N., R. 65 E., 5 miles east of Patterson. T. 5 N., R. 70 E., on Hammond Ranch... 124; 128 185 72 5,700 strata. 66 2.400 Warm 972 64 8,000, Warm 12,000 2,000 Warm Hot 80-101 100 69-118 500 432 120-140 50 399, 432, 439 129; 144 60 strata. Alluvium overlying lava (Tertiary). Hot 61 10 strata. 432 80 450 Alluvium overlying lava (Tertiary). Boiling 600 160-207 200 432 strata. Warm Hot Small Alluvium (Quaternary) near lava (Tertiary). Warm Warm Large Warm Lava (Tertiary) overlying Paleozoic strata. Warm Boiling 93-99 Lava (Tertiary) overlying Silurian and Devonian strata. Alluvium near faulted (?) lava (Tertiary). 2,000 130-160 100 Alluvium near faulted(?) lava (Tertiary). 82 1,385 14 73 64 227 57 2 59 10 60 30 100 100 92 900 70 200 65-75 2,000 5,000 40 85-90 110 Lava (Tertiary) overlying Paleozoic strata. 76-94 450 77 2,200 1,500 50 strata. 447... 75 ozoic strata. 447 65-70 Alluvium near lava (Tertiary). 407.. 84 2 springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 431. Several springs. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Refs. 407, 421, 431. Water supply for town. Also used for irrigation. Refs. 407, 421, 431. Several springs. Water used for irrigation R-fs. 138, 144, 421. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 141. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 144, 441. Several springs. Water used for bathing. State reserve. Several springs. Water used locally. R°fs. 419, 423. 11 Springs. Water supply for town. Refs. 411, 444, 445. Deposit of tufa. 2 main springs. Water used locally. Refs. 138, 144. Issues from large mound. Ref. 432. Water used locally. Several springs issuing from laree mound. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 432. Water used locally. Refs. 144, 432. Several springs. Resort. Ref. 433. Several springs. Water used locally. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 144. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. 3 springs. Water used locally. Ref. 138. Several springs issuing from terrace of tufa. 2 springs. Ref. 144. 2 springs issuing in pools on terrace of tufa and 2 springs in meadow at base of terrace. Water used for irrigation. 3 springs issuing from mounds of tufa. Water supply for cattle. 2 main springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 407. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. 2 springs. Water used for irrigation. 2 springs. Water supply for cattle. Water supply for cattle. 2 springs. Water supply for cattle. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 431. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 431. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. 6 springs. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 144, 407. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 144, 407, 431, 443. 5 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 399. 4 springs. Refs. 144, 399. 2 springs. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 398, 443. 2 springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 269. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 138, 144. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 407.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 37 Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references figure water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Nevada— Co n ti n ued 144 Bennetts Springs, in T. 2 S., R. 66 E., 9 70 Small Alluvium near limestone miles west of Panaca. (Paleozoic). 144A Delmue’s Springs, 10 miles north of Panaca 70 200 144B 70 100 145 Panaca Spring, in sec. 4, T. 2 S., R. 68 E__ 85-88 2,500 407 146 Caliente Hot Spring, in T. 4 S., R. 67 E., 110 0.25 mile north of Caliente. 147 Hiko Spring, in sec. 22, T. 4 S., R. 60 E_._ 90 4,000 407, 441 148 Crystal Spring. 1 mile northwest of Hiko.- 90 9,000 149 Ash (Alamo) Spring, 4 miles south of 90-97 9, 000 Hiko. 150 T. 14 S., R. 65 E., 3 miles west of Moapa.. 90 151 Indian Spring, in sec. 16, T. 16 S., R. 56 78 410 407,443 E., 1 mile south of Indian Spring rail- road station. 152 Las Vegas Springs, in T. 20 S., R. 61 E., 73 2,600 407,421 2 miles west of Las Vegas. 2 springs. Water supply for cattle. Ref. 407. 2 springs. Water used for irrigation. Water used for irrigation. Several springs. Water supply for town. Formerly flowed, now pumped. Water used for bathing. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Refs. 141, 144. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 141. 6 main springs. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 141. Several springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Ref. 407. Water supply for railroad; also used for irrigation. Ref. 398. 2 springs. Water used for domestic and industrial purposes, also for irrigation. Refs. 144, 269. New Mexico (See fig. 2.) 1 Sec. 32, T. 11 N., R. 2 W., 10 miles south of Shiprock. 68 3 2 Sec. 8, T. 7 N., R. 2 W., 5 miles north of Newcomb. 65 3 3 Sec. 16, T. 7 N., R. 2 W., 4 miles north of Newcomb. 67 7 4 Sec. 23, T. 25 N., R. 8 E., 0.75 mile northwest of La Madera. 80 10 5 Sec. 24, T. 25 N., R. 8 E., 1 mile northeast of La Madera. 100 5 6 Sec. 25, T. 25 N., R. 8 E., 0.25 mile north of La Madera. 90 15 7 Sec. 35, T. 25 N., R. 8 E., 1 mile southwest of La Madera. 100 5 8 Ojo Caliente Springs, 12 miles northwest of Barranca. 98-113 350 9 Togay Springs, in sec. 33, T. 19 N., R. 15 W., 20 miles east of Tohatchie. 65 65 10 Murray Spring, in sec. 29, T. 20 N., R. 3 E., 15 miles north of Jemez Springs (town). San Antonio Springs, in sec. 7, T. 20 N., R. 4 E., on San Antonio Creek 20 miles north of Jemez Springs (town). 130 150 11 120 50 12 Sulphur Springs, in sec. 3, T. 19 N., R. 3 E., 12 miles north of Jemez Springs (town). Soda Dam Springs, in sec. 15, T. 18 N., R. 2 E., in Canyon de San Diego, 2 miles north of Jemez Hot Springs (No. 15). McCauley Spring, in sec. 4, T. 18 N., R. 3 E., 7 miles north of Jemez Springs (town). 76-167 500 13 75-105 10 14 100 110 15 Jemez Hot Springs (Ojos Calientes), in sec. 22, T. 18 N., R. 2 E., 12 miles north of Jemez (pueblo). Phillips Springs, in T. 16 N., R. 1 W., 10 miles west of Jemez (pueblo) and 1 mile northeast of Rio Salado. 94-168 200 16 70 Small 17 Indian (Jemez) Springs, in T. 16 N., R. 2 E., 2 miles north of San Ysidro. 120 18 San Ysidro Hot Springs, in sec. 8, T. 15 N., R.IE.,7 milevS southwest of San Ysidro. 86 (max) 19 San Ysidro Warm Springs, in secs. 3,9,10, T. 15 N., R. 1 E. 68 Small 20 Las Vegas Hot Springs, 6 miles northwest of Las Vegas. 80-140 100 21 Ojo Caliente Springs, in sec. 21, T. 8 N., R. 20 W., 12 miles southwest of Zuni. 80 500 22 Quelites Mineral Spring, in T. 8 N., R. 2 W., on north side of San Jose River 2 miles northwest of Quelites. 80 3 23 Socorro Warm Springs, 1.5 miles southwest of Socorro. 93 500 24 Ojo Caliente, in sec. 31, T. 8 S., R. 7 W., 15 miles northwest of Monticello. 85 1,200 25 Sec. 23, T. 12 S., R. 20 W., 1 mile south of Pleasanton. 80-124 50 26 Sec. 30, T. 11 S., R. 12 W., 1 mile south of DD Bar Ranch. 80 50 27 Sec. 19, T. 12 S., R. 13 W., on Diamond Creek near its mouth. 151 30 28 Sec. 26, T. 13 S., R. 16 W., near Turkey Creek. 80 20 Mancos Shale (Upper Cretaceous) intruded by porphyry dike. 144,328,460 Gneiss intruded by dikes Mesaverde Group (Late Cretaceous). 133, 137, 328, 458, 460, 463,464. Andesite and rhyolite (Tertiary) . Limestone (Carboniferous) faulted against granite. 461, 466. . 461,465 Faulted Chinle Formation (Triassic). Fault contact between Chinle Formation (Triassic) and Carboniferous strata. Faulted Chinle Formation (Triassic). 137, 144, 460, 461, 465,466. 466 460, 466 137, 466 Contact of Carboniferous strata with Precambrian rocks. 133, 137, 144, 335, 345. 328 (Triassic). 137. Lake beds (Tertiary) near lava. Lava agglomerate (Quaternary) . Water smells of HjS. Water supply or cattle. Do. Do. Several springs. 6 springs. Tufa deposit contains fluorite. Resort. Many small pools. Water supply for cattle. Refs. 461,466. 8 springs. Water smells of HjS. Refs. 460, 465. Several springs. Large deposit of tufa. Refs. 457,460,466. 1 group of 10 and another group of 40 springs. Resort. Refs. 133, 328, 457, 464. About 40 springs in 30-acre area. Deposits of travertine. Refs. 457, 461. 465. Several springs. Water used locally. Refs. 457, 461, 465, 466. 40 springs. Water is strongly carbonated. Used locally. Refs. 457, 461. Several springs. 6 springs. Water smells of H2S. Used for bathing. Refs. 328, 459, 464. 2 springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Refs. 144, 460. Water used locally. Deposit of tufa. Ref. 460. Several springs. Water supply for Socorro. Refs. 460, 464, 467. 7 springs. Refe. 144, 460. 8 springs. Water used locally. Refs. 138, 144, 460.38 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references figure water (°F) per minute) chemical quality New Mexico—Continued 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Sec. 3, T. 14 S., R. 16 W., on Turkey Creek 3 miles above its confluence with the Gila River. Gila Hot Springs, in sec. 5, T. 13 S., R. 13 W., on the Gila River near Diamond Sec. 3, T. 13 S., R. 13 W., on the Gila River. Sec. 20, T. 13 W., R. 13 W., on the Gila River. Sec. 16, T. 14 S., R. 14 W., on the Gila River. Hudson’s Hot Springs, 4 miles northwest of Mimbres. Apache Tejo Warm Springs, 7 miles north of Whitewater. Faywood Hot Springs, in T. 20 S., R. 11 W., 6 miles northeast of Faywood. Hot Springs (Palomas), near Truth or Consequences. Radium Hot Springs, near Radium Springs railway station 17 miles north of Las Cruces. 20 90-100 900 30 30 20 142 133 97 2,000 120 142 345 90-105 10 Limestone (Pennsylvanian) faulted against granite. 137 165; 185 Small 4 springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 138, 144, 460. Water used locally. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 135, 144. Several springs. Water used locally. Refs. 138, 144. Several springs issuing from mound of tufa. Resort. Ref. 526. Several springs and wells. Water used for bathing. Resort and State Hospital for crippled children. Refs. 460, 468. 2 springs. Water is brackish. Used for bathing and heating hotel. Refs. 133, 137. New York (See flg. 3.) 1 Lebanon Warm Spring, 27 miles southeast of Albany. 76 500 Faulted limestone (Paleozoic). 137, 144, 469, 471 Water bottled and marketed. Resort since colonial times. Refs. 469-472. North Carolina (See flg. 3.) 1 Hot Springs, on French Broad River 40 miles northwest of Asheville. 92-117 30 Shady Dolomite (Cambrian) . 137, 144, 473, 476, 478, 543. About 20 springs issuing at river edge. Resort. Refs. 473-478. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 17A 17B Sec. 29, T. 2 S., R. 9 E., in crater of Mount Hood. Mount Hood Warm Springs, in sec. 24, T. 3 S., R. 8^ E., on south side of Mount Hood. Sec. 25, T. 6 S., R. 6 E., on the Clackamas River. Carey (Austin) Hot Springs, in sec. 30, T. 6 S., R. 7 E., on the Clackamas River. Bagsby Hot Springs, in sec. 26, T. 7 S., R. 5 E., on Hot Springs Creek 4 miles south of Thunder Mountain. Breitenbush Hot Springs, in sec. 20, T. 9 S., R. 7 E., on the Breitenbush Rivei. Warm Springs, in secs. 19 and 20, T. 8 S., R. 13 E., on Warm Springs River 9 miles north-northeast of Warm Springs Indian Agency. Lehman Hot Springs, in sec. 1, T. 5 S., R. 33 E., on Camas Creek. Hideaway Springs, in T. 5 S., R. 33 E., 7 miles southwest of Lehman Hot Springs (No. 8). Sec. 6, T. 1 S., R. 39 E., 2 miles northeast of Summerville. Hot Lake, in T. 4 S., R. 39 E., 10 miles southeast of La Grande. Medical Springs, in sec. 24, T. 6 S., R. 41 E., 20 miles north-northeast of Baker. Ritter (McDuffee) Hot Spring, sec. 8, T. 8 S., R. 30 E., on north bank of Middle Fork of John Day River. Hot Sulphur Spring, in sec. 35, T. 10 S., R. 32 E., on Camp Creek 6 miles south of Susan ville. Bear Gulch Spring, in sec. 11, T. 15 S., R. 31 E., near Canyon Creek 10 miles south of Canyon City. Blue Mountain Hot Springs, in sec. 13, T. 14 S., R. 34 E., near mouth of Reynolds Creek 10 miles south of Prairie City. Sam-0 Mineral Springs, in sec. 2, T. 12 S., R. 43 E., 4 miles southeast of Durkee. Radium Hot Spring, in sec. 28, T. 7 S., R. 39 E., 10 miles northwest of Baker. Sam-0 Spring, in sec. 16, T. 9 S., R. 40 E., near Baker. 18 Belknap Hot Springs, in sec. 11, T. 16 S., R. 6 E., 6 miles east of McKenzie Bridge. Oregon (See flg. 6.) 120-194 60-80 25 188 (max) 176-196 (Tertiary). Hot 50 140-198 900 138-145 Large Lake beds (Tertiary) over-lying lava. 75 Hot (Tertiary). Warm 180 175 140 50 Greenstone (Carbonifer- 482 110 35 ous). Basalt (Tertiary). 120 Warm 2 80 Faulted (?) Jurassic or Trias-sic strata. 481. 135 80 400 Alluvium overlying Tertiary volcanic and sedimentary rocks. Conglomerate near lava 147-180 75 133, 481 (upper Tertiary). Many fumaroles emitting steam and gases, including HjS. Refs. 479, 484, 485. Several small springs in 3-acre area. Resort. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 481. Several springs. Water smells of HjS. Used for bathing. Ref. 481. 8 springs in 5-acre area. Campground. Ref. 481. About 40 springs in 10-acre area. Resort. Ref. 481. Many springs for 2 miles along river. Water smells of HjS. Campground. Refs. 133, 483. 10 springs. Resort. Several springs. Water smells of HjS. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 144. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used locally. Resort. Refs. 109, 480. Resort. Refs. 144, 482. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 482. 2 springs. Water used locally. Ref. 482. Also 2 flowing wells. Water used for bathing. Water used for irrigation. 3 main springs. Water used for bathing. Resort. Refs. 137, 488.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 39 Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on figure Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (gallons per minute) Associated rocks References on chemical quality Remarks and additional references Oregon— Con tinued 19 Foley Springs, in sec. 28, T. 16 S., R. 6 E., 162-174 25 137, 144 20 4.5 miles southeast of McKenzie Bridge. Sec. 7, T. 17 S., R. 5 E., on the South Fork of McKen ie River, 8 miles southwest of McKenzie Bridge. W’all Creek Hot Springs, in sec. 26, T. 20 5., R. 4 E., 10.5 miles northeast of Oak-ridge. Winino (McCredie) Springs, in sec. 36, T. 21 S., R. 4 E., 11 miles east of Oakridge. Kitson Springs, in sec. 6, T. 22 S., R. 4 E., 8 miles southeast of Oakridge. Umpqua Warm Spring, in sec. 20, T. 26 5., R. 4 E., on Umpqua River 5 miles south of Potter Mountain. Jackson (Bybee) Hot Springs, 2 miles northwest of Ashland. Sec. 31, T. 24 S., R. hYi E., in Summit Lake Valley. Klamath Hot Springs, at Klamath Falls.. 130 60 (Tertiary). 21 (max) 98 3 22 Hot 20 23 114 35 24 105 5 Andesite (Tertiary) 25 104 70 Granite 25 (max) 27 185 150 do 28 130 8 Lava (Tertiary). 28A Taylor Warm Spring, 2 miles east of Olene. 75 500 do 28 B 76 1,350 29 Oregon (Turner) Hot Springs, in sec. 10, T. 40 S., R. 13 E., 10 miles southeast of Bonanza. Smith's Hot Spring, in sec. 10, T. 40 S., R. 13 E., 9.5 miles southeast of Bonanza. Wilkerson’s Warm Springs, in sec. 6, T. 40 S., R. 14 E., 13 miles southeast of Bonanza. Robertson's Springs, in sec. 18, T. 38 S., R. 15 E., in Horsefly Valley 8 miles south of Bly. Paulina Springs, in sec. 26, T. 21 S., R. 12 148 35 Lake beds (Tertiary) 29A 146 5 do 30 76 20 Lava (Tertiary) 31 Hot Lava (upper Tertiary) 32 65; 70 10 Andesite and tuff (upper 33 E., near north shore of Paulina Lake. East Lake Hot Springs, in seer 29, T. 21 S., R. 13 E., on south shore of East Lake. Sec. 36, T. 19 S., R. 32 E., near Twelve-mile Creek 20 miles southwest of Paulina. Sand Springs, in sec. 35, T. 25 S., R. 19 E., 110-141 Tertiary). Lake beds (Tertiary) near 34 60-87 lava (Tertiary). 35 62 30 Alluvium overlying lake 5 miles northeast of Fossil Lake. beds. 36 Sec. 32, T. 26 S., R. 18 E., on west shore 62 3 do 37 of Christmas Lake. Ana River Springs, in sec. 6, T. 30 S., R. 17 E., 7 miles north of Summer Lake post office. Buckhom Creek Springs, in sec. 5, T. 30 S., R. 17 E., 9 miles north of Summer Lake Post Office. Johnson Creek Springs, in sec. 34, T. 29 S., R. 17 E., 12 miles northeast of Summer Lake post office. Thousand Springs, in sec. 19, T. 30 S., R. 18 E., on east side of Summer Lake Valley. R. C. Foster’s Spring, 2 miles southwest of Ana River. 66 48,000- Lake beds overlying faulted 489 38 68 75,000 1,000 basalt. 39 56 9,000 do 40 66 200 40A 66 2,500 do 40B 60.5 10 Faulted lake beds (Pliocene). 40C 64.5 2 do 40D 65 50 do 40E 67.5 100 41 Pardon Warm Spring, in sec. 35, T. 30 S., 76 40 Lake beds (Pliocene) near 42 R. 16 E. Summer Lake (Woodward; J. W. Far- 116 21 faulted lava. Lake beds (Pliocene) 489. 43 leigh’s) Hot Spring, in sec. 11, T. 33 S., R. 17 E. Sec. 12, T. 30 S., R. 22 E., on west shore of 59 25 Alluvium overlying lake 44 Alkali Lake Sec. 22, T. 32 S., R. 21 E., on XL Ranch 3 miles north of Abert Lake. 63 10 beds (Pliocene). Lake beds (Pliocene) over- 44A 65 20 lying basalt. Lake beds (Pliocene) near 44B 68 10 faulted lava (Tertiary). do 44C 80 30 Lake beds (Pliocene; 44D White Rock Ranch Springs, 10 miles north of Lake view. 63; 71 10 Basalt (upper Tertiary) 44E 69 Alluvium 45 Hunters Hot Springs, 2 miles north of 128-162 600 Faulted lake beds (Pliocene). Lake view. 46 Leo Hank’s (Leithead, Joy land Plunge, 157 50 Faulted lava (Tertiary) 489.. . .. Lakeview) Hot Spring, 1.5 miles south of Lakeview. 4 springs. Resort. Ref. 481. 4 springs. 3 springs. Water used locally. 15 springs in 1-acre area. Resort. 2 main springs. Resort. 2 springs. 8 springs. Resort. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 144. Water used for bathing. Also several wells supplying hot water for heating of residences. Refs. 113,150. Several springs. Water from one is used for domestic purposes. Water used for irrigation. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Water supply for sanitarium. Water used for bathing. Resort. Water used for bathing. Also water supply for cattle. 2 springs. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 144. 2 springs. Ref. 487. Many small springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 487. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 487. 3 springs, of which the southernmost is called Mound Spring. Water supply for cattle. Ref. 490. Water used for domestic purposes. Ref. 490. 5 springs. Water supply for Summer Lake Irrigation District. Refs. 489, 490. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 490. Do. Many small springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 490. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 489. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 489. Water used for domestic purposes; also water supply for cattle. Ref. 489. 5 springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 489. Water supply for cattle. Ref. 489. Water used locally. 3 main springs. Water smells of HjS. Used for bathing and irrigation. Deposit of siliceous sinter. Ref. 490. Water used for domestic purposes; also water supply for cattle. Ref. 490. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 490. Water supply for cattle. Do. Do. 2 springs. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Water used for domestic purposes; also water supply for cattle. Kef. 489. 12 main springs, also a flowing well 200 ft deep and discharging 120 gpm. Water from well used to heat hotel. Resort. Ref. 490. Water smells of H*S. Used for bathing. Refs. 133, 144. 735—914 O—65- A47 47A 48 48A 49 49A 49B 49C 49D 50 50A 51 51A 52 52A 52B 52C 52D 52E 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 62A 62B 62C 62D 63 63A 64 64A 65 66 67 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Gus Allen’s (Barry Ranch, Down’s, Lake-view) Hot Springs, 2 miles south of Lakeview. F. S. Longfellow’s Spring_____________ Sec. 16, T. 35 S., R. 26 E., on upper Rock Creek 4 miles east of North Warner Lake. Antelope Spring....................... Hart Mountain Hot Spring, in sec. 7, T. 36 S., R. 26 E., on the north side of Hart Mountain about 200 ft below crest. Fisher’s Spring....................... W. D. Moss Ranch, on west side of South Warner Lake. Charles Crump’s Spring________________ Warner Valley Ranch................... Adel Hot Spring, in sec. 23, T. 39 S., R. 24 E., 1 mile east of Adel post office. Pat Hallinan’s Spring, 1 mile southwest of Houston Spring (No. 51). Houston Hot Springs in sec. 27, T. 40 S., R. 24 E., 3 miles east of Warner Lake post office. Sec. 14, T. 22 S., R. 32J^ E., 17 miles northeast of Burns. Millpond Spring and other springs in secs. 35 and 36, T. 23 S., R. 30 E. 0.75 mile south of Millpond Spring (No. 52). Goodman Spring, 1 mile south of Millpond Spring (No. 52). 3.5 miles southwest of Millpond Spring (No. 52). 1.5 miles east of spring No. 52C...... laker Spring, 1.5 miles southeast of spring No. 52D. Crane Hot Spring, in sec. 34, T. 24 S., R. 33 E., near Crane Creek Gap 4 miles northwest of Crane. Sec. 23, T. 22 S., R. 36 E., on the west side of Middle Fork of Malheur River 8 miles northwest of Riverside. Sec. 16, T. 25 S., R. 35 E., on the west side of South Fork of Malheur River 8 miles north of Venator. Sec. 12, T. 26 S., R. 27 E., near south shore of Silver Lake. Sec. 33, T. 26 S., R. 28 E., 3.5 miles east of Iron Mountain. Double-0 Spring, in sec. 34, T. 26 S., R. 28 E., 1.5 miles west of Double-0 Ranch. Double-0 Barnyard Spring, in sec. 33, T. 26 S., R. 28 E., on Double-0 Ranch. Basque (East Double-O) Springs, in sec. 31, T. 26 S., R. 29 E., 1 mile southeast of Double-0 Ranch. Johnson Springs, in sec. 5, T. 27 S., R. 29 E., 2.5 miles southeast of Double-0 Ranch. Hughet (Crane Creek) Spring, in sec. 8, T. 27 S., R. 29 E., 3 miles southeast of Double-0 Ranch. Sizemore Upper Spring, in sec. 9, T. 27 S., R. 29 E., 5 miles southeast of Double-0 Ranch. Sizemore Lower Spring, in sec. 15, T. 27 S. , R. 29 E., 0.5 mile southeast of Sizemore Upper Spring (No. 62A). Hurlburt Spring, in sec. 15, T. 27 S., R. 29 E., 1 mile southeast of Sizemore Lower Spring (No. 62B). Between high- and low-water boundaries of Harney Lake. Lynch Spring, in sec. 8, T. 27 S., R. 30 E.. Dunn Spring, in sec. 4, T. 27 S., R. 30 E., on south side of Mud Lake. Sec. 36, T. 27 S., R. 29^ E., 0.5 mile from southeast shore of Harney Lake. Sodhouse (Springer) Spring.............. Hoghouse Spring, in sec. 13, T. 31 S., R. 32 E., on west side of Donner and Blitzen River valley. Sec. 5, T. 32 S., R. 32Vi E., 1 mile northeast of P Ranch. Sec. 12, T. 32 S., R. 32 E., 1 mile southwest of P Ranch. Oregon—Continued 175-185 63 50 20 Faulted lava (Tertiary) 489 105-115 50 Interbedded tufl and lava 104 30 (Miocene). 489 Hot Small Interbedded tuff and lava 144 20 (Miocene). Lake beds (Pliocene) near 72; 83 104 500; 30 5 lava. Faulted lake beds (Tertiary). 489 98; 107; 164 160 20; 2; 10 10 1.3 20 160 5 72 225 486 73-80 1,200 Interbedded tuff and basalt 486 78 300 (Quaternary). 300 64 75 Lake beds, tuff, and rhyo- 72 485 lite. 62-70 50 122-126 180 Alluvium overlying lake 486- 138-144 90 beds (Pliocene). Faulted interbedded tuff 104-108 300 and basalt. Faulted(?) lava (upper Ter- 68 45 tiary). 68 10 74 5,350 Interbedded tuff, rhyolite, 72 1,750 and lake beds (Pliocene). 67-74 1,800 486 - 72 900 68 5,900 1,160 410 67 66 25 66-108 30 65 25 65; 70 10; 25 180 154 Lake beds, tuff, and rhyolite 486 54 1, 800-5, 200 (Pliocene). Lake beds and playa de- 78-80 1,800 posits. Alluvium near faulted ba- 83 100 salt (Tertiary). 89 500 3 springs. Water smells of H2S. Used for irrigation. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 489. Several springs. Water supply for cattle. Refs. 144, 491. Water used for bathing. Deposit of tufa. Water supply for cattle. Water smells of HaS. Used for bathing. Ref. 489. 2 main and several smaller springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 489. Water smells of H2S. Water supply for cattle. Deposit of tufa. 3 springs. Deposit of siliceous sinter. Also a pool of sulfurous water. Ref. 489. Water used locally. 4 springs. Water smells of H3S. Water supply for cattle. Ref. 489. Water smells of H2S. Used locally. Deposit of siliceous sinter. Ref. 489. Water contains 72 ppm of dissolved solids. Used for irrigation; also water supply for cattle. 3 springs. Water contains 121 ppm of dissolved solids. Flow maintains log pond for saw mill. Refs. 371, 491. Water used for irrigation; also water supply for cattle. Do. Water supply for cattle. Water contains 113 ppm of dissolved solids. Used for irrigation; also water supply for cattle. 5 springs. Water supply for cattle. 2 main springs. Water contains 427 ppm of dissolved solids. Used for bathing. Refs. 371, 487, 491. Several sorings. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Ref. 491. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 491. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 491. Water supply for cattle. Ref. 491. Water used for irrigation; also water supply for cattle. Refs. 141, 486, 491. Water used for irrigation: also water supply for cattle. Ref. 486. Several springs. Water used for irrigation; also water supply for cattle. Ref. 491. Several springs. Water used for irrigation; also water supply for cattle. Refs. 486, 491. Water used for irrigation; also water supply for cattle. Refs. 141, 486, 491. Water used for irrigation; also water supply for cattle. Ref. 486. Water supply for cattle. Ref. 486. Several springs in southern and eastern parts of lake. Ref. 486. Water smells of HaS. Ref. 486. 2 springs 0.5 mile apart. Water supply for cattle. Ref. 486. Refs. 371, 491. Water contains 226 ppm of dissolved solids. Used for irrigation; also water supply for cattle. Refs. 486, 491. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 486, 491. Water supply for cattle. Refs. 486, 491. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 486, 491.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 41 Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. Tempera- Flow on Name or location ture of (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references figure water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Oregon—Continued 68 Sec. 33, T. 34 S., R. 34 E., on west border of the Alvord Desert 6 miles south of 168-177 135 Faulted lava (lower Tertiary). Several springs. Water used locally. Refs. 144, 491. Alvord Ranch. 69 160 6 Lake beds (Pleistocene) near fault zone. Several springs. Ref. 491. Alvord Lake. 70 Sec. 15, T. 37 S., R. 33 E., at old borax works 2.5 miles south of Alvord Lake. 97 900 Several springs. Water supply for abandoned borax works. Ref. 491. 71 Sec. 24, T 38 S., R. 37 E., 5 miles north- 96-100 30 4 springs. Water supply for cattle. Ref. 491. east of Flagstaff Butte. (Miocene). 71A 114 10 Water used for bathing. Several springs. Water supply for cattle. Ref. 491. 72 Sec. 16, T. 39 S., R. 37 E., on north side of Trout Creek 0.5 mile downstream from 128 45 Payette Formation (Miocene and Pliocene?). 73 mouth of Little Trout Creek. Sec. 4, T. 16 S., R. 43 E., near Willow Creek 20 miles northwest of Vale. Hot Also a nearby drilled well. Ref. 492. 74 Sec. 11, T. 19 S., R. 37 E., in Warm Creek valley near Beulah. 185 Small Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 371. Faulted(?) Payette Formation (Miocene and Plio- 75 Neal Hot Spring, sec. 9, T. 18 S., R. 43 E., 12 miles northwest of Vale. 168 24 Water used locally. Also a small warm spring nearby. Refs. 371, 492. 76 Sec. 18, T. 19 S., R. 43 E., on the Malheur River 15 miles southwest of Vale. Hot cene?). Payette Formation (Miocene and Pliocene?) near Several springs. Ref. 492. 20 77 Vale Hot Springs, in sec. 20, T. 18 S., R. 45 E., on the south side of the Malheur 198 lava. Payette Formation (Miocene and Pliocene?). Also a nearby well 140 ft deep. Water used for bathing. Resort. Ref. 371. River 0.5 mile east of Vale. 78 Sec. 31, T. 17 S., R. 47 E., on the Malheur River 3 miles west of Ontario. 164 Water used locally. Refs. 144, 667. 79 Mitchell Butte Hot Springs, in sec. 12, T. 21 S., R. 45 E., on the Owyhee River. Deer Butte Hot Spring, in sec. 14, T. 21 S., R. 45 E., on the Owyhee River. North Black Willow Spring, in sec. 25, T. 21 S., R. 45 E., on the Owyhee River 122-141 3 main springs. Water used locally. Ref. 492. 80 115 Water used locally. Refs. 371, 492. Faulted Payette Formation (Mioceneand Pliocene?). 81 67 Water used locally. near Sniveley’s Ranch. 82 South Black Willow Spring, in sec. 35, T. 21 S., R. 45 E., on the Owyhee River. 71 Water used locally. Ref. 492. Alluvium overlying lava (upper Tertiary). 83 Sec. 10, T. 23 S., R. 44 E., on the Owyhee River 2 miles downstream from mouth Hot Seveial springs. Ref. 492. 60 84 of Dry Creek. Sec. 20, T. 24 S., R. 37 E., near South Fork of Malheur River 5 miles south of River- 106-143 Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 491. Faulted(?) lava (upper Tertiary). side. 84A Sec. 18, T. 27 S., R. 43 E., on the Owyhee River 30 miles northwest of Jordan Hot Large 84B Valley. Warm Small miles northwest of Rome. 85 Canter’s Hot Springs, in sec. 2, T. 30 S., R. 46 E., 0.5 mile west of Jordan Valley. 120 10 3 main springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 144. 85 A Scott’s Springs, 6 miles southwest of Rome. Tudor’s Springs, 24 miles southwest of Rome. 68 5.000 6.000 Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Do. 85B 68 Basalt overlying rhyolite (Tertiary). 85C South Fork of Owyhee River, 40 miles south of Jordan Valley. 88-95 1,000 About 15 springs within a distance of 0.5 mile. 86 Sec. 36, T. 40 S., R. 42 E., 6 miles north of McDermitt, Nev. 130 200 Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 144. Pennsylvania (See fig. 3.) 1 72 90 493 Water used locally. Former resort. man Dale 14 miles northwest of Harris- burg. South Dakota (See fig. 2.) Hot Springs, in western part of Hot 80-90 5,000 Deadwood Formation (Late 133,137,500 Springs (town). Hot Brook, 3 miles west of Hot Springs (town). Cascade Springs, at head of Cascade Creek 10 miles southwest of Hot Springs (town). 90 50 Cambrian and Early Ordovician) . 68 7,200 Small 499... Warm Colorado Shale (Cretaceous). Texas (See fig. 2.) 1 Near bank of the Rio Grande, at south end of Quitman Mountain. Near bank of the Rio Grande, 2 miles east of the south end of Quitman Mountain. 100 Faulted (?) Trinity Group (Early Cretaceous). 2 118 3 45 Alluvium (Quaternary) overlying faulted (?) Cretaceous strata. Hot Spring Creek, 5 miles east of the Rio Grande and 7 miles northeast of Ruidosa. 114 8 springs, including Minnekahta and Kidney. Resort, sanitarium, U.S. Army hospital. Refs. 145, 148, 496, 498, 501. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 148, 496. 3 springs. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 145, 498, 501. Ref. 498. Water used for bathing. Ref. 144. Pool on river flat. Overflowed until earthquake in 1922. Water used for bathing. Ref. 144. Water used for bathing. Refs. 73,138, 502-504.42 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Remarks and additional references Utah (See fig. 7.) 1 Warm Springs in sec. 20, T. 12 N., R. 15 W., 17 miles north-northwest of Terrace railroad station. Warm 2 Blue (Honeyville) Springs, in T. 13 N., R. 5 W., 18 miles southeast of Snowville. 86 3 Udy’s Hot Springs, near the Malad River 2 miles southwest of Plymouth. 90-122 4 Crystal Springs, in T. 11 N., R. 2 W., 12 miles north of Brigham City. 121-134 4A Near south end of Little Mountain, 7 miles west-northwest of Corinne. Warm 5 T. 6 N., R. 5 W., on easfrside of Promontory Point. 84 6 Utah (Bear River) Hot Springs, in T. 7 N., R 2 W., 8 miles northwest of Ogden. 131-144 6A Clay’s Hot Springs, 10 miles north of Ogden. 140 7 Patio Spring, 12 miles northeast of Ogden.. 68 8 Ogden Hot Springs, in T. 6 N., R. 1 W., at mouth of Ogden Canyon. 121; 160 9 Big Springs, in T. 2 S., R. 8 W., on the west side of Stansbury Range. 74 10 Grantsville Warm Springs, 5 miles northwest of Grantsville. 74-91 10A Morgan’s Warm Springs, 4 miles southwest of Stockton. 80 10B Russell’s Warm Springs, 4.5 miles southwest of Stockton. 90 11 Beck’s Hot Springs, 4 miles north of Salt Lake City. 128 11A Warm Springs, 2 miles north of Salt Lake City. 118 12 Wasatch Springs, in the northwestern part of Salt Lake City. 130 13 Crystal Springs, in T. 4 S., R. 1 W., 4miles southwest of Draper. 70 14 Schneitter’s Hot Pots, 4.5 miles northwest of Heber. 85-116 14A Luke’s Hot Pots, 4 miles northwest of Heber. 78-110 14B Buhler's Springs, 3.5 miles northwest of Heber. 80-108 15 Saratoga Springs, on northwest shore of Utah Lake. 111 16 T. 8 S., R. 1 E., on south shore of Utah Lake 8 miles northwest of Pay son. 88 17 T. 10 S., R. 1 E., near the north end of Long Ridge 2 miles east of Goshen. 70 18 Castilla Mineral Springs, in T. 9 S., R. 3 E., in Spanish Fork Canyon 16 miles south of Provo. ill; 145 19 Sec. 14, T. 8 S., R. 5 E., on Diamond Creek 15 miles east of Springville. Warm 19A 12 miles northeast of Jensen, in canyon of Green River. 90 20 Hot Springs, in T. 11 S., R. 14 W., at north end of Fish Springs Mountains and 3 miles north-northeast of Fish Springs (town). 74-78 21 Big Spring, in T. 11 S., R. 14 W., 1 mile southeast of Hot Springs (No. 20). 85 22 Fish Springs, in T. 11 S., R. 14 W., 4 miles southeast of Hot Springs (No. 20) and 3 miles east of Fish Springs (town). 80-140 23 Sec. 33, T. 14 S., R. 18 W., on Miller’s Ranch 8 miles south of Trout Creek. 64 24 Abraham Springs in T. 14 S., R. 8 W., on Fumarole Butte, 19 miles north-northwest of Delta. 100-205 25 Sec. 31, T. 15 S., R. 19 W., in Snake Valley 1 mile west of Gandy. 82 26 Sec. 9, T. 16 S., R. 18 W., in Snake Valley 2 miles south of Foote’s Ranch. 68 27 Knoll Springs, in sec. 11, T. 18 S., R. 18 W., in Snake Valley 12 miles southeast of Smithville. 68-71 28 Sec. 24, T. 22 S., R. 6 W., 3 miles northwest of Hatton. 94 29 Brewer’s Springs, in secs. 13 and 24, T. 15 S., R. 2 E., 1 mile northwest of Wales. 57-62 30 Lowry’s Spring and Squires’ Spring, in sec. 23, T. 18 S., R. 2 E., 3 miles south of Manti. 59; 62 31 Livingston Warm Springs, in sec. 13, T. 18 S., R. 2 E., 1 mile south of Manti. Manti Springs, in sec. 17, T.18S., R.3 E., 2 miles southeast of Manti. 62; 73 32 59; 65 33 Morrison Spring, in sec. 35, T. 18 S., R. 2 E., 2 miles northeast of Sterling. 61 34 Gunnison Spring, in sec. 18, T. 19 S., R. 1 E. 61 900 508 3,500 Carboniferous strata near Wasatch fault. 508 Small 508 Faulted (?) schist and gneiss (Precambrian). Faulted quartzite (Cambrian) . 110 50 200 Small 20, 133, 137, 144, 409, 522. Syenite on Wasatch fault Carboniferous strata near fault. Wasatch Formation (Eocene) . 522 50 500 200 Paleozoic strata on Wasatch fault. 128,133,137,418. 525... 350 350 Limestone (Carboniferous) near Wasatch fault. 525 20 30 10 211 200 2,000 Wasatch Formation (Eocene) near Carboniferous limestone. 133,137... Wasatch Formation (Eocene). strata. Carboniferous strata near Wasatch fault. Wasatch Formation (Eocene). Paleozoic or Mesozoic strata. Alluvium near faulted Paleozoic strata. 700 10 406 500 1,200 Large 1,000 Fractured lava (Tertiary) - - -Limestone (lower Paleozoic). 507 Alluvium near Carboniferous strata. Interbedded tuff and lava (Tertiary). Alluvium near faulted Wasatch Formation (Eocene). Faulted Wasatch Formation (Eocene). Large 400 40 285 30 2,500 8 Alluvium Water used for irrigation. Ref. 508. 6 springs. Refs. 144,521. 8 main springs. Water is saline. Used for bathing. Resort. Refs. 144, 508. About 30 springs. Water used locally. Refs. 124,133, 144, 505, 521. Ref. 144. 12 springs. Water is saline and ferruginous. Ref. 138. 2 springs. Water is saline and ferruginous. Used for bathing. Ref. 512. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 138, 144, 418, 505. 2 springs. Water is brackish. Ref. 144. 6 springs. Water is brackish; used for bathing. Deposit of calcareous tufa. Refs. 138,144,508. Water is ponded. Used for bathing and irrigation. Water is ponded. Used for irrigation. Several springs. Water smells of H jS. Resort. Refs. 124, 144, 511, 512, 521, 686. Water used for bathing. Refs. 137, 511-513, 523. Water used for bathing. Sanitarium. Refs. 133, 137, 144, 513, 523. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 138,144,523. 20 main springs. Water used for bathing. Extensive deposit of tufa. Refs. 138, 144, 418,514,526. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 514. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Extensive deposit of tufa. Refs. 137, 510, 514. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Resort. Ref. 523. Water used locally. Ref. 523. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 523. 3 springs. Resort. Refs. 138, 144, 526. 2 springs. Water smells of sulfur. 2 springs issuing at river edge. Several springs. Water used locally. Refs. 138,144, 506,515, 520. 3 springs. Refs. 144,506,520. 7 springs. Water smells strongly of HjS. Large deposit of tufa. Refs. 144, 406, 506, 515,520. Several springs rising in pools. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 506,520. 20 springs. Deposit of manganese. Refs. 109,144, 509, 512, 516, 520. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Deposit of tufa. Ref. 520. Several springs rising in pools. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 144,520. Several springs. Water smells of H2S. Used locally. Refs. 144,520. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 520. 3 springs. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 524. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 524. 2 main springs. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 524. Do. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 524. Water supply for cattle. Ref. 524.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 43 Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)-—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references figure water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Utah—Continued 35 Ninemile Warm Spring, in sec. 4, T. 19 S., R. 2 E. 72 900 36 Sec. 32, T. 20 S., R. 2 E., 8 miles northeast of Redmond. 58 15 37 Redmond Springs, in secs. 11 and 12, T. 21 S., R. l W., near Redmond. 70 6,000 38 Salt Spring, in sec. 17, T. 21 S., R. 1 E., 2 miles northeast of Salina. 72 2 39 Oak Spring and Christianson Spring, in sec. 1, T. 22 S., R. 2 W., 2 miles west of Aurora. 60 20 40 Herrin’s Hole Spring, in sec. 23. T. 23 S., R. 2 W., 1 mile north of Glenwood. 63 450 41 Cove Springs, in sec. 27, T. 23 S., R. 2 W., 1 miles west of Glenwood. 60 4,000 42 Richfield Hot Springs, in sec. 26, T. 23 S., R. 3 W. 74 1,500 43 Indian Spring and Parcel Creek Spring, in sec. 25, T. 23 S., R. 2 W., near Glenwood. 60 130 44 Sec. 5, T. 24 S., R. 2 W., 2 miles southeast of Richfield. 52-61 4, 500 45 Sec. 25, T. 24 S. R. 3 W., 6 miles south of Richfield. 59 25 46 Jericho Spring, in sec. 6, T. 25 S., R. 3 W., 2 miles northeast of Joseph. 65 700 47 Johnson Spring, in sec. 27, T. 25 S., R. 3 W., 2 miles southeast of Monroe. 80 200 48 Cooper Hot Springs, in sec. 15, T. 25 S., R. 3 W., 0.5 mile east of Monroe. 144-156 100 49 Joseph Hot Springs, in sec. 23, T. 25 S., R. 4 W., 1 mile southeast of Joseph. Sevier Spring, in sec. 32, T. 25 S., R. 4 W_ 135-146 30 50 59 100 51 Roosevelt (McKean’s) Hot Spring, in T. 27 S., R. 9 W., on west slope of Mineral Mountains 15 miles northeast of Milford. 192 10 52 Warm Springs, secs. 21 and 28, T. 30 S., R. 12 W., 2 miles south-southwest of Thermo railroad siding. 90-175 20 53 Radium (Dotson’s) Warm Springs, in sec. 7, T. 30 S., R. 9 W., 1 mile east of Minersville. 97 57 54 La Verkin Hot Springs, on Rio Virgin 2 miles north of Hurricane. 108-132 1, 000 55 T. 37 S., R. 7 W., 25 miles southwest of Panguitch. Warm 56 Undine Springs, in T. 25 S., R. 17 E., in Labyrinth Canyon of the Green River. Warm 57 Warm Spring Canyon near its junction with “Narrow Canyon” or “Dark Canyon” of the Colorado River. 91 Alluvium near faulted Wasatch Formation (Eocene). Faulted Wasatch Formation. ____do..................... Faulted Jurassic strata--- Faulted lava (Eocene)----- ____do........................... ____do........................... Faulted limestone (Eocene)...... Faulted lava (Eocene)___________ Lava (Tertiary)_________________ Alluvium overlying Wa- _________ satch Formation (Eocene). Alluvium........................ Faulted lava and tuff (Eo- ----- cene). Faulted tufT (Tertiary)____ 524 Lava (Tertiary)----------------- Alluvium........................ Granite.................... 518. Alluvium near faulted (?) 518. lava (Tertiary). Quartzite__________________ 518. Faulted Triassic strata------ Lava (Tertiary) overlying Wasatch Formation (Eocene) . Sandstone (Triassic)......... ____do....................... Virginia (See fig. 3.) Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 524. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 524. Several springs. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 524. Ref. 524. Water supply for cattle. Ref. 524. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 524. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 524. Several springs. Water supply for town; also used for irrigation. Ref. 524. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 524. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 524. Water used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 524. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 524. Do. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Deposit of tufa. Ref. 524. Water used for domestic purposes; also water supply for cattle. Ref. 524. Water smells strongly of H2S. Water supply for cattle. Deposits of tufa and sinter. About 16 springs issuing from a low ridge. Deposits of dense calcareous tufa. Water supply for cattle. 3 springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Several springs. Refs. 133,144. Ref. 138. Many small springs. Deposit of tufa. Ref. 138. Ref. 138. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Limestone Springs, near Compton...... Warm Spring, 1 mile south of Bridgewater. Dice’s Spring, 1 mile southeast of Burke-town. Fitzgerald Spring, near Middle River Bridge, 2.25 miles west of Fort Defiance. Bragg Spring, 2.25 miles northeast of Bolar. Bolar Spring, 3 miles northeast of Bolar.. Warm Sulphur Springs, at Warm Springs (town). Hot Springs, at Hot Springs (town)______ Healing (Rubino Healing, Sweet Alum) Springs, at Healing Springs (town). Mill Mountain Springs, at Panther Gap 1.5 miles west of Goshen. Rockbridge (Rockbridge Alum, Strick-ler’s) Springs at Rockbridge Baths 10 miles north of Lexington. Layton (Keyser’s) Springs, on the Jackson River 2 miles south of Falling Spring (No. 13). Falling Spring, 8 miles south of Healing Springs (No. 9). Sweet Chalybeate Springs, 3 miles north of Sweet Chalybeate. Lee Carter Spring, 1.5 miles northeast of Sweet Chalybeate. C. B. Hunter Spring, 0.5 mile north of Sweet Chalybeate. R. O. Stone Spring, at Sweet Chalybeate. Sweet Chalybeate Spring, at Sweet Chalybeate. Lithia (Wilson Thermal), on Mill Creek 3.25 miles east of Gala. Blueridge (Buford’s Gap) Springs, at Buford’s Gap. 61-66 64 65 61 75 72 91-96 72-106 82-88 60; 65; 66 72 63; 72 74 63-68 63 73 76 65 66-75 Folded or faulted Paleozoic strata. 500 1, 500-2, 000 60 50 1,500 1,200 133, 144, 541, 543..- 20, 128, 133, 137, 144, 409, 541, 543. 133, 137, 139, 144, 409, 543. 50; 800; 500 137, 139 200 7.000 280 20 10 100 1.000 300 133, 144, 541 541 3 springs. Water used locally. Refs. 133 Mfi si1 Water used locally. Ref. 538. Do. Do. Do. Do. 4 springs. Resort. Refs. 529, 538. 7 springs. Resort. Refs. 529, 538, 542. 4 springs. Water bottled and marketed. Resort. Refs. 538, 541. 3 springs. Water used locally. Refs. 538, 541. 3 springs. Resort. Refs. 144, 529, 538, 541. 2 springs issuing on opposite banks of the river. Water used locally. Refs. 538, 541. Water used locally. Refs. 538, 541. 3 springs. Resort Ref. 538. Water used locally. Do. Do. Water used locally. Ref. 538. 3 springs. Water used locally. Refs. 138, 541.44 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on figure Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (gallons per minute) Associated rocks References on chemical quality Remarks and additional references V irginia— Con ti nued 18 New River White Sulphur Springs, at Eggleston. Hunter’s Pulaski Alum Springs, at Sassin, 8.5 miles north of Pulaski. McHenry’s Spring, near the North Fork of the Holston River. 85 3 3 springs. Resort. Refs. 144, 541. 2 springs. Resort. Ref. 133. 19 72 strata. 20 68 144, 541 —. Water used locally. Washington (See fig. 2.) 1 2 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12A 12B 13 14 15 16 Baker Hot Spring, in sec. 30, T. 38 N., R. 9 E., on east side of Mount Baker. Sol Due Hot Springs, in sec. 32, T. 29 N., R. 9 W., 14 miles (by road) southwest of Crescent Lake. Olympic Hot Springs, in sec. 27, T. 29 N., R. 8 W., 11.5 miles (by trail) southwest of Elwha post office. Sulphur Creek Spring, in sec. 30, T. 32 N., R. 12 E., 1 mile north of Sulphur Creek Shelter. White Chuck Hot Springs, in sec. 1, T. 30 N., R. 12 E., near the White Chuck River. San Juan Hot Springs, in sec. 25, T. 28 N., R. 11 E., on the North Fork of Skyko-mish River 5 miles east of Galena. Scenic (Great Northern) Hot Springs, in sec. 28, T. 26 N., R. 13 E., 5 miles west of Scenic. McDaniels Hot Springs, in sec. 15, T. 23 N., R. 11 E. Hot Springs, in sec. 21, T. 20 N., R. 9 E., at Hot Springs railroad station. Clerf Spring, in sec. 5, T. 17 N., R. 20 E.f 8 miles east of Ellensburg. Ohanapecosh Hot Springs, in sec. 4, T. 14 N., R. 10 E., near south base of Mount Rainier. Sec. 9, T. 11 N., R. 15 E., on the North Fork of Simcoe Creek. North slope of Mount St. Helens_________ Crater of Mount Adams___________________ 108 100-132 7 50 Lava (upper Tertiary) over-lying granite. Metamorphic rocks (pre-Tertiary). 120-125 135 .do. 98 4 Granite. 100-110 30 .do. 100 122 25 ......do. 30 ______do. 546, 548. 114-127 120-122 30 ____do............ Basalt (Tertiary) 548. 68 109-120 1,100 60 Basalt (Tertiary) overlying sandstone (Miocene). Basalt (Tertiary)___________ 90 40 .do. 142-190 Hot Lava (Quaternary) ____do............ Nicolai Spring, in sec. 15, T. 11 N., R. 23 E.f 10 miles north of Sunnyside. Sec. 16, T. 6 N., R. 13. E., 5 miles southeast of Glenwood Blockhouse Mineral Springs, in sec 12, T. 4 N., R. 14 E., 8 miles west of Golden-dale. Cascade Warm (Moffet’s Hot) Springs, in sec. 16, T. 2 N., R. 7 E., near Cascade. 66 76 67 96 300 Large Ellensburg Formation (Miocene). Basalt (Tertiary)........ 50 do. 137, 546. .do.. 137. 3 main and 8 smaller springs in 1-acre area. Resort. 17 springs in 5-acre area. Resort. 4 springs. Water used for bathing. Deposit of iron-stained tufa. 3 springs. Ref. 548. Several springs. Water is sulfurous; is piped 2 miles to hotel. Resort. 4 springs. Resort. 5 springs. Resort. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 544, 549, 550. 5 springs. Resort and sanitarium. Ref. 660. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 546. Small fumaroles. Ref. 547. Steam vents and small fumaroles. Ref. 547. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 551. Several springs. Gas rises with water. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 546. 2 springs. Resort. 4 springs. Resort. Refs. 133, 546. West Virginia (See fig. 3.) 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Manacea (Irondale) Spring, at Irondale... Gillis (Iron Magnesium) Spring, at Terra Alta. Berkeley Springs, at Berkeley Springs (town). Swan Pond Spring, 5 miles east of Mar-tinsburg. North Branch of Walker Spring, 1.5 miles south of Harpers Ferry. Shannondale Springs, 5 miles southeast of Charles Town: Blue (Black) Sulphur Spring.......... Red Sulphur Spring................... Everett Fruit Farm, 5 miles southeast of Romney. Cold Stream Run, 1 mile west of Cold Stream (town). Capon (Cacapon) Springs, at Capon Springs (town). Warm (Boiling) Spring, 4 miles south of Wardensville. Big Spring, 0.5 mile southwest of Harman. Trout Rock Spring, 3 miles south of Hopeville. Arbogast Farm, 3 miles north of Onego... Roaring Springs, 1 mile north of Onego__ Roaring Springs, at Circleville_________ Near mouth of Thorn Creek, 2 miles south of Franklin. Big Spring, on Big Spring Fork 2 miles west of Lin wood. 63.6 ............ 64 40 73.5 1,000-1,230 72 100 Allegheny Formation (Pennsylvanian). Chemung Formation Devonian). Oriskany Sandstone (Early Devonian). 554................. .....do.............. 133, 137, 144, 554, 555. Ordovician strata. Water marketed for table use. Formerly the source of water supply for Terra Alta. Ref. 552. 2 springs. Source of water supply for town of Berkeley Springs. State Park. Sanitarium. Refs. 538, 541, 552. Ref. 552. 62 64 64 64 36 1 1 20 Cambrian strata Waynesboro Formation 554. (Early Cambrian). ___do.................... 554. Devonian strata............ Do. |Former resort. Ref. 552. 64 700 do. Water is slightly cloudy. Ref. 552. 64 61 170 100 Oriskany Sandstone (Early Devonian). 133, 137, 144, 554- Devonian strata. 4 springs. Water marketed for table use; also used for bathing. Resort hotel. Ref. 552. Ref. 552. 61 61 2,290 Carboniferous strata. 510 Silurian strata........ Do. Do. 61 61 65 71 500 850 5,500 7,700 Carboniferous strata ____do............. Silurian strata.... Devonian strata---- Do. Do. Several springs. Ref. 552. Ref. 552. 63 1,140 Carboniferous strata. 17 Ref. 552.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 45 Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references figure water (°F) per minute) chemical quality West Virginia—Continued Contact of Bossardsville Limestone (Silurian) and Helderberg Limestone (Early Devonian). 554 554... 554 Bossardsville Limestone (Silurian). 554 Marcellus Shale (Middle Devonian). 554 Marcellus Shale (Middle Devonian). 554 133, 137, 144, 541, 554. 554 Stones River Limestone (Middle Ordovician). Greenbrier Limestone (Mis-sissippian). 133,137,144,541, 554. 554.. 554 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Dunmore Drinking (Reece Prichard) Spring, 0.8 mile southeast of Dunmore. MeadowSpring, 0.5 mile east of Dunmore.. Upper Spring, at Dunmore_______________ Mill Run Spring, 2.5 miles southwest of Frost. Guy Run, 4 miles southwest of Frost.... Peter McCarthy Springs on Erowns Creep, 5 miles northeast of Huntersville. S. P. Curry (Nap’s Creek) Spring, at Huntersville. Ruckman Run, 6 miles east of Huntersville. Minnehaha Springs, at Camp Minnehaha, 4 miles southeast of Huntersville. Piercy’s Cave Spring, 2 miles northwest of Asbury. White Sulphur Springs (town): Black Sulphur Spring............... White Sulphur Spring............... White Sulphur Chalybeate Spring____ Big Spring......................... Sterett Spring..................... Old Sweet Springs, at Sweet Springs (town). Salt Sulphur Springs (town): Salt Sulphur Spring................ Iodine Spring...................... Right Fork of Trout Branch, 6 miles southeast of Gap Mills. Upstream from Ewin Run (cold) Spring, 7 miles southeast of Gap Mills. 63 62.5 65 69 63.5 64 62 72 68 62.5 64 64 62 61 73 61.5 64 72 30 200 400 240 230-300 230 300 550-600 1,630 25 30 5 840 610 Large 50 50 310 Refs. 538, 552. Ref. 552. Water used for bathing, also used for growing water cress. Ref. 552. Several small springs. Ref. 552. Do. 2 springs. Ref. 552. Refs. 538, 541, 552. Several springs. Ref. 552. Water used for bathing. Hotel. Refs. 538, 552. Ref. 552. Water used for medicinal drinking and bathing. Resort hotel. Ref. 538. Water bottled and marketed for table use. Ref. 552. Do. Water used for bathing. Resort. Ref. 538 Water used for bathing. Hotel. Water used for drinking. Several springs. Ref. 552. Do. Wyoming (See figs. 2, 5.) [Data for Nos. 1-96 are chiefly from ref. 562; in those areas in Yellowstone National Park where thermal springs are numerous and closely spaced, only the more noteworthy are listed] Boiling (Hot) River, 0.8 mile north-northeast of Yellowstone Park Headquarters. Mammoth (White Mountain) Hot springs, 0.5 mile southwest of Yellowstone Park Headquarters. 10,000 225-1,152 Small Small Small Small 562 160 (max) Rhyolite overlying Mesozoic strata. 562 Amphitheater Springs, 0.8 mile west of Lake of the Woods. Clearwater Springs, 1 mile southwest of Amphitheater Springs (No. 7) and 0.5 mile northwest of Roaring Mountain. Pool in crater of Semi-Centennial Geyser, near Obsidian Creek 0.6 mile south of Clearwater Springs (No. 7A). Whiterock Springs, 1 mile south-southeast of Lake of the Woods. Bijah Spring, 0.4 mile northwest of Fryingpan Springs (No. 10). Fryingpan Springs, 2 miles northwest of Norris Junction. Congress Pool, 0.3 mile southwest of Norris Junction. Crater of Monarch Geyser, near Congress Pool (No. 10). Geysers in Norris Geyser Basin: 135-196 178-198 Hot 149-156 184 562 Clay 562 Small 58.5 562 562 562 562 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7A 7B 9A 10 10A 11 Several springs, the flows combining to form stream, 6-8 ft wide, flowing into Gardiner River. Refs. 592, 625-628, 672. Several springs. Extensive deposits of travertine. Refs. 140, 557, 558, 574, 608, 617, 620, 625, 628, 634, 636, 637, 642, 645, 655, 664, 667, 679, 692, 697, 698. Also solfataras. Several boiling springs and fumaroles. Ref. 562. Erupted violently in August 1922, but ceased geyser action soon thereafter. Refs. 637, 667. 2 springs. Ref. 561. Rises in large clear pool. Ref. 561. Many bubbling vents on both sides of Mammoth-Norris Junction Road. Muddy pool, sometimes boiling and sometimes quiescent. Formerly erupted to height of 100-200 ft. Ceased activity in 1913. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 25-50 ft at intervals of 8-48 hr. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 75-100 ft at intervals of 1- 1.5 hr. Ref. 637. Erupts occasionally to height of 20-30 ft. Ref. 637. Erupts to maximum height of 25 ft at intervals of 7-19 hr. Ref. 637, 647. Erupts to height of 60-75 ft several times a day. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 8-60 ft at intervals of 20 min. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 25-30 ft at intervals of 2- 5 min. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 60-75 ft at intervals of 18-72 hr. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 20-35 ft several times an hr. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 18-30 ft several times a day. Refs. 566, 637. Erupts to height of 8-15 ft once or twice a day. Refs. 576, 637.12 13 14 15 16 16A 17 18 10 20 21 21A 21B 21C 22 22A 23 24 24A 25 26 26A 27 28 29 30 30A THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (gallons per minute) Associated rocks References on chemical quality W yoming—Continued Sylvan Springs, in Gibbon Meadows 3.5 miles southwest of Norris Junction. Gibbon Hill Geyser, near east side of Gibbon Meadows at foot of southwest side of Gibbon Hill. Artists Paintpots, at foot of northwest side of Paintpot Hill. Geyser Springs, at foot of east side of Paintpot Hill. Monument Geyser in Monument Geyser Basin 1 mile west-southwest of Painpot Hill. Beryl Spring, 1.5 miles north of Gibbon Falls. Queen’s Laundry (Red Terrace) Spring, 1.5 miles southwest of Fountain Ranger Station. River Group Springs, on both sides of Firehole River 1.5 miles south of Fountain Ranger Station. Morning Mist Springs, near Nez Perce Creek 1.2 miles east-southeast of Fountain Ranger Station. Fairy Springs, 2.7 miles south-southwest of Fountain Ranger Station. 190 (max) 188-198 178-199 Small 562 562 149 562- 197 197 160 119-203 201 (max) 184-202 5,400 54 562 562 do 562- - 562-- Small 562 Rhyolite (Tertiary) 562 Fountain Geyser. 2.2 miles southeast of Fountain Ranger Station. Morning Geyser, near Fountain Geyser (No. 21B). Great Fountain Geyser, 1 mile south-southeast of Fountain Geyser (No. 21B). 204 22 562 1 White Dome Geyser, 0.8 mile south of Fountain Geyser (No. 21B). Spray Geyser, at base of south end of Twin Buttes 4 miles southwest of Fountain Ranger Station. Pool in crater of Imperial Geyser, 0.2 mile west of Spray Geyser. Prismatic Lake in crater of Excelsior Geyser, about midway between Upper Basin Ranger Station and Fountain Ranger Station. Flood Geyser, 0.5 mile southeast of Prismatic Lake (No. 25). Rabbit Creek area, 1 mile east-southeast of Prismatic Lake (No. 25). Tributary of Juniper Creek, 6.5 miles east of Fountain Ranger Station. Juniper Creek Springs, 1.1 miles southeast of No. 27. Biscuit Basin, 2.2 miles northwest of Old Faithful Inn: 72 690 2,700 18 Rhyolite (Tertiary) 562 146 201 201 (max) 562.--. 562 562 190 201 562 562. 1.7 miles northwest of Old Faithful Inn, on northeast side of Firehole River: 562 1.2 miles northwest of Old Faithful Inn, on northeast side of Firehole River: 201 171 198 198 do 562 562 562 Remarks and additional references Several springs and fnmaroles; also large shallow pool. Ref. 561. Erupts to height of 15-25 ft several times a day. Ref. 637. Pools of bubbling mud; also fumaroles. Ref. 576. Several springs including an unnamed geyser that erupts to height of 25 ft at itervals of 6 min. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 4-9 ft almost constantly. Also several springs issuing from small cones. Barren area 240 yd long and 50 yd wide. Pool 20 ft in diameter. Water in constant ebullition. Ref. 576. Large pool. Terraces of sinter. Ref. 561. Numerous springs including 6 that are superheated and 3 small geysers. Ref. 561. Numerous springs. 4 groups of springs Includes Boulder Springs, the water of which is in constant ebullition. Ref. 561. Large cauldron of white, pink, and pale orange clay. Ref. 557. Erupts to height of 5-25 ft at intervals of 3 min. Refs. 576, 637. Erupts to height of 50-75 ft at intervals of 6-12 hr. Refs. 557, 576. 637, 665. Erupts to height of 50-60 ft at intervals of 2 5 days. Refs. 576, 637. Erupts to maximum height of 90 ft at intervals of 8-15 hr. Large deposit of sinter. Refs. 557, 637. Erupts to height of 12-17 ft once a day. Sinter cone is 18 in. high and 5 feet in diameter. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 18-30 ft at intervals of 20-30 min. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 5-20 ft at intervals of 2-31 min. Ref. 637. Began erupting in 1928 to height of 100-125 ft; ceased erupting in 1929. Ref. 637. Formerly the largest geyser in Yellowstone Park but dormant since 1888. Lake is 370 ft long and water is blue-green. Much steam. Turquoise and Opal Pools nearby, also several hot springs. Refs. 557, 576, 587, 611, 617, 637. Erupts to height of several ft at irregular intervals. Ref. 637. Several springs and large pool of blue water; also paintpots and fumaroles. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 12-22 ft at intervals of 5-10 min. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 4-12 ft at intervals of 10-20 min. Water is exceptionally clear. Ref. 637. Water is clear and quiescent. Erupts to height of 15-35 ft at intervals of 24-30 hr. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 20-40 ft once a day. Ref. 637. 2 geysers. Erupt to maximum height of 20 ft at intervals of 2-3 days. Ref. 637. Refs. 576, 677. Erupts to height of 6-100 ft two or three times a year. Refs. 637, 612. Erupts to maximum height of 30 ft two or three times a year. Ref. 637. Erupts obliquely to height of 80-100 ft at intervals of 6-9.5 hr. Refs. 637, 665.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 47 Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references figure water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Wyoming—Continued 31 32 32A 326 33A 34 34A 35 36 37 38 39 1 mile northwest of Old Faithful Inn, on southwest side of Firehole River: Chain Lakes (Bottomless Pit) Geyser. Spa Geyser......................... Grotto Geyser...................... Grotto Fountain.................... Daisy Geyser....................... Splendid Geyser.................... Giant Geyser....................... Oblong Geyser..................... 0.5 mile north-northwest of Old Faithful Inn, on northeast side of Firehole River: Grand Geyser...................... Turban Geyser..................... Sawmill Geyser...................... 0.3 mile north of Old Faithful Inn, on northeast side of Firehole River: Lion (Niobe) Geyser................. Lioness Geyser...................... Big Cub Geyser. Little Cub Geyser Giantess Geyser... Midget Geyser. Beehive Geyser. Solitary Geyser, 0.6 mile north of Old Faithful Inn. Black Sand Basin, 0.8 mile west of Old Faithful Inn: Cliff Geyser....................... Whistle Geyser..................... Rainbow Pool....................... Sunset Lake...................... Emerald Pool..................... Castle Geyser, 0.4 mile northwest of Old Faithful Inn. Old Faithful Geyser, near Old Faithful Inn. Pipeline Creek Springs, 0.5 mile southeast of Old Faithful Inn. 1 mile west of Summit Lake and 7 miles west-southwest of Old Faithful Inn. 0.5 mile south-southeast of Summit Lake.. Lone Star Geyser, 2.7 miles south-southeast of Old Faithful Inn. Shoshone Geyser Basin, 7.5 miles south-southeast of Old Faithful Inn: Bead Geyser......................... Lion Geyser.......................... Little Giant Geyser.................. Minute Man Geyser.................... Union Geyser......................... Bechter River Springs, 12.5 miles south-southwest of Old Faithful Inn. Rhyolite (Tertiary) ____do............. ____do.............. 198 200 205 do. do- do. do. 562. 562. 562. 202 .do.. .do.. -do- 562- 562.. -do.. 562.. 201 203 201 -do.. -do.. 562.. -do.. .do.. 202 .do.. -do.. .do.. 200 190 149 151 .do.. .do.. .do.. .do.. 562.. 562.. 562.. 169 158 do. do. do. do. 562. 610. do. do. do. do. 562. do. do. do. .do. .do. Erupts to height of 35-75 ft at intervals of 2-3 weeks. Refs. 566, 637. Erupts rarely to maximum height of 50 ft. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 26-30 ft at intervals of • 2-8 hr. Refs. 576, 644, 647, 651, 655, 660, 661, 677,689. Erupts to maximum height of 65 ft at intervals of 6-12 hr. Ref. 637. Erupts obliquely to maximum height of 75 ft at intervals of 1.5-3 hr. Ref. 637. Erupts rarely to height of 125-150 ft. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 150-180 ft at intervals of 6-16 days; sometimes inactive for long periods. Refs. 574, 579, 637, 648, 649, 652, 655, 665, 672, 679, 689. Erupts to height of 20-40 ft at intervals of 5-8 hr. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 180-200 ft at intervals of 8-80 hr. Refs. 579, 637, 652, 663, 672. Erupts to maximum height of 25 ft simultaneously with nearby Grand Geyser. Refs. 645, 663. Erupts to height of 17-32 ft at intervals of 3 hr. Refs. 637, 652. Erupts to height of 50-60 ft several times a day. Refs. 576, 637. Erupts rarely to maximum height of 80 ft; sometimes inactive for long periods. Refs. 637, 645. Erupts rarely to maximum height of 30 ft; sometimes inactive for long periods. Refs. 637, 645. Ref. 645. Erupts rarely to height of 150-200 ft; sometimes inactive for long periods. Refs. 579, 626, 637, 647, 652, 665, 672, 679, 689. Erupts rarely to maximum height of 30 ft. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 200-220 ft two or more times a week. Refs. 579, 637, 645, 647, 649, 652, 661, 664, 672, 689. Erupts to maximum height of 25 ft at intervals of 2 6 min. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 40-50 ft once a day. Ref. 637. Erupts infrequently to maximum height of 40 ft. Ref. 637. Erupts to maximum height of 40 ft at irregular intervals: sometimes inactive for long periods. Ref. 637. Pool 45 yd in diameter. Erupts to height of 65-100 ft at intervals of 12-16 hr. Large deposit of sinter. Refs. 587, 617, 637, 644, 647, 648, 652, 655, 661, 665, 689. Erupts to height of 116-171 ft at intervals of 65 min. Large mound of gray sinter. Refs. 106, 563, 566, 576, 579, 590, 599, 617, 637, 648, 652, 659, 660, 677, 688, 689, 692. 15 shallow, muddy springs. Deposit of sulfur. Ref. 561. Erupts to maximum height of 25 ft at intervals of 20-180 min. Cone of gey-serite 12 ft high. Refs. 587, 637. Erupts to height of 10-20 ft. Abundant “geyser eggs.” Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 10-12 ft. Ref. 637. Erupts to height of 10-50 ft twice a day. Ref. 637. Erupts to maximum height of 20 ft at intervals of 1-3 min. Ref. 637. 3 cones erupting simultaneously several times a week. Maximum height of eruption is 66 ft for northern cone, 114 ft for center cone, and 3 ft for southern cone. Ref. 637.48 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references figure water (°F) per minute) chemical quality 40 41 42 42A 43 44 44A 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 61A 61B 61C 61D 62 63 64 W yoming—Continued Three River Junction Springs, near confluence of Phillips, Littles, and Ferris Forks of Bechter River. Tendoy Falls Springs, on Ferris Fork of the Bechter River. Near northwest shore of Lewis Lake...... 0.5 mile west of west shore of Lewis Lake.. Near south outlet of Lewis Lake......... Deluge Geyser, near Witch Creek in Heart Lake Geyser Basin. Spike Geyser, near Witch Creek in Heart Lake Geyser Basin. Rustic Geyser, 0.25 mile west of north end of Heart Lake. Near confluence of Snake and Lewis Rivers, 0.5 mile north-northeast of South Entrance to Yellowstone National Park. Snake Hot Springs, near the Snake River 5 miles upstream from confluence with Lewis River. Near mouth of Basin Creek, 3 miles south of Heart Lake. Near Snake River, 0.5 mile downstream from mouth of Basin Creek. Washburn Hot Springs, 1.8 miles southeast of Dunraven Pass Ranger Station. Sulphur Creek Springs, 1.3 miles upstream from mouth of Sulphur Creek and 2 miles south-southeast of Dunraven Pass Ranger Station. Near mouth of Sulphur Creek, 3 miles south-southeast of Dunraven Pass Ranger Station. 0.5 mile northeast of Inspiration Point, on both sides of Yellowstone River. Forest Springs, 1.2 miles east-southeast of Canyon Lodge at the Yellowstone River Falls. 0.5 mile south of Norris-Canyon Road and 4 miles west-southwest of Canyon Ranger Station. Violet Springs, on tributary of Alum Creek 6 miles southwest of Canyon Ranger Station. Highland Hot Springs, on tributary of Alum Creek 3.5 miles southwest of Violet Springs (No. 56) and 1.1 miles north-northeast of Mary Lake. Alum Creek Springs. 2 miles east of Highland Hot Springs (No. 57). 1 mile southeast of Highland Hot Springs (No. 57) and 1 mile northeast of Mary Lake. Elk Antler Creek Springs................ Sulphur Spring (Crater Hills Geyser), 1 mile west of Yellowstone River and 4 miles south of Canyon Ranger Station. Crater Hills Mudpots, on Lake-Canyon Road near mouth of Elk Antler Creek. Dragon’s Mouth Spring, on Lake-Canyon Road 6 miles (by road) northwest of Fishing Bridge. {Mud Volcano, near Dragon’s Mouth Spring (No. 61B). Mud Geyser.............................. Sulphur Caldron, on northeast side of Yellowstone River nearly opposite Dragon’s Mouth Spring (No. 61B). Near west shore of West Thumb of Yellowstone Lake, 2 miles north of Thumb Ranger Station. Near west shore of West Thumb of Yellowstone Lake, 1.5 miles north-northwest of Thumb Ranger Station. Near Thumb Ranger Station, on west shore of West Thumb of Yellowstone Lake: Thumb Paintpots..................... King Geyser......................... Lakeshore Geyser.................... Occasional Geyser____________________ Twin Geysers......................... Fishing Cone Spring, offshore from Thumb Paintpots. Hot 190-198 154 (max) Small Small 201 158 (max) 120-163 562 Rhyolite overlying limestone. Basaltic gravel or breccia 178-198 562 Hot 740 561,562. 561, 562 194 (max) Large 194 Small 562 160 185 (max) 562 do 562 200 562.... (max) Large pools. Ref. 561. Several springs. Ref. 561. Do. Erupts to height of 10-15 ft. Ref. 637. Erupts almost continuously. Ref. 637. Erupts to maximum height of 30 ft at intervals of 26-90 min. Ref. 637. Several groups of springs. Terraces of travertine. Refs. 561, 621. Several springs, including Inkpot Spring, and fumaroles in marshy area. Water from Inkpot Spring is black. Deposits of iron sulfide. Ref. 561. 2 large mudpots and several small springs. Ref. 561. Deposit of sulfur. Ref. 561. 2 springs, one rising in shallow basin and tne other a small geyser. Ref. 561. Pool 20 ft in diameter; erupts to height of 5-6 ft at short intervals. Deposit of sulfur. Refs. 561, 576. 5 small mud pools. Ref. 561. Pulsating pool of clear water. Ref. 561. Pool 30 ft in diameter. Ref. 561. Erupts to maximum height of 12 ft every few sec. Ref. 561. Pool. Water contains much sulfur in suspension. Ref. 637. Pools of pink and white mud. Also several small geysers. Refs. 561, 576, 637. Spouts to maximum height of 6 ft at irregular intervals. Refs. 561, 637. Erupts to height of 15-25 ft at intervals of 35 min when lake level is low and at intervals of 2-4 days when submerged by lake water. Refs. 561, 637. Erupts to height of 25-60 ft at irregular intervals. Refs. 561, 637. 2 geysers erupting to height of 100-125 ft at intervals of 4-5 hr. Refs. 561, 637. Refs. 561, 637.65 65j 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 49 Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Wyoming—Continued Near Yellowstone River, 1 mile downstream from mouth of Lamar River. Calcite Springs, in canyon of Yellowstone River 1 mile downstream from mouth of Tower Creek. Near Lamar River, 1 mile north-northwest of mouth of Cache Creek. Wahb Springs, in Death Gulch 2.2 miles upstream from mouth of Cache Creek. Near Deep Creek, 0.4 mile upstream from mouth of Shallow Creek. Near Deep Creek, 3 miles upstream from mouth of Shallow Creek. Near Deep Creek, 4 miles upstream from mouth of Shallow Creek. Near Deep Creek, 5 miles upstream from mouth of Shallow Creek. (Whistler Geyser, near west bank of Broad Creek 3 miles upstream from its mouth. Joseph’s Coat Springs.................. Near head of tributary to Broad Creek, 1.5 miles east of Whistler Geyser and Joseph’s Coat Springs (No. 72). Near head of tributary to Broad Creek, 2 miles southeast of Whistler Geyser and Joseph’s Coat Springs (No. 72). Hot Springs Basin, 1.5 miles north of Wapiti Lake. Near tributary of Miller Creek, 2.7 miles northwest of Saddle Mountain. Near tributary of Lamar River, 2.6 miles west-southwest of Saddle Mountain. Near head of Moss Creek, 3 miles south-southwest of Whistler Geyser and Joseph’s Coat Springs (No. 72). Bog Creek Springs, near head of Bog Creek, a tributary of Sour Creek. Head of unnamed tributary of Sour Creek, 1.5 miles northeast of Bog Creek Springs (No. 79). Along unnamed tributary of Sour Creek, 2 miles east of Bog Creek Springs (No. 79). Sour Creek Springs, 2.3 miles west of Fern Lake. Ponuntpa Springs, 0.6 mile southwest of Fern Lake. Near east end of Fern Lake-------------- Near northwest end of White Lake........ Near southeast end of White Lake________ The Mudkettles, near Pelican Creek 1.5 miles east of southeast end of White Lake. The Mushpots, 1 mile southeast of the Mudkettles (No. 87). Near west end of Sulphur Hills, 1.8 miles south of Stonetop Mountain. Ebro Springs, 2.5 miles south-southwest of Stonetop Mountain. Vermilion Springs, near Pelican Creek, 2.3 miles south of Stonetop Mountain. Pelican Springs, at confluence of Pelican and Raven Creeks. Beach Springs, on shore of Mary Bay of Yellowstone Lake. Turbid Springs, near south end of Turbid Lake. Steamboat Springs, on northeast shore of Yellowstone Lake at Steamboat Point. Butte Springs, on northeast shore of Yellowstone Lake, 1.5 miles southeast of Steamboat Point. DeMaris (Cody) Hot Springs, 4 miles southwest of Cody. T. 55 N., R., 94 W., in Sheep Canyon of the Bighorn River near mouth of Five Springs Creek. T. 53 N., R. 94 W., near upper end of Black Canyon of the Bighorn River. Sec. 8, T. 48 N., R. 115 W., near the Snake River 2 miles south of boundary of Yellowstone National Park. T. 39 N., R. 116 W., near the Snake River 4 miles downstream from mouth of Hobak River. Granite Hot Springs, in sec. 6, T. 39 N., R. 113 W. Near west bank of Salt River, 2.5 miles north of Auburn. Sec. 2, T. 38 N., R. 110 W., on the Green River near Wells. 156-01 Breccia of andesitic and basaltic fragments. 562 Hot 100 198 Hot 562. 113-180 Small Small Small Warm Warm 196 Hot 186-198 190 (max) 76-100 Warm Warm Hot 94 no 68-140 Warm Small 562 562 10 562 Deadwood Formation (Late Cambrian and Early Ordovician) or Tensleep Sandstone (Pennsylvanian and Permian). Folded Carboniferous or Triassic strata. Folded Carboniferous or Triassic strata. Lava (Tertiary) overlying shale (Cretaceous). Chug water Formation (Permian and Triassic) near fault. Wasatch Formation (Eocene) near granite. Limestone (Triassic or Jurassic). 137, 564 , 598 - Small 100 100 360 38 Large 676-- - Issue near veins of calcite and gypsum. Also fumaroles. Deposit of sulfur. Ref. 561. Much Coj. Ref. 637. Several springs. Ref. 561. Do. Erupts frequently. Ref. 637. Several springs. Scorodite deposited as coating on siliceous sinter. Refs. 609, 611, 620, 637, 702. Numerous fumaroles. Ref. 561. Ref. 561. Do. Do. Do. Deposit of sulfur. Also boiling mud pots 0.5 mile west. Ref. 561. Also powerful steam vents. Ref. 576. Several deep pools of clear water in area 300 yd long and 250 yd wide. Ref. 561. Several springs. Deposit of sulfur. Resort and sanitarium. Refs. 144, 592, 594, 597, 703. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 597. Ref. 597. Refs. 144, 373, 564. Several springs. Water smells of sulfur. Used for bathing and irrigation. 2 springs. Many springs. Water is salty. Deposit of tufa. Ref. 144. 6 springs.50 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii)—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (gallons Associated rocks References on Remarks and additional references figure water (°F) per minute) chemical quality Wyoming—Continued 105 T. 32 N., R. 107 W., near Fremont Butte. Hot Small 106 Near Warm Spring Creek 4 miles north- 84 west of Dubois. (max) 107 Near mouth of Little Warm Spring Creek, 68 3 miles southwest of Dubois. 108 Fort Washakie Hot Springs, in sec. 2, T. 110 2,000 IS., R. 1 W., 24 miles west of Riverton. 109 T. 30 N., R. 97 W., 4 miles southwest of 100-120 100 Hailey. 110 T. 29 N., R. 96 W., near Sweetwater River Warm 12 miles southwest of Myersville. 111 Big Horn (Thermopolis) Hot Springs, on 135 >12,600 the Bighorn River at Thermopolis. 111A 3.5 miles northwest of Thermopolis, near Hot Small sulfur deposits. 112 Sec. 35, T. 32 N., R. 86 W., on Horse Creek Warm Large near Independence. 113 Alcova Hot Springs, in T. 30 N., R. 83 W., 139 75 in Fremont Canyon of the North Platte River. 114 T. 31 N., R. 71 W., near the North Platte Warm River 9 miles south of Douglas. 115 Saratoga Hot Springs, in T. 17 N., R. 84 120 10 W. 116 10 miles northwest of Laramie 74 Granite.................... Tertiary strata overlying limestone (Carboniferous). Carboniferous strata near granite. Chug water Formation (Permian and Triassio). ----do..................— Sandstone (Oligocene)...... Tensleep Sandstone (Pennsylvanian and Permian). Red beds (Triassic)__________ Oligocene strata near Chug-water Formation (Permian and Triassic). Faulted Upper Cretaceous strata. Folded Oligocene strata. Sandstone (Tertiary)_____ Faulted Mesaverde Group (Late Cretaceous). 137, 575, 585, 597, 598. 564. Water used for bathing. Ref. 514. Several springs. Deposit of tufa. Refs. 144, 442. Do. Several springs rising in deep pools. Resort. Refs. 126, 144, 592, 594, 646. Several springs. Water smells of HjS. Used for irrigation. Refs. 144 , 564 , 594, 623. Several springs. Water used locally. Ref. 623. 1 large spring and several small springs. Large deposit of tufa. Resort. Refs. 126,144,148, 564,577,586, 592,638,646,704. Deposits of tufa and sulfur. Flow formerly much greater. Ref. 704. Several springs. Water used locally. Refs. 144, 623. Several springs. Resort. Refs. 144, 623. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Ref. 564. 6 springs. Resort. Ref. 144. Refs. 124, 144. Although Alaska and Hawaii have recently been admitted as States, their geographic separation from the 48 conterminous States warrants their consideration here as separate entities. Alaska may be divided broadly into five geographic provinces: (1) the Pacific mountain region, which includes the coastal mountain ranges and islands of the southeastern “panhandle,” the Alaska Range and subsidiary ranges in the southern part of the State, and the southwestern extension consisting of the Alaska Peninsula and the Aleutian Islands; (2) the Central Plateau region, which is mostly within the basins of the Yukon and Kuskokwim Rivers; (3) the Rocky Mountain region, embracing subsidiary ranges in the northern part of Alaska; (4) the Arctic Mountain region, consisting of the Brooks Range and subsidiary ranges, all nearly parallel with the Arctic coast; (5) the Northern Plateau, which descends to a broad coastal plain that extends north to the Arctic Ocean. The thermal springs in the southeastern part of Alaska are generally associated with shear zones in granitic rocks which are present as batholiths or intru-sives of Mesozoic or later ages in the Coast Ranges. Few hot springs are known in the Alaska Range and Other ranges in the southern part of the main area, although the rocks of that region are intensely folded and faulted. Nearly all the known hot springs in the Alaska Peninsula and Aleutian Islands are associated with volcanic rocks, and most of them are near volcanoes that are still active. Several thermal springs in the Yukon River basin are in three general areas: between Circle and Fairbanks; the Hot Springs-Rampart area; and north of the Yukon, between Ruby and Fort Hamlin. These are areas of intrusive granitic rocks, of Mesozoic and possibly later age, fractured by post-Eocene movements. On the Seward Peninsula are also several hot springs in areas of intrusive rocks of Mesozoic or Tertiary age. Although Quaternary volcanic rocks are present at numerous places in the Yukon River basin and Seward Peninsula, no thermal springs seem to be associated with these rocks. Information concerning the various thermal springs is given in the table below. The locations of the springs and volcanoes are shown on figure 9.180° 176° 172° 168° 164° 160° 156° 152° 148° 144° 140° 136° 132° 128° 124° 120° Figure 9.—Alaska showing location of thermal springs and volcanoes. Springs from ref. 178 ; volcanoes from ref. 172. Oi DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGSyj. n 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF Thermal springs in Alaska ,ta chiefly from refs. 172 and 178. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million Temperature of water (°F) 100 Warm Warm 150 100 100; 156 Hot Hot 86-120 131 82-99. 5 130 Hot 101-136 114 Hot 130 72-153 100-134 Hot Warm Warm Warm Warm Hot 150 Hot Warm Hot Hot Hot *219 Hot 190-208 Hot Hot 167 Hot Hot Hot Flow (gpm) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Large Paleozoic schist and limestone. Probably Mesozoic or older strata. Probably granite intrusive in gneiss. Crystalline limestone 10 Large 8 i 5,955 SiOi (87); Ca (545); Na (1,587); K (61); SO. (25); Cl (3,450); small amount of free H28. Alluvium overlying granite. Probably Paleozoic strata. 45 130 60 8 292 442 i 350 SiOi (20); Na+K (58); HCOj (22); COj (32); SO* (45); Cl (39); small amount of free HjS. SiOi (78); Na+K (107); SO* (61); Cl (92); small amount of free HjS. SiOj (80); Na; HCOj; Cl; free COi, HsS. Granite, probably intruded into Paleozoic strata. Granite intrusive in schist. Granite intrusive Moderately large 145 50 Small Small 220 130 Moderately large Probably Mesozoic strata. 417 634 SiOi (59); Na (121); HCOa (86); SO* (48); Cl (120). SiOi (44); Na+K (208); HCOs (494); SO. (67); Cl (38); free COi. Lower Cretaceous quartzite. Granite, probably intruded into Paleozoic strata. Granite intrusive in schist. 338 i 813 SiOi (77); Na+K (94); HCOj (118); SO* (78); freeHiS. SiOi (82); Na (248); HCOj (173); SO* (98); Cl (252); free COi. Granite intrusive Schist Gravel, probably over-lying granite. Quaternary gravel over-lying gneiss. Granite, at contact with slate. Probably granite intrusive in Cretaceous strata. Granite intrusive in Carboniferous volcanic tuff. Altered Paleozoic strata... Lava Large DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 53 Thermal springs in Air oka—Continued No. on fig. 9 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) 41 Northeast of Vsevidof volcano on Umnak Island. 43-68 42 Central part of Umnak Island. 214 43 Near Hot Springs Cove on Umnak Island. 95-215 44 Bogoslof and New Bogoslof Islands. Hot 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Makushin volcano on Un-alaska (Unalashka, Oona-lashka) Island. Akutan Island, including springs at head of Long Creek and in Hot Springs Bay valley. Islet northwest of Akutan Island. Islet southeast of Akutan Island. Near Pogromni volcano on Unimak Island. Near Morzhovoi (Morshe-voi) village. Amagat Island, near Morzhovoi Bay. Near Pavlov volcano....... 94 * 181 Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot 140 53 Near Balboa Bay. 54 Port Moller..... Hot 150-180 55 Near Port Heiden. Hot 56 Southwest shore of Becharof Lake near base of Mount Peulik. 57 Near Katmai Pass........ Hot 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 Near Mount Katmai, including those in Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes. West Fork of Douglas River, 25 miles west of Cape Douglas. Near snore of Lituya Bay. Near head of Mud Bay..... Near Nika Bay............ North shore of Lisianski Inlet. 4 miles above head of Tenakee Inlet. Hooniah, 75 yd from shore... Hot Hot Warm Hot Hot Hot 81-179 84-111 66 67 68 Near North Arm of Peril Strait. Tenakee, on north shore of Tenakee Inlet. 3 miles east of head of Fish Bay. 101-103 56-106 62-117 60-122 70 Sitka, near shore 16 miles south of Sitka. 71 Near north side of Gut Bay.. 95-149 Warm 72 73 74 75 76 North side of Stikine River, 18 miles northeast of Wrangell. Shake’s, 20 miles northeast of Wrangell. South side of Stikine River, 8 miles north of Wrangell. South end of Vank Island, 8 miles west of Wrangell. Bailey Bay................. Hot * 125 Hot Hot 145-191 77 78 79 North bank of Unuk River.. 5 miles southeast of Saks Cove. Bell Island........-........ Warm 150 109-162 Flow (gpm) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 52,000 Lava. 1,377 2,282 SiOj (150); Ca (39); Na (350); HC03 (29) SO* (130); Cl (483); B2O3 (157). SiOj (88); Ca (164); Na (606); HCOs (67); SO4 (88); Cl (1,133); BjOs (92). do. do. do. do. 16 springs, including 1 geyser; also fumaroles. Water contains as much as 159 ppm of BjOs. Refs. 83, 153, 171. Small geyser. 28 springs, including several small geysers. Analysis is for water having temperature of 192°F. Ref. 153. Intermittent and steady jets of steam from many vents. Refs. 156, 157, 160, 169, 175, 177. Several springs. Solfataras in the crater. Refs. 155, 160, 166, 168, 171. * 952 SiOa (129); Ca (10); Na (288); HCO3 (192); S04 (39); Cl (350); B2O3 (36). Lava. Several springs and steam vents. Refs. 152, 155, 159, 171. .do. .do. .do. .do. .do. Ref. 160. Several springs issuing on beach between tide levels. Ref. 155. Many springs; also hot marshes. Refs. 160, 166. Water is sulfurous. Refs. 160,171. Refs. 155, 160, 166. Large .do. Recent lava overlying limestone. Probably Cretaceous strata. Jurassic sandstone probably intruded by lava. Several main springs; also fumaroles on southwest slope of Mount Hague. Ref. 160. 1 main and several minor pools. Water tastes alkaline. Much free gas. Refs. 160, 166. Water issues near shore. Large Large Lava.......... Lava and tuff. Jurassic strata. Much free HjS. Deposits of ocher and sulfur. Refs. 161,174. Several springs and many fumaroles. Refs. 119,151,158,161. 163, 164, 182, 183. 10 30 3 Tertiary strata-Paleozoic strata. ----do......... ____do......... 1592 1 276 4 786 SiOj (119); Na (137); SO4 (226); Cl (33); free HjS. SiOj (96); Na+K (59); HCO3 (18); CO3 (25); SO4 (35); Cl (42); small amount of free H jS. Na (206); SO4 (329); Cl (133)--- Diorite intrusive in granite. Schist..................... Fractured diorite. 22 25 1 787 SiOj (94); Na (201); SO4 (302); Cl (99); free COj, HjS. 1 393 SiOj (110); Na + K (69); IIC03 (43); C O3 (63); B4O7 (34); small amount of free HjS. 80 13 1 268 SiOj (96); Na+K (58); HCO3 (93); SO4 (49). 1 4,877 SiOj (96); Ca (378); Na (1,440); SO4 (88); Cl. (2,745); free HjS. Small Granite intrusive in gneiss. Faulted schist............ Faulted granite and diorite. Granite cut by diabase dikes. Paleozoic limestone and schist. Alluvium overlying intrusive granite. 12 springs issuing near creek Small deposits of tufa. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. 4 main springs issuing on shore between low and high tide levels. 10 main springs. Bathing resort. Ref. 180. 24 springs issuing along bank of small creek. Water used for bathing. 9 springs. Bathhouses; cabins. Ref. 180. 3 main springs, 124°-149°F. Bathing resort. Ref. 166,180. Water is sulfurous. 100 Small 83 1409 SiOj (108); Na (87); HCOa (43); Granite..................... SO4 (142). ................................. Probably Paleozoic strata, near granitic batholith. ......................................do.................... 413 SiOj (142); Na+K (54); HCOs (27); CO3 (52); small amount of free HjS. Granite. Small 10 10 .do. .do. 1 674 SiO* (105); Na+K (201); SO4 Granite cut by pegmatite (129); Cl (188); small amount dikes, of free HiS., Several springs. Bathhouse. Issues on beach between low and high tide levels. 9 main springs. Analysis is for water having temperature of 186°F. Water used for bathing. Ref. 180. Ref. 181. Temperature of water from 5 main springs ranges from 125° to 162°F. Bathhouse. * Hottest. * Main spring. * Maximum. 4 Coolest.54 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD The eight main islands and several smaller islands that constitute the State of Hawaii are composed almost entirely of volcanic materials, overlain in a few places by deposits of coral limestone and alluvial material. Active volcanism is limited to the largest and easternmost island, Hawaii, which includes the great volcanic craters of Kilauea and Mauna Loa, both of which erupt occasionally with the outpouring of molten lava. Because the volcanic materials of all the islands are largely fragmental and porous, the water table is, in most places, only a few feet above sea level and springs are not common. The location of thermal springs and wells is shown on figure 10, and information concerning them is presented in the table below. OTHER NORTH AMERICAN COUNTRIES CANADA More than half the area of Canada slopes gently to Hudson Bay, but the two main streams of the country have other outlets. The St. Lawrence River flows northeastward to the Atlantic Ocean, and the MacKenzie River flows northwest to the Arctic Ocean. Most of the eastern part of Canada is within the great region of Precambrian rocks known as the “Canadian Shield.” Farther west the broad plains are underlain by gently dipping Paleozoic and Mesozoic strata which rise through foothills to the Rocky Mountains, where the strata are upthrust, faulted, and folded, and the under-lying granitic and metamorphic rocks are exposed. In the western Coast Ranges the rocks are largely granitic and metamorphic. These are overlain by ancient sedimentary strata in many areas. Thermal springs and wells in Hawaii [All issue from or tap Tertiary or Quaternary lava] No. on fig. 10 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Remarks and references Maui County 1 West part of Molokai Island. 93 Drilled well. Water contains Ca (393 ppm), Mg (395 ppm), Na+K 820 ppm), HCOs (44 ppm), Cl (2,890 ppm). Ref. 359. Drilled well. Ref. 357. 2 Mouth of Ukumehame Canyon on Maui Island. 95 Hawaii County 1 On shore at Kawaihae... Warm Ref. 347. 2 Near shore at Kailua Warm Water vapor but no definite flow. Deposit of Qlaubersalt (Na,SO,-10HiO). Ref. 347. 3 In and near crater of Mauna Loa volcano. Hot Steam issuing from crevices. Incrustations of sulfur. Refs. 347, 348, 358. 4 Crater of Kilauea volcano. Hot Steam issuing from crevices on north edge; used as vapor baths. Also solfataras in bottom of crater. Refs. 345, 346, 348-351,353-355, 358. 5 0.5 mile northwest of Puu Kukae. 83 Small spring-fed pool at foot of fault scarp. No outflow. Ref. 350 and personal communication from Q. A. Macdonald to G. A. Waring (1950). 6 Near north base of Puu Kukae hill. 84 Small flow. Ref. 350. 7 On shore 3 miles south of Kapoho. 91 Do. 8 N ear W aiwelawela Point. Warm Small flow. Probably on southwest rift zone of Kilauea volcano. Refs. 350, 356, and personal communication from G. A. Macdonald to G. A. Waring (1950). No thermal springs have been recorded in eastern Canada; a number are present in the southwestern part of the country, where they seem to be associated chiefly with faults in ancient sedimentary strata or with fissures and fractures in the granitic and metamorphic rocks. Data on the thermal springs are presented in the table below. The locations of the springs are shown on figure 11. 160' 158“ 156' Figure 10.—Hawaii showing location of thermal springs and thermal wells. From refs. 347, 350, and 357-359.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS Figure 11.—Part of southwestern Canada showing location of thermal springs. Chiefly from refs. 711 and 712. Thermal springs in Canada [Data chiefly from refs. 711, 712. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on fig. 11 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (imperial gallons per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references Alberta 1 Jasper (Miette), on Sulphur Creek, 10 miles from Jasper Park Station. 2 Bank of Fortymile Creek, 4 miles northwest of Banff. 3 Near south base of Stoney Squaw Mountain, 2 miles north of Banff. 4 Auto Road, near Vermillion Lake, 3 miles northwest of Banff. 70-120 Warm Warm 67 503; 1,825 Ca, SO«; free HjS. Small Small Paleozoic strata. 6 main springs. Resort. Refs. 708, 709. Upper Banff Shale (Mis- Ref. 723. sissippian). Pennsylvanian strata_____ Do. 100 434 Ca (95); Mg (23); HCOa (155); S04 (147); Cl (42). Upper Banff Limestone (Mississippian). Refs. 710, 722, 723. 735-914 0—65 -556 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in Canada—Continued No. on fig. Name or location Temperature of Flow (im- Total perial gallons dissolved Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 11 water (°F) per minute) solids | (ppm) Remarks and additional references Alberta—Continued Banff: Basin, near valley floor.. 94 Cave, near valley floor.. 85 Kidney, on northeast flank of Sulphur Mountain. 101 Middle, on northeast flank of Sulphur Mountain. 92 Upper Hot, on northeast flank of Sulphur Mountain. 115 150 250 20 100 130 1,905 1,107 1,064 Ca (400); Mg (71); HC03 (175); SO* (1,120); gas, 97 percent Nj. Ca (217); Mg (39); HCOs (140); SO4 (580); gas, 97 percent Nj. Ca (230); Mg (,39); HCO3 (154); SO4 (587). Triassic strata faulted against Devonian limestone. ____do..................... ....do.................... Piped to bathhouse. Refs. 710, 711, 722, 723. Refs. 710, 711, 722, 723. Piped to swimming pool. Refs. 710, 711, 722, 723. 1,059 Ca (228); Mg (39); HCOs (128); SO4 (610); gas, 97 percent Ni. do. Issues in small cave. Refe. 710, 711, 722, 723. Ca (239); Mg (40); HCO3 (133); SO4 (634); gas, 98 percent Na. .do. Piped to bathhouse. Refs. 710, 711, 722, 723. British Columbia 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 North bank of Liard River, 2 miles below mouth of Coal River. Bank of Liard River, 1 mile' northwest of bridge on Alcan Road. West bank of Toad River, 1.5 miles above its junction with Racing River; 8 miles from Alcan Road. South bank of Prophet River, 35 miles west of Alcan Road East side of Stikine River, nearly opposite Great Glacier. North bank of Peace River at Hudson Hope. 0.5 mile east of southeast corner of Lakelse Lake and 10 miles south of Terrace. West side of Bishop’s Cove on Ursula Channel. Near Gardiner Canal, 12 miles above Desolation Channel. Near southeast bank of Brim River, 200 yd above mouth of river. Shore of Ursula Channel... Head of Klekane Inlet_____ Shore of Nascall Bay..---- Shore of Eucott Bay on west side of Dean Channel. Shore of Brynildsen Inlet on Labouchere Channel. Northwest of Bella Coola— Shore of South Bentinck Arm, 25 miles south of Bella Coola. Head of South Bentinck Arm. 1 mile from Fair Harbour on Kyuguot Sound, Vancouver Island. Sharp Point, between Sydney Inlet and Refuge Cove, west side of Vancouver Island. Skookumchuck, 20 miles northwest of Douglas. Bank of August Jacob’s Creek, 11 miles northwest of Douglas. Bank of Sloquet Creek, 10 miles above junction with Lilooet River. Harrison, near south end of Harrison Lake. Halcyon, on east shore of Upper Arrow Lake. Warm 121-125 Hot Hot 120-150 Hot 185 112 112 100 112 112 Warm 130 Warm Warm Warm Warm Hot 125 130 120 160 140; 145 120-128 26 27 Ainsworth, on west shore of Kootenay Lake. Radium (Sinclair)........... 101.5 (max) 114-116 28 Fairmont, 1.5 miles northeast of north end of Columbia Lake. 86-113 29 30 31 32 Bedrock, on west bank of Kootenay River 9.5 miles northeast of Canal Flats. East shore of Columbia Lake, 2 miles north of Canal Flats. Bank of Lussier (Sheep) River, 11 miles east-southeast of Canal Flats. Bank of Ram Creek, 13 miles southeast of Canal Flats. Warm Warm 108 (max) 90-100 Small 1,195 (hottest) SiO, (57); CaO (292); MgO (68); SOs (505); Cl (23). 700 800 CaS04 (202); NaaSC>4 (154); NaCl (423). Fractured schist and granite. Fissured quartz diorite._ Small Fissured quartz diorite Small 8,640 Na, Cl 192 SO4 Fissured quartz diorite Large Fissured quartz diorite 100 483 1,280 367 742 1,285; 1,367 788 1,766 696 1,218 SO4 (47); Na (137); Cl (217) Ca (169); Na (119); SO, (413); Cl(338). Ca (32); Mg (41); SOi (162); Cl (39). Ca (94); Na (108); SO, (360); Cl (63). Ca, Na, SO,, Cl Small Large Sedimentary strata (Jurassic?). Fractured ancient sedimentary rocks. Ca (57); Na (161); HCOs (48); SO, (433). Ca (150); Na (290); HCOs (1,144). Ca (140); HCOs (216); SO, (306). Ca (228); Mg (75); HCOs (230); SO, (570). 60 330 Metamorphosed sedimentary and volcanic rocks. Fractured Jubilee Formation (Cambrian). Small Small Jubilee(?) Formation (Upper Cambrian). Beaver foot Limestone (Upper Devonian). Jubilee Formation (Upper Cambrian). Ref. 717. Water issues in tufa-lined basins. Refs. 717,724. About 15 springs. Refs. 717, 720, 724. Several springs. Deposits of tufa Ref. 717. 18 main springs. Ref. 714. Several springs. Large deposits of tufa. Ref. 717. Several springs; probably the hottest in Canada. Resort. Ref. 718. Ref. 707. Do. Do. Do. Do. Several springs. Ref. 707. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 707. Ref. 707. Several springs. Ref. 706. May be mixed with sea water. Refs. 706, 713. 2 main springs. Water is radioactive. Resort. 3 main springs. Water is radioactive. Resort; sanatorium. Ref. 716. Several springs. Large deposit of tufa. Resort. R3f. 721. Several springs. Water is strongly radioactive. Resort. Ref. 705. 2 main springs (91° and 113°F) and 4 smaller springs. Analysis is for water having temperature of 91°F. Water is radioactive. Deposits of tufa. Resort. Ref. 705. Extensive deposits of tufa. Probably several springs. Several springs. Water is sul-furous. Used for bathing. Ref. 715. Many small springs. Deposit of tufa. Water is alkaline. Ref. 715.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 57 MEXICO The main part of Mexico consists of a great plateau region bordered on the east and west by mountain chains and comparatively narrow bands of lowland between the mountains and the coasts. In the northwest a chain of barren mountains traverses nearly the entire length of Baja California. These mountains have steep eastern slopes but a gentler descent to the Pacific coast on the west. In southeastern Mexico there is a detached mountain region, but in the extreme southeast the greater part of Yucatan consists of low sandy plains. In the main plateau region the Valley of Mexico near Mexico City and the Bolson de Mapimi in the States of Chihuahua and Coahuila, are floored by deposits of former lakes, of which many small lakes and marshy lagoons are remnants. Most of the eastern and central parts of the plateau region are underlain by Cretaceous strata. In western Mexico much of the upland region is covered by Tertiary volcanic rocks, which also extend nearly to the east coast in the southern part of the plateau region. Farther south much of the upland is of ancient crystalline rocks. Marine Tertiary strata form bands along much of both coasts and along a large part of Baja California. Popocatepetl volcano southeast of Mexico City, and several other great volcanic peaks, are along a nearly east-west line. Some of the craters are still semiactive. The new volcano of Paricutin, which began to develop in February 1943, is in the western part of this band, about 60 km northwest of Jorollo volcano, which developed in a similar way beginning in September 1759. Most of the thermal springs of Mexico seem to be concentrated in or near the middle part of the principal band of volcanic activity, which extends westward across the country from Orizaba volcano 120 km west of Vera Cruz. The table below is a summary of the available data on thermal springs in Mexico. The locations of the springs and the principal volcanoes are shown on figure 12. Thermal springs and wells in Mexico [Data chiefly from ref. 744. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (liters Total dissolved Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references fig. 12 water (°C) per minute) solids (ppm) Aguascalientes 1 2 Ojo Caliente (Cantera), 4 km southwest of Aguas Calientes. In valley east of Aguas Calientes. 28-30 40 Moderately large Several springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 732, 750. Refs. 727, 750. Baja California 1 East border of Laguna Salada (Laguna Maquata). West side of Volcano Lake, at base of Cerro Prieto. 44-53 42-77 Warm Moderately large Moderately large Small 24,890 CaSO, (5,222); NaCl (21,960).... Several springs. Ref. 746. Several springs and mud volcanoes 3 in northwest-trending band 1 mile long and 0.5 mile wide. Refs. 746, 759, 770. Several springs in ravine. Large Marmol onyx quarries. deposits of tufa. Ref. 768. Chihuahua 1 2 3 Warm Hot Hot Moderately large Moderately large Moderately large Issues at base of hill. Refs. 740, 784. Ref. 740. 6 springs issuing at base of bluff. Water is sulfurous. Used for bathing. Ref. 749. Several km north of Llanos.. 6.5 km east of Santa Rosalia. Colima 1 Barcena volcano, on San Benedicto Island. Hot Many steam fumaroles produced by eruption in August 1952. Refs. 754, 769. 58 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Mexico—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (liters Total dissolved Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references fig. 12 water (°C) per minute) solids (ppm) Durango 1 Near Agua Caliente railway station. Warm Guanajuato Comanjilla, 20 km west of 104 Moderately Guanajuato. (max) large Aguas Buenas, 20 km south- 45 Moderately High east of Comanjilla. (max) large Tupataro, 50 km west of Salamanca. Warm San Gregorio, 14 km north- Tepid Large 960 west of Cuitzeo de Abasolo village. Munguia, 10 km east of San Hot Small Gregorio. Cuitzeo de Abasolo 75 2,900 604 Warm Small SiOa; NajSO*; free HjS. SiOj (79); Na20 (246); KjO (50); SOs (165); Cl (176). SiOj (81); NaaO (167); KjO (95); SOj (54); Cl (80). Decomposed fractured granite. Tertiary conglomerate faulted against Triassic slate; near basalt and andesite. Lava__________________ Basalt and rhyolite.. .do.. _do.. .do.. Group of spouting springs and several small geysers, including Geyser Humboldt. Large amount of HjS. Deposits of sinter and opaline silica. Refs. 727, 771. Several springs. Deposit of siliceous sinter. Water used for bathing. Refs. 727, 771. Water used locally. Ref. 771. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 763. Water is muddy. 2 main springs. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 763. Ref. 771. 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 Atotonilco, 2 km from Hue-jucar. Embocadero and Zapotan, 75 km west of Ameca. Laguna de Magdalena________ Agua Caliente, near Teu-chitlan. Tala municipio: Agua Caliente Grande, 28 km east of Tala. 20 km from Tala......... 10 km from Tala........ Agua Caliente Chica, near Zapopan. Agua Caliente, 4 km from Zapotlanejo. Near Ixtlahuacan, 22 km northeast of Guadalajara. Agua Caliente de la Co-fradia, near Cuquio. Agua Caliente de la Cuna, 20 km from Yahualica. El Terrero, 8 km west of Tlajomulco. Tototlan municipio......... F12 km west of Atemjac...... [5 km northwest of Atemjac. . Near Santa Ana Acatlan: Ojo de Agua Caliente____ Hot Warm; hot 25 Hot 45 Hot Warm Hot Warm Warm Warm Warm Hot Warm Hot Hot Warm Bafto de Guerrero Warm 15 Ixtlahuacan de los Membril- los municipio. 16 Agua Tibia, at Chapala..... Warm Warm 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Tacotan, in Union de Tula municipio. Agua Caliente, 8 km from Ejutla. Agua Caliente, in Juchitlan municipio. Agua Caliente,in Chiquilist-lan municipio. Agua Caliente, south of Amacueca. North of Manatla pueblo____ San Cristobal de Barranca municipio. Atoyac municipio: Isla Grande............. Hot Warm Warm Hot Warm Warm Warm Isla Chica. Warm Molino. Warm 25 San Sebastian municipio_____ Warm 26 Apazulco, 4 km from the coast. Atotonilco, 60 km from Puri-ficacion municipio. Achiotes, 20 km from Puri-ficacion municipio. San Miguel, 16 km from Purification municipio. Hot Hot Warm Warm 119 Small Small large large Moderately large 139 large large large Moderately large Moderately large large Moderately large Moderately large Moderately large large Moderately large Water used locally. 2 springs. Water used locally. Several springs. Water used locally. 1 main and 2 smaller springs. Water is sulfurous. Used locally. Water used locally. 2 springs. Water used locally. Water used locally. Do. 4 springs. Water used locally. 2 groups of springs. Water used locally. Water used locally. Do. Water used for drinking. 3 springs. Water used locally. Water used for drinking. Do. Water used for bathing. Do. 2 groups of springs. Water used locally. 2 groups of springs. Water used for bathing. Water probably sulfurous. Used for drinking. Water used locally. Water used for drinking. Water used locally. Water is mineralized; used locally. 2 springs. Water used locally. Bathhouse. Do. Do. 2 groups of springs. Water used locally. Water used for bathing. Do. Do. Do.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 59 Thermal springs and wells in Mexico—Continued No. | Tempera-1 Total dis- Remarks and additional references on Name or location ture of Flow (liters solved Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks flg. 12 water per minute) solids (°C) | (ppm) Jalisco—Continued 27 Hot Recent basalt Many large fumaroles. Ref. 743. 28 Warm Small Probably lava 2 groups, 4 and 8 km from town. Water used locally. Mexico and Distrito Federal 1 2 3 4 5 Guadalupe Hidalgo, north of Mexico City: Pozito................ Artesian well......... Banos de Aragon, south of Guadalupe Hidalgo. Bafios de Penon, 4 km northeast of Mexico City. Popocatepetl volcano. Between Ixtapan de la Sal and Tonatico. 21.5 21 25 47.5 92 (max) 35-40 Small 603 NaiCOj (193); NaCl (108); KC1 (108); free COi. Moderately large Moderately large 345 2,216 SiOj (152); CaCOa (404); MgCOa (429); NajCOs (183); KaCOa (294,; NaCl (737;; gas, 63 percent COj, 29 percent Na. Limestone and shale Moderately large 6, 500 Ca (646); Mg (83); Na (1,61*); K (86); CO, (890); SO, (894); Cl (2,200); BO, (105); free CO,. Water used for drinking. Water used for bathing. Near early Paseo Grande. Water used for bathing. Ref. 750. Water used for bathing by Aztecs; now supplies modern bath establishment. Refs. 731, 751, 753. 7 main fumaroles exhaling water vapor, some with considerable force: also about 60 solfataras. Refs. 726, 743, 749. Several springs. Water contains 11 ppm of Li, 8.6 ppm of FejOj-f A1j03, 7.6 ppm of As, and 6.2 ppm of Br. Large deposits of tufa. Source of salt supply for local residents. Ref. 747. Michoacan [Agua Caliente, near Yurecu-aro municipio. 30 1 El Nacimiento, 6 km from Yurecuaro municipio. 20 La Buena Huerta, 4 km from Yurecuaro municipio. 25 2 Near Ixtlan de los Hervores: 88 Pozo del Carbon 98 Poze del Coyote (Pozo Grande). 100.5 Other hot springs, including Pozo Blanco, Geyser de Salitre, Geyser Tritubular, Pozo Verde; also hot pools and well. 3 Agua Caliente, 30 km south-southeast of La Piedad. Tepid 4 Agua Caliente, 16 km from Angamacutiro. Hot 5 Near Puru&ndiro .. 64-86 6 Near Huaniqueo, 48 km northwest of Morelia. Warm 7 Near west end of Lake Cuitzeo: Bano de las Arenas 37-41 Chamiquel and Tricui-luca. Hot San Sebastian 45 8 Near southwest shore of Lake Cuitzeo: Bano Prieto, 4 km from San Augustin. Hot 4 km from Hacienda Huandacareo. Hot San Juan Tararameo, near Cuitzeo village. Hot 9 Zinapecuaro municipio, 8 km south of east end of Lake Cuitzeo. 30-34 10 f4 km south of Ucareo.. Hot \Sierra Ucareo Hot 11 Ojo de Agua de Arumbaro... Hot 12 Ojo de Agua Caliente, 8 km from Los Reyes. Warm 13 Parfcutin volcano. Hot 14 Agua Tibia, in Taretan municipio, 18 km southeast of Uruapan. Warm 15 Atzizindaro, near northeast shore of Lake Patzcuaro. Warm Na, SO« Trachyte. 18,000 Ca (HCOa), (7,287); Mg (HCOs), (5,896); NaHCO, (935); NaCl (3,437). Large Moderately large Moderately large Large Moderately large Large Moderately large Moderately large Moderately large Small Small Small Moderately large Moderately large CaCOa (36); CaSOi (14); free HaS. Ca, SO* High Fe, Ca, Na, SO« Recent lava and tuff Moderately large Moderately large Water used for drinking. Do. Refs. 728, 755, 758, 762, 766, 767. Spouts to height of 3 meters. Refs. 728, 755, 758, 762, 766, 767. Spouts to height of 2 meters at intervals of 2 hr. Refs. 728, 755, 758, 762, 766,767. Refs. 728, 755, 758, 762, 766, 767. Water used for drinking. Do. 4 springs, some distance apart. Water is sulfurous. Refs. 728, 763, 771 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. Water is sulfurous. Used for bathing. Do. Water is sulfurous. Used for bathing. Ref. 758. 4 springs. Water used for drinking. Refs. 728, 758. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. Several springs and solfataras. Refs. 728, 742. Water used locally. Water used for bathing. Many fumaroles. An estimated 17,000 tons of water per day emitted as steam. Refs. 734-737, 751. 761. Water used for drinking. Water is sulfurous.60 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Mexico—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (liters Total dissolved Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references flg. 12 water (°C) per minute) • solids (ppm) Michoacan—Continued Arumbaro, near Morelia municipio. Hot 16 Barreno, near Morelia municipio. 26 Cuincho, 10 km northwest of Morelia municipio. 37.5 17 Pila de Agua Caliente, 25 km south-southwest of Morelia municipio. Warm 18 Tajimarao municipio: Agua Fria, 20 km south of Ucareo. Warm Los Hervideros, 10 km from Tajimarao. Warm 19 Banos de Purua, 50 km southeast of Morelia municipio. 34 20 2 km northeast of San Fernando. Hot. 21 Rancho Salitre, west of Jorullo volcano. Hot 22 Huacana municipio, 55 km south of Uruapan. Hot Hacienda Agua Fria, at north base of Cerro de las Humaredas. 88-102 Bafios del Chino, west of Hacienda Agua Fria. 70-89 Laguna Verde, north of Bafios del Chino. 28 23 Nopal, near Bafios del Chino. 85 Pozos de Gallo, in Maritaro area. 80-100 Pozos de Maritaro, near Laguna Verde. 92-111 Station de Huingo Warm Chiflador (Chiliador), near 'north base of Cerro de Azufre. 82-91 Curritacao (Currutaco), on north flank of Cerro de 90-100 24 Azufre. La Tacita, in and near Laguna de Azufre on south slope of Cerro de Azufre. 50-86 Bafios de Azufre, 3 km south of Cerro de Azufre. 44-55 Taximaroa (Taximarca?), 89 several km south-southwest of Cerro de Azufre. (max) 25 El Salitre, near Tuzantla Hot 26 Quetzerio, 50 km northeast of Huetamo. Hot 27 Jaripeo, 4 km from Huetamo. Hot 28 Itucuarillo and La Salada, 30 km south of Tacambaro. Hot Moderately large Moderately large Moderately large 2,040 130 Na, SO4, Cl Moderately large Moderately large Moderately large Moder- ately high HCO3; SO4; free CO2, H2S Moderately large Moderately large Small Small Small Small Small Small Small Small Small Small High Water is saline and sulfurous. Used locally. Water is sulfurous. Used for bathing. Water used for drinking. Water used locally. 3 springs. Water used for drinking. Evolved gas causes ebullition. Water used for bathing. Water used locally. Water used for drinking. Water used for drinking. Some HiS. Ref 727. 2 springs. Water used for drinking. Some HjS. Many hot springs, fumaroles, and solfataras. Refs. 762, 765. 3 main springs, 1 of which is a geyser that spouts to height of 2 meters; also fumaroles. SomeHjS. Refs. 729, 765. Many sulfurous vents on border of lagoon 80 by 200 meters. Refs. 729, 758, 762, 765. Saline pool 6 by 8 meters; viscous mud thrown to height of 10 meters. Refs. 729, 765. 2 groups of vapor vents and boiling springs. Refs. 729, 758, 765. Crater with hot muddy lagoon and many fumaroles. Vapor from largest vent rises to height of 20 meters. FreeHjSOi, HC1. Refs. 729, 765. Several springs. Common salt extracted from adjacent soil. Ref. 765. Several springs and fumaroles. Water vapor and sulfurous gases emitted with such force that stones are cast out. Refs. 728, 756, 762, 765. Crater with lagoon of boiling mud. Sulfurous vapors. Refs. 729, 756, 765. Evolved gas contains HjS, SO*. Refs. 762, 765. Ref. 765. Lagoon in crater; also several springs. Water is acid. Near former sulfur workings. Refs. 729, 756. Water used locally. Water used for drinking. Do. 2 springs a few km. apart. Water used for drinking. Morelos 1 Agua Hedionda, 3 km northeast of Cautla. Pozo Hediondo, in Xochite-pec city. At Atotonilco, 6 km from Jonacatepec. Bafios de Tula, 3 km from Amacusac. 25.3-26.1 Moderately large 2,130 High CaSOi (1,200); CaCOa; MgSO«; NaCl. Water used for bathing. 2 22 Free H3S, CO2. Water used for 3 30-38 bathing. Water is sulfurous. Used locally. 4 Warm Moderately large Water is sulfurous. Used for bathing. Nuevo Leon 1 Topo Chico (San Bernafce), 8 km north of Monterrey. Carmen, 20 km northeast of Linares. San Ignacio, 20 km east of Linares. Moderately large Na, Cl, SO4; gas, 97.5 percent N2, 2.5 percent CO2. Bathing resort. Tepid “arsenic” 2 spring nearby. Ref. 749. Water used for bathing. 3 Hot Free H2S. Water used for bathing. DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 61 Thermal springs and wells in Mexico—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (liters Total dissolved Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references flfs. 12 water (°C) per minute) solids (ppm) Oaxaca 1 La Chivela Pass, above ford of Rio Verde. On coastal plain, half a mile from base of mountains. 36.6 Moderately large 2 (max) 33 (max) ous. Ref. 757. Several springs. Deposit of tufa. Water is slightly saline. Free HjS. Water used for bathing. Refs. 741, 757. Puebla 1 Chiguahuapan municipio, 4 km east of Tlacomulco. 33 Water used locally. Several fumaroles in main crater. 2 Hot 3 Paseo Bravo and San Pablo, 1 km west of Puebla city. Ojo de San Pablo, 4 km from Tecapa. Axocopan, 5 km from Puebla city. Ojo de Rancho Colorado, in San Hueyotlipan municipio. Colucan and San Vicente, 12 and 16 km from Izucar. Chichipico and Ojo de Agua, 6 and 8 km from Tehui-zingo. Hot Moderately large Moderately large 1,800 CaCOs (547) Water is sulfurous. Water used for bathing. Ref. 733. Water used locally. Water used for bathing. Do. 4 34 Ca, HCO3 5 20 339 Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl; gas, 93 percent COa, 7 percent N2. 6 Moderately large 7 Warm; hot Water used locally. Do. g 9 35 Ca. SO4 2 springs. Water used locally. Water used locally. Water used for bathing. 10 Ojo de Agua de Tlancualpi-can, in Chiautla municipio. Los Hornos and Ixtatlala, in Teotlalco municipio. Agua Santa, at Xixingo village. 11 Warm; hot Warm Moderately large 12 Water used locally. Queretaro Hacienda Montenegro, 25 km north of Queretaro: El Salto 32 Moderately large Ref. 764. 1 26; 29 27 Pumped wells. Water reached at depth of 50 meters. Ref. 764. Ref. 764. 2 Near Pate, 70 km east-southeast of Queretaro. 96 Moderately large Ref. 727. San Luis Potosi 1 El Gato, 40 km south of San Luis Potosi. 41 316,000 500 Water is strongly radioactive. faulted rhyolite. Used for bathing, irrigation, and generation of electric power. Also flowing wells 200-600 meters deep. Refs. 752, 772. Sonora 1 Agua Caliente, between Tepustetes / and Piedras Verdes. Hot Moderately large Kef. 740. Vera Cruz 1 70 Large Zacatecas 1 2 3 4 5 6 Las Pastoras and La Al-moloya, in Rio Grande municipio. Atotonilco de los Martinez, 50 km southwest of Nieves. La Tinaja, 5 km south of Sain Alto. Bocas (El Vergel), near Chalchihuites. Near San Andreas de Teul... Santa Cruz, 12 km southwest of FresniUo. Small Na, SO4 - Moderately large Moderately large Moderately large Hot hot Warm Moderately large Water used for bathing. Issues at west base of hill. Water used for bathing. Ref. 738. Water used for drinking. 6 springs. Water from some is potable, from others too highly mineralized for drinking. Water used locally. Small bathing resort. Ref. 727.62 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Mexico—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (liters Total dissolved Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references fig. 12 water <°C) per minute) solids (ppm) Zacatecas—Continued 7 8 9 10 11 12 Bano de Atotonilco, 3 km southwest of Valparaiso. Ojo Caliente, 35 km southeast cf Zacatecas. Agua Caliente, near Momax. Agua Tibia, 2 km west of Sanchez Roman. Ojo de Agua de la Higuera, in Huanusco municipio. Near Jalpa__................ 48 35 Moderately large Moderately large Moder- ately high. 162 Warm Moderately large 193 Warm Small Warm Moderately large 60 Water used for bathing. Water is slightly alkaline. Small bathing resort. Water used locally. Free COj. Bathing resort. Water used for drinking. Free CO*. Small bathing resort. CENTRAL. AMERICA (Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Nicaragua, and Panama) The western Sierra Madre of Mexico swings southeastward, parallel to the Pacific coast, and forms the southernmost highlands of that country. South of Jorullo volcano in Mexico there are very few prominent volcanic peaks in this range, but in its extension into Central America the mountains of this range are predominantly volcanic and there are numerous cones, some of which are still active or semiactive (solfataric). East of the main mountain chain, which is composed mainly of volcanic rocks, most parts of Central America that have been mapped geologically are underlain by marine sedimentary rocks of Cretaceous and Tertiary ages; but Paleozoic strata and a few small, scattered areas of sandstone and clay containing plant remains that indicate Triassic age are exposed in northern Guatemala. Structurally, Central America does not seem to form a direct connection between South America and the main part of North America because the sedimentary beds genarally are folded along nearly east-west lines, oblique to the trend of the isthmus. The deep depression that contains Lakes Nicaragua and Managua may be a graben. Extensive volcanism began in the main ranges near the close of the Cretaceous period and has continued to the present. The lava and ash are chiefly andesitic and basaltic. Nearly all the thermal springs recorded in Central America are in areas of lava, and most of them are on or near geologically Recent volcanoes. No thermal springs seem to be reported in British Honduras and Honduras, which are east of the zone of volcanism. Costa Rica has considerable lowland along each coast and extensive plains in the northeast. The northwestern part of the main volcanic chain is formed largely by a succession of volcanic cones. Farther east the chain is partly divided into two cordilleras separated by a central plateau, beyond which the chain swings farther eastward, nearer the median part of the isthmus. El Salvador has a narrow coastal plain which is bordered by the main cordillera. Much of the country consists of irregular plateau areas which are interrupted by many volcanic peaks in notable alinement but in several broad groups. Most of the volcanoes are probably of Pliocene age. In Guatemala the Pacific Coastal Plain is nearly 80 km wide. The Sierra Madre rises steeply from the coastal plain, and along its southern base are numerous volcanic peaks, several of which are still active. The main ranges of the chain have lesser ranges branching from them and are interrupted by several depressions. North of the main chain of the Sierra Madre there is a region of high valleys enclosed by minor ranges, beyond which the country slopes to the Caribbean Sea through the undulating plains of El Peten, which occupy nearly one-third of the country. The Pacific coast of Nicaragua is bordered by the volcanic cordillera which extends into, and is interrupted by, a great depression that is in part occupied by Lakes Nicaragua and Managua. This depression is bordered on the northeast by a minor range which is in part of volcanic rocks, and from it the land surface descends northeast and east to a wide swampy coastal belt along the Caribbean Sea. Panama has a main range which extends eastward through the central part of the isthmus nearly to the low pass at the Panama Canal. Chiriqui volcano, quiet since the 16th century, is near the western border of the country, and there are other volcanic peaks farther east. East and south from the canal, a lower range of mountains continues nearly to a minor transverse range that forms the boundary with Colombia. Though mineral springs are common, only a few are noticeably thermal.05 CO DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS64 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD The table below summarizes the available information on the thermal springs in the several countries of Central America. The locations of the springs and principal volcanoes are shown on figure 13. Thermal springs in Central America—Continued No. Tempera- Remarks and additional on fig. 13 Name or location ture of water (°C) references Thermal springs in Central America [Data chiefly from refs. 783, 800, 808, 809, 811. Location of unnumbered springs not identified] No. Tempera- Remarks and additional on fig. 13 Name or location ture of water (°C) references Costa Rica 1 Rincon de la Vieja volcano._ Hot 2 Hacienda la Cueva, near Liberia. Warm 3 Near Bagaces, 23 km south- 71 east of Liberia. (max) 4 Hornillos des Miravalles Hot 5 Muchucatale, 16 km southeast of Castillo. 38.8 6 On bank of Rio Pocosol, several km above its junction with Rio San Juan. Warm 7 Las Caftas, near head of Rio Avangares. Warm 8 On bank of Rio Pefta Blanca, 25 km above its junction with Rio Fortuna. Hot 9 Agua Caliente de la Trin-chera, on bank of Rio Barranca 8 km north of Esparto. Warm 10 Poas volcano Hot 11 On coast near Hafen Caldera. Warm 12 Near San Mateo, 50 km west of San Jos6. Warm 13 Ojo de Agua, 5 km south of Alajuela. Hot 14 San Pablo Turrubures, 40 51.5 km southwest of San Jos6. (max) 15 On or near Rio Grande: Salitral del Rayo Warm Agua Caliente de Can-grejal, 4 km west of Salitral del Rayo. Warm Near junction of Rio Virilli with Rio Grande. Warm Paso del Alumbre 60-66 16 Near Rio Atarrazu below its junction with Rio Candelaria. Tepid 17 San Antonio de Desampa-rados, 5 km southeast of San Jos6. 45.6-46.2 18 El Salitre, 2 km east of San Jos6. 29 19 Irazu volcano Hot 20 Turrialba volcano Hot 21 Near Rio Parita 36.6 (max) Hot 22 Near Salitral, 1.5 km south of Cartago. 23 Agua Caliente, 3 km south-southeast of Cartago. 50 24 San Cristobal, 10 km south-southwest of Cartago. 66-68 25 Near Orosi: Orosi Convent 34.5-51. 5 Hacienda Navarro 24. 5-38 26 Near Rio Macho 50-56 27 El General, 80 km southeast of San Jos6. 17-36 28 Near Pejivalle, on north side of mouth of Rio Diquis. 49-50 Mud pots on southwest flank and hot springs 8 km farther south. Ref. 813. Hot springs near Salitral and warm springs near Santa Ana. Solfataras in crater; also mud pots on southwest flank. Ref. 813. Water used locally. Do. Lake in lower crater; hot water and steam thrown to great heights at intervals of 12 to 20 min. Also boiling springs on flank of volcano. Refs. 21, 774, 804. Small flow from several springs. Water used locally. Water used for bathing. Ref. 779. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Several saline springs. Water used locally. Several saline springs. Small flow. Several springs issuing from Miocene sandstone. Principal chemical constituents: Ca, Cl. Water used for bathing. Deposit of tufa. Water is saline. Ref. 790. Springs, fumaroles, and solfataras on north slope. Refs. 21, 774, 804. Fumaroles and solfataras. Several springs. Water used locally. Several springs. Small deposit of iron oxide. Refs. 790, 822. Principal chemical constituents: CaCc3, NajSC>4, NaCl. Water used for bathing. Refs. 790,822. Several springs. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 822. Several springs. Total dissolved solids, 500 ppm. Principal chemical constituents: Ca, HCO3, SO4. Deposit of tufa. Water used for bathing. Ref. 822. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Small flow from several springs. Water is saline. Several springs issuing from Tertiary strata. Principal I chemical constituents: Na, I SO4, Cl. Costa Rica—Continued 29 North side of Pico Blanco, near Rfo Uren. 30 Near Rfo Jurquin........... ___ Coris....................... Hualcalillo Los Hervideros. Mount Hato Viejo, Rio Viejo Gorge. Near Rio La Paloma......... Warm Water used locally. Warm 51-61 23. 5; 34 28-46 70 Not developed. 4 springs issuing from sandstone. Principal chemical constituents: SO4, Cl. Large deposit of tufa. Ref. 812. 2 main springs. Total dissolved solids, 7,500 ppm. Large deposit of tufa. 3 springs. Principal mineral constituents: SO4, Cl. Ref. 812. Warm El Salvador [Data chiefly from refs. 786, 787, 798,800, 808, 809. For general information on ausoles of Ahuachapan area, see also refs. 789, 796, 801, 807, 819, 821] Near Tejutla pueblo 29-42 Hervideros de El Obrajuelo, 72-82 near Agua Caliente pueblo. [West border of El Paraiso 37 pueblo. {Bank of Rio Grande de San 45-58 Francisco, 2 km south of l El Paraiso pueblo. Ahuachap&n area: Playon de Salitre, 8 km 70 northeast of Ahoch- (max) a pan. Ausol Valdiviseo, 6 km northeast of Ahuacha- p&n. Playon de Ahuachapan, 3 km east of Ahuacha- p&n. Ausoles de Agua Shuca, 3 km southeast of Ahuachapan. Ausol de Barreal, north of Cerro San Lazaro. Ausol El Zapote, south- 95-98 east of "Cerro San Lazaro. Ausol La Labor, south- west of Cerro San Lazaro. Ausol San Jos6, 2 km 96 northwest of Laguna (max.) Verde volcano. Ausol San Carlos, 1 km 97 east of Ausol San JosS. Ausol Cerro Branco, 1 km 93 northwest of Laguna (max) Verde volcano. Ausol El Sauce, between 86-97 Ausol San Carlos and Ausol San Jos 5. Ausol Los Termopilas 93-97 Izalco volcano (active) Hot Laguna de Coatepeque, at Hot east base of Santa Ana vol- cano. Lake Chammico, at base of Hot Javal volcano. Ausol El Boqueron (Quezal- Warm tepeque), 16 km northwest of San Salvador. Ilopango volcano Hot Infiernillos on northeast 99 flank of San Vicente vol- (max) cano. Hervideros de Carolina, near 100 Rio Torola 3 km northwest (max) of Carolina. Bank of Rio Arautc, 2 km 50-59 northwest of El Rosario. 4 small springs. 2 main springs issuing from fracture in decomposed lava. Ref. 807. Water used locally. Several large springs. Water used locally. 3 springs feeding small lake. Combined flow 200-300 liters per second. Refs. 778, 806. 1 clear and several mud springs. Refs. 778, 8C6. Small lakes from which outflow is 220 liters per minute. Refs. 797, 799. Flow 20 liters per minute. Refs. 797, 799. 9 main springs and several vapor vents. Water is sulfurous. Ref. 806. Mud crater 6 meters in diameter. Noted for clouds of steam. Refs. 787, 806. Vapor vents and pools of boiling black mud. Refs. 791, 795, 806. Ref. 799. Springs of clear water, mud pools, and vapor vents. Ref. 799. Weak vapor vents. Ref. 799. Mud pools and vapor vents. 3 main gas vents issuing from decomposed lava. Deposits of sulfur. Refs. 778, 780. Vapor vents issuing from decomposed basalt. Refs. 778,780. Springs and vapor vents. Refs. 778, 780, 799. Many fumaroles. Refs. 778, 780. Springs along shore of small lake in crater. Ref. 823. Small springs along border of lake. Several springs in ravine. Refs. 778,780,807. Several springs on flank of subsidiary Santa Ana* volcano. Ref. 823. Gas and vapor jets and pools of acid mud. One, called El In-fiernillo, spouts boiling water. Deposits of sulfur. Refs. 778, 780, 795, 806, 807, 817, 819-821. Springs, including a geyser, and vapor vents. Several springs issuing from decomposed basic lava. Water used for bathing.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 65 Thermal springs in Central America—Continued No. Tempera- Remarks and additional on Name or location ture of references fig. 13 water (°C) El Salvador—Continued 14 Los Ausoles, 3 km northeast of Santa Rosa de Lima. Pozos Tibios, on margin of 89 (max) 37 Water used for bathing. 15 Rio Pasaquina near south border of Santa Rosa de Lima. Tecapa volcano: Laguna de Alegria .. Warm Sulfurous water in small crater El Tronador Hot lake. Refs. 789, 807, 819, 820. Fumarole having high pressure. 16 Falda volcano Hot Refs. 785 , 787, 817, 819, 820. Fumaroles and solfataras. 17 Infiernillos de Chinameca, at Hot 2 main steam vents (Hervedor 18 northwest base of Chinameca volcano. El Limbo volcano Hot and Boqueron): also lesser vents and mud pools. Free HjS. Deposits of pyrite crystals. Refs. 778, 799, 807. Fumaroles and solfataras. Ref. 19 San Miguel volcano. 57-90 807. Fumaroles around crater. De- 20 Laguna Agua Caliente, 7 km 96-98 posits of sulfur and alum. Refs. 778, 817. Springs and vapor vents near 21 northeast of Jucuaran. Conchagua volcano Hot border of lagoon. Ref. 786. Fumaroles and solfataras. 22 Plavita, at southeast base of 32-69 Springs and steam fumaroles Concnagua volcano. issuing along fracture line. Guatemala IData chiefly from refs. 800, 808, 809] i Salcaja, 8 km northeast of Quezaltenango. Hot Several springs. Water used locally. 2 Santa Maria volcano Hot Fumaroles and solfataras. 3 4 Almolonga, on Cerro Que-mado volcano 6 km southwest cf Quezaltenango. Zunil volcano, 15 km southeast of Quezaltenango: Hot 1 main spring and several fumaroles. Water used for bathing. Refs. 775, 778, 821. Las Fuentes Georginas.. 45 Total dissolved solids, 2,212 ppm. Principal chemical constituents Si03 (380 ppm):.Na (123 ppm); SO* (1.450ppm). Refs. 777, 7S9. Las Aguas Amargas 45 Total dissolved solids, 2,186 ppm Principal chemical constitu ents: Si03 (340 ppm): Na (106 ppm) SO4 (1,490 ppm). Refs. 777, 799. 5 Agua Caliente, near Lake Atitlan at north base of Atitlan volcano. Hot Springs and fumaroles: also fumaroles in main crater. Refs. 778, 821. 6 La Canoa, near Rio Monta-gua, 30 km southwest of Salama. Hot Water used locally. Ref. 775. 7 About 4 km from San Jos6, 20 km northeast of Guatemala City. Hot Large flow of very sulfurous water. Ref. 781. 8 Acatenango volcano Hot Fumaroles and solfataras. 9 El Fuego volcano Hot Fumaroles and solfataras. Ref. 778. 10 Lake Amatitlan Warm-hot Several springs near lakeshore. Much steam. Refs. 775, 780. 11 Pacaya (Pecul) volcano, 10 km southeast of Amatitlan. Hot Fumaroles and solfataras near the crater. Refs. 778, 780. Nicaragua [Data chiefly from refs. 800, 808, 809, 818] 1 Coseguina volcano Hot Fumaroles and solfataras. 2 El Viejo volcano 91 (max) 1 main spring and 3 craters with fumaroles. Ref. 773. 3 Chichigalpa volcano Hot Fumaroles and solfataras. Ref. 83. 4 Near Telica volcano: San Jacinto, at south base of volcano. Hot Several pools of varicolored clay and boiling water. Free H2S. Deposits of sulfur and various salts. Refs. 784, 796. Thick mud in ebullition. Ref. 784. Tisate, farther west. Hot 5 Axusco, 3 km south of Leon.. Tepid Large flow of water into large pool at bottom of ravine. 6 Momotombo volcano Hot Fumaroles and many solfataras. 7 Tipitapa, at outlet of Lake Managua. Boiling Large flow. Free HjS. Deposits of sulfur. Ref. 784. 8 Masaya-Nindiri volcano Warm Vapor vents. 9 Lago de Apoyo, near east base of Masaya-Nindiri volcano. Warm Small springs. Water used locally. Thermal springs in Central America—Continued No. on fig. 13 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Remarks and additional references Nicaragua—Continued 10 Ometepe (Concepcion) volcano, on island in Lake Nicaragua. Near Tottoa village Warm Hot Fumaroles and solfataras near the crater. Water used for cooking. Panama 1 2 Caldera on southeast flank of Chiriqui volcano. Agua de Salud, near Calobre village. Hot Warm Fumaroles and solfataras. Refs. 809, 815. Several springs. Ref. 815. WEST INDIES The West Indies consist of three main groups, or chains, of islands. The Bahama Islands in the north are mainly low coral islands in which no thermal springs have been reported. The Greater Antilles, consisting of Cuba, Hispaniola (Haiti and Dominican Republic), Jamaica, and Puerto Rico, are composed of various kinds of sedimentary and crystalline rocks and have thermal springs in a few places. The Lesser Antilles, in the southeast, form a curving line trending southeast and south toward the coast of South America, as shown on figure 14. The curving band of islands was considered by Suess3 to be divisible into three zones. The inner zone is formed by the Lesser Antilles, the middle zone embraces the Greater Antilles, and the outer zone includes the Bahamas and several islets farther east. The Greater Antilles generally are considered to be the upper parts of a submerged mountain chain which divides in Hispaniola, one branch extending through Cuba and the other through Jamaica. Cuba has mountainous regions in the extreme east, in the central part, and in the westernmost part, and there is much rolling to flat country between the uplands. The north coast is bordered largely by hilly lands, but much of the south coast is swampy. Both coasts are bordered by many islets and coral reefs. Metamorphic and igneous rocks (pre-Cretaceous?) form parts of the range that borders the south coast near the east end of the island. Cretaceous limestone underlies many areas, but the greater part of Cuba is underlain by early Tertiary limestone which is uplifted and folded in many areas. There is little evidence of volcanic activity. Thermal springs at several places in the Habana (Havana) area have been developed as resorts, but few others seem to be recorded. Cold mineral springs are more widespread, and several have been developed as resorts. 8 Suess, Edward, 1904, The face of the earth : v. 1, p. 542-552.05 05 Figobe 13.—Central America showing location of thermal springs and principal volcanoes. Chiefly from refs. 806, 808, 809, and 818. THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD82" 78° 74° 70° 66° 62° Figure 14.—Part of the West Indies showing location of thermal springs in the Antilles. Cuba from refs. 832 and 834 ; Haiti from refs. 829 and 830; Jamaica from refs. 839 and 8,40; Puerto Rico from ref. 837; and Lesser Antilles chiefly from refs. 869-878. OS DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS68 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Hispaniola is separated from the eastern extremity of Cuba by a passage about 60 miles wide. The island comprises the republics of Haiti and Santo Domingo (Dominican Republic) and is largely mountainous. There are three nearly parallel east-west ranges. The northern range rises steeply from the coast; the central range is broader, with gentler slopes; the southern range also rises steeply, but there is a wider lowland along its eastern part. Between the three ranges are considerable areas of plain and lowland, and a lake of considerable size is in the southern part of the island. A wide central east-west core of pre-Tertiary igneous and metamorphic rocks extends throughout the island. This core is bordered chiefly by Tertiary deposits of Miocene age, but in the west it is bordered in part by Cretaceous sedimentary rocks. Most of the lowlands are underlain by Quaternary deposits, including a large area of coralline beds in the extreme northwest. An area of Mesozoic basalt forms uplands southward from Port-au-Prince and also farther west, but there is no evidence of Tertiary or later volcanic rocks. An early study by Tippenhauer (ref. 843) indicated that the lava might be of post-Tertiary age, but later studies class it as Upper Cretaceous. In the western part of the island four localities of thermal springs are well known, and one warm spring has been reported in the eastern part. Jamaica lies about 90 miles south of the eastern part of Cuba and has a central east-west range and subsidiary ridges branching from it. The mountains are highest in the east and merge westward with hills of a plateau region that occupies two-thirds of the island. There are some wide plains along the south coast. Schist and other metamorphic rocks are exposed in the eastern mountains, but most of the uplands are of Upper Cretaceous limestone which is generally much folded and extensively overlain by lower Tertiary marl and limestone. These rocks cover the greater part of Jamaica in large areas of hills and valleys. In the northwestern part there is much sinkhole country. Shallow-water Miocene and Pliocene deposits underlie most of the coastal lowlands, and geologically Recent uplift has produced coastal terraces and raised beaches. Tuffs and other volcanic rocks indicate early Tertiary volcanic activity. There were some plutonic intrusions in Oligocene time, but no recent volcanism. Thermal and cold mineral springs issue from the older rocks in a few places. Puerto Rico, about TO statute miles beyond the east extremity of Hispaniola, has a main east-west mountain range which lies somewhat south of the median part of the island. At each end of this range the mountains descend steeply to the sea. The south flank also descends steeply to a belt of coastal plain. The north flank of the range is less steep, and numerous spurs descend to a belt of lowland. Thermal springs have been reported in only three places, all on the southern coastal plain. The Lesser Antilles extend from a few miles east of Puerto Rico eastward and southward to near the coast of South America. (See fig. 14.) Some of these islands are considered to be related geologically to the mainland, as they are composed of schist, crystalline limestone, and other ancient rocks similar to those found in northeastern Venezuela. In other islands the older rocks are overlain by Cretaceous and later marine sedimentary strata, similar to those found on the mainland. Several smaller islands are composed largely or entirely of Tertiary to Quaternary volcanic rocks. Saba Island, near the northwest end of the Lesser Antilles, has an area of about 5 square miles. It is formed by a single volcanic cone that rises to an altitude of 2,800 feet. The town of Saba is in the old crater and is reached by steps cut in the mountainside. St. Eustatius Island, about 8 square miles in area, is composed of several volcanic hills, but no thermal springs have been reported. St. Christopher (St. Kitts) is about 23 miles long. It has a central volcanic range and considerable areas of lowland. Nevis, which is separated from St. Christopher by a passage only 2 miles wide, is almost circular, about 8 miles in diameter, and is formed by a single volcanic cone that rises with moderate slopes to an altitude of 3,200 feet. Montserrat, about 40 miles farther southeast, is 11 miles long and about 7 miles wide. It is composed of a group of volcanic peaks, of which Soufriere Mountain is the highest. Guadeloupe, 40 miles farther southeast, consists of a high western part of old eruptive rocks over-lain by Recent volcanic materials and of a low eastern part of Tertiary deposits of conglomerate and shell limestone. Dominica is separated from Guadeloupe by a passage 25 miles wide. It has a north-south range of high mountains, including Morne Diablotin in the north and Boiling Lake on the side of a mountain in the south. Martinique is composed chiefly of volcanic mountains. A group of mountains in the north is dominated by Mount Pelee. There is another group in the south, and a belt of upland connects the two groups. St. Lucia is largely mountainous and steep slopes rise directly from the coast, but it also has large areas of cultivated plains. In the southwestern part of the island are two pitons, which are conspicuous pyramidal peaks that are not a definite part of the main mountain system. A few miles east of them is the Soufriere in a depression that sometimes has been called a volcanic crater.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 69 St. Vincent has a central range of volcanic hills that culminate in Soufriere volcano in the north. Grenada is the southernmost of the truly volcanic islands of the Lesser Antilles. It has a north-south mountain range, considerable lowland in the southeastern and northwestern parts, and a raised limestone beach at the north end. The oldest rocks exposed are of schist, porphyry, and sandstone, which are overlain by much basalt. In the central part of the island is Grand Etang Lake, which occupies 13 acres in an old crater where a sanatorium and health resort have been established. In the northeastern part is the larger Lake Antoine, also in an old crater near sea level. Trinidad is formed for the most part of three nearly parallel ranges that trend north of east and two inter- vening wide areas of lower lands. The Northern Range borders the coast, where high cliffs rise from the sea. The greater part of this range consists of the Caribbean series of schistose rocks, which probably are of Mesozoic and Paleozoic ages. Also, there are a few small areas of marmorized and siliceous limestone of Jurassic and Cretaceous ages, and one small area of basic intrusive rock. The Central and Southern Ranges are underlain by marine sedimentary strata of Eocene through Pliocene ages; Cretaceous sandstone and shale are exposed in a few places. The available information on thermal springs in the West Indies is summarized in the table below. The locations of the thermal springs are shown on figure 14. Thermal springs and wells in the West Indies (Greater and Lesser Antilles) [Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (liters Total dissolved Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references fig. H water (°C) per minute) solids (ppm) Cuba 1 San Diego de los Bafios 34-38 2 San Vicente, 3 km north of Vinales. Warm 3 San Antonio de los Bafios... Warm 4 Guanabacoa (Santa Rita)... 17.5-26 5 Santa Maria del Rosario 19-22 6 22-25 7 San Miguel de Guamacaro.. Tepid 8 9 Las Delicias de San Antonio, 2 km north of Santiago de Cuba. 22 10 Sante Fe, on east side of Isla 28 de Pinos (Isle of Pines). [Data chiefly from refs. 832, 834, 835] 875 1,280 CaCOa (141); Mg (HCOa)a (230); CaSO« (808); free HaS. CaS04 (143); NaaS04 (39); CaS (679); free HaS, COa. 13 1,378 Mg (HC03), (323); CaSO) Tertiary limestone and (hottest) (197); MgSO. (261). sandstone; serpentine. 6 • 1,440 CaSO, (147); NaiSO. (406); Volcanic tuff near serpen- NaCl (389). tine. 25 675-772 CaCOj, MgCOs, CaCOi, NaCl. Serpentine 100 780 10 1,722 Mg (HCOs), (273); NaHCOs Tertiary sandstone (636); NajSOr (196); free COs. CaC03, CaS04, CaCla, NaCl, SiOi. Dominica 3 main springs (FI Tigre, El Templado, La Paila) on bank of Rio Caiguanabo. Water has fetid odor. Used for drinking and bathing. Refs. 831, 836, 844. 6 main and 2 small springs. Bathing resort. Several springs. Bathing resort. Ref. 836. 1 main and 3 smaller springs. Resort. Refs. 828, 844. 4 main springs. Resort. Ref. 828. 3 main springs (Paila, Castilla, Tigre). Bathing resort. Refs. 828, 844. 3 main springs. Water is alkaline; used as table water. Shallow wells. Water used for bathing. Shallow wells. Water used tor table water and bathing. Several springs. Resort. 1 North of Portsmouth Warm Small 2 Slope of Morne Diablotin, near Portsmouth. Warm Small 3 Ravine d’Or Warm Small 4 Near Laudat, north of Grande Soufriere Mountain. Grande Soufriere Mountain: Warm Small Boiling Lake... 88 Large 5 Middle Lake 40-80 Large Western Crater, 0.5 mile southwest of Boiling Lake. 83-96 Large 6 •Wotten Waven, 1.25 miles east of Roseau. 83; 96. 5 Large 7 East of Soufriere village 48-92 Moderately large [Data chiefly from ref. 874] Dominican Republic (Santo Domingo) Several springs. Water is sul-furous. Several springs. Water is sul-furous. Ref. 836. Do. Do. Lake in crater, 60 meters in diameter; water usually turbulent; contains sulfur in suspension. Much vapor. Refs. 847, 853, 856, 863, 864, 867. Lake in crater fed by 1 spouting spring and sev eral other springs. Deposit of sulfur. Ref. 867. 4 groups of springs; also large mud spring. Refs. 856, 864, 867. 1 mud spring, 1 sulfur spring; also several small warm springs. Several springs; also fumaroles. Deposit of sulfur. 1 35 km southwest of Azua___ Tepid 230 1 main and several smaller springs. Water tastes and smells of sulfur. Ref. 843.70 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in the West Indies (Greater and Lesser Antilles)—Continued No. on fig. 14 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (PPin) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references Grenada [All data from ref. 869] 1 44. 4 Ca, Na, K, HCO3 2 Hampsack, east of Tufton Hall. 24. 4-48. 9 7 springs. Water from hottest spring can ies clay in suspension. Several springs. Free H2S. 3 Warm Small Guadeloupe [Data chiefly from ref. 876] l Soufriere Mountain: 85-98 3 main fumaroles along a fissure. Refs. 836, 850, 852, 856. Water contains sulfur in suspension. Also several fumaroles. Refs. 835, 850, 852, 856. 2 Lac du Soufre, on upper part of north slope. Lower part of north slope. 3 76-89 4 95 852, 856. Several fumaroles. Refs. 836, 850, 852, 856. Several springs (1 spouting) and mud pools. Source of Jaune Matylise stream. Refs. 850, 852, 856. 5 80-90 Large Mountain. Haiti [Data chiefly from refs. 829, 843] 1 2 EauxBoynes (Terre Neuve), 30 km northwest of Gon-aives. 45-49 31. 5-42 200 Small 2,000 Small 403 1,214 12,684 Ca (51); Na+K (56); HCOs (277); SO, (68); Cl (36). Ca (118); Na+K (223); HCOj (260); SOi (62); Cl (464); free HiS. Ca (397); Mg (299); Na+K (3,930); HCOs (610); SO. (872); Cl (6,627); free H,S. Faulted upper Eocene limestone. Faulted (?) Oligocene limestone. Faulted Miocene strata 6 springs. Former sanatorium and military hospital. Refs. 826, 827 830 5 springs. Ref. 826, 827, 830. 2 main springs. Possibly contaminated bvsea water. Refs. 826, 830, 842, 843. Ref. 842. 3 4 Sources Puantes (Arca-haie), west coast at foot of Mount Terrible. Grand River of J6r6mie: Les Irois (Anse d’Hain-ault), near head of Right Fork. Tiburon (La Cahouane), near head of Left Fork. J6r6mie (Dame-Marie, Dalmarie), 8 Jrm downstream from Tiburon. 32.7 34; 37.5 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 842. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 826, 842. 35-40 Small 515 Ca (26); Na+K (135); HCOs (93); SO. (117); Cl (121). Jamaica [Data chiefly from refs. 840, 841] 1 Near head of Cabarita River. 2 Bank of White River, in Hanover Parish. 3 Quebec Estate, in St. Mary Parish. 4 Bank of branch of Back River, in Portland Parish. 5 Golden Dale Estate in Port- land Parish. 6 Bed of east branch of Guard (Guava) River, in Portland Parish. 7 Near mouth of Priestman’s River. 8 Bath of St. Thomas, the Apostle, in gorge near Sulphur River. 9 Milk River Bath, 2 miles upstream from river mouth. 10 Shore of Manati Bay....... 11 Port Henderson, near en- trance to Kingston Harbour. Warm Warm Hot Warm Hot 55 Hot 52-55 Black shale ____do..... Ca, C03 SO4 Manganese veins. Water is chalybeate. Heat may be due to decomposition of pyrite. Heat may be due to decomposition of pyrite. Water is sulfurous. Water jets from riverbed; contains Fe, Mg. 230 441 CaS04 (71); NaS04 (91); NaCl (197). Slate and limestone (pre-Cretaceous) . Water is saline. Several springs. 833, 836, 839. Resort. Refs. 33 29,650 CaClj (1,500); MgClj, (4,120); NajS04 (3,100); NaCl (20,770). Miocene limestone. 26 Warm Small Issues a few feet above river level. Water used for bathing. Refs. 836, 838, 839. Several springs. W'ater is saline. Ref. 839. 2 springs. Ref. 839. Mount Pel6e: 1 3 miles southwest of main crater. 2 2 miles south-southwest of main crater. Martinique Small Refs. 851, 861, 868, 877. Crater having area of 2 acres. Refs. 851, 855, 857, 861, 868, 877.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 71 Thermal springs and wells in the West Indies (Greater and Lesser Antilles)—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (liters Total dissolved Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references fig. 14 water (°C) per minute) solids (ppm) Montserrat [Data chiefly from ref. 866] 1 Hot Pond, near coast about 1 mile northwest of Plymouth. Mulcair soufriere, on east Cow Hill, in Tar (Tow?) River district: Hot Small Several springs feeding pond. Refs. 866, 872. Sulfurous vapor. Ref. 866. 2 3 Small 2 springs; also vapor vents. Vapor vents. Large group of vapor vents. Vapor vents. Ref. 865. Several vapor vents. 2 main vapor vents. 13 main springs, 1 spouting. Refs. 862, 867, 872. 4 Hot 5 Hot 6 Hot 7 8 9 34.2-93.2 Nevis 1 0.5 mile south of Charleston.. 2 0.25 mile south of farm estate. 36 50 (max) Moderately large Several springs. Water is sul-furous. Used for bathing. Refs. 836, 838, 873. Several solfataras. Refs. 836, 873. Puerto Rico [Data chiefly from ref. 837] 1 Quintana, 15 km north of Ponce. 34 791 Ca (85); Na (265); SOt (125); Cl (163). Sedimentary strata near lava. W'ater used for bathing. Ref 836. 2 Bafios de Coamo 44 1,604 Ca (420); Na (149); SOt (609); Cl (132); CaCO, (18). Faulted conglomerate and volcanic tuff, near post-Eocene volcanic crater. Issue 50 ft above bed of Coamo River. Bathing resort. Ref. 836 3 Virella 30 5,827 Ca (1,688); Na (819); SOt (460); Cl (1,358); CaCOi (1,065). Coastal plain deposits Water is unpotable. Saba Ref. 875. 54.2 Small Contaminated by sea water. 875. Saint Christopher (Saint Kitts) 1 Near and on Mount Misery. 93. 2-95.8 Small Lava and volcanic tuff____ Springs, fumaroles, and solfataras. Refs. 838, 856, 867, 873. Saint Lucia 1 La Soufriere (Qualibou), 22-92. 5 Moderately 3 miles south-southwest large of Soufriere village. Decomposed volcanic 10 main springs, 6 pools, and vapor rocks. vents in area of 3 acres. Much HiS. Small deposit cf sulfur. Refs. 836, 838, 849, 856, 864, 871. 1 La Soufriere Mountain. 2 Head of Larikai River valley. [Petit Wallibou Valley______ 3 1 [Rouseau Valley - _......... Saint Vincent [Data chiefly from ref. 878] Hot Hot Hot Hot Solfataras in crater and fumaroles on east slope of - mountain. Water is clear to black; highly malodorous. Refs. 838, 846 , 847, 855, 857, 863, 878. Small fumaroles. Deposits of sulfur. Refs. 870, 878. Small fumaroles. Deposits of sulfur. Ref. 847. Small fumaroles. Deposits of sulfur. Ref. 870. Trinidad | Plaisauce, 1 mile north of 43 600 226 SiOj (28): Na+K (76); HCO, Faulted Tertiary strata.. I Pointe-i-Pierre. 1 (146); Cl (54). Stopped flowing in 1941 when deep water wells were drilled nearby. Refs. 860, 879. -6 735-914 0-65-72 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD SOUTH AMERICA ARGENTINA The ancient granite and other crystalline rocks exposed in the Andes Mountains and the associated tablelands of northwestern Argentina are overlain in part by Tertiary and Quaternary volcanic rocks. The region includes many volcanic mountains and extensive saline flats in the tablelands between the main ranges. Farther south, the eastern slopes of the Andes are largely of marine Paleozoic and Mesozoic strata. Folded continental Tertiary beds underlie the lower slopes and extend eastward beneath great plains that reach to and beyond the Parana River. The lower lands are covered by Quaternary deposits, but some hills of ancient base- ment rocks rise above the plains. Misiones Territory, in the extreme northeastern part of Argentina, is within a great region of Mesozoic basalt and intrusive rocks that includes much of southern Brazil. The arid uplands of Chubut and Santa Cruz Territories in the far south are underlain mainly by ancient crystalline and metamorphic rocks, but these are covered in many areas by Cretaceous and Tertiary continental deposits and Quaternary gravel. The locations of thermal springs in Argentina are shown on figures 15 and 16. Sketch maps of the Rio Hondo and Copahue areas, which are noted for their thermal springs, are presented on figures 17 and 18. The available information on the numerous thermal springs in Argentina is summarized in the table below. Thermal springs and wells in Argentina [ Data chiefly from refs. 920, 929, and Geological map of South America, scale 1:5,000,000 (Geol. Soc. America, 1950). Principal chemical constituents expressed in parts per million. Locations of unnumbered springs not identified] No. on fig. 15 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 23 El Oratorio, at Guera....... Rio Jordan, 30 km southeast of Tilcara. San Lucas, 10 km east of Rio Jordan. Caimancito, 8 km northeast of railway station. Quinta, 20 km east of Yuto railway station. Volcan, 1 km west of railway station. Near Quemado railway station. Palo a Pique, on bank of Rio San Francisco. Arroyo el Rabon............ El Palmar, 4 km south of Rabon. Chorro................... Los Reyes, 20 km west of Jujuy. San Roque, 12 km southeast of Jujuy. Angosto de Cachipunco..... Agua Salada, 3 km west of San Antonio. Near San Antonio.......... El Carmen (El Molino), 26 km south of Jujuy. Agua Caliente de El Molino, 31 km southeast of Perico railway junction. Puerta del Chanar, in Jujuy Pozo Moralito, in Jujuy. Pozo Pena, in Jujuy.... Near Antuco............... Agua Caliente, on border of Salina de Antofalla. Salina de Aguas Calientes, at south base of Cerro Aguas Calientes. Vega de Agua Caliente, near Rio Agua Caliente. Inchachuli, in Los Andes. Pompeya, in Los Andes. Rio Tugle, in Los Andes. Tucomar, in Los Andes. Rio Lipeo (Lipion)... 35 36 48 41-59 38 41 40-45 22 20-43 25-49.5 34- 53 28.5-52 19 31.5; 40 24 27 28 22-30 21 40 40 20-35 Warm Warm Warm 45-46 38-50 38-53 35- 63 Warm Small Large Large Large Moderately large Moderately large 500 830 372 444 Na, SO4, Cl; free ELS- Na, S04.............. Na, S04, Cl.......... Quaternary lava...... Folded Tertiary strata. ___do................ .do. Ca, HCOi.......... Ca, Na, HCO»; free H2S. .do. 13,936 (hottest) 1,924 Large Moderately large Large Moderately large Large Large Small Moderately large Large Large 3,577 (hottest) 838 (coolest) 895 (hottest) 424 970 3,043 226 208 207-340 100 Small Small Small 21,030 50 Small 4,180 4,840 2,736 422 Lava(?) near Precambrian rock. Folded Tertiary strata__ Na, HCOi, Cl. .do. Na, Ca, Na, Na, Ca, Na, Ca, Ca, Na, SO4..... SO4..... SO4...- HC03... Na, SO4-. Tertiary strata near Tertiary lava. ____do................... Upper Cretaceous strata.. Tertiary trachyte overlying Paleozoic strata. Tertiary strata.......... HCO3, SO4, Cl.. Na, HCOs, SO4- Na, HCO3____ HC03________ Tertiary strata overlying Upper Cretaceous deposits. Tertiary strata__________ .do.. .do.. .do.. Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl. Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl____________ Na, HC03, SO4, Cl............ CaO (682); SO3 (1,023); NaCl (14,909). Probably Tertiary lava. ____do................ ____do................ .do.. Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl. NaCl (2,312).......- NaCl (4,080)_________ NaCl (1,355)_________________________ CaO (40); C 02 (185); NaCl (101); FejOs; free H2S. Devonian slate.. Water is slightly saline. Used for bathing. Water used for bathing. Water contains 28.7 ppm of Al. Used for bathing. 4 main springs. Analytical data for spring having temperature of 57° C. Water used for bathing. 1 main and several smaller springs. Water used for bathing. 2 main and 4 smaller springs. Water contains sulfur in suspension. Used for bathing. 3 drilled wells (Quemado, Pefia, MoralitoL Water is strongly saline. Used for bathing. 2 main springs. Water used for bathing. 6 main and several s mailer springs. Water used for bathing. 5 main springs. Water used for bathing. 4 main springs. Water used for bathing. 5 springs in 2 groups (Los Reyes and El Bajo). Bathing resort. Water used for bathing. 2 main springs. Small deposits of sulfur. Water used for bathing. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. Rises in large pool. Much gas. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. 7 main springs. Bathing resort. Flowing well. Do. 3 drilled wells. Several springs. Water is saline. Do. Do. 4 flowing wells. 4 flowing wells. Water used for bathing. 4 flowing wells. 4 main springs. Water contains 20 ppm of Fe203+Al203. Used for bathing.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 73 Thermal springs and wells in Argentina—Continued No. on fig. 15 31 Name or location Fuente de El Sauce (Parai-so), 10 km northwest of Campo Santo. Termas de Inti (Aguas Cali-entes del Molino), 18 km northeast of Giiemes. Luracatao.................. Near Juramento railway station. Near Lumbrera railway station. Ojo de Agua, 7 km southeast of Galpon village. Rosario de la Frontera, at base of Sierra de la Candelaria 10 km southeast of Rosario, in Salta: Agua Salada Alta....... Silicosa............... Sulfurosa______________ Ferruginosa............ Several others_________ Ceibal (Puesto de Aguas), 20 km east of Candelaria. Banos de Fleming, in Salta. Cuchiyaco, in Salta.... Inti and Porongal, in Salta. Quebradade Luingo, in Salta. Agua Salada de Timbo, 25 km south-southeast of Trancas. Las Cejas, 30 km east of Tucuman. Near south base of Agua Caliente Peak. Villa Vil.................. Cura Fierro, 2 km southwest of Villa Vil. Llampa, 10 km south-southwest of Villa Vil. Nacimientos de Hualfin, 8 km east of Llampa. La Colpa, 10 km southwest of Llampa. Agua de Dionisio, 30 km southeast of Villa Vil. Fuente de Vis-Vis and Nacimiento de Vis-Vis. Choya de Andalaga (Yaco-chuyo). CJ6naga, on bank of Rio Haulfln. Fiambala.................. Suriyaco, at border of saline flat. Chanampas................ Las Higueritas, 15 km southwest of Tinogasta. Adentro and Palmas Viejas, in Catamarca. Saugil, in Catamarca...... Along Rio Hondo (see also, fig. 18): Inti-Yacu............. Las Termas... Condor-Huasi. Totora Yacu.. Atacama...... Trigo-Chacra........... Alto de las Gatitas____ Atacama (Vichy) and Isca Yacu. Near Lavalle railway station. Remate Hill, in Santiago del Estero. Agua Caliente.............. Santa Terezita (Mazan), 15 km southeast of Agua Caliente. Fuente de El Chocoy, near Famatina. 40 km northeast of La Rioja. Temperature of water (°C) 18-31 22-30 47 34- 38 Warm 35- 50 89 62 84 80 28-94 22-28 29 52 80 Tepid 20.7; 32 Warm 55-64 21 30 37-39 27 24 34-38 19 30 54-58 34 25-31 21 38-42 31 (max) 20-35 20-30 31 29. 5-35. 5 Warm 60 35-37 27 (max) 23 Flow (liters per minute) 300 Small Small Small Moderately large Small Moderately large Small Small Large 27 Moderately large Small Small Large Moderately large Moderately large Moderately large Moderately large Large Large 390 400 Moderately large Moderately large Large Moderately large Total dissolved solids (ppm) 9.504 (h attest) 1,770 26,090 980 1,154 1,320 207 (hottest) 317,000 High 903 (hottest) 4,934 1,889 1,144 (hottest) 2,247 1,943 1,225 1,220 393 480 High Low Low 370 500-572 Low 417-572 1,200 Principal chemical constituents Na, SO<, Cl; free H2S, CH<........ Ca, Na, HCO3, SOi, SiOj (24)... CaClj, NaCl....................... SOj (96); NaCl (284); SiOj (40).. . Ca, Na, HCO3__ Ca, Na, HCO3.. Na, HCOs, S04, Cl. S03 (10,400); NaCl (299,300). Na, HCOs, Cl.. Na, HCO3....... Na, HCOs; free COa- Na, HCOs....... Na, HCOs....... Na, HCOs; much free COs. Na, SO4, Cl. Na, SO4, Cl- Na, SO4..... Na, SO4 Cl— Na, HCOs... Na, HCOs--. Na, HCOs... Na, HCOs... Ca, Na, SO4, Cl.. SiOs (30); Na (93); K (27); COs (70); SOi (80); Cl (50). Na, HCOs, SO4, Cl. Ca, Na, SO4, Cl. Na, HCOs- Na, HCOs. Associated rocks Tertiary limestone. Tertiary and Upper Cretaceous strata. Precambrian(?) rock..... Tertiary and Upper Cretaceous strata. Cretaceous (?) strata. . Faulted Cretaceous marl and limestone. Precambrian(?) rock..... Tertiary strata overlying Precambrian rock. Quaternary deposits_____ Tertiary and Jurassic lava. Pliocene strata......... -do.. ..do.. -do_. .do_. -do_. Precambrian crystalline rock. ---do.................. ..do.. Granite............ Quaternary deposits.. ----do.............. Tertiary strata overlying Precambrian rock. Tertiary strata. ----do......... -do. -do_. .do_. -do.. -do.. .do_. -do_. Quaternary and Tertiary strata. ----do................. Probably Precambrian intrusive rock. Precambrian (?) strata_ Remarks and additional references 5 springs. Water contains 14 ppm ofFe. Bathing resort. Ref. 927. 7 main springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 906, 920, 927. Water contains 6 ppm of F. Ref. 910. Several springs. Water is sul-furous. Ref. 919. Several springs. Water contains 16 ppm of FesOs + AI2O3. Used for bathing. Refs. 919, 923. Water is radioactive. Used for bathing. Combined flow 420 liters per minute. Refs. 896, 904, 919,920,923. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 908. 2 flowing wells. 4 main springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 908. Medicinal drinking water. Ref. 908. Do. 4 main and several smaller springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 908. Water deposits sodium bicarbonate. Used for bathing. Ref. 908. Several springs. Medicinal drinking water. Refs. 889, 908. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 908. Water used for domestic purposes. Ref. 908. Water used for bathing. Ref. 908. Water used locally. Water used for bathing. Do. Do. 20 springs on island in river. Refs. 881, 892. Several springs. Bathing resort. Ref. 881. Several springs. Ref. 881. Do. 4 main springs. Refs. 881, 892. Several springs. Ref. 881. Do. 3 main springs and several smaller ones. Water used for bathing. 3 flowing wells. Ref. 917. Water used for bathing. 6 main springs. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Water contains 30 ppm of FeCOs; much ocher deposited. Ref. 907. Water collected in reservoir for drinking by cattle.74 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Argentina—Continued No. on fig. 15 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) 55 El Saladillo de los Colorados. 34 Moderately 4,560 large 56 Surgente de Copai de Guay- 22 Large 8,270 apa, 15 km southwest of Patquia. 26 57 Pismauta, 8 km west of 40; 45 400; 356 Jachal. 58 Quebrada de Huaco (Hedi- 21-25 100 2,300- onda). 2,868 59 27.1 ately high 60 Near bank of Rfo Blanco 50 8, 674 61 25. 5 62 Banos de la Laja, 28 km 24-27 Moderately 6,610 north-northeast of San large Juan. 63 Banos de El Salado (San 21. 3-27 240 9, 234 Bernardo), 5 km east of Bafios de la Laja. 64 northeast of San Juan. 65 23. 2 San Juan. 66 Banos del Inca (Puente del 35-38 Large 16,350 Inca), near Trans-Andean Railway and border of Chile. 67 Canada del Monte (Carri- 21.5 Large 500 zal de Arriba). 68 26. 4-36. 8 1,200 69 La Pena (Cascada), south of 21 Moderately 1, 604 Rio La Pefia. larre 70 Higuerita de Callao 18. 5; 20. 2 Large 1,056 71 Zapata, 15 km northeast of 22.4 Large 980 Mendoza. 72 Borbollon, 14 km northeast 24.5; 25 6,000 1,061 of Mendoza. 73 Las Totoras, about 10 km 19.3 Moderately 871 northeast of Mendoza. (max) large 74 Cacheuta, on right bank of 35. 6-50.1 Large 1,540 Rfo Mendoza. 75 Alto Verde, 15 km north of 23.4 Moderately 334 Tunuyan. large 76 Banos de Capis and Serafim 26 Large 410 Dias, 15-20 km northeast of San Carlos. 77 Las Pefias 19 Moderately 5,970 78 Agua Poca 29 Small 620 79 El Salado 29 Large 7,900 80 La Vigorosa 20.5 Large 12,260 81 Paloma, 2 km southwest of 21.4 Moderately 2,780 Vigorosa spring. large 82 Arroyo del Tigre 30.4 Large 578 (max) 83 Cerro Bola, in bed of Rfo 19 Large 4, 840 Canada Seca. 84 Los Burros 21.2 Large 520 (max) 85 Sosneado 31; 33 24,000 10,205 86 east of Sosneado village. 87 Volcan Peteroa (Banos de 20.3-49. 5 Large 640 Azufre), at east base of the volcano. 88 Aguas Amarillas 20 Large 1,030 89 Peralito, in canyon of Rfo 32.5-46 Large 42,254 Salado. (hottest) 90 Los Molles, 2 km below Per- 36-49. 5 Large 55,100 alito springs. (hottest) 91 La Kiki, on left side of Rio 22 Small 2,966 Salado 12 km east of Los Molles. 92 Alfalfalito, on left side of Rio 26; 35. 5 Moderately 832 Salado, 18 km east of Los large (hottest) Molles. 93 La Vista, 33 km southeast of 25 Moderately 11,370 Las Molles. large 94 Cajon Grande (Companario) 51 Large 1,300 (max) Principal chemical constituents Na, SO4, Cl. Na, SO4, Cl. NaHCOs.............. Na, SO4; free HiS___ Na, SO4; much free H2S. Na, SO4, Cl; freeHaS NaCl (6,327) Na, S04, Cl; free H2S Ca (HCOs>2 (397); Mg (HC03)2 (350); CaSOt (418); MgSO, (523); Na2S04 (766); K2SO4 (492); NaCl (6,329). Ca (1,028); Na (5,552); HC03 (743); SO4 (1,838); Cl (7,100). Na, SO4................ NaHCOa (876); Na2S 04 (309); KC1 (126); free COj. Na, SO4..... Na, HCO3, SO4 Ca (108); Na (183); SO4 (468); Cl (121). Na, K, SO4........................... Ca (111); Na (125); HCOa (50); SO4 (408); Cl (99) Si03 (48); Ca (131); Na (387); HCOs (97); SO4 (525); Cl (368). Ca, Na, SO4........................ Na+K (62); HCO* (49); S04 (130). Na (1,825); HCO3 (1,229); Cl (870). Na, SO4 --.......-.........-....... Na (2,845); SO4 (1,059); Cl (3,403). Na (4,789); HCO3 (1,258); Cl (5,254); free C02. Na, SO4............................ Na, SO4, Cl. Ca (500); Na (363); S04 (3,265); Fe (58); A1 (115); Mn (44). Na (149); SO4 (155)................... Ca (972); Na (3,127); HCOs (218); SO4 (2,184); Cl (3,690); much free HjS. Na, HCOa Ca (293); HCO, (836); SO4 (460); free H,S. Ca (1,210); Na (15,176); HC03 (146); SO4 (2,644); Cl (22,365). Ca (1,324); Na (21,785); HCO3 (113); SO4 (2,930); Cl (29,900). Ca (625); Na (163); HCO, (113); SO4 (1,636); Cl (167); much free H,S. Ca (70); Na (277); HCO3 (45); Cl (389); free H2S. Ca (780); Na (3,103); HCO, (158); SO4 (2,134); Cl (4,963); free H2S. Na, SOS Cl____________________________ Associated rocks Precambrian(?) strata. ____do............. Paleozoic strata___ Paleozoic limestone. Tertiary(?) deposits. Probably Jurassic lava__ Tertiary strata_________ ____do................... do. Quaternary and Tertiary strata. Quaternary deposits over-lying Paleozoic strata. Jurassic lava and Paleozoic limestone. Mesozoic or Paleozoic strata. Tertiary strata overlying Permian strata. Water may rise from Devonian graywacke. Tertiary strata__________ Tertiary strata overlying T riassicor Permian s'ra'a. Quaternary and Tertiary strata. Quaternary and Tertiary strata. ....do................... Granitic rock............ Folded Tertiary strata___ ____do................... ____do................... ----do................... Permian strata__________ Triassic or Permian strata ....do___________________ Upper Permian strata____ Jurassic volcanic rock__ Paleozoic strata........ Tertiary volcanic rock _.. Quaternary deposits_____ Quaternary lava_________ Carboniferous schist_____ Lower Cretaceous strata. _ ____do__................. Upper Cretaceous strata.. do ___do.................... Tertiary volcanic rock overlying Lower Cretaceous strata. Remarks and additional references 1 main spring and several small flowing wells. Flowing well. Water used for drinking by cattle. Water used for bathing. 2 main springs. Water contains much Fe203 and AI2O3. Pef. 912. Several springs. Deposits of sulfur. Water used for bathing. Ref. 905. Water used locally. 3 main springs. Bathing resort. Ref. 928. Water used for bathing. Ref. 928. Water is saline. 2 main and several smaller springs. Free H2S. Water used for bathing. 5 main springs near Bridge of Incas, a natural bridge. Resort. Refs. 886, 891, 895, 899, 904, 911, 914, 915, 918. Water used for bathing and irrigation. 2 groups of 5 springs each. Water bottled and sold. Bathing resort. Refs. 882, 883, 914. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Bathing resort. Several flowing wells 25-30 meters deep. Water used for bathing and irrigation. 2 springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Several springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. 4 main springs. Water is radioactive. Used for bathing. Refs. 891, 913, 921. Water used for bathing. 2 groups of springs. Water used for bathing and irrigation. 2 main springs. Deposits of salt and ocher. Ref. 925. Water contains 7 ppm of Br. Used for bathing. Water used for bathing. Ref. 925. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. Ref. 925. 4 springs. Water used for irrigation. 2 main springs. Water contains 14 ppm of Al. Deposit of sulfur. Bathing resort. Water is potable. 8 main springs. Analytical data for spring having temperature of 38°C. Water contains 8 ppm of Fe. Bathing resort. Deposits of sulfur. 6 springs. Bathing resort. 4 main springs. Bathing resort 1 main spring. Deposit of tufa. Water used for bathing. 2 springs 2 km apart. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Water used for bathing. Many springs in area of 600 sq mi. Deposits of salt and ocher. Water contains 12 ppm of Fe. Used for bathing.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 75 Thermal springs and wells in Argentina—Continued No. Temper- Total on Name or location ature of Flow (liters dissolved fig. '5 water per minute) solids or 16 (°C) (ppm) 95 28 Moderately High large 96 San Marcos, on right bank of 21 Moderately 2,203 Rio San Marcos. large 97 La Magdalena, at Barreto 28 450 1,127 railway station. 98 Barreto, 10 km east of rail- 32 6,000 522 way station. 99 21 8 3,283 3,863 100 Villa Albertina, 10 km south 21.5 140 of Buenos Aires. 101 Punta Lara, on bank of Rio Warm Moderately 7,050; de la Plata. large 7,524 No. on fig. 16 102 Alsina de la Noria, at west 21.5 3 15,864 end of Lake Alsina. 103 Viticola, 27 km north of 55 800 704 Bahia Blanca. 104 Argerich, at National Fish Hatchery. 63.7 1,017 105 Puerto Militar, 20 km southeast of Bahia Blanca. 55 9,466 106 Ombucta: Depth of 300-304 meters . Depth of 568-570 meters.. Depth of 840-847 meters.. Los Gauchos. at Villalonga 32 * 13,337 28,865 4,264 33 63 107 railway station: 77 Depth of 1,085-1,115 meters. 80 144, 560 108 Chacra, 2 km northwest of 20 Small 2,373 109 Chos Malal village. Agua Hedionda, 4 km north- 18 Small 560 east of Chos Malal. 110 Banos de Copahue, in Na- tional Reserve on east slope of Cerro Copahue (see also fig. 18, showing): 68 396 67 18-63 838 several smaller springs; also a few fumaroles. 111 Las M Aquinas and Las 28-95 Moderately High Maquinitas, on both sides of Arroyo Blanco, 2.5 km south-southeast of Banos large 112 de Copanue (see also fig. 18). Laguna del Volcan, 7 km 35 Moderately 6,941 southwest of Banos de Copahue (see also fig. 18). large 113 Chanchoco, south of Laguna 26.5 Small 200 del Volcan. 114 Cerro del Domuyo. south of Chanchoco. 90 (max) 115 35 88,000 railway station. 116 Colluco (Huechu-Laufquen), 60 Small 2,000 2 km south of small lake. (max) 117 Queni, west and south of Warm Large small lake. 118 Southwest of Telek village.. Gran Bajo, 18 km north of 119 Warm Large San Julian. Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references Na, HCOa, S04, Cl. Quaternary deposits. Na, HCO3 Na, SO* Na, SO< Na, SO4, Cl Na, SO4, Cl Deposits of opaline silica and iron oxide. Water contains 4 ppm of Fe. Used for bathing. Flowing well 221 meters deep. Water used for drinking by cattle. Flowing well 320 meters deep. Water used for drinking by cattle. Flowing well 100 meters deep. Bottled and sold as mineral water. Flowing well 88 meters deep. Bottled and sold as mineral water. Contains 2.5 ppm of Mn. 2 flowing wells 84 and 87 meters deep. Bathing resort. Na (4,455); SO4 (6,267); Cl (4,020). Plio-Miocene strata. Flowing well. Bathing resort. Na, HC03___ Na, HC03, SO4 Quaternary deposits over-lying Plio-Miocene strata. ___do______________ Na. (2,786); SO4 (4,902). (1,138); Cl do. Flowing well 654 meters deep. Water used locally. Flowing well 711 meters deep Water used locally. Flowing well 787 meters deep. ..Na (8,886); S04 (3,800); Cl (12,400). Flowing well 850 meters deep tapping 3 water-bearing zones. Ca (4,240); Mg (2,069); Na (44,294); S04 (1,535); Cl (83,425). Na, SO4, Cl; free H2S. (Quaternary deposits over-lying Plio-Miocene strata. Lower Cretaceous strata.. Oil test well yielding water at rate of 1,200 liters per minute. Water from upper zone is saline. Water from lower zone contains 387 ppm of Br and 5 ppm of I. Used to supply bathing pool. Water used for bathing. Na, HCO3, SO4; free H2S do. Do. SiOj (118); Na (35); HCO3 (130). SiOa (116); Ca (72); SO4 (572). Quaternary andesite and trachyte. ____do.................. ____do.................. .do. Water contains 10 ppm of Fe, 13 ppm of Al. Analysis is for spring having temperature of 40° C. Water contains 23 ppm of Fe, 8 ppm of Al. 3 main and several small springs; also fumaroles. Water used for bathing. Ref. 903. Na, SO4, Cl. SO4 (97); SiOj (35). Ca, Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl. do. ----do......... Quaternary lava. Upper Cretaceous strata. _ Probably Cretaceous intrusive rock. Alluvium overlying Cretaceous intrusive rock. Probably Quaternary basalt. Probably Eocene-0 ligocene strata. Lake having area of 3 hectares in crater 0.5 km in diameter. Water contains 25 ppm of NH4, 33 ppm of Fe, 195 ppm of Al, is heated by escaping gases. Used for bathing. Deposits of sulfur. 2 main springs. Water used for bathing. Sulfurous fumaroles on hillsides. Escaping gases contain SO2 and H2S. Well No. 23. Thermal water encountered at three main horizons. Analytical data for strongly saline water from depth of 805-857 meters. Ref. 912. Many small springs issuing from mounds of tufa. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Water used for irrigation. Several springs and shallow wells near area of smoking ground (solfataras?). Ref. 916. Several springs on north border of lowland. Water is potable. Used for irrigation. Also a few saline springs on lowland.76 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLDDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 77 Figure 16.—Southern parts of Argentina and Chile showing location of thermal springs. 926; Chile chiefly from ref. 1002. Argentina chiefly from ref.78 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Figure 17.—Rio Hondo area, Santiago del Estero Province, Argentina, showing location of springs. From ref. 881.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 79 Figure IS.—Copahue area, NeuquSn Territory, Argentina, showing location of springs. From ref. 903.80 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD BOLIVIA The Western (Occidental) and Eastern (Oriental) Cordilleras of Peru extend southeast and south through western Bolivia where they are separated by a wide plateau region that is called the Central Cordillera, or Cordillera Real (Royal). The Central Cordillera extends southward from Lake Titicaca and contains many large saline flats. The Western Cordillera is composed largely of marine Jurassic and Cretaceous rocks over-lain in part by volcanic materials. Nearly all the volcanic mountains of Bolivia are in this belt; two on the southwest border are solfataric. The northern part of the Eastern Cordillera is chiefly of Devonian and Carboniferous rocks; the southern part is of Cambrian and Ordovician rocks and some intrusive granite. The great upland between the two cordilleras is underlain by continental Tertiary beds covered largely by Quaternary deposits. Much of this region may have been a lake basin. More than one-half of Bolivia lies east of the Andes and within the basin of the Rio Mamore which is tributary to Rio Amazonas. The extreme southeastern part of the country drains southward to the Rio Paraguay. Within this part are large areas of ancient crystalline and metamorphic rocks which are overlain by Devonian and Silurian rocks similar to those of the Eastern Cordillera. Thermal springs are common in the central mountainous regions. The locations of those which have been recorded are shown on figure 19. The information concerning them is presented in the table below. Thermal springs in Bolivia [Data chiefly from refs. 931, 932. Location of unnumbered spring not identi9ed. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on fig. 19 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 1 Putina, 15 km east of Cojata. Charasani Deposits of sulfur and pyrite. 2 against Devonian slate. 3 Chuma 4 5 Bank of Rio Suches, 4 km 6 from Escoma. Carabuco, 5 km from Ma- 65 7 tilde mine. Poquea, east of Ancoraimes.. Quaternary deposits over-lying Devonian strata. 8 San Francisco, south of 9 Ancohuma. Viscachani, near La Paz- 26 Moderately large Large Small 10 Oruro railway. Urmiri, near Sapahaque 42-73 1,794 SiOi (73); Na (310); K (65); SO, (629); Cl (64). bathing. 14 springs. Large deposit of tufa and small deposits of gypsum, sulfur, and pyrite; incrustations of hyalite, realgar, cinnabar. Water used for bathing. In area of antimony mines. 11 Chiguacato, near Rio Cara- 40 12 cato. Aguas Calientes, 20 km 13 north of Quime. Valle Colquiri, near junction 14 of Rios Colquiri and Ayo-paya. Kami, on bank of Rio Very hot 69 15 Ayopaya. Lanza, 5 km below Leque.. - 240,000 Moderately large 16 Liriuni, at base of Tunari 17 Mountain. Incuyo, 10 km south-south- Used for bathing. 18 west of Tapacari. Putina, between Suticollo Upper Cretaceous sandstone. Probably Upper Cretaceous strata. 19 and Parotani. Cayacayani, east of Santi- Warm Moderately large Moderately large Water used for bathing. Do. 20 vanez. Aguas Calientes, near Oruro- 21 Cochabamba railway. Colcha, near Colcha railway Warm Upper Cretaceous sandstone. 22 station. Near Arque 23 Carapari, in bed of Rio Warm Near antimony mines. 24 Grande. Paja, east of Totora 25 Base of Pomarape volcano... Hot Several springs and solfataras. 26 Capachos, 12 km east of Warm 27 Oruro. Obrajes, near Paria 71 Moderately large Issues from pyrite-bearing vein. Water is sulfurous. Used for bathing. Issues from quartz vein. 28 Machacamarca, 26 km southeast of Oruro. 6 km from Huanuni 29 Warm Probably Quaternary deposits overlying Devonian strata. Faulted Devonian strata.. 30 East of Poopo Warm Moderately large Water used for bathing. DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 81 Thermal springs in Bolivia—Continued No. on fig. lfl Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 31 32 55 Water is saline; contains Fe. 33 Ajata, southeast of Condor.. 2 km south of Challapata 71 Water is sulfurous and alkaline. 34 do In area of antimony mines. Water is strongly saline; contains 35 Probably Upper Cretaceous strata overlying Devonian slate. Fe. 36 Compania, 30 km north of Sucre. Warm Moderately large Water used for bathing. 37 38 Talulu, in bed of R'o Pil- Upper Cretaceous sandstone. Probably Quaternary rhyolite overlying Devonian strata. 39 comayo near Quila Quila. Aguas Calientes, in valley of Catavi. Catavi, near Victoria mining mill. Uncia, 3 km below Uncia tin 68 Near an antimony mine. 40 Moderately large 600 Deposits of tufa, pyrite, and manganese dioxide. Water is sulfurous and alkaline. Used for bathing. Several springs. Large deposits of 41 60 Folded Devonian slate 42 mine. Rio Huntuma, 30 km southwest of Uncia. Luluni, in valley of Rio Blanco. tufa and small deposits of opal, calcite, barite, limonite, psilo-melane, wolframite. Similar deposits 2 km north of Uncia. Water is slightly saline. Free C02, H2S. Ref. 937. Deposits of CaC03, Mn02. Several springs. Large deposits of tufa. Several springs. 43 68-75 Large 44 do 45 Chayala, in bed of Rio do 46 Grande. Tacarani, in bed of Rio Grande. Zepelin, 2 km from Luluni.. Guadalupe, southeast of Colquechaca. Yurimata, 12 km downstream from Maragua. Churifia, in bed of Rio Salinas de Macha. Tinguipaya, near Tacopapa. Probably Upper Cretaceous strata overlying Devonian slate. Devonian strata 47 Water is sulfurous and alkaline. 48 do In area of antimony mines. Water is sulfurous. In area of 49 45 do antimony mines. In area of antimony mines. 50 79 Probably Quaternary Water is sulfurous. In area of 51 rhyolite. Probably Quaternary antimony mines. 52 Large Large rhyolite overlying Upper Cretaceous strata. Upper Cretaceous strata faulted against Devonian slate. Large deposit of tufa. Much free 53 Tarapaya (San Tomas), near Potosi. 24-34 C02. Bathing resort. Ref. 936. Several springs. Deposit of tufa. 54 Ref. 935. Water contains Fe. 55 Tirispaya, near Bartolo - Warm Moderately large Moderately large Upper Cretaceous sandstone. Water is sulfurous. Bathing resort. Ref. 934. 56 Don Diego, near Potosl-Sucre railway. Chaqui, north of Cotagaita... Rio Mulatos, in riverbed 48 Water is slightly sulfurous. Used 57 80 Probably Tertiary intrusive in Devonian shale. Folded Tertiary(?) strata.. Probably Quaternary rhyolite. for bathing. Several springs. Deposits of sulfur. 58 Tepid Tepid Ref. 934. Much free C02. 59 near railway station. Rio Mu’atos-PotosI, at km 20 on the railway. Rio Yura, near its headwaters. Carma, in bed of Rio Agua Castilla. Do. 60 Deposits of tufa. 61 62 Warm 2 groups of springs. Water is sulfurous. Near antimony workings. 63 Asiento, southeast of Rio Mulatos. Pulacayo, in Veta Tajo mine. Probably Quaternary rhy- 64 59 Moderately large Moderately large olite. Devonian(?) strata Issues from silver-lead-zinc vein at depth of 500 meters. 65 66 Near Caite, on shore of Salar de Empexa. 62-79 18,608 CaO (869); MgO (373); SO3 (2,370); Cl (9,376); Alj Os (216); free HiSOt (1,678). Probably Quaternary deposits overlying Tertiary lava. 3 main springs. Analysis is for spring having temperature of 74° C. 67 Empexa, southwest of Caite. Water is saline and sulfurous. 68 Near shore of Salar de Laguna. Moderately large Moderately large Moderately large Do. 69 At north base of Ollca vol- Hot Quaternary lava. Several springs and solfataras. 70 cano. Chocaya, 15 km west of Warm Folded Tertiary deposits Deposits of tufa, partly aragonite. 71 Chocaya la Vieja. In bed of Rio San Juan, 15 km below Esmaraca. Near Sud Lopez Mountains.. overlying Devonian strata. Deposits of sulfur. Several springs issuing on saline 72 Warm Moderately large Quaternary deposits over- Chinchillani lying Tertiary lava. flats and also in shallow lake. 82 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Figure 19.—Western Bolivia and central and southern Peru showing location of thermal springs and principal volcanoes. Bolivia chiefly from refs. 931 and 932 ; Peru from refs. 1061 and 1066. BRAZIL The principal mountain ranges in Brazil are in the eastern and southeastern parts; some of them rise abruptly from the coast. They are composed largely of granite, gneiss, and other crystalline and metamor-phic rocks, all probably of Precambrian age. These rocks also underlie most of northeastern Brazil, where they are covered by continental Upper Carboniferous beds in the basins of Rio Tocantins and Rio Parnaiba and by marine Cretaceous limestone and sandstone in some upland areas. Most of the Amazon River basin in northern and northwestern Brazil is underlain byDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 83 Tertiary deposits that are covered largely by Quaternary alluvium that extends to the bordering uplands of ancient basement rocks. On both sides of the middle and lower parts of the Amazon River valley, marine Cambrian to Carboniferous strata overlying crystalline rocks are exposed. Cretaceous formations extend far south along the highlands in eastern Brazil, but in the main valleys of Rio Sao Francisco and its tributaries, marine Silurian deposits and also Cambrian and Precambrian strata, including the iron-bearing Minas quartzite, are exposed. South of the area of outcrop of the marine Cretaceous deposits is a region of Mesozoic basalt and some intrusive rocks. This region is bordered on the east and south by Paleozoic and Mesozoic deposits which lap against the coastal mountains of gneiss and granite. No areas of Tertiary or later volcanic rocks have been recorded in Brazil. The locations of thermal springs in Brazil are shown on figure 20, and the available information concerning them is summarized in the table below.IU. in . 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF Thermal springs and wells in Brazil jological Map of South America, scale 1:5,000,000 (Geol. Soc. America, 1950). Principal chemical co Temperature of water (°C) Warm Warm- hot 35 Warm 38 Warm Warm Warm Warm Tepid Warm Warm Warm 31.5 Warm 39 Warm Warm 38 25.5 30 Warm 35 29 Warm 30; 42 30-41 32-42 40 Warm Warm Warm Warm Warm Warm Warm Warm Warm Warm Warm 22 27 30-45 42-51 Warm Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Moderately large Moderately large Small 140 912 5,500 C a (63); Na (20); K (29); C O, (60); Cl (434). Upper Cretaceous strata.. Moderately larre Small Small Small Small Small Small Moderately large Small Moderately large Small Pliocene-Miocene strata... Upper Carboniferous strata. Upper Cretaceous sandstone. Upper Carboniferous strata. • Upper Cretaceous strata.. 100 20 20 522 68 1,478 SiOs (33); Na (179); SOt (26); Cl (124); tree COi. Na (22); Cl (28); free CO,... Lower Cretaceous sandstone faulted against quartzite. Precambrian sandstone. Na (405); SO, (262); Cl (599) Small Large Large 17 280 2,100 Large Moderately large Small Large Small Small Small Moderately large Moderately large 261 Ca, Mg, Na, HCO3, SO4 Upper Cretaceous strata.. 104 86 82 SiO, (49); CaO (14); SO, (19); Cl (74). SIO, (57); CaO (7); SO, (8) Minas series (Precambrian) . SiO, (29); CaO (12); 80s (13).... Precambrian crystalline rock. Probably Mesozoic lava... Precambrian rock Moderately large Upper Cretaceous strata.. Precambrian rock... 2 10,500 120 900 Small 78 39 65 128 Ca, Na, HCO3 Caj Na,’ HCO3 Ca, Na, HCO3 Upper Cretaceous strata.. DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 85 No. on fig. 20 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 Thermal springs and wells in Brazil—Continued Temper- Name or location ature of Flow (liters water per minute) (°C) Right bank of Rio Corrente. 38 Small 38 Moderately large Moderately Campo Formoso Antonica... Warm large Caldas do Cipo, 45 km north- 33-40 Large west of Itapicurfi. Cajazeiras, 21 km northwest 33-37 30 of Itapicurii. Fervente, 2 km southeast of 33 840 Itapicuru. Tareco, 36 km from Morro Warm Small do Chapeo. Agua Quente, 15 km from Warm Moderately Paramirim. large Santarem and Barra, 30 km Warm Moderately from Paramirim. large 3 km north of Monte Alto Warm Small village. Agua Quente, 60 km north 29 2,000 of Rio Pardo city. Serra Negra, 19 km east of 23.5 Moderately Patrocinio. large Tapira (Sacramento), 50 km 16-26 Moderately northeast of Araxa. large 21.7-34.1 840 Agua Quente. 63 km north- 21 Small west of Ibiracy. Agua Salus, 40 km west- 24 60 southwest of Belo Horizonte. Bebedouro, 3 km from Salitre 20.3 Small railway station. Fontes do Gir&u, in Muni- Warm Small cipio de Presidente Vargas. Agua Quente, 13 km from 28.7 2,000 Itabirito. Aguas Santas (Santa Luzia 21-27 15 de Carangola). Sao SebastiSo do Paraiso 30 Moderately Itau, between S5o Sebastiao (max) large Warm Small and Jacui. Thermopolis, 12 km east of 30 Small Jacui. Aguas Santas de Tiradentes, 21-28 770 13 km from S&o Jofio del Rey. P050S de Caldas, 25 km 41—46 290 northwest of Caldas. Pocinhos, 4 km west of Cal- 24 Moderately das. 21 large Moderately large (max) 21-29 Moderately large Contendas, 4 km east of 20-22 Moderately Conceic&o do Rio Verde. 20-23 large Moderately large Sao Louren^o (Aguas de Vienna), near Pouso Alto: Five main springs, including Fonte Vichy. 17. 5-19 Well 21.75 meters deep.. 22 7 Well 45.7 meters deep 22 6 Salvaterra, 12 km from Juiz de Fora. 23.5 (max) 20-21.4 Moderately large 20 Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Tertiary or Triassic strata. Upper Cretaceous strata... 1,685 3,987 Ca (354); Mg (56); Na (817); HCOa (43); Cl (955); gas 98 percent N2. Na, Cl • Probably Upper Cretaceous strata. 111 5,595 Na, HCO3 Precambrian crystalline schist. Precambrian nepheline rock. Na.COj (3,339): NaHCOs (151): K3CO3 (1,898); NajSO. (214). Na, HCO3 4,470 (hottest) Na!C03(2,352);NaHC0s(l,583); NajSO* (218); K*SO( (368). Faulted Minas series (Precambrian) . Minas series (Precambrian). 180 Ca (34); Mg (12); CO3 (75) Na, HCO3, SO4; free CO2 Low 62 Low Ca, HCO3, SiOj Minas series (Precambrian) . Ca, Na, HCO* 46 575 Low Low 494 SlOi (13); CaO (8); MgO (8); NajO (7); HCOs (35); Cl (4). NaCOs (345); NaHCOs (123); NaiSOt (57). Quartzite and phyllite of Minas series (Precambrian). Minas series (Precambrian). Ca, HCO^ CaO (113); NaiO (55); KjO (63). Minas series (Precambrian) intruded by pegmatite dikes. Minas series (Precambrian) . 1,407 SiOs (38); Ca (87); Mg (50); Na (115); K (90); HCOs (990); free CO». Granite and gneiss 380 Low Ca, Na HCOi - Remarks and additional references Water is potable. Used for bath- Water is brackish. Free CO2. Water used locally. Several springs. Water is brackish. Free CO2. Also shallow warm-water wells at Lagoa de Rocha and Panellas. Several springs. Water is brackish. Used locally. 4 main springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 941, 947, 960, 976, 990, 992. 3 main springs. Water used for bathing. Also several small springs 5 km farther south. Ref. 941. Water is slightly saline. Free gas. Water used for bathing. Refs. 941, 976, 990. Water is brackish. Free HsS. Water used for bathing. Water issues at base of hill. 2 springs. Water is saline. Used for bathing. 2 springs. Water is brackish. Used for bathing. Water is brackish. Free COj. Water used locally. Water used locally. Water marketed for table use. Also used for bathing. Ref. 994. 3 springs. Soda extraction works. Ref. 970. 10 main springs. Water is radioactive. Bathing resort. Refs. 940, 942, 946 , 976, 982-984, 994. Ref. 951. Water used for bathing. Ref. 977. Deposit of barite. Ref. 988. Ref. 949. W’ater used for bathing. Ref. 951. 8 springs. Water is potable. Use 1 locally. 5 springs. Water used for bathing. 3 groups of springs. Water is slightly radioactive. Used locally. Ref. 971. Water marketed for table use. 4 main springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 968. 7 main springs, including Pedro Botelho, Chiauinha, Mari-quinha, and Macacos. Water marketed for table use. Bathing resort. Refs. 956, 960 , 965, 966, 976, 986-988, 993-996. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 994. 6 main springs. Water marketed for table use. Also used for bathing. Refs. 956, 965, 976, 986, 988, 994-996. 9 springs. Water is radioactive. Marketed for table use. Bathing resort. Refs. 947, 956, 959, 963, 965, 966, 969, 976, 986-988, 994-996. 4 main springs. Free H2S. Water used locally. Ref. 995. Several springs. Marketed for table use. Refs. 959, 987. Water marketed for table use. Also used for bathing. Refs. 945, 947, 948, 973, 976, 987, 988, 994. 4 main springs. Water used locally. 4 main springs. Water marketed for table use. Bathing resort. Refs. 956, 958, 966 , 976 , 986-988, 994, 995.86 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD No. on fig. 20 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 Thermal springs and wells in Brazil—Continued Name or location Marimbeiro, 4 km from Cambuqueira. Cubatao, 11 km west of Itaperuna. Muribeca, near Santa Maria Magdalena. Inge, near Niteroi_________ S&o Jorge, 18 km north of Franca. Valley of Riberao Canoas... Ibiracy.................... Fonte Seixao, at Ibira_____ 4 km north of Mococa_______ Agua de Java, 3 km from Java railway station. 7 km from Lindoia.......... 6 km from S&o Pedro________ Near Gioconda, in Piraci-caba municipio. Near Boa Vista, in Itapira municipio. Campinas................... Sonia...................... San Antonio, at Serra Negra. Pogo Quilombo, near Pedre-neiras. Santa Barbara do Rio Pardo. Cerqueira Cesar (Esmeralda), 5 km south of Santa Barbara. Piaol, near Prata railway station. Platina, 4 km from Prata___ 12 km south of Bofete village. Serrito, 20 km from Itapeti-ninga. Colonia Teresa, near Rio Ivaf. 4 km south of Piral_________ Agua Mineral Parana, at Castro. Near Rio Cavernoso: Lourdes................ Candoi_________________ Along Rio Jordao........... 30 km north of Clevelandia.. 80 km north of Palmas....... On left bank of Rio Chapeco (Xapeco), 9 km above junction with Rio Uruguai. Caldas de Imperatriz, 24 km southwest of Florianopolis. Aguas Morn as (Caldas do Sul), 5 km southwest of Imperatriz springs. 30 km north of Imarui...... Temperature of water (°C) 19- 20 Warm Warm 20- 24 Warm Warm Warm Warm Warm 22 27; 28.5 30 Warm Warm 21 Warm 29 27 (max) 22 24-31.5 Warm Warm 30 29 20 30 30.5 29-31.5 Warm Warm 31.3-34.2 35-39.5 30 Warm Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Moderately large 8 Small 75 Small Small 2,800 7 Small Small 1,000 28 Moderately large Small Small Small Small Moderately large 480 600 35 Small Moderately large Small Moderatelv large Moderately large Small Small Small Small Small 75 Moderately large Moderately large Small 2,194 145-807 Low Low Low Low 118 52 1,982 176 90 Low 192 2,370 510 826 154 216 405 732 97 (hottest) Principal chemical constituents Ca, Na, HCO3- Ca, Na, IICO3..... Ca, Na, HCOs....... Ca, Na, HCO3; free H2S.. Ca, Na, HCO3; free H2S.. Na, HCO3.............. CaC03 (7); CaP04 (14); MgClj (24). NajCOs (356); Na2S04 (186); NaCl (1,262); free HaS. Ca, Na, HCO3- Ca, Na, K, HC03.. NaaO (109); HC03. MgS04 (60); NaHCO (1,977); NaaS04 (169); NaCl (44). Na, HCO3- Na, HCO3- Ca, Na, HCOs- Ca, Na, HCO3.. Ca, Na, HCO__ Na, K, HCO3-- Ca; Na; S04 (448); Cl (143). Ca(HC03)a(16); NaHC03 (17); KHCO3 (10). Associated rocks Probably Minas series (Precambrian). ----do................... ----do............ Gneiss........... Syenite........... ----do............ Nephaline syenite. Upper Cretaceous strata. Syenite.................. Triassic strata.......... Lower Permian strata.. Jurassic and Triassic strata. ----do------------------ Metamorphic rock. Precambrian rock.. ____do........... Faulted Minas series (Precambrian. Jurassic strata........... Triassic basalt. ....do.......... Nepheline syenite intruded into schist and quartzite. Metamorphic rock........ Upper Carboniferous deposits. Precambrian bituminous (?) schist. Upper Cretaceous strata overlying Triassic basalt. Devonian (?) strata... Lateritic diabase. f Triassic basalt.. ____do........... .do. .do. .do. Pegmatite dike intruded into granite, gneiss, and schist. Precambrian rock...... .do. Remarks and additional references 3 springs. Water marketed for table use. Refs. 988, 994. Water used for bathing. Water used locally. 4 springs. Water marketed for table use. Water marketed for table use. Several springs. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. Water marketed for table use. Water marketed for table use Ref. 975. 2 springs. Water is radioactive. Marketed for table use. Also used for bathing. Refs. 939, 974, 999. Oil test well 350 meters deep; drilled in 1932. Water used for bathing. Test well for oil (“Aragua 112”). Water moderately mineralized; high Mg content. Used for bathing. Water marketed for table use. Water is radioactive. Ref. 972. Water marketed for table use. Bathing resort. Also similar springs at Juventude, Santa Teresa, Sete Quedas, and Tres Barr as. 4 springs. Bathing resort. Refs. 940, 988. Water used for bathing. 1 main and 6 smaller springs. Bathing resort. Ref. 938. Water is potable. Used locally. Also well 9 meters deep. Ref. 938. 2 springs. Water marketed for table use. Also used for bathing. Group of 3 other springs about 3 km distant. Refs. 974, 976, 999. Water used for drinking. Refs. 974 999. Test ’ weli for oil drilled in 1896. Water is saline. Used for bathing. Pumped well. Free H2S. Water used for bathing. Several sp ings. Also similiar springs of Goio-En and Serra Azul. Water moderately mineralized; high conent of Fe203. Used for bathing. Flowing well 36 meters deep. Water marketed for table use. Also used for bathing. Water used locally. 3 main springs: Jacu, Santa Clara, Boa Vista. Other springs in same district reported at Algo-doeiro, Araras, Igreiinha, Juquia, Reserva, Sao Pedro, and So-brado. Ref. 952. Water is saline; high content of Fe203. Free H2S. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Water is brackish. Free H2S. Water used for bathing. 3 main springs. Also 3 other similar springs (Ilha Redonda, Prata, and Tarquarugu) in same district. 4 main springs. Water is highly radioactive. Marketed for table use. Bathing resort. Refs. 943, 944, 947, 998. Bathing resort. Ref. 943. Water is bitter; high content of MgS04. Free H2S. Water used for bathing.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 87 Thermal springs and wells in Brazil—Continued No. on ig. 20 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) 117 Sangra Morta 34-40 Small 118 12 km east of TubarSo 32-40 Small 119 Near Rio Bravo 35-40 Small 120 Fontes de Iral (Aguas do 24.5-36.5 280 Mel), near Rio Uruguai. 121 20.8-31 Large Total dissolved solids Principal chemical constituents (PPm) Na, HCO 3- Na, HC03. Na, HCO3- 1,324 (hottest) NaHC03 (353); NajS04 (457); NaCl (442). Associated rocks Quaternary deposits over-lying Precambrian rock. ___do.................. ___do.................. Triassic basalt. ____do.......... Remarks and additional references Several springs. Water moderately mineralized. Used for bathing. Do. Water moderately mineralized. Used for bathing. Also 3 other springs (Bittencourt, Cubatao, and Santo Anjo da Guarda) in same district. 4 main springs. State bath establishment. Water moderately mineralized. Used for bathing. CHILE The Western Cordillera, which forms the boundary between Bolivia and northern Chile, approaches the coast as it extends southward. The main parts of the ranges are chiefly of Mesozoic intrusive granite and other crystalline rocks, but there are some altered volcanic rocks. These older materials are covered in many areas by Tertiary lava. Farther south, the older rocks constitute both the coastal mountains and the numerous islands offshore, including Horn Island (Cape Horn). The northern and middle parts of the main Andean Cordillera along the east side of Chile are covered largely by Miocene to Quaternary lavas and contain many volcanic mountains, but in some places the underlying marine Mesozoic strata are exposed. Valleys between the mountain chains generally are underlain by Quaternary deposits. In the far south, ancient crystalline and metamorphic rocks form the principal mountain ranges. The locations of thermal springs in Chile are shown on figures 15 and 16, and the available data concerning them are summarized in the table below. Thermal springs in Chile [Data chiefly from ref. 1002 and Geological map of South America, scale 1:5,000,000, (Geol. Soc. America, 1950). Locations of unnumbered springs not identified. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million! No. on fig. 15 or 16 Name or location Temperature of water (° C) 1 Aguas de Pica, east and south of Aldea de Pica. 22-35 2 Ojos de Agua de Ascotan Warm 2A Tatio, near head of Rio Salado. Boiling 3 Termas de Mejillones, on harbor shore. 37 4 Lago Aguas Calientes, at southwest border of Salar Agua Caliente. Warm 5 Salina de Aguas Calientes, on border of small saline flat. Warm 6 Aguas Termales, 50 km north-northwest of Salar de Pedernales. Warm 7 Bafios del Toro (Estero de Los Bafios). 26-60 8 Aguas del Volcan, 17 km southeast of Bafios del Toro. 22 9 Agua de Catapilco, 10 km north of Quillota. 19 10 Bafios de Jahuel, 20 km east-northeast of San Felipe. 20.7; 21.8 11 Bafios de Higuera, 5 km east of Bafios de Jahuel. 18.9 12 Bafios de Colina (Peldehue), 30 km north of Santiago. 26; 32 13 Bafios de Apoquindo, 10 km east of Santiago. 17.7-23.3 14 Termas de Tupungato (Rio Colorado). 38.5; 44.6 15 Salinas de Maipu, on Rio 41.2 Maipu. (max) 16 Bafios de Cauquenes, 20 km east-southeast of Ran-cagua. 40-50 17 Los Bafiitos, 70 km south- 61 east of Rancagua. (max) 18 Aguas de la Muerte, 38 km 28 southwest of Los Bafiitos. (max) 19 Bafios de San Fernando (Tinguiririca). 70-96 Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Large 7,000 Moderately large Granitic intrusive rock Jurassic volcanic rocks Granite near kaolinized sedimentary strata. Jurassic volcanic rocks Pyritiferous Mesozoic marl. Moderately large Small 4,800 Ca, Na, HCOi, SOt, Cl; free CO,. 400 Porphyry and metamorphic rocks. Jurassic volcanic rocks Moderately large 48 Moderately large 428 2, 743 (hottest) CaSOt (120); CaCl,(77);Na,SO, (89); NaCl (142). CaCla (1,665); NaCl (1,008) do Moderately large 3,032 CaCl, (2,168); NaCl (1,031) Faulted porphyry and altered sedimentary rocks. Jurassic volcanic rocks Remarks and additional references 5 main springs. Water is potable. Used for irrigation. Several springs near small lake. Water contains borate. Many small springs and fumaroles.1 Issues at high-tide level. Water is more saline than sea water. Ref. 1007. Do. 4 main and several small springs. Deposits of tufa and salt. Bathing resort. Ref. 1004. 3 springs. Water is brackish. Used for bathing. Water used for bathing. 2 main and 5 smaller springs. Bathing resort. Large deposit of tufa. Water used for bathing. 2 main springs. Bathing resort. Ref. 1009. 4 main springs. Bathing resort. Ref. 1009. 2 main springs. Water is saline. Much free COj. Deposit of iron oxide. Bathing resort. Water is saline. Used for bathing. 4 main springs. Bathing resort. Refs. 1001, 1003, 1008, 1009. Several springs. Large deposit of tufa. Several springs. Water is astringent. Deposit of ochre. Many small springs on riverbank. 1 3 groups, 100 km south of No. 2, have total of 72 fumaroles, 40 geysers, 62 thermal springs, 13 solfataras, 5 mud springs; total flow of 7,000 liters per minute (Zeil, Werner, 1959, Das Fumarolen- und Geysir-Feld westlich der Vulcangruppe des Tatio, Provinz Antofogasta, Chile: Bayer. Akad. Wiss., Math.-Naturw. Kl. Abh. no. 96, p. 5—14). 735-914 0—65-----788 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in Chile—Continued No. on fig- 15 or 16 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 Name or location Banos de Mondaca, on west side of Descavezada volcano. Banos de Panlmavida, 25 km east-northeast of Linares. Aguas de los Volcanes, east of Cauquenes. Banos de Catillo, 30 km east-southeast of Parral. Banos de San Lorenzo (Vilicura), near base of Sierra Velluda. Banos de Trapa Trapa, on tributary of Rfo Pinco. Banos de Longavi__________ Banos de Chilian, 75 km southeast of Chilian. Termas de Villarica, at base of Villarica volcano. Termas de Ranco, near west end of Laguna de Ranco. Banos de Puyehue, 10 km south of Laguna Puyehue. Termas de Rupanco (Llanquihue), on east shore of and in laguna. Banos de Petrohue, 15 km east of Puerto Montt. Termas de Sotomo, on northwest bank of Es-tero Reloncavi. Termas de Ralun (Llaul-haupi), on east bank of Estero Reloncavi. Termas de Cochamo, on east bank of estero 10 km south of Ralun. Terma de Llancahue, on north shore of island. Termas de Cahuelmo, on east bank of Estero de Camau. Terma de Leteu, on west shore of Ensenada de Leteu. Terma de Renihue, south of Boca Camau. Termas de Quinchao, on Quinchao Island. Banos de Aysen, on shore of Ensenada de Aysen. Termas de Yungai, at Itatinos, near Rfo Papal. Termas de Cuptana, at base of Cerro de Cuptana. Banos Morales____________ Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Warm 32-33 28-44 20-36 Warm Warm 66-71 Warm Hot 55.5-70 45-70 60 22.5; 41.7 32.2 Warm Warm Hot Moderately large Moderately large Moderately large 340 Moderately large Large Moderately large Moderately large Moderately large Moderately large (max) 25; 28.7 Moderately large 58 Moderately large 55 Large Hot Large Hot Moderately large Warm Warm Small 380 Si02 (34); CaCOa (22); CaSOt (80); NazSCh (134); NaCl (92); KCh (14). Na, SO4, Cl; free H2S_ Ca, HCOa______________ Ca, Na, SO4, Cl.. Gravel overlying Quaternary lava. Jurassic volcanic rocks___ _do.. -do.. -do.. _do_. _do.. Quaternary lava. -do.. Quaternary deposits over-lying Quaternary lava. .do.. _do.. Quaternary deposits. ____do............. .do.. .do.. Metamorphic rocks. ___do............ .do.. _do_. Quaternary deposits_____ Cretaceous intrusive rocks Remarks and additional references Several springs. Water used for bathing. 5 springs. Bathing resort. Water marketed for table use. Ref. 1006. Several springs. Deposit of sulfur. 4 springs. Bathing resort. Water used for bathing. Do. Majiy springs in 10 groups. Water is sulfurous. Much C02. Deposit of ocherous tufa. Bathing resort. 5 main and several minor springs; also fumarole. Bathing resort. 2 main springs. 4 springs. Water is sulfurous. Used for bathing. 5 springs. Bathing resort. Several springs. Issues below high-tide level. Water is potable. Used for bathing. 2 springs issuing near tide level. Water is potable. Free C02, H2S. Several springs issuing below high-tide level. Water is potable. Much free H2S. 2 springs issuing near tide level. Much free H2S. Water used for bathing. Water is moderately mineralized. Water is moderately mineralized; cements adjacent sand with calcium carbonate. Issues above low tide level. Several springs; others on nearby islets. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. Do. Ref. 1005. COLOMBIA AND VENEZUELA Colombia and Venezuela comprise the northernmost part of South America, extending from the Pacific Ocean, along the south border of the Caribbean Sea, to the Atlantic Ocean. This great region was the subject of studies by several early scientific observers, some of whose reports on the natural phenomena describe thermal springs in parts of both countries. Western Colombia is traversed by three cordilleras of the Andean mountain system, many of whose peaks are covered perpetually with snow. The cores of the ranges are chiefly of granite, gneiss, and schist, but the western and central cordilleras are largely of Paleozoic intrusive rocks and pre-Cretaceous metamorphic rocks. The low mountains along the west coast and the narrow western and northern coastal plains are underlainDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 89 Thermal springs in Colombia [Data on associated rocks mainly from Geological Map of South America, scale 1:5,000,000 (Geol. Soc. America, 1950). Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on fig. 21 Name or location Temperature of water Total Flow (liters dissolved per minute) solids (°C) (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and references 1 Near Cabo Corrientes________ Warm 2 Termales de Ruiz, on Ruiz volcano: Near hotel on west slope. 45-69.4 1 km west of hotel______ 3 Tolima volcano: Agua Caliente, near east base. Azufral Quindiu, on slope. 45 Hot 35.5 Azufral San Juan, on upper slope. 32-50 Cretaceous strata 15,740 Si02 (1,065); S03 (6,448); NaCl (1,843); Al203+Fe203 (5,838); much gas. Quaternary lava .do. .do. .do. .do. Several springs. Analysis for water having temperature of 59° C. Water used for bathing. Refs. 1013, 1019. 10 small springs. Ref. 1015. Issues near deposit of sulfur. Ref. 1017. Issues at altitude of 1,955 meters. Fumaroles emit CO2 and II2SO4. Ref. 1012. Several springs and fumaroles at altitude of 4,000 meters. Fumaroles emit CO2 and H2SO4. Refs. 1012,1013. 4 8 km east of Santa Rosa de Cabal: Acimaipa___________ 57-67 Caleras. 53.6-61 Termales. 61-72 El Disparate, 2 km east 61 of Termales. 5 Near Rio Coello (Toche)______ 32 6 Tabio, 30 km north of Bogota. 7 Suba, 15 km north of Bogata. 8 Caqueza, 25 km south of BogatA. 45.5 Warm 65 410 907 Pre-Cretaceous metamor-phic rocks. ----do__________________ 227 1,488 Si02 (249); Ca (72); Mg (48); (479). Cl ____do......... Diorite porphyry. Probably Cretaceous strata. Quaternary deposits over-lying Cretaceous strata. ___do................. Cretaceous strata_____ 15 springs. Large deposit of stained travertine. Ref. 1016. 15 springs. About 100,000 tons of travertine available for agricultural use. Ref. 1016. 7 springs. Ref. 1016. Fumaroles exhaling aqueous vapor, H2S, CO2. Ref. 1016. 2 main springs. Free CO2, H2S. Deposit of iron-stained tufa. Ref. 1017. Water used for bathing. Ref. 1017. Do. Water is sulfurous. Much gas. Water used for bathing. Ref. 1017. Purac6 (Coconuco) volcano: Near quarry at base____ Cobalo (Coconuco), at base. Azufral, on slope______ Grand and Petit Vinai-gres, east of Azufral. 10 Pasto volcano............... Pandiaco, 2 km northwest of Pasto village. 12 Tuquerres volcano: Lake in crater_________ Guachal, on slope...... 36 72.8 86.5 50 Hot 101.6 (max) 20-37 27 70 Large 7,430 Small Moderately large 2,959 NaHCOs (690); Na2S04 (3,890); NaCl (2,750). CaS04 (248); NaCl (232); Al2 (S04)3 (1,343); free H2SO4 and HC1. Trachyte.. ____do____ Quaternary lava. ___do___________ .do. _do. _do. _do. -do. Deposit of tufa. Ref. 1013. Refs. 1012,1013. Ref. 1013. Water is saline. Free CO2 and sulfurous vapor. Refs. 1013, 1038. 3 springs. Ref. 1013. Several springs and many fumaroles. Deposit of aluminum sulfate. Refs. 1013, 1023. Group consists of El Tablon and 6 other springs at altitude of 2,571 meters. Water is saline; much CO2. Large deposit of iron-stained tufa. Water used for bathing. Refs. 1012,1023. Lake is 150 by 500 meters in size. Free H2SO4 and HC1. Deposit of aluminum sulfate. Ref. 1013. 1 main spring and several acid fumaroles. Free H2SO4 and CO2. Ref. 1013. largely by Quaternary deposits of sandstone and marl. The Cordillera Oriental [Eastern range] is chiefly of folded marine Cretaceous strata, but some older rocks are exposed in the crests of anticlines. Nearly one-lialf of the country lies east of this mountain chain and is within the basins of the Orinoco and Amazon Rivers, in a region of continental Tertiary deposits which are covered largely by Quaternary alluvium. The western border of Venezuela is marked by a branch of the Andean mountain system. Another branch swings northeast and north, along the north coast, and separates the basin of Lake Maracaibo from that of the Orinoco River. The cores of these mountains consist chiefly of gneiss, crystalline schist, and ancient sedimentary strata. Both flanks of the western mountains and the south flank of the eastern range are90 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD composed largely of Lower Cretaceous sandstone and shale £nd of Middle Cretaceous limestone. These strata are overlain in some areas by marine Tertiary deposits. Nearly four-fifths of Venezuela is within the Orinoco River basin, whose great plains and rolling uplands are underlain by marine Tertiary strata that are covered in large part by continental Quaternary deposits. There is a great region of swampland in the Orinoco River delta. The southern and southeastern parts of Venezuela are within the region of the Guiana Highlands, which consist of granite, gneiss, and other crystalline rocks over-lain in part by continental Triassic deposits. The Triassic rocks are exposed just south of the Orinoco River, which marks the areal boundary between them and the overlying Tertiary and Quaternary deposits farther north. Several thermal springs are scattered through the mountainous parts of both countries. Data concerning them are given in the two tables below, and the locations of the springs are shown on figure 21. 80“ 75“ 70“ 65” 60“ Figure 21.—Colombia and Venezuela showing location of thermal springs and solfatarlc volcanoes. Colombia chiefly from refs. 1013 and 1015-1017 ; Venezuela from refs. 1012,1018, 1019,1021, and 1022.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 91 Thermal springs in Venezuela [Data chiefly from ref. 1018 and Geological Map of South America, scale 1:5,000,000 (Geol. Soc. America, 1950). Locations of unnumbered springs not identified. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per millionj No. on fig. 21 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references Las Trincheras, near Puerto-Cabello. Onoto, between Turmero and Maracay. Aguas Calientes, 5 km north of Mariara (Mariana?). Plain near Lake Maracay (Valencia) San Juan de los Morros.. Aguas Calientes de Bergan-tin, 35 km east-southeast of Barcelona. Gulf of Cariaco............. 18 km south of Carfipano: Chaguaramal (Provisor). Azufral Grande (Salse of Cumatar), 1 km from Chaguaramal. Irapa, at northeast end of New Andalusia. Santa Ana de los Bafios, 25 km northwest of Guanare. Agua Caliente (Sierra Nevada of Merida), 28 km northeast of San Cristobal. La Cuiva.................. 90-97 56-64 42 37 43.2 Hot 90 Hot Hot 32; 37 26-62 115 541 SiOj (81); NasCOs (127); Na2S04 (86); NaCl (29); NaHS (31); NajB^Or (47); gas 82 percent Ni. Small Small 6; 30 (hottest) 331 (hottest) Si02 (33); Na (180); K (70); HC03 (250); COs (58). Si02 (29); Ca2 (50); Na (42); HCOs (167); SO< (95); Cl (12). Mica schist and coarsegrained granite. Mesozoic metamorphic rocks. -do. -do.. Faulted Cretaceous limestone. Quartzose sandstone over-lying limestone (Miocene). Cretaceous(?) strata.... Cretaceous limestone.... Cretaceous sandstone____ Mesozoic metamorphic rocks. Quaternary deposits over-lying Miocene(?) strata. Miocene sandstone and shale overlying Cretaceous limestone; faulted. Cabrera . Several springs issuing in ravine near sea level. Water is moderately mineralized. Free H2S. Refs. 1012, 1020, 1026. Issues at altitude of 702 meters. Water is moderately mineralized. Free H2S. Water used for bathing. Ref. 1012. Several springs at altitude of 476 meters. Water is moderately mineralized. Free H2S. Refs. 1012, 1024 Supplies pool 5 meters in diameter Water used for bathing. Ref. 1024. Water used for bathing. Refs. 1022, 1027. Water is moderately mineralized. Free H2S. Deposit of sulfur. Ref. 1024. Several springs issuing from sea bottom in area about 250 meters in diameter. Ref. 1024. Several springs. Deposits of tufa and sulfur. Ref. 1024. Several solfataras. Deposits of sulfur and silica. Refs. 1010, 1011, 1024, 1026. 2 springs. Water contains 8 ppm of PO«; 12 ppm of F. Water used for bathing. Ref. 1019. About 50 springs. RefS. 1021, 1024. Water changes in color and temperature; has peculiar taste. Ref. 1024. Possibly the same as spring No. 1 or 2. Ref. 1024. ECUADOR The Andes Mountains in Ecuador consist of a Cordillera Oriental and a Cordillera Occidental, each of which trends nearly north-south. Many peaks have perpetual snow far down their slopes, and there are several active or solfataric volcanoes. Between the mountain chains are extensive plateaus which become lower toward the south. The higher parts of the Cordillera Oriental are largely of gneiss, schist, and other metamorphic rocks that are overlain in some areas by Tertiary and Quaternary volcanic materials. The Cordillera Occidental has some areas of Mesozoic eruptive rocks, but is composed chiefly of Cretaceous sedimentary rocks. The plateau regions between the mountain chains are covered largely by Tertiary and later volcanic rocks. The coastal zone is widest in the northern and central parts, where it is underlain by marine Tertiary deposits and alluvium. Northeastern Ecuador extends east of the Andes far into the basin of the Amazon River, where continental Tertiary deposits are overlain extensively by Quaternary alluvium. The location of thermal springs in Ecuador is shown on figure 22, and information concerning the various springs is presented in the table below. 80° Figure 22.— Ecuador showing location of thermal springs and principal volcanoes. From refs. 1036, 1046.on g. 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF Near Tulfino village, west of Tulcan. El Bafto, 12 km from San Gabriel. Near Cotocachi, 10 km north of Otavalo: El Tinte (Yana-yacu)_.. Quebrada Caparossa— Potrero................ San Antonio, near Rio Pomasqui. El Neptuno, at Otavalo..... Yana-yacu, near Otavalo---- Termas de Peguche, 2 km from Otavalo. Rio Blanco (Bosque de Pinto), 4 km from Otavalo. El Salado, beside Rio Blanco, 6 km north of Otavalo. Tangli (Cachi-yacu), beside Rio Blanco 15 km from Otavalo. Laguna San Marcos, 25 km north-northeast of Cay-ambe volcano. Agua Caliente, near south bank of Rio San Pedro 40 km east of Cayambe volcano. Reventador, near west base of El Reventador volcano. Pichincha volcano (Guagua-Pichincha). Palmira, near Lloa and 10 km west-southwest of Quito. Ura-urcu, near Lloa________ Fuente de San Juan, 10 km southwest of Quito. Guangopolo (Cumbaya?), 13 km east of Quito. Cunuc-yacu, on bank of Rio Tumbaco 15 km east of Quito. Salados de la Calera (Cachi-yacu), on river plain. El Qnitasol, 8 km from Aloag- San Pedro del Tingo, 24 km east-southeast of Quito. La Merced (Alangasi, Los Belermos), 24 km southeast of Quito. La Calera, on bank of Rio San Pedro 25 km southeast of Quito. Near Macachi (Machachi), 40 km south-south west of Quito: Guitig (Hervedero, Fer-ruginosa). Hacienda Tesalia (Santa Emelia, Timpuc). Sillunchi, at west base of Pasochoa volcano 30 km south of Quito. Antisana volcano: Tysco (Lysco?), on west slope. In crater--............ Belermos, on west slope of Cotopaxi volcano. Near Banos village, at northeast base of Tunguragua volcano: Agua Santa............. Thermal springs and wells in Ecuador Geological Map of South America, scale 1:5,000,000 (Geol. Soc. America, 1950). Locations of Chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 50 400 21.5 Small 1,311 Ca; Mg; HCOa; NaCl (123); free CO2. 19.5-27 Moderately 2, 734 Ca; Mg; Na; HCOs; FeHCOs 28.7 large .3,728 2,630 889 (146). Na, HCOs - 25 Na, IICO3--- 20 19 Large Large 26.2 1,957 Ca; Mg; Na; HCO3; FeHCOs (36). 20 Large High 27.1 Moderately 26-31 large Moderately 5,474 Ca; Mg; HC03; NaCl (641) 26.7 large 2,200 400 46.1-65. 5 Gravel overlying meta-morphic rock. 300 Moderately large Hot 30-40 Moderately large 2,098 Ca; Na; HCO3; NaCl Warm Small 25.6 5,892 519 Ca, Mg, Na, HCOs, Cl; free COs. SiOs (77); Ca (130); Na (37); S (17); Cl (99); free HsS. 27 2 do 27 Large 436 20. 7; 23 4,520; 3,610 1,928 1,657 Ca, Mg, Na, HCO3, Cl; free CO2-Ca, Mg, Na, IICO3; free CO2--- 23 38-42 180 Ca, Mg, Na, IICO3, Cl; free CO2-Ca, Mg, Na, HCO3 35 Moderately large 1,546 do 20. 7-26.2 3,609- 5,892 24.3 Moderately large 1,622 Ca, Mg, Na, HC03, FeC03 Probably Quaternary lava. 22 Moderately large Moderately large 2, 710 Mg, Na, HCO3, Cl do Warm Ca, Mg, Na, HC03, Cl; free COs. do 27.2 Moderately large do 36.7 Moderately large do 54. 5 7,440 6,252 781 do 44 do 23 35.5 1,466 848 Mg, Na, HCO3-- do 22 .do 44 6,252 do DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 93 Thermal springs and wells in Ecuador—Continued No. on fig. 22 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Total Flow (liters dissolved per minute) solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references Cunuc-yacu, at northwest base of Chimborazo volcano. Cubijies, on bank of Rio Guano 10 km northeast of Riobamba. Los Elenes, on bank of Rio Guano 13 km from Riobamba. Cicalpa (Cunuc-pugyo), 8 km west of Riobamba. Pungola, 20 km southeast of Riobamba. Quillu-yacu, 3 km northeast of Alausi. 46 Decomposed andesitic tuff. Water used for bathing. Ref. 1035. Warm Quaternary lava. Water used for bathing. 22.5 do. Hot Small do. Water is alkaline and radioactive Bathing resort. Ref. 1030. 50 Small Probably Quaternary lava- 20.1 Small 4,136 S04; AI2O3 (1,085) Decomposed Quaternary andesite. Several springs near Tixon sulfur mine. Water is astringent and acid. San Vicente, 20 km east of Santa Elena: M ain- springs........... 32-40 El Volcancito, 100 meters 30.8 from main springs. 80 14,083 (hottest) Small 22,400 CaCl2 (7,304); NaCl (4,720); KC1 (991); NaBr (783); gas chiefly CH4 and C2Hb. CaCl2 (11,520); NaCl (7,590); NaBr (3,010). Quaternary deposits over-lying nearly vertical Cretaceous strata. ____do................. Aguas de Guapan, 3 km from Guapan. 45.2 Moderately large Aguas de Opar (Chaqui-maillana), 3 km northeast of Azogues. Fuentes de Banos, 9 km from Cuenca del Tome-bamba. Cullqui-yacu, north of Loja._ 20.1 87 Warm Agua Hedionda, 5 km northeast of Loja. Cerro de Colambo, 7 km from the cerro. 1 km from Cariamanga____ 25 25 20-22 150 Large Moderately large Large Moderately large 10 Tertiary limestone. 3,644 Ca, Na, HCO3; free C02. do. 2,300 Ca, Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl. High Ca, Na, SO4, S; free H2S Ca, HCO3, SO4. Tertiary (?) strata near Quaternary lava. Probably metamorphic rocks. Metamorphic rocks near Tertiary strata. Probably Quaternary lava. Cretaceous strata..... Chinangachi, in Yaruqui__ Chufata, Cubi, and El Chico, in Perucho. Cuchibianda and Pilgaran, in Atahualpa. Hacienda Cachuca, in Pue-llaro. Irubi, in San Jose de Minas. Oyacachi_______________ Several springs and 3 large pools. Water used for bathing. Refs. 1029, 1034, 1039. Mud volcano having cone of hardened mud 30 ft in diameter and 6 ft high. Water is turbid and saline; traces of petroleum. Refs. 1034, 1039. Water is saline, strongly alkaline. Free C02. Water used for bathing. Ref. 1032. Water used for drinking. Bathing resort. Water used for bathing. Ref. 1041. Water supply for municipal baths. Water used for bathing. Small deposits of tufa, gypsum, ochre, and sulfur. Water used for bathing. Ref. 1028. Do. Do. Do. Do. Water is sulfurous and ferruginous. Ref. 1028. Papallacta_______________ Pueblo Tumbaco, in Chichi. Do. Ref. 1028. PERU Peru has a Cordillera Oriental, a lower Cordillera Occidental, and a wide coastal belt. Between the ranges are plateaus and mountainous country. The eastern part of Peru is drained by the Rio Ucayali and other tributaries of the Amazon River. The Cordillera Occidental is composed largely of marine Cretaceous strata and much intrusive granite. It also includes a long belt of volcanic mountains, several of which are still active. The Cordillera Oriental is chiefly of Devonian and Silurian slates and pre-Cretaceous metamorphic rocks. It is flanked on each side by marine Lower Cretaceous strata. The two cordilleras merge southward into a wide series of ranges. The northeastern part of Peru extends far into the upper basin of the Amazon River. The available information on the various springs is summarized in the table below, and the locations of the springs are shown on figure 19.u. in . 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF Los Banos del Inca, 5 km east of Cajamarca. Cachlcadan, 8 km from Santiago de Chuco. Pampa. 50kmeastofTrujillo. Huaranchal, near Pampa spring. Tablachaca, on river bank at Pallasca. Ninabamba and Pacatqui.— Jocos (Sihuas), on river bank 30 km northwest of Poma-bamba. Santa Clara, on bank of Rio Rupac. Andaimayo................. Pomabama, on right bank of river. Shangor, 6 km from Caraz. __ Colca, 6 km below Shangor.. Pato, 12 km from Caraz.... Santa Julia, near Mancos__ Tactabamba, 4 km from Carhuaz. Near Rfo Chancos, 4 km above Carhuaz: Aguas de Chancos..... Monte Rey............. Brioso, 5 km northwest of Huaraz. Chavin, on river bank near Chavin de Huantar. Olleros (La Ceuva), 18 km southeast of Huaraz. Near Rfo Chiquian, 2 km above Llaclla. Thermal springs in Peru i, and Geological Map of South America, scale 1:5,000,000 (Geol. Soc. America, 1950). Principal parts per million] Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 62; 74 71 (max) 24 75 53 60-80 40; 43 Tepid 38 22-52. 5 36.5 Warm Moderately large Large Small Small Moderately large Large Moderately large Large Moderately large Moderately large Small Small 725 302 Si02 (392); CaCOs (84); CaS04 (30); NaCl (172); free H2S. CaS04 (59); MgS04 (27); Na2 S04 (28); NaCl (103); Fe203; free C02. 418 1,257 CaCOs (60); CaS04 (41); MgCOs (30); MgS04 (30); NaCl (214); Fe2Os (28); free C02, H2S. CaSO» (75); Na2S04 (325); NaCl (760); KC1 (39). Sandstone and limestone (Lower Cretaceous). Trachyte intrusion in Lower Cretaceous strata. Lower Cretaceous strata. _ ----do.................... .do. Low 866 Low CaCOs (75); CaS04 (306); MgS04 (132); MgCh (102); NaCl (85). Probably intrusive rock... Limestone (Lower Cretaceous). Lower Cretaceous strata.. Sandstone (Lower Cretaceous). ----do.................. 801 CaCOs (95); CaS04 (65); Na2S04 (30); NaCl (554); Fe203 (19). Probably Lower Cretaceous strata. ----do................. Warm Small 50 Moderately large Warm 950 5,565 300 NaCl...........................- CaC03 (236); MgCl2 (280); NaCl (4,319); KC1 (454); free C02, H2S. CaCOs (37); CaCl2 (33); NaCl (164); LiCl (26); Fe203 (12); free C02. ____do.................... Sandstone (probably Lower Cretaceous). ----do.................... 70; 74.5 47.8 Warm 45.5 19.2-46.2 49.2 25 225 125 Large 35 Small 3,340 (cooler) 3,424 3,500 CaC03 (208); CaS04 (174); NaCl (2,592); KC1 (212); much free C02. Na (772); K (303); HCOs (549); Cl (1,729). CaCOs (90); NaCl (3,278); KC1 (76); Fe203 (18); much free C02, small amount free H2S. 14,068 Mg (1,757); Na (1,782); K (3,241); (hottest) HCOs (1,860); S04 (1,334); Cl (3,899). .do. .do. Steeply dipping sandstone (Lower Cretaceous). Probably Lower Cretaceous strata. Folded Tertiary sandstone. Warm 34 55 58 Warm 41 56; 61 Warm Warm Hot 38-52 30 Small Large Moderately large Moderately large Small Moderately large Moderately large 1,674 956 1,869 Ca (350); HCOs (467); S04 (501); Cl (273). CaCOs (275); CaS04 (136); MgS04 (162); NaCl (257); much free C02, H2S. Ca, Na, S04, Cl..................... ____do.................. Gravel overlying Tertiary lava. Probably Tertiary lava__ 2,135 Ca,Na, S04, Cl do. Ca, HCOs. Tertiary deposits overlying Lower Cretaceous strata. Conglomerate overlying Lower Cretaceous strata. Sandstone (probably Lower Cretaceous). Moderately large Moderately large Moderately large Moderately large Small 4,363 500 CaCOs (290); CaCl2 (116); MgCl2 (252); NaCl (3,678). CaS04 (284); MgS04 (210)_____________ Probably Lower Cretaceous strata overlying Devonian slate. ____do................... 2,396 CaS04 (176); MgS04 (167); (hottest) Na2S04 (958); NaCl (958); LiCl (93). Sandstone (Lower Cretaceous). Sandstone (probably Lower Cretaceous). Lower Cretaceous strata... Warm Moderately large Hot Moderately large 2,791 1,030 CaCOs (344); CaS04 (1,166); MgS04 (432); Na2S04 (104); NaCl (689); free H2S. CaC03 (88); CaS04 (73); MgS04 (127); Na2S04 (260); LiCl (23). Intrusive rocks (Cretaceous). ____do.................... Warm Moderately large 1,146 CaCOs (196); CaS04 (160); MgCl2 (92); NaCl (584); LiCl do.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 95 Thermal springs in Peru—Continued No. Temper- on Name or location ature of Flow (liters fig. 19 water per minute) (°C) 34 Tingo, 2 km from Casapalca.. Tepid Moderately large 35 Agua Caliente, 3 km from 31 Moderately Casapalca. large 36 Near Tambo-Viso 31 Moderately large 37 Bellavista, on bank of Rfo 33 Moderately Rimac above Chilea. large 38 Bank of R io Mantaro, 12 km 43.2 Moderately from Coris. large 39 San Cristobal (Potochi), 28; 29 Moderately near Iluancavelica. large 40 4 km south-southwest of 25.2 Moderately Julcamarca. (max) large 41 Nifiobamba, 40 km south- 43.3 Moderately west of Ayacucho. (max) large 42 Sancos, near Pueblo de 20 Small Sancos. 43 Colpani, near right bank of 59 Moderately Rio Vilcanota. large 44 Andiguela, at Yanatilde.. . 35; 42.5 Moderately large Moderately 45 1 km southwest of Lares 30-45 large 46 300 meters from Yaurisque.'.. 32 Moderately 47 large 60-75 Moderately large 48 1 km from Posta de Agua 41. 5-55 Large Caliente. 49 Quelcata, between Anta- 75 Moderately bamba and Oropesa. (max) large 50 Lucha, 3 km from Catahuasi 34-45 Moderately large 51 Antaura, 15 km west of 49.2 Large Viraco. 52 Viques, 3 km north-north- 26 Moderately west of Viraco. large 53 Taparza, 8 km east of Vir- 46.6-50. 3 Moderately aco. large 54 Agua Caliente (Ullupampa), Warm Moderately 55 12 km north of Yura. Chachani volcano: large Termas de Yura, 28 km 29.6-33.9 340 northwest of Are-quipa. Aurora, at Socosani 5 30-35 145 56 km downstream from Yura. Bafios de Jesfis, on slope of 22-23 330 Misti and Pichupichu mountains 7 km east of 57 Arequipa. Chucani, 8 km from Carineli. 27.5 Moderately large 58 66; 69.4 Moderately large 59 44.8 Moderately (max) large 60 Fraylima, 8 km from Azan- 36.1 Moderately garo. large 61 Putina-Punco, 4 km west of 70 Small San Jos6. 02 37-49.1 Large Large Moderately large Moderately large Moderately 63 18 64 36 65 37.8 66 Tangolaya, 12 km west- 18.2 southwest of Puno. (max) large Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents 2, 456 CaCOs (290); CaSOt (235); NaaSOt (638); NaCl (1,080); LiCl (119). 903 Low CaSo< (94);MgCo3 (151); MgSOi (183); NaCl (300); KC1 (90); FeaOa (25). CaC03 (8); CaSO« (60).. 873 (hottest) CaCOs (76); CaSO, (313); MgSOt (75); MgCl (118); NaCl (264). Low 3,048 1,335 (hottest) 3,165 3,890 CaCOs (350); MgCla (120); NaCl (2,360); KC1 (120); free COa, HaS. CaCOs (250); KaSO, (152); NaCl (791); free COa. CaC03 (551); CaSOt (442); MgCOs (165); MgCla (245); NaCl (1,599). CaSOt (146); CaCla (2,787); MgCla (60); NaCl (856). 4,220 CaCOs (532); CaS04 (765); Naj-SO4 (65); NaCl (2,719); Fe203 (15); much free CO2. Ca, Mg, HCO3; free C02, IDS.. NaCl (500); free CO2 1,000 1,054 3,187 2,511 CaCOs (149); MgCOs (326); NaaCOs (124); NaCl (198); free COa, HaS. SiOa (222); Ca (205); Mg (125); Na (304); Cl (222); much free COa. Ca (127); Na (364); HCOs (400); SOt (165); Cl (794). 280 Na2C03 (60); Na2S04 (42); NaCl (173); small amount of free H2S. 2,562 CaSOt (1,564); MgSOt (296); NaaSOt (445); NaCl (220); free COa. 4, 439 Low 4,975 CaSOt (768); MgSO, (135); NaaSOt (287); NaCl (3,195); FeaOa (15); free COa. CaC03 (909); CaSOt (216); MgSOt (730); NaaSOt (654); NaCl (2,380); FeaOa (19); much free COa. 1,037 CaCla (220); MgCla (278); NaCl (210); free COa. Associated rocks Red sandstone (probably Lower Cretaceous). Red sandstone (Lower Cretaceous). Intrusive rock (Cretaceous). ____do.................... Probably Lower Cretaceous strata. ____do................. Steeply dipping limestone in region of Tertiary lava. Porphyry in region of Tertiary lava. Sedimentary rock in region of Tertiary lava. Probably Cretaceous intrusive rock. Slate or Cretaceous intrusive rock. Igneous intrusive rock (Cretaceous?) in Permian strata. Tertiary conglomerate___ Alluvium overlying Devonian (?) slate. Permian strata.. Jurassic(?) strata.. Quaternary lava. Quaternary trachyte. ____do_____________ Steeply dipping Cretaceous sandstone near Tertiary lava. Tertiary lava............ Cretaceous strata near Tertiary lava. ....do........ Tertiary lava.. Pre-Cretaceous metamor-phic rock. Devonian strata intruded by porphyry. Devonian slate_________ Probably Cretaceous strata overlying Devonian slate. Sandstone (probably Cretaceous). Steeply dipping red sandstone (Cretaceous). Cretaceous sandstone____ Steeply dipping red sandstone (Cretaceous). Probably Devonian strata. ----do................. Remarks and additional references Water used for bathing. Several springs. Water is slightly brackish. Free H*S. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. Do. Issues from large mound of iron-stained tufa. Water is brackish and astringent. Used for bathing 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 1071. Water used locally. Several springs. Water is slightly astringent and ferruginous. Free COj. Water used for bathing. Several small springs. Much free HjS. Large deposit of sulfur. Deposit of iron-stained tufa. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Small deposit of tufa. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Small deposits of iron-stained tufa. Water used for bathing. Ref. 1071. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Main spring issues from mound of iron-stained tufa. Free HaS. Water is brackish. Used for bathing. 3 main springs. Deposits of iron-stained tufa. Several springs issuing from tufa mound. Water is moderately mineralized. Used for bathing. 3 main springs. Small deposits of iron-stained tufa. Water used for bathing. Free HjS. Deposit of sulfur. Water used for bathing. Water is slightly astringent. Free COj. Deposit of iron-oxide. Water used for irrigation. 2 main and several smaller springs. Deposits of sulfur and alum. Water used for bathing. Water used locally. 5 main springs including El Tigre and Fierro Viejo. Analysis for water having temperature of 32°C. Deposits of tufa and iron oxide. Water used for bathing. Refs. 1054-1058, 1064, 1067,1071. Water is bottled. Refs. 1056,1067. Several springs including Pozo Negro. Water used for bathing. Refs. 1053-1056, 1058, 1059, 1062, 1067, 1071. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Water is slightly brackish. Free COa, HaS. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Free HaS. Deposit of iron-stained tufa. 4 main springs issuing from silico-calcareous tufa. Water used for bathing. Issues at base of a hill. Water is potable. Used for bathing. Small amount of free HaS. Deposit of iron oxide. Water used for bathing. Water is brackish. Free COa, HaS. Deposit of iron oxide. Several springs. Water used for bathing.96 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in Peru—Continued No. on fig. 19 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Total Flow (liters dissolved per minute) solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 67 Near Acora. 69 Moderately (max) large 1,307 CaS04 (317); MgCl2 (131); NaCl (736). Limestone (Cretaceous) and intrusive lava. 68 69 fOmate.................... Oleocan__________________ Putina (Carumas), 55 km southeast of Arequipa. 71; 74 32.8 Near boiling Moderately large Moderately large Quaternary lava. 2,011 CaCOs (187); CaS04 (227); MgCOa (50); MgCl2 (1,488); Fe203 (19). 1,939 CaC03 (91); CaS04 (121); Na2S04 (403); NaCl (1,120); free C02. do. do. 70 Caliente, on Rio Candarve 12 km above Candarve springs. Boiling Moderately large 1,141 Si02 (140); CaS04 (150); Na2S04 Pliocene strata overlying (168); NaCl (591); much free trachyte (Quaternary). C02 71 72 Candarve, at base of Yucu- 42.7; 44 mani volcano. 4 km from Ticaco.......... 49.8 Moderately large Moderately large 3.305 (hottest) • 1,768 Si02 (160); CaS04 (245); Na2C03 (386); NaCl (2,456); free C02. CaS04 (559); Na2S04 (539); NaCl (601). ----do................... Diorite or Pliocene-Mio-cene strata. Main spring near antimony mine; several small springs 1H km farther northwest. Water used for bathing. Ref. 1047. 2 main and several smaller springs. Water is sulfurous. Deposit of iron-stained tufa. Several spouting springs. Deposits of silico-calcareous tufa and iron oxide. Water used for bathing. Refs. 1048, 1071. Several springs, including 5 geysers. Deposits of siliceous sinter and iron oxide. Water used for bathing. Ref. 1048. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. ATLANTIC REGION AZORES One principal group of islands in the eastern Atlantic is the Azores. This group comprises 9 main and 2 minor islands about 830 to 1,200 statute miles west of Portugal. There are hot springs in four of the islands, as shown on figure 23. All the islands are volcanic, with generally precipitous coasts, and rise to high peaks, several of which have erupted within the past few hundred years. The main hot springs are in Sao Miguel Island (fig. 24) and are chiefly in the Valley of the Furnas (fig. 25). The available data on the several springs are summarized in the table below. 31° 29° 27° ________25° oc 0 FI O 0) o o Graciosa Fai ral ® Sao Jo Pico rerceira ge Sa <£33 Formigas Dollabara o Miguel ! h5 0 1 i—_ 100 i ' 1 3 100 i—■—i—1 Santa Maria 200 MILES 1 200 KILOMETERS 1 1_ Figure 23.—Azores showing location of thermal springs. Figure 24,—SSo Miguel Island, Azores, showing location of thermal springs. From ref. 2272. A • B. C CD • Hotel • D 0 E •o C7 Church CD Hospital F G .H •v-' m!* *□ Sn R 2 (166 ppm); Na (71 ppm); K (26 ppm); SO* (66 ppm); Cl (81 ppm); C03 (106 ppm). Refs. 1160, 1165, 1188, 1233. 263 Haegindi (Haeginda-kot). /Ulfstadhir, east of | Reykholt. 80-96 30 6 4 springs. Large deposit of sinter. 10 99.5 Several springs called Veggalaug. Water used 264 for bathing. Ref. 1165. 80 37 16 265 92;100 65 50 2 springs. Water reported to have been boiling in 18th 266 century. Suddalaug, near HvNA 60 Small between Sidhumuli and Nordhurreykir. 267 70-97 30 springs. 20 springs. Jets to height of 1 meter. 80-97 268 Dynk, 40 m south of Skrifla. 94 .5 Large gas bubbles burst with thumping sound. 269 Jets to height of 0.5 meter. Large amount of Nj. Several springs. Temperature and flow are for 272 76 30 276 51 1 Haedaspordh, near Nordhlingafljot. the largest spring. 277 278 Tepid Small 279 [Ilrutsholtslaug, on { Haffjardh&ra. 46 280 52 1 281 40 B&rdharlaug, 2 km northwest of Hellnar. 25 Well. 282 Lysuholslaug, 8.5 km 32 0.5 Large deposit of siliceous east-northeast of sinter. Refs. 1165, 1182, Budhir. 1192. 283 284 Laugar in Saelingsdalur. 40-50 Several springs. One at Saelinsgdalstunga is 286 Near Oddbjamarsker Island in Breidhaf- mentioned in several Icelandic sagas. Water formerly used for bathing. Several submarine springs. 57-66 287 jordhur. At and near Laugaland. Several springs: one near farm, two on seashore, and several below sea level. Dr&psker Island: 288 100 high and low tide levels. '735-914 0—65—8 Thermal springs and wells in Iceland—Continued No. on fig. 27 Name or location Temperature of water (°0) Flow Otters per second) Remarks and additional references 289 Dr&psker Island—Con. Near Drapsker-shver. East of Dr&psker-shver. Tepid Tepid Boiling Boiling 100 290 bathing. 291 Exposed only at low tide. Ref. 1165. 292 of island. 293 lands near Flatey Island in Breidhafjord-hur. Near Sandey Island in Breidhaf jordhur. Near Reykey and Urd-holmur Islands in Breidhafjordhur. Submarine spring. Water boils noisily; much steam. Submarine springs. Steam rises from sea surface. 295 310 314 West side of Vatnsf-jordhur: 29-31 3 springs. Several springs. Much gas. 2 springs. 2 springs, one known as Gvondarlaug. Several springs. 3 springs. Several small springs. Well. 315 Tepid 30.5 316 Morudalur: Near head of valley. 317 319 Tepid 48-55 320 323 Tepid Tepid Hot 324 325 335 Muli 339 30-42.5 Several springs. 340 50 (max) 50-70 343 3 wells. 344 65-69 345 Gjogur. Veidhileysa, at head of Veidhileysufjordhur. 68. 5-73 346 70-72 Several springs. 347 Bjarnarfjardhara Valley. 348 39.5-42.5 3 springs. 349 350 351 31 352 28; 32 76 2 springs. Several springs. Water is salty. Deposit of siliceous sinter. Several springs near shore. Hottest water is used for bathing and heating farmhouse. 353 355 Reykir, on east side of Hrutafjordhur. Reykir, at head of Midhfjordhjur. Nordur Reykir, near Ytri and K&rasstad-hir on east side of Midfjordhur. Reykir, 2 km west of 56-96. 5 356 72 357 73 358 56 359 west end of Svinavatn. Reykir & Reykjastrond, on west side of Skagafjordhur. Reykir, in HjaltadalsfL. Fosshver, near Reykja-velir, in Skagafjordhur. Reykjaholl, 2 km north of vidhimyri in Skagafjordhur. 361 40-90 formerly used for bathing. 363 65 Water used for laundering. Much gas. Large group of springs. Site of 13th century baths and laundry building. Several springs. 368 50-89 369 67 377 northwest of Reykir in Skagafjordhur. Godhdalir, on both sides of river in Vesturdalur. 55-65 378 Hot 2 groups of springs. Several springs. 379 49-53 380 381 65 382 Flokadalsvatn. Stori Reykir, on east side of FlokadalsS. 383 41 384 Reykir, in Olafsfjordhur. Laugaland, in Horgar-dalur. Gler&rgilslaugar, near Akureyri. 40-42 Several springs. 2 springs. Large deposit of siliceous sinter nearby. Several springs issuing from wall of gorge. Water used for bathing. 385 387 20-30 40 Small 2.5 104 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD No. on flg. 27 388 389 394 395 396 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 416 417 418 419 421 423, 424 425, 426 433, 434 435 436, 437 438 Thermal springs and wells in Iceland—Continued Temper- Flow Name or location ature of (liters water per (°C) second) Gislaug, on slope west of Sydhra-Gil. West side of Eyjafjard-hara: Reykhusalaugar_____ Kristneslaug....... 48.4 42.5 61 Grisararlaug....... Hrafnagilslaugar. Botnslaug........... East side of Eyjafjard-hara: Gr^tulaug.......... Brunhusalaug, at Klauf. Laugalandslaug______ Hollslaugar, at Haagerdhi. Bjarkarlaugar, at Bjork. Gardhsarlaug, in Gardhs&rdalur. Holsgerdhislaugar, in Eyjafjordhur, 20 km south of Akureyri. Reykir, on west side of FnjoskA River, 3.5 km southeast of Illugastadhir. Storutjarnir, 1km west of Ljosavatn. Strtitshver............. Uxahver. 49.3 33 64.1 54 37.5-47. 5 20 20 23-44 88-89 26-53 85-86 Small Ystihver (Badhsto-fuhver, Nordhurhver). Thvottahver.. 98.8 Storu-Laugar, 3 km southeast of Breid-hamtfri. Theistareykir, on northwest slope of Baejarfjall. Near Helviti, west and southwest of Krafla, and along east slope of Leirhnuk. East slope of Nam&fjall and Ilverarond (Hlidham&mar) at base of slope. West slope of Nam&fjall. Jardhbadhsholar (Bjar-narflag). Storagjft, near Reykjahlidh. .1 1.8 87-94 25-43 Remarks and additional references Much gas. 2 springs. Water used for laundering. Much gas. Water used for bathing. Mentioned in Sturlunga Saga as early as 13th century. Water used for bathing. Ref. 1207. Some gas. Water used to heat greenhouse. 8 springs. Pools of water. Several springs. Do. Do. Pool flooded by brook. Also boiling mud pots. Water contains SiCh (110 ppm); Na (85 ppm); S04 (51 ppm); C03 (91 ppm). Geyser spouting to height of 2 meters. Known as the Ox Spring. Water contains SiOj (160 ppm); Na (30 ppm); S04 (50 ppm); Cl (20 ppm); CO3 (24 ppm). Refs. 1106,1160,1165,1192, 1206, 1207. Largest geyser in northern Iceland. Jets to height of 12 meters. Circular basin of siliceous sinter 10 meters in diameter and 8 meters deep. Water in basin boils continuously. Subsidiary vent (Strokk). Ref. 1160. Water contains Si02 (125 ppm); Na (102 ppm); SO4 (73 ppm); Cl (70 ppm) CO3 (49 ppm). Several springs. Water used for irrigation of meadows, for heating hotel, and for swimming pool in hotel. Several solfataras and pools of mud. Several steam vents and small springs near Twin Lakes. Refs. 1133, 1138, 1165, 1221. Many mud pots. Water from one mud pot contains SiOj (214 ppm); A1 (344 ppm); Fe (310 ppm); Mg (74 ppm); Ca (94 ppm); Na (24 ppm); S04 (4,023 ppm). Much gas. Refs. 1138, 1156. Several springs. Water from one spring contains SiOj (417 ppm); A1 (50 ppm); Fe (30 ppm); Mg (215 ppm); Ca (374 ppm); Na (87 ppm); K (61 ppm); S04 (2,812 ppm). Many vapor vents and solfataras in craters. Southernmost crater named Hitur. Ref. 1265. Water used for bathing. Thermal springs and wells in Iceland—Continued No. on flg. 27 456 459 460 463 464 465 466 467 468 472 475 476 477 481 486 491 492 493 494 496 497 503 510 511 512-516 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per second) Hruth&lsar (Hrfitsh&l-sar). Kverkfjoll, near edge of Vatnajokull. Hitalaug, 1 km west of Hrauna River. Marteinsflaedha 33 35.5 1-7 Warm 30-44 14.5 Both sides of SelA River; 1.5 km south of Ilroaldsstadhir. Near Hrafnekilsstadhir, on east side of Jokuls& Leirur. 51 50-60 95 97.5 Boiling 98.5 Boiling Boiling 90 Near Jokulfell, on west side of Morsardalur. Hveravellir: Graenihver (Mey* jarauga). Beljandarkvislar, 10 km north of Hveravellir. Nauthagi and Bl&gn?-paver, 20 km south of Hveravellir. Boiling 58 Upper part of ThverA drainage basin. Near head of Torfatindar. Remarks and additional references Many solfataras. Large deposit of sulfur. Several fumaroles and solfataras. Many hot springs and fumaroles on inner wall of Rudloffkrater of Oskjuvatn. Several craters exhaling water vapor and gases. Several springs at altitude of 660 meters. Altitude of 720 meters. Several springs at altitude of 900 meters. Several springs. Deposit of sinter. Ref. 1165. Altitude of 500 meters. Several springs. Ref. 1125. Formerly a noisy steam vent. Deposit of sulfur. Ref. 1250. Jets to height of 20 cm. Ref. 1250. Formerly a geyser. Water used by Mountain-Eyving, an outlaw, for cooking in 18th century. Ref. 1250. 5 noisy steam vents. Deposit of sulfur. Ref. 1250. Deep-blue water in circular basin 8 meters in diameter. Light-blue water in circular basin 4 meters in diameter. Small geyser spouting from cone of silica. 2 springs 6 meters apart. One is a geyser. 4 springs, one of which spouts to height of 0.5 meter. Several springs. Myriad springs, solfataras, and fumaroles. One steam vent called Oskran’ki is extremely noisy. Deposits of sulfur and gypsum. Ref. 1165. Powerful and noisy fuma-role, many solfataras, mud volcanoes, and mud pots. Refs. 1136, 1165. MINOR ISLANDS-----CANARY, CAPE VERDE, FAROE (FAEROE), JAN MAYEN, AND SPITSBERGEN (SVALBARD) In addition to the Azores and Iceland, several other volcanic islands or groups of islands are situated on the mid-Atlantic Bidge, which is considered by some geologists to extend, with interruptions, from Jan Mayen Island in the north to the South Sandwich Islands east of Cape Horn, as indicated on the map of the world showing volcanic zones (fig. 1). The Canary Islands, about 60 miles west of the coast of northern Africa, form a group of seven small islands and several islets, as shown on figure 30. All the islandsDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 105 Figure 30.—Canary Islands showing location of thermal springs. are of volcanic rocks, chiefly basalt and trachyte. The easternmost two islands and several islets rise from a submarine platform. The five western islands rise as separate peaks from the deep ocean. The Cape Verde Islands, off the west coast of northern Africa, are an archipelago of 10 islands that are spread over an area about 200 miles in diameter. (See fig. 1.) The principal islands are about 320 to 350 miles west of Cape Verde; all are volcanic. Fogo Island, next to the most southwestern of the group, is nearly circular, about 15 miles in diameter with a volcanic caldera and a large active inner crater. The Faroe (Faeroe) Islands comprise 21 small volcanic islands and several islets, about 300 miles southeast of Iceland. (See fig. 1.) Most of the islands in the group are hilly and rocky and are bordered by sea cliffs interrupted by fiords. Thick sheets of basalt in-terbedded with tuffs are intruded by dolerite and, on some of the islands, are overlain by clay, sandstone, and beds of brown coal. Barth (ref. 1115) stated that Noe-Nygaard (ref. 1274) examined a spring of water, 20°C, on the east coast of Ostero Island. It is the only reported thermal spring in the islands, but is not considered to be of volcanic origin. Jan Mayen Island is about 370 statute miles north-northeast of the northeast tip of Iceland, as shown on figure 1, and is about 9 by 34 miles in extent. A volcanic mountain in its northeastern part, has been observed at times in eruption, and deLaunay (ref. 30) noted that there are hot springs. There also may be fumaroles and solfataras. Spitsbergen (Svalbard) lies north of Norway and northeast of Iceland. (See fig. 1.) It consists of four islands of unequal size and several other much smaller islands. West Spitsbergen, the largest island, is deeply indented by fiords, and Wood Bay occupies Wood Fiord in the north end of this island. The surface of Spitsbergen is very rough, because there are several large glaciers on the island and because the rocks are much folded and faulted. The island is underlain by rocks which range in age from Precambrian through Tertiary, but the largest areas are underlain by rocks of Precambrian and Triassic age. The Wood Bay area is underlain by rocks of Silurian and Devonian ages, which are faulted on the west against rocks of Precambrian through Ordovician ages. The hot springs of Wood Bay and Rock Bay, an inlet of Wood Bay, issue in nearby areas close to the faultline. OTHER SMALL ISLANDS Ascension Island (fig. 1) is 1,700 statute miles south-southeast of the Cape Verde group and is about 6 by 7y2 miles in extent. It consists of a volcanic mass on a submarine platform and contains numerous volcanic cones, one of which has a great elliptical crater. Hot springs or fumaroles have not been reported but may be present. Gough Island in the South Atlantic is about 4 by 8 miles in extent. It is mountainous and volcanic, but no thermal springs seem to have been reported. St. Helena Island, about 8 by 10 miles in extent, is on the Atlantic Ridge, 800 statute miles southeast of Ascension Island. St. Helena is composed of volcanic rocks, chiefly basalt, andesite, and phonolite, and is deeply weathered and eroded. The culminating summit is the remnant of the north rim of a large crater. The island receives considerable rain. Springs of fresh water are plentiful, but no thermal springs seem to be present. South Sandwich Islands form a scattered group about 1,600 statute miles east of Cape Horn. They probably are volcanic, and thermal springs may issue in one or more of them. Trinidad Island, 700 statute miles east of the Brazilian coast, is 2 by 4 miles in extent and is composed of volcanic rocks. It has fresh-water springs, but none is reported to be thermal. Tristan da Cunha Islands comprise three small volcanic peaks in the South Atlantic, about 2,000 statute miles west of the Cape of Good Hope and 4,000 miles northeast of Cape Horn. These islands rise from the same submarine platform as the Azores and Ascension Island. Sea cliffs in the Tristan da Cunha group expose several varieties of lava, chiefly basalt, andesite, palag-onite, and dolerite. Tristan Island, the largest and northernmost, is 7 miles in diameter and contains a volcanic cone in whose crater is a small fresh-water lakeo 05 Figure 31.—Austria, Czechoslovakia, and Hungary showing location of thermal springs and thermal wells. THERMAL SPRING^ OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLDDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 107 that is reported never to freeze. Hot springs and fuma-roles may issue there. [A volcanic eruption in late 1961 necessitated the evacuation of all the residents of the island.] ETTHOPE AUSTRIA Most of Austria is mountainous. Part of the western border with Germany is formed by the Bavarian Alps. The eastern part of the Central Alps and the Eastern Alps occupy much of central and eastern Austria. (See fig. 31.) These ranges form a wide belt of intensely folded and greatly faulted rocks. The central core of the mountains is of gneiss and schist and infolded Paleozoic sedimentary rocks. On each side are Triassic beds of marine limestone and minor areas underlain by Jurassic and Cretaceous limestone, marl, and sandstone. All these beds are intensely folded in higher areas, but deformation is less on the lower slopes. In the Tirol region in the westernmost part of the country large areas are underlain by faulted igneous rocks. The Car-nic Alps along part of the southern border are composed chiefly of Triassic rocks, but they contain some Jurassic and Cretaceous strata. In the northeast, along the valley of the Danube Kiver, are some wide areas of lowland. Numerous mineral springs issue throughout the mountain areas. It is estimated that more than 1,500 individual springs are present, but only a few have temperatures noticeably above the mean annual temperature, which ranges from about 10°C in the Danube Valley at Vienna to less than 8°C in the populated higher areas. All the principal thermal springs and many of the cold mineral springs have been developed for bathing, the water from the cold springs being heated artificially. The mineral springs are used also for medicinal drinking. The location of the thermal springs is shown on figure 31, and information concerning them is presented in the table below. Thermal springs and wells in Austria [Data chiefly from ref. 1304. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No on fig. 31 10 Name or location Scharten_____ Schallerbach. Baden: 11 main springs. Well near Krozingen. Voslau................. Fishau. Brennerbad: Main spring.. Others.. Hintertux.. Haring (Francisbad).. Mittendorf... Bad Gastein. Linod.................... Kathrininbad bei Kleinkir-cheim. Bleiberg................. Warmbad Villach. Reifnitz-am-Worthersee.. Weisenbach............. Tobelbad............... Temperature of water (° C) 36.6 27-35.7 40.3 20; 23.3 21 21.6 22.8 (max) 22.5 38.8 23.4 24.4-49.4 22.5 Warm 24-29 16.8 (max) 25 27.8-36.3 Flow (hectoliters per day) 8,640 70,000 15,550 2,600 Small 6,900 Total dissolved solids (ppm) 564 1,978 (hottest) 4,016 686 426 476 204 2,371 26,000 398 247 561 Low 2,250 663 Principal chemical constituents Sulfide; gas, 78.8 percent N*, 21.2 percent HjS and CO*. Ca, SOit Na, Cl, HCOi; gas, 98 percent N*. Ca, COj; gas, 95 percent Ns- CaS04............ Ca, Mg, SO*. HCO3-. Na, SO4, HC03.... Ca, HCO3- Ca. HCO3.......... Na, Ca, HCOs; free COa- Associated rocks Triassic dolomite. .do. Contact of Tertiary breccia with underlying Triassic dolomite. Tertiary strata........... Near contact of ancient limestone with schist. Limestone and schist. Tertiary strata including brown coal. Crystalline schist . Carboniferous dolomite.. Triassic dolomite...... Conglomerate overlying Triassic limestone. Schist and crystalline limestone. Upper Tertiary strata over-lying Devonian limestone. Remarks and additional references Ref. 1828. 1 main spring. Ref. 1310. On extension of Fischau-Voslau thermal zone. Resort; sanatorium. Refs. 1310, 1336, 1339, 1342, 1345, 1347, 1355, 1358. Do. 2 main springs. Resort. Refs. 1298, 1324, 1335, 1344. 1 main spring. Developed A.D. 865 as bathing resort. In use about 600 yr as bathing resort. Radioactive. Ref. 1316. 1 main spring. In use about 700 yr as bathing resort. Radioactive. Refs. 1297, 1316, 1337. Resort. Shallow well. Resort. Ref. 1306. 18 springs, from galleries. Developed A.D. 678 as resort. Also supplies baths at nearby Hofgastein. Refs. 1296, 1301-1305, 1307-1309, 1312, 1319-1321, 1323, 1325, 1326, 1328-1330, 1332, 1337, 1338, 1350, 1353, 1356, 1359. Early developed as bathing resort. Ref. 1337. In gallery of tin mine on Bleiberg graben. Ref. 1311. Several springs; Aquae Villacenses of the Romans. Resort. Springs of Bad Villach nearby are cold. Refs. 1346, 1349, 1350. Locally classed as thermal. Ref. 1313. Resort. Minor chemical constituents: Cl, SO4. Several springs; earthy, acidulous. Known to the Romans. Resort.108 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLDDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 109 BELGIUM AND LUXEMBOURG Belgium, for the most part, is underlain by marine Cretaceous and Tertiary strata. These strata lap onto older rocks exposed in the Ardennes Mountains in the southeastern part of the country. Along the north side of these mountains, coal beds and other rocks of Carboniferous age are faulted and infolded with strata of Devonian age. The southeast flanks of the Ardennes Mountains descend to the hilly lands of Luxembourg, which is drained .mainly by tributaries of the Moselle River, which marks part of the eastern boundary of the coun- try. Throughout most of Luxembourg the outcropping rocks are of Devonian, Triassic, and Jurassic age. In some of the lower areas, however, sedimentary deposits of Tertiary and Quaternary age overlie the older rocks. In places, the older rocks are greatly faulted, the fault systems trending northeast-southwest. In Belgium, thermal springs have been recorded at five places, and in Luxembourg one deep well that yields thermal water has long been in use. Their locations are shown on figure 32. The available information on the several thermal water supplies is summarized in the table below. Thermal springs in Belgium and thermal well in Luxembourg [Data chiefly from ref. 1368. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (liters Total dissolved Principal chemical Associated rocks Remarks and additional references tig. 32 water (°C) per minute) solids (ppm) constituents Belgium 1 Sirault, 13 km northwest of Mons. 2 Chaudefontaine, 8 km south- east of Liege. 3 Juslenville, 25 km southeast of Liege. 4 Ernonheid, 5 km east of Ferrieres. 5 Epgrave, 5 km southwest of Rochefort. 31.25 32-35 Large 352-488 Ca, Na, HCOj, Cl Condruzien strata (Upper Devonian). 17.5-21.5 Large CaCOa (144); MgCOa (35); NaaSOt (36); NaCl (19); SiOi (27). Coblentzien strata (upper part of Lower Devonian). Condruzien strata (Upper Devonian). Water temperature measured in 1779. Apparently has ceased flowing or has been covered. Several springs and shallow wells early developed. Large bathing resort. Refs. 1362-1364, 1369, 1371. 6 springs. Chemical analysis made in 1827. Used as source of waterpower for mill. Several springs at foot of mountain; much vapor in cold weather. Luxembourg 1 Mondorf-les-Bains, 15 km southeast of city of Luxembourg. 24.5 670 14,460 NaCl (9,400) 712 meters deep. Temperature of water from lowest strata 28° C. Drilled in 1946 to replace well drilled in 1844, which had become clogged. Original well, 730 meters deep, flowed 600 liters per minute; water temperature 25°C. Refs. 1361, 1365, 1366, 1370, 1372. BRITISH ISLES In Scotland and the northern part of England, the ancient sedimentary and crystalline rocks exposed are greatly folded and faulted in some areas and intruded by volcanic rocks of Mesozoic to early Tertiary age. In these districts no thermal springs have been recorded. Part of the northern half of England is occupied by the great anticline of the Pennine Hills, whose core of Lower Carboniferous strata is flanked by the Coal Measures and Permian and Triassic formations. Triassic beds also cover extensive areas in the Midlands region. A thick succession of Jurassic and Cretaceous rocks is exposed in eastern and southern England, but these rocks are overlain by Tertiary deposits in the London and Hampshire (Hants) synclinal basins. Sedimentary rocks of Cambrian to Devonian age and some gneiss and ancient volcanic rocks occupy much of Wales and southwestern England. Nearly all the thermal springs reported are in areas of Carboniferous or younger marine strata. The locations of thermal springs and wells in the British Isles are shown on figure 33. Data on these springs and wells are given in the table below.110 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Figure 33.—Part of the British Isles showing location of thermal springs and thermal wells.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 111 Thermal springs and wells in the British Isles [Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on fig. 33 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (imperial gal per min) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and references England 378 Ca, Na, HCOj, Cl 478 Ca, Mg, Cl 230 Mg, Na, SO4 660 Mg, Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl.. 1,092 1,820 Ca, Na, SO4. Gas, 96 percent N,. Ca, Ng, Ma, S04, Cl 9,200 Ca, Na, Cl Buxton, 20 miles southeast of Manchester. Bakewell, 25 miles southeast of Manchester. Matlock, 37 miles southeast of Manchester. Chatteris, 12 miles northeast of Huntingdon. Stoney Middleton, 15 miles north of Oxford. Clifton Wells, on bank of Avon River, 2 miles west of Bristol. Bristol hot well, in Bristol... Bath. Batheaston, 3 miles northeast of Bath. Tunbridge Wells, 30 miles southeast of London. Redruth, 28 miles southwest of Bod win. 82 (max) 60-62 68 69-74 63 76 110-117 • Tepid 57 125 129.5 Variable 415 350 Moderately large Carboniferous limestone, probably faulted. Carboniferous limestone.. ____do................... Carboniferous limestone... Carboniferous limestone... Contact of Keuper marl (Jurassic) with Triassic strata. Water probably rises, along faults, from Carboniferous strata. Coal Measures (Upper Carboniferous). Cretacous strata. Water may rise from Jurassic strata. Contact of granite porphry-ry with ancient slate. Originally 9 springs. Bathing resort. Refs. 1374, 1391, 1403, 1413, 1416, 1435, 1442, 1443, 1450, 1452-1454, 1456-1459, 1468, 1474-1477, 1490. Water quality similar to springs at Buxton. Bathing resort. Refs. 1468, 1490. 3 main springs. Resort. Refs. 1391, 1403, 1421, 1443, 1456-1458, 1468, 1490. Shallow wells in fenland. Water may be from deep-seated source. Refs. 1406, 1407, 1462, 1489, 1490. Bathing resort. Refs. 1468, 1490. Bathing resort. 2 original springs, temperature 66° F and 72° F, were at St. Vincent’s Rocks in the Avon River gorge. Refs. 1403, 1404, 1450. Original spring near river: temperature, 76° F; total dissolved solids, 630 ppm; principal chemical constituents, Ca, Na, HCOs, S04, Cl. Refs. 1381, 1382, 1391, 1409, 1437, 1439, 1450, 1457, 1471, 1487, 1490. 3 main springs. Developed by Romans. Large bathing resort. Refs. 1373, 1377, 1378, 1381, 1383-1391, 1393, 1395, 1396, 1398-1405, 1408-1410, 1412, 1415, 1419, 1422, 1424, 1427-1429, 1433, 1434, 1436, 1438, 1440, 1441, 1444, 1446-1449, 1455-1457, 1461, 1463, 1465-1469, 1478-1484, 1486, 1488-1490. Chalybeate. Water issues in coal shaft. Refs. 1411, 1489, 1490. Originally 2 small springs. Bathing resort. Refs. 1376, 1380, 1426, 1457, 1458, 1473. Water issues in Weal Clifford copper mine, at depth below 1,500 ft. Refs. 1430, 1431, 1464. Wales 12 Taafe’s (TafT’s) well, near Cardiff. 65-70 137 Mg, SO4. Gas, more than 95 percent Nj. Coal Measures (Upper Carboniferous). Bathing resort. Refs. 1472, 1490. Ireland (Erie) 13 Mallow, 18 miles north-northwest of Cork. 70-71 212 Ca, SO,, Cl__ Carboniferous limestone near contact with Devonian sandstone. 1 spring and 2 shallow wells at base of hill. Bathing resort. Refs. 1414, 1445. BULGARIA Bulgaria has the Danube River for most of its northern boundary and the Black Sea for its eastern boundary. The Rhodope Mountains, with sharp peaks and steep slopes, extend along part of its southern border. Smaller ranges form most of the western border. Through the central part of the country the Balkan Mountains, with rounded crests and generally moderate slopes, extend east-west. Northward from these moun- tains, long and gentle slopes interrupted by hills descend to the Danube, along whose lower course are extensive plains. In the southeastern part of the country, the wide plain of eastern Rumelia extends southward from the Balkan Mountains. According to Bourchier (ref. 1494), Archean gneiss and crystalline schist form most of the Rhodope Mountain area and also underlie much of the Rumelian plain. Carboniferous rocks overlain by marine Triassic and Jurassic strata are exposed in the western Balkans, and112 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Permian sandstone occupies parts of the Sofia basin. Lower to Upper Cretaceous strata cover nearly the whole extent of northern Bulgaria, from the crest of the Balkans to the Danube. Eocene deposits form both flanks of the eastern Balkan Mountains, and late Tertiary strata underlie lands near the Black Sea. Most of the Danube plain is covered by loess of Quaternary age. Some intrusive masses of granite and other coarsely crystalline rocks, also lavas, are present in the Balkan Mountains and in the Sredna Gora Mountains in the southwestern part of the country. Most of the thermal springs are in the southwestern part, as shown on figure 34. Available information on the springs is given in the table below. 23° 24° 25” 26” 27” 28“ Figure 34.—Bulgaria showing location of thermal springs. From ref. 1493. Thermal springs in Bulgaria [Springs numbered in accordance with ref. 1493. Data chiefly from refs. 1493, 1502, and 1506. Nearly all are developed for bathing. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million) No. Temper- Flow Total Remarks and additional references on Name or location ture of (U.S. dissolved Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks flg. 34 water (°F) gpm) solids (ppm) Balkan Mountain area 98 68 90 9 172 86 4 55 72 45 77 40 Vladislavtsi 70 DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 113 Thermal springs in Bulgaria—Continued No. Temper- Total on ature of Flow dis- fig- Name or location water (U.S. solved Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 34 (°F) gpm) solids (ppm) Balkan Mountain area—Continued 8 Bankya (Banki) 99 300 245 Pliocene stata overlying faulted andesite. Refs. 1495, 1507. 9 Malko-Bucino 73 10 Oorna-Banya (Gornia- 68-106 50 135 Refs. 1495, 1501. 11 Bania). Knyazhevo (Kniajevo) 72-97 60 Do. 12 Sofia 117 170 262 Refs. 1494, 1505. 13 Cepinci 89 55 14 Kladnitsa. 81 55 15 118 35 CO3 (411) 16 Zheleznitsa 77 260 17 Kalkovo 77 15 18 111 250 19 104 50 20 Karasarli__ 90 55 21 Stoletovsk 93 30 22 Bota-Banya 106-111 450 Issues from fault zone. 23 81 25 24 Krasnovo 88-127 15 Sulfide, H2S 25 Khisar (Hissar; Kuptchez 121 280 191 Refs. 1500, 1501, 1507. 26 bath). Davadzhov 98 45 200 27 Pesnopoi 86 28 Karlovo-Banya 124 260 Refs. 1498, 1499. 29 Pavel 122 80 30 Ovoshtnik 109 15 HCO3 (323); SO4 (690) 31 Sulica 115 160 32 Gorno-Panicherevo 120 65 HCO3 (259) .. 33 Korten 71-129 105 SO4 (467) 34 Dzhinovo 110 70 35 112 90 SO4 (736); COj (2,370); Fe203 (40). HCO3 (977) Water used for bathing. Ref. 1495. 36 Markovo-Banya 73 40 near andesite. 37 Aitos _ 107 500 38 Burgas (Bourgas)-Banya 106 360 Water used for laundering. Refs. 39 Medovo 75 (max) 8 1491,1495. Rhodope Mountain area 40 KyustendiL-. 164 500 Sulfide, H2S 41 Katrishte 68 42 Nevestino 122 43 Kadin Most.. 65 Issues from fault zone. 44 Chetirtsi. 122 45 Rakovets... 90 40 46 Baltchin ... 102 120 Alluvium overlying faulted strata. 47 Saparevo (Zaparevo) 187 25 Sulfide, H2S Hottest spring water in Bulgaria. Refs. 1491, 1494. 48 Pchelin 163 170 49 Solu-Dervent (Momina 150 270 Radioactivity 560 emans per liter. Refs. 1491, 1500, 1501. 50 Banya). Dolna-Banya 126 35 51 Kostenets 107 70 52 Gorna-D jumaya . _ 95-131 155 HCO3 (620), sulfide, H2S 53 Osenova x 154 54 Simitli 108-140 150 Sulfide, H2S ... 55 Ilustava 140 56 Gorna- Gradeschnitsa 109 50 57 Sveti Vrach 142-182 115 Ref. 1496. 58 Polenitsa 120-143 30 59 Levunovo 130-134 140 60 Marikostenovo 145 260 61 Gulina-Banya 98 470 321 Local water supply. 62 Eleshnitsa 100-133 200 63 Dobrinishki 100-104 225 64 Kanina 109 175 65 Bashnitsa 100 130 Elli Dere River area 66 Vetren 147 80 67 Malo Belov 75 600 Issues at base of bluff. 68 Varvara 90-150 140 69 Korovo.. 129 17 70 KamSnitsa (Kamenitza) 172 X w Ln Cn ■ 698 Refs. 1500, 1501. Issues from fault zone. Do. 71 Velyuva-Banya 111 72 Ludzhene 128-140 90 2,565 73 Tshepino 119 50 114 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in Bulgaria—Continued No. Name or location Temperature of Flow (U.S. Total dissolved Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references fig. 34 water (°F) gpm) solids (ppm) South-Central Bulgaria 210 Faulted schist 25 Issues from fault zone. 76 149 30 25 50 HC03 (636); SO4 (770); COa Crystalline schist.. 40 (357). 130-137 HCO3 (620); Fe203 (58) Faulted andesite 85 74 50 Noted resort. Pumped. Water for medicinal use Local water supply. Coarse sandstone.. 66 2 Tuff (tufa?) and limestone 15 Salt works nearby. Limestone 81 60 Syenite 72-90 120 Alluvium overlying granite... Town water supply. 76 1,700 Large Marble Noted resort. CZECHOSLOVAKIA The western part of Czechoslovakia consists of the province of Bohemia, which formerly was a part of Austria. This province is chiefly rolling upland drained by the Elbe River and its tributaries. It is nearly enclosed by mountain ranges—the Erzgebirge on its northwestern border, the Riesengebirge and other ranges of the Sudetes (Sudeten) Mountains on the northeast beyond the valley of the Elbe, and the Bohemian-Moravian Mountains on the south and southwest. All these ranges are formed chiefly of marine Paleozoic strata, much folded and faulted, but the central basin is underlain largely by Cretaceous deposits. Moravia, in the central part, also formerly a part of Austria, consists mainly of a plateau area that descends southward from the Sudetes Mountains and is drained chiefly by the Morava, or March, River, which is a tributary of the Danube. The province of Slovakia in the east, which formerly was a part of Hungary, consists largely of hilly lands that extend southward from the Beskid Mountains. The region is drained by several large tributaries of the Danube River. In the mountains of Czechoslovakia there are numerous mineral springs, but only a few are thermal. The springs on which published data were found are shown on figure 31, and data concerning them are given in the table below. Thermal springs and wells in Szechoslovakia [Data chiefly from ref. 1304. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on flg. 31 Name or location Temperature of water (°0) Flow (hectoliters per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) 1 Karlsbad (Carlsbad; Karlovo Vary). 42-71.1 25,000+ 6,353 2 Teplitz (Toeplitz)-Schonau.. 49 (max) 30,000 1,058 3 29.6 10,000 354 4 25.3-36 3,650 5 Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl; much free Ancient p-anite; Tertiary CO2. strata including brown coal. Na, HCO3. Porphyry near Cretaceous strata. __________________________________ Schist and dolomite. NaHC03 (1,195); KUSiOa (1,187); Schist and gneiss________ gas, 94 percent Ns. Sulfur. 4 main springs in north-south line 1,325 meters long; also 7 wells. Developed in 13th century. Bathing resort. Refs. 1511, 1514, 1515, 1517, 1521-1525, 1533-1535, 1537-1540, 1542, 1548-1551, 1554, 1556, 1557, 1562, 1564, 1568, 1570, 1572. Used by the Romans; redeveloped A.D. 762. Bathing resort. Radioactive. Refs. 1509, 1519, 1520, 1526, 1536, 1541, 1544, 1549, 1555, 1558, 1563, 1565-1567, 1569, 1573. Used since about A.D. 1000. Resort. Refs. 1304, 1571, 1892. 3 springs; hottest has small flow. Developed A.D. 1576. Bathing resort. Ref. 1543. Thermal mud baths. Radioactive. Refs. 1510, 1513, 1515, 1546.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 115 Thermal springs and wells in Czechoslovakia—Continued No. on fig. 31 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (hectoliters per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 6 Trencin (Trencsen, Tren6ian-sk6, Trentschin)-Teplice. Sztubnya (Stubnya-furdo, Lower Stubnya. Bad Stu-ben). 36-52 40-43.7 90,000 2,450 S04 1515, 1516, 1545, 1559. 5 main springs. Bathing resort. According to ref. 1293, includes Rajecz Toplice in Rajecer Mts., temperature 33°C; contains iron and alum. 33 Bathing resort. Refs. 1515, 1547. 10 Schemnitz (Selmeczbanya): 49 Bathing resorts, 5 km apart. Water deposits much tufa. Ref. 1531. Do. Vichnye (Eisenbach) 38 11 12 13 Earthy calcic. Banko, 5 km north of Kassa. Rank-Herlany (Rank Her-lein). Warm 23 Alkaline ferruginous water. Bath- Intermittent 4.504 ing resort. Well 404 meters deep. Used for municipal supply. Refs. 1512, 1552, 1553, 1574. FRANCE The Maritime Alps, along the southeast border of France, consist partly of granite and other ancient crystalline rocks but chiefly of intensely folded and faulted marine Paleozoic and Mesozoic strata. Farther north along the border, the Jura Mountains of Paleozoic strata are flanked by extensive areas of Mesozoic rocks. Beyond them the Vosges Mountains are largely of crystalline rocks, their flanks covered by marine Permian through Jurassic strata. The Ardennes Mountains on the northern border are lower and largely of Mesozoic strata. Lower ranges of ancient sedimentary rocks form the mountainous uplands and woodlands of Normandy and Brittany in the northwest. Along the southwest border of France, the Pyrenees Mountains have a core consisting chiefly of Paleozoic rocks that are greatly folded and faulted. More gently dipping Cretaceous and Tertiary strata are on the northern flanks. The Central Mountains, or plateau region of the Auvergne, sometimes called the Central Massif, is largely of ancient crystalline rocks. Extensive areas of these rocks are overlain by lava of Tertiary age. Some craters probably are the result of volcanic activity in Pleistocene time. The northern and western lowlands of the basins of the Seine, Loire, and Gironde Rivers, and also the valley of the Rhone River in the southern part of the country, are underlain by gently dipping Cretaceous and Tertiary formations. Nearly all the thermal springs and also cold mineral springs in France are grouped in the four principal mountain areas—the Alps, the Vosges, the Pyrenees, and the Central (Auvergne) Mountains. No thermal springs seem to be recorded in either the Jura Mountains or the main part of the Ardennes, although there are some cold springs in these areas. Only one thermal spring of note (Bagneres-de-l’Ome) issues in the mountainous part of Normandy. The similar highland region in Brittany has no recorded thermal springs. The northeastern part of the island of Corsica consists chiefly of schist, with some marine coastal deposits of Cretaceous to Recent age. No thermal springs have been recorded in this part of the island. The southern and western parts are underlain almost entirely by granitic rocks. The locations of the springs are shown on figure 32, and information concerning them is presented in the table below. Thermal springs and wells in France [Data chiefly from refs. 1685 and 1745. Some geologic data from Internat. Geol. Map of Europe, scale 1:1,500,009. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million. Chemical classification: A, sodic bicarbonate; B, bicarbonates of earthy bases; C, sodic sulfide; D, sodicsulfide, “degenerees”; E, calcic sulfurous, “accidentelles”; F, sodic sulfate; G, calcic and magnesian sulfate; H, sodic chloride; I, ferruginous of all classes, and bicarbonate sulfate (nearly all cold)] Name or location Temperature of Flow (hectoliters Total dissolved Principal chemical Chemical classifica- Associated rocks Remarks and additional references water CC) per day) solids (ppm) constituents tion of water Ardennes Mountain area 1 f 42 \ 26 1,200 E 2 oil test wells: 500 240 meters deep (1865). Resort. 2 St. Amand: Fontaine Bouillon.. 25 3,400 1,450 950 G, F... Vielle-Chapelle 25 Known to Romans. Resort. 2 smaller springs 25 116 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in France—Continued No. Name or location Temperature of Flow (hectoliters Total dissolved Principal chemical Chemical classifica- Associated rocks Remarks and additional references fig. 32 water CC) per day) solids (ppm) constituents tion of water Normandy 3 Bagnoles-de-1’ Orne: 27 4,000 H, F ] Faulted Paleozoic sand- 21-41 > stone or underlying gran- Resort. Refs. 1627, 1718, 1722. 1 ite. Vosges Mountain area 4 Bourbonne-les-Bains 42-65 5 Fontaines Chaudes 25.4-27.5 6 Bains (Bains-les- 33-50 Bains). 7 22-23 8 27-70 9 23.6 9A 18 9B Rappoltsweiler (Carol- 16.9; 18. 2 abad). 10 21-52.5 11 St. Honore-les-Bains 25-31 12 Bourbon-Lancy 43.5-56. 5 13 Bourbon I'Archam- 53 14 bault., N£ris 50-53 15 Evaux 28. 8-56.7 16 Jenzat 21 /Vichy 22.5-44 17 Cusset, Hauterive, and 22-24 St. Yorre groups. Vaisse (Vesse) 31.4 18 Sail-les-Bains (Cha- 23-34 19 tteau Morand). Chateau-Neuf 20-38.2 20 Rouzat (Beauregard- 31 21 Vendon). 22.5 22 27-33 23 24-25 24 Clermont-Ferrand: St. Ayre spring 24 Other springs 22-24 25 Roy at: Eugenie spring 34.2 3 other springs. 20. 3-34 26 La Bourboule: 2 wells 19 3 wells 53-60 27 Mont-Dore 35-45 28 St. Nectaire 18-46 29 18-32 Se e footnotes at end of ta Die. 5.000 Large 2.000 2,000 7.300 Moderate 3,180 10,000 6.300 Low 5,400 2,150 Na, Cl, HCOi; gas, 94.7 percent Nj, 5.3 percent COa. Na, Ca, HCOa, SO4; free COa. F F Triassic strata; granite may be present at shallow depth. F, H F... F F .. H Muschelkalk limestone. (Upper Triassic). G, B H. F Triassic strata 3 main springs; several galleries. Resort; military hospital. Refs. 1699, 1727. 3 main springs. Resort. Ref. 1606. 3 main springs; 5 smaller springs. Resort. Ref. 1627. Several springs. Not developed. Ref. 1606. About 45 springs. Large resort. Refs. 1576, 1605, 1607, 1608, 1627, 1632, 1638, 1691, 1699. Much gas. Resort. 2 wells. Resort. Springs known to Romans. Wells sunk here for brine in A.D. 1565. 2 shallow wells. Resort. Developed in early 15th century. 15 springs; several ferruginous. Large resort. Refs. 1691, 1699. Central (Auvergne) Mountains 4,020 3.000 10,100 Moderate 144 4.000 11,500 11,200 3.000 Small 9.000 236 14,400 } 10,600 3,500 4.000 5,136 Na,COs (3,490) 3,700 Ca, Na, HCOi.Ol. » 7,100 NaCl (2,269); NallCOs (2,043); Ca(HCOi)} (1,157). H, B. H, B. H, A. A, H. F.._. A.... A---- A______ A______ A...... B._.... B...... B______ B, H_— }B, }A, H.... A, H.._. A______ A, H— A, B, H Faulted Jurassic strata_____ ____do...................... Jurassic strata overlying Permian strata. Granite; gneiss............. ----do..................... Granite; gneiss____________ Faulted granite and lava___ Granite____________________ ____do..................... ____do..................... ____do..................... Oligocene strata___________ Faulted granite____________ Basalt..................... Contact of Miocene strata and basalt. Faulted Oligocene strata, near lava. Granite or schist......... Faulted granite and trachyte. Faulted granite, near basalt. ____do_____________________ 5 main springs. Known to Romans. Large resort. Ref. 1600. 5 main springs. Large resort. Refs. 1592, 1627. Resort; military sanatorium. Ref. 1639. 6 main springs. Roman ruins. Large resort. Refs. 1589, 1621, 1627, 1640, 1641, 1643, 1699, 1708. 14 main springs. Roman ruins. Large resort. Refs. 1621, 1640, 1641. 3 springs. Several springs and wells. Tufa and siliceous sinter deposits. Large resort; military hospital. Refs. 1576, 1593, 1602, 1623, 1625, 1633, 1652, 1681, 1699, 1700, 1725, 1735-1737, 1768. Refs. 1581,1602, 1625. Artesian well. Ref. 1602. 5 main springs. Resort. Refs. 1707, 1710. 22 main springs. Resort. Also cold mineral springs. Refs. 1600, 1683, 1701. Resort. Ref. 1600. Water similar to that of Gimeaux. 6 main springs. Large resort. Refs. 1581, 1600, 1612, 1645, 1649, 1713. 5 main springs. Tufa deposits. Little used. 15 springs in 3 groups. Much tufa. Resort. Ref. 1600. 4 main springs. Tufa deposits. Large resort. Refs. 1595, 1600, 1672, 1680, 1697, 1702, 1710, 1760. 5 wells 75-137 meters deep; 2 flow, 3 are pumped. Resort. Refs. 1600, 1672, 1710, 1717, 1766, 1799. 5 main springs. Large resort. Refs. 1576, 1590, 1600, 1642, 1656, 1669, 1672, 1677, 1688, 1700, 1723, 1799. 5 main springs and many small springs. Resort. Refs. 1591, 1595, 1679. 3 springs and artesian well.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 117 Thermal springs and wells in France—Continued No. on fig. 32 30 30A 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 41A 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 51A 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 62A 63 63A 64 65 66 67 68 Name or location Temperature of Flow (hectoliters Total dissolved Principal chemical Chemical classifica- Associated rocks water <°C) per day) solids (ppm) constituents tion of water Central (Auvergne) Mountains—Continued M artres-de V eyre... Martres d’Artieres. Salt-en-Donzy... M ontrond-gey ser. Chaudes-Aigues. La Chaldette______ B agnoles-les- B ains. St. Laurent_______ N6yrac (Meyras).. Celles-les-Bains__ Lacaune___________ Syl vanes......... Avene............. Capus............ Fonsanges........ Lamalou-les-Bains. Foncaude----------- M ontpellier-geyser. Balaruc-les-Bains.. 15.2-24.8 31 Warm ............. 26 2,520 53-81. 5 6,300 31 2 42 53.5 27 25 22-24 34; 36 27 Warm 23.5 Small Large 540 4.000 1.000 4.000 450 5.000 23.7-47 Small 25.5 1,296 35 .......... 48 3,000 4,824 NaHCOa (4,577).. 1,887 NajCOj (531); CaCOa (905). Low 286 1,646 CaCOa (188) Ca(HC03)2 (618); CaS04 (377); NaCl (279). A, H A, H Faulted granite, near basalt. A A. A Basalt or Cretaceous strata. _ Cretaceous strata, near basalt. A A A A, I A, B Cretaceous strata, near basalt. B Paleozoic strata, near gneiss B, I Paleozoic or Mesozoic strata. B Paleozoic strata, near basalt. A E Oxfordian limestone (Jurassic), faulted against Cretaceous marl. A B Miocene or Mesozoic strata. B, G, H... H Mesozoic near Miocene strata. Western and Southern Alps 2 30 20 38. 5-39. 5 45 47 37.5 E .. Miocene or Cretaceous strata. C . H, G Aix-les-Bains: 10,300\ 20,000/ 1,000 D Faulted Cretaceous limestone. H, G—. Bonneval (Bourg-St. Maurice). Lavey, at St. Maurice bridge. La Lech£re-les-Bains (Notre Dame de Briangon). 53 34; 34. 5 35 19.1 19 21.7 46 16.9 30 27 Tepid 30; 45 56; 61 33 28-36 Warm 2 34 49 16-23 35-43 29.5; 30.5 37 36.5 High G, H Triassic gypsiferous shale 35,000 4,000 H Brides-les-Bains H, G L’Echaillon de Veurey.. Valle du Gresivaudan: Combettes a la Ter-asse. Spring near Laval.. Spring near Domene. Allevard spring in Breda Valley. L’Echaillon (Savoie) Uriage-les-Bains H, G Cretaceous or Miocene strata . Faulted Triassic strata E, G, H.__ Moderate 1,300 936 4,200 Moderate H, G ... h; E 5,258 MgSO« (2,000): NajSO< (1,540); NaCl (1,310); free COj, HjS. H G Schist or Paleozoic strata Le Monestier-de-Brian-Con (Barrancon). La Motte-les-Bains G, H 3,760 1,000 H, G St. Bonnet E Plain-de-Phazy... Gas, 79.5 percent Ni, 20.6 percent COj. G, H R6otier G TT Aspres-les-V eynes. 5, 980 NaCl (3,270); CaS04 (2,270). H, G Serre Pon$an 345,600 Small 2,200 864 17,000; 300 3,700 F, H La Saulce 2,516 NaCl (2,135); CaCOj (237). H Digne E, H Berthemont-Roquebil-liere (St. Martin Lantosque). Gr6oux- c.. Cretaceous or Jurassic strata. E, H Aix Low B . Remarks and additional references 5 springs. Ref. 1683. Oil test well 415 meters deep. Water is radioactive; contains much COj. Refs. 1625, 1649, 1673, 1678, 1710. Not developed. 3 main springs; total about 25. Much gas. Resort. Refs. 7, 1587, 1588, 1599, 1600, 1642, 1669, 1733. 1 main spring. Resort. Several springs. Resort. Ref. 1642. Resort. 1 thermal, several cold springs. Resort. Refs. 1703, 1704. Artesian well. Resort. Several springs. Resort. 2 main springs. Resort. Resort. Resort. Several springs in 3 groups and 1 artesian well. Well water, 30°C. Resort. Ref. 1617. Resort. Artesian well 25 meters deep. Ref. 1750. Also minor spring. Resort. Refs. 1578, 1586, 1617, 1676. Several springs; HjS. Resort. Sulfureted, equivalent to 21.8 ppm Na2S. 3 springs. Resort. Refs. 1622, 1629, 1671, 1699, 1751-1753, 1757. 2 main springs. Large resort. Refs. 1596, 1617, 1618, 1628,1692,1699, 1716, 1737, 1754, 1758, 1759, 1781-1789, 1794, 1795. Resort. Ref. 1658. Highly radioactive. Ref. 1709. 2 springs. Strongly saline. Resort. Refs. 1596, 1627, 1630, 1695. Resort. Refs. 1630,1695. From gallery; resort. Not developed. Do. Well 6 meters deep, pumped. Resort. Ref. 1671. Several springs. Gallery. Strongly saline. Resort. Refs. 1594,1620,1671, 1739-1741. 2 springs. 2 springs. Resort. 2 springs. Large resort. Ref. 1671. Several springs. Resort. Refs. 1598, 1737, 1796. Ref. 1598. Several springs. Gallery at depth of 60 meters. Ref. 1693. Several springs. Ref. 1631. 2 springs having equal flow; baregine deposit. Resort. 2 springs. Resort. Ref. 1631. Sextius spring. Resort. Refs. 1624, 1634-1637. See footnotes at end of table.118 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in France—Continued No. on Name or location fig. 32 Temperature of water (°C) Flow (hectoliters per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Chemical classification of water Associated rocks Remarks and additional references Pyrenees Mountain area 69 69A 70 71 72 72A 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 86A 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 Saubusse.............. Fosse de Capbreton.... Tercis................ Dax: Fontaine Chaude... Bastion spring.... Smaller springs___ Prechacq des Landes___ Garmarde.............. Pouillon.............. E ugenie-les-B ains... Barbotan.............. Castera-Verduzan______ Lavardens............. C ambo-les-B ains .... Ogeu_................. Eaux Chaudes.......... Eaux Bonnes........... Cauterets............ Labeourat. Bareges... St. Sauveur......_____ Barzun................ Bagneres de Labassere.. Bagneres-de-Bigorre___ (Cap verm.............. Bouride, 3 km from Capvem. Tramezaigues.......... B agneres-de-Luchon___ Ferrere............... Barbazan_______________ Labarthe-Ri viere______ Encausse_______________ Audinac (St. Girons-les-eaux): Main spring........ 2 other springs____ A ulus................. Ussat_________________ Foncirgue_____________ Ax-les-Thermes. _ ..... Merens............. Campagne: Main spring____ 2 other springs.. Rennes-les-Bains.. _ Alet: Source Rocher.. Source Buvette. Lesquerde__________ Usson______________ Carcanieres........ Escouloubre........ Molitg: Main spring____ 4 other springs.. Nossa.............. Le Vernet_________ Canaveilles....... Les Graus-d’Olette (Thues). 24-38 29 37.5 Low 980 15.000 5.000 1.000 20.000 61 59 Warm 20 613 SO.. Cl Large 800 2,500 1,951 NaCl (1,359); CaSO. (492). 19 - 467 CaCOs (190); SO 21.8 432 (138). SO*, free HjS 1,492 700 24-45 NaaS(40) 29 Warm Gas, chiefly N» NajS(50) 33, 700 21.8 8^ 000 1,968 Ca, SO4 35-64.5 »3,720 Naa, S(54)__,_ 300 Small Small 13,300 1,150 H, G_. H, G_. H, G_. H, G_. H, G.. H, E_. H, G_. E, I... B, G-. G, D_. G, B_. C______ C, H. C____ C____ H, C. G____ A, G, H_. G...... G...... G, H... }h, g.. H, G. }E Oligocene or Miocene strata. ____do..................... ____do..................... Faulted Triassic marl.. ____do.......... Triassic strata.. Triassic marl... Micoene strata.. _____do............ Tertiary strata.. ___do........... Cretaceous strata........... ----do...................... Triassic-Cretaceous fault contact. Triassic strata............. Alluvium over granite and schist. Schist___________ Paleozoic strata. .do. .do. -do. Faulted Triassic strata.. ----do................... Cambrian strata. Granite; schist... Mesozoic strata. ____do......... ____do......... ----do........ .do. Paleozoic strata. ____do........... Cretaceous limestone.. Paleozoic schist...... Faulted schist.. Cretaceous marl.. ----do........... B Senonian sandstone (Upper Cretaceous). Cretaceous strata near granite. G C C c c c C c c do Several springs. Resort. Refs. 1647, 1648. Resort. Ref. 1778. Resort. Refs. 1576, 1627, 1644, 1647, 1651, 1738, 1778, 1790, 1801. Resort. Refs. 1647, 1778,1801. Ref. 1801. Ocher deposit. Also wells, 16°-19.5°C. Resort. Ref. 1778. 5 main springs; also ferruginous spring 21° C. Resort. Refs. 1647, 1684, 1801. 2 springs. Resort. Refs. 1684,1801. Resort. Refs. 1657, 1760, 1778. Resort. Ref. 1760. 6 springs. Resort. Refs. 1604, 1699, 1804. 8 springs. Resort. Used for table water. Ref. 1699. 22 springs, for 3 km along valley. Large resort. Refs. 1675, 1699, 1724, 1726, 1770, 1798. 2 springs, 3 km apart; much COj; reported arsenic. Resort. 12 springs; baregine deposited. Resort; military hospital. Refs. 1620, 1631, 1667, 1674, 1699, 1724, 1726, 1737, 1743, 1744, 1776, 1777. 2 springs. Resort. Refs. 1620, 1699, 1714, 1724, 1726. Resort. Ref. 1620. Refs. 1663, 1674. 16 main springs; also galleries; more than 50 outlets. Large resort. Refs. 1610,1617,1627,1699,1778. Resort. Refs. 1734 1778. Former resort. Ref. 1734. 1 spring. Resort. 19 springs; baregine deposited. Refs. 1576, 1609, 1611, 1619, 1662-1665, 1674, 1699, 1710-1712, 1715, 1763, 1765. Resort. 3 springs. Resort. Resort. 2 springs. Resort. 3 springs. Water is radioactive. Resort. Ref. 1748. 5 main springs. Resort. 1 spring; also pumped wells. Large resort. Resort. About 55 springs in 3 groups. Silica unusually high. Large resort. Refs. 1603, 1627, 1646, 1797, 1802. 3 springs. 3 springs. Water bottled for table use. Resort. 3 main springs; also well 14 meters deep, 39° C. Resort. Ref. 1673. 1 spring. Resort. 3 main springs. Resort. Ref. 1742. About 12 springs. Resort. 5 main springs. Resort. Resort. Ref. 1580. 2 springs. Resort. 11 springs. Resort. Refs. 1580, 1710. Several springs; sulfureted, equivalent to 5.2 ppm Na2S. Resort. Ref. About 42 springs in 3 groups; baregine deposited. Resort. Refs. 20, 1287, 1580?, 1710, 1755, 1802. See footnotes at end of table.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 119 Thermal springs and wells in France—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (hectoliters Total dissolved Principal chemical Chemical classiflca- Associated rocks Remarks and additional references fig. 32 water (°C) per day) solids (ppm) constituents tion of water Pyrenees Mountain area—Continued 113 114 115 116 117 118 48-60 18.3-42.3 40.4 44 40-63.5 20.9 Warm Large 11,600 C C •tDorres, 1 km from Les l Escaldas. c - 12,000 c 967 CaCOs (607); much COj. B Las Caldas (in Andorra) . C - Silurian strata near granite. 3 springs; sulfureted, equivalent to 27.5 ppm NaaS. 5 springs. Resort. Refs. 1580, 1710. Not developed. Ref. 1580. 2 springs. Resort. Ref. 1580. 9 springs. Resort; military hospital. Ferruginous. Corsica 119 St. Antoine de Quagno. 37; 51 120 37 121 38. 122 35-58 123 Urbalacone (Bains de 32 Taccana, Zigliara?). 124 Caldane de Baracci 32 (Olmeto). 93; 864 864 200 3,000 C Granite, probably along fault. c c c c E. Granite 2 springs; HaS. Resort; military hospital. Resort. Resort. 8 springs. Resort. Ref. 1774. Resort. Sulfuration from peat deposit. Baths. 1 Main spring. 2 Maximum. »12 springs. GERMANY AND POLAND Germany formerly included Silesia as one of its eastern provinces. The area became a part of Poland after World War II; but as it contains the only recorded thermal springs within the boundaries of Poland as of 1958, and the literature concerning them is in publications on Germany, the two countries are considered together. The most mountainous parts of Germany are along its south and southeast borders, where the ranges are of ancient gneiss and schist, and of granite and other cystalline rocks. These rocks are present also in the Black Forest region in southwestern Germany. They probably are of Archean age. Northward from these areas Paleozoic sedimentary rocks form the hilly and mountainous areas. They are considerably folded in belts that extend from east-northeast to west-southwest. Along the north border of the folded area is the Rhur coal basin of Carboniferous strata, and the similar basin of the Saar coal fields farther south. In the south and west, between the valley of the Rhine River and the mountains southeast of it, a great area that is underlain by Triassic sandstone and shale extends from approximately Stuttgart northward to some distance south of Bremen. In most places the rock strata are nearly horizontal, but they are faulted in many districts, especially along the east and west borders of the area. Along its southern and eastern parts the Triassic area is bordered by a wide belt of Jurassic rocks, which are present also along the north border of the Triassic area. In the upper basin of the Ems River in the west and of the Elbe River in the northeast, large areas are covered by Cretaceous deposits that directly overlie Paleozoic strata. The great plains region of north and northeast Germany is underlain chiefly by marine Tertiary beds, which are largely covered by Quaternary deposits that are in part of glacial material. Much of the plain of the Danube River in the extreme southeast, and also the valley of the Rhine from Basel in Switzerland to Mainz, are covered by Tertiary and Quaternary deposits. Considerable areas of Tertiary volcanic rocks, including craters that are possibly of Quaternary age, cover small areas between Mainz and Cologne. Most of the thermal springs in Germany are in its southwestern part. Many are in areas of Paleozoic and Mesozoic sedimentary rocks, and some are in areas of Tertiary volcanic rocks. Some deep wells, sunk originally to obtain brine for salt production, have also been developed as thermal bathing resorts. Western Poland includes mountainous areas of ancient crystalline rocks that are considerably folded and faulted. Within this area are four developed groups of thermal springs. The locations of the thermal springs and wells in Germany and western Poland are shown on figure 35, and the available information on them is summarized in the two tables below. 735-914120 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Figure 35.—Germany and western Poland showing location of thermal springs and thermal wells. Germany chiefly from ref. 1914.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 121 Thermal springs and wells in Germany [Data chiefly from refs. 1914, 1922. Some geologic data from International Geologic Map of Europe, scale 1:1,500,000. Chemical classification: A, simple thermal; B, alkaline; C, saline; D, bitter; E, iron; F, sulfur] No. Tempera- Flow (hec- Total dis- Chemical Associated rocks Remarks and additional references on Name or location ture of toliters per solved Principal chemical classiflca- flg. 36 water (°C) day) solids constituents tion of (ppm) water 1 18 1,200 61,250 NaCl; free COj C Turonian limestone (Upper 2 springs. Baths. Oeynhausen: Cretaceous). 2 24.2-33.4 21,500 (largest) 44,850 (hottest) C- — Muschelkalk formation 620-707 meters deep. Salt produc- (Upper Triassio). tion. Baths. Refs. 1822, 1876-1878, 1887, 1956, 1961. 30 Keuper formation (Lower Pumped, kefs. 1822, 1876-1878, Triassic). 1887, 1956, 1961. 3 4 5 18.4 18.8 20 89,670 265,400 39,250 1,712 NaCl; free COj C Oil test well; pumped. Baths. Gas, 98 percent Nj Na, Cl c Well of salt works. Pumped. C Middle Liassic limestone Resort. Well 320 meters deep; pumped. Alstaden (at coal mine). 25.5 (max) 35 16,000 Nft, Cl - c Carboniferous sandstone Several wells 289-330 meters deep at coal mine; pumped. Baths. 7 110,700 c___. Issues from fault at depth of 600 meters in Pluto mine. Baths. 8 28.7 33 26,000 1,300 Na, Ca, Cl; free COj-. Na, Cl; free COi C-__- Triassic chalk Well 550 meters deep. Resort. 82,600 c Well 650 meters deep; original flow 7,500 hectoliters per day. 10 c do — Several brine wells and springs. Water for baths piped 27 km from Bad Hamm. 2 hospitals. 1,614 Na, Cl, HCOn; free c (2 shallow wells. Baths; sanator- 11 18.1 \ CO,. | ium. { 270 259 12 20.8 2,624 SO. (1,048 ppm); Ca; gas, 86.9 percent Ni, D Baths. Ref. 1838. 13 26 268,000 13.1 percent COa. Na, Cl C Zechstein formation (Upper Well of salt works. Baths. Permian). 14 Frankenbausen: 1—do Baths. 20 20 20-25 7,172 265,000 50,750 Na, Cl, SO4; free COa. Na. Cl - - C Well (or spring?). c 1 7 brine wells, 250-890 meters deep. 15 2, 500 Na Cl-free CO* - c Muschelkalk (Upper Tri- assic), Bunter (Lower Triassic), Zechstein Analysis is for well having temperature of 21° C. Salt production since early 10th century. (Upper Permian) forma- tions. Baths. 16 Aachen (Aix-la-Chapelle)-burscheid. 32.8-73.2 39,000 4,740 (hottest) Na, Cl, HCOa; free HaS. F__ ... Upper Devonian limestone.. 33 springs; many wells, 1,570-2,200 meters deep. Large baths. Refs. 1809-1811, 1815, 1817, 1837, 1882, 1935, 1936, 1945, 1960, 1964, 1978, 1984, 1985, 2008, 2013. 17 18 32 9,600 40 8,020 1 530 Na, Cl, HCOs; free COa. Na HCO3 B Lower Devonian slate Well 250 meters deep. Baths. 18 A Lower Devonian quartzite.. Well 65 meters deep. 19 Apollinaris-bmnnen. _ 22 4,000 Na, HCOs; free CO,... B 2 'wells 15 meters deep; pumped Ref. 1824. 20 Neuenahr: Grosser Spradel (90 meters deep). 40 7,200 1 2,093-}• 2,342 Na, HCOs; free CO,... B 5 wells 90-377 meters deep. Refs. 1824, 1965, 1966. 21 4 other wells _ Hoenningen am Rhein 29-36 22. 5; 32 10,000 7,200 I 6,413 Na, HCO,; free COs.. B. 2 wells 50 and 150 meters deep; 38° C at bottom. Baths. 22 Arienheller Sprudel... 22.4 32; 32.9 8, 640 4, 460 4,900 2,394 Na, HCO,; free CO,.. Na, HCOs, SOt; gas, 92.2 percent Ni, 7.8 B_ Well 390 meters deep. Baths. 23 B Lower Devonian quartzite, slate. 2 springs. Known to Romans. Baths. 24 29.9-50 864 3,742-3, 895 percent COa. Na Cl HCO* B. do 9 springs. Iron spring: 21.3° C; total dissolved solids 564 ppm. Several large wells, large flow. Water used for drinking and baths. Refs. 1827, 1850, 1851, 1854-1857, 1859, I860, 1864, 1865, 1879, 1884, 1913, 1924, 1952, 1996, 2001, 2003. 25 24.8 4,320 4,865 Na, HCOs, Cl; free B Well 200 meters deep. Water used for drinking. Rhein. B Lower Devonian quartzite, slate. 26 22.1; 23.2 1,200; 2,705 4,053 Na, HCOs, Cl, SOi; free COa. 2 wells 375 and 337 meters deep. Water used for drinking. 27 18-31 350 7,546 Na, HCOs, Cl, SO<; free COa. B do Springs; also well 263 meters deep. Water temperature at bottom of well, 31°C. 28 31.1 (max) 11,265 Na, Cl, HCOs; free CO2. C do 5 springs or wells. Baths developed in Middle Ages. Refs. Rhein. 1861, 1868. 29 24.3 1,500- 1,700 8,900 Na, Cl, much Li; gas, 86.7 percent Na, 13.3 C Gneiss Well 184 meters deep. 30 percent COa. Schlangenbad: Schachtquelle 31 30.5 17-30 806 417 • 378-422 Na, Cl; gas, 77.4 percent CO,, 22.6 per- A... Lower Devonian quartzite . Refs. 1863, 1866, 1892, 1942. 7 other springs cent N,. 122 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD No. on fig. 35 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) 31 Wiesbaden: Kochbrunnen 66.7 Alderquelle 64.4 Schutzenquelle Other springs 49. 2 40-49 32 Soden am Taunus: Main well. 32 4 other wells 20-30 33 Offenbach am Main.. 19.2 34 Nauheim: 3 springs 17. 2-20.1 3 wells 30-34.4 35 Kissingen: Well 96 meters deep. 18.1 Well 584 meters deep. 19.2 36 Bad Kolberg 22-36 37 Plaue 19; 22 38 Warmbad bei Wol-kenstein. 26.7-31.2 39 Wiesenbad 20.2 40 Wildstein and Wildbad-Trarbach. 36-36. 2 41 17-22.8 42 Munster am Stein: Hauptbrunnen... 30.6 Brunnen No. 2 4 other wells 31.2 43 Heidelberg Warm 44 20 19.3 44.4- 68.6 34.5- 39.5 45 46 47 Wildbad 48 Liebenzell [Berg: 23.6-26.7 Spring 20.1 49 < Well 20.5 [ Cannstatt 18.4-21.2 50 20; 21 Warm 51 Bad Krozingen 52 Sulzburg 18.5 53 26.4 29.6 19 54 Saeckingen 55 Romerbad K unzing (Bad Salzbrunn). 56 Bad Weissee _ 17.1; 21 57 Fussing 52 Thermal springs and wells in Germany—Continued Flow (hectoliters per day) 5,472 2,124 2,304 2,809 1,440 2,000 24,000 16,000 (max) 16,000 430 2,160 3,240 12,000 180 880 29 8,000 10,000 140 21,160 24,000 Large 360 144 16,000 605 22,600 Total dissolved solids (ppm) 8,667 (hottest) 17,800 4,543 I, 307-18, 000 25.000-33,600 14,976 13,789 17.000-50,000 3,287- 5,539 Low 522 364 II, 900 7,224 264,000 5,079 2,852 706-732 1,257 5,477 3,663-6,556 2,060 379 3,294 1,310 13,490 1,271 Principal chemical constituents Na, Cl; gas, 79.8-83.2 percent N2, 20.2-16.8 percent CO2. Na, Cl; gas. 97.8 percent CO 2,2.1 percent Nj. Na, HCO3, Cl; free CO,. Na, Cl. Na, Cl. Na, Cl, HCO,, SO,— Na, Cl, HCO,, SO,. Na, Cl, SO,..... Na, Cl, SO,..... Na, Cl, HCO,.... Na, HCO,......... Na, HCOs; free CO,.. Na, Cl. Na, Cl; gas, 79.1 percent N, and CH<, 20.9 percent CO,. Na, Cl............. Na, Cl; free COs- Na, Cl; free COi- Na, Cl, HCO3; free CO,. Na, Cl, HCO,---- Na, HCO,, SO,; free CO,. Na, SO,, HCOs-------- Na, Ca, HCO3, SO,; gas, 93.8 percent Ns, Na. .2^peri Na, Cl, HCO,-. Na, Cl, HCO,... C Chemical classification of water Associated rocks Jurassic limestone and Tri-assic slate. Triassic slate.. Lower Permian sandstone.. Tertiary strata.......... Devonian quartzite....... Bunter sandstone (Lower Triassic). Zechstein formation (Upper Permian). Bunter sandstone (Lower Triassic). _____do............-......... Quartzite and gneiss. _do_. Quartz veins in slate. Quartz porphyry___ .do.. Muschelkalk formation (Upper Triassic). Red sandstone, in coal formation. Slate, near gneiss........... Triassic beds over granite and gneiss. ____do....................... Muschelkalk formation (Upper Triassic). .do.. Granite and porphyry.. Gneiss.................... ____do..................... Muschelkalk formation (Upper Triassic). Triassic or Jurassic strata, near granite. Oligocene strata---------- Triassic or Jurassic strata— Remarks and additional references Massenkalk (Jurassic). formation 27 springs and wells. Used by Romans. Large bathing establishments. Refs. 1827, 1831, 1848, 1849, 1851, 1852, 1858, 1867, 1869, 1871-1875, 1883, 1893-1905, 1907-1912, 1915-1919, 1931, 1942, 1943, 1946, 1948, 1959, 1973-1975, 1979, 1982, 1983, 2000, 2005. Numerous springs. 5 wells, maximum depth 230 meters. Baths developed in 16th century. Refs. 1820, 1891, 1900, 1909, 1910, 1920, 1943, 1944, 1958, 1981, 1986, 1997, 1998. Well 275 meters deep. Baths. Refs. 1816, 1826, 1832, 1835, 1890, 1900, 1910, 1921, 1923, 1943, 1949-1951, 987-1991, 2006, 2007, 2011. Refs. 1830, 1840, 1843, 1889, 1927, 1994. Wells 354-780 meter deep. Ref. 1839. 2 wells. Sanatorium. 12 main springs. Developed for bathing in 14th century. Ref. 1992. Well 14 meters deep. Used since early 16th century. Ref. 1992. 2 springs from gallery. Also piped 3 km to Wildbad-Trarbach. Ref 1823. 5 wells 200-300 meters deep; pumped for salt production. Large bathing establishments. Refs. 1847, 1880, 1900, 1934, 1939, 1943, 1976, 1977. Wells 28-66 meters deep. Salt production since early 15th century. Refs. 1847, 1976, 1977. Several wells about 1,000 meters deep. Refs. 1805,1880. Well 155 meters deep. Well 95 meters deep. 11 wells. Analysis is for well having temperature of 62.8° C. Refs. 1808, 1901, 1980, 1995, 2002. 36 springs; wells 5-56 meters deep. Refs. 1833, 1892, 1943, 1995, 2009. 3 springs; 3 wells 50-60 meters deep. Ref. 1845. Spring on island in Neckar River. Well 30 meters deep. Resort. Ref. 1834. 7 main wells, 70 meters deep. 4 springs developed by Romans. Refs. 1834, 1844, 1947. 2 springs. Refs. 1805,1836. Several wells. From gallery. Known to Romans. Resort. Several minor springs from depth 6 meters. Ref. 1828. Iodide, 0.51 ppm. Ref. 1805. 2 springs. Iodide 35 ppm. Hydrocarbon gas. Refs. 1805, 1870, 2008. Oil test well: water at 916 meters; crystalline rock at 1,142 meters. Refs. 1805, 1963.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 123 Thermal springs in Poland [Data chiefly from ref. 1914] No. Tem- Flow Total Associated rocks on Name or location perature (hecto- dissolved Principal chemical constituents Remarks and additional fig. 35 of water liters solids references (°C) per day) (ppm) 1 18.1 6,264 32,000 Na, Cl Middle Liassic sandstone Flowing well 325 meters deep. Salt production. Baths. 24. 5-43.1 7,200 621-735 Na, HCOs, SO<; gas, 65.2 percent Na; 32.9 percent COj; and 6 wells; maximum depth, 167 meters. Developed in 12th 1.9 percent Oj. century. Baths. Ref. 1892. 3 18. 4 5,000 2,881 Schist and gneiss Several springs. Water contains 11.5 ppm Fe. Baths. Refs. 1543, (max) 1885, 1892, 1934, 1937, 1957, 2014. 4 19. 5-29.6 8,000 183-223 Na, HCOj, SO*, SiOj; gas, about equal parts COa and Na. Gneiss. Gypsum-bearing strata nearby. 5 springs. Developed in 16th century. Baths. Ref. 1543. GREECE AND ALBANIA The mainland of Greece, which forms the southern part of the Balkan Peninsula, has many mountain chains that are dominated by the great chain of the Pindus Mountains. The irregular coastline is characterized by many bays and inlets. A few small valleys lie between the mountain ranges and a few plains extend along the lower courses of the main streams, most of which are small and flow rapidly. Several large streams in areas of limestone disappear underground for considerable distances. In the eastern part of the country the general strike of rock strata is east-west; in the western part the strike is north-northwest to south-southeast. There is considerable folding in rocks of Carboniferous through Eocene ages. In the Pindus range and in the Peloponnesus region in the south, Triassic limestone has been thrust over Cretaceous and Eocene strata, which are much folded. Neogene deposits along the coast and in some valleys are not extensively folded, but they have been greatly uplifted by faulting. In some places along the coast the land has risen perceptibly in historic times. Earthquakes are of common occurrence along several fault zones. Most of Crete is occupied by four main groups of mountains. In its western part are metamorphic and basic igneous rocks, overlain in some places by ancient sedimentary rocks and in other places by rocks of Triassic and Jurassic ages, including much dolomite and gypsum. Lower to Upper Cretaceous limestone and schist underlie extensive areas in other parts of the island. In the mountain ranges all these older rocks are considerably folded, uplifted, and, in places, thrust faulted. Miocene and later deposits in the coastal lowlands are comparatively undisturbed. No volcanic rocks seem to be reported in Crete and the nearby small islands. The mountains of northwestern Greece extend into southern Albania to the basin of the Simen Kiver, which flows west to the Adriatic Sea. Northern Albania includes a southeastern prolongation of the Alpine mountain system. These mountains form part of the watershed between the Adriatic and Aegean Seas. The valleys of the larger streams are underlain by Quaternary and alluvial deposits. The bordering hills, chiefly in the southwest, are of marine Miocene strata. By far the greater part of the plateau and mountain areas are of Cretaceous strata, largely of limestone. Many thermal springs in the mainland of Greece are closely related to volcanism or to faults. In some of the volcanic islands thermal springs issue close to the shore, and are sulfureted and generally saline from the infiltration of sea water. No good description of mineral and thermal springs in Albania seems to be available. Official topographic maps of the country indicate about 20 principal springs, 3 of which are thermal. The locations of the thermal springs in Greece and Albania are shown on figure 36; data on the springs are presented in the two tables below.in lg. 16 1 2 3 4 6 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF Koumou, Lemnos Island____ Gavatha (Telonia)........ Efthalou, near M o 1 y v o village. Thermi.................... Thermal springs in Greece chiefly from refs. 2024, 2033, 2040. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per millic Temperature of water (°C) 28 20.5 41.5 17.5 140 45 51-55.8 37-39.4 48.5- 49.8 25-35 19.6 41.6- 43 25 45-59.4 48.5- 50.6 16.4 25-32 123 28 1 23 i 35 15.7 21.4 29.3-40.2 25.5- 33.6 33.5 28-41 20-34 44 34.5- 78. 2 35 25 46.5 34.8-38.5 21 65. 5-87.6 44 Flow (liters per minute) 370 100 Strong 83 246 » 200-600 110 1,000 Total dissolved solids (ppm) 997 2,205 2 3,597 785 * 1,147 ♦ 7,973 2,384 4 2,804 2 20,753 >8,380 2,718 406 924 311 *409 7,703 10,078 39,149 > 32,937 5,810 35,479 1,685 1,762 11,179 Principal chemical constituents Na, Cl; free COa............. Ca(HCOj)j (359); Mg(HC03)j (218); NaCl (308). Ca(HCOj)i (1,407); Mg(HCOj)j (557); NajS04 (98). Na, HCOs; free COa________ Ca(HC03)j (515); Mg(HCOj)j (746); NaHCOa (1,688). Ca)HCOj)j (248); NaaS04 (255). Ca(HOC3)a (87); NaHCOa (409); NajSO* (482). Ca(HC03)i (2,143); Mg(HC03)a (937); NaCl (4,359). Ca(HC08)j (1,047); Mg(HC03)a (618); NaCl (337). Ca(HCOs)a (1,031); NaaSC>4 (118); NaCl (1,030). CaCla (1,576); NaCl (9,361); KC1 (1,048). CaS04 (656); CaCla (1,006); NaCl (5,883); free COa. Mg (HCOs)a (207); CaS04 (1,270 (1,270); NaCl (1,129). Ca(HCOs)a (357); free COa.. Ca(HC03)a (92); NaHCOa (574); NaCl (169); free COa. NaHCO# (101); HaSiOa (83) — - NaaCOa (41); NaCl (415); HaSi03 c$U> a (1,117); Mg(HCOs)a (1,300); CaCla (1,347); NaCl (3,704); free COa. Free HjS................. Mg(HC03)a (654); CaCla (1,253); NaCl (7,129); free COa. Free COa— Na, HC03; free HaS................ Mg, Na, So4, Cl...............---■ CaS04 (629); CaCla (564); NaCl (4,082). CaCla (4,698); NaCl (26,187)...... Mg (HCOs)a (283); CaCla (186); NaCl (973). NaCl (889); Ca; Mg; HC03— Ca, Na, S04, Cl-Na, Cl; free COa- CaCla (1,475); NaCl (8,496). Associated rocks Upper Cretaceous strata.. ___do.................. Probably Triassic strata. .do. Quaternary deposits overlying gneiss. ___do.................... Gneiss................... Lake sediments overlying faulted crystalline schist. Crystalline schist Miocene strata overlying crystalline schist. .....do....................... Gneiss............. Crystalline schist. Volcanic rock...... Probably marine Tertiary strata. Eocene strata........... Quaternary deposits overlying Eocene strata. Eocene or Upper Cretaceous strata, do. .do.. .do.. Probably Upper Cretaceous strata. ----do................... Eocene flysch. .do.. .do.. Quaternary deposits.. ____do............. Upper Cretaceous strata . Lower Cretaceous strata.. Tertiary lava___________ Probably Tertiary strata. Tuffaceous andesite_____ Probably Tertiary lava. .do.. .do.. -do.. _do_. _do_. .do..DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 125 Thermal springs in Greece—Continued vTo. on ig. 36 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) 42 67 43 67 44 28-30 45 Hagia Hellenis 138 46 Conopeli (Orta?) 28 47 THlUnls 21-25 48 21 49 Pournari 20 50 Kaiapha 27.4-35.6 51 i 25 52 Loutraki 19. 5-31. 5 53 Sousaki, near Corinth Hot 54 Epidaurus, near temple of Aesculapius. Warm 55 Therma, Aegina (Egine) Island. 25.5 56 i 20 57 28. 5-41. 2 58 Glyphad (Voliagmeni) 120 59 Hagia Anagyron, Kythnos Island. 38; 52 60 On Nikaria Island... 33. 5-55.7 61 Prassa, Kimolos Island 32 62 Adamantos, Melos (Milo) Island. 135 63 Halikis, Melos Island. 130 64 Atherma, Santorin (Thera) Island: Near shore 16-26 Near base of volcanic cone. 45-60 65 Plakas, Santorin Island 32 66 On south shore of Cos (Kos) Island. Hot 67 On Nisyros Island Hot 68 Lenta, Crete Island 22.5 Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Probably Tertiary strata do do do Quaternary deposits over-lying Pliocene strata. do Na, HCOj *22,600 *4,700 5,492- 16,523 Na,' Cl; free HjS Fault contact between Upper Cretaceous strata and Eocene limestone. Na, HCOj, CL - Upper Cretaceous strata Tertiary marl near intrusive gabbro. Upper Cretaceous strata Probably trachyte. CO2, SOj, HjS 12,824 MgSO( (1,161); CaCl, (1,051); NaCl (9,424); free CO,. 20,000 14,186 Mg(HCOs), (1,812); CaCl, (1,188); NaCl (9,356); much free H,S. Upper Cretaceous strata near dacite. Pliocene deposits overlying crystalline schist. Na, Cl High High Na, Cl - Na, Cl Free HaS Moder- ate Na, Cl Na. HCOi Na, Cl Na, HCOj Probably Cretaceous limestone. COa, SOa Na, HCOa Remarks and additional references Water contains considerable iron. Ref. 2035. 3 main springs. Bathing resort. Refs. 2020, 2034. 3 main springs, temperature, 29°-31°C; several minor springs. Ref. 2022. Solfataras, at north end of Aegean volcanoes. Ref. 2043. At ruins of ancient baths. Ref. 2015. Several springs. Analysis is for spring having temperature 31° C. Bathing resort since ancient times. Refs. 2020, 2033, 2043. 2 springs. 8 springs. Water is highly radioactive. Refs. 2017, 2019, 2041. Ref. 2032. Several springs: also fumaroles. Refs. 2023, 2025. Springs issue at two places below high-tide level. Refe. 2028, 2030. Several fumaroles. Refs. 2027, 2029.2030. 1 Approximately. * Hottest. * Main spring. * Coolest. * Seasonal range. « Other springs. Thermal springs in Albania [Data from ref. 2031] No. on fig. 36 Name or location Associated rocks Remarks 1 1 km west of Peskopija. Lower Tertiary marl and sandstone overlying Paleozoic slate and schist. Sulfurous. 2 10 km north of Rogojna. Upper Tertiary sandstone Do. 3 Lixha; 9 km south of Elbasan. Lower Tertiary marl and sandstone. Sulfurous. Large resort.126 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 20” 22° 24” '26° Figure 36.—Greece and Albania showing location of thermal springs. Greece from refs. 2024, 2038, and 2040. HUNGARY Hungary is bordered on the northwest in part by the Danube River and on the north and northeast chiefly by southern outliers of the Carpathian Mountains. The great curve of these mountains to the east, south, and southwest forms the boundary of the Transyl- vanian region, whose eastern portion was ceded to Rumania after World War I. The Drava River marks part of the southern boundary of Hungary. The western boundary with Austria extends across uplands. Hills in the north and northeast are chiefly of Mesozoic strata, but on the higher slopes of the CarpathiansDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 127 older rocks are exposed. The Bakony Mountains in the northwest extend to the Danube at Budapest, and southward to Lake Balaton. They are mainly of Tri-assic limestone with some Jurassic and Cretaceous strata, but there are considerable areas of volcanic rocks. The Mecsek Mountains in the southwest are also chiefly of Mesozoic rocks, with some volcanic areas. Much of the country is occupied by the great Central Plain which is crossed by the Danube River and several large tributaries to that stream. Most of the plain is underlain by Tertiary rocks, and brackish-water Miocene strata are exposed around the borders. Large parts of the surface are covered by Quaternary deposits, including Recent loess and alluvium. The locations of thermal springs and wells recorded are shown on figure 31, and data on them are given in the table below. Thermal springs and wells in Hungary [Data chiefly from refe. 2045, 2065. Locations of unnumbered springs not identified] No. on fig. 31 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (hectoliters per min.) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents 18-20 22.5 19- 22 20 20 24 20- 25 29 21- 63.8 79.5 (max) 39.4 Tepid 22.5 26-31 28.6-30.7 32 70 48 Pet 480 1,700 2,880 12 Tata-Tovaros: Well Dunalmaas: 723; 728 Ca, Mg, SO*, HCOj Estergonf(Gran): 1,025 1,040 193 Well Budapest: 33.5 Low 600 350-500 Goromboly-Topolca (suburb of Miskolc). Eger: 208 167 140 50 3 20 5 20 2.4 20 26 Ca, HCO» Ca, HCOa; gas 93 percent Nj 54 70 74 65 38-39 38 5,145 Na, Cl, HCO3 Balaton-Heviz: Ca, HCOi, Cl, SO* - Well 60 3.5 2.8 7 15 15 210 2.5 2.3 1.3 Large 2.5 7.8 2.2 45 70 35.6 62 22.5-23 1,016 Na, HCO3 43 Bekes (Borsod-Tapolcza?): 18; 24 43 Well 30-35 50 25 24 28-36 31.8 5.7 4.6 1.2 1,065 (hottest) Na, Ca, Mg, SI, SO4, H2S 18 Remarks and additional references 10 11 12 13 13A 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Ref. 2057. Several springs. |Ref. 2055. J Travertine quarries. Ref. 2050. Ref. 2047. 323 meters deep. Ref. 2047. Issue from Cretaceous dolomite. Resort. Refs. 2044, 2046, 2056, 2059, 2063, 2067, 2068, 2070-2072, 2074, 2076, 2077, 2083-2085. Refs. 2044, 2051, 2053, 2054, 2058, 2063, 2069, 2072, 2076, 2081, 2083, 2085. 2 wells. Spring. 8 wells tapping Triassic limestone. Ref. 2075. 228 and 248 meters deep. Ref. 2075. Well. Do. Do. Well 967 meters deep. Well. Do. Well 1,090 meters deep. Resort. Refs. 2048, 2073. Well. Resort. Well. Do. Do. Well. Ref. 2082. Springs; well. Combustible gas. Refs. 2049, 2079. 5 springs. Well. Do. Well 420 meters deep. Slightly sulfurous. 733 meters deep. Well 330 meters deep. Alkaline. Ref. 2076. Well. Alkaline. Ref. 2076. 2 springs; alkaline earth; slightly sulfurous. Resort. 5 springs; sulfureted. Issue from strata containing brown coal. Ref. 2066. Earthy calcic. Ref. 2076. Well 553 meters deep. ITALY The mountains that bound Italy on the north are parts of the several Alpine chains. They include areas of granite and other crystalline rocks, notably in Mont Blanc and other outstanding mountain masses. From the Western or Maritime Alps of southeastern France, the Apennine Range extends southward throughout nearly the entire length of Italy and forms the backbone of the country. The Apennines are generally considered to be in three parts: the Northern, Central, and Southern ranges, though these are not sharply divided. In their northern and central parts,128 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Figure 37.—Italy and Switzerland showing location of thermal springs. Italy chiefly from ref. 2105 ; Switzerland from ref. 2384.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 129 these mountains consist almost wholly of marine sedimentary rocks of Mesozoic and Tertiary ages. In the south, granite and other ancient crystalline and meta-morphic rocks form considerable parts of the mountains, especially in the Calabrian Peninsula, which forms the “toe” of Italy. In addition to the ancient crystalline rocks, lava of Tertiary and later ages covers considerable areas, chiefly in four districts: (1) the Euganean Hills, forming an area about 25 km in diameter in northeastern Italy about halfway between Verona and Venice; (2) the district in the west-central part near Rome, including the Alban Hills; (3) the volcanic areas west of Naples, including the Phlegraean Fields, part of the Campanian Plain, and the island of Ischia; and to the east, the Apulian area, dominated by Mount Vesuvius; (4) the district of Monte Volture north of Potenza in the province of Basilicata in southern Italy. Many of the principal thermal springs, whose location is shown on figure 37, are closely related to the volcanic areas; others are in areas of sedimentary strata that possibly are underlain by igneous rocks. A few hot springs issue in areas of faulted crystalline and metamorphic rocks. The extensive plains of Lombardy and other lowland parts of the Po River basin in the north are underlain by a great thickness of marine and fresh-water deposits of Pleistocene and Recent ages. Only a very few thermal springs are in that area. Hot springs and vapor vents within an area of 100 square kilometers in Tuscany have been the subject of considerable attention. At Larderello (fig. 38), wells were drilled as early as 1837 in attempts to obtain natural steam for developing power. Other attempts to use the steam for the generation of electric power were made in 1897, but the first successful plants were not established until about 1904. Turbogenerators were installed successfully in 1916. Boric acid and ammonium sulfate are obtained as byproducts, and carbon dioxide is also recovered. Some of the other main fumarole localities also are shown on figure 38. The Tuscany area is underlain by a complex of Permian to Eocene rocks, which are much folded and broken as the result of volcanism and faulting that took place at the close of Pliocene time. Most of the hot springs and vapor vents are alined either along lines of geologic contacts, wrhich may be either stratigraphic or tectonic, or along faults. The boric acid, ammonia, and perhaps other substances in the vapor exhalations, may be derived from laccolithic masses, or from volcanic rocks, or even from basic rocks intruded into schist. 10°30' Figure 38.—Tuscany area, Italy, showing fumarole localities. From ref. 2171. On Ischia Island near the Bay of Naples, are several localities of thermal springs and fumaroles, as shown on figure 39. Information on the principal thermal springs in Italy is summarized in the table below. Figure 39.—Ischia Island, Italy, showing location of thermal springs. From refs. 30 and 2105.130 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Italy [Data chiefly from refs. 2105, 2141, 2168] No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (hectoliters Total dissolved Principal chemical Associated rocks Bemarks and additional fie:. 37 water (°C) per day) solids (ppm) constituents references 1 2 3 4 5 6 6A 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Pre-St. Didier (San Desi-derio). Courmayeur............. Craveggia (Comano)...... Masino__________________ Bormio.................. San Pellegrino.......... Comano.................. Monfalcone______________ Sirmione, in Lago di Garda. Caldiero________________ Abano Bagni............. Battaglia_______________ Montegrotto............. Monteortone_____________ Val Calaono_____________ Lampiano________________ Montafia--.............. Calliano................ San Nazario di Burgundi (Sannazzaro). Casteggio............... Voghera (Rivanzzano)____ Vinadio_________________ Valdieri................ Acqui................... Acqua Santa (Liguria Province). Salso Maggiore........... Peglio.................. Sant’Andrea di Medesano. Fornovo di Taro......... Lesignano de Bagni______ Miano................... Tabiano__________________ Corniglio...___.________ Equi, Fivizzano commune. Castel San Pietro........ Imola__.................. Riolo................... Pieve Fasciana....__.... Torrite................. Porretta................ Bagni di Lucca.......... Montecatini............. Monsummano_____________ San Giuliano___________ Agnano Pisano__________ Vicascio_______________ Pomarance (Val deCecina). Montepisani,.__________ Casciana (Montevaso)___ Uliveto________________ Mammialla bei Volterra (Fenga). Maggiona_______________ Bagno di Romagna_______ San Marino_____________ Citta di Castello______ San Vittore............ Gubbio_________________ Larderello district____ Montecerboli, 18 km south of Volterra. Campiglia Marittima______ Frassine (Casale)________ Montioni (Grosseto)...___ Gavorrano________________ Elba Island (northeast part). Caldanello_______________ Poggetti di Montepescali.. Italian peninsula and small islands 35 17-24 27 38.2 35-40 27 27.5 37.9 63.5 28 80-87 58-78 Hot 63 Hot Warm Warm Warm 28 Warm Warm 30-60 38-64 45-73 22 20 (max) Warm 20 Warm Hot Warm 20 40 26 20 (max) Warm Warm* Warm 32-35 27-38 37-54 24-33 22- 35 33. 5-41 17.8; 30 23 28-50 20-41 36 23- 34 Warm Warm 43 Warm Warm Warm Warm Hot 44 31-43 26 32 34.1 Warm 35.5 35-44 288 320 3,500 HCO3, SO4, Cl HCO3, SO* 864 288 10,000 720 2,736 288 10,000 Large 589 1,000 1,500 298 12,715 2, 500 400 5, 500 4,920 SO4 HCO3, SO4 HCO3, SO4, Cl.... Ca, Na, HCOs, SO4, CO2— SO4, Cl Cretaceous limestone HCO3, Cl. Na, SO4, Cl, H2S Na, SO4, Cl . CO2, H2S, CH4, N2 960 3, 700 880 Na, SO4, Cl Na, SO4 17,000 43 300 14,400 240 500 100-290 1,168-3,372 510 Na SO4 Cl Na’ SOi’ Cl Na’ SOij Cl Tiro, RO4 HdS 324 1,330- 44,000 86, 400 4, 847 sn4 c,\ H*s -. Na SO4, Cl - 123 14, 6C0 1,080 50.000 7,000 HOOi, SO4. Cl HCOi, SOi, Cl Eocene limestone 4,000-22,000 Na, S04, Cl, CO, Liassic and Upper Cretaceous strata. Liassic limestone 4, 320 2,140-2, 390 do 3, 330 500-3,000 Limestone 200 Quartzitic schist 25, 920 2, 376 3, 000 2, 500-4, 000 Mesozoic strata Eocene strata 1,300 H2S Large Mesozoic strata Mesozoic strata Resort. 4 springs. Resort. Refs. 2138, 2191, 2261. Resort. 7 springs. Resort. Refs. 2088, 2089, 2097, 2144, 2188. 3 springs. Resort. Ref. 2256. Resort. Refs. 1297, 1304, 1316. Resort. Refs. 1304, 2127, 2128, 2147, 2173. Resort. Wells; 2 springs. Ref. 2205. Several springs. Resort. Refs. 2095, 2104, 2109, 2114, 2129. 3 springs. Resort. Refs. 2098, 2104, 2114. Gases indicate deep source. Refs. 2104, 2114, 2121, 2178. Resort. Ref. 2104. 3 springs. Ref. 2095. Several springs. Resort. 7 springs. Resort. Ref. 1285. 3 springs. Resort. Refs. 2113, 2176, 2245. Resort. Several springs. Strongly saline. Ref. 2162. 3 springs, 2 of which are strongly saline and the other sulfurous. Resort. Ref. 2263. Ref. 2150. Resort. Saline. Ref. 2149. Several springs. Resort. 3 springs. Resort. Issues along fault. Refs. 2123, 2219. 4 springs. Resort. Ref. 2125. 6 saline and 4 sulfurous springs. Resort. 5 springs. Resort. Refs. 1285, 2093, 2168, 2175. 3 main springs. Temperature of water from 18 small springs ranges from 14° to 19°C. Resort. Refs. 2103, 2137, 2143, 2168, 2200. Resort, vapor baths. Ref. 2224. 12 springs. Resort. 2 springs. Resort. Ref. 2231. Resort. 5 sulfurous and 2 bicarbonate springs. Ref. 2168. Several springs. Ref. 2231. Refs. 2115, 2158, 2202. Several springs. Resort. Several springs. Resort. Resort. Ref. 2235. 8 areas of fumaroles and steam wells. Boric. Developed for electric power. Refs. 2091, 2092, 2111, 2112, 2134, 2163, 2185-2187, 2190, 2194, 2230, 3554. Fumaroles. Boric. Commercially developed. 2 groups. Ref. 2168. Refs. 2168, 2172. Ref. 2207. Ref. 2168.No. on fig. 37 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS Roselle (Boccnaggio)_____ Casaccie................. Talamone................. Ponte a Macereto......... Rapolano................. Mont’Alceto (Armaidlo). _ Petriolo (Montaigne)..... Bagni Vignone............ Chianciano............... San Filippo.............. San Casciano dei Bagni___ San Vito_______________ Saturnia................. Acqua Fitusa (San Giovanni Gemini). Acquasanta (Ascoli Piceno Province). Canino................... Viterbo.................. Civita Vecchia........... Bassano di Sutri (II La-ghetto) . Vicarello (Terme Apolli-nari). Claudia, beside Lago Bracciano. Stigliano................ Acqua Albule............. Acqua Vergine (Laziali Colli), in Alban hills. Albano, near Lago Albano. Palena................... Sujo (Suio)..------------ Telese__................ Atrio del Cavallo on northeast side of Vesuvius crater. Torre Annunziata near south base of Vesuvius Castellammare di Stabbia. Villamaina............... Monticchio, on west slope of Monte Vulture. San Cataldo.............. Contursi................ Temperature of water (°C) 35-44 Warm 32 38 28-40 31 (max) 25. 5-45 36-52 21-39 26; 53 34-42 Warm 37.5 28 24. 5-36 9Q 30-56. 4 56 Tepid 45 (max) 20.2 10-56 23-24 20 (max) 20 35-48 29-45 20-22 52-55 41-66 30-70 Hot Hot 40-43 20-95 40-50 Hot 100 (max) 30 (max) 20 (max) 35 20 (max) 20 23-42 22; 23 21-32 26 20 39-42 32-33 35 39.6 37-39 18. 3-36. 4 Hot Thermal springs and wells in Italy—Continued Flow (hectoliters Total dissolved Principal chemical Associated rocks per day) solids constituents (ppm) Italian peninsula and small islands—Continued Small SO*. 6,720 2,000-4,000 1,824 2,500 43,200 2,650 4, 690 Large 3, 250-3, 500 hco3, SO*, Cl__ Ca, HCO3, SO *_- - HCO3, SO*, Cl__ Ca, HCO3, SO*, Cl. Ca, HCO3, SO*__ Large 2,190-3,660 5,400 720-1,970 Ca, HCO3, SO*. HCO3, SO*, Cl. 34, 500 72 52,000- 104,000 156 3, 447 2,500 4,000 Ca, HCOs, SO*, B02, H2S... Na, Cl, HjS............. Na, HCOs, SO*, Cl, COj, H2S. 2,420 HCOs, SO*, C02, H2S. 2,018 2, 510 Ca, HCOs, SO*, Cl, C02, H2S. C02, H2S-----------.--- 300 Na, HCOs, SO*, Cl, C02. 960 765 ---------- 970-9,860 1,720,000 2,240 HCOs, COs............ Na, HCOs, Cl, H2S___ Ca, HCOs, SO*, C02, H2S 18,000 240,000 2,179 Ca, HCOs, SO*, Cl____ Ca, Mg, Na, HCOs, Cl, C02. Large Large Large 7.000 4,770-19,000 5.000 Na, SO*, Cl. Na, SO*, Cl. Na, SO*, Cl. Large Na, HCOs, Cl. Large Na, HCOs, SO*, Cl. Na, HCOs, SO*, Cl. H2S. 3,600 4,500 Na, HCOs, Cl. Na, HCOs, Cl. 48 660 2,300 Ca, HCOs, C02, H2S. Ca, HCOs, C02___ Large SO*......... SO*, C02, II2S 30,000 500 HCOs, SO*, Cl, H*S Large Moderate 4,430 Ca, Na, HCOs, SO*, Cl, C02, H2S. SO*, C02, H2S.......... 17,300 Na, H2S 1,250 960 4,000 2,400 5,’5Y(L11,670 Ca, SO*, C02, H2S SO*, Cl, H2S______ Ca, Na, SO*, Cl_— Mesozoic strata; much tufa.. Rhaetic limestone (Upper Triassic). ____do...................... Mesozoic strata............ Pliocene overlying Mesozoic strata; much tufa. ____do...............-...... Mesozoic strata____________ Eocene strata; much tufa___ Pliocene overlying Mesozoic strata. Eocene strata............ Pliocene overlying Mesozoic strata. Mesozoic strata near trachyte; much tufa. Limestone.................... Mesozoic lava; much tufa... Lava___________________ Lava. Lava. Limestone. Limestone Paleozoic limestone. Lava.132 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Italy—Continued No. on fig. 37 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (hectoliters per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references Italian peninsula and small islands—Continued 118 119 120 Filicuri Island . San Calogero, on Lipari Island. Vulcano Island Hot 35-58 Hot Several springs. Ref. 2207. Several springs. Refs. 2099, 2107, 2135,2154. Many fumaroles in lava crater. Steam. Temperature of gases and acid fumes exceeds 300°C. Gases contain H3BO3. Refs. 2043, 2122, 2131, 2132, 2250, 2266. Large Na, HC03, S04, Cl Sicily 121 Alcamo Warm 122 San Lorenzo, near Roc- 38.5 HCO3, SO* 123 cameno. Montevago 31 9,760 230 57 720 124 Sciacca, near the city: Molinelli 28 12.500 5,820 20.500 Acqua Santa .. .. 32 Na', HCO3 Solfurea 52 1' 125 Acqua Calda, near Trabia. 26 126 Termini Imerese, near sea- 42; 43 1, 584; 432 6,712 14,500; 18,030 Na, SO4, Cl, CO2 127 shore. Sclafani ... 33; 35 128 Cefalu-Diana .. 38 129 Castroreale 32; 25 360; 72 Small Small 5,350; 3,900 130 Ali-Marina, on sea coast: 5 springs 28-36 2 springs _. 26; 28 2,160 131 Mount Etna, on south and Hot 132 east slopes. Acireale (Santa Tegla) 20 (max) SO4, HjS 133 Grammichelle (Acqua 22-35 134 Calda; Mineo). Pantelleria Island on 30-75 432 3,680- 7,980 Na, Cl northwest coast. Rel. 2152. Resort. Refs. 2116, 2148, 2240. 2 springs. Resort. Ref. 2184. 2 main springs. Resort. 2 springs. Resort. Sulfur water. Resort. Refs. 2192, 2193, 2232. Bicarbonate water. Many fumaroles. Refs. 2239, 2266. Resort. Ref. 2145. 4 springs. Also hot springs and and fumaroles in crater. Sardinia 135 La Crucca. Warm 136 San Martino 25 29 3,000 T ftvft 137 Ploagre 20 (max) 138 Thiese Warm 139 Mesumundu Warm 140 Benetutti 34-46 141 Orani Warm 142 Conone Warm 143 Casteldoria (Castel Dora) 70-75 Granite porphyry 144 Fordongianus 54 145 Sardara 50-60 146 Villasor (Acqua Cotta) 40; 62 Ca, Na, HCO3 Contact of granite and tra- 147 San Satumino 34-43 chyte. 148 Is Bangius 44 149 Caddas.. 55 2,160 Several springs. Resort; table water. Ref. 2229. Ref. 2225. Do. Do. Ref. 2207. Several springs. Refs. 2195,2196, 2225, 2228. Water is saline. Refs. 2225, 2227. 5 springs. Resort. Refs. 2228, 2229. 2 main springs. Refs. 2225, 2226, 2228 3 springs. Ref. 2228. Ref. 2228. Do. Unidentified locations (data from ref. 2141) Bano dell'Osa 32 23 22-25 20 (max) 29-42 23 20 (max) 21- 25 22- 25 Beveretto__ . 46,600 Bulgherano.. . Florinas Monte de Castona Sigona Grande 35,400 Siligo Solofrano Torrent Uria Torrent Alkaline. Do.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 133 PORTUGAL Portugal occupies an area about 300 miles long, north-south, and 100 miles wide, east-west, on the west side of the Iberian Peninsula. The country is traversed by mountain ranges that trend east-west and are continuations of ranges in Spain. Most streams flow westward to the Atlantic. The Minho River forms part of the northern boundary; the Guadiana River forms part of the southeastern boundary. The greater part of Portugal is underlain by rocks of Archean and Paleozoic ages, cut by eruptive rocks of later dates, like the syenite laccolith of Serra de Monchique in the south. In the south also are extensive areas of Lower Carboniferous sandstone and conglomerate, with coal beds. Mesozoic de- posits, chiefly of Jurassic age and less extensive areas of Cretaceous rocks, are present in lower areas. The plain of the Tagus River and other large areas near the coast are covered by Tertiary deposits. Great eruptions of basalt and tuff in early Tertiary time are covered in part by marine deposits of Oligocene and Miocene age. The mountains of northern Portugal are mainly of plutonic rocks flanked by Paleozoic sedimentary strata. Thermal springs are not common, though 34 localities are recorded, as shown on figure 40. Most of them have been developed as bathing resorts. Information on the various springs in Portugal is presented in the table below. 10" 8" 6" 4" 2° 0” 2” 4° Figure 40.—Portugal and Spain showing location of thermal springs. Portugal from refs. 2268 and 2272 ; Spain chiefly from ref. 2346.134 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD No. on fig. 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Thermal springs in Portugal [Data chiefly from refs. 2268, 2272. Locations of unnumbered springs not identified. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per millionj Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Mon?So (Valaderes de 20 Minho). Geres (Fonte da Bica) 42.5 21.6; 31.2 28.7 Caldas da Saude (Caldinhas). 27 Vizela and Mourisco.. 54; 62.4 21 69 Vilarelho Pedras Salgadas Warm AlfaiSo (Braganca) 15 Canavezes 35.3 61 SSo Lourengo 31.1 Warm Carvalhal (Castro Daire)— 21-29.5 SSo Pedro do Sul 67 Fonte Santa (Mantelgas) — Hot Hot 50 Sao Paulo Warm Warm Luso: 27.2 SSo JoSo de Luso 20.5 19.2 Piedade 25-27. 5 Sao Martinho (Aguas de 27-29 Salir). Aguas Santas Warm 33.4 (max) 31.5-40 32.7 Caldas de Monchique (S. 30-32.1 Joao, Chagas, Fonta Santa). Monfortinho 28 Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Na, SO* 282 81; 110 188 Na, HCOa HCOj (60); SO* (11 ppm) _ Na, SO4 Na, Cl, SO4 324 205 Na (92); HCOa (79); Cl (30); fluoride (23.6). Na, HCO3 Contact of schist and amphibolite. 268 Na, NCOa, SO4 Na, SO4—- 92.5 251 Ca; Na; Cl (35.5); Si02 Na, SO4 - - 25 292 SO4; free H2S__ Na, SO4 Nai SO4 Na, SO4 Nai SO4- Na, SO4 283 3,600 42 35 Na, SO4 252 HCO3, Cl Large Ca, Na, HCOa, Cl Ca, Cl, SO4 —. Faulted Jurassic strata 1,390 3,169 Ca, Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl HCO3, Cl 4,520 3,558 Na (1,290); Ca (234); HCO3 (284); SO, (290); Cl (2,260). Na, HCOa, SO,, Cl Na, SO4 330 At border of granitic laccolith. Remarks and additional references Strongly radioactive. Resort. Ref. 2274. Used since Roman times. Strongly radioactive and high in fluoride. Resort. Refs. 2283, 2292, 2295, 2296. 2 springs. Strongly radioactive; fluoride, 3 ppm. Resort. Refs. 1760, 2276, 2284, 2285. Strongly radioactive. Resort. Ref. 2276. Strongly radioactive. Resort. Refs. 2273, 2283. 2 springs. Radioactive. Resort. Temperature of nearby spring, 31° C. Ref. 2283. Slightly saline and radioactive. Resort. Ref. 2276. Faulted zone of Rio Tamega. Resort. Refs. 2291, 2306. Faulted zone of Rio Tamega. Resort. Ref. 2291 Do. Do. Do. Bathing. Ref. 2281. Weakly radioactive. Resort. Ref. 2276. Strongly radioactive. Resort. Refs. 2283, 2300. Strongly -radioactive. pH, 8.1. Resort. Also small warm sulfur spring at Caldas Velhas 2 km distant. Ref. 2302. Weakly radioactive. Resort. Saline, alkaline, radioactive. Resort. Ref. 2276. Strongly radioactive. Resort. Ref. 2283. Resort. On bank of Rio Dao. Resort. Do. Weakly radioactive. Resort. Resort. Much gas. Both water and gas strongly radioactive. Resort. Radioactive. Bathing. Refs. 2298, 2299, 2303, 2304. Highly radioactive. Resort. Resort. Ref. 2301. Weakly radioactive. Resort. Resort. Do. 5 main springs. High fluoride content; pH, 6.9; radioactive. Developed in Roman times. Resort. Refs. 2271, 2277, 2279, 2283, 2290, 2305. 4 springs. Strongly radioactive. Resort. Ref. 2285. Strongly radioactive. Resort. 5 main springs. pH, 9.6. Bathing. Refs. 2271, 2278, 2290, 2293. Radioactive. Ref. 2268. Ref. 2276. RUMANIA (ROMANIA) Bumania extends northwest and west from the Black Sea and includes parts of the Carpathian and Transylvanian Mountains and high plateaus beyond. The Danube Biver forms most of the southern boundary of the country, and the Pruth Biver forms most of its northeastern boundary. The higher parts of the Transylvanian Mountains are largely of schist and other met amorphic rocks, which are flanked on the south by marine Jurassic and Cretaceous strata overlain on the lower slopes by flysch of Late Cretaceous and early Tertiary ages. These formations also extend along the east base of the Carpathians, being overlain in a trough farther east by flat-lying to strongly folded Miocene salt-bearing beds. In the south-central part of the country are oil-bearing beds of Tertiary age. Along the lower parts of the Pruth and Danube Bivers are extensive areas of marsh and lagoons. Farther up the Danube the adjacent lands are somewhat higher, and in some places, hills of crystalline rocks rise above the Quaternary deposits.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS Many mineral springs issue in the mountains and uplands, but most of them are cold. Thermal springs are found at numerous places, as indicated on figure 41. Nearly all principal springs have been developed as 135 bathing resorts, some having been in use since Roman times. Very little information is available on most of the springs, as shown in the table below. 14” 16° 18” 20° 22” 24” 26” 28° Thermal springs and wells in Rumania No. on fig. 41 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (hectoliters per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Remarks and references i Fdlixfurdo (Felix baths), 8 km southeast of Oradea: Well- . 48 170, 000 812 Ca, SO*, C03 47 meters deep. Ref. 2328. Refs. 2320, 2330, 2331. Baths. 2 springs 41. 3; 48. 2 927; 947 Ca, Na, HCOu, SO,, C02. 2 3 Resort. 4 Baltzatesti (Baltatestii), near Targu-Neamtu. Korosbanya (Altenburg) _ _ Hebe, in S&ngeorz-B&i region. Csikszereda (Katalin) Resort. Ref. 2308. 5 Warm Weakly sulfurous. Ancient “Thermae- Pannoniae.” Ref. 1293. Ref. 2333. 6 7 10. 7 868 Ca, Na, HCO3, S04, C02. Ref. 2330. 7735—614 0—65------10136 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Rumania—Continued No. on fig. 41 Number or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (hectoliters per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents 8 Tusnad (Ilona) _ _ 21; 22. 5 5, 254 9 Caciulata. 10 Vizakna 28. 7-45 11 Herculesbad (Mehadia): Hygea Hercules _ _ _ 46 38, 400 3, 440 Na, Ca, Cl; gas, 40 percent N2. Others. 12 13 14 Calimanesti (Calimanescii). 15 16 17 Slanic. 18 19 Tekir Ghiol, near Con- 20 stantsa. Remarks and references Ref. 2330. Mineralized. Ref. 2308. Saline, iodine. Radioactive. Water temperature, 25°-62.5°C. Ancient “Thermae Herculis ad aquas.” Refs. 2309, 2323, 2325, 2327, 2329. Baths. Ref. 2318. Resort. Ref. 2308. Do. Used by Romans. Ref. 2308. Resort. Ref. 2308. Saline mine water. Baths. Refs. 2308, 2314. Ref. 2308. Do. Radioactive. Refs. 2315, 2319. SPAIN Spain occupies about five-sixths of the Iberian Peninsula, which consists mostly of a great plateau, limited on the north by the Pyrenees Mountains and the Cantabrian Mountains and on the south by the Sierra Morena. The plateau is traversed by four minor mountain ranges which separate the drainage basin of the Ebro River from that of the Duero River. The Ebro drains the northeastern part of the country and empties into the Mediterranean Sea; all the other main streams flow southwestward or westward to the Atlantic. The plateau region and bordering mountains are underlain by a massif of ancient rocks, complexly folded and faulted, and form a part of the Hercynian tectonic region of southern Europe. Archean granite, gneiss, and schist form much of the Pyrenees Mountains. Paleozoic sedimentary rocks constitute other main mountain masses. Sedimentary strata of Mesozoic age border most areas of older rocks and also cover large areas in south-central Spain. In the north, northeast, and southeast, large areas of older rocks are overlain by marine Tertiary strata. Volcanic rocks are present in only minor areas. The locations of thermal springs are shown on figure 40, and the available information on them is given in the table below. Thermal springs in Spain [Data chiefly from ref. 2346. Location of unnumbered spring not identified] No. on fig- 40 Name or location Temperature of water (° C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids Principal chemical constituents (ppm) Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 1 Car hallo: Bafios Viejos (Old Baths). Bafios Nuevos (New Baths). 2 Ortejo...................... 3 Aguas de Bejo_______________ 4 Caldelas de Reyes___________ 33-40 26 28-42 25 39.4 404-418 342; 375 651-2, 009 261 Low Granite. Na, SO4. .do. Na, SO4— -Naj 'Cl, SOi! 3 springs. Bathing. 2 springs. Bathing. Refs. 2342, 2343. 4 springs. Resort. Ref. 2343. Ref. 2343. 4 springs. Resort. Ref. 2344. 5 La Toja, on island of same name. 6 Caldas de Cuntis---------- (max) 60 (max) 60 400 Low Low Several springs. Resort. Ref. 2344. Several sprigns. Resort. 7 Puente Caldas, 15 km east- southeast of Pontevedra. 8 Caldas de Tuy_____________ (max) 30 47-50 Low Low Includes nearby warm spring of San Justo de Sacos. Resort. Ref. 2344 Several springs in bed of Rio Mifio. Resort. Ref. 2344. 9 10 11 12 13 Carballino_______ Polgras__________ .Parada de Achas. Lugo_____________ Caldas de Oviedo. Buyeres de Nava. La Hermida_______ 28 24 32 43 43 21-25 50-60 100 Small Small 120 Large 62.5 Large 0) Na, SO4. (i) Na, SO4. 0) HCO3— ...... Ca, SO4- ______ Na, Cl.. Silurian strata......... Carboniferous limestone. Contact of Triassic strata with Carboniferous limestone. •Resort. Ref. 2344. Resort. Contains nitrogenous matter. Resort 3 springs. Resort. Several springs. Resort. See footnote at end of table.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 137 Thermal springs in Spain—Continued No. on fig. 40 16 17 34 Name or location Puente Viesgo. Alceda......— Solares: Main spring.. Small spring.. Ontaneda----------- Molinar de Carranza. Uberuaga de Ubilla... Alzola.............. Cestona... Betelu____ Tiermas... Panticosa.. La Puda de Montserrat_____ La Garriga---------------- Caldetas (Banos de Titus). Vichy Catalan------------- Porvenir de Miranda..... Arnedillo................. Fitero, Bafios Viejos... Fitero, Bafios Nuevos. Alhama de Aragon________ Trillo and Carlos III. Montemayor....... Alange_______ Fuencaliente. Mar mole jo. Busot..... Fortuna___ Archena___ Alhama de Murcia. Zujar............. Graena____________ Lanjaron__________ Fuente Amargosa.. Puertollano_______ Temperature of water (°C) 35 27 29.8 27.2 30-35 27 30.5 27; 31 24 22-42 26-31 27-29.3 60 38.5 60 22.5 52.5 (max) 47.5 48 34 23-30 28 25-50 21 39 52.5 55.5 (max) 45 38 43 16-30 21 Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 34; 910 2,550 P) Na HCO3, Cl Jurassic strata near Carboniferous limestone. (') Na, HCO3 Nal Cl — 1,186 2,150 544 Jurassic strata overlying Carboniferous limestone. Cretaceous limestone P) Na, HCOi, Cl Ca, HCO3 Large (') Na, Cl - Na', SO4 P) P) (') m (>) Nai SO<, Cl 387 Na, SO4 Na', Cl 208 180 200 130 1,080 10,000 16,000 Naj Cl Na, HCO3, Cl Na, Cl.' Na, Cl No,', SO4, Cl Ca, Na, SO4, Cl 164 216 Na, SO4 - Ancient (crystalline?) rocks. Ca, HCO3 170 Ca; HCOs; HjSiOs (52 ppm); Fe203. Na, HCOs Ca, SO4 3,000 Large Na, Cl NaJ SO4, Cl p) Ca, SO4 5,300 Large Na, SO4, Cl p) Ca; HCO3; Fe203_. .. p) Remarks and additional references 2 springs. Resort. Resort. f Resort Do. Several springs. Resort. 3 springs. Water contains nitrogenous matter. Resort. Ref. 1293. Water contains small amount of lithium. Bathing. Ref. 1293. 2 springs. Bathing. Ref. 1642. 3 springs. Bathing. Several springs. Bathing. 5 main springs. Water contains nitrogenous matter. Resort. Ref. 1576. 4 main springs. Resort. Bathing. Do. Do. 3 springs. Resort. Several springs. Resort. Flows from gallery. Resort. Resort. Strongly radioactive. Also several small springs, 29°-37°C. Ref. 2339. 6 main springs in two groups of differing chemical character. Bathing. Water contains small amount of lithium. Resort. Ref. 2291. Bathing. Ref. 2291. 7 springs. Resort. Ref. 2338. Bathing. 3 springs. Bathing. Bathing. Bathing. Refs. 1285,1576. 4 springs. Resort. 4 main springs. Resort. Developed by the Romans. 7 springs. Resort. Water contains nitrogeneous matter. Bathing. Ref. 2348. 1 Results of chemical analysis given in ref. 2349. SWEDEN A detailed study of springs throughout Sweden was made by Wahlenburg (ref. 2353), who used the term “Quellen-Warme” to refer to their temperature. His report has therefore been included in some bibliographies on thermal springs. Although some springs were found to be perceptibly above the mean annual temperature of the air at their localities, nearly all were below 10°C, and none were considered to be truly thermal. No other reports on thermal springs in other parts of the Scandinavian Peninsula seem to be recorded. SWITZERLAND The southern part of Switzerland is bordered by the main chain of the Alps and the western part by the Jura Mountains. Between them are the Bernese Alps lying entirely in Switzerland. The valley of the Rhine River from the Lake of Constance and that of the Rhone River in the south are deep and narrow, but the basin of the Aar River and the smaller one of the Thur River contain wide areas of valleyland which form more than one-half the total area of the country. Most of the mountains are composed of belts of marine sedimentary rocks of Mesozoic age, greatly folded and faulted in the Alps but less disturbed in the Jura Mountains. In the central plain that forms much of the basin of the Aar, the bedrock deposits, chiefly of Tertiary age, are partly marine and partly brackish-water and fresh-water. These older materials are largely covered by glacial material and stream alluvium. The extensive folding and faulting in the mountain areas would seem to be favorable to the presence of thermal springs. However, only a very few of the great many mineral springs are recorded as thermal; but perhaps only those which have been developed commercially • have received attention. Those springs for which descriptions have been found as shown on figure 37, and information concerning them is presented in the table below.138 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Switzerland [Data chiefly from ref. 2384. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on fig. 37 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (cubic meters per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) 1 Large 2 Zurzach: Well 27.7 20-29 1,011 Well 38 300 3 Bad Schinznach 34; 36 720 2,971 4 Baden-Aargau, in Aar River 46-48 550-850 4,666 Valley and bed of Lim- mat River. Warm km southwest of Baden. 6 48 7,800 7 Yverdon at south end of 24 540 413 Lake Neuchatel. 8 Weissenburg 24-28.7 42 1,628 24 10 Pfaefers (Pfafers) 35-40 5, 760 428 11 Lavey-les-Bains 45-47.3 40 1,148 (hottest) 12 21 13 Saxon 25 200-800 760 14 Leukerbad (Loeche - les- 39-51.3 10,000- 2,028 Bains). 12,000 (hottest) 15 Ehemalig (former Brlger- 30 650 bad.) 16 Acquarossa 25.3 430 2,551 17 Vais 25 600 2, 075 18 24 Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Na (293); HCOs (262); SO* (263); Cl (146); free gas, 90 percent Nj. Ca (365); Na (434); HCOs (288); SO* (1,076); Cl (604); dissolved COj and HjS. Ca (517); Na (798); HCOs (481); SO* (1,418); Cl (1,200); free gas, 69 percent Nj, 30 percent COj. Ca (31); Na (54); HCO3 (215); Cl (60); and HS (5); free C O j, HjS. Ca (340); Mg (77); HCOs (125); SO* (1,040); dissolved COj and O. Ca (55); Na (29); HCOs (236); SO* (30); Cl (34); dissolved Ns. Ca (52); Na (275); HCO3 (112); SO* (423); Cl (181). Ca (460); Mg (60); HCOs (149); SO* (1,285); free gas, 98 percent Nj. Ca (500); Mg (105); HCO (530); SO* (1,303); dissolved gas, chiefly CO2. Ca (473); Mg (60); HCOs (459); SO* (1,040); free and dissolved COj. CaSO*......................... Mesozoic strata. Bunter sandstone (Lower Triassic). Gneiss________________________ Fault between Jurassic limestone and Triassic strata. Keuper formation (Upper Triassic). Probably Keuper limestone. Probably Tertiary molasse.. Morainal gravel_____________ Triassic strata. Probably crystalline schist.. Mesozoic schist and limestone. Base of alluvium overlying schist. Crystalline rock............ Mesozoic strata_____________ Dogger limestone (Middle Jurassic). Crystalline rocks. Triassic dolomite. .do. Probably crystalline. Remarks and additional references In 2 railway tunnels crossing west extension of Baden thermal zone. Ref. 2365. 404 meters deep. Used for bathing. Ref. 2362. 416 meters deep. 2 springs, developed A.D. 1658. Resort. Refs. 1285, 1291, 1687, 1699, 2366, 2367, 2386, 2387. About 20 main springs; flow varies with the season. Several resorts. Refs. 1699, 2368, 2379-2381, 2386, 2391. Bathing. Several wells about 1,000 meters deep. Resort. Ref. 1285. 2 shallow wells, developed 1903-05. Water may rise from considerable depth. Resort. Refs. 1293, 1294. Water contains 10 ppm Sr. Resort. Refs. 30, 1687. Resort. Ref. 30. Resort; water also piped 4 km north to Ragaz (Ragatz) resort. Refs. 30, 1285, 1291, 1669, 1687, 1699, 1892, 2369, 2386. Water obtained from wells. Radioactive. Small amount of free oxygen. Resort. Refs. 30, 1687, 2354, 2355, 2363, 2376. Bathing. Flow varies with the season. Bathing. Ref. 1687. The Ca and SO* probably are derived from Triassic gypsum; moderate radioactivity from underlying granite. Resort. Refs. 30, 571, 1285, 1291, 1669, 1687, 1699, 2364, 2373, 2375. Bathing. Resort. Ref. 1293. 2 wells, bored in 1899 to depths of 80 and 130 meters. Refs. 1293, 1294. Mineral character probably derived from strata overlying schist. Local use. YUGOSLAVIA Yugoslavia includes Serbia, Croatia, Montenegro, and Macedonia and covers the northwestern part of the Balkan Peninsula. The Karawanken Alps extend along the northwestern border, and most of the country forms an upland area between these mountains and minor mountains along its southeastern border. In the east the Morava, or March, River cuts through the mountains. Along the Danube River, which forms part of the eastern boundary, there is much low swampy land. The mountain regions are composed largely of granite and other crystalline rocks flanked by marine Paleozoic formations; but some areas between the mountain ranges are of Cretaceous limestone that forms a karst topography. In these areas there are many springs, some of which are slightly thermal; but the principal thermal springs of the country are in the more mountainous areas, as shown on figure 41. Information on the several springs is given in the table below. Thermal springs and wells in Yugoslavia [Data chiefly from refs. 1304, 2410, 2414. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on fig. 41 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 1 26.6 Bathing. Ref. 1293. 2 31 3,000 475 351 Pliocene coal-bearing beds overlying Triassic limestone. Tertiary limestone overlying Mesozoic dolomite. 3 (max) 26. 5-37 444 sort; sanatorium. Ref. 1304. Known to the Romans. Resort. 4 Vhrinka Warm Refs. 1304, 2431. Resort.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 139 Thermal springs and wells in Yugoslavia—Continued No. on fig- 41 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 26 363 Miocene strata overlying Triassic limestone. (max) 36.3 37.5 2,808 452 Ca, Na, HCOs, SO4, Cl. (Reported ELSiCh, 1,128). Ca, Mg, HCO3 Franz Josef-bad (Tuffer) Tertiary strata and andesite tuff overlying Triassic limestone. Eocene flysch near karst limestone. 37 (max) 360 3,053 Ca, Na, HCO3; Cl (1,467)... 36.2 1,100 386 Varazdinske (Warasdin) (max) 57 Ca, Na, HCO3, SO*, Cl Toplice. 41.8; 43 49.8 470 25 Caj Na, HC03 50-60. 5 440 42.2; 46. 6 64 Low Ca, HCO3, SO4, Cl Vrdnik 886 Ca, Na, HCO3, SO4- . 34 Ca, Mg, HCO3, SO4- . 22 1,400 35,350 Na (10,877); Cl (18,780) Rogatsch (Rogaska Slatina).. 16 Na, IICO3 22. 5 35-37. 5 Hamsigrad (Gamsigrad) 30 HCO3- 41-46 425 27 (main- spring) 76-78 87.5 72-72. 8 Na, SO4 Remarks and additional references Developed A.D. 1687. Resort. Ref. 1304. 2 springs; known to the Romans. Refs. 1304, 1310. Bathing resort. Ref. 1304 3 springs; known to the Romans. The water is radioactive. Resort. Refs. 30, 1304, 2420. Resort. Ref. 2431. Ancient Aquae Jassae. Sulfur spring baths. Refs. 2394, 2431. Sulfur baths. Ref. 2431. Water contains Zn, Cu. Resort. Refs. 2392, 2412, 2431. Sulfur baths. Refs. 2402, 2431. Bathing resort. Refs. 2399, 2407. 3 main springs. Resort. Refs. 2425, 2431. Water has high fluoride content. Resort. Ref. 2393. 2 springs; water has high fluoride content. Ancient Aqua Balissae. Resort. Refs. 2393,2404. Water has high fluoride content. Resort. Refs. 2393, 2401, 2405, 2431. Resort. Ref. 2406. Resort. Ref. 2411. Bathing resort. Sulfurous. Resort. Ref. 2399. Known to Romans. Resort; sanatorium. Ref. 1304. Resort. Ref. 2409. Resort. Refs. 2400,2415,2421-2424. Classed as slightly thermal. Resort. Ref. 2426. Resort. Ref. 2403. Sulfurous. Resort. Ref. 2399. Resort. Ref. 2408. Slightly sulfurous. Bathing resort. Refs. 2399,2431. Bathing. Bathing resort. Ref. 2431. Do. On bank of Timok River. Resort. Ref. 2399. Water is radioactive. Bathing resort. Refs. 2395,2418,2431. Ruins of Roman baths. Resort. Refs. 2398,2399. Much free CO2. Bathing. Ref. 2399 Bathing. Ref. 2399. Bathing resort. Ref. 2399. More than 20 wells. Bathing resort. Ref. 2397. AFRICA ALGERIA AND TUNISIA Algeria and Tunisia, which comprise much of northern Africa, border the south side of the Mediterranean Sea. The two countries have similar climatic and geologic conditions and may conveniently be considered together. The rugged range of the Maritime Atlas, or Kabylia Mountains, closely borders most of the coast of Algeria, and cliffs or hills rise abruptly from the seashore. The mountains are composed almost entirely of meta-morphic rocks, the most ancient in Algeria. Along the northeastern part of the coast the mountains recede a few miles, and there are some low sandy areas. To the south, and nearly parallel with the coastal range, the Tellian Atlas Mountains extend eastward from Morocco. The Tellian Atlas ranges are composed chiefly of folded Mesozoic and Tertiary strata. South of these mountains is a broad high plateau region containing many undrained saline lakes and marshes. The rocks in this region are somewhat folded and much faulted, for there are both downwarps and horst blocks. The rocks of these uplands consist mainly of marine deposits of Cretaceous and later ages, but include some continental deposits. Beyond the plateau belt is the Saharan Atlas Range composed of folded Tertiary strata. The southern front of this range descends steeply to the Sahara Desert, a vast expanse of plains underlain chiefly by Miocene and Pliocene deposits. Tertiary volcanic rocks are present at many places in the mountain areas. The northern and northwestern parts of Tunisia are mountainous and well watered. The central plateauo Figure 42.—Northern part of Algeria showing location of thermal springs. From refs. 2448, 2449, 2455. THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLDDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 141 region farther south is more arid and is crossed by an eastern extension of the Saharan Atlas Mountains. Another branch of the range extends southeastward. The northern part of the eastern coastal belt is a lowland region 50 to 100 km wide, which is fertile and fairly well watered. In its middle part are several oases, but the belt narrows southward, where there are brackish marshes and shallow intermittent lakes. The southern part of the country is within the Tunisian Sahara, but there are some upland areas, chiefly in the extreme southeastern part. The northern mountains are composed chiefly of marine strata of Late Triassic through Jurassic ages. Much of central Tunisia is underlain by Lower Cretaceous formations. Upper Cretaceous strata are exposed near the coast, and Miocene and Pliocene beds of sandstone and marl underlie most lowland areas. The Tunisian Sahara is underlain largely by Quaternary sand and gravel. Many noted thermal springs rise in Algeria. Several were developed as bathing places during Roman times, and they are still well-patronized resorts. According to Hanriot (ref. 2455), there are 77 groups of mineral springs in Algeria; of these, 64 are classed as thermal. There are several groups of thermal springs in the mountainous belt that crosses northern Tunisia. The most accessible of these springs were developed in ancient times as bathing resorts and have been in nearly continual use down to the present. Another region of thermal springs is in the south-central part of Tunisia where numerous springs, both thermal and of normal temperature, issue along the borders of saline flats, especially at Shat-el-Jerid. These and the northern springs are described in a comprehensive report by Berthon (ref. 2436). Information on the thermal springs in Algeria and Tunisia is summarized in the two tables below. The locations of the springs are shown on figures 42 and 43. 8° 10” Figure 43.—(Northern part of Tunisia showing location of thermal springs. From ref. 2436. Thermal springs and wells in Algeria [Data chiefly from refs. 2448, 2449, 2455. Location of unnumbered springs not identified. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on fig. 42 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) 1 Hammam Ben Chiguer (Sidi Chirgh). 26.3-33 40 3,075 2 Hammam Bou Ghrara (Ghara). 43.4-45. 7 720 404 3 Ain Bel Kheir 35 200 1,090 4 Hammam de Sebdou 22.5 Large 450 5 Hammam Tihammamine.. 21.8 Large 392 6 Hammam Tahammamit (Ouled Raou). 31.2 381 7 Hammam Ouled Sidi Ab-delli (Les Abdellys). 33.3-33. 7 500 : 237 8 Hammam Bou Hadjar 19-75 Large 3,414-4,890 9 Ain Madagre 30.7 20 2,126 10 Hammam Sidi Dederop (Bains de la Reine). 55 60 10,223 11 Ain el Ourka 42. 5; 46. 5 5,609 14,260 12 Hammam Selama 35; 37 38 Principal chemical, constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references Ca, Na, HCOs, Cl„. Ca, Na, IICOs, C1-- Ca, Na, HCOs, S04, Ca, Mg, HCO3, Cl- Ca, Mg, Na, HCO3-Ca, Mg, Na, HCO3- Faulted Miocene strata. Cl Many springs. Water used for bathing. 4 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 2432. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. 4 springs. Water used for bathing. Ca, HCOs, Cl; free H2S, CO2--------------------------- Ca, Na, HCO3, Cl__________ Quaternary deposits over- lying Triassic(?) strata. Ca, Na, HCOs, SO4, Cl. Na, Cl............ Ca, Na, SO4, Cl... Ca, Na, HCOs, SO4, Cl. Faulted Triassic strata. 3 main springs. Water used for bathing. Ancient Roman baths. 30 springs. Main spring (75°C) flows 210 liters per minute. Tufa deposited in mounds. Resort and infirmary. Refs. 2432, 2477, 2486. Water contains 1.1 ppm of AS2O3. Used for bathing. Water contains 64 ppm Br. Resort. Ref. 2432. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 2461. 2 oil test wells. Gypsum penetrated at depth of 272 meters. Water contains 50 ppm of BO3. Tufa deposited. Resort.142 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Algeria—Continued No. on fig. 42 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) 13 Ain Nouissy 20.2 10 14,765 14 Hammam Ouled Khaled (Nazereg). 45-49 480 1,833 15 Hammam Bou Hanifia, (HanGfia, Sidi Hanefiah). 42-66 600 1,314 16 Ain Keberta 24.5 5 4,319 17 Hammam Sidi Bou Abdallah. 44. 5-50. 5 40 1,025 18 Ain Mekeberta 20.5 10 6, 658 19 Hammam Sidi Mohamed.- - 30.4 700 23, 076 20 Ain Mentila (Mentilla, Mentil). 33 13 59, 522 21 Hammam Ouled Ghalia (Beni-Hindel). 36-40 100 2,444 22 Hammam Righa (R’hira, Rira, Rirha, Merega). 37-67 120 2, 466 23 Source Leblanc 24 10 1,610 24 Ain Garca 17 1 1,710 25 Hammam Zerguin 25-42 Small 6, 350 26 28-41 1,632 27 Hammam Berrouaghia (Ber-rouaguia). 35; 44 60 1, 508 28 Hammam Melouane, 34 km south of Alger (Algiers). 27-39. 5 1,220 29,422 29 Ain M’ta Melah 18 20 12,800 30 Hammam Ksenna 38-70 Large 5, 466 31 Ain Ben Haroun 19 50 3,312 32 Ain Souk el Arba 19 60 120 33 Hammam el Biban (Oued Chebba). 80-90 60 15, 435 34 Hammam Mansourah (Azi-gal). 25; 26 20 35 Hammam Guergour (Sidi el Djoudi). 41. 2-48 Large 3,521 36 Hammam Bou Sellam (Ouled Yelles). 38.5-49 18 1,399 37 Source Takitount (Ain Hamza). 18-21. 7 12,500 2,210 38 Hammam Bou Taleb (Thaleb, Ouled Sefian). 49-50 20 3,150 39 Hammam Gosbate (Grid-jima). 40.8 Large 4,968 40 Hammam Salahine (Sala-hin). 43-44.9 1,380 9,159 41 Hammam G. Rule, 0.5 km southeast of Hammam Salahine. 21.3 Large 42 3,020 2,018 43 Ain Sokhna (Sukhna)I 42.6-45.4 Small 44 Hammam Bou Akkaz 39.5 50 2,724 45 Hammam Beni Cuecha (Ro-cher Rouge). 40. 7-53.2 15 16,876 46 Hammam Bou Hallouf 45 85 3,260 47 Hammam Bou Hilip (Ain Kasserou). 33.9 600 500 48 Hammam Grous 33-37. 6 Large 1,160 49 Ain Djebel Leckhal (Lek-hal, Tinn). 31.7 Large 553 50 Ravin du Rummel 29. 5-31 4,000 785 51 Source du Hamma (Le Ham-ma). 33. 5-36. 5 Large 729 52 Hammam Chaboura 39 Large 1,430 53 Ain Tamersit Keirgis 25.6 100 1,197 54 Ain Tamersit Guerbir 25.6 90 1,320 55 45 Small 56 Hammam des Amamrhas 58-65 2,190 57 Hammam Meskoutine (Hammam Meskouten, Hammam-Mez-Koutin, Ilam-am-escoutin, Bains M audit), 18 km from Guelma. 72-98 6,000 1,466 58 Hammam Oued Hamimine.. 40. 5-47.2 Large 2,391 59 Hammam du Djendel 42-43 2,242 1,264 60 Hammam Oued Ali (Hammam des Biban), 12.4 km northwest of Guelma. 49. 7-56.7; 90 Large Principal chemical constituents Na, Cl_________________ Ca, Na, SO*, Cl; free H2S, C02. Ca, Na, HCO3, Cl_______ Ca, Na, SO*, Cl; free H2S__. Ca, Na, HCOa, Cl; free H2S. Ca, Na, SO4, CL............ Ca, Na, K (595), SO4, Cl—-Ca, Na, SO4, Cl; free H2S... Ca, Na, SO4, Cl; free H2S... Ca, Na, SO4, Cl............ Ca, Na, HC03, Cl...... Ca, Na, HCOs, SO4----- Ca, Na, SO4, Cl; free C02.. Ca, Na, HC03, SO<, Cl... Na, HCO3, SO4, CL.... Ca, Na, SO4, CL. Na, Cl................ Ca, Na, SO4, Cl; free H2S... Ca, Na, HCOs, S04, Cl; free COa Fe203 (31)............... Ca, Na, SO*, Cl; free H2S-_ HCOs; free H2S....... Ca, Na, SO4, Cl...... Ca, Na, SO4, Cl; free H2S... Ca, Na, HCOs, Cl...... Ca, Na, SO4, Cl........ Ca, Na, HCOs, Cl; free HaS. Ca, Na, HCOs, SO4, Cl; free HaS. Mg, Na, SO4, Cl_______ Ca, Na, SO4, Cl; free H2S... Ca, Na, HCOs, SO4, Cl— Ca, Na, SO4, Cl; free H2S. Ca, SO4, Cl------------- Ca, Na, HC03, Cl; free H2S. Ca, Na, SO4, CL. Ca, HCO3, SO4.. Ca, Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl. Ca, Na, HCOs, Cl... Ca, Na. HCOs, SO4, Cl free H2S. Ca, Na, HCOs, SO4, Cl free H2S. Ca, Na, HCOs, SO4, Cl free H2S. Ca, Na, HCOs, SO4, Cl; free H2S. VlgCOs (257); MgSO* (176); MgCl2 (416); NaCl (416); KC1 (79); gas, 97 percent C02, 2.5 percent Na, 0.5 percent H2S. Associated rocks Faulted Jurassic marl. Lower Eocene marl... Cretaceous limestone.. Upper Cretaceous marl.. Cretaceous marl....... Miocene strata........ Pliocene strata..... Eocene(?) limestone- Cretaceous sandstone____ Faulted Cretaceous marl. Upper Cretaceous strata. Upper Cretaceous marl.. Upper Cretaceous marl.. Faulted Miocene strata. Faulted Triassic strata.. Fault between Cretaceous and Triassic strata. Upper Cretaceous strata_____ Triassic strata............. Cretaceous clay. Pliocene strata overlying Triassic strata. Upper Cretaceous limestone. Oligocene and Miocene sandstone. Fault between Cretaceous and Triassic strata. Cretaceous limestone______ Cretaceous limestone.. Lower Cretaceous quartzite. Faulted lower Eocene strata. Ca, Na, HCOs, SO4--------- Ca, Na, SO4, Cl; free C02, H2S. Ca (272); COs, (480); SO4 (618); gas, 80.4 percent, N2, 19.6 percent C02. Remarks and additional references Water used for bathing. Ref. 2432. Many springs. Water used for bathing. 20 springs in 3 groups. Resort. Ancient Roman baths. Refs. 2432, 2433. Water used for bathing. 4 groups of springs. Water used for bathing. Resort. Ancient Roman baths. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 2486. 2 main springs. Water used for bathing. 10 springs. Resort and military hospital. Aquae Callidae Colonia of Romans. Refs. 2432, 2445, 2486, 2487. Well 80 meters deep. Water used for drinking. Water used for bathing. 13 springs. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 2432. 3 springs. Resort. Refs. 2432, 2477, 2486. Water used for bathing. 4 springs. Resort. Water used for drinking. Ref. 2432. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. 13 springs. Resort. Ancient Roman baths. Refs. 2432, 2473. Water used for bathing. Water used for drinking. Ref. 2432. 5 main springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 2432. Water used for bathing. Tufa deposited. Resort. Refs. 2432, 2468. , Free H2S. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Large deposits of tufa. Water used for bathing. Ruins of Roman baths. 3 main springs. Large deposits of tufa. Water used for bathing. Do. Do. Do. 3 main springs. Ref. 2443. Sulfur deposited. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Sulfur deposited. Water used for bathing. Vapor vents. Much free C02; deposits of BaCC>3. Water contains 7.3 ppm of Li. Water used for bathing. Aqua Flaviana of Romans. 8 main springs; hottest flows 1,800 liters per minute. Water contains 6.5 ppm As. Large deposits of tufa containing pisolites of aragonite. Cloud of steam. Bathing resort. Aquae Tibilitnae of Romans. Refs. 30, 1568, 2432, 2433, 2435, 2437, 2438, 2440, 2447, 2453, 2454, 2461, 2464, 2466, 2467, 2470, 2474, 2476, 2477, 2486, 2492, 2493-2495. 13 springs. Resort. Refs. 2463, 2486. Water used for bathing. Ancient Roman baths. 2 groups of springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 2475.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 143 Thermal springs and wells in Algeria—Continued No. on fig. 42 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) 61 Hammam Bradaa (Braada, Ain Berda), at northeastern end of Mount Debahr. 28-29.4 62 Hammam N’Bails (Nador).. 30-42 63 Hammam Reguema. 49.8 64 65 66 Hammam Youks les Bains._ Hammam Sidi Yahia... Hammam Tassa........ 33.5-35 34.6 39-40.6 67 Hammam Zaid. 30-41.4 68 Hammam Sidi Djaballah______ 31.6; 37.1 Hammam Sidi Trad---.... Ain Sidi el Adjene.... Ain Djeraba___________ Ain Kgar el Tir....... Ain Sfa............... Hammam de la Barbinais... Hammam Boughara....... Hammam Bou lief....... Hammam Dalsaa_________ Hammam Ibalnen________ Hammam Oued K?ob (Sidi Larbi). Hammam Ouled Tebben___ Hammam Sidi M’Cid (Mes-cid). Megris................ 60. 7; 63.9 34.9; 35. 6 Warm Warm 29 40 35 35-50 30-35 Hot 33 30 Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (PPm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 8,000 500 371 5,839 CaCOs (200); MgCOs (37); Na2S 04 (53); NaCl (22); gas, 86 percent Ns, 17 percent CO2, 2 percent O2. Ca, Na, HCOs, SO*, Cl...... Faulted Upper Cretaceous marl. Fault between Cretaceous and Triassic strata. 50 Small Large Large 50 1,090 430 10,378 1,992 1,015 424 512 Na, HCOs, SO4, Cl....... Ca, HCOs, S04; free H2S_ Na, Cl................ Ca, Na, HCOs, Cl; free H2S. Ca, Na, HCOs, Cl; free H2S. Na, S04, Cl............. Ca, Na, HCOs, Cl... Ca, Na, HCOs, S04, Cl. Upper Cretaceous limestone. Upper Cretaceous limestone. Fault between Eocene and Triassic rocks. 405 Ca, Na, HCOs, Cl. 778 Ca, Na, HCO3, Cl. Remarks and additional references Tufa deposited. Water used for irrigation. Ancient Roman baths. Refs. 2462, 2492, 2494, 2495. Large deposits of tufa. Water used for bathing. Ancient Roman baths. Ref. 2432. Water used for bathing. Ancient Roman baths. Do. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. Ruins of Roman baths. 4 main springs. Resort. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 2432. Do. 2 springs. Water used for irrigation. Water is sulfurous. Do. Water is sulfurous. Water is saline. Water is sulfurous. Water is ferruginous. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 2437. Thermal springs and wells in Tunisia [Data chiefly from ref. 2436] No. on fig- 43 27 Name or location Hammam Ahmed ben Med-joub. Ain Zitouna_____________ Hammam el Atrous________ Hammam ben Abbes________ Hammam Abd el Kader--- Hammam el Dherab________ Hammam el Chfaa_________ Hammam el Telia Merzoug. Ain el Hammam, at ruins of Utica. Ain Oued El-Lil______ Hammam Lif (Leef)....... Ain Kalaa Srira (Fguil)_ Ain el Atrous___________ Ain Chefa, at Korbous___ Ain Kebira (Kelbia), at Korbous. Ain Haraga, at Korbous__ Ain Sbia, at Korbous____ Ain Fakroun, 1 km north of Korbous. Ain Sidi Messaoud....... Ain el Okteur, 5 km southwest of Korbous. Ain el Hammam (Tabarka). Bordj el Hammam....... Kef el Hammam......... Ain el Hammam (Kof)... Hammam Salahine (Gouaidia). Hammam des Ouled ben Salem. Hammam Seiala, 8 km southwest of Beja. Hammam des Ouchtetas____ Hammam des Ouled Ali____ Hammam el Fouzoua_______ Hammam de Bulla Regia, 9 km morth of Souk el Arba. Hammam Biada............ Hammam des Ouled Abbed. Ain Ziga________________ Ain Djebel Oust......... Temperature of water (°C) 27 22 47 27 27 27 27 20.5 34 21.5 43; 50 42; 45 60 58 50 45.5 50.2 25 45 22 35 39-48. 5 39-51 29 46. 5; 70 30-40 46 44.5 40 30 26 45 44 22 54.5 Flow (liters per minute) 0.2 Small Small Small Small Small Small 42 Large 245 108 1,150 75 557 25 42 114 60 1.6 180 92 325 21 66 Small .5 240 30 180 300 120 18 360 Total dissolved solids (ppm) 10,960 1,840 4,004 14,825 11,200 11,140 11,567 11,500 11,030 11,010 2,475 17,847 Principal chemical constituents Ca, Na, SO4, Cl.. Ca, Mg, SO4, Cl. Na, Cl___________ Ca, Na, SOi, Cl- Ca, Na, S04, Cl.. Ca, Na, SO4, Cl— Ca, Na, SO4, Cl-Ca, Na, S04, Cl... Na, Cl___________ Ca, Na, HCOs. Na, SO4, Cl_ Ca, Na, SO4, CL. Ca, Na, SO4, Cl-Ca, Na, SO4, Cl.. Ca, Na, SO4, CL. Ca, Na, SO4, Cl-Ca, Na, SO4, Cl.. Na, Cl. Ca, Na, Cl............. Ca, Na, Cl; free H2S. Ca, Na, Cl; free H2S. Ca, Na, Cl........... Ca, Na, SO4, Cl------ Na, Cl...... Ca, HCOs, SO4-Ca, Na, Cl... Na, SO4, CL. Ca, Na, Cl_. Ca, SO4, Cl.. Ca, Na, SO4, CL. Associated rocks Lower Eocene strata. Lower Cretaceous strata____ Cretaceous dolomite........ Faulted Cretaceous dolomite. .do. _do.. _do. Upper Miocene strata. Alluvium___________ Upper Cretaceous strata. Jurassic strata_________ Faulted upper Eocene strata Upper Eocene strata_______ _do- .do- _do.. _do.. _do.. .do_. _do_. Quaternary strata___ Upper Eocene strata, do.. Alluvium.............. Upper Eocene strata.. Lower Eocene strata_____ Lower Miocene strata.. Upper Eocene strata. ____do.................. Lower Miocene strata. Lower Eocene strata... Triassic strata______ Eocene strata....... Lower Eocene strata. Faulted Cretaceous strata. . Remarks and additional references Several springs. Source of water supply. Ref. 2480. 2 springs. Refs. 2432, 2454, 2459, 2487, 2489,2491. 2 springs on seashore. Ancient Roman baths. Ref. 2469. On seashore. Do. Source of water supply. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. 3 springs. 2 springs. Water supply for town. Water is sulfurous. Used for bathing. At Colonia Thubumica of ancient Romans. Water used for irrigation. Water supply for town. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Part of water supply for Tunis. Ref. 2469. Roman posits baths.144 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Tunisia—Continued No. on fig. 43 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per (minute) 36 Hammam Zriba 46 360 37 Hammam Jedidi (Djdidi)... 61 830 38 Ain Garci 22 18 39 Hammam Mellegue. 38 40 40 Source du Trozza Nord Warm Small 41 Source du Trozza Sud Warm Small 42 Hammam Sahline 65 66 43 Hammam Zebbess 35 150 44 Ain Rebaou 28 4,000 45 Ain Feriana . Warm Large 46 Hammam Djebel Meich 36.5 Large 47 Ain Sidi Ahmed Zaroug 26.5: 29 420 48 Ain Dar-el-Bey, at Gafea 31-37.5 9,000 49 Ain Faouara. 31 1,800 50 Ain Nefta 27.5-30 70,000 51 Ain el Hamma du Djerid 30; 45 Large 52 Ain El Oudiane 30 360 53 Ain Tozeur (Touzer) 27. 5-30 60,000 54 Ain el Bordj 47 10,800 55 Ain Seba, in El Hamma oasis. 39-47. 5 Large 56 Ain el Hamma 37-57 Large 57 Ain Saada. 2&-30 Large Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 5,472 19,310 Ca, Na, SO,, Cl Ca, Na, SO,, Cl Ca, Mg, Cl Upper Cretaceous strata Faulted Triassic strata Upper Cretaceous strata Middle Cretaceous strata. Lower Cretaceous strata do Ca) Na, Cl - Na, Cl Ca,' Mg, SO*, Cl Upper Miocene strata Contact of Eocene strata with underlying Cretaceous strata. Ca, Na, SO4, Cl Ca) Na) SO4) Cl 335 Ca, Mg, Na, HCOi, S04, Cl. Ca, Mg, Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl. Ca, Mg, Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl. Ca, Mg, Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl. Upper Miocene strata 405 do 312 3,405 1,920 3,369 Ca, Mg, Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl. Ca, Na, SO4, Cl Ca) Na) SOt) Cl _ Ca, Na, SO4, Cl Remarks and additional references Large deposits of tufa. Resort. Ref. 2469. 2 springs and shallow well. Water used for bathing. Ref. 2469. Water is sulfurous. Ref. 2454. Do. Water used for bathing. Do. Water used for irrigation. Water used for irrigation. Refe. 2480, 2491. Water used for irrigation. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. 3 main springs. Water used for irrigation. Ancient Roman baths. Refs. 2454, 2456, 2458, 2459, 2480, 2487, 2491. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 2487, 2491. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 2454. 2 springs. Water used for irrigation. Water used for irrigation. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 2454. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 2454. Much free gas. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 2459. Spring and wells. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 2436, 2439. Spring and wells. Water used for irrigation. Ref. 2454. ANGOLA Angola has a rather arid coastal plain 50 to 150 km wide bordering the Atlantic Ocean. From this plain the country rises in irregular steps to rolling well-watered plains of the central African plateau. The northeastern part drains to the Congo River, and the southeastern part consists largely of sandy desert within the basin of the Zambezi River. The highest lands are in the district of Benguela in the southwestern part. The central plateau is chiefly of ancient crystalline rocks, which include granite in some areas. These older rocks are overlain largely by Paleozoic sandstone and conglomerate, and wide areas are covered by laterites. An upland zone, approximately parallel to the coast, is largely of granite and other crystalline rocks which are covered in many areas by ancient sedimentary rocks. The coastal zone is largely of Cretaceous and Tertiary formations overlying pre-Cretaceous red sandstone. Recent eruptive rocks form hills at several places in the district between the cities of Benguela and Mossamedes not far from the coast. A volcanic mountain called Coculo-Cabaza, south of the Kwanza (Cuanza) River, probably is the Zambi volcano of Fuchs (ref. 43). There probably are other areas of volcanic eruptions and lava flows. The available data on the several thermal springs in the southwestern part of Angola are summarized in the table below. The locations of the springs are shown on figure 44. Thermal springs in Angola [Data from refs. 2497,24981 No. on fig. 44 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Remarks , Andulo Hot In volcanic district of Bihi. 2 Chieuca Hot Do. 3 Ochilesa, on banks of Quime 45 (max) Several springs issuing from fault. Water is alkaline. Terraces of tufa deposits. 4 Montipa, 50 km northwest of Lubango (Sa de Bandeira). Warm On'south side of Lunda anticlinal axis between Mas-samedes and Montipa. 5 Kitewe, 40 km northwest of Lubango (Sa de Bandeira). Warm 6 North of Pediva Warm At foot of escarpment. 7 Kambeno, 10 km north of Kunene River and 85 km above river mouth. Warm Small amount of H2S.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 145 Figure 44.— Part of southern Africa showing location of thermal springs in Angola, Bechuanaland Protectorate. Burundi, Kenya, Mozambique, Northern and Southern Rhodesia, Nyasaland, Republic of the Congo, Rwanda, Tanganyika, and Uganda.146 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD BELGIAN CONGO (REPUBLIC OP THE CONGO) AND RUANDA-URUNDI (REPUBLIC OF RWANDA AND KINGDOM OF BURUNDI) The Belgian Congo or, since gaining its independence in 1960, the Republic of the Congo, occupies a large part of south-central Africa and is nearly all within the basin of the Congo River, which forms a part of the western border of the country. A comparatively small area in the northeast is tributary, through Albert Edward Nyanza [Lake] and Lake Albert, or Albert Nyanza, to the Nile River. Cliffs several thousand feet high along the western shores of Lake Tanganyika and Lake Kivu mark the great Western Rift Valley. The Mfumbiro, or Kirunga, Mountains consist of many volcanic peaks, and north of Lake Kivu are lava flows that extend across the Western Rift Valley and form the drainage divide between the basins of the Congo and the Nile Rivers. The highest peak rises to an altitude of nearly 15,000 feet; this and several other high peaks are snow-covered during part of the year. In the southeastern part of the colony are several minor ranges. The coastal area at and near the mouth of the Congo River is bordered by highlands through which the Congo passes in rapids to the ocean. Nearly all the remainder of the great river basin is of rolling uplands that form part of the central African plateau. Ruanda-Urundi or, since June 1962, the Republic of Rwanda and Kingdom of Burundi occupy a part of the plateau on the east side of the Western Rift Valley between Lake Tanganyika and Lake Kivu. It includes a part of the valley and its eastern escarpment and also a part of the lava area along the south flank of the Mfumbiro Mountains. Crystalline and metamorphic rocks considered to be of Archaean age are exposed in the mountains of the southeastern part of the Republic of the Congo and also near the coast. In both regions the basal rocks are overlain by sandstone and grit intercalated with thick layers of lava. These rocks may be part of the thick Karroo system of Permian through Jurassic ages. Nearly all the plateau region also is underlain by the Karroo beds. Near the coast are marine strata of Cretaceous and Tertiary ages. Data on the thermal springs in the Republics of the Congo and Rwanda and in Burundi are given in the table below. The locations of the springs are shown on figure 44. Thermal springs in the Belgian Congo (Republic of the Congo) and Ruanda-Urundi (Republic of Rwanda and Kingdom of Burundi) [Data chiefly from ref. 2508. Location of unnumbered spring not identified] No. on fig. 44 Name or location Remarks and additional references Belgian Congo (Republic of the Congo) 1 Vicinity of Lake Albert: Kaswa Water is hot and sul-furous. Deposits of sulfur. Thermal springs in the Belgian Congo (Republic of the Congo) and Ruanda-Urundi (Republic of Rwanda and Kingdom of Burundi) —Continued No. on fig. 44 Name or location Remarks and additional references Belgian Congo (Republic of the Congo)—Continued Vicinity of Lake Albert—Con. Mount Laba_ _ __ _ Water is hot and sul- Goda furous. Water and petroleum. Water is saline. 2 Semliki River valley: Zumbia (Kwaniwa?), on west side of valley. East side of valley near base of Mount Ruwenzori: Ref. 2590. Katuka _ _ Water is sulfurous. Mutwanga 3 4 Bitagoha (Rutchuru), near Lake Edward. Lowa River basin. - - 14 springs. 5 Lake Kivu volcanic area: Sake _ _ Katana (Kakondo), on border of lake. Luiro _ - Large deposits of tufa. 6 Near Kahusi volcano._ Ulindi (Hindi) River basin: Nyaluindja Water, 60 °C, rises in bathing pool. Much free C02. Large deposit of tufa. Ref. 2501. ] Lualatshi [Water is sulfurous. Lubuka _ 7 Eight other springs Ruzizi River valley: Luwangi Luvungi Mokindwa. _ _ Minyove . .. 8 Elila River basin: Mount Kasongo__ 1 Pene Kabonde [Water is saline. Tchavula_ _ Kitutu Water is sulfurous. 19 other springs 9 Lualaba River valley near Kibombo: Kibimbi 10 Lufubu, on left bank of river. Piani Mimba (Pene Sipo) group, 12 km west of Lufubu spring. Luama River basin: Water is saline. Ref. 2506. Water issues from schist. Total dissolved solids, 33,360 ppm. Principal chemical constituents: CaSC>4 (1,791 ppm); CaCl2 (3,747 ppm); NaCl (18,494 ppm). Ref. 2506. | Water is sulfurous. Basimakule 11 Luika River basin: Kilenga 12 West side of northern part of Lake Tanganyika: Uvira .. | Water is sulfurous. Mutambula 13 14 Pakundi, in Lukuga River basin. Tshapona, between Lo-mami and Luembe Rivers. DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 147 Thermal springs in the Belgian Congo (Republic of the Congo) and Ruanda-Urundi (Republic of Rwanda and Kingdom of Burundi) —Continued No. on Name or location Remarks and additional fig. 44 references Belgian Congo (Republic of the Congo) 15 16 17 18 Luvua River basin: Kisabi______________ Luona_______________ Mbalai______________ Sanga_______________ Luiboso_____________ West side of southern part of Lake Tanganyika: Rutuku______________ Kayungwa____________ Kakonta_____________ Kianza, near Tampa... N’Ganza_____________ Vicinity of Lake Upemba: Kafungwe____________ Katapena____________ Konkula_____________ 10 other springs____ Lufira River basin: Moashia_____________ Tanda Mukola________ Kashiba_____________ Basumba_____________ Manjakito fault........ Water is saline. Water is saline. Ref. 2502. Water is sulfurous. Several springs. Water temperature about 60° C. Much free C02. Ref. 2501. Ruanda-Urundi (Republic of Rwanda and Kingdom of Burundi) i Mashiosa, in Lake Kivu volcanic area. 2 Ruzizi River valley: Kisange .. Luha EGYPT, LIBYA, AND SUDAN Egypt, Libya, and Sudan comprise a large part of the desert region of northeastern Africa. The northwest coast of Egypt is bordered largely by cliffs, which rise to an uneven plateau on which are depressions occupied by minor oases. Nearly all the remainder of the country west of the Nile River is occupied by the Western, or Libyan, Desert. In this desert region are several large oases, notably those of Dakhla and Kharga, within which are natural springs. Water also is obtained from bored wells sunk to depths of 100-150 meters in sandstone. Flowing artesian water is obtained in some places. The eastern part of Egypt is traversed for its entire length by the Nile River. The narrow Nile Valley below the Aswan (Assouan) dam, the Fayum area west of the Nile, and the Nile delta lands are supplied by irrigation canals from the river; these agricultural lands, however, constitute only about 3 percent of the total area of the country. The remainder is desert. Between the Nile River and the Gulf of Suez, the Eastern, or Arabian, Desert consists chiefly of stony plateaus of Tertiary and Cretaceous strata. Older rocks are exposed in a few places. A mountain chain that borders the west shore of the gulf is largely of granitic rocks and is flanked on the coastal side by a narrow band of Tertiary strata that contain thick masses of gypsum in some places. Farther south, between Aswan and the Red Sea, the coastal mountains are largely of crystalline schist with intrusions of granite, diorite, and porphyry. The uplands west of Aswan are underlain largely by Nubian sandstone that is considered to be chiefly of Cretaceous age. In northeastern Egypt, the northern part of the Sinai Peninsula is composed largely of Cretaceous and older strata that are somewhat folded and are bordered by Tertiary strata. The surface rises southward to the high granitic mountains that form the backbone of the peninsula. Part of the coast of northwestern Libya is low and sandy, and other parts that border the Gulf of Sidra are low; but much of the shore is bordered by cliffs that rise to coastal mountain ranges. These extend some distance inland to the plateau areas of Cyrenaica, or Barca, in the northeast, and Tripolitania in the northwest. From the eastern uplands the surface descends to the Libyan Desert, which occupies most of the southeastern part of the country. From the Red Hammada of the western plateau region, the country descends more steeply to the depression of Fezzan, which occupies the west-central part of Libya. Much of this area is below sea level, but rises southward to the higher lands of the Sahara Desert. The Barca plateau region is chiefly of Miocene limestone whose strata are somewhat folded. The northwestern uplands are largely of Cretaceous rocks, but Recent eruptives are reported in some places, including Takut (Tekuk) and Manterus volcanic peaks. Rocks of late Paleozoic age have been found in the Fezzan depression. In the Cretaceous uplands are several oases with water of good quality at shallow depths. There are springs and flowing artesian wells at Ghadames and perhaps in other oases, but none are classed as thermal. Some oases with shallow water are in a long depression south of the Barca plateau. In the higher southeastern region, especially the Kufrah district, several large oases are spaced along a zone that extends for 300 km northwest-southeast. Water of only normal temperature is reported to be obtained in these places. The entire length of the Sudan is traversed by the' Nile River, but away from this stream and its main tributaries water is very scarce. The Nubian Desert in the northeast is a southern extension of the Arabian Desert of Egypt. Much of the northern region is an148 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD area of rocky mountains and plateaus of crystalline rocks which are overlain in many places by Nubian sandstone of Cretaceous (?) age. West of the Nile, a great plateau region forms part of the Libyan Desert. This region contains several oases, but water from the wells in these oases is reported to have only normal temperature. Several hot or warm springs are present in Egypt. Three localities of warm springs have been reported in Libya, and warm springs issue at one place in the valley of the Nile near the north border of Sudan. The available data on thermal springs in Egypt, Libya, and Sudan are summarized in the table below. The locations of the springs are shown on figure 45. Thermal springs and wells in Egypt, Libya, and Sudan [Data chiefly from ref. 2521. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (liters Total dissolved Principal chemical Associated rocks fig. 45 water (°C) per minute) solids (ppm) constituents Remarks and additional references Egypt 1 40 120,000 Mg, Na, SO<, Cl 2 Helw&n (Helouan les Bains), 23-34 165 4,890- Ca, Na, SO,, Cl Pleistocene deposits over- 25 km south of Cairo and 4 25,126 lying faulted middle Eo- km east of Nile River. cene limestone. 3 Ain Sukhna, 50 km south- 33 6,800 8,840 CaO (750); MgO (424); SOj Upper Cretaceous limestone west of Suez and 2 km from (981); NaCl (6,142). and Jurassic sandstone; shore of gulf. faulted. 4 Ayun Musa, 25 km south- east of Suez: No. 1 17 f 3,250 SiO, (60); CaO (476); MgO (94); SOs (483); NaCl (1,755). Alluvium overlying marine No. 2 17 l 5,600 SiO2 (24); CaO (640); MgO Tertiary clay. (97); SO, (555); NaCl (3,919). 5 Hammam Faraun, on gulf 71 Large 16,480 CaO (1,760); Mg (544); SOs Faulted Eocene sandstone shore. (max) (598); NaCl (14,320); free and limestone. H2S. 6 Hammam Saidna Musa 25 Small 9,330 CaCOs (1,034); HiSO, (1,- Faulted Cenomanian marl (Moussa), 3 km north of 036); NaCl (6,347). and limestone (Upper Tor. Cretaceous). 7 Bowitti, near El Kasr in 33.7; 34.2 Bahariya Oasis (Oasis ate Cretaceous?). Parva). 8 Ain Dalla, 60 km west of Warm Farafra Oasis. erable 9 Near El Kasr (Qasr), on 39 north border of Dakhla Oasis. Water level in pool varies with height of Nile River; no surface outflow. Ref. 2516. 3 main springs and 15 wells. Springs developed before 1600 B.C.; wells drilled in recent years. Bathing resort. Refs. 2510, 2517, 2523, 2525. Springs rise in several pools near base of fault scarp. Ref. 2526; also field notes of G. A. Waring. Issue from sand dunes. Known as “Springs of Moses.” Water used for irrigation and refreshment of caravans. Refs. 2512, 2544; also field notes of G. A. Waring. Many springs for 400 meters along shore, at base of cliffs. Known as “Baths of Pharoah.” Water has petroliferous odor; may be partly sea water. Deposits of sulfur. Refs. 2512, 2522, 2524, 2805. Several springs at base of hill. Known as “Baths of Moses, the Master.” Water used for irrigation. Ruins of ancient baths. Refs. 2512, 2515. 2 springs. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 2528, 2805. Water issues from top of sandy mound in center of depression; sulfurous but palatable. Ref. 2511. Probably Ain Sheikh Mawhub, 10 km west of El Kasr. Refs. 2528, 2805. Libya 1 Duga, near crest of Tarhuna Warm Water is ferruginous. Ref. 2527. 2 Mountains and 75 km southeast of Tripoli. Wadi Dernah Extensive deposit of tufa. Ref. 2519. }Ref. 2513. 3 Marada Oasis: Ain el Braghi 29-30 Ain ez Zauia Warm Sudan Akasha 54 Several springs. Water used for bathing. Ruins of ancient baths. Refs. 2514, 2518,2520. 40c description of thermal springs150 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD ERITREA, ETHIOPIA, FRENCH SOMALILAND, AND SOMALI REPUBLIC Eritrea, Ethiopia, French Somaliland, and the Somali Republic form the easternmost part of Africa. The northern part of Eritrea, which forms a relatively narrow band along the southwest coast of the Red Sea, widens to include a plateau region west of the coastal range, but the southern half is limited chiefly to a belt of hills and coastal plain less than 80 km wide. This southern part, which lies within the great East African Rift Valley zone, contains large areas of arid plains in which are several lakes. Much of the drainage from regions farther south and west ends in s'alt plains and basins in this region, some basins being below sea level. In this part of the rift zone are also many lava flows and volcanic mountains. Southeast of Asmara a great lava field extends north and south from Alid volcano; farther southeast are several volcanoes that have been active in recent years. The mountains of the northern part of Eritrea are chiefly of gneiss and schist, whereas the plateaus farther west are largely of thick formations of sandstone and limestone, probably of Cretaceous age. The western half of Ethiopia is a region of high plateaus above which rise several mountain ranges. Drainage is chiefly to the Blue Nile River and its tributaries. This high region is limited on the east by a remarkably straight north-south escarpment that marks the west side of the great East-African Rift Valley zone. Within this wide depressed belt much of the country is hilly. The Harar Hills form an east-west range that separates the drainage northward toward the Red Sea from that of the lower region, sometimes called Abyssinian Somaliland, whose streams flow south and southeast to the Indian Ocean. In the higher mountains of the northwest, Archaean gneiss and schist form the cores of the principal ranges which are flanked by Triassic(?) and Jurassic limestone and shale. Large parts of the plateau regions are covered by igneous rocks of Mesozoic age. The Harar Hills are largely of Tertiary limestone. Along the Rift Valley zone are many areas of Tertiary to Recent volcanic rocks. French Somaliland is a comparatively small area at the entrance to the Red Sea and consists chiefly of elevated arid plains, mainly within the great East-African Rift Valley zone. Volcanic rocks border the west end of the Gulf of Tajura on whose shore is the seaport of Djibouti. A chain of saline lakes inland receives the flow of the principal river in a depression that is more than 100 meters below sea level. The saline lake of Bahr Assal is in this low area. The Somali Republic, which formerly was British Somaliland and the Somaliland Trust, forms a scissor-like band between the eastern section of Ethiopia on the west and the Gulf of Aden and Indian Ocean on the north and east, respectively. In the northwestern part, along the Gulf of Aden, is a coastal plain of considerable width underlain by marine Cretaceous and Tertiary strata. This plain is bordered by a coastal range, and farther inland another range rises to altitudes of more than 3,000 meters, then lowers southward to plateau areas. In the northeastern extremity a high range borders the gulf coast and a rocky coast borders the Indian Ocean. Farther inland in this area are high plateaus. Most of the mountain ranges are of granite cut by quartz veins. The plateaus are underlain mainly by thick formations of sandstone and limestone, probably of Cretaceous or earlier age. The central part also consists chiefly of plateau above which rise several high mountains. The southern part includes much lowland along the valleys of the Juba and Shebeli Rivers. The region from the inland plateaus to the seacoast is underlain by granite, gneiss, and crystalline schist. Several areas of Tertiary volcanic rocks are in the southwestern part. Notes on thermal springs in Eritrea and Ethiopia are scattered through publications of early explorers. More recent information is available on several springs in the northwestern part of the Somali Republic, and a detailed report on the hot springs in French Somaliland was issued by Aubert de la Rue (ref. 2530). No reference has been found to thermal springs in the eastern part of the Somali Republic bordering the Indian Ocean, though the character of the rocks and the geologic structure in the northern and central parts seem favorable to the presence of thermal water along faults and fractured folds. The available information on thermal springs in Eritrea, Ethiopia, French Somaliland, and the Somali Republic is presented in the table on page 152. The locations of the springs are shown on figure 46.735-914 O—65 30' 36' 42' 48' Figure 46.—Eritrea, Ethiopia, French Somaliland, and Somali Republic showing location of thermal springs. Oi DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS152 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Eritrea, Ethiopia, French Somaliland, and Somali Republic [Locations of unnumbered springs not identified. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow Total dissolved Principal chemical Associated rocks Remarks and additional references fig. 46 water (°C) solids (ppm) constituents Eritrea 1 Momoullou, 4 km west of Massawa. 2 Ailet (Ailate, Heylftte), 36 km west of Massawa. 3 Ali-Hasa, 15 km southwest of Ailet. 4 Atzfut, at Hatefete, 3 km from ruins of Adulis and 0.5 km from seashore. 5 Guel, 3 km east of Adulis and near seashore. 6 Komali (Komalyi), near Annesley Bay and 10 km from Zula. 34.3 50-67.4 52.5-60 44 58.4-69.8 Warm 833 745 SlOj (88); Na (196); HCOs (411); SOt (33); Cl (77); free QOi SiOj (81); Na (168); HCCh (276); SOt (102); Cl (80). NaSO, MfSO. . - Schist and quartzite intruded by basalt. Schist intruded by igneous rock. Lava Shallow wells. Ref. 2549. 3 main springs. Water is radioactive. Used for bathing. Refs. 2544, 2546, 2549-2551. 2 main springs. Water is radioactive. Used for bathing. Refs. 2550, 2552. Refs. 2534, 2549. 18 springs issuing at base of extinct volcano. Inundated by high tide. Refs. 2433, 2549. Shallow wells. Ref. 2534. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 8 Bend of Casam River West shore of Lake Tasana (Tsana, Tana, M'-Woutan). Goramba, near Mahadera Mariam. Wirrus Aggie and Sat Al-lenga, 15 km from Goramba. Wayra, in Nile River valley below Korata. Agitta.................... Dubbi, on east bank of I’sser River. Dembitcha (Dembecka), in Nile River valley. St. Abbo (Sidano?) and Holy Virgin, near Dofane volcano and 80 km north-northeast of Ankober. Sirke (Sirge), at base of the Galla Hills near Errur (Erer). Lake Stefanie............. Near Aito Hill............ Foot of Finfini Mountains... Ta’hou, between Owssa and Gondah. Ethiopia 65 Hot 52.5 40; 60 Hot Hot Warm Warm 37 Hot Hot 45-48 Hot Hot Large Several springs flowing into grove of palms. Water used for bathing. Ref. 2539. 25 springs in large crater. Water is sulfurous. Refs. 30, 2549. Ref. 2546. 2 springs. Ref. 2546. Several springs. Ref. 2546. Do. Many springs. Water is slightly saline; much free COj. Ref. 2533. Several springs. Ref. 2546. 2 springs. Water is tasteless and odorless. Refs. 2532, 2545. Several springs. Refs. 2531, 2545. Several springs. Water is brackish. Ref. 2538. 4 wells (Aragawi, Selassie, Mariam, Abbo). Small amount of HiS. Water used for bathing. Ref. 2539. 3 wells. Water is sulfurous. Ref. 2540. Several springs spouting to height of several ft. Deposit of hard white material (siliceous sinter?) around outlets. Ref. 2541. French Somaliland [Data chiefly from ref. 2530] Alta (Goum) and Halol. Obock, on seashore______ 69-71 Near Tajura (Tadjourah), in valley of Aiboi. Ou£ah, on Oued Madagala... Near Lake Assal: East shore............. 33 36 34. 5-35.8 South shore. 77 5 km from southwest shore. Daguiro, on plain of Ounda-Dobi. Plain of Hanleh: Agu£na_______________ 84 Near Ourgu£nirbutte................. 3 other springs......_ _. 42.5 Garbes: 3.5 km east-northeast___ 100 2 km south. Small 2,355 NaHCOs (195); Na2SO, (290); NaCl (1,445). Water is slightly saline. Water is very saline and sulfurous. Used for bathing. Several springs. Water is potable Water is potable. About 160 meters below sea level. Ref. 2535. About 160 meters below sea level. Water is saline. Large deposit of travertine. Ref. 2535. Ref. 2535. Issue at base of cliff. Water is brackish. Sulfurous and aqueous vapor issuing from fumaroles along a line 400 meters long. Encrustations of gypsum and kalinite. Large deposit of travertine.7 DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 153 Thermal springs and wells in Eritrea, Ethiopia, French Somaliland, and Somali Republic—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow Total dissolved Principal chemical Associated rocks Remarks and additional references fig. 46 water (°C) solids (ppm) constituents French Somaliland—Continued 0 Left bank of Oued Kouri 46.5 10 Near Dikkil: Doundouma 35 Water is brackish. Many other springs 20-33 11 Near northeast shore of Lake 100 Several springs and fumaroles 8C meters above lake level. Large deposit of travertine. Also springs issuing at bottom of lake Sulfurous odor. 12 AbbS. Asbahalto. at base of Badi- (max) 100 2,480 CaCOs (109); CaSO< (485); NaCl (1,648). 13 koma piton on east border of Lake Abbe. Calangalata, near south end of Lake Abb6. Somali Republic 1 Dubar (Dthubar), 13 km south-southeast of Berbera. 2 Biyo Gora, in gorge 16 km east-southeast of Berbera. 3 Bihen Gaha, 70 km east of Berbera. 4 Huguf, 105 km east-south- east of Berbera. 40-43 45-54 57 34 [Data chiefly from ref. 2542] Large Moder- ately large Many springs. Water i s unpalatable, tastes strongly of iron. Ref. 2536. Several small springs within a distance of 2 km. 3 main springs. Water is mineralized but potable. Issues at base of escarpment. FRENCH EQUATORIAL AFRICA, FRENCH WEST AFRICA, AND NIGERIA The northern parts of former French Equatorial Africa (since 1960 the independent nations of the Central African Republic, Chad, and the Congo Republic) and French West Africa (since 1960 the independent nations of Dahomey, Guinea, Ivory Coast, Mauritania, Niger, Senegal, Sudan Republic and Upper Volta) are within the Sahara Desert. The coastal parts of these former territories are better watered, as is also much of Nigeria. The former French Equatorial Africa has a coastal band of marine Cretaceous and Tertiary sandstone and limestone that extends inland to the higher areas where ancient sedimentary strata overlie granite and meta-morphic rocks. In the northwest, these ancient strata are covered largely by the Saharan sand and gravel. The former French West Africa has a wide zone of uplands composed of granite, gneiss, and crystalline schist. In the west and southward toward the coast, the basement rocks are covered by Paleozoic and older sedimentary strata. A comparatively narrow belt of Quaternary and Recent deposits borders the ocean. The north and northeastern parts are largely covered by desert sand and gravel, although ancient rocks are exposed in the higher areas. Nigeria has a comparatively wide coastal band of post-Tertiary marine deposits, and there are extensive alluvial areas along the lower courses of the main rivers. The hills and mountains farther inland are composed of ancient sedimentary rocks that rest on the granite and metamorphic rocks exposed in the higher lands. Extensive areas in Nigeria receive very little rain, and so small an amount of water gets underground that there are very few springs. The geologic conditions also do not seem favorable to the presence of thermal springs, as there are no extensive areas of faulting or of volcanism. There may be a few slightly thermal springs and wells, but no specific ones seem to be recorded. The location of thermal springs in the former French Equatorial Africa and the former French West Africa are shown on figure 45 and data on them are given in the table below. Thermal springs in the former French Equatorial Africa and the former French West Africa No. Tern- Flow on pera- (liters Remarks and references fig- Name or location ture of per 45 water min- (° C) ute) Former French Equatorial Africa 1 Yerike, in volcanic crater in Tibesti Mountains of Chad. Noted for jets of vapor and deposits of sulfur. Refs. 2432, 2557. Former French West Africa 1 Tafadek, 50 km north of Agades (Agadez) in Niger. 2 Near Nunez River, downstream from Walkerteria in Guinea. 50.4 60 Issues from crystalline schist intruded by granite. Water is slightly sulfurous. Used for bathing. Ref. 2556. Several springs. Ref. 2554.154 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD MOROCCO The Grand Atlas Mountains trend east-northeast through the central part of Morocco. The smaller Anti Atlas Mountains are nearly parallel on the south. Beyond them is the northern part of the Sahara Desert. The Atlantic coastal line of French Morocco is remarkably smooth and has very few bays. The low slopes of the coastal area, which are underlain by Tertiary and Cretaceous strata, rise inland to areas of Paleozoic rocks. The highest parts of the Atlas ranges are of ancient schist, slate, and crystalline limestone which are folded and intruded by basalt and diorite. In some areas crystalline rocks are overlain by great thicknesses of limestone, sandstone, and conglomerate chiefly of Silurian and later Paleozoic ages. Paleozoic rocks are exposed in a broad zone along the southern flanks of the Anti Atlas Mountains and extend into the Sahara Desert where dry or marshy saline lake beds (shats, or chats) are present. The coast of former Spanish Morocco extends for about 200 miles along the Mediterranean Sea. It is bordered by the rugged Rif hills, which generally end in sea cliffs, and is interrupted in some places by lowlands at the mouth of stream valleys, especially at the Bay of Alhucemas and the salt marshes of the Mar Chica, south of Melilla. The bordering hills are of marine Tertiary and Cretaceous strata, but Paleozoic rocks are exposed in the highest areas. Jebel Musa, of Tertiary and Cretaceous strata, overlooks the Strait of Gibraltar nearly opposite Jebel Tariq (Gibraltar) on the north side, which is of Jurassic limestone and shale. Only a few references to thermal springs in Morocco have been found. The locations of the reported springs are shown on figure 45, and the available data concerning them are summarized in the table below. Thermal springs m Morocco [Locations of unnumbered springs not identified] Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and references Ref. 2569. Several springs. Ref. 2563. Ref. 2560. Water issulfurous. Ref. 2560. 4 springs. Water issulfurous pH, 6.2 Refs 2560, 2565, 2571. Refs. 2564, 2566. Ref. 2564. Do. Ref. 2568. Ref. 2562. Ref. 2433. Do. Triassic strata Ain Bou Kebrit, on bank of Oued Rdom (Redem). Along Rio Sebu, near Fez: Ain Kebrit da Tselfat Mouley Idriss. Mouley Yacoub Khaulani Contact of Helvetian marl (middle Miocene) and overlying Beni Amar beds. } Hot 52 1 960 31,540 Na (8,747ppm); K (1,055ppm); HCOa; Cl (17,150 ppm). Abi-Jaqubi (Abu Yacoub) I 40 Ain Soukhna, near Ben Rached (Ber Reshid). Warm 35 36 1,300 Ca, Na, HCO3, SO4, Cl Jurassic strata or crystalline rocks. Georgian limestone (Middle Cambrian). 50 SOUTHERN AFRICA (Becliuanaland Protectorate, Kenya, Mozambique, Northern and Southern Rhodesia, Nyasaland, Tanganyika, and Uganda) The northern and central parts of the Bechuanaland Protectorate are within a great plateau region, but they are undulating to hilly and contain many shallow lake basins. Some of the lakes drain to the Zambezi River; others form large brackish marshes without permanent outlets. Most of the southern part of the Protectorate is occupied by the great Kalahari Desert beyond which the drainage is southward toward the Orange River and eastward to the Limpopo River. Ancient crystalline and metamorphic rocks are exposed over large areas in the east and southeast. Other extensive areas are underlain by marine sedimentary strata of the Karroo system intruded by volcanic dikes and lava flows. These rocks range in age from Per- mian through Jurassic. There are some fresh-water Tertiary deposits in the desert areas, but most desert lands are covered chiefly by saline marl, sand, and shifting sand dunes. Kenya borders on the Indian Ocean. The coastal plain is narrow in most places, and only a few miles from the shore the land rises rapidly to plateau regions which occupy nearly all the eastern part of Kenya. Near the central part Mount Kenya, a denuded volcanic mass, rises to an altitude of 17,040 feet and glaciers extend down from its principal peaks. Between the coast and the city of Nairobi, the plateau region is partly interrupted by hills and low mountains. West of Nairobi, the great East-African Rift Valley, or Eastern Rift Valley, cuts deeply below the plateau and extends northward. It contains several small lakes. The brackish Lake Rudolf occupies a considerable part ofDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 155 the Rift Valley farther north. East of Lake Rudolf extensive arid lava plateaus rise to mountains also mainly of lava. Along the north border of Kenya, an escarpment rises to higher lands in Ethiopia. In the northeastern part are arid high plains. On the southwest border Lake Victoria occupies a broad depression considerably below the main plateau areas. Gneiss and schist form the cores of some of the lesser mountain ranges, and ancient quartzite is exposed in some of the hilly areas. Plateau regions of Kenya are chiefly of ancient crystalline rocks overlain by great flows of lava that is considered to be of post-Jurassic to Recent periods of effusion. The upland plains near the sea coast are of Triassic and Jurassic strata. The coastal plain is underlain largely by raised coral beaches and alluvium. A nearly continuous belt of volcanic rocks extends across the region from the northern to the southern border. Earlier lavas from fissure eruptions along and parallel to the Eastern Rift Valley generally are covered by eruptions from the volcanic mountains, some of which still emit vapors and steam. Mozambique also borders on the Indian Ocean. The western part of this country rises to a plateau region of granite, gneiss, and schist, which are overlain extensively by beds of the Karroo system and associated basalt layers, especially in the lower part of the Zambezi River basin. Much rhyolite is present in the Le-bombo Mountains on the southwest border of the country. Marine Upper Cretaceous rocks are exposed along parts of the coast from Delagoa Bay to Mozambique city. Eocene limestone has been recognized in the south-central portion. Northern Rhodesia 4 covers a part of the high plateau of central Africa and is mostly within the basin of the Zambezi River. A part is drained by the Congo River through Lakes Mweru, Bangweulu, and Tanganyika.4 Ancient granites and metamorphic rocks directly underlie a great part of the region, but in the east these rocks are covered by beds of the Karroo system. A wide, thick sheet of basalt belonging to this system is exposed in the gorge of the Zambezi River at and below Victoria Falls. In the northwestern part of this former colony are extensive areas of white sandy beds, probably deposited in a former large lake. In Southern Rhodesia the highest part of the plateau region forms a northeast-southwest drainage divide between the tributaries of the Zambezi River that flow to the west and north and streams that flow south and east. The east boundary of Southern Rhodesia follows approximately the border of the plateau from which the surface descends through mountainous ridges to lower lands. Most of the region is underlain by ancient meta- 4 In 1964 Northern Rhodesia became Zambia ; Tanganyika with Zanzibar became Tanzania. morphic rocks. Some areas are underlain by rocks of the Karroo system. Extensive faulting has taken place near the southeast border, but there has not been much development of volcanism in geologically Recent time. Nyasaland (Malawi) is largely a region of high plateau, but is broken by the Eastern Rift Valley from which Lake Nyasa drains to the Zambezi River. The ancient metamorphic rocks of the plateaus are in part overlain by beds of the Karroo system, and in some places they are covered by Quaternary lava. Volcanism is present within the rift valley. The coastal plain of Tanganyika is generally low and sandy and 10 to 30 miles wide. From the plain the land ascends steeply to plateaus, above which rise several mountain ranges. The highest plateaus are in the southwestern part, but the highest mountains are near the northeast border where Mount Kilimanjaro rises to an altitude of 19,321 feet. It is the highest mountain in Africa and has snowfields and several small glaciers. Lake Victoria, on the north border of the country, lies in a basin below the mean plateau levels; Lake Tanganyika, on the west border, lies at the base of cliffs several thousand feet high that mark the Western Rift Valley. On the southwest border Lake Nyasa occupies the deep depression of the Eastern Rift Valley. Northward along this great depression in the plateau region are several small alkaline or saline lakes, including Natron Lake near the north border of Tanganyika. Much of the plateau country south of Lake Victoria is underlain by granite, but most of the central plateau region is of metamorphic rocks. In some places, along faults of the rift valleys, there are beds of sandstone and shale that may belong to the Karroo system. The plateaus near the coast are underlain by marine sedimentary strata of Jurassic to early Tertiary ages. The uplands bordering the coastal plain are covered by upper Tertiary and Recent deposits. The plateaus in the region of the volcanic mountains near the northeast border of Tanganyika are chiefly of pre-Tertiary lava, but farther west many volcanic mountains and lava flows of Tertiary and later ages are present along the Eastern Rift Valley, especially near Lake Manyara and Natron Lake. Uganda is in part a lake region. Lakes of the Western Rift Valley lie along its western border and Lake Victoria is on the south. The Ruwenzori Mountains in the southwest form a high partly snow-covered range, and other high peaks rise along and near the eastern border. Much of the central and southwestern parts of Uganda consists of plateau lands that are arid in the north but are well watered in the south where there are extensive marshy lakes. Granite, gneiss, and schist are exposed over considerable areas in the region of the gorges of the upper156 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Nile River, but in most plateau areas the basement rocks are covered by sandstone and shale that probably are of Paleozoic age. The lava of the Mfumbiro Mountains, which cross the Western Rift Valley north of Lake Kivu, covers the southwest extremity of Uganda and extends to the flanks of the Ruwenzori Mountains. Basalt of the Karroo system forms the Ripon Falls at the outlet of Lake Victoria. Mount Elgon and other peaks on the eastern border are of volcanic origin, and much volcanic rock overlies granite in the northern part of Uganda. Most of the thermal springs that have been reported are in the lava areas, chiefly along faults in and near the Western Rift Valley. The available information on thermal springs in Bachuanaland Protectorate, Kenya, Mozambique, Northern and Southern Rhodesia, Nyasaland, Tanganyika, and Uganda are summarized in the table below. The locations of the springs are shown on figure 44. Thermal springs in Bechuanaland Protectorate, Kenya, Mozambique, Northern and Southern Rhodesia, Nyasaland, Tanganyika, and Uganda [Location of unnumbered springs not identified. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on fig. 44 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (imperial gallons per hour) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and references Bechuanaland Protectorate 1 Nungwe, on bank of Chobe (Kwando) River 3 miles above junction with Zambezi River. Warm 10,800 Ca, Na, SO4, Cl Probably basalt (Karroo beds). 2 main springs making stream 3 ft wide. Deposits of common salt (NaCl). Ref. 2576. Kenya ... Nangarok, 6 miles south of Mount Lutoki. . _. Near small volcano about 30 miles south of Mount Lubur. 1 Vicinity of Lake Hanning- ton. 2 Vicinity of Lake Naivasha, including steam vents on Mount Longonot, Eburru Mountain, and Orgaria Mountain, and steam vents and springs in Njorowa Gorge. 3 Near Magad Lakes__________ Lower Molo River valley_____ Hot Hot 93-95 Hot Hot Hot Na, HCO3 Water is mineralized. Ref. 16. About 12 springs, of which some are boiling and some are spouting. Refs. 94, 2573, 2574. Many springs and fumaroles. Steam from some vents is condensed for water supply on farms. Refs. 2578, 2579, 2584, 2589. Many springs; small deposits of soda are worked commercially. Ref. 2509. About 12 springs discharging into river. Refs. 2573, 2574. Mozambique Near base of Sitatonga Range, 1 mile south of Lusitu River. At south end of Sitatonga Range, 1 mile from Busi River. Probably Frontier beds Ref. 2583. (pre-Carboniferous). Probably Karroo beds .. Do. Warm Karroo beds Do. Northern Rhodesia, (Zambia) [Data chiefly from ref. 2583. Some of the listed springs near the Zambezi River may have been submerged by water impounded by dam in Kariba Gorge. Dam constructed during 1957-59] About 40 miles east of Lake Moero (Mweru). 46 (max) Probably basalt Hot 21 26-63 73 (max) 66 32 90 (max) Kabwili ooze, 18 miles southwest of junction of Kafue and Zambezi Rivers. Probably Karroo beds 14,000 283 SiOi (37); CaCOs (20); NaCl (61); KC1 (165); small amount of HjS. Kapesa (Chatenta), miles west of Zambezi River. Manzaia, 1H miles west of Zambezi River. Nakuyu, on left bank of Zambezi River. Chilambwa, near Chezia River and 5 miles from Zambezi River. Lava (Upper Karroo beds).. Sandstone (Karroo beds) Large Faulted Karroo beds, locally altered. Many springs in two groups 5 miles apart. Ref. 2594. Spouting springs. Ref. 2577. Ref. 2631. Water is slightly saline. Several spouting springs; large deposits of tufa and sinter. Refs. 2577, 2631. Several springs; flow would fill a 3-in. pipe. Deposits of siliceous sinter. Ref. 2631. Water is slightly saline. Several steaming vents for 500 yd; deposits of siliceous sinter and common salt. Ref. 2575.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 157 Thermal springs in Bechuanaland Protectorate, Kenya, Mozambique, Northern and Southern Rhodesia, Nyasaland, Tanganyika, and Uganda—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Flow (imperial Total dissolved Principal chemical Associated rocks Remarks and references fig. 44 water (°C) gallons per hour) solids (ppm) constituents Northern Rhodesia, (Zambia)—Continued Chilundu, 1 mile below junction of Zongwe and Zambezi Rivers. About 27 miles north of Zambezi River, near road to Monze. About 4 miles north of Zambezi River, near road. On left bank of Zambezi River. 31 (max) Tepid Warm Hot Small Large 3 main springs, 100 yd apart. Small deposits of sinter. Refs. 2631, 2634. Small deposits of tufa. Ref. 2577. Water is moderately mineralized. Ref. 2577. Water is saline. Southern Rhodesia [Data chiefly from refs. 2575, 2583. Some of the listed springs near the Zambezi River may have been submerged by water impounded by dam in Kariba Gorge. Dam con - structed in 1957-59] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Mendayatswa ooze, near bank of Zambezi River. On bank of Charara River.. Sampakaluma, on north side of Matabolo Flats. 50 Warm Boiling Probably faulted Karroo beds. Middle Karroo beds...... Black mud; small surface flow. Water contains small amount of H?S. Watering place for cattle. Ref. Chipiso, 3 miles east of junction of Sundi and Kariba Rivers. About 7 miles east of Zambezi River. Chipwatata, 3 miles above junction of Masumo and Zambezi Rivers. Zongola, near Fulunka’s Kraal, 2 miles southeast of Zambezi River and 40 miles downstream from mouth of Gwaai River. Chigwadada (Chebira) on right bank of Sebungwe (Lubu) River, 3 miles above its junction with the Zambezi. Sidenda, on right bank of Zambezi River at mouth of Batoka Gorge. Sigobonya, near junction of Gwaai River with the Zambezi. Bidada, 10 miles east of Gwaai River. Kavira (Shumba) on right bank of Mlibisi River. Sinisitonka.............. Sibila................... Sunga, on Deka River east of Dett, near Wankie. Nichenge, 18 miles southwest of Lukosi railway siding. Sakabika, 8 miles south of Lukosi railway siding. Lubimbi, 6 miles east of Shangani drift. In Gwampa River valley___ Mwengezi (Wengesi), 200 yards from Odzi River. In Mutambara Native Reserve, 850 yards east of Odzi River. On Dunstan farm__________ Chimanimani geyser_______ Near head of Rupisi River.._ . Zomba, on bank of Mtilikwe River. Chiwichuhagwe, near left bank of Sabi River. Hot Large 1,321 Na, S04; much free HuS. Gneiss near down-faulted Karroo beds. 2 main springs: deposit of tufa. Hot Warm Sandstone (Karroo beds). Used for small production of salt. Ref. 2631. 52-97 1,800-3,600 49-64.4 Small 622 K (216); Cl (274); Si02 (60); free HjS. Karroo beds. 667 Ca; Na; HCO3; S04 (89); Cl (320). Lower Karroo beds. 8 springs, 1 of which spouts continuously to a height of 7 ft. Deposit of calcareous-siliceous sinter. Refs. 2577, 2580, 2631. Ref. 2577. Very hot Basalt (upper Karroo beds). Water is saline. Hot Warm Probablay basalt (upper Karroo beds). Karroo beds.............. Water is potable. Water is very saline. 46-47. 7 Hot Warm 38 Warm 250,000 756 Ca; Na; HC03; S04 (96); Cl (300). Large 25,000 576 Na, HCO3. Small 6,621 Na, Cl. Faulted upper Karroo beds. Sandy shale (middle Karroo beds). Sandy shale (middle Karroo beds). Sandstone (Karroo beds) faulted against Batoka basalt. Faulted basal Karroo beds.. 6 main springs in area of several acres; also other springs, 32°-45°C. Some free H2S. Do. 3 springs; part of water supply of Wankie, northwest of Dett. 3 groups of small springs. Warm Hot Hot 53 36-56 Tepid Boiling 62 Warm Hot Small 45,000- 91,000 Small 3,300 Small 3,000 Small 1,290 354 368 273 Na, HCO3, S04, Cl; free H2S. Na, HCO3; some H2S... Na; HCO3; Si02 (84); free H2S. Ca, Na, HCOs, S04—... Na, HCOs, Cl, Si02 (87).— Archean granite--- Lower Karroo beds.. Granite, near Sabi fault. ----do.................. Umkondo beds (Carboniferous). Probably Frontier beds (pre-Carboniferous). Umkondo beds, faulted against granite. Granite...................... Contact of granite with intrusive Karroo basalt. 9 springs. Deposits of Na2S04 and Na2C03. Small solfataras. Ref. 2577. Ref. 2631. 2 groups of springs, 400 yds apart. Bathing pool; hotel. Refs. 2631, 2636. Spouting spring; water is thrown several ft high. Water used for bathing. Ref. 2636. Small amount of free H2S. Nyasaland (Malawi) 1 Maronde (Grafin Bose Thermen), for several miles along west side of Songwe River valley. 43-70 359 Ca, Na, S04. Many springs. Large of tufa. Ref. 2592. deposits158 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in Bechuanaland Protectorate, Kenya, Mozambique, Northern and Southern Rhodesia, Nyasaland, Tanganyika, and Uganda—Continued No. on fig. 44 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (imperial gallons per hour) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and references Tanganyika (Tanzania) 1 Mtagata Gorge, 35 miles north of Kafuro. In Kibo crater on Mount 54 3,700 NaiC03- 6 springs; bathing pools, 41°-43° C. Refs. 2590, 2591. Solfataras and fumaroles, with deposits of sulfur. Refs. 2585, 2587, 2588. Refs. 2579, 2582, 2586. Ref. 2581. 2 (max) 3 Kilimanjaro. On west shore of Lake 80 Na2C03 (1,500); Na2S04 (110); NaCl (620). Na, HCOs, S04, Cl Manyara (Manjara-see). Ibadakule, in Shinyange district. 50-55 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Nangarok................. 30 miles south of Mt. Lubur.. Wolo No. 1, on Abalika River. Wolo No. 2, on Bujo River.. Aupi, on Bidia River..... Aiwa, on Aiwa River...... Amor pi, in bed of Aswa River. Keyo..................... Keyo Amuro.............. About 30 miles south of Keyo Amuro. Mbalo, on Akado River.... Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Very hot Tepid Tepid Hot Warm Panyamur.................. Kibiro, on east shore of Lake Albert. Buranga, in Bwamba area, 7 miles from Kibuku. Livagimba, in Bwamba area, near Dwimbi River. Small tufa island in Lake Katwe. Ihumbu (Mtarega), near Kakindu River in Semlike Valley. Kitagata------------------ Katagata, on Kyangenyi Hill. Kikagata.................. 37 Very hot Very hot Very hot Warm 38 Near boiling Hot Warm Birara.................... Rubabu (Lubaba), 10 miles north-northwest of Nya-lusanje. Minyera, below road bridge. Ntagata, in Ruakatengi Swamp. Ishasha, 5 miles north of Kumba. Kizuguta, 3 miles north of Kabale. Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Uganda [Data chiefly from ref. 2596] 3,800; 5,300 Na, Cl 47,560 Na, Cl 1,500 Ca (110); HCO3 (50); Cl (70). Faulted gneiss and pegmatite. Not noticeably mineralized. Mineralized. Water is mineralized. Water is mineralized. Common salt produced in dry season. Water is mineralized. 2 main springs near salt workings; deposit of sulfur. Water is sulfurous. Large deposits of tufa. Ref. 2509. Water is sulfurous. Used for bathing. Ref. 2509. 3 springs. Refs. 2591, 2593. 2 small groups of springs. Water used for bathing. Water is mineralized. Water is slightly saline; free CO2. A source of water in dry season. Water is mineralized Do. Do. SOUTH WEST AFRICA AND UNION OF SOUTH AFRICA The principal reports on thermal springs in southern Africa cover both South West Africa and the Union of South Africa (Transvaal, Natal, Orange Free State, and Gape of Good Hope). The coastal plain of South West Africa is about 35 miles wide in the south but narrows northward. It is bordered by low mountains. Other mountains in the central and southeastern parts interrupt the interior plateau, which changes from an undulating region eastward to a great plain that merges with the Kalahari Desert. The coastal belt includes some areas of Miocene rocks, but gneiss, schist, and intrusive granite directly underlie most coastal areas as well as the mountains and plateaus of the central region. In the southern plateaus the crystalline and metamorphic rocks are overlain mainly by ancient sedimentary strata, largely of the Karroo system, but in some places they are over-lain by the more ancient Cape system of sedimentary rocks of Devonian age. The Union of South Africa has a low-lying coastal belt which is 50 miles wide at its widest part. In the extreme south, however, mountains come close to the sea and the land rises abruptly in high cliffs. From the coastal plains the country rises through hills to the great interior plateau which constitutes the larger part of the region. In the northeast, the high veld of the Transvaal occupies the highest part of the plateau which slopes gradually downward to the west and southwest. The borders of the Transvaal are partly encircled by a wide band of ancient crystalline rocks which are overlain in the central part by sedimentary rocks of pre-Car-boniferous age and in the south and southeast by sedi-DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 159 mentary rocks of the Karroo system (Permian through Jurassic). The main plateau in Orange Free State consists chiefly of undulating plains. There are numerous hills of ironstone in the southwestern part. Nearly all the State is underlain by Karroo beds, but granite is exposed in a small area in the north. Much of the coast of Natal is rocky. Cretaceous strata are exposed in some parts. The extreme northeastern part is occupied by wide coastal lowlands, but most of the region rises to an intermediate plateau and thence to the main plateau. Across this highland the Drakensberg Mountains rise considerably higher. They are composed largely of volcanic rocks that constitute the uppermost part of the Karroo system. Mountain spurs of these volcanic rocks also extend into the Crown colonies of Swaziland and Basutoland, which occupy parts of the plateau bordering Natal on the north and south. From the coastal belt of most of Cape of Good Hope Province, formerly Cape Colony, the surface rises in terracelike bands to the interior plateau. In the basin of the Orange River, which drains a large area, the surface descends northward to the stream, then gradually rises northward and forms the southern extension of the Kalahari Desert. In general, the plateaus and high plains of the province are underlain by nearly horizontal strata of the Karroo system which form a shallow structural basin. In the north and west are rocks older than those of the Cape system (Devonian). In the mountains of the southeastern part, strata of the Cape and lower Karroo systems are sharply folded. The sandstone that caps Table Mountain near Cape Town belongs to the lowest member of the Cape strata, but Cretaceous and younger rocks are present at some places along the coast. Data on the thermal springs and wells in South West Africa and the Union of South Africa are given in the two tables below. The locations of the springs are shown on figure 47. Figure 47.—Part of southern Africa showing location of thermal springs and thermal wells In South West Africa and the Union of South Africa.160 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OP THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in South West Africa [Data chiefly from refs. 2618-2623] No. on fig- 47 Name or location Temperature of water (°C.) 1 Hot 2 3 Numas Warm 4 5 6 Hot 7 27.8 8 9 Out jo (Otjitambi?) 46 10 76.5 11 61 12 Doornkom. 35-40 13 35 14 15 28 16 Klein Barmen (Otjikango).. 61 17 65 18 Okatjeru, 22 miles north of Warm Windhoek. 19 Ongeama (Okanjama), 8 Warm miles west of Windhoek. 20 Gross Windhoek (Queen 70-80 Adelaide), including Junk- erquelle, Pahlquelle, and Bergquelle. 21 Klein Windhoek (Glenelg).. 45-55 22 46 23 52 24 Gobabis.. Warm 25 Nossob Warm 26 Auob River valley (Gibeon 32; 34 area). 27 40 28 Aikaas — . . Hot 29 Aiais 55 30 Warmbad (Nabis, Nesbitt’s 37.5 bath), on banks of Houm River. 31 Grundom Warm 32 Blydeverwacht - - Warm Flow (imperial gallons per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 472,000 Otavi limestone Precam-brian) overlying Archean schist. 1,815 72.000 86.000 159,000 813 88,200 869 (hottest) 466 Mg, Na, HCOs, S04, SiOa, (96 ppm). Ca, Mg, HCOa, SO4, Cl, SiOj (23 ppm). Ecca sandstone (Permian).. Ecca sandstone (Permian).. Dike in Dwyka series (Carboniferous and Permian). 2,223 Gneiss intruded by granite.. 40,000 Amphibolite reef in sheared gneiss. Remarks and additional references Ref. 2630. Well. Water is saline. Well 265 ft deep. Artesian flow augmented by pumping. Well 274 ft deep. Artesian flow augmented by pumping. Refs. 2600, 2604. Water contains much K. Free HjS. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 2600, 2604, 2622. Issues from breccia-filled fissures. Ref. 2608. Do. Formerly 6 springs. Several wells drilled in recent years. Ref6. 2433, 2597, 2598, 2604, 2608, 2627, 2632. Formerly spring. Several wells. Refs. 2597, 2598, 2604, 2608, 2632. Well. Water at depths ranging from 140-555 ft. Do. 2 pumped wells. Ref. 2607. 5 springs. Water is saline. Ref. 2430. Much gas, chiefly N*. Ref. 2433. 2 springs forming a stream 6 in. wide and 1^ in. deep. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 2597-2599. Thermal springs and wells in TJnion of South Africa [Data chiefly from refs. 2621, 2622, 2627, 2631-2641. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on fig. 47 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (imperial gallons per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 1 26 939 Ca, Mg, Na, HCO3, Cl ^ Archean gneiss Tugeia: 2 1,517 Na, SO*, Cl 2A 15] 600 Na' SOi,’ Cl 65 ft deep. 3 32.5 1,355 Na, S04, CL. Diabase dike in Archean gneiss. 4 Ref. 2583. 5 6 29 5 1 Karroo beds (Permian through Jurassic). 7 8 9 Windhoek 10 11 37.7 12 Klein Chipise Hot 13 57; 65 100,000 Na, IICO3, Cl 14 Mpefu 42.8; 43. 7 Low Faulted pre-Carboniferous 2 springs. strata. 15 Souting, near west bank of 43.9 30,000 High CaCOs (30); CaSO, (218); Faulted Archean granite Water is source of salt supply. Ref. Klein Letaba River. NaCl (1,270). 2610. 16 Letaba, 0.5 mile south of 40.4-42 91,000 966 SiOa (71); Ca (30); Na (301); I)olerite dike in granite. 3 springs. Water used for bathing Groot Letaba River: SO< (64); Cl (445). and as a source of salt. Spring .. 12, 000 17 BufTelshoek farm, between 30.6 17,000 459 SiOa (45); Ca (27); Na (152); Diabase dike in Bushveld Thabazimbi and Rooiberg. HCOj (214); SO, (35); Cl granite (Precambrian). 18 27-34 414,300 188 (139). Ca, HCOs 6 main springs. northwest of Nylstroom. DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 161 Thermal springs and wells in Union of South Africa—Continued No. on fig. 47 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (imperial gallons per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 19 44 12,500 (Precambrian). 20 39. 5 32 000 257 Na, IICO3, Cl 21 39.5 20,000 Faulted Bush veld granite... 22 23 51.9 160, 000 408 Na, HCO3 24 Riffontein - 28.3-29 8,000 702 Na (235); HCOj (238); Cl Faulted Rooiberg series. (248). 25 26 27 32.8 do 28 Hot 29 Pretoria series (Preoam- brian). 30 31 32 27. 5-28. 5 214 Na, HCO3 33 Badplaats 50 180,000 409 Na, HCO3; much free H2S... Fractured Archean granite 34 31 120,000 130 Pongolasystem (Proterozoic). 35 40; 42.5 36 44.4 64,800 273 38 41 ous). 39 28 40 52-53 1,021 Ca (83); Na (231); HCO3 (Permian). miles north-northeast of (31); SOi (368); HjSiOs Kranskop. (73). 41 38-40 Na, HCO3; free HiS town. ately high 42 43 28. 8 60, 000 44 34 48, 000 3,536 brian). 45 32.7 48j 000 46 24 480,000 tein). (max) 47 28-30 2,189 48 49 29. 5 4, 000 High Na, SO4, Cl 50 37.2 24, 000 8,463 assic). 51 44.4 15,000 diorite. 52 38 Fractured Archean granite.. 53 Hot 54 30 56,000 Na, HCO3-- - ately series (Lower Triassic). high 55 25. 5-30 51,000 56 36.9 840,600 High N,. 57 58 29.3 series (Lower Triassic). 59 Inungi__ 25 ately assic). 60 Die Bad 42. 2; 43. 2 (Devonian). 61 62 Malmesbury 32.9 180,000 1,186 Na, SOi, Cl; free COj, Fractured Cape granite (Devonian). 63 Goudini (Goudine, Jordaens 40.1 Bath), near DuToit’s (Devonian). Kloof. 64 Brandvlei (Brand Vley, 64.2 2,430,000 95 Na, HCO3, Cl Faulted Table Mountain Brand valleis). sandstone (Devonian). 65 Caledon 35-42 180,000 190 66 Baden Hot 67 Montagu 44.6 68 No name 69 Warmwaterberg: Spring 45.6 174,000 205 Ca, Na, HCO3, Cl Flowing well 28 31,000 70 Gamka Valley 32.3-33.2 65, 500 71 Olifants Valley 50-51 144, 500 197 Na, HCO3, Cl 72 Stinkfontein 28.7 7,500 806 assic). 73 Kruidfontein Warm Remarks and additional references Government bathhouse. Water used for bathing. 7 springs. Water is sulfurous. Bathing resort. Ref. 2627. Free H2S. 2 springs. Gas is 92 percent Nj. Resort. 2 large springs. Water Is slightly saline. Much free H2S. Several springs. Ref. 2609. Do. Farm well. Well. Well 3,500 ft deep. Water is saline. Well 2,560 ft deep. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Water used for bathing). Water is saline. Bathing pool. Well 4,700 ft deep. Water is very saline. Water is slightly saline. Water is sulfurous. Bathing resort. Free CO2 and H2S. 2 springs. Baths. Water is sulfurous. Used for bathing. Baths. Ref. 2648. Water used for bathing. Refs. 2599, 2601, 2603, 2625, 2628, 2644, 2645. Several springs issuing from iron-manganese mound: water contains considerable Fe. Much CO2. Sanatorium. Refs. 2599, 2603, 2611, 2615, 2625, 2626, 2645. Gas is 88 percent Ni. Sanatorium. Ref. 2645. Water contains considerable Fe. Ref. 2617. 100 ft deep. Water contains considerable Fe. Used for bathing. Several springs and wells. Water contains considerable Fe. Used for bathing. Refs. 2432, 2601, 2645, 2650. Pumped well.162 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Union of South Africa—Continued No. on fig. 47 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) 74 Toverwater (Agter de Berg, Warm Bath, Hottentor Holland's Bath, Yser-Baad) south of Zwarte-bergen. 75 Grasrand................. 44.3 26 76 Near Cradock ford of the Fish River. 77 Tarka Bridge.............. 29-31.3 26-27 78 Moerlust______ 79 Fort Beaufort. Warm 27-29 80 81 82 Amanzi (Balmoral)......... Amanzi___________________ Zwartkops, 4 miles from Port Elizabeth. Warm Warm 53.6 Flow (imperial gallons per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 216,000 3,600 18,300 Low Faulted Table Mountain sandstone (Devonian). Lower Beaufort series (Triassic). Dolerite dikes in Lower Beaufort series. 181 Na, HC03; free H2S 17,300 520 Na, HCO3; free H2S Lower Beaufort series (Triassic). 250,000 365 Na, Cl — Cape system (Devonian) Remarks and additional references 5 springs. Water contains considerable Fe; deposits yellow ochre. Used for bathing. Refs. 2432 , 2645, 2647,2650. Water is slightly saline. Several springs. Refs. 2615, 2636, 2648,2649. Several wells 65-225 ft deep. Free HjS, CH«. Water used for bathing Pumped well. Several springs. Ref. 2636. Pumped well. Do. Well 3,620 ft deep. Water is slightly saline. Bokkeveld series(?) entered at depth of 3,400 ft. Refs. 2642,2643,2646. INDIAN OCEAN MADAGASCAR (MALAGASY REPUBLIC) Madagascar, or the Malagasy Republic, is nearly 1,000 miles long and 360 miles in greatest width. It is the third largest island in the world, Greenland and New Guinea ranking as first and second. The narrowest part, of Mozambique Channel, which separates Madagascar from Africa, is about 260 statute miles wide. Madagascar is largely mountainous, the main ranges in its eastern part extending nearly throughout its length. Large parts of these mountains are of granite, gneiss, and crystalline schist. There are also many volcanic mountains and lava flows but no active vol- canoes. The main ranges are bordered by extensive bands of hills and plains which are underlain in part by marine sedimentary rocks, including a narrow band of Cretaceous strata along part of the east coast. In the western part, a belt of sedimentary rocks 20 to 100 miles Avide, as indicated on figure 48, is largely of Cretaceous age; but there are some Triassic strata in the southwest and deposits of Tertiary and Quaternary age near the west border. There are numerous thermal springs in the island, but information concerning them is scanty. The available data are presented in the table below, and the locations of the springs are shown on figure 48. Thermal springs in Madagascar (Malagasy Republic) [Data chiefly from refs. 2653, 2660, and 2666. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million) No. on fig. 48 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 1 29 2 60-62 vakoera Valley. 3 stone. 4 R anomafana-sur-N amorana: 43 46 9 30+ 5 40 6 Betsieka (Betsiekabe), 15 km east of Warm Faulted basal Triassic lime- Ambohipiraka. stone. 7 44 Island. 8 60 9 10 Ambato-Boeni (Ambatobe?), on Betsiboka Warm Faulted basal Triassic lime- River 100 km south-southeast of Ma- stone. jungo. 11 50 12 36,60 13 20.6 Tananarive. 14 Betafo, 20 km west of Antsirabe... 52-55 Basalt. Remarks and additional references Deposit of tufa. Many springs. Water is tasteless. Evolved gas is 97.55 percent nitrogen. Refs. 2656, 2668. Several springs. Water is slightly saline and alkaline. Water is saline and slightly alkaline. Total dissolved solids, 3,350 ppm. Free CO2 and H2S. Large flow. Water is sulfurous. Gaseous. Large flow. Water is strongly sulfurous; used for bathing. Two main springs. Deposit of tufa. Large deposit of tufa. Ref. 2669.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 163 Thermal springs in Madagascar (Malagasy Republic)—Continued No. on fig. 48 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 15 26-51 16 Mahatsinjo, 12 km north-northwest of Antsirabe. 29 Chiefly bicarbonates Ca, Mg, and Na. Refs. 2664, ”2665, 2667-2669, 2672, 2674-2676. Large deposit of tufa; pisolites of aragonite. Total dissolved solids, 7.830 g per liter. Free C02. 17 27 18 65 19 Diabase dike in sedimentary rock. 20 Bahavo, on west side of river opposite Ambia. Ca (12), Na (365), SOi (432), Cl (84), HjSiOs (39). solids, 2,048 ppm. Total dissolved solids, 1,010 ppm. Evolves H2S. Water is strongly sulfurous. Total dissolved solids, 880 ppm. 21 22 Kiposa, at Malaimbandy, west of Sakeny River. Andranomandevy, near Migiko (Migo-hoko) in Mahabo District. 40 23 43-68 Gneiss and Triassic sandstone. solids, 480 ppm. Water is strongly sulfurous. Total dissolved solids, 904 ppm. Free C02. Total dissolved solids, 948 ppm. 24 Chiefly Ca, HCO3; low SO4, Cl, Si02. CaO (185), Cl (14), Si02 (146).. 25 26 Andrambo. On bank of Onilahy River, 2 km from Beza and east of Tongobory. Ranomasy, between Tongobory and Betioky. 50 Water is sulfurous. Much gas. Total dissolved solids, 3,560 ppm. Water is sulfurous. 27 28 Warm Warm CaO (252), S03 (105), Cl (1,359). Lower Cretaceous strata; basalt nearby. MINOR ISLANDS—KERGUELEN, REUNION, RODRIGUEZ, AND SAINT PAUL Kerguelen Island is the largest in a small archipelago about 2,000 statute miles southeast of Madagascar and nearly 2,600 miles from the southern tip of Africa, as shown on figure 49. The main island is of irregular shape and deeply indented by fiords and bays. There are a dozen smaller islands and many islets nearby. The entire group consists almost wholly of volcanic rocks, granite showing only in a small area in the southwest extremity of Kerguelen Island, as indicated on figure 50. According to Aubert de la Rile (ref. 2677), there are fumaroles near the southwestern shore, mofettes (vents emitting carbon dioxide) at two places, thermal springs at five places, and two other thermal indications. Reunion Island, formerly known as Bourbon, is an oval-shaped volcanic island about 45 miles long, situated 400 statute miles southeast of Tamatave, Madagascar. In the central part of Reunion, a large eroded crater of andesitic lava is flanked by later basaltic flows. Within the crater are several thermal springs. In the southeastern part of the island there is a smaller volcano with two craters, one of which is solfataric, as shown on figure 51. According to Moreau and others (refs. 2667, 2668) and Yelain (refs. 2690, 2691), there are fumaroles at Le Volcan in the southeastern part of Reunion and thermal springs in four localities in the northwestern part. Rodriguez Island, about 480 miles north of east from Reunion, is 13 miles long in an east-west direction and 3 to 6 miles wide. (See fig. 49.) The island, which is hilly, was built up by lava flows, mainly of dolerite, and is fringed by coral reefs. Balfour (ref. 2678) noted tepid, brackish springs at several places in the island. St. Paul Island, about 1,800 statute miles southeast of Reunion, was described by Velain (ref. 2692) as a great volcanic crater, open on the east to the ocean and forming a harbor 1,300 meters across. The main crater is composed largely of trachyte, but on its flanks are two small craters of basalt, one of which is solfataric. Numerous small springs issue near sea level within the main crater, chiefly along its north and west sides, as shown on figure 52. Other small islands in the Indian Ocean are of volcanic rocks. Amsterdam, or New Amsterdam Island, about 60 miles north of Saint Paul, has an area of about 25 square miles. It is composed almost entirely of lava. There are high cliffs along the coast and a deeply eroded crater that rises to nearly 3,000 feet altitude. All volcanic activity has ceased, and there are no thermal springs or vapor vents. Mauritius Island, 130 miles northeast of Reunion, is about 36 miles long, northeast-southwest. One small area of chloritic schist has been reported, but nearly all the island is of basaltic lava. There are several volcanic craters, but all are greatly164 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Figure 48.—-Madagascar (Malagasy Republic) showing location of thermal springs and principal lava areas. Chiefly from refs. 2653 and 2660.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 165 15° 30° 45° 60° Figure 49.—Minor islands in the southern Indian Ocean showing location of thermal springs on Kerguelen, Reunion, Rodriguez, and Saint Paul. eroded and, according to De Haga Haig,5 there seems to be no evidence of thermal activity. ASIA AFGHANISTAN The valley of the Oxus River (Amu Dar’ya) forms the northern boundary of Afghanistan. There is much irrigated land in this valley and also along the valley of the Hari Rud River in the northwestern part of the country and along the Helmand River in the southwest. Desert plateaus border the valley of the Helmand, but most of the region is traversed by high mountain ranges that trend, in general, northeastward to the higher Hindu Kush mountains in the northeastern part of the country. The mountains in the northern part are composed mainly of sedimentary rocks of Carboniferous through Jurassic ages. These rocks were folded and uplifted, and streams have cut many deep gorges into them. In regions below the main mountain ranges Cretaceous strata cover extensive areas in the west and also in the north above the plains of the Oxus River. Miocene formations, including gypsum and salt, are exposed in the main valleys and plains. Fresh-water Pliocene deposits are present in some lower areas. Deposits of 6 De Haga Haig, H., 1895, The physical features and geology of Mauritius : Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 51, p. 463-471. loess, called the Chul, cover wide areas, especially along the border of the Oxus River plain. There are great intrusions of granite and basic igneous rocks in the Cretaceous formations, and sheets of lava are interbed-ded with Lower Cretaceous strata. No Tertiary or later volcanic flows or mountains have been recognized. Only a few thermal springs have been reported to be present in the mountain areas of Afghanistan, despite the sedimentary formations having been folded and probably faulted; no thermal springs are known to be present in the areas of volcanic rocks. The locations of the springs in Afghanistan are shown on figure 53, and data on the springs are given in the table below. Thermal springs in Afghanistan No. on fig. 53 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Remarks and references 1 From General Walker’s map of 2 Dru (Droo) village, near... Warm Turkestan. Ref. 2807. Source of local water supply. Refs. 3 2775, 2807. From General Walker’s map of Turkestan. Ref. 2807. Two springs issuing from hillside. 4 Khawak (Sir-Ab), 23 miles 108; 124 5 from Inderab. Hot Refs. 2694, 2807. Several springs issuing from narrow rock ledge 14 miles from base of snow-capped mountains. Refs. 2775, 2807. Many sulfurous springs. Ref. 30. Sulfur springs issuing from small 6 7 Base of Tehalap Dalan Mountain. Bisut, near valley of Shesh Warm Burjeh. mounds of tufa. Refs. 2799,2807. ARABIAN PENINSULA The Arabian Peninsula consists in large part of Saudi Arabia, but includes Aden, Oman, and Yemen in its southern part. In northwestern Saudi Arabia and along its western border southward to and beyond Mecca are mountains of granite and schist, in part overlain by red sandstone which probably is of Cretaceous and Tertiary ages. In many areas both the crystalline and the sedimentary rocks are covered by thick sheets of lava, and there are many volcanic hills. Farther inland in northern Saudi Arabia is the extensive Red Desert of Nefud, whose great sand dunes probably are derived from the sandstone. Most of the central part of the region included in Saudi Arabia slopes gradually eastward from the western mountains to irregular plateau lands, which gradually descend to the Persian Gulf. In southern Saudi Arabia the Dahna, or Rub’ al Khali, a great sandy desert, extends to the base of mountains that form the highest parts of the Arabian Peninsula. These mountains are in Yemen in the extreme southwest, along the south and southeast coasts in Aden Protectorate, and in Oman.166 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 69° 69°30' 70° 70°30' 1. Fumaroles on west side of southwest peninsula 2. Mofettes on east side of central southern peninsula 3. Mofettes on west side of southeast peninsula and cold oxide springs 4. Reported thermal springs, southern part of west coast 5. Reported thermal springs, Bay of Melissas 6. Reported thermal springs, head of Table Bay 7. Reported thermal springs, head of Volage Bay di- 8. Reported thermal springs on MacCormick Island 9. Hot ground on east side of Chimay or Iceberg Bay 10. Cold sulfur spring at Porte Jeanne d’Arc In the middle and southern parts of the Arabian Peninsula the ancient granite and schist are exposed in many places, and near Aden are volcanic hills. Ancient red sandstone and scattered areas of limestone that mayDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 167 Figure 51.—Reunion Island, Indian Ocean, showing location of thermal springs and fumaroles. From refs. 2667 and 2692. be of Cretaceous age cover many parts, but by far the most extensive areas are underlain by marine Tertiary formations. Although there has been considerable faulting, most of the sedimentary strata are nearly horizontal. The greater part of the Arabian Peninsula is very arid; but in the mountains, where the rainfall is moderately abundant, springs are numerous. The locations of the thermal springs to which reference has been found are shown on figure 54. The available information on these springs is given in the table on page 170. CHINA Mainland China consists of eastern China (including the island of Hainan), Manchuria in the northeast, and Sinkiang and Tibet Provinces in the far west. Formosa Island (Taiwan), off the southeast coast, is traditionally a part of China, but at the time of the writing of this report is a separate political entity. As most of the published reports on thermal springs in China concern one or another of these divisions, the Figure 52.—St. Paul Island, Indian Ocean, showing location of thermal springs and fumaroles. From ref. 2692. bibliographic references have been grouped accord-ingly. The description of the topography and geology has been taken chiefly from an article by Philip Lake on the geology of China.6 EASTERN CHINA The great alluvial deltas of the Hwang Ho, or Yellow River, and the Yangtze Kiang (Yang kingdom river) occupy much of the northeastern part of this vast region. The Hwang Ho plains are bordered on the west by folded mountains which are largely gneiss, schist, and crystalline limestone, overlain largely by ancient sandstone, quartzite, and limestone. Farther west, in Shansi and Shensi Provinces, are plateau regions of Carboniferous strata that include a lower limestone 6 Lake, Philip, 1910, China [section on], Geology, in 11th ed., Encyclopaedia Britannica: Cambridge, England, Univ. Press, v. 6, p. 169-170. 735-914 O—65-----12thermal springs of theDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 169 35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60° Figure 54.—Arabian Peninsula, Iraq, Lebanon, and Syria showing location of thermal springs.170 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in the Arabian Peninsula [Location of unnumbered springs not identified] No. on fig. 54 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Remarks and references 1 Bahrein Island Warm Ref. 73. 2 Ain al Ilarra, near Mubar- Hot Water rises in pond; tasteless, raz. odorless. Used for bathing. Ref. 2699. 3 Khudud and Ilaqal, 2^ Warm Water rises in 2 sandy pools; km east of Hufafl. transparent green color. Ref. 2699. 4 Nakhl (Tadmor), 80 km 39-41 1 main and 20 small springs; flow west-southwest of Mus- 200 imperial gpm. Used for cat. water supply of town and for irrigation. Ref. 2698. 5 South of the Bay of Mus- 44 Springs issue from red limestone cat. (max) at several places. Used for irrigation. Ref. 2695. 6 On Gebel Teer (Mount Warm Sulfurous water and fumes from 2 Tarr or Dukhan), on volcanic cones. Refs. 43, 2805. Saddle Island. 7 About 20 km northwest of 37. 7-54. 4 Many small springs issuing from Mukalla (Makalla). granite; water chalybeate but potable. Ref. 2700. 8 About 8 km north-north- 37-39 Several springs; moderate flow. east of Mukalla. Free H2S. Refs. 2696, 2697. 9 Ghail Ba Wazir, 35 km Warm 3 large pools, fed by water issuing northeast of Mukalla. from massive gypsum (Tertiary?). Source of supply for irrigation. Ref. 2697. Near oil springs in southeastern Arabia. Ref. 30. reted springs. Ref. 30. series and an upper sandstone series that contains extensive coal beds. The central and western parts of eastern China, most of which are within the basin of the Yangtze Kiang, include extensive limestone plateaus. In the south and southeast are hills and minor mountain ranges which trend in general about parallel with the coast. In the upper part of the Yangtze Kiang basin the ranges trend in general south-southeast to north-north-west. Triassic red sandstone underlies the greater part of Szechwan Province and is present in synclinal troughs of the older beds in southeast China. Hainan Island is mountainous; it has a conspicuous central range and lower lands along its northern shore. Marine Tertiary deposits are present in some places along the coast of the mainland and the borders of offshore islands. There are many intrusions of granite and other igneous rocks into the gneiss and schist. Groups of volcanic cones are present in the plateaus of northeastern China, and flows of basalt cover uplands near the Mongolian border. Basalt is also present in the Shantung Peninsula of the northeast coast. In southeastern China, there seems to be no evidence of Tertiary or later volcanism. North of the Yangtze Kiang, thick and extensive deposits of brownish-yellow loess form good agricultural lands. Structurally, eastern China consists of two main regions that are separated by Tsinling Shan [Tsinling Mountains]. These high lands are greatly folded; but north of them the Paleozoic formations are in general nearly horizontal, and Carboniferous and older limestone and sandstone form an extensive plateau that rises abruptly from the western border of the great river plains of northeastern China. The plateau is deeply cut by streams, and rock strata are considerably faulted but not much folded. South of the Tsinling Shan the Paleozoic strata are folded into ridges that form the hilly region of southern China. Some of the thermal springs issue near recently extinct volcanoes. Many are along fault zones, especially in the Weiho Valley north of Tsinling Shan, in a region that is bordered by faults of considerable vertical displacement. One group of hot springs is in northern Thermal springs and wells in eastern China No. on Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Remarks and references 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 T’ang Shan, 23 miles northeast of Peiping. Hot Wun-shih-tun, 23 miles south of Tung-chow. Near Yi-chou (Yihsien). Ngai-shan, east of Chefoo. Loong-chwen, 20 miles east of Ngai-shan. Yang Kwei Fe, near Lin Tung. Hot 38 Large Pehpei, 60 miles north-northwest of Chungking. Nachuan, 17 miles southeast of Chungking. Foochow: Springs............ 30 400 Warm Large 56; 58 ________ Wells. 46-68 Amoy Island. Warm Small Baths of the Emperor consisting of two marble bathing pools at Imperial villa built A.D. 1723-35. Other hot springs nearby. Refs. 2708, 2711,2937. Baths. Ref. 2710. Do. 5 sulfur springs. Baths. Ref. 2710. Baths. Ref. 2710. At base of mountain. Bathing pool. Resort since ancient times. Refs. 2707, 2711. In limestone and sandstone gorge. Temple bathing pool. Ref. 2707. Water issues from limestone. Bathing pool. Ref. 2707. Two springs in northeastern suburbs. Hotter water contains Na (130 ppm); SO* (153.6 ppm); Cl (92 ppm); Si02 (55.5 ppm); F (13.0 ppm). Gas almost wholly N2. Cooler water chemically similar but contains 8.0 ppm F. Used for bathing. Refs. 2709, 2937. All about 150 ft deep. Water used for bathing. Ref. 2709. Several small springs between high and low tide levels on northeast coast. Principal chemical constituents: CaCl2, NaCl, KC1, K2SO*. Ref. 2704. 11 12 13 14 Chung-ling-tow, 35 Hot miles northeast of Canton. Yung Mak, 20 miles 76 north-northwest of Macao. Chau-Yuen, 20 west of Hwang. Hainan Island... miles Hot Used for bathing. Ref. 2703. Water slightly saline. Used for baths. Refs. 2703, 2937. Almost boiling. Ref. 2710. Several springs. Ref. 30.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS Anhwei Province in easternmost China, and a line of springs near the east border of the Taihang Shan extends southward through the Han River Valley to Ichang on the Yangtze Kiang and farther southwest. Many thermal springs are along definite stratigraphic horizons or on local faults. The locations of known thermal springs in eastern China are shown on figure 55. The table on page 170 lists only those springs on which more than the location has been found in the available literature. FORMOSA (TAIWAN) Formosa (Taiwan) Island, about 100 miles from the southeast coast of China, is largely mountainous. The main range extends north-south through the eastern part, and the highest peaks rise to altitudes above 12,000 feet. Along the west side of the island the coastal plain is less than 20 miles wide. On the east side a wide fertile plain extends for many miles, but part of the coast is bordered by high cliffs. The larger mountains are of schist and quartzite. Coal mines near the north end of the island are in strata probably of Tertiary age. Some areas of volcanic rock have been recorded. The locations of the thermal springs on Formosa Island are shown on figure 55. The available information on those springs is presented in the table below. i172 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs on Formosa Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents 300 2, 232 KCl (1,128 ppm); NaCl (396 ppm); CaCl2 (341 ppm); CaHCOs (201 ppm). | Low 505 215 10, 180 (cooler); 13, 262 (warmer) Na2 C03, NaCl HCO3; much free C02-_ Na2 C03, NaCl, KCl... No. on fig. 55 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Remarks and references 10 11 12 13 14 Taihoku (Tansu; Ta-yu-kang; Kwang-Tsu-Ling), between Kelung (Kirun) and Tamsui. Hokuto, on west flank of volcano 7 miles from railroad station. Sozan (Tsaoshan), 7 miles north-northeast of Taipeh. Urai (Wulai), 13 miles south of Taipeh. Toi (Tow-wei), 8 miles northeast of Ilan: Artesian well_______ Springs_____________ Ilan, 25 miles southeast Taipeh. Shokei___________________ Suivo (Su-o)_____________ Kwanshirei (Kanserei)____ Mizuho___________________ Kasho Island_____________ 77 48-95 62 80. 3 53 55-79. 3 4, 134 (T., 48°C); 75 (T., 51°C) Large 57. 5 23 61; 77 17 Warm Small Warm Small Warm Small Warm Small Warm(?) Small(?) Sulfur springs and steam jets at small sulfur mines. Refs. 2712, 2715, 2717, 2720, 2721, 3341. Several springs. Water very acid. Radioactive. Small deposits of lead-barium sulfate (hokutolite). Resort. Refs. 109, 2714, 2716, 2719, 2939, 2942 Resort. Ref. 2939. Saline water from Tertiary strata. Ref. 2942. Water derived from Quaternary deposits. Ref. 2942. Baths. Resort. Refs. 2939, 2997. Spring issues from clay slate. Ref. 2942. 2 springs issuing from Tertiary strata. Water is strongly alkaline; much gas. Resort. Refs. 2713, 2939, 2942. Ref. 2997. Do. Do. Do. Do. 120° 125° 130° 44* :-PV V / ( A N C H U R I A / I \ - u f A 40° \ \ \ V .8 .10 .9 °Jehol * £ ' 1 Peiping (Peking) 100 _i____i___I— .20 .21 • 19 18 .30 .31 27 .29 .32 • .28 .33 YELLOW SEA *26 200 MILES ia°tUne P«ninsula __I 100 I 200 KILOMETERS 0 Hsinking A*' Figure 56.—Southern Manchuria showing location of thermal springs. From ref. 2728.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 173 MANCHURIA In eastern Manchuria mountain ranges consisting largely of crystalline and metamorphic rocks extend northeast-southwest. To the west is the great fertile plain of the Liao Ho, dotted with conical hills, some of which may be of lava. Basalt is exposed in parts of the Liaotung Peninsula. In northwestern Manchuria the Khingan Mountains trend nearly north-south and are composed chiefly of ancient crystalline and metamorphic rocks, overlain by Paleozoic sedimentary strata. Thermal springs at three places in South Manchuria were mentioned in an official guidebook of the Imperial Japanese Government Railways (ref. 2939), but the best summary of the springs in this region seems to be a report by Monden and others (ref. 2728) which consists of one paper indicating thermal springs at 34 localities and seven other papers describing the principal springs. Their locations are shown on figures 55, and 56, and the available data are included in the table below. Thermal springs in Manchuria [Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on fig. 55 or 56 Name or location Temperature of water (°0) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Remarks and references i Hsiyen and Yeh, 6 km south of Atahushan. Wutualian-chih, 8 km southwest of Lungchen railway station. Halun-Arshan, on east side of railway.. Hsiung-yao-cheng (Great Hingan), 40 km southeast of Halin-Hulun-Ar-shan. Tang shan (Fe-shui-tang), 27 km west of Linghsi. Yinchin, 100 km west of Chihfeng Mohsing, 45 km north-northwest of Pingchuan. Sankoutang __ _ Hot Ref. 2728. 2 Do. 3 20-46 7, 125 1. 5 Low 28 springs issuing from alluvium overljing granite. Water moderately mineralized. Bathing resort for more than 1,000 years. Refs. 2723, 2728. Refs. 2723, 2728, 2731, 2739. 3 springs in ravine. Bathing. Ref. 2728. Ref. 2728. 4 5 54 30-44 1, 063 Na (265); SO, (164); Cl (326); Si02 (109). 6 Hot 7 Hot Do. 8 Hot Do. 9 Northwest, north, and northeast of Warm to Several springs. Refs. 2721, 2724. Ref. 2728. 10 Jehol. Maochinpa, 53 km north-northwest of Chengteh. Je-shui-tang, 15 km north-northeast of Lingyuan: 3 main groups of springs hot Hot 11 19-25 J-Baths. Ref. 2728. 8 wells 5 meters deep 38-44 12 Jeshuitang, 25 km east-northeast of Kienping. Tangshang, 15 km north-northwest of Hot Ref. 2728. 13 Hot Do. 14 Suichung (Fe shiu tang). Hsing- cheng, 3 km east of Hingcheng (Hsing-eheng) : 46 springs in and along stream Several wells 20-47 1 Radioactive. Bathing re-) sort. Refs. 2726, 2728, J 2730. Ref. 2728. 64 15 Tanghokoutze, 60 km south of Fushun. (max) Hot 16 Pai Tou Shan (mountain): San Chih Yuan, near Hoshan Lake. Do. Tang Shui Chang, on north side of Hoshan Lake. Do. Pai Wen Chuan, 4 km north of Hoshan Lake. 61 Do. 17 Liuhuang, 8 km southwest of peas of Pai Tou Shan. Tangkangtsu, 4 km south-southwest of Anshun railway station: 15 sources (wells and springs) Well 50 meters deep.. . . Hot Do. ] Sulfureted. Bathing re- 18 34-64 72 2. 5 Na (113); SO, (112); Cl (63); Si02 (96); free H2S. l sort and military sana-( torium. Refs. 2728-1 2731, 2939.174 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in Manchuria—Continued No. on fig. 55 or 56 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Remarks and references 19 Niechiatai, 15 km east of Anshan __ Hot Ref. 2728. Ref. 2725 20 Tanghoyin (Tang-ho-yan), 25 km Hot 21 southeast of Liaoyang. Kouerhtang, 24 km east of Pensihu Ssulapao, 7 km southeast of Luchia-tung. Hsiung-yao-eheng, 3 km southeast of town. Lungmentang, 6 km southeast of Sun-chia-ten (Hsu-chia-tung). Kientze, 25 km northeast of Anpei Anpei, 20 km east of Hsiung-yao-eheng. Koutang, 16 km northwest of Siuyen (Yuyin). Tangchihkou, 9 km from Suiyen_ _ . Hot Ref. 2728. Do 22 Hot 23 60-84. 5 Na (265); SO, (164); Cl (326); Si02 (109). 5 main springs. Water alkaline, sulfureted. Bathing resort. Refs. 2728, 2731. Ref. 2728. Do 24 Hot 25 Hot 26 Hot Do 27 Hot Do 28 Hot Do. Do 29 Miao leng kao, 25 km southwest of Kihwanshan (Chih-kuan-shan). Tangchihkou, 28 km northeast of Chaohokou. Tangehihtze, 9 km north-northeast of Feng-huang-cheng (Feng-cheng). Tungtang, 14 km northeast of Tang-shansheng. Wu-ling-pei: Hot 30 Hot Do 31 Hot Do 32 Hot Do. 33 42. 5-62. 5 | 52. 5-63. 1 80 1 Na (58); SO, (34); Cl (28); 1 Si02 (92). 2 minor springs _ Resort. Refs. 2728, 2731, 8 wells (2.6-13 meters deep) Tanchihtze, 12 km southwest of 34 Hot 2939. Ref. 2728. 35 Antung. Darbukan_ __ Ref. 2723 36 Derbul _ Do 37 Mergel _ Do. 38 Do 39 Do 40 Hailar, southwest of town_ Do. 41 Mud Lake, southeast of Hailar _ Do 42 Wuiun__ Do. 43 Shih-tou-ho __ Do. 44 Mu-lin Do. SINK1ANG AND TIBET The southern part of Sinkiang Province consists mainly of desert plateaus, but in the northern part several peaks of the Tian Shan reach altitudes above 20,000 feet, where there are many glaciers. Some crestal parts of these mountains consist of greatly folded Paleozoic marine sedimentary rocks; other parts are flanked by marine Mesozoic deposits. Cretaceous beds have been recognized in the western parts of the Tian Shan. In Sinkiang, Hedin (ref. 2736) noted only one locality of hot springs, about 150 km south-southwest of Kashgar. The water of another spring south of Yarkand was recorded by Shaw (ref. 2742) to be warm and slightly brackish. Tibet is bordered on the south by the Himalaya Mountains, along whose north base the Brahmaputra River has cut gorges. Farther north another great mountain system, the Trans-Himalaya, has a maximum width of more than 100 miles. Beyond them is the plateau region of northern Tibet, which is dotted by saline and alkaline lakes with no outlets and which extends eastward to escarpments that drop to lands of the upper Yangtze Kiang basin. In the high mountains of southern Tibet are marine Mesozoic strata. On the eastern border of the Tibetan plateau, limestone is exposed ; and along the shore of Tengri Nor [Tengri Salt Lake], in the southeastern part of the plateau region, marine Cretaceous strata are present. The locations of the thermal springs in Sinkiang are shown on figure 55; those in Tibet are shown on figures 55 and 57. The available data on the springs are summarized in the table below.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 175 Figure 57.—Part of southern Tibet showing location of thermal springs. From refs. 2737, 2739, and 2740. Thermal springs in Sinkiang and Tibet No. Tempera- on fig. Name or location ture of Remarks and references 55 or water 57 (°C) Sinkiang 1 Urumchi solfatara, near Turfan volcano. Eruption reported to have occurred in A.D. 1777. Ref. 43. 2 Issyk Bulak, on south side of Mus-tagh-Ata mountain southwest of Kashgar. 51. 7-52.8 4 springs. Water sulfurous, leaves iron stains on rocks. Ref. 2730. 3 Near Kara Kash River, between Sanjoo and Sooget Pass. Warm Water slightly brackish. Ref. 2742. Tibet 4 Damchok, near town <37 At altitude of 17,000 ft. Ref. 5 Kienlung, on left bank of Sutlej 2807. Refs. 2745, 2807. 6 River, 1 km north of Kyung-lung. Terthapuri, 19 km above Kienlung: 2 springs Other springs Hot 90-94 Tufa deposit. Ref. 2745. At altitude of 11,000-12,000 ft. Ref. 2745. Thermal springs in Sinkiang and Tibet—Continued No. Tempera- on fig. Name or location ture of Remarks and references 55 or water 57 CO) Tibet— Continued Manasarowar Lake: 7 Hot Refs. 2741, 2745. 8 Ref. 2745. 9 Tatapani, on west bank of Sun- Hot 3 springs forming small pool. kusi River. Water sulfurous. Ref. 2807. 10 Chang Phang Chuja, near north 54 Several springs. Refs. 30, 73, shore of Tengri Nor. 74, 2739, 2740. Several springs. Refs. 2739, 11 Dung Nagu Chaka, north of 81 Khalamba-la Pass. 2740, 2745. Several springs at altitude of 12 Dung Chaka, on south side of 54 Khalamba-la Pass. 15,700 ft. Refs. 2739, 2740, 2745. 13 Naisum Chuja, on both sides of 83 Many hot springs. Two Lahu Chu River. (max) spout to height of 60 ft. Water freezes into ice pil- lar. Refs. 2735, 2737, 2739, 2740, 2745. 14 Peting Chuj&, in and along Lahu 79 12 springs on north bank of Chu River. river spout to height of 40-50 ft. Also spouting springs in river. Refs. 2739, 2740.176 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in Sinkiang and Tibet—Continued No. Tempera- on fig. Name or location ture of Remarks and references 55 or water 57 (°C) Tibet—Continued 15 Chutang CMk&: 74 } Water sulfurous. Used for (max) 85 \ bathing. Refs. 2735, 2739, ) 2740. 16 Hot At altitude of 15,000 ft. Water stored in 4 reservoirs 30 ft in circumference and 3 ft deep. Ref. 2740. Bathing pools. Refs. 2740, 2807. Water sulfurous. Used for filling bathing pools beside Rong River (Rang Chu) between Shigatse and Lhasa. Ref. 2738. 17 18 Changra (Gangamar), 19 km from town. Trumsa (Thompa), near village. 31 Hot Letter on fig. 55 or 57 A Nakchukha Dzong, 3 km south of town. Chag Pass, 5 km southeast of town. Yanga: Ref. 2745. B C Ref. 2744. D E Selindo, 3 km southeast of town. Mense Tsuka, 10 km south-southeast of Selindo. Shigatse, 45 km north-northwest of town. Raga Tsangpo River, 15 km south of river. F G H Ref. 2745. I J K Refs. 2735, 2745. ) L M Chundo, 10 km southwest of town. iRef. 2745. INDIA AND ADJACENT AREAS India and its neighbors—Pakistan, Nepal, Sikkim, Bhutan, Burma, and Ceylon—occupy the vast region southeast of Afghanistan and Iran and south and southwest of central and western China. Much of the northern border of this area is formed by the Himalaya Mountains and the Karakoram Range, which descend southward as east-west trending ranges of hills. The crystalline and metamorphic rocks and the ancient sedimentary strata exposed in the Himalayas and in some of the lower ranges are intensely folded and faulted. The other lower ranges are composed largely of folded marine strata of late Tertiary age. South of the mountainous area is a wide band of plains that extends across the Indian Peninsula from the Bay of Bengal on the east to the Arabian Sea on the west. Drained in large part by the Ganges River, this nearly level region ranges in width from about 90 to 300 miles and is underlain by thick layers of alluvian and wind-deposited material. Most of the southern half of the Indian Peninsula is a plateau that is bordered on the east by the Eastern Ghats and on the west by the Western Ghats. The latter rise steeply from a narrow coastal plain, whereas the former rise less steeply from a wider coastal plain. Granite, gneiss, and other crystalline rocks are exposed throughout the greater part of the plateau region; elsewhere, they are overlain by crystal- line schist and sedimentary strata. The Gondwana series of Carboniferous to Jurassic age is composed almost entirely of fresh-water deposits and includes some coal beds. Marine Cretaceous strata form parts of the mountains near the northwest border of the plateau, whereas the prominent hills in the western part of the plateau are composed of basaltic rock, the Deccan Trap of Cretaceous and Eocene age. Nearly all of Ceylon is underlain by the same series of granitic and metamorphic rocks that is widespread in the southern part of the Indian Peninsula. Nepal, a small country on the northeast border of India, has a belt of lowland along its southern part. From this belt the land rises northward to the main Himalaya Mountains. It contains some of the highest peaks, including Mount Everest. Sikkim, an even smaller country, borders Nepal on the east and occupies an area in the high mountains within the upper drainage basins of two rivers that flow south to the plain of the Ganges River. Bhutan, farther east, also occupies part of the Himalayan region. Burma, which lies on the east side of the Bay of Bengal, includes a northwestern mountainous region, a central region of the Irrawaddy River basin with its great delta, and a narrow, hilly strip along the east side of the Bay of Bengal, cut by many streams that flow directly to the Bay. In the eastern part of the country the higher mountains are chiefly of granite, gneiss, and Paleozoic sedimentary rocks, which also underlie alluvium of the river valleys. In some ranges that curve to the northeast, Cretaceous and Eocene strata are flanked by Miocene beds. In the western part are deposits mostly of Tertiary and Quaternary ages. Beneath the alluvium of the Irrawaddy River valley are extensive fresh-water deposits of Pliocene age. Volcanic rocks are not common but are present in some parts of the country. The mud volcanoes in the lower Irrawaddy River valley seem to have no connection with volcanism. West Pakistan, which lies between India and Afghanistan, includes the former British Baluchistan and most of the lower part of the Indus River drainage basin. In its northwestern part are two southwest-northeast trending mountain ranges, between which lies the great stony Kharan Desert. These mountains are composed predominately of Cretaceous and Tertiary strata that are considerably folded and are intruded by syenite and diorite. Older rocks are exposed in some of the high ridges. The Tertiary and later deposits in the area between the mountains and the Arabian Sea are nearly horizontal. A zone of Recent volcanoes extends westward into southeastern Iran; all those in West Pakistan seem to be extinct. Sulfur has been mined for many centuries at Kuh-i-Sultan, the largest volcano. The lower Indus River drainage basin is a broad plainDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 177 underlain by thick deposits of alluvium. Compared to the rugged western and northwestern parts of West Pakistan, the Indus River Valley is very fertile and well watered. East Pakistan, on the Bay of Bengal, occupies the lower Ganges-Brahmaputra delta and the Assam highland foothills. In India and its neighboring countries the relation of the numerous thermal springs to the geologic structure is not clear in all places. The grouping of springs in some areas and the presence of notable bands of springs in other areas suggest faults or close folds that may allow the escape of deep-seated water. Very few springs seem directly related to volcanism. A report by Oldham (ref. 2807) contains much information on thermal springs in these countries and is the source of most of the data in the seven tables below. No table was prepared for the country of Bhutan because no specific information on the springs reported to be there has been published. The locations of the springs in Baluchistan are shown on figure 53, and those in India, Ceylon, Nepal, Sikkim, Burma, West Pakistan and East Pakistan are shown on figure 58. 70° 80° 90° 100° Figure 58.—India, Ceylon, Nepal, Sikkim, Burma, East Pakistan, and West Pakistan showing location of thermal springs. Chiefly from refs. 2745, 2807, and 2826.178 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in Baluchistan [Chiefly from ref. 2807] No. on fig. 53 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Remarks and additional references No. on fig. 53 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Remarks and additional references 1 Between Gwader and Warm Many mud volcanoes 4 Doza Khusti (Doza Warm Issues from limestone. 2 3 Ras Kucheri on Mekran coast. Lakha (Lakha Peer), between Janatar and Kichi. Uch (Ooch) Hot Warm standing 20-400 ft above plains underlain by Miocene clay and sandstone. Large gas bubbles. Large flow of sulfurous water. Ref. 2709. Several springs in center of valley bordered by cliffs or dipping sandstone. Water is saline. 5 Kooshtee), in Dehrah Valley. Kissuker (Kissooker) 71 (max) Several springs issuing near base of Trukkee Range. Thermal springs and wells in India [Data chiefly from ref. 2807. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] on 58 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) 1 Yarkand River, 25 miles below head. Hot 2 Bisil (Behitsil) . 160 3 Tosha, on right bank of Braldoh River. Warm 4 Bulu (Booloo), northeast of town. Hot 5 Chutrum, on right bank of Basha River. 110 6 Hoto, on right bank of Braldoh River. 117; 122; 137 7 Chongo (Askali, Askole, Askoley), on Braldoh River. 169 8 Duchin (Dashkin, Mush-kin?) on stream bank near plain of Bonj. 154 9 Kisik Kiul (Kiuk-Kiul, Kisoo-ker), near village. 92-130 10 Sneuron (Tsuh-Tron) 109 11 Khorkun (Kor Chondus), near village. 185 12 Nubra (Chusan), 1 mile below Panamik. 170.5; 172 13 Turnawai, 7 miles southeast of Mansurah. Warm 14 Gokra, 8 miles from village__ _ _ 150 15 Theed (T’hed) on east shore of Lake Srinagar in Valley of Kashmir. Hot in winter Flow (imperial gpm) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Large Small NaCl; much free CO2. Large Remarks and additional references Several springs issuing from base of cliff at altitude of 14,900 ft. Ref. 2782. Water contains much gas, deposits sulfur. Used for bathing. Ref. 2830. Several springs. Water is saline. Ref. 2775. Ref. 2779. 3 springs less than 1 mile apart. Water is sulfurous. Ref. 2779. Issues from tufa mound 30 ft high at altitude of 9,700 ft. Water is sulfurous and of emerald hue. Used for bathing. Refs. 2754, 2771, 2779. 2 springs. Water is chalybeate; deposits sulfur. Ref. 2816. About 50 springs at altitude of 15.500 ft. Water is brackish. Refs. 2782, 2814, 2815, 2828. Issues from limestone at altitude of 7,700 ft. Used for bathing. Ref. 2830. Issues from gneiss (?) at altitude of 9,000 ft. Water deposits sulfur and gypsum; leaves iron stain on rocks. Refs. 2828, 2830. 2 springs issuing from gneissic debris at altitude of 10,500 ft. Water is sulfurous; leaves calcareous encrustations. Used for bathing. Refs. 2755, 2766, 2801, 2814, 2815, 2827, 2828. Issues from nummulitic limestone at altitude of 5,500 ft. Several springs at altitude of 16.500 ft. 1 spring spouts from mound of tufa. Water contains much free CO2. Temperature of other springs nearby is 90°F. Refs. 2782, 2783. See footnotes at end of table.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 179 Thermal springs and wells in India— Continued No. on fig. 58 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) 16 Pampur (Kshir Nag) 70 17 18 Kium (Kyam), on south side of Chang-chengmo River. Chigar (Chagrar, Tagar?)_____ 19 20 21 22 Saira (Sohora), on tributary of Mendola River. Knarung, in Ladak______________ Islamabad, in valley of Kashmir. Raja war (Rajapur), 1 day’s march east of city. 23 Shushul (Chushul, Chusul) 24 25 26 Tatwani, on bank of Chenab River. Kuruchum, on road to Shach___ Pugha (Puga), on both banks of Rulang-chu stream. 147 70. 5 Hot Warm Warm 140 96 140 Warm 1174 27 Aknur (Aknoor), on bank of Chenab River. 28 Tsomoriri, at south end of lake. Hot Warm 29 Lausah, in hills northeast of Nurpur. 72 30 Bashisht (Bassisht, Beshist, Vashishta Muni, Biseshta-moonh), on left side of Beas (Bias, Byas) River, opposite Monal. 31 Sitakund (Sita-Kund. Seeta Koond) at Kelat on right bank of Beas (Bias, Byas) River. 117 106-110 32 Teva (Futtipani), 10 miles from Dhurmsala. 108 33 Tatwani, on tributary of Birmi River. i 120 34 Changrizang (Shalkar, Zungsum), on south bank of Para River a few miles from Shalkar. 116. 5-117. 5 35 36 Kaluth, several springs on right bank of Parbatti (Parbutty) River, near bridge. Bishenand, 500 yd from Kaluth springs. Manikarn (Mannikurn) on right bank of Parbatti (Parbutty) River. 100-108 160. 5-202 Flow (imperial gpm) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents CaC03 (20); Na2C03 (2,600); Na2S04 (160); NaCl (740); Si02 (40). 700 800 CaC03 (100); CaS04 (120); CaCl (546); NaCl (9,233); NaBr (12). Large 2 320 CaCOs, CaCl2, NasSCh, NaCl. Remarks and additional references Issues from contorted limestone. Water contains H2S. Refs. 2801, 2816, 2830. At altitude of 14,000 ft. Ref. 2801. At altitude of 15,000 ft. Ref. 2801. Bad taste. Ref. 2801. 2 springs. Ref. 2748. 2 springs issuing from marly limestone; water is sulfurous. Ref. 2830. At altitude of 14,400 ft. Refs. 2766, 2801. Issues from gneiss and slate. Ref. 2816. At altitude of 18,000 ft. Numerous springs, gently to strongly bubbling, at altitude of 15,270 ft. Water is sulfurous; free H2S. Refs. 2766, 2827. Several springs at altitude of 15,670 ft. Ref. 2794. Several springs (wells?) issuing from mica schist 500 ft above stream level. Water contains much H2S. Refs. 2765, 2767, 2796, 2801. Several springs issuing from mica schist. Main spring is a few feet above river and rises in masonry-walled tank 12 ft in diameter and 3 ft deep. Water is sulfurous and has bitter taste. Refs. 2765, 2767, 2796, 2825. Possibly 2 springs at this location. Refs. 2795, 2797, 2809, 2816. Several springs issuing from gneiss or schist at altitude of 7.000 ft. Water is bitter and deposits iron. 10 small springs at altitude of 11.000 ft. Water leaves saline incrustation; free H2S. Ref. 2788. 14 springs issuing from mica schist at altitude of 5,587 ft. Water issues violently and noisily. Ferruginous, siliceous travertine deposited by water. Much vapor and gas. Refs. 2796, 2801. See footnotes at end of table.180 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in India—'Continued . on .58 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) 37 Khirgunga (Nakthan), 9 miles southeast of Manikarn. 118 38 Dharmaur (Hissaoo Teeruth), in bed at Parbatti (Parbutty) River. Warm 39 Babut, near mouth of small tributary of Beas (Bias, Byas) River. Warm 40 Puari (Jauri) on left bank of Sutlej River 4 miles northeast of Chini. 125-130 41 Jaori, on left bank of Sutlej River_ Hot 42 Natpa (Tatpa, Nat-ssa), on right bank of Sutlej River. 137 43 Rarang, on right bank of Sutlej River. Warm 44 Bhasra (Bhatra, Lohand Khad), at head of tributary of Sutlej River. Warm 45 Suni (Soonee), on bank of Sutlej River. - 135 46 Kharsali, on left bank of Jumna River. 72. 1 47 Palia (Asarigadh, Wazirgurh) on right bank and in bed of Jumna River. >100 48 Jumnotri, at source of Jumna River. 192.6; 194 49 Huri (Uri, Ganotri), on left bank of Bhagirathi River. 139. 8 50 Banassa__ 1160 51 Badrinath _ _____ 129 f Gaurikund (Kedernath) __ 127 52 l Bank of Mandakni River below [ Gaurikund. Hot 53 Bhap-kund, on streambank 1.5 miles from Jhelum. Hot 54 Sansaodarah, near Gangnani 73 55 Tapoban: 0.5 mile from village 99; 109 1 mile from village. 123; 127 56 Kulsari, on bank of Pindar River_ Warm 57 Bhaori (Vodri, Gangnani), near Amola (Mala) village. 1 94 58 Agur, on bank of Ramgunda River. Warm 59 Naini Tel: In outlet channel of lake Warm Lake bed Warm 60 Sunah (Sonub), 35 miles south of Delhi. 108; 125 61 Kanwery __ Warm to hot 62 Pakul (Islamabad, Phrabas Kund), near Pali. Hot 63 Ganesar (Gunneshur) Hot 64 Talbrick, 14 miles west-south-west of Alwar. 118 65 Koilesar (Koleshur) _ _ __ Hot 66 Mora (Morloh), 60 miles south of Alwar. 120 67 Puklaz (Puglaz Sachu, Puklong Sachoo), on Runjit River. Warm Flow (imperial gpm) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents NaCl Large Low Variable Remarks and additional references Ref. 2816. Ref. 2805. 5 springs. Water is saline. Ferruginous deposit on stones. Ref. 2776. Water is strongly saline and slightly laxative. Refs. 2788, 2816, 2833. About 10 springs. Water is saline, alkaline, sulfate; contains much H2S. Deposits sulfur. Refs. 2776, 2812. At altitude of 8,653 ft. Several springs. Water is sul-furous. Ref. 2774. Numerous springs at altitude of 9,793 ft. Some iron deposited by water. Refs. 2774, 2784, 2805. Ref. 2788. Numerous springs at altitude of 7,478 ft. At altitude of 10,214 ft. Issues from limestone. Ref. 2763. 2 springs. Water clear but deposits ocherous sediment. Do. 4 small springs. Refs. 2763, 2816. Water is sulfurous; deposits sulfur. Water is sulfurous. 2 springs issuing from sandstone. Much free H2S. Water used for bathing. Refs. 2750, 2805. Many springs. Referred to as “Pilgrimage Well,” but may be a spring. A place of Hindu worship. Ref. 2790. Water is malodorous, leaves white deposit. Used for bathing. Ref. 2751. See footnotes at end of table.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 181 Thermal springs and wells in India—Continued No. on fig. 58 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (imperial gpm) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Remarks and additional references 68 Menchi (Menchu), on west bank Warm Water leaves deposit of iron oxide. Used for bathing. Ref. 2751. Several springs. Water is slightly sulfurous. Much gas. Water is strongly saline. Issues from sandstone at base of 69 of river. Namba, on streambank 12 miles Hot Large 70 from Golaghat. Kopili, on right bank of stream _ _ Gangra (Gangar), 12 miles north- 122 71 80 72 west of Chittore. Sitakund (Seeta-koond) 5 miles 137-140 Large hill. Issues from quartzite and is enclosed in masonry reservoir. Water slightly sulfurous. Marketed as table water. Refs. 2747, 2757, 2761, 2785, 2819, 2832. Ref. 2832. east of Monghyr and 500-600 yd from Ganges River. f Garm-pani, 300 yd northwest of 1 Sitakund spring. | Bainsa Pahar, 0.3 mile southeast 137 73 102 Issues from quartzite. Ref. 2832. 7 springs issuing from quartzite. Ref. 2832. 5 springs issuing from quartzite. Ref. 2832. Several springs issuing from hornstone (flint). Ref. 2819. Issues from quartz (quartzite?). Water used for bathing. Refs. 2758, 2817, 2819, 2825. Issues from quartzite. Ref. 2832. Issues in a cave. A place of pilgrimage. l of Sitaicund spring. fSinghi Rikh tatal pani_ 190. 5 Large 74 I Panch-bhur 84. 5 75 Paharpur (Kishi-kund), 5 miles from village. Richikund (Rishikund, Rishi- 1104 Warm 76 koond), 14 miles northwest of Haveli Khargpore. Bhaduria-bhur 98. 5 77 Gupt Gudaoli, several miles south of Puldeo. Manikpur, in jungle near town Kandela, 10 miles east-northeast of Manikpur. Sitaura (Sittourah), near foot of Warm 78 Hot 79 Warm 80 110 Ref. 2818. 81 Rajghir Hills. Bharari (Janum Kund), on An-jun River. Bhimbandh (Bheembund), 16 miles southwest of Haveli Khargpore. Karmanburi (Lachni Koond), 8 miles southwest of Haveli Khargore. Rameswar Koond, 5 miles west 145 2 springs issuing from “jaspide-ous hornstone.” Siliceous sinter deposited by water. Ref. 2819. Several springs issuing from quartz (quartzite?). Water used for irrigation. Refs. 2758, 2817, 2819, 2825. Issues from quartz (quartzite?). Ref. 2817. Issues from quartz (quartzite?). Water used for bathing. Ref. 2817. 19 wells and several springs. 82 145-148 144. 5 83 112 84 of Haveli Khargore. Rajghir (Rajgir, Rajgheer), near entrance to gorge and along base of hills. Hurma, on south side of Sone 108 85 Warm Water is radioactive. Refs. 2762, 2805, 2818, 2820. Ref. 2790. 86 stream near Gangur village. Sidpur, at village _ Water is sulfurous. Used for 87 Bara, between Dumka and Noni Hat. 145 bathing and irrigation. Ref. 2781. Ref. 2818. 88 Jerwapani (Jhariya pani). Katkamsandi (Kutkunsuandy, Katcamsandy), 17 miles northwest of Hazaribagh. Belkapi (Surajkund, Soorujkund, Hararyhaugh), 27 miles northeast of Hazaribagh. 87-93 Large Issues from fault between gneiss 89 110 Ca, Na, HC03, S04, Cl. and coal-bearing strata. Ref. 2832. Several springs issuing from trap 90 169-190 rock and granite. Water brackish, used for bathing. Free H2S. Refs. 2770, 2805, 2813, 2825. 4 springs; largest is constantly boiling. Large deposits of Na2S04, NaCl. Water is un-potable. Refs. 2785, 2805. See footnote at end of table.182 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in India—Continued No. on fig. 58 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (imperial gpm) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Remarks and additional references 91 Kesodeh, 2 miles southwest of Hot Water is sulfurous. 92 Madurkal. Nunbhil, 10 miles west of Koo- 119. 5 Small In saline marsh. Issues from 93 marabad. Hatpalia (Hatbullia, Tapat pani?), at village. [Lau-lau dah - 102 2 sandstone and trap rock. Ref. 2818. Issues from conglomerate. Water is slightly sulfurous. Refs. 2818, 2832. Issues from trap rock. Water is slightly sulfurous. Ref. 2832. Issues from limestone. Ref. 2832. 122 26 94 [Baramasia (Bhumuk) 93 9 95 Bijeragogarh, near town Warm 96 Tautlui (Tat-noi), on right bank of Sidh stream. fSu-sum panL -- 150 Large Small Issues from gneiss. Water is slightly sulfurous. Refs. 2818, 2819, 2832. Issues from conglomerate. Water is slightly sulfurous. Ref. 2832. Ref. 2832. 84 97 [Bhumka _ 82 Small 98 Sirguja (Tattapani, Tatapani) Jarum, in bed of Tabaka (Tataka) 130-196 Large Several springs issuing from fault. Free H2S. Refs. 2753, 2808. Several springs issuing from granitic gneiss. Free H2S. Ref. 2753. Issues from fault between gneiss and coal-bearing strata. Small deposit of sulfur. Issues from metamorphic rocks near fault along boundary of coal field. Ref. 2788. 6 springs. Free H2S. Water stored in masonry basins. Used for bathing at temple. Ref. 2788. Ruined temple nearby. Ref. 2788. 99 132 100 River. Indra Jurba, 12 miles south of Hazaribagh. Nuchibad (Jorya Booree), near 102 Small 101 Warm village. fTantipara, on right bank of 83-162 3 750 102 Buklesur stream. Lakarakoond, 5 miles from Tan- 85 Small 103 V tipara. Gandwani, on left bank of Son- 92 104 durah stream. Sheopur, on left bank of Damu- Warm Water is sulfurous. Used for 105 dar River near Jherria coal field. Tantolya (Tantotyu), near right bank of Damudar River. Ahmedpur, north of Hingla watercourse. Ganduari (Ganduani), 4 miles 190 bathing. Water is sulfurous. 106 Warm 107 Warm Salt lick. Ref. 2753. 108 east of Seersa Hill. That ha, in Huta coal field near 151 Water strongly sulfurous. Ref. 2753. Water forms white deposit. Free H2S. 109 Kokratra (Kokraha) village. Kowa Gandwani, 1 mile southwest of Kowdeh village. Susinia, on southwest side of hilL 92 110 Warm 111 Deori, near village 82 Issues from contact of two 112 Mhurr __ _ formations. Issues from fault. Water is 113 Jalander, near Jhinihuwara _ Warm saline; evolves gas. Used for bathing. 114 Lausundra (Lassindra), 18 miles 1 124 6 springs. Water unpalatable. Ref'. 2778. Many small springs. Water is sulfurous and radioactive. Refs. 2778, 2823, 2825. Much hydrocarbon gas. Refs. 2789, 2805, 2812. Much hydrocarbon gas. 115 west-northwest of Tui. Tui (Towa, Tuwa), on Mahai 82-152 116 River near Ruttenpur (Rut-tenpoor). Anhoni Samoni (Amoni, Anhoni 120 Small NaCl 117 Simhoni, Unhonee Sumonee, Kvrie?), north part of Narbada (Nerbudda) coal basin. Budi, 8.5 miles east-northeast of Warm Anhoni Samoni. See footnotes at end of table.No. on fig. 58 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 Seef DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 183 Thermal springs and wells in India—Continued Flow (imperial gpm) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Remarks and additional references Large Low Ca, Na, C03, S04, Cl. Several springs issuing along rock dike 0.25 mile long. Water is sulfurous; much hydrocarbon gas. Refs. 2805, 2822. Ref. 2778. A place of pilgrimage. Ebullition caused by evolved gas. Water stored in reser-oir. Water stored in a series of reservoirs. Ref. 2788. Flows from trap rock. Water used for bathing. Refs. 2805, 2825, 2834. Water brackish, slightly laxative. Issues from faulted metamorphic rocks. Ref. 2756. Water is potable. Do. Water is potable. Issues at base of hill. Water has Large acid taste; smells of burning charcoal. Used for drinking. Ref. 2816. Strongly sulfurous. Free H2S. Water used for drinking. Refs. Large 2756, 2825. Several springs issuing from Pre-cambrian limestone and sandstone. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 2789, 2805. Issues from Precambrian sand- Large Small stone. Ref. 2789. Issues from faulted Precambrian limestone and shale. Ref. 2756. 2 springs. 4 springs. Several springs. Ref. 2778. Water is sulfurous. 2 springs. Small Water is sulfurous. Several springs. Ref. 2825. 4 springs near temple. Water is sulfurous. Ref 2769. Ref. 2825. Name or location De- Anhoni (TJnhone, Maljihir?), 17 miles southeast of Anhoni Samoni. Babaiha, in stream bed___ Khair Para, in Sultanpur pendency. Wadla (Unapdeo), 2 miles north of village. Nazardeo (Nijardeo)___________ Sunafdeo, near Nazardeo village. Arawad (Unapdeo), in Chopra Dependency. Damarni (Dambhorni)___________ Tulshi-sham (Donee). Anaval (Devakl Unei, Udaki), 2 miles from Pili, in river bed________ Salbaldi (Salbaldee)______ Ushna- village. Chuikadan, near village________ Bhagatpur, on hill near village... Mandai Chota, in watercourse___ Atmalik, on north bank of Maha-nadi River. Dalli, near village____________ Mezka_________________________ Kotgaon, at southeast base of Katpar Hills. Oteri (Ooteer, Jaggarnath), 10 miles west of Khoorda. Loagudi, on east side of Girtra-badi Hill. Unapdeo (Ounkdeo, Oonup Deo), near temple on right bank of Pern Gunda River. Khair (Kair), in East Berar____ Arjuna (Urjunah), near village__ Ganeri, in bed of Pern Gunda River. Periplas, in river bed__________ Gurgaon, in river bed 800 paces from village. Satiwali, 4 miles from Kokner___ Kokner (Coaknair, Kobineera)____ Tuk Muk (Took Mookh)____________ Haloli (Hullolee), 50 paces east of Veyturna River. (Guneshpuri, near Taunsa River.. (Gandodi, in bed of Taunsa River. Vehloli, near Dysur_____________ Kulbhone (Kulmun), 50 paces from Taunsa River. Nimboli (Nimbowle)______________ {Vijrabhai (Vizrabhaee, Vizerab-hoy), in river bed. Aunklowle_______________________ Pali (Palee)____________________ Savi (Sao, Mahr)________________ otnotes at end of table. Temperature of water (°F) 120 Hot 98 90 100-103 85-91 139 Warm 124 115-120 91 100 Warm Hot Hot Warm Hot Hot 110 112 110 110 85-87 87 101 Warm Warm Warm Warm Hot Hot Warm Warm Warm Hot M100 ‘ 136 <100 109 35-914 O—05- -13184 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in India—Continued No. on fig. 68 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (imperial gpm) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Wudaoli (Mandangadh Peta) f C his gar _ 130 92 220 4 1, 730 870 Ca (49); SO, (71); Cl (516); gas, chiefly n2. Ca (67): C03 (33); S04133); Cl (434). (.Murda, 3 miles north of Chisgar__ Warm 96 1, 020 Ca (38); C03 155-156 144 1, 990 (45); S04 (104); Cl (454). Ca (53); S04 (76); Cl (519). Rajwari (Rajwadi): i 110 25 964 Ca S04, Cl 126 140 920 Springs in nearby rice fields.. Arauli (Aravali) 142-147 105 10 560 Ca (36); Mg 105 (43); S04 (85 ppm); Cl 375 Much H2S. Gas almost Math 157 10 1, 120 wholly N2. Ca, S04, Cl Rajapur 105 12 370 Ca, C03, S04, Botha (Lin Khal), near village.. Warm Cl; free H2S. Warm Gondala, in bed of Godavari River. Kaulagi, near village .. Buga (Baugha, Banga, Byora, Byorah, Baidra), 30 miles northwest of Gondala. 120; 140 Warm 110 2, 090 CaCl2, Na2 S04, NaCl; free H2S. Large Low CaC03 Warm Atmacoor, near tank of Siddapur. Wuddyralla, 1 mile from village.. Warm Warm 89-90 Vankarum, 7 miles north of Mahanandi pagoda hill. Warm Lanjabanda, 1 mile east of village. 85-91 Low CaC03 88. 7 Large Kadmala Kalva (Kuddamal Calwa). Chagorlmari 156 157 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 See footnotes at end of table. Remarks and additional references Salts deposited by water. Refs. 2769, 2793. Water used for bathing. Water used for irrigation. Refs 2769, 2793. Several other warm springs for several miles along valley. Refs. 2769, 2793. 15 springs. Water stored in cisterns for bathing use. Salts deposited by water. Refs. 2769, 2793. Refs. 2769, 2793. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Refs. 2769, 2793. Water used for irrigation. Refs. 2769, 2793. Refs. 2769, 2793. Water used for bathing and irrigation. Refs. 2769, 2793. Flows from trap rock. Refs. 2769, 2793. Do. Issues from mouth of stone cow. Refs. 2769, 2778, 2793. Ref. 2778. 2 springs issuing from faulted granite and trap rock. Refs. 2756, 2805, 2831. Several springs. Much gas. Issues from sandstone and limestone near contact of Pre-cambrian and Carboniferous rocks. Refs. 2789, 2816, 2831. Issues from faulted strata. Issues from quartzite. 2 springs. 3 springs issuing from fault. Water deposits tufa. Used for irrigation. Ref. 2806. Several springs. Water contains some iron. Ref. 2803. Source of part of water supply for town of Nandial, 10 miles west of spring. Ref. 2806. 2 springs. 2 springs.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 185 Thermal springs and wells in India—Continued 'To. on fig. 58 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (imperial gpm) Total dissolved solids (PPm) Principal chemical constituents 190 Sir well 191 Dhone - 192 Malakapuram (Mulkapoor) 193 194 Rudravaram (Roodrar) 195 196 Kotakapali (Cottapilli) 197 Muttalur _ 198 Tinimapuram _ 199 Bhuga (Boogga) _ 88 200 Irade, 6 miles from Pootoor 99-102 201 Salem _ __ 84 202 Barren Island, at landing place.. Hot i Maximum. 8 Hottest. 1 Main spring. Remarks and additional references 8 springs. Several springs issuing from faulted sandstone. Main spring flows from mouth of stone cow. Refs. 2804, 2805. Issues from gneiss and slate. Ref. 2805. Issues from basalt. Refs. 2786, 2802. IThermal springs in Ceylon [Data chiefly from ref. 2826] No. on fig. 58 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Remarks and references 1 Kannea (Cannia), 6 miles northwest of Trincomallee. 85-115 7 wells tapping granite; 6 are in stonelined basins. Several unimproved springs nearby. Water is potable. Much gas. Refs. 2764, 2768, 2805, 2807, 2810, 2825, 2826. 2 Patipal Aar, south of Baticaloa.. Hot Several springs. Ref. 2826. 3 Kitool, east of Blintenne Hot Refs. 2807, 2826. 4 Badulla, near town Hot Several springs. Ref. 2826. 5 Yavi Ooto, near village. Hot Ref. 2826. Thermal springs in Nepal [Data chiefly from ref. 2745] No. on fig. 58 Name or location Temperature of water Remarks and additional references 1 Beside Kali River, 3 km north of Hot Ref. 2745. 2 Dharchula. At altitude of 10,850 ft. Ref. 2805. Water is saline, malodorous. 3 Sheopuri, on east bank of river 1 Hot 4 mile from village. Rasua Qarhi, about 15 km south- do Ref. 2745. 5 west. Hangthuwa, near east side of do Water is sulfurous. 6 Tamor River. Nangin, at head of small stream. do Thermal springs in Sikkim [Data chiefly from ref. 2807] No. on fig. 58 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Principal chemical constituents Remarks and additional references i Mangphu (Mangpuu), 600 ft above Tista River. Warm vapor issuing from clefts in slate. Refs. 2790, 2791. 2 Momai, 1 mile below Kinchinow glacier. 110-116 Na2C03; Na2S04; NaCl... Issues from granite at altitude of 16,000 ft. Ref. 2785. 3 Phug (Phong Sachoo), on east bank of Runjit River. Warm Water is malodorous; leaves white deposit. Ref. 2751. 4 Yeumtong, on Lachong River 112. 5 Na2SOt; gas, H2S Issues from granite at altitude of 11,920 ft. Water is slightly saline. Ref. 2785. Thermal springs in Burma [Data chiefly from ref. 2807] Thermal springs in Burma— Continued No. Temper- Remarks and additional No. Temper- Remarks and additional on Name or location ature of references on Name or location ature of references fig. 58 water (°F) flg. 58 water (°F) 1 Memboo (Minbu), 0.5 mile from 87 Mud volcanoes. Water is 5 Sandoway River, near source 110 20 springs; large combined Irrawaddy River. saline. Ref. 2836. (max) flow. Water is tinted. 2 Bu-le, on north bank of stream Warm 6 Cape Negrais, on coast near cape. Mud volcanoes. Ref. 2792. near its mouth. 7 Lepan-bew-Choung 100; 115 2 springs 4 miles apart. 3 Ramree (Ramri) Island 92 8 110 bustible gas. Refs. 2780, 9 Choung-na-nay 108 2792. 10 Kay loo M young: Cheduba Island. 157 2780, 2792. Slopes on east side of Hmoh Several springs. Amherst Island Valley. 4 2792. 11 Flat Island 12 2792. 13 Nearby mainland 14 Hot 2780, 2792. 15 Vadai Choung Hot 186 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in Burma—Continued No. on fig. 58 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Remarks and additional references 16 Koon-Pai Hot 17 Maitine Hot 18 19 Kyoung Choung (Gyo, 45 miles north of Moulmein { Pagoda. Hot Warm lAllayen (Moulmein) 137 Issues from limestone. Ref. 2805. 20 Poung Yahoo .. Warm Water is saline. 21 Nga Yai Kyoon Juin Warm Do. 22 Sienli... Warm Water is sulfurous; contains iron sulfate. 23 Mai-palai (May-play) Warm Water is saline. 24 Kalin© Aurig (Eubien) 108 Well. Ref. 2787. 25 Noung-tyne (Noung-ta-bway)___ Warm Water is saline. 26 Thaphun Warm Do. 27 Mya-waddi Warm Do. 28 Poung (Poung-to-goo) Warm Do. 29 Ye-bii Warm Do. 30 Damathat, on hill near village... Warm Water is brackish. 31 Bonet, near village Warm 32 Ahtaran (Attayen) 130 3 Wells and several springs. Principal well is in a brick-walled cistern 60 ft in diameter. Water is actively bubbling and gives off much vapor. Much CO 2. Refs. 2773, 2798. 33 Myan Khoung Warm Water is saline. 34 Thalan Khoung Warm Do. 35 Ingijre Warm Do. 36 Nat Gyi Zin, at base of hill Warm 37 Henzai, near stream Warm 38 Langyen, near head of tributary of Pagayai stream. 144 Water is sulfurous; contains CaSOi. 39 Myitta, on right bank of Ten-asserim River northeast of village. 119 Water is chalybeate and very sulfurous. Ref. 2798. 40 Moung Magan, in mangrove swamp. Warm Water is saline(?). 41 Paltha Kyoung... Warm 42 Mandoo, on Bin stream south of Myitta. Warm 43 Toung Byouk, at head of east branch of stream. Warm 44 Pai, on hillside 198 (max) Several springs issuing from granite. 1 spring jets to height of 6 ft. Water contains Ca, Na, SiOt, Cl, H2SO4. Ref. 2824. 45 Palouk, on right bank of river... 196 (max) Several springs. Ref. 2798. Thermal springs and wells in Pakistan [Data chiefly from ref. 2807] No. on fig. 58 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Remarks and additional references Blast Pakistan 1 Rajshahye, between Burgunje and Titalya. Warm 2 Sitakund (Seeta Koond), 22 Warm to Many springs within one miles north of Chittagong. hot small area and 7 others within distance of 6 miles. Water is saline. Combustible gas. West Pakistan 1 Peshawar, near cantonments Warm 2 springs issuing from allu- 2 Hossein Abdal Warm vium. Large flow from nummu- 3 Bukh Ravine (Musakhel) 94 litic(?) limestone. Issues from Carboniferous 4 Sodhi, in deep ravine 0.5 mile 75 limestone. Free H2S. Deposits of sulfur. Refs. 2772, 2816. Large deposit of tufa. 5 from village. Bukkur, east of Indus River and near road to Leia. Warm Thermal springs and wells in Pakistan—Continued No. on Name or location Temperature of Remarks and additional fig. 58 water references (°F) West Pakistan—Continued 6 Tausa, 6 miles west of Indus River. Warm 7 Bindar Pir, 6 to 8 miles up the Sodi Pass. Hot Water potable. 8 Garm-ab, at foot of Mari Hills.-. Warm Water bitter; contains saltpeter and other salts. 9 Garmo, on Shoree watercourse... Hot 10 Wahi Pandi, 24 miles west of Johi. Warm 11 Tandra Rahim Khan (Shahdad-ka-gote), 6 miles north of Peeth. Warm Well 70 ft deep; taps conglomerate. Ref. 2829. 12 Gazipur (Gazee-pir, Peeth), on hill called Bhil. Hot Water pale green. Much H2S gas. Large deposit of tufa. Refs. 2752, 2829. 13 Gorandi, 4 miles west of Shah Hassan. Warm 14 Sewan, 3 miles south _ Hot Sulfur springs. 15 Phadak (Faduk), 2 miles south of Gorandi. Warm 16 Pir Ari, 2 miles south of Jhingarah. Warm 6 springs. 17 Nain, 8 miles southwest of Gorandi. Warm 18 Khai, 8 miles southwest of Jhanghar. 3 springs. 19 Kandhar (Kanda Shah), 10 miles south of Naing. Warm Water is sulfurous. Refs. [Lakhi (Lukkee), 15 miles from 102-105 20 1 Sehwan 2752, 2799. 1 Hills below Sehwan (Dharum l Hill). 120 Near sulfur mines. Issues from base of limestone cliff. 21 Khosra-ka-wahi, near Hubb River. 120 22 Garm-ab, on road to Karachi Warm Ref. 2799. 23 Rani-jo-kot, 16 miles west of Majanda. Warm Referred to as “Fountain of the sun.” 24 Deo Chandeswar Mahadeo (Suraj Kund), in Rajputana desert, 80 miles from Suni. Warm 25 Tong - Hot 26 Pokran (Pokran Landee) Warm 3 springs 0.5 mile apart. 27 Manga-pir (Muggar-pir, Munga- 99; 119; Peer, Peer Mangul, Maga, Mangear). 127 Issue from strata dipping 50°. Possibly the same as “Springs near Karachi” in ref. 2825. Water from main spring supplies alligator pool. Water is sulfurous and leaves black deposit on pebbles. Refs. 2752, 2829. 28 Jein Pir, 16 miles west of Jhirruk. Warm Ref. 2778. INDO-CHINA (Carnbodla, Laos, and Viet Nam) A nearly continuous mountain chain extends southward from China throughout the length of Indo-China and separates the drainage basin of the Song Koi, or Red River, in the northeast from that of the much larger Mekong River, which forms part of the western border of Laos. Each river has a large and fertile delta. Tertiary deposits, including coal beds, are present in the upper basin of the Song Koi, and Triassic strata have been found in the southern part of Indo-China. Most of the mountains are of crystalline schist, which is overlain by limestone in many areas. The available data on thermal springs in Cambodia, Laos, and Viet Nam are given in the table below. The locations of the springs are shown on figure 59.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 187 Figure 59.—ilndo-China, Federation of Malaya, and Thailand showing location of thermal springs. Chiefly from refs. 2837, 2838, and 3249.188 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in Indo-China (Cambodia, Laos, and Viet Nam) [Locality Nos. 5, 8, 14, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, and 33 for Viet Nam are from ref. 2837 ; the rest are from ref. 2838] No. on fig. 59 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per hour) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Remarks and additional references Cambodia i Warm hco3 Laos 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Warm Small SO, Warm Hot Small SO, Hot SO, 89 SO, 65 SO, Warm so, 42 Ca, Mg, SO, 42 Kha Ta Hoi Warm 545 SO, 36 76, 000 Warm SO, Warm SO, Ca, SO, Issues at base of limestone cliff. Ref. 2840. Ref. 2840. Issues from plicated limestone. Ref. 2840. Issues from granite. Ref. 2840. Viet Nam Hoang Su (Tchou) Phi_____________ Bo Dat (Mo Luot)_________________ Ban Mac__________________________ Muong Lai, on bank of Noire River.. Ping-phat________________________ Vikhe____________________________ Than Uyen (Than Huyen, Banxa)____ Minh-luong_______________________ Ban Ki (Ban Khi)_________________ Tu Le (Ban Nuoc Nung)____________ Nhan Gia (Nghiem Som)____________ Ban Sang (Nam San, Ngoc Chen)____ Gia Hoi (Chieng Pan)_____________ Ban-Tu__________________________ Ban Duot (Ban Det)_______________ Ban-It___________________________ Ban-ma___________________________ Ban-co-vai (Ban-Khua-vai)________ Pan Phay (Ban-Kai)_______________ Ban-hoc (Cua-nhi)_________ Ban It Ong________________ Hanh Son (Ban-Ve), at village Muong Pia_________________ Sa-phin___________________ Ban Van, on Noire River___ Ban Mong (Ban Muong)______ Ban Pe Trong______________ Na Ten (Pom Lot)__________ Ban Peo___________________ Na Ha_____________________ 36 60-70 36 20 30 29 28 Warm 29; 44. 5; 44. 8 39 58. 5 48-50 37-42. 5 35 50 58 40 30 36-45 38 45 30. 5 53 Warm 46 39 28. 5 65-80 47. 5 Warm 500 3, 000 150 SO, SO, .. 340 SO, Small Small Small Small 40, 000 20,000 3.000 2.000 1,000 1,000 20,000 3,000 Ca, Mg, SO, 336 2,628 2,672 CaSO, (1,356 ppm). Ca, Mg, SO, Ca, Mg, S04 CaSO, 3,329 Small 50.000 500 5.000 5.000 2.000 Small 3,000 15.000 10.000 200 40,000 2,649 Ca, Mg, SO,; gas, H2S, Ca, Mg, SO, CaSO, 667 Ca, Mg, SO, Ca, Mg. SO, 390 Ca, Mg, SO,—-SO, Water is very alkaline. 2 large and 1 small spring. Gas evolved. 2 springs. Water is acid.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 189 Thermal springs in Indo-China (Cambodia, Laos, and Viet Nam)—Continued No. on Temperature of Flow (liters Total dis- Principal chemical Remarks and additional references fig. 59 Name or location water (°C) per hour) solved solids (ppm) constituents Viet Nam—Continued 31 Muong Loi Warm 32 28 33 Mo-am ________ 38. 5 20,000 34 Qui Hoa, at village 36 1,000 175 Water contains much or ganic matter. 35 Phu JNho Quan (Kenh-ga) 52. 5 5,000 SO, 36 Mai Phuong__ _ _ _ Warm 37 Ha Tan _ _ _ Warm SO, 38 Huong Hoa __ .. __ 71 587 SO, 39 Warm 40 Phuoc Binh _ _ _ Hot Na, SO4 41 Ngoc Nha (Phuoc Loi) Warm 2 springs, 1 km apart. 42 Warm SO, 43 Loc Thanh (Binh Hoa) 56 408 NaCl 44 49 494 NaCl - 45 Thanh). Cu Va (Phaoc Tho, Thach Nham) _ Warm 46 Mo Due (Thrach Tru) 52 5,290 NaCl (4,400 47 Dak To__ _ . _ _. _ 45 307 str: 48 Hot Mostly vapor. 49 75 50 Triem Due (Ba Su) 90 51 Warm 52 Vinh Hao, at village _ _ 36 2,722 Ca (HCOs)-, Ref. 2843. NaHCOai KHCOs. IRAN (PERSIA) Iran is predominantly a mountainous and plateau country. High mountains of the Elburz system rise on the south border of the Caspian Sea, along whose shore is a narrow coastal plain. From near Mount Ararat in northeast Turkey, several nearly parallel ranges trend southeast and form the western part of Iran. There are narrow belts of coastal lowland, but some wide plains at the head of the Persian Gulf. In the northeast and east, high ranges extend eastward to the higher ranges of the Hindu Kush Mountains in neighboring Afghanistan. The interior is chiefly plateau interrupted by a central mountain range, which is highest in the south-central part of the country. This interior region, occupying about one-half the total area of Iran, has no drainage to the sea and forms a desert nearly 800 miles long and 100-200 miles wide. In its northern part are extensive saline marshes and dry salt plains. Granite, gneiss, and schist are exposed in the Elburz Mountains, but most of the other ranges are composed of marine strata of Devonian to Jurassic ages, which are greatly folded in most areas. Cretaceous formations are exposed throughout much of the plateau and probably underlie many areas that are covered by Quaternary deposits. They are exposed also in the central range within the plateau region. Tertiary strata are present along the bases of many of the mountain ranges, and Pliocene deposits form bands along the sea coasts. There are many areas of recent volcanism in the Elburz Mountains and also in the southeastern part of the country. Some volcanic peaks still emit vapor and gases, especially Demavend volcano about 60 km northeast of Teheran, and Kuh-i-Taftan, near the southeast border of Iran. Information on the thermal springs in Iran is presented in the table below. The existence of an additional thermal spring, not listed in the table, is suggested by the name—Ab-i-Garm (Hot Water)—of a town in the valley of the Kerkhah River about 170 km south-southeast of Kermanshah. The locations of the known thermal springs, as well as of Ab-i-Garm, are shown on figure 53.190 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in Iran No. on fig. 53 Name or location Temperatue of water (°F) Flow (gpm) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constitutents Associated rocks Remarks and references 67 5,990 1,570; 1,800 Na, HC03, Cl Much tufa at and near the spring. Water contains iron. Refs. 2846, 2858. Much tufa. Water contains iron. 2 Near Derik: 96 90-92 Refs. 2846, 2858. 3 Issi Su, at base of Zendsht Dagh. 99. 5 14,000 Altered limestone Refs. 2846, 2858. 95-122 Tepid 225 Several springs. Ref. 2852. Water contains iron; is unpalatable. Ref. 2847. Deposits tufa. Used for bathing. Ref. 2847. 2 springs. Much tufa; some pisolitic silica. Water used for drinking and bathing. Refs. 2845,2848,2855-2857. (Near Chaibagh, in Maragha ■I area. 5 Large 6 Mount Demavend area: 0.5 mile east of Ask (Aska, Usk). 82; 85 84 Large SO*... (Aske, Usk). 3 miles east of Ask (Aske, Usk). Ab-i-Garm (Sakh Tes-sar), 6 miles east of Ask (Aske, Usk). 160 Used for bathing. Refs. 2845, 2855-2857. 150 Ca, HC03, SO4 200 SO*-- bathing. Ref. 2848, 2856, 2857. Steaming vents; sulfur deposited. Refs. 78, 2845, 2848, 2855. Small deposits of sulfur and bitumen. Ref. 2849. 7 tain. At Daliki__ 158 8 9 Abbad, in Alman mountains, 1 mile above Takkia. 60 Water bubbles strongly with loud noise. (Probably a thermal carbonated spring.) Refs. 2851, 2854. Ref. 3294. 10 11 Do. 12 Garga and Khurkhu, on road between Hormos and Kerman. Chasma Abbad, near Dusari. Bandar Abbas, near base of Kuh-i-Ginao. Near Jask (Jashak), close to seashore. Bazman (Basman), near east base of Kuh-i-Baz-man. Near base of Kuh-i-Taftan.. Do. 13 Used for bathing. Ref. 2854. 14 113 Large SO*-- 15 128 SO*.. 2854, 3294. 16 98 Large SO* posits. Ref. 2853. Water bubbles violently in pool about 12 ft in diameter. Refs. 2850, 2854. Probably solfataras and fumaroles. Ref. 2854. 17 Hot IRAQ Along the northwest border of Iraq are mountains and plateaus, from which the land slopes in general southeast to the valleys of the Euphrates and Tigris Rivers. These streams flow southeastward through the entire length of the country to the head of the Persian Gulf. Southward from hills near the border highlands, the upper courses of these two rivers traverse large areas of flat land underlain by gypsum. Below Hit on the Euphrates and Baghdad on the Tigris, the streams are sluggish, and their water is diverted htrough many irrigation canals to the extensive alluvial lands of Babylonia. The northeastern part, of the country is largely a hilly region of folded Tertiary gypseous and sandy strata that include great anticlines, on which are the Kirkuk oil fields. The Hamad, or Syrian Desert, in western and southwestern Iraq, comprises a gresit gravelly plain which slopes gently northeast to the Euphrates River. Shallow ground water in the desert is obtained along many wadies (dry washes) and supports many villages and cultivated areas. Very few thermal springs have been reported. Probably the most noted are springs near the ancient city of Hit on the Euphrates River in the central part of the country. The available information on the springs is given in the table below, and the locations of those springs are shown on figure 54. DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 191 Thermal Springs in Iraq [Data chiefly from ref. 2861. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on fig. 54 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and references 1 /Tall Kaif (Tail Kaif, Tel Kiaf) area: Tlimtha, 4 km from Tall Kaif. 25-28 24 126 7,200 826 440 Ca (171); COs (105); SOj (445). Limestone (Oligocene?) Supplies village. Do. Kaif. Tall Afar, 60 km west of Mosul. Adaiya, 45 km west of Mosul. 24 Water is of “fair quality." Two springs. The water is piped 30 km to Mafraq railway station. Ref. 2860. 2 25; 26 120 Lower Fars gypsum (Tertiary). 3 4 Jaf area: 32 60 Bakhtiari gravel (Pliocene).. 26; 29 28 150 2 springs. 60 450 HCOs (105); SOi (135) Near Hit 31-36. 6 Na,Cl__. Gypsum and magnesian limestone. Several springs forming pools in which naptha bubbles up with gas; sulfur deposits. Ref. 2859. ISRAEL AND JORDAN The countries of Israel and Jordan (formerly Trans-Jordan), which have been organized since World War II, include the region formerly known as Palestine. Israel occupies a band of varying width along the Mediterranean Sea from Lebanon to the Egyptian border. Jordan occupies a region south of Syria including areas on both sides of the Jordan River and the Dead Sea and extending south and east to the borders of Iran and Iraq. The eastern part of the region consists largely of plateau land cut by deep gorges and wadies; it slopes westward to the great block-faidted valley of the Jordan River and Dead Sea. In several areas gneiss and schist with intruded granite and other crystalline rocks are exposed at the base of the plateau lands. These ancient rocks are overlain by conglomerate and sandstone which may be of Carboniferous age. An overlying formation of similar rocks, probably Lower Cretaceous, is conformably over-lain by Upper Cretaceous limestone that covers most of the region. Tertiary lava covers extensive areas northeast of the Sea of Galilee and east of the southern part of the Dead Sea. There are some areas of lava west of the Jordan River. Gently west-dipping Cretaceous strata cover most of the high land west of the Jordan River valley. Toward the Mediterranean Sea are Eocene and later marine deposits. The alluvial coastal plain is less than a mile wide in some places. Thermal springs issue chiefly along the lower part of limestone bluffs which border the Dead Sea and Jordan River Valley. Information on these springs is presented in the two tables below, and the locations of the springs are shown on figure 60. Thermal springs in Israel [Principal chemical constituents are given in parts per million] No. on fig. 60 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and references 1 El Hamme (A1 Hamma), on right bank of Jarmuth (Jarmuk) River: 34.1 Refs. 2865, 2866, 2868, 2869. 40.6 Do. 48 8 1,212 CaS04 (194); CaCl) (244); NaCl (520). Do. 2 Tabigha, 10 km north of Tiberias. Tiberias, on southwest shore of Lake Tiberias (Sea of Galilee). A1 Hamma, about 5 km south of Lake Tiberias. Ain Maleh, near El Maleh.. Iladlitha, about 5 km south of Engeddi (Ain Jidi). Hammam, near west shore of Dead Sea. 32.2 Ref. 2868. 3 58.7-61.9 28,248 (coolest) CaClj (8,526); MgCh (1,403); NaCl (16,827); MgBr, 3 main springs. Bathing resort; 4 Roman baths of Emmaus. Water is radioactive. Refs. 2865, 2868, 2870, 2871, 2873, 3290. Ref. 2863. 5 30 Volcanic ash (Lower Creta- Refs. 2863, 2868, 2872. 29 36.6 18,000 360 ceous). Ref. 2866. Water is sulfurous. Used for bath- ing. Ref. 2866.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 35° 36° Figure 60.—Dead Sea region of Israel and Jordan showing location of thermal springs. Chiefly from refs. 2863, 28,66, and 2868.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 193 Thermal springs in Jordan No. on fig. 60 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Associated rocks Remarks and references 1 Um Keis, south of El Hamme railway station. Near Wadi Zejd_. __ 45. 5 Bathing. Ancient springs of Gadara. Refs. 2867, 2873. Ref. 2863. 2 Warm 3 Sukhne, near Nar ez Zerqa stream. Ain Fashkta 24 15, 000 Ref. 2866. 4 Probably warm 54. 4-60 54 Ref. 2863. 5 6 Zerqa Ma'in, on north side of gorge. Ain al-Zerqa, 5 km south of Zerqa Ma'in. About 6 km north of Engeddi (Ain Jidi). 36, 000 Base of limestone overlying sandstone; near basalt. 10 main springs. Extensive deposits of tufa. Probably same as Roman baths of Callirrhoe; also the Barras referred to by Josephus. Water is sulfurous. Refs 30, 2866, 2868, 2869, 2872, 2873. Several springs, possibly including those of Wadi Abu Dhableh near ruins of Mirga'ah. Water is sulfurous. Refs. 30, 2869, 2872. Ref. 2863. 7 (approx) Warm JAPAN Although Japan might be considered as one of the groups of Pacific islands, it is virtually an Asiatic country. Its thermal springs are along a great volcanic zone that extends southward from Kamchatka through Chishima, or Kuril, Islands and thence throughout the length of Japan. Japan comprises the main island of Honshu (Hondo), the island of Hokkaido (Yezo) to the north, the two smaller islands of Shikoku and Kyushu south of Honshu, and many small islands offshore. The country is mountainous and hilly, and has very few extensive areas of lowland. The core of the country is of granite, gneiss, and schist, which form some of the highest mountains and also underlie many lower areas. Other uplands are underlain by Paleozoic and Mesozoic sedimentary rocks. In northern Honshu some large mountain masses of these older sedimentary rocks are surrounded by marine Tertiary strata, which also border the coast in many places. Volcanic activity began in Tertiary time and has continued to the present. In Hokkaido are two main bands of volcanic rocks. One extends southward from Sakhalin Island, and the other forms the southwestern extension of the volcanic belt of the Kuril Islands. The south-trending band continues through northern Honshu, and there is a narrower band near the west coast. The two bands unite in central Honshu in the volcanic region known as the Japanese Alps. Thence the wider band extends southward, includes the probably extinct volcano of Fujisan (Fujiyama), and continues to the sea. The narrower band parallels the west or northwest coast of southern Honshu and branches southward across Kyushu Island. A total of 165 volcanic moun- tains have been recognized, of which 63 are classed as active or quiescent (Ishizu, ref. 2942). At least 17 are well-known volcanoes that have been active in historic times.7 Many hot springs issue near the active volcanoes and also elsewhere in the lava areas. Some hot springs issue in areas of Tertiary and older sedimentary rocks, probably along lines of faulting. Some are in faulted areas of granite'and other ancient crystalline and meta-morphic rocks. A few springs that are slightly above boiling temperature and spout intermittently are called geysers, but generally they are not classed as true geysers. Many springs have temperatures between 80° and 100°C. A large number are within the great tectonic depression called the Fossa Magna, which extends north-northwest to south-southeast across Honshu, somewhat west of Tokyo. The number of thermal springs in Japan has been variously estimated from about 950 to 5,567 (Kiuto, ref. 2997). The latter figure refers to individual springs and, in some localities, includes numerous wells sunk to augment supplies of hot water. Somewhat more than 200 groups of springs of temperature above 20°C have been developed as bathing resorts. Some of these springs are classed as cold, as the water is below the normal human body temperature (about 37°C), and the water is heated for the baths. Nearly all the thermal springs of consequence probably have been developed, but there may be small remote springs that are known only locally. Hokkaido Island has not been studied in detail and may contain thermal springs that have not yet been recorded. 7 Lake, Philip, 1911, Japan [section on] Geography, in 11th ed., Encyclopaedia Britannica, Cambridge, England, Univ. Press, v. 15, p. 158-159.194 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLDDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 195 Figure 62.—,Hakone area, Kanagawa Prefecture, Japan, showing location of thermal springs. From ref. 2*939. Figure 63.—Aso caldera, Kumamoto Prefecture, Japan, showing location of hot springs and craters. From ref. 2935. A general report on the geology and mineral resources of Japan by the Imperial Geological Survey (ref. 2936) includes a summary of the thermal springs. According to this report, 951 hot springs are of sufficient interest to be listed, because several have temperatures above boiling and many are between 90° and 100°C. Saline springs predominate, but there are also many sulfur and alkaline carbonate springs. The presence of numerous hot springs associated with volcanoes in the Kuril Islands, which extend northward from Japan to Kamchatka, has been mentioned by several writers, including Fujinami (ref. 2899). No specific information on these springs has been found; but the solfataric character of many of the volcanoes was noted by Milne (ref. 3063), who also recorded hot springs in several islands, including Urup, Iturup, and Kunashir, in the southern part of the chain. It could not be determined whether any information on the volcanoes and springs of the Kuril Islands has been published since this chain of volcanic islands came under Russian administration. The available data on thermal springs in Japan are summarized in the table below. The locations of nearly all thermal springs and groups are shown on figure 61, and the distribution of springs in six of the more important localities is shown on figures 62-67. Figure 64.—.Beppu area, Oita Prefecture, Japan, showing location of thermal springs. From ref. 2939.196 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD #Sandogoya ^ Mt Nasu Omaru* K'taVu limori* # Benten *Yawata #Takao #Yumoto #ltamuru Figure 65.—Izu Peninsula, Shizuoka Prefecture, Japan, showing location of thermal springs. From ref. 2939. j—I Kuroiso 0 1 2 MILES 1 i i i i_______i 0 1 2 KILOMETERS 1 i i l J_I Figure 66.—Nasu area, Tochigi Prefecture, Japan, showing location of thermal springs. From ref. 2939. Figure 67.—Shiobara area, Tochigi Prefecture, Japan, showing location of thermal springs. From ref. 2939.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 197 Thermal springs and wells in Japan Data chiefly from refs. 2937, 2939, 2942 and from Geologic map of Japan, scale 1:3,000,000 (Geol. Survey of Japan, 1953). Locations of unnumbered springs not identified. Principal chemical constituents are given in parts per million] No. on Name or location Temper- ature Flow (hectoli- Total dissolved Principal chemical Distinguishing Associated rocks Remarks and additional fig. 61 of water (°C) ters per day) solids (ppm) constituents characteristics references Akita Prefecture 1 32-45.5 Saline, sulfide, iron.. Quaternary deposits near Tertiary lava. 4 springs. Do. 2 Oyu. 46-70.5 3 Otaki (Odaki) 61; 62 40.5; 41 80-97 6,012 24,624 2 springs. 2 springs. Sanatorium. 4 springs. Hokutolite de posited. Refs. 3071-3074 3119-3123, 3127,3169. 4 Tertiary sandstone near Quaternary lava. 5 Shibukuro (Sibu- 4,717-5,463 S04 (938); Cl (2,697); H2Si03 (370); H2SO4 (420). Acid alum vitriol 6 kuro, Shikayu). Yunosawa Quaternary or Tertiary lava. 7 Yunotai 8 Nazumi 9 Takanoyu Tamagawa (Tama-kawa). 10 springs along stream Refs. 3065-3067. Aomori Prefecture 1 Osoreyama. 25.5-99 100-14,400 Cl, SO4 15 springs. pH, 1.8-5.8. Refs 2966, 3023. 8 springs. Ref. 3046. 2 Asamushi (Asa- 61.5-79 3 musi). Makado 4 Sugayu 60 springs. Resort. 5 Nuruyu 6 Tsutayu 7 Itadome Resort. 32 springs. Resort. 6 springs. 5 springs. Resort. 8 Owani... 62-77 9 Kuradate 56-78 10 54-62 11 Dake 45-84 4,585 Quaternary volcanic detritus. Chiba Prefecture 1 Mobaro (Mohara, High concentrations of I, Br and NO3 in water. Methane used commercially Ref. 2988. Ref. 2988. Ref. 3131. 2 Tagane). Otaki Shigehara Ehime Prefecture 1 Dogo 23-47 10 springs. Water is radioactive. Resort. Refs. 2899, 3010, 3011. Fukui Prefecture 1 Awara. 53-76 152 E arth y-muriated; saline. Quaternary alluvium near Tertiary lava. 8 springs; also wells. Resort. Fukuoka Prefecture 1 Musashi 41-46. 7 Sulfur 6 springs. 2 springs. 2 Funagoya 17.5; 21 Simple; carbonated.. Pleistocene deposits over-lying crystalline schist. Resort. Fukushima Prefecture 1 Anahara.. 2 Yuno 48-68.5 3 Iizaka 50-70 4 Shingoshiki... 42.2 5 Goshiki 38. 5-44. 5 6 Shinobu-Takayu— 45-49 7 Tsuchiyu HC03 8 Hinaka 9 Atsushio 35-78 Saline; muriated 10 Kawakami Tertiary lava. 11 Bandai 12 Oshitate 13 Higashiyama 34^61 Saline; bitter Quaternary andesite Resort. 10 springs; also shallow wells. Resort. 11 springs; also shallow wells. Resort. Sanatorium. Ocher deposited. 3 springs. Water is radioactive. Several springs. 30 orifices. Artificial geyser. Refs. 3075, 3081, 3106, 3107. Several springs. Ref. 3063. 14 springs. Resort.198 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Japan—Continued No. on Name or location Temper- ature Flow (hectoli- Total dissolved Principal chemical Distinguishing Associated rocks Remarks and additional fig. 61 of water (°0) ters per day) solids (ppm) constituents characteristics references Fukushima Prefecture—Continued 14 15 39 3, 455 Sulfur. Several springs. Resort. Several springs. 16 63 Acid; hydrogen sulfide. 17 18 19 20 14-27 11 springs. 3 springs. 8 springs. Several springs. 21 48. 5-51 22 13-22 23 49 Tertiary strata near granite. Gumma Prefecture 1 81; 88 51.5; 57 2 springs. Do. 2 3 Yujiku. 37.2-79 648 5 springs. 8 springs. Resort. 4 springs. Resort. 2 springs. Resort. 4 Shima group: 54-84 Lower Tertiary sandstone... 5 6 50. 6-81. 7 Acid; hydrogen sulfide. Several springs. Ref. 3008 27 springs. Used for bathing for more than 1,000 years Refs. 2894, 2895, 3029, 3036 3047, 3063. 19 springs. Refs. 3029, 3123, 3210. Refs. 2894, 3047. 7 Kusatsu: 43-64. 4 12,820 Quaternary volcanic tuff Mount Zao group. 41. 5-66.3 (max) 8,880 (max) Moderate alum vitriol. 8 38. 9-52.8 9 10 28.9-70.7 Sulfur 11 44. 5-47 Low 5 springs. Resort. Refs. 2894, 3132. 12 20 195 Quaternary volcanic detritus. 13 14 31. 5-37 3 springs. Hiroshima Prefecture 1 2 3 4 5 6 20. fr-23.0 20.1 23.1 23.6 26.4 22.5 98; 145 210 217 99 Acid intrusive rock (granite?). 3 springs. pH, 7.8-8.2. Ref. 3056. pH, 7.2. pH, 6.8. pH, 8.2. Do. pH, 7.8. Ref. 2972. Do. Do. Do. Y oshiwa-mura Yomoto Jinja. 110 Hokkaido Prefecture 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 42 60 (max) 12,190 Na (4,200); HC03 (1,690); Cl (6,230); HBOa (600). Refs. 2988, 3082. 8 springs. Resort. Large deposit of ferruginous tufa. Refs. 3095, 3143. 3 springs. 3 springs. Refs. 2940, 3095, 3096, 3199, 3205, 3206. Ref. 3012. 7 springs. Refs. 2899, 2920, 2940, 3133, 3138, 3186, 3198, 3203, 3204. 5 springs. Artificial geyser. Refs. 3009, 3081, 3106, 3107. 3 springs and many wells. Water high in fluoride. Refs. 2991, 3136. 20 wells 30-63 meters deep. Ref. 2988. Ref. 3095. Refs. 2990, 2992, 2293, 3200, 3201. Ref. 2991. Issue at mine. Ref. 2979. Giei-.. Tertiary lava Usubetsu (Ousu-betz). 54-58 42-44 80-91 2, 772 Quaternary andesite 48-98 48-60 54, 000 2,726 (hottest) Na (560); Cl (1,023); SO. (298); HBO* (134); HjSlOs (507). Vitriol; saline; sulfur. Quaternary lava do 40. &-44. 4 40-66 Tertiary liparite 39. 4-59.9 4, 720-6, 580 Ca, SO*, Cl DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 199 Thermal springs and wells in Japan—Continued Name or location Temper- ature Flow (hectoli- Total dissolved Principal chemical Distinguishing Associated rocks Remarks and additional of water (°C) ters per day) solids (ppm) constituents characteristics references 1 2 3 4 5 6 Hyogo Prefecture Kinosaki. Yumura. Hirano... Takedao. Arima--- 47-60.3 90.5-95 27 19.5; 23.5 28.3-53.4 Kobe-Jareyama. 21.5 Large 1,000 77,000 Na (20,530); Cl (43,790). Earthy-muriated; saline. Alkaline; carbonated. Earthy-alkaline; saline; carbonated. Muriated; sulfur___ Earthy-muriated Simple; carbonated— Tertiary sandstone. Granite........... Paleozoic strata__ Quartz porphyry-do............... Granite. 9 springs. Resort. Refs. 2984, 3058. 3 springs. Water used for drinking. 2 springs. 7 springs. Analysis is for one spring (Tenmangu-no-yu). Resort. Refs. 2915, 2924, 2925, 2929, 2931, 2933, 2958, 2963, 2988, 3018, 3042, 3059, 3086, 3087, 3092, 3160, 3162. Ibaraki Prefecture 34 Paleozoic strata near granite. Ishikawa Prefecture 82; 93 Earthy-muriated; saline. 41 25 60-79 47-58 59-71.5 Katayamazu (Shiotsu). A wazu (Awadzo). - - Saline; bitter; sulfur. Sulfate; bitter; sulfur. Tertiary tuffaceous shale Tertiary volcanic tuff. 49 2 springs. Resort. Ref. 3170. Resort. Several springs. Resort. Resort. Refs. 3167, 3170. Several springs. Resort. Refs. 3044, 3167. Resort. Refs. 3044, 3167. Resort. Ref. 3044. Iwate Prefecture Paleozoic strata near gran- ite. 2 3 4 5 6 95 51 Tertiary sandstone near granite. Quaternary deposits over- 3 springs. (max) 53-84 270 Simple; bitter 13 springs. Resort. 76 389 lying Paleozoic strata. Tertiary sandstone near granite. Tertiary sandstone near Quaternary lava. Ref. 3219. Kagoshima Prefecture 1 Daio Quaternary lava 2 3 Kirishima group: Eno_ Iwodani 60-76. 7 48.7-60. 6 5,400 Large 9,252 Sulfur; sulfide Sulfur; saline . 6 springs. Ref. 2899. 6 springs. Resort. Ref. 2899. 6 springs. Ref. 2899. Maru - Tono (Gin-no)— Hisomoe Saline.-. M ilky sulfur Sulfur; alum Resort. Ref. 2899. Do. Do. Do. Yunoko (Yunono). Many springs and fumaroles in area 100 meters long and 50 meters wide. Resort. Refs. 2808, 2899. Resort. Ref. 2899. Hokonage Do. 4 Soeda (Soita). - — Quaternary lava and vol- 5 Shihobitashi. - 53.9 9,540 canic ash. Resort. 6 Anraku 7 8 9 10 11 Yamanoyu--. — 7 springs. Several springs. Do. Yunomoto 47 Alum; hydrogen sulfide. do..- Arimura 42-65 87 Iron carbonate do 12 Ibusuki. Shimo 4,200 Alum Volcanic ash. Ref. 2942. 735-914 0—65----- 14200 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Japan—Continued No. on Name or location Temper- ature Flow (hectoli- Total dissolved Principal chemical Distinguishing Associated rocks Remarks and additional fig. 61 of water (°C) ters per day) solids (ppm) constituents characteristics references Kanagawa Prefecture [See also fig. 62 for locations of springs in Hakone area] 1 2 Hakone area: Ubago (Ubako)._ 40 82.2 40-46.7 64-76 46 36-96 35.6-71 40 74.5 45 50 42-47. 3 34-88. 5 Weakly saline; soda. Quaternary andesite do Myanoshita (Miyano- shita) 1,800 do. Yunohanazawa: Gongen-yu Yeomon-yu 720-1,410 1, 718 160-620 1 Acid; hydrogen sul-1 fide. Sulfur.... Ca (103); SO, (1,036); HjSiOa (367); A1 (120). NaCl, CaSOi; much free CO,. Simple do. do Saline Refs. 2909, 3047, 3129. Water piped to 2 resorts. Ref. 2909. 5 springs. Ref. 3129. 4 springs. Ref. 3129. Ref. 3129. 8 springs. Resort. Ref. 3129 3 springs. Ref. 3129. Resort. Refs. 3016, 3019, 3020, 3022, 3023, 3030, 3129. 3 springs and several solfata-ras. Refs. 2893, 2908, 3034, 3047,3129. 4 springs. Resort. Ref. 3129. 6 springs issuing at south base of Yusakayama. Oldest resort in Hakone area. Ref. 3129. 12 springs. Resort. Refs 3016, 3019, 3023, 3030 , 3181. Ref. 3018. Refs. 3131, 3132. Kumamoto Prefecture [See also fig. 63 for locations of thermal springs and craters in Aso caldera] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 41.6 Alkaline; sulfur Teritary and Quaternary lavas. Quaternary andesite Aso caldera: Small Tochinoki (Toshita). 39-45 76 (max) 57-75 Boiling Sulfate; bitter; saline; iron. Alum; iron-alum Sulfur Hoko-Jigoku Kurokawa (Oguni). Acid; saline; sulfide.. do 47-48.5 47 Simple; carbonated.. Saline Cretaceous strata Mesozoic (?) strata Resort. Issues from bore hole 75 meters deep. Refs. 2935, 3165. 5 springs. Water piped 2 km to resort. Refs. 2878 , 2935, 2940. Artificial geyser and red mud pool. Refs. 2878, 2935, 2956, 3107. 3 springs. Ref. 2935. 2 springs. Refs. 2935, 2954-2956, 2959-2961. Ref. 3166. 3 springs; also wells (max depth 75 meters). Resort. Several wells about 107 meters deep. Resort. Miyagi Prefecture 1 2 3 Kurikoma group: 45 42.6 45 Quaternary lava do do Sulfur do Shin-Komanoyu do do do Onikobe group: Mitaki (Kamitake). 54.4 do Sulfur do 52.8 Simple do Saline; sulfur do 98.8 97.5 98.2 Saline. Resort. Ref. 3044. Ref. 3044. Do. Do. Do. Resort. Refs. 2881, 2919, 3044, 3081, 3117. 2 springs. Resort. Refs. 2881, 2919, 3044, 3081, 3117. Do. 2 springs, one (formerly?) a geyser. Refs. 3106, 3107. Formerly spouted to height of 2-3 meters about once an hr. Refs. 2881, 2919, 2920, 3107. The only natural geysers in Japan in 1956. Megama erupts at intervals of 18.5 minutes. Ref. 3107.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 201 Thermal springs and wells in Japan—Continued Name or location Temper- ature Flow (hectoli- Total dissolved Principal chemical Distinguishing Associated rocks of water (°C) ters per day) solids (ppm) constituents characteristics No. on fig- 61 Remarks and additional references Miyagi Prefecture—Continued Tamatsukuri (Yui-zumi) group: 43.3-50 Tertiary andesite do 58 (max) 65 47.7-83.5 40.5-103 Tertiary andesite. Shinkuruma Naruko (Narugo). do Alkaline sulfate; acid vitriol. do Nakayama (Nakaya- madaira) Sulfur 49.5 51.5 43-52 56.6 56 (max) 37-48 53.3; 63.3 Saline Quaternary lava 8,120 Ca (970); Na (1,850); SO4 (314); Cl (4,340); HBOa (426). do do. Tertiary sandstone near Quaternary lava. Large Large 3,150 do 3 springs. Ref. 2881. 2 springs. Resort. Ref. 2884. 3 springs. Resort. Ref. 2884. 2 springs. 5 springs. Resort. Several springs, including artificial geyser. Resort. Refs. 2884, 2998, 3000, 3002, 3081, 3105, 3106, 3108. 2 springs. Resort. 2 springs. Ref. 2880. Water is radioactive. Ref. 2880. Refs. 3082, 3083. Several springs. Ref. 2883. Resort. 4 springs. Water is radioactive. Resort. 4 springs. Resort. 2 springs. Ref. 3083. Ref. 2988. Miyazaki Prefecture Kuromatsu and Ebino, on northwest flank of Kirishima volcano. 108 42 Saline Refs. 3008, 3168. Miye Prefecture 29 Nagano Prefecture 41-82 20-29 5,148 2,160 (hottest) Sulfur Quaternary volcanic detritus. Cl (19); HCO3 (35).. Hirao area: 74-76 55; 56 45-76 55 60 52-65 Muriated; sulfate; bitter. Sulfate; saline; sulfur. Kamabayashi... 1,513 • 62-88 59. 5-96 26.6 48-52 36-47.7 Saline; acid vitriol.. Paleozoic strata near granite. Hot Hot 28-42 Paleozoic strata near Quaternary lava. 53.5 36. 5-53 47. 5-67 27 67.5-83 130 Alluvium overlying Quaternary lava. Taki 46.1-59 Resort. Ref. 2973. 3 springs. pH, 7.3. Ref. 3142. 3 springs. 2 springs. 15 springs. 1 spring and 6 boiling pools (jigoku). 3 springs. Sulfur sinter. 4 springs. 8 springs. Resort. Ref. 3064. 4 springs. Several springs. Resort. Do. Resort. 4 springs. 3 springs; also wells. Resort. Refs. 3064, 3100-3104, 3155, 3156. 3 springs. Resort. Do. 8 groups of springs. Ref. 3209.202 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Japan—Continued No. on Name or location Temper- ature Flow (hectoli- Total dissolved Principal chemical Distinguishing Associated rocks Remarks and additional fig. 61 of water (°C) ters per day) solids (ppm) constituents characteristics references l 2 3 4 Nagasaki Prefecture Yunomoto, on Iki Island. Michino....... Obama--------- 43-47 24 24-94 Unzen area: Aino-mura. 38-84 Ko-jlgoku. 100 (max) 9, 204 359-1,198 CaC03 (322); NasSOi (636); NaCI (5,663); MgCl (536); KC1 (1,634). Alum vitriol; earthy- Quaternary liparite muriated; saline. Vitriol Earthy-muriated; Quaternary andesite saline. Acid vitriol; hydrogen sulfide. Acid; hydrogen sulfide. Nara Prefecture Several springs. 4 springs. Analysis is for main spring, Fontu-yu. Snow-white sinter. Resort. Refs. 3124, 3144. 6 springs. Resort. Refs. 2899, 2940, 2978. Several springs, boiling pools, and fumaroles. Refs. 2899, 3124, 3168. 20.5 Vitriol Alluvium overlying Tertiary strata. Ref. 2913. Refs. 2913, 3210. Goshiki Niigata Prefecture 1 102 9,000 Oil test 255 meters deep. Resort. Refs. 3013, 3022. 3 springs. 2 48-52 Granite(?) 3 5 31-39. 5 Simple, carbonated.. 4 springs. 7 springs. Resort. Ref. 3015 Ref. 3082. 6 13.5-26 7 58. 5 36,880 Earthy-muriated; saline. 8 53-57 6 springs. Water is weakly radioactive. 6 springs. Water is strongly radioactive. 6 springs. Resort. 2 springs. Resort. Ref. 3082. 9 28.5-39 1,800 10 37-45 Lower Tertiary sand- 11 63; 72 88 stone. 12 36,800 Ca (2,010); Na (1,540); S04 (8,340); Cl (19,990). 13 Seki ..Quaternary andesite 14 42-48 Sulfur do 3 springs. 3 springs. Resort. Water contains beryllium. Ref. 3014. 15 55. 5-62 7,200 do Oita Prefecture [See also fig. 64 for locations of thermal springs in the Beppu area] 1 2 Beppu area 36-98 144,000 745-3,332 Na, Ca, Cl, C02, Si02. Alkaline; saline; sulfur; carbonate. Tertiary and Quaternary lavas. Quaternary andesite Many springs and wells; also fumaroles and sol-fataras. Resort. Refs. 2899, 2911, 2918, 2940, 2954, 2958, 2962, 2975-2977, 2981, 2986, 3003, 3005, 3006, 3068, 3081, 3087, 3107, 3109-3116, 3146-3154, 3157, 3168, 3169, 3175, 3217. 3 Yufuin... Large 3,060 Several springs. Refs. 2945, 3218. Ref. 2942. 4 50 Okayama Prefecture 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 39. 4; 49. 2 34.5 37.7 39.4 31.1 39.0; 43.3 41.3; 42.6 25-77 28.0 4, 500 194; 204 131 121 162 157 128 131; 133 2,397 Granite do Taru—. 2, 700 Kamisaibara (Josai-bara). do do 1,296 Granite pH, 8.5; 8.8. Resort. Ref. 3053. pH, 8.6. Ref. 3053. Do. Do. pH, 8.8. Ref. 3053. 2 springs. pH, 8.6; 8.8. Ref. 3053. Do. 5 springs. pH, 8.0. Resort. Ref. 3053.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 203 Thermal springs and wells in Japan—Continued No. on Name or location Temper- ature Flow (hectoli- Total dissolved Principal chemical Distinguishing Associated rocks Remarks and additional fig. 61 of water (°C) ters per day) solids (ppm) constituents characteristics references Saga Prefecture 1 2 3 49 1,512 4 95 2, 592 Do. carbonated. Shiga Prefecture Shi mane Prefecture 27 54-64 37; 43 41.5 Large 17; 24 38.2 43 22. 5-46. 5 46; 50 44. 5-49 34.5 Saline; carbonated .. 3,888 31,100 Tertiary sandstone near Tertiary lava. 3,230 Saline; carbonated-- Tertiary sandstone near lava. Koda Sambeyama district. 2 springs. 3 springs. Water is radio-active. Ref. 3194. 2 springs. Water is radioactive. 2 springs. Cooler water is radioactive and is heated for bathing use. Refs. 2957, 2958, 2963, 2968, 2970, 2971. 2987, 3042, 3057, 3221. Water contains iron. Resort. 3 springs. Large deposits of tufa. Refs. 3054, 3194. 2 springs. Water is radioactive. 3 springs. Ref. 3054. Ref. 3054. Ref. 3194. Do. Ref. 3055. Shizuoka Prefecture [See also fig. 65 for locations of springs on the Izu (Idu) Peninsula] 1 38-40 9 springs. 2 60 3 77-108 9,235 CaClj (2,893) ;NaCl (5,409); SiOs (524). Earth y-muriated; saline. 8 springs, including formerly active Oyu geyser; also wells. Refs. 74, 2877, 2902, 2914, 2920, 2921, 2940, 3038, 3107, 3141, 3181, 3220. Several springs. Resort. 4 52 5 (max) 41-53 11 springs; also wells. Ref. 6 Shuzenji (Syuzenzi). Ito group: 55-77 1,400 3181. 17 springs issuing in bed of 7 43. 5-50. 5 Katsura River. Resort. Refs. 2940, 3181. 7 springs; also wells. Refs. Shishido 35. 5; 47 35.5-50 2905, 3022, 3025, 3027, 3087. 2 springs. Refs. 3022 , 3025, 57,800 3027, 3087. 4 springs. Refs. 3022 , 3025 8 Toi (Tohi) 36-79 3027 , 3087. 16 springs. Refs. 3211, 3214. 4 springs. 3 springs; also springs at base 9 35-47 10 41-50 11 41-64 Saline; carbonated. _ of Amagi-san. 11 springs. 12 13 42; 52 do 2 springs. Ref. 3213. 14 42 Several springs. Resort. 15 (max) 46-70 6 springs. Ref. 2901. 16 17 Kochi 42-53 13 springs. 18 24-56 Tertiary sandstone near Quaternary lava. 40 springs and wells. Refs. 19 22-31 2900, 2906. 3 springs. 5 springs. Ref. 2900. 20 Shimogama (Simo-gama). 63-79 Refs. 3212, 3214. Ref. 3213. Ref. 2900. Do. Refs. 3212, 3213. 204 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Japan—Continued No. on Name or location Temper- ature Flow (hectoli- Total dissolved Principal chemical Distinguishing Associated rocks Remarks and additional fig. 61 of water (°C) ters per day) solids (ppm) constituents characteristics references Tochigi Prefecture [See also figs. 66 and 67 for locations of springs in the Nasu and Shiobara areas] 1 Nasu area: 52 1,800 38 do._ Omaru (Dai-Maruzuka). 61.5; 71 48; 54 Large 2 springs. Resort. Do. Simple, carbonated . 51-54 5 springs. 34 Sulfur Sinter, with sulfur. 4 springs. Resort. Refs. 2925, 2926, 2940, 3047. Resort. Yumoto (Nasu-Yumoto). 28-74. 5 2,723 Ca, SO4, Cl Acid; hydrogen sulfide. Simple. 2 Large do 3 Shiobara area: Moto-yu (Furu-Motoyu). SO* (2,029) Resort. Refs. 2926-2928,2930 Acid; sulfur do.. 2932, 2934, 2940. 4 springs. Resort. 42-60 50-54 62.5 3 springs. Resort. Resort. Simple. do 55-70 Alkaline; inuriated.. 5 springs. Resort. 2 springs. Resort. 5 springs. Resort. 3 springs. Resort. Ref. 3047. 2 springs. Resort. 10 springs. Resort. 65 42-50 54-73 55; 57.5 22-69 Saline; bitter Hydrogen sulfide Tottori Prefecture 1 73.5 2 46-56 3 Togo group: Togo 31-50 Matsuzaki (Matuzaki). 32; 36 4 33. 5-85 5 Sekigane 40-45 6 45-49 7 51. 5-56 8 Yoshioka 42. 5-56. 5 9 Yoshikata 24.4-47. 5 10 Tottori . . . 26; 28.5 11 Iwai 37-60 12 Yudani.. 32 Quaternary andesite Water is piped to resort. Ref. 3060. 4 springs. Ref. 3194. 5 springs. Water is piped to resort. Refs. 3194, 3195. 2 springs. Refs. 3194, 3195. 1,730 Large 534-1,940 Cl, HC03, S04 Muriated; sulfur; saline; simple. Sulfur radioactive. Refs. 2887, 2889, 2987, 3033, 3042, 3087, 3139, 3140, 3145, 3173, 3174, 3189-3191, 3193-3195, 3221. 6 springs. Refs. 3060, 3192, 3194. 4 springs. Ref. 3194. 4 springs. Water is radioactive. Ref. 3194. 5 springs. 6 springs. Water is radioactive. 2 springs. 7 springs. Sulfur; simple Tertiary sandstone 2,592 Tertiary sandstone near Quaternary lava. Lower Tertiary sandstone... Saline; bitter do 4,066 Saline; sulfate; bitter. Toyama Prefecture 1 2 3 4 5 6 49-60 83; 88.5 64.5-95 49 Alkaline; saline Tertiary liparite 6 springs. 2 springs. 3 springs. Sulfur Granite Aimoto (Futami)... do Simple Contact of limestone and granite. Tertiary strata 7 49 Sulfate; saline Porphyrite dike Granite or schist 9 63 4,464 Hydrogen sulfide Ref. 3063. Wakayama Prefecture 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Yumoto (Rejujin).. 39.1 87. 5-92 22-40 42-60 9,450 1, 555 Simple Saline; bitter; sulfur. Alkaline; sulfur Tertiary sandstone Lower Tertiary sandstone... Sedono-Kanay ama.. Muriated; alkaline; carbonated. 27-45 Alkaline; sulfur Tertiary sandstone Cretaceous or lower Tertiary sandstone. 3 springs. 5 springs. Ref. 3063. 8 springs. Sinter deposit 2.3 percent SrO. Ref. 2886. 3 springs. Water is radioactive. 15 springs. Water is contaminated by sea water. Resort.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 205 Thermal springs and wells in Japan—Continued No. on Name or location Temper- ature Flow (hectoli- Total dissolved Principal chemical Distinguishing Associated rocks Remarks and additional fig. 61 of water (°C) ters per day) solids (ppm) constituents characteristics references Yamagata Prefecture 1 45-70 Quatenary volcanic tuff Resort. 2 43-47. 2 3 Tertiary strata near Tertiary lava. Ref. 2884. 4 5 Yudagawa (Name-gawa?). Sekine-yunosawa... 55 E arthy-muriated; saline. Tertiary sandstone near Quaternary lava. 6 28 7 8 Hijiori 9 10 11 Mogami-Takaku 30-40 63,000 3,944 Many springs. Resort. Ref. 2892. 4 springs. Resort. 12 56-62 13 42-58 Earth y-muriated; saline. Tertiary sandstone near Quaternary lava. Do. 14 65.5-73.5 5 springs and several wells. Resort. 15 16 Ref. 3131. pH, 1.5-1.6. Ref. 3069. Yamaguchi Prefecture 1 40.8; 41.5 174 2 springs. pH, 9.0. Ref. 3052 6 springs. pH, 9.0-9.2. Re- 2 (Fukagawa). 36.2-42.0 182-195 Cretaceous strata 3 20.5-43.0 1,990-2,149 145 sort. Ref. 3051. 4 springs. pH, 6.8-7.0. Ref 4 30.1 3125. 5 20.6; 23.0 156; 182 268; 250 463 do 2 springs. pH, 7.4; 8.3. 6 27.3; 29.5 2 springs. pH, 8.3; 8.2. Water is radioactive. Ref. 3052. 2 springs. pH, 7.1; 7.5. 7 40.5; 58.0 28.0; 32.9 Quaternary alluvium near granite. Granite or crystalline schist. 8 670; 157 2 springs. pH, 8.4. Yamanashi Prefecture Masutomi (Matsutomi). 20-33 Paleozoic strata near granite. Yumura (Kofu) 33.8-42 35-36 15 springs; also wells. Water is strongly radioactive. Refs. 2907, 2940, 2942, 2957, 2987, 3031, 3032, 3035, 3038, 3040-3042, 3085, 3087, 3119-3123, 3160, 3162, 3170, 3223. 4 springs. Refs. 2875, 2876. 3 springs. Dai-san, in Futami. Shin-taki, in Osore-yama. Shirakumo, in Furo-sen. Naka, in Hiraochi.. Spring A, in Kuzu_. Hokonagi___________ Spring B, in Urai... Orodani____________ Tono, in Shiriuchi.. Prefecture Unknown 95 95 216 91 3,060 3,600 90 88 Sulfur (?) 82 207 80 80 4,680 Volcanic ash 80 KOREA (CHOSEN) Several groups of mountains occupy northern Korea and from them high ranges extend southward along the eastern part of the country. The east coast is mainly steep and rocky. West of the main range is a region of steep hills and narrow valleys. Much of the western coast is low, and there are wide mud flats due partly to the great tidal change, which is as much as 35 feet along the northwest coast. In contrast, there is a change of only 1 to 3 feet along the east coast. Granite, gneiss, and crystalline schist form the main parts of the main mountain ranges, which have been strongly folded. In the northern part, ancient crystalline and metamorphic rocks are overlain by Paleozoic sandstone, slate, and limestone. In the southeast are Carboniferous strata which contain coal beds. More206 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD important coal beds are found in Tertiary deposits in west-central Korea. Recent volcanic rocks are present in some parts of the interior. The south and west coasts are fringed by many small islands, some of which are bare masses of lava. One dormant volcano is on Quelpart Island beyond the south end of the Korean Peninsula. Information on thermal springs in Korea is given in the table below. Their locations are shown on figure 55. Thermal springs in Korea [Data chiefly from refs. 2939, 3222, 3233. Locations of unnumbered springs not identified. Principal chemical constituents in parts per million] No. on fig. 55 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (hectoliters per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 1 36-56.5 18,783 244 NaHCOs (101); H2SiOs (69). Granite 2 Lower Shuotsu (Kaneta): 53 540 268 NaHCOa (119); H2Si03 (78). Well 2,000 do 3 46-55 4,088 270 NaHCOs (139); Na2SO, (17); Granite; gneiss NaCl (26); H2SiOj (71), 4 5 6 7 Tepid 729 CaO (334); Na20 (117); free C02. g 12,062 154 NallCOj (60); H2Si03 (62).. 9 76 1,009 Si02 (122); Na (278); Cl southeast base of Keum- (467). jyong-san (Diamond Mountain). 10 Ryuko, 17 miles northwest 40. 5-55.2 1,800 24,056 Ca (3,340); Mg (224); Na Gneiss overlain by alluvium. of Chinnampo. (5,050); K (489); Cl (14,720). 11 47. 75 >1,700 969 Na (255); Cl (358) Granite or gneiss overlain by alluvium. 12 28-58 9,000 360 Na, HC03 tion. 13 14 38-50.3 233 287 Na, HC03 of Onsenri railway station. 15 Jujo, 7 miles northwest of 34-48.5 191 H2Si03 (63); Na (30); HCOi Granite and porphyry over- Taiden. (74); Cl (10). lain by alluvium. 16 Kaiundai, near sea coast, 8 47-52 575 4,454 Ca (669); Na (922); SO< (211); Granite and quartz por- miles northeast of Fusan. Cl (2,510). pbyry. 17 Torai, 7 miles northeast of 50-67 2,435 992-1,077 Na, Cl Granite overlain by allu- Kaiundai. vium. 80 135 Remarks and additional references 23 outlets, including several wells Resort. } Resort. 1 spring, 5 wells. Resort. Ref. 2997. Do. Do. Heated for baths. 4 springs, 2 wells. Developed about A.D. 730. Resort. Refs. 3228, 3236. Bathing resort since A.D. 1691. Refs. 3230, 3234. 6 springs; also several wells. Water is radioactive. Developed in ancient times. Resort. 6 small springs. Water is radioactive. Resort. Springs developed 500 yr ago; 34 wells drilled in recent years. Water is radioactive. Resort. Used for bathing. 4 springs, 4 wells. Water is radioactive. In use for more than 500 yr. Bathing resort; military sanatorium. Refs. 2937 , 2942, 3235. Spring in use for 500 yr; 10 wells drilled in recent years. Water is radioactive. Resort. Nearby resort developed in 1923 is supplied by 24 wells. 22 wells. Water is radioactive. Resort. Original spring developed about A.D. 1700. Supply in recent years from 43 flowing wells. Water is radioactive. Resort. Refs. 2942, 3231. Ref. 3229. Ref. 3237. Water is saline. Ref. 2942. LEBANON AND SYRIA Lebanon consists of a narrow band of coastal plain along the Mediterranean Sea and highlands that rise eastward to steep mountains which border the southwestern part of Syria. Syria extends from the base of the Taurus Mountains of southeastern Turkey, southward for 300 miles, and inland from the Mediterranean for 100 to 300 miles. The Lebanon Mountains in northern Lebanon and the adjoining part of Syria are prominent rugged ranges that trend generally north-northeast and are deeply cut by stream gorges. Nearly parallel to these mountains on the east are the Anti-Lebanon Mountains, which are separated from the main mountains by the valley of the Leontes, or Litany, River in southern Lebanon. Both mountain systems are composed largely of Cretaceous limestone, and in many places are worn into sharp ridges. Most of Syria inland beyond the Lebanon Mountains forms a great plateau, interrupted in several places by mountain masses. Some of these masses are of volcanic rocks. In the northeast, beyond the Euphrates River valley, are other mountains, composed of volcanic materials and ancient crystalline rocks. Sedimentary rocks in the mountain areas are considerably folded, but in the plateau regions they lie nearly horizontal. The valley of the Orontes River in northwestern Syria is the major structural feature, and may be a northward extension of the block fault of the Dead Sea and the Jordan River valley. Numerous springs of large flow, some of which are slightly thermal, are present in the limestone areas, and several springs of higher temperature issue in or near areas of lava. Perhaps the most noted thermal springs are those near Palmyra in Syria. Information on these and other springs in Lebanon and Syria is given in the table below, and the locations of the springs are shown on figure 54.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 207 Thermal springs in Lebanon and Syria [Locations of unnumbered springs not identified] No. on fig. 54 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Associated rocks Remarks and references Lebanon 1 Northern part of Lebanon. _ _ Warm Limestone(?)_. Ref. 3239. Syria 1 2 3 4 5 El Hamman (Kurd Dagh) 37 38 29 22-23 28 630 90 9, 300 (larger spring) Hammam Cheikh Issa, in hills of Oronte. Palmyra (Palmyre, Tadmor): Two main springs. Cretaceous limestone. _ Several minor springs Eocene limestone Soukhn6 (Es Sukhne) Mount Boueida: Erek 1, 080 Lower Senonian beds (Upper Cretaceous). lAlbien beds (Upper Creta-| ceous). N6douyat El-K6m Dmair __ _ __ __ 33 Ain Kebrit_ _ _ 28 18, 000 Hammam Aly _ 28 300 3 main and 4 minor springs. Much ELS. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3241. Water is radioactive. Used for bathing. Refs. 3240, 3241. Issue into subterranean canal and grotto. Water sulfurous but potable. Used for town water supply and irrigation. Refs. 1737, 3238, 3240, 3241. Flow collected by underground galleries. Water used for town water supply and irrigation. Refs. 3238, 3241. Refs. 3240, 3241. Ref. 3241. Ref. 3240. Source of commercial sulfur (50 tons per year). Ref. 3251. Important bathing place in ancient times. MALAYA (FEDERATION OF MALAYA) Malaya occupies the southern and widest part of the Malay Peninsula. A range of granite mountains which forms the narrowest part of the peninsula also extends through the southern part, west of its center. The rocks are deeply weathered over large areas. East of the mountains are hilly regions of slate cut by quartz veins and overlain by limestone. On the flanks of the main range are also hilly areas of sedimentary rocks including Carboniferous limestone, which contains many caves, and Triassic sandstone. Most of the region is densely forested. Along the west coast mangrove swamps and wide muds flats are common. The comparatively few thermal springs that have been recorded are principally in areas of granitic rocks, presumably along local faults. One of the best known is at Ayer Panas village near Malacca city in the southwestern part of the country. At Sungei Gau, in Pahang, limestone has been replaced by chalcedony, which was deposited by former hot springs. Thermal water probably still issues at this location. The available information on the springs is given in the table below, and the locations of the springs are shown on figure 59. MONGOLIA Mongolia may be divided into three main regions: A high plateau in the northwest, which is bordered on the north by the Russian Altai Mountains and on the south by the Mongol Altai Mountains; the Gobi Desert, which covers most of southern Mongolia south of the Mongolian Altai and extends far eastward; and the higher and fairly well watered Kerulen (Herelen) River drainage basin, which extends northeastward to the drainage basin of the Argun and Amur Rivers in Siberia. Very little information on thermal springs in Mongolia is available. According to Nekhoroshev (ref. 3382), there are three groups of thermal springs in the Altai Mountains of northwestern Mongolia. One group, near the U.S.S.R. border, is in a tectonic zone that probably is faulted. The other two' groups, both in the central part of the Altai Mountains, flow chiefly from granite. The temperature of the water from these springs ranges from 20° to 41 °C. All are of similar mineral content, chiefly sodium salts and hydrogen sulfide. Some evolve gas consisting almost wholly of nitrogen. Tolstikhin and Dzens-Litovsky (ref. 3433) report that both thermal and cold springs issue from208 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in the Federation of Malaya [Data chiefly from refs. 3242, 3246. Locations of unnumbered springs not identified. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on Temperature on Total dis- Remarks and additional fig. 59 Name or location water (°F) solved solids Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks references (ppm) i Near Pulai, in Kelantan_ _ Sira Kulin, near Grik in Upper Perak. Hot Limestone 2 Hot Quartz porphyry and triassic strata. 3 Ulu Yam (Ulu Selangor), 100-102 121 Ca, Na, HC03i S04, Si02 Contact of mica Ref. 3244. in Selangor. (120); free H2S. schist with granite. 4 Sungei Gau, in Pahang Warm Limestone and Probably small flow. Ref. 3246. chalcedony. 5 Ulu Klang, in Selangor 122;181-183 346 Ca, Na, HC03, S04, C02 (80), Si02 (150). Several springs. Water of 122°F contains much organic matter. Ref. 3245. 6 Dusun Tua, in Selangor 122-130 220 Ca, Na, HC03, S04, C02 Tourmaline Ref. 3244. (92), Si02 (61); free H2S. granite. 7 Cheras, 4 miles from Kajang in Selangor. 115 _do __ Do. 8 348 Ca, Na, HC03, S04, C02 (76), Si02 (140). Semuniah (Semenyih), 18 miles southeast of Kuala 113-122 Lumpur in Selangor. 3 springs in padi swamp. Ref. 3244 9 Alor Gajah, in Malacca 95; 104; 133 272 Ca, Na, HC03, S04, C02 (48), Si02 (59); free N2 Granite . (hottest) and C02. 10 Ayer Panas (Azer-Panas), near Jasin or Chevas in 91-134 293 Ca, Na, HC03, S04, C02 (58), Si02 (78); free 3 main springs; also shallow wells. De- (hottest) Malacca. h2s, n2, co2. posit of green crystals at water level in each well. Refs. 3243-3245. Cherana Puteh, in Malacca. 131 282 Ca, Na, HC03) S04, C02 (45), Si02 (59); free N 2, Granite . Ref. 3242. (max) co2, h2s, ch4. Gombak, in Selangor __ 122-129 399 Ca, Na, HC03, S04, Si02 (176). do__ Do. Do. 118-122 310 Ca, Na, HC03, S04, C02 (71), Si02 (86). _do_ _ _ _ folded rocks in an area of recently extinct volcanoes in eastern Mongolia. They classify the water as “alkaline-earth bicarbonate water emanating carbon dioxide.” The only springs whose location is known precisely enough to be shown as No. 1 on figure 55 are those at Arishan, about 270 miles southwest of Urga. Berkey and Morris (ref. 3247) recorded a water temperature of 52°C and stated that the water was used for medicinal bathing. THAILAND (SIAM) In northern Thailand parallel north-south ranges of hills rise to steep mountains along the north border of the country. Central Thailand is occupied mainly by the great plain of the Menam River. This lowland is bordered by mountains on the east and west and slopes gently southward to the Gulf of Siam. The eastern part of Thailand is largely a high barren sandy plain, nearly surrounded by hills. Southern Thailand occupies much of the narrow part of the Malay Peninsula. In the mountains on the north border of Thailand are ancient metamorphic and sedimentary rocks. Most of the other high mountains are of granitic and meta- morphic rocks and of strata of Paleozoic age. The principal plains are covered almost everywhere by Quaternary deposits, but marine strata of Tertiary age are exposed in some places. The published information on thermal springs in Thailand is summarized in the table below. The locations of the springs are shown on figure 59. TURKEY AND CYPRUS The extreme northwestern part of Turkey is on the European side of the Sea of Marmara (Marmora). The main part of Turkey occupies the peninsula of Asia Minor. Much of Asia Minor forms a plateau underlain by flat-lying Tertiary marl and limestone. The plateau rises westward to mountains near the Aegean Sea and eastward in Armenia to higher plateaus which are cut by gorges of the Euphrates, Tigris, and other large rivers. The eastern plateau descends steeply to the Black Sea, but breaks down more gradually southward. In its highest parts Archean rocks are exposed. These are overlain on the north by Paleozoic sedimentaryDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 209 Thermal springs in Thailand [All data from ref. 3249) No. on fig. 59 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Associated rocks Remarks 1 Pong Nam Ron, on border of Mae Chan Valley. Mon Pin, 9 km northwest of Amphur Fang. Ban Pong, along highway at km 198 Ping Khong, in bed of Mae Ping River.. Ban Pong, 5 km southwest of Wiang Pa Pao. Huay Pong, 36 km south of Mae Hong Son. 60-100 Porphyritic granite 15-20 springs. More than 50 springs; also steam vents. Small deposits of sulfur. Total dissolved solids 347 ppm. 2 91-100 Granite gneiss 3 55 Sandstone. _ 4 51 5 Granite . _ 6 Quartzite . 2 springs. 7 Granite wash 8 Pong Chedi, on west bank of Mae Lao River. Pa Hnnu. 12 km south of Mae Hong Son 9 Limestone 10 Granite gneiss Several springs and steam vents. Small deposits of sulfur. 11 Chae Son, 25 km northwest of Chae Horn. Granite . 12 13 Granite _ 14 15 Kui Yae, on east bank of Khwae Noi 58 16 Limestone . . 17 Granite . 18 Bang Phra; 8 km northeast of Si Racha__ 39-40 Quartzite . Flows about 5 liters per second. Total dissolved solids, 374 ppm; principal chemical constituents: Ca, Mg, Na, Cl, Si02. Free CO2. Water used for bathing. 3 springs on coastal plain. On coastal plain. Several springs on coastal plain. 19 68 20 70 21 Ta Chang, along railroad near km 603 Ta Na, about 10 km north of Kapong — Kian Sa, 20 km west of Ta Pi River 70 22 62 23 Quartzite 24 Kian Sa, near east bank of Ta Pi River. 2 springs. 25 Granite.. _ 26 Nua Khlong, on east side of highway in Amphur Muang. Tanoh Merah, on west side of highway 6 km from Batong. 48. 5 Tertiary clay 2 springs near tidal creek. Combined flow 3-4 liters per second. Total dissolved solids, 16,800 ppm; principal chemical constituents: Ca (1,020 ppm), Mg (234 ppm), SO (946 ppm), Cl (9,910 ppm). Several springs. 27 formations and on the south by formations of later age. Tertiary volcanic rocks have cut through these sedimentary rocks in some places, chiefly where volcanic mountains extend northward from Lake Van. The mountain ranges in the northern part of Asia Minor, near the Black Sea, are largely of Cretaceous limestone with much serpentine. Farther west, rocks of more ancient formations extend to the Sea of Marmara. The Taurus Mountains, the greatest mountain system in Turkey, extend along the entire southern part of Asia Minor, and also farther eastward. Some of the higher masses southeast of the central part of the peninsula are of Tertiary volcanic rocks. The larger part of the mountainous area consists of ancient sedimentary rocks, but Tertiary strata along the coast rise inland in some areas to considerable altitudes. The island of Cyprus, whose northern coast is only 45-60 miles from the mainland of Turkey, has two main ranges of mountains, one along the north coast and the other in the southern part. These ranges are considered to be extensions of the Taurus Mountains. The oldest rocks are in the northern range, along whose crest ancient igneous rocks are exposed; but most of the highlands are composed of limestone and marble that are considered to be of Cretaceous age. The mountains are flanked by strata of early Tertiary age. Cretaceous and Tertiary strata also form most of the Troodos Mountains in the southern part of the island. These strata are folded and intruded by diabase, serpentine, and basalt. The plains and some coastal areas are underlain by marine Pliocene and later deposits which unconform-ably overlie all the older rocks. There are many mineral springs in Turkey. A large number are thermal and some have been used for bathing since ancient times. Some are in the mountain areas210 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Figure 68.—Turkey and Cyprus showing location of thermal springs (positions approximate). Chiefly from refs. 3258-3260.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 211 of folded and faulted rocks; others are in the plateau regions of flat-lying strata. Some well-known springs are in the valleys of the Menderes River and its tributaries near the southwest border of the principal plateau region. No springs of high temperature in Cyprus have been recorded, but some of the warm saline and sulfur springs that issue at several localities have been developed as bathing resorts. Information on the principal thermal springs in Turkey and Cyprus is presented in the two tables below. The locations of the springs are shown on figure 68. Thermal springs in Turkey [Data chiefly from refs. 3258-3260 and from Geological map of Turkey, scale 1:800,000 (Maden Tetkik ve Arama Enstitiisii, 1942-46). Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on fig. 68 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) 1 Yarapsin, west of Tekirdag... 21-24 2 Kirkgecit, northwest of Biga. 51. 5-52 3 Ozancik, southeast of Canak- 25-65 kale. 4 On plain of ancient Troy 22-34. 5 5 Northwest of Ayvacik: 37 57-73 6 Southwest of Ayvacik: Tuzla 38-64 Gayzer suyu 100 7 East of Canakkale: Esas 41-81 Gicik 38; 77 Kum 67-69 8 Southeast of Biga. Warm 9 Kopelike (Kupeli?), north of 41; 77 Gonen. 10 Erdek, east of Gonen 23; 26 11 Dumbuldek, west of Bursa 44 (Brusa, Broosa). 12 North of Bursa (Brusa, 21; 36 Broosa). 13 Armutlu, near Gemlik 50-68 14 Yalova (Jalova), northeast 48-66. 2 of Gemlik. 15 East of Bursa (Brusa, Broosa): 45.3 40. 5 Bademlibance (Bithya?), 53. 4-84 near Mysian Olympus Mountain. 16 36 17 Kartal, 20 km southeast of Hot Istanbul. 18 Tuzla, northwest of Izmit 22 19 21 65 20 Catak, between Izmit and 32 Bolu. 21 South of Melen: 30. 5 34; 43 22 Southwest of Bolu: 35. 5 37 63 23 West of Bolu: 44 21 24 Aktas Uyuz, northeast of 22 Bolu. 25 Between Bolu and Qankiri: 31- 34 36; 43. 5 43 Kizilcatiamam (Kizilca 29-50 Hamam). 26 Ayas, northwest of Ankara... 22-50 27 Hot 28 North-northeast of Merzifon Warm (Mersivan). 29 Byzantine, near Cauvsa 51.7 (Havza) and 20 km north- (max) east of Merzifon (Mersivan). Total dissolved solids (ppm) 1,487 (hottest) 24,208 (hottest) 63,316 1,806 (hottest) 1,521 (hottest) 1,622 (hottest) 1,338 2,980 (hottest) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references Ca (70); Na (295); K (67) H C O3(80); S04(721) Cl(104); H2Si03(83) NH4 (26). Miocene strata. ____do........ ____do________ do. 3 springs. Water used locally. Several springs. Water used for bathing. 4 groups of springs. Water used for bathing. 3 main groups of springs. Water is brackish to strongly saline. Refs. 3272, 3284, 3290. ............................... Andesite and dacite. Ca (1,389); Na (7,072); Cl .........do................ (14, 250). Baths. Refs. 3268. 3 main springs. Water used for bathing. ........................................do. Ca (3,349); Na (19,484); Cl ...........do. (37,888). 3 main groups of springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3262. Spouts to height of 1-2 meters. Ca (48); Na (450); HC03 (354); S04 (452); Cl (253); N03 (25); HaSiOs (161). Volcanic rock_______________ ____do..................... ____do...................... ____do..................... Pliocene and Mesozoic strata. Volcanic rock.................. Quaternary deposits overlying volcanic rock. Eocene strata.................. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3284. 2 main springs. Refs. 3258, 3288. Mineral water used for drinking. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Ca (186); Na (231); K (54); HC03 (72); SO4 (799); Cl (104); HaSiOs (65). Paleozoic strata__________________ Miocene strata overlying Oligocene sandstone. 9 springs. Refs. 3282, 3288. 5 springs; large flow. Bathing resort. Refs. 3262, 3284, 3288, 3290. Ca (89); Na (220); HC03 (580); SO4 (273); HaSiOs (149); COa (270). Tertiary strata overlying Paleozoic limestone. ____do........................... ----do___________________________ Paleozoic limestone. Devonian strata_____ Triassic strata_____ Paleozoic schist____ Eocene(?) strata intruded by andesite. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3288. Do. Several springs; hottest, Kiikfirtlu, flows SO liters per minute from limestone; large deposits of tufa. Refs. 3262, 3279, 3284, 3290. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3250. Water used locally. 13 main springs in 4 groups. Water is used for bathing. Free H2S in cooler water. Water used for bathing. Paleozoic schist. ____do......... _____________________________ Upper Cretaceous strata Ca (155); Na (221); HC03 __________do____________________ (61); S04 (783); Cl (18); IDSiOa (64). Do. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. Water contains 3.8 ppm of I. Used for bathing. Upper Cretaceous (?) strata_____ ____do........................... Tertiary (?) deposits overlying granite. 2 springs. Water is acid; used locally. Do. Water used for bathing. Ca (44); Na (630); HC03 (1,427); Cl (280); Ha Si03 (139); COa (389). Andesite and dacite ____do............ ____do............ ____do............ Andesite (?)-------------------- Faulted Cretaceous and Tertiary strata near andesite. Cretaceous strata overlying Paleozoic limestone. Andesite and dacite_____________ 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Do. Water used for bathing. Several springs; large flow. Water is radioactive. Bathing resort. Refs. 3256, 3288. 3 springs. Water used locally. Several springs. Large deposits of tufa. Ref. 3253. Ref. 3284. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3271, 3279.212 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in Turkey—Continued No. on fig. 68 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) 30 Northeast of Amasy a (Amasia) Warm 31 Northwest of Tokat Warm 32 Near tributary of Coruh Suyu (Chorokh River). Warm 33 Near Arziti, north of Ersurum. Hot 34 Near Lori, 100 km west of Erzurum. Warm 35 At Ulja (Lija, Ilijah, Ilija, Ilidja, Ilica?), northwest of Erzurum. 45 36 About 15 km west of Erzurum. 37-39 37 Loutza, northwest of Bergama. 80 38 West of Bergama: 55; 57 48-64 Dikili 26-70 39 Southwest of Bergama: Pasa 39-43.5 26; 35 31 40 Karaagic Uyuz, north of Bergama. 41 Southwest of Balikesir: Giire.-- 25-54 57; 59. 5 58-63 42 Dag, northwest of Balikesir.. 43 Northeast of Balikesir: 29. 5-60 Yildiz Dag 47 44 Southeast of Balikesir: 32-33 59; 98 22.5-79 45 Asarkoy, south 0 f Balikesir. _ 46 Ece, northeast of Manisa 23 47 10 km east of Singerli (Sin-dirgi) and west-northwest of Simav. Hot 48 North of Simav: Eynal 76-78 Na§aQamur.. 43-52 49 Inonii, south of Bilecik 25; 27. 5 50 Northwest of Eski$ehir: Uyuz 29 38-^48 25. 5-48 51 Gobel, north of Kiitahya 31.5-33 52 Northeast of Kiitahya: 24-42.5 32-41 53 Southwest of Kiitahya: Koyu 51 12 other springs 37. 5-49 54 Northwest of Gediz: 34-42 Gediz 44-76 55 South-southeast of Gediz: Aksaz 39 Bogazi 22-37 56 Qardak, southeast of Eski-§ehir. 34 57 North of Polatli: Kiirttacirikoy ii. 26 29 58 East of Polatli: Kokarkoyii Ba§ 27 34. 5; 46 34-50 59 South of Kirsehir Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Paleozoic and Mesozoic strata intruded by andesite. Paleozoic schist Andesite, basalt, and tuff Cretaceous and Eocene strata overlying Paleozoic slate and limestone. Basalt 3,460 Ca (130); Mg (80); Na (530); HCOs (1,790); COj (510); Cl (280); SiOi (90); Fe (50). Probably basalt Andesite and dacite do 2,679 32,144 Na (645); HCOs (1,057); SO, (486); Cl (144). Na (11,833); K (358); HCOs (405); SO, (2,202); Cl (17,013); NOs (61); COs (55). do Paleozoic strata or crystalline schist. Andesite. 886 (hottest) Ca (47); Na (162); HCOs (62); SO, (323); Cl (100); HiSiOs (110); HPO, (24). Andesite or Permo-Carboniferous strata. Andesite dio Intrusive andesite or Tertiary volcanic rock. 1,345 (hottest) Ca (55); Na (274); HCOs (573);' SO, (229); Cl (85); HsSiOs (68). Andesite Cretaceous or Tertiary strata Tertiary volcanic rock Tertiary volcanic rock near granite. do Tertiary strata near granite Paleozoic strata near granite 2,474 (hottest) Ca (51); Mg (148); Na (266); HCOs (1,437); SO, (75); Cl (55); COs (330); H2Si03 (94). Crystalline limestone or basic igneous rock. do do Paleozoic strata or crystalline limestone. Probably basic igneous rock 2,933 (hottest) Ca (114); Na (500); HCO3 (842); SO, (865); Cl (81); COs (300). Andesite or basic igneous rock do Tertiary deposits overlying Paleozoic strata. Tertiary (?) deposits near andesite. do Eocene or Oligocene strata 722 (coolest) Ca (100); Na (30); HCO3 (401); SO, (22); Cl (39); COj (57). Probably granitic rock Remarks and additional references Water used for bathing. Ref. 3284. Do. Small springs at 3 places; deposits of tufa. Ref. 3282. Ref. 3282. Several small springs from tufa mounds; much free CO2. Ref. 3289. 1 main spring; large flow. Water is saline and bitter. Refs. 3282, 3288, 3289, 3294. 4 springs. Water is green and turbid. Evolved hydrocarbon gas is combustible. Ref. 3267. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. 4 springs. Water used for bathing. 3 main springs. Analyses for water having temperature of 64°C and 70°C, respectively. Water used for bathing. Refs. 3269, 3288. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3259. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. Do. Water used for bathing. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. W ater used for bathing. 7 springs. Free H*S. Water used for bathing. Mineral water used for drinking. Several springs, one of which spouts. Concretionary deposit. Ref. 3271. 4 springs. Water is muddy. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. 6 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3288. 3 springs; also shallow wells. Large flow. Hottest water contains 1.2 ppm of H2Ti03. Refs. 3288, 3290. Water used locally. 11 main springs. Water used for bathing. 12 main springs. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Water used locally. 4 springs. Water used locally. 6 springs. Hottest water contains 17 ppm of HPO< and 4.3 ppm of Br. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. 2 springs. Water used locally. Ref. 3288. Several springs having a large flow. Coolest water contains 12 ppm of Br and 0.1 ppm of I. Refs. 3288, 3291.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 213 No. on fig. 68 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) 60 20 km north of Kayseri (Kai-sarie). Warm 61 At Sivas (Siwas) Warm 62 Harcik, south-southwest of Erzincan. 24.5; 25 63 Asagii§pendere, north of Ma-latya. 29 64 Icmekoyu Mushilsuyu, east of Malatya. 21 65 Kolan, northeast of Malatya. 42 66 Buban Hame, east-northeast of Malatya. 26 67 Cermik, near the town 48 68 Crater of Nemrut Dag (Nimrod volcano). Warm 69 Tendurek, north of Lake Van. 74 70 Near Diyadin (Daoud) village. Warm 71 On left bank of Murat Suyu (Murad Chai). 56.6 72 3 km north of Mershut (Muradiye) village. 74 73 Germiab, northeast of Mar-din. 40 74 Billuris, southwest of Siirt 33.5 75 Hista, southeast of Siirt 60 76 Near right bank of Khabur River, west of Hakkari. 40.5 77 North of Ce§me: §ifne._ 24-38 28. 5-62 78 Malgaca, near Ce§me.. 21; 22 79 Near Urla, west of Izmir (Smyrna): 59-63. 5 Karako? 59-62 Cuma 55-68 80 Derekoy, east of Izmir 27-41 81 Urganli, southeast of Manisa. 43-76 82 Northwest of Ala§ehir: 28-91 51.5 83 Litza, west of Ala§ehir 25-29 84 West of Aydin: 51-63 6iimii§ 40-41 Imamkoyii 31-36 85 Kemer, west-southwest of Aydin. 33.5 86 West of Mugla: Boziik 35 Karaada 32 87 Southeast of Mugla: Cavus and Velibey 37-38 35. 5-36. 5 Kokargirme, near Koid-jiges (Koycegiz) Lake. 36-38 Sultaniye 28-39 88 Near Lykia, southeast of Dalaman (Koycegiz). Warm 89 Northwest of Denizli: Ortakfi 25-50 Kizildere 63-88 Tekkekoy, near Laodicea. 43-97 90 Near Buldan: Qizmeli - 33-41. 5 Hieropolis (Pamukkale, Pambou-Kalise, Tam-bouk-Kelessi). 3.5-54 91 Northeast of Denizli: Golemez 38-55 Karahayit (Karahait) 42-56 Kavakbasi 30 Thermal springs in Turkey—Continued Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Tertiary volcanic rock or older tuffaceous lava. Oligocene gypsiferous strata Paleozoic and Mesozoic strata introduced by granite. 3,195 Ca (242); Mg (99); Na (234); K (92); HCOs (1.366); SO, (186); Cl (171); COa (626); NOs (41); Br (88). Cretaceous (?) strata overlying Paleozoic strata. Eocene or Miocene strata overlying Cretaceous strata. 921 1,144 33,900 Ca (40); Na (193); HCOs (329); COs (42); SO, (60); Cl (114); COa (661). Probably Tertiary and Quaternary lava. 33,930 Cretaceous and Tertiary strata probably intruded by basalt. Cretaceous and lower Tertiary strata. Low 19,162 Ca (786); Mg (378); Na (6,721); SO, (1,359); Cl (10,450). Andesite or Tertiary volcanic rock. Mesozoic and Tertiary strata; probably intruded by andesite. 18,681 (hottest) Ca (639); Na (5,713); K (808); HCOs (366); Cl (10,488); COa (275). Miocene strata near mica schist... 1,941 (hottest) Na (364); HCO3 (992); SO, (114); Cl (85); HaSlOa (139); COa (123). Crystalline schist and limestone.— Eocene strata overlying Paleozoic shale and limestone. Upper Cretaceous and lower Eocene strata. 4,325 (hottest) 4,220 (hottest) Na (1,245); HCOs (1,603); CO, (502); SO, (557); Cl (138); HaSiOs (126). a (930); NHCO3 (1,328); SO, (1,233); Cl (104); HaSiOs (226); NH, (45). Miocene strata overylying gneiss.. do .. 3.541 (coolest) Ca (465); Mg (91) ; HCOs (1,045); SO, (675); Cl (53); COa (1,144). Remarks and additional references Ref. 3284. Ref. 3284. 2 springs. Mineral water used for drinking. Mineral water used for drinking. Shallow well. Water is laxative. Water contains 0.4 ppm of I. Used for bathing. Water used locally. Water contains 4.7 ppm of HPO4,13 ppm of Br, and 2.6 ppm of I. Used for bathing. Several small springs. Refs. 3263, 3278, 3282. Refs. 3282, 3286. Free H2S. Ref. 2846. Main spring issues from tufa deposit smaller springs nearby. Free H2S. Ref. 2846. Large deposit of tufa. Water is strongly saline; tastes of iron. Ref. 3286. Water used locally. Do. Free H2S. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3273. 5 springs. Ref. 3288. 6 springs. Analysis is for water having temperature of 58° C. Water contains 1.5 ppm of HPO4, 6 ppm of Br, 0.2 ppm of I. Used for bathing. 2 springs. Mineral water used for drinking. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. 3 springs. Ref. 3288. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3258. 4 springs. Water used for bathing. 5 springs. Water used for bathing. Do. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3288. Water used for bathing. 4 springs. 6 springs. 3 springs. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. Do. 5 springs. Water used locally. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. 5 springs. Ref. 3284. 3 springs. Mineral water used for drinking. In the Xanthus graben. Ref. 3284. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. 4 springs. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3259. 5 springs. Large deposits of tufa. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3271. 3 springs. Several springs; flow about 9,000 imperial gpm. Extensive deposits of tufa. Refs. 1737, 3261, 3262, 3268, 3274, 3276, 3281, 3283, 3285, 3290, 3293. 4 springs. Water used for bathing. 3 springs. Deposits of tufa. Water used for bathing. Refs. 3262, 3271. Free H2S. Water used for bathing.214 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in Turkey■—Continued No. on fig. 68 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 92 Southeast of Ala§ehir: 37; 39 23; 51.5 62; 63 67 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Do. 93 Near Sandikli, southwest of Afyon Karahisar: Celiksu 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Water used locally. 5 springs. Water used locally. Water contains 3.4 ppm of HPO4, 4.4 ppm of Br, and 0.2 ppm of I. Used for bathing. Ref. 3258. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Water used for bathing. 3 springs. Water used for bathing. 1 main spring. Water contains 12 ppm of NO3, 5 ppm of HPO4, 0.7 ppm of HASO4, 1.2 ppm of H2Ti03, 24 ppm of Br, and 0.5 ppm of I. Used for bathing. Ref. 3260. Mineral water used for drinking. Free H2S. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3284. Erkek Bogulugu Erkekler Caniurlugu 67-68 Kiikurtlii 69 1,814 Ca (175); Na (226); HCO3 (676); SO, (460); 01 (96); CO, (176). 94 Southeast of Afyon Karahisar: 71.5 Kaya (max) 68 Kizilkilise 46-52 Kizik 61.5 5,007 Na (1,643); HCOs (762); SO, (492); Cl (1,830); CO, (132). 95 West-northwest of Isparta: 27 Oligocene and Cretaceous strata. 22 96 In Sultan-Daglari, north of Warm 97 Beysehir Golii. Ilgin, northwest of Konya East of Beysehir Golii: Ka§akli 28; 42 2 springs. Water used locally. 2 muddy springs. Ref. 3284. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Deposits of tufa. Ref. 3271. Several springs. Large deposits of tufa. Ref. 3284. Mineral water used for drinking. Water used locally. Water tastes of iron. Ref. 3252. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. Do. 4 springs. Ref. 3294. Water is potable; used locally. 3 springs. Mineral water used for drinking. 4 springs. Mineral water used for drinking. 7 springs. Water used for bathing. 10 main springs. Water is saline. Free HjS. Gypsum and tufa deposited. Ref. 3271. Flows 30 liters per minute. Water contains considerable Li. Ref. 3275. Water used for bathing. Do. 2 springs. Ref. 3284. Large flow. Ref. 3284. May be a shallow well. Water used for bathing. 2 springs. Water used for bathing. 5 springs. Water used for bathing. 98 21; 37 35 Kosk 99 2 km northwest of Seydi§e-hiri (Seidi Sheher). Near Adalia (Adalar), north of Manavgat. Southeast of Konya: 32; 32.5 100 Eocene strata overlying Paleozoic strata. Miocene and Pliocene strata, probably intruded by andesite. 101 24 Eskimiishilsu, north of 29 Kara Dag (Karadja Dagh). On slope of Kara Dag (Karadja Dagh). Near Asaray, northwest of Nigde: 60 102 25 Kirecli 53 Ziga and Kasim (Hassan Kala). North-northwest of Nigde: Kocarpinar 41-52 103 27 27 20. 5-24 104 North of Eregli: 22-55.5 Kekrout, 8 km north of Eregli. 37 (max) 105 Akhiiyiik, in Bolkar Moun- 25.5 24,400 106 tains south of Eregli. Hocanti, northeast of Mut... 33 107 Saparka, southwest of Igel (Mersin). Mersin (Mersivan), near 37 108 37.5 109 Tarsus and east-northeast of IqcI. In south part of Tschakit defile, Tauros Mountains. Kokarpinar, northeast of Oligocene (?) strata overlying Cretaceous shale. 110 22 111 Seyhan. Diizici, west of Bah$e 33 112 Erzin Ba§lami§, southeast of Seyhan. Northeast of Hatay (Antak- 22 Upper Cretaceous or Miocene strata. Quaternary(?) deposits overlying Miocene strata. 113 35.5-37 lya). DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 215 Thermal springs in Cyprus [Data from refs. 3269, 3277, 3292. Locations of unnumbered springs not identified] No. on fig. 68 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks 1 20 Micoene strata. 2 springs. Water is moderately saline and sulfurous. Free H2S. 3 springs. Water is strongly saline and sulfurous. Used for bathing. 3 springs. Water is sulfurous. 4 springs. Water used for bathing. Several springs. Water is moderately saline and slightly sulfurous. Resort. Water is strongly alkaline and moderately saline; no free H2S. Do. 2 Warm __do_ 3 Tris Eliaes.. Warm Igneous rocks do. 4 Kalopanayiotis 20 CaC03) MgSO,, MgCl2, NaCl; free C02) H2S. Mgj Na, S04, Cl; free C02, H2S. 5 6 7 Kakopetria, near village of Galata. Pedoulas Warm Warm do do 25. 5 _ __do _ _ 8 23 . ..do 9 20. 5 _do_ Do. 10 Tiochou 19. 7 _ . do... Do. Anargyroi _ _ _ . 20. 5 Miocene strata Water is sulfurous. Free H2S. 20. 2 do Do. Mathi_ . 19. 5 do Do. UNION OF SOVIET SOCIALIST REPUBLICS The European part of the U.S.S.R. consists of Russia, which extends from the Black Sea northward to the Arctic Ocean and eastward to the Ural Mountains. The plains, or steppes, in this area are underlain by Quaternary deposits that overlie marine Tertiary and Cretaceous strata. The Urals are composed mainly of Paleozoic sedimentary rocks. In the south, between the Black Sea and the Caspian Sea, the Caucasus Mountains are composed largely of Paleozoic strata overlain by strata of Mesozoic and Tertiary ages. There are also considerable areas underlain by Tertiary volcanic rocks. The mountain ranges of Kazakhstan and the several smaller States and divisions in the Asiatic part of the Soviet Union east of the Caspian Sea are western extensions of the Tian Shan [Tian Mountains] and the Altai Mountains. The higher parts of these mountains are chiefly of Archean metamorphic and crystalline rocks. The lower parts are of Mesozoic and Tertiary strata. Great areas in the high desert regions are underlain by Quaternary deposits. The vast central and northern regions which comprise Siberia are largely plains, or steppes, that form the drainage basins of several rivers that flow northward to the Arctic Ocean. Much of this plains region is underlain by marine Paleozoic and Mesozoic strata covered by Quaternary deposits. In the western part of the Lena River basin in central Siberia are large areas of young volcanic rocks. In the northern part of Russia mineral springs are comparatively common, but very few are definitely thermal. In the Caucasus region, however, there are numerous groups of warm and hot springs. Most of the springs in this region between the Black and Caspian Seas are of considerable flow, and nearly all have been developed as bathing resorts. Several noted resorts have also been developed at mineral springs that are classed as cold, though the water may be a few degrees above the mean annual temperature of the locality. Numerous thermal springs issue in the oil fields on the east side of the southern part of the Caspian Sea. The mountainous region far east of the Caspian and 735-914Figure 69.—Union of Soviet Socialist Republics showing location of thermal springs. Chiefly from ref. 3377. 216 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLDDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 217 south of Lake Balkhash contains many warm and hot springs of various mineral types. Another region where mineral and thermal springs are comparatively common is that surrounding Lake Baikal and extending far eastward in Transbaikalia. In the extreme eastern and northeastern part numerous hot springs are associated with active and recently extinct volcanoes in Kamchatka. The springs of at least seven groups issue in the Chukchee Peninsula, which forms the northeastern extremity of Siberia. Most of the thermal springs on the Kamchatka Peninsula are in areas of volcanic rocks in the southern part of the peninsula where there are fumaroles on the sides of some volcanic mountains and several groups of mud volcanoes. At Paudzetka are geyserlike springs of intermittent action. Some springs of low mineral content may rise from silicic magmas. Those in volcanic areas of mafic magma are generally saline and contain perceptible amounts of arsenic, antimony, zinc, and other metals. Information on the springs has been compiled by Piip (ref. 3396). The available information on thermal springs in the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics is summarized in the table below. The locations of the springs, except those on the Kamchatka Peninsula, are shown on figure 69. The locations of those on the Kamchatka Peninsula are shown on figure 70. Figure 70.—Kamchatka Peninsula showing location of thermal springs. From ref. 3396.218 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Union of Soviet Socialist Republics [Data chiefly from ref. 3377 (Great Soviet World Atlas, 1937, pt. 1, pi. 120). Locations of unnumbered springs not identified. Principal chemical constituents are expressed No. on fig. 69 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) 1 Solzy, on left bank of Shelon River. 17.5 2 21.2 3 Dyn-Va-Shore Warm 4 Shatki, near Tesha River. Warm 5 Near Sea of Azov... 9-20 6 Psekups (Pse-coups), 60 km south of Krasno-lar. 28-52.5 7 Byelorechensk Matsesta-Sochi, 3 km from the Black Sea. Warm 8 21-25 9 Tsaishskie Warm 10 Tkarchelsk (Tkvarcheli?). Warm 11 Zheleznovodsk 14-54 12 Kumogorsk 32.9 13 Piatigorsk 21-47.5 14 Menzhi-Teklyati.. - Warm 15 No name Warm 16 Dolinsk (Dolina Tereka?). Warm 17 Tskhaltubo (Tsk-haltubski, Tri-challoubo?). 32-35 18 No name 35 19 35 20 Abastuman (Abas-toumann, Abbas-Tuman), 75 km from Barjome. 41; 45; 48.5 21 Sernovodsk (Ssier-novodsk, Srno-bodsk) and Mik-hailovsk. 20-70.3 22 Borzhomi (Borzhon, Borjom). 28.5 23 No name. Hot 24 25 Bragunskie Hot 26 Tiflis (Tbilisi), on both banks of Koura River. 52.5 (max) 27 Talginskie Hot 28 Dabala Warm 29 Eli-Su (Eli-Sou, Djili-Sou, Djily-Sou), on bank of Amam-tchai River. 40; 42 30 Grozny... 88 (max) 31 20 32 Isti-Su (Dzhermuk). 52. 5-71 in parts per million] Flow (hectoliters per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Distinguishing characteristics Associated rocks 8,300 2,800 Ca (825); Mg (261); Na (1,762); K (165); SO (999); Cl (4,283). Ca (32); Mg (18); Na+K (959); HCOa (461); SO4 (188); Cl (1,183). Na, Cl 3,700 Ca (572); HCO3 (229); S04 (1,363). Alkaline-saline- sulfate. 1,444 SiO, (32); CaO (32); NaiO (334); SO3 (96); Cl(330); free CO2. Faulted Cretaceous strata... 10,600 11,366 Fault between Cretaceous and Tertiary strata. 15,000 3,500 Alkaline-earth, sodium sulfate, carbonated. 2,118 4,173 Si02, Na, HCO3, Cl; free CO2, H2S. Si02 (30); Ca; MgO (117); SO«; Cl; free CO2. Sodic chloride; sulfide. 700 Ca, Mg, SO3, Cl; free CO2. Sodic bicarbonate; sulfide. 10,800 10,600 500 4,500 5,951 CaSOi (77); Na2S04 (137); NaiCOs (14); NaCl (234); free fcOs, Nj, HiS. Ca (48); Mg (26); Na (1,317); HCOs (1,318); SO4 (1,288); Cl (484). Ca (104); Mg (36); Na+K (1,513); HCO3 (3,904); Cl (387). Eocene and Oligocene strata intruded by andesite. Mixed bicarbonate. Complex; sulfide; CO2. 20,000 Ca (6-170); Mg (3-44); Na+K (7+154); HCO3 (3+119); SO4 (42-308); Cl (53-277). Mixed chloride; sulfide. 3,400 Large 30,000 929 Low 13,752 6,416 Na, K, HCOi, Cl, Ha SiOs; free COa. Na, Cl; free COi, HaS, CHt. Ca (464); Mg (380); Na (3,636); K (62); HCO3 (3,378); SO4 (708); Cl (5,109). Ca (148); Mg (31); Na (1,710); K (225); HCOs (2,658); SO4 (673); Cl (971); gas, 99.8 percent COa. Tertiary igneous and meta-morphic rocks and Quaternary lava. Remarks and additional references Springs at river level and well 45 meters deep. Water is radioactive. Ref. 3357. 2 wells 654 meters deep. Water is radioactive; contains 1.6 ppm of Fe. Refs. 3395, 3447. Bathing resort. Ref. 3446. Ref. 3307. Several springs. Analysis for water of 45°C temperature. Refs. 3344, 3390, 3443. Resort. Water contains 0.93-3.85 ppm of F. Resort. Refs. 3321, 3332, 3338, 3343, 3358, 3360, 3364, 3366, 3369, 3373, 3409, 3437, 3445, 3449. Resort. Water is radioactive. Resort Ref. 3395. Resort. Refs. 3320, 3321, 3332, 3395, 3422, 3424. Resort. Ref. 3367. Several springs and slanting borehole. Water is strongly radioactive. Resort. Refs. 3300, 3317, 3320, 3321, 3332, 3361, 3391, 3392, 3395, 3424, 3437. Resort. Several springs. Water is radioactive. Resort. Refs. 3332, 3395. 3. groups of springs (Zolo-touchnii, Zmeinii, and Bogatyrski). Water is radioactive. pH, 9.4. Refs. 3332, 3354, 3363, 3395, 3437. 3 groups of springs (Mikhail-ovskaia, Sleptsovsti, Helene). Resort. Refs. 3332, 3406, 3437, 3447. Water contains Fe, Br. Resort. Refs. 3332, 3447. Resort. 30 springs and wells. Water is highly radioactive. Refs, 3295, 3322, 3332, 3379, 3380, 3395, 3398, 3448. Resort. 2 main and several small springs. Resort. Refs. 3394, 3437. Oil-field springs. Water contains I. Several springs and 1 well. Water contains Fe, Br, and I. Refs. 3395, 3447. Water is radioactive; contains much F, B, I. Resort. Refs. 3306, 3334, 3352, 3428, 3447.< u. >n . 69 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS Thermal springs and wells in Union of Soviet Socialist Republics—Continued Flow (hectoliters per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Distinguishing characteristics Associated rocks Na HOOi 4,600 Ca (29); Mg (14); Na (1,266); K (16); HCOs (2,716). Cl(484). 30,000 Alkaline-calcio- carbonated. Na, HCO3 19,000 4,154 CaO (588); MgO (128); NaaO (1,290); COa (642); SOs (641); Cl (1,438);free HaS. Mixed chloride Complex, sulfide Ca, Mg, Na, K, Cl (8,000-18,600). Na, SOs, Cl 120,000 1,500 Ca, Na, SCh; free Na, HaS. Na, HOOi. Na, HCO3; gas, 97.9 percent COa. Complex Gas, 70.5 percent COa, 28.2 percent Na. Na, SO4 Complex Large 3,000 Complex Large 300 Mixed bicarbonate.. Na, Cl Complex 13,000 Low Complex Mixed sulfate Complex, sulfide ... 259 NaaCOa (68); NaaSO, (71); HaSiOs (72). Granite Complex Complex Complex, sulfide Complex Sulfide Complex Porphyry Small Sulfide 5,000 Na, IICO3 Granite Complex. SiOa (44); CaO (25); NaCl and KC1 (136); SOs (44); Cl (16); gas, chiefly Na. Mixed bicarbonate.. Alkali bicarbonate, COj. L'l U. on g. 69 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE Name or location No name___________ ....do............ ____do............ Frolikin.......... No name----------- Kurgulik__________ Goryatchinsk (Bar-guzin), near Lake Baikal (Baykul). 400 km southeast of Lake Baikal (Baykul). No name___________ Yamkum____________ Salomat___________ Chelenkhe_________ Pitatelevsky, on left bank of Selenga River, between Troitskii and Ilinski. Byssinskie._...... Unminskie_________ Tomskie___________ Tyrminskie________ Kulbdurskie (Kul-dur). Tailozhskie....... Slo-Sudzukha______ Shmakobskie_______ No name—.......... ____do........... ----do------------ Tamai-Dagskie_____ Goromaiskie_______ Annenskie_________ Ulskie............ Kenalskie......... Alskie____________ Kurumuryak-------- Ulya.............. Motykeiskie------- Sytygar-Sylba----- No name----------- Talaya____________ No name___________ Degdyanskie_______ Tabamonskie_______ Oliotorskie_______ Khatyrskie________ Ogneiskie_________ 30 km northwest of head of Mechig-mensk Bay. 1.5 km from shore... Unynskie, 14 km west of Chaplino village. Southeastern part of Arakamche-chen Island. Near KuKun River, 14 km above its mouth. 35 km south of Neshkin village. Agoura_____________ Akhtala, in Georgia. Aksuiski, in Semir-echen Province. Allin, in Baikal area. Annin, in Amur Province. Bakhmyr (Springs 1 and 2), in Tadzhik. Barguzin, in Baikal area. Baunto, in Baikal area. Birsk, in Bashkir... Chakus, in Baikal area. Thermal springs and wells in Union of Soviet Socialist Republics—Continued Temperature of water (°C) Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot 43-71 35 Hot Warm Hot Hot 54; 57 Hot Warm Warm Warm 70 Hot Warm Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Warm Warm Warm Warm Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot 91 (max) 81 (max) 78 (max) 15 58 55 42.3-44.5 72.2 45-48 36.5 32 52.3 68” Flow (hectoliters per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Distinguishing characteristics Associated rocks Na, SO< Na) SO* Na, SO4 Na) SO4 - Na) SO4 Ca, Na, HCO3, SO,. Mixed bicarbonate.. Alkali bicarbonate. 1,610 HsSi03 (76); Ca (109); Na (393); HCOa (49); SO4 (762); Cl (180). Complex Jurassic strata near granite.. Na, HCO3 Na,HCC>3 Na, Cl 65,000 Na,HCC>3, Cl Tertiary porphyry and tuff. _ Granite prophyry near Tertiary lava. 1,294 17,640-18, 530 4,300 65,000 Granite and syenite 35,800 Ca, Na, Cl; free H2S. Silurian crystalline schist.... Fault between Cretaceous and Tertiary strata. DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS Thermal springs and wells in Union of Soviet Socialist Republics—Continued 221 No. on fig. 69 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (hectoliters per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Distinguishing characteristics Associated rocks Remarks and additional references Chakussi, in Baikal area. Darasun (Daras-sun), in central Transbaikalia. 43.5 322 Ref. 3330. Ca, Mg, S04, Cl Refs. 3298, 3314, 3332. Ref. 3297. Shan region. Dzhermuk 65 Resort. Ref. 3306. Resort. Ref. 3321. Garm-Chashma, in Tadzhik. """68""’ 5,000 Bicarbonate, alkaline, ferruginous. Ref. 3331. Refs. 3317, 3437. 41 Bechtau region. Gorelink Ref. 3387. Ref. 3329. Ref. 3336. Gusikhim, in Baikal area. Izberbash, in Dagestan. Kaburabi, on east coast of Sakhalin Island. Kalmoukaievski, on Mount Byk in Bechtau region. Kargin, in Baikal area. Khazret-Ayub, in Fergan Province. Khnou, in southern Daghestan. 57 Warm * High Na, Cl Water is saline and contains Na, SO4—- - — methane. Ref. 3350. Ref. 3317. 74.6 999 Na,0 (386); SO, Ref. 3329. (362). Ref. 3332. Ref. 3408. 62.0 359 Ref. 3330. Kotelnikowski, in Baikal area. Kuchikhyr, in Baikal area. Kulinnye Bolota, in Baikal area. Ref. 3329. Water contains Zn, Fe, Mn. 32 Ref. 3329. Ref. 3332. Several springs. Supply “the great baths” or “baths of Alexander.” Ref. 3329. 46 9, 200 (main spring) Mogoi, in Baikal area. Ref. 3402. Molocovka, near Chita in eastern Siberia. 27.5 Ca, Mg, H2Si03j h2s, no3. Several springs. Ref. 3324. Mukungi River valley, on western slope of Burein Mount-tains in Amur region. Ref. 3388. Water is saline and contains methane. Ref. 3350. Rubungar uro, on east coast of Sakhalin Island. Hot Saki — Ref. 3436. Saratof, on the Volga River. Sarepta, on the Volga River. Selo Klintschy, in Perm. — Water is fetid and sulfurous. — Ref. 3436. Ref. 3436. 16 45 Ref. 3332. Ref. 3437. 370 2, 548 (743); SO3 (624); Cl (251). 22-40 Ref. 3426. Several springs. Ref. 3387. Ref. 3431. Talgar, in Tian Shan region. — Tokuz-Bulak, in Tadzhik. Turkin I, in Baikal area. 54.3 43.7 Ref. 3329. 500 Refs. 3329, 3330. Turkin II (Turka), in Baikal area. Ukhmei, in Baikal area. Ref. 3329. 72.3 Do. Ref. 3332. Do. Yatarobka, in Baikal area. Yatkunsk, in Baikal area. Zmeinyi, in Baikal area. — Ref. 3329. u. n ,70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE springs and wells in Union of Soviet Socialist Republics—Continued Kamchatka Peninsula [Data from ref. 3396] Flow (hectoliters per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Distinguishing characteristics Associated rocks 784 Na, SO*..- Moder- ately large 33,000 1,471 Na, SO*, Cl; free HaS. CaSO*, NaCL 1,080 Na, SO*, Cl Moder- ately large. Large 2,016 Na, Mg, C03, Cl_.. Na, SO*, Cl Large Na, SO*, Cl 863-4, 884 70,000 1,610 5,168 Ca, Na, HCO3, SO*, 01. Moderately large Small Large Moderately large Moderately large 8.200 4,124 7,274 550 446 596 660 1,250 1,530 1,060 Ca, Na, HCO3, SO*, Cl. CaSO*, NaCl - Na, SO*, Cl 16,300 Large 2,700 1,250 Na, SO*, Cl Na, HCO3, SO*, Cl. Na, HCOs, SO*; free H2S. Na, SO*, Cl CaSO*, NaCl Small Small 990 Na, SO*, Cl; free HaS. Small DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 223 Thermal springs and wells in Union of Soviet Socialist Republics—Continued Kamchatka Peninsula—Continued Jo. 3n .70 Name or location of spring Temperature of water (°C) 51 Opal’skie, near 74 Asacha volcano. 52 Zhirovye Hot 53 Savonskie 73 54 Asachinskie Hot 55 Khadutkinskle 23-100 56 Nizhne Oolyginskie. 60-70 57 Shtiubelevskie, in Hot volcanic crater. 58 Sredne Oolyginskie. 73 (max) 59 Verkhne Hot Oolyginskie. 60 Ozernovskie 76-85 (Osernoi, Opalski), in valley near Opalsk volcano. 61 Kuril’skie 24-41 62 Pauzhetskie 88-100 63 Along Kataskiya Hot River. 64 Along Nuskus 50 River. Kluchi.... 42 81 Flow (hectoliters per day) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Distinguishing characteristics Associated rocks HCO3, CaSO<, NaCl; free HjS. HCO3. CaSO*, NaCl; free H2S. Moderately large Large Small Moderately large 2,782 HCOj, CaSO,, NaCl; free HjS. CaSO*, NaCl; free H2S CaSO*, NaCl: free H2S. CaSC>4, NaCl; free H2S. 4,400 Small Large Small 1,300 3,203 Remarks and additional references 2 springs. 2 main springs. 4 groups of springs. Flow from 1 group is 22 hectoliters per day. Several springs. Springs form small warm lake; also fumaroles. 7 springs, the largest of which boils up to a considerable height and forms a pool which overflows into Lake Osernoi. Tufa deposited on sticks and stones. Another group of springs at a distance of 1 km. Several springs. 15 Springs, several of which spout. Water is saline. Free H*S. PACIFIC REGION AUSTRALIA Some of the topographic features of Australia include mountain systems near the coasts—the highest bordering the deepest ocean, the Pacific— and the great comparatively low interior region. Most of the deserts of the southern and western parts of Australia are underlain by Archean granite and other ancient crystalline rocks. These rocks also form uplands in the northern and northeastern parts and cores of the eastern mountain ranges. Marine Paleozoic rocks underlie most of the Northern Territory and form major parts of the eastern and southeastern ranges and most of Tasmania, where there are extensive intrusions of plutonic rocks. The eastern part of Australia is occupied largely by the Great Australian artesian basin. (See fig. 71.) The artesian basin is underlain by Mesozoic strata, chiefly Lower Cretaceous shale and sandstone. Along the southwest border of the basin, several brackish lakes nearly at sea level extend inland from the south coast. Marine Paleozoic, Mesozoic, and Tertiary strata form bands along the west coast where there are oil- bearing beds in the Tertiary formations. Greater areas of Tertiary rocks extend inland from embayments on the south, southeast, and northeast coasts. Numerous areas of basalt are present in the eastern and southeastern ranges and also in mountains in the northwestern part. Most of these lavas seem to be of late Tertiary and Quaternary ages. In the extreme southeast are some uneroded volcanic cones that are believed to have been active within geologically Recent time. The island of Tasmania, near the southeast coast of Australia, is composed very largely of marine Carboniferous and Permian strata, but there also are continental Jurassic deposits and intrusions of Mesozoic dolerite and other igneous rocks. Although numerous mineral springs, presumably of normal temperature, have been recorded in Victoria State in the extreme southeast (ref. 3461), and also cold mineral springs in other parts of the country, no mineral or thermal springs seem to be reported in the vast arid western part of Australia. The locations of the principal thermal springs and zones of springs, and some of the thermal flowing artesian wells, are shown on figure 71; data concerning them are given in the table below.224 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Australia [Data chiefly from ref. 3456. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on fig. 71 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (imperial gpm) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 1 99.5 2,430 Small Moder- ately large Water rises in deep pool. Bathing Near Musgrave telegraph station. Near Mitchell River, 10 miles north of Gamboola station. 100.5 Warm resort. Ref. 3466. Large deposit of tufa. Free H2S. Cn HOfh Refs. 3451, 3463. Several springs issuing from mounds of tufa. Ref. 3467.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 225 > ► * Thermal springs and wells in Australia-—Continued No. on fig. 71 N ame or location Temperature of water (°F) Flow (imperial gpm) 4 Einasleigh (Talaroo), 0.25 mile from Einasleigh River and 16 miles from Mount Garnet. 145.5 Moder- ately large 5 Innot Creek, 8.5 miles east-northeast of Mount Garnet and 28 miles from Herberton. 158; 189 Moder- ately large 6 Ambo, in the Innot Creek area. Warm Moder- ately large 7 Bed of Gilbert River, 10 miles above Gilberton. 94 Small 8 South of Mount Brown, near Saxby River. 120 Moder- ately large 9 Southeast of Mount Brown, near Fort Bowen. Warm Small 10 Both sides of lower Flinders River. 100-120 Small 11 Between Richmond and Hughenden. Warm Moder- ately large 12 Kynuna bore, 90 miles northwest of Winton. 198 Large 13 Southeast of Hughenden Warm Small 14 Springdale (Springvale) cattle station. Warm 1,400 15 Elderslie bore, 50 miles southwest of Winton. Boiling 350 16 South of Winton 170 (max) Moder- ately large 17 Inniskillen (Enniskillen), on Barcoo River 38 miles east-southeast of Blackall. Hot Small 18 In Tambo area. Warm Small 19 Springleigh bore, 50 miles south-southwest of Black-all. 197 20 20 Eromanga bore (No. 2) 198 Moder- ately large 21 Quilpie 160 Large 22 South of Thargomindah Hot Small 23 Southwest of Roma Warm- hot Moder- ately large 24 Dalhousie 100-120 Small 25 Goyder’s Lagoon bore Hot Small 26 Goyder's Lagoon Warm Moderately large 27 Mount Gason bore Hot Small 28 Strangway Hot Large 29 Coward Hot Large 30 Finis Hot Large 31 Hergott Hot Large 32 Myrtle Hot Large 33 Cat Hot Large 34 Paralana, in bed of Hot Spring Creek at east base of Flinders Range. 144 15 35 Southeast of Hungerford Warm Small 36 Rowena bore, near Walgett... 78-135 650 37 Moree bore... 110 Moderately large Moderately large 38 Coonamble area Warm Total dissolved solids (ppm) 713 593 1,400 Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references NaCl (404); Na2C03 (160); evolved gas 99.7 percent inert (N2?), 0.3 percent Near lava hill. Issues from tufa mound 15 ft high. Bathing resort. Refs. 3451, 3459, 3463, 3464, 3467. 0 02. NaCl (272); Na2C 03 (123); evolved gas 98.2 percent inert (N2?), 1.8 percent Granite intersected by dikes of felsite. 2 main springs. Bathing resort. Refs. 3451, 3453, 3459, 3460, 3462, 3463. C02. Na, HC03; much free C02.. Na, HCO3; much free C02.. Granite(?) ____do..................... Cretaceous strata near granite. Cretaceous strata. Ref. 3462. Ref. 3464. 2 main springs issuing from large mound of tufa. Deposit of trona (Na2C03). Refs. 3450, 3451, 3455, 3463, 3467. Refs. 3463, 3467. Na, HCO3; much free C02_.-do. Na, HC03; free C02........do. Several springs issuing from large mounds of tufa in area 2 miles in diameter. Intermittent flows of muddy water. Deposits of trona (Na2C03). Refs. 3450, 3458, 3463, 3467. Several flowing wells. Na, HC03; free C02~~..........do................... Na, HCO3; free C02....... Faulted Cretaceous strata.._ Na, HCO3; free C02 Na, HCO3; free C02. Cretaceous strata. ___do___________ Na, HCO3; free C02. Faulted Cretaceous strata... Deep flowing well. Source of water supply for cattle. Ref. 3459. Many small springs issuing from tufa mounds in a wide area nearly 200 miles long in a north-south direction. Several springs and flowing well. Ref. 3466. Flowing well 4,523 ft deep. Drilled in 1902. Temperature 212°F at surface; 241°F at depth of 4,225 ft. Source of water supply for cattle. Refs. 3459, 3462. Several flowing wells. Small deposits of calcium carbonate. Na, HC03. do. Bathing resort. Refs. 3451, 3463. Na, IICO3; much free C02. - Cretaceous strata. Na, HC03; much free C02.......--do----------- Na, HC03 do. Na, HCOs. Na, HC03 ____do...................... Cretaceous strata near ridge of granite. Cretaceous(?) strata_______ Several flowing wells. Flowing well 7,009 ft deep. Drilled during 1913-20. Water mainly from sandy beds at 4,393-4,353 ft; 5,456-5,610 ft; and 6,000-6,280 ft. Originally flowed 50 imperial gpm. Water temperature is 230° F at depth of 5,700 ft. Ref. 3462. Flowing well 4,256 ft deep. Source of water supply for cattle. Ref. 3459. Source of public water supply. Ref. 3466. Several mud springs. Ref. 3451. Several deep flowing wells. .do. .do. do. More than 30 mound springs in narrow north-south area, 5 miles long. Refs. 3452, 3465. Flowing well. Water temperature is 208° F at depth of 4,700 ft. Ref 3468. 2 main and several smaller springs. do. Na (277); SO< (148); Cl (322); evolved gas 88.1 percent N2, 11.9 percent C02. ____do.................... ----do.................... ____do.................... ____do.................... ____do.................... ____do................... Mesozoic strata faulted against Precambrian rocks. Cretaceous strata......... do. Na, HC03; much free C02. do. do. Flowing well. Water temperature is 204° F at depth of 4,304 ft. Ref. 3468. Several springs. Do. Do. Do. Do. Do. 2 main springs. Water is radioactive. Bathing resort. Refs. 3457, 3465. Many springs issuing from tufa mounds. Flowing well 2,669 ft deep. Water temperature varies. Ref. 3454. Flowing well 2,793 ft deep. Ref. 3454. Numerous flowing wells.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 226 BISMARCK ARCHIPELAGO AND EASTERN NEW GUINEA The Bismarck Archipelago is an oval group of several islands, 100 to 400 statute miles east of New Guinea, as shown on figure 72. New Britain, formerly Neu-Pommern, is the largest island and is narrow and crescent shaped. It is mountainous, composed chiefly of volcanic rocks, and includes several active volcanoes. New Ireland, formerly Neu-Mecklenburg, is long and narrow and includes a single mountain range. Granite, porphyry, and basalt are exposed in the southern part of the island, but sandstone, probably of Tertiary age, crops out in the north. The mountains of the other main islands of the archipelago have cores of granite and porphyry partly over-lain by sedimentary deposits. New Guinea, the largest island in the world if Green- 1400 160° 180° 160° Figure 72.—Part of the Pacific region showing location of Volcano Islands, Bismarck Archipelago, Solomon Islands, New Hebrides, New Caledonia, Fiji, Samoa, Tonga Islands, and Kermadec Islands.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 227 land is regarded as a continent, is divided into three main administrative areas. In 1958 the western half formed Netherlands New Guinea; the northern part of the eastern portion, together with the Bismarck Archipelago and other small islands, formed British New Guinea; and the southeastern part, together with nearby small islands, formed the Territory of Papua. Both territories were under Australian administration. From high limestone cliffs at its southeastern extremity, rugged mountains with perpetual snow on the highest peaks extend west-northwest along the axis of the island. The ranges that have been explored consist chiefly of ancient schist and slate and of intrusive granitic rocks. These rocks are flanked by marine deposits of Jurassic to late Tertiary age. The mountain systems probably extend through most of the western part of the island to its northwestern coast. In some places, raised coral reefs extend inland to altitudes of nearly 2,000 feet. Much volcanic rock is present in the mountains of the southeast peninsula. Mount Victory (Vic-, toria) and Mount Suckling, both in the main range, and Mount Trafalgar near the coast are considered to be solfataric volcanoes, as indicated on figure 73. The schist and slate of the main ranges reappear in the D’Entrecasteaux and Louisiade groups of small islands off the southeast coast. In the former group there is some Tertiary and later lava. The Louisiade Islands also may be chiefly of lava, but they are covered in large part by coral limestone. No reference to thermal springs in the western part of New Guinea has been found, but there may be fuma-roles and solfataras in the crater of Arfak (Umsini) volcano in that region. The recorded thermal springs in the eastern part are shown on figure 73. The available information on the thermal springs in the Bismarck Archipelago and eastern New Guinea is summarized in the table below. 140" 145” 150” Figure 73.—Bismarck Archipelago and eastern New Guinea showing location of thermal springs and volcanoes. Thermal springs in the Bismarck Archipelago and eastern New Guinea No. on flg.73 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Associated rocks Remarks and references 1 Near southeast coast of Lou Island in Admiralty Group. Hot Quaternary or Tertiary lava. Low-pressure steam vents. Ref. 3470. 2 Baluan Island in Admiralty Group. _ Hot __ _do_ Many vapor vents in volcanic crater. Ref. 3470. 3 4 Ambitle Island, off the east coast of New Ireland. Near north shore of New Britain Island: Hot _do_ _ Several springs, one of which spouts to height of 32 ft. Ref. 3476. Hannam Island, near shore 87-100 do... Several spouting springs, mud volcanoes, and steam fumaroles. Deposits of brown and white sinter. Ref. 3472. North Island, near south and northwest shores. 100 do.. __ _ Several springs, one of which spouts. Water is salty. Deposits of brown sinter. Ref. 3472. (According to ref. 3473, the water from 1 spring in New Britain Group contains 36,312 ppm dissolved solids, chiefly NaCl. Possibly not this spring, but another.) 5 Mount Langila, near west end of New Britain Island. Hot . -do. Large fumaroles emitting steam and S02. Ref. 3470.228 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in the Bismarck Archipelago and eastern New Guinea—Continued No. on fig. 73 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Associated rocks Remarks and references 6 Manam (Vulcan) Island, 10 miles off northeast coast of New Guinea. Hot Quaternary or Tertiary lava. 2 volcanic craters containing fumaroles emitting much water vapor and C02. Ref. 3470. 7 Near Awaru River in Papua, 2 miles upstream from junction with Moni River. Hot Trachyte Several springs. Much free H2S. Deposits of siliceous sinter and sulfur and incrustations of selenium and cinnabar. Ref. 3479. 8 Near Goropu Mountains in Papua, 40 miles south-southwest of Tuff government station. Hot Probably faulted andesite. Fumaroles and solfataras. Ref. 3469. 9 Mount Victory (Victoria?) in Papua Hot Lava Several steam vents on mountain flank. Ref. 3463. 10 Fergusson Island in D’Entrecausteaux Group. Hot do _ _ Acid hot and spouting springs at Iamalele, Deadea, 1 mile south of Debawala, and near Kedidia. Terraces of siliceous sinter and extensive deposits of sulfur. Refs. 3463, 3474, 3480, 3481. 11 Normanby Island.- — Hot do_ _ Springs at three places. Ref. 3481. BORNEO (North Borneo, Brunei, Sarawak, and Kalimantan) The island of Borneo lies about 1,000 to 1,500 statute miles northwest of the northwest coast of Australia. It is largely mountainous, and the several groups and chains trend east-west or northeast-southwest. Extensive mangrove swamps occupy much of the coastal area, and wide lowlands form the main river basins. Only reconnaissance surveys have been made of the geology of most of the island, but the general geology and stratigraphy have been summarized by Van Bemmelen (ref. 3516). In the northwestern part the mountains along the east border of Sarawak are largely of crystalline schist. These mountains are flanked by folded slate, sandstone, and limestone of Carboniferous through Jurassic ages. Triassic schist has been recorded in the western part of Kalimantan, but the principal mountains in this region are believed to be composed chiefly of igneous rocks that are covered largely by nearly horizontal strata of Tertiary age. Tertiary and Quaternary deposits and some strata of Cretaceous age underlie lowlands between the mountain ranges. Cretaceous and Tertiary volcanic rocks also cover extensive areas in the Mueller Mountains near the center of Borneo. Nearly horizontal Tertiary strata that include coal beds are present in the northern part of Kalimantan. Most of this part of the island is underlain by Tertiary strata, which include oil-bearing beds. Thermal springs have been reported at several places in Borneo, as indicated on figure 74. The small amount of published information concerning them is summarized in the table below. Thermal springs in Borneo [Data from ref. 3483. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. on fig. 74 Name or location Temperature of water Total dissolved solids (p.p.m.) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks 1 2 Near Pinowanter, in Kinoram District. Water is slightly saline. 305 Si02 (20); Ca (90); Mg (34); do 3 4 Na (31); Cl (21); CO2(109). Probablv Quaternary deposits Near Bajang Mountains in basin of upper Sambas River. Near Blintang River, a tributary of the Kapuas River. Near Katingan River, a tributary of the Kapuas River. Near Skabat Brook, a tributary of the Katungan (Katingan?) River. 228 Si02 (67); Ca (34); Na (55); overlying Mesozoic strata. Probably lower Tertiary strata 5 Cl (47); C02 (25). overlying crystalline rocks. Warm to hot. Very hot Probably lower Tertiary strata Faulted (?) ancient crystalline rocks. Tertiary(?) strata near intrusive igneous rock. Several springs. Water is 7 S Low moderately mineralized. Free II2S. Water has blue tint. Much Batu bini, in Amandit (Amuntai?) District. Batu laki, in Amandit (Amuntai?) District. Ca, HC03 - free H2S. Issues in cave. Water is 10 Ca, HC03 - moderately mineralized. Do. Figure 74. Part of the East Indies showing location of thermal springs and principal chains of volcanoes in Borneo, Celebes, Molucea Islands, and Sumatra. Springs and volcanoes chiefly from refs. 3532, 3540, and 3725. DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 229230 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD CELEBES The island of Celebes consists of a central mountainous region and four long peninsulas which radiate northeast, east, southeast, and south from it. (See fig. 74.) There is an axial range along each peninsula and the surface is very rugged. Most of the island seems to be of gneiss and other ancient crystalline rocks, which are overlain by conglomerate, limestone, and slate, and in some areas by radiolarian clay. Marine Tertiary de- posits border most of the coast. Much intrusive rock cuts the sedimentary formations, and there are volcanic rocks of several periods of effusion. Most of the eastern peninsula is of gabbro. Near the end of the northeastern peninsula are several volcanoes, two or three of which are active and the others solf ataric. Thermal springs are present at several places on or near the principal volcanoes. The available information on them is summarized in the table below. Thermal springs in Celebes No. on fig. 74 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Associated rocks Remarks and references 1 2 Northeast slope of Tompasso (Tampusu) volcano. 1 mile from Langowan and 3 miles southwest of Lake Tondano. Panghu, near Lake Tondano 97 (max) 77 Lava (Quaternary) _ _ Lava _ _ About 20 pools of bubbling mud in area of 0.5 sq mi. Much steam. Small deposit of sulfur. Refs. 73, 3484, 3725. Water rises in large pool from which outflow is considerable. Refs. 3484, 3487, 3488. 2 springs spouting to height of 3-4 ft; also pool 40 ft in diameter. Deposit of tufa around pool. Refs. 3486, 3489. Several pools of boiling mud in area 300 ft in diameter. Vapor is sulfurous. Refs. 3486, 3489. Several springs. Do. 3 95 do_ _ _ 4 1 mile from Panghu. 100 Lava, decomposed to red and white clay. 5 6 Northwest base of Klabat volcano _ Warm 7 Crater on slope of Klabat volcano at north end of Lake Luni. Hot Very large solfatara. Ref. 73. Rises in large pool. Spouts occasionally to height of 50 ft. Several steam vents; also steam and sulfurous vapor at sulfur mine. Refs. 16, 3485. 8 51 9 Slopes of Sapoetan (Soputan) and Man-dala Wangi volcanoes. 100 FIJI The colony of Fiji consists of a group or archipelago of two principal islands and many smaller ones, about 80 of which are inhabited. They are situated about 1,800 to 2,000 statute miles east of Australia, as indicated on figure 72. The larger islands are composed chiefly of plutonic and volcanic rocks, but on Viti Levu, the largest island, the igneous rocks are in some places overlain by massive limestone. Most of the smaller islands are composed of coral. Many thermal springs are present, chiefly on the two principal islands, as shown on figure 75. Information on the various thermal springs is given in the table below. Thermal springs in Fiji [Data chiefly from refs. 3497, 3500. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] No. Tempera- Total Principal Remarks and additional on Name or location ture of dissolved chemical Associated flg. 75 water (°F) solids (ppm) constituents rocks references Kandavu Island 144 Ngau Island 620 fJftfJOj (160); Cl T4601 Water used for bathing. Refs. 3490, 3496, 3506.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 231 Thermal springs in Fiji—Continued Name or location Temperature of Total dissolved Principal chemical Associated Remarks and additional water (°F) solids (ppm) constituents rocks references Ono Island 1 Near the shore. 100 Ref. 3499. Ram be Island Warm Vanua Levu Island 1 Vatuloaloa. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 On south side of Nawavi Range, 4 miles inland. Nambuonu, 0.5 mile inland________ Tambia, 2 miles inland........... Na Kama, 5-6 miles inland________ Mbati-ni-kama, near Ngawa River.. Nandongo, 4 miles inland_________ Natuvo, near the shore........... Ravuka, 9 miles inland___________ Vuinasanga, 10 miles inland______ Vandrani, 8 miles inland......... Vunimoli, 8 miles inland__________ Ndaku-ndaku, on the coast________ Wainunu Valley, from coast to 4 miles inland. Natoarau area, from coast to 4 miles inland. Near Nukumbolo, 6 miles inland... 17 Navakaravi, 1 mile inland........... 18 Nasavusavu (Savu Savu), near the shore: At rock 50 yd offshore........... About 200 yd inland Nakama, 350 yd inland. 19 Vunisawana, 400 yd from beach, 20 Navuni, 0.75 mile inland... 21 22 23 Ndreke-ni-wai, on coast__ Waikatakata, 400 yd inland. Ndevo, on the coast..... 140 Warm 140 180 194-204 161 97 131; 136 148 131; 134 100 140; 155 Warm 100-130 110-126 157 (max) 133 Hot 174-212 Boiling Warm 112; 113 130-135 148 Warm Alluvium Volcanic tuff and agglomerate. Alluvium and volcanic tuff.. Volcanic tuff and agglomerate. Lava(?).__ 8,719 8,510 Ca (1,775); Na (1,300); Cl (4,960). CaSO. (352); CaCl,, (4,518); NaCl (3,197). Volcanic tuff and agglomerate. Volcanic tuff and agglomerate. Issues on shore below high-tide level. Issues in swamp. Large deposit of siliceous sinter. Several springs. Small deposits of siliceous sinter. Large deposit of siliceous sinter. 2 springs issuing in swamp. 2 springs. Issues from former streambed. Several springs. Refs. 3498,3506. Several springs along a valley. Several springs. Much silico-calcareous sinter. Several springs. Refs. 3496, 3498. 3498.3505. 3 main springs rising in pool Springs spout occasionally to height of 2-3 ft. Refs. 3496,3498, 3505, 3507, 3508. Deposit of siliceous sinter. Refs. 3498.3501.3505. Ref. 3498. 2 springs. Several springs. Vanua Mbalavu Island 1 160 Coral limestone intrud ed by 2 springs. Refs. 3492, 3496. andesite. Viti Levu Island 1 Tavua. near Nasivi River and 3 miles inland. 2 Near mouth of Mba River on shore of Namaka Islet. 3 Near Sambeto River, 2 miles inland_ 4 Waimbasanga Lower, near Wallato River. 5 Waimbasanga Higher, 0.25 mile up- stream from Waimbasanga Lower. 150 Warm Warm 150 150 1,706 CaS04 (510); NajSO* (378); NaCl (520). 9,535 CaClj (3,940); NaCl (4,670).............. 2,609 1,293 Low CaS04 (1,069); NaCl (4,174)___________ CaS04 (789); NajS04 (364); free HiS. Basalt. Ref. 3490. Spring water is contaminated by sea water. Ref. 3498. Do. 6 Mbusa Lower, 2 miles inland......... 7 Mbusa Higher, 1.5 miles northwest of Mbusa Lower. 8 Naseuvou Southern................... 9 Naseuvou Northern, 0.75 mile from Naseuvou Southern. 130 150 205 NajS04 227 NajS04 Fractured granite. ____do.......... 1 spring. Several springs. 106 140 Andesite............. Andesitic agglomerate. Ref. 3502. Do. 735-914232 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 177° 178° 179° 180° 179° 1 i i___i_i__I____________I Figure 75.—Fiji showing location of thermal springs. From refs. 3497 and 3500. GALAPAGOS ISLANDS The Galapagos Islands form an archipelago of about a dozen small islands and many islets and rocks situated on the equator about 500 to 650 statute miles west of the coast of Ecuador, (Sjee fig. 1.) Albemarle, or Isabela, Island is the largest and westernmost of the principal islands; it is about 70 miles long, north-south, and about 40 miles wide at its maximum. Except for beach sands, it is composed of basaltic lava, scoria, and tuff, and has five main craters, at least three of which have been active within recent years. Narborough, or Femandina, Island, just west of Albemarle, consists of one large volcano, which has been active at two or more periods since 1925. All the other islands of the group, though volcanic, show few signs of recent activity. According to Banfield, Behre, and St. Clair (ref. 3509), there are hot springs, hot-water basins, steam vents, and solfataras in the craters of the three volcanoes on Albemarle Island. Fuchs (ref. 43) states that the principal crater on Narborough Island contains several active solfataras. JAVA A range of volcanic mountains extends the full length of Java along the axial part of the island. There are also several branch ranges and detached mountains. Much of the land on each side of the main ranges is mountainous to hilly, but wide lowlands extend along the north side of the western part of the island and along the north and south coasts in several other areas. Lowlands also extend nearly across the central part of the island. Schist, possibly of Cretaceous age, is exposed in a few small areas and seems to be the oldest rock in Java, although schist of an earlier geologic age is present in the small islands of the Karimundjawa (Karimon Java) group off the north coast. Nearly all the principal mountains are of lava and other volcanic materials of Tertiary to Recent ages. These rocks underlie large areas surrounding the principal centers of volcanism (on fig. 76). Most of the hilly and lower lands of Java are underlain by marine sandstone, marl, and limestone of Miocene and Pliocene age. These deposits have been considerably folded and uplifted. They are overlain alongDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 233 108° 110° 110° 112° Figure 76.—Java and nearby islands showing location of thermal springs, volcanoes, and main lava areas. Springs from refs. and 3532 ; volcanoes and lava areas from ref. 3532. 3524pri Jo. )n ig. 76 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF t S coasts by Quaternary marine deposits and alluvium. of the thermal springs are closely associated with active or solfataric volcanoes. About 15 springs or ips issue from Tertiary deposits near the borders of of lava. inghuhn (ref. 3524) described some of the thermal ngs. Most of these springs, and others, were noted by Verbeek and Fennema (ref. 35i 121 centers of present or former which about 14 are considered to fataric volcanoes. The data on the numerous sprin reports are summarized in the tabl Thermal springs and wells in Java [Data chiefly from refs. 3524, 3532. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] Name or location Temperature of water (°F) 3 km north of Tjiteureup.. Kaboel (Epetan)___________ Warm Warm Northwest slope of Parakasak vol- Warm cano. Soemoertoe, on east slope of Karang 110 volcano. Legok Prijoek 110-130 South slope of Poelosari Mountain. Hot Warm Warm Warm In southwest part of Bantam Warm Warm Bank of Tji-Sopan stream 97.2 Kapouran, at Lande Kuripan: Near Tjikopo..." .. Warm Warm Near Kebondanas Warm North slope and crater of Salak Warm volcano. Warm Warm South slope of Salak volcano Hot Warm B atu-kapur ‘Mountain 106.2 Tjiater (Drangon), on north slope 108.5-117.5 of Tangkhoeban volcano. Valley of Tji Burbus 90. 5-106.2 Northeast slope of Tangkhoeban 85 volcano. Bank of Tji Panas stream, east of 108.5 Tjiater. 130 Tjitotok, near north base of 146 Tjerimai volcano. Warm Near east base of Tjerimai volcano.. 105 112 99.5 Tji Oeja, 2 km north of Tjiniroe Warm Tjipanas, 2 km north of Tjisolok Warm Near Dadap 119.7 10 km southeast of Palaboetan Warm Ratoe. Near Tji-mandiri stream Warm 35 km west of Qede (Gedah) Warm volcano. 20 km southwest of Gede (Gedah) Warm volcano. Near south base of Gede (Gedah) Warm volcano. North-northeast of Gede (Gedah) 128 (max) volcanic crater. On northeast slope of Gede (Gedah) 118-120 volcano. Paloembon, on south slope of Batu 108 Mountain. Near north base of Djampang Warm Mountain. Bank of Tji Madja stream 101; 150 Near base of Linggungmauer 74.7 Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks do 9,720 Si02 (1,440); CaCOs (1,360); Na2C03 (2,860); K2SO< (1,190); NaCl (1,730); A1203 (160); free C02. do Tertiary strata 4,074 NaCl (2,108) do do 15,870 27,000 28,780 \ do ] do Andesite 82,215 CaCl2 (14,1300); MgCl2 (3,563); NaCl (62,133). Tertiary strata.. Lava do do do 1,387 2,209 CaCOs (293); MgCOs (299); Nas CO3 (252); NaCl (367). CaCOs (676); MgCOs (471); Nas-COs (471); NaCl (364); free C02. Tertiary strata CaCl, (1 360V NaCl (4,930). Lava Tertiary strata Tertiary limestone. Tertiary strata Fractured Tertiary strata... Lava Fractured Tertiary strata... Lava 3,618 CaCOs (837); NasSOs (547); MgCls (566); NaCl (947). do Tertiary strata do DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 235 Thermal springs and wells in Java—Continued No on fig. Name or location Temperature of water (°F) 76 48 On bank of Tji Tjankar. 124.2 49 15 km northeast of Tji Tjankar-- 50 Crater of Tangkaoeban (Tankuban Prahu) volcano. Warm 112 51 52 53 54 55 Boerangrang...................... Kantjah (Tijpanas), west of Lem-bang. Bank of Tjipanas stream, 3 km south-southeast of Lembang. Narimbang, near northeast base Tamponas Mountain. East of Tjidempet................ Warm Tepid 111; 116 Warm Warm 56 57 58 59 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 Northwest of Kopo............... On Plateau Pengalengan No. 1.... On Plateau Pengalengan No. 2... Near base of Brengbeng Mountain.. Telaga Patonggang (Tiji Sopan), on west slope of Patoeha Mountain. Near north base of Patoeha Mountain. Southwest slope of Tiloe volcano_ Between Tiloe and Wajang vol. canoes. Kawah, on east slope of Wajang volcano. Northwest slope of Goentoer volcano. 5 km northwest of Trogong....... Tjipatjing, near northeast base of Telaga Bodas volcano. Kawah Mas, on north slope of Pap-andajan (Papandayang) volcano. Kawah Manoek (Kawah Manuk), east slope of Kendang Mountain. Tjipanas, on south slope of Goentoer volcano. Padjagalan, near southwest base of Sida-keling Mountain. Telaga Bodas Lake, on north slope of Galoenggoeng volcano. Southeast slope of Galoenggoeng volcano. Near Pager-agung............... Tjiboekoer, on southeast slope of Galoenggoeng volcano. Tji Woelan (Wulan), 5 km north-northeast of Eureunpala. South of Tiloe volcano, near east border of small lava flow. Bank of Tji-arinem stream..... Bebedahan______________________ Near Tji Waline................ Near Tjieras___________________ Easternmost part of Preanger... Slamat volcano.________________ 25 km west of Kendeng volcano__ 3 km south of Tempoaran....... West slope of Kendeng volcano.. Warm Very hot 120 117. 5-161.1 99.5 Warm Hot Warm Warm Hot Warm Warm Hot 128 111 98 Warm Warm 115; 118 Warm 81-123 Warm 106.2 Warm Warm Warm Warm Hot Warm Warm Hot 87 Telaga Leri (Tologo Lin), on upper slope of Dijeng (Dieng) volcano. 105-178 88 Tjonaro (Chondero) di Moeko, on southwest slope of Dijeng (Dieng) volcano. Boiling South of Tjonaro (Chondero) di Moeko: Tologo Warno________________ Warm In Kawa Kedung (Kawa Ki-wung) Valley. Pekaraman__________________ 90 Kali Anget: Near Wono Sobo_____________ 91 On Seraju Mountain________ Hot Warm 107.5 114.8 92 93 94 Krakal, on bank of Look stream 2 km southeast of Alian. 10 km north of Poerworedjo_______ Banjoeasin, 10 km northeast of Poerworedjo. 100.4; 103.3 Warm Warm Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Tertiary strata - 1,125 2,115 1,356 (hottest) SO*, Cl_. NaCl+KCl (640); SO< (870); CO, (305). Hi m- free no. Lava overlying Miocene strata. Tertiary strata.. Lava 1,867 SO* Lava overlying Tertiary strata. 1,161 CO3, so* Lava 2,115 COj (305); SO, (870); NaCl+ KC1 (640). do Quartz and hornstone - Tertiary strata do do do do Quaternary lava Calcareous sandstone (Tertiary) . 11,861 19, 500 CaCh (6,097); NaCl (5,308) CaCh (5,500); NaCl (12,700) Remarks and additional references Water is slightly saline and bitter. Deposit of tufa. Milky water in crater lake; fumaroles on lake border. Refs. 16, 3530. Deposits of jarosite and iron oxide Ref. 3516. 2 main springs. Water is saline. Several springs. Deposit of tufa containing magnesium carbonate. Large flow of strongly sulfurous water. Water is slightly saline. Several springs. Water is slightly bitter. Water is astringent and strongly sulfurous. Large deposit of sulfur. Several fumaroles. Deposits of tufa, ocher, and siliceous sinter. Several solfataras. Several springs and solfataras. Deposits of tufa and brown opal. Ref. 3516. Spouting springs, hot mud pools, and solfataras. Deposits of sulfur. Refs. 16, 3516. Ref. 3725. Spring, also solfataras at two places. Ref. 3516. Deposits of tufa and opaline silica. Deposits of sulfur at nearby solfataras. Ref. 3525. 2 springs. Water is saline. Deposit of ocher. Several springs. Several springs. Deposit of tufa. Several fumaroles and solfataras. Several springs having small flow. Water contains iodine which is extracted commercially. Also fumaroles and solfataras. Ref. 3516. 4 main springs supplying lake of milky water. Water is sulfurous. Much steam. Refs. 3513, 3514, 3727. Several springs spouting to maximum height of 5 ft; supply pool 20 ft in diameter. Water is sulfurous. Deposits of sulfur. Refs. 3513, 3514. Lake 300 yd long. Refs. 3513, 3514. Bubbling pond. Refs. 3513, 3514. Deposit of ocher. 2 main springs.236 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in Java—Continued No. on fig. 76 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) 95 96 Kalibening, on northeast slope of Warm Gijanti volcano. 97 Ajer Panas, near base of Andong 96 Mountain, 4 km west of Gerabak. 98 Merbaboe volcano Hot 99 West slope of Merapi volcano Hot 100 Pelantoengan (Platungen), on 111 north slope of Prau Mountain. 101 Near north base of Prau Mountain. Warm 102 Near north-northeast base of Prau Warm Mountain. 103 North-northwest slope of Ungaran Hot volcano. 104 Northeast slope of Ungaran volcano. 125 105 Bed of Kali-Ulo stream Warm 106 Oudh Gedong, on south slope of Tepid Ungaran volcano. 107 Plain of Grobogan, southwest of Warm Poerwodadi. 108 Southeast of Poerwodadi Warm 109 Medang Ramsan, north of Koewoe. Warm 110 Djati and Mendikil, west and Warm southwest of Koewoe. 111 Kesongo, southeast of Koewoe Warm 112 Tjerewek, Bandar-lor, and Banjar- Warm Kidoel, near Koewoe. 113 3 km southwest of Grabagan Warm 114 Lower northern slope of Lawoe Tepid Mountain. 115 Near southwest base of Lawoe 93 Mountain. 116 Karang Panas, 12 km east of Kali 127; 135 Opak stream. 117 10 km southwest of Toeban Warm 118 Koekoesan volcano Hot 119 Oemboel, near w'est base of Wilis Tepid Mountain. 120 Southwest slope of Wilis Mountain. Hot 121 Near southwest base of Wilis 146 Mountain. 122 Ban joe Oemboel Warm 123 Keloet volcano .. Hot 124 Tjitro, at north base of hills Warm 125 1 km south of Pasinan Warm 126 Gesinglor, 10 km south of Pasinan.. Warm 127 Montroeng, 15 km south-south west Warm of Gesinglor spring. 128 Near Desa Molong stream 92 129 Paras, on west slope of Hugels Hills. 90 130 131 Goeng Lantoeng Warm 132 Near Tjoepak.. Warm 133 110 134 Kedang-waroe 98.8 (max) 135 Genoek Tepid 136 Poeloengan, 5 km east of Geden- Warm gan. 137 Koelang-anjar, 3 km from shore 108 138 Welirang volcano Hot 139 Adjasmoro volcano Hot 140 Sanggoriti (Singuriti), near north- 90.5; 111 east base of Kawi volcano. 141 2 km north of Ngangtang Warm 142 Tengger-Bromo volcano Hot 143 Semeroe volcano. Hot 144 Near east base of Lemongan (La- 103. 8-108. 5 mongan) volcano. 145 Argopoero volcano Hot 146 Djeding, on north slope of Idjgn Warm (Idg£n) Mountain. 147 Banjoe Wedang No. 2 Warm 148 Banjoe Wedang No. 1 Warm Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 4,990 Si02 (147); Ca(HC03)2 (595); Mg(HC03)2 (499); NaHC03 (501); NaCl (3,125); Fe203 (29). Trachyte Lava overlying Tertiary limestone. Sand dunes overlying Tertiary strata. Lava 1,800 Si02 (119); CaC03 (357); MgC03 (375); NaCl (780); free C02, H2S. Tertiary strata 19,518 NaCl (17,060) 25,280 NaCl (23,025) do do 26,000 CaC03 (418); MgC03 (332); NaHC03 (900); NaCl (23,920); Nal (12); NaBr (28). Lava 10,800-19, 400 Lava overlying Tertiary strata. Lava 3,300 CaC03 (205); MgCOs (788); MgClj (346); NaCl (738); COs (1,192); A1203 (13); Fe303 (20). do Remarks and additional references Several fumaroles and solfataras. Water rises in stone basin at Hindu shrine. Small fumaroles and solfataras. Several fumaroles. Refs. 3516, 3527, 3529. Flows about 30 liters per minute. Military hospital. Ref. 3519. Water is saline. Do. Do. Deposit of ocher. 2 springs. Terraces of tufa. Water is sulfurous. Free H2S. Water is saline. Water is highly saline; salt production. Water is highly saline; salt production. Do. 3 small springs. Water is highly saline; salt production. Water is saline. Water used for bathing. W'ater is highly sulfurous. Free H2S. Water is potable. Several fumaroles and solfataras. Solfataras. Ref. 3516. Water is saline. Fumaroles and solfataras. Water is saline. Do. Large flow of saline water. Free H2S. Slight amount of petroleum. 7 main and about 20 smaller springs. Water is saline. Contains I (116 ppm). Free H2S. Flow 30 liters per minute. Several muddy pools of saline water. Issues from tufa mound. Water is strongly saline. Ref. 3522. Solfataras. Water is sulfurous. Large deposits of sulfur. Ref. 3516. Fumaroles and solfataras. Water is sulfurous. 2 springs, 20 paces apart, supplying large tank beside ruins of altar. Water is saline and ferruginous. Deposit of ocher. Ref. 3514. 4 springs. Water is strongly saline. Fumaroles and solfataras. Do. Several springs. Fumaroles and solfataras.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 237 Thermal springs and wells in Java-—Continued No. on fig. 76 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 149 150 151 152 153 Hot AljOs (8,745); Fe203 (2,395); Fumaroles, solfataras, acid Raoeng (Qunung Raung) volcano.. Hot SOs (40,380). muddy springs, and crater lake. Intermittent overflow from lake diverted to ocean by trenches. Analysis is for water in lake. Refs. 94, 3516, 3520, 3526. Fumaroles and solfataras. Refs. 94, 3526. Near Ajer Panas, Madoera Island.. Near coast south of Pamekasan, 93 Issues 20 ft above sea level. Water is sulfurous. Free H2S. Much gas evolved. 2 or 3 springs. 154 155 Near northwest coast of B a wean Island. Near southeast coast of Bawean Island. 80 (max) 80 Do. (max) KERMADEC ISLANDS are covered by marine Pliocene deposits including The Kermadec Islands, nearly 2,000 statute miles east of Australia, form a group of five small islands, which extend north-south for 200 miles, as indicated on figure 72. These islands were described by Smith (ref. 3534), who found them to be composed almost entirely of geologically Recent volcanic materials. They are on a general volcanic line extending from the Bay of Plenty in New Zealand northward to the Tonga Islands and Samoa. Sunday Island, the northernmost and largest of the Kermadec group, is about 20 miles in circumference. It has two craters, the older of which is partly eroded to form Denham Bay, on whose east side Smith found small fumaroles. Farther east the main crater contains a lake which boiled in 1872 when there was an eruption. Smith also noted hot springs below high-tide level on the north shore of Sunday Island. About 90 miles south of Sunday Island, the eastern of the two small Curtis Islands had a crater in which were sol-fataras, fumaroles, and boiling mud holes; a strong stream of hot water flowed from the crater to a nearby cove in which the salt water was thus warmed. MOLUCCA ISLANDS The Molucca Islands generally are considered to consist of the islands that lie between Celebes and New Guinea, those which border the Molucca Passage extending northward, and those to the south which form bands curving westward to Java. (See fig. 74.) Halmahera (Jilolo), largest of the Moluccas, is about 150 miles east of the northeast end of Celebes and resembles that island in shape, as Halmahera also consists of four peninsulas formed by mountain ranges. Verbeek (ref. 3540) noted that much of the island seems to be of mafic eruptive rocks, probably of Mesozoic age. The eastern and northern parts of the north peninsula raised coral reefs, but most of this peninsula is of Tertiary and later volcanic rocks. One volcanic peak is on the east side of the peninsula, and six others border its west coast. This volcanic line is continued southward by five other volcanic peaks in small islands of the Ternate group. Bachian (Batjan) Island, off the west coast of the south peninsula of Halmahera, is also partly of volcanic rocks. Most of the other islands of the Moluccas are considered to lie in three concentric arcs, the outer of which includes the Xulla (Sula) Islands, Misol, and the Aru, or Greater Kei, group. These groups and other islands in the arc are chiefly of crystalline schist and limestone overlain by Jurassic, Cretaceous, and Tertiary marine sedimentary rocks. The middle arc includes Buru, Ceram, the Lesser Kei Islands, and the Timor Laut group. These also are composed chiefly of crystalline schist, ancient eruptive rocks, and Mesozoic and Tertiary sedimentary rocks. Ceram has no central range, but steep hills border its north coast. The older rocks of Ceram are largely eruptives and crystalline limestone overlain by marine Tertiary deposits. The inner concentric arc forms an extension of the volcanic belt through Sumatra and Java, east through Bali, Flores, and Pantar, and northeast through several small volcanic islands to Banda Api Island. Nearly all the islands along this arc are largely or wholly volcanic, or contain active or solfataric volcanoes. Am-boina, or Ambon, Island, near the southwest coast of Ceram, is considered by some geologists to be on this inner arc, as its principal mountains are of andesite; but parts of its higher lands are of granite and serpentine, and most of the lower areas are underlain by marine Tertiary beds. Thermal springs seem to be present only in the volcanic islands of the inner arc, as noted in the table below.238 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs on the Molucca Islands [Data chiefly from ref. 3540] No. on fig. 74 Name or location Temperature of water Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 1 Craters on Api Siaoe (Siau) _ Hot Recent lava Fumaroles and solfataras. 2 South base of Mamou volcano on Hal- _ __ do__ _ do. Several small springs. Several springs, chiefly near shore at base of Djaiolo volcano. Also solfataras. Vapor vents. Small deposits of sulfur. Steam and acid vapor from cracks in lava. Small deposits of sulfur. Ref. 3486. Spring on east shore and vapor vents in crater. Small deposits of sulfur. Ref. 3486. Vapor vents. Small deposits of sulfur. Do. 3 mahera. Volcanoes near west coast of Halma- _ do __ Recent basalt 4 hera. Crater of volcano on Hiri _ _ _ do 5 Crater of volcano on Ternate do andesite. _ do__ _ _ 6 East shore and crater of volcano on -do _ do_ 7 Tidore (Tidor). Crater of volcano on Moti do_ do_ _ 8 Crater of volcano on Makian do_ _do 9 North base of small volcanic cone on Boiling . Lava Several springs, the largest being Atoe Ri. Refs. 74, 3486, 3513. Several springs. Several springs. Free H2S. Refs. 3486, 3536. Water is sulfurous. Deposit of siliceous sinter. Ref. 3539. Free H2S. Ref. 3539. Small flow. Free H2S. Ref. 3539. 3 springs. Water from the largest contains 29,700 ppm of dissolved solids, chiefly NaCl (23,740 ppm). Ref. 3539. Free H2S. Ref. 3539. Springs and solfataras. Ref. 3535. Small flow. Water is ferruginous. Used for bathing. Several springs. Jets of hot steam from many fissures. Fumaroles and solfataras. Sulfurous vapor. Deposit of sulfur. Solfataras 10 Bachian (Batjan). Beach near mouth of Wai Mantana Hot 11 and in basin of Made River, Xulla (Sula) Islands. Northeast side of Ceram. . do _ Tertiary strata over-lying fractured Jurassic or Tri-assic strata. Quaternary deposits. 12 Amboina (Amboyna, Ambon): West of Telaga Biroe_ _ Hitou . Warm . Bank of Lila River near Lariki Hot Beach near Toelehoe Near Wai Wasia Mount Wawani and Mount Sal- Hot 13 hutu. South coast of Horuka (Oma) Warm 14 Nossa (Nusa) Laut About 70°F Lava 15 Volcano on Banda Api Hot Recent lava_ 16 Southeast flank of volcano on Manoek do __ do _ 17 (Manouk). Near summit of volcano on Seroea _ _ do _ _do 18 (Seroe). East slope of volcano on Nila _do_ _ _ _ do Fumaroles and solfataras. 19 Near summit of volcano on Teon. do _ _ do _ _ Do. 20 Northern volcanic cone on Damar _ __do_ _ Lava .. Solfataras. Deposits of sulfur. Free H2S. Deposit of siliceous sinter. Water used for cooking. Do. 21 (Dammer, Daam). Eest coast of Damar (Dammer, Daam): Woeloer ... do_ Keli _ _do_ _ _ __do 22 South flank of volcano on Roma do_ __ _do Moderately large flow. Pebbles of alunite (probably formed by decomposition of lava). Fumaroles and solfataras. Deposits of sulfur. Ref. 3486. Fumaroles and solfataras. Several small springs. Small springs in two places. Fumaroles and solfataras. 23 West slope of volcano on Gunung do_ _ _ Recent lava 24 25 (Goenoeng) Api (Gunongapi). Near summit of Api volcano on Pantar. Northern slope of Iljasi volcano on Pantar. N ear base of Kedang volcano on north coast of Lomblen. Near summit of small volcano on do _do do _ _ _do 26 Warm _do 27 Hot _ __do_ . Batoe Taroe (Komba). DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 239 Thermal springs on the Molucca Islands—Continued No. on fig. 74 Name or location Temperature of water Associated rocks Remarks and additional references 28 Slope of volcano near east end of Flores. j-Hot Recent lava .. Solfataras. 29 do _ 30 31 Slope of volcano near south coast of Flores. do 1 -do __ _ do_ _ _ Small flow. Ref. 3725. 32 _.do 33 Near summit of volcano on Sanjean _ __do - _ do_ Fumaroles and solfataras. 34 Near summit of Tambora volcano on do_ _ _ _ _ _ do_ _ Do. 35 Sumbawa. Near summit of volcano on Lombok do_ _ _ _ do_ Do. 36 Slopes of 2 volcanoes in northeastern part of Bali. Slope of Mount Atlas near southeast coast of Timor. East coast of Samou _ _ do_ _ do__ _ __ _ Do. 37 Warm.. Mud springs. Also mud volcanoes, some ejecting fragments of fossilifer-ous rock. Many mud volcanoes. Refs. 3537, 3541. Mud volcanoes ejecting fragments of fossiliferous limestone and sandstone. 3 groups of mud volcanoes, several of which have large mounds. Fragments of schist and sedimentary rocks of Permian to Quaternary age are ejected. 38 _ __do__ 39 Poulou Kambing, between Timor and Samou. Rote (Roti) __ _ do_ 40 _do_ _ NEW CALEDONIA Thermal springs at two localities in New Caledonia, as indicated on figure 72, were described by Avias (ref. 3542). The springs at the northern locality issue in three groups, at temperature of about 40°C, from sedimentary strata, probably of Liassic age, overlying pe-ridotite or serpentine, and probably faulted. The water is lightly sulfureted and has been developed with bath establishment. Other warm springs, not developed, issue from peridotite or serpentine near the south end of the island, at two places near the shore. NEW HEBRIDES The New Hebrides form a chain of half a dozen principal islands and numerous smaller ones about 300 to 500 statute miles east to northeast of New Caledonia, as shown on figure 72. This group or chain includes the Torres Islands in the north and extends south-southeast from them for about 800 miles. The small Torres group is low and bordered by coral reefs, but nearly all the other islands are of considerable height and are composed chiefly of basalt and Recent eruptive materials. They include several active craters and numerous sulfur deposits. Information concerning thermal springs on several of the islands is given in the table below. Thermal spring on the New Hebrides [Data chiefly from refs. 3543-3645] No. on fig. 72 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Remarks and additional references 1 Volcano on Vanua Lava (Great Banks). Vapor vents on north side of main crater, boiling sulfur springs in pool in minor crater on east slope of main mountain, and solfataras in two places. Deposits of sulfur. 2 3 Ambrym: Bat-in and on northwest coast. 37-41 Several springs. 4 Fumaroles. 5 Efate: Hot 6 Swamp near coast, 0.25 mile north of Quoin Hill. Yasowa volcano on Tana (Tanna). 54 Boiling Numerous springs near crater; also fumaroles. NEW ZEALAND The northern part of North Island in New Zealand forms the Auckland Peninsula, in which the hilly areas are of Paleozoic and Mesozoic rocks and the lower lands are of Tertiary volcanic rocks and marine Tertiary sedimentary deposits. (See fig. 77.) The main mountain ranges are in the eastern part of North Island parallel with the coast. They are formed chiefly of Paleozoic and early Mesozoic rocks and partly of gneiss240 THERMAL SPRINGS of the united states and other countries of the worldDESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 241 and schist. These mountains are bordered by marine Cretaceous and Tertiary strata, especially in the southeastern part of the island. The southwestern projection and the greater part of the central and northern portions form hilly areas and plateaus that are underlain by volcanic rocks, largely pumice and tuff. A range of volcanic mountains and volcanoes, three or four of which are still active or in the solfataric stage, extend through the north-central part of North Island. The mountains in the northeastern part of South Island, also those in the southern part, seem to be a southward extension of the eastern mountain chain of North Island. In both parts of South Island the mountains are bordered on the east by a broad band of Paleozoic, Triassic, and Jurassic marine strata and on the west by a band of schist. The Southern Alps, a range in the west-central part of South Island, have a core of schist. The principal peaks of the Southern Alps are snowcapped, and there are many glaciers. The western coast, in the vicinity of the Southern Alps, is deeply indented by fiords. East of the Southern Alps is a wide band of marine strata of Tertiary age. The Banks Peninsula and a smaller peninsula near Dunedin, both extending out from the east coast of South Island, consist of Tertiary basalt and andesite. These and a few other small areas of volcanic rocks are the only evidences of volcanism in South Island. The famous geysers and hot springs of New Zealand are concentrated chiefly in a band within the main volcanic areas of North Island, as indicated on figure 77. Two of the most noted areas of thermal activity are shown in detail on figures 78 and 79. Outside the main belt of geysers and thermal springs, numerous springs issue chiefly in groups farther northwest, near the borders of lava areas and apparently along fault fractures. In South Island several moderately thermal springs are in the eastern and central ranges, and others have been noted in the western mountains. Information on the principal groups of springs and geysers is given in the table below. Thermal springs and wells in New Zealand [Data chiefly from refs. 3583, 3596, 3614. Principal chemical constituents in parts per million] No. on fig. 77 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 1 1 43 2 Ngawha (Ohaewai) 21-45 5,442 Na (689); HCOs (470); SO, Lake beds near Quaternary (332); Cl (929); NIL (129); lava. H2Si0.3 (154); HB02 (2,739). [Kamo 1 25.5 2 2, 025 SiOj (106); Oa (216); Na (206); Basalt overlying Tertiary HCOs (1,180); Cl (224); sandstone and limestone. 3 much free CO2. 4 Helensville, on shore of Kai- 46-65.5 21,992 Ca(HCOs)! (56); CaCls (137); Faulted Quaternary and para Harbor. NaCl (1,510); Na2B407 (82). Tertiary strata. 5 Waiwere, on sea coast 40 3,140 Ca(HC03)2 (153); NaHCOs Faulted Miocene sandstone. (1,252); NaCl (1,669). 6 61; 85. 5 Ca, Na, Cl Andesite(?) 7 49 shore. 8 Hot mile from shore. 9 Orua, on beach Warm 3,710 Ca(HCOs), (322); CaClj (309); Tertiary andesite and Qua- NaC. (2,871); KC1 (103). ternary rhyolite. 10 Hauraki Plain. 11 Te Maire, 5 miles west of Lake 65-93 2 665 NaHCOs (370); NajSO, (73); Tertiary strata. Whangape (Wangape). NaCl (351); free H2S. 12 1 35 Faulted Tertiary strata 13 Puriri 16.6 7,673 Na (309); HCOs (620); Cl (28). Tertiary strata near andesite. 14 Mayor Island. 15 Near tributary of Waikorea 54 400 NaHCOs (46); NaCl (205); Tertiary strata, probably stream. free C02, H2S. faulted. 16 54 17 1 76. 6 1,051 Si02 (65); Na (185); HCO3 (540); Cl (39). 18 Te Aroha, at west base of Te 30-85 2 8,150 Na (3,162); HC03 (6,660); C03 Faulted Tertiary strata Aroha Mountain. (1,920); SO, (388); Cl (581); HBOs (535). 19 Katikati, near Tauranga 34; 36 221 Ca(HCOs)! (49); NaHCOs Pleistocene deposits and Harbor. (38); NaCl (21); Als03 (16). rhyolite breccia. Remarks and additional references Several small springs and gas vents. Free H2S. Ref. 3592. 3 groups of springs (shore of Tuwhakino Pond, pools at Waitetera Pond, and along Tuwhakino stream). Analytical data for water having temperature of 43°C. Nearby cinnabar deposits formerly mined. Refs. 3551, 3576, 3594, 3612. 2 springs issuing from low mounds of sinter on sanatorium grounds. Flow varies, maximum 30 imperial gpm. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3575. Several small springs. Nearby cinnabar deposits mined. Refs. 3567,3575, 3612, 3646. Several flowing wells. Springs in same locality stopped flowing when wells were drilled. Bathing resort. Ref. 3638. Several springs and drilled wells. Bathing resort. Ref. 3626. 2 groups of springs. Water is saline and sul-furous. Refs. 3626, 3676. Small flow issuing between tide limits. Not contaminated by sea water. Water is brackish. Ref. 3651. 2 springs, each flowing 140 imperial gpm. Temperature of water varies with the season. Small deposits of sulfur and siliceous sinter. Refs. 3577, 3611, 3625, 3626, 3651. Several springs rising in a small lake. Much free H2S. Refs. 3591, 3651. Small flow. Water temperature probably much higher at source of water. Several small springs. Flow 0.5 imperial gpm. Several springs; combined flow is 75 imperial gpm. Ref. 3611. Many small springs. Analytical data for water having temperature of 40.5°C. Ref. 3613. Several springs and drilled wells. Bathing resort. Refs. 3608, 3613, 3634, 3642, 3655, 3678. 2 groups of springs 5 miles apart. Analytical data for water from main spring. Refs. 3613, 3651. See footnotes at end of table.242 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Figure 78.—Rotorua-Taupo area, New Zealand, showing location of thermal spring groups. From ref. 3583.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 243 Ohinemutu LAKEK ROTORUA nmu Tarewa springs # 0 ^Hospital 0 □□□ □□□ Timaru Lake I I I H°tel11 I I I ph io ri nn io □ E □ □ Railway station ^—I—i—i-H i EXPLANATION Hot spring €> Geyser A Mud volcano ▲ Boiling mud pool 20 _j__ [h^7| | | □ □e: □ □cz 40 Chains —I (i/2 Mile) 800 Meters J GEYSERS: A, Waikite Rotorua B, Malfroy C, Whakamanu D, Houriri E, Paddlewheei F, Prince of Wales G, Pohutu H, Waikorohihi I, Wairoa J, Puarenga K, Papakura L, Waikite M, Parela Figure 79.—Rotorua and Whakarewarewa districts, New Zealand, showing main springs and geysers. From ref. 3583.XU. fis. 77 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs and wells in New Zealand—Continued Temperature of water (°C) 40- 41 41- 43 i 45 198 Hot 42-100 54-90 49 50-82 58 50-100 50-100 67-91 60-100 41-100 60-100 60-100 Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 2 664 Si02 (127); Na (179); HCOa (600); Cl (25). Tertiary strata, probably faulted. Volcanic tuff Andesite do Faulted Tertiary strata 1,241 SiOa (322); A1 (46); Ca; Na; SO,. Rhyolite (Pliocene to Recent). 962 SiOa (110); Na (27); SO, (691); NH, (55). 1,117 SiOi (182); Na (304); HCOa (278); SO, (49); Cl (365). Faulted rhyolite (Pliocene to Recent). 888 1,309 Na (155); SO, (253); Cl (112); Hj SiOa (437). SiOj (319); Na (256); HCOa (317); SO, (55); Cl (337). 3, 240 SiOa (741); Na (737); SO, (297); Cl (1,250). 2 753 SiOa (115); Na (169); HCO3 (288); Cl (103). do 4,156 SiOj (448); Na (1,215); SO, (119); Cl (1,990). Rhyolite tuff and breccia 1,606 SiOa (428); Na (366); HCOa (289); SO, (97); Cl (358). Faulted rhyolite (Pliocene to Recent). 3,309 SiOa (305); Na (926); HCOa (769); Cl (1,049); BaOa (94). Remarks and additional references Several springs; largest flows 20 imperial gpm. Ref. 3613. Several springs. Ref. 3651. Largest spring (temperature 36.6°C) flows 750 imperial gpm. Many springs of hot acid water; also steam jets, mud geysers, and many acid fumaroles. Water from 1 spring contains 10 percent mixed hydrochloric and sulfuric acids. Fumarole gases include HC1 and SO2. Large deposit of sulfur. Refs. 20, 3554, 3559, 3569, 3572, 3581, 3594, 3601, 3603, 3611, 3632, 3633, 3655, 3662, 3364, 3666. 1 small spring; also several sulfurous fumaroles. Deposit of siliceous sinter. Refs. 3594, 3635. Several springs between tide limits. Water is strongly saline; probably mixed with sea water. Several springs and small fumaroles. Analytical data for water having temperature of 50°C. Bathing resort. Several groups of springs and boiling mud pots in area 1.5 by 2 miles. Analytical data for water from Devil’s Bath (temperature 54°C). Water from one spring contains 16,340 ppm of SO*. Deposit of sulfur. Refs. 3642, 3655, 3668. Flows 500 imperial gpm. Also several smaller springs; water temperature 40-50°C. Ref. 3668. Several groups of springs issuing along line 5 miles long. Water from springs near river is alkaline, that from springs on higher ground is acidic. Ref. 3668. 2 small springs. Analytical data for water from Pukaahu spring. Ref. 3635. Several geysers, including Pehuta, Waikiti, and Wairoa, and many other springs; also many wells and mud pots. Analytical data for water from Waikiti geyser. Water from Rachel spring (flow, 70 imperial gpm, temperature 85°-93°C) is alkaline; water from many springs near lake shore is acid. Water from wells is used for heating and other domestic purposes, but it corrodes pipes and plumbing fixtures. Bathing resort. Deposit of siliceous sinter. Refs. 20, 3547, 3550, 3554, 3555, 3557, 3558, 3560, 3561, 3570, 3579, 3582, 3585, 3586, 3600, 3601, 3610, 3621, 3623, 3634, 3639, 3642, 3643, 3647, 3648, 3655, 3660, 3668, 3675, 3677. Many hot springs, hot pools, and steam vents. Combined flow, exceeding 1,000 imperial gpm, maintains Lake Rotomahana in crater of Tarawera volcano. Eruption occurred on June 10, 1886, when opening fissure intersected former Lake Rotomahara. Famous Pink and White Terraces and the geysers which formed them were destroyed by eruption. Violent hydrothermal activity continued for several months after eruption. Waimangu geyser appeared in 1900 and erupted intermittently until 1908, sometimes throwing column of mud and water to height of 1,200 ft. In 1929, gas at site of geyser was 92 percent COa and 8 percent N2. Refs. 3546, 3549, 3570, 3573, 3585, 3611, 3621, 3624, 3627, 3642-3645, 3650, 3652, 3655-3657, 3663, 3665-3668, 3673. Several springs along a fault. Water from each is of chloride type. Several mud pots and fumaroles along same fault as Northern group. Te Kopia fumarole is large steam vent. Water from each is of acid sulfate type. Several springs. Analytical data for water of Champagne Pool (temperature 73°C). Refs. 3587, 3611, 3642. Several springs and fumaroles. One spring, the Terrace geyser, boils continuously, throwing water to height of 12 ft. Analysis is for water in Blue Pool. Refs. 3582, 3621, 3640, 3642, 3655, 3672. Several alkaline springs in area 0.25 mile square. Analytical data for water from boiling pool. Small deposits of siliceous sinter.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 245 r * ▼ Thermal springs and wells in New Zealand—Continued No. on fig. 77 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Associated rocks 37 Wairakei, 6 miles north of 60-100 3,856 SiOi (304); Na (1,244); Cl Rhyolite (Pliocene to Re- Lake Taupo.8 (2,003). cent), probably faulted. 38 Rotokawa (Rotokaua), near 60-100 2,816 SiOi (398); Na (555); SO, do north shore of small lake.3 (962); Cl (729); much gas. 39 Waiora, near head of valley 60-100 1,746 SlOz (318); Na (428); SO, do (189); Cl (718). 40 Taupo, beside Waikato River3„ 35-100 2,329 Si02 (176); Na (820); Cl (1,256). do 41 Te Puia .. 1 65.5 214,000 SiOa (53); Ca(HCOj)i (104); Faulted shale and limestone CaCla (2,194); NaCl (11,522). (Upper Cretaceous). 42 South end of Lake Taupo:3 60-100 6,623 Na (2,182); Cl (3,410); B2O3 (318). Waihi, 2 miles west of To- Hot High Na, SO, Faulted Tertiary andesite... kaanu. 43 Ketetahi, on north flank of 60-100 2,805 Ca (80); Na (60); S04 (1,548); Andesite Tongariro volcano. NH (276); H2Si03 (373); HBO2 (612). 44 Hot Na, Cl Andesite near fault volcanic plateau. 45 49 Shale and sandstone (Cre- valley. taeeous), probably faulted. 46 Maruia, on gravel plain of 1 60 598 Si02 (51); Na (165); HCOs Faulted graywacke (Trias- Maruia River. (139); SO, (51); Cl (152); sic). free H2S. 47 do 48 Hanmer, near south base of 40-55 3 1,185 Na (379); HCOs (196); S04 do Kaikoura Mountains. (19); Cl (483); IIBOa (200); gas 96.5 percent CH4. 49 do Creek). 50 Bank of Huruni River, near 34 265 Na, Cl Triassic strata, probably Lake Sumner. faulted. 51 Hot 52 53 30. 5 180 Na, Cl „ 54 Frazer, on east bank of Taipo 82 330 SiOa (91); Na; K; SO,; Cl; dis- Triassic(?) strata River. solved H2S (34). 55 Cedar Flat, near Toaroha 71 440 SiOa (104); Na; K; Cl; SO, River. (295); dissolved HaS (27). 56 1 71 Na, Cl Mesozoic or Paleozoic strata. 57 65 mouth of Brunswick Creek. 58 59 38 640 60 Along Hot Spring Creek near 38 340-600 Ca, Na, S04, Cl junction with Wanganui River. 61 65 62 Near upper Waiho River: 800 1,560 Na, HCO3, Cl 63 1,130 Na, HCO3, Cl 64 Along upper Copeland River: Several small springs Hot 2,033 HCO3 (566); Cl (81). 65 Banks Peninsula, from Heath- 21-28 450 Ca (HCOa)a (87): NaHCOa Upper Tertiary volcanic cote Valley (3 miles north of (73); NaCl (260). rock. Lyttelton) to 10 miles south- west of Lyttelton. 66 21 67 50 miles southwest of Timaru.. 51-68 1 Maximum. 3 Hottest. 8 See also fig. 78. * See also figs. 78, 79. Remarks and additional references Many geysers, one called “Lightning,” and boiling springs for nearly 0.5 mile along a stream and along fault near Mokai. Deposits of siliceous sinter. Bathing resort. Refs. 3552, 3582, 3585, 3586, 3598, 3599, 3623, 3668, 3669. 3670, 3675. Several springs in area of 1 square mile. Analytical data for boiling spring. Deposit of sulfur. Bathing resort. Refs. 3592, 3611, 3675. Several springs and fumaroles. Karapiti fumarole is large steam vent. Analytical data for boiling spring. Refs. 3582,3621,3642, 3661, 3675. Many springs. Analytical data for Crow’s Nest geyser. Deposits of siliceous sinter. Bathing resort. Refs. 3552, 3582, 3623, 3641, 3643, 3655. Several springs. Bathing resort. Refs. 3636, 3654. Geyser, several other springs, and test wells. Analytical data for geyser. Bathing resort. Refs. 3559, 3566 , 3593, 3594 , 3621, 3642. Several springs and fumaroles in an area of steaming ground. Ref. 3584. Hot springs, boiling pools, and fumaroles in area about 800 ft square. Analytical data for water having temperature of 70°C. Refs. 3570, 3584, 3611, 3621. Several small springs. Water contains considerable I. Refs. 3586, 3643, 3666. Water is strongly saline. Gas is 84 percent CH4, 16 percent N2. Refs. 3573, 3616. Several springs having combined flow of 10 imperial gpm. Refs. 3609, 3611, 3651. Ref. 3565. 8 main springs and 1 well 300 ft deep. Combined flow, 50 imperial gpm. Analytical data for water from well. Bathing resort. Refs. 3573, 3589, 3590, 3604, 3611, 3626. 3642. Ref. 3565. Large flow. Ref. 3627. Several springs. Ref. 3651. Small flow. Ref. 3565. Do. Small deposits of sulfur and siliceous sinter. Ref. 3651. Large flow. Strong odor of H2S. Refs. 3565, 3649. Several springs for several miles along the river valley. Small deposits of sulfur and siliceous sinter. Ref. 3651. 3 springs having combined flow of 3 imperial gpm. Refs. 3565, 3649. Several small springs. Free H2S. Refs. 3565, 3649. 2 main springs having combined flow of 100 imperial gpm. Free H2S. Small deposit of silica. Ref. 3649. Several small springs; temperature and flow vary with the season. Ref. 3649. Large flow. Free H2S. Refs. 3565, 3659. Also other small springs. Several springs. Analytical data for spring having largest flow. Small flow. Large flow. Small springs at Lyttelton tunnel, Cass Bay, Rapaki, Motukahara, and in Heathcote Valley. Refs. 3565, 3629. Shallow well. Used for domestic purposes and irrigation. Ref. 3565. Water is sulfurous. Used for bathing. Ref. 3570. 4246 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD PHILIPPINE REPUBLIC The Philippine Republic includes 11 main islands, which form about 92 percent of the total area of the group; 20 others of about 100 to 700 square miles each; and more than 3,000 smaller islands, most of them less than 1 square mile in area. Nearly all the larger islands are mountainous, and the principal ranges trend north-south to northeast-southwest. Part of the Eastern Cordillera of Luzon Island is of crystalline rocks and schist flanked by intensely folded Tertiary sedimentary strata. The Central Cordillera in the northern part of Luzon forms a belt of granite and diorite with some andesite and dacite. Farther west is a range of pre-Tertiary volcanic flows and intrusive rocks flanked by folded sedimentary strata. The Cagayan Valley is a region of folded Tertiary sandstone and shale, and Miocene coral limestone is present in some places at an altitude of as much as 4,000 feet. Basalt and andesite of Tertiary to Recent age cover large areas, especially in southern Luzon. Schist is exposed in the northern part of Mindoro Island, but the principal mountain is of andesite. The long, narrow island of Palawan, farther southwest, has a core chiefly of schist with some plutonic and extrusive rocks. Several prominent peaks are probably volcanic. In the central part of the Philippine group, Mas-bate Island consists of pre-Tertiary sedimentary strata, with diorite intrusives and later mafic volcanic rocks, and extensive areas of marine Miocene deposits. Samar is underlain largely by Tertiary sedimentary strata. Leyte also is composed chiefly of Tertiary strata, but it has a central volcanic range. Panay has a main range that is chiefly andesitic, with some pre-Tertiary sills of diorite; but most of the island is covered by marine Tertiary beds. The axial range of Negros is largely of sedimentary and metamorphic rocks, but there are some volcanic areas in the north and the extreme south. On Cebu and Bohol, pre-Tertiary schist is overlain by folded marine Tertiary strata. Mindanao Island has ranges and plateaus of andesite and basalt, and several volcanic cones. The southwestern part of the island is largely of marine Tertiary strata covered in places by lava flows. About 20 volcanoes in the Philippines are classed as solfataric, and nearly 30 other volcanic cones seem to be extinct (ref. 3689). The volcanoes of northern Luzon, and of Babuyan Claro and other small islands off the north coast, are in nearly straight alinement. Other volcanoes are in southern Luzon, Negros, Mindanao, the small island of Camiguin off the north coast of Mindanao, Basilian (extinct), and Jolo in the far southwest. Most of the thermal springs in the Philippines issue from lava on or near volcanic cones, some of which are still solfataric; but a few springs issue from granite or other types of rock, probably along faults. Little detailed information on the thermal springs seems to be available. Their locations are shown on figure 80, and published information is summarized in the table below. No. on fig. 80 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11A 11 12 13 14 Thermal springs in the Philippine Republic [Data chiefly from refs. 3689, 3698, 3703, 3714. Principal chemical constituents are expressed in parts per million] Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Hot 39 Hot 56.2 56.2 66 Hot Hot Hot Boiling 56 50 45-60 2,114 15 km north of Lubuagan: Crater of Ambalatungan volcano Balotoc, or Mainit (Mayinit), 10 km east of Lubuagan. Large 2,113 1,700 SiOa (195); CaO (128); Na»0 (457); COs (208); SO, (295); Cl (750). HCOs (70); SO, (200); Cl (360).-HCOs (708); SO, (270); Cl (5,000). Bugias. 200 10,800 Remarks and additional references Steam vents and steam explosions near two volcanic craters. Refs. 3700, 3709. Solfataric volcano in main part of island. Probably some fumaroles. Refs. 3687, 3708. Hot springs and solfataras on west flank of volcano. Deposits of sulfur. Refs. 83, 3689, 3699, 3708. Fumaroles on flank of volcano. Refs. 3699, 3708. Several springs. Ref. 3701. Several springs. Many springs and hot gas jets. Deposits of sulfur. Ref. 3688. Many springs and hot gas jets. Ref. 3688. Strong jet of steam. Ref. 3688. Salt workings. Refs. 3696, 3702. Issues from andesite. Refs. 3702, 3717. Do. 4 springs. Analytical data for spring having temperature of 60° C and flowing 40 liters per minute. Water from other springs is less highly mineralized. Ref. 3702.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 247 Thermal springs in the Philippine Republic—Continued No. on fig. 80 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents 15 65 Small HCOs (378); SO, (78); Cl (*,700)- 16 70 17 (max) 70 Fe (450); SO, (3,000); Cl (420) — . 18 60.5 19 52 Small 20 Hot 21 Balongabong, on west bank of Bued River. Klondike, 25 km northwest of Lubang.. 50 22 23 55 (max) 86 Large 1,520 SiOi (41); Ca (134); Na (388); SO, (349); Cl (588). 24 40-60 HCOs (410); SO, (350); Cl (650). 25 Salinas, 25 km southwest of Bayam-bang. 31.3 26 45 27 43 28 55-58 29 38 4,200 1,900 680; 2,200 30 31 32 48 33 Hot 34 40-51 35 35 36 31 37 39 38 Pansol: No. 1 43-47 Large 850 SiOs (135); Ca (39);HCO, (256); SO, (37); Cl (250). No. 2.. 44. 5 39 Los Banos: At base of Mount Maqufling 70 38 20 1,440 SiOs (220); Ca (40); HCOs (270); SO, (30); Cl (500). 40 37. 5 41 Boiling Na (2,584); SO* (2,732); Cl (6,024). Lake. 42 40 43 44 48-60 Warm Hot 41-56 1,800 45 Lanot, on west shore of San Miguel Bay. 46 47 505 48 37 49 40-100 50 North of Mayon volcano: 52 129 100 51 Tancalao, near east base of Mayon volcano. Irosin, or Monbon, 5 km north-northwest of Irosin. Bujan, or Bulusan, near east base of Bulusan volcano. Puerta (Punta?) Galera, northwest of Calapan. East border of Lake Naujaun (Naujan). Near Gasang, on southwest coast of Marinduque Island. Villa Hermosa, on west coast of Samar Island. Billir&n Island: Hot 52 Warm 44.5 Hot Hot Hot Hot 42 53 HCO3, Cl 54 5,878 Na, HCO3, SO4 55 56 1,178 450; 750 57 58 Cajficao, on west side of Guinon volcano. 59 Hot Hot Small 60 Mount Himalacagan (Manacagan), near Burauen. 37.5 (Mount Danfin, near Kasiboi (Casaboy) ■1 volcano. 63 (max) Hot 61 62 Palawan Island: 63 48.9 10,500 6,025 460 64 Hot Mambucal, on northwest slope of Can-laon, or Malaspina, volcano. Mambajao, on southwest slope of Can-laon, or Malaspina, volcano. Guigulngan 39 65 Hot Warm 66 595 Ca(HCOs)s; NaCl 735-S14 0—65-----17 Remarks and additional references Water strongly saline; highly radioactive. Ref. 3702. Several springs. Solfatara. Temperature and analytical data are for condensed vapor. Water is highly radioactive. Ref. 3702. Water is very saline. Refs. 3702, 3717. Several springs issuing from andesite. Analytical data for hottest water. Refs. 3702, 3717. Water very saline. Salt workings. Ref. 3696. Several springs. 2 springs. Several springs. Water used for bathing. Refs. 3680, 3717. Water is radioactive. Refs. 3680, 3689, 3690, 3705, 3708, 3717. Water is radioactive. Resort. Ref. 3690. Lake, 1 km in diameter. Site of Yellow and Green Lakes before eruption in 1911. Refs. 20, 3685, 3689, 3693, 3705, 3708, 3712. Also several other springs nearby. Water is radioactive. Ref. 3717. Solfataric volcano. Probably some fuma-roles. Water is ferruginous. Much free COj. Resort. Ref. 3684. Several springs. Ref. 3684. Do. Several springs. Free HjS. Water used for bathing. Refs. 3684, 3689, 3701. Maintains pool 20 meters in diameter. Free HjS. Deposit of siliceous sinter. Refs. 3684, 3689. Also solfataras. Refs. 3689, 3708. Free COj. Water is ferruginous. Also solfataras. Ref 3708. Several hot springs. Resort. Ref. 3701. Several springs and solfataras. Ref. 3712. 2 springs. Several springs near sulfur mines. Refs. 3679, 3689. Solfataras and fumaroles. Deposit of sulfur. Refs. 3679, 3683, 3689. Water is sulfurous. Ref. 3683. Do. Flows of several springs combine to make stream 12 ft wide. Deposits of sulfur and siliceous sinter. Also Kasiboi (Casiboy) solfatara. Refs. 3683, 3689. Several springs. Also To-od and Pangu-jaan solfataras and several fumaroles. Ref. 3683. Solfataras and fumaroles. Do. Water is strongly saline. Several springs. Water is saline. Water used for bathing. Several springs.248 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Thermal springs in the Philippine Republic—Continued No. on fig. 80 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Flow (liters per minute) Total dissolved solids (ppm) Principal chemical constituents Remarks and additional references 67 68 Small Water is sulfurous. Hot 4,600 69 Fumaroles and solfataras. Deposits of sulfur. Ref. 3689. Several springs. Water is sulfurous. Several springs on shore between high and low tides. 70 Hot 71 72 36.5 73 34.5 2 main springs. 74 (max) 33 76 34.2 1 main and several small springs. Several springs. Do. 76 2,000 77 47. 5-63. 5 78 35; 35.8 36.2 2 main springs. 79 80 81 63 5,720 Several springs near shore. Water is strongly saline. Refs. 3686, 3708-3710. Refs. 3691, 3706 , 3712. Several springs. Ref. 3691. Do. Camiguin Island. (max) 1,700 82 Balian, near coast 8 km north of mouth of Sibugeuy River. 83 Warm 84 Sibuguey River. Sofataras and probably fumaroles. Ref. 3708. 85 38 86 Apo volcano: Several large solfataras. Refs. 3689, 3708. Jetting springs and fumaroles. Water is sulfurous. Ref. 3689. Several springs. Several springs issuing from volcanic rock. Also solfataras. 2 springs. Ref. 3715. Steam vents? Ref. 3715. Hot 87 88 89 Hot 34 Balut Island: (max) Hot SAMOA The main islands of the Samoan group lie about 500 to 700 statute miles northeast of the eastern part of the Fiji group, as indicated on figure 72. The islands are composed almost entirely of volcanic materials, although they are partly surrounded by coral reefs. The main islands are recognized to be on a great fracture zone. Hot springs do not seem to be specifically mentioned in the literature concerning the islands, but according to Jensen (ref. 3718), large fumaroles emitting steam and acid vapors have accompanied volcanic eruptions on Savaii Island, the largest of the group. It seems probable that at some periods between the eruptions, hot springs, solfataras, and other manifestations of thermal activity may be present. SOLOMON ISLANDS The Solomon Islands form a double chain of about a dozen main islands and many smaller ones, which extend from 100 to 600 statute miles southeastward from the Bismarck Archipelago, as shown on figure 72. Bougainville, near the northwest end of the group, is the largest island. Its highest mountain rises above 10,000 feet altitude. All the large and some of the smaller islands of the Solomons seem to be of volcanic rock coated with uplifted coral reefs along the coast. Other small islands seem to be entirely of coral limestone, but this rock probably overlies volcanic rock. Data on hot springs and other thermal activity on several of the islands are given in the following table. Thermal sprinps in the Solomon Islands [Data from refs. 3719, 3720] No. on fig. 72 Name or location Temperature of water (°C) Remarks 1 Mount Bogana, on Bougainville Probably solfataras and fu- 2 Island. Simbo (Zimboa?) Island: Crater of volcano 70-98 maroles. Several springs. Side of crater 70-92 Fumaroles exhaling H2S and Border of lagoon in south 78 SO3. Heat used for cooking. Several springs and fuma- part of island. Near east coast. Hot roles. Issue below low-tide level. 3 Fumaroles. Deposits of sul- 4 fur. 5 Savo Island, near northwest end Hot maroles. Several springs near shore of Guadalcanal Island. and on beach.DESCRIPTION OF THERMAL SPRINGS 249 118° 120° 122° 124° 126° 128° Figure 80.—Philippine Republic showing location of thermal springs and principal volcanoes (all solfataric). Springs chiefly from ref. 3698 ; volcanoes from ref. 3689.250 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD SUMATRA A chain of high mountains that rise steeply from the southwest coast extends throughout the length of Sumatra. Their northeastern slopes descend more gradually to broad alluvial plains that border the coast on the north. Ancient gneiss, schist, quartzite, and granite intrusives form the cores of the main ranges. In the northwest these rocks are overlain by Upper Cretaceous slate and limestone; in the southeast they are overlain by steeply dipping beds of Triassic clay and sandstone and some Cretaceous sedimentary rocks. Eocene beds that have commercial coal seams are present in the central part of the island. Marine Tertiary beds cover most of the lower lands, and there are oil-bearing deposits near the east coast. In this region are also Pliocene deposits, largely covered by alluvium. Bands of eruptive andesite extend along the lower slopes of the mountains near the southwest coast, and along the crests of the ranges are numerous volcanic cones, some of which contain lakes. About 11 mountains are considered to be active volcanoes, which occasionally throw out ash and scoria. Several others are in the solfataric stage. Although there seems to be little information available on thermal activity at and near the main volcanoes, the recorded thermal springs seem to be associated with volcanoes. Their location is shown on figure 74, and data concerning them are presented in the table below. TONGA ISLANDS The Tonga Islands (Friendly Islands) consist of a north-south-trending chain of many small islands about 200 to 600 miles south of the Samoan group, as indicated on figure 72. Most of these islands are low and of coral formation, but in the northern half of the chain are several high islands of volcanic origin. Some of the islands are of submarine volcanic tuff penetrated by dikes of andesite and diabase. Several of the islands have active volcanoes, and a zone of volcanic activity is recognized as passing along the west side of the northern part, of the chain. Niuafoou Island [Good Hope Island on some early maps] is the northernmost in the chain. It was described by Jaggar (ref. 3729) as being a volcanic crater about 3 miles in diameter, with a central lake of fresh water whose surface was 70 feet above sea level. The crater erupted lava in 1853, and had a great steam-blast eruption in 1886. There were eruptions also in 1912 and 1929. Jaggar does not specifically mention hot springs, but at Niuafoou and other active volcanoes in the Tonga Islands there may be hot springs and fuma-roles. [The crater of Niuafoou erupted again in 1946, after which it was reported that all native residents moved to other islands.] Thermal springs in Sumatra [Locations of unnumbered springs not identified. All, or nearly all, springs issue from lava] No. on fig. 74 Name or location Temperature of water (°F) Remarks and references 1 Bateekeubeue volcano Hot Fumaroles and solfataras. 2 Boer-in-Telong volcano Hot Do. 3 Base of Goenoeng Rate (Rati), near Natal. Warm 1 main spring. Free HaS. 4 Sorik-merapi volcano Hot Fumaroles and solfataras. Ref 83. 5 Tandikat volcano Hot Do. 6 Goenoeng Merapi (Gunung-berapi) volcano. Hot Do. 7 Near Bukit-sipinang, between Goenoeng Merapi and the sea. Hot 8 Priangan, near Goenoeng Merapi. Hot Several springs called Pan-churan Tujuh. Water used for bathing. Ref. 3723. 9 Flank of Maninyu volcano between Goenoeng Merapi and the sea. 102.5 Low mineral content. 10 Talang volcano Hot Fumaroles and solfataras. 11 Goenoeng Kerintji volcano Hot Do. 12 Goenoeng Soembing volcano Hot Do. 13 Near Tanjong village, northeast of Opu. 120-170 Several springs in marsh area 55 meters in diameter. Water is bitter, astringent. Much free HaS. Ref. 3723. 14 Near Opu (Yepu) River 100 Several springs, combined flow fairly large. Ref. 3723. 15 Kaba volcano Hot Fumaroles and solfataras. 16 East base of Kaba volcano 170 Several springs. Much vapor. 17 Dempo volcano Hot Fumaroles and solfataras. 18 Lake Ranau, in ancient crater on north slope of Siminung Mountain. 127 19 Margin of Pilomasin Basin, northeast of Siminung Mountain. Hot Several springs along a line. Much evolved COj, HaS. Ref. 3728. 20 Goenoeng Radjabasa volcano Hot Fumaroles and solfataras. 21 Near Krakatoa volcano. Hot Intermittent steam vents in small islands. Refs. 3721, 3726. Near small river Ayer Grau (Abu). Hot Springs bubbling up at several places. Ref. 3723. Near Padang-baru, 1 km south of Bondjol. Warm Ref. 3524. VOLCANO ISLANDS The Volcano Islands form a group of four small islands about 4,000 statute miles west of Honolulu, as shown on figure 72. I wo Jima (I5-sima, or Sulphur Island) is the largest in the group. It is 5.2 miles long and is formed of two volcanic mountains connected by an isthmus of lowland. It was well known during World War II as a Japanese stronghold. The geology and petrography of the island were studied by Tsuya (ref. 3731), and the geology and water resources were described by Swenson (ref. 3730). The northern highland is almost entirely of volcanic tuff. Mount Suribachi at the south end is of andesite overlain by cinders and scoria. The intervening lowland is of loose volcanic ash and cinders. There are many fumaroles on Iwo Jima. According to Swenson (ref. 3730), they are especially numerous in the crater of Suribachi, on the west beach, and in a belt extending northeasterly across the center of Moto Mountain. Swenson also reports that military-supply wells drilled to sea level in the central lowland yielded warm to hot water.8 8 A volcano on Cuguan Island, farther south, was reported to emit vapor from many openings (Fuchs, ref. 43).BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 251 ANTARCTIC REGION (Balleny Islands, Ross Island, and South Shetland Islands) The Balleny Islands, about 1,500 statute miles south of New Zealand, are a volcanic group. (See figs. 1, 81.) According to Fuchs (ref. 43), the volcano on Bukle Is- Figure 82.—Ross Island area, Antarctica, showing location of volcanic mountains. From ref. 3733. Figure 81.—Part of the South Polar region showing location of Balleny Islands and Ross Island. land was emitting vapor from many openings when the islands were discovered in 1839. Ross Island, in the Ross Sea about 2,200 miles south of New Zealand, is volcanic. (See figs. 81, 82.) Sir Ernest Shackleton (ref. 3733) states that Ross Island is formed of four large volcanic cones, those of Mounts Bird, Erebus, Terra Nova, and Terror. The last three seem to be on an west-east fault, and probably another fault passes through Mount Bird and Mount Erebus. The latter stands as a sentinel at the base of the Great Ice Barrier. From the side of its main crater rises an active cone, generally giving off steam and other vapors. Ice mounds are formed by the freezing of vapor from many fumaroles. The greatest steam eruptions come from a locality between the cones of Mount Bird and Mount Erebus. The South Shetland Islands, about 500 miles south-southeast of Cape Horn, are volcanic. (See fig. 1.) Fuchs (ref. 43) states that a volcano on Deception Island often emits steam and other vapors from many openings. BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES The first group of references in the following bibliography consists of 119 titles arranged alphabetically by author. Most of these contain information on the physical and chemical conditions under which thermal springs may occur and (or) on thermal activity in gen- eral. Also included in the first group are a few references that contain information on several specific springs or volcanic areas which are so widely separated geographically that placement of the references under a geographic heading was not feasible. References 26-28, 30, 43, 73, and 105 fall in this latter category. The other 3,614 references in this bibliography are grouped according to the geographic areas or countries to which they pertain. As in the first group, the references under the geographic headings are arranged alphabetically by author. GENERAL REFERENCES 1. Adams, Leason Heberling, 1924, A physical source of heat in springs: Jour. Geology, v. 32, no. 3, p. 191-194. 2. Allen, Eugene Thomas, 1936, Thermal springs; criteria of their origin and factors in their differentiation [abs.] : Washington Acad. Sci. Jour., v. 26, no. 9, p. 393. 3. Anatolik, Karl, 1891, Physikalische Schulverseiche. IV, Versuche ueber Licht, Warme, und Electrizitat: Zeitschr. phys. chem. Unterricht, v. 4, no. 6, p. 273-289, figs. 68-94. 4. Andreae, Achilles, 1893a, Ueber die kiinstliche Nachahmung des Geysirphtinomens: Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1893, v. 2, p. 1-18, 1 pi., 1 fig. 5. 1893b, Nachtrag intermittirende Springquellen ohne Dampf Oder Gasgeysire: Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1893, v. 2, p. 19-25, 1 pi. 6. 1893c, Ueber die Nachahmung verschiedener Geysirtypen und ueber Gasgeysirs: Naturh.-med. Ver. Heidelberg, new ser., v. 5, no. 1, p. 83-88. 7. Arago, Dominique Francois Jean, 1835, Observations il faire sur les sources thermales: Annuaire Bur. Longitudes, p. 265-272.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 252 8. Arago, Dominique Francois Jean, 1838, Instructions con- cernant la m^teorologie et la physique du globe: Acad, sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 7, p. 206-224. Postulates that the temperature of the earth at Bone in Algeria could not have changed more than 4°C in about 2,000 years because the springs that supplied ancient baths still had a water temperature of 96.3°C in 1785. 9. Barth, Thomas Fredrik Weiby, 1940, Pristine and contami- nated rock magma and thermal water: Bull, volcanol., ser. 2, v. 6, p. 84-87, 1 pi., 1 fig.; 1950, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America : v. 14, 1949, p. 15. 10. Beetz, W., 1862, Ueber die Farbe des Wassers: Annalen Physik u. Chemie (Poggendorff), v. 115, p. 137-147, 1 pi.; English translation, in London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philos. Mag. and Jour. Sci., ser. 4, v. 24, no. 160, p. 218-224, 1 pi. 11. Behre, Charles Henry, Jr., and Garrels, Robert Minard, 1943, Ground water and hydrothermal deposits (discussion) : Econ. Geology, v. 38, no. 1, p. 65-69. 12. Bischof, Karl Gustav Christoph, 1836-38, On the cause of temperature of hot and thermal springs, and on the bearings of this subject as connected with the general question regarding the internal temperature of the earth: Edinburgh New Philos. Jour., v. 20, p. 329-376, 1836; v. 23, p. 330-398, 1837; v. 24, p. 132-164, 252-300, 1838. 13. 1839, On the natural history of earthquakes and volcanoes : Edinburgh New Philos. Jour., v. 26, p. 25-81, 347-386, 4 figs.; Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, v. 36, no. 2, p. 230-282; v. 37, no. 1, p. 41-77. 14. 1846-54, Lehrbuch der chemischen und physikalischen Geologie: Bonn, 2 v.; 1854-55, translated into English by Benj. H. Paul and J. Drummond, with title, Elements of chemical and physical geology: London, Cavendish Society, 3 v. 15. Blum, Wilhelm, 1853, Naturliche und kiinstliche Mineral- wasser : Brunswick (Braunschweig), Germany. 16. Bonney, Thomas George, 1912, Volcanoes, their structure and significance: 3d ed., London, J. Murray, 379 p., 16 pis., 21 figs.; 1899 ed., New York, G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 321 p. Includes chart showing the distribution of active and recently active volcanoes throughout the world. Mentions mud volcanoes, solfataras, steam vents, and thermal springs in several volcanic areas. 17. Boue, Ami, 1831, Compte rendu des progr£s de la geologie: Soc. g£ol. France Bull., v. 1, no. 5, p. 94-97. 18. Chamberlin, Thomas Chrowder, and Salisbury, Rollin D., 1906, Geology: 2d ed., New York, H. Holt & Co., 3 v.; v. 1, Geologic processes and their results, 684 p., 24 pis., 471 figs., 3 tables. Explains probable mechanism of geyser action. Also describes geysers and hot springs in Yellowstone National Park. 19. Champlin, John D., Jr., 1874, Geysers: New York and Lon- don, D. Appleton & Co., American Cyclopaedia, v. 7, p. 783-789, 3 figs. A general description of geysers in Iceland, New Zealand, and the United States. 20. Clarke, Frank Wigglesworth, 1924, The data of geochem- istry : 5th ed., U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 770, 841 p. Presents chemical analyses of water samples from many sources throughout the world; includes several of thermal springs. 21. Coleman, Satis Narrona, 1946, Volcanoes, new and old : New York, John Day Co.; Toronto, Canada, Longmans, Green & Co., 222 p., 96 illus., 2 maps. 22. Dana, James Dwight, 1895, Manual of geology : 4th ed., New York, American Book Co., 1088 p., 1,575 figs. 23. Daubeny, Charles, 1830, Reflexions chimico-g£ologiques sur les eaux min^rales et leur origine, suggerees par la lecture de deux ouvrages, celui de M. Scudamore, sur les eaux de Buxton, Matlock, * * * et celui de M. le D. G. Bischof, sur les sources volcaniques: Jour, geologie, v. 2, p. 113-136. 24. 1831, On the development of azotic gas in warm springs: Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 1st ser., v. 20, p. 383; extracted by Prof. J. Griscom. 25. 1831, Remarks on thermal springs and their connexion with volcanoes: Edinburgh New Philos. Jour., v. 12, Oct. 1831-Apr. 1832, p. 49-78, 1 pi.; 1832, Annalen Chemie (Liebig), v. 3, p. 179-201. 26. 1837, Report on the present state of our knowledge with respect to mineral and thermal waters: British Assoc. Adv. Sci., 6th Mtg., 1836, Rept., p. 1-95; published in installments, Inst. France et stranger, Jour. gen. soc. et Travaux sci., v. 7, 1839. Includes data on 7 thermal springs in Austria, 7 in the British Isles, 2 in Czechoslovakia, 65 in France, 16 in Germany, 14 in Hungary, 39 in Italy and nearby islands, 6 in Portugal, 5 in Spain, 7 in Switzerland, and 5 in Yugoslavia; also data on several in Greece, Iceland, and Turkey. 27. 1848, A description of active and extinct volcanoes, of earthquakes, and of thermal springs, with remarks on the causes of these phenomena, the character of their respective products, and their influence on the past and present condition of the globe: 2d ed., London, R. and J. E. Taylor, 743 p., 4 pis., 11 maps. Presents map showing locations of principal thermal springs in the eastern part of the United States. Also includes nearly the same data on thermal springs as given in reference 26. 28. Daubree, Gabriel Auguste, 1887, Les eaux souterraines a l’5poque actuelle; leur regime, leur temperature, leur composition au point de vue du role qui leur revient dans l’economie de l’6coree terrestre: Paris, Ch. Dunod., 2 v.; v. 1,455 p., 190 figs.; v. 2,302 p., 43 figs. Includes data on temperature and flow of water from the principal thermal springs in North Africa and the temperature of the water from many noted springs in Europe, Asia, the Americas, and ocean islands. 29. Day, Arthur Louis, 1938, Volcanoes, geysers, and hot springs: Sci. Monthly, v. 47, Oct., p. 309-315; Franklin Inst. Jour., v. 226, no. 3, p. 341-352. 30. deLaunay, Louis, 1899, Recherche, captage et aniOiagement des sources thermo-minerales. Origine des eaux thermo-minerales, geologie, propriety's physiques et chimiques: Paris, Libraire Polytech.; Baudry et Cie., 642 p., 160 figs. Discusses the origin, chemical composition, temperature, and physical properties of thermal waters, also the factors affecting rate of discharge. Summarizes data on thermal springs in various parts of Europe, the Caucasus, and Algeria, and presents maps showing the locations of the springs. Mentions numerous thermal springs in other parts of the world. 31. 1909, Sur les traits characteristiques des griffons hydro-thermaux: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 149, p. 1158-1161.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 253 32. Delkeskamp, Rudolf, 1903, Die genesis der Thermalquellen von Ems, Wiesbaden und Kreuznach und deren Beziehung zu den Erz und Mineralgangen des Taunus und der Pfalz: Paper read at meeting of Deutsche Naturf. u. Aerzte, Cassel, Germany, Sept. 1903. 33. 1904, Die Bedeutung der Geologie fur die Balneologie: Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 12, p. 202-209, 2 figs. 34. 1905, Juvenile und vadose Quellen: Balneol. Zeitung, v. 16, no. 5. 35. 1906, Vadose und juvenile Kohlensaure: Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 14, p. 33-47,1 fig. 36. 1908a, Die Entstehung der Mineralquellen: Zeitschr. gesammte Mineralwasser-u. Kohlensaureindustrie, no. 14, p. 451^454. 37. 1908b, Fortschritte auf dem Gebiete der Erforschung der Mineralquellen: Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 16, no. 10, p. 401-443. 38. Desio, Ardito, 1949, Considerazioni sulla classificazione delle acque termominerali: Inst, geologia, palaontologia, e geo-grafia fisica, Univ. Milano, Ser. G., Pub. 44; extract from Soc. geol. italiana Bol. 66, p. 5-6, 1947 [1948]. 39. Donny, F., 1846, Sur la cohesion des liquides, et sur leur adherence aux corps solides: Annales chimie et physique, ser. 3, v. 16, p. 167-190, 1 pi.; also published as Ueber die Cohasion der Fluessigkeiten und deren Adhaerenz an starren Koerpen: Annalen Physik (Poggendorff), v. 67, p. 562-584. 40. Elie de Beaumont, Jean Baptiste Armand Louis Leonce, 1847, Sur les emanations volcaniques et mf'talliftres: Soc. g6ol. France, ser. 2, Bull. 4, pt. 2, p. 1249-1333; 1850, Edinburgh New Philos. Jour., v. 48, p. 94-98; 1849, Deutsche geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., v. 11, p. 388-401. 41. Fix, Philip Forsyth, 1939, Nomenclature of geyser eruptions : Jour. Geology, v. 47, no. 1, p. 99-104. 42. Fricke, Karl, 1953 [Heavy metal content of mineral springs] : Zeitschr. Erzbergbau u. Metallhiittenwesen, v. 6, p. 257-265; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 10774. 43. Fuchs, Karl Wilhelm, 1895, Les volcans et les tremblements de terre: 6th ed., Paris, F. Alcan., Bibliotheque Sci. Intemat., 279 p., 36 figs., map. Describes volcanic areas throughout the world, including mention of solfataras, fumaroles, and hot springs. Presents map of the world showing distribution of volcanoes. 44. Gautier, Armand, 1895, Chimie min^rale : Paris. Contains a chapter on thermal waters. 45. 1906, La genese des eaux thermales et ses rapports avec le volcanisme: Annales mines Mem., ser. 10, v. 9, p. 316-370; translated into English and condensed by F. L. Ransome, Econ. Geology, v. 1, no. 7, p. 688-697. 46. 1910, Caracteres diflYrentiels des eaux de source d’origine superficielle on met£orique et des eaux d’origine centrale ou ignee: Acad sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 150, no. 8, p. 436-441. 47. Geikie, Archibald, 1903, Text-book of geology: 4th ed., Lon- don, Macmillan & Co., 2 v.; v. 1, p. 1-702, figs. 1-292; v. 2, p. 705-1472, figs. 293-508. Includes discussion of volcanic areas and describes such related features as fumaroles, geysers, mud volcanoes, and hot springs. 48. Gilluly, James; Waters, Aaron Clement; and Woodford, Alfred Oswald, 1951, Principles of geology: San Fran- cisco, Calif., W. H. Freeman, 631 p., illus. Briefly discusses the relation of fumaroles, geysers, and hot springs to volcanoes. 49. Graham, J. C., 1893, Some experiments with an artificial geyser: Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., v. 45, p. 54—60, 2 figs. 50. Henrich, Ferdinand, 1910, liber die Einwirkung von kohlen- saureholtigem Wasser auf Gesteine und fiber den Ursprung und den Mechanismus der kohlensaureffihrenden Ther-men: Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 18, p. 85-94. 51. Hills, Thomas McDougall, and Warthin, Aldred Scott, Jr., 1942, Experiments in geyser action: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 240, no. 7, p. 512-517. 52. International Volcanological Association, 1951-58, Cata- logue of active volcanoes of the world including solfatara fields: Naples, Italy, Francesco Giannini & Sons. See references 352, 748, 800, 2434, 3471, 3707, and 3725 for the parts of this report pertaining to specific areas. 53. Jaggar, Thomas Augustus, Jr., 1898, Some conditions af- fecting geyser eruption: Am. Jour. Sci., 4th ser., v. 5, p. 323-333, 1 fig.; abridged, Nature [London], v. 58, no. 1498, p. 261-263. 54. Judd, John Wesley, 1881, Volcanoes—What they are and what they teach: New York and London, D. Appleton & Co., 381 p., 96 illus. Contains several incidental references to hot springs. 55. Keilhack, Karl, 1912, Lehrbuch der Grundwasser und Quel- lenkunde: Berlin. 56. 1916, Geologie der Mineralquellen und Thermen, der Mineralmoore und Mineralschlamme: Handb. Balneologie, v. 1, p. 45-116. 57. Kemp, James Furman, 1908, Waters, meteoric and mag- matic : Mining Sci. Press, v. 96, no. 21, p. 705-708. 58. LaPlace, Pierre Simon, 1820, Sur la diminution de la dur<5e du jour par le refroidissement de la terre: Jour, physique, chimie, et histoire nat., v. 90, p. 401-404. 59. LeConte, Joseph, 1891, Elements of geology: 3d ed., New York, D. Appleton & Co., 640 p., 982 figs. Discusses geysers as a phase of volcanic activity and describes the principal geysers of Iceland and Yellowstone National Park. 60. LeCoq, Henri, 1864, Les faux minerales consider^es dans leurs rapports avec la chimie et la geologie: Paris, J. Rothschild, 463 p. Contains information on variations in the chemical composition and temperature of water from thermal springs. 61. Lindgren, Waldemar, 1906, Juvenile and vadose springs, by Rudolph Delkeskamp: Econ. Geology, v. 1, no. 6, p. 602-612. 62. 1913, Mineral deposits : New York, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 883 p., 257 figs; 1933 ed., 930 p. Discusses the chemical composition of ground water, also the relation between some mineral deposits and mineral springs. 63. 1927, Hot springs and magmatic emanations: Econ. Geology, v. 22, p. 189-192. 64. 1935, Waters, magmatic and meteoric: Econ. Geology, v. 30, no. 5, p. 463-477. 65. Lyell, Charles, 1854, Principles of geology: 9th ed., New York, D. Appleton & Co., 834 p., 4 pis., 120 figs. Briefly discusses the source of heat and gases in water from springs, also the theories of geyser action. 66. Mercalli, Giuseppe, 1907, I vulcani attivi della terra: Mi- lano, Italy, U. Hoepli, 422 p., 26 pis., 82 figs.254 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 67. Morey, George Washington, 1924, Relation of crystallization to the water content and vapor pressure of water in a cooling magma: Jour. Geology, v. 32, no. 4, p. 291-295. 68. Moureu, Charles, 1908, Les degagements gazeux des sources thermales. Radioactivity et “gaz rares” : Rev. sci. [Paris], ser. 5, v. 9, no. 12, p. 353-361. 69. Munby, A. E., 1902, A model geyser: Nature [London], v. 65, no. 1681, p. 247,1 fig. 70. Palmer, Chase, 1911, The geochemical interpretation of water analyses: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 479, 31 p. 71. Pax, F., 1937, Biologie der Thermalquellen: Balneologie, v. 4, no. 5, p. 250. 72. Peale, Albert Charles, 1877, Thermal springs and geysers: Penn Monthly, p. 507-528, Philadelphia, Pa. 73. 1883, Thermal springs, in Hayden, F. V., Report on progress of the exploration in Wyoming and Idaho for the year 1878: U.S. Geol. and Geog. Survey Terr. 12th Ann. Rept., 1878, pt. 2, p. 63-454, 45 pis., 32 figs., 11 maps. Briefly describes geyser areas of New Zealand and Iceland and presents detailed information on springs and geysers in Yellowstone National Park. Also lists 200 localities in the United States, other than in Yellowstone National Park, where thermal springs are known and summarizes the occurrence of thermal springs throughout the world. Contains many references to publications that include information on thermal springs in various countries. 74. 1884, The world’s geyser regions: Pop. Sci. Monthly, v. 25, p. 494-508, 6 figs. Contains maps showing the locations of geysers in Iceland, Yellowstone National Park, and New Zealand. Also describes the principal geysers in these areas and several spouting springs (pseudogeysers) elsewhere in the world. 75. Per ret, Frank Alvord, 1950, Volcanological observations: Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 549, 162 p., 117 figs. 76. Petersen, J., 1889, Darstellung der Geisererscheinungen: Neuces Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1889, Abt. 2, p. 65-72, 2 figs. 77. Pieruccini, Renzo, 1952 [Geochemical aspects of problems concerning spring and thermal mineral waters] : Inter-nat. balneologie Kong. Ber., ISMH Deutsche, p. 130-143; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 8722. 78. Raguin, Eugene, 1949, Geologie des cites mineraux: 2d ed., Paris, Masson, 641 p., 145 figs. Discusses the origin, development, and importance of thermal springs, their geologic relationships, their discharge regime, and the chemical and physical properties of their water. 79. Reclus, Jean Jacques Elisee, 1872, The earth, a descriptive history of the phenomena of the life of the globe; translated into English by B. B. Woodward and edited by Henry Woodward: New York, Harper & Bros., p. 13-567, 234 figs., 23 maps. 80. 1884, Geysers and hot springs, in Geographie Universelle: v. 9. [19 v., 1876-94; French and English editions.] 81. Reynolds, S. H., 1941, Fumeroles, hot springs, and geysers: Bristol Naturalists’ Soc. Proc., ser. 4, v. 9, pt. 2, p. 251-263, 6 pis.; 1949, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 13, 1948, p. 223. 82. Rubey, William Walden, 1951, Geologic history of sea water; an attempt to state the problem : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 62, no. 9, p. 1111-1147, 4 figs., 6 tables. Suggests that hot springs may be the source of the “excess” volatiles that cannot be accounted for by rock weathering. 83. Sapper, Karl Theodor, 1927, Vulkankunde: Stuttgart, Ger- many, J. Engelhorns nachfolgender, 424 p., 30 pis., 32 figs., maps. Tabulates known volcanoes by regions and shows locations of volcanoes in principal regions on maps. Mentions hot springs, solfataras, and fumaroles near many volcanoes. 84. Schmitt, Harrison, 1950a, The fumarolic-hot spring and “epithermal” mineral deposit environment: Colorado School Mines Quart., v. 45, no. 1-B, p. 209-229. 85. 1950b, Origin of the “epithermal” mineral deposits: Econ. Geology, v. 45, no. 3, p. 191-200. 86. Schneider, Karl, 1913, Beitrage zur Theorie der heissen Quellen: Geologische Rundschau. Zeitschr. allg. Geologie, v. 4, p. 65-102, 2 pis., 3 figs. 87. Sherzer, William H., 1933, An interpretation of Bunsen’s geyser theory: Jour. Geology, v. 41, p. 501-512, 2 figs. 88. Sosman, Robert Browning, 1924, Notes on the discussion of the papers presented in the symposium on hot springs, and General summary of the symposium on hot springs : Jour. Geology, v. 32, no. 6, p. 464—471. Papers presented at the symposium are references 1, 67, 182, 198, 237, 238, 543, 693, 829, 1268, and 2043 in this bibliography. The papers are in general agreement that the source of the water issuing from thermal springs is chiefly meteoric, but that in some places it may be partly juvenile; also, that the source of heat in most springs and fumaroles of high temperature is subcrustal magma. 89. Stiny, Josef, 1933, Die Quellen. Die geologischen Grund- lagen der quellenkunde fiir Ingenieure aller Fachrichtun-gen sowie fiir Studierende der Naturwissenschaften: Vienna, J. Springer, 255 p., 154 figs. Discusses the various mineral substances in solution in natural waters. Lists 30 spring localities. 90. Stockmayer, Siegfried, 1928, Die Biologie und Naturschutz der Mineralquel'len: Berlin, Zeitschr. Wiss. Baeder- kunde. Osterreichisches Baderbuch, p. 85-92. A revision of reference 1304. 91. Stutzer, O., 1910, Juvenile Quellen: Internat. Geol. Cong., 11th, Stockholm 1910, Abt. 4, Vortrag 21, p. 1-8; Rev., Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 18, p. 346-351, 1910. 92. Suess, Eduard, 1902a, Ueber heisse Quellen: Gesell. deut- schen Naturf. u. Aerzte Verh. (Leipzig), v. 74, p. 133-151; Naturw. Rundschau, v. 17, p. 585-588, 597-600, 609-611; 1903, translated into English by D. H. Newland, in Eng. Mining Jour., v. 76, p. 8-10, 52-53. 93. 1902b, Hot springs and volcanic phenomena [abs.] : Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 20, no. 5, p. 517-522; Prometheus [Berlin], v. 14, nos. 690-692. 1903. 94. Tazieff, Haroun, 1952, Craters of fire: London, H. Hamil- ton, 239 p., 14 pis., 17 figs. [Translated from the French by Eithne Wilkins.] Lists about 490 named volcanoes. Mentions several thermal springs related to volcanism. 95. Thorkelsson, Thorkell, 1928, On the geyser theory: Philos. Mag., ser. 7, v. 5, p. 441—443. 96. Tyrrell, George Walter, 1931, Volcanoes: London, T. But- terworth, Ltd., 252 p., 28 figs. Contains a general description of geysers in Iceland and of hot springs in the Lassen Volcanic National Park in northern California.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 255 97. Verhoogen, Jean, 1946, Volcanic heat: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 244, no. 11, p. 745-771. 98. Vouk, Vale, 1923, Die Probleme der Biologie der Thermen: Internat. Rev. gesamten Hydrobiologie u. H.vdrographie, v. 11, p. 89-99. 99. 1937, Vergleichende biologische Studien iiber Thermen: Internat. Acad. Yougoslav. Sci. Zagreb, Cl. math., Bull. 31, p. 50-68. 100. 1948 [Biological properties of the thermal waters and their significance for balneology]: Internat. Acad. Yougoslav. Sci. Bull., new ser., L, 1. 101. 1950, Grundriss zu einer Balneobiologie der Thermen: Basel, Switzerland, Lehrbucher und Monographien aus dem Gebiete der exakten Wissenschaften, Reihe der ex-perimentalien Biologie, v. 5, 88 p., 22 figs. Summarizes the biologic relations of thermal springs. Includes bibliography of 133 papers on the subject. 102. Wagner, 1929, Katalytische Stoffe in den Heilquellen: Schles. Baeder Zeitung, v. 26, p. 67-68, 75-76; abs., Was-ser u. Abwasser, v. 26, no. 4, p. 196. 103. Waring, Gerald Ashley, 1951, Summary of literature on thermal springs: Union G£od. et Gdophys. Internat.; Assoc. Hydrologie Sci. Assemble G6n., Bruxelles 1951, Proc., v. 2, p. 289-293. 104. 1953, The occurrence and distribution of thermal springs: Pacific Sci. Cong., 7th, New Zealand 1949, Proc., v. 2, p. 439—448. 105. Weber, Frederick Parkes, 1902, Climatology, health re- sorts—mineral springs, with the collaboration for America of Guy Hinsdale: Philadelphia, Pa., P. Blakiston’s Son & Co., 2 v., illus., maps, diagrams. 106. Weed, Walter Harvey, 1890, Geysers: [New York] Colum- bia Univ. School Mines Quart., v. 11, no. 4, p. 289-306. 107. 1893, Geysers: Smithsonian Inst. Ann. Rept. to July 1891, p. 163-178,1 fig. Discusses the occurrence, character, and mechanism of geysers. Includes short description of geysers im Iceland, Yellowstone National Park, and New Zealand. 108. White, Donald Edward, 1954, Hydrothermal alteration and other characteristics of five explored hot-spring systems [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 65, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 1325-1326. Describes hydrothermal alteration in Upper Basin and Norris Basin of Yellowstone National Park, Steamboat Springs in Nevada, Sulphur Bank in California, and Wairakei in New Zealand. 109. 1955, Thermal springs and epithermal ore deposits: Econ. Geology, Fiftieth Anniversary Volume, p. 100-154. Describes ore deposits that seem to be related to existing or former thermal springs. Also discusses thermal spring systems in the five areas described in reference 108. 110. 1957a, Thermal waters of volcanic origin: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 68, no. 12, pt. 1, p. 1637-1657, 5 figs., 4 tables. Concludes that the composition of volcanic waters is determined by (1) type of magma and stage of crystallization, (2) temperature and pressure of the emanation at different stages during and after departure from the magma, (3) chemical composition, relative quantity, and depth of penetration of mixing meteoric water and water of other origin, and (4) reactions with wall rocks. 111. 1957b, Magmatic, connate, and metamorphic waters: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 68, no. 12, pt. 1, p. 1659-1682, 1 fig., 5 tables. 112. White, Donald Edward; Brannock, Walter Wallace; and Murata, Kiguma Jack, 1956, Silica in liot-spring waters: Geochim. et Cosmochim. Acta, v. 10, p. 27-59, 8 figs., 7 tables. 113. White, Donald Edward; Sandberg, Clarence Harold; and Brannock, Walter Wallace, 1953, Geochemical and geophysical approaches to the problems of utilization of hot spring water and heat: Pacific Sci. Cong., 7th, New Zealand 1949, Proc., v. 2, p. 490-499. 114. Wiedemann, Gustave, 1882, Ueber einen Apparat zur Darstellung der Erscheinungen des Geysirs: Annalen Physik u. Chemie (Poggendorff), new ser., v. 15, p. 173-175, 1 fig. 115. Wilson, J. F., 1910, Earthquakes and volcanoes—hot springs; supplementary edition including the theory of gravitation: Knoxville, Tenn., S. B. Newman & Co., 173 p., 19 figs. 116. Wolff, F. von, 1914, Die Geyser—Oder Siedequellen: Stutt- gart, Germany, Vulkanismus, v. 1, p. 606-622. 117. 1930, Plutonismus und Vulkanismus, in Gutenberg, B., ed., Handb. Geophysik: v. 3, p. 32-348, Berlin. 118. Ziegler, J. M., 1872, Geysir Theorien: Vortr. phys. Ver., Frankfort am Main. 119. Zies, Emanuel George, 1941, Temperature of volcanoes, fumaroles, and hot springs, in Temperature, its measurement and control in science and industry: Am. Inst. Physics [New York], p. 372-380; repr., Carnegie Inst. Washington Geophys. Lab. Paper 1032, 19 p. UNITED STATES GENERAL REFERENCES 120. Allen, Eugene Thomas, 1934, Neglected factors in the de- velopment of thermal springs: [U.S.] Natl. Acad. Sci. Proc., v. 20, p. 345-349. 121. Armstrong, Samuel T., 1897, List of mineral springs in the United States, in Foster, Frank Pierce, Reference-book of practical therapeutics: New York, D. Appleton & Co., 2 v„ p. 362-385. Includes a number of thermal springs. 122. Bell, Agrippa Nelson, 1885, Climatology and mineral wa- ters of the United States: New York, W. Wood & Co., 386 p. Contains information on thermal springs in 30 localities. 123. Bell, John, 1831, On baths and mineral waters: Phila- delphia, Pa., Henry H. Porter, 532 p., in 2 parts. Mentions several thermal-spring localities in the United States and Europe. 124. 1855, The mineral and thermal springs of the United States and Canada: Philadelphia, Pa., Parry & McMillan, p. 13-394. Describes 32 thermal springs. 125. Brues, Charles Thomas, 1928, Studies on the fauna of hot springs in the western United States and the biology of thermophilous animals: Am. Acad. Arts and Sci. Proc., v. 63, no. 4, p. 139-228, 6 pis., 7 figs.; 1929, abs., Internat. Cong. Enbiology, 1928, Rept., p. 237-240. Contains information on 34 thermal springs and the animal and plant life in their water. Includes an extensive bibliography. 126. 1932, Further studies on the fauna of North American hot springs: Am. Acad. Arts and Sci. Proc., v. 67, no. 7, p. 185-303, 8 figs.256 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 126. Brues, Charles Thomas—Continued Describes 154 thermal springs (including the 34 described in reference 125) and the plant and animal life in their water. 127. Bryan, Kirk, 1919, Classification of springs: Jour. Geology, v. 27, no. 7, p. 522-561, 23 figs. 128. Clarke, Frank Wigglesworth, 1914, Water analyses from the laboratory of the United States Geological Survey: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 364, 40 p. Includes chemical analyses of water from 45 thermal springs. 129. Collins, William Dennis; Lamar, William Luther; and Lohr, Edwin Wallace, 1934, The industrial utility of public water supplies in the United States, 1932: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 658, 135 p., 1 pi., 1 fig. 130. Craig, Harmon, 1953, Isotopic geochemistry of hot springs [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 64, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 1410; 1954, Am. Mineralogist, v. 39, nos. 3-4, p. 322. Discusses results of studies in the Yellowstone National Park, at Steamboat Springs, Nev., and at Lassen Volcanic National Park and “The Geysers” in California ; also at Lardarello, Italy. 131. Craig, Harmon; Boato, Giovanni; and White, Donald Ed- ward, 1954, Isotopic geochemistry of thermal waters [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 65, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 1243; 1956, Natl. Research Council Pub. 400, p. 29-38. 132. 1956, Isotopic geochemistry of thermal waters, chap. 5 of Nuclear processes in geologic settings: Natl. Research Council, Comm. Nuclear Sci., Nuclear Sci. Ser. Rept. 19, p. 29-38, table. 133. Crook, James King, 1899, The mineral waters of the United States and their therapeutic uses. With an account of the various mineral spring localities, their advantages as health resorts, means of access, etc., to which is added an appendix on potable waters: New York and Philadelphia, Pa., Lea Bros. & Co., 588 p. Includes short descriptions of 85 thermal springs developed as resorts, also of 69 geysers and hot springs in Yellowstone National Park. Contains chemical analyses of the water from many thermal springs. 134. Daland, Judson, 1890, Mineral springs of the United States, in Gould, George Milbry, A new medical dictionary : Philadelphia, Pa., P. Blakiston & Co., 519 p.; Blakiston’s New Gould medical dictionary : 1st ed., Philadelphia, Pa., P. Blakiston & Co., 1294 p. Includes information on many thermal springs. 135. Daubeny, Charles, 1839, Notice of the thermal springs of North America: Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 1st ser., v. 36, no. 1, p. 88-93. Contains data on a thermal spring at Lebanon, N.Y., and on hot springs in Virginia and Arkansas. Mentions slightly thermal springs at Williamstown, Mass., and Canaan, Vt. 136. Dole, Richard Bryant, 1910, The chemical character of the waters, in The underground waters of north-central Indiana : U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 254, p. 230-267. 137. Fitch, William Edward, 1927, Mineral waters of the United States and American spas: Philadelphia, Pa., and New York, Lea & Febiger, 799 p., 37 figs. Includes information on about 75 thermal springs developed as resorts. 138. Gilbert, Grove Karl, 1875, Report on the geology of por- tions of California, Nevada, Utah, Colorado, New Mexico, and Arizona, examined in the years 1871, 1872, and 1873, in Wheeler, George M., U.S. Geog. and Geol. Surveys W. 100th Mer., Rept., v. 3, Geology, pt. 1: p. 19-187, 82 figs., map. Lists 136 thermal springs and shows their locations on a map. 139. Haywood, John Kerfoot, and Smith, Bernard Howard, 1905, Mineral waters of the United States: U.S. Dept. Agriculture Bur. Chemistry Bull. 91,100 p. Includes chemical analyses of the water from Rubino Healing springs and Rockbridge Alum springs in Virginia. 140. Lindgren, Waldemar, 1933, Mineral deposits: 4th ed., New York and London, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 930 p., 333 figs. Describes the mineral deposits of thermal springs. Mentions the deposits of Mammoth Hot springs and other springs in Yellowstone National Park, of Steamboat springs in Nevada, and of Idaho springs in Colorado. 141. Meinzer, Oscar Edward, 1927, Large springs in the United States: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 557, 94 p., 17 pis., 23 figs. Includes descriptions of springs near Double-0 ranch and Ana River springs, both in Oregon; Warm spring near Lewistown, Mont.; and Big spring near east border of Nevada. 142. Moorman, John Jennings, 1867, Mineral waters of the United States and Canada: Baltimore, Md., Kelly & Piet, 507 p. Includes short descriptions of the principal developed thermal springs. 143. 1871, Mineral springs of North America ; How to reach and how to use them: Philadelphia, Pa., J. B. Lippincott & Co., 294 p. Later eds., 1873,1877. Contains information on 29 thermal springs. 144. Peale, Albert Charles, 1886, Lists and analyses of the mineral springs of the United States (a preliminary study) : U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 32, 235 p. Contains information on 2,822 mineral and thermal springs, also chemical analyses of the water from 819 springs. 145. 1894, Natural mineral waters of the United States: U.S. Geol. Survey 14th Ann. Rept., 1892-93, pt. 2, p. 49-88, maps. Describes 128 springs having a discharge of 1,000 gallons per hour, or greater. The temperature of the water from many of the springs exceeds 70°F. Includes a map showing the locations of mineral-spring resorts and of other mineral springs used commercially. 146. Pepper, William; Bowditch, Henry L.; Bell, Agrippa Nel- son; Chaille, Stanford E.; and Denison, Charles, 1880, Report of committee on sanitaria and on mineral springs: Am. Med. Assoc. Trans., v. 31, p. 537-565. Contains data on 500 mineral springs, some of which are thermal. 147. Schweitzer, Paul, 1892, A report on the mineral waters of Missouri: Missouri Geol. Survey, v. 3, 256 p., 33 pis., 11 figs., map. Classifies mineral waters and discusses the medicinal effect of the principal chemical constituents. 148. Stearns, Norah Dowell; Stearns, Harold Thornton; and Waring, Gerald Ashley, 1937, Thermal springs in the United States: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 679-B, p. 59-206,10 pis., 12 figs.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 257 Contains information on 1,060 thermal springs and shows their location on maps. 149. Walton, George Edward, 1873, The mineral springs of the United States and Canada, with analyses and notes on the prominent spas of Europe, and a list of seaside resorts: New York, D. Appleton & Co., 390 p., map. Describes 24 thermal-spring localities in the United States and several in France, Germany, Austria, and Switzerland. 150. White, Donald Edward; Sandberg, Clarence Harold; and Brannock, Walter Wallace, 1949, Geochemical and geophysical approaches to the problem of utilization of hot spring water and heat: Nevada Water Conf., 3d, Carson City, Nev., 1948, Proc., p. 112-125, 3 tables. ALASKA 151. Allen, Eugene Thomas, and Zies, Emanuel George, 1923, A chemical study of the fumaroles of the Katmai region : Natl. Geog. Soc., Contributed Tech. Papers, Katmai Ser., No. 2; Carnegie Inst. Washington, Geophys. Lab., Paper 485, p. 79-155, 26 photographs, 3 maps, 3 diagrams, 9 tables. 152. Byers, Frank Milton, Jr., and Barth, Thomas Fredrik Weiby, 1953, Volcanic activity on Akun and Akutan Islands: Pacific Sci. Cong., 7th, New7 Zealand 1949, Proc., v. 2, Geology, p. 382-397, 9 figs. Mentions hot lake, hot springs, and fumaroles in crater of Akutan volcano. Contains chemical analyses of w'ater from one of the hot springs; also of a hot spring on Umnak Island. 153. Byers, Frank Milton, Jr., and Brannock, Walter Wallace, 1949, Volcanic activity on Umnak and Great Sitkin Islands, 1946-1948: Am. Geophys. Union Trans., v. 30, no. 5, p. 719-734, 8 figs. Includes information on the fumaroles and hot springs. 154. Collier, Arthur James, 1902, A reconnaissance of the north- western portion of Sew7ard Peninsula, Alaska : U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 2, 70 p., 12 pis. Mentions hot sulfur springs along Spring creek. 155. Dali, William Healey, 1870, Alaska and its resources: Bos- ton, Mass., Lee & Shepard, 627 p., 13 pis., figs., map; repr., 1897. Describes several thermal-spring localities. 156. 1884, The new7 Bogosloff volcano: Science, v. 4, no. 80 (Aug.), p. 138-139. Mentions that a cloud of sulfurous steam, derived from vapor jets at many points, obscured the summit of the volcano. 157. Davidson, George, 1884, The new Bogosloff volcano in Bering Sea: Science, v. 3, no. 57 (Mar.), p. 282-286, 3 figs. Contains information similar to that in reference 156. 158. Fenner, Clarence Norman, 1920, The Katmai region, Alaska, and the great eruption of 1912: Jour. Geology, V. 28, no. 7, p. 569-606, 17 figs. Mentions fumaroles and steam vents. 159. Finch, Ruy Herbert, 1935, Akutan Volcano: Zeitschr. Vul- kanologie, v. 6, no. 3, p. 155-160, 4 pis., 2 figs. Contains information on hot springs and vapor vents in several localities. 160. Grewingk, Constantin, 1850, Beitrag zur Kenntniss der orographischen und geognostischen Beschaffenheit der Nordwest-Kiiste Amerikas mit den anliegenden In- seln : Mineralog. Gesell. St. Petersburg Verh. Russische-k. mineralog. Gesell. St. Petersburg, Verh., 1848-49, 351 p., 5 maps. Mentions hot springs at several localities on the Alaska Peninsula and in the Aleutian Islands. 161. Griggs, Robert Fiske, 1917, The Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes: Natl. Geog. Mag., v. 31, no. 1, p. 13-68, 50 photographs, diagram, map. Mentions fumaroles in Katmai crater, hot springs near Katmai Pass, and steam jets in the Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes. 162. 1918a, The Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes: Natl. Geog. Mag., v. 33, no. 2, p. 115-169, 45 photographs, diagram, map. Describes some of the fumaroles. 163. 1918b, The eruption of Katmai: Nature (London], v. 101, no. 2547, p. 497-A99, 4 figs. Mentions fumaroles in the Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes. 164. 1922, The Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes: Washington, Natl. Geog. Soc., 341 p., 16 pis., 217 figs., 9 maps. Describes fumaroles in the Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes. Also mentions fumaroles betw7een Mount Cerberus and Mount Mageik and 23 localities of hot springs in the Alaska Peninsula and the Aleutian Islands. 165. Hopkins, J. P., and Hopkins, David Moody, 1958, Seward Peninsula, p. 194-110, in Williams, Howel, ed., Landscapes of Alaska, their geologic evolution: Berkeley and Los Angeles, Univ. California Press, 148 p., 23 pis., 6 maps, 3 figs. Mentions Serpentine (Arctic) and Pilgrim (Kruz-gamepa) hot springs. 166. Jackson, Sheldon, 1880, Alaska, and missions on the north Pacific coast: New York, Dodd, Mead, & Co., 13-327 p., 85 illus., map. Mentions several thermal-spring localities. 167. Langsdorff, Georg Heinrich von, 1814, Voyages and travels in various parts of the world during the years 1803, 1804, 1805, 1806, and 1807: London, H. Colburn, 2 pts.; 1813, pt. 1, 368 p„ 16 pis.; 1814, pt. 2, 392 p., 5 pis. Describes thermal activity on an islet 30 miles west of Oonalashka (Unalaska?) in the Aleutians, also hot springs near the village of Malka and at Paratunka, both in Kamchatka. 168. Lawton, N. Oliver, 1909, Makushin sulphur deposits, Una- laska : Mining and Sci. Press, v. 98, p. 259-260, 2 figs. Mentions vapor vents at Makushin volcano. 169. Merriam, Clinton Hart, 1910, Bogoslof, our newest vol- cano: Smithsonian Inst., Harriman Alaska Ser., v. 2, p. 291-336, 6 pis., 39 figs. Mentions steam vents in both Old and New Bogoslof Islands. 170. Moffit, Fred Howard, 1905, The Fairliaven gold placers, Sew7ard Peninsula, Alaska: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 247, 85 p., 14 pis., 2 figs. Contains photograph of hot springs on upper Inma-chuck River. 171. Petrov (Petroff), Ivan, 1884, Alaska, its population, indus- tries, and resources: U.S. Dept. Interior, Census Office, 10th Census of the U.S., v. 8, p. 19-93. Mentions several areas of hydrothermal activity.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 258 172. Robinson, Gershon DuVall, and others, 1947, Objectives, methods, and progress of Alaskan [Aleutian Islands] volcano investigations of the U.S. Geological Survey: U.S. Geol. Survey, Alaskan Volcano Inv. Kept. 2, 105 p. Consists of the following: Pt. 1, Objectives, methods, and progress of Alaskan volcano investigations of the U.S. Geological Survey, by G. D. Robinson; Pt. 2, Geology of Pavlof Volcano and vicinity, by G. O. Kennedy and H. H. Waldron; Pt. 3, Volcano investigations on Umnak Island, by F. M. Byers, Jr., D. M. Hopkins, K. L. Wier, and Bernard Fisher; Pt. 4, Geology of Great Sitkin Island, by F. S. Simons and D. E. Mathewson; Pt. 5, Geology of northern Adak Island, by R. R. Coats; Pt. 6, Geology of northern Kanaga Island, by R. R. Coats; and Part 7, Reconnaissance geology of some western Aleutian Islands, by R. R. Coats. Pts. 2 to 4 and 6 describe several areas of fumaroles and hot springs. 173. Simons, Frank Stanton, and Mathewson, Donald Edward, 1955, Geology of Great Sitkin Island, Alaska : U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 1028-B, p. 21-43, illus., map. Describes a group of hot springs, mud pots, and fumaroles near head of the west fork of Big Fox Creek. 174. Spurr, Josiah Edward, 1900, A reconnaissance in south- western Alaska in 1898: U.S. Geol. Survey 20th Ann. Rept., pt. 7, p. 31-264, 7 pis., 15 figs., 12 maps. Mentions hot springs near the pass between two volcanoes on the route from Naknek Lake to Katmai volcano. 175. Stoney, George M., 1884, The new volcano of the Bering Sea (communicated by U.S. Hydrographic Office) : Science, v. 4, no. 92 (Sept.), p. 432-434,1 fig. Describes formation of a volcanic island (New Bogo-slof) near Old Bogoslof Island. 176. 1900, Naval explorations in Alaska; an account of two naval expeditions in northern Alaska, with official maps of the country explored: Annapolis, Md., U.S. Naval Inst., 105 p., illus., pis., maps. Mentions hot springs on Reed River. 177. Underwood, John Jasper, 1913, Alaska; an empire in the making: New York, Dodd, Mead, & Co., 440 p., 55 illus. Mentions a large spout of scalding water near center of New Bogosloff Island. 178. Waring, Gerald Ashley, 1917, Mineral springs of Alaska, with a chapter on the chemical character of some surface waters of Alaska, by Richard B. Dole and Alfred A. Chambers: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 418,114 p., 9 pis., 16 figs., map. Contains information on 75 thermal-spring localities in Alaska. Also describes a group of 18 springs on the east side of the Stikine River in Canada. 179. Whymper, Frederick, 1868, A journey from Norton Sound, Bering Sea, to Fort Youkon (Junction of Porcupine and Youkon Rivers) : Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 38, p. 219-237, maps. Mentions a group of warm springs near the Yukon River. 180. Wright, Charles Will, 1906, Nonmetallic deposits of south- eastern Alaska, in Brooks, Alfred, and others, Report on progress of investigations of mineral resources of Alaska : U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 284, p. 55-60. Mentions Tenakee hot springs on Chichagof Island; Sitka hot springs and thermal springs at Warm Spring Bay and Cook Bay on Baranof Island; and thermal springs near Bailey Bay, on Bell Island, and on the Stikine River a short distance upstream from the international boundary. 181. Wright, Fred Eugene, and Wright, Charles Will, 1908, The Ketchikan and Wrangell mining districts, Alaska: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 347, 210 p., 12 pis., 23 figs. Contains the same information as reference 180. 182. Zies, Emanuel George, 1924, Hot springs of the Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes: Jour. Geology, v. 32, no. 4, p. 303-310, 1 fig. 183. 1929, The Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes: Natl. Geog. Soc., Contributed Tech. Papers, Katmai Ser., v. 1, no. 4, Carnegie Inst. Washington Geophys. Lab. Paper 693, 79 p., map. Contains a map showing the locations of fumaroles. See also refs. 119,161-164. ARIZONA 184. Barragua, Manuel, 1857, Translation of an archive from Tucson [a petition for additional land, signed by Manuel Barragua and two others, San Augustin de Tucson, Nov. 24, 1777], in U.S. War Dept., Reports of explorations and surveys * * * for a railroad from the Mississippi River to the Pacific Ocean : 33d Cong., 2d sess., S. Doc. 78, v. 7, app. C, p. 29-30. Contains a reference to Agua Caliente about 40 miles south of Tucson. 185. Boving, Adam Giede, 1914, Notes on the larva of hydro- scapha and some other aquatic larvae from Arizona: Entomol. Soc. Washington Proc., v. 16, no. 4, p. 169-174, 2 pis., 2 figs. Consists of technical descriptions of larvae in the water of Hot Springs. 186. Bryan, Kirk, 1925, The Papago country, Arizona, a geo- graphic, geologic, and hydrologic reconnaissance with a guide to desert watering places: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 499, 436 p., 27 pis., 41 figs. Describes Quitobaquito springs near the Mexican boundary. 187. Buehrer, Theophil Frederic, 1927, The radioactivity of the thermal waters of Castle Hot Springs, Arizona: Am. Jour. Sci., 5th ser., v. 13, p. 445-449. 188. Everit, R. S., 1925, Hot spring water from Clifton, Ariz.: Econ. Geology, v. 20, no. 3, p. 291-292. 189. Knechtel, Maxwell M., 1935, Indian hot springs, Graham County, Ariz.: Washington Acad. Sci. Jour., v. 25, no. 9, p.409-413, 2 figs. 190. 1938, Geology and ground-water resources of the valley of Gila River and San Simon Creek, Graham County, Ariz.: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 796-F, p. 181-222, pis., figs. Contains the same information as reference 189. In addition, gives chemical analyses of the water from five thermal springs. 191. Lindgren, Waldemar, 1905, Description of the Clifton quadrangle, Ariz.: U.S. Geol. Survey Geol. Atlas, Folio 129,14 p., 3 figs., 4 maps. Includes a chemical analysis of water from thermal spring near the railroad station. 192. Ross, Clyde Polhemus, 1923, The lower Gila region, Ari- zona, a geographic, geologic, and hydrologic reconnaissance, with a guide to desert watering places: U.S. Geol. Water-Supply Paper 498, 237 p., 23 pis., 16 figs. Describes the hot spring at Agua Caliente.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 259 193. Schrader, Frank Charles, with contributions by James Madison Hill, 1915, Mineral deposits of the Santa Rita and Patagonia Mountains, Arizona : U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 582,373 p., 25 pis., 46 figs. Contains information on the hot spring at Agua Caliente. 194. Schwarz, E. A., 1914, Aquatic beetles, especially hydro- scapha, in hot springs, in Arizona: Entomol. Soc. Washington Proc., v. 16, no. 4, p. 163-168. Describes beetles in the flow from the hot springs on Castle Creek. See also references 138,144, 328, and 667. ARKANSAS 195. Boltwood, Bertram Borden, 1905, On the radio-active prop- erties of the waters of the springs on the Hot Springs Reservation, Hot Springs, Ark.: Am. Jour. Sci., 4th ser., v. 20, no. 116, p. 128-132; 1905, U.S. Dept. Interior, Ann. Rept. Secretary, 1904. 196. Branner, John Casper, 1892, The mineral waters of Ar- kansas : Arkansas Geol. Survey Ann. Rept. for 1891, v. 1, p. 6-23. Describes the springs of Hot Springs in Garland County. 197. Bryan, Kirk, 1922, The hot water supply of the Hot Springs, Arkansas: Jour. Geology, v. 30, no. 6, p. 425-449, 5 figs. 198. 1924, The Hot Springs of Arkansas: Jour. Geology, v. 32, no. 6, p. 449-459, 2 figs., 1 table. 199. Cron, Frederick W., 1939, Mineral water at Hot Springs, Ark.: Mil. Engineer, v. 31, no. 176, p. 133-137; Chem. Abs., v. 33, no. 11, col. 4355. 200. Cutter, Charles, 1891, Cutter’s guide to the Hot Springs of Arkansas: 28th ed., St. Louis, Mo., Slauson Printing Co., 63 p., 24 illus.; 1st ed., 1876(?). 201. Haywood, John Kerfoot, and Weed, Walter Harvey, 1902, The hot springs of Arkansas: U.S. 57th Cong., 1st sess., S. Doc. 282, 94 p., 10 pis., 2 figs. 202. 1912, Analyses of the waters of the Hot Springs of Arkansas, and geological sketch of Hot Springs, Arkansas: Washington, Govt. Printing Office, U.S. Dept Interior, 56 p., 2 figs. 203. Kuroda, Paul Kazuo; Damon, Paul Edward; and Hyde, H. I., 1954, Radio-activity of the spring waters of Hot Springs National Park and vicinity in Arkansas: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 252, no. 2, p. 76-86, 2 figs., 10 tables. 204. Owen, David Dale, 1860, Second report of a geological re- connaissance of the middle and southern counties of Arkansas, made during the years 1859 and 1860, assisted by Robert Peter, Leo Lesquereux, and Edward Cox: Philadelphia, Pa., C. Sherman & Son, 433 p., 14 pis., figs. Contains information on the principal springs at Hot Springs. 205. Purdue, Albert Homer, 1910, The collecting area of the waters of the hot springs, Hot Springs, Arkansas: Jour. Geology, v. 18, no. 3, p. 279-285, 3 figs. 206. Purdue, A. H., and Miser, H. D., 1923, Description of Hot Springs district (Arkansas) : U.S. Geol. Survey Geol. Atlas, Folio 215, 12 p., 3 maps. 207. Schlundt, Herman, 1935, The radioactivity of the spring waters on the Hot Springs Reservation, Hot Springs, Ark.: Am. Jour. Sci., 5th ser., v. 30, no. 175, p. 45-50, 3 tables. 208. U.S. Dept. Interior, National Park Service, 1950, Circular of general information regarding Hot Springs National Park, Arkansas, 16 p., 7 views, maps. 209. Weed, Walter Harvey, 1905, Notes on certain hot springs of the southern United States: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 145, p. 185-206, 3 figs. Contains information on the history, management, and geology of the springs at Hot Springs, Ark. Also mentions the thermal springs at Warm Springs, Ga., and Hot Springs, N.C. 210. Wood-Seys, Roland Alexander, 1903, Hot Springs, Arkan- sas ; an impressionist sketch: Chicago, Rock Island and Pacific Railroad Co., 48 p., 19 illus. See also references 144 and 148. CALIFORNIA 211. Allen, Eugene Thomas, 1926, Further evidence of the na- ture of hot springs [abs.] : Washington Acad. Sci. Jour., v. 16, no. 3, p. 74, Washington, D.C. Contains information on “The Geysers” in Sonoma County. 212. Allen, Eugene Thomas, and Day, Arthur Louis, 1927, Steam wells and other thermal activity at “The Geysers,” California : Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 378, 106 p., 34 figs., map. 213. Anderson, Charles Alfred, 1935, Alteration of the lavas sur- rounding the hot springs in Lassen Volcanic National Park: Am. Mineralogist, v. 20, p. 240-252. 214. 1936, Volcanic history of the Clear Lake area, California : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 47, p. 629-664, 6 pis., 8 figs. Mentions the solfataric activity at Sulphur Bank. 215. Anderson, Robert van Vleck, and Pack, Robert Wallace, 1915, Geology and oil resources of the west border of the San Joaquin Valley north of Coalinga, Calif.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 603, 220 p., 14 pis., 5 figs. Contains information on the Mercey hot springs. 216. Anderson, Winslow, 1892, Mineral springs and health re- sorts of California: San Francisco, Calif., Bancroft Co., 384 p., 71 illus. Describes or mentions 196 thermal- or mineral-spring localities in California. Includes chemical analyses of water from many of the California springs and from 168 mineral springs in other States, Canada, and Europe. 217. Angel, Myron, 1890, San Luis Obispo County: California State Mining Bur. 10th Ann. Rept., p. 567-585, 2 pis. Mentions Pecho hot sulfur springs and Sycamore springs. 218. Antisell, Thomas, 1856, Geological report on routes in Cali- fornia and New Mexico, in U.S. War Dept., Reports of explorations and surveys * * * for a railroad from the Mississippi River to the Pacific Ocean: 33d Cong., 2d sess., S. Doc. 78, v. 7, pt. 2, 204 p., 14 pis., 2 maps. Contains information on a hot spring near Warner’s Ranch in California and on Agua Caliente springs 5 miles from the Mimbres River in New Mexico. 219. Arnold, Ralph, 1907, Geology and oil resources of the Sum- merland district, Santa Barbara County, Calif.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 321, 93 p., 17 pis., 3 figs. Mentions the hot springs in Hot Spring Canyon 4 miles northeast of Santa Barbara. The geology of the vicinity of Mentecito hot springs is shown on a map .THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 260 220. Auchincloss, Henry B., 1864, The Devil’s Canon [at The Geysers] in California: Continental Monthly, v. 6, no. 3, p. 280-289. Describes the Witches’ Caldron and other hot springs in Devil’s Canon. Also quotes descriptions of geysers In Iceland and hot springs in Central America and on White Island, New Zealand. 221. Bailey, Edgar Herbert, 1946, Quicksilver deposits of the western Mayacmas district, Sonoma County, Calif.: California Jour. Mines and Geology, v, 42, no. 3, p. 199-230, 3 figs., 2 tables. Describes “The Geysers.” 222. Blake, William Phipps, 1857, Geological report on routes in California, in U.S. War Dept., Reports of explorations and surveys * * * for a railroad from the Mississippi River to the Pacific Ocean: 33d Cong., 2d sess., H. Doc. 91, v. 5, pt. 2, 370 p., 14 secs., 14 views, 87 wood engravings, 5 maps. Contains information on thermal springs on the flanks of the San Bernardino Mountains, between the San Bernardino Mountains and El Cajon Pass, 10 miles south of San Gorgonio Pass, in Warner’s Valley; also on mud volcanoes near Salton Sea and in the northern part of Baja California. 223. 1872, Algae at the Geysers, California : California Acad. Sci. Proc., Oct. 7, 1871, Mtg., v. 4, pt. 4, p. 193-194. Describes algae growing in the warm water of springs at “The Geysers” in Sonoma County. Mentions the abundance of algae in the water of Calistoga spring and in the water of thermal springs in Nevada. 224. Boddam-Whctham, John Whetham, 1874, Western wander- ings ; a record of travel in the evening land: London, R. Bentley & Son, 364 p., 12 illus. Describes a visit to “The Geysers” in Sonoma County. 225. Bradley, Walter Wadsworth, 1918, Quicksilver resources of California: California Mining Bur. Bull. 78, 389 p., 42 pis., 77 figs. Mentions the thermal springs ait Sulphur Bank. 226. 1922, Radioactivity in thermal gases at The Geysers, Sonoma County, Calif.: California Mining Bur. Rept., v. 18, no. 10, p. 545-550,4 figs. 227. 1946, Observations at “The Geysers,” Sonoma County, Calif.: California Jour. Mines and Geology, v. 42, no. 3, p. 295-298, 2 pis. 228. Brewer, William Henry, 1866a, On the presence of living species in hot and saline waters in California : Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 2d ser., v. 41, no. 123, p. 391-394. Describes plant and animal life in water of “The Geysers.” Also mentions algae in water of the Little Geysers and of springs in Owens Valley, both in California, and of Steamboat Springs in Nevada. 229. 1866b, Note on the organisms of the Geysers of California : Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 2d ser., v. 41, no. 126, p. 429. 230. 1868, Notice of plants found growing in hot springs in California : California Acad. Nat. Sci. Proc., v. 3. p. 120-121. Describes algal life in water of “The Geysers,” of the Little Geysers, and of hot springs and around steam jets near Lassen Peak. 231. Brown, John Stafford, 1922, Fault features of Salton Basin, California: Jour. Geology, v. 30, no. 3, p. 217-226, 1 pi., map. Mentions Palm springs and Agua Caliente springs. 232. Brown, John Stafford, 1923, The Salton Sea region, Cali- fornia, a geographic, geologic, and hydrologic reconnaissance, with a guide to desert watering places: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 497, 292 p., 19 pis., 18 figs. Contains data on Palm springs, Fish springs, Jacumba springs, and Agua Caliente springs. 233. Chamberlin, Blair, 1952, Plutonian power plant [“The Gey- sers,” Calif.] : Nature Mag., v. 45, no. 1, p. 13-16, 50, 4 views. 234. Clarke, Frank Wigglesworth, 1890, Report of work done in the division of chemistry and physics, mainly during the fiscal year 1887-88: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 60,174 p., 9 figs. Includes a chemical analysis of water from Matilija hot springs. 235. Crawford, John Jones, 1894, Report of State Mineralogist: California Mining Bur. 12th Rept. (2d Bienn.), 541 p., pis., figs. Contains short descriptions of several thermal springs and chemical analyses of the water from 14 thermal springs. 236. 1896, Report of State Mineralogist: California Mining Bur. 13th Rept. (3d Bienn.), 726 p., pis., figs. Contains information on 15 thermal springs and chemical analyses of the water from 5 springs at Highland Springs. 237. Day, Arthur Louis, 1924, Hot springs and fumaroles of “The Geysers” region, California: Jour. Geology, v. 32, no. 6, p. 459-560. 238. Day, Arthur Louis, and Allen, Eugene Thomas, 1924, The sources of the heat and the source of the water in the hot springs of the Lassen National Park: Jour. Geology, v. 32, no. 3, p. 178-190. 239. 1925, The volcanic activity and hot springs of Lassen Peak: Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 360, 190 p., 13 illus., 81 figs. 240. Differ, Joseph Silas, 1916, The volcanic history of Lassen Peak: Science, new ser., v. 43, no. 1117, p. 727-733, 2 figs.; repr., 1918, U.S. Dept. Interior, Natl. Park Service Pamph., 14 p. Mentions the fumaroles and solfataras at Bumpass Hell, the Devil’s Kitchen, and Tartarus (Boiling) Lake. 241. Dun, H. H., 1923, Geysers harnessed to furnish power: Pop. Mechanics Mag., v. 39, no. 5, p. 705-706, 2 illus. States that one of the steam vents at “The Geysers” has been connected to a steam engine yielding 150 horsepower. 242. Edwards, Arthur Mead, 1868, On the occurrence of living forms in the hot waters of California : Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 2d ser., v. 45, no. 134, p. 239-241. States that diatoms were found in a sample of water from “The Geysers.” 243. Ellis, Arthur Jackson, and Lee, Charles Hamilton, 1919, Geology and ground waters of the western part of San Diego County, Calif.: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 446, 321 p., 47 pis., 18 figs. Describes the hot springs on Warner’s ranch. 244. Everhart, Donald Lough, 1946a, Quicksilver deposits at the Sulphur Bank mine, Lake County, Calif.: California Jour. Mines and Geology, v. 42, no. 2, p. 125-153, 8 figs., 2 tables. Mentions the hot springs and fumaroles along faults in the vicinity of the mine.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 261 245. Everhart, Donald Lough, 1946b, New geologic data at Sul- phur Bank, Lake County, Calif, [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 57, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 1251. Mentions the hot springs and fumaroles in the vicinity of the mine. 246. Fairbanks, Harold Wellman, 1894, Some remarkable hot springs and associated mineral deposits in Colusa County, Calif.: Science, v. 23, no. 578, p. 120-121. 247. 1896, Stratigraphy at Slate’s Springs with some further notes on the relation of the Golden Gate series to the Knoxville [Calif.] : Am. Geologist, v. 18, no. 6, p. 350-356. 248. Fraser, Horace John; Wilson, Harry David Bruce; and Hendry, N. W., 1942, Hot springs deposits of the Coso Mountains: California Jour. Mines and Geology, v. 38, nos. 3-4, p. 223-242, 3 pis., 17 figs. 249. Gist, Evalyn Slack, 1952, Where the earth burps [Calif.]: Nature Mag., v. 45, no. 5, p. 245-247, 5 views. Mentions mud pots, steam vents, and thermal wells on the east side of Salton Sea. 250. Goldstone, L. P., 1890, Fresno County: California Mining Bur. 10th Ann. Rept., p. 183-204,1 pi. Describes the Fresno hot springs. 251. Hamilton, Fletcher, 1919, Mono County: California Mining Bur. 15th Rept., 1915-16, maps, illus. Mentions hot springs at the travertine deposit 1 mile southeast of Bridgeport in Mono County. 252. Hanks, Henry Garber, 1886, Mineral springs in California: California Mining Bur. 6th Ann. Rept., pt. 1, p. 58-76. Includes short descriptions of 31 thermal-spring localities, 28 of which have been developed as resorts. 253. Ireland, William, Jr., 1888, Lake County : California Mining Bur. 8th Ann Rept., p. 324-329. Briefly describes Anderson, Harbin, Highland, Howard Mills (Castle), Siegler, and Soda Bay springs. Contains 5 chemical analyses of water from Highland springs. 254. Ives, Ronald Lorenz, 1951, Mud volcanoes of the Salton depression: Rocks and Minerals, v. 26, nos. 5-6, p. 227-235, 5 figs. 255. James, George Wharton, 1911, The wonders of the Colo- rado Desert (Southern California) : Boston, Mass., Little, Brown & Co., 547 p., 32 illus., 3 diagrams, 4 maps. Contains information on Palm spring, Warner’s ranch hot spring, and mud volcanoes at the south end of Salton Sea, all in California; also mud volcanoes near Volcano Lake in Baja California. 256. Kellicott, D. S., 1897, An odonate nymph from a thermal spring: Cincinnati Soc. Nat. History Jour., v. 19, no. 2, p. 63-65. Describes dragonfly nymphs in water of Amedee(?) springs. 257. Kelly, V. C., and Soske, Joshua Lawrence, 1936, Origin of the Salton volcanic domes, Salton Sea, California: Jour. Geology, v. 44, no. 4, p. 496-509, 9 figs. Suggests that the mud volcanoes near the south end of Salton Sea are on a buried extension of the San Andreas fault. Mentions that carbon dioxide from buried fumaroles northeast of the mud volcanoes is used for the manufacture of dry ice. 258. Killinger, Paul E., 1947, Notes of Lassen Volcanic Na- tional Park : Rocks and Minerals, v. 22, no. 10, p. 912-913, 1 fig- Describes fumaroles, boiling pools, and mud volcanoes in Bumpass Hell, also fumaroles near the top of Lassen Peak. 259. LeConte, John Lawrence, 1855, Account of some volcanic springs in the desert of the Colorado, in southern California : Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 2d ser., v. 19, p. 1-6. Describes the mud volcanoes near the south end of Salton Sea. 260. LeConte, Joseph, and Rising, W. B., 1882, The phenomena of metalliferous vein-formation now in progress at Sulphur Bank, California: Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., v. 24, no. 139, p. 23-33. Mentions hot springs and solfataras near Clear Lake, also hot springs in the Sulphur Bank mine. 261. Loew, Oscar, 1876, Report on the geological and mineralogi- cal character of southeastern California and adjacent regions, in Wheeler, George M., U.S. Geog. and Geol. Surveys W. 100th Mer., Ann. Rept. Chief of Engineers, app. JJ: p. 173-188, 5 figs. Mentions a hot spring near Montan’s ranch and thermal springs in Death and Panamint Valleys, in the Coso Range, and near the Blind Spring mining district, all in California. Also mentions thermal springs between Carson City and Virginia City in Nevada. 262. 1876b, Report on the alkaline lakes, thermal springs, mineral springs, and brackish waters of southern California and adjacent country, in Wheeler, George M., U.S. Geog. and Geol. Surveys W. 100th Mer., Ann. Rept. Chief of Engineers, app. JJ : p. 188-199. Includes information on 11 thermal springs. 263. McGregor, Alexander, 1890, Mendocino County: California Mining Bur. 10th Ann. Rept., p. 311-314. Describes Vichy and Orr’s hot springs. 264. McLeod, Edith Rutenic, 1951a, Mud gusher: Nat. History, v. 60, no. 8, p. 379-381, 6 illus. Describes an eruption, in 1951, of mud and hot water in Surprise Valley. 265. 1951b. Hot spring erupts in farmer’s meadow: Mineral- ogist, v. 19, no. 10, p. 43H33. Contains information similar to that in reference 264. 266. McNutt, William Fletcher, 1888, Notes on the mineral and thermal springs of California: Internal. Med. Cong. 9th, San Francisco 1887, Trans., v. 5, p. 117-125. Contains short descriptions of 20 thermal springs and mentions 15 others. Also contains chemical analyses of 6 thermal springs. 267. Manning, J. F., 1870, The Geysers of California : Lippin- cott’s Mag., v. 6, p. 633-639. Mentions Calistoga sulfur springs and springs at “The Geysers.” 268. Mendenhall, Walter Curran, 1905, The hydrology of San Bernardino Valley, California : U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 142,124 p., 12 pis., 16 figs. Mentions Arrowhead, Eden, Relief, Ritchie, and Harlem hot springs, dlso the Urbita thermal well. 269. 1909a, Some desert watering places in southeastern California and southwestern Nevada: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 224, 98 p., 4 pis. Contains short descriptions of Agua Caliente spring in San Diego County, Figtree John’s springs in Riverside County, Fish springs in Imperial County, Hot springs in Inyo County, and Paradise springs in San Bernardino County, all in California. Also mentions Manse springsTHERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 262 269. Mendenhall, Walter Curran—Continued in Nye County, Nev., and Las Vegas springs in Lincoln County, Nev. 270. 1909b, Ground waters of the Indio region, California, with a sketch of the Colorado Desert: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 225, 56 p., 12 pis., 5 figs. Describes mud volcanoes near the south end of Salton Sea. Also mentions mud volcanoes near Volcano Lake in Baja California. 271. Noble, Levi F., Mansfield, George Rogers, and others, 1922, Nitrate deposits in the Amargosa region, southeastern California: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 724, 99 p., 35 pis., 7 figs. Mentions Saratoga springs. 272. Nomland, Jorgen O., and Schenck, Hubert Gregory, 1932, Cretaceous beds at Slate’s hot springs, California: California Univ., Dept. Geol. Sci. Bull., v. 21, no. 4, p. 37-49, 4 figs. 273. Phillips, J. Arthur, 1868, Notes on the chemical geology of the goldfields of California: London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philos. Mag. and Jour. Sci., 4th ser., v. 36, no. 244, p. 321-336. Mentions Sulphur springs 10 miles northeast of Borax Lake. 274. 1871, On the connexion of certain phenomena with the origin of mineral veins: London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philos. Mag. and Jour. Sci., 4th ser., v. 42, no. 282, p. 401-413, 1 pi. Describes Sulphur Bank in California as a solfatara. Also contains information on springs at Steamboat Springs, Nev. 275. 1877, The alkaline and boracic lakes of California : Pop. Sci. Review [London], new ser., v. 1, no. 2, p. 153-164. Describes hydrothermal activity in several localities in California. Also states that boronatrocalcite is deposited by a hot spring in northwestern Nevada. 276. 1879, A contribution to the history of mineral veins: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 35, p. 390-396. Describes hydrothermal activity at Sulphur Bank, Calif., and at Steamboat Springs, Nev. 277. Posepny, Franz, 1902, The Genesis of ore deposits: 2d ed., New York, Am. Inst. Mining Engineers, 806 p.; repr. in part from Am. Inst. Mining Engineers Trans., v. 23, p. 197-368, 1893. Describes the mineral deposits associated with thermal springs at Sulphur Bank. 278. Price, Thomas, 1888, The California geysers: Tech. Soc. Pacific Coast Trans., v. 5, no. 2, p. 46-48. 279. Rogers, Lloyd A., ed., 1951, Hot springs blow top; Lake City awakened by roaring eruption: [Alturas, Calif.] Alturas Plaindealer, v. 56, no. 9, Mar. 8, p. 1, 12. 280. Ross, Clyde Polhemus, and Yates, Robert G., 1943, The Coso quicksilver district, Inyo County, Calif.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 936-Q, p. 395-416, 4 pis.; 1942, abs., Washington Acad. Sci. Jour., v. 32, no. 9, p. 280. Mentions the hot springs in the Coso Range. 281. Russell, Israel Cook, 1884, A geological reconnaissance in southern Oregon : U.S. Geol. Survey 4th Ann. Rept., 1882-83, p. 431-464, 3 pis., 10 figs. Mentions the hot springs in Surprise Valley in northeastern California. 282. 1889, Quaternary history of Mono Valley, California: U.S. Geol. Survey 8th Ann. Rept., 1886-87, pt. 1, p. 261-394, 29 pis., 12 figs. Contains information on Casa de Diablo hot springs, a spring on the northeast shore of Mono Lake, and springs on Paoha Island in Mono Lake. 283. Russell, Richard Joel, 1928, Basin range structure and stratigraphy of the Warner Range, northeastern California : California Univ., Dept. Geol. Sci. Bull., v. 17, no. 11, p. 387-496, 32 figs., map. Mentions the thermal springs in Surprise Valley. 284. Sanders, F. C. S., 1916, California as a health resort: San Francisco, Calif., Bolte & Braden Co., 300 p., 80 illus. Contains descriptions of 28 thermal-spring resorts. Includes chemical analyses of the water from the springs in 8 of the localities. 285. Shepherd, Forest, 1851, Observations of the Pluton gey- sers [The Geysers] of California: Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 2d ser., v. 12, p. 153-158. 286. Simoons, Frederick J, 1954, Nineteenth century mines and mineral spring resorts of Lake County, Calif.: California Jour. Mines and Geology, v. 50, no. 2, p. 295-319, 12 figs. Mentions the resort developed at Harbin warm springs. 287. South, Marshall, 1947, Healing waters of Agua Caliente [San Diego County, Calif.] : Desert Mag., v. 10, no. 9, p. 4-8, 4 illus. El Centro, Calif. 288. Switzer, George S., 1951, “The Geysers,” Sonoma County, Calif.: Rocks and Minerals, v. 26, nos. 9-10, p. 504-509, 2 illus. 289. Thompson, David Grosh, 1921, Routes to desert watering places in the Mohave Desert region, California: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 490-B, p. 1-4, 87-269, 16 pis., 3 figs. Includes mention of Newberry, Paradise, Saratoga, and Yeoman thermal springs. 290. 1929, The Mohave Desert region, California: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 578, 759 p., 34 pis., 20 figs. Contains data on Paradise, Newberry, and Saratoga springs, also two springs near the railway station at Soda. 291. Tucker, W. Burling, and Sampson, R. J., 1945, Mineral re- sources of Riverside County: California Jour. Mines and Geology, v. 41, no. 3, p. 121-182. Includes descriptions of and chemical analyses for 10 thermal springs. 292. Turner, Henry Ward, 1891, Mohawk Lake beds: Philos. Soc. Washington Bull., v. 11, p. 385469. Mentions McLear Sulphur springs. 293. Van Winkle, Walton, and Eaton, Frederick M., 1910, The quality of the surface waters of California: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 237, 142 p., 1 pi. Includes chemical analyses of water from springs in the Sulphur Bank mine. 294. Veatch, John A., 1857, Notes of a visit to the “mud vol- canoes” in the Colorado Desert in the month of July, 1857: California Acad. Nat. Sci. Proc., v. 1, p. 104-108; 2d ed., 1873, p. 116-121; 1858, Am. Jour. Sci. 2d ser., v. 26, p. 288-295. 295. Vonsen, Magnus, 1941, Preliminary report on minerals of geysers of Sonoma County, California: Mineralogist, v. 9, no. 7, p. 245-248. 296. 1946, Minerals at “The Geysers,” Sonoma County, California : California Jour. Mines and Geology, v. 42, no. 3, p. 287-293, 1 pi. 297. Waring, Gerald Ashley, 1915, Springs of California: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 338, 410 p., 13 pis., 4 figs.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 263 Contains detailed information on 163 thermal-spring and 9 thermal-well localities. 298. Waring, Gerald Ashley, 1919, Ground water in the San Jacinto and Temecula basins, California: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 429, 113 p., 14 pis., 15 figs. Contains data on eight thermal springs. 299. Watts, William Lord, 1893, Marin County : California Min- ing Bur. 11th Rept., 1892 (1st Bienn.), p. 249-254. Mentions hot sulfur springs on the shore west of Rocky Point. 300. Weight, Harold O., 1948, Nature’s freaks on Salton shore: Desert Mag., v. 11, no. 6, p. 5-8, 7 illus. Describes the mud pots and mud volcanoes near the south end of Salton Sea. 301. White, Donald Edward, 1940, Antimony deposits of the Wildrose Canyon area, Inyo County, Calif.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 922-K, p. 307-325, 2 pis., 2 figs. Describes five hot-spring deposits. 302. 1954, Notes on certain thermal springs in California: Unpublished field notes. Includes information on thermal springs or vapor vents in 16 places. 303. 1955a, Sulphur Bank, California, a hot-spring quicksilver deposit [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 66, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 1669. 304. 1955b, Violent mud-volcano eruption of Lake City hot springs, northeastern California: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 66, no. 9, p. 1109-1130, 4 pis., 3 figs. In addition to describing the mud-volcano eruption, mention is made of mud volcanoes in the Lassen Peak and Coso hot-springs areas in California, near Gerlach hot springs in Nevada, in Yellowstone National Park in Wyoming, at Volcano Lake in Baja California, and in the hot-spring districts of Iceland and New Zealand. 305. Whiting, H. A., 1888, Mono County : California Mining Bur. 8th Ann. Rept., p. 352-401, 2 pis. Contains information on the thermal springs on Paoha Island in Mono Lake, the Casa Diablo hot springs, and the thermal springs at Benton. Also mentions deposits of travertine 1 mile southeast of Bridgeport. 306. Whitney, Josiah Dwight, 1865, Geological survey of Cali- fornia ; Geology, v. 1, Report of progress and synopsis of the field work from 1860 to 1864 : 498 p., 10 pis., 81 figs. Contains information on several thermal-spring localities in California. 307. Williams, Howel, 1932, Geology of the Lassen Volcanic Na- tional Park, Calif.: California Univ., Dept. Geol. Sci. Bull., v. 21, no. 8, p. 195-385, 64 figs., map. Discusses the hydrothermal activity in the park area. 308. Wilson, Harry David Bruce, and Hendry, N. W., 1940, Geology and quicksilver deposits of Coso hot springs area [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 51, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 1965. 309. Wood, Horatio Charles, Jr., 1867 [Remarks made by Dr. Wood]: Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia Proc., Oct., 15, 1867, Mtg., p. 125. Mentions that algae have been found in water of thermal springs in Mono County, Calif. 310. 1868, Notes on some algae from a California hot spring: Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 2d ser., v. 46, p. 31-34. 311. Yates, Robert G., and Hilpert, Lowell Sinclair, 1946, Quick- silver deposits of Eastern Mayacmas district, Lake and Napa Counties, Calif.: California Jour. Mines and Geology, v. 42, no. 3, p. 231-286, 8 figs. Mentions deposits related to hydrothermal activity at the Aetna Mine and Anderson springs areas. See also references 19, 20, 62, 75, 108, 109, 125, 126, 128, 130, 137, 144, 399, 400, 401, 409, 413, 418, 426, 441, 442, 526, 660, 667, 746, and 784. COLORADO 312. Bastin, Edson Sunderland, 1923, Silver enrichment in the San Juan Mountains, Colo.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 735-D, p. 65-129, figs. 14-32. Contains a chemical analysis of the water from the Ouray hot springs. 313. Campbell, Marius Robinson, 1923, The Twentymile Park district of the Yampa coal field, Routt County, Colo.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 748, 82 p., 13 pis., 11 figs. Mentions the Steamboat springs. 314. Comstock, Theodore Bryant, 1889, Hot-spring formations in Red Mountain district, Colorado; a reply to the criticisms of Mr. Emmons: Am. Inst. Mining Engineers Trans., v. 17, p. 261-264. Reiterates the author’s conclusion that the mounds or ridges of ore-bearing siliceous sinter are the chimneys of extinct geysers. Denies that he had expressed the idea that the ore itself was the result of geyser action. 315. Cox, Doak Carey, 1945, General features of Colorado fluor- spar deposits: Colorado Sci. Soc. Proc., v. 14, no. 6, p. 263-285, 7 figs. Discusses the occurrence of fluoride in the deposits of the hot springs at Wagon Wheel Gap and of the Poncha hot springs southwest of Salida. 316. Cross, Whitman; Howe, Ernest; and Irving, John Duer, 1907, Description of the Ouray quadrangle, Colorado: U. S. Geol. Survey Geol. Atlas, Folio 153, 20 p., 1 sheet of illus., 4 figs., 3 maps. Contains a chemical analysis of the water from the Ouray hot springs. Mentions the hot springs near Ridgway. 317. Denison, Charles, 1880, Rocky Mountain health resorts; an analytical study of high altitudes in relation to the arrest of chronic pulmonary disease: Boston, Mass., Houghton, Osgood & Co., 192 p., map; 2d ed., 1881, Boston, Mass., Houghton, Mifflin & Co., 192 p., map. Includes information on 10 thermal springs in Colorado. Also mentions Ojos Calientes and Las Vegas springs in New Mexico. 318. Emmons, William Harvey, and Larsen, Esper Signius, Jr., 1913, The hot springs and the mineral deposits of Wagon Wheel Gap, Colo.: Econ. Geology, v. 8, no. 3, p. 235-246, 3 figs., 1 table. 319. Endlich, Frederick Miller, 1877, Geological report on the southeastern district [Colorado] in Hayden, Ferdinand V. , U.S. Geol. and Geog. Survey Terr. 9th Ann. Rept., 1875, p. 103-235, 25 pis. Contains information on the chemical quality of the water and on the deposits of three springs near Hot Springs Creek 1 mile upstream from its mouth. Also includes diagrams of Pagosa Springs. 320. Frazer, Persifor, Jr., 1873, Mines and minerals of Colo- rado, in Hayden, Ferdinand V., U.S. Geol. and Geog. Survey Terr. 3d Ann. Rept., 1869: p. 201-228. Describes a group of springs in Homan’s Park between Sawatch and Homan’s Creek. Mentions Ojos Calientes in New Mexico. ■735-914 O—65------18THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 264 321. George, Russell D., 1927, Geology and natural resources of Colorado: Univ. Colorado Semicentennial Pubs., v. 1, 228 p., 25 pis. Discusses natural mineral waters and their chemical classification. 322. George, Russell D.; Curtis, Harry Alfred; Lester, Oliver Clarence; Crook, James King; Yeo, J. B.; and others, 1920, Mineral waters of Colorado: Colorado Geol. Survey Bull. 11, 474 p., 2 pis., 40 figs. Contains information, including chemical-quality and radioactivity data on thermal springs in 36 localities. Also contains information, for purposes of comparison, on several European thermal springs. 323. Hancock, Eugene Thomas, 1925, Geology and coal resources of the Axial and Monument Butte quadrangles, Moffat County, Colo.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 757, 134 p., 19 pis., 6 figs. Page 77: Water of Juniper Hot Springs probably comes from Dakota sandstone. 324. Hayden, Ferdinand Vandiveer, 1876, Colorado and parts of adjacent territories: U.S. Geol. and Geog. Survey Terr. 8th Ann. Rept., 1874, 515 p., maps. Mentions warm springs on Rock Creek in the Elk Range. 325. Lakes, Arthur, 1905a, Geology of the hot springs of Colo- rado and speculations as to their origin and heat: Colorado Sci. Soc. Proc., v. 8, p. 31-38. 326. 1905b, The hot and mineral springs of Routt County and Middle Park, Colo.: Mining Reporter, v. 52, no. 18, p. 438-439. 327. 1906, Mineral and hot springs in Colorado: Mining World, v. 24, p. 359-360. 328. Loew, Oscar, 1875, Report upon mineralogical, agricultural, and chemical conditions observed in portions of Colorado, New Mexico, and Arizona, in Wheeler, George M., U.S. Geog. and Geol. Surveys W. 100th Mer. Rept, v. 3, Geology : p. 569-661, quarto. Contains information on Canon City, Parnassus, Wagon Wheel Gap, and Pagosa Springs in Colorado; also on Rio San Francisco (Clifton) springs in Arizona, and Ojos Calientes, San Ysidro, Abiquiu, Las Vegas, and Rio Pa-jarito springs in New Mexico. 329. Packard, Alpheus Spring, Jr., 1882, Larvae of a fly in a hot spring in [Gunnison County] Colorado : Am. Naturalist, v. 16, p. 599-600. 330. Peale, Albert Charles, 1877, Geological report on the Grand River district, in Hayden, Ferdinand V., U.S. Geol. and Geog. Survey Terr., 9th Ann. Rept., 1875: p. 31-101, pis. 1-8. Mentions two groups of warm springs in the White Earth River valley, also the Uncompahgre warm springs. 331. Russell, Robert Thayer, 1948, Fluorine hot springs of Poncha Springs, Colo, [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 59, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 1400. 332. Siebenthal, Claude Ellsworth, 1910, Geology and water re- sources of the San Luis Valley, Colo.: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 240, 128 p., 13 pis., 15 figs. Contains information on Dexter warm springs, Chamberlain hot springs, Valley View hot springs, and hot springs near Capulin. 333. Spurr, Josiah Edward, and Garrey, George H., 1906, The Idaho Springs mining district, Colo.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 285-A, p. 35-40. 334. Spurr, Josiah E.; Garrey, George H.; and Ball, Sydney Hobart, 1908, Economic geology of the Georgetown quadrangle, Colo.: U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 63, 422 p., 87 pis., 155 figs. 335. Stevenson, John James, 1875, Report on the geology of a portion of Colorado explored and surveyed in 1873, in Wheeler, George M., U.S. Geog. and Geol. Surveys W. 100th Mer. Rept., v. 3, Geology, pt. 4: p. 303-501, 9 figs. Contains data on thermal springs in several localities in Colorado. 336. Washburne, H. D., 1872 [Data on hot springs], in Statistics of mines and mining in the States and Territories west of the Rocky Mountains, for the year 1870: Washington, Govt. Printing Office, p. 213-216. See also references 109, 128, 137-140, 144, 459, 513, 526, 641, and 666. FLORIDA 337. Ferguson, George Ernest; Lingham, C. W.; Love, Samuel Kenneth; and Vernon, Robert Orion, 1947, Springs of Florida: Florida Geol. Survey Bull. 31, 196 p., front., 37 figs., 4 tables, map. Describes Warm Salt spring 8 miles northwest of Murdock. Also states that the Panasoffkee River is formed in part by the flow of Warm Spring. 338. Parker, Garald Gordon, and Cooke, Charles Wythe, 1944, Late Cenozoic geology of southern Florida, with a discussion of the ground water: Florida Geol. Survey Bull. 27,119 p., 26 pis., 4 figs. Contains a chemical analysis of water from Warm Salt (Big Salt) spring. GEORGIA 339. Duggan, J. R., 1881, The mineral springs of Georgia : Ma- con, Ga., J. W. Burke & Co., 56 p. 340. Hall, B. M., and Hall, M. R., 1907, Water resources of Georgia: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 197, 342 p„ 1 pi. Includes data on the discharge of the springs at Warm Springs. 341. Hewett, Donnel Foster, and Crickmay, Geoffrey William, 1937, The Warm Springs of Georgia, their geologic relations and origin: summary report: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 819, 40 p., 8 pis., 1 fig. 342. McCallie, Samuel Washington, 1904, Notes on wells, springs, and water resources, Georgia : U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 102, p. 207-237. Includes information on the springs at Warm Springs. 343. 1908, A preliminary report on the underground waters of Georgia : Georgia Geol. Survey Bull. 15, 370 p., 29 pis., 5 figs. Contains chemical analyses of water from the springs at Warm Springs. 344. 1913, A preliminary report on mineral springs of Georgia : Georgia Geol. Survey Bull. 20, 190 p., 24 pis., map. Contains data on Warm, Thundering, and Lifsey springs. See also references 137 and 543. HAWAII 345. Ballard, Stanley S., and Payne, John H., 1940, A chemical study of Kilauea solfataric gases, 1938-1940: U.S. Dept. Interior, Natl. Park Service Volcano Letter 469, p. 1-3, 3 figs.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 265 346. Boddam-Whetham, John Whetham, 1876, Pearls of the Pa- cific : London, Hurst & Blackett, 362 p., 8 illus. Mentions that steam is condensed for sulfur baths at Solfatara on the Kilauea volcano. 347. Dana, James Dwight, 1849, Report on geology; United States Exploring Expedition during the years 1838-1842, under the command of Charles Wilkes, U.S.N.; Philadelphia, Pa., C. Sherman, v. 10, Geology, 756 p., 21 pis., 109 figs., 4 maps. Mentions a hot spring in a small crater between Kilauea volcano and Kapoho Point, a warm cavern on the shore at Kailua, and warm springs at Kawaihae, all on the Island of Hawaii. Also describes hot springs along the shore of Savu Savu Bay on Vanua Levu Island (Fiji), hydrothermal activity in several localities in New Zealand, and Los Banos on Luzon Island in the Philippines. 348. 1890, Characteristics of volcanoes, with contributions of facts and principles from the Hawaiian Islands: New York, Dodd, Mead & Co., 399 p., 16 pis., 55 figs. Mentions the water vapors associated with volcanic activity on the Island of Hawaii. 349. Fagerlund, Gunnar O., 1944, Output changes in Kilauea steam vents: U.S. Dept. Interior, Natl. Park Service Volcano Letter 485, p. 1-2, 2 figs. 350. Finch, Ruy Herbert, and Macdonald, Gordon A., 1950, Thermal water on Kilauea Volcano: U.S. Dept. Interior, Natl. Park Service Volcano Letter 507, p. 1. 351. Gordon-Cumming, Constance Frederica, 1883, Fire foun- tains : The kingdom of Hawaii, its volcanoes, and the history of its missions: Edinburgh, W. Blackwood & Sons, 2 v.; v. 1, 297 p., front., 3 illus., map; v. 2, 279 p., front., 3 illus., map. Describes use of hot vapors for sulfur steam baths near crater of Kilauea volcano. 352. Macdonald, Gordon A., 1955, Hawaiian Islands, pt. 3 of Catalogue of active volcanoes of the world including solfatara fields: Naples, Italy, Internat. Volcanol. Assoc., 37 p., 6 figs., map. Contains data on Haleakala, Hualalai, Mauna Loa, and Kilauea volcanoes and associated hydrothermal activity. 353. Macdonald, J. W., 1899, The great volcano of Kilauea. Contains data on the vapor vents. 354. Olson, Gunder Einer, 1941, The story of the Volcano House: 4th ed., Hilo, Hawaii, Hilo Tribune Herald, 91 p., 31 illus., maps. Describes the use of steam for sulfur vapor baths. 355. Palmer, Harold Schjoth, 1950, Steam vents on Kilauea vol- cano, Hawaii: Personal commun. to G. A. Waring. 356. Stearns, Harold Thornton, and Clark, William Otterbein, 1930, Geology and water resources of the Kau district, Hawaii (including parts of Kilauea and Mauna Loa volcanoes), with a chapter on ground water in the Hawaiian Islands, by Oscar E. Meinzer: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 616, 194 p., 33 pis., 9 figs. Mentions warm water in a crack near Waiwelawela Point, 12 miles southeast of Pahala. 357. Stearns, Harold Thornton, and Macdonald, Gordon A., 1942, Geology and ground-water resources of the island of Maui, Hawaii: Hawaii Div. Hydrography Bull. 7, 344 p., 44 pis., 46 figs. Mentions warm-water well at the mouth of Ukume-hame Canyon. 358. 1946, Geology and ground-water resources of the island of Hawaii: Hawaii Div. Hydrography Bull. 9, 363 p., 54 pis., 60 figs. Mentions that steam issues from cracks in and near the craters of Kilauea and Mauna Loa, also that a crack at Waiwelawela Point contains warm water. 359. 1947, Geology and ground-water resources of the island of Molokai, Hawaii: Hawaii Div. Hydrography Bull. 11, 113 p., 15 pis., 18 figs. Describes a warm-water well on the northwest slope of West Molokai. See also references 22, 660, and 1077. IDAHO 360. Fremont, John Charles, 1845, Report of the exploring ex- pedition to the Rocky Mountains in the year 1842, and to Oregon and northern California in the years 1843-44: U.S. 28th Cong., 2d sess., H. Doc. 166, 583 p., 9 pis., 9 other illus. Describes Bear River Soda (Beer) springs and White Arrow hot springs and mentions Hot Spring Gate, all in Idaho. Also mentions hot springs and a basin of saline water near Mary’s Lake in Nevada, hot springs near Las Vegas camp ground in Nevada, and several hot springs in California. 361. Gairdner, M., 1835, Letter from Dr. M. Gairdner, Fort Van- couver : Edinburgh New Philos. Jour., v. 20, p. 206-207. States that springs are numerous between the Columbia River and the Rocky Mountains. Mentions the existence of six hot springs not previously described. 362. 1836, Thermal spring in the Columbia Territory: Edinburgh New Philos. Jour., v. 21, p. 371-372. Contains a chemical analysis of water from a thermal spring on the Bear River. 363. Lindgren, Waldemar, 1898, Description of the Boise quad- rangle, Idaho: U.S. Geol. Survey Geol. Atlas, Folio 45, 7 p., 4 maps. Mentions the Boise hot springs, a tepid spring on Cottonwood Creek, and a hot spring on Squaw Creek. 364. Lindgren, Waldemar, and Drake, Noah Fields, 1904, De- scription of the Silver City quadrangle, Idaho : U.S. Geol. Survey Geol. Atlas, Folio 104, 6 p., 3 maps. Mentions a warm spring near Walters Butte and a hot spring near Enterprise. States that wells near Enterprise and Guffey yield warm water. 365. Meinzer, Oscar Edward, 1924, Ground water in Pahsimeroi Valley, Idaho: Idaho Bur. Mines and Geology Pamph. 9, 36 sheets, 3 pis., 5 figs, [mimeo.]. Mentions two slightly thermal springs in Pahsimeroi Valley; also a warm spring in Little Lost River Valley. 366. Peale, Albert Charles, 1879, Report on the geology of the Green River district, in Hayden, Ferdinand V., U.S. Geol. and Geog. Survey Terr. 11th Ann. Rept., 1877: p. 511-646, 30 pis. Describes Bear River Soda (Beer) springs and mentions a slightly thermal spring in the canyon of Blackfoot River.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 266 367. Piper, Arthur Maine, 1923, Geology and water resources of the Goose Creek basin, Cassia County, Idaho: Idaho Bur. Mines and Geology Bull. 6, 78 p., 6 pis. Contains information on eight thermal springs. 368. [1924?], Geology and water resources of the Bruneau River basin, Owyhee County, Idaho: Idaho Bur. Mines and Geology Pamph. 11, 56 p., 2 pis., 12 tables [mimeo.]. Describes nine thermal springs. 369. Rhodenbaugh, Edward F., 1953, Is Boise [Idaho] sitting on a volcano?: Earth Sci. Digest, v. 7, no. 2, p. 7-11, 27, 3 figs. States that two wells near Boise yield water having a temperature of 178°F. 370. Russell, Israel Cook, 1902, Geology and water resources of the Snake River Plains of Idaho: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 199,192 p., 25 pis., 6 figs. Mentions 10 thermal-spring localities. 371. 1903, Preliminary report on artesian basins in southwestern Idaho and southeastern Oregon: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 78, 53 p., 2 pis., 3 figs. Describes eight hydrothermal localities in Idaho and four in Oregon, all in the Lewis artesian basin. Also describes hydrothermal localities in the Otis, Harney, and Whitehorse artesian basins, all in Oregon. 372. St. John, Orestes, 1879, Report of the geological field work of the Teton Division, in Hayden, Ferdinand V., U.S. Geol. and Geog. Survey Terr. 11th Ann. Rept., 1877: p. 323-508, 40 pis. Mentions thermal springs on the west side of the Snake River valley between The Narrows and McCoy Creek. 373. Schultz, Alfred Reginald, 1918, A geologic reconnaissance for phosphate and coal in southeastern Idaho and western Wyoming: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 680, 84 p., 2 pis., 8 figs. Mentions the warm springs at Heise and two other thermal-spring localities in Idaho. Also mentions a thermal spring in western Wyoming. 374. Tillman, Samuel E., 1878, Executive and descriptive report m U.S. Geog. and Geol. Surveys West of 100th Mer., G. M. Wheeler, Ann. Rept. Chief of Engineers, 1878, app. NN: p. 107-112. Mentions several thermal-spring localities in southeastern Idaho. 375. Umpleby, Joseph Bertram, 1915, Ore deposits in the Saw- tooth quadrangle, Blaine and Custer Counties, Idaho: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 580-K, p. 221-249, 2 pis., 1 fig. Mentions Pierson, Wasewick, and Russian John springs. 376. Umpleby, Joseph Bertram; Westgate, Louis Gardner; and Ross, Clyde Polhemus, 1930, Geology and ore deposits of the Wood River region, Idaho, with a description of the Minnie Moore and nearby mines, by Donnel F. Hewett: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 814, 250 p., 33 pis., 20 figs. Contains chemical analyses of the water from Clarendon, Guyer, and Hailey hot springs. Also mentions a thermal spring near the west edge of the area. 377. Waring, Gerald Ashley, 1936, Two thermal springs in Idaho and Oregon [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Proc. 1935, p. 115-116. Contains information on Indian spring in Idaho and on a spring in the Owyhee River canyon in Oregon. See also references 113, 124, 126, 133, 137, 138, 144, 148, 150, 383, 413, 433, 482, 505, 525, 526, 625, 666, and 667. MASSACHUSETTS 378. Fitch, William Edward, 1927, Mineral waters of the United States and American spas: Philadelphia, Pa., and New York, Lea & Febiger, 799, p., 37 figs. Describes Sand spring near Williamstown. See also references 135,137, and 144. MONTANA 379. Calvert, William R., 1909, Geology of the Lewistown coal field, Montana: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 390, 83 p., 5 pis., 1 fig. Describes the warm springs near Lewistown. 380. Clarke, Frank Wigglesworth, and others, 1886, Report of work done in the division of chemistry and physics, mainly during the fiscal year 1884-85: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 27, 80 p. Includes chemical analyses of water from Matthews spring near Bozeman and of White Sulphur springs. 381. De Lacy, Walter W., 1876, A trip up the south Snake River in 1863: Helena, Mont., Contributions to the Historical Society of Montana, v. 1. Mentions thermal springs. 382. Lewis, Meriwether, and Clark, William, 1814, History of the expedition of Captains Lewis and Clark 1804-5-6, with introduction and index by James K. Hosmer: Chicago, 111., A. C. MeClurg & Co., 2 v.; v. 1, 500 p., front., 3 maps; v. 2, 583 p., front., 3 maps; 2d ed., 1903, Cambridge, Mass., Univ. Press. Describes Traveller’s Rest (Medicine Rock) springs and springs in Hot Spring Valley near the Wisdom River. 383. Lindgren, Waldemar, 1904, A geological reconnaissance across the Bitterroot Range and Clearwater Mountains in Montana and Idaho: U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 27, 123 p., 15 pis., 8 figs. Mentions several thermal-spring localities. 384. Lorenz, H. W, and McMurtrey, R. G., 1956, Geology and occurrence of ground water in the Townsend Valley, Mont.: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 1360-C, p. 171-290, 2 pis., 12 figs. Contains information on Big, Plunket (Mockel), Bedford, and Kimpton springs. 385. Meinzer, Oscar Edward, 1917, Artesian water for irriga- tion in Little Bitterroot Valley, Mont.: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 400-B, p. 9-37, 4 pis., 4 figs. Contains information on Camas hot springs; mentions a warm spring 1 mile west of the Camas hot springs. 386. Mullan, John, Jr., 1855, Report of a reconnaissance from the Bitter Root Valley to Fort Hall, thence to the head of Hell Gate River, thence to the Bitter Root Valley: U.S. War Dept., Reports of explorations and surveys * * * for a railroad from the Mississippi River to the Pacific Ocean: U.S. 33d Cong., 2d sess., S. Doc. 78, v. 1, pt. 1, Reports from the field, p. 322-349. Mentions the,numerous thermal springs near Big Hole prairie and the Anaconda (?) hot springs near Deer Lodge Creek. 387. Pardee, Joseph Thomas, 1925, Geology and ground-water resources of Townsend Valley, Mont.: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 539, 61 p., 2 pis., 7 figs. Contains information on Big, Mockel (Plunket), Bedford, and Kimpton springs. 388. Peale, Albert Charles, 1872, Report on minerals, rocks, thermal springs, etc., in Hayden, Ferdinand V., U.S.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 267 Geol. Survey of Montana and portions of adjacent Territories : 5th Ann. Prog. Rept., p. 165-204. Describes Hapgood springs near Virginia City; also contains data on the principal geysers and hot springs in ^ Yellowstone National Park. 389. 1896, Description of the Three Forks quadrangle, Mont.: r U.S. Geol. Survey Geol. Atlas, Folio 24, 6 p., 4 maps. Mentions the hot springs on the West Gallatin River, the warm springs east of Red Bluff, Hapgood springs on the South Branch of Willow Creek, and a small spring in the lower canyon of the Jefferson River. ^ 390. Sobotka, Harry, and Reiner, Miriam, 1941, Chemical com- position of a lithia spring near McLeod, Mont.: Am. Jour. r Sci„ v. 239, no. 5, p. 383-385. Describes Anderson’s springs 8 miles south of McLeod. 391. Stout, Tom, 1921, Montana; its story and biography: Chicago and New York, Am. Hist. Soc., 3 v. Lists 19 principal hot-spring resorts in Montana, among them those at Hunter’s, Chico, Corwin, and Camas hot springs. t 392. Weed, Walter Harvey, 1899, Description of the Little Belt Mountains quadrangle, Mont.: U.S. Geol. Survey Geol. - Atlas, Folio 56,10 p. Contains information on White Sulphur springs. 393. 1900, Mineral vein formation at Boulder Hot Springs, Mont.: U.S. Geol. Survey 21st Ann. Rept., pt. 2, p. 227-| 255, 3 pis., 8 figs. , 394. 1904, Gypsum deposits in Montana: U.S. Geol. Survey | Bull. 223, p. 74-75. r Contains information on Hunter’s hot springs. 395. 1905, Economic value of hot springs and hot-spring de- posits: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 260, p. 598-604. Contains information on the mineral deposits of Sun River, Boulder, Anaconda, and Hunter’s hot springs. r 396. Weed, Walter Harvey, and Pirsson, Louis Valentine, 1896, Geology of the Castle Mountain mining district, Montana: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 139, 164 p., 17 pis., 11 figs. Describes White Sulphur hot springs. 397. 1898, Geology and mineral resources of the Judith Mountains of Montana : U.S. Geol. Survey 18th- Ann. Rept., pt. 3, p. 437-616,18 pis., 23 figs. Mentions Warm Spring Creek near Maiden. * See also references 109, 128, 133, 137, 138, 141, 144, 148, 409, I 652, 667, and 679. NEVADA 398. Bain, Harry Foster, 1906, A Nevada zinc deposit: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 285, p. 166-169. Mentions Indian spring and warm spring at White’s i-' ranch. 399. Ball, Sydney Hobart, 1907, A geological reconnaissance in southwestern Nevada and eastern California : U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 308, 218 p., 3 pis., 17 figs. Contains information on Alkali spring 11 miles northwest of Goldfield. Mentions Hicks, Staininger ranch, j and Grapevine springs, also springs in Ash Meadows. 400. Becker, George Ferdinand, 1888, Geology of the quicksilver deposits of the Pacific slope: U.S. Geol. Survey Mon. 13, 486 p., 7 pis., 20 figs. Describes Steamboat springs. 401. 1889, Summary of the geology of the quicksilver deposits of the Pacific slope: U.S. Geol. Survey 8th Ann. Rept., ► pt. 2, p. 961-985, 2 pis. Mentions Steamboat springs in Nevada and the hot springs at Sulphur Bank and Oathill mines in California. 402. Beckwith, Edward Griffin, 1855, Report of explorations for a route for the Pacific railroad, on the line of the forty-first parallel of North Latitude: U.S. War Dept., Reports of explorations and surveys * * * for a railroad from the Mississippi River to the Pacific Ocean: U.S. 33d Cong., 2d sess., S. Doc. 78, v. 2, 114 p. [Geol. Report, by James Schiel, p. 96-114,4 pis.] Contains data on a group of hot springs near the east base of the Humboldt Mountains. 403. Blake, William Phipps, 1873, Diatoms in a hot spring in [Pueblo Valley, Humboldt County] Nevada: California Acad. Sci. Mtg. Aug. 21, 1871, Proc., v. 4, pt. 4, p. 183. 404. Brannock, Walter Wallace; Fix, Philip Forsyth; Gianella, Vincent Paul; and White, Donald Edward, 1948, Preliminary geochemical results at Steamboat springs, Nevada: Am. Geophys. Union Trans., v. 29, no. 2, p. 211-226,12 figs., 6 tables. 405. Browne, John Ross, 1867, A report upon the mineral re- sources of the States and Territories west of the Rocky Mountains: U.S. 39th Cong., 2d sess., Ex. Doc. 29, 321 p. Comments on the numerous thermal springs in Nevada. 406. 1868, Resources of the Pacific slope. A statistical and descriptive summary of the mines and minerals, climate, topography, agriculture, commerce, manufactures, and miscellaneous productions of the States and Territories west of the Rocky Mountains, with a sketch of the settlement and exploration of Lower California : New York, D. Appleton Co., 674 and 200 p. (2 parts, paged separately) ; 1869 ed., 678 and 200 p. States that there are many thermal springs in Nevada and describes several. Also contains chemical analyses of the water from six springs in Nevada and from Fish springs in Utah. 407. Carpenter, Everett, 1915, Ground water in southeastern Nevada : U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 365, 86 p., 5 pis., 3 figs. Contains data on 10 thermal springs. 408. Clark, William Otterbein, and Riddell, C. W., 1920, Ex- ploratory drilling for water and use of ground water for irrigation in Steptoe Valley, Nevada, with an introduction by O. E. Meinzer; U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 467, 70 p., 6 pis., 6 figs. Describes Ely warm spring, McGill warm springs, Melvin hot springs, Cherry Creek hot springs, Collar and Elbow spring, Murry springs, Borchert John spring, and a large group of thermal springs 10 miles northwest of McGill. 409. Clarke, Frank Wigglesworth, and Chatard, Thomas Ma- rean, 1884, A report of work done in the Washington laboratory during the fiscal year 1883-84: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 9, 40 p. Includes chemical analyses of water from hot springs on Ward’s ranch and at Hot Spring railway station, both in Nevada; from a warm spring near Mono Lake and a boiling spring near Honey Lake, both in California ; from hot springs 8 miles north of Ogden, Utah; from Livingston, Emigrant Gulch, and Helena hot springs, all in Montana; and from six thermal springs at Hot Springs, Va.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 268 410. Darlington, Philip Jackson, Jr., 1928, New Coleoptera from western hot springs: Psyche, v. 35, no. 1, p. 1-6. Contains technical descriptions of three new species of Coleoptera, one from a spring 37 miles south of Battle Mountain, one from Beowawe hot springs, and from a spring near Opal Mine, all in Nevada. 411. Dole, Richard Bryant, 1913, Exploration of salines in Silver Peak Marsh, Nev.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 530, p. 330-345, 3 figs. States that there are hot springs at the edge of the Marsh. 412. Dreyer, Robert Marx, 1940, Goldbanks mining district, Pershing County, Nev.: Nevada Univ. Bull., v. 34, no. 1 (Geology and Mining Ser. 33), 38 p., 13 figs. States that the cinnabar in the Goldbanks mining district was deposited by circulating hot waters. Mentions hot springs a few miles north of the mine. 413. Engelmann, Henry, 1876, Report on the geology of the country between Fort Leavenworth, Kansas Territory, and the Sierra Nevada near Carson Valley, in Simpson, James Hervey, Report of explorations across the Great Basin of the Territory of Utah * * * in 1859: Washington, Govt. Printing Office, U.S. Engineer Dept., p. 243-336. Mentions Steamboat and Hot Sulphur springs and hot springs near bend of the Walker River, all in Nevada; Bear River Soda (Beer) springs in Idaho ; boiling springs near Mud Lake and near Honey Lake in California ; and thermal springs in four localities in Utah. 414. Evans, Albert S., 1869, In Whirlwind Valley: Overland Monthly [San Francisco, Calif.], v. 2, no. 2, p. 111-115. Describes the Beowawe geysers. 415. Fall, Henry Clinton, 1928, A new coelambus from a ther- mal spring in [Ruby Valley] Nevada: Psyche, v. 35, no. 1, p. 64-65. 416. Gianella, Vincent Paul, 1939, Mineral deposition at Steam- boat springs, Nevada [abs.] : Econ. Geology, v. 34, no. 4, p. 471-472. 417. Gianella, Vincent Paul, and White, Donald Edward, 1946, Minerals of Steamboat springs, Nevada [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 57, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 1196; 1947, Am. Mineralogist, v. 32, nos. 3-4, p. 200-201. 418. Hague, Arnold, and Emmons, Samuel Franklin, 1877, Geo- logic reports: U.S. Geol. Explor. 40th Parallel (King), v. 2, 890 p., front., 25 pis. Mentions several thermal-spring localities in Nevada ; also warm springs at mouth of Ogden Canyon and north of Salt Lake City in Utah; and a large hot spring near Eagle Lake in Antelope Valley, Calif. 419. Hill, James Madison, 1915, Some mining districts in north- eastern California and northwestern Nevada: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 594,200 p., 19 pis., 4 figs. Mentions the hot mineral springs at Sodaville in Mineral County, Nev. Also shows location of Hinds hot springs on a map of the south end of the Pine Nut Range in Douglas County, Nev. 420. Jones, J. Claude, 1914, Occurrence of stibnite and metastib- nite at Steamboat Springs, Nevada [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 25, no. 1, p. 126. 421. Kearney, W. M., 1913, Biennial report of State Engineer of Nevada, for 1911-1912 : 294 p., 8 views, 1 graph. Includes measurements of the discharge of Warm Creek in Elko County and Preston springs, Lund spring, and springs at the head of Warm Creek, all in White Pine County. 422. Kerr, Paul Francis, 1940, Tungsten-bearing manganese de- posit at Golconda, Nev.: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 51, no. 9, p. 1359-1389, 5 pis., 6 figs.; abs., Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 51, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 2026. States that the rock overlying the ore deposit is of hot-spring origin. 423. 1946, Tungsten mineralization in the United States: Geol. Soc. America Mem. 15, 241 p., 23 pis., 34 figs. States that tungsten-bearing manganese deposit near Golconda, Nev., was formed by hot springs. Also mentions hot springs near Sodaville, Nev. 424. King, Clarence, 1878, Systematic geology: U.S. Geol. Ex- plor. 40th Parallel (King), v. 1, 803 p., 26 pis., 12 maps. Contains information on the mineral deposits of Steamboat springs and of hot springs in Ruby, Reese River, and Grass Valleys, in the Humboldt Range, and at Geiger Grade, all in Nevada. Mentions the hot springs at Salt Lake City and north of Ogden, both in Utah. 425. Knopf, Adolph, 1917, Tin ore in northern Lander County, Nev.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 640-G, p. 125-138, 1 fig. Mentions a warm spring 20 miles north of Battle Mountain (town). 426. LeConte, Joseph, 1883, On mineral vein formation now in progress at Steamboat Springs [Nev.] compared with the same at Sulphur Bank [Calif.] : Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., v. 25, p. 424-428, 2 figs. 427. Lindgren, Waldemar, 1905, The occurrence of stibnite at Steamboat Springs, Nevada : Am. Inst. Mining Engineers Bull. 2, p. 275-278; Trans., v. 36, p. 27-31. Describes the Steamboat springs and gives a chemical analysis of the water. 428. 1911, The Tertiary gravels of the Sierra Nevada of California: U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 73, 226 p., 28 pis., 16 figs. Describes Walleys hot springs and gives a chemical analysis of the water. 429. Loeltz, 0. J., and Eakin, T. E., 1953, Geology and water resources of Smith Valley, Lyon and Douglas Counties, Nev.: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 1228, 89 p., 3 pis., 6 figs., 8 tables. Describes Hinds hot springs and mentions a few nearby warm springs. 430. Marshall, Ruth, 1928, A new species of water mite from thermal springs: Psyche, v. 35, no. 2, p. 92-96, 1 pi. Describes a mite from a warm spring 15 miles north of Deeth and from Minden hot springs, both in Nevada. 431. Maxey, George Burke, and Eakin, T. E., 1950, Ground water in White River Valley, White Pine, Nye, and Lincoln Counties, Nev.: Nevada, Office State Engineer, Water Resources Bull. 8, 59 p., 2 pis., 5 figs., 10 tables. Contains data on Moon River spring, Hot Creek spring, Mormon spring, and William springs. 432. Meinzer, Oscar Edward, 1917, Geology and water resources of Big Smoky, Clayton, and Alkali Spring Valleys, Nevada : U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 423, 167 p., 15 pis., 11 figs. Describes Spencer, Darrough, McLeod’s ranch, Char-nock, and Gendron springs. Contains chemical analyses of the water of Spencer, Alkali, Charnock, and Darrough springs.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 269 >- 433. Meinzer, Oscar Edward, 1924, Origin of the thermal springs of Nevada, Utah, and southern Idaho: Jour. Geology, v. 32, no. 4, p. 295-303, 4 figs. 434. Murbarger, Nell, 1956, Geysers of Whirlwind Valley [Ne- ^ vada] : Desert Mag., v. 19, no. 1, p. 17-20, 7 figs. Describes the Beowawe geysers. r 435. Nolan, Thomas Brennan, and Anderson, George Harold, 1934, The geyser area near Beowawe, Eureka County, Nev.: Am. Jour. Sci., 5th ser., v. 27, no. 159, p. 215-229, 10 pis., 2 figs. 436. Overton, Theodore D., 1947, Mineral resources of Douglas, ^ Ormsby, and Washoe Counties: Nevada Univ. Bull., v. 41, no. 9 (Geology and Mining Ser. 46), 91 p., 5 pis., 14 A figs. Describes Steamboat springs and mentions Gerlach hot springs. 437. Penrose, Richard Alexander Fullerton, Jr., 1893, A Pleisto- cene manganese deposit near Golconda, Nevada: Jour. ^ Geology, v. 1, no. 3, p. 275-282, 2 figs. Mentions the hot springs near Golconda and suggests I a hot-spring origin for the manganese ore. 438. Ransome, Frederick Leslie, 1909a, Notes on some mining districts in Humboldt County, Nev.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 414, 75 p., 1 pi., 7 figs. Mentions the Sou hot springs. 439. 1909b, The geology and ore deposits of Goldfield, Nev.: U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 66, 258 p., 35 pis., 34 figs. Contains data on the Alkali springs. 440. Reeds, Chester Albert, 1927, Desert landscapes of north- western Nevada: Nat. History, v. 27, no. 5, p. 448-461, 22 figs. Mentions that large springs, some of which are thermal, issue at the margins of desert basins and that many of the springs deposit mineral matter. 441. Russell, Israel Cook, 1885, Geological history of Lake La- K hontan, a Quaternary lake of northwestern Nevada : U.S. Geol. Survey Mon. 11, 288 p., 46 pis., 36 figs. Mentions the numerous hot springs in the Lahontan basin and briefly describes the principal ones. Contains chemical analyses of the water from a spring at Hot Spring railway station and from hot springs north of f Granite Mountain, both in Nevada; also, analyses of a spring near Honey Lake in California. 442. St. John, Orestes, 1883, Report on the geology of the Wind River district, in Hayden, Ferdinand V., U.S. Geol. and Geog. Survey Terr. 12th Ann. Rept., 1878, pt. 1: p. 173-269, 49 pis. Mentions warm springs and tufa deposits 1 mile down-■v stream from the mouth of Warm Spring Creek and 0.5 mile from the Wind River, also warm springs at the mouth of Jakes Creek Canyon, in Nevada. Includes views of Sou hot springs and of hot-spring deposits in Osobb Valley, both in Nevada, and of hot-spring deposits in Provo Valley, Utah. 443. Spurr, Josiah Edward, 1903, Descriptive geology of Ne- -* vada south of the 40th parallel and adjacent portions of California: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 208, 229 p., 8 pis., 25 figs. Mentions Indian springs and hot springs in White River valley and on Hot Creek ranch. 444. 1905, Geology of the Tonopah mining district, Nevada: U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 42, 295 p., 24 pis., 78 figs. ». Describes the Devil’s Punchbowl in Monitor Valley 45 miles northeast of Tonopah and mentions a hot spring and a nearby tepid spring 25 miles southwest of Tonopah. 445. Spurr, Josiah Edward, 1906, Ore deposits of the Silver Peak quadrangle, Nevada : U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 55, 174 p., 24 pis., 40 figs. Mentions hot springs at Silver Peak and on the east side of Clayton Valley. 446. Waring, Gerald Ashley, 1918, Ground water in Reese River basin and adjacent parts of Humboldt River basin, Nev.: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 425-D, p. 95-129, 6 pis., 1 fig. Mentions Mound Spring, hot springs east of Fish Creek, and hot springs in Buffalo Valley. Also contains chemical analyses of water from the springs at Hot Springs ranch, a spring 1 mile north of those springs, and a spring in Buffalo Valley. 447. 1920, Ground water in Pahrump, Mesquite, and Ivanpah valleys, Nevada and California: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 450-C, p. 51-81, 5 pis., 2 figs. Describes warm springs at Manse and Pahrump ranches in Pahrump Valley ; also contains chemical analyses of water from both springs. 448. White, Donald Edward, 1947, Rock alteration associated with thermal springs [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 58, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 1239; 1948, abs., Am. Mineralogist, v. 33, nos. 3-4, p. 210-211. Contains observations of rock alteration in areas of thermal springs; makes special reference to Steamboat springs. 449. 1952a, Three-dimensional picture of Steamboat springs, Nevada [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 63, pt. 2, no. 12, p. 1311-1312. 450. 1952b, Some recent results of investigations at Steamboat springs, Nevada [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 63, pt. 2, no. 12, p. 1374. 451. 1954, Observations on some thermal springs in Nevada: Unpublished field notes. Contains data on 33 thermal springs. 452. White, Donald Edward, and Brannock, Walter Wallace, 1950, The sources of heat and water supply of thermal springs, with particular reference to Steamboat Springs, Nevada : Am. Geophys. Union Trans., v. 31, no. 4, p. 566-574. 3 figs., 2 tables; abs., Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 61, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 1534. 453. 1951, Sources of heat, water supply, and mineral content of Steamboat springs, Nevada: Internal. Union Geodesy and Geophysics; Assoc. Sci. Hydrology Gen. Assem., Oslo 1948, Trans., v. 3, p. 168-176, 3 figs., 1 table. 454. White, Donald Edward, and Craig, Harmon, 1959, Isotope geology of the Steamboat springs area, Nevada [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 70, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 1696. 455. White, Donald Edward; Fix, Philip Forsyth; Gianella, Vincent Paul; and Brannock, Walter Wallace, 1946, Preliminary results at Steamboat springs, Washoe County, Nev. [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 57, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 1258-1259. 456. White, Donald Edward; Thompson, George Albert; and Brannock, Walter Wallace, 1949, Thermal springs and their possible significance in the future discovery of ore deposits [abs.] : Econ. Geology, v. 44, no. 1, p. 83. Mentions Steamboat springs. See also references 20,102,108,109,125,126,128, 130, 137, 138, 140, 141, 144, 269, 274, 276, 304, 395, 520, 562, and 667.270 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD NEW MEXICO 457. Clark, John Dustin, 1929, The saline springs of the Bio Salado, Sandoval County, N. Mex.: New Mexico Univ. Bull., Chemistry Ser, v. 1, no. 3, 29 p., 17 figs. Contains information on the sulfur springs near Mount Pelado, Soda Dam springs, Jemez hot springs, and Indian, San Ysidro, and Phillips springs, also on two thermal wells. 458. Clarke, Frank Wigglesworth, 1893, Report on work done in the division of chemistry during the fiscal years 1891-92 and 1892-93: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 113, 115 p. Contains a chemical analysis of water from Ojo Caliente spring in Taos County, N. Mex. 459. Hayden, Ferdinand Vandiveer, 1873, Geological report, em- bracing Colorado and New Mexico: U.S. Geol. Survey Terr. Ann. Repts. for 1867, 1868, and 1869 [reprints], 261 p. Mentions hot springs 5 miles northwest of Las Vegas, N. Mex., also warm sulfur springs on the right bank of the Grand River just upstream from the head of its canyon in Colorado. 460. Jones, Fayette Alexander, 1904, New Mexico mines and minerals: Santa Fe., N. Mex., New Mexican Printing Co., 349 p., 50 figs. Contains data on seven important thermal springs and mentions several minor thermal springs. 461. Kelly, Clyde, and Anspach, E. V., 1913, A preliminary study of the waters of the Jemez Plateau, New Mexico: New Mexico Univ. Bull., Chemistry Ser., v. 1, no. 1, 72 p. Contains information on several thermal springs, including chemical analyses of the water. 462. Kintzinger, Paul R., 1956, Geothermal survey of hot ground near Lordsburg, N. Mex.; Science, v. 124, no. 3223, p. 629-630, 1 fig. 463. Lindgren, Waldemar, 1910, The hot springs at Ojo Cali- ente, Taos County, N. Mex., and their deposits: Econ. Geology, v. 5, p. 22-27. 464. Lindgren, Waldemar, Graton, Louis Caryl, and Gordon, Charles Henry, 1910, The ore deposits of New Mexico: U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 68, 361 p., 22 pis., 33 figs. Mentions Las Vegas, Faywood, Jemez, and Socorro thermal springs and describes hot-spring mineral deposits at Ojo Caliente springs in Taos County. 465. Reagan, Albert B., 1903, Geology of the Jemez-Albuquerque region, New Mexico: Am. Geologist, v. 31, no. 2, p. 67-111, 7 pis. Contains information on several thermal-spring localities. 466. Renick, Brink Coleman, 1931, Geology and ground-water resources of western Sandoval County, N. Mex.: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 620, 117 p., 10 pis., 3 figs. Contains chemical analyses of water from eight thermal springs and describes several of the springs. 467. Richardson, Harriet, 1898, Description of a new crustacean of the genus Sphaeroma from a warm spring [Socorro?] in New Mexico: U.S. Natl. Mus. Proc., v. 20, no. 1128, p. 465-466. 468. Theis, Charles Vernon, Taylor, George Carroll, Jr, and Murray, C. Richard, 1942, Thermal waters of the Hot Springs artesian basin, Sierra County, N. Mex.: New Mexico State Engineer 14th and 15th Bienn. Repts, July 1938-June 1942, p. 419-492,1 pi, 7 figs. See also references 125, 133. 137, 138, 144, 328, 335, and 526. NEW YORK 469. Fitch, William Edward, 1927, Mineral waters of the United States and American spas: Philadelphia, Pa, and New York, Lea & Febiger, 799 p, 37 figs. Contains information on Lebanon warm spring, 27 miles southeast of Albany. Includes a chemical analysis of the water. 470. Meade, William, 1817, An experimental inquiry into the chemical properties and medicinal qualities of the principal mineral waters of Ballston and Saratoga, in the State of New York * * * to which is added an appendix containing a chemical analysis of the Lebanon spring in the State of New York: Philadelphia, Pa, H. Hall, 195 p, illus. 471. Peale, Albert Charles, 1886, Lists and analyses of the min- eral springs of the United States (a preliminary study) : U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 32, 285 p. Contains a chemical analysis of water from Lebanon warm spring. 472. Weeks, Fred Boughton, 1905, New York: U.S. Geol. Sur- vey Water-Supply Paper 114, p. 82-92. Contains information on Lebanon warm spring. See also references 133,135,137,138, 144, and 145. NORTH CAROLINA 473. Fitch, William Edward, 1927, Mineral waters of the United States and American spas: Philadelphia, Pa, and New York, Lea & Febiger, 799 p, 37 figs. Contains chemical analyses of water from two of the hot springs on the French Broad River. 474. Kain, John Henry, 1818, Remarks on the mineralogy and geology of the northwestern part of the State of Virginia, and the eastern part of the State of Tennessee: Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 1st ser, v. 1, p. 60-67. Contains information on the hot springs on the French Broad River. 475. Kerr, Washington Carruthers, 1875, Report of the Geo- logical Survey of North Carolina : Raleigh, N.C, v. 1, 325 p, 8 pis, map. Contains information on the total dissolved solids in water from one of the hot springs on the French Broad River. 476. Smith, Edward D, 1821, An account of the warm springs in Buncombe County, State of North Carolina : Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 1st ser, v. 3, no. 1, p. 117-125. Describes the hot springs on the French Broad River. 477. Stose, George Willis, and Stose, Anna Jonas, 1947, Origin of the hot springs at Hot Springs, N.C.: Am. Jour. Sci, v. 245, pt. 2, no. 10, p. 624-644, 4 figs. 478. Watson, Thomas L, 1924, Thermal springs of the southeast Atlantic States: Jour. Geology, v. 32, no. 5, p. 373-384, 2 figs, 2 tables. Contains a chemical analysis of water from one of the hot springs on the French Broad River. See also references 124, 133, 137, 138, 144, 145, and 543. OREGON 479. Ayres, Fred Donald, and Creswell, A. E, 1951, The Mount Hood fumaroles: Mazama [Portland, Oreg.], v. 33, no. 13, p. 33—40, 4 illus.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 271 480. Hewett, Donnel Foster; Shannon, Earl Victor; and Gon- yer, Forest A., 1928, Zeolites from Ritter hot spring, Grant County, Oreg.: U.S. Natl. Mus. Proc., v. 73, art. 16 (no. 2727), 18p., 2pis., 1 fig. 481. Langille, H. D.; Plummer, Fred Gordon; and others, 1903, Forest conditions in the Cascade Range Forest Reserve, Oregon: U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 9, 298 p., 41 pis. Contains information on hot sulfur spring and on Breitenbush and Belknap hot springs, all near the Clackamas River. 482. Lindgren, Waldemar, 1901, The gold belt of the Blue Moun- tains of Oregon: U.S. Geol. Survey 22d Ann. Rept., pt. 2, p. 551-776, 26 pis., 10 figs. Describes Medical springs and mentions several others, including two on the Idaho side of the Snake River. 483. Newberry, John Strong, 1857, Report upon the geology of the route [from Sacramento Valley to the Columbia River], in U.S. War Dept., Reports of explorations and surveys * * * for a railroad from the Mississippi River to the Pacific Ocean: U.S. 33d Cong., 2d sess., S. Doc. 78, v. 6, pt. 2, 85 p., 11 figs., 5 pis. Describes two hot springs in the Warn Chuck River valley. 484. Phillips, Kenneth N., 1936, A chemical study of the fu- maroles of Mount Hood: Mazama, v. 18, no. 12, p. 44-46, 2 figs., Portland, Oreg. 485. Phillips, Kenneth N., and Collins, J. Russel, 1935, Fu- maroles on Mount Hood: Mazama, v. 17, no. 12, p. 19-21, 2 figs., Portland, Oreg. 486. Piper, Arthur Maine; Robinson, Thomas William; and Park, Charles Frederick, Jr., 1940: Geology and ground-water resources of the Harney Basin, Oreg.: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 841, 189 p., 20 pis., 9 figs. Contains data on several thermal springs and wells. 487. Russell, Israel Cook, 1905, Preliminary report on the ge- ology and water resources of central Oregon: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 252,138 p., 24 pis., 4 figs. Mentions several thermal-spring localities. 488. Stearns, Harold Thornton, 1929, Geology and water re- sources of the upper McKenzie Valley, Oreg.: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 597-D, p. 171-188, 3 pis., 2 figs. Describes the Belknap hot springs. 489. Trauger, Frederick Dale, 1950, Basic ground-water data in Lake County, Oreg.: U.S. Geol. Survey open-file rept., 287 p.,26 pis. [dupl.]. Contains detailed information on several thermal springs. 490. Waring, Gerald Ashley, 1908, Geology and water resources of a portion of south-central Oregon: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 220, 86 p., 10 pis., 1 fig. Contains information on several thermal springs. 491. 1909, Geology and water resources of the Harney Basin region, Oregon: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 231, 93 p., 5 pis. Contains information on several thermal springs in the Harney, Catlow, and Alvord Valleys. 492. Washburne, Chester Wesley, 1911, Gas and oil prospects near Vale, Oreg., and Payette, Idaho: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 431-A, p. 26-55,1 pi. Mentions several springs in the vicinity of Vale, Oreg. See also references 109, 113, 133, 137, 141, 144, 150, 371, 377, 386, and 2092. PENNSYLVANIA 493. Peale, Albert Charles, 1886, Lists and analyses of the mineral springs of the United States (a preliminary study) : U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 32, 235 p. Contains data on a warm spring in Perry County, Pa. SOUTH DAKOTA 494. Darton, Nelson Horatio, 1896, Preliminary report on arte- sian waters of a portion of the Dakotas: U.S. Geol. Survey 17th Ann. Rept., pt. 2, p. 603-694, 39 pis., 16 figs. 495. 1897, New developments in well boring and irrigation in eastern South Dakota, 1896: U.S. Geol. Survey 18th Ann. Rept., pt. 4, p. 561-615,10 pis. Contains data on 49 deep wells and states that the geothermal gradient is about 1°F for each 40- to 50-foot increase in depth. 496. 1901, Preliminary description of the geology and water resources of the southern half of the Black Hills and adjoining regions in South Dakota and Wyoming : U.S. Geol. Survey 21st Ann. Rept., pt. 4, p. 489-599, 55 pis., 28 figs. Mentions springs in Hot Springs (city), also Hot Brook, 3 miles west of the city. 497. 1909, Geology and underground waters of South Dakota : U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 227,156 p., 15 pis., 7 figs. 498. 1918, Artesian waters in the vicinity of the Black Hills, South Dakota: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 428, 64 p., 13 pis., 11 figs. Discusses the source of the warm water issuing from springs in and near Hot Springs (city). 499. Darton, Horatio Nelson, and Smith, William Sidney Tan- gier, 1904, Description of the Edgemont quadrangle, South Dakota-Nebraska: U.S. Geol. Survey Geol. Atlas, Folio 108,10 p., 5 figs., 4 maps. Includes data on the warm springs at Cascade. 500. O’Harra, Cleophas Cisney, and Todd, James Edward, 1902, Mineral resources of South Dakota: South Dakota Geol. Survey Bull. 3,136 p., 31 pis., 4 figs. Contains information on the Minnekahta hot springs. 501. Waring, Gerald Ashley, 1946, Thermal springs at and near Hot Springs, S. Dak.: Unpublished field notes. See also references 133,137,145,148. TEXAS 502. Gordon, Charles Henry, 1913, Geology and underground waters of the Wichita region, north-central Texas: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 317, 88 p., 2 pis. Mentions three slightly thermal springs in Montague County. 503. Hill, Robert Thomas, and Vaughan, Thomas Wayland, 1898, Geologly of the Edwards Plateau and Rio Grande Plain adjacent to Austin and San Antonio, Tex., with reference to the occurrence of underground waters: U.S. Geol. Survey 18th Ann. Rept. (1896-97), pt. 2, p. 193-321, 34 pis., 24 figs. Describes Comal springs near New Braunfels. 504. Rossler, A. R., 1876, Beschaffenheit und geologische Ver- haltnisse des Sauersees im Hardin County, Tex.: K.-kgl. geol. Reichsanst. Wien Verh., 1876, p. 227-229. Contains information on six thermal springs in the Sour Lake area. See also references 73,138, and 144.272 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD UTAH 505. Bradley, Frank Howe, 1873, Report of geologist of the Snake River Division, in Hayden, Ferdinand V., U.S. Geol, and Geog. Survey Terr. 6th Ann. Rept., 1872: p. 190-271, 8 figs., maps. Contains information on several thermal-spring localities in Utah, Wyoming, and Idaho. 506. Bryan, Kirk, 1919, Classification of springs: Jour. Geology, v. 27, p. 522-561, 23 figs. Mentions Hot, Big, and Fish springs at and near the northeast end of the Fish Springs Range. 507. Callaghan, Eugene, and Thomas, Harold Edgar, 1939, Manganese in a thermal spring in west-central Utah: Econ. Geology, v. 34, no. 8, p. 905-920, 6 figs., 3 tables. Contains data on hot springs near the village of Abraham. 508. Carpenter, Everett, 1913, Ground water in Boxelder and Tooele Counties, Utah: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 333, 87 p., 2 pis., 9 figs. Contains information on thermal springs at Hot Springs, at Honeyville, near Plymouth, at the south end of Little Mountain, and in Park Valley. 509. Crittenden, Max D, Jr., 1951, Manganese deposits of west- ern Utah: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 979-A, 62 p., 1 pi., 2 figs., 22 tables. Contains information on the hot springs near the village of Abraham. 510. Emmons, Samuel Franklin, 1877, Western Uinta Range: U.S. Geol. Explor. 40th Parallel (King), v. 2, p. 311-325. Mentions warm springs near Heber. 511. 1893, The Wasatch Mountains: Intemat. Geol. Cong., 5th, Washington 1891, Compte rendu, p. 381-391, 2 figs.; Geol. Guide Book, Rocky Mountain Excursion, p. 253-487. Mentions thermal springs at Hot Springs and between Centerville and Salt Lake City. 512. Gilbert, Grove Karl, 1890, Lake Bonneville: U.S. Geol. Survey Mon. 1, 438 p., 51 pis., 51 figs., map. Mentions the group of warm springs and vapor vents at Fumarole Butte, warm springs north of Salt, Lake City, and at North Ogden Canyon. 513. Hayden, Ferdinand Vandiveer, 1871, U.S. Geological Sur- vey of Wyoming and portions of contiguous Territories, 4th Ann. Rept., 1870 (2d report of progress) : p. 85-188, 20 figs. Includes information on thermal springs near Salt Lake City. 514. Howell, Edwin Eugene, 1875, Report on the geology of por- tions of Utah, Nevada, Arizona, and New Mexico, examined in the years 1872 and 1873, in Wheeler, George M., U.S. Geog. and Geol. Surveys W. 100th Mer. Rept., v. 3, Geology, pt. 3: p. 227-301, 2 pis., 41 figs. Describes warm springs near the town of Midway and hot springs at the north end of Escalante Valley. 515. Ives, Ronald Lorenz, 1946, The Fish Springs area, Utah: Rocks and Minerals, v. 21, no. 9, p. 555-560, 8 figs. 516. 1947, Fumarole Butte, Utah: Rocks and Minerals, v. 22, no. 10, p. 903-909, 7 figs. Describes hydrothermal activity at Fumarole Butte. 517. King, Clarence, 1878, Systematic geology: U.S. Geol. Ex- plor. 40th Parallel (King), v. 1, 803 p., 26 pis., 12 maps. Mentions the hot springs at Salt Lake City and North of Ogden. 518. Lee, Willis Thomas, 1908, Water resources of Beaver Val- vey, Utah: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 217, 57 p., 1 pi., 3 figs. Contains information on McKean’s (Roosevelt) hot springs, Dotson’s spring, and warm springs 3 miles south of Thermo. 519. Marsell, Ray E., 1951, Ground-water contamination by sa- line thermal waters [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 62, no. 12, pt. 2,1506-1507. Contains information on the hot springs northwest of Salt Lake City. 520. Meinzer, Oscar Edward, 1911, Ground water in Juab, Mil- lard, and Iron Counties, Utah: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 277,162 p., 5 pis., 13 figs. Contains data on several thermal springs in Utah, also on a group of springs in Nevada near the Utah border. 521. Pack, Frederick James, 1927, Structure of thermal springs on the Wasatch fault: Am. Jour. Sci., 5th ser., v. 14, p. 409-418, 4 figs. 522. Pack, Frederick James, and Carrington, A. C., 1921, Geo- logic and economic resources, Weber County, Utah: Utah Univ. Bull., v. 11, no. 19, 61 p. Contains data on Utah hot springs and Ogden hot springs. 523. Richardson, George Burr, 1906, Underground water in the valleys of Utah Lake and Jordan River, Utah: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 157, 81 p., 9 pis., 5 figs. Contains information on several thermal-spring localities. 524. 1907, Underground water in Sanpete and central Sevier Valleys, Utah: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 199, 63 p., 6 pis., 5 figs. Contains data on Joseph hot springs, springs 0.5 mile east of Monroe, and Johnson spring. 525. Stansbury, Howard, 1852, Exploration and survey of the valley of the Great Salt Lake of Utah, including a re-connoissanee of a new route through the Rocky Mountains : U.S. 32d Cong., Spec, sess., Mar. 1851, S. Doc. 3, 487 p., 35 illus., 23 pis., maps; repr., 1853, S. Ex. Doc. 3, 495 p.; 1855, Lippincott, Grambo & Co., Philadelphia, Pa., under title, “An expedition to the valley of the Great Salt Lake of Utah ; including a description of its geography, natural history, and minerals, and an analysis of its waters; with an authentic account of the Mormon settlement.” Contains information on several thermal-spring localities in Utah, also one in Idaho and one in Wyoming. 526. Wheeler, George Montague, 1889, Geographical report of areas occupied, in Wheeler, George M., U.S. Geog. and Geol. Surveys W. 100th Mer. Rept., v. 1, Geographical report: p. 21-146. Mentions several thermal-spring localities in Utah and Idaho. See also references 20, 109, 124, 125, 128, 133, 137, 138, 144, 317,406-409, 413,418,424,433,442, 666, 686. VIRGINIA 527. Burke, William, 1842, The mineral springs of Virginia ; with remarks on their use, and the diseases to which they are applicable: New York, Wiley & Putnam, 394 p., map; 2d ed., 1846.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 273 * * \ L ► 528. Burke, William, 1853, The Virginia mineral springs: 2d ed., Richmond, Va. 529. Dunglison, Robley, 1866, Medical lexicon; A dictionary of medical science, thoroughly revised and very greatly modified and augmented: Philadelphia, Pa., H. C. Lea, 1047 p.; 1st ed., 1860. Contains information on several thermal springs. 530. Froehling & Robertson, 1904, A hand-book on the min- erals and mineral resources of Virginia. Prepared for the Virginia Commission to the St. Louis Exposition: Richmond, Va., 159 p. Describes the mineral springs. Contains chemical analyses of the water from many of them. 531. Hayden, Horace Henry, 1831, Notices of the geology of the country near Bedford springs in Pennsylvania and the Bath or Berkeley Spring in Virginia, with remarks upon those waters: Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 1st ser., v. 19, no. 1. 532. Hemmeter, John, and Zueblin, Ernest, ca. 1920, Report on radioactivity of springs in Virginia: Baltimore, Md., 16 p. 533. Moorman, John Jennings, 1847, The Virginia springs, with their analyses and some remarks of their character * * * : Philadelphia, Pa., Lindsay & Blakiston, 219 p. 534. 1854, The Virginia springs, comprising an account of all the principal mineral springs of Virginia, with remarks on the nature and medical applicability of each: 2d ed., Richmond, Va., J. W. Randolph, 319 p., pis., maps. 535. 1859, The Virginia springs and springs of the South and West: Philadelphia, Pa., J. B. Lippincott & Co., 403 p., front., pis., map. 536. 1869, Virginia White Sulphur Springs, with the analysis of its waters * * * : Baltimore, Md., Kelly, Piet & Co., 27 p. 537. 1876, White Sulphur Springs, with the analysis of its waters, the diseases to which they are applicable, and some account of society and its amusement at the springs: Baltimore, Md., Sun Book & Job Printing Office, 31 p. 538. Reeves, Frank, 1932, Thermal springs of Virginia : Virginia Geol. Survey Bull. 36, 56 p., 8 pis., 4 figs., 7 tables. Contains data on 321 springs in Virginia and West Virginia. Most are only slightly thermal. 539. Rogers, William Barton, 1836, Memoir on the connection of thermal waters in Virginia with anticlinal axes and faults: Virginia Geol. Rept., app. 540. 1843, On the connection of thermal springs in Virginia with anticlinal axes and faults: Assoc. Am. Geologists and Naturalists Repts., 1840-42, p. 323-347. Contains information on the thermal springs in 29 localities. 541. 1884, A reprint of the annual reports and other papers on the geology of the Virginias, by the late William Barton Rogers: New York, D. Appleton & Co., 832 p., 8 pis., map, 8 charts. Contains information on thermal springs in 29 localities. Includes chemical analyses of the water from six thermal springs in Virginia and White Sulphur springs and Old Sweet springs in West Virginia. 542. Watson, Thomas Leonard, 1907, Mineral resources of Vir- ginia : Lynchburg, Va., J. P. Bell Co., 618 p, 83 pis., 101 figs. (Virginia-Jamestown Exposition Comm.) Contains information on the mineral springs. 543. 1924, Thermal springs of the southeast Atlantic States : Jour. Geology, v. 32, no. 5. p. 373-384, 2 figs, 2 tables. Summarizes available data on Hot, Warm Sulphur, and Healing springs in Virginia, Warm Springs in Georgia, and Hot Springs in North Carolina. See also references 20,126, 133, 137-139,144, 409. WASHINGTON 544. Calkins, Frank Cathcart, 1905, Geology and water resources of a portion of east-central Washington: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 118, 96 p., 4 pis., 4 figs. Mentions Clerf spring. 545. Fowler, Claude S., 1936, The geology of the Mount Adams country: Geol. Soc. Oregon Country News Letter, v. 2, no. 1. Mentions fumaroles and vapor vents on Mount Adams. 546. Landes, Henry, 1905, Preliminary report on the under- ground waters of Washington: U.S. Geol Survey Water-Supply Paper 111, 85 p., 1 pi. Contains chemical analysis of the water from the Great Northern hot springs and Blockhouse spring. 547. Phillips, Kenneth N., 1941, Fumaroles of Mount St. Helens and Mount Adams: Mazama [Portland, Oreg.], v. 23, no. 12, p. 37-42, 3 figs. 548. Plummer, Fred Gordon, 1902, Forest conditions in the Cas- cade Range, Wash., between the Washington and Mount Rainier forest reserves : U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 6, 42 p., 11 pis. Contains information on the springs at Hot Springs resort on the Northern Pacific Railway, on the warm springs on Burnt Boot Creek, on the Hot Sulphur spring at Madison, and on hot mineral springs on the North Fork of Skykomish River. 549. Smith, George Otis, 1901, Geology and water resources of a portion of Yakima County, Wash.: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 55, 68 p., 7 pis., 8 figs. Describes Clerf spring. 550. 1903, Description of the Ellensburg quadrangle, Wash.: U.S. Geol. Survey Geol. Atlas, Folio 86, 7 p., 3 maps. Contains information on Clerf spring. 551. Waring, Gerald Ashley, 1913, Geology and water resources of a portion of south-central Washington: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 316, 46 p., 1 pi., 1 fig. Describes Nicolai spring. See also references 133,137, 660. WEST VIRGINIA 552. Erskine, Harlan Mercer, 1948, Principal springs of West Virginia; a report on the location, discharge, and temperature of the principal springs of West Virginia: West Virginia Conserv. Comm., 50 p., 1 pi., 5 figs., 2 tables. Contains information on 27 springs yielding water having temperature higher than 60 °F. 553. MacCorkle, William Alexander, 1916, The White Sulphur Springs: New York, Neale Pub. Co. 554. Price, Paul Holland; McCue, John Bruce; and Hoskins, Homer Arthur, 1936, Springs of West Virginia: West Virginia Univ. Tech. Bull. 8, p. 90-125. Contains data, including chemical analyses, on 11 springs having water temperature exceeding 60° F.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 274 555. Stose, George Willis, and Martin, George Curtis, 1905, Water resources of the Pawpaw and Hancock quadrangles, West Virginia, Maryland, and Pennsylvania: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 145, p. 58-63. Contains data, including a chemical analysis, on Berkeley springs. See also references 133, 137, 144, 538, 541. WYOMING 556. Allen, Eugene Thomas, 1928, The classification of the hot areas in the Yellowstone Park and the causes of their development [abs.] : Washington Acad. Sci. Jour., v. 18, no. 19, p. 511. 557. 1933, Hot springs of Yellowstone Park: Internat. Geol. Cong., 16th, Washington, 1933; Guidebook 24, Excursion C-2, Yellowstone—Beartooth—Big Horn Region: 64 p., 8 pis., 14 figs. 558. 1934, The agency of algae in the deposition of travertine and silica from thermal waters: Am. Jour. Sci., 5th ser., v. 28, no. 167, p. 373-389. States that algae are a factor in the precipitation of travertine from the water of Mammoth Hot springs in Yellowstone National Park. 559. 1935, Geyser basins and igneous emanations: Econ. Geology, v. 30, no, 1, p. 1-13; abs., Am. Geophys. Union Trans., 15th Ann. Mtg., pt. 1, p. 240, June 1934. Contains much information on hydrothermal activity in Yellowstone National Park. 560. 1936, The hot springs of the Yellowstone National Park: Carnegie Inst. Washington News Service Bull. (School ed.), v. 4, no. 1, p. 1-20, maps; 1941, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1940, v. 12, no. 1, p. 114. 561. Allen, Eugene Thomas, and Day, Arthur Louis, 1934, Hot springs of the Yellowstone National Park: Pacific Sci. Cong., 5th, Toronto, Canada, 1933, Proc., v. 3, p. 2275-2283. 562. 1935, Hot springs of the Yellowstone National Park. Microscopic examinations by H. E. Merwin: Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 466, 525 p., front., 215 figs., 109 tables, map. 563. Barlow, John Whitney, and Heap, David Porter, 1872, Re- port of a reconnaissance of the basin of the upper Yellowstone in 1871: U.S. 42d Cong., 2d sess., S. Doc. 66, 43 p., map. Describes the Great Geyser Basin and the group of hot springs near the shore of Yellowstone Lake, both in Yellowstone National Park. 564. Bartlett, Albert B., 1926, The mineral hot springs of Wyo- ming : Wyoming Geologist’s Office, Bull. 16, 15 p., 5 illus. 565. Bauer, Clyde Max, 1946, Physical character of hot-spring and geyser deposits [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 57, no. 12, pt. 2, p. 1249. States that the sinter in Yellowstone National Park reveals the history of the spring or geyser depositing it. 566. 1947, Yellowstone geysers : revised ed., Yellowstone Park, Haynes, Inc., 125 p., front., 98 views, 2 figs., map; 1st ed., 1937. Lists 107 geysers and 4 spouting springs in Yellowstone National Park. 567. 1948, Yellowstone—its underworld : Geology and historical anecdotes of our oldest National Park: Albuquerque, N. Mex., Univ. New Mexico Press, 122 p., 9 pis., 13 figs., map. Contains much information on hydrothermal activity in Yellowstone National Park. 568. Bloss, Fred Donald, and Barth, Thomas Fredrik Weiby, 1949, Observations on some Yellowstone geysers; Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 60, no. 5, p. 861-886, 14 figs. 569. Brockett, L. P., 1881, Yellowstone National Park in Our Western Empire: Philadelphia, Pa., chap. 22. Quotes data from references 625-635, 665, and 669. 570. Brown, Robert, ca. 1876, The wonderland of America, in The countries of the world: London, Paris, and New York, v. 4; 6 v., 1876-92. Includes a general description of Yellowstone National Park. 571. Brues, Charles Thomas, 1924a, Observations on animal life in the thermal waters of Yellowstone Park, with a consideration of the thermal environment: Am. Acad. Arts and Sci. Proc., v. 59, no. 15, p. 369-437,1 pi., 5 figs. Contains information on animal life in the thermal waters of Yellowstone National Park, also in the water of thermal springs at three localities in France and one locality in each of Germany, Italy, Austria, and Switzerland. 572. 1924b, Observations on the fauna of thermal waters: Natl. Acad. Sci Proc., v. 10, p. 484—486. Contains information on plant and animal life in the thermal waters of Yellowstone National Park. 573. 1927, Animal life in hot springs: Quart. Rev. Biology, v. 2, p. 181-203, 19 figs. Contains information on the fauna in thermal waters in Yellowstone National Park; mentions arachnids in thermal springs at Luxeuil, France. 574. Bunce, Oliver Bell, 1872, Our great National Park, in Bryant, William Cullen, ed., Picturesque America, or the land we live in; a delineation by pen and pencil of the * * * picturesque features of our country, with illustrations on steel and wood, by eminent American artists: New York, D. Appleton & Co., v. I, 568 p., front., 23 steel engravings, illus. Contains a general description of the geysers and hot springs in Yellowstone National Park. 575. Burk, Creighton A, 1952, The Big Horn hot springs at Thermopolis, Wyo., in Wyoming Geol. Assoc. Guidebook 7th Ann. Field Conf.: p. 93-95. 576. Chittenden, Hiram Martin, 1949, Yellowstone National Park; historical and descriptive: 5th ed., revised by Eleanor Chittenden Cress and Isabelle F. Story, Stanford, Calif., Stanford Univ. Press, 286 p., front., 21 illus., map. Contains data on the mean height, duration, and interval of the eruptions of 58 geysers. 577. Collier, Arthur James, 1920, Oil in the Warm Springs and Hamilton domes, near Thermopolis, Wyo.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 711-D, p. 61-73,4 pis., 1 fig. 578. Comstock, Theodore Bryant, 1873, On the geology of west- ern Wyoming: Am. Jour. Science and Arts, 3d ser., v. 6, no. 36, p. 426—432. Briefly describes hydrothermal activity in Yellowstone National Park. 579. 1874, The Yellowstone National Park: Am. Naturalist, v. 8, no. 2, p. 65-79 ; no. 3, p. 155-166. Contains information on the eruptions of 10 geysers. 580. 1876, Remarks on the hot springs and geysers and other topics illustrating the scientific value of the YellowstoneBIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES Park [abs.] : Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 24th Mtg., 1875, Proc. v. 24, pt. 2, p. 97-99. 581. 1877, On some unexplained phenomena in the geyser basins of the Yellowstone Park: Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 25th Mtg, 1876, Proc., p. 235-239. 582. Cook, C. W., 1870, The valley of the upper Yellowstone: Western Monthly v. 4, no. 19, p. 60-67, Chicago [111.] Describes one of the earliest, if not the first, recorded visits to the hot-spring and geyser localities of Yellowstone National Park. 583. Copeland, Joseph John, 1936, Yellowstone thermal Myxo- phyceae: New York Acad. Sci. Annals, v. 36, p. 1-32, 13 illus., map. 584. Daly, Reginald Aldworth, 1911, The nature of volcanic ac- tion : Am. Acad. Arts and Sciences Proc., v. 47, no. 3, p. 48-122, 5 pis., 15 figs. Discusses the relation of the geysers in Yellowstone National Park to rhyolite of Pliocene age. 585. Darton, Nelson Horatio, 1906a, The hot springs at Ther- mopolis, Wyo.: Jour. Geology, v. 14, no. 3, p. 194-200, 5 figs. 586. 1906b, Geology of the Owl Creek Mountains, with notes on resources of adjoining regions in the ceded portion of the Shoshone Indian Reservation, Wyoming: U.S. 59th Cong., 1st sess., S. Doc. 219, 48 p., 19 pis., 1 fig. Describes the thermal springs near Thermopolis. 587. 1920, Geysers of Yellowstone National Park: Berlin, Geol. Charakterbilder founded by H. Stille, published by Dr. K. Andrde; no. 23, 8 p., 6 pis., 1 fig. 588. Davis, Bradley Moore, 1897, The vegetation of the hot springs of Yellowstone Park: Science, new ser., v. 6, no. 135, p. 145-157, 7 figs., 6 illus. 589. Day, Arthur Louis, 1939, The hot-spring problem: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 50, no. 3, p. 317-336. Classifies the hot springs of Yellowstone National Park according to the chemical character of their water. 590. Doane, Gustavus C., 1871, Report upon the so-called Yel- lowstone Expedition of 1870: U.S. Cong. 41st, 3d sess., S. Doc. 51, 40 p. Mentions various hot springs and describes the eruptions of two geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 591. Dunraven (Windham Thomas Wyndham-Quin, 4th Earl of), 1876, The Great divide; travels in the Upper Yellowstone in the summer of 1874 : London, Chatto & Windus, 377 p., 15 illus., map. Includes notes and comments on the hot springs and geysers of Yellowstone National Park. 592. Eldridge, George Homans, 1894, A geologic reconnaissance in northwest Wyoming: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 119, 72 p., 4 pis., 1 fig. Describes the DeMaris, Big Horn (Thermopolis), and Fort Washakie hot springs. 593. Ellsworth, Spencer, 1883, A pilgrimage to geyser land, or Montana on muleback * * * : Lacon, 111., Home Journal Printing Establishment. 594. Endlich, Frederick Miller, 1879, Report on the geology of the Sweetwater district, in Hayden, Ferdinand V., U.S. Geol. and Geog. Survey Terr. 11th Ann. Rept., 1877: p. 3-158, 6 pis. Briefly describes springs 2 miles west of Camp Brown and on Beaver Creek near Beaver Canyon. 595. Everts, Truman C., 1871, Thirty-seven days of peril: Scrib- ner’s Monthly Mag., v. 3, no. 1, p. 1-17, 9 illus. Describes the use of hot springs for cooking and 275 warmth by a member of the Washburn expedition (1870) who became lost in the Yellowstone area. 596. Fenner, Clarence Norman, 1936, Bore-hole investigations in Yellowstone Park: Jour. Geology, v. 44, no. 2, pt. 2, p. 225-315, 15 figs., 13 tables; Carnegie Inst. Washington Geophys. Lab. Paper 895. Discusses the mechanism of geyser action as revealed by information gained by boring to a depth of 406 ft in the Upper Geyser Basin and to a depth of 265 ft in the Norris Geyser Basin. 597. Fisher, Cassius Asa, 1906a, Geology and water resources of the Bighorn Basin, Wyo.: U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 53, 72 p., 16 pis., 1 fig. Describes Cody hot springs and mentions several others; also includes a chemical analysis of water from the Thermopolis hot springs. 598. 1906b, Mineral resources of the Bighorn Basin [Wyo.] : U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 285-F, p. 311-315. Contains information on the Cody and Thermoplis hot springs. 599. Fix, Philip Forsyth, 1949, Regularity of Old Faithful Gey- ser, Yellowstone National Park, Wyoming: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 247, p. 246-256,1 pi., 3 tables. 600. Folsom, David E., 1894, The Folsom-Cook exploration of the Upper Yellowstone in the year 1869: St. Paul, Minn., H. L. Collins Co., Printers, 23 p. Mentions the hot springs and geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 601. Forbes, Stephen Alfred, 1893, A preliminary report on the aquatic invertebrate fauna of the Yellowstone National Park, Wyoming, and of the Flathead region of Montana: U.S. Fish Comm. Bull., v. 11, for 1891, p. 207-258, 6 pis. Describes the fauna of a warm stream near Lewis Lake and in the water of a warm spring near the shore of Yellowstone Lake. 602. Geikie, Archibald, 1881a, The geysers of the Yellowstone: Macmillan’s Mag., v. 44, no. 264, Oct., p. 421-435. 603. 1881b, The geysers of the Yellowstone: Appleton’s Journal, new ser., v. 11, Dec., p. 538-547. 604. 1882, Geological sketches at home and abroad: London, Macmillan & Co., 382 p.; 1889 ed., New York, Macmillan & Co., 382 p., 29 figs. Describes the geysers of Yellowstone National Park. 605. Gooch, Frank Austin, and Whitfield, James Edward, 1888, Analyses of waters of the Yellowstone National Park, with an account of the methods of analysis employed: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 47, 84 p., 2 figs. 606. Guptill, Albert Brewer, ca. 1898, Haynes’ Guide to Yellow- stone Park: St. Paul, Minn., F. Jay, Haynes, 139 p., 45 illus., maps. Contains short descriptions of some of the principal geysers and hot springs. 607. Hague, Arnold, 1884, Yellowstone National Park: Science, v. 3, no. 52, p. 135-136. Contains information on the hot springs and geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 608. 1885, Report of operations in the Division of the Yellowstone National Park during the year ending June 30, 1885: U.S. Geol. Survey 6th Ann. Rept., 1884-85, p. 54-59. Contains information on hydrothermal activity in Yellowstone National Park.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 276 609. Hague, Arnold, 1887, Notes on the deposition of scorodite from arsenical waters in the Yellowstone National Park: Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., v. 34, no. 201, p. 171-175. Describes the deposits of Joseph’s Coat springs. 610. 1888, Geological history of the Yellowstone National Park: Am. Inst. Mining Engineers Trans., 1887, v. 16, p. 783-803, map; repr., 1893, Smithsonian Inst. Ann. Rept. to July 1892, p. 133-151. States that there are more than 3,500 geysers, hot springs, mud pots and paint pots in the Park. Mentions the role of algae in the deposition of geyserite. 611. 1889a, Report of operations in the Division of the Yellowstone National Park during the year ending June 30, 1888: U.S. Geol. Survey 9th Ann. Rept., 1887-88, p. 91-96. Describes Excelsior geyser; also mentions the deposition of scorodite by Joseph’s Coat springs and Constant geyser. 612. 1889b, Soaping geysers: Am. Inst. Mining Engineers Trans, for 1888, v. 17, p. 546-555; 1893, repr., Smithsonian Inst. Ann. Rept. to July 1892, p. 153-161. Recounts experiments on several geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 613. 1893a, The Yellowstone Park: Internat. Geol. Cong., 5th, Washington 1891, Rept., p. 336-345,1 fig. Describes hydrothermal activity in the Park. 614. 1893b, Itinerary of the Yellowstone Park: Internat. Geol. Cong., 5th, Washington 1891, Rept., p. 346-359, 3 pis. Includes information on the geysers and hot springs in the Park. 615. 1900a, Thermal springs; New York, Appleton’s Universal Cyclopaedia, v. 11, p. 396-397. 616. 1900b, Yellowstone National Park: New York, Appleton’s Universal Cyclopaedia, v. 12, p. 549-550. 617. 1904, The Yellowstone National Park; Scribner’s Mag., v. 35, no. 5, p. 513-527, 8 pis., 8 illus. Contains information on the hot springs and geysers, also on their deposits. 618. 1911a, Origin of the thermal springs in the Yellowstone National Park : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 22 (Mar. 31), p. 103-122. 619. 1911b, The origin of the thermal waters in the Yellowstone National Park: Science, new ser., v. 33, no. 850 (Apr. 14), p.553-568. 620. 1928, Geological history of the Yellowstone National Park: U.S. Dept. Interior, Natl. Park Service, 23 p., 9 illus., map. Discusses hydrothermal activity in Yellowstone National Park; mentions the deposition of scorodite by Joseph’s Coat springs. 621. Hague, Arnold; Iddings, Joseph Paxon; Weed, Walter Har- vey; and others, 1899, Geology of the Yellowstone National Park: U.S. Geol. Survey Mon. 32, pt. 2, 893 p., 121 pis., 4 figs., atlas. Describes the Snake River springs. 622. Hague, Arnold; Weed, Walter Harvey; and Iddings, Jo- seph Paxon, 1896, Description of Yellowstone National Park quadrangles, Wyo.: U.S. Geol. Survey Geol. Atlas, Folio 30, 6 p., illus., 8 maps. Describes the hot springs and geysers and their deposits. 623. Hares, Charles Joseph, 1917, Anticlines in central Wyo- ming: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 641-1, p. 233-279, 1 pi., 19 figs. Mentions the hot mineral springs near Alcova, warm springs in Beaver Gorge near Hailey, and thermal springs in two other localities. 624. Harshberger, J. W., 1897, The vegetation of the Yellow- stone hot springs: Am. Jour. Pharmacy, v. 69, p. 625- 634. 625. Hayden, Ferdinand Vandiveer, 1872a, Preliminary report of the U.S. Geological Survey of Montana and portions of adjacent Territories, 5th Ann. Rept. of progress: Washington, Govt. Printing Office, 538 p. Describes hot springs along the Gardiner River and in the Yellowstone area. Also mentions the Bear River Soda springs in Idaho. 626. 1872b, Die neu entdeckten Geyser-Gebiete am oberen Yellowstone und Madison River: Petermanns Geog. Mitt., v. 18, no. 7, p. 241-253,321-326, map. 627. 1872c, Wonders of the West, II. More about the Yellowstone : Scribner’s Monthly Mag., v. 3, no. 4 (Feb.), p. 388-396,11 illus. Describes some of the principal geysers and hot springs in Yellowstone National Park. 628. 1872d, The hot springs and geysers of the Yellowstone and Firehole Rivers: Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 3d ser., v. 3, no. 14 (Feb.), p. 105-115; no. 15 (Mar.), p. 161-176, 3 pis., 7 figs. 629. 1873, Sixth annual report of the U.S. Geological and Geographic Survey of the Territories for the year 1872: p. 12-85, 24 figs. Contains data on the hot springs and geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 630. 1874, Our great West and the scenery of our natural parks : Am. Geog. Soc. Bull., v. 6, p. 196-211. 631. 1876a The Yellowstone Park and mountain regions of portions of Idaho, Nevada, Colorado, and Utah: Boston, Mass., L. Prang & Co., 48 p., 15 pis., 2 maps. 632. 1876b, The Grotto geyser of the Yellowstone National Park, with a descriptive note and map, and an illustration by the Albert-type process: Washington, Govt. Printing Office, 2 leaves [2 p.] of text, 1 pi. 633. 1877, Pacific tourist; wonders of the Rocky Mountains. The Yellowstone Park, how to reach it, in Williams, R. T., Illustrated Guide to the Pacific Railroad, California, etc.: New York. 634. 1878, Yellowstone National Park: Johnson’s New Illustrated Universal Cyclopaedia, v. 4, p. 1526-1530. Describes the hot springs and geysers. 635. 1880, The great West; its attractions and resources. Containing * * * recent explorations in the Yellowstone Park, “The Wonderland of America”: Philadelphia, Pa., and Bloomington, 111., 528 p., 25 pis., 3 maps. 636. Hayden, Ferdinand Vandiveer; Doane, Gustavus C.; and Langford, Nathaniel Pitt, 1874, Le Parc National des fitats-Unis : Tour du Monde, v. 28, p. 289-352, 52 illus., 13 views. Contains information on the hot springs and geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 637. Haynes, Jack Ellis, 1951, Haynes Guide; Handbook of Yellowstone National Park: 52d revised ed., Bozeman, Mont., Haynes Studios, Inc., 190 p., front., 122 illus., 18 maps. Describes the geysers and other thermal springs. 638. Hewett, Donnel Foster, and Lupton, Charles Thomas, 1917, Anticlines in the southern part of the Big HornBIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 277 Basin, Wyo.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 656, 192 p., 32 pis., 12 figs. Mentions the Thermopolis hot springs. 639. Hoeppli, Reinhard J. C., 1926, Studies of free-living nema-f todes from the thermal waters of Yellowstone Park: Am. Micros. Soc. Trans., v. 45, p. 234-249, 3 pis. f 640. Holmes, William Henry, 1876, Report on the geology of the northwestern portion of the Elk Range, in Hayden, Ferdinand V., U.S. Geol. and Geog. Survey Terr. 8th Ann. Rept., 1874 : p. 59-71,11 figs., map. Mentions the warm sulfur springs in the valley of 4 the West Fork of Rock Creek. 641. Howard, Leland Ossian, 1895, Animal life in thermal ■* springs: U.S. Dept. Agriculture, Div. Entomology, Insect Life, v. 7, p. 413-414. Mentions insect larvae in the water of a hot spring in Uinta County, Wyo., near hot water in Yellowstone National Park, and in water of a hot spring in Gunnison j, County, Colo. 642. Hubbard, H. G., 1891, Insect life in the hot springs of the t Yellowstone National Park: Canadian Entomologist, v. 23, p. 226-230. 643. Jones, William A., 1875, Report upon the reconnaissance of northwestern Wyoming, including Yellowstone National Park, made in the summer of 1873: U.S. Engineer Dept. Rept. 331 p., maps. Describes the thermal waters of Yellowstone National Park. 644. Jordan, David Starr, 1893, Yellowstone Park: Geog. Soc. California Bull., v. 1, pt. 1, p. 31-39, 4 figs. 645. Kipling, Rudyard, 1899, Travel sketches, in Works of Rud- yard Kipling: authorized ed., New York, Doubleday & McClure Co., v. 2, chaps. 30-31, p. 73-105. (Probably first pub. in the Pioneer, Allahabad, India, 1889.) Contains picturesque descriptions of some of the hot springs and geysers in Yellowstone National Park. . 646. Knight, Wilbur Clinton, 1893, Notes on the mineral re- sources of Wyoming: Wyoming Univ. Agr. Coll. Expt. Sta. Bull. 14, p. 119-211. Mentions thermal springs in several places in Wyoming. 647. Langford, Nathaniel Pitt, 1871, The wonders of the Yel- lowstone: Scribner’s Monthly Mag., v. 2, no. 1 (May), p. 1-17, 12 illus.; no. 2 (June), p. 113-128, 20 illus. i Contains descriptions of some of the geysers and hot springs and their deposits in Yellowstone National Park. 648. ca. 1905, Diary of the Washburn expedition to the Yellowstone and Firehole Rivers in the year 1870: St. Paul, Minn., 122 p., 42 illus., map. Contains mention of some of the geysers and hot springs. 649. LeConte, Joseph, 1878, Geysers and how they are ex- plained : Pop. Sci. Monthly, v. 12, no. 4 (Feb.), p. 407-417, 11 figs. Mentions geysers in Yellowstone National Park, Iceland, and New Zealand. States that the so-called geysers in California are fumaroles. 650. Leffmann, Henry, 1881, Analyses of some geyser deposits: Chem. News [London], v. 43, no. 1112 (Mar. 18), p. 124. Contains analyses of seven samples of geyser and hot-spring deposits in Yellowstone National Park. 651. Leffmann, Henry, and Beam, William, 1883, Contributions to the geological chemistry of Yellowstone National Park: Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., v. 25, no. 146, p. 104-106. Includes four analyses of hot-spring deposits. 652. Ludlow, William, 1876, Report of a reconnaissance from Carroll, Montana Territory, on the upper Missouri, to the Yellowstone National Park and return, made in the summer of 1875: Washington, U.S. Engineer Dept., 155 p., 2 pis., map. Contains descriptions of geysers and hot springs in Yellowstone National Park. 653. Lutz, Frank Eugene, 1931, Notes on the animal life of thermal waters in the Yellowstone National Park: Am. Mus. Novitates 498,10 p. 654. Lystrup, H. T, 1933, Winds—their effect on geyser activ- ity : Yellowstone Nature Notes, v. 10, p. 26. 655. Maguire, Henry N., 1877, The Black Hills and the Ameri- can Wonderland: Chicago, 111., Donnelley, Loyd & Co., Lakeside Library, v. 4, no. 82, p. 277-306, 33 illus., map. Contains information on several of the geysers and hot springs in Yellowstone National Park. 656. Majors, Forest H., 1946, Exploration of the Brutch sulfur deposits, Hot Springs County, Wyo.: U.S. Bur. Mines Rept. Inv. 3964,15 p., 5 figs. Mentions hot water in one of the sulfur mines 3.5 miles northwest of Thermopolis. 657. Marler, George D., 1951, Exchange of function as a cause of geyser irregularity: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 249, no. 5, p. 329-342. 658. 1954, Does the cold of winter affect the thermal intensity of the hot springs in Yellowstone Park?: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 252, no. 1, p. 38-54,1 pi. 659. 1956, How old is Old Faithful geyser [Wyoming] ?: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 254, no. 10, p. 615-622,1 fig. 660. Melbo, Irving Robert, 1950, Our country’s National Parks: Indianapolis, Ind., Bobbs-Merrill, 2 v., v. 1, 284 p., illus., map; v. 2, 244 p., illus., map. Contains a general description of the geysers and hot springs in Yellowstone National Park and mentions hydrothermal activity at Lassen Volcanic National Park in California, at Mount Rainier in Washington, and at Kilauea volcano in Hawaii. 661. Mitchell, Silas Weir, 1880, Through the Yellowstone Park to Fort Ouster: Lippincott’s Mag., v. 25, no. 12 (June), p. 688-704; v. 26, no. 1 (July), p. 29-41. Describes some of the more important geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 662. Muench, Joyce Rockwood, and Muench, Josef, 1949, Ther- mal wonders of Yellowstone: Nat. History, v. 58, no. 7, p. 312-315, 8 views. 663. Nichols, Robert Leslie, 1934, Pebbles rounded in geyser tubes: Jour. Geology, v. 42, no. 4, p. 430-432. Refers to rounded fragments of rhyolite in the vents of Grand and Turban geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 664. Norris, Philatus W., 1883, The Calumet of the Coteau, and other poetical legends of the border * * * together with a guide-book of Yellowstone National Park: Philadephia, Pa., J. B. Lippincott & Co., 275 p. Mentions the principal hot springs and geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 665. Norton, Harry J., 1874, Wonder-land illustrated; or horse- back rides through the Yellowstone National Park: Virginia City, Mont., H. J. Norton, 132 p., front., 17 illus., maps. Contains information on the geysers and hot springs.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 278 666. Peale, Albert Charles, 1873, Report of examinations in Colorado, Utah, and the Yellowstone region, in Hayden, Ferdinand V., U.S. Geol. and Geog. Survey Terr. 6th Ann. Rept., 1872: p. 99-187,19 figs. Contains a general description of hot springs and geysers in Yellowstone National Park and a list of thermal springs in Colorado, Utah, and the Yellowstone National Park. 667. 1883, The thermal springs of Yellowstone National Park: Description of springs and geysers of Yellowstone National Park, in Hayden, F. V., Report on progress of the exploration in Wyoming and Idaho for the year 1878: U.S. Geol. and Geog. Survey Terr. 12th Ann. Rept., 1878, pt. 2: p. 63-454, 45 pis., 32 figs., 11 maps. 668. Porter, Robert Percival; Gannet, Henry; and Jones, Wil- liam A., 1882, The Yellowstone National Park, in The West, from Census of 1880: Chicago, 111., Rand, McNally & Co., 630 p., pis., map. Contains information on the geysers and hot springs. 669. Raymond, Rossiter Worthington, 1880, Camp and cabin; Sketches of life and travel in the West: New York, Fords, Howard, & Hulbert, 243 p. Includes descriptions of the hot springs and geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 670. 1889, Soaping geysers: Am. Inst. Mining Engineers Trans., 1888, v. 17, p. 449-454. Describes experiments made in Yellowstone National Park. 671. Reynolds, Sidney Hugh, 1941, Fumaroles, hot springs, and geysers: Bristol [England], Naturalists Soc. Proc., 1940, 4th ser., v. 9, pt. 2, p. 251-263. Includes a general description of the geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 672. Richardson, James, 1873, AVonders of the Yellowstone: New York, Scribner, Armstrong & Co., 256 p., 19 illus., map. Contains detailed descriptions of the principal hot springs and geysers in Yellowstone National Park. Also discusses geysers in Iceland and New Zealand. 673. 1874, Wonders of the Yellowstone region: Chambers’ Jour. Pop. Lit., Sci., and Arts, v. 51 p. 315-317. 674. Riley, William C., 1889, Grand tour guide to the Yellow- stone National Park; a manual for tourists: St. Paul, Minn., Northern News Co., 135 p., illus.; revised by John Hyde. 675. Rolfe, Mary A., 1927-28, Our National Parks: Chicago, 111., and New York, B. H. Sanborn & Co., 2 v., pis., illus.; 2d. ed., 1935-36 ; 3d ed., 1937. 676. Rubey, William Walden, and Murata, Kiguma Jack, 1941, Chemical evidence bearing on origin of group of hot springs [abs.] : Washington Acad. Sci. Jour., v. 31, no. 4, p. 169-170. Describes a group of hot springs 2.5 miles north of Auburn, AAryo. 677. Schlundt, Herman, and Moore, Richard Bishop, 1909, Radioactivity of the thermal waters of Yellowstone National Park: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 395, 35 p., 4 pis., 7 figs. 678. Setchell, William Albert, 1903, The upper temperature limits of life: Science, new ser., v. 17, no. 441, p. 9344)37. Discusses observations of living organisms in thermal waters in Yellowstone National Park. 679. Stanley, Edwin James, 1878, Rambles in wonderland, or Up the Yellowstone and among the geysers and other curiosities of the National Park: New York, D. Appleton 6 Co., 179 p., 12 illus., map. 680. Strahorn, Robert Edmund, 1878, To the Rockies and be- yond, or a summer on the Union Pacific Railroad and its branches: Omaha, Nebr., Omaha Republican Printers, 141 p.; 2d ed., 1879, 216 p., illus., pis., maps; 3d ed., 1881, Chicago, 111., Belford, Clarke & Co., 213 p. Includes data on principal hot springs and geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 681. 1879, The resources of Montana Territory and attractions of Yellowstone National Park: Helena, Mont., published by direction of the Montana Legislature, 77 p., illus. 682. 1881a, The enchanted land, or an October ramble among the geysers, hot springs, lakes, falls, and canyons of the Yellowstone National Park: Omaha, Nebr., Omaha Republican Printers, 48 p., illus. 683. 1881b, Montana and Yellowstone National Park: Kansas City, Mo., Ramsey, Millett & Hudson, 191 p. 684. Strong, William E., 1876, A trip to Yellowstone National Park in July, August, and September, 1875; from the journal of General AV. E. Strong: Washington, 143 p., pis., maps. 685. Tilden, Josephine Elizabeth, 1897, On some algal stalactites of the Yellowstone National Park: Bot. Gazette, v. 24, p. 194-199,1 pi. 686. 1898, Observations on some west American thermal algae: Bot. Gazette, v. 25, p. 89-105, 3 pis. Contains technical descriptions of algae found in thermal waters in Yellowstone National Park, in Beck’s hot springs near Salt Lake City in Utah, in Crater Rock hot springs in Oregon, and in hot springs at Banff, Canada. 687. Toula, Franz, 1887, Der Yellowstone-National Park, der vulkanische Ausbruch auf Neu Seeland und das Geysirphanomen: Ver. Verbreitung naturw. Kenntnisse Wien. 688. Trager, Martelle W., 1939, National Parks of the North- west: New York, Dodd, Mead, & Co., 216 p, 15 illus., 7 maps. Includes information on the principal geysers and hot springs in Yellowstone National Park. 689. Trumbull, Walter, 1871, The Washburn Yellowstone expe- dition: Overland Monthly Mag. [San Francisco, Calif.], v. 6, no. 5, p. 431-437; no. 6, p. 489-496. Describes and assigns names to some of the prominent geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 690. Turner, Daniel Stoughton, 1946, The Norris parking area mud pool: Yellowstone Nature Notes, v. 20, no. 6, p. 5-6. 691. 1949, Development of a new thermal feature in Yellowstone National Park: Am. Geophys. Union Trans., v. 30, no. 4, p. 526-527. 692. U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service, 1938, Yellowstone National Park, Wyoming: 37 p., 10 views, map. Contains a list of the principal geysers and hot springs, including information on the temperature of the water. 693. Van Orstrand, Charles Edwin, 1924, Temperatures in some springs and geysers in Yellowstone National Park: Jour. Geology, v. 32, no. 3, p. 194-225, 5 figs., 9 tables. 694. Weed, Walter Harvey, 1889a, The diatom marshes and diatom beds of the Yellowstone National Park: Bot. Gazette, v. 14, p. 117-120. Describes extensive deposits of diatoms in marshes supplied by hot-spring waters and discusses the efficiencyBIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 279 with which diatoms separate silica from the water in which they live. 695. Weed, Walter Harvey, 1889b, The vegetation of hot springs : Am. Naturalist, v. 23, p. 394-400. Mentions algae in the thermal waters in Yellowstone National Park. 696. 1889c, On the formation of siliceous sinter by the vegetation of thermal springs: Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., v. 37 (no. 221), p. 351-359. Refers to deposits of siliceous sinter in Yellowstone National Park. 697. 1889d, Formation of travertine and siliceous sinter by the vegetation of hot springs: U.S. Geol. Survey 9th Ann. Rept., 1887-88, p. 613-676, 10 pis., 5 figs. Discusses the deposition of travertine at Mammoth Hot springs. 698. 1893, The formation of hot spring deposits: Internat. Geol. Cong., 5th, Washington 1891, Compte rendu, p. 360-363. Describes the travertine deposits of Mammoth Hot springs. 699. 1912, Geysers: U.S. Dept. Interior, 29 p., 18 views, 1 fig., 4 maps. Contains special reference to the geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 700. 1921, Geysers of the Yellowstone National Park: U.S. Dept. Interior, Natl. Park Service, 29 p., 18 views, map. Contains general descriptions of geysers in Iceland and New Zealand in addition to more detailed information on the geysers in Yellowstone National Park. 701. Weed, Walter Harvey, and Pirsson, Louis Valentine, 1891, Occurrence of suphur, orpiment, and realgar in the Yellowstone National Park: Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., v. 42, p. 401^405. States that the sinter deposited by Chrome spring contains orpiment and realgar, also that sulfur is deposited by many hot springs, fumaroles, and solfataras. 702. Whitfield, James Edward, 1889, Scorodite from the Yel- lowstone Park [Wyo.] : U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 55, p. 65-66. Describes scorodite in the deposits of Joseph’s Coat spring. 703. Woodruff, Elmer Grant, 1908, Sulphur deposits at Cody, Wyo.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 340-L, 451-456,1 pi. Describes the Cody Hot springs and their deposits. 704. 1909, Sulphur deposits near Thermopolis, Wyo.: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 380-M, p. 373-380,1 fig. Describes the Thermopolis Hot springs. See also references 59, 106, 108, 124, 126, 136, 140, 144, 148, 373, 388, 442, 505, 514, 525. OTHER NORTH AMERICAN COUNTRIES CANADA 705. Boyle, R. W., and McIntosh, D., 1914, On the amount of radium and radium emanation present in the waters of several western springs: Royal Soc. Canada Proc. and Trans., 3d ser., v. 7, sec. 3, p. 163. Contains information on radioactivity of warm springs at Sinclair, Fairmont, and Banff. 706. Clapp, C. H., 1914, Sharp Point hot spring, Vancouver Island, B.C.: Canada Geol. Survey Summ. Rept., 1913, p. 80-83. 707. Dolmage, Victor, 1922, Coast and islands of British Co- lumbia between Burke and Douglas Channels: Canada Geol. Survey Summ. Rept., 1921, pt. A, p. 22-49, 4 figs. Contains information on thermal springs at six widely separated localities. 708. Dowling, D. B., 1911, Coal fields of Jasper Park, Alberta: Canada Geol. Survey Summ. Rept., 1910, p. 150-169, figs. 5-6. Describes a group of hot springs on Sulphur Creek. 709. 1912, Geology of the Roche Miette map-area, Jasper Park, Alberta : Canada Geol. Survey Summ. Rept., 1911, p. 201-219. Mentions the Jasper hot springs. 710. Elworthy, R. T., 1917, Examination of the hot springs at Banff, Alberta: Royal Soc. Canada Proc. and Trans., 3d ser., v. 11, sec. 3, p. 27-33. 711. 1918, Mineral springs of Canada, Part II, The chemical character of some Canadian mineral springs: Canada Dept. Mines Bull. 20 (Mines Br. No. 472), 173 p., 10 pis., 2 figs. Contains information on the hot springs near Banff, including chemical analyses of the water. 712. 1926, Hot springs in western Canada—their radioactive and chemical properties: Canada Dept. Mines, Mines Br., Inv. Mineral Resources and Mining Industry, 1925, Bull. 669, 33 p. 713. Hoffmann, George Christian, 1902, Report of the section of chemistry and mineralogy: Canada Geol. Survey Ann. Rept. 1899, new ser., v. 12, 64 p. Contains information on a spring on Sharp Point between Sydney Inlet and Refuge Cove on the west coast of Vancouver Island. 714. Kerr, Forest Alexander (compiled by Harold Caswell Cooke), 1948, Lower Stikine and western Iskut River areas, British Columbia : Canada Geol. Survey Mem. 246 (Pub. 2482), v, 94 p., 5 pis., 3 maps. Describes the group of springs near the Stikine River. 715. Leech, Geoffrey B., 1954, Canal Flats, British Columbia (Map and preliminary account) : Geol. Survey Canada Paper 54-7, 32 p., map. Describes the warm mineral springs on the Lussier River and Ram Creek. 716. LeRoy, O. E., 1913, West Kootenay and Boundary districts; Geology of the region between Proctor and Midway: Internat. Geol. Cong., 12th, Toronto, Canada, 1913, Guidebook 9, Transcontinental excursion C2, p. 61-102, 3 pis., map. Describes the Halcyon hot springs along the east side of Upper Arrow Lake. 717. McLearn, F. H., and Kindle, E. D., 1950, Geology of north- eastern British Columbia: Canada Geol. Survey Mem. 259, 236 p., 8 pis., 16 figs., map. Mentions several thermal-spring localities. 718. Marshall, J. R., 1927, Lakelse Lake map area, Coast dis- trict, British Columbia: Canada Geol. Survey Summ. Rept., 1926, pt. A, p. 35-44,1 fig. Describes a group of hot springs near Lakelse Lake. 719. Pickering, B. J., 1954, Principal hot springs of the south- ern Rocky Mountains of Canada, in Alberta Soc. Petroleum Geologists, Guidebook 4th Ann. Field Conf., Banff-Golden-Radium, Aug. [1954] : 182 p., 27 pis., 5 maps. 735-914 0-65- 19THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITE t) STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 280 720. Rand, A. L., 1944, The southern half of the Alaska High- way and its mammals: Natl. Mus. Canada Bull. 98 (Biol. Ser. no. 27). Mentions thermal springs along Toad River. 721. Rice, Harington Molesworth Anthony, 1944, Notes on geol- ogy and mineral deposits at Ainsworth, British Columbia: Canada Geol. Survey Paper 44-13, 5 p., 2 maps ; Western Miner, v. 17, no. 9, p. 42-45, 3 figs. Mentions the Ainsworth hot springs. 722. Satterly, John, and Elworthy, R. T., 1917, Mineral springs of Canada, Part I, The radioactivity of some Canadian mineral springs: Canada, Dept. Mines Bull. 16 (Mines Br. no. 435), 60 p. 23 pis., 5 figs. Includes information on five thermal springs at Banff. 723. Warren, P. S., 1927, Banff area, Alberta : Canada Geol. Sur- vey Mem. 153 (Geol. Ser. no. 134), 94 p., 7 pis., 1 fig. Describes the principal springs. 724. Williams, Merton Yarwood, 1944a, Geological reconnais- sance along the Alaska Highway from Fort Nelson, British Columbia, to Watson Lake, Yukon: Canada Geol. Survey Paper 44—28, 33 p., map. Describes several thermal-spring localities. 725. 1944b, The Fort Nelson-Watson Lake area (British Columbia) : Western Miner, v. 17, no. 9, p. 54-60, 2 figs. See also references 178,180, and 686. MEXICO 726. Aguillera, J. G., and Ordonez, Ezequiel, 1897, Las fuma- roles del PopocatCptl: Soc. Cient. “Antonio Alzate” Mem., v. 10, no. 24, p. 185-188. 727. Burkart, Joseph von, 1836, Aufenthalt und Reisen in Mex- ico in den Jahren 1825 bis 1834: Stuttgart, Germany, E. Schweizerbart, 2 v. (in one) ; v. 1, 395 p.; v. 2, 288 p., 9 pis., map. Contains information on nine thermal-spring areas. 728. Caballero, J. de G., 1905, La region geisseriana al N. del estado de Michoacdn: Soc. Cient. “Antonio Alzate” Mem., v. 22, p. 203-208. 729. 1906, Los hervideros de la sierra de Ozumatlfin: Soc. Geol. Mexicana Bol., v. 2, p. 35-41. Describes solfataras, fumaroles, cauldrons of boiling mud, and a geyser. One of the fumaroles noisily emits water vapor and sulfurous gas with such force that stones are cast out. 730. Carpenter, William W., 1851, Travels and adventure in Mexico; in the course of journeys of upward of 2,500 miles, performed on foot; giving an account of the manners and customs of the peoples, and the agricultural and mineral resources of that country: New York, Harper & Bros., 300 p. Describes a hot spring near Amatlan. 731. Cochelet, 1845, Souvenirs d’un voyage de Mexico k New Yorck: Soc. Geog. Paris Bull., ser. 3, v. 3, no. 16, p. 209-250. Mentions a hot ferruginous spring at Mount Penon near Mexico City. 732. Diaz de Leon, Jesus, 1894, Estudio sobre la constitucion geologica de una parte del suelo en que descansa la ciudad de Aguascalientes, Capital del estado del mismo nombre: Soc. Geog. Mexicana Bol., 4th ser., v. 3, no. 1, p. 74-94,1 pi. Describes Ojo Caliente springs issuing at the southwest base of Cerro Ojo Caliente. 733. Dollfus, Auguste, and Montserrat, Eugene de, 1867, Eaux minerales des environs de Puebla: Mexique Archives Comm., Sci. v. 2, p. 390-403. 734. Foshag, William Frederick, 1945, Las fumaroles del “Pari- cutin,” in Mexico, Unlv. Nac. Inst. Geologia, El Parfcutin, p. 95-100. 735. 1948, Aqueous emanation from Parfcutin volcano tabs.]: Am. Mineralogist, v. 33, nos. 3-4, p. 195. 736. 1950, The aqueous emanation from Parfcutin volcano: Am. Mineralogist, v. 35, nos. 9-10, p. 749-755, 4 figs. 737. Foshag, William Frederick, and Henderson, Edward Por- ter, 1946, Primary sublimates at Parfcutin volcano: Am. Geophys. Union Trans., v. 27, no. 5, p. 685-686. Discusses the origin of the salts deposited around the vents of low-temperature fumaroles. 738. Gallagher, David, 1954, San Alto spring, State of Zaca- tecas, Mex.: Unpublished notes. 739. Gilliam, Albert M., 1846, Travels over the table lands and cordilleras of Mexico during the years 1843 and 1844: Philadelphia, Pa., J. W. Moore, 455 p., 8 illus., maps. Mentions a hot spring on the plain of Pueblo. Includes a map showing the locations of hot springs near Mexico City. 740. Hardy, Robert William Hale, 1829, Travels in the interior of Mexico: London, H. Colburn and R. Bentley, 540 p., 5 illus. Mentions a hot spring between Tepustetes and Piedras Verdes, also a hot spring on the road to a gold mine about 180 miles north of Llanos. 741. Hermesdorf, M. G., 1862, On the Isthmus of Tehuantepec: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 32, p. 536-554. Mentions hot springs on western and southern slopes of Cerro Prieto. 742. Hernandez, Apolinar, 1938, Estudio hidrogeologico de Ucareo, Estado de Michoacfin: Soc. Geol. Mexican Bol., v. 10, nos. 5-6, p. 147-178, 23 figs., 3 photomicrographs, map. Mentions thermal springs and solfataras of Sierra Ucareo. 743. Hovey, Edmund Otis, 1907, Volcanoes of Colima, Toluca, and Popocatepetl: Science, new ser., v. 25, no. 646, p. 764. States that a vigorous column of steam rises from the central crater of Colima volcano. 744. Instituto Medico Nacional, 1895, Datos par el estudio de las aguas minerales de los Estados Unidos Mexicanos, apendice & la Primera Parte de la Materia Medica Mexicana : Mexico City, Oficina Tipografia Secretaria Fo-mento, 84 p., map. Contains information on 3 thermal springs in Neuvo Leon, 44 in Michoac&n, 20 in Zacatecas, 14 in Puebla, 46 in Jalisco, 4 in Morelos, and 4 in Distrito Federal. 745. King Clarence R., 1947, Finding and mining optical calcite crystals [Mexico] : Eng. Mining Jour., v. 148, no 6, p. 94-96. States that all the deposits of Iceland spar in Mexico are in areas of thermal springs. 746. MacDougal, Daniel Trembly, 1907, The desert basins of the Colorado Delta: Am. Geog. Soc. New York Bull., v. 39, no. 12, p. 705-729,11 figs. Describes warm springs on the east side of Laguna Maquata. Map shows the locations of these springs, also of mud volcanoes near Volcano Lake. Mentions mud volcanoes near Salton Sea in California.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 281 747. Mancera, O., 1943, Obtencidn de sal en Ixtapan de la Sal: Ciencia, v. 4, nos. 2-3, p. 70-71. Contains information on thermal springs between Ixtapan and Tonatico in the State of Mexico. 748. Mooser, Federico, 1958, Active volcanoes of Mexico, in Central America, Catalogue of active volcanoes of the world including solfatara fields: Naples, Italy, Intemat. Volcanol. Assoc., pt. 6, p. 1-36, 7 figs., maps. Includes information on hydrothermal activity in some of the volcanic localities in Mexico. 749. Ober, Frederick Albion, 1884a, Travels in Mexico and life among the Mexicans: Boston, Mass., Estes and Lauriat, 672 p., 190 illus., maps. Describes solfataras in crater of Mount Popocatapetl, Topo Chico hot springs near Monterrey, and Santa Rosalia hot springs near Santa Rosalia. 750. 1884b, Mexican resources; a guide to and through Mexico: Boston, Mass., Estes and Lauriat, 57 [3], 37 p., maps, illus., plan. Mentions the hot springs in the vicinity of Aguas-calientes, also the baths of El Penon and Grand Paseo near Mexico City. 751. Ordonez, Ezequiel, 1945, El volcdn de Paricutin: Mexico, Comision Impulsora y Coordinadora de la Investigacidn cientifica, 138 p., illus.; 1947 ed., Mexico City, Editorial Fantasia, 181 p., 56 pis., 8 figs., maps. [Spanish, English, and French.] Mentions the formation of fumaroles at Paricutin. 752. Oswald, Felix Leopold, 1880, Summerland sketches, or ram- bles in the backwoods of Mexico and Central America: Philadelphia, Pa., J. B. Lippincott & Co., 425 p., 76 illus. Describes Aguas Calientes near Los Banos village 40 miles south of San Luis Potosi and hot springs near Casa Morena in Michoacdn State. 753. Quevedo, 1893, Les eaux mindrales au Mexique; les bains du-“Penon” pres de Mexico: Nature [Paris], v. 21, pt. 2, p. 357-358, 1 fig. 754. Richards, Adrian F., and Dietz, Robert S., 1956, Eruption of Barcena volcano, San Benedicto Island, Mexico: Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Quezon City, Philippines, 1953, Proc., v. 2, p. 157-176, 10 pis.; Contr. from Scripps Inst. Oceanography, new ser., no. 793; 1953, abs., Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 64, p. 1503; 1952, Volcano Letter 517, p. 7; 1953, Volcano Letter 519, p. 7. Mentions steam vents associated with volcanic eruption. 755. Salazar, Salinas Leopoldo, 1931, Los geysers de Ixtlan: Mexico Univ., Rev. Mensual, v. 1, no. 5, p. 422^423. 756. Saussure, Henry de, 1860, Excursion to an ancient volcano in Mexico: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 30, p. 53-58. Mentions hydrothermal activity in the vicinity of Sierra San Andres. 757. Shufeldt, Robert W., 1872, Reports of explorations and surveys to ascertain the practicability of a ship-canal between the Atlantic and Pacific oceans, by the way of the Isthmus of Tehuantepec, made under the direction of the Secretary of the Navy: U.S. 42 Cong., 2d sess., S. Doc. 6, 151 p., 20 maps. Describes thermal springs on the Pacific plains midway between the passes of Tarifa and Chivela, also at La Chivela Pass. 758. Singletary, Coyle E., 1952, The hot springs, geysers, and solfataras of the northern part of the state of Michoacdn, Mexico: Texas Jour. Sci., v. 4, no. 4, p. 413-420, 10 figs. 759. Sykes, Godfrey Glenton, 1937, The Colorado Delta: Car- negie Inst. Washington Pub. 460 (joint publication, Carnegie Inst. Washington [and] Am. Geog. Soc. New York), 193 p., 1 pi., 74 figs. Mentions the group of hot springs at the eastern base of Cerro Prieto. 760. Tamayo, Jorge L., 1946, Datos para la hidrologia de la Republica Mexicana: Mexico Inst. Panamericano Geo-grafia y Historia Pub. 84, 448 p., illus. 761. Trask, Parker Davies, 1943, The Mexican volcano Pari- cutin: Science, new ser., v. 98 (no. 2254), p. 501-505. Describes fumaroles at Paricutin. 762. Villada, Manuel M., 1891, Apuntes de geologia y de bo- tdnica relativos & Mexico: Naturaleza, ser. 2, v. 1, p. 419-433 ; 493-498, 3 pis. Describes vapor vents, mud pots, and hot springs in several localities. 763. Villafana, Andres, 1908, Fuente termal en Cuitzeo de Aba- solo, Estado de Guanajuato, Mdxico: Mexico Inst. Geol. Parergones, v. 2, no. 7, p. 277-287, 2 pis., maps. 764. Villarello, Juan de D., 1909, Hidrologia subterrdnea de los alrededores de Montenegro: Soc. Geol. Mexicano Bol., v. 5, p. 37—65. Describes the thermal springs at El Salto. 765. Waitz, Paul, 1906a, Phdnomdnes postparoxysmiques du San Andres, Michoacdn: Internat. Geol. Cong., 10th, Mexico City, 1906, Guide 10, Excursion du San Andrds et Colima, 29 p., 3 pis., 3 maps. Describes several areas of hydrothermal activity. 766. 1906b, Algunos experimentos en geysers artificiales: Soc. Geol. Mexicana Bol., v. 2, p. 71-85, 1 pi. Describes geysers and other hot springs, boiling pools, and fumaroles near village of Ixtldn. 767. 1906c, Les geysers d’lxtldn: Intemat. Geol. Cong., 10th, Mexico City 1906, Guide 12, Excursions de l’Quest, 22 p., 3 pis., 5 figs., 1 map. 768. Walker, Lewis W., 1947, Nature’s onyx factory: Desert Mag., v. 11, no. 2, p. 13-15, 3 illus. Describes Volcan and six smaller springs in a ravine 5 miles from El Marmol quarries. 769. Williams, Howel, 1952, Recent eruption on San Benedicto Island, Revilla Gigedo Group, Mexico: Volcano Letter 517, p. 7. States that the eruption was accompanied by the emission of much steam and water. Mentions that nearby Socorro Island, which erupted in 1848, is still solfataric. 770. Winship, George Parker, 1904, The journey of Coronado 1540-1542 from the city of Mexico to the Grand Cafion of the Colorado and the buffalo plains of Texas, Kansas, and Nebraska; translated and edited with an introduction, by George Parker Winship: New York, A. S. Barnes 6 Co., front., map. Describes a visit to an area of mud volcanoes—probably near Volcano Lake in Baja California. 771. Wittich, Ernesto, 1910, Geysers y mantiales thermales de Comanjilla (Guanajuato) : Soc. Geol. Mexicana Bol., v. 6, p. 183-188, 2 pis. 772. 1925, Los pozos de aguas termominerales y radioactivas perforadas en la cuenca Zavala-Gogorron, S. L. P. [San Luis Potosi] : Soc. Cient. “Antonio Alzate” Mem., v. 44, p. 377-391, 1 pi. See also references 14, 22, 43, 79, 222, 224, 255, 270, 304, and 784.282 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD CENTRAL AMERICA (Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Nicaragua, and Panama) 773. Belcher, Edward, 1843, Narrative of a voyage round the world, performed in her Majesty’s ship Sulphur during the years 1836-1842, including details of the naval operations in China from Dec. 1840 to Nov. 1841: London, H. Colburn, 2 v.; v. 1, 387 p., front., 7 engravings, 11 vignettes, maps; v. 2, 475 p., front., 10 engravings, 9 vignettes. Mentions hot vapors rising from the craters of Volcan de Viejo near Lake Managua; also mentions a thermal saline spring on the shore of a bay on the easternmost island of the Admiralty Group. 774. Biolley, Pablo, 1889, Costa Rica and her future: Washing- ton, Judd & Detweiler, 96 p.; translated from the French by Cecil Charles, 1890, Costa-Rica und seine zukunft: Berlin, Thormann u. Goetsch, 90 p. Mentions fumaroles and hot springs on the north slope of Irazu volcano and boiling springs on the slopes of Poas Volcano. 775. Boddam-Whetham, John Whetham, 1877, Across Central America: London, Hurst & Blackett, 353 p., 2 illus. Mentions the hot springs near Lake Amatitlan, the Almolonga hot spring near Quezaltenango, and hot sulfur springs near the village of La Oanoa. 776. Castro, Esteban, 1878, Estadistica de la jurisdiccion mu- nicipal de San Vicente: San Salvador [Govt. pub.]. Describes Ausol El Obrajuelo near San Vicente, La Joya, and three other springs about 10 miles southeast of San Vicente. 777. Deger, Erwin Conradin, 1937, Die geochemische Stellung und balneologische Bedeutung einiger Thermalquellen Mittelamerikas: Chemie Erde, v. 11, no. 2, p. 249-255, 2 figs. 778. Dollfus, Auguste, and Mont-Serrat [Montserrat], Eugene de, 1868, Voyage geologique dans les rdpubliques de Guatemala et de Salvador. Mission Scientifique au Mexique et dans L’Ainerique Centrale: Paris, Impri-merie imperiale, 539 p., 18 pis. Contains information on fumaroles, mud volcanoes, and thermal springs. 779. Dondoli B., Cesar, 1941, Nota geologica; Ojo de Agua y sus alrededores: Costa Rica Dept. Nac. Agr. Bol. T6c. 36, Ser. Geol. 3,10 p., 3 figs. 780. Dunlop, Robert Glasgow, 1847, Travels in Central America, being a journal of nearly three years’ residence in the country; together with a sketch of the history of the Republic and an account of its climate, productions, commerce, etc.: London, Longman, Brown, Green, & Longmans, 358 p. map. Mentions the boiling springs on the shore of Lake Amatitlan and thermal wells in the town of Amatitlan, also several areas of mud volcanoes and fumaroles. 781. Dunn, Henry, 1828, Guatemala, or the united provinces of Central America, in 1827-8; being sketches and memorandums made during a twelve months’ residence in that republic: New York, G. & C. Carvill, 318 p.; 1829 ed., London. Mentions a hot sulfur spring about 3 miles from San Josd, Guatemala. 782. Frantzius, A. von, 1862, Die warmen Mineralquellen in Costarica: Preussiche Medizinal-Zeitung, new ser., v. 5, no. 14-16, 16 p. 783. 1873, Die warmen Mineralquellen in Costarica: Neues Jahrb, Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, no. 5, p. 496-510. 784. Frobel, Julius, 1859, Seven years’ travel in Central Amer- ica, Northern Mexico, and the far West of the United States: London, R. Bentley, 587 p., 8 illus. Describes a hot spring near Tipitapa village and mud volcanoes of San Jacinto and Tisate, all in Nicaragua; also Ojo Oaliente in northern Mexico and Warner’s ranch springs in California. 785. Grebe, Willi Herbert, 1955, La mineria en El Salvador [Centro America]: El Salvador Servicio Geol. Nac. Anales Bol., no. 1, 62 p., 3 pis., 12 figs. Mentions fumaroles on the flanks of Tecapa and Cuya-nausul volcanoes; also mentions solfataras. 786. 1956, Las fumaroles y fuentes termales en las montafias volcanicas de mayor edad de El Salvador: El Salvador Servicio Geol. Nac. Anales Bol., no. 2, p. 34r43, 2 pis., 7 figs. 787. 1957a, Dampfquellen in El Salvasor und ihre wirtschaft-liche Bedeutung: Umschau, 1957, no. 6, p. 176-179, 4 figs, 1 map. 788. 1957b, Fumarolen and Thermalquellen in den alteren vulkanischen Gebirgen von El Salvador: Petermanns Geog. Mitt., v. 101, p. 31-35, map, 3 tables. 789. Guzman, D. J., 1883, Apuntamientos sobre la topografia fisica de la Republics de El Salvador: San Salvador. Mentions several thermal springs. 790. Hale, J., 1826, Six months’ residence and travels in Cen- tral America, through the free states of Nicaragua and particularly Costa Rica: New York, 32 p.; 1827, abs., Geog. Soc. France Bull., v. 8, no. 53, p. 99-111. Mentions a hot spring 1 mile south of Cartago and another near San Josd, both in Costa Rica. 791. Hustedt, Friedrich, 1953, Algunas observaciones sobre la vida de microorganismos en los arroyos termales de los ausoles de El Salvador: El Salvador Univ. Inst. Tropical Inv. Cient. Comun., v. 2, nos. 3-4, p. 103-108. 792. International Bureau of American Republics, 1892, Nica- ragua : Bull. 51,183 p. Mentions hot springs. 793. 1892, El Salvador: Bull. 58,169 p. Mentions geysers and hot springs. 794. Larde, Jorge, 1924, Geologia general de Centro America y especial de El Salvador : San Salvador. Mentions several warm springs in El Salvador. 795. Lotschert, Wilhelm, 1956, Temperatur- und pH-Studien in salvadorenischen Solfataren und Thermen: Deutchen Bot. Gesell. Ber., v. 69, p. 21-31, 4 figs., 3 tables. 796. McBirney, Alexander R., 1955, Aspecto quimico de la ac- tividad de fumarolas en Nicaragua y El Salvador: El Salvador Univ. Inst. Tropical Inv. Cient. Comun., v. 4, nos. 3-4, p. 95-100, 5 tables. 797. 1956, An appraisal of the fumarolic activity near Ahua-chapan, El Salvador: El Salvador Servicio Geol. Nac. Anales Bol., no. 2, p. 19-32 [English], 3 graphs, 3 maps; 1958, abs., Annot Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1956, v. 29. no. 2, p. 307. 798. Meyer-Abich, Helmut, 1953, Los ausoles de El Salvador, con un sumario geoldgico-tectdnico de la zona volcanicaBIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 283 occidental: El Salvador Univ. Inst. Tropical Inv. Cient. Comun., v. 2, nos. 3—1, p. 55-102, 8 pis., 8 figs., 3 tables, map. 799. Meyer-Abich, Helmut, 1956, Los volcanes activos de Guate- mala y El Salvador (America Central) : El Salvador Servicio Geol. Nac. Anales Bol., no. 3, 102 p., 26 pis., 20 figs. Mentions fumaroles, solfataras, and thermal springs in several localities. 800. Meyer-Abich, Helmut, and McBirney, Alexander R., 1958, Active volcanoes of Guatemala and El Salvador, in Central America, pt. 6 of Catalogue of active volcanoes of the world including solfatara fields: Naples, Italy, Intemat. Volcanol. Assoc., p. 38-146, 29 figs. Contains information on hydrothermal activity in Guatemala, El Salvador, Nicaragua, and Costa Rica. 801. Montgomery, George Washington, 1839, Narrative of a journey to Guatemala in Central America in 1838: New York, Wiley & Putnam, 195 p. Describes boiling ponds near Ahuachapdn and hot springs near the town of Salama. 802. Penta, Francesco, 1953, Sulle possibility offerte dal terri- torio della repubblica di El Salvador nell’America Cen-trale nel campo delle “forze endogene”: Annali Geofisica, v. 6, no. 3, p. 309-314. 803. Penta, Francesco, and Perozzi, A., 1953, Dictaman sobre el valor industrial del las manifestaciones fumardlicas y exhalativas volcdnicas en general de la regidn salva-dorena: Inf. Mining Econ. San Salvador. 804. Pittier, Henri Francois, 1910, Costa Rica—Vulcan’s smithy : Natl. Geog. Mag., v. 21, no. 6, p. 494-525, 30 views, 2 maps. Mentions solfataras and hot springs on the slopes of Irazu and Pods volcanoes. 805. Renson, C., and Puente, J., 1889, Informe sobre la expe- dicidn cientifica a los ausoles de Ahuachapdn: San Salvador Univ. No. 2, ser. 1; repr., 1929, in Garcia, M.A., Diccionario Histdrico-Enciclopedico de la Republica de El Salvador, v. 3, p. 73. 806. Sapper, Karl Theodor, 1896, Dampfquellen und Schlammvul- kane in S. Salvador: Deutsche geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., v. 48, no. 2, p. 14-26, 4 figs. 807. 1897, Ueber die Infiernellos von Chinameca: Deutsche geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., v. 49, p. 906-908, 1 fig. Mentions fumaroles, mud volcanoes, and hot springs in several localities. 808. 1913, Die Mittelamerikanischen Vulkane: Petermanns Geog. Mitt. Erganzungsheft 178, 173 p., 1 pi., 5 figs. Describes the hot springs associated with individual volcanoes in Guatemala, El Salvador, Nicaragua, and Costa Rica. 809. 1925, Los volcanes de la America Central: Halle, Germany, Max Niemeyer, Studien ueber Amerika und Spanien (Estudios sobre America y Espana) ; Extra-Serie 1, 116 p., 4 pis. [Spanish.] Describes fumaroles, solfataras, and hot springs in Guatemala, El Salvador, Nicaragua, and Costa Rica. 810. Schaufelberger, Paul, 1931, El origen de las fuentes ter- males y minerales de la Meseta Central [Costa Rica] : Apuntes de geologia No. 2, 8 p.; repr. from El Maestro, v. 5, no. 9. 811. 1932, Ueber einige Mineral- und Thermalquellen von Costa Rica: Eclogae geol. Helvetiae, v. 25, no. 1, p. 139-162. 812. 1933, Ueber einige Mineral- und Thermalquellen von Costa Rica, 2: Eclogae geol. Helvetiae, v. 26, no. 2, p. 281-294. 813. Seehach, Karl von, 1865, Reise durch Guanacaste [Costa Rica], 1864 und 1865: Petermanns Geog. Mitt., no. 2, p. 241-249, map. Mentions vapor vents at the Hornillos de Miravalles, a hot spring near Salitral, and fumaroles and solfataras near Guachipilin. 814. 1892, Ueber Vulkane Centralamerikas: K. Gesell. Wiss. Gottingen abh. 38,251 p., 14 pis. Contains information on hot springs in Costa Rica, Nicaragua, El Salvador, and Guatemala. 815. Seeman, Berthold, 1853, Narrative of the voyage of H. M. S. Herald during the years 1845-51, under the command of Captain Henry Keilett, R. N., C.B., being a circumnavigation of the globe, and three cruises to the Arctic regions in search of Sir John Franklin: London, Reeve & Co., 2 v.; v. 1, 322 p., front., map; v. 2, 302 p., front., p. 297-302. Mentions hot springs in Panama and Colombia. 816. Segura Paguaga, Alfonso, and Arguedas, Jorge Leon, 1940, El valle de Cartago y Coris: Costa Rica Dept. Agriculture Rev., v. 5, nos. 9-12, p. 438—449, 7 figs. Mentions hot springs. 817. Sonnenstern, Maximilian von, 1858, Carta topographica de la Republica de El Salvador, con una descripcidn de cada uno de los Departamentos del Estado de El Salvador; repr., 1950, Mus. Nac. “David J. Guzman” Annales, v. 1, no. 3, p. 37-67. Describes several areas of hydrothermal activity. 818. Squier, Ephraim George, 1852, Nicaragua; its people, scenery, monuments, and the proposed interoceanic canal: New York, D. Appleton & Co., 2 v.; v. 1, 424 p., 13 pis., 35 engravings, 2 figs.; v. 2, 452 p., 12 pis., 25 engravings, 7 figs. Describes hot springs and vapor vents in several localities. 819. 1855, Notes on Central America, particularly the States of Honduras and San Salvador; their geography, topography, climate, population, resources, production, etc., and the proposed Honduras interoceanic railway: New York, Harper & Bros., 397 p., 11 illus., 3 topog. sections, 3 charts, maps. Mentions hydrothermal activity in the vicinities of Ahuachapdn and San Vicente and Tecapa volcanoes. 820. 1858, The States of Central America, their geography, topography, climate, population, resources, productions, commerce, political organizations, aborigines, etc., etc., comprising chapters on Honduras, San Salvador, Nicaragua, Costa Rica, Guatemala, Belize, the Bay Islands, the Mosquito Shore, and the Honduras interoceanic railway : New York, Harper & Bros., 782 p., 8 pis., 57 wood-cuts, 5 maps. Mentions vapor vents on the slopes of San Vicente and Tecapa volcanoes and hot springs near Ahuachapdn. 821. Stephens, John Lloyd, 1858, Incidents of travel in Central America, Chiapas, and Yucatan: 12th ed., New York, Harper & Bros., 2 v.; v. 1, 424 p., 32 illus., map; v. 2, 474 p., 46 illus.; 1st ed., 1841. Describes hydrothermal activity in El Salvador and Guatemala. 822. Villafranca, Richard, 1895, Costa Rica—the gem of Ameri- can republics; the land, its resources, and its people: New York, Sacket & Wilhelms Litho. Co., 139 p. Mentions Agua Caliente (5 miles from Cartago) and thermal springs at Orosi and Salitral.284 THERMAL SPRINGS OP THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 823. Williams, Howel, 1953, Geology of southern El Salvador, Central America [abs.]: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 64, no. 12, p. 1517. See also references 21, 78, 83, and 220. WEST INDIES GREATER ANTILLES 824. Aenlle, Joaquin Fabion, 1866, Apuntos para el estudio de las aguas minero-medicinales de la Isla de Cuba: 2d ed., Royal Univ. Habana Fac. Pharmacy, 108 p. 825. Beato y Dolz, Jose, 1882, Informe sobre las aguas minero- medicinales de la isla de Cuba: Acad. Cienc. [Habana] Anales, v. 18, no. 210, p. 325-336. 826. Blanquet, Lucienne, and Morette Andre, 1957a, Sur la composition des eaux et des gaz spontanes de quelques sources thermominerales de Haiti: Acad. sd. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 245 p. 1556-1559. 827. 1957b [Composition of water from some thermo-mineral sources in Haiti] : Annales pharm. franqaises, v. 15, p. 611-616. 828. Broderman, Jorge, 1942, Investigation geolOgica de las aguas minero-medicinales de la Provincia de la Habana : Soc. Cubana Ingenieros Rev., v. 37, no. 4, p. 195-219. 829. Brown, John Stafford, 1924a, The hot springs of the Re- public of Haiti: Jour. Geology, v. 32, no. 5, p. 384-399, 3 figs., 3 tables. 830. 1942b, Water Resources, in Woodring, Wendell Phillips; Brown, John Stafford; and Burbank, Wilbur Swett, Geology of the Republic of Haiti: Haiti Dept. Public Works, 631 p. [French ed., 710 p.]; Baltimore, Md., Lord Baltimore Press (both eds.). Describes four groups of thermal springs. 831. Cabarrouy Llodia, Anibal, 1942, Batios sulfuroses termales radioactivos de San Diego de los Banos: Havana, Obra-pia. [Pamph.] 832. Cosculluela y Barreras, Juan A., 1945, Aspectos fundamen- tales relacionados con la hidrologla mineral de Cuba: Habana Acad. Cienc. Med., Fis. y Nat. Anales, v. 83, no. 5, p. 228-254. Discurso de Contestation, by Jose I. Corral, p. 255-278. Includes data on thermal springs in nine localities. Summarizes earlier publications on springs in Cuba. 833. De la Beche, H. T., 1829, Remarks on the geology of Ja- maica : Geol. Soc. London Trans., ser. 2, v. 2, p. 143-194. Describes St. Thomas Bath mineral spring. 834. Fernandez y Benitez, Jose A., 1907, Estudio qulmico, mi- crogrfifico y bacteriolOgico de las aguas minero-medicinales de San Diego, en la provincia de Pinar del Rio; Santa Rita, Santa Maria del Rosario, y Madrugada, en la provincia de la Habana; con algunos datos sobre las aguas de San Vicente (Vinales), Fuente de Obispo (Guanabacoa), San Miguel de Guamacaro (Matanzas) y Delicias de San Antonio (Santiago de Cuba) : Habana Acad. Cienc. Med., Fis. y Nat. Anales, v. 44, p. 64-72, 181-196, 297-336, 369-397, 451-475, 18 figs. Describes seven groups of thermal springs. 835. Hazard, Samuel, 1871, Cuba with pen and pencil: Hartford, Conn., Hartford Publishing Co., 584 p., front., 17 illus., vignettes; Spanish ed., 1928, in Coleccidn de libros Cubanos: Habana Cultural S. A. Chicago, 111., Pitkin & Parker. Contains information on five thermal-spring localities. 836. Hill, Robert Thomas, 1899, Cuba and Porto Rico; with the other islands of the West Indies; their topography, climate, flora, products, industries, cities, people, political conditions, etc.: 2d ed., New York, Century Co., 447 p., front., 86 illus., map. Mentions San Antonio de los Banos in Cuba; warm springs at Coamo, Quintana, Ponce, and elsewhere in Puerto Rico; St. Thomas and Milk River Baths in Jamaica; sulfur baths in Nevis Island; and thermal springs and soufrieres in Guadeloupe, Dominica, and St. Lucia. 837. Hodge, Edwin Thomas, 1920, The geology of the Coamo- Guayama district, Porto Rico: New York Acad. Sci. Survey of Porto Rico and the Virgin Islands, v. 1, p. 111-228, 50 figs., map. Describes Banos de Coamo and Quintana and Virella springs. 838. Martin, R. Montgomery, 1837, The British colonies, their history, extent, condition, and resources: 2d ed., London, J. Cochran & Co. (6 v. in 3) ; v. 4, Book 1, West India Islands, 188 p., 5 pis., maps. Contains information on thermal activity in Jamaica, St Lucia, St. Vincent, Grenada, Trinidad, Dominica, Nevis, and St. Christopher (St. Kitts). 839. Phillippo, James Cecil, 1883, Mineral springs of Jamaica, in Sinclair, A. C., and Fyfe, Laurence R., Handb. of Jamaica for 1883: London, Jamaica, Govt. Printing Establishment, p. 461—171. 840. 1891, The mineral springs of Jamaica: Kingston, Inst. Jamaica, 37 p. 841. Sawkins, James Gay, 1869, Reports on the geology of Ja- maica, or Part II of the West Indian Survey: London Longmans, Green & Co., v., 339 p., map. Describes St. Thomas and Milk River Baths, also thermal springs in several other localities. 842. Stuart, R., 1878, Haiti, or Hispaniola: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 48, p. 234-274. Mentions nine mineral spring localities. 843. Tippenhauer, Louis Gentil, 1893, Die Insel Haiti: Leipzig, Germany, F. A. Brockhaus, 693 p., 33 pis., 12 figs. Describes several thermal springs. 844. Turnbull, David, 1840, Travels in the west, Cuba; with notices of Porto Rico, and the slave trade: London, Longman, Orme, Brown, Green & Longmans, 574 p., front., map. Includes information on Banos de San Diego and springs at Madruga and Guanabacoa. 845. Zans, V. S., 1951, Economic geology and mineral resources of Jamaica: Jamaica Geol. Survey Dept. Bull. 1, p. 1-61. LESSER ANTILLES 846. Anderson, Tempest, 1903, Report on the eruptions of the Soufriere in St. Vincent, in 1902, and on a visit to Montagne PelOe, Martinique. Part II, The changes in the districts and the subsequent history of the volcanoes: Royal Soc. London Philos. Trans., Ser. A, v. 208, p. 275-332, 17 pis. Mentions two vapor vents. 847. Anderson, Tempest, and Flett, John S., 1902, Preliminary report on the recent eruption of the SoufriOre in St. Vincent, and of a visit to Montagne PelOe in Martinique: Royal Soc. London Proc., v. 70, no. 465, p. 423-445, 3 pis.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 285 Describes hydrothermal activity on St. Vincent and Martinique Islands; also mentions the Grande Soufridre and Boiling Lake in Dominica. 848. Anonymous, 1952, Use of power from volcanic energy being explored in West Indies by UN expert: Chem. and Eng. News, v. 30, no. 10, p. 1012. Refers to the possibility of utilizing volcanic energy to produce electricity on St. Lucia as has been done at Lardarello, Italy. 849. Breen, Henry Hegart, 1844, St. Lucia—Historical, statis- tical, and descriptive: London, Longman, Brown, Green, & Longmans, 423 p., map. Describes the boiling cauldrons in the Soufridre. 850. Deville, Charles, 1843, Observations sur le tremblement de terre dprovd aux Antilles, le 8 Fevrier 1843: Acad, sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 17, p. 1283-1288. Mentions the thermal springs and vapor jets in Guadeloupe. 851. Dickson, H. N., 1902, The eruptions in Martinique and St. Vincent: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 20, no. 1, p. 49-60, maps. States that a boiling lake in Dominica disappeared and that hot springs in Jamaica were disturbed during volcanic eruptions (1902) in Martinique and St. Vincent. 852. Dupuget, M., 1796, Coup-d’oeil rapide sur la physique gdndrale et la Mineralogi des Antilles: Jour, mines, v. 2, 2, no. 18, p. 43-57. Contains data on the springs in Guadeloupe. 853. Elliott, Stuart E., 1951, The Mouth of Hell [Dominica] : Nat. History, v. 60, no. 10, p. 440-445, 476, 11 illus. Describes the Boiling Lake, also steam vents, in Dominica. 854. Ferguson, William, 1823, Extract from inspection report of the Island of Trinidad made in the year 1816, by the Inspector of Hospitals * * *: Royal Soc. Edinburgh Trans., v. 9, p. 93-96. Describes mud volcanoes near Point Icaque. 855. Heilprin, Angelo, 1903, Mont Pelde and the tragedy of Martinique: Philadelphia, Pa., and London, J. B. Lip-pincott, 335 p., front., 36 pis., 29 figs. Describes an eruption, in 1902, of the Soufricre on St. Vincent Island and the resulting formation of a new crater containing a shallow boiling lake. A map of Martinique shows “Fountaine chaude” 5 km west-southwest of the volcano’s crest. 856. Hill, Robert Thomas, 1902, The volcanic disturbances in the West Indes; Natl. Geog. Mag., v. 13, no. 7, p. 223-267,15 illus. Describes hydrothermal activity related to volcanic disturbances (1902) in Guadeloupe, St. Lucia, St Christopher (St. Kitts), Dominica, and Martinique. 857. Hovey, Edmund Otis, 1902, Martinique and St. Vincent; a preliminary report upon the eruptions of 1902: Am. Mus. Nat. History Bull., v. 16, p. 333-372, 19 pis., fig. Describes a small lake of boiling water in the volcanic crater in St. Vincent and the fumaroles in Martinique. 858. Kennan, George, 1902a, The tragedy of Pelde: Outlook Mag. [New York], v. 71, June 28-Aug. 16, p. 539-542; 583-588; 680-687; 725-732; 769-777; 822-826; 920-925; 966-974, 4 illus. Describes the disastrous eruptions, in 1902, of boiling water and boiling mud in Martinique. 859. Kennan, George, 1902b, The tragedy of Pelde; A narrative of personal experience and observation in Martinique: New York, Outlook Co., 257 p., front., 13 illus., maps. Postulates that the hot water and hot mud resulting from the eruption, in 1902, of Mount Pelde on Martinique were ejected in the form of steam and dust. 860. Kugler, Hans G., 1950, Plaisance hot springs, Trinidad, British West Indies: Personal commun. to G. A. Waring. 861. Lacroix, Alfred, 1904, La montagne Pelde et ses Eruptions: Paris, Masson et Cie., 662 p., 30 pis., 238 figs. Includes data on the fumaroles produced by the eruptions, in 1902, of Mount Pelde in Martinique. 862. Nugent, Nicholas, 1811, An account of the “Sulphur” or “Soufridre” of the Island of Montserrat: Geol. Soc. London Trans., ser. 1, v. 1, p. 185-190. Mentions that a stream flowing down the mountainside turns to boiling water when it comes in contact with hot sulfurous exhalations. 863. Ober, Frederick Albion, 1880, Camps in the Caribees—The adventures of a naturalist in the Lesser Antilles: New York, C. T. Dillingham, 366 p., 34 illus. Describes hot springs and the Boiling Lake in Dominica, the crater lake and a crater pool in St. Vincent, and a warm spring and fumaroles in Guadeloupe. 864. Palgrave, W. Gifford, 1877, West Indian Memories—The Lesser Antilles and the “Boiling Lake”: Macmillan’s Mag., v. 35, no. 209, p. 361-374. London. Describes the boiling pools in the crater of the soufridre in St. Lucia, also the boiling springs, steam vents, and Boiling Lake in the Grande Soufridre in Dominica. 865. Perret, Frank Alvord, 1935, The eruption of Mt. Pelde 1929-1932: Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 458, 126 p., front., 72 figs., diagram, chart. Describes fumaroles that were formed at the time of the eruption of Mount Pelde. 866. 1939, The volcano-seismic crisis . at Montserrat 1933-1937: Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 512, 76 p., front., 51 figs. Describes soufrieres, hot springs, and a hot pond. 867. Robson, G. R., and Willmore, P. L., 1955, Some heat meas- urements in West Indian soufridres: Bull, volcanol., ser. 2, v. 17, p. 13-39, 6 figs., 3 tables. Contains data on the rate of flow in hot streams and measurements of steam emission from fumaroles and of heat loss from the surface of hot pools in several of the islands in the West Indies. Maps show distribution of hot springs and fumaroles in St. Lucia, Dominica, and Montserrat. 868. Russell, Israel Cook, 1902, Volcanic eruptions on Marti- nique and St. Vincent: Natl. Geog. Mag., v. 13, no. 12, p. 415-436,10 illus. Describes hydrothermal activity during and after the eruptions. 869. Sapper, Karl Theodor, 1903a, Ein Besuch der Insel Gren- ada : Centralbl. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Paliiontologie, 1903, Abt. A, p. 182-186, map. Describes thermal springs near Peggy’s Whim, near Lake Antoine, and near Tufton Hall. 870. 1903b, Bericht ueber einen Besuch von St. Vincent: Centralbl. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1903, Abt. A, p. 248-258, 5 figs. Mentions fumaroles in three localities.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 286 871. Sapper, Karl Theodor, 1903c, Zur Kenntniss der Insel S. Lucia in Westindien: Centralbl. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1903, Abt. A, p. 271-278, 2 figs. Describes hot clear-water and mud springs near the south end of the island. 872. 1903d, Ein Besuch der Insel Montserrat (Westindien) : Centralbl. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1903, Abt. A, p. 279-283,1 fig. Describes fumaroles and thermal springs in several localities. 873. 1903e, Ein Besuch der Inseln Nevis und S. Kitts (S. Christopher) : Centralbl. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1903, Abt. A, p. 284-287,2 figs. Describes the warm springs and fumaroles near Charlestown in Nevis and the hot sulfur springs and fumaroles near Mount Misery in St. Christopher (St. Kitts). 874. 1903f, Ein Besuch von Dominica: Centralbl. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1903, Abt. A, p. 305-314, 3 figs. Describes the Boiling Lake, also hot springs, mud springs, and vapor vents in several places. 875. 1903g, Ein Besuch von S. Eustatius und Saba: Centralbl. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1903, Abt. A, p. 314-318, 3 figs. Mentions two warm springs on Saba but none on St. Eustatius. 876. 1903h, Ein Besuch von Guadeloupe: Centralbl. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1903, Abt. A, p. 319-323, 2 figs. Describes fumaroles, mud pools, and hot springs in several localities. 877. 1903i, Ein Besuch von Martinique: Centralbl. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1903, Abt. A, p. 337-358, 8 figs. Describes fumaroles near the head of the Riviere Blanche. 878. 1903j, Der Krater der SoufriSre von St. Vincent: Centralbl. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1903, Abt. A, p. 369-373,2 figs. Mentions the lake in the old crater, the pond in the new crater, and fumaroles in three valleys. 879. Wall, George Parks, and Sawkins, James Glay, 1860, Re- port on the geology of Trinidad; or, Part I of the West Indian Survey: London, Longman, Green, Longman, & Roberts, 211 p., 5 pis., 58 figs. Mentions the springs at Pointe-fi-Pierre. 880. West, William, assisted by G. S. West, 1895, On some fresh- water algae from the West Indies: Linnean Soc. London Jour. (Botany), v. 30, p. 264-280,4 pis. Contains descriptions of 14 species of algae from warm or hot streams in the crater of the Grande Soufri-ere in Dominica. See also references 74, 75, 836, and 838. SOUTH AMERICA ARGENTINA 881. Alvarez, Antenor, 1928, Las termas de Rio Hondo (Santi- ago del Estero) : Buenos Aires, J. Peuser, 110 p., 10 figs., maps. 882. Alvarez, Hector H., 1918, Aguas termominerales de Villa- vicencio (Provincia de Mendoza) : Argentina, Direction Gen. Minas, Geologia, Hidrologia, ser. D. Bull. 10. 30 p., 9 illus., 3 maps. 883. Alvarez, Hector H., and others, 1938, Contribution al es- tudio fisicoquimico del agua mineral Villavicencio; Indi-caciones terapeuticas: Buenos Aires, 112 p., 24 views, map. 884. Arata, P. N., 1897, El Puente del Inca y sus termas: La Biblioteca, v. 3, p. 210-232, Buenos Aires, 885. Bandoni, A. J., Celsi, S. A., and Cignoli, F., 1950 [Mineral waters of Argentina] : Rev. farmaceutica [Buenos Aires], v. 92, p. 69-81; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 6324. 886. Brand, Charles, 1828, Journal of a voyage to Peru; a pas- sage across the Cordillera of the Andes in the winter of 1827, performed on foot in the snow; and a journey across the pampas: London, H. Colburn, 346 p., front., 3 illus. Contains a description of the hot springs at Puente del Inca. 887. Canton, Eliseo, 1894, Estudios de las aguas minerales del norte de la Republica Argentina (Salta, Jujuy, Santiago del Estero, y Tucuman). [Govt, pub.] 888. Castillo, Manuel, 1940, Reumatismo y aguas minerales ar- gentinas: Buenos Aires, “El Ateneo,” 233 p. Contains chemical analyses of the water from 15 thermal springs. 889. Cetrangolo, Zulema Ch. de, 1938, Opalos y calcedonias del Agua de Dionisio (Dept. BelOn, Provincia de Catamarca) : Tucuman Univ. Nac. Pub. 231, Inst. Mineralogia y Geologia, Cuademos, v. 1, no. 2, p. 10-12. 890. Claren, Federico, 1891, Plano y description topografica de las aguas termales del Rio Hondo: Acad. Nac. Cienc. Cordoba Bol., v. 12, pt. 2, p. 121-130. 891. Conway, William Martin, 1902, Aconcagua and Tierra del Fuego, a book of climbing, travel and exploration: London and New York, Cassell & Co. 252 p., 18 pis. Describes the hot springs at Puente del Inca. Mentions the baths of Chilian in Chile. 892. Corti, Hercules, 1918a, Las aguas de las termas de Rio Hondo (Provincia de Santiago del Estero) : Argentina, Direction Gen. Minas, Geologia, y Hidrologia ser. D, Bull. 9, 34 p., 3 pis., maps, 1 table. 893. 1918b, Las termas de Rio Hondo : Asoc. Quim. Argentina Anales, v. 6, p. 215-229; 1919, Chem. Abs. v. 13, p. 353. 894. 1923, Las fuentes termo-minerales de Cacheuta: Argentina, Direction Gen. Minas, Geologia, y Hidrologia, ser. D, Bull. 14, 36 p., 5 pis., 5 diagrams, tables. 895. 1924, Contribution al estudio de las aguas termo-minerales de Puente del Inca: Argentina, Direction Gen. Minas, Geologia, y Hidrologia Pub. 1, 22 p., 1 pi.; Asoc. Quim. Argentina Anales, v. 12, p. 99-102, 186-198; 1925, Chem. Abs., v. 19, p. 550. 896. 1925, Contribution al estudio de las fuentes termo-minerales de Rosario de la Frontera: Argentina, Direction Gen. Minas, Geologia, y Hidrologia Pub. 14, 21 p., 1 pi. 897. 1929, Contribution al estudio de las termas sulfurosas del Sosneado (Provincia de Mendoza) : Argentina, Direction Gen. Minas, Geologia, y Hidrologia Pub. 66, 18 p., 4 pis. 898. Corti, Hercules, and Camps, Jose, 1930, Contribution al estudio de las aguas de la Republica Argentina: Argentina, Direction Gen. Minas, Geologia, y Hidrologia Pub. 84, 400 p.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 287 899. Darwin, Charles Robert, 1844, Geological observations on the volcanic islands and parts of South America visited during the voyage of H. M. S. “Beagle”: New York, D. Appleton & Co. 648 p., 5 pis., 40 figs., maps [3d ed., 1891]. Describes the hot springs at Puente del Inca; also mentions thermal springs of Cauquenes and Villa Vicencio. 900. Del Area, E. E., 1910, Aguas minerales especialmente de la Repfiblica Argentina: Cong. Internac. Americano Medi-cina e Higiene, Buenos Aires 1910 : 356 p. 901. Doering, Adolfo, 1891, Las aguas termales del Rio Hondo (Provincia de Santiago del Estero) : Acad. Nac. Cienc. Cordoba Bol., v. 12, pt. 2, p. 107-120. 902. Espeche, Federico, 1894, Aguas termales y minerales de la Provincia de Catamarca: Argentina, Dept. Nac. Higiene Anales, v. 4, p. 1145-1148, Buenos Aires. 903. Groeber, Pablo, and Corti, Hercules, 1920, Estudio geo- 16gico de las termas de Copahue, por el Doctor Pablo Groeber, y estudio quimico preliminar de las muestras de aguas recogidas en el terreno por el Doctor Hercules Corti: Argentina, Direecion Gen. Minas, Geologia, y Hidrologia, ser. F, Bull. 3, 17 p., 3 pis. Maps and part of text are also in Sussini, Miguel, and others, 1936-41, v. 13, 1938. 904. Herrero Ducloux, Enrique, 1907, Aguas minerales alcalinas de la Republica Argentina : Rev. Mus. La Plata, v. 14 (2d ser., v. 1), p. 9-52. 905. 1916, Nota sobre el Agua Hedionda de la Quebrada de Huaco (Provincia de San Juan) : Rev. Mus. La Plata, v. 23 (2d ser., v. 10), no. 2, p. 206-230. 906. 1918, Termas de Inti (Agua Caliente) en la Provincia de Salta: Acad. Nac. Cienc. Cordoba Bol., v. 23, pt. 2, p. 263-286, figs., map. 907. 1932, Nota sobre el agua ferruginosa de El Chocoy (La Rioja) : Rev. farmacdutica [Buenos Aires], v. 74, no. 9. 908. Herrero Ducloux, Enrique, and Herrero Ducloux, Leopoldo, 1909, Las aguas minerales de los valles de Hualfin y otros de la Provincia de Catamarca: Rev. Mus. La Plata, v. 16 (2d ser., v. 3), p. 51-120, 21 figs., map. 909. Lozano, N., 1935, Contribution al estudio de los nuevas fuentes de aguas termo-minerales (Luracatao, Provincia de Salta) : Anales Biotipologia, Eugenesia y Medicina Social [Buenos Aires]. 910. Lozano, N.; Zanalda, D.; and Gaibrois, R., 1934 [New Ar- gentine mineral hot springs (Salta)]: Nac. Cong. Mddicina, 5th, Actas y Trabajos, v. 4, p. 316; 1934, Asoc. Quim. Argentina Anales, v. 24, p. 58; 1936, Chem. Abs., v. 30, col. 8448. 911. MacRae, Archibald, 1856, Report of a journey across the Andes and pampas of the Argentine Provinces, in Gillis, James Melville, The U.S. Naval astronomical expedition to the southern hemisphere during the years 1849-52: U.S. 33d Cong., 1st sess., H. Doc. 121, v. 2, p. 1-68, 37 illus., 11 woodcuts. Describes the hot springs at Puente del Inca. 912. Mazza, F. Aurelio, 1922, Datos sobre el agua termal de Pismauta (Provincia de San Juan) : Nac. Cong. Quimica, 1st, Actas y Trabajos, v. 2, p. 435-437. 913. Meaurio, V. L., and Magnin, Jorge, 1915, Estudio de las aguas termo-minerales de Cacheuta (Mendoza) : Buenos Aires, 29 p. 914. Miers, John, 1826, Travels in Chile and La Plata, including accounts respecting the geography, geology, statistics, government, finances, agriculture, manners, and customs, and the mining operations in Chile: London, Baldwin, Cradock, & Joy, 2 v.; v. 1, 494 p., 12 pis., map; v. 2, 532 p., 8 pis., map. Describes hot springs near Villa Vicencio and at Puente del Inca. 915. Murua y Perez, Demetrio, 1877, Estudio sobre las aguas ter- males denominadas Banos del Inca: Santiago de Chile, Annales Universidad 49, p. 763-787. 916. Musters, George Chaworth, 1873, At home with the Pata- gonians—A year’s wanderings over untrodden ground from the Straits of Magellan to the Rio Negro: 2d ed., London, J. Murray, 340 p., front., 9 illus., map; translated into Spanish by Arturo Costa Alvarez, with title, Vida entre los Patagones: Univ. Nac. La Plata, Biblio-teca Centenaria, v. 1, p. 127-392, with reproductions of original illustrations and map. Mentions a hot spring in an area of smoking ground between Geylum and Patagones. 917. Peirano, A., 1943 [Geological study of Remate Hill (San- tiago del Estero) ] : Cuademos mineral, geol. Univ. Nac., Tucumdn (Argentina), v. 3, p. 7-31; 1944, Chem. Abs., v. 38, col. 1187. Contains a chemical analysis of water from a thermal spring. 918. Proctor, Robert, 1825, Narrative of a journey across the Cordillera of the Andes, and of a residence in Lima, and other parts of Peru, in the years 1823 and 1824: London, Hurst, Robinson & Co.; Edinburgh, A. Constable & Co., 374 p. Describes hot springs at Puente del Inca. 919. Rassmuss, Juan, 1920, Observaciones geolbgicas en Salta; las termas de Rosario de la Frontera: Argentina, Direc-ci6n Gen. Minas, Geologia, y Hidrologia, ser. F, Bull. 2, p. 15-16. 920. 1925, Las termas de Rosario de la Frontera: Argentina, Direccifin Gen. Minas, Geologia, y Hidrologia Pub. 13, 16 p., map. 921. Sa Adolfo M., 1946, [The presence of uranium in water from Cacheuta hot springs and from Mendoza Province; preliminary note] : Asoc. Quim. Argentina Anales, v. 34, p. 205-206; 1948, Chem. Abs., v. 42, col. 2172. 922. Stappenbeck, Friedrich August Richard, 1915, Estudio geo- logieo e hidrolbgico de la zona subandina: Buenos Aires, Nac. Ministerio Agricultura. 923. 1921, Estudios geologicos y hidrbgeologicos en la zona subandina de las Provincias de Salta y Tucumdn: Argentina, Ministdrio Agricultura, Sec. Geologia, Mineralogla, y Mineria, v. 14, no. 5, 135 p. Contains information on the thermal springs of Galpon and Rosario de la Frontera. 924. 1926, Geologie und Grundwasserkunde der Pampa: Stuttgart, Germany, E. Schweizerbart’sehe (E. Nagele), 409 p., 80 figs, 13 tables. 925. 1937, Uber Onyxmarmorlagerstatten und damit zuspm-menhangende Quellen bei San Rafael, Argentinien [Mendoza] : Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 45, no. 12, p. 203-210, 4 figs.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 288 926. Sussini, Miguel, and others, 1936-41, Aguas minerales de la Republica Argentina: Buenos Aires, Ministerio Interior, Comisidn Nac. Climatologia y Aguas Minerales, 14 y.; 1936, v. 1, Parte General. Introduceion al estudio de las aguas minerales de la Reptiblica Argentina, 182 p., 13 pis.; 1937, v. 2, Provincia de Buenos Aires, 341 p., 93 pis., 95 figs.; 1941, v. 3, Provincia de Catamarca, 235 p., illus.; 1938, v. 4, Provincia de COrdoba, 235 p., 65 pis., 24 figs., map; 1939, v. 5, Provincia de Jujuy, 230 p., 106 pis., 37 figs.; 1940, v. 6, Provincia de la Rioja, 131 p., illus.; 1937, v. 7, Provincia de Mendoza, 472 p., illus.; v. 8, Provincia de Salta (unpub.?) ; v. 9, Provincia de San Juan (unpub.?) ; v. 10, Provincia de San Luis (unpub.?) ; v. 11, Provincia de Santiago del Estero (unpub.?) ; v. 12, Provincia de Tucumfin (unpub.?) ; 1938, v. 13, Territorio Nacional de Neuqufin, 173 p., illus.; v. 14, Territories Nacionales (unpub.) ; 1947, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 11, 1945-46, p. 319. A series of comprehensive studies on mineral and thermal springs in Argentina. The springs are classified according to their characteristics and geologic environment. Many are described in detail. 927. Thierry, Mauricio de, 1913, Aguas termo-minerales de la Provincia de Salta, fuentes de “El Sauce” y “Aguas Cali-entes”; con una resena de las mismas por Eduardo de Miribel: Argentina, DirecciOn Minas, Geologia, y Hidro-logia, Anales, v. 9, no. 2, 48 p., 11 figs., map. 928. 1914, Aguas minerales de la Provincia de San Juan: Argentina, Direccidn Gen. Minas, Geologia, y Hidrologia, ser. D, Bull. 1, 20 p. 929. 1915, Ensayo de clasifieacion de las aguas minerales de la Republica Argentina; precedido de un estudio de con-junto sobre las aguas minerales y las crenoterapia: Argentina, Ministerio Agricultura, Sec. Geologia, Mine-ralogia, y Mineria, v. 10, no. 3, 150 p. 930. White, Ernest William, 1881-82, Cameos from the Silver- land, or the experiences of a young naturalist in the Argentine Republic: London, J. van Voorst, 2 v., map. Mentions thermal springs. See also references 1077 and 1003. BOLIVIA 931. Ahlfeld, Friedrich (Federico), 1941, Los yacimientos minerales de Bolivia; La Paz, Litografias e imprensas unidas, Argentina, Direccidn Gen. Minas y Petrdleo, 282 p., 54 figs., maps, 14 tables. Discusses the distribution of thermal springs in Bolivia and lists data on 64 principal springs. 932. 1946a, Geologia de Bolivia : Ministerio Economia Nac., Direccidn Gen. Minas y Petroleo. Extracto de Revista Mus. La Plata (nueva ser.), Sec. Geologia, v. 3, p. 5-370, front., 8 pis., 115 figs., maps. Discusses the distribution of thermal-spring localities in Bolivia and the spring-deposited minerals in several of them. Contains chemical analyses of the water from Toua spring and two springs of Caite. 933. 1946b, Geologia de los yacimientos de antimonio en Bolivia: Mineria Boliviana, v. 3, no. 30 (Aug.-Oct.), p. 9-14; no. 31 (Nov.-Dee.), p. 13-14, 5 figs. Discusses the relation of thermal springs to mineral deposits and geologic structure. 934. Bingham, Hiram, 1911, Across South America: Boston, Mass., and New York, Houghton Mifflin Co., 405 p., front., 75 illus., 7 maps. Describes hot springs north of Cotagaita and between Potosi and Bartolo, both localities in southern Bolivia. 935. Castelnau, Francis (Comte de), 1850-51, Expedition dans les partes centrales de l’Amfirique du sud, de Rio de Janeiro a Lima, et de Lima a Para; exficutfie par ordre du gouvemement frangais pendant des annfies 1843 a 1847; Paris, P. Bertrand, 7 parts; pt. 1, Histoire du voyage, 1850-51, maps. Contains information on the thermal springs of San Tomas between Potosi and La Paz. 936. Hoek, H., 1905, Exploration in Bolivia: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 25, no. 5, p. 498-513, 6 illus. Mentions hot springs at Miraflores. 937. Lindgren, Waldemar, 1922, A recent deposit of a thermal spring in Bolivia: Econ. Geology, v. 17, p. 201-206. Describes thermal-spring deposits 2 miles downstream from the Uncia tin mines. BRAZIL 938. Alvim, Paulo Araujo, 1940, Fontes minerals de Avarfi, Sao Paulo: Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 4 (whole no. 24), p. 289-292, map. Contains information on the thermal springs at and 5 km south of Santa Barbara do Rio Pardo. 939. Andrade, Paulo de, 1934, Emtomo dos processos de analises radioactivas de agua [Estimation of the radioactivity of water] : Chimica e Industria [Sao Paulo], v. 2, p. 161-163; 1935, Chem. Abs., v. 29, col. 2839. Reviews method of determining radioactivity of the hot springs at Lindoya. 940. Andrade Junior, Jose Ferreira de, 1925, Reconhecimento geologico do arredores de Araxfi e outros pontos de oc-correncia de aguas minerales: Brasil, Servigo geologico e mineraldgico Bol. 9, p. 65-77. Mentions the warm springs of Araxfi and Serra Negra and the mineral deposited by their water. 941. 1926, Aguas thermo-mineraes do valle do Rio Itapicuru, Estado da Bahia: Brasil, Servigo geolfigico e mineraldgico Bol. 17, p. 1-32, map. 942. 1927, Radioactividade das aguas mineraes do barreiro de Araxfi e de outras fontes do estado de Minas Geraes: Brasil, Servigo geoldgico e mineralogico Bol. 22, 26 p., 3 figs. 943. 1928, Aguas thermaes radioactivas de Caldas de Impera-triz (Estado de Santa Catharina) : Brasil, Servigo geo-lfigico e mineralogico Bol. 28, 54 p. 944. 1930, Radioactividade das figuas mineraes de Imperatriz; e estudos sobre os niobo-tantalatos: Brasil, Servigo geor lfigico e mineralogico Bol. 48, 65 p. 945. 1932, Estagao hydro-mineral de Sao Lourengo, Fonte Vichy: Acad. Brasileria Scienc. Annaes, v. 4, no. 2, p. 41-55. 946. 1936. Radioactividade das figuas mineraes do Araxfi. [The radioactivity of the mineral springs of Araxfi; occurrence of thorium emanation in the radioactive water]: Acad. Brasileria Scienc. Annaes, v. 8, p. 61-74; Chem. Abs., v. 30, col. 4756. 947. 1937. Aguas mineraes Brasileiras: Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 2 (whole no. 9), p. 163-168. 948. 1942, Captagao das fontes de Sao Lourengo: Brasil, Ministerio Agricultura, Dept. Nac. Produgao mineral, Lab. Produgao Mineral Bol. 4, 41 p., 13 pis.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 289 949. Andrade Junior, Jose Ferreira de, 1945, Fontes do Girdu, Municipio de Presidente Vargas, Minas Gerais: Min-eragao e Metalurgia, v. 9 (whole no. 52), p. 168; 1949, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 13,1949, p. 8. Describes a newly found thermal spring 3 km from Pires do Rio. 950. Anonymous, 1937a, Descoberta nova fonte termal en Goiaz (nota) : Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 2, no. 11, p. 297. 951. 1937b, Agua quente de Itabirito, Minas Gerais (nota) : Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 2. no. 11 (whole no. 12), p. 388-389. 952. 1938, Aguas minerais de Guarapuava, Parana (nota) : Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 3 (whole no. 14), p. 72. 953. 1940, Brejo das Freiras, Paraiba (nota) : Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 5 (whole no. 25), p. 38. 954. 1944, Fonte termal de Brejo das Freiras, Paraiba (nota) : Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 7 (whole no. 42), p. 331. 955. Barros, Diogenes Cupertino de, 1934, Agua de Santa Barbara [Goyaz] : Escola Minas, Ouro Preto, Annaes, no. 25, p. 97-103. 956. Bello, Josaphat (Fide Yori, pseudonym), 1904, Estudos— As nossas aguas mineraes Pogos de Caldas: Belo Horizonte, Minas Gerais, p. 23-68. 957. Boa Nova, Francisco de Paulo, 1940, Aguas termais de Brejo das Freiras [Paraiba] : Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 5 (whole no. 28), p. 176-177. 958. Brandao, Thome, 1922, Cambuquira estancia hidro-mine- ral: Belo Horizonte, Minas Gerais, 146 p. 959. Burton, Richard Francis, 1869, Explorations of the High- lands of the Brazil; with a full account of the gold and diamond mines: London, Tinsley Bros., 2 v.; v. 1, 443 p., front.; v. 2,478 p., front. Mentions the Caldas or Thermae de Sao Jose, the mineral water of Caxambu, and Agua Quente (a hot spring, now buried beneath an earth slip, near Morro d’Agua Quente). 960. Correa Netto, Orozimbo, 1917, Aguas thermaes Brasileiras : 196 p., illus. 961. 1918, As dguas thermaes de caldas Novas, Goyaz: 188 p., 25 illus., 4 maps. 962. 1919-20, Aguas thermaes de Matto Grosso: Com. de Linhas Telegraphicas Estrdtegicas de Matto-Grosso ao Amazonas, pt. 1, Pub. 61, app. 5, 84 p. 1919; pt. 2, Pub. 62, app. 5, 84 p., 23 illus., 5 maps., 1920. 963. Costa, Ribeiro da, and Diogo, Cezar, 1893, Relatorio da analyse qualitiva e quantitive das aguas mineraes de Caxambu: Acad. Nac. Medicina, Rio de Janeiro, 50 p. 964. Diniz Gonsalvez, Alpheu, 1936, Aguas mineraes do Brasil: Brasil, Ministerio Agricultura, Direccion Estatistica Producgao, 164 p., 67 illus., 5 figs., map, 8 tables. Contains data on 43 thermal-spring localities and chemical analyses of the water from 29 mineral springs, most of which are thermal. 965. Fernandes, Carlos Ferriera de Souza, 1877, As dguas mineraes do Brasil: Rio de Janeiro, 78 p. 966. Ferraz, Luis Caetano, 1929, Compendio dos mineraes do Brasil—Aguas mineraes: Rio de Janeiro, Imprensa Nac. 967. Fleury, R. A. Curado, 1941, Notieias sobre a Fonte da Estiva, Municipo de Riachao, Estado do Maranhiio: Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 5 (whole no. 29), p. 230-232, map. 968. Florencio, Wilier, and Castro, Celso de, 1942, Aguas Santas de Tiradentes, Minas Gerais: Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 6 (whole no. 34), p. 166-168, map. 969. 1943, Radioactividade da fonte de agua mineral Dom Pedro Caxambu, Estado de Minas Gerais: Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 6 (whole no. 36), p. 285-286. 970. 1944, Aguas minerais de Tapira, Sacramento, Minas Gerais: Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 8, no. 43, p. 49. 971. 1948, Aguas termais de Itau: Minas Gerais, Inst. Tecno-logia Indus. Avulso 6, 20 p.; 1950, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, 1949, v. 14, p. 83; 1951, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1950, v. 22, pt. 2, p. 219. 972. Furia, A., 1935 [Thermal springs at Campinas, Sao Paulo] : Chimica e industria lSao Paulo], v. 3, no. 7, p. 83; Chem. Abs., v. 29, col. 7533. 973. Gomes, C. T. de M., 1902, Analyse de agua mineral de Sao Lourengo: Escola Minas, Ouro Preto, Annaes 5, p. 203. 974. Guimaraes, Ranulpho Queiroz, 1923, As dguas mineraes medicinaes de Sao Paulo: Sao Paulo, Brasil, 170 p., illus. 975. 1926, A dgua de Java, in “Riquezas de Sao Paulo” : p. 1-10. 976. Leao, Josias, 1939. Mines and minerals in Brazil: Brasil, Centro Estudos Economicos, Dept. Nac. Producgao Pub. 80, 243 p. Contains information on 20 mineral springs, many of which are thermal. 977. Lobo, Joao Bruno, 1938a, Estudo da fonte “Salus,” Sarzedo, Estado de Minas Gerais: Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 2 (whole no. 11), p. 335-339, maps. 978. 1938b, Fontes minerais do Sabd, Pernambuco: Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 3 (whole no. 13), p. 59-61. 979. 1938c, Aguas termais em Goiaz: Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 3 (whole no. 15), p. 137-145. 980. Lopes, Renato de Souza, 1956, Aguas minerais do Brasil; composigaq, valor, e indigacoes terapeuticas: Brasil, Servigo Informagao Agr., Dept. Nac. produgao Mineral, Com. Permanente Crenologia Pub. 2 (2a ed., revista e aumentada), 148 p., Rio de Janeiro, Dept. Imprensa Nac.; 1st ed., 1930. Contains chemical-quality data for 16 thermal springs. 981. Maack, Reinhard, and Spitzner, Reinaldo, 1946, Estudo contributivo ao conhecimento de algumas aguas minerais do estado do Parana: Arquivos Biologia e Technolo-gia, v. 1, p. 129-176, illus. [English and German summaries] ; 1954, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, 1953, v. 18, p. 250. 982. Magalhaes, Octavio de, 1926, Estudo nas Aguas de Araxd: Sao Paulo, Brasil, 70 p., 11 views, 5 plans, 12 graphs. 983. May, 1879, Aguas sulphurosas alcalinas do Araxd, pro- vincia de Minas: Joraal Commercio Rio de Janeiro, Rev. Indus. Mar. 1879, v. 4, p. 78-79. 984. Mello, Brandao P. de, 1886, As dguas mineraes de Araxd: Rio de Janeiro, 22 p. 985. Mileo, Jose Nicolau, 1937, Aguas minerais do Brasil: Ar- chivos hygiene e saude publica, v. 2, p. 271-277; 1939, Chem. Abs. v. 33, col. 8335. 986. Morais, Jose Jacques de, 1938, Estancias hidro-minerais de Minas Gerais: Mineragao e Metalurgia, v. 3 (whole no. 13), p. 63.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 290 987. Nascimento, Theodureto do, 1929, As estancias hydro- mineraes de Minas Gerais: Brasil, Ministerio Agricul-tura (Service of Information, report to President of the State), 14 p. 988. Padua Rezende, Antonio de, 1920, As figuas minerals do Estado de Minas Gerais: Paris, 198 p., 27 views, map. 989. Pimental, Antonio, 1894, Aguas medicinaes do Planalto: Com. Exploradora do Planalto Central do Brasil, Rela-torio, app. 5, p. 223-231. [Portuguese and French.] 990. Ponde, Adriano, 1925, Radioactividade das aguas minero- medicinaes do Itapicuru: Rio de Janeiro, Brasil-Medico, 18 p. 991. Ribero, Enrico Branco, 1927, As aguas medicamentosas naturaes: S5o Paulo, Brasil, 130 p.; Fac. Medicine S&o Paulo Univ. unpub. thesis. Describes Guarapuava springs in Parana. 992. Salles, Benjamin da Rocha, 1930, Aguas thermo-radio- activas de Calderao de Cipd no Estado da Bahia: 70 p., 3 gravures and graphs. 993. Sanches de Lemos, Pedro, 1904, As aguas thermaes de Pogos de Caldas: Belo Horizonte, Minas Gerais, Imprenso Oficial, 204 p., 20 pis. 994. Schaeffer, Alfred, 1928, Estudo analytico das figuas mi- neraes do estado de Minas Gerais: Official State publication, 54 p. 995. Serzedello Maximiano, 1884, Aguas mineraes de Caxambu, Caldas, Lambary, Contendas, e Cambuquira: Rio de Janeiro. 996. Sousa Lima, Agostinho Jose de, 1888, Relatorio sobre as figuas mineraes de Pogos de Caldas, Caxambu, Lambary: Rio de Janeiro. 997. Spitzner, Reinaldo, 1946, Aguas minerals do Parand: A Retorta, v. 1, No. 2/3, p. 38-51; Ohem. Abs., v. 40. col. 5857. 998. Teixeira, Antonio Salles, 1938 [Analytical data on the min- eral-water springs of the State of Santa Catarina (Brasil)] : Rev. Brasileira Chimica [Sao Paulo], v. 6, p. 302-305 [Portuguese] ; 1939, Chem. Abs., v. 33, col. 2631. 999. Wanderley, L. A., 1923, A radioactividade das dguas mi- neraes do Estado de Sao Paulo in “Estado de Sdo Paulo”: 28 p.; 2d ed., 1924, Inst. Engenharia Sao Paulo. CHILE 1000. Boyd, John, 1876, The medical society of Chili: Edinburgh Medical Jour., v. 22, pt. 1, p. 110-116. Contains information on several thermal-spring resorts. 1001. Caldcleugh, Alexander, 1836, An account of the great earthquake experienced in Chile on the 20th of February, 1835; with a map: Royal Soc. London Philos. Trans, for 1836, pt. 1, p. 21-26 map. States that several thermal springs came into existence as a result of the earthquake, also that the temperature of the springs of Cauquenes was lowered 26°F for a short time. 1002. Darapsky, Ludwig, 1890, Las dguas minerales de Chile: Valparaiso, G. Helfmann, 193 p., front., 5 pis., 1 fig., map. Contains information on 39 thermal springs. 1003. Darwin, Charles Robert, 1845, Journal of researches into the natural history and geology of the countries visited during the voyage round the world of the H. M. S. “Beagle” under the command of Captain Fitz Roy, R. N.: London J. Murray, ed., 1852, London, J. Murray, 519 p.; new ed., 1890, New York, D. Appleton & Co., 551 p., front., 103 illus., map. Describes the springs of Cauquenes and the springs at Puente del Incas in Argentina. 1004. Domeyko, Ignace, 1846, M6moire sur la constitution g£o- logique du Chili: Annales mines, ser 4, v. 9, p. 365-540, 4 pis. Describes the springs in the valley of Estero de los Bafios. 1005. Estaban, Ascension Lopez, 1951 [The Bafios Morales and Panimdvida watersheds]: Chile Univ. Tesis Quim., v. 3, p. 65-75; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 4151. 1006. Muller Hess, Roberto, 1942, Informe tecnico geoldgico sobre las figuas minerales de Panimfivida: Cong. Pan-americano Ingenieria Minas y Geologia, lst3 Chile 1942, Anales, v. 3, Geologia, pt. 2, p. 1278-1309, 17 figs.; 1946, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America; v. 10,1943-1944, p. 90. 1007. Reichert, F., 1906, Aus dem Hochgebirge der Wiiste von Atacama: Deutsche Ver. Osterreich, Alpenverein, Zeitschr., p. 152-161. Mentions hot springs in the Atacama desert. 1008. Rodriguez, S. Lucia, 1951 [Study and analysis of waters of the hot springs of Cauquenes]: Chile Univ. Tesis Quim., v. 3, p. 311-322; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 4151. 1009. Smith, John Lawrence, 1856, Report on the minerals and mineral waters of Chile, in Gilliss, James Melville, The U.S. Naval astronomical expedition to the southern hemisphere during the years 1849-1852: v. 2, 300 p.; U.S. 33d Cong., 1st sess., H. Doc. 121, app. D, p. 83-107. See also references 43 and 891. COLOMBIA AND VENEZUELA 1010. Anonymous, 1956, Natural steam found in Venezuela: Chem. Eng. News, v. 34, no. 52, p. 6311 (Dec. 24). Describes steam vents 10 miles inland from Carupano. 1011. 1958, Nature may yield power: Chem. Eng. News, v. 36, no. 13, p. 104 (Mar. 31). States that steam vents near Carupano may be utilized to generate electricity. Cites power development from natural steam at Lardarello, Italy. 1012. Boussingault, Jean Baptiste Joseph Dieudonne, 1883, Con- siderations sur les eaux minerales des Cordilleres: Annales chimie et physique, ser. 2, v. 52, p. 181-190; Edinburgh New Philos. Jour., v. 15, p. 151-153; 1834, Annalen Physik (Poggendorff), v. 32, p. 262-269. Contains information on Tricheras, Mariana, and Onoto springs in Venezuela; on San Juan, Quindiu, Agua Tibia, Coconuco, and Pandiaeo springs in Colombia ; and Belermos and Los Bafios springs in Ecuador. 1013. 1874, Sur les eaux acides qui prennent naissance dans les volcans des Cordilleres: Acad, sci [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 78, p. 453-461, 526-533, 593-599; Annales chimie et physique, ser. 5, v. 2, p. 76-130. Contains information on springs and fumaroles in several localities. Includes mention of Tysco spring in Ecuador. 1014. Comision de Geografia Economica de Caldas, 1937, Geo- grafia economica de Colombia; IV, Caldas: Colombia, Contraloria Gen. de la Republica, 607 p., pis., figs.; 1939, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 6,1938, p. 53. Includes information on thermal springs in Caldas.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 291 1015. Fetzer, Wallace Garden, 1942, Comisidn geoldgica de Cal- das: Colombia, Ministerio Minas y Petroleos, Compilation Estudios Geol. Ofleiales en Colombia, v. 5, p. 503-544, 1 pi., 5 figs. Describes the Termales del Ruiz. 1016. 1945, Fuentes minerales y yacimientos de carbonato de calcio de Santa Rosa de Cabal (Rio San Ramon) : Colombia, Servicio Geol. Nac., Compilation Estudios Geol. Ofleiales en Colombia, v. 6, p. 433-454, 2 pis. Describes the Termales, Acimaipa, and Caleras groups of springs. Mentions El Disparate, a fumarole east of the Termales group. 1017. Holton, Isaac Farwell, 1857, New Granada ; twenty months in the Andes: New York, Harper & Bros.; London, Sampson, Low, Son & Co., 605 p., 33 illus., map. Mentions several thermal-spring localities. 1018. Humboldt, Friedrich Wilhelm Heinrich Alexander (Baron von), 1807, Voyage aux regions Oquinoxiales, du Nouveau Continent, fait en 1799-1804: Paris, 30 v. and atlas ; 1822-29, translated into English by Helen Maria Williams with title, Personal narrative of travels to the equinoctial regions of the New Continent during the years 1799-1804, with maps, plans, etc.: London, Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme, & Brown, 7 v.; 1907, translated into English and edited by Tomasina Ross: London, G. Bell & Sons, 3 v. Mentions several thermal springs in Venezuela, also vapor vents and fumaroles on peak of Teneriffe in the Canary Islands. 1019. Lopez, Victor M.; Sarria, Jose V.; and Davey, John C, 1943, Fuentes termales de Santa Ana de los Banos (Guanare-Estado Portuguesa) : Venezuela, Ministerio Fomento, Rev. Fomento, v. 5-6, no. 53, p. 41-46, maps. 1020. Myers, Henry Morris, and Meyers, Philip Van Ness, 1871, Life and nature under the tropics; or sketches of travels along the Andes, and on the Orinoco, Rio Negro, and Amazons: New York, D. Appleton & Co., 330 p., front., 3 illus., map. Includes a description of the Trinchera springs. 1021. Otero, A. German; Prado, J. L., and Gimenes, C. Noel, 1939, Fuentes termo-minerales de Venezuela; Fuentes en Agua Caliente, Estado Tachira: Venezuela, Ministerio Fomento, Rev. Fomento, v. 2, no. 14, p. 117-128, 3 pis., 4 tables, map. 1022. Palacios, G. Delgado, 1920, Fuente termomineral de San Juan de los Morros; anotaciones medicas—anotaciones quimicas—anotaciones geologicas: Venezuela, Direccion Sanidad Nac., Oficina central, Caracas, 37 p., 14 illus., map. 1023. Royo y Gomez, Jose, 1942, La cuenca hidrografica del Jua- nambu, Departamento de Narino: Colombia, Ministerio Minas y Petroleos, Compilation Estudios Geol. Ofleiales Colombia, v. 5, p. 213-252,4 pis., 11 figs. Mentions thermal springs near Pasto, in Pandiaco, and at El TablOn. 1024. Spence, James Mudie, 1878, The land of Bolivar; or War, peace, and adventure in the Republic of Venezuela: 2d ed., London, S. Low, Marston, Searle, & Rivington, 2 v.; v. 1, 323 p., 37 illus., 4 maps; v. 2, 345 p., 25 illus., 3 maps. Mentions several springs, including those of Carupano, La Cuiva, Tachira, and the submarine springs in the Gulf of Cariaco. 1025. Taylor, Edward Burnett, 1861, Anahuc; or, Mexico and the Mexicans, ancient and modern: London, Longman, Green, Longman & Roberts. Includes mention of hot springs in New Granada (Panama, Ecuador, Colombia, and Venezuela). 1026. Wall, George Parke, 1860, On the geology of a part of Venezuela and of Trinidad: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 16, p. 460-470,1 pi. Contains information on the thermal springs of Trincheras and Chaguaramal and the vapor vents at Azufral Grande. 1027. Waring, Gerald Ashley, 1938, Thermal springs of San Juan de los Morros, Venezuela: Unpublished field notes. See also references 815 and 1022. ECUADOR 1028. Andrade-Marin, Luciano, 1946, Una monografia de la Pro- vincia de Pichincha : Quito. Contains mention of thermal springs. 1029. Dressel, Luis H., 1876, Estudio sobre algunas aguas minerales de Ecuador: Quito. Contains chemical analyses of water from 11 thermal springs. 1030. Hidalgo, Cesar Leon, 1932, Estudio sobre la radioactividad de las aguas de la fuente termal de Los Elenes: Riobambo. 1031. Larenas, Arquidamo, 1947-48, Analisis de nuestras aguas minerales: Casa Cultura Ecuatoriana Inf. Cient. Bol., v. 1, no. 3, p. 27-29; v. 1, no. 4, p. 38-39; v. 2, no. 5, p. 20-22; and v. 2, nos. 6-7, p. 17-19. Includes data on several thermal springs. 1032. Matovelle, Julio, 1921, Cuenca de Tomebamba, breve resena histOrica de la provincia de este nombre en el antiguo reino de Quito: Cuenca. Contains description of Las Aguas de Guapan in the Province of Canar. 1033. Mestanza, Ernesto Alban, 1937, La radioactividad de las aguas minerales en el Ecuador: Quito, Univ. Central Anales 300, p. 519-552. 1034. 1943, Estudio de las aguas termales de San Vicente: Quito, Univ. Central Asoc. Escuela Quimica y Farmacia Rev., V. 1, no. 2, p. 5-12; 1944, Chem. Abs., v. 38, col. 2773. 1035. Meyer, Hans, 1938, En los altos Andes del Ecuador; Chim- borazo, Cotopaxi, etc.; translated into Spanish from the German ed., 1907, by Jonas Guerrero: Quito, Univ. Central, 618 p., 93 figs., 3 maps. Describes thermal springs near Hacienda Cunuc-Yacu, solfataras in the crater of Antisana volcano, and water vapor rising from Sangay, Cotopaxi, Guagua-Pichincha, and Tungurahua volcanoes. 1036. Munoz, Jose E., 1949, Aguas minerales del Ecuador y nociones de hidrologia general: Quito, Ministerio Education Publica, Talleres Graficos Nac., 299 p., 37 illus. Contains data on 34 thermal springs. 1037. 1956, El agua sulfurosa de Guangopolo: Inf. Cient. Nac. Bol. [Quito], v. 8, no. 76, p. 715-722. 1038. Oppenheim, Victor, 1950, The volcano PuracO: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 248, no. 3, p. 171-179,1 pi., 2 figs. Mentions several hot springs on the volcano slopes and two fumaroles near the rim of the crater.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 292 1039. Sheppard, George, 1937, The geology of south-western Ecuador: London, Thomas Murby & Co., 275 p., 195 illus. Mentions the thermal springs of San Vicente, also a nearby saline spring and Volcancito (a cone of hardened mud from which water, gas, and oil escape). 1040. Troya, Albornoz C. A., 1947, El balneario de San Pedro del Tingo: Quito, Gaceta Municipal, no. 113. 1041. Vazquez de Espinosa, Antonio, 1929 [Compendium and description of the West Indies] ; 1942, translated into English, by Charles Upson Clark: Smithsonian Inst. Misc. Colin., v. 102, 862 p. Mentions hot springs near Loja, near Quito, and about 120 miles north of Quito (all in Ecuador) ; near Son-sonate and near San Salvador (both in El Salvador) ; in La Matanza Valley (in Colombia) ; near Cajamarca and near Huancavelica (both in Peru) ; in the Cochabamba Valley (in Bolivia) ; and about 40 miles from Valdivia (in Chile). 1042. Wandemberg, E., 1880, Agua mineral de Tesalia: Quito, Anales Bniv. Central. 1043. Whymper, Edward, 1892, Travels amongst the great Andes of the Equator: New York, C. Scribner’s Sons, 456 p., 138 illus., 4 maps. Describes spring near Machachi and steam explosions of Cotopaxi volcano, both in Ecuador. 1044. Wiggins, Ira Loren, 1950a, Beyond Cayambe: Pacific Dis- covery, v. 3, no. 1, p. 10-14, 3 views. Mentions hot springs near the northeast outlet of Laguna San Marcos. 1045. 1950b, Thermal springs near Cayambe volcano, Ecuador : Personal commun. to G. A. Waring. 1046. Wolf, Theodor (Teodoro), 1892, Geografia y geologia del Ecuador: Leipzig, Germany, F. A. Brockhaus, 671 p., 12 pis., 47 figs., map. Describes nine thermal-spring localities. See also references 1012 and 1013. PERU 1047. Ahlfeld, Friedrich, 1926, Die Antimonitlagerstatte von Acora, Siidperu: Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 34, p. 190-192, 1 fig. Mentions thermal springs near Acora. 1048. Alayaza y Paz-Soldan, Francisco, 1903, Informe sobre la Provincia Litoral de Moquegua y el Departmento de Tacna : Cuerpo Ingenieros Minas Peru Bol. States that there are five geysers in Quebrada de Calientes near Yucumani volcano, also spouting springs near Putina. 1049. Broggi, J. A., 1925, Los travertinos de los alrededores de Oroya y el cauce subterraneo del Rio Yauli en el Pueblo de Saco: Soc. Geol. Peru Bol. 1, p. 61-65, 5 pis. 1050. Carmand, A. C. de, 1903, Perou, D£partement d’Ancachs. Productions animales et v6g6tales; richesses minerales. Etude fait d’aprAs l’oeuvre de Antonio Raimondi, par ordre et sous les auspices du Ministere des Affaires Etrang&res: 383 p., 8 illus., map. Contains information on 12 thermal-spring localities in the Ancash Department. 1051. Chase, Philip W., 1933, The geology along the Perene and Tambo Rivers of eastern Peru: Jour. Geology, v. 41, no. 5, p. 513-526, 3 figs. States that hot springs issue from the Yurinaqui sandstone in several places. 1052. Delgado A., Dora Luz, 1954 [Chemical and bacteriological analysis of the thermal waters of Uyurmiri]: Univ. Nac. Mayor San Marcos [Lima] Facultad Farmaeea y Bioquimica Anales v. 5, p. 492-498; 1957, Chem. Abs., V. 51, col. 3064. 1053. Escomel, Edmundo, 1929, Obras cientlficas: Lima, Imp. Torres Agirre, 2 v; v. 1 Contains data on Jesus springs near Arequipa. 1054. 1935, Algunos balnearios medicinales del Peru: Lima, 207 p., 23 illus., map. Describes the Termas de Yura and the Banos de Jesus. 1055. [1936?], Principales fuentes medicinales del Peru: Lima, Corp. Nac. Turismo, 14 p., map. Briefly describes Los Banos del Inca, Chancos spring, Churin springs, Yura springs, and Jesus springs. 1056. Freyre, Alejandro, 1950, Geologia y radioactividad en las termas minero-medicinales des Arequipa; Soc. Quim. Peril Bol., v. 16, no. 2, p. 105-122; Cong. Quin. Peruano, 3d, Lima 1950, Actas y Trabajos, v. 2, p. 737-754. Describes the Yura-Socosani group of springs and the springs of Jesus. 1057. Hill, S. S., 1860, Travels in Peru and Mexico: London, Longman, Green, Longman, & Roberts, 2 v.; v. 1, 330 p.; v. 2,312 p. Describes the Baths of Yura. 1058. Hutchinson, Thomas Joseph, 1873, Two years in Peru, with exploration of its antiquities: London S. Low, Marston, Low & Searle, 2 v.; v. 1, 343 p., 67 illus.; v. 2, 334 p., 45 illus. Describes visits to Yura and Jesiis springs. 1059. Maldonado, Angel, 1918, Trabajos cientificos: Lima. Contains information on Jesiis springs near Arequipa. 1060. Maldonado, Angel, and Guevara, R. Juan de Dios (de Dios Guevara, Juan R.), 1950, Determinacion del boro en aguas y suelos del Peril: Soc. Quim. Peru Bol., v. 16, no. 1, p. 5-31. Includes information on the boron content of thermal springs. 1061. Marquez, Victor Carcamo, 1937, An&lisis quimico de treinta aguas minerales del Peru : Soc. Quim. Pen! Bol., v. 3, no. 1, p. 15-45. Contains chemical analyses of water from thermal springs in nine localities. 1062. Pozzi-Escot, 1936, El acido yodico, nuevo componente qui- mico en las aguas de la terma de Jesiis, en Arequipa: Rev. Cienc. [Peru], v. 40, June. 1063. Prazak, Ladisloa J., 1949, Crenologia Peruana: Lima Corp. Nac. Turismo. 1064. 1950, PresentaciOn de los analisis quimicos de las aguas minero-medicinales: Soc. Quim. Peril Bol., v. 16, no. 2, p. 123-142. Includes a chemical analysis of the water from El Tigre spring at Yura. 1065. Raimondi, D. Antonio, 1882, Aguas minerales del Peru: Escuela de Construcciones Civiles y de Minas del Peru Anales, v. 2; 210 p. 1066. 1874-1902, El Peru : Lima, Geographic Soc. Lima, 4 v.; v. 1, Preliminary part, 444 p.; repr., 1940, under auspices of Rotary Club of Lima, commemorating 50th anniversary of author’s death, 341 p.; v. 2 and 3, History of the geography of Peru, 475 p., and 614 p.; v. 4, Mineral-ogic and geologic studies, 515 p. Contain data on many thermal springs.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 293 1067. Ramos, Ignacio A., 1943, Termalismo en el Peru: Escuela Nac. Ingenieros Bol., ser. 3, v. 16, July-Sept., p. 3-97, 6 figs. Mentions several thermal springs. Contains chemical analyses of water from Banos del Inca and Aguas de Chancos. 1068. Rich, John Lyon, 1945, Oil possibilities of South America in the light of regional geology: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geologists Bull., v. 29, no. 5, p. 495-563, 23 figs. 1069. Saldana, Luis Alva, 1941, Aniilisis quimico de algunas aguas minerales de Ancash: Soc. Quim. Peru Bol., v. 7, no. 2, p. 76-84. Contains chemical analyses of the water from five thermal springs. 1070. Squier, Ephraim George, 1877, Peru: Incidents of travel and exploration in the land of the Incas: London, Macmillan & Co., 599 p., 250 Illus., map. Mentions a visit to the hot springs of Aguas Calientes. 1071. Steinmann, Gustav, 1930, Geologie del Peru: Heidelberg, Germany, Carl Winters, 448 p., 9 pis., 271 figs., map. Mentions several thermal-spring localities. 1072. Tschudi, Johann Jacob von, 1854, Travels in Peru, on the coast, In the sierra, across the cordilleras and the Andes into the primeval forests: New York, A. S. Barnes & Co., 354 p., 2 illus.; translated from the German, by Tomasina Ross; new edition complete in one volume; 1st ed., 1846, Peru, Reiskizzen aus den jahren 1838-1842, 2 v., St. Gallen; Switzerland, Scheitlin u. Zollikofer; English ed., 1847, London, D. Bogue; New York, Wiley & Putnam, 506 p. Contains a description of a group of springs, one called the Hervidero, about 1.5 miles from Yauli. 1073. Valdez de la Torre, Carlos, 1911, Aguas termominerales de Acaya, en Jauja : Lima. ATLANTIC REGION AZORES 1074. Archer, W, 1875, Notes on some collections made from Furnas Lake, Azores, containing algae and a few other organisms: Linnean Soc. of London Jour., Botany, v. 14, p. 328-340. 1075. Borges, F. Henriques de, 1867, A trip to the Azores: Bos- ton, Mass. Includes description of the hot springs on Sao Miguel Island. 1076. Bullar, Joseph, and Bullar, Henry, 1841, A winter in the Azores, and a summer at the baths of the Furnas: London, J. Van Voorst, 2 v; v. 1, 375 p., front, 18 illus.; v. 2, 391 p., front., 9 illus. 1077. Campbell, George Granville, 1876, Log letters from “The Challenger”: London, Macmillan & Co., 448 p., map; 1881, ed., with additional notes, 512 p. Describes the hot springs on Sao Miguel Island in the Azores, at Kilauea crater in Hawaii, and at the bridge of the Incas in Argentina. Also mentions mineral springs on Kerguelen Island in the Indian Ocean. 1078. Fouque, Ferdinand Andre, 1873a, Resultats gcneraux de l’analyse des sources geys5riennes de l’lle de San Miguel (Azores) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 76, p. 1361-1364. 1079. 1873b, Les eaux thermales de l’lle de San Miguel (Agores) : Paris, 150 p. 1080. Fouque, Ferdinand Andre, 1873c, Volage geologique aux Agores: Revue Deux Mondes, v. 103,1, L’lle de Terceira, p. 40-65; II, Graciosa, Pico, et Fayal, p. 615-644. 1081. Hartung, Georg, 1860, Die Azoren in ihrer ausseren Ersheinung und nach ihrer geognostischen Natur ges-childert von G. Hartung: Leipzig, Germany. 1082. Hunt, Carew, 1845, A description of the Island of St. Michael (Azores) : Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 15, p. 268-296, map. 1083. Masson, Francis, 1778, An account of the Island of St. Miguel: Royal Soc. London Philos. Trans., v. 68, pt. 2, p. 601-610; abridged ed., 1809, v. 14, 1776-80, p. 392-394. 1084. Morais, J. Custodio de, 1953 [Boiling springs of Furnas, Azores] : Coimbra Univ. Museo e lab. Min. Geol. e centro estud. geol. Mem. e noticia, no. 35, p. 48-75 [Portuguese, English summary] ; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 6336. 1085. Moseley, Henry Nottidge, 1875, Notes on fresh-water algae obtained at the boiling springs at Furnas, St. Michaels, Azores, and their neighbourhood: Linnean Soc. of London Jour., Botany, v. 14, p. 321-325. 1086. 1879, Notes by a naturalist on the “Challenger,” being an account of various observations made during the voyage of H.M.S. “Challenger” round the world in the years 1872-1876: London, Macmillan & Co., 620 p.; 2 pis. Describes the hot springs on Sao Miguel Island in the Azores, on Great Banda Island and Temate Island in the South Seas, and on Camiguin Island of the Philippines. Also mentions fumaroles on Bird Island in the South Seas and hot springs on Kerguelen Island in the Indian Ocean. 1087. Thomson, Charles Wyville, 1878, The voyage of the “Chal- lenger”—The Atlantic; a preliminary account of the general results of the exploring voyage of H.M.S. “Challenger” during the year 1873 and the early part of the year 1876: New York, Harper & Bros., 2 v; v. 1, 391 p., pis. 1-14, 106 figs.; v. 2, 340 p., pis. 15-42, 62 figs. Describes hot springs on Sao Miguel Island, Azores. 1088. Walker, Walter Frederick, 1886, The Azores, or Western Islands; a political, commercial, and geographical account : London, Trubner, 335 p., 11 illus., map. 1089. Webster, John White, 1821a, Siliceous sinter of the Azores: Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, v. 3, p. 391-392. One variety of sinter from St. Michael Island differs from that found elsewhere in having an unusually high content of water, 16.35 percent; silica content, 83.65 percent. Suggests for it the name michaelite. 1090. 1821b, A description of the Island of St. Michael, comprising an account of its geological structure; with remarks on the other Azores or Western Islands: Boston, Mass., R., P., & C. Williams, p. 9-244, front., pis., maps; 1822, rev., Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, v. 4, no. 2, p. 251-266. 1091. 1822, Account of the hot-springs of Furnas, in the Island of St. Michael: Edinburgh Philos. Jour., v. 6, no. 12, p. 306-313. See also references 74,2271, 2272, and 2290. GREENLAND 1092. Gintl, Wilhelm, 1873, Resultate der Analyse des Wassers von Unartok: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 68, no. 1, p. 107-109, map.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 294 1093. Graah, 1830, Extrait du journal du Capitaine Graah: Soc. gf:og. France Bull., v. 14, p. 181-188. Mentions seven springs on Unartok Island. 1094. Jessen, A., 1896, Geologiske Iagttagelser: Medd. om Groenland, v. 16, p. 123-169, 1 pi., map. Describes springs on Unartok Island. 1095. Koch, Lauge, 1929, The geology of East Greenland: Medd. om Groenland, v. 73, pt. 2, 320 p., 6 pis., 53 figs. [English.] Describes springs at several localities on eastern side of Greenland. 1096. Pedersen, Alwin, 1926, De Varme kilder ved Scoresby- sund: Medd. om Groenland, v. 68, p. 251-257. 1097. Rosenkrantz, Alfred, 1942, The Mesozoic sediments of the Kap Hope area, Southern Liverpool Land, the Lower Jurassic rocks of east Greenland: Pt. 2 of Medd. om Groenland, v. 110, no. 2, 56 p., 4 pis., 30 figs. ICELAND 1098. Allan, Robert, 1856, On the condition of the Haukedalr geysers of Iceland, July 1855: British Assoc. Adv. Sci. Rept., 1855, Mathematics and Physics Sec., p. 75-78. 1099. Andersen, Svend, 1934, Et lille Bidrag til Islands thermo- phile Flora: Bot. Tidsskr., v. 42, p. 409-415. 1100. Andreae, Achilles, 1893, tiber die ktinstliche Nachahmung des Geysirphanomens : Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geolo-gie u. Palaontologie, v. 2, p. 1-18; condensed as, tiber die Nachahmung verschiedener Geysirtypen und fiber Gasgeysire: Naturh.-med. Ver., Heidelberg, new ser., v. 5, no. 1, p. 83-88. 1101. Anonymous (editorial; News and views), 1935, Re-awak- ening of Geysir at Hawkdale, Iceland: Nature [London], v. 136, p. 366. 1102. Bachmann, Fritz, 1956, Heisse Quellen als Gestaltungs- faktoren der islandischen Kulturlandschaft [Hot springs as a factor of the Icelandic cultural landscape] : Geog. Helvetica v. 11, no. 1, p. 59-68, illus. [German, English summary] ; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21, 1956, p. 29. 1103. Backstrom, H, 1891, Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Islan- dischen Liparite: Geol. Foren. Stockholm Forh., v. 13, p. 637-682. 1104. Bardarson, G. G., 1926, Die jtingsten Vulkanischen Aus- bruchstellen in der Askja : Zeitschr. Vulcanologie, v. 10, p. 120-126. 1105. 1930, Vulkan-Ausbrfiche in der Gegend der Hekla im Jahre 1913: Visindafftlag tslendinga, Rit 6. 1106. Baring-Gould, Sabine, 1863, Iceland; its scenes and sagas : London, Smith, Elder, & Co., 447 p., 16 pis., 19 figs., map. Describes several areas of hydrothermal activity. 1107. Barrow, John, Jr., 1835, A visit to Iceland by way of Tronyem, in the “Flower of Yarrow” yacht, in the summer of 1834: London, J. Murray, 320 p., illus. Describes hot springs and geysers in southwestern Iceland. 1108. Barth, Thomas Fredrik Weiby, 1936a, St6ri Geysir pa Island vekket til nytt liv: Naturen Arg., v. 60, no. 1, p. 1-6. 1109. 1936b, Thermal activity in Iceland: Norsk geol. Tidsskr,. v. 16, no. 2—4, p. 288-291. 1110. 1939, Yarme kilder og vulkanisme p& Island: Naturen Arg., v. 63, no. 1, p. 11-27. 1111. Barth, Thomas Fredrik Weiby, 1940, Geysir in Iceland: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 238, no. 6, p. 381-407, 7 figs., 3 tables. 1112. 1941, Geysir og Geysirtheorier: Naturen Arg., v. 65, nos. 7-8, p. 193-209; abs., Norske Vidensk.-Akad. Oslo Arbok 1940, p. 21-23; 1951, Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 15, 1950, p. 18. 1113. 1947, Geysers of Iceland: Am. Geophys. Union Trans., v. 28, no. 6, p. 882-887, 3 figs., 1 table. 1114. 1949, Den geokjemiske utvikling av de varme kilder pft Island [abs.] : Norske Vidensk.-Akad. Oslo Arbok 1948, p. 3-4; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20, 1955, p. 31. 1115. 1950, Volcanic geology, hot springs, and geysers of Iceland : Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 587, 174 p., 31 pis., 68 figs., 55 tables. A comprehensive report on hydrothermal activity in Iceland. Describes individual hot springs and geysers and shows their locations on maps. Also includes many photographs and extensive bibliographies on volcanism and thermal springs in Iceland. 1116. 1953 [Volcanology and geochemistry of the geysers and hot springs of Iceland]: Schweizerische naturf. Gesell. Verh., 132 Jahresvers.; Bern 1952, p. 51-60; 1954, Chem Abs., v. 48, col. 4392. 1117. Bisiker, William, 1902, Across Iceland: London, Edward Arnold, 236 p., illus., maps. 1118. Black, Joseph, 1793, Analyse des eaux de quelques sources chaudes d’lslande: Annales chimie, ser. 1, v. 16, p. 40-62; v. 17, p. 113-140. 1119. 1794, An analysis of the waters of some hot springs in Iceland: Royal Soc. Edinburgh Trans., v. 3, pt. 2, p. 95-126. 1120. Bodvarsson, Gunnar, 1948, On thermal activity in Iceland: Iceland, Geothermal Dept., State Electricity Authority, 77 p., 3 pis., 3 graphs [mimeo.]. 1121. 1950, Geofysiske metoder ved varmtvandtsprospektering i Island: Verkfraedingafftlag Islands, Timarit ftrg. 35, no. 5, p. 49-59, illus.; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21,1956, p. 60. 1122. 1951, Skyrsla um rannsftknir ft jardhita i Hengli; hveragerdi og nftgrenni, firin 1947-1949, fyrri hluti. [Report on the Hengill thermal area; investigations carried out in the years 1947-49], Section I: Verkfraed-ingafftlag Islands, Timarit ftrg. 36, no. 1-2, p. 1—48, illus. [English summary] ; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21, 1956, p. 61. See ref. 1153 for sec. 2 of this article. 1123. 1949, Drilling for heat in Iceland : Oil and Gas Jour., v. 48, p. 191,192,196,199, 3 figs. 1124. Boehmer, George Hans, 1886, Volcanic eruptions and earthquakes in Iceland within historic times: Smithsonian Inst. Ann. Rept. to July 1885, pt. 1, p. 495-541. 1125. Boving, Adam Giede, 1925, A summer trip in Iceland south of Vatna-Jokul: Entomol. Soc. Washington, v. 27, no. 2, p. 17-35. Describes organisms living in a hot-water creek. 1126. Browne, John Ross, 1863, A Californian1 in Iceland: Har- pers New Monthly Mag., v. 26, nos. 152-154? p. 145-162, 289-311, 448-467, 54 illus. Includes descriptions of eruptions of Strokk and Stori Geysir in Haukadalur. 1127. 1867, The land of Thor: New York, Harper & Bros., 542 p., 108 illus.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES Includes descriptions of eruptions of Strokk and Stdri Geysir in Haukadalur. 1128. Bruer, Carl, 1C36, Der wiedererwachte Geysir auf Island: Umsehau, v. 40, p. 153. 1129. Bunsen, Robert Wilhelm von, 1874a, Ueber den inneren Zusammenhang der pseudovulkanischen Erscheinungen Islands: Annalen Chemie u. Pharmacie (Liebig), v. 62, no. 1, p. 1-59. 1130. 1847b, Physikalische Beobachtungen ueber die haupt-sachlichsten Geisir Islands: Annalen Physik u. Chemie (Poggendorfl), v. 72, p. 159-170. 1131. 1848, On the colour of water: Edinburgh New Philos. Jour., v. 47, p. 95-98, 1849, Works of the Cavendish Society, v. 1,1848. 1132. 1853, Recherehes sur les rapports intrinsfeques des ph^nomenes pseudovolcaniques de I’Islande: Annales chimie et physique, ser. 3, v. 38, p. 385-A37. 1133. Burton, Richard Francis, 1875, Ultima Thule; or a sum- mer in Iceland: London and Edinburgh, W. P. Nimmo., 2 v.; v. 1, 380 p., front., 9 illus.; v. 2, 408 p., front., 20 illus. Briefly describes the thermal springs of Iceland, also the sulfur deposits and mines near the hot springs in the vicinity of Krisuvik. 1134. Campbell, John F., 1865, Frost and Are. Natural engines, tool-marks, and chips, with sketches taken at home and abroad by a traveller: Edinburgh, Edmonston & Douglas, 2 v.; v. 1, 506 p., 64 figs.; v. 2, 519 p., 53 figs. Describes in detail the tubes of the hot springs and geysers of Iceland. 1135. Casares, Jose, 1911 [Comparison of the waters of the geysers of Iceland] : Soc. espanola fisica y qulmica Anales, v. 9, p. 197-198 [Spanish] ; Chem. Abs., v. 5, p. 3554. 1136. fieleda, Jifi, and Kroha, Rudolf, 1940, O horkych prame- nech zapadng od Torfajokull na Island®: <3esk& Akad., Trida 2, Rozpravy, v. 49, no. 10, 22 p., illus.; The hot springs west of Torfajokull in Iceland [English summary] : Ceskd Akad., Bull. Internat., v. 40, p. 70-85, illus; 1951, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 15, 1950, p. 46. 1137. Chambers, Robert, 1856, Tracings of Iceland and the Faroe Islands: London and Edinburgh, W. & R. Chambers, 85 p., front., maps. Describes Stdri Geysir, Strokk, and the pools that formerly constituted Roaring Geyser in Haukadalur, also the two groups of geysers on the shore of Laugarvatn. 1138. Coles, John, 1882, Summer travelling in Iceland; being the narrative of two journeys across the island by unfrequented routes, with a chapter on Askja by E. Del-mar Morgan : London, J. Murray, 269 p., front., 17 illus., map. Describes Stori Geysir and Strokk, also the other geysers and hot springs in Haukadalur. Mentions springs and steam vents at Krafla Mountain. 1139. Coninck, A. P. de, 1940, Les nematodes libres des sources chaudes: Wetenschappelijke resultaten der studiereis van Prof. Dr. P. van Oye op Ijsland VIII: Biol. Jaarb. Konink. Natuurw. “Dodonaea” Gent., pt. 7. p. 138-160. 1140. Damour, Augustin Alexis, 1846, Analyses de quelques eaux thermales silicif®res de l’lslande: Annales mines, 295 v. 9, p. 333-338. Soc, g®ol. France Bull., ser. 2, v. 4, p. 542-550, 1847; 1141. Damour, Augustin Alexis, 1847, Un mdmoire sur la com- position de l’eau de plusieurs sources silicifferes de l’lslande: Annales chimie et physique, ser. 3, v. 19, p. 470-484; Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 24, p. 182-184. 1142. 1848, Sur l’incrustations siliceuse des geysers et sur divers hydrates de silice naturels: Soc. g6ol. France Bull., ser. 2, v. 5, p. 157-163. 1143. De Fonblanque, Caroline Alicia, 1880, Five weeks in Ice- land. London, Richard Bentley & Son, 180 p. Briefly describes Stdri Geysir and Strokk in Haukadalur. 1144. Descloizeaux, Alfred Louis Olivier Legrand, 1847a, Ob- servations physiques et g£ologiques sur les principaux gey sirs d’lslande: Annales chimie et physique, ser. 3, v. 19, p. 444-470; Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 24, p. 456-459; London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philos. Mag., ser. 3, v. 30, p. 391-409. 1145. 1847b, Observation sur les deux principaux geysers de l’lslande: Soc. gdol. France Bull., ser. 2, v. 4, 1846-47, p. 550-559. 1146. Descloizeaux, Alfred Louis Olivier Legrand, and Bunsen, Robert Wilhelm von, 1846, Note sur les temperatures des geysers d’lslande, a differentes profundeurs, ob-servees par MM. Descloizeaux et Bunsen, au mois de juillet 1846 (Communiqu£e par M. Dufrenoy) : Acad, sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 23, p. 934-937. 1147. Dillon, Arthur Edmund Denis Lee-Dillon, 1840, A winter in Iceland and Lapland: London, H. Colburn, 2 v.; v. 1 [Iceland], 304 p., front.; v. 2 [Lapland], 332 p., front. Describes a warm spring at Laugarn near Reykjavik, St6ri Geysir and Strokk in Haukadalur, and the hot springs in Apu Vatn. 1148. Dufferin and Ava, Frederick Temple Hamilton-Temple- Blackwood; Marquis of, 1857, Letters from high latitudes ; being some account of a voyage in the schooner yacht “Foam,” 85 O.M. to Iceland, Jan Mayen, and Spitzbergen, in 1856 : 2d ed., London, J. Murray, 425 p. Contains a description of St6ri Geysir and Strokk. 1149. Einarsson, Trausta (Trausti), 1937a, Ueber eine Beziehung zwischen heissen Quellen und Gangen in der Islandi-schen Basaltformation: Visindafdlag Islendinga (Soc. Sci. Islandica), Greinar 1 [no.] 2, p. 135-144, 3 maps. 1150. 1937b, Ueber die neuen Eruptionen des Geysir in Haukadalur: Visindafelag Islendinga (Soe. Sci. Islandica), Greinar 1 [no.] 2, p. 149-166, 2 figs.; 1943, abs.; Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 9,1941-42, p. 78. 1151. 1940, Antwort auf S. L. Tuxens Kritik: Visindafelag Islendinga (Soc. Sci. Islandica), Greinar 1 [no.] 3, p. 194-200; 1950, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 14, 1949, p. 76. 1152. 1942, Ueber das Wesen der heissen Quellen Islands; mit einer Ubersicht liber die Tektonik des mittleren Nordislands: Visindafelag Islendinga (Soc. Sci. Islandica), Rit 26, 91 p.; 1943, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 9, 1941-42, p. 78. 735-914 O—05—20296 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 1153. Einarsson, Trausta (Trausti), and others, 1951, Sk^rsla um rannsAknir A jardhita i Hengli; hveragerdi og nAgrenni, flrin 1947-1949, sidari hluti: Verkfraedinga-fAlag Islands, Tlmarit Arg. 36, no. 3-4, p. 49-82, illus.; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21,1956, p. 160. See ref. 1122 for sec. 1 of this article. 1154. Einarsson, Vigus, 1940, Iceland, land of frost and Are: Canadian Geog. Jour., v. 21, no. 4, p. 173-191, 36 views, map; 1941, repr., Smithsonian Inst. Ann. Kept., year ended June 30,1941, p. 285-292,12 pis. Briefly describes the hot springs and geysers. Mentions use of thermal waters for heating houses, greenhouses, and swimming pools. 1155. Feddersen, A., 1888, Geysirdalen og dens VandlSb: Geo- grafisk Tidskr., v. 9, p. 2-11. 1156. Forbes, Charles Stuart, 1860, Iceland; its volcanoes, gey- sers, and glaciers: London, John Murray Co., 335 p., front., 20 illus., map. 1157. Fresenius, E., 1932, Gartenbau an den heissen Quellen Islands: islandischen Freunde Mitt., v. 19 p. 43-45. 1158. Gillis, J, 1939, Analyze van zes watermonsters [water samples] uit Ijsland : Wetenschappelijke resultaten der studiereis van Prof. Dr. Paul van Oye op Ijsland III: Biol. Jaarb. Konink. Natuurw. “Dodonaea” Gent., v. 6, p. 155-170. 1159. Grondal, Ben, 1931, Utilization of hot springs for heating in Iceland: Heating-Piping and Air Conditioning [Chicago], v. 3, no. 2, p. 174-178, 10 figs., map. 1160. Grossman, Karl, 1894, Across Iceland: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 3, no. 4, p. 261-281, 9 figs., map. 1161. Gudmundsson, Valtyr, 1904. Island am Beginn des 20. Jahrhunderts; translated into German from the Danish edition, by Richard Palleske: Katowice, Silesia, 233 p., front., 108 illus. Briefly describes the thermal springs and geysers. 1162. Halgrimsson, Jonas, 1838, Geysir und Strokk: H. Kro- ger’s Naturhist. Tidsskr., v. 2, p. 209-222. 1163. Hawkes, L., 1941, Hot springs and geysers of Iceland: Nature [London], v. 147, no. 3739, p. 788-789. 1164. Heintz, W., 1850, Ueber die Temperatur der Geyserquellen in Island, fiber den Siedpunkt des vollkommen luftfreien Wassers und fiber eine Ursache der Dampfkesselexplo-sionen: Fortschr. Physik. Jahrb. 3, p. 91-93, 1847. 1165. Henderson, Ebenezer, 1818, Iceland; or the journal of a residence in that island, during the years 1814 and 1815; containing observations on the natural phenomena, history, literature, and antiquities of the island; and the religion, character, manners, and customs of its inhabitants: Edinburgh, Oliphant, Waugh, & Innes, 2 v.; v. 1, 377 p., 8 engravings, map; v. 2, 412 p., 6 engravings. Contains information on many of the important thermal springs and geysers. 1166. Herrmann, P., 1927, liber heisse Quellen auf Island: Naturforscher, v. 4,1927-28, p. 63-65. 1167. Hooker, William Jackson, 1813, Journal of a tour in Ice- land in the summer of 1809 : 2d ed., London, Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme, & Brown, v. 1, 369 p., front., 3 pis., map. Describes the hot springs near Reykjavik, the springs in Laugardalur, the geysers in Haukadalur, and the Aahver boiling spring. 1168. Humlum, Johs, 1936, Hveradalir in Kerlingarfjoll, Ice- land: Geog. Tidskr. (K. Dansk Geog. Selsk.), v. 39, no. 1, p. 11-34,10figs. [English.] 1169. Humlum, Johs, and Tuxen, S. L., 1935, Die heissen Quel- len auf Hveravellir in Island: Geog. Tidskr. (K. Dansk Geog. Selsk.), v. 38, p. 3-27. 1170. Icelandic Government, 1937, Reglur um medhferd og eftirlit medh Geysi i Haukadal: Logbirtingablad no. 45. 1171. Jameson, Robert, 1820, Account of rocks formed by hot- springs, torrents of hot water, bursting subterranean lakes, air volcanoes, and cold-springs: Edinburgh Philos. Jour., v. 2, p. 307-316. Describes rocks formed from minerals and sediments in water from thermal springs in Iceland. 1172. Johnstrup, F., 1877, Om de i Aaret 1875 forefaldne vul- kanske Udbrud paa Island tilligemed nogle indledende geografiske Bemaerkninger: Geog. Tidskr., v. 1, p. 50-66. 1173. 1886, Om de vulkanske Udbrud og Solfatararne i den nordostlige Del af Island: Dansk Naturh. F6ren, Festskr., p. 149-198. 1174. Kahle, Bernhard, 1900, Ein Sommer auf Island: Berlin, A. Bodenburg, 285 p., 24 illus., map. Contains a description of Stdri Geysir and other hot springs in the same vicinity. 1175. Keilhack, Konrad, 1886, Beitrage zur Geologie der Insel Island: Deutsche geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., v. 38, p. 376-449, 3 pis., 13 figs. Includes descriptions of several solfataras, fuma-roles, and thermal springs in Iceland. 1176. Kjartansson, Gudmundur; Thoroddsen, Sigurdur; and Bodvarsson, Gunnar, 1952, Islands geologi og udnyttelse af vandkraft og jordvarme: VerkfraedingafAlag Islands, Tlmarit Arg. 37, no. 1-2, p. 2-23, illus.; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21. 1956, p. 309; 1958, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1956, v. 29, no. 2, p. 307. Describes the geology, the occurrence and development of water power, and the thermal zones and hot springs of Iceland. 1177. Knebel, Walther von, 1906, Studien in den Thermenge- bieten Islands: Naturw. Rundschau, v. 21, no. 12, p. 145-149. 1178. Kneeland, Samuel, 1876, An American in Iceland; an ac- acount of its scenery, people, and history: Boston, Mass., Lockwood, Brooks & Co., 326 p., 19 illus., map. Contains a description of the geysers and other hot springs in Haukadalur. 1179. Krasske, Georg, 1938, Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Diato- meen-Vegetation von Island und Spitzbergen: Archiv Hydrobiologie, v. 33, p. 503-533. Describes species of diatoms living near some of the hot springs. 1180. Kroha, Rudolf, and Celeda, Jiri, 1939 [On the hot springs west of Torfajokull in Iceland]: Internat. Acad. Tchfeque Bull., v. 40, p. 70-85 [Czech, English summary] ; 1946, abs., Mineralog. Abs., v. 9, p. 306-307. 1181. Krug von Nidda, C., 1834, Geognostische Darstellung der Insel Island: Karsten’s Archiv Min., Geogn., Berg., u. Htittenm., v. 7, no. 2, p. 421-525. mary] 1946, abs., Mineralog. Abs., v. 9, p. 306-307. 1182. 1836, Ueber die Mineralquellen auf Island: Karsten’s Archiv Min., Geogn., Berg., u. Hfittenm., v. 9, no. 2, p. 247-284; 1837, English translation, London and Edin-BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 297 burgh Philos. Mag. and Jour. Sci., new ser., v. 22, p. 90-110, 220-226. 1183. Lang, Heinrich Otto, 1880, Ueber die Bedingungen der Geysir: Nachr. Ko. Gesell. Wiss., u. Georg-Auguste-Univ. Gottingen, no. 6, p. 225-287. 4 figs. 1184. Liebmann, F. M., 1841, De islandske varme Kilders Vege- tation : Skandin. Naturforskeres Forh., 2. M. p. 336-340. 1185. Lindroth, Hjalmar, 1937, Iceland, a land of contrasts; translated from the Swedish, by Adolph B. Benson: Princeton, N.J., Princeton Univ. Press, 3, 234 p., 7 pis., map. Mentions the use of water from hot springs for cooking, bathing, laundering, and the heating of greenhouses. 1186. Lindsay, W. Lauder, 1861, On the eruption, in May 1860, of the Kotlugja Volcano, Iceland: Edinburgh New Philos. Jour., new ser. 4, v. 13, no. 1, p. 6-55, 1 pi. 1187. 1867, On the protophyta of Iceland: Microsc. Soc. London Quart. Jour., new ser, v. 7, p. 197-203. 1188. Lock, Charles George Warnford, 1879, The home of the Eddas: London, S. Lowe, Marston, Searle, & Rivington, 348 p., map. Contains descriptions of several important thermal springs and geysers in Iceland. 1189. Lock, William George, 1882, Askja, Iceland’s largest vol- cano, with a description of the great lava desert in the interior, and a chapter on the genesis of the island: Charlton, Kent [England], v. 4, no. 1, 106 p., front. Includes description of thermal springs near Askja volcano. 1190. Lottin, V., 1836, Expedition scientifique d’lslande—Extrait de deux lettres de M. Robert k M. Cordier: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 3, p. 425. Contains data on the temperature of the water in the tube of Stori Geysir, also of Strokk. 1191. 1838, Voyage en Island et au Groenland ex£cutee pendant les annees 1835 et 1836 (Gaimard expedition) : Paris, Comm. Sci. Nord. Contains a few notes on the hot springs and geysers. 1192. Mackenzie, George Steuart, 1812, Travels in the island of Iceland during the summer of the year 1810: 2d ed., Edinburgh, A. Constable & Co., 491 p., 15 pis., 5 figs., map. Mentions the hot springs in several localities. 1193. Mallet, Robert, 1877, On the conversion of the geyser- throats in Iceland into volcanic vents: London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philos. Mag. and Jour. Sci., ser 5, v. 3, p. 108-109. 1194. Manni, Rudolf von, 1935, Der grosse Geysir auf Island ist neu erwacht: Umschau, v. 39, p. 1040. 1195. Menge, John, 1820, Notice of a mineralogical journey through south, north, and east Iceland: Edinburgh Philos. Jour., v. 2, no. 3, p. 156-167. 1196. Metcalfe, Frederick, 1861, The Oxonian in Iceland; or notes of travel in that island in the summer of 1860, with glances at Icelandic folk-lore and sagas: London, Longman, Green, Longman & Roberts, 424 p., front., 3 pis. 1197. Miles, Pliny, 1854, Nordurfari, or rambles in Iceland: New York, C. B. Norton, 334 p. 1198. M’Nab, W. R., 1868, Notice of some diatomaceae from Iceland: Bot. Soc. Edinburgh Trans., v. 9, p. 95. 1199. Morgan, E. Delmar, 1882, Excursion to Askja, August 1881: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Proc., v. 4, no. 3, p. 140-148. Very similar to ref. 1138. 1200. Miiller, Jon, 1850, Ueber Bunsen’s Geysirtheorie: Annalen Physik u. Chemie (Poggendorff), v. 79, p. 350-353. 1201. Murray, John, 1822, On the boiling springs of Iceland: Philos. Mag. and Jour. Sci., v. 59, p. 32-33, 1 fig. 1202. Nielsen, Niels, 1937, Renewed activity of the Great Geysir (Iceland) : Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 89, no. 5, p. 451^454, map. 1203. Nordoff, Charles, 1857, Stories of the island world: New York, Harper & Bros., 315 p., front., 14 illus. 1204. Ohlsen, C., 1806, Om Vandspringene Geisir og Strok i Island: Kgl. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Skr., v. 4, no. 1, p. 233-246; 1812, Jour, mines, v. 31, p. 5-18. 1205. 1813, Beschreibung zweier natiirlicher Springbrunnen siedendheissen Wassers, des Geysers und des Strok in Island: Annalen Physik (Gilbert), v. 43, p. 50-61. 1206. Olafsen, Eggert, 1772, Vice-Lavmand Eggert Olafsens og Land-Physici Biame Povelsens Reise igiennem Island: Soroe, Denmark, 2 v., translated into German by J. M. Geuss, with title, Des Vice-Lavmands Eggert Olafsens und des Landphysici Biame Povelsens, 1774—75, Reise durch Island, versanstaltet von der Koniglichen Societat der Wissenschaften in Kopenhagen, und beschreiben von bemeldtem Eggert Olafsen: Kopenhagen and Leipzig, Heinecke & Faber, 2 v.; 1774, v. 1, 328 p.; 1775, v. 2, 244 p., 50 pis., map; 1802, translated into French by Gauthier-de-Lapayronie, with title, Voyage en Islande; fait par ordre de S. M. Danoise, contenant descriptions sur les moeurs et les usages des habitants; une description des lacs, rivieres, glaciers, sources chaudes et volcans * * *: Paris, 5 v. and atlas; 1805, translated into English by Messrs. Olafsen and Provelsen, with title, Travels in Iceland; performed by order of his Danish Majesty * * *; London, printed for Richard Phillips, 162 p., 4 pis., map; condensed in Richard Phillips, Collection of modem and contemporary voyages and travels, 1805-1810, v. 2. Mentions hot springs and geysers in several localities. 1207. Olafsson, Olaf (Olavius, Olaus), 1787, Oekonomische Reise durch Island in den Nordwestlichen und Nord-Nordost-lichen Gegenden. Auf Konigl. Danischen Befehl heraus-gegeben und durch nothige Kupfer erlautert. Aus dem Danischen ins Deutsche iibersezt Mit einer neuen Landkarte und 17 Kupfertafeln: Dresden and Leipzig, Breitkopfischen Buchhandlung, 464 p., 17 pis.; translated into German from the Danish edition by J. Jasperson. Mentions warm springs in several localities. 1208. Oswald, Elizabeth Jane, 1882, By fell and fjord; or scenes and studies in Iceland: Edinburgh and London, W. Blackwood & Sons, v. 282 p., illus. Describes eruptions of Sttri Geysir and Strokk in Haukadalur and thermal activity near Krisuvik. 1209. Paijkull, Carl Wilhelm, 1868, A summer in Iceland: Lon- don, Chapman & Hall, 364 p., front., 5 pis., figs.; translated into English from the Swedish edition by M. R. Barnard. Includes a general description of solfataras, sulfur springs, hot mud springs, and geysers. Mentions St6ri and Strokk in Haukadalur and hot springs near Reykir.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 298 1210. Peak, Cuthbert E., 1882, Across Iceland by the Sprengi- sandr route: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Proc., v. 4, no. 3, p. 129-140,1 pi. Describes the Stori Geysir, Strokk, and other thermal springs in Haukadalur. 1211. Petersson, Sven G., 1946 [The hot springs on Iceland and their use—impressions of travel]: Geol. Forenen. Stockholm Forh., v. 68, Heft 3, no. 446, p. 405-412; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 1357. 1212. Pfeiffer (Madame), Ida, 1852, Visit to Iceland and the Scandinavian north: London, Ingram, Cooke, & Co., 354 p., front., 6 engravings; translated from the German (2d ed., 1853) ; 1852, Pfeiffer, Ida (Reyer), A journey to Iceland, and travels in Sweden and Norway: New York, G. P. Putnams, 273 p.; translated from the German by Charlotte Fenimore Cooper. Includes a description of the geysers and hot springs. 1213. Preyer (Thierry) William, and Zirkel, Ferdinand, 1862, Reise nach Island im Sommer 1860, mit wissenschaft-lichen Anhangen: Leipzig, Germany, F. A. Brockhaus, 499 p., front., 5 pis., 1 fig., map. Includes an account of a visit to the principal area of geysers and hot springs. 1214. Prytz, K., and Thorkelsson, Thorkell, 1905, Undersogelse af nogle islandske varme Kilders. Radioaktivet og af Kildeluftartemes Indhold af Helium og Argon: Overs, kgl. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Forh., no. 4 p. 317-346. 1215. Rehm, A., 1935, Wie der Geysir aus seinem 20-jahrigen Schlaf erweckt wurde: Umschau, v. 39, p. 1042. 1216. Robert, Louis Eugene, 1838, Mindralogie et g6ologie: France, Comm. Sci. Nord. Voyage en Islande et au Greenland, ex6cutde pendant les ann^es 1835 et 1836. (Gaimard Expedition) : Paris, Arthus Bertrand, ed., pt. 1, p. 1-327; pt. 2, p. 328-468; Atlas [sep. v.], 2 p., 36 pis. 1217. Russell, Waterman Spaulding Chapman, 1914, Iceland; horseback tours in saga land: Boston, R. G. Badger, 314 p., front, 30 illus., map. Includes descriptions of Stori Geysir and Strokk, the solfataras at Krisuvik, and the Arhver River hot springs near Reykholt. 1218. 1917, Askja, a volcano in the interior of Iceland: Geog. Rev., v. 3, no. 3, p. 212-221,6 figs. Describes lake in southeastern part of crater and states that lake water boils where it comes in contact with solfataras. 1219. Sapper, Karl, 1919, Uber islandische Lavaorgeln und Homitos: Deutsche geol. Gesell. Monatsber., v. 62, p. 214-221. 1220. Sartorius von Waltershausen, Wolfgang, 1847, Physisch- geographische Skizze von Island, mit besonderer Riicksicht auf vulkanische Ercheinungen: Giittingen, Germany, Vandenhoeck and Ruprecht. Includes data on the hot springs. 1221. 1853, Erlauterungen zum geologischen Atlas von Island: Gottingen, Germany, Dieterischen Buchhandl., 59 p. Describes palagonite tuff in vicinity of springs at Krabla; also refers to geyser basins filled with water and mud. Includes a chemical analysis of sinter. 1222. Schneider, Karl, 1907, Beitrage zur physikalischen Ge- ographic von Island: Petermann Geog. Mitt., v. 53, no. 8, p. 177-188. Refers to geysers, hot springs, mud volcanoes, solfataras, fumaroles, and mofettes as the last phases of volcanic activity. 1223. Schwabe, Gerhard Helmuth, 1933a, Beobachtungen fiber thermische Schichtungen in Thermalgewassem auf Island: Archiv Hydrobiologie, v. 26, p. 187-196. 1224. 1933b, Probleme der Thermalbiologie auf Island: Naturwissenschaften v. 23, p. 158-160. 1225. 1936, Beitrage zur Kenntnis islandischer Thermalbio-tope: Archiv Hydrobiologie, suppl. v. 6, p. 161-352. 1226. 1951, Karbonate des Bodens in Thermen: Internat. Ver. theoret. u. angew. Limnologie Verh., v. 11, p. 341-361, illus. [German, Spanish summary] ; abs., 1953, Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 17, 1952, p. 389; 1953, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1952, v. 25, no. 1, p. 116. 1227. Scott, D. Hugh, 1906, Sportsman’s and tourist’s handbook to Iceland: 8th ed., Leith, Scotland, G. V. Turnbull, 127 p., map. Includes description of excursion to vicinity of Stdri Geysir and Hekla. 1228. Shepherd, Charles William, 1867, The north-west pen- insula of Iceland; being the journal of a tour in Iceland in the spring and summer of 1862: London, Longmans, Green & Go., 162 p., front., pi., map. Describes the alternating geyser and vents of boiling water at Tungufljat. 1229. Sigurosson, Steinthor, 1946, Thermal activity in Iceland and its utilization, in Thorsteinsson, Thorsteinn, ed., Iceland 1946; a handbook published on the 60th anniversary of the National Bank of Iceland: 4th ed., Reykjavik, Iceland Rikisprentsinidjas Gutenberg, 295 p., map. 1230. Sonder, Richard A., 1941, Studien fiber heisse Quellen und Tektonik in Island: Vulkaninstitut Immanuel Fried-lander Pub. 2,132 p., 13 pis., 2 figs. 1231. Stanley, John Thomas, 1794a, An account of the hot springs near Rykum in Iceland (in a letter to Dr. Black) : Royal Soc. Edinburgh Trans., v. 3, pt. 2, p. 127-137. 1232. 1794b, An account of the hot springs near Haukadal in Iceland (in a second letter to Dr. Black) : Royal Soc. Edinburgh Trans., v. 3, pt. 2, p. 138-153. 1233. Stefansson, Vilhjalmur, 1939, Iceland, the first American republic: Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday Doran, 275 p., front., 15 illus. Includes descriptions of visits to the main geyser area and to the Laugar hot-spring area. 1234. Symington, Andrew James, 1862, Pen and pencil sketches of Faroe and Iceland, with an appendix containing translations from the Icelandic: London, Longman & Roberts, 315 p., front., 50 illus. Describes geysers and other hot springs in Haukadalur, also the boiling mud pools and solfataras in the vicinity of Krisuvik. 1235. Taylor, Bayard, 1886, Egypt and Iceland in the year 1874: New York, G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 282 p.; pt. 1, Egypt, p. 9-149; pt. 2, Iceland, p. 153-282. Describes eruptions of Stori Geysir and Strokk. 1236. Taylor, D., 1856, Analyse des Wassers des grossen Geysirs auf Island: Allg. Erdkunde Zeitschr., new ser., v. 1, p. 457-459. 1237. Thorarinsson, Sigurdur, 1949, Um aldur Geysis: Ndtturu Fraedhingurinn, Arg. 19, no. 1, p. 3A-41.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 299 1238. Thorkelsson, Thorkell, 1910 [The hot springs of Iceland]: Kgl. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Skr., ser 7, no. 8, p. 181-264, 13 pis., figs. 1239. 1920, Undersogelse af nogel varme Kilder paa Nordis-land: Kgl. Danske Vidensk. Selsk, Math.-fys. Medd., ser 3, no. 1. 1240. 1928, On thermal activity in Reykjanes, Iceland : Visind-af61ag Islendinga (Soc. Sci. Islandica) Rit 3, 52 p. [English] ; 1929, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1928, v. 1, p. 255-256. 1241. 1930, Some additional notes on thermal activity in Iceland: VisindafSlag Islendinga (Soc. Sci. Islandica), Rit 5, p. 1-31, map [English]; 1931, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1930, v. 3, pt. 2, p. 417—118. 1242. 1940, On thermal activity in Iceland and geyser action: VisindafSlag Islendinga (Soc. Sci. Islandica), Rit 25, 139 p., 10 figs., 14 tables [English.] 1243. Thoroddsen, Thorvaldur, 1889a, De varme Kilder paa Hveravellir: Ymer (Svenska sallskapet antropolgi och geografi), v. 9, p. 49. 1244. 1889b, Neue Solfataren und Schlammvulkane in Island: Ausland, v. 62, no. 9, p. 161-164, Stuttgart, Germany. 1245. 1901, Geological map of Iceland '(scale 1:600,000) : Copenhagen, Carlsberg fund. 1246. 1904, Landfraedissaga Islands [Icelandic]: Copenhagen. Discusses the geysers of Iceland. 1247. 1910a, De varme Kilder paa Island deres fysisk-geologiske og geografiske Udbredelse: Overs. Kgl. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Forh. 2, p. 97-153. 1248. 1910b, De varme Kilder paa Island, deres fysisk-geologiske Forhold og geografiske Udbredelse: Overs. Kgl. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Forh. 3, p. 183-257. 1249. 1911, Losing Islands : Copenhagen, 2 v. 1250. 1913-15, Ferdabdk. Sk^rslur um Rannsoknir & Island 1882-1898 Kaupmannahofn, Hid Islenska Fraedafelag: 4 v., 1913, v. 1, 380 p.; 1914, v. 2, 293 p.; v. 3, 360 p.; 1915, v. 4, 356 p. Contains data on several spring localities. 1251. 1915, Ueber heisse Quellen in Island: Internat. Geog. Cong. 10th, Roma 1913, Atti, p. 1188-1191. 1252. 1925, Die Geschichte der islandischen Vulkane (nach einem hinterlassenen manuskript) : Kgl. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Skr., Naturv. og mat., Afd. 8, Raekke 9 (Acad. Royal. Soc. Lettres Danemark Mem.), 458 p., 47 figs., 10 maps, 3 tables. 1253. Thuesen, S. E., 1933, Lidt om islandske varme Kilder og deres Plantevaekst: Bot. Tidsskr., v. 42, p. 325-333. 1254. Troil, Uno von, 1780, Letters on Iceland; containing ob- servations on the civil, literary, ecclesiastical, and natural history; antiquities, volcanoes, basaltes, hot springs; customs, dress, manners of the inhabitants, &c., made during a voyage undertaken in the year 1772 by Joseph Banks, Esq., assisted by Dr. Solander, Dr. J. Lind, Dr. Uno von Troil, and several other literary ingenious gentlemen: in Pinkerton, John, 1808, A general collection of the best and most interesting voyages and travels in all part of the world: London, v. 1, p. 621-734. 1255. Tuxen, S. L., 1936a, Faunaen i og red de varme Kilder paa Island: Nord, Naturf.-mote, Helsingfors, Bar. 19, p. 510-512. 1256. Tuxen, S. L., 1936b, Die Arten der Gattung Scatella (Ephy- dridae) in heissen Quellen: Opusc. Ent. Lund 1, p. 105- 111. 1257. 1938a, Bemerkungen fiber die erneuerte Activitfit des grossen Gey sir in Haukaldalur: Visindaf61ag Islendinga (Soc. Sci. Islandica), Rit 23, 25 p. 5 figs.; 1943, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 9, 1941-42, p. 302. 1258. 1938b, StOri Geysir paa Island samt om Geysirtheorier: Naturens Verden, v. 22, p. 118-142, Copenhagen. 1259. 1942, Islands varme Kilder og deres Dyreliv: Dyr. i Nat. og Mus. 1941, p. 45-61. 1260. 1944, The hot springs of Iceland; their animal communities and their zoogeographical significance, in Copenhagen, Akad. afh., The zoology of Iceland: v. 1, pt, 2, 216 p., 7 pis., 63 figs., 13 tables. [English.] Includes a map showing 37 spring localities, also 45 chemical analyses of water from hot springs. 1261. Tyndall, John, 1854, On some of the eruptive phenomena of Iceland: Royal Inst. Great Britain Proc., v. 1, 1851-54, p. 329-335. 1262. Walker, Robert, 1875, Note of temperature measurements in the Great Geyser of Iceland—August, 1874: Royal Soc. Edinburgh Proc., v. 8, p. 514r-521. 1263. Watts, William Lord, 1875, Snioland [Snowland]; or Ice- land, its jokulls and fjails: London, Longmans & Co., 183 p., 12 pis., map. 1264. 1876a, On Iceland, its physical aspects, characteristics, etc.: Brighton Nat. Hist. Soc. Proc., v. 23, p. 78-89. Includes mention of some of the hot springs. 1265. 1876b, Across the Vatna Jokull; or, Scenes in Iceland; being a description of hitherto unknown regions: London, Longmans & Co., 202 p., front., 1 pi., map. Describes hydrothermal activity in several localities. 1266. West, G. S., 1902, On some algae from hot springs: Jour. Botany, British and Foreign [London], v. 40, p. 241-248, lpl. Describes 56 specimens of algae from hot springs and geysers in Iceland and 3 from a spring at Sira Rimau on the Malay Peninsula. 1267. Winkler, Gustav Georg, 1863, Island. Der Bau seiner Gebirge und dessen geologische Bedeutung: Munich, Germany. 1268. Wright, Frederick Eugene, 1924, The hot springs of Ice- land : Jour. Geology, v. 32, no. 6, p. 462-464. See also references 65, 73,106, 649, 672, 700, 2092, and 3554. MINOR ISLANDS—CANARY, CAPE VERDE, FAROE (FAEROE), JAN MAYEN, AND SPITSBERGEN (SVALBARD) 1269. Encyclopaedia Britannica: 11th ed., New York, Encyclopaedia Britannica, v. 5, p. 253-255. 1270. 1911, Jan Mayen: 11th ed., New York, Encyclopaedia Britannica, v. 15, p. 152. 1271. Buch, Christian Leopold von, 1825, Einige Bemerkungen ueber Quellen-Temperatur: Berlin, Abh., p. 93-106; Annalen Physik (Poggendorff), v. 12, p. 403-418, 1828; 1829, Some remarks on the temperature of springs tabs.]: Philos. Mag., new ser., v. 6, p. 166-169. Includes data on the temperature of springs in the Canary Islands.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 300 1272. Buch, Christian Leopold von, 1826-27, Observations made during a visit to Madeira and a residence in the Canary Islands: Philos. Mag., new ser., v. 1, p. 380-383, 1826; v. 2, p. 73-86, 1827. Mentions warm springs on Teneriffe Island. 1273. Hoel, Adolph, and Holtedahl, O., 1911, Les nappes de lave, les volcans et les sources thermales dans les environs de la Baie Wood au Spitsberg: Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Skr., Kristiania, I. Mat.-Naturv. Kl., v. 1, no. 8, 38 p., 8 pis., 6 figs., map. 1274. Noe-Nygaard, A., 1942, Varmakelda paa Ostero : Naturens Yerden, p. 39-42. 1275. Strom, Kaare Munster, 1921, Some algae from hot springs in Spitzbergen: Bot. Notiser, 1921, p. 17-21. [Eng- lish.] 1276. Thor, Sig, 1930, Beitrage zur Kenntnis der invertebraten Fauna von Svalbard [Spitsbergen] : Skr. om Svalbard og Ishavet 27. 1277. 1934, Neue Beitrage zur Kenntnis der invertebraten Fauna von Svalbard: Zool. Anz., v. 107, p. 114r-139. See also references 16, 30, 43, 75, 1018, 1115, and 1178. EUROPE GENERAL REFERENCES Many books and reports describe the spas of Europe, especially those where thermal springs have been developed for medicinal bathing. As each of these publications contains information on several countries, their references have been grouped under the heading “General References,” to avoid repetition in the bibliographies for each country. 1278. Althaus, Julius, 1862, The spas of Europe: London, Trub- ner & Co. 1279. Braun, Julius, 1875, On the curative effects of baths and waters, being a handbook to the spas of Europe; including a chapter on the treatment of phthisis by baths and climate, by Dr. Rohden of Lippspringe. An abridged translation, with notes, edited by Sir Hermann Weber: London, Smith, Elder, & Co., 658 p. 1280. Granville, Augustus Bozzi, 1841, Bains d’Europe. Manuel du voyageur aux eaux d’Allemagne, de France, de la Belgique, de la Savoie, de la Suisse, etc., etc. (in part translated from the English) : Paris. 1281. Hirschfeld, Josef, and Pichler, Wilhelm, 1876, Die Bader, Quellen und Curorte Europas: Stuttgart, Germany. 1282. Hof man, J. J., 1910 [Investigations on water from springs] : Pharm. Weekblad Nederland, v. 48, p. 1003-1018; 1911, Chem. Abs., v. 5, p. 3869. 1283. Hynie, O., and Koutek, J., 1933, Geologie der wichtigsten Schlammarten Europas, die gegenwartig zu Heil-zwecken verwendet werden: [Czechoslovak Republic], Stitnf Geol. TJstav, Knihovna v. 16, 96 p. Describes the geology of the vicinities of medicinal springs and muds. 1284. Lee, Edwin, 1836, An account of the most frequented wa- tering places on the continent * * * and of the medicinal application of their mineral springs; with tables of analysis and an appendix on English mineral waters : London, Longman, Rees, Orme, Brown, Green, & Longman, 232 p. 1285. Linn, Thomas, 1893, The health springs of Europe. A medical guide to the mineral springs * * * of Europe: London, H. Kimpton, 330 p., 13 vignettes, map; 5th ed., 1897, New York, D. Appleton & Co., 323 p. 1286. Macpherson, John, 1869, The baths and wells of Europe, their action and uses: London, Macmillan, 336 p., map ; 2d ed., 1871, Our baths and wells. 1287. 1888, The baths and wells of Europe with a sketch of hydrotherapy and hints on climate, sea bathing, and popular cures: London, E. Stanford, 379 p., map. 1288. Madden, Thomas Moore, 1876, The principal health re- sorts of Europe and Africa for the treatment of chronic diseases: 2d ed., London and Philadelphia, Pa., Lindsay & Blakiston, 276 p. 1289. Raspe, F., 1885, Heilquellen—Analysen: Dresden, Ger- many. 1290. Rotureau, Armand Jean Baptiste, 1858-64, Des principales eaux minerales de l’Europe, France, Angleterre, &c: Paris, 3 v.; 1858, v. 1, Allemagne et Hongrie; v. 2, France, 1859, 1864; v. 3, France, supp., Angleterre, Belgique, Espagne et Portugal, Italie, Suisse. 1291. Schott, Morris, 1928, Health and pleasure resorts of Cen- tral Europe; describing the natural mineral water sources and their therapeutical indications. New York, privately printed, 172 p., front. 1292. Tichborne, Charles Robert Clarke; and James, Moses Prosser, 1883, The mineral waters of Europe; including a short description of artificial mineral waters : London, Bailliere, Tyndall & Oox, 234 p. 1293. Weber, Hermann, and Weber, Frederick Parkes, 1898, The mineral waters and health resorts of Europe * * * being a revised and enlarged edition of “The spas and mineral waters of Europe”: London, Smith, Elder & Co., 524 p., map. 1294. 1907, Climatotherapy and balneotherapy; the climates and mineral water health resorts (spas) of Europe and North Africa * * * being a third edition of “The mineral waters and health resorts of Europe” much enlarged in respect to medical climatology: London, Smith, Elder & Oo., 833 p. See also reference 1755. AUSTRIA 1295. Aigner, August, 1904, Uber die Therme von Mittendorf im steirischen Salzkammergut: Naturw. Ver. Steiermark Mitt., v. 40, p. 261-279. 1296. Aurand, K., Jacobi, W., and Schraub, A., 1956 [Decompo- sition products of radon in water from the hot springs of Gastein] : Osterreichische Akad. Wiss., Math.- naturw. Kl., Sitzungsber., Abt. 2, v. 165, nos. 1-4, p. 133-148; 1957, Chem. Abs., v. 51, col. 13269. 1297. Bamberger, Max, and Kriise, Karl, 1910, Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Radioaktivitat der Mineralquellen Tirols: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 119, Abt. 2A. p. 207-230. 1298. Bamberger, Max; Kruse, Karl; and Landsiedl, Anton, 1898, t'ber den Nachweis von Argon in den Badequellen von Voslau bei Wien: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 107, Abt. 2B, p. 138-139. 1299. Baum, Gustav, 1935, Zur Chemie der Bleiberger Therme: Carinthia II, Canaval-Festschr. 1935, p. 142-144. 1300. Behr, Johannes, 1950, Von den Gasteiner Thermalquellen: Bohrtech., Brunnenbau, v. 1, no. 12, p. 371-375, map; 1954, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 18, 1953, p. 29; 1955 abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1954, v. 26, no. 1, p. 94.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 301 1301. Bisanz, R., and Kroupa, E., 1939, Bestimmung von Fluor und Kieselsaure in den Gasteiner Thermen: Ohemiker Zeitung, v. 63, no. 88-89, p. 689-691. 1302. Bunzel, E., 1894, Wildbad Gastein: 7th ed., Vienna. 1303. Conrad, V., 1956, On thermal springs; a contribution to the knowledge of their nature: Archiv Meteorologie, Geophysik u. Bioklimatologie, ser. A, v. 9, no. 3, p. 371-405 [incl. German summary], illus.; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21,1956, p. 117. 1304. Diem, Karl, 1914, Osterreichisches Baderbuch. Offizielles Handbuch der Bader, Kurorte, und Heilanstalten Osterreichs. U’ber Veranlassung und mit Unterstiitzung des K. K. Ministeriums des Innern sowie unter Beteili-gung des Zentralverbandes der Balneologen Oster-eichs: 'Berlin, Urban & Schwarzenberg, 816 p., 8 figs., map. Describes the mineral-spring resorts and shows their locations on a map. 1305. Eble, Burkard, 1834, Die Bader zu Gastein: Wien, L. Grund. 1306. Eichleiter, C. F., and Hackl, O., 1917, Chemische Analyse der Heiligenstadter Mineralquelle: Geol. Reichsanst. Wien Jahrb., v. 66, no. 1, p. 139-144. 1307. Gager, Carl, 1897, Bad Gastein. Nach den neuesten Hilfs- quellen. Bearbeitet von Carl Gager: Berlin, A. Hirsch-wald. 1308. Guemel, W. von, 1889, Geolog. Bemerkungen tiber die warmen Quellen von Gastein: K. bayer. Akad. Wiss., Math.-naturh. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 19, p. 341. 1309. Haberlandt, Herbert, 1952 [New geochemical studies at Bad-Gastein] : Mikrochemie Ver. Mikrochim. Acta, v. 39, p. 92-100; Ohem. Abs., v. 46, col. 4971. 1310. Hoffmann, J., 1941, Uranbestimmungen in Quellen stidost- lich des Erzgebirges bis zum Wiener Thermalgebiet: Monatsh. Chemie, v. 74, no. 1, p. 38-52, 1 fig.; 1942, Chem. Abs., v. 36, col. 6078. 1311. Holler, Herbert, 1936, Die Bleiberger Therme: Canaval- Festschr., Carintha II. Klagenfurt, p. 137-142; abs., Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geblogie u. Palaontologie, 1936, Referate 3, p. 760. 1312. Honigsberg, Benedict Ellen von, 1857, Wildbad-Gastein im Jahre 1856: K.-k. Gesell. Aerzte, Wien, Zeitschr., v. 13. 1313. Kahler, Franz, 1929, Die Therme von Reifnitz am Worther- see: Geol. Bundesanst. Verh., 1930, no. 2, p. 93-98. 1314. Kampe, R., and Prinz, E., 1934, Die Mineralquellen ; Hand- buch der Hydrologie: Wien, v. 2, pt. 2. 1315. Karrer, F., 1877, Geologie der Kaiser Franz Josef Hoch- quellen-Wasserleitung: Geol. Reichsanst. Wien Abh., v. 9, 199-218. 1316. Kerner, Fritz von Marilaun, 1918, Geologische Statistik der radioaktiven Quellen Tirols: Geol. Reichsanst. Wien Verh., p. 103-114. 1317. Knett, Josef, 1901, Vorlaufige Mittheilung fiber die Fort- setzung der “Wiener Thermenlinie” (Winzendorf-Baden-Meidling) nach Nord: Geol. Reichsanst. Wien Verh., p. 245-248. 1318. 1928, Die Thermal- und Mineralquellen, in Osterreichisches Baderbuch: Wien, p. 23-80. 1319. Kober, Leopold, 1953 [Gastein; geology, tectonics, depos- its, and radioactivity]: Berg- u. hfittenm. Monatsh. montan. Hochschule Leoben, v. 98, p. 106-111; Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 11095. 1320. Konapik, Nelly, 1954 [The arsenic content of the Gasteiner thermal springs] : Osterreichische Chem.-Zeitung, v. 55, p. 46-47; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 7227. 1321. Kosmath, Walter, and Gerke, Otto, 1935, Das radioaktive Klima und das radioaktive Milieu von Badgastein, seine bioklimatische und balneologische Bedeutung: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 144, pt. 2A, p. 339-355, 4 figs., 7 tables. 1322. Labat, A., 1903, Climat et eaux minerales d’Autriche- Hongrie: Paris. 1323. Ludwig, E., and Panzer, Th., 1900, tiber die Gasteiner Thermen: Tschermak’s mineralog. petrog. Mitt., new ser., v. 19, p. 470-488. 1324. Ludwig, E., and Zdarek, E., 1906, tiber die Voslauer Therme: Tschermak’s mineralog. petrog. Mitt., new ser., v. 25, p. 157-178. 1325. Mache, Heinrich, 1904a, tiber die Emanation im Gasteiner Thermalwasser: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Anz., 1904, p. 228-230. 1326. 1904b, tiber die “Radioaktivitat” der Gasteiner Thermen : Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Anz., 1904, p. 342-343. 1327. 1924, Neumessung der Radioaktivitat der Gasteiner Thermen: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 132, Abt. 2A, p. 207-214. 1328. 1943, tiber die Entstehung radioaktiver Quellen: Alpen- land, Geol. Ver. (Geol. Gessell., Wien) Mitt., v. 34, p. 69-79, 1 fig.; 1947, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 11, 1945-46, p. 203; 1945, Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1944, v. 16, no. 2, p. 345. 1329. Mache, Heinrich, and Bamberger, Max, 1914, tiber die Radioaktivitat der Gasteine und Quellen des Tauern-tunnels und tiber die Gasteiner Therme: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 123, Abt. 2A, p. 325-403, 4 figs., 2 tables. 1330. Mache, Heinrich, and Kraus, Felix, 1926, Uber den Ra- diumgehalt der Thermen von Gastein und Karlsbad: Phys. Zeitschr., v. 27, p. 205-206. 1331. Mueller, Bruno, 1940, Die Heilquellen des Sudetenlandes; Sudetendeutsch Anst. f. Landes- u. Volkforsch: Reichen-berg, Germany, Kraus, 61 p.; 1943, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1942, v. 14, no. 2, p. 270. 1322. Pohl-Ruling, Johanna, and Pohl, Egon, 1954 [New determinations of the radium and radon contents of waters of the Gastein thermal springs] : Osterreichische Akad. Wiss., Math.-naturw. Kl., Sitzungsber., Abt. 2, v. 163, p. 173-177; 1956, Ohem. Abs., v. 50, col. 4429. 1333. Rae, William Fraser, 1888, Austrian health resorts and the bitter waters of Hungary: London, Chapman & Hall, 292 p.; 2d ed., 1889, 318 p. 1334. Reissacher, Carl, 1865, Der Curort Wildbad-Gastein. Mit besonderer Rficksicht auf die Thermalquellen: Salzburg, Austria, K.-k. Bergverwalter. 1335. Reuter, J., 1837, Monographic tiber Voslau. 1336. Rupp, G., 1914 [The hot spring near Krozingen (Baden) ]: Nachr. Genussm Zeitschr., v. 28, p. 425-426; 1915, Chem. Abs., v. 9, p. 1518. 1337. Scheminzky, F., and Grabherr, W., 1951 [Uranium-accu- mulating mammillary stalagmites of the Austrian thermal springs, particularly at Gastein] : Tschermak’s mineralog. petrog. Mitt., v. 2, p. 257-282; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 6052.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 302 1338. Schider, Eduard, 1899, Gastein, fur Curgaste und Tou- risten: 10th ed., Salzburg, Austria. 1339. Schneider, Franz Coelestin, and Kretschy, M., 1878, Ana- lyse der Schwefelthermen zu Baden nachst Wien : Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 76, Abt. 2, p. 476-498. 1340. Schubert, R. J., 1911, Uber die Thermen und Mineralquel- len Osterreiehs: Geol. Reichsanst. Wien Verh., p. 419-422. 1341. Schuster, Mattheus, ed., 1936, Die nutzbaren mineralen Gesteine und Erden Bayerns: 512 p., 28 pis. 1342. Schaffer, F., 1907, Uber einen Brunnen auf dem Mitter- berg in Baden bei Wien : Geol. Reichsanst. Wien Verh., p. 265-268. 1343. Sickenberg, Otto, 1929, Erne unterpliozane Therme auf der Wiener Thermenlinie bei Leobersdorf in Nieder-osterreich : Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturh. Kl., Anz., v. 66, p. 203-205. 1344. Siegmund, H., and Juhasz, P., 1866, Chemische Analyse der Mineralquelle zu Voslau: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Sitzunger., v. 54, Abt. 2, p. 216-224. 1345. Sipocz, Ludwig, 1874, Chemische Analyse einiger Wasser von Baden bei Wien: Geol. Reichsanst. Mineralo. Mitt., V. 24, p. 251-256. 1346. Stiny, Joseph, 1937, Zur Geologie der Umgebung von Warmbad Villach: Geol. Bundesanst. Jahrb., v. 87, p. 57-110, 13 figs., 1 table. 1347. 1953, Zur Kenntnis der Herkunft der Badner Ileil-quellen, in Skizzen zum Antlitz der Erde: Wien, Briider Hollinek, p. 315-322, illus.; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21,1956, p. 571. 1348. Stockmayer, Siegfried, 1928, Die Biologie der Mineral- quellen von Medizinalrat, in Osterreichisches Bader-bueh, Offizielles Handb. Mineralquellen, Kurorte, u. Kuranstalten Osterreiches: Vienna, p. 85-91. 1349. Strouhal, Hans, 1933, Die Ergebnisse der biologischen Untersuchungen an den Thermen von Warmbad Villach: Volksgesundheitsamtes Mitt., Jahrg. 1933, p. 95-98, 108-109. 1350. 1934, Biologische Untersuchungen an den Thermen von Warmbad Villach in Kamten (Mit Beriicksichtigung der Thermen von Badgastein) : Archiv Hydrobiologie, v. 26, no. 3, p. 323-385; no. 4, p. 495-583, 3 pis., 7 figs., 11 tables, 2 maps. 1351. 1935, Der Einfluss des Villacher Thermalwassers auf seine tierschen Organismen: Internat. Mineralquellen-Zeitung [Wien], v. 36, p. 2-4. 1352. Suess, H., and Schwarz, H., 1910, Neuer Analysen der Badener Schwefelthermen: Internat. Mineralquellen-Zeitung [Wien], v. 11, no. 224, p. 10-11. 1353. Tornquist, Alexander, 1930, Mineralquellen (Thermen) und Minerallagerstatten in den Ostalpen: Geol. Gesell. Wien Mitt., v. 21, for 1928, p. 15-23. 1354. Toula, F., 1879, Die “Wienerbucht” mit besonderer Be- riicksiehtigung von Baden und seinen Thermen: Osterreichische Touristen Klubs Jahrb., v. 12. 1355. Waagen, Lukas, 1914, Die Thermalquellen der Stadt Baden in Nieder-Osterreich: Zeitscbr. prakt. Geologie v. 22, no. 2, p. 84-97, 2 figs. 1356. Waltenhofen, Adalbert von, 1885, Uber die Thermen von Gastein: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 92, pt. 2, p. 1258-1282, 1 pi., 1 fig., 4 tables. 1357. Wassing, Ant, 1899, Der Curort Wildbad-Gastein: 2d ed., Vienna and Leipzig. 1358. Wettendorfer, A., 1906, Der Kurort Baden bei Wien: 4th ed., Vienna. 1359. Wick, Ludwig von, 1897, Die warme Quellen Gastein: 2d ed., Vienna and Leipzig. 1360. Zebenter, 1893, Mineralquellen Tirols: Innsbruck, Austria. See also references 26, 571, 1285, 1291, 1699, 1760, 1828, 1892, 1900,1901,1943, and 2008. BELGIUM AND LUXEMBOURG 1361. Boever, C., 1952 [Recent investigation of the hot springs of Mondorf-fitat] : Rev. tech. Luxembourg, v. 44, p. 95-101 [French] ; Ohem. Abs., v. 46, col. 9431. 1362. Felix, Jules, 1890, Des eaux thermales de Chaudfontaine (Belgique), et leur action physiologique et thera-peutique: Soc. beige geologie, paleontologie, et hydrologie Mem., v. 4, p. 243-257. 1363. Fourmarier, Paul, 1941, La source thermale de Chaud- fontaine (Belgique) : Assoc, franqaise av. sci. Compte rendu, Sess. 63, p. 489-492; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19,1954, p. 150. 1364. 1955, Reflexions au sujet de l’origine des eaux thermales de Chaudfontaine (vall6e de la Vesdre) : Soc. geol. Belgique Annales, v. 78, Bull. 8-10, p. 491-510, illus.; 1958, abs., Biblography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21,1956, p. 184. 1365. Lucius, Michel, 1949a, La refection du forage Kind a Mondorf-les-Bains: Inst. Grande-Duchd Luxembourg Sec. Sci., Archives, new ser., v. 18, p. 95-116, 1 fig., 2 tables. 1366. 1949b, La remise en etat de la source thermominerale Kind A Mondorf: Soc. Beige gdologie, paleontologie, et hydrologie, v. 58, pt. 3, p. 355-359,1 fig. 1367. Moeller, 1920 [Present state of our (Belgian) mineral spring and bathing resorts] : Acad, royale mOd. Belgique Bull. v. 30, p. 601-606; Chem. Abs., v. 14, p. 3290. 1368. Poskin, A., 1888, Les sources minerales de la Belgique; nomenclature, geographie, analyses, et bibliographie: Soc. beige geologie, paleontologie, et hydrologie Mem., v. 2, p. 348-382, 3 tables. Contains information on five thermal springs. 1369. Prost, Eugene, 1925 [The radioactivity of water of the thermal springs of Chaudfontaine] : Rev. universelle mines, v. 8, no. 7, p. 21-28; 1926, Chem. Abs., v. 20, p. 789. 1370. Reuter, M. L., 1847, Analyse de l’eau du puits artesien de Mondorf (grand-duche de Luxembourg) : Annales mines, ser. 4, v. 11, p. 593. 1371. Rigo fils, 1844, Chaudfontaine et ses environs: Brussels, 28 p., 15 views. 1372. Walferdin, F. H., 1856, Recherches sur la temperatur de la terre a de grandes profondeurs. Observations sur la source artesiene de l’etablissement thermal de Mondorff dans le grand-duche de Luxembourg: Acad, sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 36, p. 250-254. See also references 1280, 1285, 1293, 1687, and 1941. BRITISH ISLES 1373. Allen, B., 1699, The natural history of the chalybeate and purging waters of England, with their particular es-sayes and uses * * * to which are added some observations on the Bath waters of Somersetshire: London;BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 303 1711 ed., The natural history of the mineral waters of Great Britain. 1374. Armstrong, W., and Harburn, John English, 1903, Bux- ton; its waters, baths, and acessory methods of treatment : London, Simpkin, Marshall & Co.; Bristol, England, J. Wright & Co., 71 p.; 2d ed., 1911, Bristol, England, J. Wright & Sons, 70 p. 1375. Atkins, J., 1737, A compendious treatise on the contents * * * of cold and hot mineral springs in general, particularly the celebrated hot waters of Scarborough: London. 1376. Babington, W., 1791, Analysis of the medicinal waters at Tunbridge Wells: London. 1377. Bannantyne, Gilbert Alexander, 1899, The thermal waters of Bath: Bristol, England, J. Wright & Co., 87 p. 1378. Batten, E. Chisholm, 1876, On the cause of the heat of the Bath waters: Somersetshire Archaeol. Nat. History Soc. Proc., v. 22, pt. 2, p. 52-60. 1379. Booth, A., 1830, A treatise on the natural and chemical properties of water, and on the various British mineral waters: London, 196 p.; 1838 ed., London, 196 p. 1380. Burr, Thomas Benge, 1766, History of Tunbridge Wells: London, M. Hingeston. 1381. Canton J., 1767, Observations on the heat of the Bath and Bristol waters: Royal Soc. London Philos. Trans., v. 57, p. 203; abridged ed„ 1809, v. 12, 1763-69, p. 420. 1382. Carrick, A., 1797, Dissertation on the chemical and me- dicinal properties of the Bristol hot-well water: Bristol, England, 167 p. 1383. Charleston, Rice, 1754, A treatise on Bath waters, wherein are discovered the several principles of which they are composed, the causes of their heat, and the manner of their production : Bath, England. 1384. Crickitt, R. E., 1867, The hot springs of Bath and else- where : Geol. Mag., new ser., v. 4, no. 34, Repts. and Proc., p. 174-175; Thermal waters at Bath and elsewhere: Bath Nat. History Club Proc., v. 1, p. 78-98. 1385. Cuff, Charles, 1830, On the presence of iodine, potash, and magnesia in the Bath waters: Philos. Mag., ser. 2, v. 7, p. 9-10. 1386. Dalton, W. H., 1889, A list of works referring to British mineral and thermal waters: Bristish Assoc. Adv. Sci., 58th Mtg., 1888, Rept., app., p. 859-897. Lists 740 publications containing information on the mineral and thermal springs of the British Isles. 1387. Daubeny, Charles Giles Bridle, 1834, On the quantity and quality of the gases disengaged from the thermal spring which supplies the King’s Bath in the city of Bath: Royal Soc. London Philos. Trans., 1834, v. 124, pt. 1, p. 1-13, 1 fig.; Royal Soc. London Proc., 1834, v. 3, p. 258-259. 1388. 1864, On the thermal waters of Bath: Geol. Mag., v. 1, no. 5, Repts. and Proc., p. 230-231. 1389. 1865, On the thermal waters of Bath: British Assoc. Adv. Sci., 34th Mtg., Bath 1864, Rept., Notices and abs., p. 26. 1390. Davis, Charles Edward, 1883, The mineral baths of Bath : Bath, England, W. Lewis & Son, 86 p. 1391. Edmunds, F. H. [1948?], Report on underground water conditions and research in Great Britain, 1939: Union Geodesy et geophysics intemat.; Assoc, internal, hydrologie sci., Washington 1939, Comptes rendu v. 2, Rept. Inv. 18, 8 p. Describes the thermal springs at Bath, Bristol, Buxton, and Matlock. 1392. Elliott, J., 1781, An account of the nature and medicinal virtues of the principal mineral waters in Great Britain and Ireland, and those most in repute on the Continent: London; 2d ed., 1789. 1393. Falconer, Randle Wilbraham, 1857, The baths and min- eral waters of Bath: London; 3d ed., 1860, The Bath mineral waters in cases of rheumatism, sciatica, gout, etc.; London, 50 p.; 1880, 6th ed., London, J. & A. Churchill, 56 p.; 1881, 7th ed. 1394. Falconer, William, 1770, An essay on the Bath waters: London; 2d ed.; 1772, Bath, England, 2 v.; 3d ed., 1807, 1395. Flinn, E., 1888, Ireland; its health resorts and watering places: London. 1396. Freeman, Henry William, 1888, The thermal baths of Bath; their history, literature, medical and surgical uses and effects * * * : London, Hamilton, Adams & Co., 379 p., 5 illus., 9 plans. 1397. Gairdner, William Tennent, 1832, Essay on the natural history, origin, composition, and medical effects of mineral and thermal springs : Edinburgh. 1398. Gibbes, George Smith, 1799-1800, A chemical examination of the Bath waters: Jour. Nat- Philosophy and Chem. Arts., v. 3, p. 359-363, 403-405, 1799; p. 452-454, 1800. 1399. 1800, A treatise on the Bath waters: Bath, England, Meyler & Son; 2d ed., 1803; 3d ed., 1812. 1400. 1832, The Bath waters: Bath and Bristol Mag., v. 1, p. 300-303, 408-413., p. 300, 408. 1401. Glanvil, J., 1669, Observations concerning the Bath springs: Royal Soc. London Philos. Trans., v. 4, no. 49, p. 977; 1809, abridged ed., v. 1, 1665-72, p. 361. 1402. Graham, James, 1789, A new plain and rational treatise on the true nature and uses of the Bath waters: Bath, England, R. Crutwell. 1403. Granville, Augustus Bozzi, 1841, The spas of England, and principal sea-bathing places : London, H. Colburn, 3 v.; v . 1, Northern spas; v. 2, Midland spas, 324 p., 2 illus, 10 vignettes; v. 3, Southern spas, p. 325-640, 5 illus., 8 vignettes. 1404. Guidott, Thomas, 1676, Discourse of Bath and the hot waters there, and on the St. Vincent Rock near Bristol: London. 1405. 1725, A collection of treatises relating to the city and waters of Bath : London, printed for J. Leake. 1406. Harmer, F. W., 1871a, On some thermal springs in the fens of Cambridgeshire: British Assoc. Adv. Sci., 40th Mtg., Liverpool 1870, Rept., p. 74. 1407. 1871b, The supposed thermal springs in Cambridgeshire: Geol. Mag., new ser., v. 8, no. 8, p. 143-144. 1408. Herapath, William, 1837, Analysis of the water of King’s Bath, Bath: British Assoc. Adv. Sci. Ann. Rept., 1836, p. 70-73. 1409. 1844, Analyses of the Bath waters and of the Bristol Hotwell water: London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philos. Mag., ser. 3, v. 8, no. 24, p. 371. 1410. Heriot, Mackay, 1875a, The Bath waters: Bath Field Club Proc., v. 3, no. 2, p. 163-170. 1411. 1875b, The mineral spring at Batheaston: Bath Field Club Proc., v. 3, no. 2, p. 171-177. 1412. 1877, The mineral waters of Bath: Somersetshire Arch-aeol. Nat. History Soc. Proc., v. 22, pt. 2, p. 47-51. 1413. Hyde, Samuel, 1898, Buxton, its baths and climate: 4th ed., London and Manchester, England; 1st ed., 1889, Peakland and the baths and climate of Buxton: Manchester, England, 76 p.304 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 1414. Jephson, Charles Denham Orlando, 1834, On variations of temperature in a thermal spring at Mallow (Ireland) : Geol. Soc. London Proc., v. 2, no. 36, p. 76. 1415. King, Preston, 1901, Bath waters: Bristol, England. 1416. Kirby, William, 1932, The Buxton mineral waters: Pharm. Jour., v. 129, p. 454; 1933, Chem. Abs., v. 27, p. 2744. 1417. Knox, Alexander, 1845, The Irish watering places, their climate, scenery, and accommodations, including analyses of the principal mineral springs by Dr. R. Kane: Dublin, 336 p., front 1418. Labat, A., 1900, Climat et eaux min^rales d’Angleterre: Paris. 1419. Lee, Edwin, 1837, Additional remarks on the use of Eng- lish mineral springs, especially those of Bath, Cheltenham, and Leamington: London. 1420. 1841, The mineral springs of England and their curative efficacy, with remarks on bathing and on artificial mineral waters : London; 2d ed., 1848, The baths and watering places of England, considered with reference to their curative efficacy : London, 212 p.; 3d ed., 1854, and 5th ed., 1868, The watering places of England considered with reference to their medical topography: London, J. Churchill, 280 p. 1421. Lipscomb, G., 1802, Description of Matlock Bath, with an attempt to explain the causes of the heat, and the petrifying quality of the springs: London. 1422. Little, Bryan, 1947, The building of Bath [A.D.] 47-1947; an architectural and social study: London, Collins, 176 p., 130 illus. 1423. Luke, Thomas Davey, 1919, Spas and health resorts of the British Isles; their mineral waters, climate, and the treatment to be obtained, with a section on curative institutions: London, A. & C. Black, Ltd., 318 p., 32 illus., map. 1424. Lyell, Charles, 1865, On the mineral waters of Bath and other hot springs, and their geological effects: Am. Jour. Sci., 2d ser., v. 39, p. 13-24. 1425. MacPherson, J., 1871, Our baths and wells: The mineral waters of the British Islands: London. 1426. Madan, P., 1687, Essay on the waters of Tunbridge. London. 1427. Masson, Irvine, and Ramsey, William, 1912, An analysis of the waters of the thermal springs of Bath : Chem. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 101, pt. 2, p. 1370-1376; rev., Chem. News, v. 106, no. 2750, p. 70. 1428. Merck, George, and Galloway, Robert, 1847, Analysis of the water of the thermal spring of Bath (King’s Bath) : London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philos. Mag., ser. 3. v. 31, p. 56-67. 1429. 1848, Analysis of the water of the thermal spring of Bath (King’s Bath) : Chem. Soc. London Mem. and Proc., v. 3, p. 262-273. 1430. Miller, W. A., 1864, Chemical examination of a hot spring containing caesium and lithium, in Wheal Clifford, Cornwall: Chem. News, v. 10, p. 181-182; Mining and Smelting Mag., v. 6, p. 197-198. 1431. 1865, Chemical examination of a hot spring in Wheal Clifford, Cornwall: British Assoc. Adv. Sci., 34th Mtg., Bath 1864, Rept., Notices and abs., p. 35-36; Annales mines, ser. 6, v. 7, p. 299. 1432. Monro, Donald, 1770, A treatise on mineral waters. London, 2 v. 1433. Moore, Charles, 1867, On abnormal conditions of second- ary deposits when connected with the Somersetshire and South Wales coal-basin, and on the age of the Sutton and Southemdown series: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 23, p. 450-568. States that the drilling of a well at Bath affected the flow from the nearby hot springs. 1434. Murray, John, 1815, An analysis of the mineral waters of Cromlix near Dunblane, and of Pitcaithly; with general observations on the analysis of mineral waters, and the composition of Bath water and some others: Royal Soc. Edinburgh Trans., v. 7, p. 445-493; London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philos. Mag., v. 46, p. 264-278; Annales de chimie, v. 96, p. 217-288. 1435. Muspratt, J. Sheridan, 1864, On the Buxton thermal spring: Chem. News v. 10, Correspondence, p. 179-180. 1436. Noad, M., 1844, Analysis of the Bath water: Pharm. Jour., v. 3, p. 526-532. 1437. Nott, John, 1793, A treatise on the hot-well waters near Bristol: London, 94 p.; repr., 1797. 1438. Oliver, W., 1707, A practical dissertation on Bath waters; of the antiquity of Bath and its waters, the origin of the springs, of the ingredients in the waters, etc.: London, later eds., 1716, 1737,1747. 1439. Owen, E., 1753, Observations on the earths, rocks, stones, and minerals for some miles about Bristol, and on the nature of the hot well, and the virtues of its waters: London. 1440. Parker, W., 1857, New physiological views, with an ap- pendix on the Bath thermal waters: Bath, England. 1441. Peach, Robert Edwards Myhill, 1888, Bath, old and new; a handy guide and history : London, Simpkin, Marshall & Co., 294 p., front., 6 illus. 1442. Pearson, G., 1784, Chemical history of the tepid springs of Buxton * * * with a chronological relation of the use of Buxton water from the earliest records, etc.: London, 2 v., 327 and 227 p. 1443. Percival, Thomas, 1772, Experiments and observations on the waters of Buxton and Matlock in Derbyshire: Royal Soc. London Philos. Trans., v. 62, p. 455; 1809, abridged ed., v. 13, 1770-76, p. 355; repr. 1773, Essays, medical and experimental, v. 2, p. 53-70. 1444. Phillips, Richard, 1806, Analysis of the hot springs at Bath: Philos. Mag., v. 24, p. 342-361. 1445. Plunkett, William, and Studdert, Lancelot, 1877, Report on the solid and gaseous constituents of the Mallow spa, in the County of Cork: Royal Irish Acad. Proc., ser. 3, v. 3, Science, p. 75-78. 1446. Ramsay, William, 1912a, The formation of neon as a product of radioactive change: Chem. Soc. [London] Jour. v. 101, pt. 2, p. 1367-1370. 1447. 1912b, Report on the mineral waters of Bath. Chem. News, v. 105, no. 2730, p. 133-135. 1448. Rastall, R. H., 1926, Note on the geology of the Bath springs: Geol. Mag., v. 63, no. 3, p. 98-104. 1449. Richardson, L., 1928, Wells and springs of Somerset; with a bibliography of the Bath thermal waters by W. Whitaker: Geol. Survey of England Mem., 270 p., 3 figs., map. 1450. 1930, Wells and springs of Gloucestershire: Geol. Survey of England Mem., 292 p., 8 figs., 1 pi. 1451. Robertson, William Henry, 1838, Buxton and its waters, an analytical account of their medicinal properties and general effects: London, 147 p. 1452. 1846, A guide to the use of Buxton waters: 3d(?) ed., London, 31 p.; 9th( ?) ed., 1882, London, 40 p.; 21st ed., 1884, Buxton, England, C. F. Wardley, 62 p.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 1453. Robertson, William Henry, 1861, A handbook to the peak of Derbyshire, and to the use of the Buxton mineral waters: 2d (?) ed., London, 234 p., front., pi., map, plans; 1st ed., 1854 and 11th ed., 1886, Buxton, England, C. F. Wardley, 271 p. 1454. 1898, Guide to the use of the Buxton mineral waters; with notes and introduction by Dr. G. Larimer: 27th ed., Buxton, England. 1455. Roscoe, H. E., 1864, Note on the existence of lithium, strontium, and copper in the Bath water: Chem. News, v. 10, p. 158; 1865, British Assoc. Adv. Sci, 34th Mtg., Bath 1864, Rept., Notices and abs., p. 41. 1456. Royal Medical and Chirurgical Society of London, 1895- 1902, The climates and baths of Great Britain; London and New York, Macmillan & Co., Ltd., 2 v.; 1895, v. 1, The climates of the south of England, and the chief medicinal springs of Great Britain, 640 p., map of southern England showing altitude by colors, scale 16 miles to an inch; 1902, v. 2, The climates of London and the central and northern portions of England, together with Wales and Ireland, 628 p., 2 maps. 1457. Scudamore, Charles, 1820, A chemical and medical report of the properties of the mineral waters of Buxton, Matlock, Tunbridge Wells, Harrogate, Bath, Bristol, Cheltenham, Leamington, Malvern, and the Isle of Wight: London, privately published, 265 p. 1458. 1833, A treatise on the composition and medical properties of the mineral waters of Buxton, Matlock, Tunbridge Wells, * * * and the Beulah Spa, Norwood: London, Longman & Co., 215 p.; 3d ed., 1839. 1459. Short, T., 1734, The natural, experimental, and medicinal history of the mineral waters of Derbyshire, Lincolnshire, and Yorkshire, particularly those of Scarborough : London; 2-v. ed., 1752. 1460. 1740, An essay toward a natural and medicinal history of the principal mineral waters of Cumberland, Northumberland * * * and a table of all the warm waters in England, and most of the cold baths * * *: Sheffield, England. 1461. Sitwell, Edith, 1932, Bath: London, Faber & Faber, 288 p., front., 15 illus.; 3d printing, 1936. 1462. Skertchly, S. B. J., 1877, Geology of the Fenland: Geol. Survey Great Britain Mem. 1463. Smollett, Tobias George, 1752, An essay on the external use of water, by Tobias Smollett; edited with introduction and notes, by Claude E. Jones : London ; repr., 1935, Inst. History of Medicine Bull.; Johns Hopkins Press, Baltimore, Md., v. 3, no. 1, p. 31-82, Jan. 1464. Smyth, Warington W., 1865, On the thermal water of the Clifford Amalgamated mines of Cornwall: British Assoc. Adv. Sci., 34th Mtg., Bath 1864, Rept., p. 70; 1864, Mining and Smelting Mag., v. 6, p. 193-196. 1465. Spender, Constance, and Spender, Edith, 1922, Bath (The story of the English towns) : London and New York, Macmillan & Co., 119 p., 10 illus. 1466. Spender, John Kent, 1882, The Bath thermal waters; historical, social, and medical; with an appendix on the climate of Bath by R. L. Blomefield: 3d ed., London, J. & A. Churchill, 292 p.; 1st ed., 1877; 2d ed., 1878. 1467. 1888, The Bath thermal waters, in Bath England, Handb. to Bath: British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1468. Stephens, J. V., 1929, Wells and springs of Derbyshire: Geol. Survey England and Wales Mem., 155 p., 5 figs. 305 1469. Stevens, J. N., 1758, A treatsie on the medicinal qualities of the Baths waters: London and Bristol. 1470. Strahan, Aubrey, 1887, Geology of the Carboniferous limestone ♦ * * of North Derbyshire: 2d ed., Great Britain Geol. Survey Mem. 1471. Sutherland, A., 1758, The nature and qualities of Bristol water, with practical reflections on Bath waters: Bristol, England. 1472. Thomas, T. W., 1878, On the water of Taff’s Well [near Cardiff] : Cardiff Naturalists’ Soc. Trans., v. 9, p. 48-52. 1473. Thomson, John, 1858, Analysis of the Tunbridge Wells water: Chem. Soc. London Jour. v. 10, p. 223-229. 1474. Thresh, John Clough, 1881, Chemical examination of the Buxton thermal water: Chem. Soc. London Trans., v. 39, p. 388-399. 1475. 1882a, Chemical examination of the Buxton thermal water: Chem. Soc. London Trans., v. 41, p. 117-132. 1476. 1882b, The new analysis of the Buxton thermal water: Chem. News, v. 46, no. 1197, p. 201-204. 1477. 1883, Buxton as a health resort, * * * with a full account of its celebrated mineral waters: Buxton, England, 292 p. 1478. Tomkins, N., 1895, Bath thermal springs, their supposed origin and source: Bath Nat. History Field Club Proc., v. 8, p. 113-135. 1479. Travers, Morris W., 1937, The composition of the mixture of rare gases from the hot springs of Bath: Chem. Soc. London Jour., v. 128, p. 1561-1562. 1480. Tunstall, James, 1847, Rambles about Bath and its neighbourhood: London; 6th ed., 1876, revised and edited by R. E. M. Peach: London, Simpkin, Marshall & Co., 488 p., front., illus., 8 pis., 2 maps. 1481. 1850, The Bath waters, their uses and effects in the cure and relief of various chronic diseases: London and Bath, 144 p.; 4th ed., 1867, 164 p.; 5th ed., 1879, 175 p. 1482. Wagner, Richard, 1801, The history of Bath: London. 402 p., app., 123 p., front., plan; 13 illus. 1483. Walcker, Adolph, 1829a, Analysis of the mineral water of Bath: Quart. Jour. Sci., Lit., and Arts, v. 27, no. 1, p. 78-89. 1484. 1829b, Analyses of Bath water and of two mineral springs in Windsor Forest: Philos. Mag., ser. 2, v. 6, Misc. art., p. 148. 1485. Waring, Edward John, 1878-79, Biblioteca Therapeutica, or Bibliography of therapeutics, chiefly in reference to the articles of Materia Medica, with critical, historical, and therapeutical notes, and an appendix containing the bibliography of British mineral waters: London, 2 v. [v. 78 and 82 of the New Sydenham Society] ; 1878, v. 1, p. 1-427; 1879, v. 2, p. 429-933. 1486. Williamson, Alexander William, 1866, On the composi- tion of the gases evolved by the Bath spring called King’s Bath: British Assoc. Adv. Sci. Ann. Rept., 1865, p. 380-386, 5 figs. 1487. Willich, A. F. M., 1798, A comparative view of the chemi- cal and medicinal properties of the Bristol hot-well water: London. 1488. Wood, John, 1769, Description of Bath * * * its mineral waters : London, printed for J. Murray, 2 v. 1489. Woodward, Horace B., 1876, Geology of East Somerset and the Bristol Coal-fields: Geol. Survey England and Wales Mem., 271 p., 9 pis., 23 figs.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 306 1490. Woodward, Horace B., 1887, The geology of England and Wales; with notes on the physical features of the country: 2d ed., London, 670 p., 101 figs., 2 vignettes, 2 illus. See also references 26, 54, 322, 1284, 1285, 1293, and 1686. BULGARIA 1491. Angheloff, B., ca. 1948, Les eaux souterraines en Bulgarie: Union Geod. et geophys. intemat.; Assoc, internat. hydrologie sci., Washington 1939, Compte rendu, v. 2, Bept. Inv. 14, 5 p. States that total flow of 34 springs, water temperature above 30°C, is 17,195 liters per minute. 1492. Azmanov, A., 1937, Nekolko mineralni izvori v iztcenija Balkan: Trud. podz. bogat. i min. indust, na Bulgarija, v. 7, p. 199-209 [Bulgarian, German summary] ; 1939, abs., Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaonto-logie 1939, Referate 2, p. 629. 1493. Bonchev (Bonschew), G., 1939, Beitrag zu den Quellen in Bulgarien: Bulgaria Acad. Sci. Trans., v. 59, no. 30, p. 85-132. [Bulgarian, German summary.] 1494. Bourchier, James David, 1910, Bulgaria, in En- cyclopaedia Britannica: 11th ed., New York, Encyclopaedia Britannica, v. 4, p. 772-786. 1495. deLaunay, Louis, 1907, La Bulgarie d’hier et de demain: Paris, Hachette, 494 p., 26 illus., map. 1496. Kanazirsky, Vernie Georges, 1936, La Bulgarie tou- ristique; guide complet: Sofia, Balkantourist, 175 p. Mentions the localities of 34 thermal springs. 1497. Koen (Cohen), El Raf; Dimitrov, Ts.; and Kamenov, B., eds., 1946, Geologie de la Bulgarie: Bulgaria, Direction en Recherches g§ol. et miniires, Ann., ser, A, v. 4, 448 p., illus. [Bulgarian; French and Russian summaries] ; 1952, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 16, 1951, p. 165. 1498. Nickolow, N., and Radew, W. G., 1927, Hidro-Geologische Untersuchung der Umgebung der Thermalquellen in Karlovo-Bezirk, Bulgarien: Zeitschr. Bulgarien geol. Gesell, v. 1, p. 5-60, 6 pis. [Bulgarian, German summary.] 1499. 1932, Hydrogeologische Studien fiber die Thermal-quelle b.d. Dorfe Banja (Bezirk Karlowo), mit Berfick-sichtigung ihrer Fassung: Zeitschr. Bulgarien geol. Gesell., v. 4, no. 2, p. 157-166, 3 pis. [Bulgarian, German summary.] 1500. Pentcheff, N. P., 1927, Recherches sur les gaiz rares de quelques sources thermales de Bulgarie: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 185, p. 511-513. 1501. 1928, ’ Recherches sur les gaz rares de quelques sources thermales de Bulgarie: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 186, p. 249-251. 1502. Petkov, Joseph, 1932, Bulgarie: Sofia, Imprimerie de l’Etat bulgare, 248 p., illus., map. Includes data on about 30 springs. 1503. Petrov (Petroff), F., 1930, Les eaux min6rales en Bul- garie: Sofia. [Bulgarian, French summary.] 1504. Radoslawoff, B. M., 1931, Das Bergwesen Bulgariens unter besonderer Berficksichtigung der Steinbrfiche und Mineralquellen: Kgl. Bulg. Min. Handel, Gew. u. Arb., Sofia, 68 p.; 1932, abs., Geol. Zentralbl., v. 46, no. 5, p. 280. 1505. Vankova, Andreicheva, and Kalcheva, D., 1938 [Physico- chemical and biological studies on some Bulgarian mineral waters] : Univ. Sofia Ann. 2, Fac., phys.-math., v. 2, no. 34, p. 411-446 [Bulgarian, French summary] ; 1940, Chem. Abs., v. 34, col. 2502. 1506. Wassileff (Vassilev), G. N, 1937 [The hot springs of Bulgaria] Schema der Thermalwasserquellen Bulgariens : Berg- u. htittenm. Jahrb. Leoben v. 85, no. 3-4, p. 383-392 [German] ; 1938, Chem. Abs., v. 32, col. 3063. Lists the locations of 72 thermal springs. 1507. Weiss-Bartenstein, Walter K., 1915, Bulgariens nutzbare Mineralien und ihre Ausbeutung: Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 23, no. 10-11, p. 89-104, 5 figs. CZECHOSLOVAKIA 1508. Becher, David, 1772, Neu Abhandlung von Karlsbade. 1509. Becke, Friedrich, 1883, Barytkrystalle in den Quellbil- dungen der Teplitzer Thermen: Tschermak’s mineralog. petrog. Mitt, (new ser.), v. 5, p. 82-84. 1510. Behounek, F., 1936 [Methods and results of testing ther- mal waters for radioactivity] : Archives med. hydr., v. 14, no. 2, p. 137-142; 1939, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1938, v. 10, no. 1, p. 171. • Contains information on the thermal springs of Pistyan and some other springs in Czechoslovakia. 1511. Berzelius, Jons Jakob, 1822, Undersokning af Mineral- Vattnen i Carlsbad, Toplitz och Konigswart i Bohmen: Stockholm Acad. Hand!, p. 139-182, 195-232; Annalen chimie, v. 21, p. 246-250; 1823, Annalen Physik (Gilbert), v. 74; p. 113-212, 276, 302. 1512. Buchtala, J., 1928, Der Geysir von Herlany. Einheitliche Erkiirung der versehiedenen Geysirphaenomene an einem aerohydrodynamischen Apparate: Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 36, no. 9, p. 149-154, 8 figs. 1513. Cherbuliez, Emile, and Herzenstein, Anna, 1934 [New sulfur constituent of the thermal waters of Pistany, Czechoslovakia] : Helvetica Chim. Acta, v. 17, p. 1587-1592,1935, Chem. Abs., v. 29, col. 5208. 1514. Delkeskamp, Rudolf, 1900, Entstehung und Wegfuhrung des Baryts: Notizbl. Ver. Erdkunde Darmstadt., v. 4, no. 21, p. 55-83. Mentions the deposition of barytes at or near the spring of Karlsbad. 1515. Druce, J. G. F., 1927, The waters of some Czecho-slovak health resorts: Chem. News, v. 135, p. 169-173, 10 illus. 1516. 1928, Slovakian mud bath: Chemist and Druggist [London], v. 108, p. 467; 1929, Chem. Abs., v. 23, p. 4533. Describes the hot spring at Trencsen-Teplice. 1517. Goethe, Johann Wolfgang von, 1807, Sammlung zur Kennt- niss der Gebirge von und um Karlsbad: Leonhard, Taschenb. I., p. 1-52. Discusses the origin of the thermal springs at Karlsbad. 1518. Haidinger, Wilhelm, 1854, Barytkrystalle, als Absatz der neuen Militiirbadhausquelle in Karlsbad: K.-k. geol. Reischsanst. Wien, Jahrb., v. 5, p. 142-148. 1519. Hibsch, J. E., 1906, Ueber tertiare Fluoritgange im Be- reiche der Erzgebirgsbruchzone und des Teplitzer Quartzporphyrs in Nordbohmen: Tschermak’s mineralog. petrog. Mitt., v. 25, p. 482-488. Discusses fluorite desposits in the area of the Teplitz thermal springs. 1520. 1908, Uber das Auftreten gespannten Wassers von hoherer Temperatur innerhalb der Schichten der oberen Kreideformation in Nordbohmen: Geol. Reichsanst. Wien Jahrb., v. 58, p. 305-310.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 1521. Hochstetter, Ferdinand Christian von, 1858, Karlsbad, seine geognostischen Verhaltnisse und seine Quellen: Berlin. 1522. Hoff, K. E. A. von, 1825, Bemerkungen iiber Karlsbad: Kastner, Archiv Naturl., v. 6, no. 1, p. 103-144. 1523. Hoffman, Josef, 1938, Zur Frage der Barytenstehung aus den Karlsbader Quellen: Austria, Geol. Bundesanst. Verh. 10, p. 186-189. 1524. 1939, Tiber das Radium-Uranverhaltnis in Karlsbader Thermen: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturh. Kl., Anz., v. 76, Abt. 18-19, p. 114-116; 1952, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 16, 1951, p. 138. 1525. 1940 [The proportion of radioactive substances, the determination of hitherto unknown, and the establishment of some doubtful constituents of the Karlsbad hot springs] : Balneologie, v. 7, p. 353; 1942, Chem. Abs., v. 36, col. 5700. 1526. 1941 [Uranium in the northerly part of the Erzgebirge fracture-zone] : Monatsh. Chemie., v. 73, p. 242-253 [German] ; 1942, Chem. Abs., v. 36, col. 4784. Contains information on uranium and radon in the water of the thermal springs at Teplitz. 1527. Holluta, J., and Hermann, W., 1938, Untersuchungen an einer Mineralquelle in Bad Karlsbrunn: Naturf. Ver. Briinn Verh., v. 69, p. 14-20; 1949, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 13, 1948, p. 123. 1528. Hynie, Ota, 1949 [Geology of the mineral springs in Bo- hemia and Moravia] : Geotechnica (Czechoslovakia, Stdtnl Geol. TJstav) v. 7, 83 p., illus. [Czech; Russian and English summaries] ; 1951, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1950, v. 23, no. 1, p. 89. 1529. Hynie, Ota, and Kodym, Odolen, 1936, Zridla * * * Die Quellen des Sauerlinges von Bad Teplice an der Becva und die Rekonstruktion ihrer Fassung in den Jahren 1932-1934: Czechoslovakia, St&tni Geol. f’stav Sbornik, v. 11, p. 61-117, 6 pis., 4 figs. [Czech, German summary] ; 1939, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 6,1938, p. 125. 1530. John, Johann Dionys, 1792, Die Bader zu Teplitz in Boh- men * * » . Dresden, Germany. 1531. Judd, John Wesley, 1876, On the ancient volcano of the district of Schemnitz, Hungary; Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 32, no. 127, p. 292-325, 1 pi., 4 figs. Contains information on the thermal springs of Vichnye (Eisenbach) and Skleno (Glashuette), in the Schemnitz district, also on the hot-spring deposits of siliceous sinter and calcareous tufa. 1532. Kampe, Robert, 1924, Heilquellen und Bergbau: Karls- bader Arztliche Vortaiige [Jena], v. 5, 56 p. 1533. 1930, Die Entstehung der Karlsbader Thermen; Zeitschr. Wiss. Baderkunde, v. 4, p. 597; abs., Wasser u. Abwasser, v. 27, no. 8, p. 229. 1534. 1933, Die Karlsbader Thermen als gasfuhrende Quellen: Freiberger geol. Gesell. Ber., v. 14, p. 32-36. 1535. Knett, Josef, 1898, Verhalten der Karlsbader Thermen wahrend des vogtliindiseh westbohmisehen Erdbebens im October-November 1897: Akad. Wiss Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 107, pt. 1, p. 669-698,10 pis., 3 figs. 1536. 1899, Zur Kenntnis der Beeinflussuug der Teplitzer Urquelle durch das Lissaboner Erdbeben: Deutscher 307 naturw.-med. Ver. Bohmen, “Lotos,” Sitzungsber., v. 47, p. 320-333. 1531. Knett, Josef, 1901, Die geologischen Verhaltnisse von Karlsbad: Vienna, Organ Ver. Bohrtechniker (mit Chemiker u. Techniker Zeitung). 1538. 1902, Der Boden der Stadt Karlsbad und seine Thermen : Vers, deutsche naturf. Aerzte, Festschr. 74, p. 59. 1539. 1905, Nichtbeeinflussung der Karlsbader Thermen durch das Lissaboner Erdbeben ; Deutscher naturw. -med. Ver. Biihmen, “Lotos,” Souderabdruck Sitzungsber., no. 5, 5 p. 1540. Kolhbrster, Werner, 1912, Beitrage zur Kenntnis der ra- dioactiven Eigenschaften des Karlsbader Sprudels: Deutsche phys. Gesell. Verh., v. 14, p. 356. 1541. Kratzman, Eduard, 1862, Geschichte der Teplitzer Ther- man: Teplitz, Czechoslovakia. 1542. Kraus, J., 1891, Carlsbad and its natural healing agents from the physiological and therapeutical point of view: 4th ed., London, Trubner & Co. 1543. Kretschmer, Franz, 1919, Die Geologie der Sehwefelquel- len bei Gross-Ullersdorf (Miihren) : Neues Jahrb. Mi-neralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1919, Referate, p. 69-90, 2 figs. Contains information on several springs in the Gross-Ullersdorf district in Moravia, also on the sulfur springs at Bad Landeck in Poland. 1544. Laube, G. C., 1898, Die an der Urquelle in Teplitz am 1. November 1755 wahrend des Erdbebeus von Lissabon wahrgenommenen Erscheinungen: Sitzungsber. “Lotos,” Prague. 1545. Mahel’, Michal, 1948, La geologie des environs de Transci- anske Teplice: Slovakia, Stfitny Geol. f'stav, Pr. sbsit 17, p. 187-240, 5 pis. [Czech; French and Russian summaries] ; 1950, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 14, 1949, p. 166. Contains information on the thermal springs of Trencsen-Teplice. 1546. 1950, Origine des eaux minf'rales de Piestany-les-bains : Geol. Sbornik (SlovenskA Akad. Vied a Umeni) v. 1, no. 2-4, p. 94-105, illus. [Czech; Russian and French summaries] ; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20, 1955, p. 336. 1547. Matejka, Alois, 1936, Les sources min^rales des Bains de Sliac in Slovaquie au point de vue geologique: Czechoslovakia, Statny Geol. f’stav V£stnik, v. 12, no. 3-4, p. 93-111, 4 figs. [Czech; French summary] ; 1938, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America v. 5, 1937, p. 191. 1548. Merrylees, John, 1886, Carlsbad and its environs: with a medical treatise on the use of the waters, by B. London: London, S. Low, Marston & Co., Ltd., 199 p., 14 illus., plan. 1549. Michel, H., 1938, Die Bohmischen Bader: Umschau, v. 42, p. 1172; 1939, abs., Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie Geologie; u. Palaontologie, 1939, Referate 2, p. 625-627. 1550. Michler, Otto, 1932, Woher kommt der Karlsbader Spru- del?: Ver. Naturfreunde Reichenberg Mitt., v. 54, p. 3-51. 1551. Montessus de Ballore, Robert Fernand Bernard (viscomte de), 1904, Les thermes de Karlsbad en Boheme: Cosmos [Paris], new ser., v. 53, no. 993, p. 180-184, 7 figs. 1552. Noszky, E., 1929a, Der Pseudogeysir von Rank-Herlfiny: Foldtani Kilzlony, v. 59, p. 56-59 [Hungarian] ; 116-119 [German],THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 308 1553. Noszky, E., 1929b, Der Pseudogeysir von Rank-IIerlany: Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 37, no. 5, p. 72-73. 1554. Ovchinnikov, A. M., 1955 [Mineral waters of the health resort Karlovo Vary [Karlsbad] in Czechoslovakia] : Voprosy kurortologii, Fizioterapii, i Lecheb., no. 3, p. 66-71 [Russian] ; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 2311. 1555. Reuss, Ambrosius, 1835, Die Baeder von Toeplitz und ihre bewunderungswuerdige Heilkraft bei vielen und haufig vorkommender ausseren und inneren Krankheiten: Leitmeritz, Czechoslovakia. 1556. Ritter, Adolph, 1909, Carlsbad and its springs, a clinical study Munich, Germany, 105 p. [A prize essay published by the town council of Carlsbad, translated from the German.] 1557. Rosiwal, August, 1894, Ueber neue Massnahmen zum Schutze der Karlsbader Thermen: Geol. Reichsanst. Wien, Jahrb., v. 44, p. 671,1 pi. 1558. Schmelkes, Gottfried, 1867, Sedimente meiner Praxis an den Thermen zu Toeplitz : Berlin, A. Hirschwald. 1559. Schneider, Franz Coelestin, 1874, Untersuchung der Ther- men von Trentschin-Teplitz und des Siiuerlings von Kubra: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Sit-zungsber., v. 69, pt. 2, p. 72-90. 1560. Schneider, Karl, 1913, Beitrage zur Theorie der Heissen Quellen: Geol. Rundschau, p. 65-402, 2 pis., figs. Includes a discussion of the Bohemian thermal zone. 1561. Silar, Jan, 1956 [Hydrogeological relations of the sulfur hot springs of Velke Losiny, Moravia] : Univ. Carolina Geologica, v. 2, p. 25-43 [Czech, German summary] ; 1957, abs., Chem. Abs., v. 51, col. 15841. 1562. Sipocz, Lajos (Ludwig), 1904, Carlsbad, its springs and spring products: 7th ed., Carlsbad, Germany, 68 p., front., 14 figs., plan. [English.] 1563. Sparmann, Johann Wilhelm, 1733, Kurze doch Griindliche Beschreibung aller in und vor der Stadt Toplitz befind-lichen Warmen Bader * * *: Dresden and Leipzig, Germany. 1564. Sprenger, E., 1930, Bacillariales aus den Thermen und der Umgebung von Karlsbad: Archiv Protistenkunde [Karlsbad], v. 71, p. 502-542. 1565. Suess, Franz E., 1899, Die Thermalquellen von Teplitz und ihre Geschichte: Geol. Reichsanst. Wien Jahrb., v. 48, p. 425-426, 3 pis. 1566. 1900, Eline Bemerkung fiber die Einwirkung des Erdbe-bens von Lissabon auf die Thermalquellen von Teplitz: Geol. Reichsanst. Wien Verh., p. 55-63. 1567. Troschel, Heinrich Gottlieb, 1761, AUgemeine Bemerkun- gen fiber das Teplitzer Wasser * * *; Greiz, Germany. 1568. Vater, Heinrich, 1902, Ueber Ktypeit und Conchit: Zeitschr. Krystallographie, v. 35, p. 149-178. 1569. Waagen, W., 1888, Theorie der Teplitzer Thermalquellen: Tech. Blatter, v. 20, pt. 3, p. 173-188. 1570. Warnsdorff, E R. von, 1846, Einige Bemerkungen fiber die Granite von Karlsbad: Neues Jahrb. Minerologie, Geognosie, Geologie u. Petrefaktenkunde, 1846, p. 385-405, 2 pis. Contains information on the thermal springs near Karlsbad. 1571. Watznauer, A., 1938, Die geologischen Grundlagen der Therme von Johannisbad: Firgenwald, v. 11, nos 1, 3, p. 3-13, 101-111, 5 figs.; 1939, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 6,1938, p. 314. 1572. Weithofer, K. A., 1933, Die Karlsbader Thermen und der Bergbau, nebst einigen allgemeinen Bermerkungen ueber Mineralquellen: Neues Jahrib. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, Beilage-Band 70, Abt. B, p. 116-138. 1573. Zittman, Johann Friedrich, and Schwenke, Christian Gotthold, 1754, Pralctische Anmerkungen von den Teplitzer Badern: Dresden and Leipzig, Germany. 1574. Zsigmondy, W., 1877, Die artiesische Springquelle in Rfink-IIerlany in Oberungarn: Ungar. Karpathenver. Jahrb. [Kesmark], v. 4. 1575. Ziikert, Johann Friedrich, 1768, Systematische Beschrei- bung aller Gesundbrunnen und Bader Deutschlands: Berlin and Leipzig. See also references 54, 92, 1279, 1285, 1287, 1291, 1293, 1304, 1310, 1330, 1340, 1699, 1807, 1892, 1901, 1904, 1943, 2076, and 2248. FRANCE 1576. Aleixandre, Joaquin, and Castells, Rosendo (Secre- taries), 1903, Section d’hydrologie mSdicale: Cong, internat. medecine, 14®, Madrid 1903, Comptes rendus, 286 p. 1577. Alibert, Jean Louis, 1826, Precis historique sur les eaux minerales. 1578. Anglada, Joseph, 1821, Sur le degagement du gaz azote du sein des eaux minerales sulfureuses: Annales chimie et physique, ser. 2, v. 18, p. 113-133; rev., Quart. Jour. Sci., Lit., and Arts, v. 12, p. 409-410. 1579. 1827, Memoires pour servir a l'histoire generate des eaux minerales sulfureuses et des eaux thermales : Paris, 2 v. 1580. 1833, Traite des eaux minerales et des etablissements thermaux du Departement des Pyrenees-Orientales. Paris, BailliSre, 2 v.; v. 1, 382 p., 4 illus., map; v. 2, 560 p., 2 illus. 1581. Armand, Louis, 1934, Considerations hydrologiques sur quelques sources minerales du Massif Central: Paris, Coll. France, Inst, hydrologie et climatologie Annales, v. 9, pt. 4, no. 34, p. 221-241, 7 figs. (incl. sketch map) ; 1943, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 9, 1941-42, p. 11. 1582. Armand, Louis, and Blanquet, L., 1934, Les eaux minerales de Chateldon et leur radioactivite: Annales mines, ser. 13, v. 5, no. 2, p. 82-89. 1583. Bardet, Godefroy, 1912, Stations de France et stations d’Allemagne; etude comparee; Notes hydrologiques, 2® s6r.: Paris, O. Doin et Fils, 135 p. 1584. Bardet, Jacques, 1913, Etude spectographique des eaux minerales frangaises: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 157, p. 224-226. 1585. Battesti, F., 1905, Etude medicate sur les climats et les eaux minerales de la Corse: Soc. sci. hist, et nat. Corse, no. 276,102 p., Bastia, France. 1586. Bechamp, A., and Gautier, Armand, 1861, Nouvelle analyse chimique de l’eau thermale du Balaruc-les-Bains: Acad, sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 52, p. 863-864. 1587. Berthier, P., 1810, Analyse de l’eau minerale de Chaudes- Aigues (Cantal) : Jour, mines, v. 27, p. 141-153. 1588. 1820, Analyse de l’eau de deux sources min6rales de Chaudes-Aigues (Cantal) : Annales mines, v. 5, p. 499-506. 1589. 1821a, Analyse des eaux minerales de N6ris (d£parte-ment de l’Allier) : Annales mines, v. 6, 311-312.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 309 1590. Berthier, P., 1821b, Analyse eaux min5rales et thermales du Mont-Dore: Annales chimie, v. 19, p. 25-32. Quart. Jour. Sci., v. 13, p. 417-418,1822. 1591. 1821c, Notice sur les eaux minyrales et thermales de Saint-Nectaire, d£partement du Puy-de-Dome: Annales chimie, v. 19, p. 122-136; 1822, Quart. Jour. Sci., v. 13, p. 396. 1592. 1828 [Analysis of water of Bourbon-Lancy] : Annales mines, ser. 2, v. 3, p. 98. 1593. Berthier, P., and Puvis, C., 1820, Notice sur les eaux minerales et thermales de Vichy (dfpartement d’Allier) ; Annales mines, v. 5, p. 401-420; 1821, Annales chimie, 2 ser., v. 16, p. 439-442. 1594. Besson, Paul, 1908, Radioactivity des eaux d’Uriage-les- Bains (Isere) : Acad. Sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 147, p. 848-850. 1595. Billard, G., and Mougeot, A., 1912, Action catalytique des eaux thermo-miny rales de Royat prises au griffon : Soc. biol. Paris Comptes rendus, v. 72, p. 1050-1052. 1596. Blanc, G. A., 1905, On radioactivity of mineral springs: Philos, Mag., 6th ser., v. 9, no. 49, p. 148-154, 4 figs. 1597. Blanchard, R., 1903, Observations sur la faune des eaux chaudes: Soc. biol. Paris Comptes rendus, v. 55, p. 947-950. 1598. Blanchet, F., 1939, Les sources tliermo-minyrales du Plan- de-Phazy et de R£otier, pres Mont-Dauphin (Hautes-Alpes) ; leur composition chimique, leur origine geolo-gique: Univ. Grenoble, Sec. sci. mfidecines, Annales, v. 16, p. 1-17, 1 pi., 3 figs.; Univ. Grenoble lab. g£ologie, fac. sec. Travaux, v. 22, p. 1-17,1940; 1949, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 13, 1948, p. 28; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19, 1954, p. 45. 1599. Blanquet, L., Aubignat, A., Cuvelier, R., Tronche, P., and de la Tour, J., 1950 [The mineral waters of Chaudes-aigues] : Inst, hydrologie et climatologie Annales, v. 21, p. 109-137; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 4665. 1600. Boucomont, Francisque, 1879, Les eaux minerales d’Au- vergne, Paris: 2d ed., V. A. Delahaye et Cie, 232 p., 11 pis., map. 1601. Boudant, Jean Julien, 1877, Les eaux minerales du Mont- Dore, topographie, propriytes physiques et chimiques; Clinique m5dicale: Paris, Baill&re. 1602. Bouquet, J., 1854, Histoire chimique des eaux minerales et thermales de Vichy, Ousset, Vaisse, Hauterive, et Saint-Yorre; analyses des eaux minerales de Medague, Chateldon, Brugheas et Seuillet: Annales chimie et physique, ser. 3, v. 42, p. 278-363; Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 39, p. 326-329; 1855, Jour, phar-macie, v. 27, p. 104-115, 198-205. 1603. Brajnikov, Boris, 1936, Contribution a l’ytude hydrogdo- logique des Pyrenees ariSgeoises: Paris, Coll. France, Inst, hydrologie et climatologie Annales, v. 11, pt. 4, p. 249-282, 5 figs.; 1943, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 9, 1941-42, p. 35-36. 1604. Bresson, A., 1906, Reunion extraordinaire dans les PyrA ndes occidentales (Luz, Gavarnie, et les Eaux Ohau-des) ; Soc. g6ol. France Bull., ser. 4, v. 6, p. 777-852, 18 figs., map. 1605. Brochet, Andre, 1910a, Nouvelles determinations de la radioactivity des eaux thermales de Plombifires: Acad, sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 150, p. 145-148. 1606. Brochet, Andre, 1910b, Radioactivity de quelques sources sauvages des Vosges: Acad sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 150, p. 291-293. 1607. 1910c, Relation entre la radioactivity et la richesse en extrait sec, des eaux thermales de Plombi5res: Acad, sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 150, p. 423-425. 1608. 1910d, La radioactivity des sources thermales de Plom-toiyres et des Vosges: Annales mines, ser. 10, v. 17, p. 437-477, 3 figs., 5 tables. 1609. Brugne, J., 1948 [Aerosols from thermal waters at Lu- chon] : Rev. pathologie compare et hygiene gyn., v. 48, p. 315-320. Chem. Abs., v. 42, col. 1531. 1610. Brustier, Vincent, Auvergnat, R., and Vignes, R., 1594 [A study of the waters from the hot springs of Bagnferes-de-Bigorre] : Soc, pharm. Montpellier Travaux, v. 14, p. 188-190; 1955, Chem. Abs., v. 49, col. 4913. 1611. Brustier, Vincent, and Garcia-Fernandez, Henri, 1950, Sur la prysence du soufre libre h l’ytat colloidal dans certaines sources sulfuryes de Luchon (Haute-Garonne) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 230, no. 3, p. 317-319,1 fig. 1612. Camere, 1885, Etude sur les eaux minerales de ChStel- Guyon: Annales mines, ser. 8, v. 8, p. 300-322, 8 figs. 1613. Carnot, Adolphe, 1885, Analyses des eaux minyrales Frangaises, exycutyes au Bureau d’Essai de l’ficole des Mines: Annales mines, ser. 8, v. 7, p. 79-142. 1614. 1894, Analyses des eaux minyrales Frangaises, exycu-teys au Bureau d’Essai de l’Ecole des Mines: Annales mines, ser. 9, v. 6, p. 355-457. 1615. 1899, Analyses des eaux minyrales Frangaises, exycu-tees au Bureau d’Essai de 1’lScole nationale supdrieure des Mines: Annales mines, ser. 9, v. 16, p. 33-94. 1616. Carrere, Joseph Barthelemy Frangois, 1785, Catalogue raisonny des ouvrages qui ont yty publiys sur les eaux minyrales en gyneral et sur celles de la France en particulier, avec une notice de toutes les eaux minerales de ce royaume et un tableau des dlffyrents degrys de tempyrature de celles qui sont thermales: Paris, Soc. royale mydecine, 584 p. 1617. Castagne, Robert, 1925, Radioactivity des sources de quel- ques stations des Alpes (Aix-les-Bains, Challes-les-Eaux [cold]), des Pyr5nyes (Bagnferes-de-Bigorre), et des Cdvennes (Lamalou-les-Bains, Balaruc-les-Bains, les Fumades), et des gaz naturels de Vergyze (Gard), de Herypian et de Gabian (Hyrault) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 180, p. 510-512. 1618. Castanie, 1933, Le nouvel ytablissement thermal d’Aix-les- Bains: Ministfire Sanity Publique. 1619. Caujolle, F., 1932, Alcalinity ionique des sources sulfuryes de Bagneres-de-Luchon; Soc. historie nat. Toulouse Bull., v. 64, no. 3, p. 517-522; 1933, abs., Rev. Gyologie, v. 14, no. 3-4, p. 181. 1620. Cazaux, P., Canellas, J., and Thomassin, R., 1954 [The chemical constitution of sulfurated waters from Bareges, Barzun, Saint-Sauveur^ and Uriage]: Coll. France, Inst, hydrologie et climatologie Annales, v. 25, p. 47-74 [French]; 1955, Chem. Abs., v. 49, col. 13557. 1621. Cluzet and Nogier, Th., 1914, Analyse physique de quel- ques sources d’fivaux-les-Bains: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 159, p. 92-93. 1622. Cluzet, J.; Nogier, Th.; Kofman; Florence; Moret, Leon; Piery, A.; and Milhaud, M.; 1935, Les eaux minyrales et la cure de Saint-Gervais: Coll. France. Inst, hydrologie et climatologie Annales, v. 10, pt. 2, no. 36.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 310 1623. Cormac, Charles Edward, 1887, The mineral waters of Vichy and the diseases in which they are indicated: London, J. & A. Churchill., 375 p., 2 maps; new ed., 1904, The waters and baths of Vichy: Paris. 1624. Corroy, Georges, 1949, Les eaux thermo-minyrales d’Aix- en-Provence; leur histoire, leur origine: Annales Hubert et Haug (Lab. g£ol. fac. sci. Univ. Paris), v. 7, p. 99-115, illus.; 1953, abs.; Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 17,1952, p. 87. 1625. Cotar, Charles, 1913, The mineral waters of Vichy, for the use of practitioners: London, H. K. Lewis, 208 p. 1626. Curie, P., and Laborde, A., 1904, Sur la radioactivity des gaz qui se d£gagent de l’eau des sources thermales : Acad, sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 138, p. 1150-1153. 1627. 1906, Sur la radioactivity des gaz qui proviennent de l’eau des sources thermales: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 142, p. 1462-1465. 1628. D’Arsonval, A., Bordas, F., and Touplain, F., 1923, Les eaux minyrales des groupes d’Aix-les-Bains et Marlioz: Annales Falsifications et Fraudes, v. 16, no. 176, p. 268-286. 1629. 1925, Les eaux minyrales de Saint-Gervais-les-Bains, Le Fayet (Haute-Savoie) : Annales Falsifications et Fraudes, v. 18, no. 201-202, p. 454-460. 1630. 1929, Les eaux minyrales de Salins-Moutiers et de Brides-les-Bains (Savoie) : Annales Falsifications et Fraudes, v. 22, no. 242, p. 70-76. 1631. Daubeny, Charles, 1833, Remarks on a certain kind of organic matter found in sulphureous springs: Linnean Soc. London Trans., v. 16, p. 587-597; 1834, Annalen Chemie (Liebig), v. 10, p. 336-348 . 1632. Daubree, Gabriel Auguste, 1876, Sur la prysence de la tridymite dans les briques zyolithiques de PlombiSres, et du quartz dans les laves pyridotiques d’Oahu (Archipel Hawaien) : Paris, Soc. gyol. France Bull., ser. 3 v. 4, p. 523-524. 1633. Daumas, Casimir, 1867, The mineral waters of Vichy, their origin, physical properties, chemical composition, and curative effects: 4th ed., Vichy, A. Wallon, 341 p. 1634. deFreycinet, Louis, 1835, Recherches ii entreprendre pour dycouvrir la cause de la chaleur des sources thermales de Sextius, ii Aix en Provenee: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 1, correspondance, p. 445-449. 1635. 1836a, Sur les premieres expyriences faites ft Aix en Provence, aux bains de Sextius: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 2, Correspondance, p. 265-267. 1636. 1836b, Sur les eaux thermal d’Aix en Provence nom-myes les bains de Sextius: Acad, sci [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 2, p. 360-362. 1637. 1836c, Concernant les bains de Sextius: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 2, p. 408-409. 1638. Delaby, R., Charonnet, R., and Janot, M., 1933, Les vari- ations d’une source thermale; la source des Dames de PlombiSres: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 197, p. 1739-1741. 1639. deLaunay, Louis, 1888, Mymoire sur les sources minyrales deBourbon-l’Archambault: Annales mines, ser. 8, v. 13, p. 429-488. 1640. 1895a, Les sources thermales de Nyris (Allier) et d’Evaux (Creuse) : Annales mines, ser. 9 v. 7, p. 563-623. 1641. 1895b, Sur la relation des sources thermales de Nyris et d’Evaux avec les dislocations anciennes du Plateau Central: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 120, p. 1288-1291. 1642. deLaunay, Louis, 1906, Observations gyologiques sur quel- ques sources thermales (Cestona, Bagnoles, Chaudes-Aigues, Mont-Dore, etc.) : Annales mines, ser. 10, v. 9, p. 5-46,10 figs. 1643. De Laures and Becquerels, 1855, Mymoire sur les con- ferves des eaux thermales de Nyris: Soc. hydrologie mydicale [Paris] Annales, v. 1, 205 p. 1644. Delfour, H., 1937, Contribution a l’ytude physicochimique des eaux thermales de Dax et leurs variations en fonc-tion des crues de l’Adour: Univ. Bordeaux fac. medeeine, thesis, 94 p. 1645. Demarty, J., 1938, Excursion du 3 avril 1938, A Chatel- Guyon: Rev. sci. nat, Auvergne, v. 4, pt. 2, p. 123-124; 1947, abs. Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 11, 1945-46, p. 78. 1646. Druce, J. G. F., 1927, The thermal waters of Ax and of Andorra: Chemist and Druggist [London], v. 106, p. 323; 1927, Chem. Abs., v. 21, p. 3864. 1647. Dubaleu, P. E., 1912a, Les eaux chaudes du dypartement des Landes et la fosse de Capbreton: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 154, p. 673-675. 1648. 1912b, Eaux thermales des Landes et la Fosse de Cap Breton: Soc. linneau Bordeaux Actes, v. 66, p. 41^46. 1649. Duchon, Robert, 1910, Proportions yievyes de mysothorium 1 dans les eaux minyrales de Chfltel-Guyon (Puy-de-Dorne) et de radium dans l’eau du sondage des Martres d’ArtiAres (Puy-de-Dome) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 210, p. 225-228. 1650. Dufrenoy, J., 1926, Les Sulfuraires, les Beregines et les Ferrobactyries de quelques eaux thermales: Paris, Coll. France, Inst, hydrologie et climatologie Annales, v. 1, p. 27. 1651. Dupouy-Camet, J., 1946, Remarques hydrogeologiques sur les eaux thermominyrales de Dax et la rygion dacquoise: Paris, Coll. France, Inst, hydrologie et climatologie Annales, v. 17, no. 62, p. 116-130. 1652. Durand-Fardel, Ch. L. Maxime, 1851, Des eaux de Vichy, Considyryes sous les rapports Clinique et thyrapeuti-que » » * : Paris, Beauvais. 1653. 1860, Dictionnaire gynyral des eaux minyrales et d’hydro-logie Mydicale: Paris, 2 v. 1654. 1883, Traity des eaux minyrales de la France and de l’Etrange et de leur emploi dans les maladies chroniques: 3d ed., Paris, G. BailiAre, 664 p.; 1st ed., 1857, 758 p., Paris, C. BailliAre; 2d ed., 1862, New York, H. BailliAre. 1655. Durocher, J., 1853, Observations sur le gisement et l’origine des eaux sulfureuses pyrynyennes: Soc. geol. France Bull., ser. 2, v. 10, p. 424-430. 1656. Emond, E. E., 1903, The Mont-Dore thermal springs : Eng- lish ed., Clermont-Farrand. 1657. Fabre, Rene, 1941 [Examination of the Honorine spring in Cambo-les-Bains] : Acad, mydecine Paris Bull., ser. 3(?), v. 125, p. 650-653; 1942, abs., Chem. Zentralbl. 1942 [pt.] II, p. 208. 1658. Falconnier, Alfred, and others, 1952 [Hot springs of La- vey]: Soc. vaudoise sci. nat. Bull., v. 65, no. 280, p. 245-271; Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 11516. 1659. Federation Thermale et Climatique Fran^aise (Paris), 1930, The spas of France. [Cover title, Stations thermales de France] : Published in collaboration with L’lnstitut d’Hydrologie et de Climatologie and underBIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 311 the patronage of L’Office National du Tourisme, 144 p. [English.] 1660. Filhol, Edouard, 1849a, Analyse de quelques eaux mine- rales : Acad. mSdecine [Toulouse] Mem., v. 5, p. 123-124. 1661. 1849b, Sur les eaux sulfureuses thermales des Pyr6n6es: Annales chimie et physique, ser. 3, v. 27, Lettres, p. 490-493. 1662. 1850, Sur les eaux minerales de Bagneres-de-Luehon: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 30, no. 25, Memoirs presented, p. 735-738; Jour, pharmacie, v. 28, p. 177-186; Acad, medeeine [Toulouse] Mem., v. 6, p. 242-246. 1663. 1851, Recherches sur les eaux sulfur6es de Bagneres-de-Luehon et de Labass£re, suivies de considerations generates sur les eaux sulfureuses des Pyrenees: Jour, pharmacie, v. 20, p. 80-89; 1851, Jour, chimie mdd., v. 7, p. 743-745. 1664. 1852, Note sur la composition de Pair des piscines, des salles de douches, et des etuves de Bagn&res-de-Luchon: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 34, p. 679-681. 1665. 1853, De la constitution chimique des eaux de Bagn5res-de-Luchon prises sur les lieux d’emploi: Acad. sci. Toulouse Mdm., v. 3, p. 170-176. 1666. 1855, Nouvelles recherches sur les eaux minerales des Pyrenees: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 41, no. 18, Mem., p. 693-695. 1667. 1863, Analyse des eaux minerales de Bareges: Acad, sci. Toulouse Mem., v. 13(?), p. 170-180. 1668. Fontan, J. P. Amedee, 1853, Recherches sur les eaux minerales des Pyrenees, de l’Allemagne * * * : 2d ed., Paris. 1669. Forbes, James David, 1836, On the temperatures and geo- logical relations of certain hot springs, particularly those of the Pyrenees; and on the verification of thermometers; Royal Soc. [London] Philos. Trans., v. 2, p. 571-616, 1 pi., 2 figs. 1670. 1837, Remarks illustrative of the physical geography of the Pyrenees, particularly in relation to hot springs: British Assoc. Adv. Sci. Rept., 1836, v. 5, Notices and abs., p. 83. 1671. 1900, Travels through the Alps, by the late James D. Forbes; new edition, revised and annotated by W. A. B. Coolidge: London, A. & C. Black, 572 p., front., 37 illus., 9 sketches, 6 maps. 1672. Fritsch, A., Pinset-Harstriim, I., and Coursaget, J, 1958 [Radioactive content of water and gases from thermal sources at La Bourboule, Le Mont-Dore, and Royat] : Comm, energie atomique (France) Rept. 576, 4 p.; 1959, Chem. Abs., v. 53, col. 22627. 1673. Garrigou, F., 1877, Sur la presence du mercure dans la source du Rocher, a l’etablissement du mont Cornadore (Saint-Nectaire-le-Haut, Puy-de-Dome) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 84, p. 963-965. 1674. Gautier, Armand, 1901, Origine des eaux thermales sul- fureuses. Sulfosilicates et oxysulfures ddrivds des silicates naturels: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 132, p. 740-746; rev., Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 9, p. 279. 1675. Geslin, Marcel, 1954, Etude des eaux de la region de Cau- terets (Hautes-Pyrendes) : Inst, hydrologie et clima-tologie Annales, v. 25, no. 76, p. 35-38; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20,1955, p. 186. 1676. Geze, Bernard, 1937, Observations sur le volcanisme dans la region de Montpellier: Soc. geol. France Bull., ser 5., v. 7, Compte rendus, p. 261-262. 1677. Glangeaud, Ph, 1913, Les caractdristiques des eaux de source des formations volcaniques de l’Auvergne: Acad, sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 157, p. 1031-1033. 1678. 1920, Le geyser des Martres d’Artieres (Puy-de-Dome) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 170, p. 888-891. 1679. 1924, Le bassin hydromineral de Saint-Nectaire (Puy-de-Dome) ; ses dislocations et son cadre volcanique: Acad, sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 178, p. 538-541, 1 fig. 1680. 1927, Sur l’origine des sources minerales fumerolliennes de Royat (Puy-de-Dome) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 184, p. 1299-1302. 1681. Granville, Augustus Bozzi, 1859, The mineral springs of Vichy; a sketch of their chemical and physical characters and their efficacy in the treatment of various diseases, by the author of “The spas of Germany,” “The spas of England,” etc.; London, J. Churchill, 243 p. 1682. Greppo, J. G. Honore, 1846, Etudes archgologiques sur les eaux thermales ou minerales de la Gaule a l’epoque romaine: Paris, Leleux, 318 p. 1683. Jacquet, Ch., 1926, Recherches sur les sources radioactives du Puy-de-Dome: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 183, p. 227-229. 1684. Jacquot, Eugene, 1865, Sur le gisement des sources min6- rales du d6partement du Gers et sur les relations qui les rattachen't au systeme des Pyrenees: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 60, p. 967-970. 1685. Jacquot, Eugene, and Willm, Edmund, 1894, Les eaux minerales de la France; Etudes chimiques et g^ologi-ques : Paris, Baudry et Cie., 602 p., 21 figs. Discusses the genesis, composition, and occurrence of mineral waters. Lists 1,200 mineral springs including 23 thermal springs discharging more than 5,000 hectoliters per day. The total flow from the large thermal springs is 326,400 hectoliters per day. 1686. James, Constantin, 1852, Guide pratique aux eaux minerales de France * * * quelques mots sur les eaux minerales de l’Angleterre: 2d ed., Paris. 1687. 1861, Guide pratique aux eaux minerales Franqaises et Etrangeres; suivi d’6tudes sur les bains de mer et l’hydrotherapie d’un traitd de therapeutique thermale: 5th ed., Paris, V. Masson et Fils, 615 p.; 15th ed., 1886, Paris, Libr. Bloud et Barrai, 380 p. Describes briefly the thermal and mineral springs in France, Belgium, Germany, Switzerland, and Italy. 1688. Jeannel and Jacquin, 1909 [Analyses of the waters of Mont-Dore] : Annales hydrologie et climatologie m£d., v. 54( ?). 1689. Jung, J., 1939, Introduction a l’6tude de la temperature des sources dans les departements du Puy-de-Dome, du Cantal, de la Correze et de la Haute Loire: Rev. sci. nat. Auvergne, v. 5, p . 73-79. 1690. Jurain, Georges, 1955, Sur la teneur en uranium d’eaux thermales du sud des Vosges: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 241, no. 21, p. 1482-1485; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America , v . 20, 1955, p. 264. 1691. Jutier, 1858, Sur les sources minerales de Plombi&res: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 47, p. 211-212. 735-914 O—65—•—21THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 312 1692. Kilian, Wilfrid, 1924, Sur l’origine probable des eaux thermales d’Aix-les-Bains (Savoie) et le role des accidents tectoniques dans la thermalisation et la mineralisation des sources: Soc. g£ol. Belgique, Livre Jubilaire (50th anniversaire, 1874-1924) : v. 1, pt. 1, p. 97-102, 1 pi. 1693. Kilian, Wilfred, and Blanchet, F., 1921, Sur la presence d’une nappe sous-alluvionnaire d’eau thermale et mineralisee dans le lit de la Durance, k Serre-Ponqon (Hautes-Alpes) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 172, p. 1564-1567. 1694. Lagrange, R., and Urbain, Pierre, 1953, Repartition des elements decelables spectrographiquement dans les eaux thermominerales: Soc. franqaise mineralogie et crystal-lographie Bull., v. 76, no. 4—6, p. 208-215; Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 9867; 1954, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 18, 1953, p. 213. 1695. Laissus, C., 1896, Les eaux thermales de Brides-les-Bains et de Salins-Moutfers : 2d ed., Paris. 1696. Landelle, Armand, 1904, Les eaux sulfurees sodiques. Stations Pyr6neennes: Toulouse. 1697. Laussedat, 1901, Les bains de Royat & eau gazeuse courante: Soc. hydrologie et climatologie med. Paris Annales, v. 6, p. 353-372. 1698. LeCoq, Henri, 1865, Les eaux minerales du Massif Central de la France, consid6r£es dans leurs rapports avec la chimie et la geologic: Paris, Poisay. 1699. Lee, Edwin, 1854, The baths of France, central Germany, and Switzerland: 3d ed., revised and enlarged, London, J. Churchill, 208 p.; 1857 ed., The baths of Germany, France, and Switzerland: London, 2 v.; 1863 ed., The principal baths of Germany, France, and Switzerland: London, J. Churchill; 1867 ed., The principal baths of France, Switzerland, and Savoy: London. 1700. Lefort, Jules, 1849, Analyse de l’eaux min^rale de l’enclos des Celestins a Vichy: Jour, pharmacie, v. 16, p. 14-17. 1701. 1855, Etudes chimiques et physiques des eaux minyrales et thermales de Chateauneuf (Puy-de-DOme) : Jour, pharmacie, v. 27, p. 241-252. 1702. 1857a, Etude chimique sur les eaux minerales et thermales de Royat et de Chamalieres (Puy-de-D6me) : Jour, pharmacie, v. 31, p. 84-94. 1703. 1875b, Recherches sur la composition chimique de l’eau min6rale de N6yrac (Ardeche) : Jour, pharmacie, v. 32, p. 25-37. 1704. 1857c, Nouvelle analyse de l’eau minerale et thermale de NSyrac (Ardeche) : Jour, pharmacie, v. 32, p. 264-268. 1705. 1859a, Analyse chimique de l’eau mindrale de Saint Alban (Loire) : Jour, pharmacie, v. 35, p. 267-270. 1706. 1859b, Traits de chimie hydrologique: Paris. 1707. 1863, Note sur l’existence du caesium et du rubidium dans les sources thermales de Sail-les-Chateaumorand (Loire) : Jour, pharmacie, v. 44, p. 276-278. 1708. 1866, Etude pour servir a l’histoire des gaz des eaux minerales en general et des eaux thermales de N6ris en particular: Jour, pharmacie, ser. 2, v. 3, p. 321-324. 1709. Lemoine, E., 1935, La source thermo-mindrale de La Le- chere: Soc. histoire nat. Savoie Bull, v. 23, p. 167-183. Chambdry; 1938, abs., Rev. gdologie, v. 18, p. 249-250. 1710. Lepape, Adolphe, 1923a, Radioactivity des sources de quelques stations des Pyrenees (Bagn&res-de-Luchon, Vernet, les Escaldas, Thuds), et du Plateau Central (La Bourboule, Royat, Saint-Nectaire, Sail-les-Bains) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 176, p. 1702-1705. 1711. Lepape, Adolphe, 1923b, Relations entre la radioactivity, la temperature et la sulfuration des sources de Bagndres-de-Luchon. Hypothdse explicative: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 176, p. 1908-1910. 1712. 1927, Sur l’origine de la radioactivity des sources de Bagneres-de-Luehon : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 185, p. 1292-1294, 1 fig. 1713. Lepape, Adolphe, and Geslin, Marcel, 1940, Radioactivity des sources hydrominerales de Chatel-Guyon (Puy-de-DOme). Sources trds riches en thoron: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 210, p. 223-225. 1714. 1954, Radioactivity de quelques eaux des sources de Cauterets et de Luz-Saint-Sauveur (Hautes-Pyrynyes) : Inst, hydrologie et climatologie Annales v. 25, no. 76, p. 27-33; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20, 1955, p. 317. 1715. Lepape, Adolphe, and Moureau, Charles, 1920, Analyse radioactive des sources thermales de BagnOres-de-Luchon. Sources trfes riches en ymanation du radium: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 171, p. 731-733; 1909, prelim, account, Acad. mOdecine [Paris] Bull.; Annales mines, ser. 10, v. 15, p. 465-489. 1716. Lepape, Adolphe; Moret, Leon; and Schneider, Georges, 1934, La minyralisation des eaux thermales d’Aix-les-Bains (Savoie) et sa signification geOlogique: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 198, p. 1706-1707. 1717. Le Peintre, Marcel, and Olivier, Henri Rene, 1952, Dyter- mination polarographique de la valence de l’arsenic dans les eaux thermales de La Bourboule: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 234, p. 352-355. 1718. Loisel, P., 1919, Sur la radioactivity de l’eau de la grande source de Bagnoles-de-l’Orne et ses variations: Acad, sci [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 169, p. 791-792. 1719. 1920, Sur les variations de la radioactivity des sources de Bagnoles-de-l’Orne et leur relation avec la pluie: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 171, p. 858-860. 1720. 1921a, Sur la radioactivity des sources de la rygion de Bagnoles-de-l’Ome: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 173, p. 921-923. 1721. 1921b, Sur l’yxistence d’une nouvelle ymanation radioactive dans les sources de Bagnoles-de-l’Orne et des environs: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, p. 1098-1101, 2 figs. 1722. 1922, Sur la radioactivity des sources de la rygion de Bagnoles-de-l’Orne et son rapport avec la structure g6o-logique: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 175, p. 890-892. 1723. Loisel, P., and Castelnau, R., 1921, Sur la radioactivity des eaux du Mont-Dore: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 173, p. 1399-1392. 1724. Lomet, Antoine Francois, 1795, Mymoires sur les eaux minyrales et les etablissements thermaux des Pyrynyes, comprenant la recherche des moyens les plus propre a recueillir et conserver les sources minyrales * * *: Paris, R. Vatar., 154 p., 4 pis. 1725. Longchamp, 1821, Analyse des eaux de Vichy: Jour, phar- macie, v. 7, p. 565-569. 1726. 1823a, Note sur les eaux sulfureuses de Barfeges, Cauterets et Saint-Sauveur (Hautes-Pyrynyes) : Annales chimie et physique, ser. 2, v. 22, p. 156-161. 1727. 1823b, Sur la chaleur des eaux thermales naturelles: Annales chimie et physique, ser. 2, v. 24, p. 247-259.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 1728. Longchamp, 1826, Sur une formation de pyrite dans une eau thermale: Annales chimie et physique, ser. 2, v. 32, p. 294-299; 1827, Quart. Jour. Sci., v. 22, p. 398-399. 1729. 1832, Annuaire des eaux minyrales de la France: Paris, 306 p., front. 1730. 1833a, Considerations sur la constitution intyrieure du globe, tiroes de l'analyse des eaux thermales sulfureuses de la chaine des Pyrenees [extr.] : Acad, et soc. Sci. France et ytranger Jour. v. 1, p. 134-136; 1836, Annalen Chemie (Liebig), v. 17, p. 317-327. 1731. 1833b, Mdmoire sur la baregine: Acad, et Soc. sci. France et Stranger Jour., v. 1, p. 136-137; 1934, Annalen Chemie (Liebig), v. 10, p. 333-336. 1732. 1834, Sur les gaz qui se dSgagent du sein des eaux thermales : Acad, et soc. sci. France et Stranger Jour., v. 2, p. 249-250; 1836, Annalen Chemie (Liebig), v. 17, p. 327-333. 1733. Lormand, Ch., 1925, Analyse d’eaux thermales de Chaude- saigues (Cantal) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 180, p. 450-451. 1734. 1926, Analyse chimique de l’eau de Capvern: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 182, p. 404-406. 1735. Mallat, Antonin Jerome, 1934, Vichy A travers les ages: Vichy, Imprimerie centrale bourbonnaise, 256 p. 1736. Mallat, Antonin Jerome, and Cornillon, J., 1909, Histoire des eaux minSrales de Vichy: Paris, G. Steinheil, v. 1, 814 p., pis., maps, plans. 1737. Martel, E. A., 1935, Contamination, protection et amSliora- tion des sources thermominSrales: Cong, internat. mines, mStallurgie et gSologie appl., 7®, Paris 1935, Sec. gSolo-gie appl., Comptes rendus, v. 2. Contains references to specific springs in France, Italy, Switzerland, Turkey, U.S.S.R., Syria, and Algeria. p. 791-798. 1738. Massie, C. [1913?], Etude sur les eaux thermales de Tercis pres Dax : Toulouse, 152 p. 1739. Massol, G., 1908, Sur la radioactivity des gaz de l’eau thermale d’Uriage (Is&re) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 147, p. 844-846. 1740. 1909, Composition chimique des depots des eaux thermales d’Uriage (Isfere) : Soc. chim. France Bull., ser. 4, v. 5, p. 404-405. 1741. 1910, Sur la composition chimique des gaz spontanes de la source thermo-mindrale d’Uriage (Isere) ; Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 151, p. 1124—1126. 1742. 1912, Sur la radioactivity des eaux thermo-minerales d’Usson (Ari&ge) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 155, p. 373-375. 1743. Massy, R., 1930 [Radioactivity of the springs of BarAges]: Soc. pharm. Bordeaux Bull., no. 68, p. 235-238; 1932, Chem. Abs„ v. 26, p. 4242. 1744. Massy, R., and Cazaux, P., 1928 [Chemical composition of the thermal waters of BarAges] : Jour, pharmacie et chimie, v. 7, p. 340-345 [French] ; 1928, Chem. Abs., v. 22, p. 3245. 1745. Maury, Eugene, 1936, Eaux potables, eaux minyrales en Corse. Etude hydrogeologique: Cong, internat. mines, mytallurgie et geologic appl., 7®, Paris 1935, Sec. gdolo-gie appl., Comptes rendus, v. 2, p. 737-743. 1746. Mengel, Octave, 1908, Sur la tempdrature des eaux ther- males des Pyrenyes-Orientales : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 146, p. 1126-1128. 1747. 1944, Distribution orogenique des eaux thermales et minyrales de l’extrymite orientale des Pyrenees: Soc. agri. Pyrynees-Orientales Bull., v. 62, p. 11-30, illus; 313 1953, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 17,1852. 1748. Meriel and Lassere, J., 1948 [The thermal center of St. Girons-les-Eaux (formerly Audinac)] Acad, mydecine [Toulouse] Mym., v. 49, p. 211-215; 1950, Chem. Abs., v. 44, col 10219. 1749. Ministere dc travaux publics et des transports, ca. 1930, Stations thermales franqaises : Paris, 103 p. 1750. Montessier, A., 1860, Source thermo-minyrale dycouverte aux environs de Montpellier: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 51, p. 636-637. 1751. Moret, Leon, 1933a, Les sources thermo-minyrales de Saint-Gervais-les-Bains (Haute Sovoie) dans leurs rapports avec la gcologie de la rygion; Sur les limites gdologiques du Jura myridional: Assoc. Frangaise, av. sci., Comptes rendus 57® sess., p. 254-258; 1936, abs. Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 3,1935, p. 163. 1752. 1933b, La gyologie des environs de Saint-Gervais-les-Bains (Haute Savoie) et ses relations avec la nature et l’origine des sources thermo-minyrales: Soc. sci. Dauphine Bull., v. 53 (ser. 5, v. 12), p. 335-370; abs., p. 443-444. 1753. 1933c, Sur les eaux thermo-minyrales de Saint-Gervais-les-Bains (Haute Savoie), nature, origine, et relations avec les montagnes environnantes: Rev. Savoisienne, Annycy, v. 74, pt. 2; p. 101-108; 1935, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 2,1934, p. 161. 1754. 1939, Origine geologique des sources thermales d’Aix-les-Bains; Etudes Rhodaniennes; Rev. gyographic rygionale, v. 15, no. 1-3, p. 161-162; 1940, abs.; Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 7,1939, p. 212. 1755. 1946, Les sources thermominyrales. Hydrogyologie-Gyochimie-Biologie: Paris, Masson et Cie., 146 p, 48 figs. 1756. 1951, Sources thermales alpines et grands travaux de barrages: Univ. Grenoble lab. gyologie fac. sci. Travaux, v. 28, p. 79-96, illus.; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19, 1954, p. 327. 1757. Moret, Leon, and Blanquet, L., 1934, La gyologie des en- virons de Saint-Gervais (Haute-Savoie) et ses relations avec la nature et l’origine des sources thermo-minyrales: Soc. sci. Dauphine Bull., v. 53 (ser. 5, v. 12), p. 335-370. 1758. Moret, Leon, and Schneider, Georges, 1934a, I dyes nou- velles sur le probleme geologique de l’origine des sources thermo-minyrales d’Aix-les-Bains (Savoie) : Soc. sci. Dauphine Bull., v. 54 (ser. 5, v. 13), p. 1-16. 5 figs ; Univ. Grenoble lab. geologie fac. sci. Travaux, v. 18, p. 1-16; 1937, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 4,1936, p. 191. 1759. 1934b, Le problAme de l’origine des sources thermo-minyrales d’Aix-les-Bains (Savoie) : Paris, Coll. France, Inst, hydrologie et climatologie Annales, v. 9, pt. 3, no. 33, p. 192-206, 5 figs.; 1943, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America v. 9, 1941—42, p. 202-203. 1760. Moureau, Charles, 1906, Sur les gaz des sources ther- males. Dytermination des gaz rares; prysence generate de l’argon et de l’hyiium: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 1425 p. 1155-1158.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 314 1761. Moureau, Charles, 1908a, Les engagements gazeux des sources thermales: Rev. sci., ser. 5, v. 9, no. 12, p. 353-361. 1762. Moureau, Charles, and Biquard, Robert, 1908, Nouvelles recherches sur les gaz rares des eaux thermales: Acad, sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 146, p. 435—437. 1763. Moureau, Charles, and Lepape, Adolphe, 1909a, La radio- activity des sources thermales de Bagneres-de-Luchon: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 148, p. 834-837. 1764. 1909b, Sur les gaz des sources thermales; presence du crypton et du x£non: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 149, p. 1171-1174. 1765. 1909c, Sur le radioactivity des sources thermales de Bagnyres-de-Luchon: Annales mines, ser. 10, no. 15, p. 465-489, 2 tables, 2 figs. 1766. Nicolas, Ad., 1909, Sur la radioactivity des eaux thermales de la Bourboule: Assoc, frangaise av. sci., Comptes rendus 37' sess., 1908, p. 797-799. 1767. Perrin, Maurice, 1954, Les eaux minyrales de la rygion Lorraine: Acad. Stanislas Mym., ser. 6, v. 38, 1950-53, p. 21-36; 1955, abs.; Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19, 1954, p. 361. 1768. Pictet, Raoul, 1876, Notice sur la fontaine intermittente de Vichy les Bains: Archives sci. phys. nath., Bibliothy-que Univserselle, new ser., v. 57, p: 57-76. 1769. Poskin, 1904 [Argon in thermal spring waters]: Soc. hydrologie climatologie, med. Paris Annales, v. 9, p. 255. 1770. Proix-Noe, Marthe, and Proix, Genevieve, 1946, Sur la prysence du thoron dans diffyrentes atmosphyres de la station hydrominyral de Cauterets: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 223, p. 548-550. 1771. Ranse, F. de, 1883, Neris-les-Bains et ses eaux minyrales: Paris. 1772. Regnault, Paul, 1886, Boubon-l’Archambault et ses eaux minyrales et ses nouveaux thermes: Paris, G. Masson. 1773. Revil, J., 1908, Les sources thermominyrales de la Savoie: Rev. gyn. sci. pures et appl., v. 19, p. 825-833; 1909, Chem. Abs., v. 3, p. 161. 1774. Richaud, J., 1925, Etude sur les eaux sulfureuses de Pie- trapola-les-Bains (Corse) : Montpellier, 55 p. 1775. Robin, Edouard Charles Albert, compiler, 1924, The spas of France: 2d ed., Paris Comm. Myd. Stations Thermales Office Natl. Tourisme, 142 p. [English.] 1776. Robine, Rene, and Dejussieu, 1927, La substance active des eaux de Baryges: Soc. biologie Paris Comptes Rendus, v. 97, p. 313-316. 1777. 1928 [The chemical composition of the waters of Baryges (Hautes-Pyrynyes)]: Jour, pharmacie et chimie, v. 7, p. 9-13; Chem. Abs., v. 22, p. 1816. 1778. Rodhain, P., 1942, Les venues hydrominyrales et la genyse des gisements minyraux en Aquitaine: Annales mines, ser. 14 (131) Mym., v. 1, p. 5-70, 11 tigs. 1779. Sarrot-Reynauld, Jean, 1957, Les minerais mytalliques et les sources minyrales de la rygion de La Mure: Univ. Grenoble lab. gyologie fac. sci. Travaux, v. 33, p. 135-156, map; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 22, 1957, p. 472. 1780. Sassure, Horace Benedict de, 1790 [Deposit of algae at Aix] : Jour, physique, p. 410. 1781. Schneider, Georges, 1933, Note sommaire sur les sources thermales d’Aix-les-Bains (Savoie) : Assoc, frangaise av. sci., Comptes rendus 57' sess., p. 262-264; 1936, abs.; Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 3,1935, p. 211. 1782. Schneider, Georges, 1934a, Conclusions tiryes de mesures prycises du dybit des sources thermales d’Aix-les-Bains : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 199, p. 80-82. 1783. 1934b, Les captages des sources thermales d’Aix-les-Bains : Annales mines, ser. 13, v. 5, no. 4, p. 261-279, 1 pi., 7 figs. 1784. 1935a, Variations de dybit des sources thermales d’Aix-les-Basins: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 200, p. 848-850. 1785. 1935b, Sur des fuites d’eau thermale de la source soufre k Aix-les-Bains: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 200, p. 1336-1338. 1786. 1935c, Les sources thermales d’Aix-les-Bains: Annales mines, ser. 13, v. 8, no. 7, p. 5-64; no. 8, p. 69-116, 7 figs. 1787. 1935d, Quelques remarques sur les captages des sources thermoninyrales: Cong, internat. mines, mytallurgie et gyologie appl., 7' sess., Paris 1935, Sec. gyologie appl., v. 2, p. 799-811. Discusses factors that should be considered in the development of springs. 1788. 1935e, Variations du rygime propre des sources thermales d’Aix-les-Bains: Cong, internat. mines, mytallurgie et gyologie appl., 7' sess., Paris 1935, Sec. gyologie appl., v. 2, p. 817-838,1 fig. 1789. Schneider, Georges, and Moret, Leon, 1933, Une hypo- thyse nouvelle sur l’origine des sources thermo-miny-rales d’Aix-les-Bains (Savoie) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 197, p. 1734-1736. 1790. Schoeller, Henri, 1951, thermique des eaux souter- raines d’origine profonde: Internat. Union Geodesy and Geophysics; Assoc. Sci. Hydrology, Oslo 1948, v. 3, p. 109-116, 3 figs. 1791. Societe d’Hydrologie Medicale de Paris, 1900, Stations hy- drominyrales et maritimes de la France: Cong, internat. mydecine, 13', Paris 1900, 458 p. 1792. Syndicat General des Medecine des Stations Balneaires et Sanitaires de France, 1903, Index mydical des prin-cipales stations thermales et climatiques de France: Paris, J. Gainche, 398 p., map. 1793. Thiebaut, Jean, 1951, Etude gyologique des eaux minyrales de Montygut-Segla (prys de Muret) : Soc. historie nat. Toulouse Bull., v. 86, no. 3-4, p. 273-275; 1958 abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 22,1957, p. 543. 1794. Touplain, F., 1930, Etude des sources thermales d’Aix-les- Bains : Paris, Coll. France, Inst, hydrologie et climatologie Annales, v. 5. 1795. Touplain, F., and others, 1933, Etudes des sources ther- males d’Aix-les-Bains : Paris, 80 p. 32 figs. 1796. Tripier, F. M., 1837, Mymoire sur les eaux thermales du Plan-du-Phazi, prys de Mont-Dauphin (Hautes-Alpes) : Jour, pharmacie, ser. 1, v. 23, p. 57-70. 1797. Urbain, Pierre, 1947 [Analysis of the mineral waters of Ax-les-Thermes Ariege] : Paris, Coll. France, Inst, hydrologie et climatologie Annales, v. 18, p. 1-64, maps; 1948, Chem. Abs., v. 42, col. 8376. 1798. Urbain, Pierre, and others, 1954, Sur l’emploi des traceurs radioactifs sur le terrain en gdologie et hydrogyologie; expyriences de Cauterets et Luz (September-Octobre 1953) : Paris, Coll. France, Inst, hydrologie et climatologie Annales, v. 25, no. 76, p. 7-26, illus; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20,1955, p. 556.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 1799. Urbain, Pierre; Lagrange, R.; Lepape, Adolphe; and Ges- lin, Marcel, 1958: [Analysis of the mineral waters of la Bourboule and Mont-Dore] : Inst, hydrologie et climatologie Annales, v. 27, p. 1-67; Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 20785. 1800. Vauquelin, Louis Nicolas, 1798, Experiences sur la sub- stance visqueuse qui se rassemble sur l’ecore du Robinia viscosa: Annales chimie, v. 28, p. 223-224; Acad. sci. Paris M6m. cl. sci. math, et phys., Inst. Nac. France, v. 5, p. 105,1804. 1801. Vie, Georges, 1935, Les sources salves et chafides dans la region pyr6n6enne occidentale: Rev. sci. v. 73, no. 11, p. 378-379. 1802. Willm, Eduard, 1887, Sur les eaux sulfureuses et sul- fureuses ddgdn6r£es d’Olette (I’yren^es-Orientales) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 104, p. 1178-1180. 1803. Waterlot, Jean, 1953, Essai de determination de la pro- venance de l’eau de la source min^rales des Sarrazins h Sermaize-les-Bains (Marne) : Annales mines, v. 142, no. 11, p. 17-27, illus.; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19, 1954, p. 514. 1804. Zurcher, Ph., 1916, Note sur les sources du vallon des “Eaux-Chaudes” pr£s de Digne (Basses-Alpes) : Soc. g£ol. France Compte rendus, ser. 4} v. 16, p. 54-59, 2 figs. See also references 7, 20, 30, 62, 78, 109, 322, 571, 1285, 1287, 1291,1293,1914, and 1922. GERMANY AND POLAND 1805. Abele, Gustav, 1950, Die Heil- und Mineralquellen Siid- bayerns : Geol. Bavarica [Munich], no. 2,112 p., 2 maps. Describes 134 localities of mineral waters; 2 springs and 1 well in which water is thermal. 1806. Althous, C. L. von, 1838, Beschreibung der Verfahrens bei der Bethrversuchen und warmen Quellen in Ehren-breitstein: Coblenz, Germany, 2 pis., map. 1807. Bardet, Godefroy, 1910, Aux stations minGrales d’Alle- magne et de Bohfeme. Impressions d’un voyage d'6tude. Notes hydrologiques, premier s6rie: Paris, 150 p. 1808. Baur, K., 1929, Ueber chemische and Physikalische Befunde an den Baden-Badener Thermen: Deutsche geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., v. 81, p. 355-365, 2 figs. 1809. Beissel, J., 1865, Ueber die Organismen der warmen Quel- len in Aachen und Burtscheid und deren geognostischen Lage: Naturh. Ver. preussischen Rheinlande Verh., v. 22, p. C 45-55. 1810. 1875, Die Thermalquellen Aachens und Burtscheids, in Aachen, seine geologische Verhaltnisse und Thermalquellen, Bauwerke, Geschichte, und Industrie: Festschrift zur 16. Hauptvers. Ver, deutscher Ingenieure, dargebracht vom Aachener Bezirksverein, p. 38-57. 1811. Benzenberg, J. F., 1831, Ueber die warmen Quellen in Aachen: Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie, u. Petrefac-tenkunde, v. 2, p. 1-16. 1812. Bischof, Carl Gustav Christoph, 1826, Chemische Unter- suchung der Mineralwasser zu Gailnau, Fachingen und Selters im Herzogthum Nassau * * * (title page, Die vulkanischen Mineralquellen Deutschlands und Frank-reichs) : Bonn, Germany, 412 p. 1813. Blumfield, F., and others, 1913, Aerztliche Festschrift zur Eroffnung des Stadtischen Kaiser Friedrich Bades in 315 Wiesbaden: Wiesbaden, Germany (published by the city), 206 p., 22 figs., diagrams. 1814. Braun, Carl, 1856, Wiesbaden als Heilquelle und als climatischer Heilort: Wiesbaden, Germany, 146 p. 1815. Bresmal, J. F., 1703, Hydro-analyse des eaux chaudes et froides d’Aix-la-Chapelle [Aachen] : Li£ge, Belgium. 1816. Bromeis, Conrad, 1851; tiber aussere und innere Ver- haltnisse der gasreichen Thermen zu Nauheim: Univ. Marburg, Germany, dissert., 35 p., 1 pi. 1817. Brusoff, A., Reinartz, F., and Schloemer, Alfons, 1933 [The action of bacteria in the thermal springs of Aachen and Aachen-Burtscheid]: Zeitschr. Untersuchung Lebensmittel, v. 66, p. 446-453; 1934, Chem. Abs., v. 28, col. 1798. 1818. Buckland, F. O., 1892, Health springs of Germany and Austria: 2d ed., London; abs., Nature [London], v. 45, p. 510. 1819. Carl, F., 1856, Untersuchung der warmen Quelle des Gemeindebades in Wiesbaden: Wiesbaden, Nassaui-scher Ver. Naturkunde, Jahrb. Ver. Naturkunde Herzogthum Nassau, (Jahrb), no. 11, p. 102-104. 1820. Casselmann, W, 1860, Chemische Untersuchung einiger Mineralquellen zu Soden und zu Neuenhain: Nas-sauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., no. 15, p. 139-226. 1821. Cramer, Helmuth, 1953, Thermalwasser aus tiefliegenden Karsthohlen des Bayerischen Innviertels: Geologica Bavarica [Munich], no. 17, p. 164-177; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19,1954, p. 100. 1822. Dechen, H. von, 1876, Ueber die Thermalquellen zu Bad Oeynhausen: Naturh. Ver. preussischen Rheinlande Verh., v. 33, p. 87-92. 1823. 1883a, Ueber die Thermalquelle in der Kautenbach bei Trarbach an der Mosel: Naturh. Ver. preussischen Rheinlande Verh., v. 40, p. C 97. 1824. 1883b, Ueber die Verdienste G. Bischof’s urn die Auf-findung der Mineralquellen des Apollinaris-Brunnens und des Bades Neuenahr: Naturh. Ver. preussischen Rheinlande Verh., v. 40, p. 0108-110. 1825. Dechen, H. von, and Rauf, Hermann, 1887, Geologische und Mineralogisehe Litteratur der Rheinprovinz und der Provinz Westfalen sowie einiger agrenzenden Gegen-den chronologisch und innerhalb der Jahre alphabetisch geordnet: Naturh. Ver. preussischen Rheinlande Verh., v. 44, 5th ser., v. 4, p. 181-476; published by Ph. Bert-kau, Secretary of the Societies. Includes references to 110 papers on specific thermal springs. 1826. Dede, L., 1923, Ueber das Vorkommen von Biel und Zink in den Sintern der Bad Nauheimer Sprudel: Zeitschr. anal. Ohemie, v. 62, p. 342-348. 1827. Delkeskamp, Rudolf, 1903, Die Genesis der Thermal- quellen von Ems, Wiesbaden, und Kreuznach und deren Beziehung zu den Erz- und Mineralgangen des Taunus und der Pfalz: Deutsche Naturforscher u. Aerzte Gesell. Verh., Sept. 1903, Cassel. 1828. Denner, Julius, and Koehne, Werner, ca. 1948, Die Ther- malwasser Deutschlands: Intemat. Union Geod^sie, Geophysique; Assoc. Hydrologie sci., Washington 1939, Comptes rendus, v. 2, Rept. Inv. 2, 18 p., map. Discusses the distribution and characteristics of thermal springs in Germany, Austria, and western Czechloslovakia. Mentions the most important springs and shows their locations on a map.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 316 1829. Dietrich, Dr., and Kaminer, Dr., 1916-24, Handbuch der Batneologie medizinischen Klimatologie und Balneo-graphie: Leipzig, Germany, G. Thieme, 3 v. 1830. Diruf, Oscar, 1892, Bad Kissingen und seine Heilquellen: vorzugsweise zum Gebrauche fur Curgaste bearbeitet: Wurzburg, Germany, A. Stuber. 1831. D’Orville, W., and Kalle, W., 1858, Analyse der Faulbrun- nenquelle zu Wiesbaden: Nassauiseher Ver. Natur-kunde Jahrb., no. 13, p. 41-52; note and analysis, 1860, Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie., 1860, p. 444. 1832. Dunker, E., 1857, Altes und Neues liber Nauheim und seine Soolquellen; Oberhessen Gesell. Naturk.- u. Heilk-unde, Ber. 6, p. 7-12. 1833. Eck, H., 1902, Ueber den Grund des Zutagetretens der Wildbader Thermen: Centralbl. Mineralogie, 1902, p. 231-233. 1834. Egger, P., and Schmitt, Karl Franz, 1927, Beirage zur Zusammensetzung der Mineralquellen in Berg-Canstatt: Ver. vaterl. Naturkunde Wiirttemberg Jahresh., v. 83, p. 49-57. 1835. Ensslin, F., 1925, Uber die Sinter der Bad-Nauheimer Sprudel; Oberhessen Gesell. Naturk.- u. Heilkunde Ber., new ser., v. 10, Naturw. Abt., p. 28-40, figs. 1836. Erb, Ludwig, 1942, Uber eigenartige Thermalwasserver- luste in einem Tiefbohrloch von Bad Krozingen (Baden) : Reiehsamts Bodenforschung Zweigstelle Wien Ber. 11-12, p. 200-205, illus.; 1952, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 16,1951, p. 88. 1837. Feder, E., and Lorenz, K., 1923 [Chemical investigations of the waters of the four chief hot springs of Aachen and Aachen-Burtscheid] ; Zeitschr. Nahrungs- u. Genuss-mittel, v. 46, p. 339-360; 1924, Chem. Abs., v. 18, p. 1866. 1838. Fischer, F. W., 1858, Die Arminiusquelle (Lippspringe). Balneol. Skizze.: Paderborn, Germany. 1839. Fliegel, G., 1929, Die Thermalsolsprudel von Bad Kolberg in Thiiringen: Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 37, no. 1, p. 1-10; no. 2, p. 27-31,3 figs. 1840. Forbes, James D., 1839a, Account of an intermitting brine spring discharging carbonic acid gas, near Kissingen in Bavaria: Edinburgh New Philos. Jour., v. 26, no. 52, p. 306-326. 1841. 1839b, Notice of a brine spring emitting carbonic acid gas. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. Rept., 1838, pt. 2, p. 28-29. 1842. 1845, Notice respecting an intermitting brine spring discharging carbonic acid gas, near Kissingen in Bavaria : Royal Soc. Edinburgh Proc., v. 1, p. 233-235. 1843. 1851, Farther remarks on the intermitting brine springs of Kissingen: Edinburgh New Philos. Jour., v. 51, p. 139-142; Royal Soc. Edinburgh Proc., v. 3, p. 66-69. 1844. Frank, Manfred, 1933, Die Entstehungsgeschichte der Oannstatter Quellen: Ver. vaterl. Naturkunde Wurttem-berg Jahresh., v. 89, p. 53. 1845. 1941, Die Liebenzeller Thermen im wurttembergischen Schwarzwald (Hydrologie und Chemismus) : Reichs-stelle Bodenforschung, Zweigstelle Stuttgart, Mitt., no. 19, 53 p., 2 pis., 13 figs.; 1944, abs., Zentralbl. Mineralogie, 1944, Referente 2, no. 4, p. 372-373. 1846. 1952, Die Niirtinger Heinrich squelle ein neues Heil-wasser aus deni Stubensandstein Wiirttembergs: Geol. Landesanst. Geologie Jahrb., v. 66, p. 141-149; 1955, Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19,1954, p. 152. 1847. Frantzius, J. von, 1869, Das Soolbad Mtinster am Stein bei Creuznach: Creuznach. 1848. Fresenius, Carl Remigius, 1850a, Ueber den Zustand, in welchem das Arsen und Mangan im Sinter des Koch-brunnens zu Wiesbaden vorkommt: Annalen Chemie (Liebig), v. 75, p. 172-176. 1849. 1850b, Chemische Untersuchung des Kochbrunnens zu Wiesbaden: Nassauiseher Ver, Naturkunde Jahrb., no. 6, p. 145-196. 1850. 1851, Chemische Untersuchung der wichtigsten Mineral-wasser des Herzogthums Nassau. II. Abh., Die Mineralquellen zu Ems: Nassauiseher Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., no. 7, pt. 2-3, p. 145-202, 4 tables. 1851. 1852a, Zusammensetzung der Mineralwaser zu Wiesbaden und Ems: Annalen Chemie (Liebig), v. 82, p. 249-250. 1852. 1852b, Ueber das Vorkommen von Borsaure in dem Wasser des Kochbrunnens zu Wiesbaden: Nassauiseher Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., no. 8, pt. 2, p. 91-96; Erdmann Jour, prakt. Chemie, v. 55, p. 163-165. 1853. 1852c, Chemische Untersuchung der wichtigsten Mineral-wasser des Herzogthums Nassau. III. Abh., Die Quellen zu Schlangenbad : Nassauiseher Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., no. 8, pt. 2 p. 97-118. 1854. 1866, Analyse der Felsenquelle No. 2 in Bad Ems: Erdmann Jour, prakt. Chemie, v. 97, p. 1-6. 1855. 1868, Analyse der Augusta-Quelle in Bad Ems; Nassau-ischer, Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., 1867-68, v. 21-22, p. 339-4:15. 1856. 1872a, Analyse der Victoria-Quelle in Bad Ems: Nas-sauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., 1871-72, v. 25-26, p. 347-360. 1857. 1872b, Analyse der Romer-Quelle in Bad Ems: Nassauiseher Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., 1871-72 v. 25-26, p. 361-380. 1858. 1873a, Chemische Untersuchung der warmeu Mineral-quelle im Badhaus der Koniglichen Wilhelmsheilanstalt zu Wiesbaden: Nassauiseher Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., 1873-74 v.' 27-28, p. 100-113; Erdmann Jour, prakt. Chemie, new ser., v. 9, p. 368-373. 1859. 1873b, Neue chemische Untersuchung des Kranchens, Fiirstenbrunnens, Kesselbrunnens, und der neuen Bade-quelle zu Bad Ems: Nassauiseher Ver. Naturkunde Jarhb., 1873-74, v. 27-28, p. 114-171. 1800. 1873c, Chemische Untersuchung der Mineralquellen zu Bad Ems: Erdmann Jour, prakt. Chemie, v. 114, p. 53-78. 1861. 1877a, Analyse der warmen Quelle zu Assmannshausen : Nassauiseher Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., 1876-77, v. 29-30, p. 413-431; Erdmann Jour, prakt. Chemie, v. 124, p. 278-290. 1862. 1877b, Chemische Analyse der warmen Soolquelle zu Wern in Westfalen: Wiesbaden, Germany, [pamph.] 1863. 1878, Chemische Untersuchungen der warmen Quellen zu Schlangenbad: Erdmann Jour, prakt. Chemie, v. 125, p. 306-320; Nassauiseher Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., 1878-79, v. 31-32, p. 49-69. 1864. 1879a, Analyse der Wappen-Quelle zu Bad Ems: Nassauiseher Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., 1878-79, v. 21-32, p. 17-31. 1865. 1879b, Analyse des Kaiser-Brunnens zu Bad Ems: Nassauiseher Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., 1878-79, v. 31-32, p. 32-48.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 317 1866. Fresenius, Carl Remigius, 1879c, Chemisehe Untersuehung der warmen Quellen zu Schlangenbad: Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., 1878-79, v. 31-32, p. 49-69; 1878, Jahrb. prakt. Chemie, new ser., v. 17, p. 306, 320. 1867. 1886, Neue chemisehe Untersuchungen des Kochbrun-nens zu Wiesbaden und Vergleichung der Resultate mit den 1849 yon mir erhaltenen: Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., v. 39, p. 1-20. 1868. Fresenius, Carl Remigius, and Will, H., 1843, Chemisehe Untersuchungen der neugefassten warmen Quellen von Assmannshausen : Annalen prakt. Chemie u. Pharmacie (Liebig), v. 47, p. 198-211. 1869. Fresenius, Heinrich, 1886, Chemisehe Untersuehung der Schfitzenhof-Quelle zu Wiesbaden: Nassauishcer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., v. 39, p. 21-50. 1870. Fresenius, L., and Fresenius, R., 1932, Chemisehe und physikalisch-chemische Untersuehung der Heilquellen zu Bad Wiesee am Tegernsee: Wiesbaden, Germany. 1871. 1936, Neue Untersuchungen einiger Wiesbadener Quellen : Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., v. 83, p. 28-35, 7 tables. 1872. Fresenius, R., and Hintz, Ernst, 1896, Chemisehe Unter- suchung der Thermaiquelle des Augusta-Victoria-Bades zu Wiesbaden: Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., v. 49, p. 3. 1873. Fresenius, Wilhelm, 1950 [Study of the constancy of hot springs and other waters of Wiesbaden] : Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., v. 88, p. 70-84; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 6325. 1874. 1951 [Study of the constancy of the chlorinity of three springs at Wiesbaden] : Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., v. 89, p. 103-105; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 2719. 1875. 1954 [The constancy of the Kochbrunnen, Schiitzenhof, and Faulbrunnen springs of Wiesbaden]: Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., v. 91, p. 47-52; 1955, Chem. Abs., v. 49, col. 5729. 1876. Freytag, Moritz, 1877, Ueber die gegenwartigen Quellen- verhaltnisse des Bades Oeynhausen : Bonn, Nat. History Ver. Notizbl., p. 46-51. 1877. 1878, Das fiscalische Bad Oeynhausen und seine Quellen: Zeitschr. Berg.-, Hiitten.-, u. Salinwesen preussischer Staate, pt. 26, p. 275-289. 1878. 1881, Ueber die geognostischen und balneologischen Verhaltnisse des Bades Oeynhausen: 2d ed., Naturh. Ver. preussischen Rheinlande Verh., v. 38 p. C 118, Bonn. 1886. 1879. Geisse, Nicolaus, 1892 [The springs of Ems]: Ems, Ger- many. 1880. Genser, Carl, 1934, Radioaktive Heilquellen in Deutsch- land: Deutsche geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., v. 85, p. 482-495, 1 pi., 3 figs. 1881. 1952 [Balneology; the present condition of radium health baths in the West Zone of Germany] : Munch, med. Wochschr., v. 94, p. 2066-2072; 1956, Chem Abs., v. 50, col. 8101. 1882. Gimbernat (Gimbernet), Charles de, 1802, Geschwefeltes Stickgas in den Aachen Mineralquellen : Annalen Chemie (Crell) v.2., p. 191. 1883. Gmelin, Leopold, 1826, Bemerkungen fiber Wiesbadens Heilquellen: Annalen Physik u. Chemie (Poggendorff), v. 7, p. 451-468. 1884. 1836, Analyse des Badsinters von Ems : Annalen Physik u. Chemie (Poggendorff), v. 37, p. 199-203. 1885. Goetsch, W., 1929, Der Kohlensaiiregehalt der Mineral- sprudelbader von Bad Reinerz, seine Permanenz wahrend des Badens im Vergleich zum Kohlensafirege-halt der Quellen: Zeitschr. Wiss. Baderkunde, v. 3, p. 320-323; abs., Wasser u. Abwasser, v. 25, no. 10, p. 294; Chem. Abs., v. 23, col. 4758. 1886. Golab, Jozef, 1947, Krotka charakterystyka zrodel okolic Krzeszowic (Short characteristics of the springs in the Krzeszowice region, near Cracow) : Poland, Panstwowy Inst. Geol., Bull., 32, p. 26-38, illus. [Polish, English summary]; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19, 1954, p. 173-174. 1887. Graeff, 1875, Ueber die Quelle des Bades Oeynhausen. Zusammenstellung der chemischen Analysen derselben: Naturh. Ver. preussischen Rheinlande Verh., v. 32, p. C 52-55. 1888. Granville, Augustus Bozzi, 1838, The spas of Germany: 2d ed., London, 516 p. 1889. 1846, Kissingen, its sources and resources: 370 p., 12 mo. London. 1890. Groedel, Isidor Maximilian, 1899, Bad-Nauheim; its springs and their uses, with useful local information and a guide to the environs by J. Groedel: 2d ed., Fried-burg and Bad-Nauheim, Germany, Carl Bindemagel, 176 p. front., plan, map. [From the German guide to Bad-Nauheim, by O. Weiss and J. Groedel.] 1891. Grossman, Fr., 1887, Die Heilquellen des Taunus, darge- stellt von einem Verein von Aerzten: Wiesbaden, Germany. 1892. Gutmann, Edward, 1880, The watering places and mineral springs of Germany, Austria, and Switzerland; a popular medical guide: New York, D. Appleton & Co., 331 p., 5 illus. 1893. Harpuder, K., 1929, Ueber die Aktivitat der Mineralquel- len : Zeitschr. Wiss. Baderkunde, v. 3, p. 293-297; abs., Wasser u. Abwasser, v. 25, no. 10, p. 293. 1894. Henrich, Ferdinand, 1904a, Untersuchungen ueber die Wiesbadener Thermalquellen und deren Radioaktivitfit: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Anz., v. 41, p. 320-321. 1895. 1904b, Uber ein radioaktives Gas in den Wiesbadener Thermalquellen: Zeitschr. angew. Chemie, v. 17, no. 46, p. 1757-1760. 1896. 1905a, Untersuchungen fiber die Thermalquellen von Wiesbaden und deren Radioaktivitat: Monatsh. Chemie, v. 26, p. 149-184., 6 figs. 1897. 1905b, Ueber die Radioaktivitat der Wiesbadener Thermalquellen : Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., v. 58, p. 67-104. 1898. 1906a, Untersuchungen fiber die Thermalquellen von Wiesbaden und deren Radioaktivitfit: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 115, pt. 2B, p. 1075-1080, 1 fig.; Monatsh. Chemie, v. 27, p. 1259-1264; 1907, Phys. Zeitschr., v. 8, no. 4, p. 112-114, Feb. 15. 1899. 1906b, Uber radioaktive Bestandteile der Wiesbadener Thermalquellen: Chemiker-Zeitung, v. 30, 1st semester, no. 21, p. 220-222. 1900. 1907a, Die Aktivitat der Luft und der Quellwasser: Zeitschr. Elektrochemie, v. 13, no. 27, p. 393—406. 1901. 1907b, Weitere Mittheilungen fiber die Radioaktivitfit der Wiesbadener Thermalquellen: Zeitschr. angew. Chemie, v. 20, no. 2, p. 49-51.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 318 1902. Henrich, Ferdinand, 1908, Untersuchungen iiber die Gase der Wiesbadener Thermalquellen: Deutsche cheni. Gesell. Ber., v. 41, p. 4196-4209. 1903. 1909, liber die Radioaktivitat der Gase der Wiesbadener Thermalquellen: Zeitschr. Elektrochemie, v. 15, no. 19, p. 751-757, 3 figs. 1904. 1910a, Ueber die Einwirkung von kohlensaurehaltigem Wasser auf Gesteine und ueber den Ursprung und den Mechanismus der kohlensaurefiihrenden Thermen: Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 18, no. 3, p. 85-94. 1905. 1910b, liber die Radioaktivitat des Wassers der Ther-malquellen von Wiesbaden: Zeitschr. anorg. Chemie, v. 65, p. 117-135, 2 figs. 1906. 1910c, liber die Bestimmung und zweckmiissige Berech-nung der Radioaktivitat von Mineralquellen: Zeitchr. angew. Chemie, v. 23, p. 340-342, 1 fig. 1907. 1910d, Antwort an L. Griinhut und E. Hintz: Zeitschr. angew. Chemie, v. 23, pt. 2, p. 1809-1810. 1908. 1910e, Antwort auf die Duplik von E. Hintz und L. Griinhut: Zeitschr. angew. Chemie, v. 23, pt. 2, p. 2358-2359. 1909. 1916, liber den Gasgehalt der Taunusgesteine und seine Beziehung zu den Gasen der Wiesbadener Thermalquellen : Zeitschr. Elektrochemie, v. 22, p. 64-69. 1910 1925, liber die Radioaktivitat und neuere Untersuchung der Quellen des Taunus: Zeitschr. angew. Chemie, v. 38, p. 472-476, 2 figs. 1911. Henrich, Ferdinand, and Bugge, Giinther, 1905,, Fiber radioaktive Bestandteile der Wiesbadener Thermalquellen : Zeitschr. angew. Chemie, v. 18, no. 26, p. 1011-1014. 1912. 1912, Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Quellenabsatze (Sinter) der Wiesbadener Thermalquellen: Chem.-Zeitung, v. 36, no. 51, p. 473. 1913. Herget, E., 1866, Die Thermalquellen zu Bad-Ems: Nas- sauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., 1864-66, nos. 19-20, p. 1-39,1 pi. 1914. Himstedt, Franz, and others, compilers, 1907, Deutsches Baderbueh; bearbeitet unter Mitwirkung des Kaiser-lichen Gesundheitsamtes: Leipzig, Germany, J. J. Weber, 535 p., 13 tables, 1 map. Contains information on 57 thermal-spring localities. 1915. Hintz, Ernst, and Grunhut, L., 1907 [Chemical and physi- cal-chemical examination of the Koehbrunnen at Wiesbaden] : Naussauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., no. 60, p. 29-72; 1908, Chem. Abs., v. 2, p. 773. 1916. 1910a, Bemerkungen zuzwei Abhandlungen von F. Henrich, betreffend den Wiesbadener Koehbrunnen: Zeitschr. angew. Chemie, v. 23, pt. 2, p. 1308-1311. 1917. 1910b, Duplik an F. Henrick: Zeitschr. angew. Chemie, v. 23, pt. 2, p. 2125-2126. 1918. 1910c, Bemerkungen zur vorstehenden Antwort: Zeitschr. angew. Chemie, v. 23, pt. 2, p. 2359. 1919. Hjelt, C., and Rohr, R., 1859, Chemische Untersuchung des Mineralwassers im Badehaus zu den Vier Jahreszeiten in Wiesbaden: Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., no. 14, p. 436-446. 1920. Horstmann, S., 1844, Geologische Verhaltnisse der Sodener Gegend und ihre Heilquelle: Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geognosie, Geologie u. Petrefactenkunde, 1844, p. 232-234. 1921. Jennings, A. Vaughan, 1900, The geology of Bad Nauheim and its thermal salt springs (Hesse) : Geol. Mag., dec. 4, v. 7, no. 8, p. 349-366, 6 figs. 1922. Kaiserlichen Gesundheits-Amt, eds., 1900, Deutschlands Heilquellen und Baeder: Berlin, 400 p., 88 illus., 1 map. [German, French, and English.] Describes 50 localities in which the temperature of the water from springs or wells is 18°C or higher. Includes map showing the locations of mineral springs. 1923. Kassner, C., 1933, Der Ausbruch des grossen Sprudels in Bad Nauheim : Zeitschr. Korortw., v. 2 p. 369-371. 1924. Kastner, K. W. G., 1827, Zur Kenntniss der Mineralwas- ser: Gediegener Schwefel zu Ems: Kastner, Archiv gesamte Naturlehre, v. 11, p. 268-271; abs., Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Petrefactenkunde, v. 21, p. 462. 1925. 1828a, Zur Kenntniss der Mineralwasser. Ueber Nassau’s Thermalquellen: Kastner, Archiv gesamte Naturlehre, v. 13, p. 401-464. 1926. 1828b, Ueber Nassau’s Thermalquellen : Kastner, Archiv gesamte Naturlehre, v. 14, p. 66-68. 1927. 1832, Kissengen’s Heilquellen: Kastner, Archiv Chemie, v. 5, 1, p. 152-157; Kastner, Archiv gesamte Naturlehre, v. 26, p. 425-453, 1834. 1928. 1841, Die vorziiglichsten Heilquellen des Herzogthum Nassau, ihr physikalische Verhalten und chemische Gehalt neu gepriift und untersucht: Jour. Aerzte von Hufeland u. Osann, v. 92, p. 67-105. 1929. Keferstein, Charles, 1822, Geognostische, geologische Bemerkungen liber die heissen und warmen Quellen in Deutschland: Deutschland geogn. u. geol. dargest, 2, p. 7-14. 1930. Keilhack, K., 1935, Deutschlands Heilquellen * * * Bo- dens : Medi. Welt, v. 9, p. 1-12. 1931. Kerner, G., 1856, Chemische Analyse der heissen Mineral- quelle im Badhause “Zum Spiegel” in Wiesbaden: Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde, Jahrb., no. 11, p. 179-191. 1932. Kiderlen, Helmut, 1953, Zur Entstehung der Schwarzwald- thermen: Neues Jahrb. Geologie u. Palaontologie Abh., v. 97, p. 496-506, illus.; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col 2294; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20, 1955, p. 275. 1933. Koch, C., 1880, Die Gebirgsformation bei Bad Ems nebst den Thermalquellen und Erzgangen daselbst: Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., v. 36, p. 32-56, map. 1934. Kohl, E., 1932 [Radium-containing ores and mineral wa- ters in Germany] : Zeitschr. Kurortw., v. 2, no. 9, p. 562; 1935, abs., Am. Water Works Assoc. Jour., v. 27, p. 278-279. 1935. Kortum, C. J., 1798, Vollstandig physische-medicinische Abhandlung iiber die warmen Bader in Aachen und Burtscheid: Dortmund, Germany. 1936. 1817, Die warmen Mineralquellen und Bader in Aachen und Burtscheid: Dortmund, Germany. 1937. Lachmann, 1928, Die Landecker Quellen in Lichte neu- ester balneologischer Forschungen: Zeitschr. Wiss. Baderkunde, v. 2, p. 611-618; abs., Wasser u. Abwasser, v. 25, no. 4, p. 104. 1938. Labat, A., 1902, Climat et eaux minSrales d’Allemagne: Paris. 1939. Laspeyrcs, 1867, Kreuznach und Diirkheim a. d. Hardt: Deutsche geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., v. 19, p. 803-922; v. 20, p. 153-204. Describes 49 mineral-spring resorts; includes data on principal thermal springs.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 319 1940. Lassar, Oscar, 1890, Deutsche Kurorte, Eine Festschrift fur die Mitglieder des 10th internationalen medicini-schen Congresses im Auftrage der Militarbeiter: Berlin, Reichsdruckerie, 285 p., illus. 1941. Lee, Edwin, 1850, The baths of Rhenish Germany, with notices of the adjacent towns: London; 5th ed., 1870, with an appendix on Spa [Belgium] and its mineral springs: London, J. Churchill. 1942. 1869, The baths of Nassau: Wiesbaden, Schwalbach, Schlangenbad * * * with a supplement on Homburg and Nauheim: 5th ed., London Churchill & Sons, 165 p. 1943. Lepsius, R., 1908, Notizen zur Geologie von Deutschland: Ver. Erdkunde Darmstadt Notizbl., ser. 4, no. 29, p. 4-34; abs., Neues Jahrb. Minerologie, Geologie u. Pala-ontologie, 1911, Referate 2, p. 51-52; Chemi. Zentralbl., 1911, [pt.] II, p. 1551. 1944. Liebig, Justus von, 1845, Untersuchung der Mineralquellen von Soden: Frankfurt, Germany. 1945. 1851, Chemische Untersuchung der Schwefelquellen Aachens: Aachen and Leipzig, Germany. 1946. Lindenborn, A., and Schuckart, J, 1858, Untersuchung der Mineralquelle in Schutzenhof zu Wiesbaden: Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., no. 13, p. 53-63; 1860, abs., Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, p. 569. 1947. Link, Erwin, 1930 [The Cannstatt-Stuttgart mineral springs] : Gas- u. Wasserfach, v. 73, p. 220-226, 253-257; Chem. Abs., v. 24, p. 2519. 1948. Lohr, Fr., 1800, Versuch einer kurzen Beschreibung von Wiesbaden und seiner Mineralquellen: Darmstadt, Germany, 1 pi. 1949. Ludwig, R., 1853, Ueber die warmen Solquellen Nauheims: Oberheissen Gesell, Naturk- u. Heilkunde Ber. 3, p. 2-11, lpl. 1950. 1855a, Der Solsprudel zu Nauheim: Ver. Erdkunde u. verwandte Wiss. Darmstadt Notizbl., no. 12, p. 82-84, 1 profile. 1951. 1855b, Die Sprudelquellen zu Neuheim: Oberheissen Gesell. Naturk.- u. Heilkunde Ber. 5, p. 42-47; supp. p. 66-70,1 pi. 1952. 1863, Die warmen Mineralquellen zu Ems empfangen ihre hohere Temperatur durch in der Erdoberfliiche vorgebende chemische Process: Ver. Erdkunde u. verwandte Wiss. Darmstadt Notizbl., no. 17, p. 73-74. 1953. Lupon, Friedrich Freiherrn von, 1897, Quellentempera- turen in Oberbayern: Phys.-okon. Gesell. Konigsberg Schr. v. 38, p. 1-36, map. 1954. Marck, W. von der, 1879, Sol-Therme von Werries bei Hamm: Naturh. Ver. preussischen Rheinland Verh., v. 36, p. C 79. 1955. Martin, Alfred, 1906, Deutsches Badewesen in Vergang- enen Tagen: Jena, Germany, E. Diederichs, 448 p., 159 illus. 1956. Mestwerdt, A., 1916, Die geologisehen Verhaltnisse der Heilquellen von Bad Oeynhausen: Naturh. Ver. preussischen Rheinland, Verh., v. 72, p. 97-117, figs. 1957. Meyer, Lothar, 1864, Chemische Untersuchung der Ther- men zu Landeck in der Grafschaft Glatz: Jour, prakt. Chemie, v. 91, no. 1, p. 1-15. 1958. Michels, Franz, 1926, Der Ursprung der Mineralquellen des Taunus: Senkenb. naturf. Gesell., v. 56, p. 225-238. 1959. 1954, Zur Geologie der Wiesbadener Mineralquellen: Deutsche geol. Gesell., Zeitschr., v. 106, pt. 1, p. 113-117. 1960. Monheim, J. P. J., 1829, Die Heilquellen von Aachen, Burtscheid, Spaa, Malmedy, und Heilstein, in ihren historische, geognotische, physikalische, chemische, medicalische Beziehungen: Aachen and Leipzig, Germany, 1 map. 1961. Morsbach, 1900, Die Oeynhauser Thermalquellen (Lippe) : Verh. naturh. Ver. preussischen Rheinland, v. 57, p. 12-36. 1962. Mueller de la Fuente, E., 1906,- The thermal springs of Schlangenbad: Wiesbaden, Germany. [English.] 1963. Nathan, Hans, 1949, Geologische Ergebnisse der Erdol- bohrungen im Bayerischen Inviertel: Geologica Ba-varica [Munich], no. 1, 68 p., 1 pi., 5 figs., 6 tables. 1964. Noeggerath, J. J., 1849, Gelogische Orgeln und die Ther- malquellen von Burtscheid : Deutscher Naturf. u. Aerzte, 25 Vers., Aachen 1847, Anti. Ber., 24. 1965. 1862, Der grosse intermittirende Wassersprudel zu Bad Neuenahr und der Ahr: Annalen Physik u. Chemie (Poggendorff), v. 115, p. 169-174. 1966. 1884, Die intermittirende heisse Springquelle zu Neuenahr in der Rheinprovinz : Neuer Abdruck: Naturh. Ver. preussischen Rheinlande Verh., v. 41, p. 251-260. 1967. Osann, Emil, 1829-32, Physikalisch-medicinische Darstel- lung der bekannten Heilquellen des vorziiglichsten Landes Europas: Berlin, v. 1,1829; v. 2,1832. 1968. Pax, Ferdinand, 1940, Biologie der deutschen Schwefel- quellen : Deutsche Mineralwasser-Zeitung, v. 44, p. 241. 1969. 1946, Die Mineralquellen des Glatzer Berglandes und ihre Fauna: Senckenb. naturf. Gesell., v. 27, no. 4-6, p. 89-110, 1 fig.; 1950, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 14, 1949, p. 197. 1970. Pax, Ferdinand, and Sods, Arpad, 1943, Die Nematoden der deutschen Schwefelquellen und Thermen: Archiv Hydrobiologie, v. 40, p. 123-183. 1971. Pax, Ferdinand, and Tischbiereck, Hildegord, 1940, Die Fauna deutscher Thermen nach Untersuchungen in Bad Blauda: Der Balneologie, v. 7, p. 281-303. 1972. Pax, Ferdinand, and Wulfert, Kurt, 1941, Die Thermal- fauna des Riesengebirges: Lotos, v. 88, p. 1-22. 1973. Peez, August Heinrich, 1833, Mineral wells of Wiesbaden and their sanative efficacy : Darmstadt, Germany. 1974. Philippi, C. W., 1852, Untersuchung des Faulbrunnenwas- sers zu Wiesbaden: Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., no. 8, p. 90-94. 1975. 1855, Berichtigung der Analyse des Faulbrunnenwas-sers zu Wiesbaden: Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., no. 10, p. 379. 1976. Polstorf, 1854, Chemische Analyse der Elisabeth-Quelle zu Kreuznach und der Mutterlauge der Saline Munster earn Stein: Naturh. Ver. preussischen Rheinland Verh., v. 11, p. 223-224. 1977. Prieger, J. E. P, 1853, Kreuznach, seine jod- und brom- haltige Elisabethquelle und Mutterlauge: Kreuznach, Germany. 1978. Reumont, G., and Monheim, J. P. J., 1810, Analyse des eaux sulfureuses d’Aix-la-Chapelle [Aachen] : Annales chimie, v. 76, p. 226-232; Bull, pharmacie, v. 3, p. 11-15, 1811. 1979. Ritter, G. H., 1800, Denkwiirdigkeiten der Stadt Wies- baden und der benachbarten Gegend in vorziiglicher Hinsicht ihrer samtlichen Mineralquellen: Mainz, Germany.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 320 1980. Robert, Aime, 1857, Description topographique, mfidicale et chimique des bains de Baden-Baden: Strassburg, Germany. 1981. Sandberger, F., 1859, Die Bohrung auf Kohlensaure- haltiges Solvvasser zu Soden im Herzogthum Nassau: Deutscher Naturf. u. Aerzte 30 Vers. Carlsruhe, Amtl. Ber., p. 64-66; abs., Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1859, p. 46-50. 1982. Sandberger, G., 1960, Versuch das geologische Alter einer Therme, derjenigen von “Wiesbaden” zu bestimmen: Deutsche geol. Gesell. Zeitschr, v. 12, p. 567-572, 3 figs. 1983. 1861, Wiesbaden und seine Thermen. Eine natur-historische Schilderung: Wiesbaden, Germany, 80 p., illus; abs., Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Pa-laontologic, 1861, p. 601. 1984. Schloemer, Alfons K., 1933 [Activity of nonpathogenic bacteria utilizing mineral matter in the thermal water of Aix-les-Bains (France) and Aix-Burtseheid. I.] : Zeitschr. Untersuchung Lebensmittel, v. 65, p. 470-476; 1934, Chem. Abs., v. 28, col. 2382. 1985. 1936 [The action of nonpathogenic organisms in the thermal waters of the baths of Aachen and Aachen-Burtscheid. II] : Zeitschr. Untersuchung Lebensmittel, v. 71, p. 268-273; Chem. Abs., v. 30, col. 5607. 1986. Schmidt, A., 1904, Ueber die Radioaktivitat einiger Sfiss- wasser-, Mineral-, und Thermalquellen des Taunus : Kgl. Real-gymnasiums Wiesbaden, Jahresber. 10 ft. 1987. Schbnhals, Ernst, 1933, Das Auftreten der Mineralquellen bei Bad Neuheim, erlautert an Hand der Neuen geo-logischen Spezialkartierung: Deutsche geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., v. 85, p. 545-553, 2 figs. 1988. 1936, Geologie die Umgebung von Bad-Nauheim und Friedberg (Oberh.) unter besonderer Beriicksichtigung der Tertiarablagerungen : Univ. Giessen, dissert., 134 p., 9 pis., 22 figs.; Hessische geol. Landesanst. Darmstadt Abh., v. 9, no. 1, 134 p.; 1938, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 5, 1937, p. 267-268; 1939, v. 6,1938, p. 258. 1989. Schott, Theodor, 1894, The mineral waters of Nauheim: London. 1990. Schreiber, F., 1855, Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Nauheimer Solquellen: Eisleben, Germany, Bergwerksfreund, v. 18, p. 649-672. 1991. 1857, Die neue Fassung and das Verhalten des Sol-sprudels No. 7 in Nauheim : Ver. Erdkunde u. verwandte Wiss. Darmstadt Notizbl., pt. 1, no. 6, pt. 41^45. 1992. Schreiter, Rudolf, 1938, Thermen bei Freiberg?: Naturw. Ver. Freiberg Mitt., v. 3, p. 17-19; 1939, abs., Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1939, Referate 2, p. 86. 1993. Schulz, A., 1852, Mikroskopische Untersuchung der wich- tigsten Mineralquellen von Nassau: Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., no. 8, pt. 2, p. 49-89, 2 pis. 1994. Schuster, Mattheus, 1940, Der Schonborn-Sprudel und andere Altere Solequellen bei Bad Kissingen; die Geschichte ihrer Erschliessung und ihre geologische Bedeutung: Reichsanst. Bodenforschung Zweigstelle Miinchen Mitt., no. 36, p. 1-95, 18 illus. geol. map; 1944, abs., Zentralbl. Mineralogie. Referate 2, no. 4, p. 373; 1950, Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1944, v. 17, p. 286, 1950; 1951, Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 15, 1950, p. 261. 1995. Sieveking, H., and Lautenschlager, L., 1912, liber Helium in Thermalquellen und Erdgasen: Phys. Zeitschr., v. 13, p. 1043-1051, 1 fig. 1996. Spengler, L., 1856, Brunnenfirtzliche Mitteilungen fiber die Thermen zu Ems : 3 ed., Ems, Germany. 1997. Stiebel, F., 1840a, Soden und seine Heilquellen: Frank- furt, Germany; another ed. 1844. 1998. 1840b, Masse Bildung durch Galltonella in Sodener Salz Brunnen: Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, 1840, p. 504. 1999. Stifft, C. E., 1831, Geognostisehe Beschreibung des Her- zogthum Nassau mit besonderer Beziehung auf der Mineralquellen dieses Landes: Wiesbaden, Germany. 2000. Suchland, Rudolf, and Valentin, Wilhelm, 1858, Unter- suchung der heissen Mineralquelle im Badhaus zum goldenen Brunnen in Wiesbaden: Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde, Jahrb., no. 13, p. 28-40. 2001. Thilesius, H. C., 1817, Ems und seine Heilquellen: Wies- baden, Germany. 2002. Thuerach, H., 1913, Exkursion nach Baden-Baden: Deutsche geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., v. 65, pt. B, Monatsber., nos. 8-10, p. 489-508, 3 figs. 2003. Trommsdorff, J. B., 1824, Ueber die Mineralquellen des steinernen Hauses zu Bad Ems: Bonn, Germany, J. J. Noeggerath, Das Gebirge in Rheinland-Westfalen nach mineralogischen und chemischen Bezuge, v. 3, p. 216-224, 2 figs. 2004. Tutkowski, Paul, 1924, Geysirspuren in ukrainischen Po- lessie: Deutsche geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., Monatsber., no. 75, p. 218-219. 2005. Vollpracht, F., 1857, Chemische Analyse der heissen Quelle des Badehauses der “Vier Jahreszeiten” in Wiesbaden: Nassauischer Ver. Naturkunde Jahrb., no. 12, p. 411-419. 2006. Wagner, Julius, 1951, Zur Geographie der Baderstadt Nauheim: Geog. Rundschau, v. 3, no. 3, p. 115-118, illus.; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19,1954, p. 510. 2007. Weiss, Otto, and Groedel, J., 1907, Bad-Nauheim, seine Kurmittel und deren Anwendung * * * Friedburg and Bad-Nauheim, Germany, C. Bindemagel, 93 p., front., pis., map, diagrams. 2008. Weithofer, K. A., 1938, Zur Geologie und Entstehung der Schwefelquellen: Berg.- u. htittenma. Monatsch., v. 86, no. 5, p. 89-97. 2009. Weizsacker, Th., 1913, Ueber die Wildbader Thermalquel- len : Ver. Naturkunde Wtirttemburg Jahrb., v. 49, p. 41-48, 1 fig. 2010. Werveke, L. van, 1909, Das Vorkommen von Mineral- und Thermalquellen im lothringischen und luxembur-gischen Buntsandstein und die Mogliehkeit der Auf-schliessung von warmen Quellen im Moseltal: Geol. Landesanst. von Elsass-Lothringen Mitt., v. 7, p. 91-114, 1 table. 2011. 1913, Die Richtung der Nauheimer Thermalquellen-spalte: Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 21, no. 1, p. 49-54, 5 figs. 2012. Wilckens, O., 1927, Geologie der Umgegend von Bonn : Berlin, Gebriider Borntraeger, 273 p., 10 pis., figs. 2013. Wildenstein, Robert, 1852, Ueber das Vorkommen der Borsaure in der Aachen Kaiserquelle: Erdmann Jour, prakt. Chemie, v. 55, p. 165-166; 1854, abs., Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, Jahrg. 1854, p. 184.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 2014. Woy, R., 1910 [Reinerz bath in Schlesien and its new heal- ing springs] : Zeitschr. oftentl. Chemie, v. 10, p. 181-192 [German] ; 1911, Chem. Abs., v. 5, p. 3484. See also references 32, 62, 322, 571, 1279, 1285,1287,1291,1293, 1543,1669,1687, and 1699. GREECE AND ALBANIA 2015. Baird, Henry Martyn, 1856, Modern Greece: a narrative of a residence and travels in that country, with observations on its antiquities, literature, language, politics, and religion : New York, Harper & Bros., p. 13-380, 60 illus., map. Mentions ruins of ancient baths at Epidaurus, the two hot springs at Thermopylae, and springs at Neo-Patras. 2016. Cochrane, George, 1837, Wanderings in Greece: London, Henry Colburn, 2 v., fronts., pis., map. Mentions some of the thermal springs. 2017. Crosby, Francis William, and Crosby, William Otis, 1896, The sea mills of Cephalonia [Greece]: Massachusetts Inst. Technology [Cambridge], Technology Quart., and Soc. Arts Proc., v. 9, p. 6-23, 3 figs. Mentions thermal springs in several localities. 2018. Dambergris, A. K., 1892, Ueber die Mineralquellen von Aedipsos: Deutsche chem. Gesell. Ber., v. 25, p. 99. 2019. 1896, Die neuen heissen Quellen von Aedipsos und Gialtra, entstanden beim Lokrischen Erdbeben 1894: Tschermak’s mineralog. u. petrog. Mitt., new ser. v. 15, p. 385-393. 2020. 1908, Uber einige Schwefelquellen, Solquellen, und alkalischen Quellen von Griechenland: Pharm. Post, v. 42, 19/2, Nov., p. 157; Pharmazent Lab., Athens; 1909, abs., Chem. Zentralbl., 1909 [pt.] I, p. 1192. 2021. Emmanuel, Emmanuel, 1925 [New Grecian mineral spring] : Archiv Pharmazie, v. 263, p. 191-193; Chem. Abs., v. 19, p. 2096. . 2022. 1927 [Mineral waters of Loutraki] : Archiv Pharmazie, v. 265, p. 550-554; Chem. Abs., v. 21, p. 3996. 2023. Fouque, Ferdinand Andre, 1879, Santorin et ses Eruptions: Paris, G. Mason, 440 p., 61 pis. Contains information on hydrothermal activity in the vicinity of Santorin volcano. 2024. Georgalas, G. C., 1922, Carte des eaux min5rales de la Grfece: Bur. geologie Grdce Pub. 5, 14 p., Map. [Greek, French summary.] 2025. 1940, Die postvulkanische Fumarolentatigkeit und Wiirmehaushalt des Santorin-Vulkans: Bull, volcanol. ser. 2. 6, p. 237-242, 3 pis; 1950, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 14, 1949, p. 91. 2026. Georgiades, A. N., 1947, Les thermes de “Vulcain” dans Tile de Lemnos: Gdol. Pays Heliyniques, v. 1, p. 194r-203. [Greek, French summary.] 2027. Gorceix, H., 1874a, Ph6nom£nes volcaniques de Nisyros: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus v. 78, p. 444-446. Mentions the fumaroles produced by an eruption in 1873. 2028. 1874b, Aperqu geologique sur l’lle de Kos: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 78, p. 565-568. Mentions the boiling mineral springs on the coast. 2029. 1874c, Sur l’dtude des fumerolles de Nisyros et de quelques-uns des produits de Fdruption de 1873: Acad, sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 78, p. 1309-1311. 2030. 1874d, Etude des fumerolles de Nisyros et de quelques-uns des produits des Eruptions dont cette ile a ety le 321 sifege en 1872 et 1873: Annales chimie et physique, ser. 5, v. 2, p. 333-354. 2031. Government of Albania, 1928, Karte von Albanien : Scale 1: 200,000. Shows the locations of 20 springs, of which 3 are indicated to be thermal. 2032. Makres, K., and Kopakakos, G., 1931 [The adamantine mineral waters of the island of Milos (Greece)]: Praktika (Akad. Athenon), v. 6, p. 210-214; 1933, Chem. Abs., v. 27, p. 3266. 2033. Pertessis, Michel L., 1923, Les eaux minyrales de M<5- thana: Bur. g6ol. Gr5ce Pub. 9, 38 p. [Greek, French summary.] 2034. 1924, Les eaux minerales de Kaiapha: Service gdol. Grdce Pub. 11, 21 p. [Greek, French summary.] 2035. 1925, Les eaux minyrales de Langaza: Service geol. Grdce Pub. 13, 17 p. [Greek, French summary.] 2036. 1926, Sur la radioactivity des eaux minerales de Kamena Vourla: Service g<5ol. Grice Pub. 16, 52 p. [Greek, French summary.] 2037. 1930, Les eaux minerales de Smocovo, Thessalie: Service g5ol. Grice Pub. 17, 42 p. [Greek, French summary.] 2038. 1932, Les eaux minerales de File de Lesbos: Service giol. Grice Pub. 20, 38 p. [Greek, French summary.] 2039. 1934, Sur la radioactivity des sources minyrales de Gr5ce: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 198, p. 1053-1055. 2040. 1937, Sources thermo-minyrales de Grice: Service gdol. Grice Pub. 24, 112 p., 2 pis., map. [Greek, p. 5-88; French, p. 89-112.] Contains chemical analyses of water from 28 thermal springs in 18 localities. 2041. 1939, Sur les sources thermales radioactives de File de Nikaria: Praktika (Akad. Athenon), v. 14, p. 156-163, 2 pis. [Greek, French summary] ; 1940, abs., Chem. Zentralbl., 1940 [pt.] I, 3506. 2042. 1952 [Stability of chemical composition and temperature of Greek hot springs] : Praktika (Akad. Athenon), v. 26, p. 25-38 [Greek, French summary] ; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 1910. 2043. Washington, Henry Stephens, 1924, Notes on the solfatara of Sousaki (Greece), a recent eruption at Methana (Greece), and recent maccaluba at Vulcano (Italy) : Jour. Geology, v. 32, no. 6, p. 460-462. See also references 1293, 3252, and 3290. HUNGARY 2044. Bamlaky, Geza, 1928, Die gesehichtlichen und wirschaft- lichen Verhaltnisse der Budapester Biider und Mineral-wasser: Hidrol6giai Kozlony, v. 4-6 (1924-26), p. 21-26 [Hungarian], p. 110-117, 2 pis. [German]. 2045. Dalmady, Zoltan V, ed., 1929, The spas and waters of Hungary: Budapest, Hungarian Balneol. Soc., 159 p. [English.] A collection of eight papers on mineral springs and their uses, including three (by Julius v. Benczur, Z. v. Vamossy, and Johann Kunszt) containing information on thermal springs. 2046. fibner, Jozsef, 1934, A budapesti Hungdria forrds vizho- zama: Hidrologiai Kozlony, v. 13, p. 55-60,1 pl„ 2 tables; Der Wasserertrag der Hungaria-Quelle in Budapest, p. 61-66.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 322 2047. Einczinger, Ferenc, 1932, Esztergom melegforrfisai [Ester- gom hot springs] : Hidrol6giai Kozlony, v. 12, p. 82-84, 1 fig. 2048. Emszt, Kalman, 1928a, Vorausgehende Untersuchung des HajduszobloszlAer Thermalwassers: HidrolAgiai Kozlony, v. 4-6 (1924-26), p. 65-66] [Hungarian]. 2049. 1928b [Newest chemical analysis of the thermal springs of HarkAny, Hungary] : Balneol. Ertesito, v. 13, p. 7-9. [Hungarian] ; 1929, Chem. Abs., v. 23, p. 798. 2050. 1929, A dunalmaasi langyos forrasok vegyi Vizsgalata: Hidrol6giai Kozlony, v. 9, p. 104-106. 2051. 1932, A RudAsfiirdo forrasainak vegyi elemzAse: HidrA-lAgiai Kozlony, v. 12, p. 110-117 [Hungarian]: Chemi-sche Analyse der Quellen des Rudas-Bades, p. 117-119 [German summary] ; 1933, Chem. Abs., v. 27, p. 4326. 2052. 1934, Analyse der Quellen des Csaszar-Bades: HidrolAgiai Kozlony, v. 13, p. 77-86 [Hungarian, German summary] ; 1934, Chem. Abs., v. 28, col. 5555. 2053. 1936, Chemische Untersuchung der neu erbohrten Quellen der Szent Imre- und Rudas-Bader: Hidrol6giai Kozlony, v. 16, p. 44-50. [German.] 2054. Frank, Miklos, 1950 [The catalytic effect of mineral wa- ters] : Hidrol. Kozlony, v. 30, p. 416-427 [Hungarian] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 8680. 2055. Horusitzky, Heinrich, 1926, Hydrogeologie und National- okonomische Zukunft der Thermen von Tata und Tova-ros: Jahrb. Kgl. ungarischen geol. Anstalt Mitt., v. 25, p. 35-95,1 pi. 2056. Hunkar, Bela, 1942, Die chemische Zusammensetzung der Budapester Heilquellen: Wiener med. Wochenschr., v. 92, p. 853-856; 1943, abs., Chem. Zentralbl., 1943 [pt.] I, p. 1254. 2057. Jasko, Sandor, 1935, A PApai-Bakony HidrolAgiAja: Hi- drolAgiai Kozlony, v. 15, p. 205-211 [Hungarian] ; Hy-drologie Bakony-Gebirges bei PApa, p. 212, 3 figs. [German summary.] 2058. Kalecsinszky, A. v., 1898, Die chemische Analyse der wahrend der Vorabeiten beim Bruckenkopfe am Schwurplatze von Budapest ausgebrochenen artesischen Thermen: Foldtani Kozlony, v. 28, p. 306-311 [Hungarian], p. 343-349 [German], 2059. Render, Joszef, 1940 [The lukewarm spring of Budapest] ; HidrolAgiai Kozlony, v. 20, p. 216-221 [Hungarian] ; 1941, Chem. Abs., v. 35, col. 7591. 2060. Loczy, Lajos, 1937, Die tektonischen und hydrolischen Verhaltnisse der Gegend zwischen Balatonfiired und AszAfo, mit besonderer Beriicksichtiguug der Erschlies-sung des Kohlendioxydgases und Sauerwassers: Jahrb. kgl. ungarischen geol. Anstalt Mitt. (Magyar KirAlryi Foldtani Int. Evkonyve), 1929-32, p. 71-158, 4 pis., 15 figs. [Hungarian, German summary] ; 1939, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 6,1938, p. 173. 2061. Palfy, Moritz v., 1909, t'Tber das Aufsteigen der Thermal- wasser an die Oberflache: Foldtani Kozlony, v. 39, p. 16-17 [Hungarian] ; p. 108-110 [German]. 2062. Papp, Ferenc, 1936, AsuAnyvizeink As a fold alkata: Hi- drolAgiai Kozlony, v. 16, p. 136-152 [Hungarian] ; Zusammensetzung der Mineralwasser und Beschaffen-heit des Bodens, p. 153-154, 2 figs. [German summary.] 2063. 1937, Die warmen Heilquellen von Budapest: HidrolAgiai Kozlony, v. 17, p. 79-282, 70 figs. [German] ; 1939, abs., Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Paliionto-logie, Referate 2,1939, p. 629-630. 2064. Papp, Ferenc, 1949, Les eaux mAdicinales de la Hongrie (Suite et fin) : Hidrologiai Kozlony, v. 29, p. 295-300, 5 figs., 5 tables. 2065. 1951, Les eaux mAdicinales de la Hongrie: Internat. Union Geodesy and Geophysics; AsSoc. Sci. Hydrology, Oslo 1948, Trans., v. 3, p. 1544167, 4 figs., 4 tables. Contains analyses of water from 11 warm and 13 hot springs. Spring locations are shown on map. 2066. Papp, Karl v., 1903, Die Umgebung von Alvacza und Kazanesd im Komitat Hunyad: Jahrb. kgl. ungarischen geol. Anstalt Mitt., v. 10, p. 70-104, 6 figs. 2067. Sarlo, Karoly, 1947 [Sulfur content of Budapest thermal springs] : Magyar KAm. Lapja 2, p. 276-279 [Hungarian] ; 1948, Chem. Abs., v. 42, col. 3103. 2068. 1942 [Chemical evaluation of mineral waters]: Magyar KAm. Lapja 3, p. 144—145 [Hungarian] ; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 8077. 2069. 1949 [The chemical composition of the mineral water wells of Margitsziget, Budapest] : HidrolAgiai Kozlony, v. 29, p. 90-94 [Hungarian] ; 1950, Chem. Abs., v. 44, col. 6551. 2070. Schafarzik, Feranc, 1920a, Heissquellenflttchtlinge am Fusse des Szent-GellArt (Blocks) Berges zu Budapest: Foldtani Kozlony, v. 50, p. 79-83 [Hungarian], p. 137-142 [German], 3 figs. 2071. 1920b, tiber eine unbeachtet Gebliebene Quelle des Budapester Thermalen Wassernetzes: Foldtani Kozlony, v. 50, p. 83-85 [Hungarian], p. 142-144 [German], 2 figs. 2072. 1928a, Die geologische und graphische Darstellung der Mineralwasserquellen von Budapest: HidrolAgiai Kozlony, v. 4-6 (1924-26), p. 14-20 [Hungarian], p. 104-110 [German], 1 pi. 2073. 1928b, Ueber die jodhaltige Therme von Hajduszoboszlo, Komitat Hajdu, Ungarn: HidrolAgiai Kozlony, v. 4-6 (1924-26), p. 61-64 [Hungarian], p. 137-146 [German]. 2074. Schreter, Zoltan, 1912, Die Spuren der Tatigkeit Terti- iirer und Pleistozaner Thermalquellen in Budaer Gebirge (with chemical analyses by R. Ballo) : Jahrb. kgl. ungarischen geol. Anstalt Mitt., v. 19, p. 199-262, 1 pi., 1 fig. 2075. 1926, Die lauen Thermen von Eger (Erlau) : Jahrb. kgl. ungarischen geol. Anstalt Mitt., v. 25, p. 101-124, 1 pi. 2 figs. 2076. Societe d’Imprimiere par actions, 1878, Les eaux mlnArales de la Hongrie: Budapest, 147 p. 2077. Szalai, Tibor, 1949 [Origin and heat content of juvenile ingredients of Hungarian thermal waters] : HidrolAgiai Kozlony, v. 27, p. 73-77 [Hungarian] ; 1950, Chem. Abs., v. 44, col. 6056. 2078. 1951, Origin of the “juvenile” substances of the thermal waters in Hungary and their quantity of heat: Internat. Union Geodesy and Geophysics; Assoc. Sci. Hydrology, Oslo 1948, Trans., v. 3, p. 181-187, map. 2079. Than, Karl, 1876, Analyse der HarkAnyer Therme: Tsehermak’s mineralog. petrog. Mitt., p. 1-12. 2080. Vendl, Aladar, 1928, Ueber die geologischen Verhaltnisse der Somlyo- und der Szarhegy-Berge und ihre einstigen Thermen: HidrolAgiai Kozlony, v. 4-6 (1924-26), p. 37-44, [Hungarian], p. 124-133 [German], 1 fig. 2081. Ville de Budapest, 1916, Bain Szechenyi-Budapest, source hyperthermale sulfureuse, ouverte toute 1’annAe. PropriAtA de la Ville de Budapest Capitale-RAsidence: Budapest, 14 p., 40 pis.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 323 2082. Vitalis, S, 1934, Die hydrogeologisehen Verhaltnisse des Bades Sikindaffirdo und seiner Umgebung: Hidro-16giai Kozlony, v. 13, p. 38-54. 2083. Weszelszky, Gyula, 1928, Die chemischen Verhaltnisse der Budapester Mineralquellen : Hidroldgiai Kozlony, v. 4-6 (1924-26), p. 27-32 [Hungarian], p. 118-119 [German]. 2084. 1932 [Radioactivity of the hot springs near Rudas Bath at Budapest] : HidrOlogiai Kozlony, v. 12, p. 120-124 [Hungarian] ; 1933, Chem. Abs., v. 27, p. 4163. 2085. 1936, A budapesti hevizek r&diumemanaciOtartalm&nak eredet^rol: Ueber den Unsprung des Radiumemanation-gehaltes der Budapester Thermen: Hidroldgiai Kozlony, v. 16, p. 5-29, map. [Hungarian and German.] See also references 1285, 1291,1293, 2008. ITALY 2086. Allen, Eugene Thomas, 1939, The Tuscan soffioni; a re- view [abs.] : Am. Geophys. Union Trans., 20th Ann. Mtg., pt. 3, Repts. and Papers, Volcanology, p. 430. 2087. Anderson, Tempest, 1905, Recent changes in the crater of Stromboli: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 25, p. 123-129,11 pis., map. 2088. Andres, Angelo, 1905-06, Sulla formazione del fango ter- male di Bormio: R. 1st. lombardo sci. e lettere Rend., v. 38, p. 956-970, 1 pi.; v. 39, p. 301-316. 2089. 1907, Di alcuni microorganism!, probabilmente nuovi, esestenti nel fango termale di Bormio: Cong, naturalisti italiani Atti, 1906, p. 1-10. 2090. Anonymous, 1930, The mineral waters of Sardinia [abs.] : Water and Water Engineering [London], v. 32, p. 48. 2091. Anonymous (editorial), 1951, Natural steam power plants in Italy rebuilt: Chem. Eng. News, v. 29, no. 16, p. 1552. 2092. Ayres, Eugene, and Scarlott, Charles A., 1952, Energy sources—the wealth of the world: 1st ed., New York, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 344 p., front., illus., tables. Includes description of the development of steam wells at Larderello. Also mentions development of natural heat from thermal waters in Iceland, Oregon, and New Zealand. 2093. Betti, Mario, and Bonino, G. B., 1923, Esame ehimico- fisico ed analise dell’ acqua del Doccione dei Bagni Caldi (Bagni di Lucca) : Gazz. chim. italiana, v. 53, p. 437-452, 1 pi., 9 tables. 2094. Bizio, Giovanni, 1877, Analise chimica delle acque termall Euganee: R. ist. veneto de sci., lettere ed Arti Atti, ser. 5, v. 3, desp. 3, p. 307-338. 2095. Bragagnolo, Giuseppe, 1934 [Analysis of the hot springs of Val Calaona (Padova)] : Annali chimica appl., v. 24, p. 628-630; 1935, Chem. Abs., v. 29, col. 4109. 2096. 1937 [The mineral waters in the province of Udine] : Annali chimica appl., v. 27, p. 59-73; Chem. Abs., v. 31, col. 5489. 2097. 1948 [The radioactive waters of Bormio in Valtellina]: Annali chimica appl., v. 38, p. 179-194; 1949, Chem. Abs., V. 43, col. 4565. 2098. Bragagnolo, Giuseppe, and Carraro, E., 1936 [The thermal springs of Colli Euganei] : Annali chimica appl., v. 26, p. 185-193; Chem. Abs., v. 30, col. 7734. 2099. Cabella, Antonio, 1908, Risultati dell’analisi dell’acque termo-mineral della Sorgente San Calogero nell’Isola di Lipari: Soc. naturalisti Napoli Boll., v. 22, p. 38-44. 2100. Carlevaro, Enzo, 1941, L’utilizzazione industriale delle acque termali: Geofisica pura e appli. [Milano], v. 3, no. 1, p. 29-31. 2101. 1942, II decisivo contributo italiano alio sfruttamento delle acque termali: Geofisica pura e appli. [Milano], v. 4, no. 1, p. 5-14; abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, v. 17, 1944, p. 267, 1950. 2102. Carobbi, Guido, 1951 [Some products of the Vesuvian fu- maroles] : Soc. mineralog. italiano Rend., v. 7, p. 43-44 [Italian] ; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 2090. 2103. Carobbi, Guido, and Cipriani, C, 1954, Geoehemische Un- tersuchungen fiber die Quellen von Montecatini-Terme (Pistoia, Italien) : Fortschr. Mineralogie, v. 32, p. 86; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20,1955, p. 85. 2104. Carretta, Umberto, 1954 [Recent studies on eugenic (Euganean) hyperthermal waters]: Annali chimica appli., v. 44, p. 407-423 [Italian] ; 1955, Chem. Abs., v. 49, col. 3447. 2105. Casciani, Paolo, compiler, 1907, Le acque minerali d’ltalia: Rome, Ministero Intemo, Direzione Gen. Sanita Pubblica, 370 p., illus. [Italian and French.] Contains information on 131 bathing resorts and their springs, including 71 classed as thermal. 2106. Casoria, Eugenio, 1909, Le acque solfuree carboniche- boriche in Contursi (Prov. di Salerno) : Annali regia scuola surperiori agricoltura Portici, v. 9, ser. 2, 1909; 1913, abs., Wasser u. Abwasser, v. 6, no. 7, p. 285-286. 2107. Cavallaro, Carmelo ca. 1954, Le acque termo-minerali S. Calogero di Lipari: Stromboli (Assoc. Intemat. Vul-conologi), no. 3, p. 30-32, 2 figs. 2108. Ciofalo, Michele, 1927, Fauna termale Siciliana : R. accad. sci. lettere arti Zelanti Acireale Rend, e Mem., ser. 4, v. 1, p. 49-76. 2109. Collura, Paolino, 1949-50, [Natural thermalism studied from the point of view of the Euganeo Plan] : Ingegnere [Milan], v. 23, p. 1221-1229, 1349-1356, 1949; v. 24, p. 25-33, 1950 [Italian] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 9372. 2110. Conti, Piero Giovanni Ginori, 1928, Sfruttamento chimico del vapor dei soffioni boraciferi: Soc. geol. italiana Boll., v. 47, p. [97-106]. 2111. 1933a, Rieerche per 1’ottenimento dell’elio e per l’utiliz-zazione integrale dei gas di Larderello: Soc. italiana prog. sci. Atti, v. 22, pt. 1, p. 135-172. 2112. 1933b, The natural steam springs of Tuscany and their industrial exploitation: Royal Soc. Arts Jour. [London], v. 81, p. 737-775, figs. 2113. Cortassa, S., 1929, L’acqua termale dello Stabilimento Militare di Acqui: Annali chimica appli., v. 19, p. 297-306. 2114. Dal Piaz, Giorgio, 1951, On the mineral hot springs of the Euganean Hills and particularly of Abano (Padova) : Internat. Union Geodesy and Geophysics; Assoc. Sci. Hydrology, Oslo 1948, Trans., v. 3, p. 121-123. 2115. Dal Piaz, Giorgio; Merla, G.; and Trevisan, Livio, 1950. Relazione geologica sulle sorgenti termominerali di Bagni di Casciana : Pisa, Italy, 24 p. 2116. Daubeny, Charles Giles Bridle, 1825, Sketch of the ge- ology of Sicily: Edinburgh New Philos. Jour., v. 13, no. 24, p. 107-118; no. 26, p. 254-269, map; Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 1st ser., v. 10, p. 230-256, 1825.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 324 2117. Daubeny, Charles Giles Bridle, 1835, On the volcanic strata exposed by a section made on the site of the new thermal spring discovered near the town of Torre del Annuziata, in the Bay of Naples, with some remarks on the gases evolved by this and other springs connected with the volcanoes of Campania : Edinburgh New Philos. Jour., v. 19, no. 38, p. 221-231; abs., Geol. Soc. London Proc., v. 2, no. 40, p. 177-179. 2118. De Gori, Roberto, and Fiore, Louisa, 1952, Analysis of the water of Bagno Vignoni: Annali chimica appli., v. 42, p. 306-308 [Italian] ; Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 1049. 2119. De Luca, S., 1868, Recherches chimiques et th^rapeu- tiques sur l’eau thermale de la solfatare de Pozzuoles: Acad. sd. [Paris] Oomptes rendus, v. 67, p. 909-912. 2120. 1870, Recherche chimiques et th^rapeutiques sur l’eau thermomin^rale de la solfatare de Pozzuoles: Acad. sci. [Paris] Oomptes rendus, v. 70, p. 408-410. 2121. DeMarchi, L., 1927 [The origin of the thermal waters of Montegrotto] (Euganei) : R. accad. naz. Lincei Atti, v. 6, no. 5 (Cl. sci. fis., mat. e. nat.), Rend., ser. 6, v. 5, p. 841-845; Chem. Abs., v. 21, p. 3864. 2122. Dessau, Gabor, 1951, Nuovi studi su Vulcano: 1st ge- ologia appl. Univ. Napoli Mem. e note, v. 4, p. 33-48, 4 pis., 5 figs. 2123. De Stefani, Carlo, 1879, Le acque termali di Pieve Fosciana : Soc. toscana sci. nat. Atti, v. 4, p. 72-97. 2124. 1897, Isoffioni boraciferi della Toscana: Soc. geog. italiana Mem., v. 6, p. 410-435. 2125. 1904, Le acque termali di Torrite in Garfagnana: Soc. geol. italiana Boll., v. 23, p. 117-148. 2126. Dolomieu, Deodat, 1799, Description of the Paliorum Lacus or Lake Palius, in the valley of Noto in Sicily: Tilloch, Philos. Mag., p. 77-80. [Translated from Italian.] 2127. Doro, Bartolomeo, 1939a [Chemical and physicochemical analysis of the Roman thermal waters of Monfalcone] : Annali chimica appli., v. 29, p. 91-111 [Italian] ; Chem. Abs., v. 33, col. 8863. 2128. 1939b [The physicochemical state of the hot springs at Monfalcone] : Annali chimica appl., v. 29, p. .374-380 [Italian] ; 1940, Chem. Abs., v. 34, col. 838. 2129. Drigo, Angelo, and Rostagni, Antonio, 1943 [Radioactivity in the thermal area of Abano (Padua), Italy]: Atti Reale ist. veneto sci., lettere ed arti Atti, pt 2, p. 102, 407-413 [Italian] ; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 7331. 2130. Falini, Filippo, 1947, Sui criteri di ricerca per energia geotermica: Accad. naz. Lincei Atti., Cl. sci., fis., mat. e nat., Rend., ser. 8, v. 3, pt. 3-4, p. 360-365; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20, 1955, p. 156. 2131. Fiore, Otto de, 1914,1 fenomeni avvenuti a Vulcano (Isole Eolie) dal 1890 al 1913, Parte I: Zeitschr. Vulcanologie, v. 1, no. 2, p. 57-73, 3 pis., 1 fig. 2132. 1919, I fenomeni eruttivi avvenuti a Vulcano (Isole Eolie) ; nel 1916: Soc. sismici italiana Boll., v. 22, p. 246-262, 5 figs. 2133. Forbes, James David, 1829, Physical notices of the Bay of Naples. IV, On the solfatara of Pozzuoli: Edinburgh Jour. Sci., new ser., v. 1, p. 124-141,2 figs. 2134. Funaioli, Ugo, 1918, The Larderello natural steam power plant: Engineering [London], v. 105, p. 507-508, 567-569, 9 figs. 2135. Gabell, A., 1908, Analisi dell’acque minerale S. Calogero: Soc. nat. Napoli Bol., v. 12. 2136. Garelli, Giovanni, 1864, Delle acque minerali d’ltalia e delle loro applicazione terrapeutiche. 2137. Giani, Eugenio, 1951, Le sorgenti termali dell’azienda de- maniale di Montecatini: Riv. Catasto e Servizi Tecnici Erariali, new ser., v. 6, no. 1, p. 33-51, illus.; 1952, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 16, 1951, p. 112. 2138. Gioanetti, Victor Aime, 1779, Analyse des eaux min^rales de St. Vincent et de Couramayeur dans le duchg de’Aoste avec une appendice sur les eaux de la Saxe, de Pr6 S. Didier et de Fontane-More: Turin, Italy, 119 p. 2139. Gorceix, H., 1872, Sur les gas des solfatares des Champs Phl6greens: Annales chimie et physique, ser. 4, v. 25, p. 559-566. 2140. Gortani, Michele, 1938, Le acque sotterranee in Italia. Bibliografia generale: Roma, Servizio idrograf. Italia Pub. 18, pt. 11,474 p. 2141. 1951, Proposal to classify genetically the thermal Italian springs: Internat. Union Geodesy and Geophysics; Assoc. Sci. Hydrology, Oslo 1948, Trans, v. 3, p. 145-153. 2142. Gosse, Louis Andre, 1820, Account of a visit made to the baths of St. Filippo in Tuscany, with a description of the mode of forming stone medallions in basso relievo from the waters of the spring: Edinburgh Philos. Jour., v. 2, no. 4, p. 290-300. 2143. Guareschi, R., 1911, Le acque minerali de Montecatini di propriety demaniale: Annali chimica appl. v. 1, p. 506-514. 2144. Giimbel, C. W. von, 1891, Geologische Bemerkungen fiber die Thermen von Bormio und das Ortlergebirge: Kgl. bayer. Akad. Wiss., Mtinchen, Math-naturh. Kl., Sit-zungsber., v. 21, p. 79-120. 2145. Guzzanti, C., 1898, Fenomeni tellurici a Fiumecaldo, presso Mineo: Accad. sci. Acireale Atti e Rend., no. 8, 1896-7, p. 20-22. 2146. Haas, Hippolyt, 1907, Ueber die Solfatara von Pozzuoli: Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, v. 2, p. 65-108,3 pis. 2147. Hauer, Karl Ritter von, 1858, Chemische Untersuchung der warmen Quelle von Monfalcone nachst Triest: Geol. Reichsanst. Wien Jahrb., v. 9, p. 497-503. 2148. Hoffmann, F., 1832, Ueber das im mittellandischen Meere entstandene vuleanische Eiland, genannt Corrao, Nerita, Isola Ferdinandea, Graham Island, Hotham Island, und Julia, nebst einiger Nachrichten ueber krater-formige Inseln ahnlichen Ursprungs: Annalen Physik Chemie (Poggendorff), v. 24, p. 65-109, 1 fig. 2149. Illari, Giuseppe, and Cattadori, Lino, 1939 [The hot springs of Corniglio (Parma)]: Annali chimica appl., v. 29, p. 289-295. [Italian.] 2150. Illari, Giuseppe, and Zucchetti, Mario, 1938 [Analysis of the mineral waters of the Lesignano Baths (Parma)] : Annali chimica appl., v. 28, p. 258-275 [Italian] ; Chem. Abs., v. 32, col. 9348. 2151. Imbo, Giuseppe, 1939 [Measurement of the radioactivity of some waters of the island of Ischia] : Ricerca sci. ed prog, tecnico economia naz., v. 10, p. 546-551 [Italian] ; 1939, abs., Chem. Zentralbl., 1939 [pt.] II, 4456. 2152. Indovina, Renato, and Alliata, Pier Luigi, 1938, Analisi delle acque termali di San Lorenzo, presso Roccamena (Palermo)]: Annali chimica appl., v. 28, p. 336-346. 2153. Ippolito, Felice, 1947, Intorno ai criteri di ricerca per energia geotermica: Accad. naz. Lincei Atti, Cl. sci. fis.,BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 325 mat. e nat., Rend., ser. 8, v. 2, pt. 6, p. 821-827; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20,1955, p. 250. 2154. Irrera, L., and Labruto, G., 1934 [Chemical and physico- chemical examination of the thermal-mineral waters of S. Calogero on Lipari Island] : Annali chimica appl., v. 24, p. 57-70 [Italian] ; Chem. Abs., v. 28, col. 3814. 2155. Issel, Raffaelo, 1900, Saggio sulla fauna termale italiana: Mus. Zoologia Anatomia Comp., R. univ. Genova Boll., v. 4, no. 100, p. 1-4. 2156. 1901a, Saggio sulla fauna termale italiana: Accad. sci. Torino Atti, v. 36, p. 53-74,265-277. 2157. 1901b, Studi sulla fauna termale Euganea: Soc. Ligu-stieo sci. nat. geog. Genova Atti, v. 12, p. 146-150. 2158. 1901c, Osservazioni sopra alcuni animali della fauna termale italiana: Mus. Zoologia Anatomia Comp., R. univ. Genova Boll., v. 5, no. 106, p. 1-15, 2 pis. 2159. 1906, Sulla termobiosi negli animali acquatici. Ricer-che faunistiche e biologiche: Soc. Ligustico sci. nat. geog. Genova Atti, v. 17, p. 3-72, 2 pis., 14 figs. 2160. 1908, Sulla biologia termale (con particolare riguardo alle fauna) : Internat. Rev. gesamten Hydrobiologie u. Hydrographie, v. 1, p. 29-36. 2161. 1910, La faune des sources thermales de Viterbo: Internat. Rev. gesamten Hydrobiologie u. Hydrographie, v. 3, p. 178-180. 2162. Italia Arti grafiche, Iodica, 1948 [Therapeutic mechanism of the thermal waters of Salsomaggiore] : Bergamo, 300 p. [Italian.] 2163. Keller, Walter David, and Valduga, Adriano, 1946, The natural steam at Larderello, Italy: Jour. Geology, v. 54, no. 5, p. 327-334, 4 figs., 3 tables. 2164. Labat, A., 1890, Eaux minfirales d’ltalie: Paris. 2165. Labruto, Gaetano, and Labruto, Andrea, 1954 [Investiga- tion on the mud of the thermae of Granata-Cassibile in Ali Marina (Messina] Annali chimica appl., v. 44, p. 380-396 [Italian] ; 1955, Chem. Abs., v. 49, col. 3447. 2166. Lenzi, David 1928, Analisi del vapore dei soffioni bora- ciferi: Soc. geol. italiana Boll., v. 47, p. 82-86. 2167. Lobley, James Logan, 1889, Mount Vesuvius. A descrip- tive, historical, and geological account of the volcano and its surroundings: London, Roper & Drawley, 400 p., 20 pis. 2168. Lotti, Bernardino, 1893, Die geologischen Verhiiltnisse der Thermalquellen im toscanischen Erzgebirge (Catena Me-tallifera) : Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 1, p. 373-378,1 fig. 2169. 1895a, Sulle condizioni geologiche della sorgente termale di Vignoni, presso S. Quirico d’Orcia (provincia di Siena) : Com. geol. Italia Boll., v. 26, p. 219-221. 2170. 1895b, Thermalquelle zu Vignoni bei S. Quirico d’Orcia, Prov. Siena: Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 3, p. 497-498. 2171. 1928, I soffioni boraciferi della Toscana: Soc. geol. italiana Boll., v. 47, p. [87-96], 1 fig. 2172. 1931, La sorgente termale del Bagno di Gavorrano in Provincia di Grosseto: R. ufficio geol. Italia Boll., v. 56, no. 4, p. 1-6. 2173. Ludwig, E., and Panzer, Th., 1901, Ueber die Therme von Monfalcone: Tschermak’s mineralog. u. petrog. Mitt., new ser., v. 20, p. 185-198. 2174. Maddalena, Leo, 1939, Considerazioni geoidrologiche sulla origine e sulla protezione igienica delle sorgenti del l’Acqua Vergine; Ricerca sci., v. 10, no. 3, p. 98-103, 1 fig.; 1940, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 7,1939, p. 194. 2175. Magri, G., 1907, Alcune considerazioni circa l’origine delle “ocre rosse” depositate dalle acqua termali degli stabi-limenti dei bagni di Lucca: R. accad. Lincei Atti, ser. 5, Rend. 16, semestre 2,400-408. 2176. Malandrone, Iginio, 1942 [The thermal springs of Acqui] : Riv. Catasto e Servizi Tecnici Erariali, v. 9, p. 360-371 [Italian] ; 1943, abs., Chem. Zentralbl., 1943 [pt] I, 1254. 2177. Malladra, Alessandro, 1913, La solfatara dell’Atrio del Cavallo: R. accad. sci. fis. e mat. Napoli Rend., v. 19, pts. 6-10, p. 153-164,1 pl„ 1 fig. 2178. Mameli, Efisio, and Carretta, Umberto, 1936 [Analyses of the water and mud of the “Prehistoric Thermal Waters” (Montegrotto thermal springs, Euganean Hills)]: Annali chimica appl., v. 26, p. 475-488 [Italian] ; 1937, Chem. Abs., v. 31, col. 2719. 2179. 1954 [Two centuries of physical and chemical investigation on the hyperthermal mineral waters, muds, and gases of Euganei Mountains (Italy)] : Accad. patavina sci., lettere ed arti atti e Mem., pt. 2, v. 66, p. 7-146 [Italian] ; 1957, Chem. Abs., v. 51, col. 13269. 2180. Manfredini, Manfredo, 1935, Le sorgenti di Sardegna: Cong. geog. Italiano, 12, Sardegna 1934, Atti, p. 159-168, map.; 1943, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 9, 1941^2, p. 187. 2181. 1951, Contributo alio studio della idrogeologia laziale; I, Alcuni dati sulla falda idrica che alimenta le sorgenti delle Acque Albule: Italy Servizio Geol. Boll., v. 71 (1947-49), p. 113-119; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19, 1954, p. 298. 2182. Marotta, Domenico, 1942, Le sorgenti italiane; elenco e descrizione; Campania: Servizio Idrografico, Sezione Idrografica, Napoli, Pub. 14, v. 7, 745 p., map; 1950, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1944, v. 17, p. 283. 2183. 1943 [Mineral waters of Italy] : Annali chimica appl., v. 33, p.*231-262 [Italian] ; 1944, Chem. Abs., v. 40, col. 7453. 2184. Massara, G., and Capuano, S., 1931, Analisi delle acque termali di Termini Imerese sorgente nord-est: Annali chimica appl., v. 21, p. 403-418, 6 tables. 2185. Mazzoni, Alfredo, 1952, Societa Larderello In Italy brings in world’s largest steam well: Petroleum Engineer, v. 24, no. 9, p. A47, A48, A53, 5 illus. 2180. 1954 [The steam vents of Tuscany and the Larderello plant] : Anonimia Arti Grafiche Calderini s. v. 1.: 2d ed., Bologna, Italy; 1st ed., 1948. [Italian.] 2187. Mazzoni, Alfredo, and Breusse, J. J., 1954, Application de la prospection 61ectrique a la tectonique pour la recherche de vapeur naturelle a Larderello (Italie) [with discussion] : Internat. Geol. Cong., 19th, Algiers 1952, Compte rendu, sec. 15, pt. 17, p. 161-168, illus.; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20,1955, p. 353. 2188. Meyer-Ahrens, Konrad, 1869, Die Thermen von Bormio in physikalisch-chemischer, therapeutischer, klimatologi-scher, und geschichtlicher Beziehung * * *: Zurich, Switzerland, 135 p., table. [Literatur, p. 134-135.]THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 326 2189. Ministero di Lavori Pubblici, Servizio Idrografico, Istituto Poligrafico dello Stato, 1934, Le sorgenti italiane; elenco e descrizione; Sicilia: Pub. 14, v. 2, 545 p., 26 pis., 96 figs.; Le sorgenti italiane; elenco e descrizione, Sardegna : Pub. 14, v. 4, 415 p., 6 pis., 55 figs.; 1943, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 9,1941-42, p. 135. Describe in detail the springs of Sicily and Sardinia, some of which probably are thermal. 2190. Mitsuchi, Tomofusa, 1954, Geothermal electric plant in Italy: Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 63, no. 2, p. 69-66, illus. [Japanese, English summary] ; 1957, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1956, v. 28, no. 1, p. Ill; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20,1955, p. 367. 2191. Mollo, Jean-Dominique Marie, 1728, Traits des eaux mindrales de Courmayeur: Geneva, 132 p. 2192. Monforte, Francesco, and Labruto, Gaetano, 1952a [Chem- ical and physicochemical analysis of sulfurated water of Marino Hot Springs of Ali Marina (Messina)] : Annali chimica appl., v. 42, p. 247-264 [Italian] ; Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 10496. 2193. 1952b [Chemical and physicochemical analyses of the thermal water of a new spring in Ali Marina (Messina)] : Annali chimica appl., v. 42, p: 265-282 [Italian]; Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 19496. 2194. Moret, Leon, 1935, A propos des “soffioni” de Toscane: Soc. geol. France Comptes rendus sommaire, ser. 5, v. 5, no. 12, p. 175-177. 2195. Moretti, Attilio, 1938, Le manifestazioni idrotermali del Casteldoria (Sardegna settentrionale) : R. ufficio geol. Italia Boll., v. 63, Note 3,14 p., 2 figs. 2196. 1951, Nuove osservazioni sul fenomeno idrotermale di Casteldoria (Sardegna) : Italy Servizio Geol. Boll., v. 73, pt. 1, p. 31-36; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19, 1954, p. 329. 2197. Morgante, Sergio, 1951, Considerazioni sulla natura e sull’origine delle acque termominerali euganee: Soc. mineralog. italiana Rend., v. 7, p. 89-93; 1953, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 17, 1952, p. 306; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 4015. 2198. 1956 [Further considerations on the origin of the hot mineral waters of the Venetian region of Euganeo] : Univ. studi Trieste, Fac. sci., 1st. mineralogia, no. 4. 8 p.; Soc. adriatica sci. nat., Trieste Boll., v. 18, no. 1 [Italian] ; 1957, Chem. Abs., v. 51, col. 17029. 2199. Nasini Raffaello, 1928, Gas combustibili, Elio, Emanazione radioattiva, nei soffioni boraciferi della Toscana. Problem! di geologi: Soc. geol. italiana Boll., v. 47, p. [75-81]. 2200. 1930a [The waters of Montecatini. Problems of chemical hydrology] : Cong. naz. chimica pura ed appl., 3d, Atti, p. 95-117. [Italian.] 2201. 1930b, I soffioni e i lagoni della Toscana e la industria boracifera: Roma, Tipografia Editrice Italia, 658 p. 2202. Nasini, Raffaello, and Porlezza, C., 1917, L’acqua termale di Bagni di Casciana: R. ist. veneto sci. lettere ed arti Atti, v. 76, p. 725-768; 1919, Chem. Abs., v. 13, p. 1809. 2203. 1921, La ororadioattivith delle acque minerali. I’acqua carbonica-solfureo-borica delle terme di Satumia : Gior. chimica indus. ed appl., v. 3, no. 12, p. 543-545, 3 tables. 2204. 1922, Analisi ed esame chimico-fisico dell’acqua thermale carbonica-sulfureo-borica di Saturnia: Gazz. chim. italiana, v. 52, p. 115-124, 6 tables. 2205. Nicolis, E. de, 1908, Intorno alii ricerche intraprese dal Comune di Verona dal 1901 al 1906 per ottenere miglioramenti delle prerogative terapeutiche delle sorgenti termo-minerali di sua propriety, pollanti presso Caldiero: Gior. geol. pratico, v. 6, nos. 1, 2, p. 1-53. 2206. Oglialoro-Todaro, A., Forte, O., and Cabella, A., 1899, Acque del Gurgitello delle Terme Belliazzi nellTsola d’lschia (Casamicciola) : R. accad. sci. fis. e mat Napoli Atti, ser. 2, v. 9, no. 7, p. 1-34. 2207. Pallucchini, Annibale, ca. 1948, Brevi notizie sulle acque sotterranee in Italia: Union G6od. et gSophys. internat; Assoc, internat. hydrologie sci. Washington 1939, Comptes rendus, v. 2; question 3, rept. 10, 30 p., 3 pis., 2 figs. Describes springs having a flow sufficiently large for irrigation use. Includes map showing the location of about 345 thermo-mineral springs. 2208. Parascondola, Antonio, 1936, II bacino idrotermale del Lucrino e delTAvemo nei Campi Flegrei: Soc. natu-ralisti Napoli Boll. 48, p. 17-37. 2209. Parlati, Luigi, 1926 [The mineral waters of Basilicata] : 11 notiziario chim.-industriale, v. 1, p. 116-117 [Italian] ; Chem. Abs., v. 20, p. 2474. 2210. Pennycuick, J. A. C, 1948, Power without fuel: London, Electrician, v. 140, p. 117-118,3 figs. Discusses the use of natural hot water and steam to generate electricity on Ischia Island. 2211. Penta, Francesco, 1940, Studi e ricerche in corso nei Campi ed Isole Flegrei condotti alio scopo di utilizzare le energie del sottosuolo: Soc. naturalisti Napoli Boll. 51, p. 197-206; abs., Zentralbl. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontologie, Referate 3, p. 373, 1943; 1950, Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1944, v. 17, p. 267, 1950. 2212. 1951, Sulle ricerche per “forze endogene” nei napole-tano: Soc. geol. italiana Bull., v. 69, 1950, pt. 3, p. 567-587, illus. 2213. 1954, Sulle ricerche per forze endogene in Italia: Industria mineraria [Rome], v. 5, no. 1,' p. 1-13, illus.; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20, 1955, p. 413. 2214. Penta, Francesco, and Conforto, B., 1951 [Results of drill- ing and of geomineral studies at the Campi Flegrei of hot vapors, hot springs, and endogenous forces, in general] : Annali geofisica, v. 4, p. 369-385 [Italian] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 3921. 2215. Peracca, 1877, Cenni idrologici sulle acque termo-minerali d’ischia e sui risultate che dal loro uso ne ottennevo i militari del Regio esercito nell’anno 1876: Gior. med. militare [Roma], v. 25, p. 321-329. 2216. Perret, Frank Alvord, 1924, The Vesuvius eruption of 1906; study of a volcanic cycle: Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 339,151 p., 24 pis., 98 figs. 2217. Piccini, Pr., 1928, Azione generale delle acque minerali in alcuni gruppi piu importante di esse: R. soc. italiana Igiene Gior, v. 50, no. 3, p. 66-73; 1929, abs., Wasser u. Abwasser, v. 25, no. 6, p. 165. 2218. Picciola, L., 1923(?), Le acque minerali e termali della Venezia Giulia: Rassenga mineraria metall. e chim., v. 61, no. 5, p. 130-131,1925. 2219. Pieri, C., and Burichetti, E., 1930, L’acque termale di Pieve Fasciana: Soc. toscana sci. nat. Atti e Mem. 40, p. 1-20.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 2220. Piutti, A., and Comanducci, E., 1907 [Chemical analysis of the thermal mineral water “Greco” near Contursi, Salerno] : Accad. sci. fis. e mat. [Napoli] Rend., v. 13, p. 160-177 [Italian] ; 1908, Chem. Abs., v. 2, p. 649. 2221. 1912 [Chemical analysis of the mineral water “Minerva” of Torre Annunziata, Naples] : Accad. sci. fis. e mat. [Napoli] Rend., v. 18, p. 159-161 [Italian] ; 1913, Chem. Abs., v. 7, p. 525. 2222. 1921 [Thermal ferruginous carbonated water from the central basin of Agano (Naples)] : Accad. sci fis. e mat. [Napoli] Rend., v. 27, p. 80-84 [Italian] ; 1921, Chem. Abs., v. 15, p. 3352. 2223. Platania, G., 1934 [Radioactivity of some thermal springs of Ischia Isle] : Soc. italiana prog, sci Atti, v. 22, no. 2, p. 232 [Italian] ; Chem. Abs., v. 28, col. 6367. 2224. Porlezza, C., and Ceccarelli, A., 1935, Nuove indagini sull’acqua minerale Parlanti di Monsummano: Soc. toscana sci. nat. Atti [Proc.], v. 44, no. 5, p. 111-115; 1937, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 4, 1936, p. 217. 2225. Puxeddu, Ernesto, 1951 [Mineral waters of Sardinia] : Seminario fac. sci. Rend., 1952, univ. Cagliari, v. 19, 1949, p. 15-109 [Italian] ; 1952, Chem, Abs., v. 46, col. 3683. 2226. Puxeddu, Ernesto; Rattu, Anna; and Moss, Edwin, 1934 [Chemical and physico-chemical analysis of the hot springs of Acqua Cotta (Villasor)] : Annali chimica appl., v. 24, p. 289-300 [Italian] ; Chem. Abs., v. 28, col. 6884. 2227. Puxeddu, Ernesto; Rattu, Anna; and Oppo, Potenziana, 1934 [Physical and chemical investigation of the hot springs of Fordongianus (Sardinia) ] : Annali chimica appl., v. 24, p. 409-426 [Italian]; 1935, Chem. Abs., v. 29, col. 404. 2228. Puxeddu, Ernesto, and Sanna, G., 1929, Le acque minerali della Sardegna; Nota I.: Gior. chimica indus. ed appl., v. 11, no. 10, p. 438-442, 7 tables. 2229. Puxeddu, Ernesto; Sanna, G.; and Moss, E., 1933, Analisi chimica e ricerche chimico-fisiche delle sorgenti termali di Sardara: Annali chimica appl., v. 23, p. 193-214, 9 tables. 2230. Reck, Hans, 1935, Die Soffionenfelder Toskanas in ihrer vulkanologishen Bedeutung: Zeitschr. Vulkanologie, v. 16, no. 3, p. 161-179., 3 pis. 2231. Redini, Roberto, 1933, II fenomeno idrotermale del M. Pisano: Soc. geol. italiana Boll., v. 52, p. 52-72. 2232. Ricca, Bruno, 1945 [Italian mineral waters. A new thermo-mineral spring at Ali-Marina (Messina)]: Annali chimica appl., v. 35, p. 112-122 [Italian] ; 1946, Chem. Abs., v. 40, col. 7453. 2233. Ricca, Bruno, and Meduri, Pasquale, 1935 [Analysis of the spring waters at Iungari, Calabria] : Annali chimica appl., v. 25, p. 571-586 [Italian] ; 1936, Chem. Abs., v. 30, col. 4597. 2234. Sabatini, V., 1907, La macaluba di Bassano in Teverina: Com. geol. Italia Boll. 38, p. 54-56. 2235. Saccardi, P., and Deliana, N., 1941 [Analysis of the min- eral water of the thermal baths of S. Vittore in Genga, Ancona Province] : Annali chimica appl., v. 31, p. 101-109 [Italian] ; Chem. Abs., v. 35, col, 5607. 2236. Saccardi, P., and Giannella, Vincenzo, 1955, Ricerche chimiche e chimico-fisiche sulle sorgenti termali de Acquasanta (Ascoli Piceno: Italy Servizio geol. Boll., v. 77, p. 555-572,12 tables. 327 2237. Sacco, F., 1928, l’Origine de soffloni boraciferi: Soc. geol. italiana Boll., v. 47, p. 66-67. 2238. Sainte-Claire Deville, Charles Joseph, 1856, Sur la nature et la distribution des fumerolles dans irruption du Vesuve du 1" Mai 1855: Soc. gt'ol. France Bull., ser. 2, v. 13, p. 606-642,1 fig. 2239. 1857, MEmoire sur les Emanations volcaniques: Soc. gEol. France Bull., ser. 2, v. 14, p. 254—279. Describes volcanic phenomena at Vesuvius, Etna, Stromboli, and other places in Italy and Sicily. 2240. Santangelo, Mariano, 1940, Relazione sulle misure di radio- attivitA di alcune acque termominerali e dei vapori caldi delle stufe di Sciacca (Agrigento) : Ricerca sci. ed prog, tecnico economia naz., v. 11, no. 12, p. 957-960. 2241. Santi, B., 1955, Manifestazioni esalativo-ldrotermali del- 1’isola d’Ischia ; Bull, volcanol., v. 16, p. 181-224, map; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20.1955, p. 469. 2242. Santi, Beniamino, and Noi, A. di., 1955, Sulle manifestazioni esalativo-idrotermali dell’isola d’lschia: Industria mineraria [Rome], v. 6, no. 9, p. 489-493; 1958 abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 22,1957, p. 471. 2243. Sappa, Mercurino, 1955, Fenomeni geyseriformi dell’isola d’Ischia: Bull, volcanol., v. 16, p. 225-250, illus.; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20,1955, p. 470. 2244. Scarpa, Oscar, 1939, Sulla radioattivitft delle acque ter- mali e dei gas delle fumarole dell’Isola d’lchia : Ricerca sci. ed prog, tecnico economia naz., v. 10, no. 11, p. 988-991. 2245. Schivardi, Plinio, 1871, Rendiconto della stagione termale dell’anno 1870 ai Bagni d’Acqui: Gazz. medica italiana-lombardia, p. 89-90. 2246. 1895, Guida alle Acque Minerali ed ai Bagni d’ltalia: 4th ed., Milan, Italy. 2247. Schneider, Franz Coelestin, 1874a, Ghemische analyse der euganaischen Thermen von St. Helena bei Battaglia : Akad. Wis. Wien, Math.-naturh. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 69, pt. 2, p. 55-71; abs., Chem. Zentralbl., v. 45, p. 122. 2248. 1874b, Untersuchung der Thermen von Trentschin-Teplitz und des Sauerlings von Kubra: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math-naturh. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 69, pt. 2, p. 72-90; abs., Chem. Zentralbl., v. 45, p. 122. 2249. Serio, Calogero, 1954 [Comparative chemical investiga- tions on two groups of thermomineral springs in the district of Trapani (Sicily) ] : Riv. mineraria siciliana, v. 5, p. 251-257 [Italian] ; 1955, Chem. Abs., v. 49, col. 11210. 2250. Sicardi, Ludovico, 1940, II recente ciclo dell’attivitit fu- marolica dell’isola di Vulcano: Bull, volcanol., ser. 2, v. 7, p. 85-137, illus.; 1951, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 15,1950, p. 270. 2251. 1944, L’attivitA della solfatara di Pozzuoli attraverso la documentazione storica avati l’ultimo ottantennio : Soc. italiana sci. nat. Atti, v. 83, pt. 2, p. 97-114; 1950, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 14,1949, p. 237. 2252. Susanna, Vittorio, 1950 [Numbering of thermal waters and muds of the Flegrea zone] : Arch, ospedale mare, v. 2, p. 207-208 [Italian]; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 9201. 735-914 O—65——22THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 328 2253. Talenti, Mario, and Borgioli, Natale, 1948 [Hyperthermal waters of Mount San Antonio (Rosapepe) in Contursi (Salerno)]: Annali chimica appl., v. 38, p. 195-211 [Italian] ; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 3121. 2254. 1955, L’acqua delle Terme di Fogliano (Latina) : Chimica [Milan] v. 31, no. 6 (new ser.), p. 241-244. 2255. 1958 [Thermal water of Saturnia baths (Grosseto Province)] : Chimica [Milan], v. 34, p. 349-352 [Italian] ; Chem. Abs., v. 53, col. 11722. 2256. Taramelli, T., 1910, Condizioni geologiche delle fonti ter- mali di San Pellegrino : Gior. geologia pratica, v. 8, no. 4, p. 115-136. 2257. Tarrico, Michele, 1929, Le terme Luigiane nei rapporti geologici: R. ufficio geol. Italia Boll., v. 54, no. 2, p. 1-12, 1 fig. 2258. Tioli, L., 1894, Le acque minerali e termali del Regno d’ltalia: Milan, Italy. 2259. Trentin, A., 1926, La distribuzione geografiea delle sorgenti minerali in Italia: Riv. idrologia, climatologia e terapia fis., v. 37, p. 326-342. Includes data on several thermal springs and list of references. 2260. Trevisan, Livio, 1951 [A new hypothesis on the origin of the heat of some springs of Tuscany]: Industria mine-raria, v. 2, p. 41-42 [Italian] ; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 4525. 2261. Verraz, Ambroise, 1809, Dissertation sur les eaux de Cour- mayeur situAes dans la valine d’Aoste, Departement de la Doire, avec theses soutenues publiquement devant la Faculty de MAdecine de l’Academie de Turin: Turin, Italy, 31 p. 2262. Vinassa de Regny, Paolo, 1900, La sorgente acidulo-alca- lino-litiosa di Uliveto ; Soc. toscano sci. nat. Mem. 17, p. 186-202. 2263. Viola, C., 1923 [Radio-activity of mineral springs]: Accad. Lineei Atti, v. 32, no. 2, p. 7-11 [Italian] ; 1924, Sci. Abs., v. 27, Sec. A., p. 188. 2264. Visintin, Bruno, 1945 [The water of the Grotto Gattulla, of the Government Hot Baths of S. Cesarea (Otranto) ]: Annali chimica appl. v. 35, p. 97-111 [Italian] ; 1946, Chem. Abs., v. 40, col. 7454,1946. 2265. Vistoli, G., 1955 [Mineral waters of Monzone; preliminary note] : Chimica [Milan], v. 11, p. 471—173; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 4431. 2266. Washington, Henry Stephens, and Day, Arthur Louis, 1915, Present conditions of the volcanoes of southern Italy: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 26, p. 375-388, 9 pis., 1 fig. 2267. Zambonini, F., Carobbi, G., and Caglioti, V., 1925, Ricerche chimiche e chimico-fisiche su tre acque minerali di Agnano (Napoli) : Annali chimica appl., v. 15, p. 434-474. See also references 20, 21, 30, 54, 75, 78, 94, 113, 130, 322, 571, 848, 1171, 1193, 1285, 1293, 1297, 1304, 1316, 1669, 1686, 1687, 1717, 1737, 2043, 3087, and 3554. PORTUGAL 2268. Acciaiuoli, Luiz de Menezes Correa, 1947, Hydrologia por- tugueza. Aguas minerals e de mesa, 1943-1946: Portugal, Direcgao Geral Minas e Servigos Geol., 286 p., 127 figs., 9 graphs. Contains data on nine thermal springs. 2269. 1950, Historia da quimica na hydrologia portuguesa : Acad. Cienc. Lisboa Mem., v. 5, p. 215-267; 1951, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 15, 1950, p. 190. 2270. Acciaiuoli, Luiz de Menezes Correa, 1952, Le Portugal hydrominAral: Portugal, Direcgao GAral Minas e Servigos Geol., Lisboa, v. 1, p. 285, illus.; 1954, abs., Bibilography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 18,1953, p. 1. 2271. 1955, Estudos analiticos de aguas termais; Caldas da Rainha, Caldas de Monchlque, Ilha de S. Miguel (Furnas e Ribeira Grande) : Portugal, Direcg&o Geral Minas e Servigos Geol., 176 p. 2272. Acciaiuoli, Luiz de Menezes Correa; Diniz, Pedro Joyce; Castro e Solla, Luiz de; and Narciso, Armando, 1940, Aguas minerals do Continente e Ilha de S. Miguel: Portugal, Direcgao Geral Minas e Servigos Geol., 162 p. Contains data on thermal springs in Portugal and the island of Sao Miguel, Azores. 2273. Batista Coelho, Arnaldo, 1918, Caldas da Saude (Santo Tirso)—Eficaeia das suas aguas: Santo Tirso, 49 p.; abs,. Rev. chimica pura e appl., ser. 2, anno 3, v. 13, p. 308-309. 2274. Brandao, V. Souza, 1919, Exame de algumas roehas das visinhangas da nascente de Aguas termais de Valadares de Minho (MonsAo) : Rev. chimica pura e appl., ser. 2, anno 4, v. 14, p. 129-136, map. 2275. Brito, Alberto, 1945, ContribuigAo para o estudo especto- grafico das Aguas minerals do Norte do Portugal: Oporto. 2276. Carneiro e Freitas, Constantino Augusto de Almeida, 1947, As termas de Carvalhal (Castro Daire) e suas possibili-dades creno-climato terApicas: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 215-222. 2277. Carvalho, Augusto da Silva, 1947, Novas contribuigoes para a histOria das Caldas da Rainha: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 41-54. 2278. Castel-Branco, J. Bentes, 1906, EstagAo climaterica e sanitaria das Caldas de Monchique: Lisboa. 2279. Costa e Silva, Luis da, 1947, Palavras dirigidas aos con- gressistas no Hospital Termal das Caldas da Rainha: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 55-57. 2280. Cotelo Neiva, J. M., 1946, Notas sObre a geoquimica das Aguas minero-medicinais do norte de Portugal: Portugal, Servieo Fomento Mineiro, Estudos, Notas e Traba-lhos, v. 2, pts. 3-4, p. 228-231; abs. Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, v. 22, 1949, pt. 1; 1950, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 14,1949, p. 55. 2281. 1947a, As termas de AlfaiAo (Branganga) : Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 395-396. 2282. 1947b, Notas sobre a geoquimica das Aguas minero-medicinais do norte de Portugal: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 397-399. 2283. Custodio de Morais, J, 1947, Aguas minerals de Portugal, sua composigao e origem: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 339-351, map. 2284. Freire de Andrade, Carlos, 1924, Sources thermales de Caldelas, Captages: Portugal, Servigos Geol. Commun. 15, 22 p., figs. 2285. 1933a, Sources minAro-mAdicinales de Cucos ; Captages: Portugal Inst. Hidrologia, p. 1-37, figs., map. 2286. 1933b, A tectonica do estuario do Tajo e dos vales submarinas ao largo da costa de Caparica e a sua relagaoBIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES com as nascentes termo-minerales de Lisboa : Portugal Servigos Geol. Comun. 19, p. 1-20, table. 2287. Freire de Andrade, Carlos, 1935, Consideracoes sobre a linha de depressoes Barcelos-Montalegre: Univ. Lisboa Mus. e Lab. Mineralog. e Geol. Bol., ser 2, no. 4, p. 21-39, map; 1939, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 6, 1938, p. 89. 2288. Guimaraes, Feliciano, 1947, Francisco Tavares, hydrolo- gista: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 247-292, 3 pis. Contains maps showing the locations of mineral springs in Portugal. 2289. Herculano de Carvalho, A., 1953 [Radioactivity of Portu- guese mineral waters] : Rev. quimica pura e appl., v. 4, p. 206-212 [Portuguese]; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 10949. 2290. 1955, Estudos analiticos de dguas termais; caldas da Rainha, caldas de Monchique, ilha de S. Miguel (Furnas e Ribeira Grande) : Portugal, Direegao Geral Minas e Servicos Geol., Lisboa, 177 p.; abs., 1957, Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20, 1955, p. 228. 2291. Hernandez-Pacheco, Eduardo, 1947, ContribuciOn al estudio de las dguas juveniles, y a la hydrogeologia de la peninsula Hispanica : Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st Lisboa, Actas, p. 407-420. 2292. Jorge, Arthur Ricardo, 1888, As Caldas de Geres: Oporto, Portugal. 2293. Kaiser, Erich, 1914, Der Elaolithsyenitlakkolith der Serra de Monchique im siidlichen Portugal: Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Paliiontologie, Beilage-Band 39, p. 225-267, 6 figs., 4 pis. 2294. Lopez, Alfredo Luis, 1892, Aguas minero-medicinaes de Portugal: Lisboa, M. Gomes. 2295. Maia, Celestino, 1947a, Resumo da palestra sobre as Ter- mas do Geres: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 75-80, map. Contains a map showing the locations of mineral springs in Portugal. 2296. 1947b, A primeira descricao geologica do Ger6s: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hildrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 329-338, illus. 2297. Narciso, Armando, 1947, Clinica hidrologiea e organizagao termal: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 353-393. 2298. Nazareth, Francisco Martins de Souza, and Gomes, Felis- mino Ribeiro, 1918, Constantes fisico-quimicas das Aguas do Luso: Rev. chimica pura e appl., ser. 2, anno 3, v. 13, p. 187-196. 2299. Oliveira, Jose Cid de, 1947, Palavras dirigidas aos con- gressistas, no Luso. A dgua termal de Luso e suas apli-cag5es terapeuticas: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 59-61. 2300. Pinto, Victor Macedo, 1947, Palestra feita em Caldas de Aregos: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 71-74. 2301. Rosa, Mario, 1947, A posigao de Monte Real na clinica hidroldgica: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 471-480. 2302. Silva Barreiro, Abilio Augusto da, 1947, I. Primeira ana- lise, sumaria, da nascente das Caldas de S. Lourengo, II. Noticia dos restos doutra estancia termo-sulfurica muito mais antiga na mesma encosta, cerca de dois quilometros a jusante da primeira: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidro- 329 logia, 1st Lisboa, Actas, p. 143-147; 1950, abs., Rev. chimica pura e appl., ser. 4, v. 1, p. 187-189. 2303. Viana de Lemos, Americo, 1947a, Determinagoes de radio- actividade na visinhanga da nascente termal de Luso: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 297-301. 2304. 1947b, A fonte de S. Joao do Luso: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st Lisboa, Actas, p. 303-307. 2305. Withering, William, 1795, A chemical analysis of the water at Caldas da Rainha: Lisbon Acad. Sci. [Portuguese and English]; 1798, Annales chimie, v. 25, p. ISO-185. [French.] 2306. Zbyszewski, Georges, 1938, Observations sur un cas d’hydrologie souterraine dans le nord du Portugal; le bassin de Chaves: Rev. g<§ographie phys. et gGologia dynam., v. 11, pt. 3, p. 286-292, 6 figs.; 1943, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 9,1941-42, p. 331. See also reference 1760. RUMANIA (ROMANIA) 2307. Abrard, R., 1937, Les eaux mindrales de la Roumanle: Moniteur pdtrol. Roumain, v. 38, no. 9, p. 693-694. 2308 Encyclopaedia Britannica, 1911, Rumania: 11th ed., New York, Encyclopaedia Britannica, v. 23, p. 825-849. Mentions nine thermal-spring localities. 2309. Athanasiu, G. S., 1927, Radioactivity des sources thermales des Bains d’Hercule (Roumanie) : Acad. Sci [Paris] Comptes rendus. v. 185, p. 944-945. 2310. 1929 [Radioactivity of Rumanian thermal springs II.] : Inst. geol. Romaniei Anuarul, v. 13, p. 53-63 [French] ; 1932, Chem. Abs., v. 26, p. 4539. 2311. 1931 [The radioactivities of Rumanian springs. III.] : Inst. geol. Romaniei Anuarul, v. 16, p. 935-944 [French] ; 1935, Chem. Abs., v. 29, coL 3911. 2312. 1941, Einige Bemerkungen fiber den Ursprung und die regionale Verteilung der radioaktiven Quellen von Rumanien: Soc. roumaine physique Bull., v. 42, p. 87-102, 1942; abs., Chem. Zentralbl., 1942 [pt.] I, p. 1482. 2313. Berger, M. S. D., 1900, Les eaux mingrales en Roumanie: Paris. 2314. Cantuniari, St., 1939, Etudes hydrogeologiques sur les sources minerales de Slanic (Distr. du Bacau) ; Soc. Romane geologie Bui. 4, p. 30-52,2 pis. 2315. Cisman, Alex, and Ruscior, Const., 1948 [Radioactivity of the hot mineral springs of Mangalia, Rumania] : ficole polytech. Jassy Bull., v 3, no. 1, p. 344-352 [French] ; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 6077. 2316. Crasu, V., Manole, V., and Cociasu, E. M., 1941 [Mineral waters of Rumania, Bucegi district] : Inst. geol. Romaniei, Studii tech, dcon., ser. B, no. 15, 148 p. 2317. 1943 [Mineral waters of Rumania. II, The districts of Dolj, Gorj, Meliedinti, Olt, Romanati, and Valcea] : Inst. geol. Romaniei, Studii tech. econ. ser. B, no. 23, 74 p. [French.] 2318. Dick, J., 1930 [Analysis of the water and deposits from springs of the “baths of Basna,” district of Tamava-mica]: Soc. Stiinte Cluj Bull., v. 5, p. 330-343. [French.] 2319. Donescu, T., 1933, Radioactivitatea isvorarelor termale de la Mangalia. (Determinari facute in August 1932) : Soc. Fizica Romania Bui. Bilunar 56, p. 6-8. [Rumanian.]THERMAL SPRINGS OP THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 330 2320. Geza, Horvath, 1916, Adaiyk a nagyvdradi Ptispokffirdo faundjfihoz: Allatani Kozlemenyek, Budapest, v. 15, p. 103-107. 2321. Giurgea, Emile, 1914, Contribution A l’ytude de la radio- activity des eaux min^rales de Roumanie: Acad. Romana, Sec. sci. Bull., v. 3, p. 54-61; 1915 abs., Chem. Zentralbl., 1915, [pt.] II, p. 47. 2322. Leyden, E. V., 1897, Uber die Heilquellen, Bader, und Cur- orte Roumaniens: Deutsche med. Wochenschr. [Leipzig], v. 23, Sept. 2, p. 569-571. 2323. Loisel, P., and Michallesco, 1922, Sur la radioactivity des sources des Bains d’Hercule en Roumanie: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 175, p. 1054-1056. 2324. 1923, Sur la radioactivity des sources de “Baile Her-culane” (Bains d’Hercule) en Roumanie: Acad. Romana, Sec. sci. Bull., v. 8, p. 320-323. 2325. Pamfil, G. P., 1921, Bestimmung und Gehalt an NHiCl in den Thermalwassern von Mehadia: Soc. Stiinte Cluj. Bui., v. 1, p. 132-135; 1923, abs., Chem. Zentralbl., 1923 [pt.] I, p. 1071. 2326. Partos, A., 1901, Herculesbad und seine Thermen: Buda- pest. 2327. Schneider, Franz Coelestin, 1871, Analyse der Mineral- quellen des Hercules-Bades nachst Mehadia. Unter Mitwirkung des Herrn, Dr. J. Kottsdorfer, ausgefiihrt von F. C. Schneider: Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturw. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 64, pt. 2, p. 577-622. 2328. Spacu, G., and Dick, J., 1927 [Analysis of water from the spring “Balint” of the Felix baths] : Soc. Stiinte Cluj. Bui., v. 3, p. 240-243 [French] ; 1928, Chem. Abs., v. 22, p. 129. 2329. Spencer, Edmund, 1838, Travels in Circassia, Krim Tar- tary, etc., including a steam voyage down the Danube, from Vienna to Constantinople and around the Black Sea in 1836: 2d ed., London, H. Colburn, 2 v.; v. 1, 355 p., front., 9 illus., map; v. 2, 425 p., front., 9 illus.; 3d ed., 1839. Describes the baths of Mehadia. 2330. Straub, Janos, 1950, Composition chimique d’eaux mydi- cinales (eaux minerales) de Transylvanie, leurs compo-sants plus rares et l’importance biochimique de ceux-ci: Inst. gyol. Hongrie Annales (Magyar Allami Foldtani Intyzet Evokonyve), v. 39, pt. 1, 110 p., 2 tables. [Hungarian ; French summary, p. 103-109.] Includes chemical analyses of the water from five thermal springs. 2331. Szabo, A., and Atila, Soo, 1956 [Radioactivity of some hot springs near Oradea and Hunedoara (Siebenbergen) ] : Acad. rep. populare Romine, Inst. fiz. Atomica IFA/ R/l, 9 p. [Rumanian] ; 1957, Chem. Abs., v. 51, col. 15043. 2332. Voitesti, I. P., 1921, Betrachtungen fiber den Ursprung und die Entstehung der Thermalquellen von Herkules-bad: Soc. Stiinte Cluj Bui., v. 1, p. 124-131. Chem. Zentralbl. 1923 [pt.] I, p. 1071. 2333. 1937, Situatia geologica, originea, aparitia si evolutia isvoarelor “Hebe” de la Sangeorz-Bai: Univ. Cluj. Muz. Geol.-Mineralog. Rev., v. 6, no. 1-2, p. 22-25; 1938, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 5,1937, p. 324. See also references 1279,1293, 2076, and 2352. SPAIN 2334. Anonymous, 1944, Guia balnearia de 1944: Spain, Direc- cion de Turismo publico. 2335. 1947, Distrito minero de Santander (La Espana Minera y Metalurgica; Actividades profesionales) : Spain, Direccion Gen. Minas, 52 p., 76 figs.; 1949, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 17,1952, p. 67. 2336. Bataller Calatayud, Jose R., 1955, Notas sobre hidrologia subterranea espanola: Acad. Cienc. Barcelona Mem., ser. 3, no. 651, v. 32, no. 3, p. 41-71, illus.; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21,1956, p. 38. 2337. Botella y de Hornos, Federico de, 1892, Monographia de las aguas minerales y termales de Espana : Ministero de Fomento. Contains map showing the location of thermal springs in Spain; also includes chemical analyses of the water from many springs. 2338. Carbonell, T. F. A., 1946 [The mineral springs of Fuen- caliente (Ciudad Real) ] : Spain, Inst. Geologieo y Minero Notas y Comun. 16, p. 237-266, illus. [Spanish] ; 1948, Chem Abs., v. 42, col. 7463; 1953, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 17, 1952, p. 67. 2339. Hernandez-Pacheco, Francisco, 1947, Estudio hidrogeolo- gico de las termas de Alhama de Aragon, Zaragoza) : Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 421-440. 2340. Labat, A., 1901, Olimat et eaux minyrales d’Espagne: Paris. 2341. Lopez de Azcona, Juan Manuel, 1947a [Spectographic study of the elemental composition of medicinal waters of the Spanish peninsula. I.] : Spain. Inst. Geoldgico y Minero Notas y Comun. 17, p. 3-8, map [Spanish] ; 1948, Chem. Abs., v. 42, col. 2039. 2342. 1947b, Composicion elemental por mytodos espectrales de aguas medicinales de la peninsula iberica num. 1: Spain, Inst. Geologieo y Minero Notas y Comun. 17, p. 233-243, map; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19, 1954, p. 289. 2343. 1947c, Las aguas minero-medicinales de la Provincia de la Coruna: Cong. Luso-Espanhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 133-142, map. 2344. 1956, Las aguas mineromedicinales de la provincia de Pontevedra [Spain] : Spain Inst. Geologieo y Minero Notas y Comun. 41, p. 3-22, 4 pis., map, 1 table. 2345. Mazarrasa, J. M. de, 1930, Aguas minero medicinales de la Provincia de Santander: Spain, Officia Minas, Me-talurgia, y Combustibles Bol 14, p. 757-772, 805-826. 2346. Medicos Directores de Banos, 1903, Resena de los prin- cipales balnearios de Espana; Libro dedicado a los miembros del XIV Congreso Internacional de Medicina, Madrid, Abril 1903. [Cover, XIV Congreso Internacional de Medicina; Aguas minero-medicinales de Espana, Abril 1903] : Madrid, 332 p., 30 illus. Contains map of Spain showing the chemical character and location of springs, 40 of which are classed as thermal. 2347. Mendizabal y Gortazar, Joaquin, and Ruiz de Gaona, Maximo, 1949, Explicacion de la hoja no. 141, Pamplona: Spain, Inst. GeolOgico y Minero, Mapa Geol., scale 1: 50,000. Expl. no. 1184, 36 p., illus.; 1951, abs., Bibli-BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES ography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 15,1950, p. 90. 2348. Meseguer Pardo, Jose, 1951, Hidrologia de Puertollano; la fuenta acidula de San Gregorio: Spain Inst. Geologico y Minero Notas y Comun. 22, p. 163-181; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 22,1957, p. 358. 2349. Orti, Carlos, 1947, DistribuciOn geol6gica de los manan- ciales mineromedicinales Espanoles: Cong. Luso-Espa-nhol Hidrologia, 1st, Lisboa, Actas, p. 405-406. 2350. Pina de Rubies, S., and Sir vent d’Argent, C., 1931 [Spec- tographic determination of cations of some Spanish medicinal mineral waters]: Soc. Espanola fisica y Quimica Anales, v. 29, p. 235-246 [Spanish] ; Chem. Abs., v. 25, p. 3104. 2351. Rubio, Pedro Maria, 1853, Tratado complete de las fuentes minerales de Espaiia : Madrid. 2352. Sullivan, William R., 1863, Notes on geology and min- eralogy of the Spanish provinces of Santander and Madrid: London. See also references 1285, 1293, 1576, 1642, and 2291. SWEDEN' 2353. Wahlenburg, Georg (Goran), 1812, Beobachtungen iiber Quellen-Warme und die Vegetation, zur Bestimmung der Erd-Temperatur und des Klima von Schweden: Annalen Physik (Gilbert) v. 41, p. 115-161. (Forsok att genom spring-kallors * * * : Stockholm Acad. Handl. 30, p. 205-222, 1809. Ron om spring-kallors temperatur * * * : Stockholm Acad. Handl. 32, p. 1-54, 198-207, 1811.) SWITZERLAND 2354. Baup, S., 1835, Analyse de l’eau thermale de Lavey: An- nales chimie et physique, v. 48, p. 109-111. 2355. Binggeli, E., and Haenny, Ch., 1952, Mesure de la radio- activity des eaux de Lavey : Soc. vaudoise sci. nat. Bull., v. 65, no. 280, p. 253-264, illus.; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21, 1956, p. 55. 2356. Bios, W., 1903, Die Quellen der frankischen Schweiz: Erlangen, Germany, Inaugural dissert., 43 p. 2357. Cadisch, Joos, 1927, Uber Geologie und Radioactivitat der Schweizerischen Mineralquellen: Schweizerische mine-rolog. petrog. Mitt., v. 7, 417. 2358. 1928, Zur Geologie alpiner Thermal- und Sauerquellen: Schweizerische Naturf. Gesell. Jahresber. Graubiinden, v. 66. 2359. 1932, Zur Geologie der Schweizer Mineral- und Thermal-quellen: Schweizerische Naturf. Gesell. Verh., v. 42, p. 138-176,1 pl„ figs. 2360. 1936a [Geology of Swiss mineral and curative springs] : Lebensmitteluntersuchung u. Hygiene, v. 27, p. 216-243 [German] ; 1937, Chem. Abs., v. 31, col. 6160. 2361. 1936b [Geological characteristics of Swiss mineral and curative springs] : Lebensmitteluntersuchung u. Hygiene Mitt., v. 27, p. 244-259. [German.] 2362. 1956, liber die Wiedererbohrung der Therme von Zur-zach (Kantons Aargau) : Eclogae Geol. Helvetiae, v. 49, no. 2, p. 313-316,1 fig. 2363. Falconnier, Alfred, 1952, Source thermale de Lavey-les- Bains; Considerations gdologiques et hydrologiques: Soc. vaudoise sci. nat. Bull., v. 65, no. 280, p. 245- 331 252, illus.; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21, 1956, p. 172. 2364. Fierz-David, H. E., 1942 [Leuker hot springs and the relationship between the misfortune in the Brig-Ried water tunnel with hot springs in general] : Schweizerische naturf. Gesell. Zurich Vierteljahrsschr., v. 87, p. 373-382. [German.]; 1943, Chem. Abs., v. 37, col. 5521. 2365. Frohlicher, Hugo, 1946, Einige Beobachtungen an ther- malen Quellen der beiden Hauensteintunnel: Schweizerische naturf. Gesell. Verh., v. 126, p. 113-114; 1952, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 16,1951, p. 102. 2366. Hartmann, Adolf, 1910 [Origin and chemistry of the ther- mal springs of Baden and Schinznach] : Schweizerische med. Wochenschr., v. 43, p. 3-5, 17-21. [German.] 2367. 1925a, Die Thermalquellen von Schinznach: Ver- schweiz Naturf. Gesell. (Schweizerische naturf. Gesell. Verh.), v. 106, pt. 2, p. 52-97. 2368. 1925b, Die Mineral- und Helquellen des Katons Aargau: Naturf. Gesell. Aargau Mitt., v. 17, p. 282. 2369. Heim, Albert, 1928, Die Thermen von I’faefers: Schwei- zerische naturf. Gesell. Zurich Vierteljahrsschr., v. 73, p. 65-140, 3 pis., figs. 2370. Jordi, Hans A., 1955, Geologie der Umgebung von Yverdon (Jurafuss und mittelandisehe Molasse) : Beitr. Geol. Karte Schweiz Lief. 99, 84 p., illus.; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21,1956, p. 289. 2371. Knett, J., 1828, Die Thermal- und Mineralquellen, in Osterreichisehes Baderbuch; Vienna. 2372. Labat, Jean Baptiste, 1895, Voyage en Suisse: Paris, Baux minerales et stations sanitaires, 66 p. 2373. La Harpe, Jean Jacques Charles de, 1893, Loueche-les- Bains: Paris. 2374. 1897, La Suisse baln^aire et climatique: 2d ed., Zurich. 2375. Lugeon, M., 1912, Les sources thermales de Louche les Bains (Leukerbad, Valois) : Beitr. Geol. Karte Schweiz, new ser., v. 38, nos. 1-2, p. 1-31. 2376. Matthey, Emile, 1952, La Composition chimique de l’eau thermale de Lavery-les-Bains: Soc. vaudoise sci. nat. Bull., v. 65, no. 280, p. 265-271; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21, 1956, p. 390. 2377. Meyer-Ahrens, Konrad, 1860, Die Heilquellen und Kurorte der Schweiz * * * in historischer, topographischer, chemischer, und thermapeutischer Beziehung geschil-dert: Zurich, 2 v. 2378. 1867, Die Heilquellen und Kurorte der Schweiz und einiger der Schweiz zunachst angrenzenden Gegenden der Nachbarstaaten: Zurich, 812 p., pis., tables. 2379. Miihlberg, F., 1906, Beobachtungen bei der Neu-Fassung der Limmatquelle (zu Baden) und fiber die dortigen Thermen im Allgemeinen : Eclogae Geol. Helvetiae, v. 9, p. 56-58. 2380. Munzel, Ulrich, 1947, Die Thermen von Baden; eine bal- neologische Monographie: Zurich, Dissert., Eidgenos-sische Technische Hochschule, 300 p., 103 figs.; 1949, abs. Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 13,1948, p. 191. 2381. 1953, [Hot Springs of Baden as therapeutic springs] : Schweizerische Apoth.-Zeitung, v. 91, p. 351-371 [German] ; Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 10153.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 332 2382. Nussberger, Gustav, 1901, Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Entstehung von Mineralquellen im Btimdnerschiefer-gebiete: Chur, Switzerland, 38 p. 2383. 1914, Heilquellen und Bader im Kanton Graubiinden; Hrsg. vom Verkehrsverein fiir Graubiinden: Chur, Switzerland, 136 p., illus. 2384. ed., 1937, Die Mineral- und Heilquellen der Schweiz; Herausgegeben vom Schweizerischen Verein analy-tischer Chemiker dem Eidgenossischen Gesundheitsamt und der Schweizerischen Gesellschaft fiir Balneologie und Klimatologie: Bern, Switzerland, 201 p., 5 figs., map. Contains data on 14 thermal springs and thermal wells. 2385. Peter, H., 1922, Expertenbericht an die Baudirektion des Kantons Aargau ueber die Thermalquellen in Baden: Zurich, Erstattet von H. Peter, Ing., Direktor Stadt. Wasserversorgung. 2386. Preller, D. S. Du Riche, 1896, The mineral springs of the Baden District (Switzerland) : Geol. Mag., dec. 4, v. 3, no. 4, p. 149-154, 4 figs. 2387. Robert, Aime, 1865, Notice sur les eaux thermales sul- fureuses de Schinznach (Suisse, canton d’Argovie) : Strassburg, Germany, Bur. Rev. Hydrologie med., 112 p., front., 2 pis., map. 2388. Robert, Aime, and Guggert, 1861, Bade et ses thermes * * * Avec les nouvelles analyses chimiques des sources par M. R. Bunsen * * * : Paris. 2389. Rothpletz, August, 1902, Ueber den Ursprung der Ther- malquellen von St. Moritz: Kgl. buyer. Akad. Wiss., Math.-phys. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 32, p. 193-207, 2 figs. 2390. Schweitzer, A., 1916, Ueber die Radioaktivitiit der Heil- quellen der Schweiz: Annalen sehweizerische Gesell. Balneologie u. Klimatologie. 2391. Wydler, Wolfgang, 1937 [The carbonic acid content of the thermal sulfur springs at Baden] : Sehweizerische med. Wochenschr., v. 67, p. 695-696. [German.] See also references 30, 571, 1285, 1291, 1293, 1294, 1669, 1687, 1699, and 1892. YUGOSLAVIA 2392. Gorjanovic-Kramberger, K.; Steeb, C. Baron; and Mel- kus, M., 1910, Die geologischen und hydrographischen Verhaltnisse der Therme “Stubicke Toplice” in Kroatien und deren chemisch-pliysikalische Eigenschaften: Geol. Reichsanst. Wien. Jahrb., v. 60, p. 1-66, 2 pis., figs. 2393. Ivanacevic, Ivan, and Tomic, Dragutin, 1946 [Fluorine in the water of the hot springs at Sisak, Lipik, and Daru-var] : Izvanredna Izdanja Inst. Farmakol. i Toksikol. Zagrebu, v. 3, p. 27-37 [Croatian, French summary] ; 1952, Ohem. Abs., v. 46, col. 3684. 2394. Ivekovic, Hrvoje, and Dancevic, Luka, 1936 [Chemical analysis of the sulfurated thermal water of Varazdinske Toplice] : VPS Casopis Vodnu, Plinsku i Santi, Tehniku 2, p. 234^235 [Croatian] ; 1937, Chem. Abs., v. 31, col. 4426. 2395. Jowanowitsch (Iovanovich), D. K., 1934, f'ber die radio- aktiven Erscheinungen und die Gegenwart von Edel-gasen bei den Thermalwasser von Ssoko Banja: Kgl. serbische Akad. Bull., v. 162, p. 1-16, 1 pi. [Serbian, title also in German] ; 1936, abs., Chem. Zentralbl. 1936 [pt.] II, p. 449. 2396. Jowanowitsch (Iovanovich), D. K., 1936 [Radioactive bathing places in Yugoslavia] : Banje Morska i Klimat Mesta, Jugoslav, p. 69-76 [Croatian] ; 1937, Chem. Abs., v. 31, col. 5079. 2397. Kenig, Dezider, 1934 [The mineral waters of Strumicka Banja]: Soc. chim. royaume Yougoslavie Bull., v. 5, p. 176-187 [Serbian, German summary] ; 1935, Chem. Abs., v. 29, col. 5205. 2398. Lukovic, Milan T., and Petkovic, Kosta V., 1935, Radio- active thermal springs of Niska Banja and their relation to the geology of the area: Acad, royale Serbe, Acad. sci. math, et nat., Bull. Sci. Nat., no. 2, p. 7-14, 7 figs., map. [English.] 2399. Mallat, Joseph, 1902, La Serbie contemporaine, etudes, enquetes, statistiques: Paris, J. Maisonneuve, 586 p., 4 maps. Includes information on mineral and thermal springs. 2400. Marie, Luka, and Rezek, Adolf, 1936, Prilog poznavanju mineralnih voda RogaSke Slatine: Hrvatsko Prirod-oslovno Dru§tvo (Soc. sci. nat. Croatica), Glasnik g. 41-48, p. 231-245., 1 fig. [Croatian, German summary] ; 1941, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 8,1940, p.151. 2401. Miholic, Stanko S., 1923 [Chemical analysis of the min- eral water of Lipik]: “Rad” Acad. sci. Zagreb, v. 228, p. 70-85 [Croatian] ; 1924, Ohem. Abs., v. 18, p. 1024. 2402. 1932 [Chemical analysis of warm springs of Samobor Mountains] : Soc. chim. royaume Yougoslavie Bull., v. 3, p. 91-103 [Croatian, German summary] ; 1933, Chem. Abs., v. 27, p. 3422. 2403. 1935a [Analysis of water of the Velika thermal spring] : Soc. Chim. royaume Yougoslavie Bull., v. 6, p. 51-60 [Croatian] ; 1936, Chem. Abs., v. 30, col. 4245. 2404. 1935b [Chemical analysis of the mineral waters of Daruvar]: Soc. chim. royaume Yougoslavie Bull., v. 6, p. 121-129 [Croatian, German summary] ; 1936, Chem. Abs., v. 30, col. 2673. 2405. 1935c [Chemical analysis of the thermal water in Lipik] : Soc. Chim. royaume Yougoslavie Bull., v. 6, p. 169-177 [Croatian] ; 1936, Chem. Abs., v. 30, col. 495. 2406. 1936 [Chemical analysis of the Vrdnik thermal water] : Soc. chim. royaume Yougoslavie Bull., v. 7, no. 1, p. 21-29 [Croatian] ; 1937, Chem. Abs., v. 31, col. 3181. 2407. 1937 [Chemical analysis of the thermal water in Buko vicka Banja] : Soc. chim. royaume Yougoslavie Bull., v. 8, p. 82-96 [Croatian, German summary] ; 1938, Chem. Abs., v. 32, col. 6368. 2408. 1938a [Chemical investigations on siliceous sinters of the island Vis (Lissa) in Dalmatia] : Glasnika (Soc. sci. nat. Croatica Bull,), no. 49/50, 1937-38, p. 49-56 [Croatian, German summary] ; 1939, Chem. Abs., v. 33, col. 5775. 2409. 1938b, Kemijska analiza termalnog vrelu u Ilidza: Arhiv Kem. Farm. (Arhiv za hemiju i farmaeiju), v. 12, p. 83-92. [Croatian.] 2410. 1940, Chemische Analyse der Thermalquellen im nord-westlichen Kroatien [abs.] : Acad. Yougoslave sci., Cl. sci. math, et nat. Bull. Internat. 33, p. 49-55; 1948, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 12,1947, p. 160. 2411. 1942 [The chemical analysis of the warm-spring water at LeSce] : Vjestnik Hrvatskog Drzavnog Geol. Zavoda i Hrvatskog Drzavznog Geol. Muzeja, Svejak 1, 9 p.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES [Croatian, German summary) ; 1946, Chem. Abs., v. 40, col. 3547. 2412. Miholic, Stanko S., 1945, Chemical analysis of the thermal water of StubiCke Toplice [abs.] : (Internat. acad. sci. Zagreb). Acad. Yougoslave sci., Cl. sci. math., et nat., Bull. Internat. 35, p. 152-156; 1946, Chem. Abs., v. 40, col. 4158; 1948, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 12, 1947, p. 160. 2413. 1949 [Tin in some samples of plutonic rocks] : Soc. chim. Belgrade Bull., v. 14, p. 121-127 [Serbian, English summary] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 4442. 2414. 1952 [The chemical composition and properties of mineral waters] : Godisnjak balneol.-klimatol. inst. (Zagreb, Yugoslavia), v. 1, p. 7-18 [Croatian] ; 1955, Chem. Abs., v. 49, col. 9841. 2415. 1957, The thermal waters of ViSegrad in Bosnia, A geochemical study: Croatica Chem. Acta, v. 29, p. 39-44 [English] ; Chem. Abs., v. 51, col. 13269. 2416. Miholic, Stanko S., and Mirnik, K., 1957 [The thermal source of Laktasi (Bosnia) ; a geochemical study] : Soc. chim. rep. populaire Bosnie et Herzegovine Bull. 6, p. 5-9 [French] ; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 9489. 2417. Miholic, Stanko S., and Trauner, Leo, 1952, Mineralne vode u Hrvatskoj (Mineral waters of Croatia) : Godisnjak Balneol.-klimatol. Inst. NR Hrvatske, v. 1, p. 59-133. [Croatian.] Describes 24 thermal springs, including chemical analyses of the water. Also contains information on the biologic associations of some of the spring waters. 2418. Milojevic, N., 1958 [The mineral springs of Soko Banja (Serbia), and the problem of their cooling] : Annales g6ol. peninsule balkanique, v. 25, p. 85-109 [Serbian, German summary] ; Chem. Abs., v. 53, col. 11721. 2419. Nenadovic, Laza, 1936 [Description of bathing places] : Banje Morska i Klimat, Mesta Jugoslav, p. 235-379 [Croatian] 1937, Chem. Abs., v. 31, col. 5079. 2420. Picotti, Mario, 1933 [Detection of radioactivity in the S. Stefano D’lstria hot sulfur spring] : Soc. italiana sper. Bull., v. 8, p. 665-667 [Italian] ; 1934, Chem. Abs., v. 38, col. 407. 2421. Rezek, Adolf, 1931 [Mineral waters of Rogatsh (Rogaska Slatina)] ; Soc. chim. royaume Yougoslavie Bull., v. 2, p. 213-223 [Croatian] ; 1932, Chem. Abs., v. 26, p. 4660. 2422. 1936, Mineral waters of Rogaska Slatina] : Soc. chim. royaume Yougoslavie Bull., v. 6, p. 179-187, 3 tables [Croatian, German summary] ; Chem. Abs., v. 30, col. 4597. 2423. 1940, Contribution ;i la connaissance des eaux mint'rales de Rogaska Slatina: Acad. Sci. et Arts Ljubljana, Cl. mat. et historie nat., Prirodoslovne Razprave, v. 4, p. 100-101; 1952, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 16, 1951, p. 257. 2424. Rezek, Adolf, and Pinter, T., 1933 [Medicinal mineral water of Rogaska Slatina, Yugoslavia. II. Catalytic action] : Soc. chim. royaume Yougoslavie Bull., v. 4, p. 37-51 [Croation, Germany summary] ; 1934, Chem. Abs., v. 28, col. 3815. 2425. Schneider, Franz Coelestin, 1862, Chemische analyse eini- ger Mineralquellen Osterreichs; Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-naturwiss. Kl., Sitzungsber., v. 45, pt. 2, p. 483-511. Contains information on springs at Topusco. 2426. Soyer, R., 1949 [The hypothermal waters of Arandjelovac, Yougoslavia] : Paris, Coll. France, Inst. Hydrologie et 333 Climatologie 1950, Annales, v. 20, pt. 68, p. 127-130 [French] ; Chem. Abs., v. 44, col. 5501. 2427. Tomic, Dragutin, 1950 [The fluorine content of Slovenian thermal waters] : Arhiv Kemi (Arhiv za kemiju i farmaciju?), v. 22, p. 187-190 [German] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 8295. 2428. 1952 [Hot springs of lower Steiermark, II. Fluorine content of Slovenian thermal waters] : Pharm. Jugoslav., v. 2, p. 53-57 [Croation, German summary] ; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 10961. 2429. Trauner, Leo, 1952 [The catalytic activity of mineral wa- ters] : GodiSnjak balneol. klimatol. inst. (Zagreb, Yugoslavia), v. 1, p. 3.3-41 [Croatian] ; 1955, Chem. Abs., v. 49, col. 9841. 2430. Vouk, Vale, 1916, 1919, Die biologische Erforschung der Thermen Kroatiens und Slavoniens: Travaux Math. Soc. Nat. Acad. Slaves Sud. Bull., v. 5, 1916; v. 11, 12, 1919. 2431. Vucetic, Pierre-Paul, 1922, La Yugoslavie Pittoresque. La vie technique, industrielle, agricole, et coloniale. Numero special; Hors serie. Le Royaume des Serbs, Croats, et Slovenes (La Yugoslavie): Zagreb (?), 104 p. States that there are about 200 mineral springs, some of which are thermal. Describes the principal springs. See also references 30, 101, 1293, 1304, 1310, and 1892. AFRICA GENERAL, REFERENCES 2432. deLaunay, Louis, 1903, Les richesses min^rales de l’Afrique: Paris, C. Beranger, 395 p., maps. Mentions several thermal springs in Algeria, Tunisia, Morocco, French West Africa, Ethiopia, Ruanda, and the Union of South Africa. 2433. Gumprecht, Thaddaus Eduard, 1851, Die Mineralquellen auf dem Festlande von Africa besonders in Bezug auf ihre geognostischen Verhaltnisse: Karsten’s Archiv, v. 24, p. 71-279 ; repr., 215 p. Contains information on thermal springs in many localities in Africa; also mentions thermal springs on the Canary and Cape Verde Islands west of Africa and on the Comoro Islands, Madagascar, and Bourbon (Reunion) Island east of Africa. 2434. Richard, J. J, and Neumann van Padang, Maur, 1957, Africa and the Red Sea, pt. 4 of Catalogue of active volcanoes of the world including solfatara fields : Naples, Italy, Internat. Volcano! Ascoc. 118 p., 36 figs.; supp., Tibesti, by B. Geze, 6 p. ALGERIA AND TUNISIA 2435. Arago, Dominique Francois Jean, 1838, Instructions con- cernant la meteorologie et la physique du globe: Acad, sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 7, p. 206-224. Describes a thermal spring “some distance from B6ne” in Algeria. 2436. Berthon, Louis, 1927, Etude sur les sources thermo- minerales de la Tunisie: Services mines et carte g6ol., pt. 1, Regions Gabfes et Tunis, 177 p., 61 figs. Contains information on 57 thermal-spring localities in Tunisia.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 334 2437. Blanchard, R., 1903, Observations sur la faune des eaux chaudes: Soc. biologie [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 55, p. 947-950. Describes the fauna in the spring-fed pools of Ham-man Sidi-Mescid and Hammam Meskoutine, both in Algeria. 2438. Braun, Max, 1872, Ueber einige Erzlagerstatten der Pro- vinz Constantine: Deutsche geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., v. 24, pt. 1, p. 30-44; 1874, abs., Fortschr. Chemie, Jahresber., v. 24, p. 34, 1874; 1877, abs., Rev. geologie, v. 13, p. 36, 1877. Contains information on Hamman Meskoutine, Ain Berda, and springs in Oued-bou-Hammed. 2439. Bruun, Anton Fr., 1939, Observations on Thermosbaena mirabilis Monod from the hot springs of El-Hamma, Tunisia: Dansk Nat. Foren., Vidensk., v. 103, p. 493-501. 2440. Combes, 1842, Note sur les eaux thermales d’Ham-am- escoutin (Algerie) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 14, p. 334-336. 2441. Dalloni, Marius, 1928, Observations g£ologiques sur les eaux min^rales et thermales de l’Alg^rie: Cong. Eau, AlgSr. 2442. Daubree, Gabriel Auguste, 1877, Formation contemporaine de zdolithes (chabasie, christianite), sous l’influence de sources thermales, aux environs d’Oran (Algerie) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 84, p. 157-159. 2443. Durozoy, Guy, 1955, Les sources thermales de Constan- tine et du Hamma: Terres et Eaux (Algeria, Direction Service Colonisation et Hydraulique), v. 6, no. 26, p. 18-43, illus. [English and Spanish summaries] ; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21,1956, p. 155. 2444. Ehrmann, France, 1941, Du role actif et passif du trias gypso-salin et min6ralis£ dans la gen&se des sources minerales, thermales ou thermo-mingrales de la Kabylie des Babors (Algerie) : Assoc, franqaise sci., Compte rendu, Sess. 63, p. 479-481; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19, 1954, p. 130. 2445. Fleury, 1906, Une station alg<5rienne; Hammam-R’hira (Algerie) : Soc. sci. et med. ouest [Rennes] Bull., v. 15, p. 92-98. 2446. Fournel, Henri, 1846, M6moire sur les gisements de mu- riate de soude de T Algerie: Annales mines, ser. 4, v. 9, p. 541-586,1 pi. Contains a chemical anlysis of the water from springs 7 miles southwest of Kantara. 2447. Giard, A., 1903, A-propos des observations de M. R. Blan- chard sur la faune des eaux chaudes: Soc. biologie [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 55, p. 1003-1004. 2448. Guigue, Simone, 1940, Les sources thermo-mindrales de TAlgerie. Etude geochimique (Tome ler) : Service carte gdol. Algerie Bull., ser. 3, Geologie appl., pt. 5, 140 p., 3 pis., 40 figs., 8 plans, map. Contains information on the chemical character of the water from springs in 17 localities. Map shows 42 thermal-spring localities. 2449. 1947, Les sources therm o-min6rales de l’Algdrie. Etude geochimique (Tome 2) : Service carte geol. Algerie Bull., ser. 3, Geologie appl., pt. 9, 112 p., 3 pis., 40 figs., 24 tables. Describes 20 thermal springs and includes chemical analyses of the water from 37 thermal springs (including the 17 in reference 2448). 2450. Guigue, Simone, 1950 [Radioactivity of the principal thermo-mineral springs in Algeria] : Inst. Hydrologie et Climatologie Annales, v. 21, p. 137-164 [French] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 4565. 2451. 1952a [Radioactivity of thermal springs of Algeria]: Inst. Hydrologie et Climatologie Annales. v. 23, p. 93-114 [French] ; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 5852. 2452. 1952b, Diagrammes logarithmiques de quelques sources thermomin&rales d’Algerie: Service carte g£ol. Algerie Bull., Travaux Recents, pt. 3, p. 83-106; 1954, abs., Biblography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 18,1953, p. 165. 2453. Guigue, Simone, and Betier, G., 1951, Les sources thermo- minerales de !Algerie: Union Geod. et Geophys. Internal ; Assoc. Hydrologie Sci., Oslo 1948, Trans., v. 3, p. 117-120, 1 table. States that there are 174 thermal-spring localities in Algeria. Contains information on the chemical quality of 62 important springs. 2454. Guyon, Jean Louis Genevieve, 1864, Etudes sur les eaux thermales de la Tunisie, aecompagnees de recherches historiques sur les localites qui les fournissent: Paris, Impr. et librairie administratives de Paul Dupont, 69 p. 2455. Hanriot, Adrien Armand Maurice, 1911, Les eaux mine- rales de l’Alggrie: Paris, 400 p., map. 2456. Hesse-Wartegg, Ernest, 1882, Tunis, the land and its people: New York, Dodd, Mead & Co., 302 p., 22 illus; German ed.: Tunis, Land u. Leute; Vienna, A. Hartle-ben, 234 p. Mentions the springs in the oasis at Gafsa. 2457. Hutin, 1837, Sources thermales en Afrique: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 4, Correspondance, p. 654. Mentions two thermal-spring localities in Tunisia. 2458. Johnston, Harry Hamilton, 1898, A journey through the Tunisian Sahara: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 11, no. 6, p. 581-608. States that there are hot springs in many places. Specifically mentions the Roman baths near Gabes and near Gafsa. 2459. 1911, Tunisia, in Encyclopaedia Britannica, 11th ed., New York, Encyclopaedia Britannica, v. 27, p. 393-399. Mentions several thermal-spring localities. 2460. Joleaud, L., 1914, Notice g6ologique sur Hammam Mes- khoutin (Algerie) : Soc. geol. France Bull., ser. 4, v. 14, p. 423-434, 6 figs. 2461. 1932, Algerie et Tunisie p. 1-128, in la Croix, A., La geologie et les mines de la France d’outre-mer: Paris. 604 p., 38 figs. States that Ain Ouarka is fed by a thermal spring and that the Jurassic rocks in the vicinity of Hammam Meskoutine have been altered by hydrothermal action. 2462. Kennedy, John Clark, 1846, Algeria and Tunis in 1845. An account of a journey made through the two regencies by Viscount Fielding and Capt. Kennedy: London, H. Colburn, 2 v.; v. 1, 304 p., front.; v. 2, 261 p., front. Describes Hammam Berda and Hammam Meskoutine. 2463. Lafeunte, Pierre, 1933, La station hydromindrale d’Oude- Hamimine: Office Algerien d’action eeon. et touristique (Ofalac) Bull, econ., v. 2, no. 12, p. 946-948; 1934, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 1,1933, p. 140. 2464. La Rouviere, 1874, Sur les sources d’eau bouillante d’Hammam Meskoutine, province de Constantine enBIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES Algerie: Soc. linneeime Normandie Bull., ser. 2, v. 8, p. 138-149. 2465. Mason, J. L., 1939, Studies on the fauna of an Algerian hot spring: Jour. exp. Biology, v. 16, p. 487-498. 2466. Moniez, R., 1893, Description d’une nouvelle esp^ce de Cypris vivant dans les eaux thermales du Hammam-Meskhoutine: Soc. zool. France Bull., v. 18, p. 140-142. 2467. Niel, Capt., 1840, Communication mfimoire * * * province de Constantine: Soc. gdol. France Bull., v. 11, p. 129-131. Describes Haminam Meskoutine. 2468. Nodon, Albert, 1910, Recherches sur l’ionisation de la source chaude des thermes d’Hammam-Salahin pr£s de Biskra (Algyrie) : Acad. Sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 150, p. 1083-1084. 2469. Noel, Eugene, 1909, Note sur l’hydrog^ologie Tunisienne: Soc. geol. France Bull., ser. 4, v. 9, p. 459-487. Mentions several thermal-spring localities. 2470. Ossian, Henri, and Chevallier, 1846, Sur la presence de l’arsenic dans certains eaux minyrales de l’Algerie: Acad. Sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 23, Correspon-dance, p. 682-683. 2471. Pesquier, Eduard, 1904, Etude: Annales hydrologie [Paris], v. 9. Mentions thermal springs. 2472. Pouget, I., and Chouchak, D., 1923, Radioactivity des eaux minyrales d’Algyrie: Acad. Sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 177, p. 1112-1114. 2473. 1925a, Les eaux mindrales radioactives du Guergour (Algyrie) : Acad. Sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 181, p. 124-126. 2474. 1925b, Radioactivity des eaux minyrales d’Hammam Meskhoutine (Algyrie) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 181, p. 921-923. 2475. 1926, Radioactivity et composition chimique des eaux minyrales du Hammam des Ouled Ali: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 182, p. 1480-1481. 2476. Puillon-Boblaye, 1838, Sur la gyologie des provinces de Bone et de Constantine: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 7, p. 239-245. Describes springs near Constantine and Hammam Meskoutine. 2477. Renou, M. E., 1843, Aperqu sur la constitution gyologique de l’Algyrie: Annales mines, ser. 4, p. 521-540. Describes several thermal springs. 2478. 1846, Note sur quelque mindraux de l’Algyrie: Acad, sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 23, Correspondance, p. 547-549. Describes the deposits formed by springs southeast of Calle. 2479. Richardson, James, explorer, 1848, Travels in the Great Desert of Sahara, in the years of 1845 and 1846, including a description of the oases and cities of Ghat, Ghadames, and Mourzuk : London, R. Bentley, 2 v.; v. 1, 440 p., 3 pis., 12 figs.; v. 2, 482 p., 2 pis., 11 figs. Describes the springs at Ghadames and Ludinot. 2480. 1860, Travels in Morocco (edited by his widow, J. E. Richardson) : London, C. J. Skeet, 2 v.; v. 1, 301 p., front., 5 figs.; v. 2, 321 p., front., 3 figs. Mentions the springs at Gafsa and near ruins of the ancient city of Utica, both in Tunisia; also the animal life in the spring water. 335 2481. Rogers, Albert G., 1865, A winter in Algeria: London. Contains mention of thermal springs. 2482. St. Marie (Count), 1846, Algeria in 1845—A visit to the French possessions in Africa: London, R. Bentley, 284 p., front. Mentions several of the principal thermal springs. 2483. Savornin, J., 1920, Etude gyologique de la rdgion du Hodna et du plateau sytifien: Service carte gyol. Algyrie Bull., ser. 2, no. 7,499 p., 1 pi., 94 figs. Describes 20 thermal springs in Algeria. 2484. Schoeller, H., and Gosselin, N., 1939, Carte hydrogeo- logique de la Tunisie; Bordeaux, France 94 p.; 1943, abs., Zeitschr. prakt. Geologie, v. 51, no. 6, p. 71; 1948, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1943, v. 16, no. 2, p. 347. 2485. Sedillot, Charles, 1837, Sur les sources thermales situdes a deux lieues environ de Mjer-Ammar: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 5, p. 555-558. 2486. Service des Mines (Algerie), 1889, Notice sur les sources thermales et minyrales d’Algyrie: Algiers, 95 p. Lists 135 spring localities in Algeria, some of which are definitely thermal and others only slightly so. 2487. Shaw, Thomas, 1757, Travels or observations relating to Barbary: repr. in Pinkerton, John, 1814, A general collection of the best and most interesting voyages and travels in all parts of the world, many of which are now first translated into English: London, v. 15, p. 501-680. Mentions several hot springs developed as baths, also springs used for irrigation of plantations near Gafsa. 2488. Solignac M., 1927, Etude sur les sources thermo-minyrales de la Tunisie: Tunis, pt. 1. 2489. Spratt, Thomas A. B., 1846, Remarks on the lakes of Ben- zerta, in the Regency of Tunis: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 16, p. 251-255. Mentions a group of warm springs (probably Hammam Lif). 2490. Strahan, (Mrs.) Lisbeth Gooch (Seguin), 1878, Walks in Algiers and its surroundings: London, Daldy, Isbister & Co., 502 p., front., 15 illus., maps. Includes a description of the springs of Hammam Rira. 2491. Temple, Grenville, 1835-36, Excursions in the Mediter- ranean : London, Saunders & Otley, 2 v.; 1835, v. 1, Algiers and Tunis, 301 p., front., map; 1836, v. 2, Greece and Turkey, 358 p., front. Describes springs at Hammam Lif, El Hammah tal Ghabs, and Gafsa. 2492. 1838, Extracts from notes made during the campaign to Kostantinah, in September 1837: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 8, p. 39-53, map. Mentions Hammam Berda and Hammam Meskoutine. 2493. Tripier, F. M., 1839a, L’examen analytique dys depots recueiliys par M. Guyon aux sources thermales d’Ham-mam-Mez-Koutin (Bains enchantys) : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 8, Correspondance, p. 255. 2494. 1839b, Observations sur les sources thermales d’Ham-mam-Berda et d’Hammam-mes-Koutin, situyes entre Bone et Constantine : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 9, Correspondance, p. 599-602; Jour, chimie myd., ser. 2, v. 6, p. 274r-279,1840.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 336 2495. Tripier, F. M., 1841, Sur les eaux thermales de la province de Constantine: Annales chimie et physique, ser. 3, v. 1, p. 340-354. 2496. Urbain, Pierre, 1953, Contribution de l’hydrogdologie ther- male k la tectonique; l’aire d'emergenee d’Hammam Meskoutine (departement de Constantine) ; Soc. geol. France Bull., ser. 6, v. 3, pt. 1-3 p. 247-251, illus.; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20,1955, p. 556. See also references 28, 30, 73, 1568, 2432, and 2660. ANGOLA 2497. Beetz, P. F. W., 1933, Geology of South West Angola, be- tween Cunene and Lunda axis: Geol. Soc. South Africa Trans., v. 36, p. 137-176, map. Mentions four thermal-spring localities. 2498. Gregory, John Walter, 1917, Contributions to the geology of Benguella: Royal Soc. Edinburgh Trans., v. 51, p. 495-536, 2 pis., 9 figs. Contains information on the hot springs at Andulo and Chieuca in the volcanic district of Bihe, on the warm springs along the banks of the Quime at Ochilesa, and on hot springs in Katanga. 2499. Nascimento, J. Pereira do, and Maltos, A. Alexandre de, 1912, A colonisaqao de Angola: Lisbon, 163 p., 14 pis., 1 map. See also reference 43. BELGIAN CONGO (REPUBLIC OF THE CONGO) AND RUANDA-URUNDI (REPUBLIC OF RWANDA AND KINGDOM OF BURUNDI) 2500. Aubel, Rene van, 1928, Sur la zone granitique du Lualaba entre 10°30' et 9° 45' latitude Sud: Soc. geol. Belgique Annales, v. 51, app., pt. 1, p. 31-52, figs. 2501. Boutakoff, N., 1933, Les sources thermo-minerales du Kivu, leurs relations avec les grandes fractures radiales et leur utilisation au point de vue tectonique: Soc. beige gSologie, pal^ontologie, et hydrologie Bull., v. 43, p. 75-80, 1 fig. 2502. Cornet, J., 1906, Sur la distribution des sources thermales au Katanga (Congo) : Soc. g(:ol. Belgique Annales, v. 33, Mem. 1, p. 41-48. 2503. Emin-Bey (Emin Pasha, Eduard Schnitzer), 1879, Journal einer Reise von Mruli nach der Hauptstadt Unydro’s mit Bemerkungen fiber Land und Leute: Petermanns Mitt., Band 25, v. nos., 5, 6, 10, p. 179-187, 220-224, 388-397. Mentions saline [warm] springs near Kibiro and Mba-covia, near shore of Mwutiln-Nzige [Lake Albert]. 2504. Gotzen, G. A. Graf von, 1895, Durch Afrika von Ost nach West. Resultate und Begebenheiten einer Reise von der deutschostafrikanischen Kfiste bis zur Kongomtindung in den Jahren 1893-1894 : Berlin. Mentions thermal springs in Ruanda. 2505. Mathieu, F. F., 1913, Les sources thermales du Bas-Ka- tanga: Soc. geol. Belgique Annales, Pub. rel. Congo Beige, v. 40, p. 103-125,2 pis., figs. 2506. Passau, G., 1923, Note sur les sources thermales salines de la Lufubu, Province Orientale (Congo Beige) : Soc. gdol. Belgique Annales, Pub. rel. Congo Beige, v. 45, app., p. C35-C38. 2507. 1933, Les sources thermales de la Province orientale (Congo Beige) : Royale Coll. Beige Inst. Bull., v. 4, pt. 3, p. 788-814. 2508. Passau, G., 1936, Les sources hydrothermales du Congo Beige: Cong, internat. mines, mdtallurgie, et gdologie appl., 7th, Paris 1935, v. 2, Gdol. appl., p. 841-846. Lists, by name or location, the thermal springs in the Congo and neighboring regions of Ruanda-Urundi and Uganda. 2509. Willis, Bailey, 1930, Living Africa: New York, McGraw- Hill Book Co., Inc., 320 p., front., 23 illus., 8 maps. Mentions solfataras at the Mfumbiro volcanoes in the Congo, boiling mud pools northeast of Mount Ruwenzori in Uganda, and hot springs at the Magad Lakes in Kenya. See also reference 2393. EGYPT, LIBYA, AND SUDAN 2510. Attia, M. I., 1955, Contribution to the study of Helwan sulphur and mineral springs : Soc. gdog. Egypte Bull., v. 28, p. 51-78, 5 figs., 4 tables. [English.] 2511. Bagnold, R. A., 1931, Journeys in the Libyan Desert, 1929 and 1930: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 78, p. 13-39, 524—5.35, 6 pis., map. Describes Ain Dalla. 2512. Barron, T., 1907, The topography and geology of the Pen- insula of Sinai (western portion) : Egypt Survey Dept., 241 p., 10 pis., 5 figs. Describes hot springs at the foot of an escarpment facing El Tor, the group of springs near the northwestfacing Gebel Hammam Faraun, and the springs of Ayun Musa. 2513. Desio, Ardito, 1943, L’Esplorazione mineraria della Libia : Collezione sci. e doc. Africa italiana, v. 10, 1st. studi politica internaz., 333 p., 24 pis., 39 figs., map. Contains information on Ain el-Braghi and Ain ez-Zauia, also springs at El-Auenet. 2514. Dunn, Stanley C., 1911, Notes on the mineral deposits of the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan: Geol. Survey Anglo-Egyp-tian Sudan Bull. 1, 70 p., maps. Mentions hot mineral springs at Akasha. 2515. Fourtau, R., and Georgiades, N., 1905, Sur la source de Hammam Moussa prfes de Tor (Sinai) : Acad, sci [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 140, p. 166-167. 2516. Gastinel, Pacha, 1861, Waters of Ain el Sira: Inst. Egypte Bull. 2517. 1881, Etude topographique, chimique, et inedicale des eaux minerales d’Helouan-les-Bains (Moyenne Egypte) : Inst. Egypte Bull., ser. 2, no. 2, p. 70-99. 2518. Grabham, G. W., 1931, Report of the geological survey of the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan for the year 1930: Khartoum, Sudan Republic, 10 p. Describes hot spring at Akasha. 2519. Gregory, John Walter, 1911, Contribution to the geology of Cyrenaica: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 67, no. 268, p. 572-615, 1 pi., 4 figs. Mentions tufa deposits near mouth of deep gorge upstream from Dema. 2520. Holroyd, Arthur T., 1839, Notes on a journey to Kardofan in 1836-37: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 9, p. 163-191, map. Describes a group of springs 4 miles south of Okmeh village. 2521. Hume, William Fraser, 1925, Geology of Egypt: Cairo, Government Press, 2 v.; v. 1, The surface features ofBIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 337 Egypt, their determining causes and relation to geological structure, 408 p., 122 pis. Includes descriptions of the principal springs in Egypt. 2522. Hume, William Fraser; Madgwick, T. G.; Moon, F. W.; and Sadek, H., 1020, Preliminary general report of the occurrence of petroleum in Western Sinai: Survey of Egypt Petroleum Resources Bull. 2, 15 p., 5 pis., 2 maps. Contains information on the Hammam Farafln hot springs. 2523. May, William Page, 1904, Helwfin and the Egyptian De- sert ; with articles by Prof. A. H. Sayce and Prof. G. Schweinfurth: 2d ed., London, G. Allen, 102 p., 32 illus., map. 2524. Michaeloff, S., 1939, Chemical-biological study of hot sul- furous water from the source “Hammam Faraun” (Sinai) : Inst, Egypte Bull., v. 21, p. 25-29; 1940, Chem. Abs., v. 34, col. 3851. 2525. Narkirier, S., 1928 [Sulfur waters of Helouan-les-Bains, their composition and therapeutic value] : Egyptian Med. Assoc. Jour., v. 11, p. 57-72; 114-128 [French] ; Chem. Abs., v. 22, p. 4175. 2526. Sadek, H., 1926, Geography and geology of the district be- tween Gebel Atflqa and El-Galala El-Bahariya : Survey of Egypt Paper 40,120 p., 13 figs. Describes sulfur springs near north base of Khashm El-Galala. 2527. Warrington, G. H., 1844, Extract from “A short account of Tripoli in the west”: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 14, p. 104-107. Mentions a warm spring at Duga. 2528. Wilkinson, John Gardner, 1843, Modern Egypt and Thebes; being a description of Egypt, including the information required for travellers in that country: London, John Murray, 2 v.; v. 1, 476. p., illus., map; v. 2, 591 p., illus. Describes the springs in Little, Kharga, Dakhla, and Farafra Oases. See also references 30, 79, 2433,2544, 2805, and 2873. ERITREA, ETHIOPIA (ABYSSINIA), FRENCH SOMALILAND, AND SOMALI REPUBLIC 2529. d’Abbadie, Antoine Thomson, 1848, Lfettre a M. Dausay (Voyage en Abyssinie) : Soc. geographic [Paris] Bull., v. 9, p. 97-118. Contains mention of thermal springs. 2530. Aubert de la Riie, Edgar, 1939, Le volcanisme en Cote Franqalse des Somalis: Bull, volcanol. ser. 2, v. 5, p. 71-108, 12 pis., 11 figs., rev., Nature [London], v. 145, no. 3682, p. 828-829, 1940. Mentions several thermal-spring localities, also two groups of fumaroles. 2531. Barker, William C., 1842, Extract report on the probable position of Harrar, with some information relative to the various tribes in the vicinity: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 12, p. 238-244. Mentions the hot springs at Sirke (Sirge). 2532. Beke, Charles Tilstone, 1842, Communications respecting the geography of southern Abyssinia : Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 12, p. 84—102, map. Describes the hot springs of St. Abbo and of the Holy Virgin. 2533. Beke, Charles Tilstone, 1844, Abyssinia—being a continu- ation of routes in that country: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 14, p. 1-76, map. Describes the warm springs on the east bank of the I’sser River near Dubbi. 2534. Blanford, William Thomas, 1870, Observations on the ge- ology and zoology of Abyssinia: London, Macmillan & Co., 487 p., front., 12 pis., map, 9 vignettes. Describes several thermal-spring localities. 2535. Cana, Frank R., 1911, Somaliland, in Encyclopaedia Bri- tanniea; 11th ed., New York, Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc., v. 25, p. 378-384. Mentions a warm spring-fed stream that flows into Bahr-Assal. 2536. Cruttenden, Charles J., 1849, Memoir on the western or Edoor tribes, inhabiting the Somali coast of N-E Africa * * *: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 19, p. 49-76. Describes the hot springs northwest of Dubar. 2537. Galinier, and Ferret, 1844, Rapport sur les travaux executes en Abyssinie: Bibliography Univ., v. 55, 1845, p. 308-320; v. 56, p. 83-93; 1884, summ., Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 19, p. 870-886. Mentions several thermal springs. 2538. Gwynn, C. W., 1911, A journey in southern Abyssinia: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 38, no. 2, p. 113-139, 8 illus., map. Describes hot springs near Lake Stephanie. 2539. Harris, William Cornwallis, 1844, The highlands of AEthiopia, described during eighteen months’ residence of a British embassy at the Christian court of Shoa : 2d ed.: London, Longman, Brown, Green & Longmans, 3 v.; v. 1, 419 p., front., vignette, map; v. 2, 425 p., front., vignette; v. 3, 423 p., front., vignette. Describes hot-water wells near Arto hill and a group of springs in a bend of the Casam River. 2540. Isenberg, Karl William, and Krapf, John Ludwig, 1843, Journals of the Rev. Messrs. Isenberg and Krapf, missionaries of the Church Missionary Society, detailing their proceedings in the kingdom of Shoa and journeys in other parts of Abyssinia in the years 1839, 1840, 1841, and 1842: London, Seeley, Burnside, & Seeley, 529 p., maps. Mentions hot-water wells in the Finfini area. 2541. Johnston, Charles, 1844, Travels in southern Abyssinia. through the country of Adal to the kingdom of Shoa: London, J. Madden & Co. 2 v., v. 1, 492 p., front., map; v. 2, 447 p., front. Describes a group of boiling springs at Ta’hou. 2542. Macfadyen, William Archibald, 1933, The geology of Brit- ish Somaliland; pt. 1 of Geology and Paleontology of British Somaliland: London, 87 p., 4 pis. Contains information on four thermal-spring localities. 2543. 1952, Water supply and geology of parts of British Somaliland: Govt. Somaliland Protectorate, 184 p., 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 8293. 2544. Parkyns, Mansfield, 1856, Life in Abyssinia—Being notes collected during three years’ residence and travel in that country: New York, D. Appleton & Co., 2 v. (in one) ; v. 1, 350 p., 8 illus.; v. 2, 355 p., 5 illus. Describes Ayun Musa in Egypt and hot springs at Ailat in Ethiopia.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 338 2545. Penta, Francesco, 1939, L’attivitA svolta dal Centro Studi delle risorse naturali dell’Italia meridionale: Soc. naturalisti Napoli Boll. 50, p. 75-125. Includes brief description of the hot springs of Galla and Sidano in Ethiopia. 2546. Plowden, Walter Chichele, 1868, Travels in Abyssinia and the Galla country, with an account of a mission to Ras Ali in 1848: London, Longmans, Green, & Co., 485 p., maps. (From the manuscript of the late Walter Chichele Plowden, edited by his brother Trevor Chichele Plowden.) Contains information on several thermal-spring localities. 2547. Rochet d’Hericourt, C. F. X., 1841a, Considerations geo- graphiques et commerciales sur le golfe Arabique, le pays d’Adel et le royaume de Choa (Abyssine-mdridio-nale) [extr.] : Soc. geographic [Paris] Bull., ser. 2, v. 15, p. 269-293. States that there are 24 hot springs in the kingdom of Choa. 2548. 1841b, Observations faites durant un voyage dans le pays d’Adel et le royaume de Choa: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 12, p. 732-735. Contains the same information as reference 2547. 2549. 1850, Memoire sur l’etat constant de soulfevement du golfe Arabique et de l’Abyssinie, et sur les rdsultats scientifiques de son voyage [extr.] : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 30, p. 24-28. Contains information on several thermal-spring localities in Ethiopia. 2550. Toffoli, Cesco, 1937a, Le acque dell’Eritrea: Annali chimica appl., v. 27, p. 30-32, 2 figs. Mentions several thermal-spring localities. 2551. 1937b, Le acque termali della regione di Ailet (Eritrea) : Annali chimica appl., v. 27, p. 165-174. 2552. 1937c, L’acqua termale di Ali-Hasa (Eritrea) : Annali chimica appl., v. 27, p. 175-178. 2553. Usoni, Luigi, 1952, Risorse minerarie dell’Africa orien- tate ; Eritrea-Etiopia-Somalia : Rome, Ministerio Africa Italiana, Ispettorato Gen. Mineralogia, 547 p., illus.; 1954, abs., Bibiliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 18, 1953, p. 427. Includes a section on mineral springs. See also references 30, 43, and 2432. FRENCH EQUATORIAL AFRICA, FRENCH WEST AFRICA, AND NIGERIA 2554. Belcher, Edward, 1832, Extracts from observations on vari- ous points of the west coast of Africa, surveyed by his Majesty’s ship Aetna in 1830-32: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 2, p. 278-304. Mentions hot springs on the Nunez River downstream from Walkeria. 2555. Combier, M., 1935, Carte geologique de Dakar [French West Africa] : Com. Etudes Afrique Occidentale, ser. B, Bull. 1, p. 1-39. 2556. Lambert, Roger, 1938, Contributions A la connaissance hydrologique de la Colonie du Niger [French West Af- rica] ; Govt. G6n. Afrique Occidentale Frangaise, Service Mines Bull. 1, p. 29-46, 6 pis. Describes Tafadek, a thermal spring about 50 km north of Agadez. 2557. Nachtigal, Gustav Hermann, 1876, Journey to Lake Chad and neighboring regions: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 46, p. 396-411, map. Mentions a hot spring (Yerike?) on the east slope of a crater at the summit of Tarso. 2558. Raeburn, C., 1928, The Nigerian Sudan; some notes on water supply and cognate subjects: Nigeria Geol. Survey Bull. 2559. Raeburn, C., and Jones, B., 1934, The Chad basin; geology and water supply : Nigeria Geol. Survey Bull. 15. See also reference 2432. MOROCCO 2560. Abrard, R., 1921, La Source sulfureuse Ain bou Kebrit (Maroc) : Soc. geol. France Compte rendu, 1921, p. 158-159. 2561. Anonymous, 1926, Recherches geologiques dans la m^seta Marocaine: Soc. sci. nat. Maroc Bull. 14, p. 1-154. Mentions a group of warm springs along the west flank of the Cherrat anticline. 2562. Bondon, J., and Frey, R., 1935, Les sources thermales d’Abeino (Sud de Tiznit), Maroc Meridional: Com. etudes eaux souterraines [Rabat], v. 2, no. 4, p. 34-35, 1 pi.; abs., 1936, Rev. geologie, v. 16, p. 523,1936. 2563. Bourcart, Jacques, and Urbain, P., 1933, Sur la presence de sources minerales au voisinage d’affleurements aber-rants du Trias, en particulier dans le R’arb marocain: Soc. geol. France Compte rendu, ser. 5, v. 3, p. 14. 2564. Frey, R., 1935, De la nature des eaux d’Oulmes (Maroc) : Assoc, frangaise av. sci., Cong. Rabat 1934, Rept., p. 55-77; abs., Rev. geologie, v. 15, p. 245. 2565. Graude, Charles, and Rodier, J., 1955, Contribution A l’etude des eaux thermominerales de Moulay Yacoub (composition, vieillissement et radioactivite) : Soc. sci. nat. Maroc Compte rendu, no. 4, p. 78-81. 2566. Liouville, Jacques, 1923, La mission des eaux minerales du Docteur Jean Bertrand (Recensement des richesses hydrothermominerales du l’empire Cherifien) : Soc. sci. nat. Maroc Bull., v. 3, nos. 5-6, p. 92-101. Contains information on Lada Ai'a spring. 2567. Marin, A., 1930 [Geographic description of the Spanish Protectorate zone in Morocco] : Soc. geog. nac. Bol. 70. Madrid. 2568. Negre, L., 1913, Bacteries thermophiles des eaux de Fi- guig: Soc. biologie [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 74, p. 867-869. 2569. Ruiz Albeniz, Victor, 1930, Colonization espanola en Ma- rruecos: Madrid, 259 p. Mentions thermal spring in Guad Bu Azum. 2570. Russo, Philibert Augustin Frangois, 1927, Recherches gdologiques sur le territoire de hauts plateaux (Maroc Oriental) : Annales univ. Lyon, new. ser., 1, Sci. mede-cine, pt. 46,198 p., 1 pi., 51 figs., map. 2571. 1934, La science au Maroc: Coup d’oeil d’ensemble sur l’hydrogeologie du Maroc. Mentions hot spring at Moulay Yacoub near Fez, Ain Souknhna near Ben Rached, and mineral springs near Oulmes.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 339 2572. Russo, Philibert Augustin Francois, 1936, Hydrog6ologie Chiker (Region de Taza Maroc septentrional) : Cong, internat. mines, 7th, Paris 1935, v. 2, p. 779-782. See also references 20 and 2433. SOUTHERN AFRICA (Beclmanaland Protectorate, Kenya, Mozambique, Northern and Southern Rhodesia, Nyasaland, Tanganyika, and Uganda) 2573. Akeley, Mary L. Jobe, 1929, Carl Akeley’s Africa: New York, Blue Ribbon Books; Cornwall, N.Y., Cornwall Press, 321 p., front., 1 pi. Mentions hot springs along lower Molo River and boiling springs near the south end of Lake Hannington. 2574. 1949, Rumble of a distant drum, a true story of the African hinterland: New York, Dodd, Mead & Co., 364 p., 20 figs. Mentions the same thermal spring as reference 2573. 2575. Bond, Geoffrey W., 1953, The origin of thermal and min- eral waters in the middle Zambezi Valley and adjoining territory: Geol. Soc. South Africa Trans., v. 56, p. 131-148, 4 figs., 5 tables. 2576. Bradshaw, Benjamin F., 1881, Notes on the Chobe River, South Central Africa: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Proc., new ser., v. 3, p. 208-213, map. Describes a hot saline spring on the bank of Chobe (Kwando) River in Bechuanaland. 2577. Ferguson, David, 1903, The geysers or hot springs of the Zambesi and Kafue valleys: Rhodesia Sci. Assoc. Proc., v. 3 [1902], p. 9-20. 2578. Gregory, John Walter, 1896, The great Rift Valley; being a narrative of a journey to Mount Kenya and Lake Baringo * * * : London, J. Murray, 422 p., front., 20 pis., 23 figs., 2 maps. Mentions a steam vent on the north wall of the crater on Mount Longonot, 10 miles south of Lake Naivasha. 2579. 1921, The rift valleys and geology of East Africa: An account of the origin and history of the rift valleys of East Africa and their relation to the contemporary earth movements which transformed the geography of the world: London, Seeley, Service, & Co., Ltd., 479 p., 20 pis., maps, 44 figs. Mentions steam vents in several localities, also a hot spring in Njorowa Gorge and another at Lake Manyara. 2580. Hahn, Daniel Paul, 1911, A geyser in South Africa: South African Jour. Sci., v. 7, p. 240-241,1 pi. Describes the Zongola geyser in Southern Rhodesia. 2581. Handley, J. R. F., 1954, The hot springs at Ibadakule, Shinyange district: Tanganyika Geol. Survey Rees., v. 1, p. 38; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19, 1954, p. 189. 2582. Lenk, Hans, 1894, Ueber Gesteine aus Deutsch-Ostafrika, in Baumann, Oscar, Durch Massailand zur Nilquelle. Reisen und Forschungen der Massai-Expedition des deutschen Antisklaverei-Komite in den Jahren 1891-1893: Berlin, Otto Eisner, 386 p., 27 pis., 140 illus., map. Includes information on a hot spring on the west side of Lake Manyara in Tanganyika. 2583. Maufe, H. B., 1933, A preliminary report on the mineral springs of Southern Rhodesia : Southern Rhodesia Geol. Survey Bull. 23, 78 p., 2 pis.; 1935, Chem. Abs., v. 29, col. 5205. 2584. Mugge, O., 1886, Ueber einige Gesteine des Massai-Landes: Neues Jahrib. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaontolgie, Beilage-Band. 4, p. 576.-609. Contains a chemical analysis of the water from a hot spring near Lake Naivasha in Kenya. 2585. Richards, J. J., 1945, Kilimanjaro; crater fumaroles of Kibo and seismic activity during 1942-1945: Nature [London], v. 156, no. 3960, p. 352-354, 3 figs. Describes fumaroles in the Kibo crater on Mount Kilimanjaro in Tanganyika. 2586. Schmidle, W., 1902, Beitriige zur Algenflora Afrikas; Eng- ler’s Bot. Jahrb., v. 30, no. 2, p. 58-68, 14 figs. Describes algae growing in warm spring near Lake Manyara in Tanganyika. 2587. Spink, P. C., 1944, Weather and volcanic activity of Kili- manjaro: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 103, no. 5, p. 226-229, 2 pis., 1 fig. Describes fumaroles in the Kibo crater on Mount Kilimanjaro in Tanganyika. 2588. 1945a, Further notes on the Kibo inner crater and glaciers of Kilimanjaro and Mount Kenya: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 106, nos. 5-6, p. 210-216, 8 pis., 2 figs. 2589. 1945b, Thermal activity in the eastern Rift Valley: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 105, nos. 5-6, p. 197-207, 5 pis., map. Describes fumaroles, steam vents, boiling pools, and hot springs in the vicinity of Lake Naivasha in Kenya. 2590. Stanley, Henry Morton, 1878, Through the Dark Conti- nent, or the Sources of the Nile: New York, Harper & Bros., 2 v.; v. 1, 522 p., front., 57 illus., map; v. 2, 566 p., front., 90 illus., map. Describes Mtagata hot springs in Tanganyika, also hot springs near Kwaniwa’s village in the Congo. 2591. 1890, In Darkest Africa : New York, C. Scribner’s Sons, 2 v.; v. 1, 547 p., front., 73 illus., map; v. 2, 540 p., front., 72 illus., maps. Describes three hot springs at Mtarega in Uganda and mentions the Mtagata hot springs and other hot springs near Iwanda and Luajimba. 2592. Teale, E. O., and Oates, F., 1934, The limestone caves and hot springs of the Songwe River (Mbeya) area with notes on the associated guano deposits: East Africa and Uganda Nat. History Soc. Jour., v. 12, no. 4., p. 130-137. Describes the Maronde springs (Grafin Bose Ther-men) in Northern Rhodesia. 2593. Tucker, Alfred Robert, 1908, Eighteen years in Uganda and East Africa: London, E. Arnold, 2 v.; v. 1, 359 p. front., 29 illus., map; v. 2, 388, p., front., 30 illus. Contains a description of the boiling springs in the Semliki River valley between Lakes Edward and Albert. 2594. Wallace, L. A., 1899, The Nyasa-Tanganyika plateau: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 13, no. 6, p. 595-621, map. Describes a group of hot springs 40 miles east of Lake Mweru in Northern Rhodesia. 2595. Wayland, E. J, 1921, Hot springs, in Uganda Geol. Dept. Ann. Rept., 1920, p. 72-75. 2596. 1935, Notes on thermal and mineral springs in Uganda: Uganda Geol. Survey Bull. 2, p. 44-55, map. See also references 16, 94, 2508, 2509, 2634, and 2636.340 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD SOUTH WEST AFRICA AND UNION OF SOUTH AFRICA 2597. Alexander, James Edward, 1838a, Report of an expedition of discovery through the countries of the Great Nama-quas, Boschmans, and the Hill D&maras, in South Africa: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 8, p. 1-28, map. Contains information on Nisbett’s Bath, Glenelg Bath, and Queen Adelaide’s Bath. 2598. 1838b, An expedition of discovery into the interior of Africa, through the hitherto undescribed countries of the Great Namaquas, Boschmans, and Hill D&maras: London, H. Colburn, 2 v.; v. 1, 320 p., front., 5 illus.; v. 2, 306 p., front., 7 illus. Describes the same springs as reference 2597. 2599. Backhouse, James, 1844, A narrative of a visit to the Mauritius and South Africa: London, Hamilton, Adams & Co., 648 p., front., 43 illus., maps. Refers to several hot-spring localities. 2600. Baines, Thomas, 1864, Explorations in South-west Africa, being an account of a journey in the years 1861 and 1862 from Walvisch Bay, on the western coast, to Lake Ngami and the Victoria Falls: London, Longman, Green, Longman, Roberts, & Green, 535 p., front., 32 illus. Describes Gross Barmen hot springs and nearby tepid springs. 2601. Barrow, John, 1806, Travels into the interior of southern Africa, in which are described the character and the condition of the Dutch colonists of the Cape of Good Hope, and of the several tribes of natives beyond its limits; the natural history of such subjects as occurred in the animal, mineral and vegetable kingdoms; and the geography of the southern extremity of Africa: 2d ed., London, T. Cadell & W. Davies, 2 v.; v. 1, 419 p., 8 pis.; v. 2, 372 p., map. Describes visits to several thermal-spring localities. 2602. Bond, Geoffrey W., 1946, A geochemical survey of the un- derground water supplies of the Union of South Africa: Geol. Survey South Africa Mem. 41, 216 p. Contains data on some of the deep thermal wells. 2603. Burchell, William John, 1822-24, Travels in the interior of southern Africa : London, Longman, Ilurst, Rees, Orme, & Brown, 2 v.; 1822, v. 1, 586 p., 10 pis., 50 vignettes, map.; 1824, v. 2, 648 p., 10 pis., 46 vignettes 1953, repr., with some additional material and an introduction by I. Schafera: London, Batchworth Press, 2 v. Describes visits to several thermal-spring localities. 2604. Chapman, James, 1868, Travels in the interior of South Africa, comprising fifteen years’ hunting and trading; with journeys across the continent from Natal to Walvisch Bay, and visits to Lake Ngami and the Victoria Falls: London, Bell & Doldy, 2 v.; v. 1, 454 p., front., 10 illus., map.; v. 2, 480 p., front., 15 illus., map. Describes Gross Barmen, Klein Barmen, and Eik-ham’s hot springs. 2605. Cock, Gilbert, 1929, The composition of some water sup- plies in South West Africa : South West Africa Sci. Soc. Jour., v. 2, p. 63-70. 2606. Finn, N., 1941, Crenotherapy in South Africa: South Afri- can Med. Jour., v. 15, p. 229-234. Contains data on some of the thermal springs. 2607. Frommurze, H. F., 1932, Flowing boreholes in the Reho- both, Gibeon, and Gobabis districts, South-West Africa : Geol. Soc. South Africa Trans., v. 34, p. 129-149, 1 pi., 6 figs. 2608. Gevers, Traugott Wilhelm, 1932, The hot springs of Wind- hoek, South West Africa: Geol. Soc: South Africa Trans., v. 35, p. 1-28, 3 pis., 3 figs., 4 tables; abs., Geol. Soc. South Africa Proc., p. 38-42; 1933, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1932, v. 5, p. 160. 2609. 1943, The hot springs in the Tugela River near Kran-skop, Natal: Geol. Soc. South Africa Trans., v. 45, p. 65-74. 2610. 1948 [Notes on Souting spring], in Kent, Leslie E., Diatomaceous deposits in the Union of South Africa with special reference to Kieselguhr: Union South Africa Dept. Mines, Geol. Survey Mem. 42, pt. 1, p. 71-73. Describes Caledon spring in the Cape Colony. 2611. Hahn, Daniel Paul, 1906, A South African mineral spring: British Assoc. Adv. Sci. Rept., 1905, p. 366-367. 2612. 1911, A geyser in South Africa: South African Assoc. Adv. Sci. Jour., v. 7, no. 6,240-241,1 pi. Describes geyser near the Zambezi River. 2613. Hall, Arthur L., 1938, Analyses of rocks, minerals, ores, coal, soils, and waters from southern Africa: Union South Africa Dept. Mines, Geol. Survey Mem. 32, 876 p. 2614. Houghton, S. H., and Frommurze, H. F., 1936, The geology of the Warmbad District, South West Africa: South West Africa Dept. Mines Mem. 2, 64 p., 2 figs., 3 maps. 2615. Itier, Jules, 1844, Notice sur la constitution gdologique du Cap de Bonne-Esp£rance: Acad, sci [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 19, p. 960-970. Contains information on a sulphur spring 8 km from Cradock in Somerset, on two saline springs near Caledon, and on springs at Roodeberg and Coyman’s-Kloof. 2616. Jameson, Robert; Wilson, James; and Murray, Hugh, 1831, Narrative of discovery and adventure in Africa, from the earliest ages to the present time, with illustrations of the geology, mineralogy, and zoology: New York, J. and I. Harper, 359 p.; 1850 ed., by Hugh Murray. 2617. Jeppe, Frederick, 1877, Notes on some of the physical and geological features of the Transvaal, to accompany his new map of the Transvaal and surrounding Territories : Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 47, p. 217-250, map. Mentions several thermal-spring localities. 2618. Kent, Leslie E., 1942, The Letaba hot spring: Royal Soc. South Africa Trans., v. 29, pt. 2, p. 35-47, 1 pi. 2619. 1946, The warm springs at Loubad, near Nylstroom, Transvaal: Royal Soc. South Africa Trans., v. 31, pt. 2, p. 151-168, 3 figs. 2620. 1948, Diatomaceous deposits in the Union of South Africa with special reference to kieselguhr: Union of South Africa Dept. Mines, Geol. Survey Mem. 42, pt. 1, Geology and economic aspects, by L. E. Kent, 184 p.; pt. 2, The diatom flora, by the late A. W. Rogers, p. 185-242,14 pis., 16 figs. Includes data on Souting hot spring and springs on Riffontein 16 in the Groblersdal district and on Kol-wanie 293 in the Ermelo district. 2621. 1949, The thermal waters of the Union of South Africa and South West Africa: Geol. Soc. South Africa Trans., v. 52, p. 231-264, 3 figs., tables. Contains data on 74 thermal springs and 9 thermal wells in South Africa and on 24 thermal springs and several thermal wells in South West Africa. 2622. 1951, The thermal water of the Union of South Africa and South West Africa: Internat. Union Geodesy Geophysics ; Assoc. Sci. Hydrology, Oslo 1948, Trans., v. 3,BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 341 pt. 1, The Union of South Africa, p. 203-223, map, 3 tables; pt. 2, South West Africa, p. 224-228, map, table. Contains the same information as reference 2621 and, in addition, data on two thermal wells in the Union of South Africa and on 1 spring and 2 thermal wells in South West Africa not included in reference 2621. 2623. Kent, Leslie E., 1952, The medicinal springs of South Africa: South African Railways Publicity and Travel Dept. Pamph., 22 p., map, tables. Discusses the source and distribution of thermal springs; includes chemical analyses of water from 27 springs. 2624. Kent, Leslie E., and Russell, H. D., 1949, The warm spring on Buffelshoek, near Thabazimbi, Transvaal: Royal Soc. South Africa Trans., v. 32, pt. 2, p. 161-175, 4 figs. 2625. Lichtenstein, Hinrich, 1811-12, Reisen im siidlichen Afrika : in den Jahren 1803, 1804,1805, und 1806: Berlin, C. Salfeld, 2 v.; repr., 1928-30 of translation from the original German, by Anne Plumptre: Cape Town, Van Riebeeck Soc., 2 v.; v. 1, 470 p., front., 4 pis., 1928; v. 2, 498 p., front., 3 pis. Describes a hot spring in the Brandvlei and hot springs at the south end of Swarteberg. 2626. Methuen, Henry H., 1846, Life in the wilderness; or wan- derings in South Africa; London, R. Bentley, 318 p., front., 2 pis., 14 figs. Describes the warm springs at Caledon. 2627. Muller, J. F., ca. 1948, Report on underground water con- ditions and research, Union of South Africa: Union g6od6sie et g6ophysique intemat.; Assoc, internat. hydrologie sci., Washington 1939, Compte rendu, v. 2, Rept. Inv. 6, 4 p. Describes 11 thermal-spring localities in the Union of South Africa and 2 in South West Africa. 2628. Murray, Hugh, and Jameson, James Wilson, 1850, Narra- tive of discovery and adventure in Africa from the earliest ages to the present time; with illustrations of the geology, mineralogy, and zoology: 5th ed., Edinburgh and London, T. Nelson, 472 p., map; 1830, 1st ed.; 1853 ed., London, T. Nelson, 482 p., illus., maps. Describes six thermal-spring localities in the Union of South Africa. 2629. Paterson, William, 1790, A narrative of four journeys into the country of the Hottentots and Caffraria, in the years 1777, 1778, and 1779: 2d ed., London, J. Johnson, 175 p., 19 pis., map. Describes a warm spring in the vicinity of Swarteberg and another in Channa Land. 2630. Rindl, M. M., 1915, Medicinal springs of South Africa; the mineral spring on the farm Rietfontein, Dist. Brandfort, Orange Free State: South African Jour. Sci., v. 12, p. 579-588. 2631. 1916, The medicinal springs of South Africa; South African Jour. Sci., v. 13, p. 528-552, map. Lists and describes 40 thermal-spring localities. Includes chemical analyses of the water from several of the springs. 2632. 1918, The medicinal springs of South Africa; Supplement I: South African Jour. Sci., v. 15, p. 217-225. Describes Gross Barmen hot springs at Gross Windhoek and Klein Windhoek in South West Africa, also Winburg springs in the Union of South Africa. 2633. Rindl, M. M., 1925, The medicinal springs of South Africa : Official Yearbook, South Africa, v. 8, p. 41-46. 2634. 1928, The medicinal springs of South Africa; Supplement II: South African Jour. Sci., v. 25, p. 116-126. Contains chemical analyses of water from thermal springs in South West Africa and Union of South Africa. Mentions Chilundu springs in Northern Rhodesia. 2635. 1930, International standard measurements in hydrology, and a provisional register of mineral waters of South Africa, based on these standards: South African Jour. Sci., v. 27, p. 213-226. Includes descriptions of seven thermal springs and chemical analyses of the water from each. 2636. 1931a, The medicinal springs of South Africa; Supplement III: South African Jour. Sci., v. 28, p. 119-123. Contains information on Fort Beaufort and Cradock springs in Union of South Africa and on springs near head of Rupisi River and in the Mutambara Native Reserve in Southern Rhodesia. 2637. 1931b, International standard measurements in hydrology and a provisional register of medicinal waters of South Africa based on these standards. Second communication : South African Jour. Sci., v. 28, p. 124-130. Includes information on springs at Caledon, Floris Bad (Rietfontein), Warmbaths, Winburg, and Baden Baden (Gannafontein). 2638. 1932, The medicinal springs of South Africa; Supplement IV: South African Jour. Sci., v. 29, p. 278-280. Contains data on the Ezulwini springs, the Kursaal (Oldenburg) spring, and the Warmbaths. 2639. 1934, The medicinal springs of South Africa; Supplement V: South African Jour. Sci., v. 31, p. 173-176. Describes the Sipofaneni and Gansbaai springs; also contains chemical analyses of water from Gansbaai, Malmesbury, and Pahlquelle springs. 2640. 1936, The medicinal springs of South Africa: South African Med. Jour., v. 10, p. 695-698. Summarizes the principal thermal springs. 2641. 1937, The medicinal springs of South Africa; Supplement VI: South African Jour. Sci., v. 33, p. 254—257. Contains a chemical analysis of water from Badplaats spring, also radioactivity determinations of water from Gansbaai spring and Warmbaths, all in the Union of South Africa. 2642. Rogers, A. W., 1909, The Zwartkops borehole : Geol. Comm. Cape of Good Hope Rept., p. 110-116. 2643. Rose, John George, 1910, A new Cape thermal chalybeate spring: South African Jour. Sci., v. 7, p. 202-203. Describes a thermal well at Zwartkops near Port Elizabeth; includes a chemical analysis of the water. 2644. Scherzer, Karl Ritter von, 1861-63. Narrative of the circumnavigation of the globe by the Austrian frigate Novara, undertaken by order of the Imperial Government in the years 1857, 1858, & 1859; London, Saunders, Otley, & Co., 3 v.; v. 1, 485 p., 52 illus.; v. 2, 627 p., 8 illus.; v. 3, 544 p., 6 illus. Includes descriptions of hot springs of Brandvlei in the Union of South Africa, hot springs in St. Paul’s Island in the Indian Ocean, and the chain of boiling springs, solfataras, and fumaroles in New Zealand. 2645. Schwartz, Ernest H. L., 1904, Hot springs [South Africa] : Geol. Mag., dec. 5, v. 1, no. 6, p. 252-260,1 fig.THERMAL SPRINGS OP THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 342 2646. Smith, George William, 1913, Some notes concerning a deep bore at Zwartkops near Port Elizabeth and the resulting thermal chalybeate spring: South African Jour Sci., v. 9, p. 119-127,1 pi. 2647. Sparrman, Andrew (Anders), 1789, A voyage to the Cape of Good Hope, towards the Antarctic Polar Circle, and round the world, but chiefly into the country of the Hottentots and Caffres, from the year 1772 to 1776: Perth, R. Morison & Son, 2 v. (in one) ; v. 1, 254 p., front., 3 pis.; v. 2, 261 p., 6 pis.; translated into English from the Swedish original, by George Forster. Describes Warm Bath at the foot of Swarteberg in the Union of South Africa. 2648. Steedman, Andrew, 1835, Wanderings and adventures in the interior of southern Africa : London, Longman & Co., 2 v.; v. 1, 330 p., front., vignette, 4 illus., map; v. 2, 358 p., front., vignette, 6 illus. Describes springs near Cradock ford of the Fish River, Goudine springs near Du Toits Kloof, and the springs in Brandvlei and near the source of Fisher’s River, all in the Union of South Africa. 2649. Thompson, George, 1827, Travels and adventures in southern Africa, comprising a view of the present state of the Cape Colony: 2d ed., London, H. Colburn, 2 v.; v. 1, 450 p., front., 12 illus., 10 vignettes; v. 2, 493 p., front., 8 illus., 7 vignettes, map. Describes the springs near Cradock ford of the Fish River in the Union of South Africa. 2650. Thunberg, Karl Peter, 1795, An account of the Cape of Good Hope and some parts of the interior of southern Africa: London, Longman, Hurst, Rees, & Orme, 4 v.; extr., in Pinkerton, John, A general collection of the best and most interesting voyages and travels in all parts of the world; many of which are now first translated into English, v. 16,1814, p. 1-147,1 pi. Describes the spring at the foot of Swarteberg and mentions spring in Olyfants Valley, both in the Union of South Africa. 2651. Townsend, R. W., 1844, On the minerals of Cork: British Assoc. Adv. Sci. Rept., 1843, Notices and abs., p. 38. Describes manganese in spring deposits near the Cape of Good Hope. See references 21, 34, 2433, and 2583. INDIAN OCEAN MADAGASCAR 2652. Anonymous, 1927, Les eaux min^rales & Madagascar: Madagascar et Dependances Bull. econ., 1927, no. 1, p. 1-36. 2653. Besairie, Henri, and Hourcq, Victor, 1936, Eaux thermo- minerales de Madagascar rdcemment studies: Cong, intemat. mines, metallurgie et geologie appl., 7th, Paris 1935, v. 2, Geologie appl. p. 839-840. 2654. Besairie, Henri, and Pavlonsky, Rotislav, 1951, Etude geologique des feuilles Mantra (563) et Manombo (562) : Madagascar, Bur. g£ol. Travaux, no. 17, 22 p. (processed), illus.; 1953 abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1952, v. 24, no. 1, p. 15. Includes information on springs. 2655. Bocquillon-Limousin, M. H., 1859, Analyses d’eaux min- <5rales de Madagascar: Soc. hydrologie et climatologie m6d. Paris Annales, v. 6, p. 320-326. 2656. Ellis, William, 1858, Three visits to Madagascar during the years 1853, 1854, 1856, including a journey to the capital; with notices of the natural history of the country and of the present civilization of the people: London, J. Murray, 476 p., front., 24 illus., map. Describes a spring 0.5 mile from Ranomafana village. 2657. Ferraud, V, 1898, Etude sur les eaux d’Antsirabe; Notes, Reconnaissances et Explorations, 1897-1900, pt. 24: Tananarive, p. 1647-1652. 2658. Herault, P., 1899, Les eaux minerales fi. Madagascar: Rev. Madagascar. 2659. Kermorgant, A., 1901, Eaux thermales et minerales des colonies frangaises: Archives hygiene et medecine colo-niales, v. 4, p. 236-244. 2660. Lacroix, Antoine Frangois Alfred, 1922, MinSralogie de Madagascar: Paris, Augustin Challamel, ed., Librairie maritime et coloniale, 3 v.; v. 1, Geology; descriptive mineralogy, 624 p., 27 pis., 504 figs., map; v. 2, Applied mineralogy; lithology, 694 p., 29 pis., 11 figs.; v. 3, Lithology; Appendix; Geographic index, 431 p., 8 pis., 25 figs., map. Contains information on 20 springs, several of which are thermal. 2661. 1932, Madagascar et Dependences, in La geologie et les mines de la France d’outre-mer: p. 295-348. Mentions hydrothermal activity in Madagascar and St. Paul Island. 2662. Lautel, Robert, 1949, Etude geologique des feuilles Am- batomainty et Andranomavokely: Madagascar, Bur. geol. Travaux, no. 2, 25 p. [processed], maps; 1952, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 16, 1951, p. 181; 1953, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1952, v. 24, no. 1, p. 17. Includes data on hot springs. 2663. Lemoine, Paul, 1906, Etude geologique dans le nord de Madagascar: Paris, A. Hermann, 520 p., maps, pis. Contains chemical analyses and other data on the thermal springs. 2664. Lenoble, Andre, and Robillard, Reginald de, 1946, Le bas- sin thermo-mineral d’Antsirabe: Acad. Malgache [Tananarive] Bull., new ser., v. 27, p. 54-71, 5 pis. Describes thermal springs and wells in the Antsirabe area. 2665. Monnier, Dr., 1924, La station thermale et climatique d’Antsirabe: Madagascar et Dependances, Bull, econ., 1924, 3 et 4 trimestres, p. 32-53, 5 figs.; repr. from Bull. Soc. hydrologie et climatologie France. Discusses the chemical quality and uses of water from springs in the Antsirabe area. 2666. Moureu, Charles, 1924, Rapport sur les etudes de quelques sources thermales de Madagascar: Madagascar et Dependences Bull, econ., 1924, 3 et 4 trimestres, p. 21-31. 2667. Moureu, Charles; Lepape, A.; and Moureu, H., 1924, Radio- activite de quelques sources thermales de Madagascar (bassin d’Antsirabe) et de la Reunion: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 179, p. 123-129. 2668. Moureu, Charles; Lepape, A.; Moureu, H.; and Geslin, M., 1926, Composition (gaz courants et gaz rares) des gaz spontanes de quelques sources thermales de Madagascar et de la Reunion: Acad, sci [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 182 p. 602-605. 2669. Mullens, Joseph, 1875, Twelve months in Madagascar: 2d ed., London, J. Nisbet & Co., front., 10 illus., map. Mentions hot springs near Betafo and Sirabe. 2670. Perrier de la Bathie, H., 1910, Notes sur la valiee permo- triasique et le contact des terrains metamorphiques etBIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 343 des terrains s^dimentaires dans l’Ouest de Madagascar: Colonie Madagascar et Dfipendances, Bull. 6con., v. 10, no. 2, p. 199-235, figs., map. Mentions some of the thermal springs in western Madagascar. 2671. Perrier de la Bathie, H., 1915, Etudes et recherches pour la captation des eaux thermales d’Antsirabe: Colonie Madagascar et Dependanees, Bull 6con., v. 15, no. 1, p. 93-103. 2672. 1923a, No'uvelles recherches pour la captation des eaux thermales d’Antsirabe: Madagascar et Dependanees, Bull, econ., v. 20, no. 1, 255-261. Tananarive. 2673. 1923b, Liste des sources thermales ou minerales de Madagascar. Madagascar et Dependanees, Bull, econ., v. 20, no. 1, p. 277-282. 2674. Reland, 1905, Les eaux thermales et minerales d’Antsirabe : Colonie Madagascar, Bull, econ., v. 5. 2675. Salvat, 1916, Recherches sur la radioactivite des eaux ther- males d’Antsirabe: Rapport presente au comite consul-tatif hygiene et salubrite de Madagascar, 1916. 2676. Wage, 1891, Analyse des eaux d’Antsirabe: an. Ann. 4, 1891. MINOR ISLANDS-------KERGUELEN, REUNION, RODRIGUEZ, AND SAINT PAUL 2677. Aubert de la Rue, Edgar, 1932, Etude geologique et g6o- graphique de l’archipel de Kerguelen: Rev. geographie phys. et geologie dynamique, v. 5, pts. 1-2, 231 p., 25 pis., 35 figs., maps. Briefly describes fumaroles, mofettes, and thermal springs. 2678. Balfour, Isaac Bayley, 1879, The physical features of Rod- riguez : Royal Soc. [London] Philos. Trans., v. 168, p. 289-292. Mentions warm springs. 2679. Bostock, John, 1838, Notice of the analysis of a mineral water from the Island of St. Paul, in lat. 38°45’ S., and long. 77°53' E.: Geol. Soc. London Trans., ser. 2, v. 5, p. 261-262; Geol. Soc. London Proc., v. 2, p. 112-113. 2680. Eaton, A. E., 1879, The physical features of Kerguelen Island, in An account of the petrological, botanical, and zoological collections made in Kerguelen’s Island and Rodriguez during the Transit of Venus Expedition in the years 1874—75: Royal Soc. [London] Philos. Trans., v. 168, 579 p„ 55 pis., p. 1-4. Mentions hot springs. 2681. Encyclopaedia Britannica, 1911, Kerguelen Island, Ker- guelen Island, Kerguelen’s Land, or Desolation Island: 11th ed., New York, Encyclopaedia Britannica, v. 15, p. 754-755. Mentions hot springs. 2682. Lacroix, Antoine Francois Alfred, 1936, Le volcan actif de l’lle de la Reunion et ses produits: Paris, Gauttier-Villars, 297 p., 68 pis., map. Briefly describes the fumaroles and their deposits in the volcanic crater. 2683. Maillard, L., 1853, Note sur l’lle de la Reunion: Soc. g£ol. France Bull., ser. 2, v. 10, p. 499-504, 1 pi. Mentions vapor vents in the volcanic crater. 2684. Moseley, Henry Nottidge, 1885, Notes of a naturalist on the Challenger, in Tizard, Thomas Henry, Report on the scientific results of the voyage of H.M.S. Challenger during the years 1873-1876: Edinburgh, Neill & Co., v. 1, 509 p., illus. 735-914 O—65----23 Mentions hot springs on Kerguelen Island and describes hot springs and gas vents on Camiguin Island in the Philippines. 2685. Rabat, Charles, 1915, RGsultats hydrographiques et geo- graphiques de l’expedition Rallier du Baty it Kerguelen : Geographie, v. 30, p. 294-296. Mentions fumaroles. 2686. Rallier du Baty, R., 1922, Le voyage de la “Curieuse”: Geographie, v. 37, p. 1-26, 6 figs. Briefly describes vapor vents and hot springs on Kerguelen Island. 2687. Velain, Charles, 1875a. Observations efectuees k l’lle Saint-Paul: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 80, p. 998-1003. States that there are numerous thermal springs on St. Paul Island, but no thermal springs or vapor vents on Amsterdam Island, 42 miles northwest of St. Paul Island. 2688. 1875b, Analyse des degagements gazeux de l’ile Saint-Paul : Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 81, p. 332-335. Mentions thermal springs and gas and vapor vents. 2689. 1875c, Les lies Saint-Paul et Amsterdam: Rev. sci., ser. 2, v. 5, no. 6, p. 121-129,4 figs. Describes the numerous thermal springs on St. Paul Island. 2690. 1876a, Les lies Saint-Paul et Amsterdam—L’ile de la Reunion: Assoc, frangaise, av. sci. Compte rendu, 4th sess., Nantes 1875, p. 581-600, pis. Mentions the vapor vents in the crater on Reunion Island and the thermal springs and gas vents on St. Paul Island. 2691. 1876b, Une excursion au volcan de la Reunion: Nature [Paris], no. 160, p. 50-54, 4 figs.; English translation, Nature [London], v. 14, no. 355, p. 333-336, 1876 . Describes the vapor vents in the crater on Reunion Island. 2692. 1878, Description geologique de la presqu’ile d’Aden, de l’ile de la Reunion, des lies Saint-Paul et Amsterdam: Paris, Typographic A. Hennuyer, 360 p., front., 27 pis., 46 figs. Describes the thermal springs and fumaroles on Reunion and St. Paul Islands. 2693. Zbyszewski, Georges, 1933, Nouvelles reconnaissances aux lies Kerguelen: Rev. geographie, phys. et geologie dynamique, v. 6, pt., 3, p. 263-265. See also references 1077, 1086, 2644, 2661, 2667, and 2668. ASIA AFGHANISTAN 2694. Wood, John, 1841, A personal narrative of a journey to the source of the River Oxus, by the route of the Indus, Kabul, and Badakhshan, performed under the sanction of the Supreme Government of India in the years 1836, 1837, and 1838: London, J. Murray, 424 p., map; Wood, Alexander ed., 1872, A personal narrative of a journey to the source of the River Oxus, by Captain John Wood, with an essay on the geography of the valley of the Oxus, by Colonel Henry Yule: London, J. Murray, 280 p., front., map. Mentions thermal springs near Issar (U.S.S.R.) and at Sir-Ab [Khawak]. See also references 30, 2775, 2799, 2807, and 2853.344 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD ARABIAN PENINSULA 2695. Fraser, James, 1824, Notes made in the course of a voy- age from Bombay to Bushire in the Persian Gulf; transmitted with a series of illustrative specimens: Geol. Soc. London Trans., ser. 2, v. 1, p. 409-412. Mentions warm springs issuing south of the Cove of Muscat. 2696. Hibbert, W., 1838, Remarks upon the Maculla hot spring in Arabia, together with some notes regarding the Red Sea islands: London and Edinburgh New Philos. Jour., v. 24, no. 47, p. 30-35. 2697. Little, O. H, 1925, The geography and geology of Makalla (South Arabia) : Survey of Egypt, Geol. Survey, 250 p., front. 35 pis., 5 figs. Mentions thermal sulfur spring north of Makalla city and thermal wells near Ghail Ba Wazir. 2698. Miles, S. B., 1901, Across the Green Mountains of Oman: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 18, no. 5, p. 465-498, map. States that thermal springs are source of supply for town of Nakhl (Palmyra or Tadmor) and for irrigation of gardens and groves of date palms. 2699. Philby, Harry St. John Bridger, 1922, The heart of Arabia; A record of travel and exploration: London, Constable & Co., Ltd. 2 v.; v. 1, 386 p., front., 39 illus.; v. 2, 354 p., 8 illus., map. Describes Ain al Harra near Mubarraz and Khudud and Haqal springs east of Hufuf. 2700. Wrede, Adolphe Baron, 1844, Account of an excursion to Hadramaut: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 14, p. 107-112. Mentions thermal springs northwest of Makalla. See also references 30, 43, 73, and 2805. CHINA GENERAL REFERENCES AND EASTERN PART OF CHINA 2701. Chang, H. T., 1926, On the distribution of thermal springs in China : Pan-Pacific [Pacific] Science Cong., 3d, Tokyo, Proc., v. 1, p. 812-813, map. States that 512 springs are known, the water from 177 being definitely hot and from most of the others reportedly hot. Map shows distribution of springs. 2702. 1935, On the distribution of thermal springs in China: Geog. Soc. China Jour., v. 2, no. 3, p. 13-22, map. [Chinese, English summary, p. 3.] Contains the same information as reference 2701. 2703. Gray, John Henry, 1878, China. A history of the laws, manners, and customs of the people: London, Macmillan & Co., 2 v.; v. 1, 397 p., 53 illus.; v. 2, 374 p., 84 illus. Mentions hot springs at Yung-Mak, Chung-ling-tow, and Foochow Foo. 2704. Hayasaka, Ichiro, 1955, Brief description of the geology of hot springs in Amoy Island: Tokyo. Printed Japanese manuscript belonging to the Compilation Comm. Geology and Mineral Resources of the Far East; English translation for the Engineer Intelligence Div., U.S. Army forces, Far East, 9 p. [typescript] ; incl. map showing location of Amoy Island. 2705. Hoeppli, R., and Chu, H. J., 1932, Free-living nematodes from hot springs in China and Formosa: Hong Kong Naturalist,, Supp. 1, p. 15-28. 2706. Hsieh, C. Y., and Chang, K., 1928, Geology of Tang Shan and its vicinity, Nanking: Geol. Soc. China Bull. 7, p. 157-174, 4 pis., figs. 2707. Thorp, James, 1945, Unpublished notes : Earlham College, Richmond, Ind. Mentions warm springs of Yang Kwei Fe near Lin-tung, at Pehpei, and at Nanchuan. 2708. Timkovskii, Egor Fedorovich (Timkowski, George), 1827, Travels of the Russian mission through Mongolia to China, and residence in Peking, in the years 1820-1821, with corrections and notes by Julius von Klaproth: London, Longman, Reed, Orme, Brown, & Greene, 2 v.; v. 1, 468 p., front., map; v. 2, 496 p., front; translated from Russian by H. E. Lloyd. Mentions warm springs 23 miles northeast of Peking. 2709. Wang, Tiao-hsin, and Lin, Yuan-Tsun, 1940, The analysis and study of hot-spring water in Foochow: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 238, no. 11, p. 799-804, 1 pi., 2 figs., table. 2710. Williamson, Rev. A., 1868, Notes on the productions, chiefly mineral, of Shan-Tung: Royal Asiatic Soc. Jour., North-China Br., new ser., no. 4, 1867, p. 64-73. Mentions thermal springs at Ngai-shan, at Loong-chwen, at Wun-shih-tun, near Yi-chou, and at Chau-Yuen. 2711. Willis, Bailey, 1949, Friendly China: Stanford, Calif., Stanford Univ. Press, 312 p., 39 illus. Describes hot springs of T’ang Shan and Lin Tung. See also references 30 and 2937. FORMOSA (TAIWAN) 2712. Collingwood, Cuthbert, 1867, The sulphur-springs of northern Formosa: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 23, 382-384; “On the sulphur springs of northern Formosa” : London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philos. Mag. and Jour. Sci., ser. 4, v. 34, p. 401,1867. 2713. Han, Kwan, 1944, Chemical investigation of the hot springs of Formosa. I, The hot spring of Kansirei: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., v. 65, p. 342-345, 2 figs., 4 tables [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 3557. 2714. Hayakawa, Masataro, and Nakano, Tomonori, 1912, Die radioaktiven Bestandteile des. Quellsedimentes der Tkermen von Hokuto, Taiwan: Zeitschr. anorg. u. allg. Chemie, v. 78, p. 183-190, 3 figs., 7 tables. 2715. Hayasaka, Ichiro, 1940, On some thermal springs of Tai- wan, Japan: Bull, volcanol., ser. 2, v. 6, p. 227-235,1 fig.; 1950, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 14,1949, p. 108. 2716. Okamoto, Yohachiro, 1911, On a radioactive mineral, found as a crust under the hot spring water of Hokuto in Taiwan : Geol. Soc. Tokyo Jour., v. 18, no. 219, p. 19-26. [English.] 2717. Pan, Kuan, 1952, Chemical composition of the hot spring in Kwan-Tsu-Ling (Taiwan) : National Taiwan Univ., Agr. Chem. Dept. Bull. 1, p. 22-26; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 11998. 2718. Pan, Kuan; Lin, S. F.; Hseu, T. M.; Sun, P. J.; and Chan, T. H., 1955, Chemical studies on the hot springs in Taiwan. I, Chemical and physico-chemical analyses of Yang-Ming Shan hot springs: Chinese Assoc. Adv. Sci. Trans., v. 1, p. 27-30; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 17263. 2719. Richards, Theodore W, and Sameshima, Jitsusaburo, 1920, The atomic weight of lead from a Japanese radio-active mineral: Am. Chem. Soc. Jour., v. 42, no. 5, p. 928-930. Describes a sample of lead that was separated from a mineral crust deposited by a hot spring at Hokuto.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 345 2720. Swinhoe, Robert, 1864, Notes on the Island of Formosa: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 34, p. 6-18, map. Describes hydrothermal activity associated with sulfur deposits. 2721. Williams, Samuel Wells, 1899, The middle kingdom; a survey of the geography, government, literature, social life, arts, and history of the Chinese Empire and its inhabitants: New York, C. Scribner’s Sons, 2 v.; v. 1, 836 p., front., 40 illus.; v. 2, 775 p., front., 30 illus., map. Mentions sulfur deposits associated with hydrothermal activity in Formosa. Also states that there are many hot springs in provinces of Shensi and Sz’ chuen, and at Jeh-ho in Manchuria. 2722. Ziro, 0. E., 1928, Distribution of hot springs in Formosa: Tokyo Geog. Soc. Jour., v. 40, p. 555-571. See also references 109, 2939, 2942, 2997, and 3341. MANCHURIA 2723. Ahnert, E. E., 1929, Mineral resources of North Man- churia : Geol. Survey China Mem., ser. A, no. 7, 262 p., 15 pis., 9 maps. [English, Chinese summary.] Includes thermal springs of Halhin-Hulun-Arshan and near summit of Great Hingan in list of 12 mineral springs. 2724. Anonymous, 1941, Jehol, the hot water city: Far Eastern Rev., v. 37, no. 4, p. 136. 2725. Imamura, Zengo, 1941 [Tang-ho-yen hot springs, Liao-yang prefecture, Feng-tien province] : Manchoukuo Geol. Inst. Bull. 102, p. 63-68, 5 figs. [Japanese.] 2726. Inoue, W., 1940 [Radioactive prospecting at Hsing-cheng hot springs near Ti-Tao] : Manchoukuo Geol. Inst. Bull. 98, p. 23-32, 6 figs. [Japanese] ; 1941, Chem. Abs., v. 35, col. 6509. 2727. Iwasaki, Iwazi, 1940 [The radon content of some hot springs in Manchoukuo] : Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., v. 61, p. 367-373 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 34, col. 5345. 2728. Monden, Sigeyuki, and others, 1939 [Researches on leading hot springs in Manchuria] : South Manchuria Railway Co., Geol. Inst. Bull. 95, 78 p., 30 pis., 32 figs. [Japanese.] Consists of the following papers: [Hot springs in Manchoukuo], by Sigeyuki Monden; [Tang-kang-tsu hot springs, Hai-cheng prefecture, Feng-tien province], by Rinji Saito; [Wu-lung-pei hot springs, Antung prefecture, Antung province], by Isao Sioda; [Hsiung-yu-cheng hot springs, Kai-ping prefecture, Feng-tien province], by Zengo Imamura; [Hsing-cheng hot springs, Hsing-cheng prefecture, Chin-chou province], by Syoiti Nisida; [Halun-arshan hot springs, north Hsing-an province], by Sigeyuki Monden; [Je-shui-tang hot springs, Chien-chang prefecture, Je-ho province], by Goro Asano; and [Tang-shan (Fe-shui-tang) hot springs, Ko-shih-ko-teng prefecture, west Hsing-an province], by Sigemitu Okada. 2729. Niinomy, K., 1935 [On the springs of Tang-kang-tzu] : South Manchuria Railway Co., Geol. Inst. Bull. 83, p. 40-45,1 pi. [Japanese.] 2730. 1937 [Geology of the district of Hsing-cheng hot springs, Chin-Chou province] : South Manchuria Railway Co., Geol. Inst. Bull. 91, p. 1-17, 2 pis., 9 figs. [Japanese.] 2731. South Manchuria Railway Co., 1919, Hot springs in Man- churia : Darien, Japan Tourist Bur., Darien Br., 42 p., 35 illus., 5 maps. See also references 2721 and 2939. SINKIANG AND TIBET 2732. Columbia Lippincott Gazetteer of the World, 1952, Mana- sarowar Lake: New York, Columbia Univ. Press, p. 1134. Mentions hot springs along banks of channel that connects Mapham Lake to Rakas Lake. 2733. Boyle, George, and Manning, Thomas, 1876, Narrative of the mission of George Boyle to Thibet, and of the journey of Thomas Manning to Lhasa: London. 2734. Csoma de Koros, Alexander, 1832, Geographical notice of Tibet: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 1, p. 121-127. Mentions hot springs between T’sang Province and U in Wei Province. 2735. Harrer, Heinrich, 1954, Seven years in Tibet; translated by Richard Graves: New York, E. P. Dutton & Co., p. 19-314, map. Mentions hot springs in three different localities in Tibet. 2736. Hedin, Sven Anders, 1899, Through Asia: New York and London, Harper & Bros., 2 v.; v. 1, p. 1-663, front., 135 illus., map; v. 2, p. 664-1278, front., 124 illus., map. Describes springs at Issyk-bulak, on the south side of Mus-tagh-Ata Mountain in Sinkiang. 2737. Markham, C. R., 1875, Travels in Great Tibet, and trade between Tibet and Bengal: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 45, p. 299-315,1 pi. Describes hot springs and geysers along Lahu Chu River at and near Naisum Chuja. 2738. McGovern, William Montgomery, 1924, To Lhasa in dis- guise : a secret expedition through the mysterious Tibet: New York and London, Century Co., 462 p., 76 illus. Mentions thermal springs at several places in Tibet. 2739. Montgomerie, Thomas George, 1875a, Narrative of an ex- ploration of the Nameho, or Tengri Nur Lake, in Great Tibet, made by a native explorer in 1871-2: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 45, p. 315-330, 1 pi. Describes hot springs at Chutang CMkfi, Peting Chujfi, Naisum Chujii, Dung Chaka, Dung Nagu Chdka, and Chang Phang Chujfi. 2740. 1875b, Journey to Shigatze in Tibet, and return by Dingri-Maidan into Nepal, in 1871, by the native explorer No. 9: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 45, p. 330-349, 1 pi. Mentions hot springs at Chajong (Tatapani) and indicates (on map) a hot spring at Gangamar, 90 miles east of Chajong. 2741. Moorcroft, William, 1816, A journey to Lake Manafarovara in Un-des, a province of Little Tibet: Asiatick Researches, v. 12, p. 375-534. 2742. Shaw, Robert Barkley, 1871, Visits to High Tartary, Yar- kand, and Kashghar, and return journey over the Karakoram Pass: London, J. Murray, 486 p., front., 12 illus., maps. Mentions spring near Kara-Kash River. 2743. Thompson, ca. 1850, Western Himalayas and Tibet. Con- tains mention of thermal springs. 2744. U.S. Air Force, 1948, World Aeronautical Chart, Goring Lake Sheet (No. 438 : N. Lat. 28°-32°, E. Long. 84°-90°; scale 1:1,000,000). Shows six locations of hot springs. 2745. U.S. Army Map Service, Corps of Engineers, War Depart- ment, 1944, Manasarowar Sheet (N. H-44) ; 1945, Lhasa Sheet (N. H-46) ; 1947, Tsangpo Sheet (N. H-45). Show several locations of hot springs in southern Tibet.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 346 2746. Waddell, Lawrence Austine, and Holdich, Thomas Hun- gerford, 1911, Tibet, in Encyclopaedia Britannica: 11th ed., New York, Encyclopaedia Britannica, v. 26, p. 916-918. Mentions that the lake region of Tibet is noted for its many hot springs. See also references 30, 43, 73, 74, 617, 2803, and 2807. INDIA AND ADJACENT AREAS 2747. Adam, John, 1821, On the geology of the banks of the Ganges, from Calcutta to Cawnpore: Geol. Soc. London Trans., ser. 1, v. 5, 346-352. Describes the springs of Sitakund. 2748. Adams, Andrew Leith, 1867, Wanderings of a naturalist in India, the western Himalayas, and Cashmere: Edinburgh, Edmonston & Douglas. 333 p., front. Refers to the thermal springs of Islamabad. 2749. Ahmad, M. I., 1953, Volcanoes and sulphur of western Baluchistan: Pakistan Geol. Survey Rees., v. 4, pt. 3, p. 1-16; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 10620. 2750. Baird-Smith, R., 1843a, Memoir on Indian earthquakes: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 12, pt. 1, no. 136, p. 257-297. Mentions hot sulfur spring at Sonub, near Delhi. 2751. 1843b, Memoir on Indian earthquakes (cont’d) : Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 12, pt. 2, no. 144, p. 1029-1056. Mentions hot springs at several locations. 2752. Baker, W. E., and Maclagan, 1848, Temperature of the hot springs at Peer Mangul, or Maga, or Mangear: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 17, pt. 2, p. 230-232. 2753. Ball, V., 1880, On the Aurunga and Hutar coal fields and the iron ores of Palamow and Toree: Geol. Survey India Mem., v. 15, p. 1-127, maps. Mentions thermal springs at Jarum, Thatha, Tatapani, and Ganduani. 2754. Bates, Robert H., and Craig, Robert W., 1953, We met death on K2; Part 1: Saturday Evening Post, v. 226, no. 3, p. 19-21,166,168,170. Includes photograph of hot sulfur springs near village of Askole. 2755. Bellew, Henry Walter, 1875, Kashmir and Kashgar—A narrative of the journey of the embassy to Kashgar in 1873-74: London, Triibner & Co., 419 p. Describes thermal springs at Panamik and Chang-lung. 2756. Blanford, William T., 1869, On the geology of the Taptee and Lower Nerbudda valleys and some adjoining districts : Geol. Survey India Mem., v. 6, p. 163-384, 2 pis., 15 figs., maps. Describes thermal springs at Salbaldee and mentions Unapdeo, Ganerio, and Gondala springs. 2757. Buchan, ca. 1870, Survey of Bihar, Eastern India. II. Describes the Sita-Kund hot springs. 2758. Buchanan, Francis Hamilton, 1831, On the minerals of the Rajmahal cluster of hills: Gleanings in Sci., v. 1, p. 1-8, Calcutta. Mentions thermal springs of Rishikund and Bhim-band. 2759. Buist, George, 1852, The volcanoes of India: Geog. Soc. Bombay Trans., v. 10, p. 139-166. Includes map showing locations of 37 thermal springs. 2760. Buyers, William, 1848, Recollections of Northern India, with observations on the origin, customs, and moral sentiments of the Hindoos * * *.: London, John Snow, 13-548 p. 2761. Chatterjee, P. K., 1940, Economic geology of Jamalpur and its neighbourhood, Monghyr district, Behar: Geol., Mining, and Metall. Soc. India Quart. Jour., v. 12, no. 1, p. 1-7,1 pi., map. Mentions thermal springs at and near Sitakund. 2762. Chatterji, N. K., 1936, Radioactivity of the thermal springs of Rajgir: Indian Med. Gazette, v. 71, p. 150-153; 1936, Chem. Abs. v. 30, col. 4394. 2763. Chhibber, H. L., 1950, Thermal springs near Gangnani, Tehri-Gahrwal Himalayas: Jour. Sci. and Indus. Research v. 9, no. 3, Sec. B, p. 78; 1951, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 15, 1950, p. 50. 2764. Cordiner, James, 1807, A description of Ceylon, contain- ing an account of the country, inhabitants, and natural productions * * * : London, Longman, Hurst, Rees, & Orme, 2 v.; v. 1,445 p.; v. 2, 360 p., 25 pis. Contains information on the hot wells of Cannia. 2765. Cunningham, Alexander, 1848, Journal of a trip through Kulu and Lahul to the Chu Mureri Lake, in Ladak, during the months of August and September, 1846: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 17, pt. 1, p. 201-230, 2 pis. Describes thermal springs at Sitakund and Vashishta Muni. 2766. 1854, Ladak, physical, statistical, and historical; with notices of the surrounding countries: London, W. H. Allen & Co., 485 p., 31 pis., map. States that there are many hot springs in Ladak and describes those of Nubra, Puga, and Chusul. 2767. Cunningham, Alexander, and Broome, A., 1841, Abstract journal of the routes of Lieutenants A. Broome and A. Cunningham to the sources of the Punjab rivers: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 10, no. 109; new ser., no. 25, pt. 1, p. 1-6. Describes the hot “well” of Sitakund and mentions the hot “wells” of Biseshta-moonh (Vashishta Muni?) 2768. Davy, John, 1821, On the geology and mineralogy of Cey- lon : Geol. Soc. London Trans., ser. 1, v. 5, p. 311-327. Contains information on the hot wells of Cannia. 2769. Duncan, A., 1838, Medical and Physical Society of Bom- bay Trans.: v. 1. Mentions several thermal springs of Konkan region. 2770. Everest, Robert, 1831, Geological observations made on a journey from Calcutta to Ghazipur: Gleanings in Sci., v. 1, p. 129-136, Calcutta. Mentions hot springs in Pachete hills, in bed of Damuda River, and near Katcamsandy. 2771. Filippi, Filippo de, 1912, Karakoram and Western Hima- laya, 1909—An account of the expedition of H. R. H. Prince Luigi Amedeo of Savoy, Duke of the Abruzzi: New York, Dutton, 469 p., pis., Ulus.; translated into English by Carol de Filippi nee Fitzgerald, and H. T. Porter. Describes a hot spring between Chongo and Askoley. 2772. Fleming, Andrew, 1853, Report on the geological structure and mineral wealth of the Salt Range in the Punjab; with maps, sections, &c.: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 22, p. 229-279, 333-368, 444-462, 1 pi., figs. Describes a warm spring in Bukh Ravine. 2773. Foley, W., 1836, Notes on the geology &c. of the country in the neighborhood of Maulamyeng (vulg. Moulmein) : Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 5, no. 53, p. 269-281, map.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 2774. Fraser, James Bailie, 1820, Account of a journey to the sources of the Jumna and Bhagriralhi Rivers: Asiatick Researches, v. 13, p. 171-249. 2775. Gardiner, 1853, Abstract of a journal kept by Mr. Gar- diner during his travels in central Asia—with a note and introduction by M. P. Edgeworth: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 22, no. 3, p. 283-305. Mentions hot springs at a village of the Therba tribe (north of Droo), at Khornushu, and northeast of Booloo village. 2776. Gerard, Alexander, 1841, An account of Koonawur, in the Himalaya, etc., by the late Capt. Alexander Gerard; edited by George Lloyd: London, J. Madden, 308 p., app., map. Mentions several groups of hot springs and wells. 2777. Ghosh, P. K., 1948, Mineral springs of India (summary) : Current Sci. [Bangalore], v. 17, no. 3, p. 85; 1954, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 18, 1953, p. 150. 2778. Giraud, Herbert, and Haines, R., 1859, Analysis of the mineral springs and various wells and river waters in the Bombay Presidency: Med. Phys. Soc. Bombay Trans., v. 5, p. 242-263. 2779. Godwin-Austen, Henry Haversham, 1864, On the glaciers of the Mustakh Range: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 34, p. 19-56, map. Describes hot springs near Chongo, near Braldoh River, and at Chutrun. 2780. Halstead, Edward P., 1841, Report on the Island of Che- dooba: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., new ser., v. 10, no. 113, p. 349-377; no. 114, p. 419-436. Describes the several mud volcanoes on Cheduba (Chedooba) Island. 2781. Hayden, H. H., 1909, Thermal springs in the Rajmahal Hills: Geol. Survey India Rees., v. 37, p. 328. 2782. Hayward, G. W., 1870, Journey from Leh to Yarkand and Kashgar, and exploration of the sources of the Yarkand River: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 40, p. 33-166, map. Describes hot springs in Chang Lang valley, at a point about 15 miles north of Kush Maidan, and near the source of the Yarkand River. 2783. Henderson, ca. 1860, Lahore to Yarkand. Describes springs 8 miles from Gokra. 2784. Hodgson, Bryan Houghton, ca. 1822 [Description of Jum- notri springs] : Asiatic Researches, v. 14. 2785. Hooker, Joseph Dalton, 1855, Himalayan journals—Notes of a naturalist in Bengal, the Sikkim and Nepal Himalayas, the Khasia Mountains, etc.: 2d ed., London, J. Murray, 2 v. (in one) ; v. 1, 348 p., front., 41 ills.; v. 2, 345 p., front., 37 illus. Contains descriptions of the hot “wells” of Sitakund and the hot springs of Soorujkund, near Yeumtong, and near Momay. 2786. Liebig, G. von, 1861, Account of visit to Barren Island in March 1858: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 29, 1860, no. 1, p. 3-10,1 pi. Describes the fresh-water hot spring near shore of Barren Island. 2787. Low, 1837 [Data on springs] : Asiatic Researches, v. 18. Mentions Eubien hot well. 2788. Macpherson, John, 1855, Mineral waters of India, with some hints on spas and sanatoria: Indian Annals Med. 347 Sci. [Calcutta], v. 2, p. 205-221; 1856, abs., Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 25, p. 197. 2789. Malcolmson, John G., 1840, On the fossils of the eastern portion of the great basaltic district of India: Geol. Soc. London Trans., ser. 2, v. 5, p. 537-575, 2 pis. Includes information on several thermal springs. 2790. Mallet, F. R., 1872 [Data on thermal springs] : Geol. Sur- vey India Mem., v. 9. 2791. 1874, On the geology and mineral resources of the D&rjiling district and the western Duars: Geol. Survey India Mem., v. 11, pt. 1, p. 1-96, 2 maps. Mentions warm, moist air issuing from rock fissures near Mangphu copper mines. 2792. 1876, The mud volcanoes of Ramri and Cheduba: Geol. Survey India Rees., v. 11, p. 188-223, 1 pi. 2793. Mann, Harold, and Paranjpye, S. R., 1917, The hot springs of the Ratnagiri District: Royal Asiatic Soc., Bombay Br., Jour., v. 24, p. 185-212, 5 maps. 2794. Marcadieu, 1854 [Data on springs] : Indian Annals Med. Sci. [Calcutta], v. 2. 2795. 1855a [Data on springs] : Indian Annals Med. Sci. [Calcutta], v. 3. 2796. 1855b, Report on the Kooloo iron mines and on a portion of the Manikam valley: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 24, no. 3, p. 191-202. Describes springs on bank of Parbutty River at Man-nikurn, on bank of Bias River in the Kerloo Valley, and the springs of Kelat. 2797. 1861 [Data on springs] : Indian Annals Med. Sci. [Calcutta], v. 9, p. 109. 2798. Mason, ca. 1870, Natural productions of Burma. Mentions the thermal springs of Ahtaran, Myitta, and Palouk. 2799. Masson, Charles, 1842, Narrative of various journeys in Baloochistan, Afghanistan, and the Panjab, including a residence in these countries: London, R. Bentley, 3 v., fronts., illus. Contains data on thermal springs of Garmab, Lakha, Lakhi, and Bisut. 2800. Mitra, S. N., Roy, S. C., Sircar, P., and Dey, D. C., 1958, Bakreswar hot spring waters: Inst. Chemists [India] Jour. Proc., v. 30, p. 75-78; Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 20789. 2801. Moorcroft, William, 1841, Travels In the Himalayan prov- inces of Hindustan and the Panjab; in Ladakh and Kashmir; in Peshawar, Kabul, Kunduz, and Bokhara; by Mr. William Moorcroft and Mr. George Trebeck, from 1819 to 1825: London, J. Murray, 2 v; v. 1, 459 p., front., map. Contains data on thermal springs at Mani Kam (Manikam), Bassisht, Chusan, Knarung, Chusul, and Kshir Nag. 2802. Mouat, F. J., 1862, Narrative of an expedition to the An- daman Islands in 1857: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 32, p. 109-126, 2 figs; Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Proc., v. 6, p. 41-43, 1862. Contains description of fresh-water hot spring near shore of Barren Island. 2803. Newbold, T. J., 1844, Note on a recent fossil fresh-water deposit in southern India, with a few remarks on the origin and age of the kunkur [tufa] and on the supposed decrease of thermal temperature in India : Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 13, pt. 1, no. 148, p. 313-318. Contains information on spring near Lanjabanda.348 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 2804. Newbold, T. J., 1845a, Notes, chiefly geological, across the peninsula of southern India from Madras, Lat. N. 13°5', to Goa, Lat. N. 15°30', by the Baulpilly Pass and ruins of Bijanugger: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 14, pt. 2, no. 163, p. 497-551, 1 pi. Describes springs at and near Bhuga. 2805. 1845b, On the temperature of the springs, wells, and rivers of India and Egypt, and of the sea and tablelands within the tropics: Royal Soc. London Philos. Trans., 1845, pt. 1, p. 125-139; London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philos. Mag. and Jour. Sci., v. 40, p. 99-115, 1846. Contains information on 20 thermal springs in India, 2 in Malaya, and 4 in Egypt. 2806. 1848, On the thermal springs of Calwa and Mahanandi in the Kurnool province: Madras Jour. Lit. and Sci., v. 15, p. 160-162. 2807. Oldham, Thomas, 1882, The thermal springs of India, edited by R. D. Oldham: Geol. Survey India Mem., v. 19, pt. 2, p. 99-161, map. The most comprehensive report on thermal springs in India. Tabulates data on 292 springs in India, 5 in Tibet, 6 in Afghanistan, and 4 in Pakistan and shows spring localities on map. Also contains an extensive list of references on thermal springs. 2808. Ouseley, J. R., 1848, On the antiquities of Sarguja and its neighbourhood: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 17, pt. 1, p. 65-67. Describes Tatapani hot spring. 2809. Parish, William H., 1848, A report of the Kohistan of the Jullundhur Doab: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 17, pt. 1, p. 281-295, 1 pi. Mentions Futtipanl hot spring. 2810. Percival, Robert, 1805, An account of the Island of Cey- lon, containing its history, geography, natural history, with the manners and customs of its various inhabitants ; to which is added the journal of an embassy to the court of Candy: 2d ed., London, C. and R. Baldwin, 466 p., front., 4 pis. Describes the hot wells of Cannia. 2811. Piddington, H., 1831, Analytical examination of a min- eral water from the Athan hills, Tenasserim Province: Gleanings in Sci., v. 3, no. 1, p. 24-26, Calcutta. 2812. Prinsep, J., 1831a, Examination of the water of several hot springs on the Arraean coast: Gleanings in Sci., v. 3, no. 1, p. 16-18, Calcutta. 2813. 1831b, Chemical analyses: Gleanings in Sci., v. 3, no. 9, p. 277-284, Calcutta. Contains analytical data on water from spring at Katcamsandy. 2814. Schlagintweit, Adolphe, 1857, Report on the progress of the magnetic survey, and of the researches connected with it, from November 1855 to April 1856: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 26, no. 2, p. 97-132. Contains information on several thermal-spring localities. 2815. Schlagintweit, Adolphe, Schlagintweit, Hermann, and Schlagintweit, Robert, 1857, Journey across the Kuen-Luen from Ladak to Khotan: Royal Geog. Soc. London Proc., v. 1, p. 273-277. Mentions the group of 50 hot springs near Lake Kiuk-Kiul and two groups of hot springs in the Nubra Valley. 2816. Schlagintweit, Robert, 1864, Enumeration of the hot springs of India and High Asia: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 33, p. 49-56. Contains information on 99 hot-spring localities. 2817. Schulten, C., 1914, Hot springs in Raj Darbhanga, Kharg- pore Hills, District Monghyr; Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour, and Proc., ser. 2, v. 10, no. 5, p. 147-152. 2818. Sherwill, S. R., ca. 1850, Geographic report on Berbhum: Official report, Indian Govt. Contains data on the thermal springs of Sittourah, Raghir, Tautlui, Hatbullia, Nunbhill, and Bara. 2819. 1852, The Kurrukpoor Hills: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 21, no. 3, p. 195-206. Contains information on several thermal springs. 2820. Sherwill, Walter Stanhope, 1846, Note on the geological features of Zillah Behar: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 15, no. 169, p. 55-59. Mentions that there are numerous hot springs in the Rajgheer hills and 19 hot wells at village of Rajgheer. 2821. Smoult, 1843, Guide to Darjeeling. Contains data on hot springs. 2822. Spilsbury, George C., 1827, On two hot springs in the valley of the Nerbudda : Med. Phys. Soc. Calcutta Trans., v. 3, p. 450-451. 2823. Steichen, A., 1916, The variation of the radioactivity of the hot springs of Tuwa: London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philos. Mag. and Jour. Sci., ser. 6, v. 31, no. 181, p. 401—103. 2824. Stevenson, J. F., 1864, Account of a visit to the hot springs of Pai in the Tavoy district: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 32, 1863, no. 4, p. 383-386. 2825. Sykes, W. H., 1836, On a portion of Dukhun, East Indies: Geol. Soc. London Trans., ser. 2, v. 4, p. 409—432, 1 fig. Mentions 13 thermal-water localities. 2826. Tennent, James Emerson, 1860, Ceylon; an account of the island, physical, historical, and topographical: 5th ed., London, Longman, Green, Longman & Roberts, 2 v.; v. 1, 643 p., 31 engravings, 7 illus., 6 maps; v. 2, 669 p, 60 engravings, 10 illus., 3 maps. Mentions five thermal-water localities. 2827. Thomson, Thomas, 1852, Western Himalaya and Tibet; a narrative of a journey through the mountains of northern India during the years 1847—48: London, Reeve & Co., 501 p., front., map. Describes thermal springs of Nubra and Pugha. 2828. Vicary, N., 1846, Geological report on a portion of the Baloochistan Hills: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 2, p. 260-267,1 fig. Mentions thermal springs near Ooch, at Kissooker, and at Doza Khooshtee. 2829. 1847, Notes on the geological structure of parts of Sinde: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 3, p. 334-349, 5 figs. Mentions springs in Munga-Peer basin and near Peeth in the Hala Mountains; also warm-water wells near Shahdad-ka-gote. 2830. Vigne, Godfrey Thomas, 1842, Travels in Kashmir, Ladak, Iskardo, the countries adjoining the mountain-course of the Indus, and the Himalaya north of the Panjab: London, H. Colburn, v. 1, 406 p., front., 3 illus., maps. Describes Pampur spring and thermal springs at Behitsil, Tsuh-Tron, and near Rajapur, Duchin, and Kor Chondus.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 2831. Voysey, H. W., 1833, Second report on the geology of Hyderabad: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 2, no. 18, p. 392-405. Includes information on Gondala and Bangah hot springs. 2832. Waddel, L. A., 1890, On some new and little known hot springs in South Bihar: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 59, pt. 2, no. 3, p. 224r-235. Describes 15 thermal springs. 2833. Wade, C. M., 1837, Note on the hot spring of Lohand Khad: Asiatic Soc. Bengal Jour., v. 6, p. 153-154. 2834. White, 1833, Description of a jatra, or fair, which takes place annually at the hot wells about fifty miles in a southeasterly direction from Surat: Royal Asiatic Soc. Great Britain and Ireland [London], v. 3, 1831-33, p. 372-378. 2835. Younghusband, Francis Edward, 1904, To the heart of a continent: London, J. Murray, 332 p., front., 8 pis., map. Mentions hot springs at Ak-Chak-tash and in the Ash-kuman, Yarkun, and Lutku valleys. 2836. Yule, Henry, 1858, A narrative of the mission sent by the Governor-General of India to the Court of Ava in 1855, with notices of the country, government, and people: London, Smith, Elder & Co., 391 p., front., 29 pis., 49 figs. Describes a visit to the mud volcanoes near Memboo village in Burma. See also reference 2745. INDO-CHINA (Cambodia, Laos, and Viet Nam) 2837. Autret, M., 1941, Les sources thermales et minerales du Tonkin: Indochine Bull, eeon., v. 44, pt. 2, p. 93-140, 2 maps, 14 tables. Contains short descriptions of 28 thermal springs; also gives chemical analyses of water from 26 of the springs. 2838. Blondel, F., 1928, Notes sur les sources thermales et minerales d’lndochine; I. Premier Inventaire des sources d’lndochine: Indochine Service Geol. Bull. v. 17, pt. 3, 23 p. map. Includes information on 77 springs, 59 of which are thermal. 2839. Bredillet, M., Fontaine, H., and Richard, C., 1958 [Review of hot springs and mineral springs in southern Viet-Nam]: Annales pharm. frangaises, v. 16, p. 246-251 [French] ; 1959, Chem. Abs., v. 53, col. 3551. 2840. Dussault, Leon, 1925, Etudes gGologiques dans la Chaine Annamatique Septentrionale: Indochine Service Geol. Bull., v. 14, pt. 4, 45 p., 4 pis., 9 figs., maps. Mentions warm sulfur springs at five locations. 2841. Fontaine, H., 1957 [Hot springs of southern Viet-Nam] : Archives g6ol. Viet-Nam, no. 4, p. 35-123 [French] ; 1959, Chem. Abs., v. 53, col. 1598. 2842. Guichard, Franck, and Nguyen-Kim-Kinh, 1939, Etude pr£liminaire d’une eau de source thermale sulfureuse: [French Indo-China], Conseil Recherehes Sci. Indochine Compte rendu. 1938-39, p. 97-100; 1943, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 9,1941-1942, p. 112. 2843. Lambert, 1910, Indochine Bull. Econ. Sept.-Oet. Contains data on Vinh Hao hot springs in Annam. 349 2844. Madrolle, C., ca. 1920; Indochine du Nord; and Indochine de Sud: [Guidebooks]. Lists data on 22 thermal and 11 nonthermal mineral springs. IRAN (PERSIA) 2845. Bell, Charles M., 1840, Geological notes on part of Ma- zunderan: Geol. Soc. London Trans., ser. 2, v. 5, p. 577-581, 1 fig. Describes thermal springs in the vicinity of Usk. 2846. Loftus, William Kennett, 1855, On the geology of portions of the Turko-Persian frontier, and of the districts adjoining: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 11, p. 247-344, 23 figs., map; 1854, abs., Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 10, p. 464-469. Mentions thermal springs in several localities. 2847. Morier, James Justinian Jacques, 1818, Second voyage en Perse, en Armenie, et dans i’Asie Mineure, fait de 1810 ft 1816: Paris, Gide fils, 2 v.; v. 1, 464 p., front., 1 illus., v. 2, 482 p., front., 1 illus. Mentions springs at Chiraz and describes several springs in vicinity of Maragha. 2848. Murray, C. A., 1859, On some mineral springs near Tehran, Persia: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 15, p. 198-199. 2849. Pilgram, G. E., 1908, Geology of the Persian Gulf and the adjoining portions of Persia and Arabia: Geol. Survey India Mem., v. 34, pt. 4,177 p. Mentions thermal spring at Daliki. 2850. Pottinger, Henry, 1816, Travels in Balooehistan and Sinde; accompanied by a geographical and historical account of those countries: London, Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme, & Brown, 423 p., front., map. 2851. St. John, Oliver Beauchamp Coventry, 1876, Narrative of a journey through Baluchistan and southern Persia, 1872, in Persian Boundary Commission, Eastern Persia. An account of the journeys of the Persian Boundary Commission, 1870-71-72: London, Macmillan & Co., 2 v.; v. 1, The geography, with narratives, by Majors St. John, Lovett, and Euan Smith, and an introduction by Sir Frederic John Goldsmid, 443 p., front., maps; v. 2, Zoology and geology, by W. T. Blanford, 516 p., illus. Describes a spring in the high mountains south of Mashfsh. 2852. Sjogren, H., ea. 1920, Beitrage zur Geologie * * * Nord- lichen Persien : Pamph., 31 p. Refers to springs near Savelan Mountain. 2853. Stiffe, A. W., 1874, On the mud-craters and geological structure of the Mekran coast: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 30, p. 50-54, 3 figs. Describes hot springs near Jashak and Karachi, also the mud craters between Guadur and Ras Kucheri. 2854. Sykes, Percy Molesworth, 1902, Ten thousand miles in Persia, or eight years in Iran : London, J. Murray, 481 p., front., 68 illus., map. Describes a solfatara, a hot well, and several thermal springs. 2855. Thomson, R. F., and Kerr, Lord Schomberg H., 1859, Jour- ney through the mountainous districts north of the Elburz, and ascent' of the Demavend, in Persia: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Proc., v. 3, no. 1, p. 2-17. Describes the thermal springs in the vicinity of Mount Demavend.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 350 2856. Tietze, Emil Ernst August, 1874, Geologische Unter- suchungen in Persien (Reise nach dem Demavendberge und der Provinz Mazenderan) : Geol. Reichsanst. Wien Verh., p. 360-363. Contains data on the thermal springs of Demavend Mountain. 2857. 1875, Ueber Quellen und Quellenbildungen am Demavend und dessen Umgebung: Geol. Reichsanst. Wien Jahrb., v. 25, no. 2, p. 129-140, map. 2858. Witt, Henry M., 1856, Chemical examination of certain lakes and springs on the Turko-Persian frontier near Mount Ararat: London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philos. Mag. and Jour. Sci., 4th ser., v. 11, p. 257-262. Contains chemical analyses of four thermal springs. See also references 78 and 3294. IRAQ 2859. Ainsworth, William Francis, 1888, A personal narrative of the Euphrates Expedition: London, K. Paul, Trench & Co., 2 v. Describes the thermal saline springs near Hit. 2860. Iraq Petroleum Company, Ltd., 1934, The construction of the Iraq-Mediterranean pipe-line; a tribute to the men who built it. An account of the construction in the years 1932 to 1934 of the pipe-line * * * from near Kirkuk, Iraq, to the Mediterranean ports of Haifa (Palestine) and Tripoli (Lebanon) : London, St. Clements Press, Ltd., 125 p., front., illus., map. Mentions that water from Sukhna springs is piped to Mafraq depot crossing. 2861. Macfadyen, W. A., 1938, Water supplies in Iraq: Iraq Geol. Dept. Pub. 1, 206 p., 19 pis. Includes data on many springs, wells, and collecting galleries, a few of which yield thermal water. ISRAEL AND JORDAN 2862. Blake, George Stanfield, 1928, Geology and water re- sources of Palestine: Jerusalem, 51 p., map. 2863. Blake, G. S., and Goldschmidt, M. J., 1947, Geology and water resources of Palestine; app., Rainfall in Palestine and Trans-Jordan, by R. Feige and E. Rosenau : Jerusalem, Palestine Dept. Land Settlement and Water Commissioner, 413 p., 31 pis., maps. Contains information on many important springs, five of which are thermal. 2864. Carson, Rachel Louise, 1951, The sea around us: New York, Oxford Univ. Press, 230 p. States that the Dead Sea is supplied by hot springs. 2865. Friedmann, A., 1913, Analysen der Thermalwasser einiger beruhmter Quellen Palastinas : Chemiker-Zeitung, v. 37, no. 146, p. 1493-1494. 2866. Ionides, M. G., and Blake, G. S., 1939, Report on the water resources of Transjordan and their development, by M. G. Ionides, incorporating a report on geology, soils and minerals, and hydrogeological correlations, by G. S. Blake: London, Govt. Transjordan, 372 p., 98 pis., 108 figs., 42 tables. Includes data on Hadlitha, El Hamme, Zerqa Ma’in, Sukhne, and Hammam springs. 2867. Lawrence, Thomas Edward, 1935, Seven pillars of wis- dom : London and Toronto, J. Cape, 672 p., front., 53 illus., maps; abbreviated ed., Revolt in the Desert: New York, George H. Doran Co., 355 p., front., 15 pis., 1927. Refers to the hot springs of Gadara. 2868. Luke, Harry Charles Joseph, and Keith-Roach, Edward, eds., 1934, The handbook of Palestine and Transjordan: 3d ed., London, Macmillan & Co., Ltd., front., map. Describes Ain Maleh, Al-Hamma, Zerqa Ma’in, Ain al-Zerqa, and hot springs near Lake Tiberias. 2869. Merrill, Selah, 1881, East of the Jordan—A record of travel and observation in the countries of Moab, Gilead, and Bashan during the years 1875-1877: New York, C. Scribner’s Sons, 549 p., 69 illus., map. Describes thermal springs at three places. 2870. Rosenblatt, David B, 1951, Radioactivity of the hot springs of Tiberias: Science, v. 114, no. 2950, p. 46. 2871. Rosenblatt, David B., and Lindeman, H., 1952, The radio- activity of the hot springs at Tiberias: Science, v. 116, no. 3025, p. 689-690. 2872. Tristam, Henry Baker, 1873, The land of Moab—Travels and discoveries on the east side of the Dead Sea and the Jordan: New York, Harper & Bros., 416 p., front., 41 figs., map. Includes descriptions of springs at Callirrhoe and near Zara. 2873. Wilson, C. W., 1873, Recent surveys in Sinai and Palestine: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 43, p. 206-240, map. Mentions hot springs at foot of Jebel Haminan Far’un, near Lake Tiberias, near Umm Keis (Gadara), and in Zerqa Ma’in (Callirrhoe). See also references 30 and 3290. JAPAN 2874. Aihara, Yonosin, 1934, On the distribution of thermal springs in Kyushu: Kwagaku (Science), v. 4, p. 97-98. [Japanese.] 2875. Akiyama, Teishiro, and Yamamoto, Yoshimasa, 1952, On the geochemical studies of hot springs in Kofu city (no. 1) : Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 61. no. 4, p. 152-153, illus. [Japanese, English summary] ; 1954, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 18, 1953, p. 4; 1955, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology, 1954, v. 26, no. 1, p. 95. “Determines the distribution of temperature and pH values of the hot springs of Kofu, Japan, and correlates the variations with the structure of the region.” 2876. 1953, Geochemical studies of hot springs in Kofu city (no. 2) : Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 62, no. 3, p. 118-125, illus. [Japanese, English summary] ; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 11690; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, 1954, v. 19, p. 6. 2877. Alcock, Rutherford, 1861, Narrative of a journey in the interior of Japan, ascent of Fujiyama, and visit to the hot sulphur-baths of Atami, in 1860: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 31, p. 321-356, map. 2878. Anderson, Robert van Vleck, 1907, The great Japanese volcano Aso: Pop. Sci. Monthly, v. 71, no. 1, p. 29-49, 10 figs. Mentions hot spring at Tochinoki and steam vents in crater of volcano. Includes view of hot springs of Yunotani.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 351 2879. Anonymous, 1940, Abstracts of papers on scientific hy- drology published in Japan during the years 1927-1938 (excluding those given in previous volumes) : Japanese Jour. Astronomy and Geophysics Trans, and Abs., v. 17, no. 2, p. 20-51. Contains about 60 papers on thermal springs. Most of these papers are included in this bibliography. 2880. Arii, Kimio, and Nagasawa, Sin, 1947, Geochemical study on mineral springs in the northeastern districts of Japan ; II, Sakunami group; III, Nakayamadaira spring group: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 68, p. 13-15 [Japanese]; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 7611. Analyses were made, and other data obtained, on nine hot springs of the Sakunami group, Miyagi Prefecture, and also for the Nakayamadaira spring group. 2881. 1953, Geochemical studies on mineral springs in the Tohoku district; XIII, Kawatabi group; XIV, Onikobe spring group: Tohoku Univ., F. Ishikawa Anniversary Volume, Sci. Repts., v. 37, no. 1, p. 106-116, illus. [Japanese] : 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 8990; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19,1954, p. 17. 2882. 1956, Geochemical studies on mineral springs in the Tohoku Districts; XV, Narugo spring group: Tohoku Univ. Sci. Repts., 1st ser., v. 39, p. 246-249 [Japanese] ; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 11322. 2883. Arii, Kimio, Nagasawa, Sin, and Seto, Kimio, 1948, Geo- chemical studies on mineral springs in the northeastern district of Japan; IV, Aone spring groups, Kamakur-azawa spring, and Ashidate spa: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour,. Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 69, p. 125-127 [Japanese] ; 1950, Chem. Abs., v. 44, col. 9268. 2884. 1949, Geochemical studies on mineral springs in the northeastern districts of Japan; VI, Semi spring group; VII, Tendo spring group; VIII, Akayu-Tenaka spring group; IX, Kurumayu spring group; X, Narugo-Yumoto group: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 70, p. 43-45, 99-101, 155-160 [Japanese]; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 4379. 2885. Arii, Kimio, and Seto, Kimio, 1948, Geochemical studies on mineral springs in the northeastern district of Japan; V, Radon content of mineral springs in Miyagi Prefecture; Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 69, p. 127-129 [Japanese] ; 1950, Chem. Abs., v. 44, col. 9268. 2886. Asari, Tamuja, 1949, The geochemical distribution of strontium; V, Strontium contents of the sinter deposits of hot springs: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 70, p. 430-431 [Japanese] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 2832. 2887. Ashizawa, Takashi, 1950-52, Chemical studies on the Misasa hot springs: Okayama Univ. Balneol. Lab. Repts.; 1950, v. 3, p. 21-34; 1951, v. 4, p. 1-10; 1952, v. 6, p. 4-14 [Japanese] ; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, cols. 10774-10776. 2888. 1951, Vitriol springs. VI, Colorimetric determination of antimony, determination of free mineral acid, and detection of sulfides of the second group: Okayama Univ. Balneol. Lab. Repts., v. 5, p. 51-54 [Japanese, English summary] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 8296. Contains data on the mineral content of water from the Yanahara hot springs. 2889. Ashizawa, Takashi, 1952, Chemical studies on Misasa hot spring. XVIII, A pyrite-polysulfide theory of sulfur springs: Okayama Univ. Balneol. Lab. Repts., v. 7, p. 15-19 [Japanese]; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 3680. 2890. Ata, Saneo, 1931, Some hot springs of southern Kyushu: Jour. Geog. [Tokyo], v. 43, p. 504-512. [Japanese.] 2891. Chamberlain, Basil Hall, 1891, Things Japanese; being notes on various subjects connected with Japan, for the use of travellers and others: 2d ed., London, J. Murray, 503 p., map. Mentions some of the most noted thermal springs and the use of their waters. 2892. Chitani, Y., 1924, On the Mogami hot spring in the Pre- fecture of Yamagata: Imp. Geol. Survey Japan Rept., v. 91, p. 1-2. [Japanese.] 2893. Cochius, H., 1873, Die Solfatara von Aschinoyu: Deutsche Gesell. Natur. u. Volkerkunde Ostasiens Mitt., pt. 3, p. 2-5. 2894. Descharmes, Augustin Marie Leon, 1874, Itinerary of a journey from Yedo to Kusatsu, with notes upon the waters of Kusatsu: Asiatic Soc. Japan [Tokyo] Trans., v. 2, p. 23—49; repr., 1907, new. ser., v. 2, p. 22-48. [English.] 2895. Divers, Edward, 1889, Note on the amounts of sulphuretted hydrogen in the hot springs of Kusatsu: Asiatic Soc. Japan [Tokyo] Trans., v. 6, pt. 2, p. 346-347; repr. of original edition of 1878. 2896. Emoto, Y., 1933a, Die Mikroorganism der Thermen: (Eine historische Ubersicht fiber die Erforschung der Thermalmikroorganismen) : Bot. Mag. [Tokyo], v. 47, p. 268-295. 2897. 1933b, Verbreitung der schwefeloxydierenden Bakterien in den Thermen Japans: Bot. Mag. [Tokyo], v. 48, no. 538, p. 6-29. 2898. Foster, Helen Laura, and Mason, Arnold Caverly, 1955, The 1950 and 1951 eruptions of Mihara Yama, O Shima volcano, Japan: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 66, no. 6, p. 731-762, 5 pis., 14 figs. Describes fumaroles in the inner crater. 2899. Fujinami, Kiochi, 1936, Hot springs in Japan: Tokyo, Japanese Government Railways, Board of Tourist Industry, Tourist Library, v. 10, 87 p., front., 66 illus., map. States that about 85 percent of the 946 springs in Japan are classified as thermal. Mentions several individual springs and groups of springs. 2900. Fukutomi, Takaharu, 1936a, Physical and chemical prop- erties of the Simogamo, Rendaizi, and Simokawazu thermal springs in southern Idu [Izu] Peninsula, I: Tokyo Imp. Univ. Earthquake Research Inst. Bull., v. 14, p. 259-270, 7 figs. [English, Japanese summary.] 2901. 1936b, On the hot springs of Yazu, Sikuoka Prefecture: Disin (Earthquake), v. 8, p. 457-468. [Japanese, English summary.] 2902. 1937, On the hot springs of Atami, Izu Peninsula : Tokyo Imp. Univ. Earthquake Research Inst. Bull., v. 15, p. 113-133, 13 figs., 2 tables. [English, Japanese summary.] 2903. 1952, On the Baba hot springs in Niseko volcanic region Hokkaido: Hokkaido Univ. Geophys. Bull., v. 2, p. 23-30 [Japanese] ; 1956, abs., Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Proc. v. 2, p. 45.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 352 2904. Fukutomi, Takaharu, and Fujiki, Tadayoshi, 1952, On the tepid springs in the neighborhood of Noliezi town, Aomori Prefecture: Hokkaido Univ. Geophysics Bull., v. 2, p. 31-47 [Japanese] ; 1956, abs., Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Proc., v. 2, p. 45. 2905. Fukutomi, Takaharu, and Huzii, Ziro, 1937, On the ther- mal springs of Ito, Izu Peninsula : Tokyo Imp. Univ. Earthquake Research Inst. Bull., v. 15, pt. 2, p. 506-535, 18 figs., 1 pi., 2 tables. [Japanese, English summary.] 2906. Fukutomi, Takaharu, and Nakada, Musakazu, 1935, On the Rendaizi thermal spring in southern Idu Peninsula: Tokyo Imp. Univ. Earthquake Research Inst. Bull., v. 13, pt. 3, p. 616-628, 17 figs., 1 table. [English, Japanese summary.] 2907. Fushimi, Hiroshi, and Akiyama, Tesihiro, 1955, Geo- chemical study of hot springs and test borings in Masu-tomi district: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 76, p. 620-624, 4 figs., 2 tables [Japanese] ; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 11569. 2908. Geerts, Antonius Johannes Cornelius, 1881a, The mineral springs of Ashi-no-yu in the Hakone Mountains: Asiatic Soc. Japan [Tokyo] Trans., v. 9, pt. 1, p. 48-52. [English.] 2909. 1881b, Analyses of ten Japanese mineral waters : Asiatic Soc. Japan [Tokyo] Trans., v. 9, pt. 1, p. 94—105. 2910. Gokan, Bunnosuke, 1939, The European and American in- fluence on the mineralogy and geology of Japan in the modern age: Tokyo Sci. Mus. Bull. 1, p. 53-104 [Japanese, English summary] ; 1940, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 7, 1939, p. 106. Discusses mineral resources and hot springs of Japan. 2911. Habu, Katakusu, 1938, On the effect of the sea seiches upon the flow of some thermal springs in Beppu : Nippon Gakuzyutu-Kyokai (Jour. Assoc. Adv. Sci. Japan), v. 13. [Japanese, English abstract.] 2912. Hamada, Hidenori, 1929, Re-determination of the radio- activity of hot springs in the San-in district and neighborhood : Tohoku Imp. Univ. Sci. Repts., 1st ser., v. 18, p. 317-321. [Japanese.] 2913. Haraguchi, Kuman, and others, 1950, Report on the hot spring researches at Goshiki spa and Shionoha spa, Kawakamimura, Yoshin o-gun, Nara Prefecture: Japan Geol. Survey Bull., v. 1, no. 4, p. 37-40, illus. [Japanese, English summary] ; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21, 1956, p. 238; 1958, abs., Annot. Bibliography Econ. Geology 1956, v. 29, no. 2, p. 306. 2914. Hartel, Fr. F., 1935, Die Heilbader Japans: Balneologie; Berlin, v. 2, p. 302-317; abs., Wasser u. Abwasser, v. 33, no. 11, p. 321. States that the temperature of the water from 951 springs exceeds 37°C. 2915. Hatsuta, Jinichiro, 1935, Gush-quantity of the Arima ther- mal springs, Hyogoken: Kyoto, Tikyu (Globe), v. 24, no. 6, p. 428-436. [Japanese.] 2916. Hatuta, Yorimi, and Suzuki, Masatatu, 1936, On the gey- ser at the “Itazi Hatiman-Digoku”: Tikyu-Buturi (Geophysics), v. 1, p. 94-103. [Japanese, English abstract.] 2917. Hayasaka, Ichiro, 1941, Observations on the thermal springs of Urai, Taihoku Prefecture: Taiwan Tigaku Kizi, v. 12, no. 4, p. 68-75, illus. [Japanese.] 2918. Homma (Honma), Fujio, 1926, Guidebook for the geologi- cal excursion to Beppu, the hot-spring city: Pan-Pacific [Pacific] Sci. Cong., 3d Tokyo, Guidebook, Excursion E-l, 6, 16 p., 3 views, maps. [English.] 2919. Honda, K., and Sone, T., 1915, On the geyser at Onikobe, Miyagi Prefecture, in Ishizu, Risaku, The mineral springs of Japan: pt. 1, p. 73-77, 3 figs. [English.] 2920. Honda, K., and Terada, Torahiko, 1906a, On the geyser in Atami: Earthquake Inv. Comm. Pub. in Foreign Languages 22, Sec. B, art. 4, p. 51-73, 7 figs., 12 pis., map. [English.] 2921. 1906b, On the geyser in Atami, Japan: Phys. Rev., v. 22, no. 5, p. 300-311, 8 figs; repr. in Ishizu. Risaku, The mineral springs of Japan: pt. 1, p. 47-52, 1915. [English.] 2922. Horikawa, Yasuichi, 1922, Chironomm sp. inhabiting the hot springs in Japan : Konchu Sek., v. 26, no. 11, p. 359-361, 1 pi. [Japanese.] 2923. Iimori, Satoyasu, and Hata, Shin, 1937, Radon content of some mineral springs in Japan: Inst. Phys. Chem. Research [Tokyo] Bull., v. 16, p. 1471-1478 [Japanese] ; 1938, Chem. Abs., v. 32, col. 7622. 2924. Ikeda, Nagao, 1949a, Geochemical studies on the hot springs of Arima. I, General observations: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 70, p. 328-329. [Japanese.] 2925. 1949b, Geochemical studies on the hot springs of Arima. II, Chemical composition of Ariake-no-yu, Shin-onsen (new hot spring), and Hon-onsen (central hot spring). Contents of rare alkali metals: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour.. Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 70, p. 363-366 [Japanese]; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 3101. 2926. 1954a, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Nasq [Tochigi Prefecture]. I—III: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 75, p. 362-371, 3 figs., 17 tables [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 11685. 2927. 1954b, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Nasu [Tochigi Prefecture]. IV-VI: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 75, p. 463-471, 11 tables [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 14051. 2928. 1955a, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Nasu, VII-VIII, Chemical composition of the Moto-yu spring, Yumoto, Nasu: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 76, no. 7, p. 711-716, 1 fig., 14 tables [Japanese] ; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 14152. 2929. 1955b, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Arima. III-IV, Chemical composition of the Tenmangu-no-yu spring, Arima Spa : Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 76, no. 7, p. 716-721, 2 figs., 9 tables [Japanese] ; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 14152. 2930. 1955c, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Nasu. IX, Chemical composition of the Moto-yu spring, Nasu; X. Daily variation of the chemical composition of the Moto-yu spring: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 76, no. 8, p. 833-839, 4 figs., 5 tables [Japanese] ; 1957, Chem. Abs., v. 51, col. 9979. 2931. 1955d, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Arima. V, VI, Investigations on the Tenmangu-no-yu spring, Arima area: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 76, no. 8, p. 839-844, 10 tables [Japanese] ; 1957, Chem. Abs., v. 51, col. 9980.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 2932. Ikeda, Nagao, 1955e, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Nasu. XI-XIII, On the sinter deposit of Moto-yu spring, Yumoto, Nasu: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 76, no. 10, p. 1007-1079, 21 tables. [Japanese.] 2933. 1955f, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Arima. VII, Investigation of the Tenmangu-no-yu spring, Arima area : Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 76, no. 10, p. 1079-1882, 1 fig., 3 tables. [Japanese.] 2934. 1955g, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Nasu. XIV, On the sinter deposit of the Moto-yu spring, Yumoto, Nasu ; XV, On the new compound of naturally occuring arsenic sulfide: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 76, no. 11, p. 1195-1201, 1 fig., 13 tables. [Japanese.] 2935. Iki, Tsunenana, 1926, Geologic notes on the Aso volcano: Pan-Pacific [Pacific] Sci. Cong., 3d, Tokyo, Guidebook, Excursion E-4, 14 p., 8 views, maps. [English.] States that there are several fumaroles, solfataras, and hot springs within the caldera. Mentions Yuno-tani, Tochinoki, Toshita, Tarutama, and Uchinomaki springs. 2936. Imperial Geological Survey of Japan, 1926, The geology and mineral resources of the Japanese Empire: Tokyo, Govt. Press, 136 p. [English.] States that the water of more than 250 of the 951 hot springs is radioactive. 2937. Imperial Japanese Government Railways, 1913-17, An official guide to eastern Asia: Tokyo, Tsukiji Type Foundry, 5 v.; 1913, v. 2, Southwestern Japan, 370 p., Ill illus., 15 maps; 1914, v. 3, Northeastern Japan, 488 p., 78 illus., 25 maps; 1915, v. 4, China, 414 p., 173 illus., 23 maps; 1917, v. 5, East Indies, including Philippine Islands, French Indo-China, Siam, Malay Peninsula, and Dutch East Indies, 519 p., 103 illus., 26 maps. [English.] Describes Dogo and Arima spas in southwestern Japan and Yumoto, Shuzeni, Kusatsu, and Onogawa spas in northeastern Japan. Also mentions hot springs at Sawatari, Shima, Takayu, and Azuma in northeastern Japan; hot springs 0.5 mile from Tuong-mwong Gate of Foo-Chow, northwest of Cha-ho-sien, at Tang-shan, and at Yung Male in China; and hot springs at Los Banos in the Philippine Islands. 2938. 1915, Japan; Travelers’ Handy Guide: Tokyo, Imp. Government Railways, Traffic Dept., 62 p., 30 pis. Mentions some of the hot-spring resorts. 2939. 1922, The hot springs of Japan (and the principal cold springs), including Chosen (Korea), Taiwan (Formosa), and South Manchuria; together with many tables giving classification, chemical basis, curative values, radioactivity, etc.: Tokyo, Japanese Government Railways. Official series, v. A., 486 p., front., 190 illus., maps. [English.] Includes 85 noted hot springs in list of the important radioactive springs. Contains several maps showing the locations of hot springs. 2940. 1933, An official guide to Japan; a handbook for travellers: Tokyo, Japanese Government Railways [and] Kobe, Tanaka Printing & Publishing House, Ltd., 506 p., front., 10 illus., 36 maps, 14 plans. A revision and condensation of volumes 2 and 3 of reference 2937. Includes Japan, Formosa (Taiwan), 353 South Saghalien (Karafuto), and the mandate islands in the South Seas. 2941. Iriye, Toshikatsu, 1956, The Chemical studies of conducted hot spring water in Chuzenzi: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 77, p. 412-417, 3 figs., 4 tables. [Japanese.] 2942. Ishizu, Risaku, 1915, The mineral springs of Japan, with tables of analyses, radioactivity, notes on prominent spas, and list of seaside resorts and summer retreats; specially edited for the Panama-Pacific International Exposition [San Francisco]: Tokyo, Imp. Hygienic Lab., pt. 1, 94 p.; pt. 2, 203 p.; pt. 3, 70 p., 77 pis., 4 figs., 7 maps. [English.] 2943. Isikawa, Seisyo, 1927, On test boring for hot springs: Kyoto, Tikyu (Globe), or, On the prospecting of hot springs; Chikyu (The Globe), v. 8, no. 1, p. 26-37. [Japanese.] 1930, The Kurobe and its hot springs: Kyoto, Tikyu (Globe), or, The gorge of the Kurobe and the hot springs along the valley; Chikyu (The Globe), v. 13, no. 2, p. 123-131. [Japanese.] 2944. Istani, D., 1915, Radioactivity of mineral springs in Mi- yagi Prefecture: Tokyo Math.-Phys. Soc. Proc., ser. 2, v. 8, p. 15-35 [English] ; Chem. Abs., v. 9, p. 2350. 2945. Ito, Yuichi, 1937, On the animals of the Yufuin hot spring: Japan Jour. Limnology, v. 7, p. 150-157. [Japanese, English summary.] 2946. 1938, Untersuchungen ueber die Fauna der heissen Quellen Japans (XV) : Annot. Zool. Japan, v. 17, p. 395—404. 2947. Iwasaki, Iwaji (Iwadi), 1937, The radon contents of the hot springs in the district of Izu. I; Japanese Assoc. Mineralogists. Petrologists, and Econ. Geologists Jour., v. 18, p. 154 [English.] 2948. 1938, Geochemical investigations of volcanoes in Japan. XIII, The radon content of hot springs in Idu [Izu] district. I: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 59, p. 1019-1026, 3 figs., 6 tables [Japanese, English abstract] ; Chem. Abs., v. 32, col. 8261. 2949. 1939, Geochemical investigations of volcanoes in Japan. XIX, The radon content of mineral springs of Yahiko-Kakuda district. I: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 60, p. 999-1004 [Japanese] ; 1940, Chem. Abs., v. 34, col. 1596. 2950. 1940a, On the distribution of chemical elements in mineral springs of Japan. I, II [abs.]: Japanese Jour. Astronomy and Geophysics Trans, and Abs., v. 17, no. 2, p. 37-38. [English.] 2951. 1940b, Recent geochemical investigations of hot springs: Science [Japan], v. 10, p. 245-249 [English] ; 1941, Chem. Abs., v. 35, col. 4322. 2952. 1944, Geochemical investigations of geysers. Ill, IV, V : Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 65, p. 640-644, 731-740. [Japanese.] 2953. 1945, Geochemical investigations of geysers. VI: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 66, p. 41-42 [Japanese] ; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 7388. 2954. 1948, Geochemical investigations of geysers. XV, Chemical composition of the Hokojigoku geyser at the Aso Volcano, Kumamoto Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 69, p. 5-6 [Japanese] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 8790.354 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 2955. Iwasaki, Iwaji (Iwadi), 1949a, Geochemical investigations of geysers. XIX, Preliminary minor ebullition and small spouting of geysers: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 70, p. 283-284 [Japanese] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 2832. 2956. 1949b, Geochemical studies of Yunotani hot springs in Aso volcano: Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 58, no. 4-5, p. 143-150, 1 fig., 9 tables [Japanese, English summary] ; 1951, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 15,1950, p. 134. 2957. 1950, Geochemical investigations of strongly radioactive springs. Distribution of radon in hot springs: Chem. Researches [Japan], v. 8, p. 1^42 [Japanese, English summary] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 2318. 2958. Iwasaki, Iwaji (Iwadi); Fukutomi, Hiroshi; and Taru- tani, Toshikazu, 1954, Geochemical investigations of hot spring deposits. II: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 75, p. 282-286, 1 fig., 4 tables [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 11266. 2959. Iwasaki, Iwaji (Iwadi), and Ieyoshi, Minoru, 1943a, Geo- chemical investigations of geysers. I: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 64, p. 1345-1350 [Japanese] ; 1948, Chem. Abs., v. 42, col. 301. 2960. 1943b, Geochemical investigations of geysers. II, Studies of the Hoko-jigoku hot spring of Aso, Kumamoto Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 64, p. 1453-1458 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 3557. 2961. 1945, Geochemical investigation of geysers. VII-XIV: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 66, p. 42-49 [Japanese] ; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 7388. 2962. Iwasaki, Iwaji (Iwadi); Ishimori, Tomitaro; and Hataye, Itsuhachiro, 1951, Geochemical investigations of volcanoes in Japan. XXIX, Radioactive constituents of fumarolic gases: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 72, p. 736-739 [Japanese] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 6052. 2693. Iwasaki, Iwaji (Iwadi), and Matsuda, Fumio, 1951, Geochemical investigations of strongly radioactive springs. II, Radium contents of hot-spring deposits: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 72, p. 94-97 [Japanese] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 3422. 2964. Iwasaki, Iwaji (Iwadi), and Murakami, Tomio, 1946, Geo- chemical investigations of strongly radioactive springs : Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 67, p. 106-107 [Japanese] ; 1950, Chem. Abs., v. 44, col. 9268. 2965. 1949, Geochemical investigations of geysers. XVI, The nature of the Yoshimoto geyser of Yufuin; XVII, Chemical composition of water of Yoshimoto geyser: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 70, p. 207-210 [Japanese] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 4614. 2966. Iwasaki, Iwaji (Iwadi); Shimojima, Hikaru; and Nitta, Tadashi, 1955, Geochemical investigations of geysers. XXI, Variation in the chemical composition of spring waters and gases at Osoreyama Shurao-jigoku geyser, Aomori Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 76, no. 8, p. 885-888, 1 fig., 2 tables. [Japanese.] 2967. Iwasaki, Iwaji (Iwadi); Tarutani, Toshikazu; Katsura, Takashi; and Tachibana, Keisuke, 1953, Geochemical investigation of hot-spring deposits. I, Silica in Shiro-ike hot spring: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 74, p. 857-859 [Japanese] ; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 4733. 2968. Iwasaki, Iwaji (Iwadi), and Ukimoto, Isamu, 1943, Chemi- cal investigation of hot springs in west Japan. IX, Radium content of the mineral springs in Ikeda, Shi-mane Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 64, p. 1272-1277 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 3365. 2969. Iwasaki, Iwaji (Iwadi); Ukimoto, Isamu; and Hoshika, Mishijoshi, 1942a, Geochemical investigation of hot springs in Japan. Ill, The radon content of some hot springs in Hukuoka in Oita Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 63, p. 19-22 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 2985. 2970. 1942b, Geochemical investigation of hot springs in Japan. IV, The radon content of hot springs in Sambeyana district 2: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 63, p. 139-142 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 2985. 2971. Iwasaki, Iwaji (Iwadi); Ukimoto, Isamu; and Ieyoshi, Minaru, 1943a, Geochemical investigations of hot springs in west Japan. V, Variation of the radon content of Ikeda mineral springs, Shimane Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 64, p. 662-668 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 3365. 2972. 1943b, Geochemical investigation of hot springs in west Japan. VII, The radon content of some hot springs: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 64, p. 941-946 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 3365. 2973. Kakegawa, Kazuo, and Takeuchi, Ushio, 1951, Chemical studies on the Nozawa hot springs. I: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 72, p. 409-410 [Japanese] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 2207. 2974. Kawakami, Hiroyasu (Hiroshi), 1957, Chemistry of hot springs: Kagaku no Ryoiki, v. 7, p. 759-767 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 51, col. 18398. 2975. 1958, Simultaneous determination of barium and strontium in hot spring waters by spectroehemical analysis: Onken Kiyu, v. 10, p. 194-199 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 16659. 2976. Kawakami, Hiroyasu; Koga, Akito; and Kajihara, Ma- suyo, 1958, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Beppu. X, Phenolphthalien reactions; XI, Rate constant of decomposition of hydrogen peroxide, oxygen reduction potential, absorption spectrum, and aging; XII, Specific suppressive power, benzidine reaction, and aging: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 79, p. 1276-1287 [Japanese] ; 1959, Chem. Abs., v. 53, cols. 6490-6491. 2977. Kawakami, Hiroyasu; Koga, Akito; and Nozaki, Hidetosi, 1956a, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Beppu. I, II: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 77, p. 1327-1332, 1785-1789 [Japanese] ; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, cols. 3211, 3212. 2978. 1956b, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Unzen. I-III: Chem. Soc. Japap Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 77, p. 1773-1780 [Japanese] ; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, cols. 3211, 3212. 2979. Kayama, Isao, and Iriye, Toshikatsu, 1957, Geochemical studies on the hot springs at Yakumo mine, Hokkaido: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemical Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 78, p. 989-993 [Japanese]; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 11323. 2980. Kayama, Isao, and Okura, Takeshi, 1951, Geochemical studies on Showa-Shinzan. I: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour.,BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 355 Pure Chemical Sec., v. 72, p. 773-775 [Japanese] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 6049. 2981. Kikkawa, Kozo (Kyozo), 1950, The hot spring systems in Beppu in view of two chemical compounds: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 9, no. 1, p. 53-73 [Japanese], (Geophys. Inst. Kyoto Univ.) ; 1956, abs., Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Proc., v. 2, p. 44. 2982. 1954a, On Shirahama thermal springs, Wakayama Prefecture ; Contamination with sea water and deposits inside the conduit pipe: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 9, no, 2, p. 85-94, 5 figs. [English.] 2983. 1954b, On the salinities and overdraft conditions in Ito thermal springs: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 9, no. 2, p. 95-104, 8 figs. [English.] 2984. 1954c, Pumping test in Kinosaki springs, Hyogo Prefecture: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 9, no. 2, p. 109-115, 3 figs. [Japanese, English abstract.] 2985. 1954d, The sources of radon to the radioactive springs: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 9, no. 2, p. 117-126, [English.] 2986. Kikkawa, Kozo (Kyozo), and Suezo, Karube, 1949, New distribution of Cl and MCOs in Beppu hot springs district: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 8, nos. 2-4, p. 55-65 [Japanese] ; 1956, Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Proc., v. 2, p. 43. 2987. Kimura, Kenjiro, 1953a, Geochemical studies on the radio- active springs in Japan: Pacific Sci. Cong., 7th, New Zealand 1949, Proc., v. 2, Geology, p. 485-489, 5 tables. 2988. 1953b, On the utilization of hot springs in Japan: Pacific Sci. Cong., 7th, New Zealand 1949, Proc., v. 2, Geology, p. 500-504, 3 tables. 2989. Kimura, Kenjiro; Yokoyama, Y., and Ikeda, N., ca. 1955, Geochemical studies on the minor constituents in mineral springs of Japan: Assoc. Internat. hydrologie Sci., Assemble gen., Rome 1954, v. 2 (Pub. 37), p. 200-210; 1958 abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21, 1956, p. 305. 2990. Kitano, Yasushi, 1953a, Chemical investigations of hot springs in Japan. XXV : Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 74, p. 380-383 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 10772. 2991. 1953b, Chemical studies of hot springs in Japan. XXVI, Yunokawa and Yachigashira springs: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 74, p. 735-739 [Japanese] ; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 3598. 2992. 1953c, The forms of calcium carbonate deposits in hot springs. II: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 74, p. 789-792 [Japanese] ; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 4733. 2993. 1954a, Chemical composition of calcium carbonate deposits in hot springs: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 75, p. 125-129, 6 figs., 2 tables. [Japanese.] 2994. 1954b, Weathering of calcium carbonate deposits in hot springs: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 75, p. 129-132, 6 tables [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 48, cols. 10964-10965. 2995. 1954c, Chemical investigations of hot springs in Japan. XXVII: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 75, p. 872-876 [Japanese] ; 1955, Chem. Abs., v. 49, col. 7157. 2996. Kitano, Yasushi, and Nishimura, Masakichi, 1955, Chemi- cal investigations of hot springs in Japan. XXIX, The conditions under which aragonite and calcite are formed in hot springs; XXX, Boron content of hot springs in Japan; XXXI, Manganese content of hot springs in Japan: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 76, no. 6, p. 581-589, 4 figs., 12 tables. [Japanese.] 2997. Kiuti, Sinzo, 1939, Distribution of thermal springs in Japan: Japanese Jour. Astronomy and Geophysics, v. 17, no. 1, p. 185-191, 4 figs., 2 tables. [English.] 2998. Kobayashi, Giichiro, 1939, Geological classification of hot springs of Japan and their relation with certain geologic tectonic lines: Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 51, no. 608, p. 460-464. [Japanese.] 2999. 1940, Geological classification of hot springs of Japan and their relation with certain geological tectonic lines: Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 52, no. 613, p. 126-129; no 616, p. 269-289; no. 619, p. 430-438, 1 pi., 6 figs. [Japanese.] 3000. 1941, Geological classification of the hot springs in Japan and the relation between the hot springs and geotectonic lines: Yabe Jubilee Pub., v. 2, p. 1027-1077, 1 pi., 1 fig. [English, Japanese summary] ; 1949, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 13, 1948, p. 146. 3001. 1943, On the origin of the so-called juvenile water connected with volcanic action: Jour. Geography [Tokyo], V. 55, no. 652, p. 228-230. [Japanese.] 3002. 1944, Special character of Naruko hot-spring, Miyagi: Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 56, no. 661 [660], p. 108-116, 1 fig. [Japanese.] See also reference 3128. 3003. Koga, Akito, 1957, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Beppu. VI, Distribution of titanium; VII, Distribution of silver; VIII, Distribution of boric acid: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 78, p. 1713-1725 [Japanese] ; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 11323. 3004. 1958, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Beppu. IX, Distribution of molybdenum: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 79, p. 461-466 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 18968. 3005. 1959, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Beppu. XVII, Distribution of chromium: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. [Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 80, p. 362-365 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 53, col. 17382. 3006. Koga, Akito; Nozaki, Hidetosi; and Kawakami, Hiroyasu, 1957, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Beppu. V, Radioactive elements: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 78, p. 642-646 [Japanese] ; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 8423. 3007. Kondo, Sinko (Shinko), 1954, On the distribution of nat- ural water vapor under the ground: Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 63, no. 4 ( 694), p. 201-208, illus. [Japanese, English summary] ; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20, 1955, p. 287. 3008. 1956, On the distribution of natural steam under the ground in Japan : Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 65, no. 3, p. 111-117, illus. [Japanese, English summary] ; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 22, 1957, p. 290.356 3009. 3010. 3011. 3012. 3013. 3014. 3015. 3016. 3017. 3018. 3019. 3020. 3021. 3022. 3023. 3024. 3025. 3026. THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD Kozu, Shukusuke (Sendai), 1934, The great activity of Komagatake in 1929: Tschermak’s mineralog. petrog. Mitt., v. 45, p. 133-174, 26 figs., 11 tables. [English.] Mentions Tomenyou and Shikabe springs near east base of volcano. Kozu, Toshio, and Suga, Masao, 1954, Chemical studies in the hot springs of Dogo: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 75, p. 1233-1235 [Japanese] ; 1955, Chem. Abs., v. 49, col. 13559. 1955, Chemical studies on the hot springs of Dogo. II: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 76, no. 9, p. 957-960, 2 figs., 3 tables [Japanese] ; 1957, Chem. Abs., V. 51, col. 11621. Kuramochi, Fumio, 1956, On the Tsuruno-yu hot spring: Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 65, no. 1, p. 46-54, illus. [Japanese, English summary] ; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 22, 1957, p. 304. Kuroda, Kazuo, 1939a. The occurrence of germanium in the hot springs of Senaml: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 14, no. 7, p. 303-304,1 table. [English.] 1939b, The occurrence of beryllium in the hot springs of Matunoyama: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 14, no. 7, p. 305-306,1 table. [English.] 1939c, Vanadium, chromium, and molybdenum contents of the hot springs of Japan: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 14, no. 8, p. 307-310, 2 tables. [English.] 1940a, Radium vanadium, chromium, and molybdenum contents of the hot springs at Yunohanazawa [Hakone area] and their seasonal variations: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 15, no. 2, p. 65-70, 6 figs., 7 tables. [English.] 1940b, Zinc content of the hot springs of Japan: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 15, no. 3, p. 88-92, 3 figs., 3 tables. [English.] 1940c, Lead content of the hot springs of Japan: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 15, no. 4, p. 153-155, 2 figs., 2 tables. [English.] 1940d, Effect of rain on the composition of the hot springs of Yunohanazawa, Hakone: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 15, no. 4, p. 156-160, 2 figs., 2 tables. [English.] 1940e, The occurrence of gallium in the hot springs of Japan: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 15, no. 6, p. 234—236, 3 tables. [English.] 1940f, The occurrence of beryllium in the hot springs of Japan: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 15, no. 6, p. 237-238, 2 tables. [English.] 1940g, Copper, lead, and zinc content of the hot springs of Japan: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 15, no. 10, p. 439-441, 3 tables. [English.] 1941, The copper content of the hot springs of Yunohanazawa, Hakone, Kanagawa Prefecture, and that of the hot springs of Osoreyama, Aomori Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 16, no. 3, p. 69-74, 7 figs., 6 tables [English] ; Chem. Abs., v. 35, col. 5223. 1942a, Vanadin-, Chrom- und Molybdangehalt einiger Mineralquellen Japans: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 17, no. 4, p. 213-215, 2 figs., 2 tables. 1942b, Die Veranderung der chemischen Zusammenset-zung der Thermalquellen unter dem Einfluss der Gezeiten: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 17, p. 381-391, 8 figs., 8 tables. 1942c, Determination of traces of silver in mineral waters by the dithizone method: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 17, no. 9, p. 419-423 [English] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 4595. 3027. Kuroda, Kazuo, 1942d, Die Veranderung der chemischen Zusammensetzung der Thermalquellen unter dem Einfluss der Gezeiten. II, Mitt. Weitere Untersuchungen der Thermalquellen von Ito: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., . v. 17, no. 10, p. 435-439, 3 figs., 4 tables. 3028. 1942e, Lead content of the calcareous sinters: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 17, no. 12, p. 499-501, 1 fig. [English.] 3029. 1942f [Geochemical investigations on the thermal springs of Kusatsu]: Deutsche Gesell. Natur.- u. Volkerkunde Ostasiens Mitt., v. 33, C, p. 1-13 [German] ; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 4793. 3030. 1943 Chemical studies on the hot springs of Yunohanazawa, Hakone: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 64, p. 153-164, 181-190, 222-234, 369-379 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 4255. 3031. 1944a, Strongly radioactive springs discovered in Masutomi: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 19, no. 3, p. 33-83, 30 figs., 39 tables. [English.] 3032. 1944b, Analyse radioactive des sources minerales de Masutomi: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 19, no. 12, p. 213-214. [French.] 3033. Kuroda, Kazuo (Paul Kazuo), 1948, Thorium springs: Onsen Kiko Gakukai Shi (Jour. Balneology and Climatology), v. 14, p. 20 [Japanese] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 245, col. 3306. 3034. Kuroda, Kazuo (Paul Kazuo), and Ikeda, Nagao, 1948, Geochemistry of polythionic acid. I, Distribution of polythionic acid in the hot springs near Hakone volcano: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 69, p. 171-172 [Japanese] ; 1952. Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 1399. 3035. Kuroda, Kazuo, and Nakanishi, Masaki, 1942, On the radon content of the mineral springs of Masutomi: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 17, no. 11, p. 489-490. [English.] 3036. Kuroda, Kazuo; Oana, Shinya; Emoto, Y.; Schwade, G. H.; Gehr, Emmo; and Gehr, Elisabeth, 1942, Uber das Thermalbad Kusatu: Deutsche Gesell. Natur.- u. Volkerkunde Ostasiens Mitt. v. 33, pt. C, 67 p. (Kommisionsverlag von Otto Harassowitz, Leipzig). 3037. Kuroda, Kazuo, and Tagaya, Takeo, 1942, Geochemical studies on boron. II, Boron content of mineral springs in the northeast region of Japan : Inst. Phys. Chem. Research [Tokyo] Bull., v. 21, p. 181-187 [English] ; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 7875. 3038. Kuroda, Kazuo (Paul Kazuo), and Yokoyama, Yuji, 1948a, On the equilibrium of the radioactive elements in the hydrosphere: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 21, no. 7-12, p. 52-63. [English.] 3039. 1948b, Radioactivity of fumarole vapor of the [Iwo-yama] volcano: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 69, p. 77-79 [Japanese] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 9431. 3040. 1948c, Isotopes of radium in strong radioactive springs. II, Precipitation of radium and thorium X; III, Abundance ratio of radium and thorium X and chemical composition: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 69, p. 122-125 [Japanese] ; 1951; Chem. Abs., v. 44, cols. 9268, 9269. 3041. 1948d, The Lauritsen-type K.Y. fontactoscope and its use in geochemistry: Chem. Researches, v. 3, Inorganic Chemistry, p. 29-69 [Japanese, English summary] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 4182.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 357 3042. Kuroda, Kazuo (Paul Kazuo), and Yokoyama, Yuji, 1949, The equilibrium of the radioactive elements in the hydrosphere. Ill, The ratio of thorium emanation to radium emanation in the hydrosphere; IV, The ratio of thorium X to radium in the hydrosphere: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 22, p. 34-45 [English] ; Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 8873. Contains data on the amount of Th and Rn in Masutomi, Ikeda, Misasa, Sekigane, and Arima springs; also data on ThX and Ra in Ikeda and Misasa springs. 3043. Lyman, Benjamin Smith, 1877, Geological survey of Hok- kaido. A general report on the geology of Yesso: Tokei [Tokyo], Japan Public Works Dept., published by the Kaitakushi, 116 p., 2 maps. Contains information on 30 mineral springs, most of which are classified as thermal. 3044. 1878, Geological survey of Japan. Report on the second year’s progress of the survey of the oil lands of Japan: Tokei [Tokyo], Japan Public Works Dept. 67 p. Mentions hot springs of Yonokura, Nuruyu, Arayu, Samusawa, Narigo, Awadzo, Yamashiro, and Yamanaka. 3045. 1879, Geological survey of Japan. Reports of progress for 1878 and 1879: Tokei [Tokyo], Japan Public Works Dept. 266 p. Contains information on 27 thermal-spring localities. 3046. Maeda, Kison, 1936, On a hot spring in Asamusi, Aomori Prefecture: Disin (Earthquake), v. 8, p. 1-12. 3047. Marshall, D. H., 1878, Notes on some of the volcanic moun- tains in Japan: Asiatic Soc. Japan Trans., v. 6, pt. 2, p. 321-345; repr., July 1889. Mentions hot baths at the bases of several volcanoes. 3048. Martin, 1876, Untersuchungen Japanischer Mineralwasser: Deutsche Gesell. Natur.- u. Volkerkunde Ostasiens Mitt., pt. 10, p. 20-26. 3049. Matsui, Takeshi (Matui); Gohara, Yasuma; and Huzita, Kozi, 1950, Prospecting of hot springs in the eastern side of Mount Maeyama, Simabara city, Kyusyu: Research Inst. Nat. Resources [Tokyo], Misc. Rept. 16, p. 47-57, maps [Japanese, English summary] ; 1955 abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19,1954, p. 306. 3050. Matsumara, S., 1915, On Scatella calida Mats, in a hot spring: Gifu (Insect World), v. 19, p. 223-225. [Japanese.] 3051. Matsuura (Matuura), Shinnosuke, 1943, Chemical studies of hot springs in Tyugoku district. 1, Tawarayama hot springs, Yamaguchi Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., v. 64, p. 535-540, 1 fig. [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 3557. 3052. Matsuura (Matuura), Shinnosuke; Fukushima (Huku- sima), Ryuta; and Iwasaki, Iwaji, 1941, Geochemical investigations of hot springs in west Japan. II, Radon content of hot springs in Yamaguchi Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry See., v. 62, p. 1163-857, 3 figs. [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 441, col. 2985. 3053. Matsuura (Matuura), Shinnosuke; Fukushima (Huku- sima), Ryuta; and Murakami, Hisato, 1943, Geochemical investigations of hot springs in west Japan. VI, Radon content of hot springs in Okayama Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 64, p. 854r-857, 3 figs. [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 3365. 3054. Matsuura (Matuura), Shinnosuke; and Hirota, Masayoshi, 1949, Chemical investigation of hot springs in Chugoku districts. II, Springs in the vicinity of Mount Aono in Shimane Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 70, p. 62-63 [Japanese] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 4379. 3055. Matsuura (Matuura), Shinnosuke; Iwasaki, Iwaji; and Fukushima (Hukusima) Ryuta, 1940, Geochemical investigations of hot springs in west Japan. I, The radon content of hot springs in Sambeyama district: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 61, p. 225-230 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 34, col. 4660. 3056. Matsuura (Matuura), Shinnosuke; Murakami, Hisato; and Tada, Chikao, 1943, Geochemical investigations of hot springs in west Japan. VIII, Radon content of hot springs in Hiroshima Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 64, p. 969-971, 1 fig., 1 table [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 3365. 3057. Matsuura (Matuura), Shinnosuke, and Tada, Chikao, 1943, Geochemical investigations of hot springs in west Japan. X, Radon contents of the mineral springs in Ikeda, Shimane Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 64, p. 1411-1416 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 3365. 3058. Matuyama, Motonori, 1936, On the Kinosaki thermal springs, in Hyogo Prefecture: Tikyu (Globe), v. 27, p. 3-14, 79-91. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3059. Matuzawa, Takeo, 1934, On the thermal spring of Arima : Disin (Earthquake), v. 6, p. 119-124. 3060. Mifune, Masaaki, 1963, Chemical composition of Sekigane and Kaike hot springs, Tottori Prefecture: Okayama Univ. Balneol. Lab. Repts., v. 10, p. 10-12, 1 fig., 1 table. [Japanese.] 3061. Milne, John, 1879, A cruise among the volcanoes of the Kurile Islands: Geol. Mag., new ser., dec. 2, v. 6, no. 8, p. 337-348, map. States that volcanoes on Paramushir, Matau, Iturup, and Kunashiri Islands emit steam. 3062. 1880, The Kurile Islands (correspondence) : Geol. Mag., new ser., dee. 2, v. 7, no. 4, p. 191-192. Mentions that steam is emitted from volcanoes on Chirinoi, Simisir, Ushishir, Rashua, Shais Kotan. Kharim Kotan, and One Kotan Islands (in addition to those mentioned in ref. 3061). 3063. 1886, The volcanoes of Japan: Seismog. Soc. Japan Trans, v. 9, pt. 2,184 p., 9 pis., map. Mentions many hot springs in Japan and the Kurile Islands. 3064. Minakami, Takeshi, 1937, The Sengataki thermal spring and underground mineral water at the foot of Volcano Asama : Tokyo Imp. Univ. Earthquake Research Inst. Bull. 15, p. 134-141, 4 figs., 1 table. [English, Japanese summary.] 3065. Minami, Eiichi; Fujimoto, Masatoshi; and Kakihana, Hidetake, 1953, Inorganic and analytical chemistry with ion-exchange resins. VII, Water of hot spring Tamakawa: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 74, p. 740-743 [Japanese] ; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 3598. 3066. Minami, Eiichi; Sato, Gen; and Watanuki, Kunihiko, 1957, Arsenic and lead content of the hot springs of Tamakawa, Akita Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 78, p. 1096-1100 [Japanese] ; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 11323.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 358 3067. Minami, Eiichi; Sato, Gen; and Watanuki, Kunihiko, 1958, Arsenic and lead content of the hot springs of Tamagawa, Akita Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 79, p. 860-865 [Japanese] ; Ohem. Abs., v. 52, col. 18968. 3068. Minato, Hideo, 1957, Distribution of germanium and lithium in Jumanjigoku springs of the spa Beppu: Okayama Daigaku Onsen Kenkyusho Hekuku, v. 18, p. 22-23 [Japanese] ; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 7580. 3069. Misumi, S., 1953, Chemical studies on Jagahara hot spring, Zao-Takayu, Yamagata Prefecture: Yamagata Univ. (Nat. Sci.) Bull., v. 2, p. 207-213 [Japanese] ; 1955, Chem. Abs., v. 49, col. 4207. 3070. Mitsui, Kazuo, 1954, On the poisonous water of Volcano Azuma, Fukushima Prefecture: Research Inst. Nat. Resources [Tokyo] Misc. Rept. 33, p. 1-7, 5 figs. [Japanese, English summary] ; 1957, Chem. Abs., v. 51, col. 641. 3071. Miura, Hikojiro, 1938, Chemical studies on the origin of of Sibukuro spring, Akita Prefecture. I-III: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 59, p. 178-185; 375-384; 597-608, 10 figs., 8 tables [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 52, cols. 3732, 4257, 5543. 3072. 1939, Chemical studies on the origin of Shibukuro spring. IV-VI; Ohem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 60, 257-266, 521-650 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 33, col. 8863. 3037. 1940, Chemical studies on the origin of Shibukuro spring. VII, VIII: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 61, p. 647-656, 761-769 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 34, col. 7800. 3074. 1956, Chemical study on genesis of Shibukuro hot spring. IX: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 77, p. 417-424, 16 figs. 3 tables. [Japanese.] 3075. Miyanaga, Tokuichi; Watanabe, Ryujin; and Sato, Shigeo, 1953, components of hot springs in Fukushima Prefecture. I, Components of Tsuchiyu hot spring; Japanese Jour. Pharmacy and Chemistry, v. 25, p. 734-741 [Japanese] ; 1954, Ohem. Abs., v. 48, col. 4733. 3076. 1954, Components of hot springs in Fukushima Prefecture. V, Hot springs in the south of Nakadori area: Japanase Jour. Pharmacy and Chemistry, v. 26, p. 480-485 [Japanese]; Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 10265. 3077. Miyanaga, Tokuichi; Watanabe, Takato; and Suzuki, Ko, 1954a, Components of hot springs in Fukushima Prefecture. Ill, Components of springs in coastal areas: Japanese Jour., Pharmacy and Chemistry, v. 26, p. 193-201 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 10264. 3078. 1954b, Components of hot springs in Fukushima Prefecture. IV, Funka hot spring on Mount Bandai: Japanese Jour. Pharmacy and Chemistry, v. 26, p. 476-479 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 10265. 3079. Molisch, Hans, 1926, Pflanzenbiologie in Japan auf Grand eigener Beobachtungen: Jena [Germany], G. Fischer, 270 p., 84 figs. 3080. Morimoto, Koyoshi, ed.-in-chief, 1954, Monograph of min- eral springs in Japan: Tokyo, Aoyama Shoten (publisher), Ministry of Welfare, Natl. Parks Div., 785 p. [Japanese.] Contains 1,065 chemical analyses of water from mineral springs. 3081. Murakoshi, Tsukasa, and Hashimoto, Katsumi, eds., 1956, Geology and mineral resources of Japan: Japan Geol. Survey 266 p., map, 32 figs., 43 tables. [English.] Discusses the origin of thermal springs. Includes a map showing the locations of about 250 hot springs. 3082. Mutoo, Satoru, 1954, Geochemical studies of boron. IX, On the mineral springs of high boron content: Ohem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 75, p. 407-410, 1 fig., 5 tables [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 11685. 3083. Nagasawa, Sin, and Arii, Kimio, 1949, Geochemical studies on mineral springs in Tohoku districts. XI, XII, Akiu Spring groups: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 70, p. 216-220 [Japanese] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 3101. 3084. Naito, Katsutoshi, 1952, The mineral springs of Aso vol- cano. IV, Monthly variation of ammonium ion and other components of Uchinomaki spring: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 73, p. 23-26 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 8789. 3085. Nakai, Toshio, 1937, The minor constituents of mineral springs of Japan. I, Radium contents of some mineral springs of Akita, Tiba, Nagano, and Gifu Prefectures; II, Radon and radium contents of the mineral springs of Masutomi and its neighborhood, Yamanashi Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 58, p. 292-296, 638-643 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 31, cols. 4589, 6552. 3086. 1938, The minor constituents of the mineral springs of Japan. Ill, Radium contents of the mineral springs of Arima, Hyogo Prefecture; IV, Radon and radium contents of the mineral springs of Masutomi and its neighborhood, Yamanasi Prefecture; V, The concentration of radium from the water of mineral springs: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 59, p. 1179-1192, 3 figs., 8 tables [Japanese] ; 1939, Chem. Abs., v. 33, col. 920. 3087. 1940, Radium content of mineral springs in Japan: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 15, no. 9, suppl., p. 333-426 (also paged 1-94), 26 figs., map, 32 tables. [English.] 3088. Nakamura, Hisayoshi, 1959, The regional properties of hot springs in Japan. II, Hot springs other than those of Quaternary volcanic areas: Chigaku Zasshi, v. 68, p. 47-67 [Japanese, English summary] ; Chem. Abs., v. 53, col. 22628. 3089. Nakamura, Hisayoshi, and Ando, Takeshi, 1954a, On the relation between altered zones and fumaroles and hot springs in the Otake thermal region, Oita Prefecture: Geol. Survey Japan Bull., v. 5, no. 8, p. 373-380, 4 figs. [Japanese, English summary.] 3090. 1954b, On the Goshogake geothermal region in Akita Prefecture: Geol. Survey Japan Bull., v. 5, no. 9, p. 443-448, 3 figs., 1 table. [Japanese, English summary.] 3091. Nakamura, H., 1953, Geology and hot springs at the Hirao district, Nagano Prefecture: Geol. Survey Japan Bull., v. 4, p. 147-156; 1954, Chem, Abs., v. 48, col. 5754. 3092. Nakamura, Saemontaro, 1926, On the distribution of radio- active mineral springs in Japan: Pan-Pacific [Pacific] Sci. Cong., 3d, Tokyo, Proc., v. 1, p. 814-817, 1 fig. 3093. Nakanishi, Masaki, 1947, Hot springs of Ito. I, II, Effect of tide and the underground structure: Onsen Kiko Gakukai Shi (Jour. Balneology and Climatology), v. 13, p. 25, 81 [Japanese],; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 3208. 3094. Namba (Nanba), Munetoshi, and Murota, T., 1952, Some studies on volcano Aso and Kujiu (pt. 3) ; On the shape of old Aso crater and the distribution of the centralBIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 359 cones and hot springs: Kumamoto Jour. Sci., v. 1, no. 1, p. 66-73. 3095. Nishimura, Masakichi, 1945, Chemical investigation of hot springs. XII, Usubetsu, Koganeyu, and Jozankei hot springs in Hokkaido: Chem. Soe. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 66, p. 4-6 [Japanese] ; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 7611. 3096. 1951, Chemical investigations of hot springs. XIV: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 72, p. 61-64 [Japanese] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 3684. 3097. 1952, Chemical investigation of hot springs in Japan. XXIV, Statistical study on the contents of iron and manganese in mineral springs in Japan: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 73, p. 749-753 [Japanese] ; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 5049. 3098. 1955, Chemical investigations of hot springs in Japan. XXVIII, Statistical study of contents of several major constituents of mineral springs in Japan: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 76, no. 4, p. 349-353, 15 figs., 7 tables [Japanese] ; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 4431. 3099. 1958, Chemical investigations of hot springs in Japan. XXXVII, XXXVIII, Spectrographic studies on minor metallic constituents in hot spring waters of Hokkaido: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 79, p. 172-187 [Japanese]; Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 14037. 3100. Noguchi, Kimio, 1935, Geochemical investigations of vol- canoes in Japan. I, Studies on the gases and spring waters of volcano Asama : Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 56, p. 1495-1510, 9 tigs., 5 tables [Japanese] ; 1936, Chem. Abs., v. 30, col. 1704. 3101. 1936, Geochemical investigations of volcanoes in Japan. IV, The gases and the spring waters of the volcano Asama: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 57, p. 920-928,10 figs. [Japanese.] 3102. 1938, Geochemical investigations of volcanoes in Japan. XI, XII, The gases and the spring waters of the volcano Asama: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 59, p. 521-543, 902-908, 24 figs., 10 tables [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 32, cols. 5738, 7376. 3103. 1939, Geochemical investigations of volcanoes in Japan. XVII, Investigation of the radon contents of the spring waters in the vicinity of the volcano Asama : Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 60, p. 7-17, 13 figs. [Japanese]; Chem. Abs., v. 33, col. 3256. 3104. 1940, Geochemical investigations of volcanoes in Japan. XXII, Studies on gases and the spring waters of volcano Asama. V.: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 61, p. 432-446 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 34, col. 5798. 3105. 1941, Geochemical investigations of geysers in Japan. II, The geysers at Naruko, Miyagi Prefecture. 2, 3: Chem. Soe. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 62, p. 718-729. [Japanese.] 3106. 1953, Geochemical investigation of geysers in Japan [abs.] : Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Quezon City, Philippines, 1953, Abstract of Papers, p. 7-8. 3107. 1956, Geochemical investigation of geysers in Japan: Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Quezon City, Philippines, 1953, Proc., v. 2, p. 228-240,11 figs., 3 tables. 3108. Noguchi, Kimio, and Fukushima, Ryuta (Hukusima, Ri- juta), 1940, Geochemical investigations of geysers in Japan. I, Studies on the geysers at Naruko, Miyagi Pre- fecture. 1.: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 61, no. 7, p. 677-682, 4 figs. [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 34, col. 7799. 3109. Nomitu, Takaharu; Ikeda, Ryoziro; and Seno, Kinzo, 1938, Rainfall as a source of the Beppu thermal springs: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 2, p. 97-126. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3110. Nomitu, Takaharu, and Seno, Kinzo, 1939, The Beppu hot springs and the tide, with the effect of the atmospheric pressure: Kyoto Imp. Univ., Coll. Sci. Mem., ser. A, v. 22, no. 6, p. 403-428, 12 figs. [English] ; 1950, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 14, 1949, p. 189. 3111. 1940, Rainfall and juvenile water as the feeding origins of the hot springs in Beppu : Kyoto Imp. Univ., Coll. Sci. Mem., ser. A, v. 23, no. 3, p. 41-74, 9 figs. [English] ; 1950, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 14,1949, p. 189. 3112. Nomitu, Takaharu; Seno Kinzo; and Nokanome, Hiroysau, 1938, The tidal effect upon the Beppu thermal springs: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 2, p. 1-23. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3113. Nomitu, Takaharu; Seno, Kinzo; and Yamasita, Kaoru, 1938, The correlation between the flow and its head in the Beppu thermal springs: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 2, p. 269-279. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3114. 1940, The correlation between the rate of discharge and the pressure head in the Beppu hot springs. 1, The stratified type: Kyoto Imp. Univ., Coll. Sci. Mem., ser. A, v. 23, no. 3, p. 75-95, 7 figs. [English]; 1950, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 14,1949, p. 189. 3115. Nomitu, Takaharu, and Yamasita, Kaoru, 1938, On the distribution of underground temperatures in Old Beppu City : Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 2, p. 233-259. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3116. 1940, Distribution of the subterranean temperature and the hot spring veins in the old city of Beppu: Kyoto Imp. Univ., Coll. Sci. Mem., ser. A, v. 23, no. 3, p. 97-122, 6 figs. [English] ; 1950, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 14, 1949, p. 189. 3117. Nomura, Yukichi, 1954, Studies on geysers at Onikobe: Tohoku Univ., Tech. Rept., v. 19, no. 1, p. 45-62, illus.; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20,1955, p. 392. 3118. Oana, Shinya, 1939a, Geochemische Untersuchungen der Vulkane in Japan. XVIII, Dichtemessungen des durch Kondensation von Fumarolendampf erhaltenen Was-sers: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 14, no. 6, p. 279-283, 3 figs., 1 table; Chem. Abs., v. 33, col. 8536. 3119. 1939b, Geochemical investigations of volcanoes in Japan. XX, The influence of rain water on the density of the water from a fumarole; XXI, Density of mineral waters in the vicinity of Komagatake, Akita Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 60, p. 1005-1009 [Japanese] ; 1940, Chem. Abs., v. 34, col. 1596. 3120. 1942 [Heavy water in the thermal water of Kusatsu] : Deutsche Gesell. Natur.- u. Volkerkunde Ostasiens Mitt., v. 33, pt. C, p. 15-19 [German] ; 1949, Chem. Abs. v. 43, col. 2862. 735-914 0—65-----24THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 360 3121. Oana, Shinya, and Kuroda, Kazuo, 1940, Geochemische Untersuchungen der Vulkane in Japan. XXIV, Radongehalt von Mineralwasser in Masutomi: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 15, no. 12, p. 485-486, 1 table. 3122. 1942, Geochemische Untersuchungen der Vulkane in Japan. XXVIII, Geochemische Untersuchungen an den Mineralquellen von Masutomi. II.: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 17, no. 9, p. 397-416, 9 figs., 14 tables. 3123. 1943 [The radium spa Musutomi and springs alien to their environment. Ill, Significance and determination of the trace elements]: Deutsche Gesell. Natur.-Vol-kerkunde Ostasiens Mitt., v. 33, E, p. 6-14 [German] ; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 5889. 3124. Ogawa, Takuji, and Homma, Fujio, 1926, Guidebook for the geological excursion to the Unzen volcanoes: Pan-Pacific [Pacific] Sci. Cong., 3d, Tokyo, Guidebook, Excursion E-l, 3,4. 35 p, 14 figs. Contains information on the Obama and Unzen hot springs. 3125. Ogura, Tsutomu, 1922, Explanatory text of the geological map of Japan : Imp. Geol. Survey Japan, Kogushi sheet, 2 p, map. [Japanese, English summary.] Mentions Kawatana salt spring. 3126. Ohara, Eiichi; Yamamoto, Daisei; and Shozo, Tanaka, 1954, Geochemical studies on volcano Aso. I.: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 75, p. 349-352 [Japanese]; Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 11997. 3127. Ohashi, Ryoichi, 1920, Note on the plumbiferous barytes from Shibukuro, Prefecture of Akita, Japan: Min-eralog. Mag. [London], v. 19, p. 73-76. 3128. Oinouye, Yoshitika, 1931, The distribution of principal mineral springs in Japan: Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 43, p. 559-562. [Japanese.] 3129. Oinouye, Yoshitika, and Kobayashi, Giichiro, 1926, Geo- logical guide to the Hakone district: Pan-Pacific [Pacific] Sci. Cong., 3d, Tokyo; Guidebook, Excursion B-2, p. 42-50, 3 pis. Contains data on 12 hot-spring spas. 3130. Okabe, Kenzo, 1941, Catalytic activity of mineral water: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 62, p. 537-543 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 35, col. 7810. 3131. 1942, Catalytic activities of mineral waters. V-X: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 63, p. 27-30, 793-796, 1025-1032, 1144^1146 [Japanese]; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, cols. 3555, 3556. Contains data on Bansyoji spring (Yamagata Prefecture), Kadogawa hot spring (Kanagawa Prefecture), and Shigehara hot spring (Chiba Prefecture). 3132. 1943, Catalytic activities of mineral waters. XI, XII: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 64, p. 1351-1352, 1450-1452 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 3557. Contains data on Kadogawa hot spring (Kanagawa Prefecture) and Ikado hot spring (Gumma Prefecture). 3133. Okuno, Hisateru, 1939, Chemical investigations of hot springs in Japan. II, Hot springs of Noboribetsu. 2.: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 60, p. 685-691, 2 figs. [Japanese] ; 1940, Chem. Abs., v. 34, col. 201. 3134. 1941a, Chemical investigations of hot springs. Ill, IV. Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry See., v. 62, p. 234r-243 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 35, col. 4885. Contains data on fluorine in water from the hot springs of Hokkaido. 3135. Okuno, Hisateru 1941b, Chemical investigations of hot springs in Japan. VI-VIII: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 62, p. 1151-1162 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, cols. 3235, 5655. Contains information on the Toyako hot spring. 3136. 1942a, Chemical investigations of hot springs. IX, A new colorimetric method for the determination of fluorine; X, Fluorine content of hot springs and fresh water: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 63, p. 23-26, 871-877 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 3235. 3137. 1942b, Eluorine in mineral springs: Hokkaido Imp. Univ., Fac. Sci. Jour., ser. 3, Chemistry, v. 3, no. 3, p. 95-171 [Japanese]; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 9303. 3138. Okuno, Hisateru; Ikariyama, Noboru; and Uzumasa, Yasumitsu, 1938, Chemical investigations of hot springs in Japan. I, Hot springs Noboribetsu: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 59, p. 853-859, 2 figs. [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 32, col. 7171. 3139. Oshima, Yoshio; Mifune, Masaaki; Yamada, Naohorn; and Ueyama, Akito, 1956, Analysis of Misasa hot springs, Tottori Prefecture, Japan: Okayama Daigaku Onsen Kenkyusho Hokuku, v. 16, p. 1-18 [Japanese] ; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 7579. 3140. Oshima, Yoshio; Yamada, Naohorn; and Mifune, Masaaki, 1954, Radon content of hot springs in Tottori Prefecture, Japan: Oakyama Daigaku Onsen Kenkyusho Hokuku, v. 14, p. 1-14 [Japanese]; 1958, Chem. Abs. v. 52, col. 9487. 3141. Otuka, Yanosuke, 1943, Geologic consideration of the ab- normal temperature distribution in the hot springs of Atami, Shizuoka Prefecture, Japan: Tokyo Imp. Univ. Earthquake Research Inst. Bull., v. 21, pt. 3-4, p. 414-434, 7 figs. [Japanese, English summary.] 3142. Owa, Eijiro, 1956, Report on the geology and some hot springs of Iiyama city, Nagano Prefecture: Japan Geol. Survey Bull., v. 7, no. 9, p. 413-416, 3 figs., 1 table [Japanese, English abstract.] 3143. Pumpelly, Raphael, 1870, Across America and Asia. Notes of a five years’ journey around the world and of residence in Arizona, Japan, and China: New York, Leypoldt & Holt, 454 p., 25 illus., 4 maps. Mentions warm springs in valley of Ousubetz Creek in Hokkaido and at Yurrup. 3144. Sato, Denzo, 1912, Sinter from the geyser of Obama, Japan : Beitrage Mineralogie von Japan, no 4, p. 138-141 [German] ; 1913, Chem. Sci. Jour., v. 104, pt. 2, p. 66. 3145. Sato, Mitsuo, 1955, The existence of radium B, radium C, and thorium B in the Misasa hot spring [Japan] : Okayama Univ. Balneol. Lab. Repts., v. 13, p. 5-8 [Japanese]; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 2096. 3146. Seno, Kinso, 1938a, The distribution of the coefficients of the tidal effect upon the flow of the Beppu thermal springs: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 2, p. 24-32. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3147. 1938b, The distribution of the affecting coefficients of rainfall upon the Beppu thermal springs: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 2, p. 152-177. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3148. 1938c, The distribution of the pressure heads of the Beppu mineral springs: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 2; p. 280-290. [Japanese, English abstract.]BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 3149. Seno, Kinso, 1938d, On the yearly variation of the electric conductivity of some thermal springs of Beppu: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 2, p. 359-368. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3150. 1940, Distribution of certain geophysical elements in the hot springs district of Beppu: Japanese Jour. Astronomy and Geophysics, v. 17, no. 2, p. 265-294, 21 figs., 21 tables. [English.] 3151. Seno, Kinso, and Nisida, Hisao, 1938, The distribution of temperature in the pipes of some thermal springs of Beppu: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 2, p. 32-40. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3152. Seno, Kinso, and Oya, Kunio, 1954, Notes on chemical ele- ments of hot springs: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 9, no. 2, p. 149-153, 4 figs. [Japanese, English title.] 3153. Seno, Kinso, and Yamasita, Kaoru, 1938, The rapid effect of rainfall upon two thermal springs of Beppu: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 2, p. 132-151. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3154. Seno, Kinso, and Yamasita (Yamashita), Kozaburo, 1949, The mutual interaction of discharges of hot springs in Beppu: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 8, p. 1-27 [Japanese] ; 1956, Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Proc., v. 2, p. 43. 3155. Shibata, Yuji; Noguchi, Kimio; and Kaneko, Osamu, 1937, Geochemical investigations of volcanoes in Japan. IX, investigations of the concentration of DsO in the spring waters in the vicinity of volcano Asama: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 58, p. 1013-1024 [Japanese] : 1938, Chem. Abs., v. 32, col. 462. 3156. 1939, Geochemische Untersuchungen der Vulkane in Japan. IX, Bestimmung des Schwerwassergehaltes von den in der Nahe des Vulkans Asama befindlichen Quell-wasser: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 14, no. 6, p. 274-279, 7 figs., 1 table. 3157. Shiga, Shiko, 1959, Distribution of copper, zinc, manga- nese, and titanium in hot springs of Oita Prefecture; Oita Daigaku Gakugei-gakubu Kenkyu Kiyo, Shizen Kagaku, no 8, p. 12-18 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 53, col. 20633. 3158. Shima, Makoto, and Shimazu, Hiroshi, 1958, Relation be- tween specific gravity of hot-spring water and its evaporation residue. II: Rikagaku Kenkyusho Hokoku, v. 34, p. 89-92 [Japanese] ; 1959, Chem. Abs., v. 53, col. 13459. 3159. Shimokata, K6z6, 1942, Thorium content of mineral springs in Japan: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 63, p. 1109-1113 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 3364. 3160. 1949, Thorium contents of mineral springs in Japan: Nagoya Inst. Technology Bull. 1, p. 159-164 [English] ; 1950, Chem. Abs. v. 44, col. 9088. 3161. 1952, Geochemical study of mineral springs in Central Japan. I, Thoron and radon content of mineral springs in Tono district in Gifu Prefecture: Nagoya Inst. Technology Bull. (Anniversary issue), v. 4, p. 367-373 [English] ; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 2534. 3162. 1956a, Contents of elements of thorium series in mineral springs of Japan. II, On mineral springs in Arima ; III, On mineral springs in Yamanashi Prefecture; IV, On sediments of mineral springs in Yakendo and Masu-tomi; V, On mineral springs in Hokkaido; VI, On mineral springs in the northeastern provinces; VII, On mineral springs in Kanto and Chubu Provinces: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku 361 Zasshi), v. 77, p. 4-12, 558-565, 685-691, 17 figs., 14 tables. [Japanese.] 3163. Shimokata, Kozo, 1956b, Radioactivity of mineral springs in the central part of Japan. Ill, IV, Thoron and radon content of mineral springs mainly in T6nd District in Gifu Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 77, p. 403—110, 5 figs., 3 tables. [Japanese.] 3164. 1956c, Content of radioactive elements in the thorium series in mineral springs of Japan. VIII, Mineral springs in Chugoku and Shikoku Prefectures; IX, Mineral springs in Kyushu: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 77, p. 848-858, 4 figs., 5 tables, 4 maps; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 1517. 3165. Shinomiya, Chiro; Kokubu, Nobuhide; Namba (Nanba), Munetoshi; and Naito, Katsutoshi, 1951, The hot springs in Aso volcano: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 72, p. 846-848 [Japanese] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 6559. 3166. Shinomiya, Chiro, and Naito, Katsutochi, 1951, The hot springs of Aso volcano: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 72, p. 1012-1015 [Japanese] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 8295. 3167. Sonobe, Ryuichi, 1939, Explanatory text of the geological map of Japan : Japan Imp. Geol. Survey, Daishoji sheet. [Japanese text, English summary.] Contains data on Yamashiro, Katayamazu, Awazu, Seryo thermal springs. 3168. Subterranean Heat Research Group, 1955 [Studies of sub- terranean heat] : Japan Geol. Survey Bull., v. 6, no. 10, p. 551-626, 86 figs., 26 tables, 17 views. [Japanese, English summaries.] A series of five papers on studies of subterranean heat and its possible development in the Oita, Kagoshima, Nagasaki, and Miyazaki Prefectures. 3169. Suganuma, Ichizo, 1928, On the constituents and genesis of a few minerals produced from hot springs and their vicinities in Japan: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 3, p. 69-76, 87-89, 3 tables. [English.] Consists of the following papers: I, The Akita hokut-olite; II, Composition and genesis of soluble sulfates produced in the environments of a sulfurous spring [near Beppu, Oita Prefecture] ; and III, Calcium carbonate minerals deposited from effervescent springs. 3170. Suganuma, Ichizo, and Kitaoka, K., 1935, On the presence of inert gases in some mineral spring gases in Japan: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 10, p. 289-296, 2 figs. [English.] 3171. Sugawara, Ken [1952?] National report on hydrology— Japan: Assoc. Internat. Proc., Hydrologie Sci., Assemble gen., Bruxelles 1951, Proc., v. 1, p. 45-57; 1954, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 18,1953, p. 401. 3172. Sugihara, Takeshi, 1951, Chemical studies of hot springs in the Sanyo district: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 72, p. 1019-1022 [Japanese] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 8295. 3173. 1953a, The distribution of the nitrate content in Misasa hot springs; Tottori Prefecture: Okayama Univ. Balneol. Lab. Repts., v. 9, p. 32-35 [Japanese] ; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 2095.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 362 3174. Sugihara, Takeshi, 1953b, The aging of mineral waters. I, Changes in the radon content of thermal waters of Misasa after flowing out; II, Changes in the silicate content; III, Variation of silicate in mineral waters: Okayama Univ. Balneol. Lab. Repts., v. 11, p. 1-18; v. 12, p. 6-10; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 2897. 3175. Suzuki, Masatutu, 1936, The geology and lines of the ther- mal springs in Beppu and vicinity: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 1, p. 6-19. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3176. Tagaya, Takeo, 1942, Geochemical studies on boron. I, Boron content of mineral springs in Japan: Inst. Phys. Chem. Research [Tokyo] Bull., v. 21, p. 165-180 [English] ; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 7875. 3177. Tagaya, Takeo, and Asari, Tamuja, 1942, Geochemical studies on boron. Ill, Boron content of mineral springs in the Hatimandai region, Akita Prefecture: Inst. Phys. Chem. Research [Tokyo] Bull., v. 21, p. 188-189 [English] ; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 7876. 3178. Tanaka, Ken-iti, 1938, The origin of hot springs with chemical constituents: Onsen (Hot Springs), v. 9, p. 12-18. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3179. Tanaka, Motoharu, 1951, Manganese content of natural waters. Ill, The manganese content of Hakone hot springs: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 72, p. 211-214 [Japanese] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 1190. 3180. Tanaka, Nobuyuki, 1943a, Studies on nickel and cobalt in mineral springs. I, Nickel content of acid vitriol springs in Japan: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 18, no. 5, p. 201-210, 3 figs., 8 tables. [English.] Contains data on Yoemonyu thermal springs in Yuno-hanazawa Prefecture. 1943b, Studies on nickel and cobalt in mineral springs. II, Nickel and cobalt contents of Tentoku mineral spring, Saga Prefecture: Chem. Soc. Japan Bull., v. 18, no. 10, p. 365-368. [English.] 3181. Terada, Torahiko, and Miyabe, Naomi, 1934, Hot springs and deformation of earth’s crust: Imp. Acad. Japan Proc., v. 10, p. 410-413, 2 figs. [English.] 3182. 1935a, Hot springs and deformation of earth’s crust: Imp. Acad. Japan Proc., v. 11, p. 99-101. [Japanese.] 3183. 1935b, Geographical distribution of hot and mineral springs and deformation of the earth’s crust: Tokyo Imp. Univ. Earthquake Research Inst. Bull., v. 13, pt. 3, p. 576-586. [Japanese, English summary.] 3184. Titani, Yosinosuke, 1928, Hot springs in Japanese oil fields: Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 40, p. 626-636, 698-708. [Japanese.] 3185. 1929, Hot springs in Japanese oil fields, continued: Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 41, p. 46-53, 141-147. [Japanese.] 3186. Tsuboi, Chuji, 1932, On the geyser of Noboribetsu: Kwagaku (Science), or Kagaku tisiki (Scientific knowledge), Tokyo, v. 2, p. 318. [Japanese.] 3187. Tsubota, Hiroyuki, and Kitano, Yasushi, 1956, Colors of CaCOs deposits from hot springs: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 77, p. 901-905, 3 figs. [Japanese.] 3188. Tsujimura, Taro, and Kiuti, Nabuzo, 1937, The relation between the distribution of hot springs and the volcanoes: Kwagaku (Kagaku tisiki), Tokyo, v. 7, p. 590-591. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3189. Umemoto, Shunji, 1952a, Geochemical studies of the Mi- sasa hot springs, I-IV: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 73, p. 756-758, 798-802, 859-861 [Japanese] ; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 5852. 3190. Umemoto, Shunji, 1952b, The phosphorus content in Misasa spa : Okayama Univ., Balneol. Lab. Repts., v. 6, p. 1-3 [English] ; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, cols. 2093, 2095. 3191. 1952c, Radon content of Misasa hot springs, Japan: Okayama Univ., Balneol. Lab. Repts., v. 7, p. 6-7; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, cols. 2093, 2095. 3192. 1952d, The effects of pumping suction of hot springs: Okayama Univ., Balneol. Lab. Repts., v. 7, p. 8-11; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, cols. 2093, 2095. 3193. 1953a, Geochemical studies on Misasa hot springs, V: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 74, p. 94-96 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 8293. 3194. 1953b, The chloride and sulfate content of well waters and the amounts of chloride and sulfate fixed to the soil in mineral-spring districts: Okayama Univ., Balneol. Lab. Repts., v. 9, p. 1-27; v. 10, p. 1-2; v. 12, p. 1-5 and 15; v. 15, p. 6-10. A series of papers on hot springs of the following groups: I, Misasa (Tottori Prefecture) ; II, Sekigane (Tottori) ; III, Shigaku and Yugakai (Shimane) ; IV, Tamatsukuri (Shimane) ; V, Hamamura and Kachimi (Tottori) ; VI, Near Kitadani village (Tottori) ; VII, Chemical prospecting of mineral springs; VIII, Matsu-zaki, Togo, and Asozu (Tottori), (with Kimura, Ken-jiro) ; IX, Saginoyu (Shimane), (with Tanaka, Shigio) ; X, Matsuzaki, Togo, Asozu, Hamamura, and Kachimi (Tottori). 3195. 1954a, Geochemical studies on Misasa hot springs [Tottori Prefecture], VI-VIII: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 75, p. 352-361, 12 tables [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 11685. 3196. 1954b, Radioactive elements in the hot springs in the Tottori Prefecture, Japan: Radioisotopes (Japan), v. 3, no. 1, p. 7-8 [English] ; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 15996. 3197. Umemoto, Shunji; Harada, Mitsuru; Okabe, Shigeru; Miyakoshi, Junichiro; Sakanone, Masanobu; and Tanaka, Masaya, 1958, Togo Matuzaki hot springs, Tottori Prefecture: Okayama Daigaku Onsen Kenkyusho Ho-koku, v. 23, p. 1-22 [Japanese] ; 1959, Chem. Abs., v. 53, col. 17377. 3198. Uzumasa, Yasumitsu, and Akaiwa, Hideo, 1958a, Chemi- ical investigations of hot springs in Japan. XXXIX, Fluctuations of minor constituents of hot spring waters of Noboribetsu, Hokkaido: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 79, p. 654-658 [Japanese] ; Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 18968. 3199. 1958b, Chemical investigations of hot springs in Japan. XL, Fluctuation of minor constituents of hot spring waters of Jozankei, Hokkaido: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 79, p. 1021-1024 [Japanese] ; 1959, Chem. Abs., v. 53, col. 1599. 3200. Uzumasa, Yasumitsu, and Kitano, Yasushi, 1952, Chemi- cal investigation of hot springs in Japan. XVI, XVII, The change of Futamata hot spring water: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 73, p. 689-693, 720-724 [Japanese] ; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 5049. 3201. 1953, Chemical investigation of hot springs in Japan. XVIII, The change of Futamata spring waters: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 74, p. 333-336 [Japanese]; Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 10153.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 363 3202. Uzumasa, Yasumitsu, and Mayumi, Hirotoshi, 1945, Chem- ical investigation of hot springs. XIII, Dithizone method of determination of heavy metals in spring water in the presence of hydrogen sulfide: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 66, p. 6-7 [Japanese]; 1949, Chem. Abs., v. 43, col. 7611. 3203. Uzumasa, Yasumitsu, and Morozumi, Masayo, 1955, Chem- ical investigations of hot springs in Japan. XXXII- XXXIV, Noboribetsu hot springs in Hokkaido: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 76, no. 8, p. 844r-855, 6 figs., 11 tables [Japanese] ; 1957, Chem. Abs., v. 51, coll. 9980. 3204. 1956, Chemical investigations of hot springs in Japan. XXXV, Noboribetsu hot springs in Hokkaido; Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 77, p. 267-270, 7 tables. [Japanese.] 3205. Uzumasa, Yasumitsu, and Nishimura, Masakichi, 1941, Chemical investigations of hot springs in Japan. V, Hot spring Jozankei: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 62, p. 713-717. [Japanese.] 3206. 1943, Chemical investigations of hot springs in Japan. XI, Hot springs in Jozankei, Hokkaido 2: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 64, p. 817 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 3557. 3207. Watanabe, Takeo, 1940, Eruptions of molten sulphur from the Siretoko-Iosan volcano, Hokkaido, Japan: Japanese Jour. Geology and Geography Trans, and Abs., v. 17, nos. p. 289-310,12 figs. [ English. ] 3208. Watanabe, Wataru, 1909, The tufa cones formed at the Kuriyama hot spring in the Province of Shimozuke: Mining Inst. Japan Jour., v. 25, no. 194, p. 865-866 [English] ; repr. in Ishizu, Risaku, The mineral springs of Japan, pt. 1, p. 40-41,1915. 3209. Yagi, Teisuke, 1932, The Yamanouti hot springs in Na- gano Prefecture: Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 44, p. 126-132, 185-197, 277-284. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3210. Yamagata, Noboru, 1951, Geochemical studies on rare alkalies. III-V: Chem. Soc. Japan Jbur., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 72, p. 154-161, 247-249 [Japanese] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, cols. 1190, 3683. 3211. Yamagisi, Tadao, 1931, Geographical studies of the dis- trict around the Toi hot springs: Geog. Rev. [Nanking], v. 7, p. 105-112. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3212. 1932, Geographical studies of the district around the Kawazu hot spring in the Idu [Izu] Peninsula: Geog. Rev. [Nanking], v. 8, p. 48-58. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3213. 1933, A study on the hot spring zone at the foot of Mount Amagi: Geog. Rev. [Nanking], v. 9, p. 747-754. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3214. 1936, On the distribution of some thermal springs along the River Kawazu, in the Idu [Izu] Peninsula: Geol. Soc. Japan Jour., v. 43, p. 383-384. [Japanese.] 3215. 1952, Some relations between hot springs and geological structures on the Abukuma highlands: Chiba Univ. Coll. Arts and Sci. Jour., v. 1, no. 1, p. 50-58, illus. [English] ; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20,1955, p. 593. 3216. 1953, A supplementary table for the study on “Some relations between hot springs and geologic structures”: Chiba Univ. Coll. Arts and Sci. Jour., v. 1, no. 2, p. 101-103 [English] : 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20, 1955, p. 593. 3217. Yamasita, Ituziro; Kida, Takasi; and Maruta, Yorimi, 1936, The geographical distribution of the Chlor-amount in the Beppu thermal springs: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics), v. 1, p. 89-93. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3218. Yoda, Wasiro, 1937, On the temperature distribution of the hot spring zone at Yufuin: Tikyubuturi (Geophysics) v. 1, p. 285-305. [Japanese, English abstract.] 3219. Yokota, Hohati, and Yamaguti, Yaitiro, 1937, An investi- gation of the hot spring of Geki in Iwate Prefecture: Tirigatu (Geography), v. 5, p. 2106-2113. [Japanese.] 3220. Yokoyama, Matajiro, 1927, Cessation of activity of the Atami Geyser: Jour. Geography [Tokyo], v. 39, p. 497-500. [Japanese.] 3221. Yokoyama, Yuji, 1949, Equilibrium between radon and its decay products in strongly radioactive springs [Misasa and Ikeda] : Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 70, p. 399-402 [Japanese] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 3102. 3222. 1955, Radioactive springs in Japan. I, New method for determination of mesothorium I in mineral waters; II, New method for determination of actinium X in mineral waters; III, Isotopes of radium in mineral waters: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec., v. 76, p. 551-562, 8 figs., 8 tables [Japanese] ; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 11569. 3223. 1956, Radioactive springs in Japan. IV: Chem. Soc. Japan Jour., Pure Chemistry Sec. (Nippon Kagaku Zasshi), v. 77, p. 370-375 [Japanese] ; 1957, Chem. Abs., v. 51, col. 15842. 3224. Yoshimura, Shinkichi, 1933, [Kata-numa, a very strong acid-water on volcano Katanuma, Miyagi Prefecture, Japan] : Archiv Hydrobiologie, v. 26, p. 197-202. [German.] 3225. Compiler, 1936, Abstracts of papers on scientific hydrology for the year 1935; Japanese Jour. Astronomy and Geophysics Trans, and Abs., v. 13, no. 3, p. 52-60. See also references 74, 109, and 3346. KOREA (CHOSEN) 3226. Iimori, Satayasu; Yoshimura, Jun; and Hata, Shin, 1934, Radon content of mineral springs of Korea: Inst. Phys. Chem. Research [Tokyo] Bull., v. 13, no. 11, p. 1363-1372,1 fig. [Japanese.] 3227. Iwase, Eiichi, and Saito, Nobufusa, 1942a, Carbonic acid springs of Shoseiri village in Chuseihoku Prefecture (Korea) : Inst. Phys. Chem. Research [Tokyo] Bull., v. 21, p. 763-766 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 5655. 3228. 1942b, Hot springs of Onseiri village in outer Kongo district (Korea) : Inst. Phys. Chem. Research [Tokyo], p. 767-773 [Japanese] ; 1947, Chem. Abs., v. 41, col. 5655. 3229. Kawasaki, Sigetaro, and Kongo, Yosyoe, 1928, On the hot spring of Bazan, Tyosen [Chosen] : Geol. Survey Tyosen (Korea) Rept., p. 51-55. [Japanese.] 3230. Kinosaki, Yosio, 1930, On the hot springs of Kongozen, Tyosen [Chosen] : Geol. Survey Tyosen (Korea) Rept., p. 117-119. [Japanese.] 3231. Komada, Ikuo, 1923, The thermal spring of Torai: Chosen (Korea) Geol. Survey Bull., v. 2, 42 p., 21 pis., map. [English, Japanese.]THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 364 3232. Komada, Ikuo, 1925, Thermal springs of Kaiundai, Jujo, Onyo, Shinsen, Angaku, and Ryuko: Chosen (Korea) Geol. Survey Bull., v. 3, p. 1-49, 30 pis., maps. [English, Japanese.] 3233. 1926, Thermal springs of Onseiri, Shuotsu, Lower Shu-otsu, and Heisan, and cold carbondioxidated spring of Shoseiri: Chosen (Korea) Geol. Survey Bull., v. 7, p. 1-38. [English, Japanese.] 3234. Koto, B., 1909, Journeys through Korea: Tokyo Imp. Univ., Coll. Sci. Jour., v. 26, art. 2, 207 p., 36 pis. [English.] Describes Tong-nai hot spring. 3235. Tateisi, Iwao, 1928a, On the hot spring of Onyo, Tyosen [Chosen] : Tyosen (Korea) Geol. Survey Rept., p. 3-20. [Japanese] 3236. 1928b, On the hot spring of Onsei, Tyosen [Chosen] : Tyosen (Korea) Geol. Survey Rept., p. 23-38. [Japanese.] 3237. 1928c, On the hot spring of Suianpo, Tyosen [Chosen] : Tyosen (Korea) Geol. Survey Rept., p. 41-50. [Japanese.] See also references 2937,2939, 2942, and 2997. LEBANON AND SYRIA 3238. Carle, G., 1923, De l’alimentation en eau de Palmyre dans les temps actuels et anciens: Geographic [Paris], v. 40, no. 2, p. 153-160,1 pi., 3 figs. 3239. Dubertret, L., 1933, L’hydrologie de la Syria: Rev. gdo- graphie phys., et geologie dynamique, v. 6, no. 4. p. 347-452. 3240. Dupre la Tour, Francois, 1949, La radioactivity de quel- ques sources au Liban et en Syria: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 229, no. 15, p. 712-713. 3241. Mazloum, Soubhi, 1940, Contribution a l’etude des eaux souterraines de la Syrie Nord: Union Geophysique In-ternat.; Assoc. Hydrologie Sci., Washington, 7th, Assemble gen., 1939, Compte rendu, v. 2, Rept. of Inv. 17, 14 p. See also reference 1737. MALAYA (FEDERATED MALAY STATES; FEDERATION OF MALAYA) 3242. Bott, W., 1892, The thermal springs of Selangor and Ma- lacca: Royal Asiatic Soc., Straits Br. Jour., no. 24, p. 43-62, 1 fig. 3243. Cameron, John, 1865, Our tropical possessions in Malayan India—being a descriptive account of Singapore, Penang, Province Wellesley, and Malacca; their peoples, products, commerce, and government: London, Smith, Elder & Co., 408 p., front., 6 pis. Describes the hot springs of Ayer Panas. 3244. Jones, W. R., 1914, On the supposed case of tin in statu nascenti in the Malay Peninsula: Geol. Mag., dec. 6, v. 1, p. 537-541. Mentions several hot springs. 3245. Meunier, Stanislas, 1890, Examen chimlque d’eaux minO- rales provenant de Malaisie; mineral d’etain de formation actuelle: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 110, p. 1083-1085. 3246. Scrivenor, John Brooke, 1931, The geology of Malaya: London, Macmillan & Co., Ltd., 217 p., 33 figs., map. Describes the deposits of several thermal springs. See also reference 1467. MONGOLIA 3247. Berkey, Charles P., and Morris, Frederick K., 1927, Nat- ural history of central Asia ; v. 2, Geology of Mongolia : New York, G. Putnam’s Sons, 475 p., 44 pis., 161 illus. Includes a description of a hot spring at the northeast base of Sain Noin (mountain) in the Arishan area. 3248. Ossendowski, Ferdinand, 1922, Beasts, men, and gods: New York, E. P. Dutton & Co., 325 p., map. Describes Lake Kogosol and states that it may be fed by hot springs on its floor. See also references 3382 and 3433. THAILAND (SIAM) 3249. Sresthaputra, Yija, 1951, Hot springs: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 984, p. 171-175, 2 figs., 4 tables [1952]. Contains a list of 27 thermal-spring localities. Describes springs near Amphur Fang and 8 km northeast of Si Racha. TURKEY AND CYPRUS 3250. Abich, Otto Wilhelm Hermann von, 1877, Das thrialetische Thermalquellensystem in Karthalinien vom geologischen Standpunkte betrachtet: Deutsche geol. Gesell. Zeitschr., v. 29, p. 820-829. 3251. Ainsworth, William Francis, 1842, Travels and research in Asia Minor, Mesopotamia, Chaldea, and Armenia: London, J. W. Parker, 2 v., front., illus. Contains data on thermal springs. 3252. Baker, James, 1877, Turkey in Europe: 3d ed., London and New York, Cassel, Petter, & Galpin, 650 p., map; revised ed., 1879, entitled “Turkey” : New York, Cassel, Petter, & Galpin, 495 p. States that Turkey is rich in thermal springs. Specifically mentions spring at Lija (Ilijah) near Burgas and another spring near Eski Zaghra. Also mentions thermal springs in the vicinity of Therma in Greece. 3253. Blumenthal, Maurice M., 1941, Geologie des montagnes de la transversale d’Eskipazar et leurs sources minerales (vilfiyet de Cankiri) : Maden Tetkik ve Arame, Ankara, Turkey, sene 6, no. 3/24, 4/25, p. 320-352, 550-593, 8 pis., 1 fig. [Turkish and French]; 1943, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 9,1941^12, p. 29-30. 3254. 1950, Beitrage zur Geologie des Landschaften am mittle-ren und unteren Yesil Irmak (Tokat, Amasya, Havza, Erbaa, Niksar) ; Maden Tetkik ve Arama Enstitiisii Yayinlarindan, Jeol. Harta Mater., ser. D, no. 4, 153 p., illus. [German, Turkish summary] ; 1951, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 15,1950, p. 28. Includes information on mineral and thermal springs of the region. 3255. Broughton, John Cam Hobhouse (First Baron), 1858, Travels in Albania and other provinces of Turkey in 1809 and 1810: London, J. Murray, new ed., revised and corrected, 2 v.; v. 1, 544 p., 10 illus; v. 2, 528 p., 3 illus., maps. Mentions warm spring near Bunarbashi (Bali Dagh) village, which is close to the site of ancient Troy. 3256. Caglar (Kaglar), Kerim Omer, 1939 [Investigation of the medicinal springs and waters of Kizilcahamam] : Yuk-sek Ziraat Enstitiisii Calismalarindan (Arb. Yuksek Ziraat Enstitiisii Ankara) no. 93, p. 1-20 [Turkish] ; abs., Chem. Zentralbl. 1940 [pt.] I, 3506.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 3257. Caglar (Kaglar), Kerim Omer, 1946 [Analyses of Turkish hot springs] : Maden Tetkik ve Arama Enstitiisii Mecmuasi (Ankara), v. 11, no. 36, p. 307-319 [Turkish] ; 1948, Chem. Abs., v. 42, col. 6965. 3258. 1947, Tiirkiye maden sulari ve kaplicalari [Turkish mineral waters and thermal springs, Maden Tetkik ve Arama Enstitiisii yayinlarindan: Mineral studies and research institute publications], ser. B, no. 11, pt. 1, p. 1-94. [Turkish, French summary.] Contains chemical analyses of water from Kiikiirtlii (near Brusa), Kupeli, Gonen, and Cuma springs. 3259. 1948, Tiirkiye maden sulari ve kaplicalari [Turkish mineral waters and thermal springs] : Maden Tetkik ve Arama Enstitiisii yayinlarindan [Mineral studies and research institute publications], ser. B, no. 11, pt. 2, p. 95-318. [Turkish.] Contains chemical analyses of water and other data on 174 hot springs. Includes analytical data for springs at Bademli, Derman, Kizildere, Yalova, and Kizilca-hammam. 3260. 1950, Tiirkiye maden sulari ve kaplicalari [Turkish mineral waters and thermal springs] Maden Tetkik ve Arama Enstitiisii yayinlarindan [Mineral studies and research institute publications], ser. B, no. 11, pt. 3, p. 319-638. [Turkish.] Contains chemical analyses and other data on many thermal springs including those at Gediz, Sakarya, Kizik, and Kolan. 3261. Chikachev, Petr Aleksandrovich (Tchihatschef, Pierre de), 1866, Asie Mineure; description physique de cette contree (8 v., and atlas, 1860-69) : Gotha, Germany, v. 1, Physical geography, 1866 ; 20 pis., atlas; Reisen in Klein-asien und Armenien, 1847-1863: Petermanns Mitt. Er-ganzungsband 4, v. 20; 68 p., map, 1867. Describes Hieropolis and its thermal springs. 3262. 1887, Klein-Asien, von P. de Tchihatschef, Das Wissen der Gegenwart, Deutsche Universal-Bibliothek fur Gebildete; Leipzig, Germany, G. Frey tag, 188 p., 19 figs., map. Mentions Bithya springs near Brusa, Yalova springs, Elidja Valley springs, and springs near Tuzla, at the ancient city of Hierapolis, and near Karahait. 3263. Clayton, E., 1887, The mountains of Kurdistan: Alpine Jour. [London], v. 13, no. 97, p. 293-330, 1 pi. States that there are numerous hot springs in the crater of Nimroud Dagh. 3264. Davis, (Rev.) Edwin John, 1874, Anatolica ; or The journal of a visit to some of the ancient ruined cities of Caria, Phrygia, Lycia, and Pisidia ; London, Grant & Go., 374 p., fronts., illus., pis. 3265. 1879, Life in Asiatic Turkey. A journal of travel in Cilicia (Pedias and Traehoea), Isauria, and parts of Lycaonia and Cappadocia: London, Edward Stanford, 536 p., front., illus., pis., 2 maps, 2 plans. 3266. DeKay, James Ellsworth, 1833, Sketches of Turkey in 1831 and 1832, by an American: New York, J. and J. Harper, 527 p., illus. Describes thermal springs near Smyrna. 3267. Dirisu, Niizhet Sakir, 1947 [The thermal springs of Erzu- rum] : Fac. m6d. Ankara Bull., v. 1, p. 44-46 [Turkish] ; 1948, Chem. Abs., v. 42, col. 998. 3268. Fellows, Charles, 1852, Travels and researches in Asia 365 Minor, more particularly in the province of Lycia : London, J. Murray, 510 p., illus., map. Describes the extensive deposits of tufa near the ancient city of Hierapolis. 3269. Francis, W., 1930, Mineral springs of Cyprus, in Ronald Storrs and B. J. O’Brien, eds., Handbook of Cyprus, 368 p., map. Describes six thermal-spring localities. 3270. Geary, Grattan, 1878, Through Asiatic Turkey—Narrative of a journey from Bombay to the Bosphorus: London, S. Low, Marston, Searle and Rivington, 2 v., fronts., pis., map. Mentions thermal springs. 3271. Hamilton, William J., 1842, Researches: Asia Minor, Pon- tius, and Armenia; with some account of their antiquities and geology: London, J. Murray, 2 v.; v. 1, 544 p., 6 pis.; v. 2, 508 p., 6 pis., map. Describes the Byzantine Baths of Cauvsa and the extensive deposit of tufa near the ancient city of Hierapolis. Also contains information on hot springs in several other localities. 3272. Homer, ca. 850 B.C., Iliad; 1934, Translated into English by Augustus Taber Murray, with title, Homer, The Iliad: New York, G. P. Putnam’s Sons; London, W. Heineinann, 2 v.; 1. 1, 479 p.; v. 2, 643 p. Mentions warm spring that feeds “eddying Sca-mander,” near the site of ancient Troy (v. 2, p. 465). 3273. Hubbard, Oliver P., 1847, Notices of Koordistan * * * derived chiefly from the letters of Rev. A. H. Wright: Am. Jour. Sci., ser., 2, v. 3, p. 347-354. Mentions hot sulphur spring west of Julamerk. 3274. Humann, Carl; Cichorius, Conrad; Judeich, Walther; and Winter, Franz, 1898, Altertumer von Hierapolis: K. Deutsche, Archaeol. Inst. Jahrb., Erganzungsheft 4. 3275. Kleinsorge, H., 1939, La source thermale lithiniffere de Akhiiyiik, Province de Konya, district d’Eregli: Bull, trimestriel Inst. Recherches Minieres, no. 4, p. 105-109, 2 figs.; Ankara Ref. in Rev. geologie et sci. connexes, v. 20, pt. 3, p. 116,1940. 3276. Larsen, Sven, 1950, The petrified waterfalls of Hierapolis ; a 14,000-year-old wonder of Anatolia: Illus. London News, v. 127, no. 3314, p. 698, 5 illus. 3277. Luke, Harry Charles, and Jardine, D. J., 1920, Handbook of Cyprus: London, E. Stanford, 300 p.; 1913 ed. Describes six mineral-spring localities, and five other spring localities. 3278. Lynch, F. H. B., 1901, Armenia: Travels and studies: London, Longmans, 2 v.; v. 1, The Russian provinces, 470 p., 52 pis., 56 illus., 7 maps; v. 2, The Turkish provinces, 512 p., 45 pis., 41 illus., 9 maps. Describes a small warm lake in Nimrud Crater. 3279. MacFarlane, Charles, 1850, Turkey and its destiny—The results of journeys made in 1847 and 1848 to examine into the state of that country ; London, J. Murray, 2 v.; v. 1, 543 p.; v. 2, 681 p. Describes hot springs near Brusa and at base of a ridge of Ak Daghler. 3280. Marek, Kurt W. (C. W. Ceram, pseud.), 1949, Gotter, Graber, und Gelehrter: Hamburg and Stuttgart, Germany ; 1951, translated into English by E. B. Garside, with title, Gods, Graves, and Scholars: New York, Knopf, 426 p., 32 pis., many figs. Mentions the springs near Bunarbashi (Bali Dagh) village, which is close to the site of ancient Troy.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 366 3281. Martel, E. A., 1919, Hierapolis (Asie Mineure) : Nature [Paris], v. 47, no. 2378, p. 262-266, 5 figs. 3282. Oswald, Felix, 1906, A treatise on the geology of Ar- menia : Iona, England, F. Oswald, 516 p., 19 pis., 12 maps. Contains maps showing the hot springs at Ilija, near Arzit, and at Tendurek; also the warm lake in Nimrud Crater, and deposits of travertine along the Chorokh River. 3283. Phene, J. S., 1879, On the deposit of carbonate of lime at Hierapolis in Anatolia, and the efflorescence of the limestone at Les Baux, in Provence: British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 49th Mtg., 1879, Rept. 3284. Phillippson, Alfred, 1918, Kleinasien, in C. Winters, Handb. regionalen Geologie, v. 22, no. 5, pt. 2, 183 p., 3 pis., 4 figs. States that there are 70 thermal-spring localities in Asia Minor. Names and describes the locations of several. 3285. Reclus, Jean Jacques Elisee, 1884, L’Asie Ant6rieure, in Nouvelle Geographie Universelle; la terre et les hommes: Paris, Hachette et Cie., v. 9, 950 p., 85 views and wood engravings, 160 maps. Describes the deposits of travertine near the site of ancient Hierapolis. 3286. Richardson, Thomas, and Browell, E. J. J., 1857, On the analysis of waters from the Turko-Persian frontier: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 13, p. 184-187. Includes a chemical anlysis of water from a hot spring near Mershut village, north of Lake Van. 3287. Salomon-Calvi, Wilhelm, 1940 [Have the European min- eral springs counterparts in Turkey?] : Turkey, Zeit-schr. hyg. u. exptl. Biol., v. 2, no. 2, p. 63-101 [German] ; 1946, Chem. Abs. v. 40, col. 6717. Contains chemical analyses of 59 mineral springs in Turkey. 3288. 1941, Kann man in der Tiirkei Heilbader nach Art der Warm Springs von Georgia (U.S.A.) einrichten?: Maden Tetkik ve Arama, Enstitiisii Mecmuasi, Ankara, sene 6, no. 3/24, p. 356-360. [Turkish and German.] Describes 12 thermal springs in Turkey suitable for development of bathing resorts. 3289. Smith, Eli, and Dwight, H. G. O., 1834, Missionary re- searches in Armenia, including a journey through Asia Minor and into Georgia and Persia, with a visit to the Nestorian and Chaldean Christians of Oormiah and Salmas: London, G. Wightman, 472 p., map. Describes springs near Lori village and at Ilija village. 3290. Smith, John Lawrence, 1873, Mineralogy and chemistry— Original researches: Louisville, Ky., J. P. Morton Co., 401 p. Describes the thermal springs in the vicinity of Brusa, in the Yalova Valley on the south side of the Gulf of Nicomedia, near the ancient city of Hierapolis, near Eski-Shehr, near the ancient city of Troy, on Mitylene Island, and on the west shore of Lake Tiberias. 3291. Stchepinsky, V., 1942, Geologie et ressources min£rales de la region de Kirsehir-Bogazhijan cayi: Maden Tetkik ve Arama, Ankara, sene 7, no. 3/28, p. 489-502, map [Turkish and French] ; 1943, Chem. Abs., v. 37, col. 5341: 1946, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 10, 1943-1944, p. 122. Describes several thermal springs. 3292. Tamari, M., 1943, Sulphur springs of Cyprus: Nature [London], v. 152, no. 3853, p. 277-278. 3293. Wilson, Charles William, and Hogarth, David George, 1910, Hierapolis in Encyclopaedia Britannica: 11th ed., New York, Encylopaedia Britannica, v. 13, p. 452. Describes the extensive travertine terraces. 3294. Yule, Henry, 1903, The book of Ser Marco Polo, the Ve- netian, concerning the kingdoms and marvels of the east; translated and edited with notes * ♦ *: London, J. Murray, 2 v.; v. 1, 462 p., illus.; v. 2, 662 p., illus. States that “Greater Hermenia” possesses “the best baths from natural springs that are anywhere to be found.” Mentions hot springs at Ilija and at Hassan Kala’a. Also states that there are many natural hot baths in the area now known as Iran and mentions several by name. See also references 7, 30, 43, 78, 79, 1737, 2024, and 2846. UNION OF SOVIET SOCIALIST REPUBLICS 3295. Abich, H., 1870 Mineral springs of Tiflis] : Tiflis. [Rus- sian.] 3296. Abramof, Major-General, 1871, The principality of Ka- rategin: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 41, p. 338-342; translated from the Russian and communicated by R. Mitchell. Mentions the hot springs in the Surkhail Valley. 3297. Aleksandrov, V. V, 1933, The Dushak thermal springs: [Russia], Central Geol. Inst. U.S.S.R. Materialy, Regional geology no. 2, p. 1-19, figs. [Russian, English summary.] 3298. Arsenev, A. A., and Nechaeva, E. A., 1951, Geologo-petro- graflcheskii ocherk raiona kurorta Darasun : Akad. Nauk SSSR., Inst. Geol. Nauk Trudy, v. 128, Geol. Ser. 49, p. 120-194, illus.; 1955, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 19, 1954, p. 19. Describes the geology and petrology of the Darasun mineral springs area. 3299. Atkinson, Thomas Witlam, 1858, Oriental and western Si- beria, a narrative of seven years’ explorations and adventures in Siberia, Mongolia, the Kirghis Steppes, Chinese Tartary, and part of Central Asia : New York, Harper & Bros., 17-533 p., 52 illus., map. 3300. Balneologicheskii institut * * * Pyatigorsk, 1927 [Min- eral waters of the Caucasus] : Leningrad, 80 p. [Russian.] 3301. Basharina, L. A., 1956, Fumaroles of Sheveluch volcano [northern Kamchatka] during Sept.-Dee., 1953: Akad. Nauk SSSR, Lab. Vulkanologii, Vulkanol. Sta. Byull. 24, p. 21-27, 1 fig., 9 tables. 3302. Bentkhen, P. P., 1937, Mineral springs of Toulovskaya and Starikova Rivers, Little Khingan Range: Acad. Sci. U.S.S.R., Far Eastern Br., Bull. 25, p. 75-83, 6 figs. [Russian, English summary.] 3303. Barthenson, Leon, 1897, Ressources baln£aires de la Rus- sie: Internat. Cong, hydrologie, climatologie, et geologie, 4th, Clermont-Ferrand [France], 1896, Compte rendu, p. 119-130. 3304. Bickel, Adolf, 1933, Der “warme Berg,” ein geologisches und balneologisches Unikum auf der Erde: Zeitscher. Gesell. physikal. Therapie, v. 45, no. 2, p. 78-84, 2 figs.; 1935, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 2,1934, p. 20. “Describes the geology of ‘Warm Hill,’ and explains origin of the springs, Ural Region, Russia.”BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 3305. Billings, Joseph, 1802, An account of a geographical and astronomical expedition to the northern parts of Russia * * * in the years 1785-1794; narrated from the original papers by Martin Sauer, Secretary to the expedition: London, T. Cadell, 332 p., app., 58 p., 14 pis. Describes several hot-spring localities. 3306. Bozoyan, O. A., 1956 [The gas contents of the mineral waters at the Dzhermuk health resort] : Voprosy-Geo-logii i Gidrogeologii Armyanskoi SSR, p. 156-171 [Russian] ; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 1519. 3307. Brudin, I. D., 1935, Goryuchie gazy i mineralnye vody yuzhnoi Ukralny: Priroda [Nature], no. 3, p. 64-67, map. 3308. Cochrane, John Dundas, 1824, Narrative of a pedestrian journey through Russia and Siberian Tartary, from the frontiers of China to the frozen sea and Kamchatka: 2d ed., London, printed for C. Knight, 2 v.; v. 1, 428 p„ front., 2 illus., map; v. 2, 344 p., front., 2 illus., map. Mentions hot sulfur springs near Lake Baikal. 3309. Collins, Perry McDonough, 1860, A voyage down the Amoor; with a land journey through Siberia, and incidental notices of Manchooria, Kamchatka, and Japan: New York, D. Appleton & Co., 390 p., front., 3 illus.; ed., 1864, Overland explorations in Siberia, northern Asia, and the Great Amoor River country. Mentions thermal springs in the vicinity of Lake Baikal and also 50 miles west of Petropaulosky in Kamchatka. 3310. Denguin, Yury, 1931, Some mineral springs of the south part of the central Transbaikalian region; East-Siberian Br. Geol. and Prosp. Survey, Geology and mineral resources East Siberia Rees. no. 4, p. 57-73, 10 figs. [Russian, English summary.] 3311. 1932, Mineral springs of central Transbaikalia (upper parts of Chikoi, Onon, and Ingoda Rivers) : [Russia], Glavnoe geologo-razvedochnoe upravlenie Trudy (United Geol. and Prosp. Service U.S.S.R. Trans.), no. 184, 43 p., 7 pis., 11 figs., 21 tables. [Russian, English summary.] 3312. Denisov, P. V., 1955, Schematic explanation of the origin of the thermal springs Tyan-Shan; Gidrokhim. Mate-rialy, v. 23, p. 82-96, 7 figs., 4 tables [Russian] ; 1956, Chem. Abs., v. 50, col. 14151. 3313. Ditmar, Karl, 1860, Die Vulkane und heissen Quellen Kamchatka’s: Petermanns Geog. Mitt., p. 66-67. 3314. Dombrowskaja, N. S., and Juschkewitsch, F. F., 1927, Chemische Zusammensetzung der Darassun Mineral-wasser: Univ. Extreme-Orient Mem., 4, 19 p.; 1931, abs., Chem. Zentralbl., 1931, Referate 2, p. 980. 3315. Drechev, S. M., 1954 [Hot waters in the valley of the River Manych] ; Gidrokhim. Materialy, v. 22, p. 57-59 [Russian] ; 1955, Chem. Abs., v. 49, col. 15126. 3316. Dru, Leon, 1883, Rapport sur les eaux m morales du Cau- case (Mission de 1882) : 115 p., 55 pis. 3317. 1884, Note sur la g^ologie et l’hydrologie de la region du Bechtaou (Russie-Caucase) : Soc. g6ol. France Bull., ser. 3, v. 12; 1883-84, p. 474-515, 4 pis., 2 figs., 3 tables. Contains information on many thermal springs. 3318. Durov, S. A., 1955 [The genesis of the water of a sulfate- bicarbonate hot spring (near Kislovodsk)] : Novocher-kasskogo Politekh. Inst, imeni Sergo Ordzhonikidze, v. 26, p. 252-264 [Russian] ; 1957, Chem. Abs., v. 51, col. 13269. 3319. Dzens-Litovsky, A. I., 1937 [Mineral springs of the Birsk region, Bashkir Republic] : [Russia], Central Sci.-Inv. 367 Geol. and Prosp. Inst. Pogrebov Jubilee v., p. 104-109. [Russian.] 3320. Dzens-Litovsky, A. I„ 1940, The mineral sources of the Caucasian group of mineral waters: Priroda [Nature], no. 6, p. 70-83, 6 figs., 3 tables. [Russian, English title.] 3321. Dzens-Litovsky, A. I., and Tolstikhin, N. I., 1937, Mineral springs and muds of the Soviet Union: Priroda [Nature], no. 10, p. 104-124, 12 figs., 2 tables. [Russian.] 3322. Eristavi, D. I., and Kituashvili, N. A., 1955, The physico- chemical investigation of hot spring waters of Tbilisi [Tiflis] : Gruzinskogo Politekh. Inst. Trudy, no. 5, p. 56-67 [Russian] ; 1959, Chem. Abs., v. 53, col. 5553. 3323. Erman, Georg Adolph, 1848, Travels in Siberia, including excursions northwards, down the Obi, to the Polar Circle, and southwards, to the Chinese frontier: London, Longman, Brown, Green, & Longman, 2 v.; v. 1, 495 p., map; v. 2, 536 p.; translated from the German by William Desborough Cooley. 3324. Ermilov, I. Ya., 1948 [Thermal springs in the Mukungi River Valley on the western slope of the Burein Chain] : Akad. Nauk SSSR, Lab. Gidrogeol. Problem Trudy, v. з, p. 301-304 [Russian] ; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 9530. 3325. Ermolov, A. S., 1916, Source thermo-min6rale Guiik-Salgan dans la region Daghestan, pri;s de la ville Petrovsk; Geolo. Komitet Materialy (Comite g6ol. materiaux ggologie g£n. et appl.) no. 22, 31 p., 6 pis., map. [Russian, French title.] 3326. Florensky, A. A., 1936a, Mineralnye istochniki tsentralnoi chasti Nakhichevanskogo kraya: Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. (Akad. Nauk) Inst. G6ol. Travaux, v. 6, p. 89-131, 1 pi., 21 figs.; 1937, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 4, 1936, p. 84. 3327. 1936b, Tatevskii mineralnye istochnik v Zangezure: Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. (Akad. Nauk) Inst. Geol. Travaux, v. 6, p. 133-154, 15 figs.; 1937, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 4, 1936, p. 84. 3328. Forsch, B. N., 1936, Zur Frage liber das Feld des Thermal- wassers: Acad Sci. U.R.S.S. (Akad. Nauk) Doklady, v. 4 (13), no. 4 (108), p. 185-186,1 fig. 3329. Frank-Kameneckij (Kamenetzky), A., and Koncevic, Y. I., 1931, Sur la chimie des sources thermales de la Trans-bai'kalie du Nord: Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. (Akad. Nauk) Doklady, 1931-A, p. 19-26, 5 tables [Russian, French title]; 1932, abs., Neues Jahrb. Mlneralogie, Geologie и. Palaontologie, Referate, 2, p. 699-701. Describes the thermal springs in 30 places. Includes chemical analyses of the water from 7 springs. 3330. Frank-Kameneckij (Kamenetzky), A., and Waksberg, N., 1928, Hydrochemische Untersuchungen der Heissen Quellen am Baikalsee: Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. (Akad. Nauk) Doklady 1928-A, p. 23-28, 2 tables. 3331. Galakhov, N. N., 1940, The thermal source of Kuldur, and Gryllotalpa: Priroda [Nature], no. 5, p. 68-70, 2 figs., 1 table. [Russian, title and table of contents in Russian and English.] 3332. Gerasimov, A. P., 1920, Mineralniya vody v Rossii (Min- eral water in Russia) ; Comm, for Study of Natural Resources of Russia, Russian Acad. Sci. (Rept.) 40 T., 153 p. [Russian.] Consists of a collection of reports by various authors on mineral springs in several different localities. Includes data on the temperature and chemical quality of the water.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 368 3333. Gerasimov, A. P., 1936, Geologic sketch of the upper Malka basin, Caucasus region: [Russia], Central Geol. and Prosp. Inst. Trans., no. 62, 25 p., map. [Russian, English summary.] 3334. Getseu, V. V., 1948a [Chemical composition of the waters from the hot spring Isti-su in Dagestan] : Gidrokhim. Materialy, v. 14, p. 131-134 [Russian] ; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 801. 3335. 1948b [Chemical composition of the waters obtained from a boring at Izberbash, Dagestan] : Gidrokhim Materialy, v. 14, p. 135-137 [Russian] ; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 801. 3336. Godet, Ch., 1830, Voyage aux bains du Caucase en 1828: Nouvelles Annales des Voyages et des sciences geogra-phiques * * * edited by J. B. Eyries, P. F. de Renau-diere, and J. H. Klaproth : v. 48, p. 137-174. 3337. Golovachev, F. A., 1937, The mineral springs of the south- eastern extremity of the Chukchee Peninsula: Arctica, v. 5, no. 5, p. 57-80, 10 figs., 1 table. [Russian, English summary.] 3338. Golovin, F. I., 1955 [The fluorine content of the Matsesta mineral springs] : Gidrokhim. Materialy, v. 23, p. 70-73, 2 figs., 1 table. [Russian.] 3339. Gonsovskaya, G. A., 1957 [Particularities of the fumarole formations of hot springs in southern Kamchatka] : Akad. Nauk SSSR Doklady, v. 113, p. 172-174 [Russian] ; Chem. Abs., v. 51, col. 14168. 3340. Grigorev, N. A., and Chernstov, A. I., 1939 [New mineral springs of the Matsesta type, northern Caucasus region, Russia] : Problems of Soviet Geology, v. 9, no. 7, p. 91-93. [Russian.] 3341. Guillemard, Francis Henry Hill, 1889, The cruise of the Marchesa to Kamchatka & New Guinea, with notices of Formosa, Liu-Kiu, and various islands of the Malay Archipelago: 2d ed., New York, Scribner & Welford, 455 p., 139 illus., 14 maps; 1st ed., 1886, 2 v., London, J. Murray. Describes hot springs in several places on the Kamchatka Peninsula, hot springs and solfataras near Tam-sui in Formosa, and steam vents in the crater of Goe-noeng Api (Gunongapi) in the Banda Islands. 3342. Hahn, K., 1893, Geographische Mitteilungen (Ueber Mi- neralquellen im Kaukasus) : Ausland [Stuttgart, Germany], v. 66, no. 8, p. 24-125. 3343. Iakovlev, N. N., Oguilvie, A. N., and Nekhorochev, V. P., 1916, Recherches et explorations geologiques dans la region des sources min£rales de la Matsesta dans la Rivilre du Caucase: Geol. Komitet Materialy (Comitl glol. matlriaux glologie gen. et appl.), no. 8, 52 p., 8 pis., 1 fig., 5 tables. [Russian, French summaries.] 3344. Ignatovich, N. K., 1932, The Psekups mineral springs: [Russia], Glavnoe geo logo razvedochnoe upravlenie Trudy (United Geol. and Prosp. Service U.S.S.R. Trans.), no. 97, 187 p., 57 figs., map, 12 tables. [Russian, English summary.] 3345. Ivanov, I. M., and Shklyar, A. Kh., 1941, Mineralnye vody SSSR.—The mineral waters of the White Russian SSR: Priroda (Akad. Nauk SSSR), v. 30, no. 6, p. 52-56, illus. [Russian] ; 1954 abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 18, 1953, p. 199. 3346. Ivanov, V. V., 1957, The present hydrothermal activity of the volcano Ebeko on the Isle of Paramushir [Kurile Islands] : Akad. Nauk SSSR, Geokhimiya, 1957, no. 1, p. 63-76, 4 figs., 7 tables. [Russian, English summary.] 3347. Kalitsky (Kalickij), K., 1914a, Neftedag (Neftjanaja Gora, Transkaspien) : Geol. Komitet Comitl geol. (Mlm.), nouv. ser., no. 95, 8 p., 3 pis., map. [Russian, German summary.] Mentions some of the thermal saline springs in the Nephtedag oil area. 3348. 1914b, Boiadag: [Russia], Glavnoe geologo-razvedoch-noe upravlenie Izv. (Comity geol. Bull.) St. Plters-bourg, v. 32, no. 3, p. 191-240. [Russian.] Mentions thermal springs in the Boiadag oil area. 3349. 1941c, Koum-dag and Monjoukly (territoire Caspienne) : Petrograd, Geol. Komitet (Comitl glol. Bull.), v. 33, no. 10, p. 1221-1231, 3 pis. [Russian, English summary.] Mentions thermal springs in the Koum-dag and Monjoukly areas. 3350. Karafuto, K., and Kaisha, S., 1928, Report on the Inves- tigation of the East Concession for Oil along the East Coast of North Sakhalin: Tokyo, North Sakhalin Oil Co; translation prepared by Engineer Intelligence Div. Office of the Engineer, Headquarters U.S. Army Forces, Far East, Tokyo, Japan. Contains descriptions of Rubungaruro and Kaburabi hot springs on the east coast of northern Sakhalin Island. 3351. Karapetyan, O., 1938, Glavnye mineralnye istochniki Armyanskoi SSR v. svyazi s razvitiem kurortnogo stroitelstva: Akad. Nauk SSSR, Armyanskii Filial, Geol. Inst., Materialy Geologii i Gidrogeologii Armyanskoi SSR, no. 3, 31 p., illus.; 1951, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 15, 1950, p. 143. 3352. Kashkai, Mirali, 1939, Geologo-petrografisheskii ocherk raiona mineralnykh istochnikov Isti-su v Kurdistane i ikh geokhimicheskaya kharakteristika: Akad. Nauk SSSR, Azerbaidzhanskiy Filial, Geol. Inst., Baku, 121 p., illus. [Russian, English summary] ; 1953, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 17,1952, p. 225. 3353. Kolesnikov, B., 1935 [Thermo-mineral sources of Terney region] : Acad. Sci. U.S.S.R., Far Eastern Br., Bull. 13, p. 127-130, map [Russian] ; 1941, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 8, 1940, p. 121. Describes the character and occurrence of the thermal mineral springs of the Ternei district, Amur River region, Russia. 3354. Konshin, A., 1893 [Mineral waters of Borjom and Abastu- man]: Geol. Caucasus Materialy, ser. 2, 104 p. [Russian.] 3355. Kosygin, A. I., 1935, Die Wasser der Schlammvulkane des westlichen Turkmeniens: Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. (Akad. Nauk) Bull. (Izv.), no. 8-9, p. 1029-1039 [Russian and German; 1937, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 4, 1936, p. 148. 3356. Kotulskij, W. K., 1920, Die Quellen von Nordtransbaika- lien: Natiirliche Produktionskrfifte in Russland (KEPS). Akad. Wiss. Petrograd, v. 4, no. 40, p. 95. [Russian, German title.] 3357. Kozyrev, A. A., 1932, Recapturing of the mineral springs in the Solzy spa: [Russia], Glavnoe geologo-razvedoch-noe upravlenie Izv. (United Geol. and Prosp. Service U.S.S.R. Bull.), v. 51, p. 671-682 (pt. 44, p. 1-12), 3 figs. [Russian, English summary.]BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 369 3358. Krasintseva, V. V., 1950 [The composition of gases in the mineral waters of Matsesta as they come to the surface and in the bath tubs] : Gidrokhim. Materialy, v. 18, p. 106-111 [Russian] ; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 5588. 3359. 1955 [The chemical composition of the main thermal springs of Buryat-Mongolia] ; Voprosy Izvcheniya Kurort. Resursov SSSR (Moscow, Gosudarst. Izda-tel’stvo Med. Literatury) Sbornik, p. 133-141 [Russian] ; 1958, Ohem. Abs., v. 53, col. 10602. 3360. Kravtsov, A. I., 1939 [Origin of the hydrogen sulfide min- eral waters of the Sochi-Matsesta resort] : Sovetskaya Geologiya, v. 9, no. 7, p. 94-95 [Russian] ; Khim. Referat. Zhur. 1940, no. 1, p. 41-42; 1942, Chem. Abs., v. 36, col. 1417. 3361. Kryukov, P. A., 1948 [The oxidation-reduction condition of the water in the group of the Caucasian mineral waters] : Gidrokhim. Materialy, v. 14, p. 161-182 [Russian] ; 1950, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 6324. 3362. Langwagen, Ya. V., 1930, Les sources arsenicales de Djoulfa dans la region de Nakhitchevan: Geol. Komitet Materialy (Comite geol. Materiaux gf'ologie g£n. et appl.), no. 144, 34 p., 1 pi., 3 figs. [Russian, French summary.] 3363. Levchenko, V. M., 1939 [The chemical composition of the Abastuman thermal springs] : Gidrokhim. Materialy, v 11, p. 205-210 [Russian] ; 1940, Chem. Abs., v. 34, col 5577. 3364. 1947a [Physicochemical characteristics of Matsesta waters] : Gidrokhim. Materialy, v. 13, p. 205-227 [Russian] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 8170. 3365. 1947b [Oxidation-reduction processes in Matsesta waters] : Gidrokhim. Materialy, v. 13, p. 229-236 [Russian] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 8170. 3366. Levchenko, V. M., and Miller, E. I., 1947 [Determination of gold in Matsesta waters]: Gidrokhim. Materialy, v. 13, p. 258-260 [Russian]; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 8170. 3367. Levitskaya, X. P., 1936, The mineral spring of Kumo- gorsk : 62 p. [Russian, English summary.] 3368. Litvinov, V. F., 1938 [Some geophysical investigations in Kazakhstan]: Ucheniye Zapiski Kazanskiy Gosudarst. Univimeni Kirova. Fizika i ematika Math, v. 2, p. 41-62 [Russian]; 1939, Chem. Abs., v. 33, col. 8109. 3369. Makarova, K. A., 1948 [Changes in the chemical composi- tion of the Matsesta mineral waters (at Sochi in the Caucasus), in relation to the hydrometeorological conditions] : Gidrokhim, Materialy, v. 14, p. 138-145 [Russian] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 5471. 3370. Makerov, Ya. A., 1938 [Mineral springs of the Far Eastern Region] : Akad. Nauk, Far Eastern Br., Bull. 28, p. 3-36, 2 figs. [Russian] ; Chem. Abs., v. 32, col. 5971. 3371. Maksimovich, G. A., 1932 [Mineral springs of Chechnya, Caucasus]: Jour. Applied Chem. (U.S.S.R.), v. 5, p. 1066-1077 [Russian]; 1933, Chem. Abs., v. 27, p. 1688. 3372. Markhilevitch (Markilevich), I. I., 1927, Les sources ther- males Rakhmanovsky: Glavnoe geologo-razvedochnoe upravlenie Izv. (Comity g^ol. Bulls.), v. 46, no. 10, p. 1265-1279, 1 pi., 2 figs., map. [Russian, French summary.] 3373. Martel, E. A., 1904, Sur la source sulfureuse de Matsesta (Transcaucasie) et la relation des cavemes avec les sources thermo-mingrales: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 138, p. 999-1001, 1 fig. 3374. Menetries, Edouard, 1833, Esquisse d’un voyage au Cau- case et jusqu’aux frontteres de la Perse: Nouv. annales voyages et sci. gdog. * * *, v. 59, p. 186-222. Mentions that turtles were found living in spring water (8 miles from Lenkoran) having temperature of 104° F. 3375. Naboko, S. I., 1954, Hydrosolfataras of Diky Greben: Acad. Sci. U.S.S.R., Volcanol. Sta. Bull. 22, p. 59-64, 1 pi.; 1957, abs., Mineralog. Mag. and Jour. [London], v. 31, no. 238, p. 387. 3376. Moeller, W., 1889 [Useful minerals and mineral waters of the Caucasus]: Geol. Caucasus Materialy, ser. 2, 420 p. [Russian.] 3377. Motylev, V. E.; Gorkin, A. F.; Shmidt, O. Yu.; Nikitin, M. V.; and Shaposhnikov, B. M., ed., 1937, Boleshoi Sovetskii Atlas Mira (Great Soviet World Atlas) : Moscow, U.S.S.R. Central Exec. Comm, for Inst. Sci. Research, 2 pts., folio. Includes a map of the Soviet Union showing 152 places having warm or hot springs. 3378. Mushketov, D. I., 1926 [Geologic survey of the environ- ments of the radium mine of Tyuya-Muyun]: Acad. Sci. U.S.S.R. Radium et minerais radioactifs Travaux, II, p. 3-13 [Russian, French title] ; 1931, Chem. Abs., v. 25, p. 2947. Mentions hot springs on the southern slope of Tiuya-Muyun. 3379. Mzareulishvili, M. V., 1957a [Hydrochemical investiga- tions of the thermal waters of Tiflis] : Akad. Nauk Gruzinskaya SSR Soobshcheniya, v. 18, no. 3, p. 299-305 [Russian] ; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 4893. 3380. 1957b [Oxidation-reduction processes and the gas composition of the Tiflis hot springs] : Akad. Nauk Gruzinskaya SSR Soobshcheniya, v. 18, no. 3, p. 687-694 [Russian] ; 1958, Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 10464. 3381. Nasledov, B. N., and Sokolov, P. T., 1929, Eaux radio- actives curatives dans les montagnes de Kara-Mazar: [Russia], Glavnoe geologo-razvedochnoe upravlenie Izv. (C'omite g6ol. Bulls.), v. 48, no. 1, p. 272-277; v. 48, no. 2, p. 154-159, 1 fig. [Russian, French title.] 3382. Nekhoroshev, V. P., 1927, Les sources thermales de 1’Altai: [Russia], Glavnoe geologo-razvedochnoe upravlenie Izv. (Comity gfiol. Bulls.), v. 46, no. 3, p. 431-451, map. [Russian, French summary.] 3383. Nesterenko, L. P., 1953 [New region of hydrothermal de- velopment in the Donetz Basin]: Akad. Nauk SSSR Izv., Ser. geol., no. 6, p. 106-109 [Russian] ; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 10498. 3384. Nikolayev, A. V., 1929, Istochniki Barguzina i ikh mine- ralnyye obrazovaniya (Sur les sources min^rales de Bargusin en Sib£rie et leur depots) : Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. Mus. Mindralog. Travaux (Mus. Mineralog. Leningrad Travaux), v. 3, p. 50-132, 4 figs., 15 tables. [Russian, French title.] 3385. Nikolski, A. P., 1937, The hot springs in the district of the Gulf of Lavrenty and the Mechigmensk Bay: Arc-tica, v. 5, no. 5, p. 81-92, 1 fig., 3 tables. [Russian, English summary.] 3386. Noinski (Ninskii), M., 1931, Geological and hydrogeologi- cal observations in the region of Ijevskoi mineral spring: [Russia], Glavnoe geologo-razvedochnoe upravlenie Izv. (United Geol. and Prosp. Service U.S.S.R. Bulls.), v. 50, pt. 2, p. 807-826, 1 pi. (no. 53, (p. 1-20)). [Russian, English summary.]THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 370 3387. Novokhatsky, I. P., and Kalinin, S. K., 1939, Spectroscopic character of the thermae of the Transilian Alatau (Tyan-Shan) : Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. (Akad. Nauk) Do-klady, v. 22, no. 6, p. 323-324. [English.] 3388. 1940, Lithium in the thermal waters of Kasakhstan: Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. (Akad. Nauk) Doklady, v. 29, p. 53-54 [English] ; 1941, Chem. Abs., v. 35, col. 4130. 3389. Oganesov, L. A., 1936, Mineralnye istochniki Armenii: State Pub. Co., Armenian SSR, Erivan, 259 p., 4 pis., 18 figs. [Russian] ; 1949, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 13, 1948, p. 199. 3390. Oguilvie, A. N., 1925, Compte-rendu d’une excursion aux eaux thermales de Psekoups en 1915: Geol. Komitet Ma-terialy (Comity gdol. matdriaux geologie gdn. et appl.). no. 15, 27 p., map, 2 figs. [Russian, French title.] 3391. 1929, Compte rendu preliminaire des travaux hydro-gdologiques pour l’dtude des eaux radioactives de Piatigorsk: Comity geol. matdriaux geologie gdn. et appl., no. 96, 38 p., 2 charts, 1 table [Russian, French summary] ; 1931, abs., Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaeontologie, 1931, Referate 2, p. 370. 3392. Oguilvie, A. N., and Levitskaya, X. P., 1934 [Piatigorski Hot Narzan] : 39 p. [Russian.] 3393. Ossendowski, Ferdinand, 1924, Man and mystery in Asia, in collaboration with Lewis Stanton Palen: London, Edwin Arnold & Co., 295 p., front., map. Mentions two warm springs on shore of Lake Kutchuk. Also cites previous investigations of “numerous mineral and healing springs” but gives no references to publications on them. 3394. PafTenholz, C. (Paffengol’ts, K. N.), 1930, Les sources mindrales d’Eli-Son: [Russia], Glavnoe geologo-razve-dochnoe upravlenie Izv. (Geol. and Prosp. Service, U.S.S.R. Bulls.), v. 49, p. 667-682 (v. 49, no. 6, p. 23-38, 5 figs., 4 tables. [Russian, French summary.] 3395. Pertsov, I. A., ed., ea. 1939, Health resorts of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics—A symposium of articles compiled from data of the Central Institute of Balneology in Moscow: Moscow, U.S.S.R. Society of Cultural Relations with Foreign Countries (VOKS). 270 p., 44 illus. [English.] Includes data on several of the principal thermal springs. 3396. Piip, B. I., 1937, Termalnye Klyuchi Kamchatki: Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. (Akad. Nauk) Proc., Kamchatka ser. 2, 268 p., 73 figs., 47 tables, map. [Russian, English summary.] Describes 64 groups of thermal springs, mostly in the southern part of Kamchatka. Includes map showing the names and locations of the springs. 3397. Popov, A. P., and Karnitskii, V. A., 1928 [Analysis of min- eral springs in the Upper Chechnya (Caucasus)] : Zhur. Prikladnoi Khimii 1, p. 291-299 [Russian] ; 1929, Chem. Abs., v. 23, p. 4758. 3398. Porter, Robert Ker, 1821-22, Travels in Georgia, Persia, Armenia, Ancient Babylonia, Tiflis, &c., during the years 1817, 1818, 1819, and 1820: London, Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme, & Brown, 2 v.; v. 1, 720 p., front., 59 pis., map. Describes the warm springs of Tiflis. 3399. Posokhov, E. V., 1946 [Radioactivity of thermal and cold springs of the Transilian and Jungarian Altau] : Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. (Akad. Nauk), v. 51, p. 135-137 [Russian] ; Chem. Abs., v. 40, col. 6339. 3400. Posokhov, E. V., and Kalinin, S. N., 1943, Spectroscopic characteristics of thermal and cold springs and mountain rivers in eastern Kazakhstan: Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. (Akad. Nauk) Izv., Ser. geol., no. 6, p. 98-103, 1 fig. [Russian, English summary] ; 1950, abs., Bibliography Econ. Geology, v. 17,1944, p. 264. 3401. Prejevalsky, Nikolas Michailovitch (Przhevalskii, Nikolai Mikhailovich), 1879, From Kulja, across the Tian Shan to Lob-Nor: London, S. Low, Marston, Searle, & Riving-ston, 251 p., map; translated into English from the Russian edition by E. Delmar Morgan. Includes a description of the warm mineral springs of Arassan. 3402. Presniakov, E., 1930, Geological sketch of the environs of the Molocovka watering place near Chita: East-Siberia Br. Geol. and Prosp. Survey, Geology and Mineral Resources East Siberia Rees., no. 3, p. 5-34. [Russian, English summary.] 3403. Prokopenko, N. M., 1930 [The thermal springs of the mid- dle and eastern Tian-shan—Materials of geology and geochemistry of the Tian-shan] : Akad. Wiss. Leningrad, Materialy Kom. d. Exped. unters., v. 30, p. 3-108, 8 figs., map [Russian, German summary] ; 1931, abs., Geol. Zentralbl., v. 45, no. 5, p. 298. 3404. 1932a [Gas exhalations in the Tian-shan and Pamir. (Geochemic character) ] : Pamir Expedition 1930 Rept., v. 1 (11), Thermal springs and gases; Akad. Wiss. Leningrad, p. 15-35, 1 table [Russian, German summary] ; 1935, abs., Neues Jahrb. Minerologie, Geologie u. Palaeontologie, Referate 2, p. 48-49,1935. 3405. 1932b [The thermal springs of the Pamir] : Acad. Wiss. Leningrad, p. 35-69, 3 pis., 4 figs. [Russian, German summary] ; 1935, abs., Neues Jahrb. Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaeontologie, Referate 2, p. 48-49, 1935. 3406. Prokopoff, C. (Prokopov, K. A.), 1913, Description gdo- logiques des alentours des sources mindrales de Mi-khailovskaia (Siernovodsk) du territoire du Tdrek: [Russia], Glavnoe geologo-razvedochnoe upravlenie Izv. (Comity geol. Bulls.), v. 32, no. 9, p. 871-925, 2 pis., 1 fig. [Russian, French summary.] 3407. Rabkin, M. I., 1937, The hot springs of Neshken: Arctica, v. 5, no. 5, p. 93-101, 1 fig., 1 table. [Russian, English summary.] 3408. Renngarten, V. P., 1927a, Apergu des gisements de mi- ndreaux utiles et des sources mindrales du Daghestan meridional: [Russia], Glavnoe geologo-razvedochnoe upravlenie Isv. (Comite geol. Bulls.), v. 46, no. 3, p. 207-244, 2 figs., map. [Russian, French summary.] 3409. 1927b, Description geologique des environs des sources minerales de Matsesta et d’Agoura: Geol. Komitet, Materialy (Comite gdol., Materiaux geologie gen. et appl.) no. 56, 108 p., 3 pis. [Russian, French summary.] 3410. 1932, Mineral springs in the region of the Georgian military road: [Russia], Glavnoe geologo-razvedochnoe upravlenie Trudy (United Geol. and Prosp. Service U.S.S.R. Trans.), no. 156, 96 p., 4 pis., map. [Russian, English summary p. 93-94; French summary p. 94-96.] 3411. Rodevich, V. M., ed., 1936 [Handbook on water resources of the U.S.S.R.]: v. 16, Lena-Yenesei region, no. 1; v. 17, Lena-Indigirka region, nos. 1 and 2. [Russian.] 3412. Sazonov, Y. V., 1929, Les sources mincrales de Poliustrovo: [Russia], Glavnoe geologo-razvedochnoe upravlenie Izv. (Comity gdol. Bulls.), v. 48, pt. 1, p. 585-590,1 fig. (v. 48, no. 4, p. 147-152). [Russian, French title.]BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 3413. Schmidt, K., 1885, Die Thermalwasser Kamtschatka’s: Acad. Sd. St. Petersbourg Mem. 7, v. 32, no. 18. 3414. Schuyler, Eugene, 1877, Turkistan; Notes of a journey in Russian Turkistan, Khokand, Bukhara, and Kuldja: New York, Scribner, Armstrong & Co., 2 v.; v. 1, 411 p., front., 9 illus., 15 figs.; v. 2, 463 p., 14 illus., map. Describes a visit to the springs of Arassan. 3415. Semenof, P. P., 1861, First ascent of the Tian-Shan or Celestial Mountains, and visit to the upper course of the Jaxartes or Syr-Daria, in 1857: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 31, p. 356-366, map; translated into English from the Russian edition by John Michell. Describes a visit to the springs of Arassan. 3416. Shadin, W. J., 1927, Radix perega Mull, var. geisericola Beck in einer Therme am Ufer des Baikalsees: Russ-ische hydrobiol. Zeitschr., v. 6, p. 142-143. Russian, German summary.] 3417. Shavrova, N. N., 1938 [Determination of the radioactivi- ties of gases of the secondary volcanoes of the Klyuchev-skaya Mountain (in Kamchatka)] : Vulcanicheskoi Sta. Kamchatke Byull. 1938, no. 2, p. 37-40 [Russian] ; 1940, Chem. Abs., v. 34, col. 6164. 3418. Shevchenko, Z. G., 1938, Mineralnye vody Azerbaidzhana i ikh znachenie dlya naseleniya: Akad. Nauk SSSR, Azerbaidzhanskiy Filial, Trudy XI/54, 60 p., illus.; 1951, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 15, 1950, p. 268. 3419. Shinkarenko, A. L., 1948 [The gas component and content of microelements in mineral springs of the Caucasian mineral waters] : Akad. Nauk SSSR, Lab. Gidrogeol. Problem Trudy, v. 3, p. 253-263 [Russian] ; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 9529. .3420. Shitikov, M. F., 1931, Hydrogeological explorations in the reigon of the Ijevskoi mineral spring during the year 1926: [Russia], Glavnoe geologo-razvedochnoe uprav-lenie Izv. (United Geol. and Prosp. Service U.S.S.R. Bulls.), v. 50, pt. 2, p. 827-833, 2 tables (pt. 53, p. 21-27). [Russian, English summary.] 3421. Sinzov, I., 1909 [On certain new springs, well borings, and thermal waters in Russia] : Russische-k. Mineralog. Gesell. Verh., v. 47, p. 175-191, 193-208. [Russian.] 3422. Slavyanov, N. N., 1950 [History of mineral springs and health resort Zheleznovodsk]: Akad. Nauk SSSR, Lab. Gidrogeol. Problem imeni F. P. Savarenskogo Trudy, v. 8, 118 p. [Russian] ; 1954, Chem. Abs., v. 48, col. 14051. 3423. Slavyanov, N. N., and others, 1938, Termy y gazy Tyana- Shana: Acad. Sci. U.S.S.R. (Akad. Nauk SSSR), Council for research on productive forces, 279 p., pis., figs., maps, tables. Consists of the following papers: Slavyanov, N. N., Thermal springs of the Tian Shan; Grushe, P. A., Geological description of the thermal springs Djety-oguz and Ak-su; Mashkovtsev, S. F., Thermal springs of the Issyk-ata; Gatalsky, M. A., The Kara-baity thermal springs; Grigoryeva, V. S.. Thermal springs of the Ala-Medyn; Shumov, V. V., Thermal springs and gases on the southern slope of the Kunguey-Alatau; Karstens, E. E., Thermal springs in Tajikistan; Sarycheva, T. G., Geological structure of the Ayak-kalgan thermal springs region; Lidin, G. D., Thermal springs and gases of the Jarkent region in the Tian-Shan; Dubarsky, M. B., Thermal springs and gases of the Kopal region in the Jungar Alatau; Makarenko, F. A., The Kopal-arasan 371 thermal springs; and Karstens, E. E., Thermal springs in Kazakhstan. 3424. Smirnow, W., 1870, Guide aux eaux min^rales du Caucase: Moscow, 279 p., 3 illus., 1 table; Russian ed., 1879. 3425. Smolko, G. I., 1932, The iodic springs in the western part of the Turkmenian S.S.R. (in Boiadag, Mondjukly, and Nephtedag) : [Russia], Glavnoe geologo-razvedochnoe upravlenie Trudy (United Geol. and Prosp. Service U.S.S.R. Trans.), no. 175, 72 p., 4 figs., 8 tables. [Russian, English summary.] 3426. Sokolov, D. V., and Stopnevich, A. D., 1917, Sources min^rales de Stolypino: Geol. Komitet, Materialy (Comity geol., Materiaux geologie gen. et appl. no. 19, 28 p., 2 pis. [Russian, French title.] 3427. Starik, I. E., 1943, Radiological study of Caucasian region mineral waters: Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S., Cl. Sci. chim., Bull. 1943, p. 435-442 [Russian, English summary] ; 1945, Chem. Abs., v. 39, col. 1592. 3428. Tageeva, N. V., 1948 [Mineral waters of Dzhermuk (Isti- Su) in Armenia] : Akad. Nauk SSSR, Lab. Gidrogeol. Problem imeni F. P. Savarenskogo Trudy, v. 1, p. 212-220 [Russian] ; 1952, Chem. Abs., v. 46, col. 4151. 3429. Tkachuk, V. G., 1958, Types of thermal springs in the Sayan-Baikal Mountain region: Acad. Sci. U.S.S.R., Geol. Sci. Sec., Proc. (Akad. Nauk SSSR Doklady) ; English translation, v. 118, nos. 1-6, p. 181-184, 3 figs. 3430. Tolmachev, P. I., 1932 [Tian-Shan gaseous springs]: Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. Bull. 1932, p. 51-64 [Russian] ; 1933, Chem. Abs., v. 27, p. 3762. 3431. 1933, L’h61ium dans les gaz des sources thermales du Pamir: Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. (Akad. Nauk) Doklady, 1933-A, p. 94-97. [Russian, French title.] 3432. Tolstikhin, N. I., 1938 [Mineral water provinces of the U.S.S.R.] : Sovetskaya geologiya, v. 8, no. 3, p. 240-243, 1 fig. [Russian] ; 1936, Chem. Abs., v. 33, col. 4355. 3433. Tolstikhin, N. I., and Dzens-Litovsky, A. I., 1937, Mineral waters of northern Asia in connection with its geologic structure and tectonics: Internat. Geol. Cong., 17th, Moscow, Pamph., “Additional abstracts of papers.” [English.] 3434. Tolstikhin, N. I., and Tambovtseva, O. S., 1938 [Mineral springs of the Far Eastern provinces] : Razvedka Nedr 1938, no. 8-9, p. 30-34 [Russian] ; 1939, Khim. Referat. Zhur. 2, no. 1, p. 30; Chem. Abs., v. 9501. 3435. Tolstikhin, O. N., 1958 [The hot springs of the Kamchatka peninsula, and the problems of their utilization] : Sovetskaya Geologiya 1958, no. 2, p. 109-133 [Russian] ; Chem. Abs., v. 52, col. 11323. 3436. Tooke, William, 1799, View of the Russian Empire during the reign of Catherine the second and to the close of the present century: London, T. N. Longman & O. Rees, 3 v.; v. 1, 564 p., map; v. 2,612 p.; v. 3, 694 p. Mentions several thermal springs in widely scattered parts of Russia. 3437. Tsebricoff, P. de, 1928, Quelques observations concernant les eaux mindrales du Caucase: Rev. universelle mines, 7th ser., v. 20, no. 2, p. 66-82. 3438. Ustinova, T. I., 1946, Geizery na Kamchatke: Vsesoyuz. Geog. Obshehestvo Izv., v. 78, no. 4, p. 393-402; 1957, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 20,1955, p. 557.372 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 3439. Ustinova, T. I., 1949 [The geysers of Kamchatka] : Akad. Nauk SSSR, Lab. Gidrogeol. Problem imeni F. P. Sava-ranskogo Trudy, v. 2, p. 144-157, map [Russian] ; 1953, Chem. Abs., v. 47, col. 7702. 3440. 1955, Kamehatskie geizery: Akad. Nauk SSSR, Inst. Geog. [Moscow], 120 p., illus.; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 21, 1956, p. 612. 3441. Vasilievsky, M. M., 1931, The hot Pitatelevsky spring in Transbaikalia : East-Siberian Br. Geol. and Prosp. Survey, Geology and Mineral Resources East Siberia Rees., no. 4, p. 5-46, 3 pis., 11 figs., 15 tables, map. [Russian, English summary.] 3442. Vasilievsky, M. M., Bogoiavlensky, L. N., and Kobzeva, A. S., 1926, Les sources thermales de Bielokourikha dans 1’Altai : Geol. Komitet, Materialy (Comite g<5ol., Ma-t<5riaux g^ologie gen. et appl.) no. 46, 54 p., 7 figs., 12 tables. [Russian, French summaries.] Consists of the following papers: Vasilievsky, M. M., The thermal springs of Bielokourikha: Bogoiaviensky, L. N., The causes of radioactivity of the thermal springs of Bielokourikha ; Kobzeva, A. S., Chemical study of the thermal springs of Bielokourikha. 3443. Vasilievsky, M. M., and Ivtchenko, P., 1927, Apergu geo- logique des sources minerales du Psecoups: [Russia], Glavnoe Geologo-Razvedochnoe upravlenie Isv. (Comite geol. Bulls.), v. 46, no 3, p. 269-279, 3 figs. [Russian, French summary.] 3444. Vasilievsky, M. M., and Naletov, P. I., 1931, Geological outlines of Pitatelevsky spring of the Selenga River, Buriat-Mongolian A.S.S.R.: East-Siberian Br. Geol. and Prosp. Survey, Geology and Mineral Resources East Siberia Rees., no. 4, p. 47-56, map. [Russian, English summary.] 3445. Veselovskii, N. V., 1941 [Radioactivity of mineral waters of the resort Sochi-Matsesta, determined on the location in the fall of 1938] : Gidrokhim. Materialy, v. 12, p. 43-46 [Russian, German summary] ; 1943, Chem. Abs., v. 37, col. 4008. 3446. Vinogradov, I. V., 1939 [The Shatki (Gor’kii region) bal- neary resort and the Shatki sapropelic mud] : Voprosy Kurortologii 1939, no. 2, p. 53-56 [Russian] ; 1939, Khim. Referat. Zhur., no. 11, p. 29; 1940, Chem. Abs., v. 34, col. 7493. 3447. Yanovskiy, P. L., compiler, 1957, Mineral waters of the USSR: 2d ed., Moscow, Food Industries, 120 p., 53 illus. [Russian.] 3448. Zavaritsky, A. N., 1936, K voprosu o genezice Tiflisskikh term: Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. (Akad. Nauk), Inst. Geol. Travaux, v. 5, p. 79-94; 1937, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 4, 1936, p. 317. 3449. Zeverev, K. S., Levchenko, V. M., and Miller, E. I., 1947 Determination of gold in Matsesta waters] : Gidro-khim. Materialy, v. 13, p. 258-260 [Russian] ; 1951, Chem. Abs., v. 45, col. 8170. See also references 43,167, 1293,1737, 2694, 2807. PACIFIC REGION AUSTRALIA 3450. Anonymous, 1892, Notes on thermal springs in New South Wales [Queensland] : Nature [London], v. 46, no. 1185, p. 256. 3451. Anonymous, 1951, Thermal springs in Queensland: Inter- nat. Union Geodesy and Geophysics Assoc. Sci. Hydrology, Gen. Assem., Oslo 1949, Trans., v. 3, p. 198-200. 3452. Brown, H. Y. Lyell, 1888, The Mesozoic plains of South Australia: Australian Assoc. Adv. Sci. Proc., v. 1, p. 241-245. States that warm springs emerge near the contact of the Cretaceous strata with bedrock. 3453. Bruck, Ludwig, 1891, The mineral springs of Australia: Australian Med. Gazette, Jan., p. 97-106. 3454. Burge, C. O., 1907, The artesian water supply of Aus- tralia : Eng. Rec., v. 56, no. 20, p. 551-552. Includes information on several deep flowing wells. 3455. Daintree, R., 1872, Notes on the geology of the Colony of Queensland: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 28, p. 271-317, 3 pis., 19 figs., map. Describes deposit of trona at a hot spring near Gibson’s cattle station on the Saxby River. 3456. David, Tannatt William Edgeworth, 1950, The geology of the Commonwealth of Australia, edited and much supplemented by W. R. Browne: London, E. Arnold & Co., 3 v.; v. 1, Hist, geology, 747 p.; v. 2, Physiography, Econ. geology, 618 p.; v. 3, atlas. Describes several artesian basins, particularly the Great Australian Artesian Basin. Mentions several thermal-spring localities and states that the boring of wells to tap the artesian reservoirs has reduced or stopped the flow from several springs. 3457. Grant, Kerr, 1938, The radioactivity and composition of the water and gases of the Paralana hot spring: Royal Soc. South Australia Trans., v. 62, pt. 2, p. 357-365, lpl., 2 figs. 3458. Gregory, John Walter, 1906, The dead heart of Aus- tralia—A journey around Lake Eyre in the summer of 1901-1902, with some account of the Lake Eyre basin and the flowing wells of Central Australia: London, J. Murray, 384 p., 32 illus. Contains information on the mound springs of Queensland and the springs along the lower Flinders River; discusses the temperature gradient in artesian wells. 3459. 1911, The flowing wells of central Australia: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 38, no. 1, p. 34-59; no. 2, p. 157-181,16 figs. Mentions the geysers and hot springs in the Eastern Highlands of Australia, the hot springs at Herberton, the geysers along the Einasleigh River, and the high temperature of the water in deep bore holes. 3460. Henderson, J. Baillie, 1909, Tables of artesian borings, perennial springs, and water analyses: Queensland, Water Supply Dept. Rept., 1908, p. 41-52. Includes data on the Herberton thermal spring, which probably is a bored well. 3461. Herman, H., 1914, Economic geology and mineral resources of Victoria: Victoria Geol. Survey Bull. 34, 36 p. States that 85 mineral springs are known in Victoria but gives no information on water temperatures. 3462. Irrigation and Water Supply Commission of Australia, 1954, Springleigh Bore: Official commun. to G. A. Waring. Contains detailed information on the Springleigh bore. Also includes information on a deep well at Elderslie and mentions hot springs at Ambo and Innot Spa. Discusses the thermal gradient in various places in Australia.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 373 3463. Jack, Robert Logan, and Etheridge, Robert, Jr., 1892, The geology and paleontology of Queensland and New Guinea: Queensland, Minister Mines and Public Instruction Pub. 92, 768 p., 68 pis., map. Describes the mound springs of South Australia, the mud springs along the lower Minders River, two springs near Mount Brown, the Einasleigh, Innot Creek, and Inniskillen hot springs, and hot mud springs near Thar-gomindah, all in Queensland. Also describes hydrothermal activity on Fergusson and Dobu (Goulvain) Islands in the D’Entrecasteaux Group and mentions that steam issues from the sides of Mount Victory on the northeast coast of New Guinea. 3464. Marks, Edward Oswald, 1911, The Oaks and eastern por- tion of the Etheridge goldfields: Queensland Geol. Survey Pub. 234, 30 p., 4 pis., 3 figs., 2 maps. Mentions the Einasleigh hot springs, also warm springs in the Gilbert River 10-12 miles upstream from Gilberton. 3465. Mawson, Douglas, 1927, The Paralana hot spring: Royal Soc. South Australia Trans, and Proc., v. 51, p. 391-397. 3466. Miles, Beryl, 1954, The stars my blanket: London, J. Murray, 235 p., front., 16 pis., map. Describes a spring at the Mataranka tourist resort 224 miles southeast of Darwin; also mentions an artesian well near the Springvale cattle station and the artesian wells at Quilpie, about 100 miles north-northeast of Thargomindah cattle station. 3467. Palmer, E., 1885, Hot springs and mud eruptions on the Lower Flinders River: Royal Soc. Queensland Proc., 1884, v. 1, pt. 1, p. 19-23. Describes the hydrothermal activity along the lower Flinders River. Also describes springs near Mount Brown and mentions springs about 10 miles north of Gamboola Station on the Mitchell River and a spring on the Einasleigh River about 30 miles from Georgetown. 3468. Ward, L. Keith, 1950, Underground water in Australia. 3, Australian artesian basins; The Great Australian Basin: Chem. Eng. Mining Rev., v. 43, no. 3, p. 97-107, 7 figs. BISMARCK ARCHIPELAGO AND EASTERN NEW GUINEA 3469. Baker, George, 1946, Preliminary note on volcanic erup- tions in the Goropu Mountains, southeastern Papua, during the period December, 1943 to August, 1944: Jour. Geology, v. 54, no. 1, p. 19-31, 5 figs. Mentions steam and sulfurous vapors related to volcanic activity in the Goropu Mountains and on the D’Entrecasteaux Islands. 3470. Best, J. G., 1956, Investigations of recent volcanic ac- tivity in the Territory of New Guinea: Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Quezon City, Philippines, 1953, Proc., v. 2, p. 180-294, 12 pis. Describes fumaroles on Mount Langila on New Britain Island, on Lou and Baluan Islands in the Admiralty Group, and on Manam (Vulcan) Island 10 miles from the northeast coast of New Guinea. 3471. Fisher, N. H., 1957, Melanesia, pt. 5 of Catalogue of active volcanoes of the world including solfatara fields: Naples, Italy, Internat. Volcanolog. Assoc., 105 p., 41 figs., map. Contains information on volcanoes and associated solfataras in the Admiralty Group, the coastal islands of New Guinea, New Britain, Papua, the D’Entrecas- teaux Islands, small islands east of New Ireland, Solomon Islands, Santa Cruz Islands, New Hebrides Islands, Matthew Island, and Hunter Island. 3472. Lehmann, E., 1908, Petrographische Untersuchungen an Eruptivgesteinen von der Insel Neupommern; unter be-sonderer Beriieksichtigung der eutektischen Verhaltnisse pyroxenandesitischer Magmen : Tschermak’s mineralog. petrog. Mitt., v. 27, p. 181-243, 6 figs., 1 table. Describes hot springs near the shore of Hannam and North Islands in the Bismarck Archipelago. 3473. Liversidge, A., 1880, Water from a hot spring, New Brit- ain : Chem. News, v. 42, p. 324; Royal Soc. New South Wales Proc., v. 14, p. 145, 1881. 3474. 1890, Note upon the hot spring waters of Fergusson Island, D’Entrecasteaux Group: British New Guinea, Ann. Rept., 1888-89. 3475. Noakes, L. C., 1942, Geological reports on New Britain: New Guinea, Geol. Bull. 3. Contains mention of thermal springs. 3476. Sapper, Karl, 1910a, Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse einer amtlichen Forschungsreise nach dem Bismarck-Archipel im Jahre 1908. I, Beitrage zur Landeskunde von Neu-Mecklenburg und seinen Nachbarinseln: Deutsche Schutzgebiete Mitt. Erganzungsheft 3, p. 1-130. Mentions spouting hot springs on Ambitle Island off the coast of New Ireland. 3477. 1910b, Beitrage zur Kenntnis Neupommerns und des Kaiser-Wilhelm-Landes: Petermanns Geog. Mitt., v. 56, p. 189-193, 255-256, 2 maps. Describes fumaroles, solfataras, and boiling mud springs on New Britain Island. 3478. 1910c, Neu-Mecklenburg: Deutscher Geographentag, 17th, Liibeck, 1-6 Juni, 1909, Verh., p. 141-168. Mentions hot springs at Lihir (Lir) near Luisehafen, and at Feni (Anir) on the Hibernian Islands. Among those at Feni is Geyser Balamusson. 3479. Stanley, Evan R., 1919, Australia, Territory of Papua annual report, for 1917-1918: 99 p., maps. Describes hot springs 65 miles west-northwest of the Goropu Mountains. 3480. 1920, Report on the geology of Fergusson Island (Mora-tau) : Minister for Home and Territories, Terr. Papua, Bull. 6, 27 p., 13 figs., map. Mentions several thermal-spring localities. 3481. 1924, The geology of Papua. (To accompany the geological map of the Territory of Papua) : Papua Geol. Survey, 56 p., 50 figs. Describes hydrothermal activity at two locations on Fergusson Island and at three on Normanby Island. See also references 83, 562, 564, 773, and 3463. BORNEO (North Borneo, Brunei, Sarawak, and Kalimantan) 3482. Everett, Alfred Hart, 1878, Volcanic phenomena in Bor- neo : Nature [London], v. 17, p. 200-201. Cites the existence of thermal springs in Borneo as proof of former volcanic activity on the island. 3483. Posewitz, Tirador (Theodor), 1889, Borneo * * * Ver- breitung der nutzbaren Mineralien: Berlin; 1892, translated into English by Frederick H. Hatch, with title, Borneo—its geology and mineral resources: London, E. Stanford, 495 p., 18 figs., 4 maps. Describes several thermal-spring localities in North, South, and West Borneo and in Sarawak.374 THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD CELEBES 3484. Bickmore, Albert Smith, 1868, Travels in the East Indian Archipelago: New York, D. Appleton & Co., 553 p., 36 illus., map. Describes a hot spring near Langowan village and an area of mud pools at the northeast end of Celebes. Also mentions a hot sulfur spring on Damar Island and a warm spring on the flank of Maninyu volcanic crater in Sumatra. 3485. Fairchild, David Grandison, 1943, Garden islands of the great East: New York, C. Scribner’s Sons, 239 p., front., 124 views. States that several of the volcanoes on Celebes are in the solfataric stage: also that steam and sulfur fumes issue at a sulfur mine on the upper slope of Sapoetan. 3486. Guillemard, Francis Henry Hill, 1894, Australasia, v. 2, Malaysia and the Pacific archipelagoes: London, Edward Stanford, 694 p.; 2d ed., 1908, revised by A. H. Keane, 574 p„ front., 47 illus., 16 maps; London, Edward Stanford, Stanford’s compendium of geography and travel, new issue. States that there are numerous hot springs, mud volcanoes, solfataras, and gas vents on Celebes. Also mentions boiling springs on Batjan Island in the Moluccas, the smoking volcano on Ternate Island, hot springs on Tidore Island, hot springs on Ceram Island, and the active volcano of Goenoeng Api (Gunongapi) Island in the Banda Group. 3487. Hickson, Sydney John, 1889, A naturalist in North Celebes: London, J. Murray, 392 p., front., 35 figs., maps. Mentions hot-water springs near Langowan village in Celebes. 3488. Van Spreeuwenberg, M. A. F. 1848, A glance at Min- hassa [Minahassa] : Jour. Indian Archipelago and Eastern Asia, v. 2, p. 825-845. Mentions the hot springs in northeastern Celebes. 3489. Wallace, Alfred Russel, 1869, The Malay archipelago; the land of the orangutan, and the bird of paradise—A narrative of travel, with studies of man and nature: London, Macmillan & Co., 2 v.; v. 1, 478 p., 27 illus., 5 maps; v. 2, 524 p., front., 23 illus., 4 maps. Describes hydrothermal activity near Panghu in Celebes, See also references 16, 73, 74, 3516, 3532, and 3725. FIJI 8490. Agassiz, Alexander Emanuel, 1899, The islands and coral reefs of Fiji: Harvard College Mus. Comp. Zoology Bull., v. 33,167 p., 120 pis., 44 figs. States that Ngau Island, the Great Astrolabe Reef, Vanua Mbalavu, and Rambe Islands are either partly or wholly composed of volcanic rocks. Hot springs on these islands are related closely to these rocks. 3491. 1903, The coral reefs of the tropical Pacific: Harvard Coll. Mus. Comp. Zoology Mem., v. 28, 410 p., 238 pis. Describes the geology of the Tonga Islands, several of which contain hot springs. 3492. Andrews, Ernest Clayton, 1900, Notes on the limestones and general geology of the Fiji Islands, with special reference to the Lau Group, based upon surveys made for Alexander Agassiz: Harvard Coll. Mus. Comp. Zoology Bull., v. 38 (Geol. ser., v. 5, no. 1), 50 p., 40 pis. Describes two hot springs near the shore of Vanua Mbalavu. 3493. Brock, Reginald Walter, 1924, Sketch of the geology of Viti Levu, Great Fiji: Royal Soc. Canada Proc. and Trans., 3d ser., v. 18, see. 4, p. 63-83,2 figs. Mentions hot springs at Tavua and in the Namosi district. 3494. Buchner, Max, 1878, Reise durch den stillen Ozean. Mentions hot springs on the coast of Kandavu Island. 3495. Foye, Wilbur Garland, 1918, Geological observations in Fiji: Am. Acad. Arts and Sci. Proc., v. 54, no. 1, p. 1-145, front., 40 figs. Mentions hot springs near Lambasa and in the southern part of Fiji. 3496. Gordon-Cumming, Constance Frederica, 1881, At home in Fiji: Edinburgh, W. Blackwood & Sons; new ed., 1882, New York, A. C. Armstrong, 365 p., front., 3 illus. Describes thermal springs on Ngau Island, along the shore of Savu Savu Bay on Vanua Levu Island, and near Loma Loma on Vanua Mbalavu Island. Also describes a visit to the geyser region of New Zealand. 3497. Guppy, Henry Brougham, 1903, Observations of a nat- uralist in the Pacific between 1896 and 1899; v. 1, Vanua Levu, Fiji, a description of its leading physical and geological characters: London, Macmillan & Co., Ltd.; New York, Macmillan Co., 392 p., 5 pis., 20 figs. Contains data on 23 thermal-spring localities on Vanua Levu Island, including the well known springs of Savu Savu, Wainanu, Nukumbolo, Mbati-ni-Kama, and Na Kama. 3498. Horne, John, 1881, A year in Fiji, or an inquiry into the botanical, agricultural, and economical resources of the colony: London, E. Stanford, 297 p., 1 pi. Describes visits to several thermal-spring localities in Fiji. 3499. Kleinschmidt, T., 1879, Reisen auf den Viti-Inseln : Jour. Mus. Godeffroy [Hamburg], no. 14. Contains a description of a visit to the warm springs near Nambualu village on Ono Island. 3500. Ladd, Harry Stephen, 1934, Geology of Vitilevu, Fiji: Bernice P. Bishop Mus. Bull. 119, 263 p., 44 pis., 11 figs., 7 tables. Contains information on several thermal springs. 3501. Liversidge, A., 1880, Water from a hot spring, Fiji Islands : Chem. News [London], v. 42, p. 324-325 ; Royal Soc. New South Wales Jour, and Proc., v. 14, p. 147-148, 1881. 3502. MacDonald, John Denis, 1857, Proceedings of the expedi- tion for the exploration of the Rewa River and its tributaries, in Na Viti Levu, Fiji Islands: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 27, p. 232-268, map. Mentions two warm springs near Na Seivau village. 3503. Thiele, H. H., 1891, Rewa River, Fiji: Scottish Geog. Mag., v. 7, no. 8, p. 434-441,1 pi., map. Cites hot springs in the Wai-Dina as evidence of volcanic activity on Viti Levu. 3504. Usher, Leonard G., ed., 1943, Fiji—Handbook of the Colony: Suva, Fiji, A. Barker, 96 p., 16 pis., map. Cites thermal springs as evidence of volcanic activity on Vanua Levu. 3505. Wilkes, Charles, 1845, Narrative of the United States Exploring Expedition during the years 1838-1842: Philadelphia, Pa., Lee & Blanchard, 5 v. and atlas; v. 3, 438 p., 11 pis., 50 woodcuts, 10 vignettes. Describes hot springs along the shore of Savu Savu Bay on Vanua Levu Island.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 375 3506. Williams, Thomas, and Calvert, James, 1870, Fiji and the Fijians, edited by George Stringer Rowe: 3d ed., London, Hodder & Stoughton, 592 p., front., 41 illus., map. Cites the presence of thermal springs on Vanua Levu and Ngau Islands as proof of the volcanic orgin of the Fiji Islands. 3507. Wright, C. Harold, 1922, The hot springs of Nasavusavu: Fiji Dept. Agriculture, Agr. Circ., v. 3, no. 1, p. 5-7. Suva, Fiji. 3508. 1926, The hot springs at Nasavusavu: Analyst [London], v. 51, p. 235-237. See also references 20, 73, 74, and 347. GALAPAGOS ISLANDS 3509. Banfield, A. F.; Behre, Charles H., Jr.; and St. Clair, David, 1956, Geology of Isabela (Albemarle) Island, Arehipielago de Colon (Ga 1Apages) : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 67, no. 2, p. 215-234, 4 pis., 4 figs., 2 tables. Describes hydrothermal activity in the craters and on the slopes of Volcan Alcedo, Volcan Grande, and Volcan Wolf. 3510. Beebe, Charles William, 1926, The Arcturus adventure; ■an account of the New York Zoological Society’s first oceanographic expedition: New York and London, G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 439 p., 8 pis., 69 figs. Describes an eruption of Volcan Wolf in 1925 and states that several fumaroles were produced. 3511. Chubb, Lawrence John, 1933, Geology of Galapagos, Cocos, and Easter Islands: B. P. Bishop Mus. Bull. 110, 68 p., 9 figs. States that vapors were discharged and fumaroles formed during eruption in northern part of Albemarle Island in 1926. See also reference 43. JAVA 3512. Abel, Clarke, 1818, Narrative of a journey in the interior of China, and of a voyage to and from that country, in the years 1816 and 1817: London, Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme, & Brown, 420 p., quarto, front., 6 pis., map. Describes mineral springs at Epetan in Java and Los Banos on Luzon Island in the Philippines. 3513. Adams, William Henry Davenport, 1880, The Eastern Archipelago—A description of the scenery, animal and vegetable life, people, and physical wonders of the islands in the eastern seas: London and New York, T. Nelson & Sons, 576 p., front., 54 illus., map. Mentions several thermal-spring localities in Java, also hot springs and geysers on Batjan Island in the Moluccas. 3514. d’Almeida, William Barrington, 1864, Life in Java; with sketches of the Javanese: London, Hurst & Blackett, 2 v.; v. 1,319 p., front.; v. 2, 303 p., front. Mentions several hydrothermal localities. 3515. Bemmelen, Reinout Willem van, 1934, Geologische Kaart van Java, 1:100,000 Schaal; Toelichting bij Dienst Mijnb. Ned-Ind: The Hague, Govt. Printer, p. 1-95, pis., figs. Shows the locations of several thermal springs. 3516. 1949, The geology of Indonesia : The Hague, Govt. Printing Office, 2 v. and portfolio; v. 1A, General geology of Indonesia and adjacent archipelagoes, 732 p., 378 figs., 124 tables; v. IB, Portfolio, 41 pis., figs., table; v. 2, Economic geology of Indonesia, 265 p., 52 figs., 56 tables. Discusses the mineral deposits associated with hydro-thermal activity in several places in Java. 3517. Fliickiger, F. A., 1862, Ueber den Salzaurebach Sungi Part in Ost-Java: Naturf. Gesell. Bern Mitt., p. 17-20. Describes a saline sulfate brook fed in part by thermal springs. 3518. Forbes, Henry Ogg, 1885, A naturalist’s wanderings in the Eastern Archipelago; A narrative of travel and exploration from 1878 to 1883 : New York, Harper & Bros., 536 p., front., 78 illus., 32 figs., 6 maps. Mentions thermal springs at Tjipanas village, along the south border of Ranau Lake, and at the east base of Kaba volcano. 3519. Fresenius, C. Remigius, 1843, Chemische Untersuchung zweier Mineralwasser der Insel Java: Annalen Chemie u. Pharmacie (Liebig), v. 45, p. 308-318; Belique Jour. Pharmacie, v. 4, p. 63-66,1843. Describes the warm springs of Platungen. 3520. Hartmann, M., 1933, Bijdrage tot de kennis van gassen, sublimatie-en inkrustatieprodukten en thermale wateren in de Merapi-Ladoe’s: Vulkanol. en seismol. Mededeel. 12, Dienst van den Mdjnbouw in Nederlandsch Indie, p. 117-131, 1 fig.; 1935, abs., Rev. geologi, v. 15, p. 242. 3521. Horsfield, Thomas, 1816, On the mineralogy of Java. Essay I: Batavia, Genoot. Verh., v. 8, p. 141-173. Describes a thermal lake in the crater of Tankuban-Prahu volcano, hot-water wells at the base of the Pana-wangan hills in Cheribon, and warm mud pools between the districts of Grobogan on the west and Blora and Jipang on the east. 3522. Jukes, Joseph Beete, 1847, Narrative of the surveying voy- age of H.M.S. Fly, commanded by Captain F. P. Blackwood, R.N., in Torres Strait, New Guinea, and other islands of the Eastern Archipelago, during the years 1842-1846; together with an excursion into the interior of the eastern part of Java: London, T. & W. Boone, 2 v. ; v. 1, 423 p., front., 24 illus; v. 2, 362 p., front., 11 illus. Describes hot springs in a small valley about 2 miles from Batu in Java. 3523. Junghuhn, Franz Wilhelm, 1845, Reise durch die Insel Java [Journey through Java] : Annalen Nat. History, v. 16, p. 329-332, 462-466; v. 17, p. 46-48, 469-476. 3524. 1852-54, Java, seine Gestalt, Pflanzendecke, und innere Bauart: Leipzig, Germany, Arnold, 3 v., atlas; 1852, v. 1, Die Gestalt und Bekleidung des Landes, 483 p., illus.; 1854, v. 2, Die Vulkane und vulkanischen Erscheinungen. 964 p., illus.; 1854, v. 3, Die neptunischen Gebirge, 314 p., illus. Includes a description of Platungen springs; also contains information on several other thermal springs and fumaroles. 3525. Junghuhn, Friedrich, 1845, Topographische und natur- wissenschaftliche Reisen durch Java, with introduction by C. G. Nees von Esenbeck: Magdeburg, Germany, K. Leopold-Carol Akad. Naturf., 520 p., 38 pis., 2 maps. Contains chemical analyses of water from three thermal springs and from thermal lake Telaga-bodas. 735-914 0—6! -25THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 376 3526. Kemmerling, Georg Laure Louis, 1919, Het Idgen-Hoog- land. De Geologie en Geomorphologie van den Idgen: Batavia, G. Kolff & Co., Koninkl. Natuur. Ver., 169 p., 58 pis., 24 figs., 3 maps. Describes fumaroles, solfataras, and mofettes of the Kawah-Idgen and Goenoeng Raoeng areas in eastern Java, also several thermal springs and their deposits of travertine. Contains chemical analyses of water from thermal springs and the crater lake in the Idgen-Merapi volcanic area. 3527. Maier, P. J., 1850-51 [Analyses of mineral waters of Java] : Naturk. Tijdschr. Nederland. Indie. 3528. Meunier, Stanislas, 1886, Examen d’eaux minSrales de Java: Acad. sci. [Paris] Comptes rendus, v. 103, p. 1205-1207. Contains information on three mineral springs near Kapouran. 3529. Neumann van Padang, Maur, 1933, De Uitbarsting van den Merapi (Midden Java) in de Jaren 1930-31: Vulkanol. en seismol. Mededeel., Dienst. van den Mijnbouw in Nederlandsch Indie, no. 12, 135 p., 7 pis., figs.; appendix and English summary by M. Hartmann. Contains map showing the location of hot springs near Merapi volcano. 3530. Raffles, Thomas Stamford, 1817, The history of Java: London, Black, Parbury, & Allen, 2 v.; v. 1, 479 p., front., 24 pis., map; 2d ed., 2 v., 1830, London, J. Murray. Quotes the information given in reference 3521 on thermal water. 3531. Stevens, Horace J., 1904-05 [Copper in Java] : Chicago, M. A. Donohue & Co., Copper Handb., 1904, v. 4, 1903, p. 156; 1905, v. 5,1904, p. 156. States that iodide of copper is obtained by evaporating water from springs in the Kendeng district. 3532. Yerbeek, Rogier Diederik Marius, and Fennema, Reinder, 1896, Geologische Beschrijving van Java en Madoera: Amsterdam, J. G. Stemler Co., 2 v.; atlas; v. 1, p. 1-503, 11 pis., 17 views; v. 2, p. 504-1135, 8 views; French ed., 1896, 2 v., 1183 p., atlas; 1898, summary, Petermanns Geog. Mitt., v. 44, p. 24-33,1 pi. Contains data on thermal springs in nine localities in east Java. See also references 16, 20, 83, 94,109, 3725, and 3727. KERMADEC ISLANDS 3533. Smith, Stephenson Percy, 1887, The Kermadec Islands, their capabilities and extent: Wellington, New Zealand, G. Didsbury, 29 p. Mentions steam vents on the banks of Green Lake, and steam vents and a small warm spring at Denham Bay, both on Sunday Island. 3534. 1888, Geological notes on the Kermadec Group: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1887, v. 20, p. 333-344. Contains information, similar to that in reference 3533, on hydrothermal activity on Sunday Island. Also mentions solfataras, fumaroles, boiling mud ponds, and a hot spring on the eastern of the two Curtis Islands 90 miles south of Sunday Island. MOLUCCA ISLANDS 3535. Encyclopedia Britannica, 1910, Amboyna (Dutch Ambon) : 11th ed., New York, Encyclopaedia Britannica, v. 1, p. 797. Mentions the hot springs and solfataras on Wawani and Salhutu mountains. 3536. Emmons, William Harvey, 1931, Geology of petroleum: 2d ed., New York and London, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 736 p., 435 figs. Mentions the hot sulfur springs and mud volcanoes on the northeast side of Ceram. 3537. Ten Kate, Herman F. C., 1894 [Mud volcanoes in Samau Island] : Tidjschr. Koninkl. Nederland. Aard. Gen., p. 350-358. 3538. United States Navy Department, 1935, Sailing directions for Celebes: Washington, HO 163, 628 p. Mentions the hot springs on the beach near the mouth of Wai Mantana and in the basin of River Made, both localities in the Sula (Xulla) Islands. 3539. Verbeek, Rogier Diedrik Marius, 1905, Description geo- logique de l’lsle d’Ambon. French edition translated from Mijnw. in Nederlandsch Oost-Indie Jaarb.: v. 35, pt. sci., 323 p., figs., maps. Contains information on several thermal springs. 3540. 1908, Rapport sur les Moluques. French edition translated from Mijnw. in Nederlandsch Oost-Indie Jaarb.: v. 37, pt. sci., 844 p., 10 pis., atlas. Mentions hydrothermal activity on the islands of Batjan, Tidore, Ternate, Halmahera, Roti, Samau, Timor, Pantar, Roma, Gunongapi, Damar, Nila, Seroe, and Manouk. 3541. Wichmann, Arthur, 1892 [Mud volcanoes on Samau Island] : Tijdschr. Koninkl. Nederland. Aard. Gen., p. 223-226. See also references 74, 596, 1086, 3485, 3486, 3513, 3524, and 3725. NEW CALEDONIA 3542. Avias, Jacques, 1953, Note sur les sources thermales de Nouvelle Caledonie: Pacific Sci. Cong., 7th, New Zealand 1949, Proc., v. 2, Geology, p. 482-484, 4 figs. NEW HEBRIDES 3543. Atkin, Joseph, 1868a, On volcanoes in the New Hebrides and Banks’s Islands: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 24, p. 305-307. Mentions hot sulfur springs and vapor vents on Vanua Lava (Great Banks Island) ; also vapor vents on other islands in the New Hebrides. 3544. 1868b, On volcanoes in the New Hebrides and Banks Islands (communication) : London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philos. Mag. and Jour. Sci., ser. 4, v. 36, p. 72-73. Mentions the hot sulfur springs on Vanua Lava (Great Banks Island). 3545. Mawson, D., 1905, The geology of the New Hebrides: Linnean Soc. New South Wales Proc., v. 30, pt. 3, p. 400-485,16 pis., 5 figs. Contains information on hot springs on Vanua Lava (Great Banks Island), Tanna, Ambrym, and Efate. See also reference 43. NEW ZEALAND 3546. Abbay, R., 1878, On the building-up of the white sinter terraces of Rotomahana: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 34, p. 170-178, 6 figs. 3547. Aitken, J. B., 1914, Medicinal and other springs of New Zealand: Pharm. Jour. [London], v. 92, p. 710-712; Chem. Abs., v. 8, p. 2665.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 377 3548. Anonymous, 1949, Seventh Pacific Science Congress, sec- ond report; geology, volcanology, and geophysics: New Zealand Sci. Rev., v. 7, no. 3, p. 29-32, 2 figs.; 1950, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 14,1949, p. 294. 3549. Bell, James Mackintosh, 1906, The great Tarawera vol- canic rift, New Zealand: Royal Geog. Soc. [London] Jour., v. 27, no. 4, p. 369-382, 7 views, 2 maps. Describes the changes in hydrothermal activity caused by the eruption of Mount Tarawera in 1886. 3550. 1907, Report of surveys: New Zealand Geol. Survey 1st Ann. Rept. (newser.). States that the siliceous sinter at Whakarewarewa contains gold and silver. 3551. Bell, James Mackintosh, and Clarke, E. de C., 1909, The geology of the Whangaroa Subdivision, Hokianga Division : New Zealand Dept. Mines, Geol. Survey Bull. 8 (new ser.), 115 p., 17 pis., 8 maps. Contains information on hot springs and hot pools. 3552. Boord, Hilda, 1904, On the Hot Lakes district, New Zea- land : Victoria Inst., Journal of the Transactions, v. 36, p. 129-147,1 pi., London. Mentions 10 geysers and also other indications of hydrothermal activity. 3553. Bruce, J. A., and Shorland, F. B., 1932-33, Utilization of natural heat resources in thermal regions: New Zealand Jour. Agriculture, v. 45, p. 272-278, 1932; v. 47, p. 29-32, 1933. 3554. Bruce, J. Arthur, 1942, Nature’s heat resources; their post-war utilization in thermal regions: Dunedin, N.Z., John Mclndoe, 40 p., 9 illus. Discusses the possibilities of utilizing natural heat in the thermal areas of New Zealand. Describes the use of natural steam in Iceland for heating and at Larderello in Italy for the production of power. 3555. Bucke, E. W., 1887, Geysers of the Rotorua District, North Island of New Zealand: Geol. Mag. [London], new ser., dec. 3, v. 4, no. 1, p. 39-40; 1887, British Assoc. Adv. Sci. Rept., 1886, p. 644. 3556. Bunbury, C., 1879, The geysers of New Zealand: Frazer’s Mag. [London], p. 761; Living Age [London], p. 812. 3557. Cadell, Henry M., 1897, A visit to Mount Tarawera: Scot- tish Geog. Mag., v. 13, p. 246-259, 7 views, maps. Describes hydrothermal activity near Lake Rotorua and the geyser area near Whakarewarewa village. 3558. 1899, A visit to the New Zealand volcanic zone: Edinburgh Geol. Soc. Trans., v. 7, p. 183-200, 6 pis., 3 figs. Mentions the geysers near Whakarewarewa village. 3559. Carpenter, William Lant, 1882a, On the siliceous and other hot springs in the volcanic district of the North Island of New Zealand: British Assoc. Adv. Sci. Rept., 1881, p. 580-582. 3560. 1882b, On the Hot Lake district and the glacier scenery and fjords of New Zealand: British Assoc. Adv. Sci. Rept., 1881, p. 742. Mentions the many hot springs, mud volcanoes, and fumaroles near Lake Taupo and the hot springs near Lake Rotorua. Also mentions the terraces at Lake Rotomahana which were destroyed by the eruption of Tarawera volcano. 3561. Chamberlain, G., 1944, Fluorine in New Zealand waters. Part I, North Island waters: New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 26, Sec. B, no. 2, p. 90-94. 3562. Clarke, Frank Wigglesworth, 1890, A report of work done in the Division of Chemistry and Physics, mainly during the fiscal year 1888-89: U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 64, 60 p. Contains chemical analyses of three samples of gey-serite from New Zealand. 3563. Cleaver, A. S., 1895, Through the Hot Lake district of New Zealand: Belfast Nat. History and Philos. Soc. Rept. and Proc., 1894-95, p. 34—42. Mentions the geysers and hot springs. 3564. Collie, W., 1880, Remarks on volcanoes and geysers of New Zealand: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1879, v. 12, p. 418-420. 3565. Collins, B. W., 1953, Thermal waters of Banks Peninsula, Canterbury, New Zealand: Pacific Sci. Cong., 7th, New Zealand 1949, Proc., v. 2, Geology, p. 469-481, 2 figs., 1 table. 3566. Corbett, J. G, 1870, An account of a remarkable phe- nomenon observed at a hot spring near Lake Taupo: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1869, v. 2, p. 414. 3567. Cropp, W. H., 1922, The genesis of the Puhipuhi cinnabar deposits; a working hypothesis : New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 5, no. 3, p. 173-177,1 pi. States that cinnabar was deposited in fractures in the sinter deposited by thermal springs. 3568. Cussen, L., 1887, Thermal activity in the Ruapehu Crater: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1886, v. 19, p. 374-380. States that the water of the crater lake appears to be boiling. 3569. Day, Arthur Louis, 1939, Studies of the hot springs of New Zealand: Carnegie Inst. Washington Yearbook 38, p. 290-293. Summarizes the chemical character of thermal waters in New Zealand. Mentions hydrothermal activity in Iceland and in Yellowstone National Park. 3570. Dieffenbach, Ernst, 1843, Travels in New Zealand, with contributions to the geography, geology, botany, and natural history of that country: London, J. Murray, 2 v.; v. 1, 431 p., front., 2 illus.; v. 2, 396 p., front., 1 illus. Describes several areas of hydrothermal activity. 3571. Dollimore, Edward Stewart, compiler, 1952, The New Zealand Guide: Dunedin, N.Z., Wise, 926 p., 33 views. Includes information on the hot-spring and geyser areas. 3572. Du Ponteil, Carl Graf, 1855, Analyse des Wassers aus einem vulkanischen See auf Neu-Seeland: Annalen Chemie u. Pharmacie (Liebig), v. 96, pt. 2, p. 193-198. Contains a chemical analysis of water from a hot lake on White Island. 3573. Farr, C. Coleridge, and Rogers, M. N., 1929, Helium in New Zealand: New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 10, no. 5, p. 300-308, 3 figs. Contains chemical analyses of the gas from five thermal springs. 3574. Fenton, F. D., 1882, New Zealand thermal spring dis- tricts : Wellington, N.Z., Govt. Printers, 36 p. 3575. Ferrar, H. T., and others, 1925, The geology of the Whan- garei—Bay of Islands Subdivision, Kaipura Division: New Zealand Dept. Mines, Geol. Survey Br., Bull. 27 (new ser.), 134 p., front., 5 pis., 3 figs., 2 sheets geol. sections, 11 maps. Contains information on the chemical quality of water from two springs at Ruatangata.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 378 3576. Fleming, C. A., 1944, Hydrothermal activity at Ngawha, North Auckland; with a section on underground water hy James Healy: New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 26, Sec. B, no. 5, p. 255-276, 5 figs. 3577. Gillies, R., 1869, Thermal spring near Wangape: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1868, v. 1, p. 477. 3578. 1870, Account of a visit to a hot spring called “Te Puia” near Wangape Lake, central Waikato, Auckland, in August 1868: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1869, v. 2, p. 169-173. 3579. Ginders, A., 1894, Rotorua Springs, in New Zealand Year- book for 1894: Wellington. 3580. Grange, Leslie I., 1927a, Rotorua district: New Zealand Dept. Sci. and Indus. Research, Geol. Survey Br., 21st Ann. Rept. (new ser.), p. 14-15. Contains information on five groups of hot springs, five fumaroles, and the Pohutu geyser. 3581. 1927b, White Island: New Zealand Dept. Sci. and Indus. Research, Geol. Survey Br., 21st Ann. Rept. (new ser.), p. 19-20. States that there are 11 fumaroles of considerable size and many small vents on White Island. 3582. 1928, Rotorua-Taupo Subdivision: New Zealand Dept. Sci. and Indus. Research, Geol. Survey Br., 22d Ann. Rept. (new ser.), p. 8-11. Mentions geysers, hot springs, and fumaroles in several localities. 3583. 1937, The geology of the Rotorua-Taupo Subdivision, Rotorua and Kaimanawa Divisions: New Zealand Dept. Sci. and Indus. Research, Geol. Survey Br., Bull. 37 (new ser.), 138 p., front., 39 pis., 11 figs., 19 maps. Describes hot springs and fumaroles in 18 areas. 3584. Grange, Leslie I., and Hurst, J. A., 1929, Tongariro sub- division : New Zealand Dept. Sci. and Indus. Research, Geol. Survey Office, 23d Ann. Rept. (new ser.), p. 5-8. Describes hot springs, mud pools, and fumaroles in several localities. 3585. Gregory, John Walter, 1905, The geysers and how they work, in Marshall, Patrick, The geography of New Zealand : Christchurch, N.Z., A. Hamilton and G. Hogben, p. 189-200, 2 pis., 3 figs.; 1908 ed., London, Whitcombe & Toombs, p. 211-223. Describes Waimangu geyser, the geyser basins of Wairakei, and geysers near Rotorua. 3586. Grigg, F. T. J., and Rogers, M. N., 1929, Radioactivity and chemical composition of some New Zealand thermal waters: New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 11, no. 4, p. 216-219. 3587. Grimmett, R. E. R., 1939, Arsenical soils of the Waiotapu Valley. Evidence of stock poisoning at Reporoa: New Zealand Jour. Agriculture, v. 58, p. 383-391; 1940, Chem. Abs., v. 34, col. 1112. Contains data on the arsenic content of some warm springs. 3588. Grindley, G. W., 1957, Geothermal power, in Science in New Zealand (Australian and New Zealand Assoc. Adv. Sci. Handb.) : 11 p., illus.; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 22, 1957, p. 203. 3589. Haast, Julius von, 1871, Notes on the thermal springs in the Hanmer Plains, Province of Nelson: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1870, v. 3, p. 293-298. 3590. 1882, Further notes on the thermal springs in the Han- mer Plains, Provincial district of Nelson: New Zealand Inst. Proc. and Trans., 1881, v. 14, p. 414-417. 3591. Haszard, H. D. M., 1891, Thermal springs in Lake Waikare, Waikato: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1890, v. 23, p. 527-528, 1 pi. 3592. Healy, James, 1941, Sulphur at Rotokaua, Taupo: New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 23, Sec. 3B, p. 84B-92B. Describes hydrothermal activity in the vicinity of Rotokaua Lake. 3593. 1942, Boron in hot springs at Tokaanu, Lake Taupo: New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 24, Sec. IB, p. 1B-17B, 2 figs., map, 5 tables. 3594. 1945, The present state of volcanicity of New Zealand: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1944, v. 77, pt. 5. p. 277-281. Mentions hydrothermal activity in several localities. 3595. 1949, Summary of New Zealand springs: New Zealand Sci. Rev., v. 7, no. 7, p. 122-123. 3596. 1951, The thermal springs of New Zealand (summary) : Internat. Union Geodesy and Geophysics; Assoc. Sci. Hydrology Gen. Assembly, Oslo 1948, Trans., v. 3, p. 197. 3597. 1953a, Utilization of geothermal resources in New Zealand [abs.] : Pacific Sci. Cong., 7th, New Zealand 1949, Proc., v. 2, Geology, p. 500. 3598. 1953b, Preliminary account of hydrothermal conditions at Wairakei, New Zealand [abs.] : Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Quezon City, Philippines, 1953, Abstract of Papers, p. 1-2. 3599. 1956, Preliminary account of hydrothermal conditions at Wairakei, New Zealand: Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Quezon City, Philippines, 1953, Proc., v. 2, p. 214-227. 3600. Healy, James, and Foster, R. W., 1947, Utilization of nat- ural thermal resources at Rotorua: New Zealand Dept. Sci. and Indus. Research, Auckland Indus. Devel. Labs., Rept. 5. 3601. Hector, James, 1869a [On hot springs at Rotorua] : New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1868, v. 1, p. 441. 3602. 1869b, Analyses of waters from hot springs at Waiwera, near Mahurangi, Auckland: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1868, v. 1, p. 476-477. 3603. 1871a, Notes on the geology of White Island; with observations on the crystalline forms of the specimens of sulphur obtained, by E. H. Davis: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1870, v. 3, p. 278-285, 2 pis. Mentions spouting springs and pools of boiling mud near the margin of the crater lake. 3604. 1871b, Further notes on the thermal springs of the Hanmer Plains: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1870, v. 3, p. 297-298. 3605. 1878, On the mercurial springs of the Bay of Islands [abs.] : New Zealand Inst. Proc. and Trans., 1877, v. 10, p. 535. 3606. 1880, Mineral springs of New Zealand, in Handbook of New Zealand, p. 102-109: 1883 ed., p. 133-144; 1886 ed., p. 110-119; and later eds. 3607. 1901, The mineral springs of New Zealand [abs.] : Australasian Assoc. Adv. Sci., 8th Mtg., Melbourne 1900, Proc., Sec. E, p. 278-299. 3608. Henderson, John, 1937, The Aroha thermal water: New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 19, no. 12, p. 721-731, 3 figs.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 3609. Henderson, John, 1938, Maruia Hot springs: New Zealand Dept. Sci. and Indus. Research, Geol. Survey Br., 32d Ann. Rept., p. 19-20. 3610. 1939, Rotorua thermal water: New Zealand Dept. Sci. and Indus. Research, Geol. Survey Br., 33d Ann. Rept., p. 13-14. 3611. 1941, Underground water in New Zealand : New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 23, Sec. B, no. 3, p. 97B-112B, 2 figs.; summary in Internat. Union Geodesy and Geophysics; Assoc. Sci. Hydrology, Washington 1939, Trans., 1942. Contains much information on thermal springs. 3612. 1944, Cinnabar at Puhipuhi and Ngawha, North Auckland: New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 26, Sec. B, no. 2, p. 47-60,2 figs. States that the cinnabar was deposited by thermal waters. 3613. Henderson, John, and Bartrum, J. A, 1913, The geology of the Aroha subdivision, Hauraki, Auckland: New Zealand Geol. Survey Bull. 16, new ser., 127 p., 17 maps. Contains information, including chemical-quality data, on the Te Aroha, Okauia, Waitoa, and Katikati groups of thermal springs. 3614. Herbert, Arthur Stanley, 1921, The hot springs of New Zealand: London, H. K. Lewis & Co., Ltd., 284 p., 87 illus., 3 maps. 3615. Hert, R. P. F. de, 1887, Les terasses blanche et rose de la Nouvelle-Zdlande: Soc. Royale gdographie Anvers Bull. 7, p. 289. 3616. Hill, H., 1895, The Nuhaka hot springs: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1894, v. 27, p. 478-479. 3617. 1896, Ruapehu and the volcanic zone in 1895: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1895, v. 28, p. 681-688. Describes the effect of an eruption (1895) on the crater lake. Also mentions the warm springs on the west side of the volcano. 3618. 1905, Taupo plateau and lake; a retrospect and prospect: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1904, v. 37, p. 445-464. Mentions the geysers, hot springs, and fumaroles. 3619. Hochstetter, Ferdinand Christian von, 1862, Roto mahana Oder der Warme See in der Provinz Auckland auf der Nordinsel von Neu-Seeland: Petermanns Geog. Mitt., p. 263-266, map. 3620. 1863, Neu Seeland: Stuttgart, Germany, 556 p.; English ed., 1867, New Zealand, Its physical geography, geology, and natural history, with special reference to the results of Government expeditions in the provinces of Auckland and Nelson : Stuttgart, Germany, 515 p., 7 pis., 10 wood-cuts, 93 illus., maps; translated by Edward Sauter from the German original, published in 1863, with additions and revisions by the author. Discusses hydrothermal activity. Includes descriptions of the principal groups of geysers and hot springs. 3621. 1864, Geologie von Neu-Seeland: Beitr. Geologie der Provinzen Auckland und Nelson—Reise der Novara, Geol. Theil, v. 1, Abt. 1, p. 64-66, 92-95, 105-152; English ed., 1864, F. von Hochstetter and A. Petermann, The geology of New Zealand; in explanation of the geographical and topographical atlas of New Zealand, from the scientific publications of the Novara expedition: Auckland, N.Z.,: translated by C. F. Fischer; Lectures by Dr. F. von Hochstetter delivered in New Zealand. 113 p. 379 Includes descriptions of thermal springs in 10 localities in Auckland. 3622. Hovey, Edmund Otis, 1924a, Geysers of New Zealand and their deposits; Am. Mineralogist, v. 9, p. 95. States that there are many thousand hot springs in New Zealand, some of which are geysers. Describes some of the principal geysers. 3623. 1924b, Geyser region of New Zealand [abs.] : Geol. Soc. America Proc., v. 35, p. 113-114. 3624. Hutton, Frederick Wollaston, 1869a, Notes on the basin of Te Tarata, Rotomahana : New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1868, v. 1, p. 106-108,2 figs. 3625. 1869b, Description of the Wangape hot springs [abs.] : New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1868, v. 1, p. 477. 3626. 1885, Sketch of the geology of New Zealand: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 41, p. 191-220, 4 figs. Discusses the distribution of solfataras, fumaroles, geysers, and hot springs. 3627. 1887, The eruption of Mount Tarawera: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 43, p. 178-189, 2 figs. States that the eruption was hydrothermal, no lava being extruded. Mentions the hot springs and their deposits, which were destroyed by the eruption. 3628. Ream, R. F., 1955, Volcanic wonderland, the scenery and spectacle of the New Zealand thermal region: Auckland, N.Z., G. B. Scott, Publishers, 49 p., 125 views. 3629. Laing, R. M., 1884, A few notes on thermal springs at Lyttelton: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1883, v. 16, p. 447-448. 3630. Liversidge, A., Skey, W., and Gray, G., 1898, On the com- position and properties of the mineral waters of Aus-traliasia : Australiasian Assoc. Adv. Sci. Rept., 7th Mtg., p. 87-108, Sydney. Contains chemical analyses of the water from several springs in the Rotorua, Taupo, and Te Aroha areas in New Zealand. 3631. Maclaren, J. Malcolm, 1906, The source of the waters of geysers: Geol. Mag. [London], new ser., dec. 5, v. 3, p. 511-514. States that the water of geysers in New Zealand is believed to be of meteroic, rather than of magmatic, origin. 3632. Maclaurin, James Scott, 1906, Colonial Laboratory, 39th report: New Zealand Mines Dept. Contains a chemical analysis of the water in the crater lake on White Island. 3633. 1912, Occurrence of pentathionic acid in natural waters: Chem. Soc. London Proc., v. 27, p. 10-12. Contains information on the chemical quality of the water in the crater lake on White Island. 3634. Maclaurin, James Scott, and Wright, C. M., 1911, Radio- activity of the thermal waters of Rotorua-Taupo and Te Aroha: Dominion Lab., 44th Ann. Rept., p. 63-70. 3635. Macpherson, Eric Ogilvy, 1944, Notes on the geology of Whakatane district and Whale Island: New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 26, Sec. B, no. 2, p. 66-76, 5 figs. Contains information on several thermal springs and wells. 3636. 1945, Te Puia hot springs: New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 26, Sec. B. no. 5, p. 244-254, 4 figs.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 380 3637. Mair, Gilbert, 1877, Notes on the influence of atmospheric changes on the hot springs and geysers in the Rotorua district: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1876, v. 9, p. 27-29, 623. 3638. Mair, Robert, 1872, Notes on a thermal spring near Helens- ville, Kaipara: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc.. 1871, v. 4, p. 396. 3639. Malfroy, Camille, 1892, On geyser-action at Rotorua : New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1891, v. 24, p. 579-590, 3 pis. 3640. 1894, Report on the geyser at Orakei Korako: New Zealand Dept. Lands and Surveys Ann. Rept., C-l, p. 68-69. 3641. Mallet, J. William, 1853, Results of analyses of siliceous deposits from the hot springs of Taupo, New Zealand: Dublin Geol. Soc. Jour., v. 5, p. 263-264; Erdmann prakt. Chemie Jour., v. 59, p. 158-159, 1853. 3642. Marshall, Patrick, 1912, Geology of New Zealand: Wel- lington, N.Z., J. Mackay, Govt. Printer, 218 p., front., 112 figs., map. Mentions fumaroles, mud pots, geysers, and hot springs in several localities. 3643. Martin, Josiah, 1879, The geysers, hot springs, and ter- races of New Zealand: Pop. Sci. Rev. .[London], v. 18 (new ser., v. 3), p. 366-384,1 pi., 2 figs. 3644. 1887a, The terraces of Rotomahana, N.Z.: Geol. Soc. London Quart. Jour., v. 43, p. 165-177, 1 fig.; Geol. Mag. [London], new ser., dec. 3, v. 4, p. 135-136, 1887. 3645. 1887b, A descriptive account of the White Terrace at Rotomahana [abs.] : New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1886, v. 19, p. 605-606. 3646. Modriniak, N., 1944, Geophysical investigation of the Puhipuhi mercury deposit: New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 26, Sec. B, no. 2, p. 61-65, map. States that there is a close connection between the loss of magnetic properties and thermal activity. 3647. 1945, Thermal resources of Rotorua : New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 26, Sec. B, no. 5, p. 277-289, map. 3648. 1948, Geophysical investigation of Rotorua: New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, v. 30, Sec. B, no. 1, p. 1-19, 5 figs. Describes the use of thermal water for heating. 3649. Morgan, Percy Gates, 1908, The geology of the Mikonui Subdivision, North Westland: New Zealand Geol. Survey Bull. 6 (new ser.), 175 p., 29 pis., 12 maps, 2 diagrams, 2 geol. sections. Mentions thermal springs in several localities. 3650. 1917, Eruption of Frying-pan Flat, near Waimangu, Rotorua district: New Zealand Geol. Survey 11th Ann. Rept., C-2B, p. 11-12. 3651. 1927, Minerals and mineral substances of New Zealand: New Zealand Dept. Sci. and Indus. Research, Geol. Survey Br. Bull. 32, new ser., 110 p., maps. Contains information on the thermal springs. 3652. Mundy, D. L., and Hochstetter, Ferdinand von, 1875, Roto- mahana, and the boiling springs of New Zealand: London, Samson, Low. 3653. Ongley, Montague, Director, 1948, The outline of the geology of New Zealand, by officers of the Geological Survey: Wellington, N.Z., Harry H. Tooms, 47 p., map. Map shows the location of some of the volcanoes and the geology of the thermal-spring regions. 3654. Ongley, Montague, and Macpherson, Eric Ogilvy, 1928, The geology of the Waiapu Subdivision, Raukumara Division: New Zealand Dept. Sci. and Indus. Research, Geol. Survey Br. Bull. 30, new ser., 79 p., 6 pis., maps. Mentions the hot springs at Te Puia. 3655. Park, James, 1910, The geology of New Zealand; an in- troduction to the historical, structural, and economic geology: Christchurch and London, Whitcombe & Tombs, Ltd., 488 p., front., 17 pis., 145 figs., 6 maps. Describes hydrothermal activity in several localities. Contains data on 35 thermal springs. 3656. 1911, Tarawera eruption and after: Royal Geog. Sob. [London] Jour., v. 37, no. 1, p. 42-49, 4 pis., map. Describes the effect of the eruption on hydrothermal activity. 3657. Pond, James Alexander, and Smith, Stephenson Percy, 1887, Observations on the eruption of Mount Tarawera, Bay of Plenty, New Zealand, 10th June, 1886: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1886, v. 19, p. 342-371. Mentions hot springs in the volcanic district. 3658. Poynton, J. W., 1904, Notes on an insect found in some hot springs at Taupo: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1903, v. 36, p. 170-172. 3659. Ralph, W. H., 1874, Communication regarding a hot spring in the bed of Wataroa River Westland: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1873, v. 6, p. 380. 3660. Reaney, R. EL, 1899, Thermal springs, Rotorua: New Zealand Dept. Lands and Surveys Ann. Rept., C-l, p. 125. 3661. Rogers, M. N., 1927, The radioactivity of the Karapiti blowhole: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., v. 57, p. 892. States that the blowhole emits much steam and other gases at a high velocity. Contains information on the radon content of the gases. 3662. Rolston, Edward, and Edwin, R. A., 1869, On the crater of White Island [abs.] : New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1868, v. 1, p. 463-465,1 pi. Mentions the steam jet and mud geyser near the shore of the crater lake. 3663. Savage, Joseph, 1889, The Pink and White Terraces of New Zealand: Kansas Acad. Sci. Trans., 1887-88, v. 11, p. 26-30. 3664. Sewell, William, 1874, Notes on a visit to White Island, in the course of a trip made in H.M.S. “Basilisk” [abs.] : New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1873, v. 6, p. 386-387. Mentions hydrothermal activity in the crater on White Island. 3665. Shaw, G. C., 1954, The angry mountains; New Zealand’s volcanic belt: Pacific Discovery, v. 7, no. 4, p. 13-18, 9 views. Mentions the warm lake in the crater of Ruapehu volcano and hydrothermal activity in the volcanic belt of the North Island. 3666. Skey, William, 1878, On certain of the mineral waters of New Zealand: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1877, v. 10, p. 423^448. 3667. Smith, Stephenson Percy, 1886, The eruption of Tara- wera ; a report to the surveyor general: Wellington, N.Z., Govt. Printer, 84 p., 21 pis., maps. 3668. Springall, Percy W., 1888, A trip through the Hot Lake district, New Zealand: Royal Geog. Soc. Australasia Proc. and Trans., v. 3, pt. 1, p. 53-63. Contains information on hot springs in several localities.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 381 3669. Steiner, A., 1953, Hydrothermal rock alteration at Waira- kei, New Zealand: Econ. Geology, v. 48, no. 1, p. 1-13, 4 figs. 3670. Studt, F. E., 1957, Wairakei hydrothermal system and the influence of ground water: New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Technology, Sec. B, v. 38, no. 6, p. 595-622, illus.; 1958, abs., Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North America, v. 22,1957, p. 521. 3671. Tucker, 1895, Description of the Hot Springs District, in Pictorial New Zealand: London, 301 p. 3672. Wallace, Alfred Russel, 1879, Australasia; based on Hell- wald’s “Die Erde und ihre Volker” ; edited and extended by A. R. Wallace, with ethnological appendix by A. H. Keane: London, Edward Stanford, 672 p., front., 54 illus., 29 maps. Briefly describes the hot springs and geysers of New Zealand. 3673. Warbrick, Alfred, 1934, Adventures in Geyserland; life in New Zealand’s thermal regions, including the story of the Tarawera eruption and the destruction of the famous terraces of Rotomahana : Dunedin and Wellington, N.Z., A. H. and A. W. Reed. 3674. Wilson, Stuart H., 1953, The chemical investigation of the hot springs of the New Zealand thermal region: Pacific Sci. Cong., 7th, New Zealand 1949, Proc., v. 2, Geology, p. 449, 6 figs. 3675. 1955, Chemical investigations, in Grange, L. I., compiler, Geothermal steam for power in New Zealand: New Zealand Dept. Sci. and Indus. Research Bull. 117, chap. 4, p. 27—42, figs., tables. Contains information on the chemical character of the thermal waters and their evolved gases in several areas. 3676. Winkelmann, C. P., 1887, Notes on the hot springs Nos. 1 and 2, Great Barrier Island, with sketches showing temperature of the waters: New Zealand Inst. Trans, and Proc., 1886, v. 19, p. 388-392,1 pi. 36T7. Wohlmann, H. S., 1907, The mineral waters and health, resorts of New Zealand. Part I, Rotorua: Wellington, N.Z., New Zealand Tourist and Health Resort Dept., 48 p. 3678. Wright, Alfred, 1887, Te Aroha, New Zealand; a guide for invalids and visitors to the thermal springs and baths: Te Aroha, Hot Springs Domain Board, 34 p., front., map. See references 20, 21, 73, 106, 108, 109, 347, 649, 672, 687, 700, 2092, 2248, 2644, and 3496. PHILIPPINE REPUBLIC 3679. Abella y Casariego, Enrique, 1884a, La isla de Biliran (Filipinas) y sus azufrales: Spain, Comision Mapa Geol. Espana Bol., v. 11, pt. 2, p. 359-373, map; Madrid, Ministerio de Ultramar, Tello, 1885. 3680. 1884b, El Monte Maquiling (Filipinas) y sus actuates emanaciones volc&nicas: Spain, Comision Mapa Geol. Espana Bol., v. 11, pt. 2, p. 374r-391; 1937, translated into English by Jos6 B. Blando, m Philippine Agriculturist (Univ. Philippines Pub., ser. A), v. 26, no. 2, p. 199-221. Contains information on six thermal-spring localities. 3681. 1884c, Emanaciones voleanicas subordinadas al Malinao (Filipinas) : Spain, Comisidn Mapa Geol. Espana Bob, v. 11, pt. 2, p. 395-404, 3 pis.; Madrid, Ministerio de Ultramar, Tello, 1885. 3682. Abella y Casariego, Enrique, and Vera y Gomez, Jose de, 1893, Estudio descriptivo de algunos manantiales mine-rales de Filipinas: Manila, 150 p. Includes chemical analyses of water from several thermal springs, descriptions of some of the springs, and a list of reported springs. 3683. Adams, George I., 1909, Geological reconnaissance of the Island of Leyte—with notes and observations on the adjacent smaller islands and southwestern Samar: Philippine Jour. Sci., v. 4, Sec. A, no. 5, p. 339-358, map. Contains information on several solfataras, mud pots, and thermal springs. 3684. Adams, George I, and Pratt, Wallace Everette, 1911, Geo- logic reconnaissance of southeastern Luzon: Philippine Jour. Sci., v. 6, Sec. A, no. 6, p. 449-481, 6 pis., 4 figs. Mentions Tiui hot springs, Naglagbong springs, Lanot mineral spring, and hot springs on the beach near Maniti. 3685. Alcaraz, Arturo, 1956, Taal Volcano: Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Quezon City, Philippines, 1953, Proc., v. 2, p. 34. Mentions lake in volcanic crater and steam vents on southwest shore of the lake. 3686. Alcaraz, Arturo; Abad, Leopoldo F.; and Quema, Jose C., 1952, Hibok-Hibok volcano, Philippine Islands, and its activity since 1948; Volcano Letter 516, p. 1-6; no. 517, p. 1-4, 7 figs. Mentions that a hot spring issues near sea level on the north side of the volcano; also mentions that eruption of volcano (1948) began with steam blasts. 3687. Alcaraz, Arturo; Abad, Leopoldo F.; and Tupas, M. H., 1953, The Didicas submarine volcano [abs.] : Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Quezon City, Philippines, 1953, Abstract of Papers, p. 4. Mentions that steam was given off during the eruption of Didicas volcano in 1952. 3688. Alvir, A. D., 1956, A cluster of little known Philippine volcanoes: Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Quezon City, Philippines, 1953, Proc., v. 2, p. 205-206. Mentions hot springs and steam vents in the craters of Ambalatungan, Bumbag, and Podakan volcanoes. 3689. Becker, George Ferdinand, 1901, Report on the geology of the Philippine Islands: U.S. Geol. Survey 21st Ann. Rept., pt. 3, p. 487-614,3 pis., 2 figs. Describes the principal volcanoes, both active and extinct; includes information on the fumaroles, solfataras, hot springs, and crater lakes. 3690. Bowring, John, 1859, A visit to the Philippine Islands: London, Smith, Elder, & Co., 438 p., front., 14 illus. States that three are many mineral and thermal springs in the La Laguna district of Luzon; also states that there are boiling springs at pueblo of Mainit. 3691. Brown, Glen Francis, 1943, Thermal springs in Mindanao: Unpublished notes. 3692. Centeno y Garcia, Jose, 1876, Memoria geoldgico-minera de las Islas Filipinas: Spain, Comisidn Mapa Geol. Espana Bob, v. 3, p. 181-234, map; Madrid, Ministerio de Ultramar, Tello 8, 64 p., map. Contains descriptions of thermal springs and analyses. 3693. 1885a, El Volc&n de Taal: Spain, Comisi6n Mapa Geol. Espana Bob, v. 12, pt. 2, p. 169-208; Madrid, Ministerio de Ultramar, Tello, 1885, 53 p., 4 pis.THERMAL SPRINGS OF THE UNITED STATES AND OTHER COUNTRIES OF THE WORLD 382 3694. Centeno y Garcia, Jose, 1885b, Noticia acerca de los manantiales termo-minerales de Bambang y de las salinas de Monte Blanco: Spain, Comision Mapa Geol. Espana Bol., v. 12, p. 223-236, map; Madrid, Ministerio de Ultramar, Tello, 1885,14 p., map. 3695. Centeno y Garcia, Jose, and others, 1889, Memoria de- criptiva de los manantiales minero-medicinales de la Isla de Luzon: Spain, Comision Mapa Geol. Espana Bol., v. 16, p. 177-295; Madrid, Ministero de Ultramar, Tello, 1890, 117 p. 3696. Cox, Alvin Joseph, and Dar Juan, T., 1915, Salt industry and resources of the Philippine Islands; Philippine Jour. Sci., v. 10, Sec. A, no. 6, p. 375-401, 17 pis., 5 tigs. Contains information on Mayinit hot spring and Salina springs, both in Luzon. 3697. Cox, Alvin Joseph; Heise, George William; and Gana, V. Q., 1914, Water supplies in the Philippine Islands : Philippine Jour. Sci., v. 9, Sec. A, no. 4, p. 273-410, 5 pis., 8 tables. Includes information on nine thermal springs. 3698. Feliciano, J. M., 1928, A study of thermal springs in the Philippines: Pan-Pacific [Pacific] Sci. Cong., 3d, Tokyo 1926, Proc., v. 1, p. 804-811, map. Contains information on 54 thermal springs. 3699. Ferguson, Henry Gardiner, 1908, Contributions to the physiography of the Philippine Islands. II, Batanes Islands : Philippine Jour. Sci., v. 3, Sec. A, no. 1, p. 1-25, 9 pis., 4 figs., 3 maps. 3700. Goodman, Maurice, 1907, Sulphur in the Philippines: Far Eastern Rev., v. 4, p. 120-121. Mentions sulfur deposits near some of the solfataras. 3701. Heise, George William, 1915, Water supplies in the Phil- ippine Islands, II: Philippine Jour. Sci., v. 10, Sec. A, no. 2, p. 135-169, 8 tables. Includes chemical analyses of water from the hot springs at Ilocos Sur, a hot spring near Punta Galera, and a hot spring at Tiui. 3702. 1917, The radioactivity of the waters of the mountainous region of northern Luzon: Philippine Jour. Sci., v. 12, Sec. A, no. 6, p. 293-307, 1 pi., 2 figs., map, 2 tables. Contains information on 11 thermal springs and 1 solfatara. 3703. Heise, George William, and Behrman, Abraham S., 1918, Philippine water supplies: Philippine Dept. Agriculture and Nat. Resources, Bur. Sci. Pub. 11, 218 p., 19 pis., 4 figs., 16 tables. Describes 20 mineral springs, some of which are thermal. 3704. Jagor, Fedor, 1873, Reisen in den Philippinen: Berlin, 381 p., map; Spanish ed., 1875, Madrid; English ed., with some omissions, Travels in the Philippines: London, Chapman & Hall, 370 p., 1875. Mentions several thermal springs. 3705. Marche, Alfred de la, 1843, Description des sources ther- males nominees Los Banos et du volcan de Taal, dans les environs de Manille: Soe. geographie [Paris] Bull., ser. 2, v. 19, p. 79-83. 3706. Montano, Joseph, 1885, Voyage aux Philippines, in Rap- port a M. le Ministre de l’lnstruction publique sur une mission aux lies Philippines et en Malaisie (1879-1881) : Paris, Hachette et Cie., p. 271-479. Mentions hot springs in the mountains near Lake Mainit in Mindanao Island. 3707. Neumann van Padang, Maur, 1953, Philippine Island and Cochin, China, pt. 2 of Catalogue of active volcanoes of the world including solfatara fields: Naples, Italy, In-ternat. Volcanolog. Assoc., 49 p., 16 figs., map. Contains information on volcanoes or solfataras at 31 localities in the Philippines and 2 in Cochin China (southern Viet Nam). Mentions thermal springs in some of the localities. 3708. Pelaez, Vinicio R., 1953a, The behaviour and character- istics of volcanoes in the solfataric and fumarolic stage of activity: Pacific Sci. Cong., 7th, New Zealand 1949. Proc., v. 2, Geology, p. 364—368. Mentions several localities in the Philippines where there are fumaroles, solfataras, and thermal and mineral springs. 3709. 1953b, The volcanic activity of Catarman and Hibok-Hibok, Camiguin Island, Mindanao, of September, 1948 [abs.] : Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Quezon City, Philippines, 1953, Abstract of Papers, p. 4-5. Mentions steam as one of the products of eruption. 3710. 1956, The volcanic activity of Catarman and Hibok-Hibok, Camiguin Island, Mindanao, of September 1948: Pacific Sci. Cong., 8th, Quezon City, Philippines, 1953, Proc., v. 2, p. 89-112, 5 figs., 2 tables. States that solfataras and fumaroles are present on Mount Catarman; also states that release of water vapor characterized eruDtions of Camiguin and Hibok-Hibok craters. 3711. Pratt, Wallace Everette, 1911, The eruption of Taal vol- cano, January 30, 1911: Philippine Jour. Sci., v. 6, Sec. A, no. 2., p. 63-86,14 pis., 3 figs., map. Mentions that two streams of hot water fed the new lake that formed in the crater of Taal volcano after the eruption. 3712. 1916, Philippine lakes: Philippine Jour. Sci., v. 11, Sec. A, no. 5, p. 223-239,1 pi., 2 figs. Describes the hot lake in the crater of Taal volcano in Luzon, also Lake Mainit in Mindanao and Lake Naujan in Mindoro. Both the latter are considered to be crater lakes and have thermal springs near their shore. 3713. Rosario, Mariano V. del, 1938 [Crenotherapy with refer- ence to the Philippines] : Rev. filipina medecina y far-macia, v. 29, p. 51-78 [Spanish] ; Chem, Abs., v. 32, col. 4257. Describes some of the more important mineral springs. 3714. Smith, Warren DuPre, 1925, Geology and mineral re- sources of the Philippine Islands: Philippine Dept. Agriculture and Nat. Resources, Bur. Sci. Pub. 19, 559 p., 39 pis., 23 figs., 41 tables. Mentions several thermal areas containing solfataras, fumaroles, steam vents, and hot springs. Contains brief descriptions of several thermal springs. 3715. U.S. Department of Commerce, Coast and Geodetic Sur- vey, 1940, U.S. Coast Pilot, Philippine Islands, Part 2, Palawan, Mindanao and Sulu: 3d ed., Washington, 542 p. Mentions two hot springs near the shore of Balut Island. 3716. Worcester, Dean C., 1912, Taal volcano and its recent destructive eruption: Natl. Geog. Mag., v. 23, no. 4, p. 313-367, 41 views, maps. Mentions that great columns of steam accompanied the eruption in 1911.BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 3717. Wright, J. R., and Heise, George William, 1917, The radio- activity of Philippine waters: Philippine Jour. Sci., v. 12, Sec. A, no. 3, p. 145-165, 1 pi., 2 figs., 2 tables. Contains information on the radioactivity of the water from six thermal springs and on the chemical quality of the water from four others. See also references 20-22, 73, 83, 347, 1086, 2684, and 3512. SAMOA 3718. Jensen, H. I., 1907, The geology of Samoa and the erup- tions in Savaii: Linnean Soc. New South Wales Proc., 1906-07, v. 31, p. 641-672,11 pis., 6 figs. Mentions that immense steam clouds rose from the main crater and that vapors issued from a vent near the crater during the eruptions of 1905 and 1906. SOLOMON ISLANDS 3719. Guppy, Henry Brougham, 1887a, The Solomon Islands, their geology, general features, and suitability for colonization: London, S. Sonnenschein, Lowery & Co., 152 p. Mentions hydrothermal activity on Simbo (Zimboa?) and Savo Islands. 3720. 1887b, The Solomon Islands and their natives: London, S. Sonnenschein, Lowrey & Co., 384 p., 9 illus. Mentions fumaroles and solfataras on Eddystone Island, fumaroles on Vella-la-vella Island, and fumaroles and steam vents on Simbo (Zimboa?). SUMATRA 3721. Dammerman, Karel William, 1948, The fauna of Kraka- tau, 1883-1933: Verh. d,er Konink. Nederlandisch Akad. van Wissen., Afd. Natuurkunde: Amsterdam, Noord-Hollandsche Uitj.-Mij., Tweede Sectie, pt. 44, 594 p., front., 11 pis., 46 figs. States that crater of Anak Krakatau Island contains a lake, probably of hot water. Contains a photograph showing steam vents on Anak Krakatau. 3722. Kemmerling, Georg Laure Louis, 1920, Vulkanen en Vul- kanische Verschijnselen in de Residentien Sumatra’s Westkust (noordelijk deel) en Tapanoeli door den tijdelijken geoloog bij s’Lands Mijndiensten: Vulkanol. Mededeel. Mijnw. Nederlandsch Oost-Indie, no. 1, p. 1-93, 27 pis., atlas. 3723. Marsden, William, 1811, The history of Sumatra, contain- ing an account of the government, laws, customs, and manners of the native inhabitants, with a description of the natural productions, and a relation of the ancient political state of that island: 3d ed, London, Longman, Hurst, Reese, Orme, & Brown, 479 p., and index, 8 p., map. Mentions hot springs northeast of Ipu, a warm spring on the bank of the Ipu River, hot springs close to Ayer Grau stream, and hot mineral springs at Priangan near Goenoeng Merapi volcano. 3724. Netherlands East Indian Volcanological Survey, 1927—49: Bull. 1-98; nearly all numbers contain maps, diagrams, and photo views. Includes a few chemical analyses of thermal waters and many comments on changes in the temperature and outlet points of hot springs, solfataras, and fumaroles. 3725. Neumann van Padang, Maur, 1951, Indonesia, pt. 1 of Catalogue of the active volcanoes of the world including 383 solfatara fields: Naples, Italy, Internat. Yolcanol. Assoc., 271 p., 110 figs., map. Contains data on 30 localities of volcanoes or solfataras in Sumatra, 28 in the Lesser Sunda Islands, 13 in Celebes, 1 in New Guinea, and 21 in minor islands. Includes information on thermal springs and wells in Sumatra. Java, Flores, and Celebes. 3726. Stehn, Ch. E., ca. 1929, Krakatau: Pacific Sci. Cong., 4th, Java 1929, Rept., Pt. 1, The geology and volcanism of the Krakatau group: p. 1-55, 20 pis. Describes hydrothermal activity associated with eruptions of Krakatau in 1927-29. 3727. Verbeek, Rogier Diederik Marius, 1886, Krakatau: Ba- tavia, Java, Imprimerie Etat, 567 p., 43 figs., 25 chro-rholithographs. States that the hot springs of Poeloesari volcano boiled more vigorously and that the great hot springs of Dieng spouted with increased energy after the great eruption of Krakatau. Both springs are in Java. 3728. Westerveld, J., 1952, Quaternary volcanism on Sumatra: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 63, no. 6, p. 561-594, 5 pis., 3 figs., 11 tables. Mentions that fumaroles, solfataras, and hot springs are the only active signs of volcanism on Sumatra. See also references 84, 3470, 3519, and 3525. TONGA ISLANDS 3729. Jaggar, Thomas Augustus, 1935, Laving on a volcano: Natl. Geog. Mag., v. 68, p. 91-106, 18 illus., map. Mentions a steam eruption in 1946. VOLCANO ISLANDS 3730. Swenson, Frank Albert, 1948, Geology and ground-water resources of I wo Jima: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 59, no. 10, p. 995-1008, 2 pis., 2 figs., 3 tables. States that fumaroles are numerous and that the temperature of the water in wells ranges from 105°F to 160° F. Includes a chemical analysis of the water from a well. 3731. Tsuya, Hiromichi, 1936, Geology and petrography of Io- sima (Sulphur Island), Volcano Islands Group: Tokyo Imp. Univ. Earthquake Research Inst. Bull. 14, pt. 3, p. 453—180, 3 pis., 10 figs. [English.] States that there are more than 20 solfataras on the island (Iwo Jima). ANTARCTIC REGION (Balleny Islands, Ross Island, and South Shetland Islands) 3732. Encyclopedia Britannica, 1911, South Shetland Islands: Encyclopaedia Britannica: 11th ed., New York, Encyclopaedia Britannica, v. 25, p. 516. States that voyagers in 1828 and 1842 reported that steam issued from numerous vents on Deception Island. 3733. Shackleton, Ernest Henry, 1909, The heart of the Ant- arctic : Philadelphia, Pa., J. B. Lippincott Co., 2 v.; v. 1, 372 p., front., 131 pis.; v. 2, 419 p., front., 139 pis., 38 illus,. 3 maps. Describes Mount Erebus and other volcanic cones, remarking on the huge column of steam rising from the crater of Mount Erebus, on the ice mounds formed from the vapor escaping from fumaroles in the crater, and on the steam eruptions at a low point between Mount Erebus and Mount Bird. See also reference 43. U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1965 O—735-9147 DAY )E7 s' n sTrilobites of the Late Cambrian Pterocephaliid Biomere in the Great Basin, United States / „ earth sciences LibraryTrilobites of the Late Cambrian Pterocephaliid Biomere in the Great Basin, United States By ALLISON R. PALMER GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 The content, concept, and internal conation of a trilobite biomere in the Great Basin of Western United States are defined; 112 species representing gl genera of ptychoparioid trilobites are described and illustrated UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE, WASHINGTON : 1965UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR STEWART L. UDALL, Secretary GEOLOGICAL SURVEY Thomas B. Nolan, Director The U.S. Geological Survey Library has cataloged this publication as follows : Palmer, Allison Ralph, 1927- Trilobites of the late Cambrian Pterocephaliid biomere in the Great Basin, United States. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1964. iv, 106 p. illus., maps (3 fold, in pocket) diagrs. 30 cm. (U.S. Geological Survey. Professional paper 493) 0-ry\ - Bibliography: p. 97-100. 1- Trilobites. 2. Paleontology—Cambrian. 3. Paleontology—Great Basin. I. Title. (Series) For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office Washington, D.C. 20402CONTENTS Page: Abstract__________________________________________________ 1 Introduction________________________________________________ 1 Acknowledgments_____________________-__________________ 3 Scope, content, and concept of the Pterocephaliid biomere.. 4 Divisions of the Pterocephaliid biomere_____________________ 5 Aphelaspis zone________________________________________ 5 Dicanthopyge zone______________________________________ 6 Prehousia zone_________________________________________ 9 Dunderbergia zone______________________________________ 9 Elvinia zone________________________________________ 12 Physical stratigraphy of the Pterocephaliid biomere____ 12 Evolution within the Pterocephaliid biomere________________ 14 Aphelaspis haguei (Hall and Whitfield)------> Dicanthopyge reductus n. sp---------------------- 15 Prehousia prima---->Prehousia alata___________________ 16 Elburgia intermedia n. sp.-->Elvinia roemeri (Shum- ard)_______________________________________________ 17 Pterocephalia concava Palmer--->Pterocephalia sanc- tisabae Roemer______________________________________ 19 Elviniella laevis Palmer---->Irvingella major Ulrich and Resser__________________________________________ 20 Significance of ornamentation______________________________ 21 Key to the ptychoparioid trilobites of the Pterocephaliid biomere in the Great Basin______________________________ 23 Systematic paleontology____________________________________ 28 Asaphiscidae__________________________________________ 28 Systematic paleontology—Continued Page Cheilocephalidae_____________________________________ 29 Elviniidae___________________________________________ 32 Dokimocephalinae_________________________________ 33 Elviniinae_______________________________________ 39 Erixaniidae__________________________________________ 48 Lonchocephalidae_____________________________________ 50 Norwoodiidae_________________________________________ 52 Olenidae_____________________________________________ 54 Pterocephaliidae_____________________________________ 57 Aphelaspidinae___________________________________ 58 Housiinae________________________________________ 65 Pterocephaliinae_________________________________ 69 Unassigned trilobites________________________________ 77 Stratigraphic data and locality register__________________ 93 Bastian Peak section_________________________________ 93 Cherry Creek section_________________________________ 93 Eureka section_______________________________________ 94 McGill section_______________________________________ 94 Ruby Range section---------------------------------- 95 Shingle Pass section_________________________________ 95 Snake Range section__________________________________ 95 Yucca Flat section___________________________________ 96 Miscellaneous collections that yielded illustrated specimens__________________________________________ 96 References________________________________________________ 97 Index____________________________________________________ 101 ILLUSTRATIONS Plate 1. 2. 3. 4-6. 7. 8. 9-10. 11. 12-13. 14-16. 17. 18-20. 21. 22, 23. [Plates 1-20 follow Index; plates 21-23 are In pocket] Asaphiscidae, Cheilocephalidae. Dokimocephalinae. Dokimocephalinae, Elviniidae. Elviniinae. Elviniinae, Lonchocephalidae, Norwoodiidae, Olenidae. Olenidae, Aphelaspidinae. Aphelaspidinae. Aphelaspidinae, unassigned Pterocephaliidae. Housiinae. Pterocephaliinae. Pterocephaliinae, Erixaniidae, Position uncertain. Position uncertain. Approximate relative ranges of the named ptychoparioid trilobites of the Pterocephaliid biomere. Stratigraphic occurrences of identified species of ptychoparioid trilobites from the Pterocephaliid biomere: 22. White Pine and Lincoln Counties, Nevada. 23. White Pine, Nye, and Eureka Counties, Nevada. hiIV CONTENTS Page Figure 1. Map showing localities of fossiliferous beds of the Pterocephaliid biomere______________________________________ 2 2. Schematic diagram of the origin of the Pterocephaliid biomere________________________________________________ 4 3. Correlation of the zones of the Pterocephaliid biomere with zonation of contemporaneous beds in the central and eastern United States_____________________________________________________________________________________ 6 4-8. Maps showing localities containing faunas of the: 4. Aphelaspis zone____________________________________________________________________________________________ 7 5. Dicanthopyge zone------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8 6. Prehousia zone____________________________________________________________________________________________ 10 7. Dunderbergia zone_______________________________________________________________________________________ 11 8. Elvinia zone______________________________________________________________________________________________ 13 9. Correlation of the formations in the Great Basin that contain beds of the Pterocephaliid biomere_____________ 14 10-11. Diagrams showing the evolutionary relationships of: 10. Prehousia_________________________^__________________________________________________________________ 16 11. Aphelaspis and Dicanthopyge___________________________________________________________________________ 17 12. Diagram showing the comparative evolution of the length of the palpebral lobe, width of the fixed cheek, and length of the glabella in Prehousia_______________________________________________________________________ 18 13-15. Diagrams showing the evolutionary relationships of: 13. Elburgia_________________________________________________________________________________________________ 19 14. Pterocephalia____________________________________________________________________________________________ 20 15. Irvingella_______________________________________________________________________________________________ 21 16. Graph showing the changes in percentage of common species having granular ornamentation during the time of the Pterocephaliid biomere__________________________________________________________________________________ 22TRILOBITES OF THE LATE CAMBRIAN PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE IN THE GREAT BASIN UNITED STATES By Allison R. Palmer ABSTRACT The Pterocephaliid biomere is a biostratigraphic unit of stage magnitude that includes the most consistently fossilif-erons parts of the Upper Cambrian in the Great Basin of western conterminous United States. The thickness of strata containing faunas of this biomere generally exceeds 500 feet. This interval includes units consisting of fine-grained detrital material and of clean carbonate rocks; the carbonate rocks probably represent sediments that composed a broad carbonate bank, and the units of detrital material represent belts of predominantly land-derived detrital sediments that flanked the bank on the east and west. The ptychoparioid trilobite fauna of the Pterocephaliid biomere consists of 112 species representing 51 genera. The sequence of faunas within the Pterocephaliid biomere is divided into five zonal assemblages that can be traced throughout the Great Basin. The assemblages are, in ascending order, the Aphelaspis zone, Dicanthopyge zone, Prehousia zone, Dunderbergia zone, and Elvinia zone. The first three zones, which are valid throughout the Great Basin, may correlate with beds currently assigned only to the Aphelaspis zone in central Texas and the southern Appalachian region. The principal faunal elements of the Pterocephaliid biomere probably invaded the Great Basin region from oceanic regions to the west and annihilated nearly all previously existing faunas of the older Crepicephalid biomere. The invading faunas then evolved in place and were in turn annihilated by a new invading fauna, which terminated the Pterocephaliid biomere. Several possible evolutionary series are described, including one that extends through five species and two genera. Geographic distribution of contemporaneous ornamented species in several genera suggests some correlation between environment and ornamentation in some groups of trilobites. New taxa are Oligometopus contractus n. sp., Cheilocephalus brachyops n. sp., Cheilocephalus granulosus n. sp., Pseudo-kingstonia exotica n. gen., n. sp., Iddingsia intermedia n. sp., Apachia prima n. sp., Delleal punctata n. sp., Dunderbergia calculosa n. sp., Dunderbergia brevispina n. sp., Elburgia intermedia n. sp., Irvingella transversa n. sp., Hardyoides mimicus n. sp., Aciculolenus peculiaris n. gen., n. sp., Xenochei-los granulosus n. sp., Terranovella brevis n. sp., Simulolenus quadrisulcatus n. gen., n. sp., Dicanthopyge convergens n. gen., n. sp., Dicanthopyge quadrata n. sp., Dicanthopyge reductus n. sp. Aphelaspis longispina n. sp. Olenaspella paucisegmenta n. sp., Litocephalus magnus n. sp., Stenambon megagranulus li. gen., n. sp. Stenambon paucigranulus n. sp., Parahousia subcqualis n. sp., Prehousia diverta n. sp., Prehousia impolita n. sp., Prehousia indenta n. sp., Prehousia prima n. sp., Tumicephalus depressus n. gen., n. sp., Cernuolimbus laevifrons n. sp., Cernuolimbus granulosus n. sp., Strigambitus bilobus n. gen., n. sp., Strigambitus transversus n. sp., Strigambitus? blepharina n. sp., Pterocephalial punctata n. sp., Erixaniuml brachyaxis n. sp., Erixanium multisegmentus n. sp., Bromella veritas n. gen., n. sp., Dytremacephalus asperaxis n. sp., Minupeltis definita n. sp., Aphelotoxon limbata n. gen., n. sp., Aphelotoxon punctata n. sp., Aphelotoxon spinosus n. sp., Aphelotoxon marginata n. sp., Aphelotoxon granulosus n. sp., Comanchia minus n. sp., Anechocephalus spinosus n. sp., Morosa brevispina n. sp., and Morosa extensa n. sp. INTRODUCTION During the Cambrian period, the present Great Basin in western conterminous United States (fig. 1) was almost continuously covered by generally shallow seas, and a blanket of sediments averaging more than 5,000 feet in thickness was deposited. Many complete or partial sections through this blanket are exposed in the mountain ranges of eastern Nevada, western Utah, and southeastern California. Where limestones are interbedded with shales or siltstones in these sections, trilobite remains are common in many places, whereas in uniform sequences of thick-bedded carbonates, shales, or sandstones, trilobite remains are relatively scarce. The only part of the Cambrian that consistently yields trilobites in nearly every section in the Great Basin is the Upper Cambrian interval included between the abrupt appearance of Aphelaspis or its associates and the equally abrupt disappearance of Irvingella and its associates. This interval is a biostratigraphic unit of stage magnitude, in which the upper and lower limits are paleontologically defined. It does not conform strictly to the definition of a stage, however (see p. 4), and is called the Pterocephaliid biomere after one of the two common trilobite families that characterize the interval. The Pterocephaliid biomere has been chosen as the first part of the Cambrian faunal sequence of the Great Basin to be comprehensively studied, because trilobites from within the biomere are among the most frequently collected fossils. It is also the only widespread Cambrian faunal unit presently known i2 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN 118° 116° 114' 112° Promontory ' 1 Range / / 1 \ \ \ Stansbury l .Range \ \ X Tintic \ Deep Creek Range .District \ \ . Fish Springs Range J / House Range / / UTAH j / / .Wah Wah Range ^ s' #/ ^ / . Needles Range , £1 gi / $/. iv A / #/ j / _ A Dicanthopyge quadrata n. sp. —> D. convergens n. sp. —» D. reductus n. sp.; Prehomia prima n. sp. —> P. indenta n. sp. —* P. alata Palmer; Elburgia quinnensis (Resser) —> El-mum roemeri (Shumard); Pterocephalia concrna Palmer —> P. sanctisabae Roemer; and, Elviniella laevis Palmer —» Imingella augustilinibatus Kobayashi —» I. fohri Resser —> I. major Ulrich and Resser. None of these series show reversals in morphologic trends at different localities, even though the rock sequences indicate frequent significant shifts and repetitions ofEVOLUTION WITHIN THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE 15 several environments. Thus the alternative possibility that the series represent superposition of ecologic variants by progressive ecologic shift has no support. Some of the more general relationships at the genus level are reviewed in the appropriate family discussions in the part on “Systematic paleontology” (p. 28). APHELASPIS HAGUEI (HALL AND WHITFIELD) -» DICANTHOPYGE REDUCTUS N. SP. Although Aphelaspis haguei is listed as the first species in the evolutionary series A. haguei -> Diccmtho-pyge reductus n. sp., it may have been derived from A. brachyphasis Palmer (fig. 11). The thoracic pleurae of both A. brachyphasis and A. haguei have short pointed tips. In the section at McGill (pi. 28), A. brachyphasis has been found in nearly all the fos-siliferous beds of the lower Aphelaspis subzone. Ho-laspid specimens of A. brachyphasis in silicified suites in the lower part of the subzone vary considerably in details of pygidial shape, ranging from specimens having a narrow border to specimens having a relatively wide and slightly concave border (Palmer, 1962b, pi. 4, figs. 6-10). In the upper beds of the subzone, forms having pygidia differing only slightly from those of forms in the lower beds, which have a wide border, are associated with forms that have distinctive cranidia on which the angle between brim and border is more acute than the angle on the cranidia of A. brachyphasis and that have more pronounced fossulae at the anterolateral comers of the glabella than the fossulae on the associated specimens of A. brachyphasis. In addition, on these forms associated with A. brachyphasis in the upper beds of the subzone, the fixed cheeks are slightly upsloping, the glabella has a distinct ornamentation of fine pits, and the surface of the pleural parts of the pygidium is ornamented by obscure closely spaced fine granules. These specimens are here assigned to the early part of the range of A. haguei. On the later forms of A. haguei, pygidial furrows are more subdued than on earlier forms, the pleural regions are somewhat less concave, the axis is somewhat shorter, the cranidia have more pronounced fossulae at the anterolateral corners of the glabella, and a border furrow is more consistently present. The collections from beds directly overlying the highest beds containing A. haguei at McGill, Nev., include a species that has many features in common with A. haguei. Cranidia of the two species are indistinguishable. Both species have a fine pitted ornamentation on the cranidium and fine closely-spaced granules on the pleural regions of the pygidium. The species differ in the structure of the pygidium and the thorax. The pleural tips of the thoracic segments of the new species, A. longispina, are long and backswept in contrast to the short and laterally directed tips of A. haguei. The pygidium of A. longispina is distinctly subquadrate in outline rather than transversely subo-vate as in A. haguei. A form having elongate pleural tips on the thoracic segments but a transversely subovate pygidium is present in beds at the top of the range of A. haguei in a partial section in the Highland Range, Nev. This form is interpreted here as being evolutionally as well as morphologically transitional between A. haguei and A. longispina. Because of its pygidial shape, it is tentatively included within the hypodigm of A. haguei. In both the McGill and Highland Range sections, the fossiliferous beds directly overlying the beds containing the long-spined populations of Aphelaspis have a species that differs from A. longispina only by having posterolateral spines formed on the pygidium. This species is assigned to a new genus and named Di-canthopyge guadrata n. sp. Two additional species of Bicanthopyge are found in succeeding beds at McGill and differ from D. guadrata only in shape of the pygidium. The oldest of these is D. convergent n. sp., which has distinctly convergent sides of the pygidium but moderately long posterior spines. The terminal species is D. reductus n. sp., which has an even more pronounced taper of the pygidial sides making the pygidium subtriangular and reducing the posterior spines to short nubs. D. reductus has no apparent immediate descendants in the Great Basin. The only possibly related species belong to Litocephalus, a genus found in the Bunder-bergia and Elvinia zones. These trilobites have the well-defined cranidial border and long pleural tips to the thoracic segments characteristic of Dicanthopyge, but they have a large pygidium that is transversely subovate and has a distinct median notch. Intermediate forms will have to be found before an evolutionary relationship between Dicanthropyge and Litocephalus can be seriously considered. Parts of the series A. haguei —» D. reductus are known from many areas of the Great Basin, and the stratigraphic succession of the individual elements of the series is always the same. This series of forms is therefore interpreted as a true example of evolution that can be traced through five successive species and two genera. The significant evolutionary changes are in the pleural parts of the thorax and pygidium of these trilobites. At this point, I cannot overemphasize the importance of searching for all parts of dissociated trilobites before attempting identification. For16 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Figure 10.—Evolutionary relationships of Prehousia. Species ranges are proportional to those given in plate 21. example, if only the cranidia of these species were known, more than two “species” probably could not have been recognized, and these would probably have been considered congeneric. PREHOUSIA PRIMA->PREHOUSIA ALATA The sequence Prehousia prima —> P. alata (fig. 10) is somewhat more subtle than the sequence of Aphelaspis liaguei —> Dicanthopyge reductus. Prehousia prima, which is first found in the McGill section in association with D. reductus, could be assigned to Aphelaspis on the basis of all characteristics except size of the palpebral lobes. The lobes are distinctly shorter than the palpebral lobes of any of the Great Basin species of the Aphelaspidinae. In strata immediately above beds containing P. prima, a second species, P. indenta, is found, which differs from P. prima by having slightly narrower fixed cheeks. A third species, P. alata, which has still narrower fixed cheeks and, also, smaller palpebral lobes, is found in higher beds. The pygidia of the species in this series are much like the pygdium of Aphelaspis subditus Palmer, but they differ by having a somewhat wider border of more constant width. The combined characteristics—narrow fixed cheeks, small palpebral lobes, and a pygidial border of nearly constant width—are features of the genus Housia from the Elvinia zone. Prehousia diverta n. sp. from the Dunderbergia zone is intermediate both morphologically and stratigraphically between the evolution-EVOLUTION WITHIN THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE 17 Figure 11.—Evolutionary relationships of Aphelaspis and Dicanthopyge. ary sequence of P. prima —» P. alata and the species of Housia. Although the details of the whole evolutionary sequence are not available because of lack of sufficient specimens from critical levels, the striking morphologic change of width of the fixed cheeks and size of the palpebral lobes with time is well shown by the triangular diagram in figure 12. The great similarity of P. prima to earlier species of Aphelaspis is evidence for the probable derivation of the Housiinae from one of the species of the Aphe-laspidinae, and it is the principal reason for changing the family Housiidae (Palmer, 1960a, p. 71) to a subfamily within the Pterocephaliidae. ELBURGIA INTERMEDIA N. SP.->ELVINIA ROEMERI (SHUMARD) Although the series ETbwrgia intermedia —» Elvinia roemeri (fig. 13) is shown as beginning with E. intermedia n. sp., Dunderbergia brevispina n. sp. may be a still older species in the same lineage. The similarities between Dunderbergia and Elburgia are shown by the median angulation of the border and border furrow on the cranidium, the form of the pygidium, and the course of the ventral cephalic sutures. Species of both genera are found throughout the Dunderbergia zone; so, evidence for any common ancestry must be found in older beds. The discovery of Dunderbergia18 TRILOBITES OP THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Length of glabella Figure 12.—Comparative evolution of length of palpebral lobe, width of fixed cheek, and length of glabella in Prehousia. brevispina in the upper part of the Dieanthopyge zone provides an important possible link between the genera. The cranidium of D. brevispina has the prominent convex glabella characteristic of most species of Dunderbergia. The free cheeks have short genal spines virtually like those of all the species of Elbur-gia. Until additional intermediate forms can be found in the Prehousia zone, however, a direct ancestral relationship between D. brevispina and a species of Elbwr-gia cannot be demonstrated with certainty. Evolutionary relationships among the species of Elburgia are complicated by the fact that the range of Elburgia granulosa (Hall and Whitfield) completely overlaps that of E. intermedia n. sp. and overlaps the lower part of the range of E. quinnensis (Res-ser). In general, however, the granular species of Elburgia are found in older beds than is E. quinnensis, which is characterized by a smooth surface. Because E. intermedia lacks granules on the external surface of the glabella, and thus is morphologically intermediate between E. granulosa and E. quinnensis, and because its total range is older than the range of E. quinnensis, it is here considered to be the probable direct ancestor of E. quinnensis.EVOLUTION WITHIN THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE 19 Dunderbergia Dicanthopyge bremspina zone Elvinia roemeri . quinnensis Dunderbergia zone intermedia granulosa Prehousia zone Elburgia Elvinia zone Figure 13.—Evolutionary relationships of Elburgia. Species ranges are proportional to those given in plate 21. The differences between E. quinnensis and Elvinia roemeri (Shumard) lie entirely in the cranidium and are indicated principally the presence of an evenly curved border furrow and a shallow posterior trans-glabellar furrow of nearly constant depth on E. roe-men. The stratigraphic ranges of these common species do not overlap, further strengthening the conclusion that the younger species, E. roemeri, is a direct descendant of E. quinnensis. PTEROCEPHALIA CONCAVA PALMER—► PTEROCEPHALIA SANCTISABAE ROEMER Pteroceplialia concava (fig. 14) is older than P. sanctisabae and is found in the middle and lower parts of the Dunderbergia zone. P. sanctisabae is found in the upper Dunderbergia zone and throughout the Elvinia zone. Holaspid cranidia of the two species that are longer than 10 mm are nearly indistinguishable, although P. concava generally has less well formed glabellar furrows. The large pygidia of P. sanctisabae differ from those of P. concava only by having one or two additional distinct ring furrows and pleural ridges. The principal differences between the species are in the early development of the holaspis (Palmer, 1960a, p. 88). The small holaspis of P. concava has a short frontal area on the cranidium and a relatively narrow pygidial border; these characteristics resemble those of species of Sigmocheilus. During holaspid development the cranidial and pygidial borders increased their breadths markedly. In contrast, small20 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Figure 14.—Evolutionary relationships within Pterocephalia. Species ranges are proportional to those given in plate 21. holaspids of P. sanctisabae already resemble the large holaspids. Thus, P. concava seems to be a transitional species reflecting its Sigmocheilus-like ancestor in the early holaspid stages and developing a different large holaspid whose characteristics became stabilized and were present throughout the holaspid development of the descendant species, P. sanctisabae. ELVINIELLA LAEVIS PALMER—> IRVINGELLA MAJOR ULRICH AND RESSER The series Elviniella laevis —> Irvingella major (fig. 15) has been suggested in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a, p. 64), but lack of data prevented adequate documentation of the series. The additional stratigraphic information collected from the regional study presented in the present paper seems to confirm the evolutionary series. A probable ancestor for Elviniella laevis is not found in the Great Basin region. In the Dunderbergia zone, however, this species is linked by two morphologically and stratigraphically intermediate species to Irvingella major at the top of the El-vinia zone. Irvingella angustilimbatus Kobayashi is the probable direct descendant of Elviniella laevis; it differs by having a parallel-sided rather than anteriorly tapered glabella and a shorter more nearly sub-equally divided frontal area. I. angustilimbatus gave rise to I. flohri Resser, which has a still shorter frontal area that is subdivided into a brim and border only on meraspid and small holaspid specimens. I. major seems to have evolved from I. flohri by the development of a more prominent glabella and the movement of the anterior ends of the palpebral lobes closer to the axial furrows. I. major does not have any apparent immediate descendants, and the evolutionary sequence probably terminates at the top of the Pterocephaliid biomere. The foregoing evolutionary sequences are potentially useful for interregional and intercontinental correlation. Although each species, in theory, may live on after the appearance of an evolutionary offshoot, the first appearance of a species can certainly be no earlier than the time of its development from an earlier form. Whereas the first individual or even the first few generations of newly evolved species can never be determined in practice, the observed lower limits of all but the first species in the foregoing seriesSIGNIFICANCE OF ORNAMENTATION 21 Elvinia zone Irvingella Dunderbergia zone laevis Elviniella armustilimbatus. major Figure 15.—Evolutionary relationships of Irvingella. are probably close to the real lower limits of these species. Otherwise, examples of association of ancestor and descendant should occur, but these have generally not been seen. Also, the observed upper limits of intermediate species in a series may be close to the real upper limits. Thus, the genus Irvingella takes on special sratigraphic importance. Species of this genus have been reported from Australia, South America, and many localities in Europe and Asia (p. 46). Identification and evaluation of the specimens from these localities affords the best opportunity presently known for precise intercontinental correlation of regions that were widely separated during the Cambrian, particularly if more than one element in the evolutionary series is present. Species ranges are proportional to those given in plate 21. SIGNIFICANCE OF ORNAMENTATION External surfaces of trilobites of the Pteroce-phaliid biomere are smooth, pitted, or covered to varying degrees with one or more sizes of granules. Ornamentation is an important criterion for the identification of species of most genera of the Elviniidae and of some other genera. Discussion of the reliability of ornamentation for population differentiation has been presented in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a, p. 57, 58). The regional study presented here shows that in some genera (for example, Dunderbergia, Elburgia, Litocephalus, Cemuolimbus), species whose principal identifying characteristics are their ornamentation 735-610 0-65-322 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN have partly overlapping ranges in time (pi. 21). However, these species are rarely found in the same collection. If they are found associated, only one species is common. These observations seem to indicate that contemporaneous congeneric species generally did not inhabit the same local areas. If the whole trilobite fauna of the Pterocephaliid biomere is analyzed for stratigraphic distribution of ornamentation, a striking arrangement of forms having and lacking granular ornamentation is apparent. Whether all the trilobites or only the common species are included, the faunas below the Dunderbergia zone, where species lacking granular ornamentation predominate, contrast with the faunas in and above the Dunderbergia zone, where species having granular ornamentation predominate. If the distribution figures for the common species are broken down to each subzone, the curve constructed to show species having granular ornamentation indicates, first that less than 20 percent of the granular species occur in the Aphelaspis zone, and second that the proportion of granular species increases regularly to a peak of more than 80 percent of the fauna in the Dunderbergia zone and then decreases to less than 50 percent of the fauna at the end of the Elvinia zone (fig. 16). This distribution pattern is at least partly due to the fact that the Aphelaspidinae and Housiinae, which are the common trilobites in beds of the pr^-Dunderbergia zone, include few species having granular ornamentation, whereas the Elviniidae and Pterocephaliinae, which characterize the younger beds, commonly include species having granular ornamentation. How- ever, all the suprageneric taxa involved include both species having and species lacking granular ornamentation. The relative abundance of species having granular ornamentation in the Dunderbergia zone may result from parallel evolution in several families in response to the environmental changes related to the regional shift towards more calcareous sediments at this time. Although this change might explain the distribution pattern outlined in figure 16, it provides only a partial explanation for the contemporaneous existence of congeneric ornamented species that seem to have mutually exclusive geographic distributions. If the trilobites were naturally gregarious, and a species traveled in swarms, perhaps local abundance of particular ornamented species merely indicates temporary and random population peaks. Their distribution pattern, however, may be related to special local and as yet unresolved microenvironments. If such special conditions existed, then the strata affected by microenvironments might be recognized by their characteristic ornamented species; this relationship would be very useful in making a bed-by-bed petrographic-paleontologic analysis of paleoecology. Such a paleoecological analysis, however, is the subject for a separate study that must take into consideration not only the trilobites described here but also the agnostid trilobites, the linguloid, acrotretid, and orthoid brachiopods, and the echinoderms, conodonts, algae, sponges, molluscs, and burrowing soft-bodied organisms that formed a part of the animal communities. Zones Percentages of species 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 1 1 1 1 L 1 1 1 Elvinia ° ^ Dunderbergia / Prehousia Dicanthopyge S'"" Aphelaspis Figure 16.—Changes in percentage of common species having granular ornamentation during the time of the Pterocephaliid biomere.KEY TO THE PTYCHOPARIOID TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE IN THE GREAT BASIN 23 KEY TO THE PTYCHOPARIOID TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE IN THE GREAT BASIN The following key is designed as an aid to the idnetification of the trilobites described in this paper. Although it may also aid in identification of trilobites at the generic level in other contemporaneous faunas, its purpose is parochial. Because of the necesssarily subjective nature of many of the characteristics used in the key, all final determinations of a species identification will require reference to illustrations and descriptive text. The key is constructed principally on the basis of cranidial features, and pygidial features are cited only where absolutely necessary for final discrimination of species having nearly indistinguishable cranidia. Statements about details of ornamentation refer to textural features of the external surface of the exoskeleton, which are visible on many specimens only after whitening with MgO or NH4C1. All proportions cited were determined from measurement under a microscope containing a scale having divisions of at least one-fifth millimeter. Particular dimensions were measured as straight-line distances between furrows or from margins to furrows in the following manner: Dimension Sagittal length of border______ Sagittal length of brim-....... Sagittal length of frontal area. Sagittal length of glabella____ Width of fixed cheeks__________ Basal glabellar width.......... Distinct anterior position of palpebral lobes. Description of measurement From anterior cranidial margin to middle of border furrow. From middle of border furrow to middle of preglabellar furrow. From anterior cranidial margin to middle of preglabellar furrow. From middle of preglabellar furrow to middle of occipital furrow. On line between midlengths of palpebral lobes, from middle of palpebral furrow to middle of axial furrow. Between midpoints of axial furrows across widest part of glabella just anterior to occipital furrow. If sagittal distance from preglabellar furrow to line connecting anterior ends of palpebral lobes is about two-thirds or less of sagittal distance from occipital furrow to line connecting posterior ends of palpebral lobes. Move to key number Key No. and characteristic indicated 1. a. Frontal area on cranidium either convex and not divided or lacks indication of brim in front of glabella________9 b. Brim on craniduim indicated in front of glabella___________2 Move to key number Key No. and characteristic indicated 2. a. Posterior glabellar furrows connected across midline of glabella___________________________________________13 b. Posterior glabellar furrows not connected across midline of glabella______________________________________________3 3. a. Cranidial border distinctly concave (Pterocephaliinae).50 b. Cranidial border not distinctly concave________________4 4. a. Glabella has at least one pair of moderately deep lat- eral glabellar furrows______________________________15 b. Glabella has lateral furrows generally shallow, poorly formed, or absent_________________________________________5 5. a. Palpebral lobes distinctly anterior to glabellar mid- length______________________________________________24 b. Palpebral lobes about opposite or posterior to glabella midlength_________________________________________________6 6. a. Cranidial border defined by distinct border furrow of approximately constant depth________________________31 b. Cranidial border defined by change in slope or by poorly defined shallow border furrow_____________________________7 7. a. Sagittal length of border equal to or greater than length of brim______________________________________________8 b. Sagittal length of border less than length of brim___40 8. a. Sagittal length of frontal area more than one-half length of glabella___________Listroa toxoura Palmer (pi. 11). b. Sagittal length of frontal area less than one-half length of glabella______________________________Minupeltis—114 9. a. At least one pair of deep lateral glabellar furrows present_____________________________________________45 b. Lateral glabellar furrows only slightly apparent_____10 10. a. Glabella well defined by axial furrows________________11 b. Glabella poorly defined by axial furrows______________12 11. a. Distinct border furrow present________Oligometopus—56 b. No distinct border furrow_____________Cheilocephalus—57 12. a. Sagittal length of frontal area more than one-fourth length of glabella-Bynumina globosa (Walcott) (pi. 18). b. Sagittal length of frontal area less than one-fourth length of glabella. Pseudokingstonia exotica Palmer (pi. 1). 13. a. Sides of glabella subparallel, at least in posterior half. Irvingella angustilimbatus Kobayashi (pi. 6). b. Sides of glabella convergent forward__________________14 14. a. Ocular ridges directed slightly anterolaterally towards ends of palpebral lobes. _ Elviniella laevis Palmer (pi. 7). b. Ocular ridges directed straight laterally or slightly posterolaterally to ends of palpebral lobes -Elvinia—61 15. a. Palpebral lobes distinctly anterior to glabellar mid- length______________________________________________46 b. Palpebral lobes about opposite or posterior to glabellar midlength________________________________________________16 16. a. Width of fixed cheeks distinctly less than one-fourth basal glabellar width_______________________________17 b. Width of fixed cheeks one-fourth or more basal glabellar width____________________________________________________18 17. a. Sagittal length of border greater than length of brim. Comanchia minus Palmer (pi. 19). b. Sagittal length of border less than length of brim. Stenambon—62 18. a. Anterior border has long anteriorly directed projection. Dokimocephalus pernasuta (Walcott) (pi. 3). b. Anterior border lacks long anterior projection________1924 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Mom to key number Key No. and characteristic indicated 19. a. Anterior border furrow has distinct anteriorly directed median angulation_________________________________20 b. Anterior border furrow nearly evenly curved in plan view_______________________________________________ 21 20. a. Second pair of glabellar furrows nearly as deep as pos- terior glabellar furrows______________Elburgia—64 b. Second pair of glabellar furrows distinctly shallower than posterior glabellar furrows_____________Dunderbergia—73 21. a. Glabella nearly subparallel sided and squarely truncate at front..----------------------------Erixanium—63 b. Glabella either distinctly tapered forward or rounded at front__________________________________________________22 22. a. Palpebral lobes small, poorly defined, having length less than one-third sagittal length of glabella. Glaphijraspis ornata (Lochman) (pi. 7). b. Palpebral lobes large, well defined, having length more than one-third sagittal glabellar length________________23 23. a. Fixed cheeks nearly horizontal. Pseudosaratogia leptogranulata Palmer (pi. 2). b. Fixed cheeks distinctly upsloping; palpebral lobes dis- tinctly posterior to glabellar midlength. Iddingsia—66 c. Fixed cheeks distinctly upsloping; palpebral lobes about opposite glabellar midlength Kindbladia affinis (Walcott) (pi. 3). 24. a. Palpebral lobes well defined by palpebral furrows. Morosa—81 b. Palpebral lobes poorly defined by palpebral furrows..25 25. a. Axial furrows at sides of glabella noticeably downsloping anterior to palpebral lobes, in side view; brim steeply downsloping, nearly flat, wider than nearly horizontal border________________________________Housia—82 b. Axial furrows at sides of glabella not noticeably down-sloping anterior to palpebral lobes___________________26 26. a. Axial furrows at sides of glabella noticeably concave between palpebral lobes in dorsal view. Parahousia—83 b. Axial furrows at sides of glabella not noticeably concave___________________________________________________27 27. a. Brim has distinct median swelling. Tumicephalus depressus Palmer (pi. 13). b. Brim lacks median swelling______________________28 28. a. Occipital furrow not apparent. Blountia bristolensis Resser (pi. 1). b. Occipital furrow apparent_______________________29 29. a. Width of fixed cheek about one-half basal glabellar width; glabella barely tapered forward, very rounded at front---------------------------Hardyoides—115 b. Width of fixed cheek generally less than one-half basal glabellar width; glabella either distinctly tapered forward or bluntly rounded at front____________________30 30. a. Basal glabellar width slightly greater than glabellar length; if width equals length, sagittal length of cranid- ium less than 4 mm_________________Aphclotoxon—84 b. Basal glabellar width slightly less than glabellar length; if width equals length, sagittal length of cranidium generally exceeds 4 mm______________________Prehousia—69 31. a. Anterior margin of cranidium distinctly pointed. Morosa extensa Palmer (pi. 20). b. Anterior margin of cranidium rounded_________________32 32. a. Fixed cheeks strongly upsloping. .Anechocephalus—89 b. Fixed cheeks nearly horizontal or only slightly upsloping................................................... 33 Move to key number Key No. and characteristic indicated 33. a. Border furrow on cranidium has indication of slight to moderate median angulation that is pointed forward. _______________________________Dunderbergia—73 b. Border furrow lacks indication of median angulation that is pointed forward___________________________________34 34. a. Sagittal length of border greater than that of brim. Taenora expansa Palmer (pi. 11). b. Sagittal length of border less than that of brim______35 35. a. Anterior end of glabella strongly rounded; junction between axial and preglabellar furrows unmarked. Apachia—80 b. Anterior end of glabella bluntly rounded; distinct anterolateral corners or shallow to deep anterolateral fossulae apparent................................36 36. a. External surface of cranidium strongly pitted......37 b. External surface of cranidium smooth, faintly pitted or granular______________________________________38 37. a. Border very convex in sagittal profile. Delhal punctata Palmer (pl.3). b. Border flat or unevenly convex in sagittal profile. Prehousia prima Palmer (pi. 13). 38. a. Pygidium has one or two pairs of border spines___43 b. Pygidium lacks border spines______________________39 39. a. Pygidium has distinct posterior median notch. Litocephalus—92 b. Pygidium lacks notch in posterior margin_________44 40. a. External surface of cranidium smooth or pitted___41 b. External surface of cranidium has strong granular ornamentation. Pseudosaratogia abnormis Palmer (pi. 2). 41. a. Pygidium has one pair of marginal spines. Dicanthopyge—95 b. Pygidium lacks marginal spines..__________________42 42. a. Pygidium has median swelling behind axis. Erixaniuml brachyaxis Palmer (pi. 17). b. Pygidium lacks median swelling behind axis. Aphelaspis—97 43. a. Pygidial margin between border spines curved forward. Dicanthopyge—95 b. Pygidial margin between border spines curved backward. Olenaspella—90 44. a. Lateral border of free cheek moderately convex; cranidial length less than 6 mm. Bromella veritas Palmer (pi. 18). b. Lateral border of free cheek nearly flat; cranidial length may exceed 6 mm_________________________Aphelaspis—97 45. a. Posterior furrows on glabella connected across top Irvingella—59 b. Posterior furrows on glabella curved, not connected across top______________Terranovella brevis Palmer (pi. 7). 46. a. Occipital ring has prominent occipital spine. Xenocheilos granulosus Palmer (pi. 7). b. Occipital ring lacks prominent occipital spine_47 47. a. Glabellar sides moderately to strongly convergent forward_________________________________________48 b. Glabellar sides subparallel, bowed, or only slightly convergent forward___________________________________49 48. a. Sagittal length of border less than length of brim. Dytremacephalus—101 b. Sagittal length of border equal to or greater than length of brim_________________________________Aphelotoxon—84KEY TO THE PTYCHOPARIOID TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE IN THE GREAT BASIN 25 Move to key number Key No. and characteristic indicated 49. a. Sagittal length of frontal area more than one-sixth length of glabella___________________Simulolenus—102 b. Sagittal length of frontal area less than one-sixth length of glabella___________Aciculolenus peculiaris Palmer (pi. 7). 50. a. Border tapered laterally to sharp point. Cernuolimbus depressus Palmer (pi. 14). b. Border not tapered to sharp point laterally_____________51 51. a. Cranidial border well defined_________________________52 b. Cranidial border poorly defined.......................54 52. a. Palpebral lobes poorly defined by palpebral furrow. Strigambitus? blepharina Palmer (pi. 16). b. Palpebral lobes well defined by palpebral furrow____53 53. a. Border furrow generally shallow; junction of facial suture with anterior margin not distinctly angular. Sigmocheilus—104 b. Either border furrow deep and narrow, or junction of facial sutures with anterior margin distinctly angular. Cernuolimbus—107 54. a. Cranidium has well-defined granular ornamentation on brim_______________________________Strigambitus—110 b. Cranidium has subdued or absent granular ornamentation on brim___________________________________________55 55. a. External surface of cranidium finely pitted. Pterocephalial punctata Palmer (pi. 17). b. External surface of cranidium not pitted. Pterocephalia—112 56. a. Width of fixed cheeks about one-half basal glabellar width; granular ornamentation well-defined. Oligometopus breviceps (Walcott) (pi. 1). b. Width of fixed cheeks one-third or less basal glabellar width; granular ornamentation barely apparent. Oligometopus contractus Palmer (pi. 1). 57. a. Frontal area short—length about one-ninth that of glabella including occipital ring; anterior margin convex, has zone of terrace lines about half sagittal length of frontal area.. Cheilocephalus brachyops (pi. 1). b. Frontal area nearly flat—length more than one-eighth that of glabella including occipital ring______________58 58. a. External surfaces of all parts nearly smooth. Cheilocephalus brevilobus (Walcott) (pi. 1). b. External surfaces of all parts covered with closely spaced granules; zone of terrace lines on anterior margin narrow. Cheilocephalus granulosus Palmer (pi. 1). 59. a. Width of fixed cheek about two-thirds basal glabellar width____________Irvingella transversa Palmer (pi. 6). b. Width of fixed cheek one-half or less basal glabellar width__________________________________________________60 60. a. Distance between palpebral furrows on line tangent to front of glabella slightly greater than basal glabellar width; transverse and longitudinal convexity of glabella moderate; second glabellar furrows generally not apparent________..Irvingella flohri Resser (pi. 6). b. Distance between palpebral furrows on line tangent to front of glabella slightly less than basal glabellar width; transverse and longitudinal convexity of glabella great; second pair of glabellar furrows generally distinct, especially on molds. Irvingella major Ulrich and Resser (pi. 6). 61. a. Surface of cranidium smooth; sagittal length of border distinctly less than length of brim. Elvinia roemeri (Shumard) (pi. 3). Move to key number Key No. and characteristic indicated b. Surface of cranidium covered with low coarse granules; sagittal length of border about equal to length of brim Elvinia granulata Resser (pi. 3). 62. a. External surface obscurely ornamented; pygidium has broad, shallow median notch; axis has three distinct ring furrows behind articulating furrow. Stenambon paucigranulus Palmer (pi. 11). b. External surface conspicuously ornamented with closespaced granules; pygidium has moderately deep median notch; axis has four distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Stenambon megagranulus (pi. 11). 63. a. Cranidial border defined by distinct shallow border furrow; axis of pygidium has two or three ring furrows; postaxial part of pygidium has distinct carina Erixanum carinatum Palmer (pi. 17). b. Cranidial border defined principally by change in slope; axis of pygidium has five or six ring furrows; postaxial part of pygidium lacks carina. Erixanium multisegmentus Palmer (pi. 17). 64. a. Glabella has prominent external granular ornamenta- tion. Elburgia granulosa (Hall and Whitfield) (pi. 5). b. Glabella lacks external granular ornamntation________65 65. a. Brim has distinct coarse granular ornamentation on external surface___Elbut gia intermedia Palmer (pi. 6). b. Granular ornamentation lacking or only barely visible on lateral parts of brim. Elburgia quinnensis (Resser) (pi. 6). 66. a. Sagittal length of border on cranidium distinctly less than length of brim; surface of mold has granules on top of glabella and fixed cheeks; lateral and posterior border furrows on free cheek joined. Iddingsia intermedia Palmer (pi. 2). b. Sagittal length of border on cranidium equal to or slightly more than sagittal length of brim; surface of mold smooth; lateral and posterior border furrows on free cheek not connected_____________________________________67 67. a. External surface of cranidium smooth. Iddingsia utahensis Resser (pi. 2). b. External surface of cranidium partly or wholly granular________________________________________________68 68. a. Brim and border smooth or have very fine granular ornamentation; distinct contrast between ornament on glabella and that on frontal area. Iddingsia similis (Walcott) (pi. 2). b. Brim and border have distinct granular ornamentation. Iddingsia robusta (Walcott) (pi. 2). 69. a. Length of palpebral lobe on cranidium generally about one-half length of glabella. Prehousia semicircularis Palmer (pi. 12). b. Length of palpebral lobe on cranidium generally about one-third or less length of glabella____________________70 70. a. Sagittal profile of frontal area smoothly concave; frontal area lacks definite border furrow. Prehousia diverta Palmer (pi. 12). b. Frontal area has distinct border furrow; border flat or gently convex________________________________________71 71. a. Width of fixed cheeks on larger holaspids (length >4 mm) more than 12 percent of sum of length of glabella, width of fixed cheek, and length of palpebral lobe, surface has moderately distinct pits. Prehousia indenta Palmer (pi. 13).26 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Move to key number Key No. and characteristic indicated 71. b. Width of fixed cheeks on larger holaspids generally less than 12 percent of sum of length of glabella, width of fixed cheek, and length of palpebral lobe; surface smooth, faintly pitted, or roughened______________72 72. a. Pygidium has poorly defined pleural furrows; posterior margin unevenly curved; width of axis nearly one-third width of pygidium; surface generally smooth or faintly pitted_____Prehousia alata Palmer (pi. 13). b. Pygidium has three distinct pleural furrows extending across pleural field onto inner part of slightly concave border; posterior margin evenly rounded; width of axis about one-fourth width of pygidium; surface generally faintly roughened. Prehousia impolita Palmer (pi. 13). 73. a. External surfaces of cranidium and free cheek generally smooth; pygidium has fine granular ornamentation on axis and border only. Dunderbergia nitida (Hall and Whitfield) (pi. 4). b. External surface of cranidium ornamented partly or wholly with either pits or granules; pygidium partly or wholly ornamented with closely spaced granules_________74 74. a. External surfaces of cranidium and free cheek coarsely pitted—particularly top of glabella and border regions______Dunderbergia polybothra Palmer (pi. 4). b. External surface of cranidium partly or wholly granular....................................................75 75. a. Cranidial relief low; anterolateral corners of brim generally only downsloping; free cheek has long slender genal spine; length of spine about three times length of posterior section of facial suture. Dunderbergia anyla (Hall and Whitfield) (pi. 4). b. Cranidial relief moderate to great; anterolateral corners of brim generally depressed; free cheek has short slender genal spine; length of spine about equal to or shorter than length of posterior section of facial suture_________________________________________________76 76. a. Ornamentation of cranidium generally consists only of scattered moderately prominent coarse granules. Dunderbergia variagranula Palmer (pi. 5). b. Ornamentation of cranidium consists either of mixture of closely spaced fine granules and scattered coarse granules or of closely spaced fine granules only_______77 77. a. Cranidial ornamentation consists dominantly of closely spaced fine granules on all parts. Dunderbergia calculosa Palmer (pi. 5). b. Cranidial ornamentation consists of both closely spaced fine granules and scattered coarse granules____________78 78. a. Closely spaced fine granules on cranidium generally ap- parent only on border, also on top of glabella and palpebral lobes of some specimens; coarse scattered granules most apparent on brim; free cheek has genal spine whose length is about equal to length of posterior section of facial suture. Dunderbergia bigranulosa Palmer (pi. 4). b. Closely spaced granules and scattered coarse granules mixed on all parts of cranidium; free cheek has genal spine whose length is about one-half length of posterior section of facial suture. Dunderbergia brevispina Palmer (pi. 5). 79. a. Border of cranidium differentiated from brim only by distinct break in slope; length of border less than one-half length of brim. Pseudosaratogia abnormis Palmer (pi. 2). Move to key number Key No. and characteristic indicated 79. b. Border of cranidium differentiated from brim by shallow border furrow; length of border about one-half length of brim. Pseudosaratogia leptogranulata Palmer (pi. 2). 80. a. Frontal area subequally divided; back of glabella rises distinctly from occipital furrow. Apachia butlerensis (Frederickson) (pi. 3). b. Sagittal length of brim about twice that of border; back of glabella does not rise distinctly from occipital furrow_______________________Apachia prima Palmer (pi. 3). 81. a. Length of genal spine about equal to length of posterior section of facial suture; terrace lines only on outer edge of border of p ygidium. Morosa brevispina Palmer (pi. 20). b. Length of genal spine about twice length of posterior section of facial suture; entire border of pygidium generally covered with terrace lines. Morosa longispina Palmer (pi. 20). 82. a. Free cheek has long genal spine; sagittal length of pygid- ium about two-thirds width. Housia ovata Palmer (pi. 12). b. Free cheek lacks genal spine; sagittal length of pygidium about one-half width. Housia varro (Walcott) (pi. 12). 83. a. Sagittal length of border of cranidium nearly twice that of brim; external surface has coarse pitted ornamentation___________Parahousia constricta Palmer (pi. 12). b. Sagittal length of border of cranidium only slightly greater than length of brim; external surface not distinctly pitted. Parahousia subequalis Palmer (pi. 12). 84. a. Occipital ring has short median spine. Aphelotoxon spinosus Palmer (pi. 19). b. Occipital ring lacks spine...__________________________85 85. a. Anterior margin distinctly acuminate; glabella poorly defined______Aphelotoxon acuminata Palmer (pi. 19). b. Anterior margin gently curved; glabella moderately well defined_____________________________________________86 86. a. External surface of cranidium coarsely pitted; fixed cheeks moderately convex; sagittal length of border distinctly greater than that of brim. Aphelotoxon punctata Palmer (pi. 19). b. External surface generally either smooth or granular; fixed cheeks flat or gently convex; frontal area subequally divided______________________________________87 87. a. Width of fixed cheek nearly one-half basal glabellar width__________Aphelotoxon marginata Palmer (pi. 19). b. Width of fixed cheek about one-third basal glabellar width___________________________________________________88 88. a. External surface covered with closely spaced fine granules______Aphelotoxon granulosus Palmer (pi. 19). b. External surface smooth. Aphelotoxon limbata Palmer (pi. 19). 89. a. Sagittal length of frontal area of cranidium less than one-third glabellar length; pygidium lacks posterolate al spines___Anechocephalus trigranulatus Palmer (pi. 20). b. Sagittal length of frontal area of cranidium between one-third and one-half length of glabella; pygidium has pair of posterolateral spines. Anechocephalus spinosus Palmer (pi. 20).KEY TO THE PTYCHOPARIOID TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE IN THE GREAT BASIN 27 Move to key number Key No. and characteristic indicated 90. a. Axis of pygidium has two ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow; border has two pairs of evenly spaced spines, each connected by low ridge to posterior band of adjacent pleural segment. Olenaspella paucisegmenta Palmer (pi. 10). b. Axis of pygidium has three or more ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow; border has one to three pairs of border spines___________________________________________91 91. a. First pleural segment of pygidium has well-formed border spines; other border spines, if present, placed near anterolateral spines. Olenaspella separata Palmer (pi. 10). b. First and second pleural segments of pygidium have well-formed border spines, approximately equally spaced along posterior margin; third pair of spines, if present, placed close to and adaxially from spine of second pleural segment; each spine connected by low ridge to posterior band of adjacent pleural segment. Olenaspella regularis Palmer (pi. 10). 92. a. External surface of cranidial border smooth; top of pygidial axis smooth; posterior median notch short. Litocephalus bilobatus (Hall and Whitfield) (p. 11). b. External surface of cranidial border and pygidial axis ornamented with either fine closely spaced granules or coarse granules______________________________________93 93. a. Cranidial border has scattered coarse granules; pygidial axis has pairs of granules on each of first four segments. Litocephalus verruculapeza Palmer (pi. 11). b. Cranidial border has fine closely spaced granular ornamentation___________________________________________94 94. a. Granular ornamentation on cranidium confined to border; posterior median notch on pygidium short. Litocephalus granulomarginatvs Palmer (pi. 10). b. Fine granular ornamentation present on most areas of cranidium, particularly on top of glabella; pygidium has long, slender median notch. Litocephalus magnus Palmer (pi. 10). 95. a. Pygidium subquadrate, sides subparallel; external sur- faces of pleural regions of pygidium, genal spines, and tips of thoracic segments generally covered with fine granules_______Dicanthopyge quadrata Palmer (pi. 9). b. Sides of pygidium conspicuously convergent posteriorly______________________________________________96 96. a. Posterior border spines moderately long; surfaces of all parts of exoskeleton have shallow closely spaced pits. Dicanthopyge convergens Palmer (pi. 9). b. Posterior border spines short, close together; surfaces of pleural regions of pygidium and genal spines roughened____________Dicanthopyge reductus Palmer (pi.10). 97. a. Pygidium subquadrate; posterior margin has slight median inbend; tips of thoracic segments long, slender, backswept_______Aphelaspis longispina Palmer (pi. 9). b. Pygidium transversely subovate; tips of thoracic segments short, sharp-pointed____________________________98 98. a. Border of pygidium narrow, only slightly expanded laterally; pleural fields crossed by three or four shallow pleural furrows; border of cranidium narrow, well defined by border furrow; eye ridges distinct, directed laterally at right angles to axial line; genal spine on free cheek more than twice as long as posterior section of facial suture..Aphelaspis buttsi (Kobayashi) (pi. 8). Moot to key number Key No. and characteristic indicated 98. b. Border of pygidium moderately expanded laterally; pleural fields crossed by only one or two distinct pleural furrows; genal spine on free cheek less than twice as long as posterior section of facial suture_99 99. a. Fixed cheeks on cranidium slightly upsloping; antero- lateral fossulae generally well formed; brim moderately to strongly convex, making distinct angle with border; sagittal length of border only slightly less than length of brim; external surface generally distinctly pitted; pleural fields on pygidium crossed by one or two moderately well defined pleural furrows; border generally slightly concave. Aphelaspis haguei (Hall and Whitfield) (pi. 9). b. Fixed cheeks on cranidium nearly horizontal; anterolateral fossulae poorly defined; sagittal length of border between one-half and three-fourths length of brim; surface generally smooth; pleural furrows on pygidium generally shallow_______________________________100 100. a. Cranidium has distinct border furrow; palpebral furrow moderately well defined; free cheek has slender genal spine; pygidium has two or three ring furrows generally apparent behind articulating furrow; only one pleural furrow generally apparent. Aphelaspis subditus Palmer (pi. 8). b. Border furrow and palpebral furrow on cranidium very slightly apparent; free cheek has short broad-based genal spine; pygidium has one or two distinct ring furrows generally apparent behind articulating furrow; two pleural furrows generally apparent. Aphelaspis brachyphasis Palmer (pi. 8). 101. a. Palpebral lobes on cranidium placed slightly anterior to glabellar midlength; external surface of cranidium covered with closely spaced granules. Dytremacephalus granulosus Palmer (pi. 18). b. Palpebral lobes on cranidium opposite or slightly anterior to glabellar midlength; distinct granular ornamentation on cranidium confined to top of glabella. Dytremacephalus asperaxis (pi. 18). 102. a. Sagittal length of frontal area about one-fourth glabellar length; pygidium has two distinct furrows posterior to articulating furrow and two distinct pleural furrows. Simulolenus quadrisulcatus (pi. 8). b. Sagittal length of frontal area more than one-fourth glabellar length; pygidium has one ring furrow posterior to articulating furrow and one pleural forrow.._________________________________________________103 103. a. External surface smooth; ring furrow on pygidium poorly defined. Simulolenus wilsoni (Henningsmoen) (pi. 8). b. External surface finely granular; ring furrow on pygidium distinct_________Simulolenus granulatus (Palmer) (pi. 8). 104. a. Pygidium has border spines; length of cranidial border generally less than twice length of brim_____________105 b. Pygidium lacks border spines; length of cranidial border generally more than twice length of brim__________________106 105. a. Pygidial border spines very short; margin of pygidium very slightly scalloped; cranidial brim strongly convex in sagittal profile; external surface of glabella covered with closely spaced coarse granules. Sigmocheilus pogonipensis (Resser) (pi. 15).28 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Move to key number Key No. and characteristic indicated 105. b. Pygidial border spines well defined; five or six short broad-based pairs of spines present; cranidial brim gently convex in sagittal profile; external surface of glabella has very slight fine granular ornamentation. Sigmocheilus flabellijer (Hall and Whitfield) (pi. 15). 106. a. Border of pygidium flared laterally; posterior margin gently rounded, slight median inbend present in some specimens; line connecting points of greatest width passes slightly posterior to end of axis. Sigmocheilus grata (Resser) (pi. 15). b. Border of pygidium not flared laterally; posterior margin bluntly pointed on axial line; line connecting points of greatest width passes over end of axis. Sigmocheilus notha (Resser) (pi. 15). 107. a. External surface of cranidium distinctly pitted. Cernuolimbus orygmatos Palmer (pi. 14) b. External surface of cranidium partly or wholly granular____________________________________________________108 108. a. Sagittal length of cranidial border about 1}* times length of brim_.Cernuolimbus semigranulosus Palmer (pi. 14). b. Sagittal length of cranidial border equal to or less than than length of brim_____________________________________109 109. a. Cranidial border has granular ornamentation. Cernuolimbus granulosus Palmer (pi. 14). b. Cranidial border smooth. Cernoulimbus laevifrons Palmer (pi. 14). 110. a. Pygidium transversely subovate; posterior margin gently convex backward; axis has three well defined ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Strigambitus transversus Palmer (pi. 16) b. Pygidium subquadrate; posterior margin has distinct median inbend; axis generally has only two distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow___________111 111. a. Pleural fields and axis of pygidium coarsely granular; median notch only moderately developed. Stringambitus utahensis (Resser) (pi. 16). b. Pleural fields of pygidium generally nearly smooth; granular ornamentation faint on large specimens; median notch generally deep. Strigambitus bilobus Palmer (pi. 16) 112. a. Pygidium elongate, subquadrate. Pterocephalia elongata Palmer (pi. 17). b. Pygidium subovate-...................................113 113. a. Pygidium has six or more ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow; four or five distinct pleural ridges generally present. Pterocephalia sanctisabae Roemer (pi. 17). b. Pygidium has four or five distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow; two or three distinct pleural ridges generally present. Pterocephalia concava Palmer (pi. 17). 114. a. Anterior end of glabella clearly defined by preglabellar furrow_________Minupeltis definita Palmer (pi. 18). b. Anterior end of glabella not clearly defined by preglabellar furrow. Minupeltis conservator Palmer (pi. 18). 115. a. Occipital spine present. Hardyoides mimicus Palmer (pi. 7). b. Occipital spine absent. Hardyoides minor Kobayashi (pi. 7). SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY The descriptions on the following pages are arranged alphabetically by family, subfamily within the family, genus within the family or subfamily, and species within the genus. Genera not clearly assigned to families or subfamilies are arranged alphabetically under “Unassigned trilobites” (p. 77), following the last of the described trilobites having a family assignment. A diagnosis or description is provided for each species and for most supraspecific taxa. Lack of discussion of a suprageneric taxon indicates acceptance of this taxon as it is constituted in part O of the “Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology,” (Harrington and others, 1959). The descriptive terms used here are defined or illustrated in the Treatise on pages 42, 44, 46, 47 and 117-126. All described specimens are preserved in limestone and show little evidence of diagenetic flattening. Nearly all deformation of specimens resulted from late Paleozoic or younger tectonic activity. Silicification of the exoskeleton is found in specimens from some collections, although the quality of surface detail has been lost on many specimens. All descriptions refer to features of the external surface of the exoskeleton unless specifically stated otherwise. Statements in the section on occurrence given with each species description are a subjective appraisal of the relative abundance of the species in the faunal assemblages in which it is found. Geographic frequency of occurrence is summarized in plate 21, in which the solid bars represent the occurrence of species known from four or more of the localities in figure 1, and the open bars represent the occurrence of species known from three or fewer of these localities. The probability that a named fossil species approximates a neontologic species is directly related to the frequency of occurrence and abundance of specimens assigned to it. Species indicated to be common or moderately common are generally represented by enough material so that new discoveries will probably not materially alter their concept or content. Species indicated to be rare or moderately rare may have their concept or content significantly changed by new discoveries. Family ASAPHISCIDAE Raymond Subfamily BLOUNTIINAE Lochman Genus BLOITNTIA Walcott Blountia Walcott, 1916, p. 396; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, p. 619; Palmer, 1954, p. 721; 1962b, p. 22; Howell, 1959, p. 292. Homodictya Raymond, 1937, p. 1114; Rasetti, 1946, p. 454; Shaw, 1952, p. 473; Howell, 1959, p. 292. Stenocombus Raymond, 1937, p. 1106.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY Blountia bristolensis Resser Plate 1, figures 1, 2, 4 Blountia bristolensis Resser, 1938a, p. 65, pi. 12, fig. 24; Palmer, 1962b, p. 22, pi. 3, figs. 33, 34. Maryvillia bristolensis Resser, 1938a, p. 87, pi. 12, fig. 38. Maryvillia hybrida Resser (part), 1942b, p. 71, pi. 13, figs. 14, 15. Blountia nixonensis Lochman, 1944, p. 43, pi. 4, figs. 7-12; Palmer, 1954, p. 722, pi. 79, fig. 4. Diagnosis.—Anterior margin of cranidium evenly rounded. Width of fixed cheek about one-third basal glabellar width. Sagittal length of border slightly greater than length of brim. Free cheek narrow. Genal spine very short and sharp pointed. Pygidium subsemicircular in outline. Border furrow moderately wel 1 defined at anterolateral margin, becoming shallow towards rear, interrupted by poorly defined end of axis, which barely extends onto border. Discussion.—This species is distinguished from other species in the genus by the form of the border furrow on the pygidium, which becomes shallower towards the rear and seems to be interrupted by the end of the axis. The specimens from Nevada and Utah do not seem to differ significantly from specimens in the Aphelaspis zone in Tennessee. Occurrence. Rare, Aphelaspis zone: House Range, Utah; Highland Range and Yucca Flat, Nev. Family CHEILOCEPHALIDAE Shaw Diagnosis.—Subisopygous ptychoparioid trilobites having an unfurrowed glabella slightly tapered forward, reaching to border furrow or to short undivided frontal area. Palpebral lobes generally situated slightly anterior to glabellar midlength. Posterior limbs moderately broad exsagittally, bluntly pointed. Pygidium has moderately broad border of nearly constant breadth. Axis reaching to inner edge of border; length greater than width; width equal to or less than greatest width of pleural region. Discussion.—Besides Gheilocephalus, the genera Pseudokingstonia n. gen. and Oligometopus Resser are here assigned to this formerly monotypic family. None of the species are common elements of the faunas, and their assignments to one family may only reflect a superficial similarity. Pseudokingstonia is probably correctly assigned, however, because, in addition to the characters in the diagnosis, it has the peculiar geniculation of the posterior limbs of the cranidium and the distally expanded band of the first pygidial segment typical of Gheilocephalus. The assignment of Oligometopus is less certain and is based princi- 29 pally on the presence of the large anteriorly tapered glabella that reaches to the border furrow. Genus CHEILOCEPHALUS Berkey Gheilocephalus Berkey, 1898, p. 289; Palmer, 1954, p. 757; Lochman, 1959, p. 312. Pseudolisania Kobayashi, 1935, p. 162; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, p. 621. Type species.—Gheilocephalus st. croixensis Berkey, 1898, p. 290, pi. 17, fig. 1; pi. 20, figs. 7, 8; pi. 21, fig. 19. Diagnosis.—Moderately large trilobites (maximum probable length about 80 mm) having cranidium sub-trapezoidal in outline. Glabella large, low, tapered forward, and bluntly rounded at front and reaches more than five-sixths cranidial length. Occipital ring well defined, has low poorly defined median node. Frontal area short sagittally and flat or slightly concave; it has poorly defined narrow border. Fixed cheeks narrow, downsloping; width, including palpebral lobes, one-third or less than one-third basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes small, poorly defined, situated opposite anterior third of glabella. Eye ridges short and commonly mark abrupt change in slope between fixed cheek and frontal area. Posterior limbs large, subtriangular in outline; exsagittal length slightly more than one-half length of gabella. Posterior margin generally has distinct “shoulder” about at transverse midlength of limb. Posterior border furrow shallow, curved forward distally on some specimens. Pygidium subsemicircular in outline. Axis prominent, tapers posteriorly to rounded poorly defined tip at inner edge of border; five or more shallow ring furrows generally apparent posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural regions divided by narrow border furrow into gently convex pleural fields and moderately broad concave border of nearly constant width. First pleural furrow well defined extends nearly across border and outlines broad distally expanded anterior band of first pleural segment. Remaining pleural and interpleural furrows generally shallow, close spaced; anterior furrows may extend onto border. External surfaces of all parts are either smooth or have granular ornamentation. Discussion.—This is a rare but distinctive genus found throughout the Pterocephaliid biomere. The small anteriorly placed palpebral lobes, narrow fixed cheeks, short frontal area, and large posterior limbs that generally have marginal “shoulders” distinguish the cranidia from those of all other trilobites in the fauna. The broad concave border of nearly constant width and the distally expanded anterior band of30 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN the first pleural segment are the most distinctive features of the pygidium. Specifically identifiable specimens referable to Cheilocephalus are present in more than a dozen collections from the Pterocephaliid biomere in the Great Basin; they occur in rocks ranging from the upper part of the Aphelaspis zone to the lower part of the Elvinia zone. The species, as recognized, seem to be long-ranging and of limited value for precise dating within the Pterocephaliid biomere. Lochman (1953, p. 887) suppressed Bemicella Frederickson as a synonym of Cheilocephalus without any explanation. Although Frederickson (1949, p. 347) suggested the possibility that the type species of Bemicella, B. minuta, might be an immature Cheilocephalus, he pointed out several valid and useful distinguishing characteristics. Cranidia of C. brachyops n. sp. that are smaller than the cranidia of Bemicella minuta are almost like those of large Cheilocephalus cranidia. (See pi. 1, fig. 14.) The distinctions between cranidia of Bemicella and of Cheilocephalus pointed out by Frederickson, therefore, are not immature features, and Bemicella is here considered to be a genus separate from Cheilocephalus but probably synonymous with Oligometopus (p. 31). Cheilocephalus brachyops n. sp. Plate 1, figures 12-15, 17 Cheilocephalus spp., Palmer, 1960a, p. 94, pi. 10, figs. 13, 14. Diagnosis.—Cranidium has short frontal area; marginal part convex, forms poorly defined border; sagittal length about one-ninth that of glabella, including occipital ring. Anterior margin has zone of terrace lines about one-half sagittal length of frontal area. Fixed cheeks narrow; width slightly less than one-third basal glabellar width. External surface of cranidium has closely-spaced granular ornamentation —most apparent on glabella and fixed cheeks posterior to eye ridges. Outer part of concave border of pygidium nearly horizontal. Tops of axial rings and surface of pleural fields have low scattered poorly defined granules. Discussion.—The short convex marginal part of the frontal area distinguishes this species from the other species of Cheilocephalus in the Great Basin. It differs from C. huttsi Besser, which occurs in the Ore Hill Limestone Member of the Gatesburg Formation in Pennsylvania, principally in having relatively broader fixed cheeks. The pleural region on the right side of a large aberrant pygidium from USGS collection 2563-CO from Shingle Pass, Nev., (pi. 1, fig. 15) is only about two-thirds the width of the pleural region on the left. The margin of the pygidium is complete and the border is present, evidence indicating that the specimen was not broken and healed. Occurrence. Moderately rare, lower part of Elvinia zone: Eureka, Shingle Pass, Snake Range, and Ash Meadows, Nev.; House Range, Utah. Rare, upper part of Prehousia zone: Shingle Pass, Nev. Cheilocephalus brevilobus (Walcott) Plate 1, figures 9-11 Lisanial hreviloha Walcott, 1916, p. 404, pi. 66, figs. 3, 3c. Pseudolisania hreviloha (Walcott). Kobayashi, 1935, p. 162; Resser, 1938a, p. 96, pi. 16, fig. 17. Pseudolisania raaschi Lochman, 1938a, p. 77, pi. 18, figs. 25-34. Pseudolisania texana Lochman, 1938a, p. 80, pi. 18, figs. 35-38. Cheilocephalus hreviloha (Walcott). Palmer, 1954, p. 759, pi. 88, figs. 1-4. Diagnosis.—Frontal area of cranidium relatively broad, nearly flat; sagittal length about one-sixth that of glabella including occipital ring. Width of fixed cheek including palpebral lobe about one-third basal glabellar width. Lateral part of concave border of pygidium nearly horizontal; breadth of pygidium about equal to greatest breadth of pleural field. Surfaces of all parts generally smooth. Fixed cheeks rarely have scattered granules. Discussion.—This species is distinguished from all others in the genus except C. minutus Palmer and C. omega (Lochman and Hu) by its nearly smooth surface. It differs from C. minutus and C. omega by having a relatively broader and less downsloping pygidial border and differs further from C. omega by having a less sagittally convex cranidium; better definition of the axial furrows on the cranidium, and better definition of both axial and ring furrows on the pygidium. Lochman’s assignment of C. omega to Maryvillia and the accompanying attempt to justify it are not supported by any significant morphological features. Her specimens have the “elbows” on the posterior limbs of the cranidium and the distal expansions of the anterior band of the first pleural segment of the pygidium that are characteristic of Cheilocephalus, as are the glabellar shape, structure of the frontal area and posterior limbs, and position of the palpebral lobes. Only in the shallowness of the furrows on the outer surface of the exoskeleton do these specimens have even a superficial resemblance to Maryvillia. They differ most importantly from Maryvillia by lacking a separately identifiable brim, a characteristicSYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 31 of at least generic value. The collection described by Lochman and Hu seems to be one of the uncommon examples of two congeneric species, C. omega and G. granulosus, occurring together. Occurrence. Rare, Aphelaspis zone: Shingle Pass and Snake Range, Nev.; (?) upper part of Elvinia zone: Cherry Creek, Nev. Cheilocephalus granulosus n. sp. Plate 1, figures 6-8 Cheilocephalus sp., Palmer, 1962b, p. 27, pi. 3, figs. 30, 31. Cheilocephalus brevilobus Lochman and Hu, 1962, p. 436, pi. 69, figs. 1-24. Diagnosis.—Frontal area moderately broad, nearly flat; sagittal length between one-sixth and one-eighth length of glabella, including occipital ring. Anterior margin has narrow zone of terrace lines. Width of fixed cheeks including palpebral lobes about one-third basal glabellar width. Outer part of concave border of pygidium nearly horizontal. Breadth of border about equal to greatest breadth of pleural field. External surfaces of all parts, except over areas of muscle attachment on glabella, covered with fine closely spaced granules. Discussion.—This species is intermediate in stratigraphic position between the older form C. brevilobus and the younger species C. brachyops. It differs from C. brevilobus principally by having a granular ornamentation and from C. brachyops by having a broader frontal area and a narrower marginal zone of terrace lines on the cranidium and granular ornamentation on the border of, the pygidium. The distinctive granular ornamentation of this species is also found on all the specimens identified as Cheilocephalus brevilobus by Lochman and Hu (1962) that have the exoskeleton preserved. Their species, therefore, is not conspecific with Walcott’s specimen of C. brevilobus, which has a characteristically smooth external surface, but it is more probably conspecific with the forms described here as C. granulosus n. sp. Occurrence. Rare, Dicanthopyge zone: Cherry Creek and Shingle Pass, Nev.; Dunderbergia zone: Highland Peak, Nev. Genus 0LIG0MET0PTJS Resser Oligometopus Resser, 1936, p. 28; Palmer, 1960a, p. 100. Bernicella Frederickson, 1949, p. 347. Type species.—Ptychoparia (Solenopleural) brevi-ceps Walcott, 1884, p. 49, pi. 10, fig. 9. Description.—Small Cheilocephalidae probably not exceeding 15 mm in total length. Only cranidium known. Glabella prominent, moderately convex trans- versely and longitudinally, well defined by deep axial furrows, tapered forward; sides straight or slightly bowed outward, strongly rounded in front, reaching to border furrow. Glabellar furrows very slightly apparent. Occipital furrow deep, straight. Occipital ring has low, broad median node near occipital furrow. Frontal area consists only of narrow prominent convex, gently curved to nearly straight border having a strongly depressed outer part; sagittal length about one-eighth or less that of glabella. Fixed cheeks moderately convex, downsloping; width between one-fourth and one-half basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes moderately well defined, depressed below surface of cheek, situated opposite or slightly anterior to glabellar midlength; length between one-third and one-half length of glabella. Posterior limbs short, bluntly terminated, have deep, straight border furrow; transverse length less than basal glabellar width. Course of anterior section of facial suture slightly convergent forward from palpebral lobe to border furrow and curved across border to cut anterior margin near anterolateral corners of cranidium. Ventral course not known. Course of posterior section convex. External surfaces of all parts except border have moderately coarse low granules. Border has well-defined terrace lines. Discussion.—Species of this genus differ from others in the Cheilocephalidae particularly by having a prominent convex glabella, moderately broad fixed cheeks, a border clearly defined laterally, and a nearly vertical anterior margin. Bernicella (Frederickson, 1949, p. 347) seems to share these features with Oligometopus and is here considered a synonym of that genus rather than of Cheilocephalus, as stated by Lochman (1953a, p. 887). Only the holotype of Bernicella minuta, the type species, seems referable to Oligometopus. The figured paratype (Frederickson, 1949, pi. 68, fig. 16) is from a different collection and may be an immature specimen of a species of Cheilocephalus. (Compare with C. brachyops, pi. 1 fig. 14.) Oligometopus contractus n. sp. Plate 1, figure 5 Diagnosis.—Fixed cheeks relatively narrow; width about one-third or less than one-third glabellar width. Palpebral lobes situated slightly anterior to glabellar midlength. Granular ornamentation subdued, barely apparent, even on whitened specimens. Discussion—This species has significantly narrower fixed cheeks and considerably less well-developed granular ornamentation than either O. breviceps (Walcott) or O. minutus (Frederickson).32 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Occurrence. Rare, upper part of Dunderbergia zone: Shingle Pass, Nev.; lower part of Elvinia zone: Snake Range, Nev. Oligometopus breviceps (Walcott) Plate 1, figure 3 Ptychoparia (Solenopleural) breviceps Walcott, 1884, p. 49, pi. 10, fig. 9. Stenelymus breviceps (Walcott). Raymond, 1937, p. 1101. Oligometopus breviceps (Walcott). Resser, 1936, p. 29; Palmer, 1960a, p. 100, pi. 10, figs. 19, 20. Diagnosis.—Cranidium has moderately broad convex fixed cheeks; width about one-half basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes situated about opposite glabellar midlength. External surface has moderately coarse well-defined granular ornamentation. Discussion.—This species is most like O. minutus (Frederickson), differing principally by having more convex and less downsloping fixed cheeks, more posteriorly placed palpebral lobes, and a posterior border furrow more nearly at right angles to the axial line. Occurrence. Rare, lower part of Elvina zone, Eureka, Nev. Genus PSEUDOKINGSTONIA n. gen. Type species.—Pseudokingstonia exotica n. sp. Diagnosis.—Cheilocephalidae having cranidium moderately to strongly convex transversely and longitudinally, gently rounded at front. Glabella slightly tapered forward, clearly defined only at sides by change in slope from glabella to slightly downsloping fixed cheeks; front poorly defined, reaching to border. Occipital ring smooth, not differentiated from glabella. Border narrow, low, composed of several transverse terrace lines raised above surface of anterior margin of cranidium. Fixed checks gently convex; width, including palpebral lobe, about one-third basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes not differentiated from fixed cheek, situated opposite anterior third of glabella. Posterior limb subtriangular in outline; transverse width slightly less than basal glabellar width. Posterior border furrow broad, shallow, subparallel to posterior margin. Posterior edge of limb marked by distinct angulation or “shoulder” about midway between tip of limb and axial furrow. Pygidium subsemicircular in outline; all features on external surfaces barely visible. Axis raised slightly above gently convex pleural fields, tapered posteriorly, reaching to inner edge of border; width less than greatest width of pleural region. Border moderately wide, barely differentiated from pleural fields, moderately convex, outer edge depressed. First pleural furrow apparent only across border, barely outlining thickened distal part of anterior band of first pleural segment. Free cheeks and ventral features not known. External surfaces of all known parts smooth. Discussion.—This genus is proposed for small nearly featureless trilobites in the Elvinia zone that superficially resemble the much older genus Kingstonia but differ in several important respects that show a more probable relationship to Cheilocephalus. The cranidium has a poorly defined glabella, narrow terrace-lined border, and small anteriorly placed palpebral lobes and the pygidium has a downturned margin; all these features conform to the general concept of Kingstonia. However, the glabella reaches to the inner edge of the border, the posterior border furrow is subparallel to the posterior margin, and the posterior margin has distinct “shoulders.” Also, the anterior band of the first pleural segment of the pygidium seems to be thickened distally, and the pygidium has a relatively wide border. These features are not typical of Kingstonia and, together with the narrow fixed cheeks and anterior position of the palpebral lobes, are characteristic of Cheilocephalus. Because of these morphologic characteristics, Pseudokingstonia is here recognized as a nearly smooth genus within the Cheilocephalidae. Pseudokingstonia exotica n. sp. Plate 1, figures 16, 18, 19 Diagnosis.—This species is the only one known at present for the genus, and its characteristics are those of the genus. Occurrence. Rare, Elvinia zone: House Range, Utah; Cherry Creek and Schell Creek Range, Nev. Family ELVINIIDAE Kobayashi Diagnosis.—Micropygous ptychoparioid trilobites having a prominent generally well defined glabella; border and doublure on cranidium generally narrow, of nearly constant width, subcircular in cross section except in some Dokimocephalinae having a border that is broad and flat, or modified into unusual shapes. Border and doublure of pygidium generally narrow, of nearly constant width. Axis prominent, generally having four or fewer segments; tip of axis connected to border by short, broad, poorly defined postaxial ridge. Many species have well-formed granular ornamentation. Discussion.—This family includes here what may superficially seem to be a heterogeneous assortment of 10 dubiously related genera (pis. 2-7): Dunderbergia, Elburgia, Elvinia, Elviniella, Irvingella, Apachia,SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 33 Dokimocephalus, Iddingsia, Kindbladia, and Pseudo-samtogia. These genera are listed among six families and four superfamilies in part O of the “Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology” (Harrington and others, 1959). They are grouped here in one family and two subfamilies because of similarities in morphology that suggest possible genetic relationship. The possibility of such a relationship is strengthened by a similar temporal and spatial distribution within a biomere that atforded a continuum of environmental complexes on the western shelf of the North American continent; during the time of occurrence, interrelation could have logically occurred among the genera. Interpretation of the degree of relationship of genera is still highly subjective with regard to Cambrian trilobites and may never be resolved to the satisfaction of all paleontologists. The scheme presented here seems to be the most reasonable at the present time for presenting the relationship of the Upper Cambrian trilobite genera under consideration. The differences between this scheme and that of the Treatise reflects what is perhaps the greatest deficiency in the classification of many of the Cambrian trilobites in that book—that is, the apparent reliance almost entirely on morphologic similarity at the generic level and little or no regard for spatial and temporal distribution of the forms. Thus, morphologic similarities that may indicate real genetic relationships cannot be distinguished from morphologic similarities resulting from convergence or happenstance. If only the end members of lineages are looked at, little reason for grouping, for example, Dokimocephalus (pi. 3, fig. 18) and Irvingella (pi. 6, figs. 7-24) in the same family can be seen. However, by following the history of evolution and relationships of these genera to other trilobites backward in time, a reasonable case for their relationship can be made. Dokimocephalus differs from Iddingsia principally by modification of the cranidial border. Iddingsia has the posterior pair of lateral glabellar furrows commonly longer, more distinct, and more posteriorly directed than the other pairs. The glabellar structure in the oldest named species of Iddingsia, I. intermedia n. sp. (pi. 2, figs. 5, 7, 8), is not greatly different from the glabellar structure of the older species of Dunderbergia. D. brevispina n. sp. (pi. 5, figs. 11, 15) and D. calculosa (pi. 5, figs. 6, 8). Thus, a reasonable chain of morphologic features connects Dunderbergia with Dokimocephalus through Iddingsia. Dunderbergia differs from Elburgia principally by lacking well defined glabellar furrows. Both Dunderbergia and Elburgia have an anteriorly directed angulation of the border furrow as does Elviniella, and Elviniella is the probable ancestor of Irvingella. The pygidium of Irvingella is structurally little different from that of Dunderbergia. Thus, a real relationship seems to exist between Dunderbergia and Irvingella and, therefore, also between Irvingella and Dokimocephalus. Pseudosaratogia is related to Dokimocephalus and Iddingsia through the glabellar structure, as is Apachia, and Apachia has a probable common ancestor with Kindbladia (p. 34). Elvinia is the probable descendant of Elburgia (p. 17). The heterogeneous assortment of genera of the Elviniidae, therefore may represent a group of trilobites logically related on the basis of stratigraphy, morphology, and biology. Subfamily DOKIMOCEPHALINAE Kobayashi Diagnosis.—Elviniidae having glabella generally strongly rounded at front, posterior glabellar furrows generally well defined, directed obliquely backward. Genus APACHIA Frederickson Apachia Frederickson, 1949, p. 346. Type species—Apachia trigonis Frederickson, 1949, p. 346, pi. 70, figs. 14-17. Diagnosis.—Small Dokimocephalinae, total length probably not exceeding 20 mm. Glabella prominent, strongly convex to conical transversely, moderately to strongly convex longitudinally, tapered forward, strongly rounded anteriorly, well defined by axial and preglabellar furrows. Glabellar furrows shallow or absent; posterior pair if present inclined strongly backward. Frontal area short; length between one-third and one-half that of glabella. Brim downsloping or depressed; sagittal length slightly greater than that of strongly convex border. Border furrow deep, narrow, gently to strongly curved in plan view. Fixed cheeks narrow, gently convex, horizontal or slightly upsloping; width between one-third and one-fourth basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes narrow, well defined by gently curved palpebral furrow, situated about opposite glabellar midlength. Posterior limbs slender, tapered to point. Course of anterior section of facial suture nearly straight forward or slightly outward from palpebral lobe to border furrow, then turned inward across border to cut anterior margin about opposite anterolateral corners of glabella. Course of posterior section, divergent and sinuous. Border of free check narrower than ocular platform. Lateral and posterior border furrows joined at genal angle. Genal spine short; length less than length of posterior section of facial suture. 735-610 0-65-434 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Pygidium subsemicircular. Axis broad, moderately elevated, poorly defined at sides, merged posteriorly with short broad ridge; axis reaches nearly to inner edge of narrow well-defined border of nearly constant width. One or two ring furrows present posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural fields have no furrows apparent posterior to articulating furrow. Discussion.—The concept of this genus is here broadened to include A. prima n. sp. and Dellea 'butler ensis Frederckson (1949, p. 351), which differ from the type species and from A. convexa Deland and Shaw (1956, p. 546) by having a strongly convex rather than conical glabellar cross section and a more curved border furrow in plan view. The oldest species of the genus, A. prima, shows many similarities to Kindbladia and differs principally in lacking distinct glabella furrows and up-sloping fixed cheeks. The two genera seem to have had a common ancestry. Apachia butlerensis (Frederickson) Plate 3, figures 10, 13 Dellea butlerensis Frederickson, 1949, p. 351, pi. 69, figs. 16-18. Diagnosis.—Cranidium has a very convex glabellar cross section. Posterior part of glabella rises steeply above occipital furrow. Length of border on frontal area slightly less than length of brim. Border furrow strongly bowed forward in plan view. External surface covered with closely spaced fine granules. Other parts not known. Discussion.—This species is most like A. prima n. sp. and differs by having a more nearly subequally divided frontal area and by having the posterior part of the glabella distinctly rising above the occipital furrow. The convex rather than conical cross section of the glabella distinguishes A. butlerensis from the other described species of the genus. Occurrence. Rare, Elvinia zone: Shingle Pass, McGill, and Mount Hamilton (?), Nev. Apachia prima n. sp. Plate 3, figures 5-7 IDellea butlerensis Wilson [not Frederickson], 1951, p. 639, pi. 91, figs. 1-3, 11. Diagnosis.—Cranidium has strongly convex glabellar cross section. Posterior part of glabella does not rise steeply from occipital furrow. Sagittal length of brim on frontal area about twice length of border. Border furrow bowed forward abruptly in plan view. Free check and pygidium, as described for genus. External surfaces of all parts covered with closely spaced fine granules. Discussion.—This species is most like A. butlerensis (Frederickson). It differs by having a relatively longer brim and by not having the posterior part of the glabella rising steeply from the occipital furrow. It also resembles species of Kindbladia but lacks the distinct glabellar furrows and upsloping fixed cheeks of species of that genus. The specimens illustrated by Wilson (1951) as Dellea butlerensis Frederickson seem to have the relatively long brim and the lower posterior part of the glabella characteristic of A. prima rather than of A. butlerensis (Frederickson). Occurrence. Moderately rare, upper part of Dunderbergia zone: McGill, Bastian Peak, and Ash Meadows, Nev. Genus DOKIMOCEPHALUS Walcott Dokimocephalus Walcott, 1924, p. 55; 1925, p. 83; Shlmer and Shrock, 1944, p. 623; Frederickson, 1948, p. 800; Wilson, 1949, p. 36; Lochman, 1959, p. 281; Palmer, 1960a, p. 95. Type species.—Ptychoparia % pemasutus Walcott, 1884, p. 49, pi. 10, figs. 8, 8a-b. Diagnosis.—Dokimocephalinae having a large glabella well defined by axial and preglabellar furrows. Posterior pair of glabellar furrows generally deep, nearly straight, posterolaterally directed; second pair may be present. Occipital ring has median node or spine. Frontal area has narrow brim and broad border variously modified into pointed, spatulate, or lin-guiform shape; sagittal length of border more than four times that of brim. Fixed cheeks narrow, flat to moderately convex, upsloping; width less than one-half basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes strongly arcuate, well defined by palpebral furrows, situated opposite posterior third of glabella. Posterior limbs tapered laterally to point. Lateral and posterior border furrows on free cheeks deep, not joined, merged with base of genal spine. Genal spine moderately long, directed posterolaterally at slight angle to margin of cheek. Outline of pygidium transversely subovate. Axis prominent, short; length about two-thirds that of pygidium; two or three ring furrows visible behind articulating furrow. Pleural fields crossed by two or three shallow pleural furrows. Border not clearly differentiated from pleural field. External surfaces of glabella, fixed cheeks, ocular platform of free cheeks, and tops of axial rings of pygidium have coarse granular ornamentation. Brim and border of cranidium, border and genal spine of free cheek, and pleural regions of pygidium smoothSYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 35 or granular. Molds of all parts have granular ornamentation similar to that on external surface. Discussion.—The most distinctive feature of members of this genus is the structure of the cranidial border. A secondary feature of value in distinguishing imperfectly preserved cranidia from those of contemporaneous species of Iddingsia is the nature of the ornamentation of the mold. On all the younger species of Iddingsia the mold is smooth, whereas on all species of Dokimocephalus the mold has a granular ornamentation similar to that on the external surface. Both Frederickson (1948) and Wilson (1949) emphasized the presence of an occipital spine as a generic feature. They were apparently unaware of the lack of an occipital spine in the type species, D. pernasutus. Dokimocephalus pernasutus (Walcott) Plate 3, figure 18 Ptychoparia? pernasutus Walcott, 1884, p. 49, pi. 10, figs. 8, 8a-b. Dokimocephalus pernasutus (Walcott). Walcott, 1924, p. 55, pi. 11, fig. 1; 1925, p. 84, pi. 16, figs. 29-31; Palmer, 1960a, p. 95, pi. 11, figs. 18, 20. Dokimocephalus gregori Walcott, 1925, p. 84, pi. 16, figs. 32-33; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, pi. 264, figs. 38-39. Diagnosis.—Border of cranidium forms a pointed snout having concave sides and a tip curved down at end. Sagittal length of border four to five times that of brim. Fixed cheeks moderately convex, slightly up-sloping. External surface of glabella and fixed cheeks covered with coarse scattered granules. Surfaces of brim, border, and posterior limbs smooth. Discussion.—Discovery of an excellently preserved cranidium of this species in southern Nevada shows that the suspected synonymy of D. gregori from Missouri with D. pernasutus (Palmer, 1960a) was correct. The specimens do not differ significantly in any observable feature. Besides the obvious character of the pointed snout, this species differs from others in the genus by having a somewhat broader brim, more convex fixed cheeks, and a lack of ornamentation of the frontal area. Occurrence. Rare, lower part of Elvinia zone; Eureka, Snake Range, and Yucca Flat, Nev. Genus IDDINGSIA Walcott Iddingsia Walcott, 1924, p. 58; 1925, p. 97; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, p. 627; Bell and others, 1952, p. 184; Lochman, 1959, p. 282; Palmer, 1960a, p. 95. Type species.—Ptychoparia similis Walcott, 1884, p. 52, pi. 10, fig. 10. Diagnosis.—Dokimocephalinae in which glabella has one or two well-defined glabellar furrows; posterior pair generally deep, arcuate. Frontal area slightly expanded anteriorly, divided into distinct brim and border by border furrow that generally has slight median angulation. Length of brim two-thirds to nearly twice that of border. Fixed cheek generally upsloping, narrow; palpebral lobes well defined, arcuate, situated slightly posterior to glabellar midlength; eye ridges generally distinct, directed posterolaterally from axial furrow. Posterior limbs short, slender, tapered to sharp point. Free cheek has deep lateral and posterior border furrows and long posterolaterally directed cylindrical genal spine making slight angle with lateral border of cheek. Pygidium transverse subtriangular to subovate. Axis prominent, slightly tapered, has two to four shallow ring furrows; axis reaches to or nearly to inner edge of poorly defined narrow border that is nearly absent on axial line. Discussion.—Iddingsia is distinguished from the other genera in the subfamily by its relatively narrow unmodified cranidial border and generally large glabella. Its species content has been discussed in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a, p. 96). The statement at that time that the frontal area is “subequally divided into brim and border” must be modified. A new species, 7. intermedia, the oldest presently recognized in the genus, has a border distinctly narrower than the brim and a frontal area more like that of Dunderhergia, from which it was probably derived. The cranidial ornamentation of the three principal species, I. intermedia, I. robusta (Walcott), and 7. similis (Walcott), seems to show evolutionary change. 7. intermedia has a coarse granular external ornamentation on all parts, but the surface of the mold is granular only on the glabella and fixed cheeks; 7. rohusta, the next younger species, has a granular external ornamentation similar to that of 7. intermedia., but the surface of the mold is smooth; 7. similis, the youngest species, has a granular ornamentation on the external surfaces of the glabella and fixed cheeks only, and the surface of the mold is smooth. 7. utahensis Resser would seem to be the natural terminal species in this series with respect to evolution of ornamentation, both because it has a smooth external surface and because its mold has a smooth surface. However at McGill, Nev., in the one collection where it has been recognized in stratigraphic context, it is found a few feet below a bed containing 7. similis. More data about the details of distribution of the relatively rare younger species of Iddingsia will be36 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN needed to properly evaluate the significance of this occurrence. Iddingsia intermedia n. sp. Plate 2, figures 5-8 Diagnosis.—Glabella well defined across front by preglabellar furrow; posterior glabellar furrow bi-geniculate; second pair of glabellar furrows shallow; third pair apparent only on mold. Border relatively narrow, well defined by moderately deep border furrow; length about two-thirds that of brim. External surfaces of all parts except furrows have low closely-spaced coarse granules. Surface of mold has distinct granules only on top of glabella and fixed cheeks; a few scattered coarse granules occur on brim of some specimens. A free cheek possibly belonging to this species is virtually like that of Dunderbergia nitida (Hall and Whitfield). Pygidium has two distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural fields crossed by two shallow pleural furrows. Border concave, not clearly separated from pleural fields. Edge of border and tops of axial rings have low closely-spaced granules. Scattered coarse granules also present on tops of axial rings and on pleural fields. Discussion.—The relatively narrow border and the granular cranidial mold distinguish this species from others presently assigned to the genus. It is the oldest species of Iddingsia known. The structure of the frontal area emphasizes the relationships of this genus to Dunderbergia. Occurrence. Moderately rare, upper part of Dunderbergia zone and lowest part of Elvinia zone: McGill, Bastian Peak, Snake Range, and Schell Creek Range, Nev. Iddingsia robnsta (Walcott) Plate 2, figures 10, 11 Ptychoparia similis robustus Walcott, 1884, p. 53, pi. 1, figs. 9, 9a. Iddingsia robusta (Walcott). Walcott, 1925, p. 97, pi. 16, figs. 10-11; Palmer, 1960a, p. 96. pi. 11, figs. 13-16. Iddingsia nevadensis Resser, 1942b, p. 85, pi. 16, figs. 15-17. Diagnosis— Preglabellar furrow generally shallow. Length of frontal area slightly greater than one-half length of glabella. Brim and border separated by abrupt change in slope. Border nearly flat, slightly downsloping; length equal to or slightly greater than length of brim. Fixed cheeks upsloping; width about one-third basal glabellar width. Occipital ring has low median node. External surface covered with closely-spaced generally small granules of several sizes. Surface of mold smooth. Discussion.—This species differs from I. intermedia n. sp. by having a relatively broader border, and from I. similis (Walcott) and I. utahensis Resser by having a granular ornamentation on all parts. Exfoliated specimens cannot be distinguished with certainty from exfoliated specimens of I. similis and I. utahensis. Occurrence. Rare, lower part of Elvinia zone: Eureka, Snake Range, McGill, Schell Creek Range, Nev. Iddingsia similis (Walcott) Plate 2, figures 1-4 Ptychoparia"! similis Walcott, 1884, p. 52, pi. 10, fig. 10. Iddingsia similis (Walcott). Walcott, 1924, p. 58, pi. 12, fig. 6; 1925, p. 97, pi. 16, figs. 8, 9; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, pi. 265, figs. 15,16. Uddingsia similis (Walcott). Robison, 1960, p. 22, pi. 1, figs. 19, 22. [not] Iddingsia similis Bell and others, 1952, p. 184, pi. 30, figs. 4a-c; pi. 31, fig. 2. Diagnosis.—Glabella moderately defined at front by preglabellar furrow. Border flat, horizontal, or slightly downsloping, well defined by narrow border furrow ; sagittal length of border about equal to or slightly greater than sagittal length of brim. Occipital ring has median node. External surfaces of fixed cheeks and glabella, exclusive of glabellar furrows, have low closely-spaced coarse granules. External surfaces of brim and border generally smooth, rarely have very fine granular ornamentation, which is visible only after whitening. Surface of mold smooth. Lateral and posterior border furrows of free cheek discontinuous, disappearing posteriorly at base of genal spine. Genal spine long, slender, curved inward at tip. Pygidium has tip of axis slightly anterior to border but connected to it by broad poorly defined ridge; three distinct ring furrows present posterior to articulating furrow. Border narrow, flat, slightly downsloping. Border furrow narrow, shallow. Discussion.—This is the youngest species presently known in the genus. It is most similar to I. robusta (Walcott) and I. utahensis Resser, from which it differs primarily in cranidial ornamentation. The specimens illustrated by Bell and others (1952) have a distinct occipital spine and represent an unnamed species of Iddingsia. The specimens illustrated by Robison (1960) do not have a clearly preserved external surface and are not assignable with certainty to this species. Occurrence. Moderately rare, upper part of Elvinia zone: Eureka, Shingle Pass, McGill, and Schell Creek Range, Nev.; House Range, Utah.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 37 Iddingsia utahensis Resser Plate 2, figure 9 Iddingsia utahensis Resser, 1942b, p. 85, pi. 16, figs. 18-20. Diagnosis.—Preglabellar furrow shallow. Border gently convex, downsloping, separated from brim by abrupt change in slope; sagittal length about equal to sagittal length of brim. External surface and surface of mold smooth. Discussion.—The smooth external surface of this species distinguishes it from all others in the genus. Occurrence. Rare, lower Elvinia zone: McGill and Schell Creek Range, Nev.; Tintic, Utah. Genus KINDBLADIA Frederickson Kindbladia Frederickson, 1948, p. 802; Lochman, 1959, p. 283; Palmer, 1960a, p. 97. Type Species—Berheia wichitaensis Besser, 1942b, p. 93, pi. 15, figs. 31, 32. Diagnosis.—Small Dokimocephalinae having total length probably not exceeding 20 mm. Glabella prominent, tapered slightly forward, strongly rounded at front, well defined by axial and preglabellar furrows; transverse convexity moderate to strong; longitudinal convexity gently to moderate, greatest at front. Posterior two pairs of glabellar furrows deep, short; posterior pair curved backward. Occipital furrow deep. Occipital ring has median node or spine. Frontal area divided into strongly convex border and moderately convex brim by narrow border furrow that is moderately to strongly curved in dorsal view. Sagittal length of border less than that of brim. Fixed cheeks narrow, gently to moderately convex, upsloping; transverse width between one-third and one-fourth basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes small, well defined by curved palpebral furrow, situated about opposite glabellar midlength; exsagittal length between one-third and one-half that of glabella. Posterior limbs tapered laterally to a point. Course of anterior section of facial suture slightly divergent forward from palpebral lobe to border furrow, then turned inward to cut anterior margin barely perceptibly about opposite anterolateral corners of glabella. Course of posterior section nearly straight pos-terolaterally from palpebral lobe to posterior margin of cranidium. Lateral and posterior border furrows of free cheek well defined, joined at genal angle forming sharp point. Border narrower than ocular platform. Infraocular ring present. Genal spine short, sharp; length slightly less than length of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium subsemicircular. Axis prominent, slightly tapered posteriorly, reaches to inner edge of border, bears two or more ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Border flat, broad, of nearly constant width, defined at inner edge by abrupt change in slope. Pleural region crossed by two or more shallow pleural furrows extending slightly onto border. Discussion.-—The content of this genus has been discussed in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a, p. 97). Discovery of free cheeks and pygidia associated with K. affinis (Walcott) cranidia has provided the first information about the free cheek of Kindbladia and confirmed the assignment of the type of pygidium illustrated by Wilson (1951, pi. 92, fig. 24) to the genus. The pygidium illustrated by Frederickson (1948, pi. 123, fig. 21) has the laterally swollen anterior band of the first pleural segment and general shape characteristic of pygidia of Gheilocephalus; it may belong to a species of that genus rather than to Kindbladia. Because of the relatvely thick exoskeleton of most specimens of Kindbladia and a tendency for the granular external surface to adhere to the matrix, well-preserved specimens are difficult to obtain. Unless the external surface of the cranidium and the nature of the occipital ring can be observed, specimens of Kindbladia are generally not identifiable to species. Kindbladia affinis (Walcott) Plate 3, figures 1-4 Ptychoparia (Eulomal) affinis. Walcott, 1884, p. 54, pi. 10, fig. 12. Iddingsia affinis (Walcott). Resser, 1937, p. 14. Berkeia affinis (Walcott). Resser, 1942a, p. 7. Berkeia comes Resser, 1942b, p. 90, pi. 15, figs. 18-21. Berkeia nevadensis Resser, 1942b, p. 91, pi. 15, figs. 26, 27. Kindbladia affinis (Walcott). Palmer, 1960a, p. 97, pi. 11, figs. 17, 19, 20. Diagnosis.—Occipital ring has median node rather than median spine. Sagittal length of border slightly less than length of brim. Length of genal spine on free cheek slightly less than length of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium has two distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. External surfaces of cranidium and free cheek covered with closely spaced fine granules. Fine granules somewhat more scattered on external surface of pygidium. Surfaces of molds of all parts faintly pitted. Discussion.—This species differs from K. wichitaensis (Besser) in its lack of an occipital spine, in its slightly narrower brim, and, if the assignment of a pygidium to K. wichitaensis by Wilson (1951, pi. 92, fig. 24) is correct, in the smaller number of distinct ring furrows on the pygidial axis.38 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Occurrence. Moderately common, lower part of Elvinia zone: Eureka, McGill, Shingle Pass, Bastian Peak, Cherry Creek, and Snake Range, Nev.; House Range and Tintic, Utah. Genus PSEUDOSARATOGIA Wilson Pseudosaratogia Wilson, 1951, p. 647; Lochman, 1959, p. 252; Palmer, 1960a, p. 101. Type species.-—Pseudosaratogia magna Wilson, 1951, p. 648, pi. 94, figs. 9-16. Diagnosis.—Moderate-sized Dokimoceplialinae, total length probably not exceeding 70 mm, generally much less. Glabella prominent, well defined by axial and preglabellar furrows, slightly tapered forward, bluntly to strongly rounded anteriorly, convexity variable. Posterior pair of glabellar furrows generally apparent, deep or shallow, at distinct angle to axial furrow. Occipital furrow deep, straight; occipital ring generally lacks spine. Frontal area flared anteriorly, has distinct brim and border separated by narrow border furrow or sharp change in slope. Sagittal length of border distinctly less than length of brim. Fixed cheek narrow; width less than one-half basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes well defined by arcuate palpebral furrow, situated slightly posterior to glabellar midlength; exsagittal length between one-half and one-third sagittal length of glabella. Eye ridges generally apparent, make distinct angle with axial furrows. Posterior limbs slender, sharp pointed. Course of anterior section of facial suture distinctly divergent forward from palpebral lobe to border furrow, then turned abruptly inward across border. Ventral course not known. Course of posterior section divergent sinuous. Lateral and posterior border furrows of free cheek well defined; shallow or absent at base of genal spine. Genal spine short; length between one and two times that of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium subovate to subsemicircular; axis prominent, short, has two or three ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural regions lack clearly defined border, crossed by two or three shallow pleural furrows. External surfaces of all parts generally have distinct granular ornamentation. Discussion.—As constituted here, this genus includes those members of the Pteropcephaliid biomere characteristically having a flared frontal area, narrow border and fixed cheeks, and prominent glabella—the posterior glabellar furrow makes a distinct angle with the axial furrow. The western species described in the following paragraphs differ from the eastern species described by Wilson (1951) by having a more convex and anteriorly rounded glabella, shallower glabellar fur- rows, and somewhat shorter palpebral lobes. These features may be sufficient to justify the placement of the western species in a separate genus, when more is known about the species. Pseudosaratogia abnormis Palmer Plate 2, figures 12-14, 16, 17 Pseudosaratogia abnormis Palmer, 1960a, p. 101, pi. 11, fig. 11. Diagnosis.—Glabella prominent, strongly convex transversely, moderately to very convex longitudinally ; front strongly rounded. Posterior pair of glabellar furrows shallow. Border narrow, separated from brim by distinct change in slope; sagittal length generally less than one-half that of brim. Length of palpebral lobe about one-third length of glabella. Lateral and posterior border furrows of free cheek joined at genal angle, shallowest at base of genal spine. Length of genal spine slightly greater than length of posterior section of facial suture. External surfaces of cranidium and cheek covered with closely-spaced granules; outer edges of border on cranidium and free cheek generally have narrow zone of terrace lines. Discussion.—This species is most like P. leptogranu-lata Palmer, from which it differs principally by having a narrower cranidial border that is differentiated from the brim only by a sharp change in slope. If the free cheeks of P. leptogranulata are properly assigned, they differ from those of P. abnormis by not having the lateral and posterior border furrows connected at the genal angle. Both this species and P. leptogranulata resemble Iddingsia intermedia n. sp. but can be distinguished by having a more flared frontal area, nearly horizontal rather than upsloping fixed cheeks, and less distinct glabellar furrows.. They are probably closely related, however, and P. abnormis and P. leptogranulata may have evolved from I. intermedia. A collection from the Bastian Peak section contains several cranidia and a free cheek that may represent this species (pi. 2, figs. 16, 17). The cranidia have a well-defined external granular ornamentation characteristic of the Eureka specimens of P. abnormis originally described; but the molds have smooth surfaces, and they have the general proportions of P. leptogranulata Palmer. The free cheek has clearly disjunct border furrows. Because of lack of samples large enough to determine variability in this species, the Bastian Peak specimens are provisionally assigned to P. abnormis. Occurrence. Rare, lower part of Elvinia zone: Eureka, Shingle Pass, McGill, and Bastian Peak(?), Nev.; Tintic, Utah.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 39 Pseudosaratogia leptogranulata Palmer Plate 2, figure 18 Pseudosaratogia leptogranulata Palmer, 1960a, pi. 11, fig. 10. Diagnosis.—Glabella strongly convex transversely, moderately to strongly convex longitudinally. Posterior glabellar furrows shallow. Border furrow distinct; sagittal length of border about one-half that of brim. Length of palpebral lobe about one-third of glabella. External surface of cranidium has distinct fine granules. Surface of mold smooth. Discussion.—The subdued granular ornamentation and somewhat better defined cranidial border distinguish this species from P. abnormis Palmer. Occurrence. Rare, lower part of Elvinia zone: Eureka and Ash Meadows, Nev. Subfamily ELVINIINAE Kobayashi Diagnosis.—Elviniidae having generally bluntly rounded or anteriorly truncated glabella. Posterior glabellar furrows of younger species continuous across glabella. Genus DUNDERBERGIA Walcott Dunderbergia Walcott, 1924, p. 56; 1925, p. 84; Resser, 1935, p. 23; Raymond, 1937, p. 1112; Kobayashi, 1938, p. 181; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, p. 625; Palmer, 1954, p. 760; 1960a, p. 65; Howell, 1959, p. 238. Type species.—Grepicephalus (Loganellus) nitidus Hall and Whitfield, 1877, p. 212, pi. 2, fig. 8. Diagnosis.—Elviniinae having well-defined subquadrate glabella; glabellar furrows generally not well defined. Length of palpebral lobe about one-third to one-fourth length of glabella including occipital ring. Line connecting midlengths of palpebral lobes crosses glabella just posterior to junction of second glabellar furrows with axial furrows. Anterior margin and border furrow commonly come to a blunt point on axial line instead of forming an even curve. Free cheek has well-defined continuous lateral and posterior border furrows; posterior border furrow generally deepest. Border narrow. Ocular platform gently convex, twice or more width of border. Genal spine of variable length, from one-half to more than three times length of posterior section of facial suture. Thorax has 13 segments. Pleural tips of anterior segments short, directed laterally; pleural tips increase in length and become increasingly backswept to 11th segment. Posterior two pleural tips relatively shorter. Pygidium subsemicircular, widest at anterolateral corner. Border narrow, of nearly constant width. Axis prominent, subparallel sided, bluntly rounded posteriorly, generally connected to border by low broad poorly defined postaxial ridge. Pleural regions nearly flat. Discussion.—The generally subquadrate glabella lacking well-defined glabellar furrows and the relatively small palpebral lobes are the characteristics that most easily distinguish this genus from other genera in the subfamily. Since the earlier diagnosis and description of this genus was made (Palmer, 1960a), a nearly complete individual of D. nitida has been collected from the Bastian Peak section. This specimen shows the nature of the thorax (pi. 4, fig. 1) and the positioning of the segments having the short and long pleural tips as described here in the revised diagnosis. Only minor modifications in the generic description, principally in the statement about the genal spine of the free cheek, are required by the addition of three species (D % anyta (Hall and Whitfield), D. brevispina n. sp., and D. calculosa n. sp.) not discussed in the earlier paper. Length of the genal spine seems to be of taxonomic significance in this genus as well as in Aphelaspis. Most of the species have a short slender genal spine about equal in length to the posterior section of the facial suture, but D1 anyta has a long slender genal spine about three times this length, and D. brevispina has a short stubby spine about half this length. In addition, D1 anyta has a more moderate transverse and longitudinal convexity of the cranidium than other species in the genus. Dunderbergia? anyta (Hall and Whitfield) Plate 4, figures 8, 10, 14-16 Grepicephalus (Loganellus) anytus Hall and Whitfield, 1877, p. 219, pi. 2, figs. 19-21. Liostracus anytus (Hall and Whitfield). Brogger, 1886, p. 202. Dunderbergia anytus (Hall and Whitfield). Resser, 1937, p. 9. Diagnosis.—Glabellar and cranidial convexity generally low; brim gently to moderately downsloping to depressed; frontal area distinctly flared forward. Free cheek has long slender genal spine; length of spine about three times length of posterior section of facial suture. Lateral and posterior border furrows not clearly joined; posterior border furrow deepest, continues laterally onto base of genal spine. Anterior tip of doublure sharply rounded, indicating rostral plate has deep semiparabolic lateral notches. Border furrow of pygidium generally shallow; border only slightly convex in cross-section. Greatest40 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN width of axis slightly less than greatest width of pleural region. Surfaces of all parts covered with closely-spaced fine granules. Yeination of brim of cranidium generally well developed. Discussion.—This species shows several features that are atypical of Dunderbergia, particularly the generally low convexity and somewhat narrower fixed cheeks of the cranidium, the long genal spine bearing the continuation of the deep posterior border furrow on the free cheek, and the relatively narrow pygidial axis. In these features it resembles S'trigambitus transversus n. sp. (pi. 16, figs. 6-10) and differs in having narrow cranidial and pygidial borders that lack distinct terrace lines. The differential development of the border furrows on the free cheek may not be an important distinguishing characteristic above the species level. Similar free •cheeks are present on some species of other genera of the Elviniidae (pi. 2, figs. 1, 16) and also the Ptero-cephaliidae (pi. 12, figs. 11, 14). The stratigraphic position of Z>? anyta within the Tange of Dunderbergia, which, however, has both older and younger species of more typical form for the genus, also raises some doubt about the degree of relationship of the species to the others of the genus. D ? anyta is tentatively assigned here to Dunderbergia because of its overall appearance and particularly because of the narrow cranidial border and slight median angulation of the border furrow. The type lot of D. ? anyta consists of counterparts of a single piece of fossiliferous limestone from near Schellbourne in the northern part of the Schell Creek range, Nev. Several cranidia, free cheeks, and a pygidium are present. The granular ornamentation of the fossils differs from that of other fossils assigned to this species by being considerably subdued and consisting of relatively larger individual granules. Because some variation in detail of granular ornamentation has been recognized in other species of Dunderbergia, the differences noted between the specimens in the type lot and in the more recent collections, which are otherwise indistinguishable, are not here considered to be adequate for species discrimination. Occurrence. Moderately common, lower part of Dunderbergia zone: Snake Range, Ruby Range, McGill, Spring Mountains, and Schellbourne, Nev.; House Range, Deep Creek Range, and Wah Wah Range, Utah. Dunderbergia bigranulosa Palmer Plate 4, figures 9, 11-13 Dunderbergia bigranulosa Palmer, 1960a, p. 66, pi. 5, figs. 10-13, 15-23. Diagnosis.—Glabella prominent, elevated. Anterolateral corners of brim generally depressed. Free cheek has short slender genal spine; length of spine slightly greater than length of posterior section of facial suture. Ornamentation consists of closely-spaced fine granules occurring on all specimens on the borders of the cranidium, free cheek, and pygidium and on some specimens also on axis of pygidium, top of glabella, and palpebral lobes. Pleural fields of pygidium generally have scattered or closely-spaced fine granules. Coarse scattered granules present on all specimens on brim and fixed cheeks of cranidium and ocular platforms of free cheeks; coarse granules generally less abundant or apparent on glabella and border. Discussion.—This species seems to be in part transitional to and in part coexistent with Dunderbergia nitida (Hall and Whitfield). Specimens can generally be recognized by the presence of distinct fine granules on the cranidial border and moderately distinct scattered coarse granules on the brim, fixed cheeks, and perhaps other parts of the cranidium. D. bigranulosa is distinguished from D. nitida principally by the presence of granular ornamentation on the pleural fields of the pygidium and on the ocular platform of the free cheek. It differs from D. calculosus n. sp., which is here interpreted to be an ancestral form in the same lineage, by having better defined scattered coarse granules on the cranidium and by having the areas of closely-spaced fine granules generally confined to the border, although in some specimens they are present also on the top of the glabella and palpebral lobes. D. variagranula Palmer is another similar species; it generally lacks any distinct fine granular ornamentation on the cranidium and has better defined coarse granules on the glabella. Occurrence. Moderately common, middle part of Dunderbergia zone: Eureka, Cherry Creek, Bastian Peak, Ruby Range, Spring Mountains, and Pahranagat Range, Nev. Dunderbergia brevispina n. sp. Plate 5, figures 11-13, 15 Diagnosis.—Cranidium has prominent, elevated glabella; glabellar furrows moderately distinct. Anterolateral corners of brim generally depressed. Free cheek has short genal spine; length of spine about one-half length of posterior section of facial suture. External surfaces of cranidium and free cheek have granules of two distinct sizes:—scattered coarse granules surrounded by closely-spaced fine granules. EntireSYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 41 surface of pygidium covered with closely-spaced fine granules. Discussion.—This species of Dunderbergia is the oldest presently recognized in the Great Basin. The moderately distinct glabellar furrows and short genal spines indicate a possible relationship to species of Elburgia and Iddingsia and are also the principal features distinguishing D. brevispina from the other granular species of Dunderbergia-—D. bigranulosa Palmer, D. variagranula Palmer, and D. ? anyta (Hall and Whitfield). Occurrence. Moderately rare, Dicanthopyge zone: Snake Range and Shingle Pass, Nev. Dunderbergia caleulosa n. sp. Plate 5, figures 6-10 Diagnosis.—Cranidium has prominent elevated glabella. Anterolateral corners of brim generally depressed. Posterior glabella furrows moderately distinct. Free cheek has short slender genal spine; length of spine about equal to length of posterior section of facial suture. External surfaces of all parts covered with closely-spaced fine granules. Few low scattered coarse granules apparent on cranidium and free cheeks of some specimens. Discussion.—This species is intermediate in ornamentation between the older species, D. brevispina n. sp., and the two younger species, D. bigranulosa Palmer and D. variagranula Palmer. Its principal distinguishing characteristics are the dominance of fine granular ornamentation on all parts and the occurence of only a few scattered low coarse granules. The free cheek has a longer genal spine than does that of D. brevispina, and the pygidium has fine granular ornamentation on the pleural fields, which distinguishes the species from D. bigranulosa. The pygidium and free cheek are much like those of D. variagranula, which is distinguished principally by the dominance of the scattered coarse granular ornamentation and suppression or absence of associated fine granular ornamentation on the cranidium. Dunderbergia simplex (Basetti, 1961, p. 112, pi. 24, figs. 1-6) has a fine granular ornamentation similar to that of D. caleulosa. However, the ornamentation lacks scattered coarse granules, the border furrow on the cranidium almost lacks the median angulation, and the free cheek has a more curved lateral margin and a much longer genal spine. Occurrence. 'IPrehousia zone: Shingle Pass, Nev.; Lower part of Dunderbergia zone: McGill and Spring Mountains, Nev.; Deep Creek Range, Utah. Dunderbergia nitida (Hall and Whitfield) Plate 4, figures 1, 2, 5, 6 Crepicephalus (Loganellus) nitidus Hall and Whitfield, 1877, p. 212, pi. 2, fig. 8. Crepicephalus (Loganellus) simulator Hall and Whitfield, 1877, p. 218, pi. 2, figs. 16-18. Ptychoparia nitidus (Hall and Whitfield). Walcott, 1884, p. 57. Dunderbergia nitida (Hall and Whitfield). Walcott, 1924, p. 56, pi. 11, fig. 2; 1925, p. 84, pi. 16, fig. 4; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, pi. 264, fig. 29; Palmer, 1960a, p. 67, pi. 4, figs. 14-21, 23, 24. Dunderbergia simulator (Hall and Whitfield). Resser, 1935, p. 24. Diagnosis.—Glabella prominent, elevated. Anterolateral corners of brim generally depressed. Free cheek has short slender genal spine, length of spine about equal to length of posterior section of facial suture. External surfaces of cranidium and free cheek generally smooth. Obscure scattered coarse granules present on brim of some specimens. Pygidium has fine closely-spaced granules on top of axis and on border. Pleural fields generally smooth. Discussion.—The lack of any distinct cephalic ornamentation is the characteristic feature of this species. It is the most common species of Dunderbergia in the upper part of the Dunderbergia zone, although it ranges downward into the middle part of the Dunderbergia zone. Occurrence. Moderately common, middle and upper parts of the Dunderbergia zone: Eureka, Bastian Peak, Cherry Creek, McGill, Yucca Flat, Sheep Range, Tempiute, Pahranagat Range, Mount Hamilton, and Ash Meadows, Nev.; Quartz Spring area, Calif. Dunderbergia variagranula Palmer Plate 5, figures 1-5 Dunderbergia variagranula Palmer, 1954, p. 761, pi. 88, fig. 7; 1960a, p. 68, pi. 4, figs. 22, 25, 26, 28, 29. Diagnosis.—Glabella prominent, elevated. Anterolateral corners of brim depressed. Glabellar furrows obscure. Free cheek has short genal spine; length of spine about equal to that of posterior section of facial suture. External surfaces and molds of cranidium and free cheek contain generally prominent scattered coarse granules on all parts; external surface between coarse granules smooth or have very fine generally indistinct closely spaced granules. All parts of pygidium covered with closely spaced fine granules. Discussion.—This somewhat variable species is characterized particularly by it cranidial ornamentation42 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN composed of scattered generally prominent coarse granules on all parts. The most similar species are the older forms D. brevispina n. sp. and D. calculosa n. sp. The genal spine of D. brevispina is shorter than that of D. variagranula, and the fine granular ornamentation of the cranidium is more prominent. D. calculosa has closely spaced fine granules as its dominant ornamentation and has scattered and generally subdued coarse granules. Some small specimens from the upper part of the Dunderbergia zone and the Elvinia zone that have an ornamentation composed of scattered coarse granules have been tentatively assigned to this species. However, larger specimens and more knowledge of the morphology and ornamentation of other parts of these trilobites are needed to confirm this identification. Occurrence. Moderately rare, middle Dunderbergia zone: Eureka, Ruby Range, Sheep Range, Tempiute, Ash Meadows, and Pahranagat Range, Nev.; Panamint Range, Calif. Rare, Upper, Dunderbergia zone, Elvinia zone: Eureka and Snake Range. Nev. Dunderbergia polybothra Palmer Plate 4, figures 3, 4, 7 Dunderbergia polybothra Palmer, 1960a, p. 67, pi. 5, figs. 1-4, 6, 7, 9 14. Diagnosis.—Glabella prominent, elevated. Anterolateral corners of brim generally depressed. Free cheek has short slender genal spine; length of spine about equal to length of posterior section of facial suture. External surfaces of all parts of cephalon coarsely pitted; pits best developed on border of cranidium and free cheeks and on top of glabella. Top of axis and border of pygidium have closely-spaced fine granules; pleural fields coarsely but faintly pitted. Discussion.—This species is easily distinguished from others in the genus by its pitted ornamentation. Occurrence. Moderately rare, middle part of Dunderbergia zone: Eureka and Yucca Flat, Nev. Genus ELBURGIA Palmer Elburgia Palmer, 1960a, p. 68, 69. Type species.—Gre picephalus (Loganellus) granulosus Hall and Whitfield, 1877, p. 214, pi. 2, figs. 2, 3. Diagnosis.—Elviniinae having low broad straightsided anteriorly tapered glabella, bluntly rounded at front. Posterior two pairs of glabellar furrows generally well defined. Posterior pair deep, curved, or bigeniculate in all specimens and connected across top of glabella on molds of some specimens. Border well defined, convex, narrower than brim, has distinct median angulation. Fixed cheeks gently convex, nearly horizontal; width slightly less than one-half basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes well defined, length about one-third length of glabella. Free cheek has well-defined border that is narrower than ocular platform. Lateral and posterior border furrows deep, joined at genal angle. Genal spine short, sharp; length less than one-half length of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium short, wide, has moderately well defined narrow border. Axis prominent, broad, reaching to or nearly to border and connected to border by broad, poorly defined postaxial ridge. One or two prominent ring furrows present posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural fields crossed by one or two shallow pleural furrows extending to border furrow. Discussion.—The distinctive generic and specific characteristics of Elburgia occur almost entirely in the cranidium. Isolated free cheeks cannot be distinguished from those of Elvinia. Isolated pygidia cannot be distinguished with certainty from those of either Elvinia or Dunderbergia. The well-defined glabellar furrows in combination with the distinct median angulation of the border and border furrow distinguish species of this genus from all others in the Elviniidae. Discrimination of species within the genus is based entirely on cranidial ornamentation. The three species described here seem to form a morphologic series ranging from an older form having a completely granular outer surface, E. granulosa (Hall and Whitfield), through an intermediate form having a granular ornamentation that is reduced or lacking on the glabella and subdued on other parts, E. intermedia n. sp., to a nearly smooth form, E. quin-nensis (Resser). However, specimens having a granular ornamentation that is much more concentrated than is typical of E. granulosa have been observed within the range of E. quinnensis, although they are not associated with E. quinnensis. Thus, a more or less similar range in time is indicated for both ornamentation types. This similarity in range provides an explanation, perhaps, for the occurrence of both granular and smooth species of Elvinia, which seems to be the direct descendant of Elburgia (p. 17). Elburgia granulosa (Hall and Whitfield) Plate 5, figures 14, 16-19 Crepicephalus (Loganellus) granulosus Hall and Whitfield, 1877, p. 214, pi. 2, figs. 2, 3. Ptyclioparia granulosus (Hall and Whitfield). Walcott, 1884, p. 57. Dunderbergia granulosa (Hall and Whitfield). Resser, 1935, p. 24.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY Dunderbergia (Megadunderbergia) granulosa (Hall and Whitfield). Kobayashi, 1938, p. 181. Elburgia granulosa (Hall and Whitfield). Palmer, 1960a, p. 69, pi. 6, figs. 16, 17, 19. Diagnosis.—External surface of cranidium, exclusive of furrows and palpebral lobes, covered with coarse granules. Intergranular distance about equal to or greater than granule diameter. Ocular platform on free cheek has granular ornamentation as on cranidium. Lateral border, exclusive of genal spine, has more concentrated granules. Genal spine has scattered coarse pits. Pygidium has granules on tops of axial segments, pleural ribs, and border. Granules closely-packed on border and at end of axis. Surfaces of molds of most parts have mixture of scattered coarse granules and pits. Discussion.—This is the oldest species in the genus and generally characterizes the earliest beds of the Dunderbergia zone. E. granulosa is distinguished from E. intermedia which occurs in slightly younger beds, by having a well-developed granular ornamentation on the glabella. The peculiar pitted ornamentation of the genal spine may also be a useful specific feature. Some small cranidia, less than 3 mm long, have granular ornamentation on the palpebral lobes. Two Elburgia cranidia from about the middle of the Dunderbergia zone have a closely-packed granular ornamentation on all parts except the furrows and may represent another species (pi. 5, tig. 18). Occurrence. Moderately common, lower part of Dunderbergia zone; Cherry Creek, McGill, Eureka, Bastian Peak, Yucca Flat, Spring Mountains, and Muddy Mountains, Nev.; Deep Creek, Fish Spring, Needles, and House Ranges, Utah. Elburgia intermedia n. sp. Plate 6, figures 5, 6 Diagnosis.—Granular ornamentation most evident on brim; intergranular distance generally greater than granule diameter. Granules on fixed cheeks generally low, obscure. External surface of glabella generally smooth. External surface of border smooth or has fine granular ornamentation. Surface of mold has scattered coarse granules on both border and glabella in addition to brim and cheeks and abundant coarse pits. Free cheek and pygidium not known with certainty. Discussion.—This species occupies an intermediate position both morphologically and stratigraphically between E. granulosa below and E. quinnensis above. It differs from E. granulosa by lacking well-developed granular ornamentation on the glabella and from E. 43 quinnensis by having well-developed granular ornamentation on the brim. Occurrence. Moderately rare, lower part of Dunderbergia zone; McGill, Bastian Peak, and Grant Range, Nev. Elburgia quinnensis (Resser) Plate 6, figures 1-4 Taenicephalus quinnensis Resser, 1942b, p. 105, pi. 21, figs. 18, 23. Elburgia quinnensis (Resser). Palmer, 1960a, p. 69, pi. 6, figs. 11-13, 15. Diagnosis.—External surface of cranidium nearly smooth; some specimens finely pitted. Lateral parts of brim and of posterior limbs may have many closely spaced low granules visible only when specimen is whitened and viewed in extreme oblique lighting. Brim also may have barely visible scattered low coarse granules. Surface of mold has many fine pits that are most noticeable on brim and cheeks. Positions of coarse granules may be indicated by low elevations; terminal pits are slightly larger than those on other parts of cranidium. Discussion.—This species is easily distinguished from others in the genus by its lack of appreciable granular ornamentation on the cranidium, even on the surface of the mold. No pygidia and free cheeks of this species have yet been found that show the external surface, although several exfoliated specimens having the typical pitted surface of the mold are known. Ocurrence. Moderately common, middle and upper parts of Dunderbergia zone: Eureka, Bastian Peak, Shingle Pass, Tybo, Spring Mountains, Sheep Range, and Grant Range, Nev.; Quartz Spring area, Stovepipe Wells, and Furnace Creek quadrangle, Calif. Genus ELVINIA Walcott Elvinia Walcott, 1924, p. 56; 1925, p. 88; Bridge and Girty, 1937, p. 252; Kobayashi, 1938, p. 179; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, p. 625; Lochman, 1959, p. 296; Palmer, 1960a, p. 70. Moosia Walcott, 1924, p. 59; 1925, p. 106. Type species. Dilcelocephalus roemeri Shumard, 1861, p. 220, 221. Diagnosis.—Elviniinae having posterior glabellar furrows connected across glabella forming single arcuate furrow of nearly even depth. Other glabellar furrows rarely apparent. Palpebral lobes arcuate; length about one-half length of glabella exclusive of occipital ring on specimens having glabellar length 6 mm or less; proportionately less on larger specimens. Anterior margin of cranidium evenly curved. Border furrow appears nearly straight in dorsal view. Anterior course of facial sutures nearly straight forward from palpebral lobes.44 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Free cheek has short sharp genal spine diverging from general curvature of cheek margin. Ocular platform broad, separated from moderately to strongly convex border by broad deep marginal furrow; connection between lateral and posterior marginal furrows shallow. Pygidium subsemicircular in outline, widest at anterior margin. Border narrow, of nearly constant width. Axial lobe prominent, subparallel sided, bluntly rounded posteriorly. Pleural lobes nearly flat. Discussion—Although this genus is widespread in the Great Basin, it is not a common trilobite. Even large collections from within the range of Elvinia rarely have more than a few cranidia referable to the genus. None of the collections provided any new information about the character of the genus beyond that already given in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a, p. 70). Elvinia granulata Resser Plate 3, figure 12 Elvinia granulata Resser, 1942b, p. 96, pi. 18, figs. 11, 12; Palmer, 1960a, p. 71, pi. 6, fig. 4. Elvinia ruedemanni Resser, 1942b, p. 95, pi. 18, figs. 7-10; Fisher and Hanson, 1951, pi. 1, figs. 1, 2. IParairvingella hamburgensis Resser, 1942b, p. 27, pi. 4, figs. 23, 24. Diagnosis.—External surface of cranidium, exclusive of furrows and palpebral lobes, covered with low granules. Brim generally flat or concave in longitudinal profile; axial length about equal to that of border. Discussion.—The granular surface of this species is its most distinctive characteristic. Occurrence. Rare, Elvinia zone; Eureka, Nev.; House Range, Utah. Elvinia roemeri (Shumard) Plate 3, figures 9, 11, 14,16 Dikeloceplialus roemeri Shumard, 1861, p. 220, 221. Crepicephalus (Loganellus) unisulcatus Hall and Whitfield, 1877, p. 216, pi. 2, fig. 22. Ptyclioparia matheri Walcott, 1912, p. 268, pi. 44, figs. 15-17. Elvinia roemeri (Shumard). Walcott, 1924, p. 56, pi. 11, fig. 3; 1925, p. 88, pi. 17, figs. 9-13; Bridge, 1933, p. 232, pi. 2, figs. 17-19; Miller, 1936, p. 30, pi. 8, fig. 36; Bridge and Girty, 1937, p. 251, pi. 69, figs. 1-22; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, pi. 264, figs. 34-37; Wilson, 1949, p. 38, pi. 10, figs. 5, 9. 10, 12, 13; Frederickson, 1949, p. 352, pi. 69, figs. 19-21; Lochman, 1950, pi. 47, figs. 21-23; Wilson, 1951, p. 642, pi. 92, figs. 18-22; Nelson, 1951, p. 775, pi. 107, fig. 8; Bell and others, 1952, p. 183, pi. 30, figs, la-d; Palmer, 1960a, p. 70, pi. 6, fig. 7; Robison, 1960, p. 38, pi. 4, fig. 12; Lochman and Hu, 1960, p. 814, pi. 96, figs. 38-47. Moosia grandis Walcott, 1924, p. 59, pi. 14, fig. 9; 1925, p. 107, pi. 23, figs. 20, 21. Elvinia tetonensis Resser, 1937, p. 12. Elvinia texana Resser, 1938b, p. 30. Elvinia shumardi Resser, 1938b, p. 30; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, pi. 264, figs. 41, 42. Elvinia bridgei Resser, 1938b, p. 31; 1942b, p. 97, pi. 18, figs. 28-31; pi. 19, figs. 1-5. Elvinia missouriensis Resser, 1938b, p. 31; 1942b, p. 96, pi. 18, figs. 13-17. Elvinia dakotensis Resser, 1938b, p. 32. Elvinia utahensis Resser, 1938b, p. 32; 1942b, p. 95, pi. 18, figs. 5-6. Elvinia gregalis Resser, 1942b, p. 97, pi. 18, figs. 28-31. Elvinia longa Resser, 1942b, p. 97, pi. 18, figs. 24-27. Elvinia vagans Resser, 1942b, p. 98, pi. 19, figs. 6-9. Elvinia brevifrons Resser, 1942b, p. 98, pi. 19, figs. 10-14. Elvinia matheri (Walcott). Shimer and Shrock, 1944, pi. 264, fig. 40. Elvinia obliquoensis Rusconi, 1953, p. 1, fig. 1. Diagnosis.—External surface of cranidium smooth. Brim generally moderately convex. Border convex in sagittal profile; saggital length between one-half and two-thirds length of brim. Discussion.—This widespread but relatively rare species is characterized particularly by its smooth external surface. It is distinguished from Elburgia quin-nensis (Resser), its possible ancestor, by having the transglabellar furrow of even depth and generally longer palpebral lobes. Replicas of Rusconi’s specimens of Elvinia obliquoensis from Argentina (Rusconi, 1953) show that this species does not differ in any observable feature from E. roemeri. At present these are the only specimens referable to Elvinia outside North America. Occurrence. Moderately rare, Elvinia zone: Eureka, McGill, Bastian Peak, Cherry Creek, Shingle Pass, Snake Range, Tybo, Ruby Range, Mount Hamilton, and Yucca Flat, Nev.; Deep Creek range, Utah. Genus ELVINIELLA Palmer Elviniella Palmer, 1960a, p. 71, 72. Type species.—Elviniella laevis Palmer, 1960a, p. 7, pi. 6, figs. 8-10, 14. Diagnosis.—Elviniinae having glabella tapered forward and having conspicuous posterior glabellar furrows connected across glabella; other glabellar furrows barely visible. Border and border furrow come to blunt point on axial line in many specimens. Fixed cheeks broad; width slightly greater than one-half basal glabellar width. Ocular ridges directed slightly anterolaterally to ends of palpebral lobes. Palpebral lobes long, strongly arcuate; length about one-half that of glabella including occipital ring. Anterior course of facial sutures nearly straight forward from palpebral lobes.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 45 Free cheek has long slender genal spine directed outward at distinct angle from margin of cheek. Lateral and posterior border furrows distinct, not connected across genal angle. Width of lateral border about one-half width of ocular platform. Pygidium, hypostome, and thoracic segments not known. Discussion.—1The discovery of free cheeks in association with cranidia assignable to Elviniella in USGS collection 3061-CO from the Tybo district, Nevada, has provided the new information given in the foregoing diagnosis. The relatively wide fixed cheeks and the palpebral lobes that are distinctly more than half of the glabellar length, exclusive of the occipital ring, distinguish cranidia of Elviniella from superficially similar small cranidia of Elvinia roemeri (Shumard). (Compare pi. 7, fig. 14 with pi. 3 fig. 14.) The structure of the free cheek, having the long genal spine diverging at an angle from the border, is similar to that of cheeks of Dokirnocephalus and Iddingsia in the Do-kimocephalinae, further emphasising the interrelationships between the Elviniinae and Dokimocephalinae (P- 33). Elviniella laevis Palmer Plate 7, figures 14, 18, 19 Elviniella laevis Palmer, 1960a, p. 72, pi. 6, figures 8-10, 14. Diagnosis.—This is the only species presently recognized in the genus. The generic diagnosis is thus also a specific diagnosis. The external surfaces of the granidium and free cheeks are nearly smooth; however, whitened specimens observed in oblique lighting may show faint irregular anastomosing or reticulate markings on the posterior part of the fixed cheek and terrace lines along the anterior margin of the border. Discussion.—Except for the discovery of a free cheek described under the genus, no significant new information has been obtained about the morphology of E. laevis or about possible additional species in the genus. Occurrence. Rare, upper part of Dunderbergia zone: Eureka, Tybo, Ash Meadows, Pahranagat Range, and McGill. Nev.; Elvinia zone: Eureka, Snake Range, and Cherry Creek, Nev. Genus IRVINGELLA Ulrich and Resser Irvingella Ulrich and Resser (in Walcott, 1924, p. 58) ; Walcott and Resser, 1924, p. 10; Walcott, 1925, p. 97; Resser, 1938b, p. 33; 1942b, p. 3, 13; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, p. 627; Kobayashi, 1954, p. 34; Lochman, 1959, p. 295; Palmer, 1960a, p. 72. Irvingella (Parairvingella) Kobayashi, 1938, p. 175; Palmer, 1960a, p. 73. Irvingella (Irvingellina) Kobayashi, 1938, p. 175; 1954, p. 35. Parairvingella Resser, 1942b, p. 4, 25. Komaspis (Parairvingella) Kobayashi, 1954, p. 33. Type species.—Irvingella major Ulrich and Resser (in Walcott, 1924, p. 58, pi. 10, fig. 3). Diagnosis.—Elviniinae having prominent subquadrate glabella, broadly rounded anteriorly. Posterior glabellar furrows connected across glabella, forming single deep furrow; junctions of lateral parts with furrow across top generally slightly angular. Middle pair of glabellar furrows generally visible at sides of glabella. Frontal area short, less than one-fourth length of glabella including occipital ring. Fixed cheeks moderately broad; width between palpebral and dorsal furrows more than one-third width of glabella just anterior to occipital furrow. Palpebral lobes long, slender, depressed below general level of cheek; length about two-thirds length of glabella including occipital ring. Posterior limbs short, steeply depressed. Free cheek narrow. Border broader than ocular platform except posterolateral to eye. Genal spine moderately long, forms continuous curve with border. Course of anterior section of facial suture curved inward and forward from anterior end of palpebral lobe; cuts anterior margin of cranidium less than half the distance from anterolateral cranidial comer to axial line. Pygidium subtrapezoidal, broadest at or near anterior margin, has prominent axis crossed by one or two deep ring furrows; length of axis about three-fifths length of pygidium. Distinct border generally present. Pleural lobes narrower than axial lobe. Discussion.—Examination of closely spaced strati-graphically controlled collections containing Irvingella from Nevada shows that three common strati-graphically distinct species are present: an older species, I. angustilimbatus Kobayashi, an intermediate species, I. flohri. and a younger species, I. major Ulrich and Resser. A rare fourth specices, I. transversa n. sp., is associated with I. major. A review of the historical development of the concept and content of Irvingella has been presented in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a, p. 73). The only additional change here is to discontinue recognition of Parairvingella as a subgenus on the basis of further study of specimens referable to its type species, I. angustilimbatus (p. 47). Thirty-nine specific names have been applied to t.rilobites having the characteristics of Irvingella. Twenty-seven of these “species” are from the United States, of which 23 were described by Resser (1942b, p. 13-24). Frederickson (1949) and Gaines (1951) reviewed many of Resser’s “species” from Oklahoma 735-610 0-65-546 TKILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN and Texas, respectively, and concluded that the features cited as species features were in most instances either superficial or inaccurately reported. They recognized only one species, I. major, in their areas. Examination of the typees of all the North American “species” referred to Irvingella during the present study has confirmed the observations of Frederickson and Gaines. Present assignments of 23 of these “species” are given in the synonymies of I. major, I. flohri, and I. angustilimbatus. Five additional “species” are represented by types that are not well enough preserved or illustrated to be adequately compared with species recognized here. I. tumifrons (Hall and Whitfield) and I. protuberans Kobayashi are represented by large, distorted, and exfoliated cranidia that are possibly referable to I. major. I. davisensis Resser is represented by a fragmentary cranidium possibly also referable to I. major, and I. ottertailensis Resser is represented by a mold of a cranidium so incomplete that even its generic assignment is questionable. Most of the known specimens of foreign trilobites assigned to Irvingella were examined during 1961 and 1962. I. suecica, with its subspecies, I. suecica mar-ginata (Westergard, 1947), from Sweden is a species differing from American species of Irvingella by having a distinct cranidial border persisting further into the holaspid stage. It differs further from I. major by having slightly wider fixed cheeks, a less transversely convex glabella, and less well-defined second glabellar furrows. I. nuneatonensis (Sharman, 1886) from England may be a distinct species. It is represented by slightly compressed specimens in shale. Large cranidia differ from those of I. major only in having a slightly more elongate and anteriorly tapered glabella. The holo-type, which is a smaller complete specimen (total length 9 mm), is not objectively distinguishable from I. major, but some evidence for a slight postdeposi-tional shortening of the glabella may make the resemblance more apparent than real. This species is presently being studied (1962) by Mr. Adrian Ruston of Cambridge University. I. jorusconii (Rusconi, 1953) from Argentina is in every respect identical with I. major. I. obliquoensis (Rusconi, 1953) may also be a synonym of I. major. It is represented only by large broken cranidia that have all observable characteristics correct for I. major, but they are inadequately preserved for accurate identification. I. platycephala (Rusconi, 1953) may be a separate species. One of the paratype specimens studied is a cranidium having a low transverse glabellar convexity, in which the front of the glabella obscures the border from dorsal view. However, a second one of the paratype specimens is a typical I. major. The holotype was not among the replicas available for study; so, correct placement of the species is not possible. Irvingella septentrionalis (Walcott and Resser, 1924) from Novaya Zemlya is represented by a single distorted cranidium that has all the characteristics of I. major. However, 1.1 arctica (Walcott and Resser) (1924) is not an Irvingella. Although it has the posterior glabellar furrow complete across the glabella, it also possesses a large occipital node, the suggestion of a small anteriorly placed palpebral lobe, and a well-defined border that tapers laterally and is different in structure from that of species of Irvingella having a border. The species is represented only by one small distorted cranidium, and its correct generic assignment is not certain. Among unnamed specimens assigned to Irvingella is a slightly crushed and weathered cranidium from China identified as Irvingellal by Troedsson (1937). The specimen lacks a preserved frontal area, and thus, although it otherwise resembles Irvingella, it could represent a younger genus, Drumaspis. Cranidia of a species of Drumaspis from Nevada, in a fauna containing some elements resembling those described by Troedsson from China, differ from Irvingella only by having facial sutures that meet on the axial line. Irvingella tropica (Opik, 1963) from the Pomegranate limestone in Queensland, Australia, seems to be identical in every respect with the variant of I. angustilimbatus from the Tybo district, Nev. (pi. 6, fig. 23), described in the following discussion. In the collections of N. Y. Pokrovskaya in Moscow are cranidia of an Irvingella from the northeastern part of the Siberian platform that are identical with those of I. transversa n. sp. Three asiatic species seems to belong to Irvingella, but further comparison must await study of the specimens on which they are based. These are I. taitzehuen-sis (Lu, 1957) from China, and Komaspis (Parairvin-gella) convexus and K. (P.) megalops (Kobayashi, 1962) from Korea. Irvingella angnstilimbatns Kobayashi Plate 6, figures 17, 18, 21-23 Charioccplialusl tumifrons Walcott (not Hall and Whitfield), 1884, p. 61, pi. 18, fig. 16. Irvingella (Parairvingella) angustilimbatus Kobayashi, 1938, p. 175 ; Palmer, 1960a, p. 73, pi. 6, figs. 2, 3. Parairvingella angustilimbatus (Kobayashi). Resser, 1942b, p. 26, pi. 4, figs. 18-22. Parairvingella intermedia Resser, 1942b, p. 27, pi. 4, figs. 25-31.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 47 Parairvingella eurekensis Resser, 1942b, p. 26, pi. 4, figs. 15-17. Irvin gella (Parairvnigella) eurekensis (Resser). Palmer, 1960a, p. 74, pi. 6, fig. 1. Diagnosis.—Short frontal area distinctly divided into brim and border. Glabella prominent, moderately convex transversely and longitudinally; second glabellar furrows shallow. Width of fixed cheeks about one-half or less than one-half basal glabellar width. Pygidium, free cheeks, and hypostome not known. Discussion.—This species is the oldest representative of Irvingella and the only species of Irvingella having a well-defined cranidial border, even on large hola-spids. This species was assigned to the subgenus Parairvingella in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a), when Parairvingella eurekensis Resser was believed to constitute a second species. The problem of adequately determining systematics from small samples, however, is indicated by the foregoing synonymy. Parairvingella eurekensis Resser was recognized as a distinct species because the sagittal length of the frontal area on the two small known specimens is greater in comparison to glabellar length than is the sagittal length of the frontal area on larger specimens representing I. angustilimbatus. Generally, the sagittal length of the frontal area increases rather than decreases relative to glabellar length as size increases. A sample of I. angustilimbatus from Tybo, Nev., (USGS 1471-CO) has both small and large cranidia and, coupled with samples of cranidia of uParairvin-gella” type of various sizes from other localities, shows that the holaspid growth of the frontal area of this species is uncommon. Thus, the principal distinction made between I. angustilimbatus and I. eurekensis seems to be no longer valid, and the species are here considered to be synonyms. This leaves I. angustilimbatus as the only recognizable American species in Parairvingella. The fact that I. flohri, I. transversus, and I. major, which lack a definite border in larger holaspids, pass through a “Parairvingella stage” in the meraspid and early holaspid periods (pi. 6, figs. 8, 14, 15, 19) emphasizes the close relationship of Parairvingella and Irvingella. Westergard (1947) showed a similar growth pattern for I. suecica. and Lochman (1953, 1959), following Westergard’s suggestion, placed Parairvingella in synonymy with Irvingella. Parairvingella was subsequently reinstated as a subgenus (Palmer, 1960a). However, usage of the cumbersome trinomial nomenclature now seems unnecessary. One cranidium from USGS collection 1471-CO, made at Tybo (pi. 6, fig. 23), seems to show an extreme of variation that can occur in a sample where most other cranidia are clearly conspecific with I. angustilimbatus. The form of this cranidium, which has a slightly tapered glabella, is much like that of Elvi-niella and emphasizes the close relationship between Irvingella and Elviniella, which is its probable ancestor (p. 20). This cranidium cannot be objectively distinguished from the two known cranidia of Irvingella tropica Opik from the Pomegranate limestone, Queensland, Australia. However, because of the small number of specimens in the Tybo collection, the variant Tybo cranidium cannot be clearly shown to represent a population specifically distinguishable from associated specimens assigned to I. angustilimbatus. Thus, although I. tropica may have existed in both Australia and America, the possibility of homeomorphy cannot be eliminated, and the Tybo specimen is recorded in the present paper as a variant of I. angustilimbatus. Occurrence. Moderately rare, lower part of Elvinia zone: Eureka, McGill, Shingle Pass, Tybo, Yucca Flat, and Bare Mountain, Nev. Irvingella flohri Resser Plate 6, figures 16, 19, 20, 24 Irvingella flohri Resser, 1942b, p. 24, pi. 4, figs. 12-14. Irvingella adamsensis Resser, 1942b, p. 24, pi. 4, figs. 7-11. Irvingella aff. I. flohri Resser. Deland and Shaw, 1956, p. 556, pi. 66, figs. 10-12. Diagnosis.—Frontal area short, undivided in larger holaspids. Sagittal convexity of glabella gentle to moderate; transverse convexity moderate. Second pair of glabellar furrows rarely apparent. Distance between palpebral furrows on line tangent to front of glabella slightly but consistently greater than basal glabellar width. Width of fixed cheeks one-half or less than one-half width of glabella. Pygidium has axis bearing one or two ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Anterolateral comers generally rounded. Discussion.-—This species occurs in beds slightly older than those containing I. major and I. transversa. The foregoing distinguishing features are consistent, although minor, and are significant in the understanding of the evolution of the genus (p. 20). Deland and Shaw (1956, p. 556) placed both I. adamsensis Resser and I. richmondensis Resser in the synonymy of I. flohri. The placement of I. adamsensis is certainly correct. I. richmondensis is represented by a small cranidium that could belong to either I. major or I. flohri. Because of its association with I. transversa, a species known only from beds containing48 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN I. major, I. richmondensis is here considered to be more probably a synonym of I. major. Occurrence. Moderately rare, middle part of Elvinia zone; Eureka, Shingle Pass, and McGill, Nev.; House Range, Utah. Irvingella major Ulrich and Resser Plate 6, figures 9-15 Irvingella major Ulrich and Resser, in Walcott, 1924, p. 58, pi. 10, fig. 3; Walcott, 1925, p. 98, pi. 15, figs. 26-29; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, pi. 265, fig. 25; Frederickson, 1949, p. 353-355, pi. 69, figs. 5-7; Wilson, 1951, p. 644r-645, pi. 93, figs. 14, 21-23; Gaines, 1951, p. 609, pi. 1, figs. 1-32; Bell and Ellinwood, 1962, pi. 55, figs. 4, 5. Irvingella septentrionalis Walcott and Resser, 1924, p. 10, pi. 2, figs. 32, 33. Irvingella abrupta Resser, 1942b, p. 21, pi. 3, figs. 40-45. Irvingella accincta Resser, 1942b, p. 21, pi. 3, figs. 37-39. Irvingella agrestis Resser, 1942b, p. 17, pi. 3, figs. 4-6. Irvingella alberta Resser, 1942b, p. 23, pi. 4, figs. 1-3. Irvingella alia Resser, 1942b, p. 16, pi. 2, figs. 42-47. Irvingella alta Resser, 1942b, p. 19, pi. 3, figs. 16-18. Irvingella arbucklensis Resser, 1942b, p. 14, pi. 2, figs. 28-33. Irvingella ardmorensis Resser, 1942b, p. 18, pi. 3, figs. 7-12. Irvingella bacca Resser, 1942b, p. 20, pi. 3, figs. 34-36. Irvingella burnetensis Resser, 1942b, p. 20, pi. 3, figs. 28-33; Wilson, 1949, p. 39, pi. 11, figs. 18, 21. Irvingella deckeri Resser, 1942b, p. 19, pi. 3, figs. 19-27. Irvingella gibba Miller, 1936, p. 31, pi. 8, figs. 1, 2. Irvingella media Resser, 1942b, p. 22, pi. 3, figs. 46-54; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, pi. 265, figs. 26, 27; Wilson, 1949, p. 39, pi. 10, fig. 7; pi. 11, figs. 16, 17, 19, 20. Irvingella mesleri Resser, 1942b, p. 15, pi. 2, figs. 34-38. Irvingella oblonga Resser, 1942b, p. 17, pi. 3, figs. 1-3. Irvingella plena Resser, 1942b, p. 18, pi. 3, figs. 13-15. Irvingella recurva Resser, 1942b, p. 15, pi. 2, figs. 39-41. Irvingella richmondensis Resser, 1942b, p. 23, pi. 4, figs. 4-6. Irvingella silvestris Resser, 1942b, p. 13, pi. 2, figs. 22-27. Irvingella jorusconii Rusconi, 1953, p. 2, fig. 2. llrvingella obliquoensis Rusconi, 1953, p. 2, figs. 4, 5. Diagnosis.—Frontal area short, undivided in all but smallest holaspids. Glabella prominent, strongly convex transversely and longitudinally, has short second pair of glabellar furrows commonly most distinct on exfoliated specimens. Distance between palpebral furrows on line tangent to front of glabella generally equal to or less than basal glabellar width. Width of fixed cheeks one-half or less than one-half basal glabellar width. Anterolateral corners of pygidium on many specimens acuminate. Discussion.—Specimens from many localities have been referred to I. major, and the synonymy of the species has been discussed several times. The only published description, however, is a careful and fairly complete presentation by Gaines (1951). New information derived from study of silicified specimens in USGS collection 3064—CO, Mount Hamilton district, Nev., shows that the free cheek has only a short anterior projection of the doublure beneath the cranidial border and that this species must have had a rather wide (transverse) rostral plate. Evolutionary development within Irvingella is to some extent summarised in the ontogeny of I. major, the youngest species of the genus. Small meraspids have a distinct brim and border, as in the oldest species of Irvingella, I. angustilimbatus. Larger meraspids and perhaps small holaspids have the subdued glabellar convexity and proportionately greater distance between the anterior ends of the palpebral lobes characteristic of I. flohri, the immediate ancestor of I. major. Occurrence. Moderately common to abundant, highest beds of Elvinia zone: Eureka, Snake Range, McGill, Cherry Creek, Ruby Range, Mt. Hamilton, and Yucca Flat, Nev. IrvingeUa transversa n. sp. Plate 6, figures 7, 8 Diagnosis.— Frontal area short, undivided in hola-spid. Glabella prominent, moderately to strongly convex transversely and longitudinally; second glabellar furrows barely apparent. Width of fixed cheeks about two-thirds basal glabellar width. Distance between palpebral furrows on line tangent to anterior end of glabella about one-third greater than basal glabellar width. Discussion.-—This striking species is represented by both large and small cranidia and occurs in association with I. major. The width of the fixed cheeks and the distance between the anterior ends of the palpebral lobes relative to the basal glabellar width are far greater than the outside limits for these characteristics observed on I. major by Gaines (1951) and by me. Thus, this species does not seem to represent merely an extreme variation of I. major. The occurrence is here considered to be one of the relatively rare examples of an association of two congeneric species in the Ptero-cephaliid biomere. Occurrence: Rare, upper part of the Elvinia zone: Eureka and Ruby Range, Nev. Family ERIXANIIDAE Opik This family was recently proposed (Opik, 1963, p. 77) for trilobites having cranidia on which the border is narrow, the brim and fixed cheeks are wide, the posteriorly situated palpebral lobes are long and arcuate, and the glabella is subrectangular and has a sagittally short occipital ring. The thorax has 12 segments on which the pleural tips are long and slender. Pygidia have a short axis and, generally, a narrow border. InSYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 49 addition to three new species of a single genus Erix-anium from Australia, Opik (1963, p. 78) noted that specimens described as Genus and species undetermined 1, 2, and 3 by Palmer (1960a, pi. 11, figs. 1-3, 5, 6) from the Dunderberg Shale also belong to Erix-anium. These specimens together with subsequently collected material, all from the Peterocephaliid bio-mere, represent at least four species here assigned with varying degrees of confidence to Erixanium. Genus ERIXANIUM: Opik Erixanium Opik, 1963, p. 77. Type species.—Erixanium, senturn Opik, 1963, p. 78-81, pi. 8, figs. 1-4, 7, 8; pi. 9, figs. 1-5; text figs. 26, 27. Diagnosis.—Because the family Erixaniidae is presently monotypic, the diagnostic features of Erixanium, are the same as those for the family. However, E.? brachyaxis n. sp., which has a relatively short brim and a flat border on the cranidium and a relatively broad pygidial border, could be removed from Erixanium on these differential characteristics. If so, Erixanium could be diagnosed as follows: Erixaniidae having a narrow slightly convex cranidial border; sagittal length less than one-third that of nearly flat brim. Pygidium has narrow border; width of border less than one-half width of pleural platform. Discussion.—Specimens of Erixanium are rare but widespread in the Dunderbergia zone of the Great Basin. Samples large enough to show infraspecific variability have not been obtained. Thus, the small differences between E. multisegmentus n. sp. and E. carinatum n. sp. and their Australian counterparts E. alienum Opik and E. senturn Opik may need to be reevaluated when larger samples are found. During a visit to Dr. N. V. Pokrovskaya of the Geological Institute of the Academy of Sciences in Moscow, U.S.S.R., in May 1962,1 was shown complete specimens of a species of Erixanium from near the mouth of the Lena River in northeastern Siberia. In that area, as well as in Australia and the United States, Erixanium is found in the interval between beds containing Glyptagnostus and those containing Irvingella. Thus, Erixanium is added to the small but growing list of geographically widespread and strati-graphically restricted Cambrian trilobite genera that are of extreme importance for accurate intercontinental correlation within the Cambrian system. The Siberian species of Erixanium, which seems to be conspecific with E. multisegmentus n. sp. has a thorax and cephalon that are virtually the same as those of E. senturn Opik. E. senturn differs primarily in the structure of its pygidium. Pygidial characteristics, therefore, are apparently the most significant for discrimination of species within Erixanium. Erixanium carinatum n. sp. Plate 17, figures 19-21 Diagnosis.—Cranidium has narrow convex border, defined by narrow border furrow; sagittal length between one-third and one-fourth length of brim. Glabellar furrows generally shallow. Pygidium sub-triangular, has short axis, length of axis about one-half that of pygidium. Three moderately well-defined ring furrows present posterior to articulating furrow. Postaxial median carina present, connected to border. Border narrow, continuous with first pleural furrow. Anterior half of pleural fields crossed by two or three broad moderately deep pleural furrows. Shallow interpleural furrows may be present. Discussion.—This species is most like E. senturn, the type species, from the Georgina and Pomegranate limestones in Australia (Opik, 1963). The principal difference is the presence of a well-defined post-axial median carina on the pygidium. The axis has one less segment, and the posterior part of the pygidial border furrow is also better defined on the American species. The distinct postaxial carina distinguishes E. carinatum from all other species in the genus. Occurrence. Rare, lower half of the Dunderbergia zone: Yucca Flat, Nev.; House Range?, Utah. Erixanium multisegmentus n. sp. Plate 17, figures 17, 18 Genus and species undetermined 1, Palmer, 1960a, p. 101, pi. 11 figs. 2, 5, 6. Genus and species undetermined 3, Palmer, 1960a, p. 102, pi. 11, fig. 3. Diagnosis.—Cranidium has nearly flat border separated from brim by sharp change in slope; sagittal length about one-third length of brim. Glabellar furrows distinct, moderately deep. Axis pygidium has five or six ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow; posterior end of axis poorly defined; length of axis slightly less than three-fourths length of pygidium. Border narrow, moderately well defined. Pleural fields crossed by four or five shallow pleural furrows. Discussion.—The long many-segmented axis of the pygidium, the narrow cranidial border, the generally deep glabellar furrows, and the lack of a distinct border furrow on the cranidium distinguish this species from others in the genus.50 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Occurrence. Rare, middle part of Dunderbergia zone: Eureka and Tybo district, Nev. Erixanium? brachyaxis n. sp. Plate 17, figures 14-16 Diagnosis.—Cranidium has relatively broad flat border separated from brim by distinct change in slope; sagittal length nearly one-half that of brim. Glabellar furrows barely apparent. Axis pygidium short; sagittal length about one-half length of pygidium. Three or four shallow ring furrows present posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural regions have broad, flat poorly defined border; border nearly as wide as pleural fields. Pleural fields crossed by one or two shallow pleural furrows that continue onto border. Postaxial boss elongate, extended onto inner part of border. Discussion.—This species is included in Erixanium because of the presence of a postaxial boss on the pygidium and the general similarity in the structure of the cranidium. It differs from other species in the genus by having a broad rather than narrow pygidial border and a broader cranidial border. The differences in pygidial structure are greater than those generally apparent between congeneric species, and E.f brachyaxis may represent another genus. Until more is known about these rare trilobites, the species is tentatively included in Erixanium, with which it has its greatest affinities. Occurrence. Rare, middle part of Dunderbergia zone: McGill, Cherry Creek, and Ruby Range, Nev. Erixanium sp. Plate 17, figure 22 Some generally fragmentary pygidia and isolated cranidia having the generic characteristics of Erixanium cannot be assigned with certainty to the species of Erixanium named here. Some of the pygidia (pi. 17, fig. 22) may represent a species characterized by two or three pairs of well-defined pleural furrows that terminate abruptly at the border furrow and by a short axis having only four or five ring furrows posterior to the articulating furrow. Pygidia of this type are most like those of Erixanium sentum Opik. They differ primarily by having the pleural furrows meeting the lateral border furrow abruptly rather than by curving backward and being continuous with it. Without more knowledge of the variability of this feature in species from either the Australian or American collections, its reliability as a discriminating factor cannot be evaluated, and the American specimens are for the present not assigned to a named species. Occurrence. Rare, middle part of Dunderbergia zone: Ruby Range, Nev. and House Range, Utah. Family LONCHOCEPHALIDAE Hupe Genus GLAPHYRASPIS Resser Glaphyraspis Resser, 1937, p. 12; Rasetti, 1959, p. 279; 1961, p. 112. Raaschella Lochman, 1938a, p. 81. Tyne species.—Liostracus parvus Walcott, 1899, p. 463, pi. 65, fig. 6. Description.—Small Lonchocephalidae having cranidium on which glabella prominent, well defined by generally deep axial and preglabellar furrows, subparallel sided or tapered forward, bluntly rounded anteriorly. Two pairs of short deep glabellar furrows present, generally not connected to axial furrow; posterior pair generally curved. Occipital furrow deep, particularly at sides of glabella. Occipital ring generally broadest on axial line, generally lacks distinct node or spine. Frontal area short, subequally divided into convex downsloping brim and border by narrow border furrow; length one-third or less than one-third length of glabella. Fixed cheek moderately convex; width less than one-half basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes small, narrow, situated about opposite second glabellar furrows. Narrow eye ridges generally present. Posterior limbs moderately broad exsagittally, have deep posterior border furrow and prominent convex posterior border. Course of anterior section of facial suture slightly convergent forward from palpebral lobe to border furrow ; suture curved inward across border to cut anterior margin imperceptibly near axial line and then curved backward across doublure to axial line, perhaps outlining minute triangular rostral plate. Course of posterior section of facial suture gently convex near palpebral lobe, becoming more strongly convex near posterior margin. Lateral margin of free cheek gently curved towards front, becoming strongly curved posteriorly around genal angle. Genal spine absent. Border furrow deep near anterior end, disappears towards genal angle. Eye small, holochroal; composed of about 50 to 60 lenses. Infraocular ring absent. Hypostome not known. Thorax has eight thoracic segments. Each segment has prominent axis equal in width or slightly narrower than pleural region. Tips of thoracic segments generally bluntly rounded. Pygidium subtriangular. Axis prominent, tapered backward, poorly defined posteriorly, reaches nearly to posterior margin; as many as five ring furrows present posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural re-SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 51 gions nearly flat near axis; distal margins down-sloping or depressed. Pleural furrows generally present. Posterior band of each pleural segment has transversely elongate node about at point where pleural region is bent ventrally. Nodes decrease in size posteriorly. No distinct border present. Doublure narrow, tapered toward axial line. External surfaces of most parts of exoskeleton have coarse or fine granular ornamentation, particularly on cranidium and free cheeks. Smooth specimens relatively rare. Discussion.—Glaphyraspis is particularly characterized by the prominent well-defined glabella, the short subequally divided downsloping frontal area on the cranidium, and the rounded genal angle of the free cheek. Pygidia are similar, including the nodes on the posterior bands of the pleural regions, to those of Lonchocephalus and Terranovella. Three distinct kinds of Glaphyraspis species are known. The type species, G. parva (Walcott), is characterized by subparallel glabellar sides, generally low glabellar convexity, and a slight median indentation in the front of the glabella. It is known at present only from beds in the upper part of the Crepicephalus zone in Virginia (Rasetti, 1961, p. 106) and Nevada and from beds of uncertain stratigraphic position at its type locality in northwestern Wyoming. A second kind of Glaphyraspis is represented by forms having an anteriorly tapered moderately to strongly convex glabella and deep glabellar furrows. This is the commonest kind of Glaphyraspis and is found over most of the United States in the Aphelaspis zone. Three species are included in this group: G. omata (Loch-man) and G. occidentalis (Lochman), which are species that lack occipital spines and which were formerly placed in Raaschella but were shown by Rasetti (1961, p. 112) to be congeneric with G. parva (Walcott), and an undescribed species that has an occipital spine. G. occidentalis is known at present only from Montana and Wyoming (Lochman and Duncan, 1944, p. 43; Lochman and Hu, 1960, p. 815). The undescribed species is known only from southeastern Arizona. G. omata seems to be the most common of these species; it occurs in many collections from the Great Basin, Texas (Lochman, 1938a, p. 82; Palmer, 1954, p. 764) and the Appalachian region. A third kind of Glaphy-raspis, represented by G. ovata Rasetti, is characterized by poor definition of the glabellar furrows and is the youngest species recorded for the genus. It is found in the Pseudosaratogia magna fauna in Virginia (Rasetti, 1961, p. 113) in beds equivalent in age to the lower Elvinia, zone of the Great Basin. Glaphyraspis ornata (Lochman) Plate 7, figures 15-17, 20-22 Raaschella ornata Lochman, 1938a, p. 82, pi. 18, figs. 6-10; Palmer, 1954, p. 764, pi. 89, figs. 7-9. Glaphyraspis ornata (Lochman). Palmer, 1962a, p. 93, pi. 19 figs. 15-19, 26, 27, text fig. 2C. Diagnosis. — Glabella tapered forward, bluntly rounded anteriorly, moderately to strongly convex transversely and longitudinally. Glabellar furrows deep. Width of fixed cheek between one-third and one-half basal glabellar width. Occipital ring lacks node or spine. Discussion.—G. omata is most similar to G. occidentalis (Lochman) from Montana and Wyoming. It differs by having relatively wider fixed cheeks and a somewhat less variable ornamentation. These features may not have actual specific significance, however. The width of the fixed cheeks of most of the cranidia in the type lot of G. occidentalis is about one-third the basal glabellar width; larger cranidia are nearly smooth, whereas small cranidia are distinctly granular. Most of the cranidia of G. omata from USGS collection 2468-CO at McGill, Nev., have a coarse granular ornamentation on specimens of all sizes, and the width of the fixed cheeks is more nearly one-half the basal glabellar width. Trilobites in this sample are silicified, and enough specimens are available to show that the ornamentation is consistent. USGS collection 2315-CO from Shingle Pass, however, contains specimens that have wide fixed cheeks but relatively subdued granular ornamentation; USGS collection 2996-CO from the House Range, Utah, contains specimens that have a distinct granular ornamentation but have fixed cheeks intermediate in width between those typical of G. omata and G. occidentalis. Specimens from the Highland Range have a barely apparent granular ornamentation and fixed cheeks whose width is slightly less than one-third of the basal glabellar width. All the samples seem to be of the same age. Thus, geographic variation and some intrapopulation variation seem to be present within the presently constituted species of Glaphyraspis. Until adequate material is obtained in stratigraphic sequence at one locality, the significance of ornamentation and cranidial proportions in the systematics of Glaphyraspis will remain uncertain. All the specimens from the Aphelaspis zone in the Great Basin are here included in G. omata. Occurrence. Moderately rare, Aphelaspis zone: McGill, Shingle Pass, Snake Range, and Highland Range, Nev.; House Range, Utah. Genus TERRANOVELLA Lochman Terranovella Lochman, 1938b, p. 473; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, p. 635; Rasetti, 1959, p. 280.52 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Description.—Lonchocephalidae in which the cra-nidium has a well-defined slightly sunken glabella surrounded by deep axial and preglabellar furrows; glabella is tapered forward, bluntly rounded at front. Two pairs of deep short lateral glabellar furrows generally present; posterior pair distinctly curved. Occipital furrow deepest at sides of glabella, narrow but well impressed across axial line. Occipital ring has moderately long posteriorly directed median spine. Frontal area convex, almost tumid, obscurely divided into brim and border; sagittal length from one-third to slightly more than one-half that of glabella. Border, when apparent, narrower than brim. Fixed cheeks moderately convex, slightly downsloping; width about one-half basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes poorly defined, situated on line through anterior pair of glabellar furrows. Narrow eye ridges may be present. Posterior limbs broad, have deep, narrow posterior border furrow. Course of anterior section of facial suture nearly straight forward from palpebral lobe to border, then turned inward across border to cut anterior margin imperceptibly. Ventral course not known. Course of posterior section convex. Border of free cheek moderately to poorly defined, slightly narrower than ocular platform. Only lateral border furrow apparent. Eye prominent. Infraocular ring absent. Genal spine short, sharp. Axis of pygidium well defined at sides, poorly defined at rear, tapered backward to inner edge of steeply depressed border region. Three or four narrow ring furrows present posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural fields crossed by several shallow pleural and interpleural furrows. Each pleural segment has low knob along outer edge of pleural field. External surfaces either smooth, pitted, or finely granular. Discussion.—This genus is most like Glaphyraspis in structure of the glabella and differs in this respect from all other trilobites of the Pterocephaliid biomere. It differs from Glaphyraspis by having a sunken glabella, strongly convex frontal area, and a short genal spine on the free cheek. All known species of Terra-novella have a broad-based median occipital spine. Most species of Glaphyraspis lack an occipital spine. Terranovella brevis n. sp. Plate 7, figures 12, 13 Diagnosis.—Frontal area short; sagittal length between one-third and one-half that of glabella. External surface smooth. Discussion.—This species is known at present only from a few cranidia from the Aphelaspis zone in the Highland Kange, Nev. It differs from all other species in the genus by lacking any distinct ornamentation and by having a relatively short frontal area. Occurrence. Rare, upper part of Aphelaspis zone: Highland Range, Nev. Family NORWOODIIDAE Walcott Genus HARDYOIDES Kobayashi Hardyoides Kobayashi, 1938, p. 177. Nortcoodina Lochman, 1940a, p. 11, 48. Type species.-—Hardyoides minor Kobayashi, 1938, p. 177, pi. 16, fig. 29. Diagnosis.—Norwoodiidae having subcylindrical glabella; frontal area downsloping; distinct border present; fixed cheek moderately convex, slightly down-sloping; posterior fixigenal spines short. Thorax composed of eight segments; axial spines may be present on occipital ring and third, fifth, and seventh segments. Pygidium subsemicircular; border poorly defined, downsloping. Description.—Small norwoodiid trilobites (length probably not exceeding 6 mm). Cephalon subsemicircular, gently to moderately convex transversely and longitudinally. Cranidium subtrapezoidal; width at posterior margin about twice width between anterior sections of facial sutures. Glabella prominent, sub-cylindrical, strongly rounded in front. Glabella furrows barely apparent. Occipital furrow deep, straight. Occipital ring has node or spine. Frontal area short, downsloping; length between one-third and one-half length of glabella. Border slightly narrower than brim, well defined by narrow curved border furrow. Fixed cheeks gently convex, slightly downsloping; width slightly more than one-half basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes small, poorly defined, opposite anterior fourth of glabella. Narrow eye ridges generally present at right angles to axial line. Posterior limbs large; exsagittal length more than one-half that of glabella; transverse width greater than basal glabellar width. Low knobs present on many specimens adjacent to axial furrow opposite posterior end of glabella. Posterior border furrow deep near glabella, disappears laterally near base of short, stout posterior fixigenal spine. Course of anterior section of facial suture straight forward or slightly convergent from palpebral lobe to border furrow, curved across border to cut anterior margin imperceptibly and continues diagonally backward across doublure to axial line, then abruptly turned back to form short median suture behind trans-SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 53 versely subovate rostral plate. Rostral suture nearly straight, submarginal. Course of posterior section of facial suture convex, directed outward and backward to cut lateral margin of cephalon. Free cheek subtriangular. Border about as wide as ocular platform, poorly defined. Eye small, convex. Infraocular ring absent. Thorax composed of eight segments. Axis distinct, convex, narrower than pleural regions. Pleural regions gently convex. Each segment has deep straight pleural furrow and blunt tip. Axial spine may be present on third, fifth, and seventh segments. Pygidium subsemicircular. Axis prominent anteriorly, tapered backward to inner edge of poorly defined downsloping border; end not clearly marked. Two or three shallow ring furrows present posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural fields crossed by three or four pleural and interpleural furrows of more or less equal depth. Anterior width of pygidium one-half or less maximum width of cephalon. External surfaces of all parts smooth or covered with fine even granular ornamentation. Discussion.—The discovery of Hardyoides minor Kobayashi, the type species of Hardyoides, represented by abundant silicified and limestone individuals in the Aphelaspis zone of eastern Nevada, has clarified knowledge on its morphology and stratigraphic position. Earlier assignment of the species to beds of Franconia (Kobayashi, 1938) and Tremadoc (Lochman, 1959) age are incorrect. Assignment of the species to Holcacephalus (Shaw, 1951), the synonymy of Nor-woodina (Lochman, 1910a) with Holcacephalus (Res-ser, 1938a) by Lochman (1940b), and the synonymy of Levisaspis (Rasetti, 1943) with Hardyoides (Kobayashi, 1938) by Shaw (1953) required that the types and relationships of these genera be reviewed. Walcott (1916) described N orwoodia tenera as one of several species of early Upper Cambrian proparian trilobites assigned to a new genus Norwoodia and family Norwoodiidae. Lochman (1940a, p. 11) reviewed the Norwoodiidae, made N. tenera the type species of a new genus Norwoodina, and gave a careful analysis and description of the characteristics of the genus. She also cited Holcacephalus granulatus Resser as a synonym of N. tenera without explanation and failed to note that by so doing Holcacephalus (Resser, 1938a; type species H. granulatus) became a senior synonym of Norwoodina. This situation was quickly rectified (Lochman, 1940b), and the nomenclature seemed to be stabilized. Earlier, however, Kobayashi (1938) described a new genus Hardyoides and new species Hardyoides minor from Upper Cambrian beds in Canada. Although he was aware of the proparian nature of H. minor and also of Walcott’s 1916 publication, to which he referred in his text, he failed to note the resemblance of the cranidium of H. minor to that of N. tenera or even to relate his species to the Norwoodiidae. Shaw (1951, p. 106) reviewed the Norwoodiidae and suggested that Hardyoides represented only a subgenus of Holcacephalus. From his remarks in the text, it is apparent that his knowledge of Hardyoides came only from the poor photograph and inaccurate drawing of H. minor in Kobayashi (1938). He included Hardyoides and Holcacephalus, together with Levisaspis (Rasetti, 1943) and Paranorwoodia (Rasetti, 1945), in a new subfamily, Holcacephalinae of the Norwoodiidae. Shaw, later (1953, p. 145) revised his views and recognized Holcacephalus and Hardyoides as separate genera, but he placed Levisaspis in synonymy with Hardyoides. Although the Holcacephalinae was rejected by Lochman (1953, p. 892), her arrangement of the Norwoodiidae (Lochman, 1959, p. 302) was nearly that of Shaw. Study of Kobayashi’s types of Hardyoides minor borrowed from the National Museum of Canada, the types of Norwoodia tenera and Holcacephalus granulatus from the U. S. National Museum, Rasetti’s illustrations of Levisaspis typicalis and the new material from Nevada has revealed the following information: Hardyoides minor differs from Norwoodia tenera principally by lacking axial spines on the occipital ring and seventh thoracic segment. There is little doubt that these species are congeneric. Both species differ from Holcacephalus granulatus by having a sub-cylindrical, virtually unfurrowed glabella instead of a subtriangular glabella having deep lateral glabellar notches. They also have a finer granular ornamentation. The structure of the glabella and the form of the granular ornamentation of H. granulatus are characteristic of trilobites of the Menomoniidae rather than the Norwoodiidae. Holcacephalus, including H. granulatus only, is here removed from the Norwoodiidae and considered as a proparian genus of the Menomoniidae. Levisaspis typicalis Rasetti has a cranidium similar to that of Hardyoides minor and Norwoodia tenera, but the whole trilobite is structurally unlike these species and, although possibly related, is probably not congeneric with either form. The species has five instead of eight thoracic segments, no axial spines, and a concave, upturned pygidial border. Most of the illustrations and statements regarding Hardyoides, Holcacephalus, Norwoodina, and Levisaspis by Lochman (1959, p. 302), based principally on the work of Shaw (1951, 1953), need to be changed.54 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN' Norwoodina is a synonym of Hardyoides, not of Holcacephalus. Levisaspis is not congeneric with Hardyoides. Holcacephalus belongs to a family different from that of the other three genera. The illustration of Hardyoides (Lochman, 1959, fig. 224-4) is actually that of Levisaspis. The real illustration of Hardyoides, although inaccurate in detail is given as part of the illustration of Holcacephalus (Lochman, 1959, 224-la, lb). The only species recognized here as properly belonging to Hardyoides are II. minor Kobayashi, H. mimi-cus n. sp., Norwoodia tenera Walcott, and Norwoodina tenera cuneifera Lochman (1940a). Holcacephalus (Hardyoides) glabrus (Shaw) belongs to Levisaspis. Hardyoides mimicus n. sp. Plate 7, figure 1 Diagnosis.—Cranidium has occipital spine. Fixige-nal spines short; length less than twice length of occipital ring, exclusive of occipital spine. Sagittal length of border about twc-thirds that of brim. External surface has only slightly apparent granular ornamentation, even after whitening. Discussion.—This species occurs in beds slightly younger than those containing H. minor and differs by having an occipital spine and a slightly longer brim. It is most nearly like the much older species H. tenerus (Walcott), from which it differs principally by having shorter and more delicate fixigenal spines. Occurrence. Rare, Dicanthopyge zone: Yucca Flat, Nev. Hardyoides minor Kobayashi Plate 7, figures 3-5, 9-11 Hardyoides minor Kobayashi, 1938, p. 177, pi. 16, fig. 29; Palmer, 1962a, p. 94, pi. 19, figs. 20-25. Diagnosis.—Cranidium has occipital ring lacking axial spine, frontal area subequally divided into brim and border, and short posterior fixigenal spines having length less than twice sagittal length of occipital ring. Thorax has axial spines on third and fifth segments only. External surface has moderately distinct granular ornamentation. Discussion.—This species differs from II. tenerus (Walcott) by having a narrow brim and shorter posterior fixigenal spines and by lacking axial spines on the occipital ring and seventh thoracic segments. The narrow brim and absence of an occipital spine also distinguish H. minor from the slightly younger II. mimicus n. sp. II. minor and II. tenerus occur in dark limestones of the outer detrital belt (Palmer, 1960b) in the Great Basin. H. tenerus is found in beds equivalent to those of the Gedaria zone, which are at least two trilobite zones older than the beds containing II. minor. The occurrence of two such similar species in similar rocks at significantly different times suggests a strong environmental control on their spatial distribution. Occurrence. Moderately rare, upper part of Aphelaspis zone: McGill, Nev.; House Range, Utah. Family OLENIBAE Burmeister Genus ACICTJLOLENTTS n. gen. Type species.—Aciculolenus peculiaris n. sp. Description.—Small olenid (?) trilobites known only from cranidium. Glabella prominent, moderately to strongly convex transversely, gently to moderately convex longitudinally, tapered forward; sides slightly convex; anterior strongly rounded. Three pairs of deep subparallel glabellar furrows present on flanks of glabella. Occipital furrow deep at sides of glabella, displaced abruptly forward on axial line by large node or base of spine that occupies normal position of occipital furrow. Occipital ring narrow at sides, abruptly widened on axial lines. Frontal area short, concave, has upturned margin in front of glabella that is not clearly differentiated into brim and border; length of area about one-sixth or less than one-sixth length of glabella. Fixed cheeks moderately narrow, slightly downsloping; width about one-third basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes prominent, short, convex, slightly upturned, continuous with prominent eye ridges, situated opposite second pair of glabellar furrows; length about one-third or less than one-third length of glabella. Palpebral furrow deep, continuous with moderately deep furrow at back of eye ridge. Posterior limbs subquadrate in outline; transverse width less than basal glabellar width. Posterior margin straight, directed slightly forward from base of glabella to base of border spine at genal angle; distinct backward-sloping flange present behind crest of posterior border. Border distal to posterolateral spine directed forward to intersect posterior section of facial suture about opposite base of posterior glabellar furrow. Posterior border furrow curved forward distally. Course of anterior section of facial suture slightly convergent forward from palpebral lobe for short distance, then curved broadly and evenly inward to cut anterior margin about in front of line projected forward from base of anterior glabellar furrow. Course of posterior section concave towards glabella so that distal end just before cutting cranidial margin is at right angles to axial line.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 55 Surface of cranidium roughened by poorly defined low granular ornamentation. Discussion.—This trilobite has so many peculiar features that a meaningful comparison with known trilobites is difficult to make. The glabellar shape and structure of the frontal area are somewhat like those of Acerocare tullbergi (Moberg and Moller). (Refer to Henningsmoen, 1957, pi. 30, fig. 11.) These features plus the small prominent palpebral lobes and prominent eye ridges suggest affinities to the Olenidae, and A. peculiaris is tentatively assigned to that family. Aciculolenus peculiaris n. sp. Plate 7, figure 2 Diagnosis.—This is the only trilobite presently assigned to Aciculolenus, and its characteristics are those described under the genus. Discussion.-—The combination of proparian posterior limbs, concave posterior sections of the facial sutures, and a median node or spine in the normal position of the occipital furrow is unique among Late Cambrian trilobites and serves to distinguish this species from all known forms. Occurrence. Rare, uppermost part of Elvinia zone: Cherry Creek and Ruby Range, Nev. Genus SIMTJLOLENUS n. gen. Type species.—Parabolinella incerta Wilson (not Rasetti), 1954, p. 280, pi. 26, figs. 18-22 (equal Olenust wilsoni Henningsmoen, 1957, p. 112, text fig. 17). Diagnosis.—Members of the Oleninae in which cranidium has large well-defined glabella bearing three or four pairs of glabellar furrows. Occipital ring has distinct median node. Frontal area short, has well-defined brim and border. Fixed cheeks narrow. Palpebral lobes small, situated anterior to glabellar midlength. Course of anterior section of facial suture nearly straight forward from palpebral lobe. Free cheek has long slender genal spine. Inner spine angle slightly obtuse. Pygidium transverse subquadrate in outline. Length about one-third width. Axis prominent, subparallel sided, bluntly terminated, has one or two ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. One or two pleural furrows present, not crossing poorly defined border. Posterior margin smooth, has broad, shallow median indentation. Description.—Small- to medium-sized olenid trilobites (estimated maximum length about 30 mm). Cephalon subsemicircular, has slender genal spines directed nearly straight backward. Glabella low, broad, slightly tapered forward, bluntly rounded at front. Three or four pairs of glabellar furrows generally apparent ; posterior pair generally deep, narrow, makes distinct angle with axial furrow; second pair moderately deep, nearly at right angles to axial furrow; third pair shallow, short, not connected to axial furrow, distal end close to fourth pair that may form from axial furrow at back edge of moderately prominent eye ridge. Occiptal furrow narrow, has slight angulation about midway between axial furrow and top of glabella. Occipital ring broadest on median line, has distinct median node. Frontal area short; sagittal length one-third or less than one-third length of glabella. Border narrow, convex; sagittal length equal to or less than that of nearly flat slightly down-sloping brim. Fixed cheek narrow, nearly flat, horizontal; width about one-fourth or less than one-fourth basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes small, convex, semicircular, situated anterior to glabellar midlength; length between one-third and one-fourth length of glabella. Palpebral furrow straight or slightly curved. Posterior limbs tapered to sharp point laterally; transverse length less than basal glabellar width. Posterior border furrow narrow, nearly straight. Course of anterior section of facial suture straight forward or slightly divergent outward from palpebral lobes to border furrow, then turned inward across border gradually to cut anterior margin about in front of anterolateral corners of glabella. Ventral course not known. Middle body of hypostome undivided; contact between anterior and posterior lobes marked by shallow furrows only at sides. Lateral border well defined. No distinct posterior border. Muscle (?) areas on posterolateral parts of anterior lobe of middle body thickened. Transverse breadth of free cheek much less than length. Lateral border narrow, well defined by lateral border furrow that connects with posterior border furrow at genal angle and continues as shallow groove onto base of genal spine. Posterior border furrow continues forward to intersect posterior section of facial suture about midway between posterior margin and palpebral lobe. Inner spine angle slightly obtuse. Pygidium transversely subquadrate; lateral margins strongly curved; posterior margin smooth, has broad, shallow median indentation. Axis prominent, subparallel sided, bluntly terminated posteriorly, has one or two distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural regions not clearly differentiated into border and pleural platform, gently convex. One or two distally curved pleural furrows cross pleural platform but not border.56 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN External surfaces of brim and ocular platform have distinct veination. External surfaces of all parts either smooth or finely granular. Discussion.—The species here assigned to Simu-lolenus show their clear relationships to the Olenidae in their thin exoskeleton and the structure of the glabella, palpebral lobes, free cheeks, and hypostome. They each have a small transverse nonspinose pygid-ium containing only one or two ring furrows and are distinguished by this feature from all western European and eastern Canadian species of the family. The only other described olenid having such a small pygid-ium is Olenus ogilviei Opik from early Upper Cambrian beds in Queensland, Austria (Opik, 1963, p. 59-62). The Australian species differs from all the Simulolenus species, however, by having large palpebral lobes, wider fixed cheeks, and a distinct, narrow pygidial border. A species of Bienvillia, an olenid from younger beds in Nevada, also has a distinctive small transverse pygidium. Perhaps as more is learned of the olenid trilobites in regions bordering the Pacific ocean, an olenid stock may become apparent that can be distinguished from Atlantic forms by the possession of a small transverse pygidium. Simulolenus granulatus (Palmer) Plate 8, figures 9, 10 Olenus"! granulatus Palmer, 1960a, p. 79, pi. 6, figs. 23-27. Diagnosis.-—Sagittal length of frontal area about one-third length of glabefia. Sagittal length of border slightly more than one-half length of brim. Three pairs of furrows generally apparent on glabella. Line connecting midpoints of palpebral lobes passes through or slightly anterior to distal parts of second glabellar furrows. Width of fixed cheeks slightly more than one-fourth basal glabellar width. Pygidium has one distinct ring furrow posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural fields crossed diagonally by one distinct pleural furrow. External surfaces and surfaces of molds of known parts covered with low fine granules. Discussion.—This species is most like S. wilsoni (Henningsmoen); it differs principally in its ornamentation and the more distinct ring furrow on the axis of the pygidium. The species have been found together in several collections. Both differ from S. quadrisulcatus n. sp. by lacking distinct formation of the fourth pair of glabellar furrows, by having one less axial and pleural furrow on the pygidium, and by having a slightly broader fixed cheek, slightly longer frontal area, and slightly more anteriorly placed palpebral lobes. Occurrence. Rare, middle part of Dunderbergia zone: Eureka and Tybo, Nev. Simulolenus wilsoni (Henningsmoen) Plate 8, figures 5-8, 11, 12 Parabolinella incerta (Rasetti). Wilson, 1954, p. 280, pi. 26, figs. 18-22. Olenus"! wilsoni Henningsmoen, 1957, p. Ill, text fig. 117; Palmer, 1960a, pi. 6, figs. 18, 20-22, text fig. 15. Diagnosis.—Sagittal length of frontal area about one-third or slightly more than one-third of length of glabella. Sagittal length of border slightly greater than one-half length of brim on cranidia that are less than 2 mm long; slightly less than one-half length of brim on cranidia that are 5 mm long. Line connecting midpoints of palpebral lobes passes slightly anterior to distal ends of second glabellar furrows. Width of fixed cheek slightly less than one-third basal glabellar width. Three pairs of furrows generally apparent on glabella. Pygidium has one poorly formed ring furrow posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural fields crossed diagonally by one pleural furrow. External surfaces and surfaces of molds of all parts smooth. Discussion.—This species differs from both S. granulatus (Palmer) and S. quadrisulcatus n. sp. by having a smooth rather than granular external surface. It further differs from S. quadrisulcatus by having broader fixed cheeks, a longer frontal area, slightly more anteriorly placed palpebral lobes, and one less axial and pleural furrow on the pygidium and by lacking a distinctly formed fourth pair of glabellar furrows. The species shows some variability in the definition of glabellar furrows and of eye ridges. This variability is in part a function of size. The glabellar furrows and eye ridges are most prominent on smaller cranidia. (Compare pi. 8, figs. 6, 7.) Occurrence. Moderately rare, middle part of Dunderber-gia zone: Eureka, Tybo, Ruby Range, and Yucca Flat, Nev. Simulolenus quadrisulcatus n. sp. Plate 8, figures 1-4 Diagnosis.—Glabella generally has four distinct pairs of glabellar furrows. Frontal area short; sagittal length about one-fourth glabellar length. Border narrow, convex; sagittal length equal to or slightly less than that of brim. Fixed cheeks narrow; width slightly more than one-fifth basal glabellar width. Line through midpoints of palpebral lobes passes across second glabellar furrows.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 57 Pygidium has two distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural fields crossed by two pairs of pleural furrows. External surfaces of all parts covered with minute closely spaced granules apparent only if lightly coated with magnesium oxide and placed under low oblique lighting. Surface of mold smooth. Discussion.—This species differs from the others assigned to the genus by its narrower fixed cheeks, shorter frontal area, slightly more posteriorly placed palpebral lobes, and generally distinct fourth pair of glabellar furrows. Its pygidium has two distinct ring and pleural furrows rather than one, as in the other species. The granular ornamentation is much finer than that of 8. granulatus (Palmer). A small olenid cranidium from USGS collection 2524-CO at Cherry Creek (pi. 8, fig. 3) has a granular surface, short frontal area, and four pairs of glabellar furrows suggestive of 8. quadrisulcatus; however, the fixed cheeks are somewhat wider than those of a comparable-sized cranidium in the type lot from the Eureka district, and it may represent a different olenid species. Occurrence. Moderately rare, uppermost part of Elvinia zone: Eureka, McGill, Ruby Range, and Cherry Creek(?), Nev. Family PTEROCEPHALIIDAE Kobayashi Diagnosis.—Subisopygous opisthoparian ptycho-parioid trilobites having a cephalon that is generally gently to moderately convex transversely and longitudinally. Glabella tapered forward, generally well defined at sides and anterolateral corners, less well defined across front; glabellar furrows generally poorly defined; if distinct, glabellar furrows generally broad or rarely, deep and narrow. Axial furrows have tendency to develop fossulae at anterolateral comers of glabella. Occipital furrow generally present. Occipital ring of most species has median node; median occipital spine rare. Frontal area generally divided into distinct brim and border. Sagittal length of border generally greater than distance from dorsal surface of border to ventral surface of doublure. Fixed cheeks narrow, flat or slightly convex; width one-half or less than one-half basal glabellar width; position generally horizontal or slightly upsloping. Posterior limbs sharp pointed. Posterior border furrow nearly straight. Course of anterior section of facial suture straight forward or slightly divergent from front of palpebral lobe to border, then curved inward to cut anterior margin more than one-half distance from anterolateral corners of cranidium to axial line. Rostral suture, where present, barely submarginal. Connective sutures convex towards axial line, joined to form median suture only in later members of family. Posterior section of facial suture invariably divergent sinuous, cuts posterior margin of cephalon adaxial to base of genal spine. Hypostome has poorly differentiated median body and posterior lobe. Lateral border generally well defined, narrow. Posterior border poorly defined or absent; if present, narrow. Rostral plate, where present, subtrapezoidal to sub-triangular, has concave sides. Border of free cheek generally well defined. Genal spine present, lateral margin of spine continuous with margin of main part of cheek. Eye surface on all known specimens separated from ocular platform by infraocular ring. Thorax of 12 to 13 segments. Axis moderately to strongly convex transversely, generally prominent. Pygidium has prominent posteriorly tapered axis that is moderately to strongly convex transversely and raised above pleural regions. Width of axis generally less than width of pleural region. Border generally poorly defined, on most species narrowed behind axis. Pleural field has pleural furrows, where present, broader and deeper than inter-pleural furrows. External ornamentation generally subdued. Most species smooth or finely pitted. Granular ornamentation rare. Discussion.—This is the dominant family in the Pterocephaliid biomere and includes about 40 percent of the described ptychoparioid species of the fauna. As stratigraphic and paleontologic study of these trilobites progressed and more was learned about the fossils from the interval between the Aphelaspis and Dunderbergia zones, it became apparent that the trilobites of the family Housiidae (Palmer, 1960a, p. 74) were intimately related through the early species of Prehousia to the Aphelaspidinae and thus that this taxon was more appropriately a subfamily within the Pterocephaliidae. The Pterocephaliidae in the Great Basin is therefore composed of three subfamilies: the Aphelaspidinae, having 15 species representing 4 genera; the Housiinae, having 10 species representing 3 genera; and the Pterocephaliinae, having 17 species representing 4 genera. In addition, several species described in the section on “Unassigned trilobites” (p. 77) probably belong to the Pterocephaliidae. These include Tumicephalus depressus n. sp., n. gen., which has characteristics of both the Aphelaspidinae and Housiinae; Listroa tox-oura Palmer, which has characteristics of the Aphelaspidinae and Pterocephaliinae; and Taenora expansa Palmer, which has some characteristics of the Aphela- 735-610 0-65-658 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN spidinae. Both L. toxoura and T. expansa were included in the Aphelaspidinae in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1962b, p. 31). There is some doubt, however, about the appropriateness of assigning any of these species to named subfamilies, and they are here considered as supragenerically unplaced genera. The genus Morosa has some characteristics of the Hou-siinae and Aphelaspidinae and may also belong in the Pterocephaliidae. Other unplaced genera having some possible affinities with the family are Anechocephalus and Stenambon. Nearly all the species having possible relationships to the Pterocephaliidae are rare elements in the fauna, and more knowledge of them and their relationships to other forms will be needed to place them confidently in suprageneric taxa. Subfamily APHELASPIDINAE Palmer Diagnosis.—Pterocephaliidae having generally distinct and convex border on cephalon or less commonly, flat or slightly concave border. Palpebral lobes generally located about opposite glabellar midlength. Border of pygidium generally subequal in width to greatest width of pleural platform. Genus AFHELASPIS Resser Aphelaspis Resser, 1935, p. 11; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, p. 619; Palmer, 1954, p. 743; 1962b, p. 32; Ivshin, 1956, p. 31; Lochman, 1959, p. 256. Proaulacopleura Kobayashi, 1936, p. 93; Howell, 1959, p. 269. Clevelandella Resser, 1938a, p. 68. Labiostria Palmer, 1954, p. 750; Lochman, 1959, p. 258. Type species—Aphelaspis walcotti Resser, 1938a, p. 59, pi. 13, fig. 14. (See Palmer, 1953, p. 157, for discussion.) Diagnosis.—Aphelaspidinae having border furrow on cranidium either present or absent. Glabella generally lacks well-defined glabellar furrows. If present, lateral and posterior border furrows on free cheek, join at genal angle and generally extend short distance onto base of genal spine. Thorax has 13 segments. Pygidium generally transversely subovate, rarely subquadrate. Axis has one to five ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural regions have pleural furrows barely apparent on most specimens. Border poorly defined, narrowest at axial line, broadening laterally. Posterior margin is evenly curved, has very slight median inbend, or is slightly angular at posterolateral corners. Discussion.—The statements in the description of Aphelaspis (Palmer, 1962b, p. 32) about the thorax— “pleural tips of each segment short, sharp,”—and the pygidium—“pygidium transversely subovate”—must be amended to read, “Pleural tips of each segment short and sharp or long, slender, and backswept,” and, “Pygidium generally transversely subovate, rarely sub quadrate^ as a result of the discovery of A. longi-spina n. sp. Five species of Aphelaspis are now recognized in the central Great Basin faunas. Prehousia is the only pterocephaliid genus that is difficult to distinguish from Aphelaspis if all parts are known. This difficulty is due partly to the strong probability that Prehousia is a direct descendant of one of the species of Aphelaspis, probably A. subditus Palmer. Species of Prehousia generally have smaller more anteriorly placed palpebral lobes, a narrower fixed cheek, and a pygidial border of more even width than those of species of Aphelaspis. The cranidial differences are indicated most clearly on a triangular diagram (fig. 12) relating length of palpebral lobe and width of fixed cheek to length of glabella. In the present area of study, beds containing Aphelaspis are separated from younger beds containing Prehousia by the beds of the Dicanthopyge zone. If species the Aphelaspis-Prehousia lineage are ever found in the Dicanthopyge zone, assignment of the species to either Aphelaspis or Prehousia may have to be arbitrary. Aphelaspis brachyphasis Palmer Plate 8, figures 13, 17-21 Aphelaspis brachyphasis Palmer, 1962b, p. 33, pi. 4, figs. 1-19. Diagnosis.—Length of frontal area of cranidium about six-tenths length of glabella exclusive of occipital ring. Border slightly downsloping and flat or very gently convex; sagittal length variable, generally between one-half and three-fourths sagittal length of brim. Border furrow barely apparent. Palpebral lobe barely defined by palpebral furrow. Free cheek has broad-based genal spine tapered abruptly to sharp point. Pygidium transversely subovate in outline and has sharply rounded lateral margins and slight median indentation behind axis. Axis well defined, has one or two distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. A much shallower additional ring furrow apparent on some specimens. Border poorly defined, variable in width from one-third to one-sixth that of pleural region. Discussion.—The short, broad-based genal spines generally short frontal area, poorly defined palpebral lobes, and small number of ring furrows on the axis of the pygidium are the most distinctive features of this species. The variation observed in A. brachyphasis (Palmer, 1962b, p. 33) seems to polarize into characteristics of two separate species, A. subditus PalmerSYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 59 and A. haguei. (Hall and Whitfield), which are often associated in the upper part of the Aphelaspis zone. Specimens identified as A. haguei. have been collected from near the top of the lower part of the Aphelaspis zone (pi. 9, figs. 21-23); this evidence indicates that A. haguei possibly represents an earlier “split” from A. brachyphasis than does A. subditus. Occurrence. Common, lower part of Aphelaspis zone: McGill and Hot Springs Range, Nev. Aphelaspis buttsi (Kobayashi) Plate 8, figures 14-16 Olenus cf. 0. truncatus Butts, 1926, p. 77, pi. 9, figs. 6, 7. Proaulacopleura buttsi Kobayashi, 1936, p. 93, pi. 15, fig. 6; Resser 1938a, p. 95, pi. 16, fig. 18. Aphelaspis buttsi (Kobayashi). Palmer, 1962b, p. 35, pi. 4, ngs. 23, 26, 31, 32. Diagnosis.—Cephalon has long slender genal spines reaching nearly to posterior end of thorax on largest specimens; length of spines from point where posterior section of facial suture cuts cephalic margin to tip of genal spine twice or more than twice length of posterior section of facial suture. Eye ridges directed laterally at right angle to axial line. Posterior pair of lateral glabellar furrows moderately well defined, straight, inclined posteriorly. Border furrow evenly curved. Lateral and posterior border furrows of free cheek barely extend onto genal spine. Thorax has 13 segments; each segment has short, sharp posterolaterally directed pleural spines. Length of pygidium slightly less than one-half width. Three ring furrows present on axis posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural fields have three or four shallow pleural furrows and shallow pleural grooves between first, second, and sometimes third pleural segments. Furrows and grooves do not extend onto border. Border narrow; breadth one-sixth or less than one-sixth breadth of pleural region. Discussion.—The long genal spines, well-defined narrow cranidial border, and moderately well defined eye ridges at nearly right angles to the axial line are the principal distinguishing characteristics of this species. A. buttsi resembles specimens assigned to Olenaspella in most features but lacks the distinctive pygidial border spines characteristic of Olenaspella. It occurs stratigraphically beneath the lowest known Olenaspella-be&rmg beds in Nevada and perhaps represents a divergence towards Olenaspella from the main Aphelaspis stock. Occurrence. Rare, lowest part of Aphelaspis zone: McGill, Nev. Aphelaspis haguei (Hall and Whitfield) Plate 9, figures 19-26 Crepicephalus (Loganellus) haguei Hall and Whitfield, 1877, p. 210, pi. 2, figs. 14, 15. Ptychoparia haguei (Hall and Whitfield) Walcott, 1884, pi. 6, fig. 6. Elrathia haguei (Hall and Whitfield) Resser, 1935, p. 28. Diagnosis.—Cranidium having glabella well defined by axial furrows; preglabellar furrow and prominent fossulae generally best defined in members of younger populations. Frontal area has well-defined brim and border; brim moderately to strongly convex sagittally, makes distinct angle with border; border flat or slightly convex; sagittal length slightly less than length of brim. Fixed cheeks slightly upsloping; palpebral lobes moderately defined by shallow palpebral furrow. Free cheek has moderately broad border and slender genal spine extending posteriorly to about fifth thoracic segment. Lateral border furrow moderately to poorly formed. Thorax composed of 12 or 13 segments. Pleural tips short, sharp, directed posterolaterally. Pygidium has well-defined axis bearing two or three ring furrows behind articulating furrow. Pleural fields moderately convex and have one or two moderately well-defined pleural furrows. Border separated from pleural field principally by change in slope; border narrow behind axis, abruptly expanded laterally, flat or slightly concave, downsloping. External surfaces of cranidium and free cheek, except for furrows and genal spines, generally have distinct shallow pits visible after whitening. External surfaces of pygidium and tips of genal spines have fine granular ornamentation apparent only after whitening. Surfaces of molds of all parts pitted. Discussion.—This species is distinguished from the associated species of Aphelaspis, A. brachyphasis Palmer, or from A. subditus Palmer on the basis of the cranidial and pygidial features given above. Populations at opposite ends of the range of this species can generally be distinguished by minor features. Members of the geologically older populations have cranidia that lack well-defined fossulae and have pygidia on which the borders are more distinctly concave, the pleural furrows are better defined, the outline is generally less transverse, and the axis is relatively longer than on members of the younger populations. A single collection from the Highland Range, Nev. (USGS colln. 2318-CO) contains many parts of a single species that is morphologically intermediate between A. haguei and A. longispina (pi. 9, figs. 12, 14, 18). All parts except the thoracic segments are like60 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN those of members of younger populations of A. haguei, but the fragments of thoracic segments in the collection indicate the presence of long pleural tips such as those characteristic of A. longispina. This sample is here tentatively assigned to A. haguei as the terminal member of a gradually changing infraspecific complex. The holotype of A. haguei is in a collection from the west side of Pogonip Ridge, Mount Hamilton, Nev., associated with Olenaspella regularis Palmer and Aphelaspis subditus Palmer. Its assignment to the Middle Cambrian genus Elrathia by Resser reflects the similarity of Aphelaspis to Middle Cambrian forms. However, the bluntly rounded glabella of A. haguei that has generally distinct fossulae in the axial furrows is typically that of a Pterocephaliid trilobite and unlike that of Middle Cambrian ptychoparioids. Occurrence. Moderately rare, lower part of Aphelaspis zone: McGill, Nev. Moderately common, upper part of Aphelaspis zone: McGill, Snake Range, Highland Range, Tybo, Osgood Mountains, and Hot Springs Range, Nev.; House Range, Utah. Aphelaspis subditus Palmer Plate 8, figures 22-26 Aphelaspis subditus Palmer, 1962b, p. 35, pi. 4, figs. 20-22, 25. Diagnosis.—Cranidium having lateral glabellar furrows lacking on outer surface of exoskeleton. Palpebral lobes moderately well defined by shallow palpebral furrows. Border furrow present, evenly curved. Length of border between one-half and three-fourths sagittal length of brim. Lateral and posterior border furrows on free cheek generally well defined, joined at genal angle, very slightly extended onto genal spine. Genal spine slender, reaching to about fifth thoracic segment. Thorax has 12 segments. Pleural tips curved slightly, pointed, directed posterolaterally. Pygidium has two or three ring furrows on axis posterior to articulating furrow. Border barely defined, narrow, horizontal or slightly downsloping; breadth of border one-fourth to one-fifth that of pleural region. Pleural fields either have or lack distinct pleural furrows. Posterior margin has slight median indentation. Discussion.—This species is characterized particularly by the well-defined border furrow on the cranidium and by the generally unfurrowed glabella. It is associated at many localities with A. haguei, from which it differs by having a less convex brim, a narrower border, a better defined border furrow on the cranidium, a generally less concave border, and less well defined pleural furrows on the pygidium. Furthermore, the external surface of A. subditus is generally smooth whereas that of A. haguei is generally pitted. Both A. haguei and A. subditus seem to have been derived from A. brachyphasis by polarization of the infraspecific variation observed in that species (p. 15). As a result of this close evolutionary relationship between the species, some samples are found in which the parts assignable to the two species are distinguished with difficulty. Generally, however, the foregoing features can be used satisfactorily to identify specimens belonging to either species. Occurrence. Common, upper part of Aphelaspis zone: Cherry Creek, McGill, Tybo, Mount Hamilton, Highland Range, Pioche, Hot Springs Range, and Yucca Flat. Nev. Aphelaspis longispina n. sp. Plate 9, figures 13, 15-17 Diagnosis.—Cranidium has generally unfurrowed glabella, well defined by axial and preglabellar furrows. Frontal area divided into distinct brim and border by shallow border furrow. Brim flat, downsloping; sagittal length slightly greater than that of border. Border gently convex in sagittal profile. Fixed cheeks slightly upsloping; palpebral lobes moderately well defined by shallow arcuate palpebral furrows. Free cheek has well-defined border. Shallow lateral border furrow and somewhat deeper posterior border furrow joined at genal angle and extended onto slender genal spine. Thoracic segments have long backswept pleural tips. Pygidium subquadrate. Axis prominent, defined only at sides, merged posteriorly with border, has two ring furrows behind articulating furrow; length between one-half and three-fourths that of pygidium. Pleural region has greatest breadth of border about equal to greatest breadth of pleural field. Pleural field flat or slightly convex, has two or three shallow pleural furrows extending to inner edge of border. Border flat, downsloping, broadest posterolaterally, tapered towards axial line and anteriorly. Posterior margin has slight median inbend. External surface of cranidium—all but genal spine of free cheek and axial parts of thoracic segments and pygidium finely pitted. External surfaces of genal spines, tips of thoracic segments, and pleural regions of pygidium either roughened or very finely granular. Discussion.—This species has been recognized in two collections from McGill, Nev. It appears to be on the direct line of evolution from Aphelaspis to Dicantho-pyge and intermediate both morphologically and stratigraphically between Aphelaspis haguei (Hall andSYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 61 Whitfield) and Dicanthopyge quadrata n. sp. The most distinguishing characteristic of A. longispina is the presence of long backswept pleural tips on the thoracic segments; supplementary characteristics are a relatively short axis, a relatively broad border, and a subquadrate shape for the pygidium. Occurrence. Bare, uppermost part of Aphelaspis zone: McGill, Nev. Genus DICANTHOPYGE n. gen. Type species.—Dicanthopyge quadrata n. sp. Diagnosis.—Aphelaspidinae in which cranidium has glabella obscurely furrowed, moderately well defined by axial and preglabellar furrows. Frontal area divided into distinct brim and border by narrow border furrow. Brim downsloping, flat; sagittal length slightly greater than that of border. Border gently to moderately convex, broadest on axial line. Fixed cheeks slightly upsloping; palpebral lobes moderately well defined by shallow arcuate palpebral furrows. Posterior limb long, slender, sharp pointed. Free cheek has well-defined lateral and posterior border furrows of about equal depth, joined at genal angle and extended onto base of long slender genal spine. Thorax composed of 13 segments; pleural tips increase in length and posterior deflection from front to back of thorax. Pygidium has short prominent axis well defined at sides that has two or three ring furrows behind articulating furrow. Pleural regions nearly flat, have two or three shallow strongly curved pleural furrows. Border not differentiated from pleural field. Posterior margin has one pair of posterolateral marginal spines. Margin between spines curved forward. Description.—Aphelaspidinae, estimated maximum length about 45 mm, having cranidium subquadrate, gently to moderately convex longitudinally, gently convex transversely. Glabella obscurely furrowed, well defined by shallow narrow axial and preglabellar furrows, straight sided, bluntly rounded at front. Occipital furrow shallow. Occipital ring gently convex, has low median node. Frontal area divided into distinct brim and border by narrow border furrow; length between one-half and two-thirds that of glabella. Brim flat, downsloping; sagittal length slightly greater than length of border. Border gently to moderately convex, slightly tapered towards anterolateral comers of cranidium. Fixed cheeks flat, slightly upsloping; width, exclusive of palpebral lobes, slightly more than one-third basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes prominent, moderately well defined by shallow arcuate palpebral furrow; length less than one-half length of glabella. Posterior limbs long, slender, tapered to sharp point; posterior border furrow broad, moderately deep. Free cheek has well-defined border, narrower than ocular platform. Lateral and posterior border furrows of comparable depth, joined at genal angle and extended onto base of long slender genal spine. Course of anterior section of facial suture slightly divergent forward from palpebral lobe to border, then curved abruptly inward and continued diagonally across border to cut anterior margin just before axial line. Ventral course nearly straight backward across doublure. Course of posterior section of facial suture divergent, sinuous. Rostral plate not known, but truncated tip of doublure of free cheek indicates plate to be probably subquadrate, longer sagittally than wide. Thorax composed of 13 segments. Anterior segments have short sharp laterally directed pleural tips. Pleural tips on more posterior segments increase in length and become progressively more posteriorly directed. Pygidium subquadrate to sub’trapezoidal in outline; all specimens have single pair of broad-based, short posterolateral marginal spines. Axis prominent, short, generally bears two distinct ring furrows behind articulating furrow; length between one-half and three-fourths that of pygidium. Low broad poorly defined median ridge extends posteriorly from end of axis onto border. Pleural regions flat, slightly convex or slightly concave. Pleural fields not clearly differentiated from border, crossed by one or two shallow strongly curved pleural furrows that extend onto but not across border. External surfaces of exoskeleton of cranidium, axial parts of thorax and pygidium, and free cheek except for genal spine have distinct fine pits. Pleural regions of pygidium, genal spines, and tips of thoracic segments either pitted, roughened, or covered with fine granules. Surfaces of molds of all parts pitted. Discussion.—This genus differs from Olenaspella and Nericia, the only other Pterocephaliid trilobites having spinose pygidial margins and similar cephala, by having a pygidial axis that is short and has few segments, a border that is broader than the pleural field, and marginal spines that are not clearly associated with individual pleural segments. The cranidium differs from that of Olenaspella by having a broader less convex border and a slightly more tapered glabella and by lacking distinct glabellar furrows. The free cheeks differ from those of Olenaspella by having a truncate rather than tapered anterior tip to the doublure.62 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Three species are recognized here on the basis of consistent features of pygidial shape and ornamentation. These species seem to be in direct evolutionary sequence beginning with Dicanthopyge quadrata n. sp., which has a subparallel-sided pygidium and distinct marginal spines; followed by D. convergens n. sp., which has distinctly convergent pygidial sides and moderately long marginal spines; and ending with D. reductus, which has strongly convergent pygidial sides and short marginal spines. D. quadrata seems to have been derived from the immediately older species, Aphelaspis longispina n. sp., from which it differs principally by having marginal spines on the pygidium. Dicanthopyge convergens n. sp. Plate 9, figures 1, 4, 6 Diagnosis.—Pygidium has sides convergent posteriorly to outer edges of broad-based moderately long posterior marginal spines. Width of axis about equal to that of pleural regions in older populations, distinctly greater in younger populations. Surfaces of all parts of exoskeleton have shallow closely spaced pits. Discussion.—This species is intermediate in form and stratigraphic position between D. quadrata n. sp. and D. reductus n. sp. Its pygidium has a greater posterior taper and generally wider axis than does that of D. quadrata and longer less closely spaced posterior marginal spines than does that of D. reductus. D. convergens differs from both species by having pitted rather than granular or roughened surfaces on the genal spines and on the pleural regions of the pygidium. Occurrence. Moderately rare, middle part of Dicanthopyge zone: McGill, Shingle Pass, Ruby Range, Cherry Creek, Yucca Flat, Spring Mountains, and Muddy Mountains, Nev.; Deep Creek and House Ranges, Utah. Dicanthopyge quadrata n. sp. Plate 9, figures 2, 3, 5, 7-11 Aphelaspidinae, gen. and sp. undet., Palmer, 1962b, p. 40, pi. 5, figs. 22, 27, 29. Diagnosis.—Pygidium subquadrate; sides subparallel; posterolateral marginal spines broad-based, moderately long. Width of axis about equal to or only slightly greater than width of pleural regions. External surfaces of pleural regions of pygidium, genal spines, and tips of thoracic segments generally covered with fine granules; some pygidia have fine pitted ornamentation. Discussion.—This species is the oldest representative of Dicanthopyge. It seems to be a direct descendant of Aphelaspis longispinus n. sp., from which it differs principally by having posterolateral marginal spines on the pygidium. The subquadrate pygidial shape distinguishes D. quadrata from the younger species D. convergens n. sp. and D. reductus n. sp. Occurrence. Moderately rare, lower part of Dicanthopyge zone: McGill, Cherry Creek, Schell Creek Range, Ruby Range, Highland Range, Mount Hamilton, Tybo, Spring Mountains, and Snake Range, Nev.; Deep Creek Range, House Range, and Fish Springs Range, Utah. Dicanthopyge reductus n. sp. Plate 10, figures 19, 20 Diagnosis.—Pygidium subtriangular; sides convergent posteriorly to outer edges of short closely spaced posterior marginal spines. Width of axis greater than width of pleural regions. Surfaces of pleural regions of pygidium, genal spines, and, probably, tips of thoracic segments roughened. Discussion.—This species is the youngest presently recognized in Dicanthopyge and represents the culmination of the posterior taper of the pygidial sides begun in Dicanthopyge convergens n. sp. It differs from D. convergens principally in the reduced size of the posterior marginal spines and the roughened rather than pitted surfaces of the pleural regions of the pygidium and genal spines. Occurrence. Moderately rare, upper part of Dicanthopyge zone: McGill and Snake Range, Nev.; House Range, Utah. Genus LITOCEPHALUS Resser Litocephalus Resser, 1937, p. 17; Palmer, 1956, p. 608; 1960a, p. 81. Pterocephalina Resser, 1938b, p. 42. Type species.—Dicellocephalus richmondensis Walcott, 1884, p. 41, pi. 10, fig. 7 (—Dikellocephalm bilobatus Hall and Whitfield, 1877, p. 226, pi. 2, fig. 36). Diagnosis.—Aphelaspidinae in which the cephalon has border well defined by deep border furrow. Thorax has pleural spines of most segments long, slender, backwardly directed. Border of pygidium concave; posterior margin has deep median notch reaching nearly to posterior end of axis. Discussion.—Litocephalus can be easily identified by its distinctive notched pygidium. Species are characterized primarily by details of external ornamentation on both the cranidium and the pygidium. This is a rare genus known principally from the more western Upper Cambrian sections. A full description based primarily on specimens from the Eureka district hasSYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 63 been given in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a). The additional specimens discovered from other areas have provided no new information. A single new species, L. rnagnus n. sp., has been identified from the Elvinia zone of the Tybo district, increasing the known range of the genus upward from the Dunderbergia zone. Litocephalus bilobatus (Hall and Whitfield) Plate 11, figures 13-15 Dikellocephalus bilobatus Hall and Whitfield, 1877, p. 226, pi. 2, fig. 36. Dicellocephalus richmondensis Walcott, 1884, p. 41, pi. 10, fig. 7. Litocephalus richmondensis (Walcott). Resser, 1937, p. 17. Pterocephalina bilobata (Hall and Whitfield). Resser, 1942b, p. 77, pi. 14, figs. 39-43. Litocephalus bilobatus (Hall and Whitfield). Palmer, 1956, p. 608-610, pi. 73, figs. 1-6, 8; 1960a, p. 82, pi. 7, figs. 24-27. Diagnosis.—Cranidium and free cheek have smooth external surface of border. Sagittal length of border about three-fourths length of brim. Facial sutures cut anterior margin between point directly in front of anterolateral corners of glabella and axial line. Surface of axial rings on pygidium smooth. Discussion.—This species is distinguished from the other species of the genus by having a smooth external surface on the cranidium. It is further distinguished from L. verruculapeza Palmer by lacking paired granules on each axial ring of the pygidium. Occurrence. Common, Dunderbergia zone: Eureka, Nev. Litocephalus granulomarginatus Palmer Plate 10, figures 13, 14, 17, 18 Litocephalus granulomarginatus Palmer, 1960a, p. 82, pi. 8, figs. 14, 17, 18, 24. Diagnosis.—Cranidium and free cheek have granular external surface of border. Sagittal length of border about three-fourths length of brim. Facial sutures cut anterior margin between point directly in front of anterolateral corners of glabella and axial line. Surface of axial rings of pygidium smooth. Discussion.—This species is intermediate in ornamentation and stratigraphic position between L. bilobatus, which has a smooth cranidium, and L. rnagnus n. sp., which has a completely granular surface. It differs from L. verruculapeza Palmer by having smaller and more evenly distributed granules on the cranidial border and by lacking paired granules on the axial rings of the pygidium. Occurrence. Rare, Dunderbergia zone: Eureka and Tybo, Nev. Litocephalus rnagnus n. sp. Plate 10, figures 12, 15, 16 Diagnosis.—External surface of cranidium and top of axis of pygidium have many low poorly defined granules. Length of palpebral lobes slightly greater than one-half length of glabella. Outline of pygidium subovate; length slightly more than two-thirds width. Axis has five or six ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural fields crossed five or six shallow posteriorly curved pleural furrows that extend onto broad slightly concave border. Posterior median notch long, narrow. Discussion.—This species most nearly resembles L. granulomarginatus Palmer in the general form of the cranidium and number of axial and pleural furrows on the pygidium. It differs by having granular ornamentation on parts of the cranidium other than the border and also on the top of the axis of the pygidium. Furthermore, the palpebral lobes of L. rnagnus are relatively larger, the pygidial border is much broader, and the median notch longer and narrower than those of L. granulomarginatus. Occurrence. Moderately common, lower Elvinia zone: Tybo, Nev. Litocephalus verruculapeza Palmer Plate 11, figures 7-9 Litocephalus verruculapeza Palmer, 1960a, p. 83, pi. 8, figs. 12, 13, 15, 16, 19, 20. Diagnosis.—Cranidium and free cheek have external surface of border smooth. Sagittal length of border about three-fourths that of brim. Facial sutures cut anterior margin between point directly in front of anterolateral corners of glabella and axial line. Surface of axial rings on pygidium smooth. Discussion.—This species seems to be slightly divergent from the main evolutionary line of Litocephalus; it differs from the other species by having smaller palpebral lobes, scattered coarse granules on the cranidial border, and pairs of coarse granules on the axial rings of the pygidium. Occurrence. Rare, Dunderbergia zone: Eureka and Cherry Creek, Nev. Genus 0LENASPELLA Wilson Olenaspella Wilson, 1956, p. 1344; Palmer, 1962b, p. 36. Type species.—Parabolinella? evansi Kobayashi, 1936, p. 92, pi. 15, figs. 7,8,10.64 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Diagnosis—Aphelaspidinae in which border of cephalon well defined by narrow border furrow. Free cheek has lateral and posterior marginal furrows joined at genal angle, extended slightly onto base of genal spine. Pygidium transversely subovate to sub-semicircular. Axis prominent, generally has two or more ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural fields flat or gently convex transversely, have three or four broad, shallow pleural furrows. Interpleural furrows may be present between first, second, and third pleural segments. Border narrow, poorly defined; margin has one to three pairs of slender posteriorly directed spines. First pygidial segment always extended laterally as border spine. Discussion.—This genus has been fully described in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1962b, p. 36). The only modification of the generic description required by the new species 0. paucisegmenta is a reduction to two for the minimum number of ring furrows on the axis of the pygidium. The well-defined straight posterior glabellar furrows on the cranidium and the narrow pygidial border having one to three pairs of border spines are the most distinctive features of species of this genus. The only other American aphelaspinid having pygidial spines is Dicanthopyge, which differs consistently from Olenaspella by lacking distinct glabellar furrows and by having generally fewer ring furrows on the pygidium, a broader pygidial axis, and no clear segmental source for the border spines. Crepicephalus 'borealis Lermontova (1940) is a Siberian trilobite that represents an unnamed genus closely related to both Olenaspella and Eugonocare. Complete specimens in the collections of Dr. N. V. Pokrovskaya of the Geological Institute, Academy of Sciences, Moscow, show that the Olenaspella-Wke cranidium illustrated by Lermontova is correctly associated with a Crepicephalus-Yike pygidium. The cra-nidial structure of G. borealis demonstrates its aphelaspinid rather than crepicephalid affinities. It differs from Olenaspella by having the pygidial border more expanded posterolaterally and by bearing broad-based rather than slender border spines. The presence of border spines on the pygidium distinguishes the genus from Eugonocare. Olenaspella paucisegmenta n. sp. Plate 10, figures 1-3 Diagnosis.—Pygidium has two well-defined ring furrows on axis posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural regions have two or three shallow pleural furrows curved abruptly backward near inner edge of moderately to poorly defined narrow border and extended onto border. Shallow interpleural furrows apparent between first and second pleural segments near outer edge of pleural field. Margin has two pairs of spines; outer pair longest; each pair connected to posterior band of first and second pleural segment by low narrow ridge. Discussion.—This species is closely related to 0. regularis Palmer. It differs principally by having two rather than three or four ring furrows on the axis of the pygidium posterior to the articulating furrow. 0. evansi (Kobayashi) has a similar short axis but bears three pairs of evenly spaced marginal spines. The pygidial spines in this species show some variation in direction. Typical forms have the sides of the outer pair of spines subparallel to the axial line. Others (pi. 10, fig. 3) have both pairs of spines slightly convergent towards the axis. A similar kind of variation is present in the older species 0. regularis. Occurrence. Moderately rare, Prehousia zone: Ruby Range and Tybo, Nev. Rare, Dicanthopyge zone: Yucca Flat. Nev. Olenaspella regularis Palmer Plate 10, figures 4-6 Parabolinella evansi Wilson, 1954 [not Kobayashi, 1936, 1938], p. 281, pi. 25, figs. 10, 15-17. Olenaspella regularis Palmer, 1962b, p. 38, pi. 5, figs. 1-3. Diagnosis.-—Pygidium has three or four ring furrows behind articulating furrow on axis. Pleural regions have two or three shallow pleural furrows that curve abruptly backward near inner edge of poorly defined narrow border and extend onto border. Shallow interpleural grooves apparent between first and second pleural segments near outer edge of pleural field. Margin has two or three pairs of spines. Most specimens have two pairs of spines, outer pair longest; each pair connected to posterior band of adjacent pleural segment by low narrow ridge. Third pair of spines, if present, short, adjacent to inner edge of second pair of spines. Discussion.—Variation in this species is mostly apparent in the pygidial spines. Besides the presence of a third pair of spines adjacent to tjie inner spines on a few specimens, the outer pair of spines may be directed either straight backward or distinctly inward. (Compare pi. 10, figs. 5, 6.) Occurrence. Moderately common, upper part of Aphelaspis zone: McGill, Cherry Creek, Hot Springs Range, and Mount Hamilton, Nev.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 65 Olenaspella separata Palmer Plate 10, figures 7-11 Olenaspella separata Palmer, 1962b, p. 39, pi. 5, figs. 6, 8-21, 23-26, 28, 30-32. Diagnosis—-Length of pygidium about one-half width. Axis generally has four to five ring furrows behind articulating furrow. Pleural regions crossed by three or four shallow pleural furrows; narrow interpleural furrow present between first and second segments on some specimens. Border poorly defined. Posterior margin has one to three pairs of spines: one pair of long, slender spines formed from first pleural segment on all specimens; second pair short, formed either from second pleural segment or from border between first and second pleural segments on all specimens; third pair, if present, slightly longer than second pair, formed from second pleural segment on all specimens. Second and third pairs of spines are nearer to first pair of spines than to axial line on all specimens. Occurrence. Moderately common, lower part of Aphelaspis zone: McGill, Hot Springs Range, and Mount Hamilton, Nev. Subfamily HOUSIINAE Hup<5 Diagnosis.—Pterocephaliidae having border on ceph-alon generally distinct and gently convex or flat. Palpebral lobes small; exsagittal length generally less than one-third sagittal glabellar length. Fixed cheeks narrow; width generally less than one-fourth basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes situated slightly to distinctly anterior to glabellar midlength. Pygidium has poorly defined border, which is only slightly narrowed behind axis. Margin lacks spines. Genus HOtTSIA Walcott Dolichometopus (Housia) Walcott, 1916, p. 374. Housia Walcott, 1924, p. 57; 1925, p. 93; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, p. 625; Wilson, 1951, p. 642; Lochman, 1956, p. 456; Palmer, 1960a, p. 74. Housiella Kobayashi and Ichikawa, 1955, p. 66. Type species.—Dolichometopus (Housia) varro Walcott, 1916, p. 374, pi. 65, figs. 1-le. Diagnosis.—Housiidae having a maximum length of perhaps 60 mm; cranidium has brim and anterior part of glabella depressed. Border at a distinct angle to brim; sagittal length slightly less than length of brim. Fixed cheek composed almost completely of a flaplike palpebral lobe adjacent to dorsal furrow and anterior to midlength of glabella. Doublure of cephalon crossed by median suture. Free cheek has moderately broad slightly convex border. Lateral and posterior marginal furrows mod- erately deep, not connected, disappear near base of genal spine. Genal spine short or long. Thorax has 10-11 thoracic segments. Axial lobe prominent. Pleural spines short, posteriorly directed. Pygidium transversely subovate in outline. Axial lobe prominent, well defined, extends to inner edge of broad poorly defined border. Border has nearly constant width. Discussion.—This distinctive genus is most easily recognized by its characteristic cranidium that has a poorly defined glabella, downsloping brim, nearly horizontal border, and palpebral lobes situated adjacent to the axial furrow and slightly anterior to the glabellar midlength. Another characteristic generic feature is the inconsistency with which the last thoracic segment is free. Most collections of species of Housia have some pygidia partly or completely ankylosed with the last thoracic segment. When the segment is completely ankylosed, the pygidium has a superficial resemblance to pygidia of members of the Ceratopygidae, which have anterolateral spines as a fundamental part. This feature led Whitehouse (1939) to consider Housia and Ceratopyge synonymous and Kobayashi and Ichikawa (1955) to place Housia and the Housiinae in the Ceratopygidae. The relationships of Housia described on page 57 show the genus to be with the Pterocephaliidae. Kobayashi and Ichikawa (1955) also proposed a new' genus Housiella for Housia canadensis (Walcott). It was distinguished from Housia by the presence of genal spines and by the shallowness of the axial furrows around the glabella. Housia vacuna (Walcott), a species having a short genal spine, would thus be assigned to Housiella. However, cranidia and pygidia of this species cannot be satisfactorily distinguished from those of Housia varro, the type species of Housia, and the distinctions made by Kobayashi and Ichikawa between Housia and Housiella seem to be hardly more than species differences. Housiella is here considered a synonym of Housia. This is also the opinion of Lochman (1959), who placed Housiella in the synonymy of Housia without comment. The principal differences between species of Housia are the shape of the pygidium and the length of the genal spines. Housia ovata Palmer Plate 12, figures 8-11 Housia ovata Palmer, 1960a, p. 75, pi. 7, figs. 1-7, 9. Diagnosis.—Free cheeks have gently curved lateral margin and long, slender genal spine. Sagittal length of pygidium about twTo-thirds width. External surface66 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN of brim on cephalon, ocular platform of free cheek, and axial lobe and pleural furrows of pygidium coarsely pitted. Some small pygidia have granular surface. Discussion.-—The long slender genal spine and the relatively elongate pygidium distinguish this species from all others presently assigned to the genus. Occurrence. Common, lower part of Elvinia zone; Eureka, Bastian Peak, Cherry Creek, Snake Range, Shingle Pass, Pioche, Spring Mountains, Yucca Flat, and McGill, Nev.; Quartz Spring area, Calif. Housia varro (Walcott) Plate 12, figures 1-7 Dolichometopus (Housia) varro Walcott, 1916, p. 374, pi. 65, figs. 1-le. Housia varro (Walcott). Walcott, 1924, p. 57, pi. 12, fig. 4; 1925, p. 95, pi. 18, figs. 4-8; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, pi. 265, fig. 9; Bell and others, 1952, p. 183, pi. 30, figs. 3a-d; Robison, 1960, p. 25, pi. 2, fig. 1. IHousia halli (Resser). Palmer, 1960a, p. 75, pi. 7, fig. 8. Diagnosis.—Free cheeks have sharply rounded genal angle; genal spine absent. Sagittal length of pygidium about one-half width. Discussion.—The absence of a genal spine is the principal feature distinguishing this species from the otherwise similar species H. vacu/na (Walcott) and H. canadensis (Walcott). The type lot of H. varro consists of many poor specimens compressed and slightly distorted in a baked shale matrix. The discovery of better preserved specimens in limestone shows the pygidium to be somewhat shorter and wider than that of H. ovata and confirms the absence of genal spines on the free cheek. The free cheeks having genal spines reported (Palmer, 1960a, p. 75) from the type lot of H. varro have a significantly narrower doublure than those of associated cheeks of H. varro and probably represent a species of Elvinia. As far as can be determined, H. varro consistently lacks genal spines. Housia halli, which is represented only by a pygidium formerly assigned to Dunderbergia (Kesser, 1935), may be a synonym of H. varro. The type pygidium does not differ significantly from well-preserved pygidia of H. varro, but until cranidia and free cheeks are discovered, the relationships of H. halli must remain uncertain. The association of II. varro with Irvingella major and Iddingsia similis indicates that it comes from beds near the top of the Elvi/riia zone. II. ovata Palmer is found only in beds of the lower parts of the Elvinia zone and is evidently an older species. Occurrence. Rare, Irvingella major subzone, Elvinia zone: House Range, Utah; Schell Creek Range, Nev. Genus PARAHOUSIA Palmer Parahousia Palmer, 1960a, p. 76. Type species.—Parahousia constricta Palmer, 1960a, p. 77, pi. 7, figs. 16-18, text fig. 13. Diagnosis.—Housiinae having frontal area short; length slightly less than one-half that of glabella. Border furrow shallow. Palpebral lobes prominent, barely defined by palpebral furrow, situated close to glabella and anterior to glabellar midlength. Fixed cheek narrow; width between one-fourth and one-fifth basal glabellar width. Free cheek has conspicuous lateral and posterior border furrows that disappear near base of long slender genal spine and are not connected. Pygidium strongly arched in transverse profile. Axis prominent, subparallel sided, extended to inner edge of poorly defined depressed border. Discussion.—The foregoing diagnosis has been modified from that given in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a, p. 76) only by elimination of features now known to be specific rather than generic characteristics. This knowledge results from the addition of a second species, P. subequalis n. sp. This genus is distinguished from Housia by the presence of a narrow fixed cheek, a shorter and less depressed frontal area, and a depressed pygidial border. Parahousia constricta Palmer Plate 12, figures 12, 14, 15 Parahousia constricta Palmer, 1960a, p. 77, pi. 7, figs. 16-18, text fig. 13. Diagnosis.—Sagittal length of border nearly twice length of brim. External surfaces of most parts of cephalon coarsely pitted. External surfaces of axis and pleural fields of pygidium finely granular on small specimens, faintly pitted on large specimens. Border of free cheek, genal spine, and anterolateral corners of pygidium have prominent terrace lines. Discussion.—This species is distinguished from P. subegualis principally by the pitted ornamentation and broader border of the cranidium and by lack of terrace lines on the whole of the pygidial border. In the Shingle Pass section, where both species occur, P. constricta appears above P. subequalis and is apparently a slightly younger species. Occurrence. Moderately rare, lower Elvinia zone: Eureka. Shingle Pass, Cherry Creek, and Schell Creek Range, Nev. Parahousia subequalis n. sp. Plate 12, figures 13, 18, 19 Diagnosis.—Length of cranidial border only slightly greater than length of brim. Axial furrows have dis-SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 67 tinct pits at anterolateral comers of glabella on larger cranidia. Entire border of pygidium covered with well-defined terrace lines; external surfaces of remainder of pygidium and of cranidium smooth. Free cheek not known with certainty. Discussion.—The lack of a distinct pitted ornamentation of the cranidium and pygidium together with the more fully ornamented pygidial border are the most striking characters that distinguish this species from Parahousia constricta Palmer. Occurrence. Moderately rare, upper Dunderbergia zone: Snake Range and Shingle Pass, Nev. Genus PREHOUSIA Palmer Prehousia Palmer, 1960a, p. 77. Type species.—Prehousia alata Palmer, 1960a, p. 78, pi. 7, figs. 10 ,12,13. Diagnosis.—Housiinae having short frontal area, sagittal length of area slightly more than one-half length of glabella. Border generally well defined, slightly convex; sagittal length between one-half and three-fourths that of brim; rarely border poorly defined. Palpebral lobes barely defined by palpebral furrow, situated anterior to glabellar midlength; exsagittal length between one-fourth and one-half that of glabella. Fixed cheeks narrow; width one-third or less than one-third basal glabellar width. Facial sutures cut anterior margin nearly at axial line. Free cheek has well-defined border. Lateral and posterior marginal furrows generally joined, not noticeably extended onto base of genal spine. Genal spine slender, tapered to sharp point; length about equal to length of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium transversely subovate; breadth generally greater than twice length. Axis prominent, tapered posteriorly, merged with inner part of border; breadth one-third to about one-fifth greatest breadth of pygidium. Border moderately broad, separated from pleural field only by gradual change in slope, has nearly constant width. External surface smooth, pitted, roughened, or finely granular in axial region. Discussion.—The addition of three new species to this genus has required modification of the generic diagnosis and description (Palmer, 1960a) only to the extent of allowing for trilobites having somewhat wider fixed cheeks, a narrower pygidial axis, and a roughened external surface. The affinities of this genus to Aphelaspis are well shown by the two oldest species, P. prima n. sp. and P. indenta n. sp., which are distinguished principally by having slightly smaller palpebral lobes and narrower fixed cheeks on the cranidium (fig. 12). Prehousia alata Palmer Plate 13, figures 2, 5, 8, 9, 12, 13 Prehousia alata Palmer, 1960a, p. 78, pi. 7, figs. 10, 12, 13. Diagnosis.—Cranidium has narrow border, moderately defined by shallow border furrow; sagittal length slightly greater than one-half length of brim. Fixed cheeks narrow; palpebral lobes short, poorly defined. Katio of length of glabella to length of palpebral lobe to width of fixed cheek varies from 6.5:2.5:1 to 7:3:1. Free cheek has well-defined border furrow. Genal spine moderately short; length about equal to length of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium has unevenly curved posterior margin; alae slightly formed at anterolateral margins on some specimens. Axis has two or three shallow ring furrows behind articulating furrow; width nearly one-third width of pygidium. External surfaces of all parts either smooth or finely and faintly pitted. Discussion.—This species differs from P. prima n. sp. and P. indenta n. sp. by having distinctly narrower fixed cheeks. It differs from P. impolita by having an unevenly curved posterior margin to the pygidium, a narrower pygidial axis, a slightly narrower cranidial border, and a smooth or pitted rather than roughened surface. Occurrence. Upper part of Prehousia zone, Snake Range, Goodsprings, Wah Wah Range, Grant Range, Schell Creek Range, and Shingle Pass (?), Nev.; House Range, Utah. Prehousia diverta n. sp. Plate 12, figures 16, 17, 20-23 Diagnosis.—Cranidium has glabella straightsided, tapered forward, rounded anteriorly. Frontal area sub-equally divided into downsloping brim and slightly convex border by change in slope; distinct border furrow lacking. Fixed cheeks horizontal; width about one-fourth basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes barely defined, short; length between one-third and one-fourth that of glabella. Free cheek has lateral and posterior border furrows moderately well defined but becoming shallow toward genal angle. Anterior projection of doublure squarely truncated. Thorax and hypostome not known.68 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIXD BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN' Pygidium subovate. Axis prominent, bears three or four ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow; merges with moderately broad, concave poorly defined border. Width of axis between one-third and one-fourth that of pygidium. Two or three broad shallow pleural furrows cross pleural regions, turn abruptly backward at inner edge of border, and continue onto but not across border. External surfaces of all parts of exoskeleton either smooth, finely pitted, or slightly roughened. Surfaces of internal molds pitted. Discussion.—This species differs from all others in the genus in the structure of the frontal area of the cranidium and by the somewhat longer pygidium. The lack of a distinct border furrow and the presence of small poorly defined palpebral lobes on the cranidium are characteristics observed also on species of Housia. The tendency for the border furrows of the free cheek to become shallow towards the genal angle is a characteristic of both Housia and Parahousia. The width of the fixed cheek and shape of the glabella of P. diverta are the principal reasons for retaining this species in Prehousia. Occurrence. Moderately rare, lower part of Dunderbergia zone: Bastian Peak, McGill, Muddy Mountains, Patterson Pass, and Spring Mountains, Nev.; House Range and Deep Creek Range, Utah. Prehousia impolita Palmer Plate 13, figures 1, 3, 4 Diagnosis.—Cranidium has narrow border, well defined by shallow border furrow; sagittal length between one-half and three-fourths length of brim. Fixed cheeks narrow; palpebral lobes small, poorly defined. Ratio of length of glabella to length of palpebral lobe to width of fixed cheek about 7 :2:1. Free cheek has well-defined border furrow. Genal spine moderately short; length about equal to length of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium subsemicircular. Axis well defined, bears two or three shallow ring furrows behind articulating furrow; width about one-fourth that of pygidium. Border broad, slightly concave, not clearly separated from pleural fields. Pleural fields crossed by three shallow pleural furrows that extend onto inner part of border. Surfaces of nearly all parts of exoskeleton minutely granular or roughened. Ornamentation most apparent on border regions and top of glabella; visible, however, only after whitening. Discussion—This species is most likely to be confused with P. alata Palmer and P. semicircularis Palmer. P. alata has a broader axis, an unevenly curved posterior margin, and poorly defined pleural furrows on the pygidium and a narrower border of the cranidium. P. semicircularis has a broader border, longer palpebral lobes on the cranidium, and a smooth external surface. Occurrence. Moderately rare, upper part of Prehousia zone: Cherry Creek, Pintwater Range, Ash Meadows, and southern Ruby Range, Nev. Prehousia indenta n. sp. Plate 13, figures 6, 7, 10, 11, 14, 15 Labiostria conveximarginatal Robison, 1960, p. 30, pi. 3, fig. 10. Diagnosis.—Cranidium has moderately convex border; length about one-half or slightly more than one-half length of brim. Border furrow has posterior median inbend present on all specimens. Width of fixed cheek between one-fourth and one-fifth basal glabellar width. Free cheek has moderately convex lateral border. Pygidium has evenly curved posterior margin. Border downsloping; inner edge marked by distinct change in slope of pleural region. Width of axis between one-third and one-fifth width of pygidium. Surfaces of all parts of exoskeleton covered with fine to moderately coarse pits. Discussion.—This species differs from Prehousia prima n. sp. by having a narrower border and fixed cheeks on the cranidium and a better defined border on the pygidium. It differs from P. alata Palmer and P. impolita n. sp. by having broader fixed cheeks, from P. alata by lacking posterolateral alae on the pygidium, and from P. semicircularis Palmer by having a broader pygidial axis and broader fixed cheeks on the cranidium. The pitted ornamentation distinguishes this species from all but P. prima. A cranidium probably representing this species from the Fish Springs Range, Utah, was illustrated by Robison (1960) as Labiostria conveximarginatal Palmer. The palpebral lobes are small and placed slightly anteriorly, unlike those of Labiostria (now Aphelaspis) conveximarginata. Occurrence. Common, middle part of Prehousia zone: McGill, Snake Range, Cherry Creek, Ruby Range, and Spring Mountains, Nev.; House Range (?), Fish Spring Range, and Tintic, Utah. Prehousia prima n. sp. Plate 13, figures 16-18 Diagnosis.—Cranidium has flat or slightly convex border; length nearly three-fourths that of brim. Border furrow evenly curved or has slight posteriorSYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 69 median inbend. Width of fixed cheeks slightly less than one-third basal glabellar width. Free cheek has nearly flat border. Pygidium has evenly curved posterior margin. Border downsloping—continuing slope of pleural fields— not clearly differentiated. Width of axis between one-third and one-fourth that of pygidium. Surfaces of all parts of exosekleton covered with fine to moderately coarse pits. Discussion.—This species is intermediate in both stratigraphic position and morphology between Aphe-laspis and more typical members of Prehousia. It differs from Aphelaspis by having smaller palpebral lobes and narrower fixed cheeks (fig. 12) and from other species of Prehousia by having fixed cheeks whose width is nearly one-third the basal glabellar width and a border that is nearly three-fourths the length of the brim. The most similar species is the immediately younger form, P. indenta n. sp., which seems to be derived from P. prima and differs from it by having a narrower border and fixed cheeks of the cranidium, a convex instead of flat border of the free cheek, and a pygidial border differentiated from the pleural field by a distinct change in slope. Occurrence. Common, upper part of Dicanthopyge zone: McGill, Shingle Pass, and Tybo, Nev. Prehousia semicircularis Palmer Plate 12, figures 24-26 Prehousia semicircularis Palmer, 1960a, p. 78, pi. 7, figs. 11, 14, 15, 19. Diagnosis.—Sagittal length of border about three-fourths length of brim, Palpebral lobes relatively large; length slightly less than one-half that of glabella; width slightly greater than width of fixed cheek. Pygidium has evenly rounded anterolateral corners; width of axial lobe slightly less than one-fourth that of pygidium. External surface smooth on all parts. Discussion.—The large palpebral lobes of this species distinguish it from all other species in the genus. Pygidia are most like those of P. impolita n. sp., differing principally by lacking any noticeable ornamentation. Occurrence. Rare, Dunderbergia zone: Eureka, Nev. Subfamily PTEROCEPHALUNAE Kobayashi Diagnosis. — Pterocephaliidae having generally broad concave border on cephalon. Palpebral lobes generally situated about opposite glabellar midlength or, less commonly, anterior to glabellar midlength. Pygidium has broad poorly defined border. Margin either has or lacks spines. Genus CERNUOLIMBUS Palmer Cernuolimbus Palmer, 1960a, p. 84. Type species.—Cernuolimbus orygmatos Palmer, 1960a, p. 85, pi. 8, figs. 1, 3, 5, 8, 11. Diagnosis.—Pterocephaliinae having cranidium in which brim and border are distinct; axial length of border slightly less than equal to, or slightly greater than axial length of brim; inner part of border generally downsloping. Anterior sections of facial suture cut anterior margin slightly more than three-fourths distance from anterolateral corner of cranidium to axial line. Free cheek has long genal spine and well-defined generally concave border. Lateral border furrow continuous with posterior border furrow. Width of border at anterior margin ranges from one-fourth to slightly less than equal to greatest width of ocular platform. Pygidium subquadrate to subsemicircular in outline; length of axis more than three-fourths total length of pygidium; axis has two to five distinct ring furrows. Pleural regions have two to four low pleural ribs extending nearly to margin. Border not clearly differentiated from pleural field, widest at anterolateral corners; border gently tapers posteriorly, narrowest on axial line. Discussion.—The somewhat pointed anterior cranid-ial margin, relatively great sagittal length of the brim, and relatively long axis on the pygidium distinguish species of Cernuolimbus from those of Sigmocheilus, the most similar pterocephalinid genus. Cernuolimbus, represented by species in the Prehousia and lower Dunderbergia zones may be ancestral to Sigmocheilus, represented by species in the middle and upper Dunderbergia and lower Elvinia zones. Cernuolimbus depressus Palmer Plate 14, figure 9 Cernuolimbus depressus Palmer, 1960a, p. 85, pi. 8, figs. 9, 10. Diagnosis.—External surface of cranidium coarsely pitted; border downsloping, continuing slope of brim, tapered to a point laterally. Facial sutures nearly meet on axial line, giving pointed anterior margin to cranidium. Border furrow on mold has single row of granules. Discussion.—The downsloping, laterally tapered, pointed border of this species is its most distinguishing characteristic. It shows some morphologic similarity to Morosa extensa n. sp. (p. 87). However, the two species differ in the structure of the border, the position and size of the palpebral lobes, and the anterior course of the facial sutures; so, although a real 735-610 0-65-770 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN relationship between them cannot be entirely ruled out, they are here considered to be only superficially similar forms. Occurrence. Rare, Dunderbergia zone: Eureka, Ruby Range, and (?) Cherry Creek, Nev. Cernuolinibuii granulosus n. sp. Plate 14, figures 13-17 Diagnosis.—Cranidium has bluntly rounded anterior margin. Border v eil defined, generally sigmoid in sagittal profile; s.gittal length slightly less than that of convex brim. Border furrow deep, narrow, has slight posterior median inbend. Anterior edge of bor der, between facial sutures, has narrow zone of terrace lines. Free cheek has concave border, well defined by narrow border furrow; width of border at anterior margin variable from slightly less to slightly more than width of ocular platform. Pygidium subquadrate. Axis short, prominent, has two distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Posterior margin gently curved; posterolateral corners subangular. Pleural furrows and border poorly defined. External surfaces of all parts, exclusive of furrows, covered with closely spaced granules. Fine-granular ornamentation visible only on many specimens after whitening. Discussion.—This species is most easily recognized by its narrow cranidial border defined by a deep border furrow and by the granular ornamentation on all parts of the skeleton. It is most similar to C. laevi-frons n. sp., from which it differs principally by having granular ornamentation on the borders of the cranidium and free cheeks and by having a more quadrate shape to the pygidium. The variability in the degree of granular ornamentation on the border and the median inbend of the border furrow are shown on plate II, figures 13, 14, and 17. Occurrence. Moderately common, lower part of Dunderbergia zone: Ruby Range, Spring Mountains, Yucca Flat, Tempiute, and Muddy Mountains, Nev.; Deep Creek and House Ranges, Utah; Panamint Range, Calif. Cernuolimtms laevifrons n. sp. Plate 14, figures 10-12, 18 Diagnosis.—Cranidium has bluntly pointed anterior margin. Frontal area subequally divided into convex brim and concave border. Border furrow has slight median inbend. External surface of border smooth except for narrow zone of terrace lines along edge between facial sutures. External surfaces of other parts of cranidium, exclusive of furrows, covered with moderately abundant low granules; granules particularly conspicuous on top of glabella and top of palpebral lobes. Some small cranidia (length, 4 mm) have granules apparent only on top of glabella, tops of palpebral lobes, and brim just anterior to eye ridges. Free cheek has concave border; width of border at anterior margin slightly less than one-half width of ocular platform. Granular ornamentation moderately well founded on genal spine and posterior margin behind border furrow. Scattered granules apparent on ocular platform of some larger specimens. Pygidium has prominent axis, reaching to posterior margin; axis has three distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural furrows and border poorly defined. Posterior margin moderately curved, has narrow zone of terrace lines. External surfaces of all parts covered with low granules. Discussion.-—This species is easily recognized by its bluntly pointed anterior margin, smooth cranidial border, and relatively long axis on the pygidium. It is the oldest species presently recognized in Cemuolim-bus. Occurrence. Moderately rare, Prehousia zone: Cherry Creek, Nev. Cernuolimbus orygmatos Palmer Plate 14, figures 1-3 Cernuolimbus orygmatos Palmer, 1960a, p. 85, pi. 8, figs. 1, 3, 5, 8, 11. Diagnosis.—External surfaces of all parts coarsely pitted. Anterior margin of cranidium distinctly pointed. Border slightly downsloping from border furrow and nearly flat or slightly turned up at anterior margin. Pygidium subsemicircular. Axis has four ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow; each ring has pair of prominent granules. Discussion.—The pitted ornamentation, slightly upturned anterior margin, and pairs of granules on the axial rings of the pygidium are the most distinctive features of this species. C. depressus Palmer, the only other species having pitted ornamentation presently known in the genus, has a more downsloping cranidial border and a more pronounced lateral taper. Occurrence. Moderately rare, Dunderbergia zone: Eureka and Ruby Range (?), Nev. Cernuolimbus semigranulosus Palmer Plate 14, figures 4-8 Cernuolimbus semgranulosus Palmer, 1960a, p. 86, pi. 8, figs. 2. 4, 6, 7. Diagnosis.-—Facial sutures make distinct angle with anterior margin. Border flat or turned up slightly atSYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 71 anterior margin, downsloping from border furrow; sagittal length nearly 1% times that of convex brim. External surface of cranidium has distinct granular ornamentation only on tops of glabella and palpebral lobes; other areas either smooth or very finely granular. Border of free cheek nearly as wide as ocular platform. Genal spine covered with closely spaced fine granules. Pygidium has transversely subovate outline; axis prominent, has two ring furrows behind articulating furrow. External surface covered with fine granules visible only after whitening. Discussion.—The wide border on the cranidium and free cheek distinguishes this species from C. granulosus n. sp. and C. laevifrons n. sp., the only other presently recognized members of Cemuolimbus having granular ornamentation. Occurrence. Moderately rare, Dunderbergia zone: Eureka and Ash Meadows, Nev. Genus PTEROCEPHALIA Roemer Pterocephalia Roemer, 1849, p. 421; 1852, p. 92; Bridge, in Bridge and Girty, 1937, p. 247; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, p. 631; Palmer, 1954, p. 751; 1960a, p. 86; Lochman, 1959, p. 256. Hederacauda Kobayashi, 1960, p. 250. Type species.-—Pterocephalia sanctisabae Roemer, 1849, p. 421. Diagnosis.—Pterocephaliinae having cranidium in which border is broad, concave, scarcely differentiated from brim. Sagittal length of border greater than three times length of brim. Junction of facial sutures with anterior margin generally imperceptible. Facial sutures submarginal beneath part of anterior margin to axial line then turn abruptly backward to form median suture across doublure. Free cheek has broad concave border, slightly raised above level of ocular platform at border furrow. A low ridge parallels entire lateral margin nearly to tip of genal spine at distance about one-fourth width of border from lateral margin. Genal spine moderately long, broad, flat at base, tapered to sharp slender point. Thorax of 13 segments. First 12 segments have slender laterally directed pleural tips. East segment has broad pleural tips curved distinctly backward. Pygidium subquadrate to subovate and has well-defined axis containing four to eight ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Broad generally concave border not differentiated from gently convex peural fields. Three to five pleural ridges extend across pleural field and onto inner part of border. Posterior margin has slight median inbend, smooth edge. External suface of exoskeleton generally has closely spaced fine granules in axial region. Borders of cranidium, free cheek and pygidium, and tips of pleurae of thorax generally have well-defined terrace lines. Discussion.—The broad concave poorly defined border on the cranidium and free cheeks, which has a subsidiary ridge near its outer margin, is the most characteristic feature of Pterocephalia. A discussion of the content of the genus has been presented in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a, p. 87, 88). Three species are recognized in the Great Basin faunas and are distinguished primarily on the form and structure of the pygidium. Information about the details of thoracic structure was obtained from a complete individual of P. sanctisabae Roemer collected from Upper Cambrian beds in southeastern British Columbia by Mr. Thomas Thomsen of Stanford University. Pterocephalia seems to represent the terminal genus in the evolutionary lineage of the Pterocephaliinae. No younger Cambrian genera are known that can be properly assigned to this subfamily. Kobayashi (1960, p. 250) recently proposed a new genus Hederacauda having Dikellocephalus multicine-tus Hall and Whitfield as type species. The holotype of this species is a fragmental pygidium of a specimen of Pterocephalia sanctisabae on which the fracturing across the pleural ribs that extend onto the border gives the broken margin a superficial appearance of having spines. The true broken nature of the border can be seen on the type but might be impossible to ascertain from the plaster cast that Kobayashi studied. The “5 spines on the margin of Hederacauda multi-cinctusv are used as the justification for excluding the species from Pterocephalia. These features are artifacts, however, and Hederacauda multicinctus is a synonym of Pterocephalia sanctisabae. Pterocephalia? punctata n. sp. Plate 17, figures 8, 12, 13 A distinctive Pterocephalinid species is associated with Cemuolimbus granulosus Palmer in USGS collection 2603-CO. Its cranidium is characterized by generally low relief, a bluntly pointed anterior margin, and a subequally divided frontal area having a concave border that is very slightly differentiated from the brim. The palpebral lobes are short, between one-third and one-half the glabellar length, and are situated slightly anterior to the glabellar midlength. The free cheek has a poorly defined border and a moderately long, flat sharply pointed genal spine. The pygidium is subovate in outline and has a prominent slender axis bearing three distinct ring72 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN furrows posterior to the articulating furrow. A broad concave border, not clearly separated from the pleural fields, is crossed by three pleural ridges that are turned sharply backward as they cross the contact of the border and pleural field. The posterior margin is broadly rounded, and the posterolateral corners are slightly angular. External surfaces of all parts are pitted. This ornamentation is particularly noticeable on the cranidium and free cheeks. Discussion.—This species presents a combination of features not seen in other described Pterocephalinid genera. The cranidium and free cheek are most like those of species of Aphelaspis that lack a distinct border furrow, but the pygidium is totally unlike any Aphelaspis pygidium and is quite similar to pygidia assigned to Sigmocheilus grata (Resser). The species is assigned here to Pterocephalia with question because of the absence of a distinct border furrow, but it differs from all other species in the genus most significantly by having a subequally divided frontal area. It may represent a new genus of Pterocephaliinae. (A similar unnamed form is described on p. 92, and illustrated on pi. 16, figs. 11-13.) Occurrence. Rare, lower part of Dunderbergia zone: Ruby Range and Yucca Flat, Nev. Pterocephalia concava Palmer Plate 17, figures 4-7 1 Pterocephalia cf. P. occidens Walcott. Palmer, 1954, p. 752, pi. 86, figs. 9,10; pi. 87, figs. 1, 2. Pterocephalia concava Palmer, 1960a, p. 88, pi. 9, figs. 1-6, 9-12. Pterocephalia sanctisabae Roemer. Robison, 1960, p. 31, pi. 3, figs. 4, 5, 9. Diagnosis.—Glabellar furrows shallow. Border of cranidium and free cheek generally have low scattered coarse granules. Sagittal length of border ranges from three times length of brim on small cranidia (4—5 mm long) to more than five times on large (14 mm long) mature cranidia. Pygidium transversely subovate in outline and has slight median inbend in posterior margin. Axis has four or five distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural fields crossed by two or three distinct pleural ridges. Breadth of border increases relative to breadth of pleural field, and border becomes more concave with increasing size. Discussion.—This species is most like P. sanctisabae Roemer. It differs principally by having less conspicuous glabellar furrows, fewer distinct ring furrows and pleural ridges on the pygidium, and a strikingly different development of the mature specimens. Small mature specimens of P. concava have a relatively short border that increases in length relative to that of the brim during holaspid development. Small mature specimens of P. sanctisabae, however, are virtually like the large specimens in all observable features. Statements made in the original diagnosis (Palmer, 1960a, p. 88) about the thoracic segments have been deleted here because the discovery of a complete specimen of P. sanctisabae (p. 71) shows that the macro-pleural segment is the last segment of the thorax, a characteristic that is probably typical of all species in the genus. Occurrence. Moderately common, middle part of the Dunderbergia zone: Eureka, Bastian Peak, Cherry Creek, McGill, and Ruby Range, Nev. Pterocephalia elongata Palmer Plate 17, figures 9-11 Pterocephalia elongata Palmer, 1960a, p. 88, pi. 9, figs. 14-20. Diagnosis.-—Glabellar furrows shallow. Sagittal length of border between three and five times length of brim. Pygidium has elongate subquadrate outline; greatest breadth near posterior margin; sides straight, nearly parallel, or slightly diverging posteriorly. Posterior margin nearly straight and has slight median indentation. Axis has four or five distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Two or three distinct pleural ridges parallel lateral margin of pygidium. A narrow postaxial ridge extends across border to posterior margin. Discussion.-—The elongate subquadrate shape of the pygidium of this species distinguishes it from all others in the genus. Isolated cranidia and free cheeks cannot be distinguished with certainty from those of P. concava Palmer. Occurrence. Moderately rare, middle part of Dunderbergia zone: Eureka and Cherry Creek, Nev. Pterocephalia sanctisabae Roemer Plate 17, figures 1-3 Pterocephalia sanctisabae Roemer, 1849, p. 421; 1852, p. 92, pi. 11, figs. 1 a-d; Bridge, 1933, p. 232, pi. 2, figs. 26, 27; Bridge, in Bridge and Girty, 1937, p. 246, pi. 67, figs. 1 a-d; pi. 68, figs. 7-43; Shimer and Shrock, 1944, pi. 266, figs. 35-37; Wilson, 1949, p. 42, pi. 10, figs. 1-3; Frederickson, 1949, p. 355, pi. 69, figs. 1-4; (?) Wilson, 1951, p. 647, pi. 91, fig. 24; Palmer, 1960a, p. 89, pi. 9, figs. 7, 8, 13. Conocephalites (Pterocephalus) laticeps Hall and Whitfield, 1877, p. 221, pi. 2, figs. 4-7. Dikellocephalus multicinctus Hall and Whitfield, 1877, p. 226, pi. 2, fig. 37. Pterocephalia dakotensis Resser, 1938b, p. 39.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 73 Pterocephalia bridge,i Resser, 1938b, p. 40; Lochman, 1950, p. 334, pi. 47, figs. 14-18; Lochman and Hu, 1960, p. 814, pi. 96, figs. 28-33. Pterocephalia oriens Resser, 1938b, p. 40. Pterocephalia potosiensis Resser, 1938b, p. 40. Pterocephalia ulrichi Resser, 1938b, p. 41. Pterocephalia silvestris Resser, 1938b, p. 41. Pterocephalia deckeri Resser, 1938b, p. 41. Diagnosis.—Glabellar moderately deep. Sagittal length of border on cranidium between five and nine times length of brim on mature specimens. Pygidium transversely subovate in outline and has at least six distinct ring furrows on axis posterior to articulating furrow and four or five distinct pleural ridges extending across pleural fields and onto border. Posterior margin has slight median indentation. Discussion.—This species is the youngest species in the genus and the subfamily and is characterized primarily by the very wide cephalic border and the relatively large number of axial furrows and pleural ridges on the pygidium. Occurrence. Moderately common, Elvinia zone: Eureka, Bastian Peak, Shingle Pass, Snake Range, Ash Meadows, Yucca Flat, and Groom District, Nev.; Tintic Utah. Genus SIGMOCHEILUS Palmer Sigmocheilus Palmer, 1960a, p. 89. Type species.—Sigmocheilus serratus Palmer, 1960a, p. 91, pi. 10, figs. 1-3. (=Dikellocephalus -flabellifer Hall and Whitfield, 1877, p. 227, pi. 2, figs. 29, 30. Diagnosis.—Pterocephaliinae having generally well-defined border on cranidium. Sagittal length of border between 1% and 4 times greater than that of brim. Border generally concave in sagittal profile and has greatest depth near its midlength. Facial sutures cut anterior margin at slight angle between point opposite anterolateral corners of glabella and axial line. Free cheeks have long genal spines and well-defined concave border. Lateral and posterior border furrows barely connected. Lateral border furrow shallowest; posterior border furrow continues onto genal spine. Breadth of border equal to or less than greatest breadth of ocular platform. Pygidium elongate subovate, subquadrate, or transversely subovate; greatest width about opposite or anterior to posterior end of axis. Axis prominent, bears four to six ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow, tapered to a blunt point at inner edge of border. Border and pleural field not clearly differentiated; three to five pleural ridges generally apparent, geniculated at boundary between pleural field and border, continued onto but not across border. Border concave; posterior margin evenly rounded, nearly straight, or has slight median inbend. Edge smooth or has broad spines. Discussion.—The older species of this genus are most likely to be confused with older species of Pterocephalia. The principal difference between cranidia is that the border of Sigmocheilus is generally well marked by a border furrow, whereas a border furrow is generally not clearly marked on the external surface of Pterocephalia. On exfoliated cranidia of Pterocephalia,, the border furrow is shown more clearly. On pygidia of species of Pterocephalia the end of the pygidial axis is generally distinctly anterior to a line passing through the points of greatest width whereas on pygidia of Sigmocheilus, this line passes nearly over the end of the axis or clearly anterior to the end of the axis. The length of the genal spine of Pterocephalia species is generally less than that of Sigmocheilus species. (Compare pi. 15 figs. 5, 9, pi. 17, figs. 1, 7.) Cranidia of Sigmocheilus also resemble those of Cemuolimbus but generally have a longer concave border, the deepest part of which is at the sagittal midlength rather than anterior to the midlength. Species of this genus are common in the Dunderbergia zone and the lower part of the Elvinia zone and are discriminated principally on the shape and border features of the pygidium. Sigmocheilus flabellifer (Hall and Whitfield) Plate 15, figures 1, 3, 5, 6 Dikellocephalus flabellifer Hall and Whitfield, 1877, p. 227, pi. 2, figs. 29, 30. Apatokephalus? flabellifer, Walcott, 1914, p. 350. Parabriscoia flabellifera Resser, 1938b., p. 38. Parabriscoia! flabellifer, Kobayashi, 1953, p. 58. Richardsonella flabellifera, Kobayashi, 1960, p. 243, text fig. 8e. Sigmocheilus serratus Palmer, 1960a, p. 91, pi. 10, figs. 1-3. Diagnosis.—Sagittal length of cranidial border about lJ/2 times length of brim. Brim gently to moderately convex; border moderately concave. External surface of glabella has closely-spaced fine granules. Free cheek has long slender genal spine; length of spine greater than three times that of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium transversely subovate. Three or four pleural ridges apparent, extend onto border. Posterior margin has five or six pairs of broad-based strongly tapered sharp border spines; pair nearest axial line generally shorter than other pairs. Discussion.—The well-formed border spines on the pygidium are the most distinctive characteristics of this species. Cranidia resemble those of earlier species74 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN of Sigmocheilus but generally have a relatively broader brim. This is the youngest species presently recognized in Sigmocheilus. Hall and Whitfield’s species D. flabellifer was based on a single imperfect pygidium (pi. 15, fig. 6) and was represented only by a slightly schematic engraving in their publication; it was vaguely located stratigraphi-cally. Its original generic assignment presented a bias to later authors, because by 1914 Dikellocephalus had become restricted in concept to a group of trilobites of Trempealeau age. Thus, subsequent assignments were to genera of this age having superficially similar pygidia. The identity of D. -flabellifer with S. serratus (Palmer, 1960a) was not recognized until 1961, when I found Hall and Whitfield’s type specimen in the collections of the U.S. National Museum. Occurrence. Moderately common, upper part of Dunder-bergia zone and lower part of Elvinia zone: Eureka, Cherry Creek, McGill, Shingle Pass, Snake Range, Spring Mountains, Yucca Flat, and Bare Mountain, Nev. Sigmocheilus grata (Resser) Plate 15, figures 16-18 Pterocephalina grata Resser, 1942b, p. 78, pi. 15, figs. 3-6. Sigmocheilus grata (Resser). Palmer, 1960a, p. 90, pi. 9, figs. 22, 23, 26, 27. Diagnosis.—Sagittal length of border between two and three times length of brim. External surface of border smooth or covered with few scattered low coarse granules. Remainder of surface of cranidium, exclusive of furrows, covered with low fine granules. Border of pygidium moderately flared posterolater-ally; posterior margin broadly rounded or straight, has slight median indentation on some specimens. Edge smooth. Line connecting points of greatest width passes just posterior to end of axis. Discussion.—This species differs from the closely related and apparently older species S. notha (Resser) by having a less pointed posterior margin and a more lateraly flared pygidial border. The absence of border spines distinguishes it from the younger species S. pogonipensis (Resser) and S. serratus Palmer. Variability among specimens of this species is much like that of S. notha and is most apparent in the width and ornamentation of the cranidial border. It is perhaps the result of unstable and rapidly shifting bottom environments during the time this species was living in central Nevada. Occurrence. Moderately common, upper part of Dunder-bergia zone: Eureka, Cherry Creek, Spring Mountains, and Grant Range, Nev. Sigmocheilus notha (Resser) Plate 15, figures 7, 8, 10-15 Pterocephalina notha Resser, 1942b, p. 77, pi. 14, figs. 34—38. Iddingsia ? quinnensis Resser, 1942b, p. 88, pi. 16, figs. 39-41. Diagnosis.—Sagittal length of cranidial border generally two to four times sagittal length of brim. Free cheek has well-defined concave border; length of genal spine between two and three times length of posterior section of facial suture. External surface of border on some specimens covered with scattered coarse granules. Other parts of cranidial exoskeleton either smooth, roughened, or very finely granular. Posterior margin of pygidium smooth, bluntly pointed towards rear; line connecting points of greatest width pass over end of axis. Length of pygidium nearly two-thirds width. Border generally downsloping, not flared posterolaterally. Discussion.—The relatively narrow pygidium having a bluntly pointed nonspinose posterior margin is the most distinctive part of the species. The most similar species, S. grata (Resser), has a less pointed posterior margin and more laterally flared border. Specimens here assigned to S. notha differ among themselves in sagittal length, ornamentation of the cranidial border, and to a lesser extent in details of external ornamenation of other parts of the cranidium. None of these features, however, have provided reliable means of differentiating significant taxa, and the variability is here interpreted as infraspecific. S. notha is common in many collections in the upper part of the Dunderberg Formation, where cyclic sedimentation is particularly conspicuous. Perhaps the morphologic variablity is a reflection of the instability of the habitat apparent preferred by this species. Resser (1942b, p. 88) described a species, Iddingsia? quinnensis, on the basis of an exfoliated cranidium from the same collection as S. notha. It does not differ in any significant feature from S. notha (Compare pi. 15 figs. 8, 10) and is here considered to be a synonym of that species. Occurrence. Common, middle and upper parts of Dunder-bergia zone: Bastian Peak, McGill, Ruby Range, Grant Range, Quinn Canyon Range, and Cherry Creek, Nev. Sigmocheilus pogonipensis (Resser) Plate 15, figures 2, 4, 9 Pterocephalina pogonipensis Resser, 1942b, p. 78, pi. 15, figs. 1, 2. Sigmocheilus pogonipensis (Resser). Palmer, 1960a, p. 91, pi. 10, figs. 4-7. Diagnosis.—Sagittal length of cranidial border about one and one-half times that of brim. BrimSYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 75 strongly arched in sagittal profile; anterior part nearly vertical. Border strongly concave. Front of glabella well defined by preglabellar furrow. External surface of cranidium, exclusive of furrows and border, covered with low coarse granules. Free cheek has long slender genal spine; length of spine more than three times length of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium transverse subovate. Pleural regions crossed by four or five prominent pleural ribs that continue onto border. Border covered with well-defined terrace lines. Margin has six pairs of short asymmetrical spines. Discussion.—The strongly convex cranidial brim and short border spines on the pygidium are the most distinctive features of this species. At Eureka and Shingle Pass, Nev., this species has been found in beds stratigraphically below those containing S. serratus Palmer, a species having better formed border spines on the pygidium and a less convex brim on the cranidium. S. pogonipensis was therefore first thought to be ancestral to S. serratus in an evolutionary lineage that began with species lacking border spines on the pygidium, progressed through forms having vestigial spines, and terminated with a species having well-founded spines. However, at Cherry Creek, Nev., S. pogonipensis and S. serratus are associated in two small collections, an occurrence that casts doubt on the suggested evolutionary lineage. The cranidial ornamentation of S. pogonipensis is very similar to that of species of S trig ambitus, whereas the ornamentation of S. serratus is more like that of the other species of Sigmocheilus. S. pogonipensis may thus represent an offshoot of S trig ambitus rather than a part of the main evolutionary lineage of Sigmocheilus. Occurrence. Moderately rare, upper part of Dunderbergia zone: Eureka, Cherry Creek, Shingle Pass, Yucca Flat, and Pahranagat Range, Nev. Genus STRIGAMBITUS n. gen. Type species.—S trig ambitus transversus n. sp. Diagnosis.—Pterocephalinae having a well-defined glabella containing three pairs of moderately deep glabellar furrows. Frontal area subequally divided into poorly differentiated convex brim and concave border. Fixed cheeks narrow, horizontal, or slightly upsloping Palpebral lobes and eye ridges well defined. Anterior sections of facial sutures intramarginal nearly to axial line, then joined and continued ventrally across doublure as median suture. Free cheek has well-defined lateral and posterior border furrows joined at genal angle and extended onto genal spine. Pygidium has prominent axis bearing two or three distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Outline transversely subovate to subquadrate. Posterior margin has or lacks median inbend. Border concave, not clearly differentiated from pleural fields. External surfaces of border regions covered with well-defined terrace lines; all other parts covered with closely-spaced coarse granules. Description.—Pterocephaliinae (estimated maximum length about 60 mm) having cranidium, exclusive of posterior limbs, subquadrate, moderately rounded anteriorly, gently to moderately convex transversely and longitudinally. Glabella moderately convex transversely, gently convex longitudinally, tapered forward, bluntly rounded anteriorly, well defined at sides and anterolateral corners by moderately deep axial furrows, less well defined across front. Three pairs of moderately deep glabellar furrows generally apparent; posterior pair curved broadly backward. Occipital furrow deep at sides, shallow across axial line. Occipital ring moderately wide, has low median node placed slightly anterior to midlength. Frontal area moderately long; sagittal length between two-thirds and three-fourths length of glabella. Brim and border poorly differentiated by very shallow border furrow; brim moderately convex; border concave. Sagittal length of border equal to or slightly greater than length of brim. Fixed cheeks narrow, horizontal, or slightly upsloping; width between one-third and one-fourth basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes well defined by arcuate palpebral furrows, connected to glabella by moderately well-defined eye ridges; length about two-fifths length of glabella. Posterior limbs long, slender; posterior border furrow deep, straight. Anterior sections of facial sutures slightly divergent forward from palpebral lobes to border furrow, then curved inward across border and intramarginal nearly to axial line, where they meet and continue backward ventrally across doublure as median suture. Posterior sections divergent and sinuous. Free cheek has flat or concave border; width at anterior end about equal to that of ocular platform. Infraocular ring well formed. Lateral and posterior border furrows well defined, joined at genal angle and continued backward onto genal spine. Genal spine long, slender, having subcircular cross section, or short, moderately broad, having subovate cross section. Thoracic segments and hypostome not known with certainty. Pygidium subquadrate to transversely subovate. Axis prominent, tapered posteriorly to inner edge of border, contains two or three distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow; length between one-half and76 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN three-fourths length of pygidium; low median ridge extends from end of axis onto border. Border not clearly differentiated, variable in width. Pleural fields crossed by one or two shallow pleural furrows, generally curved abruptly backward distally and continued onto inner part of border. Posterior margin either has or lacks well-defined median inbend. External surfaces of border regions of cranidium, free cheek, and pygidium covered with well-defined terrace lines. All other parts generally thickly covered with coarse granules. Discussion.—The poorly defined brim and border and the well-defined glabellar furrows on the cranidium, together with the distinctive ornamentation of terrace lines on the border regions and abundant coarse granules on other parts, are the most characteristic features of species of this genus. In an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a), Strigambitus utahensis (Resser) was placed in Sigmocheilus, but the lack of a well-defined border was atypical of Sigmocheilus. Discovery of additional species having cranidia like those of S. utahensis but having different free cheeks and pygidia indicates that these species characterize a genus distinct from Sigmocheilus in ornamentation and structure of the frontal area. At present, this genus is characteristic of faunas in the lower part of the Dunderbergia zone. Strigambitus bilobus n. sp. Plate 16, figures 1-3 Diagnosis.—Free cheek has short, moderately broad, flattened genal spine; length' of spine only slightly greater than length of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium subquadrate in outline, has deep rounded posterior median inbend. Width of axis at anterior margin slightly greater than anterior width of pleural region. External surface of border contains distinct terrace lines. External surface of axial rings has low coarse granules. External surface of pleural fields nearly smooth, except on large specimens, which have low scattered granules. Discussion.—The deep median notch and relatively narrow pleural regions of the pygidium are the most distinctive features that differentiate this species from the slightly older S. utahensis (Resser). S. bilobus is the youngest species presently assigned to Strigambitus and occurs above S. utahensis in the Ruby Range section and above S. transversus n. sp. in the McGill section. Occurrence. Moderately rare, lower part of Dunderbergia zone: Ruby Range, McGill, and Cherry Creek, Nev. Strigambitus? blepharina n. sp. Plate 16, figures 14-18 Diagnosis.—Glabellar furrows of larger cranidia barely apparent. Sagittal length of downsloping nearly flat brim about one-half that of moderately concave border on cranidia having a sagittal length of 15 mm or more; on cranidia 5 mm or less in length, sagittal length of brim about two-thirds or more that of border. Fixed cheeks nearly flat, horizontal. Palpebral lobes on larger cranidia barely defined on external surface; short, length between one-fourth and one-fifth that of glabella. Free cheek has moderately broad concave border; central depression of moderate depth continues backward to intersection with posterior border furrow of comparable depth and then extends a short distance onto base of genal spine. Lateral border furrow distinct, relatively shallow, intersecting posterior border furrow at right angle. Genal spine long, slender, sub-circular in cross section; length about twice length of posterior section of facial suture. Axis of pygidium moderately to strongly tapered posteriorly; low narrow postaxial ridge extends short distance onto border. Pleural regions have broad poorly defined border. Pleural fields narrower than border, crossed by two or three narrow pleural ridges that continue more than half the distance across border. External surface of glabella of large cranidia has closely spaced fine granules on upper parts; other parts generally smooth; smaller cranidia have fine granular ornamentation on all parts except border, which has moderately formed terrace lines. Border and genal spine of free cheek and border and tops of pleural ridges of pygidium contain moderately formed terrace lines. Top of axis of pygidium and pleural fields of small specimens have closely spaced fine granules. Discussion.—S? blepharina is included in Strigambitus with question because the small palpebral lobes and relatively subdued ornamentation of larger cranidia are unlike those of other species of the genus. The affinities to Strigambitus are shown in the smaller cranidia, which have the characteristic ornamentation and glabellar furrows of other speices of the genus. In addition to the small palpebral lobes and modified ornamentation, this species differs from others in the genus in the unusual relation between the lateral and posterior border furrows on the free cheek. Occurrence. Rare, Dunderbergia zone: Quartz Spring area and Death Valley, Calif.; Spring Mountains, Nev.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 77 Strigambitus transversus n. sp. Plate 16, figures 6-10 Diagnosis.—Free cheek has genal spine that is extremely long, slender, rounded in cross section; length of spine more than twice length of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium transversely subovate; posterior margin convex backward. Axis contains three distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Border narrower than pleural fields. Discussion.—This seems to be the oldest of the three species here assigned to Strigambitus and is most easily distinguished from the others by lacking a distinct posterior median inbend in the pygidial margin. USGS collection 1478-CO may represent a transitional assemblage between S. transversus and S. utahensis. Some pygidia having a slight median inbend in the border are present in association with pygidia definitely lacking an inbend. Occurrence. Moderately common, lower part of Dunder-hergia zone: McGill, Bastian Peak, Snake Range, and Spring Mountains, Nev.; House, Needles, and Deep Creek ranges, Utah. Strigambitus utahensis (Resser) Plate 16, figures 4, 5 Pterocephalina utahensis Resser, 1942b, p. 79, pi. 15, figs. 7-11. Sigmocheilus utahensis (Resser). Palmer, 1960a, p. 91, pi. 9, figs. 24, 25, 28. Diagnosis.—Free cheek has genal spine long, slender, subcircular in cross section; full length of spine not known. Pygidium subquadrate, has distinct shallow median inbend in posterior margin. External surfaces of pleural fields and axis thickly covered with coarse granules. Discussion.—This species is morphologically and perhaps stratigraphically intermediate between S. transversus n. sp., a species lacking a median inbend in the pygidial margin and having well-defined pygidial ornamentation, and S. bilobus n. sp., which has a deep median inbend in the posterior margin and poorly defined pygidial ornamentation. Occurrence. Moderately rare, lower part of Dunderhergia zone: Eureka, Spring Mountains, Muddy Mountains, and Ruby Range, Nev.; Fish Springs Range, Utah; Panamint Range, Calif. UNASSIGNED TRILOBITES All the trilobites described on the preceding pages are assigned with considerable confidence to their suprageneric taxa. Some of the genera and species described on the following pages may also represent suprageneric taxa described above. However, in order to distinguish between degrees of confidence in supra- generic assignment, all questionably assigned genera and their included species are described in this section and their possible affinities are indicated in either the description or the discussion following. Genus ANECHOCEPHALUS Palmer Anechocephalus Palmer, 1960a, p. 92. Type species.—Anechocephalus triganulatus Palmer, 1960a, p. 92, pi. 8, figs. 21-23. Description.—Small pterocephaliid (?) trilobites (estimated maximum total length 30 mm). Cranidium has glabella that is well defined at sides and anterolateral corners, less well defined in front, gently to moderately convex transversely and longitudinally, tapered slightly forward, moderately to bluntly rounded at front; glabellar furrows shallow; occipital furrow well defined, generally deep. Occipital ring gently convex, widest on axial line. Frontal area moderately short. Brim depressed, generally continuing the longitudinal convexity of glabella. Border nearly horizontal; sagittal convexity gentle to moderate. Border furrow moderately deep. Fixed cheeks up-sloping to elevated; width about one-third basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes large, arcuate, well defined by palpebral furrow, situated slightly above level of top of glabella; length slightly greater than one-half length of glabella on specimens having a glabella length of 2 mm or more; length somewhat more on smaller specimens; midlength situated slightly posterior to glabellar midlength. Posterior limbs slender, tapered laterally to sharp point; length slightly less than basal glabellar width. Course of anterior section of facial sutures nearly straight forward or slightly bowed outward from palpebral lobe to across border furrow, then turned inward across border and marginal or submarginal nearly to axial line; ventral course not known. Posterior section at nearly right angles to axial line behind palpebral lobes, curved broadly backward to posterior margin. Free cheek has well-defined gently convex lateral border, narrower than ocular platform. Infraocular ring present. Lateral and posterior border furrows distinct; posterior border furrow deepest; furrows join at genal angle and extend down middle of moderately long nearly flat genal spine nearly to tip. Thoracic segments and hypostome not known. Pygidium subquadrate. Axis prominent, tapered posteriorly, reaches to or nearly to inner edge of poorly defined border; axis contains two distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow; low post-axial ridge extends for short distance behind axis.78 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASEST Pleural fields not distinctly separated from border, crossed by two or three pleural furrows that are curved abruptly backward and extend onto border. Posterior margin extended either into broad short lobes or into pair of slender posteriorly directed posterolateral spines of variable length. External surface of glabella has coarse semireticu-late ornamentation that is conspicuously absent from areas of glabellar furrows. Similar ornamentation variably formed on fixed cheeks and brim. Border of cranidium covered with distinct terrace lines. Free cheek not noticeably ornamented except for terrace lines on anterior part of border and on genal spine. Pygidium generally not noticeably ornamented; poorly defined closely spaced granules on anterior part of pleural fields of some specimens. Discussion.—This genus was originally based on only a few cranidia and pygidia from the Dunderber-gia zone. The occurrence of at least one new species in the Elvinia zone represented by many specimens has provided additional information on the content and concept of Anechocephalus. The foregoing description is modified from that given in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a) on the basis of this information. The upsloping to elevated narrow fixed cheeks having large well-defined palpebral lobes and the generally short frontal area having a well-defined moderately convex border are the most distinctive characteristics of species of Anechocephalus. Anechocephalus spinosus n. sp. Plate 20, figures 1-4, 6, 7, 11, 12 Diagnosis.—Length of frontal area of cranidium between one-third and one-half length of glabella. Border furrow has slight posterior median inbend. Occipital furrow generally deepest along sides of glabella. Pygidium has pair of posterolateral spines of variable length. Discussion.—This species, which is characterized primarily by its spine-bearing pygidium, is either unusually variable or else composed of two or more closely related forms. In three collections from the Eureka district, all taken about 16 feet below the lowest cherts of the Windfall Formation, indistinguishable cranidia and free cheeks are associated with pygidia bearing posterolateral spines of different lengths. Within each collection, the few observed pygidia are virtually the same, but a comparison between collections shows a striking difference in the length of spines on the pygidia (compare pi. 20, figs. 4, 7, 12). Because all these specimens are from the same fauna in about the same stratigraphic position in the same area and none of the samples are very large, the different pygidia are here tentatively considered to be varieties of a single species. Occurretiee. Moderately rare, uppermost part of Elvinia zone: Eureka, McGill, and Yucca Flat, Nev. Anechocephalus trigranulatus Palmer Plate 20, figures 5, 8-10, 13, 14 Anechocephalus trigranulatus Palmer, 1960a, pi. 8, figs. 21-23. Diagnosis.—Cranidium has short frontal area; sagittal length less than one-third length of glabella. Border furrow straight, deep. Occipital furrow has nearly constant depth. Border of pygidium extended into short broad posterolateral lobes, each generally having a row of three low coarse granules paralleling posterolateral margin. Discussion.—This species is characterized particularly by its short frontal area and lack of posterolateral pygidial spines. The occurrence of additional specimens from Cherry Creek, Nev., in the lower Elvinia zone increases the known stratigraphic range of the species. Occurrence. Rare, upper Dunderbergia zone: Eureka and Pahranagat Range, Nev.; lower Elvinia zone: Cherry Creek, Nev. Genus APHEI0T0X0N, n. gen. Type species.—Bynumiella % acuminata Palmer, 1960a, p. 93, pi. 10, fig. 9, 10. Description.—Small ptychopariid trilobites probably not exceeding 10 mm in total length. Cranidium subtriangular to subtrapezoidal, moderately convex transversely, gently convex longitudinally. Anterior margin straight or slightly pointed. Glabella subtriangular in outline, low, well to poorly defined by axial and preglabellar furrows. Occipital furrow moderately well defined, at least at distal ends. Occipital ring smooth or has median node or short spine. Two pairs of short glabellar furrows may be apparent; length of posterior pair about twice length of anterior pair. Frontal area short, either has or lacks well-defined convex border; sagittal length about one-fourth or less than one-fourth of glabella including occipital ring. Sagittal length of border equal to or greater than length of brim. Fixed cheek flat to moderately convex, downsloping; width between one-third and one-half glabellar width. Palpebral lobes small, poorly defined, situated opposite or slightly anterior to glabellar midlength. Ocular ridges generally not apparent. Posterior limb generally broad exsagittally, contains moderately well-defined posterior border furrow; tapered laterally to blunt point.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 79 Course of anterior section of facial suture nearly straight forward or slightly convergent anteriorly from palpebral lobe to border, then turned inward to cross border gradually, reaching anterior margin near axial line and continuing backward ventrally across doublure as median suture. Course of posterior section divergent, sinuous. Free cheek has moderately to strongly curved lateral margin. Border furrows poorly defined; width of border equal to or less than width of ocular platform. Genal spine short, little more than nub. Anterior part of doublure squarely truncate. Pygidium subtriangular to subsemicircular, moderately to strongly convex transversely and longitudinally. Axis prominent, moderately well defined anteriorly, tapered backward and merged with pleural regions near posterior margin. Ring furrows well defined only on anterior part; two to four deep narrow furrows present posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural regions very slightly furrowed, sides depressed; shallow closely spaced pleural and interpleural furrows may be slightly apparent. External surfaces of all parts smooth, coarsely pitted or finely granular. Discussion.—The triangular glabella, generally moderate to strong cephalic convexity, and the small eyes are particularly characteristic of this genus. Several species here assigned to it are found at various levels within the Dunderbergia zone. The genus has no apparent relationships to any other trilobites of the Pterocephaliid biomere, but it does have some similarity to Dresbachia, Menomonia, and Densonella of the earlier Upper Cambrian and to Clelandia from the Lower Ordovician. It differs from the earlier genera by having downsloping fixed cheeks, smaller eyes, and shorter posterior limbs and from Clelandia by having median cephalic suture and somewhat larger eyes. The type species, A. acuminata (Palmer), was first assigned with question to Bynumiella. Reexamination of the types and unillustrated paratypes of B. typicalis Resser shows that they actually belong to Clelandia and that Bynumiella is a synonym of Clelandia. The differences between Clelandia and Aphelotoxon are based on the observations of Ross (1951, p. 116). An indication of evolutionary relationships within the genus is given by collections from the Ruby Range, Nev. USGS collection 2601-CO contains distinctly pitted specimens that have a well-defined glabella and border are assignable to A. pmnctata n. sp. (pi. 19, fig. 2). About 150 feet higher in the section (USGS colln. 2605-CO), specimens assignable to A. acuminata have a poorly defined glabella and border and a smooth surface (pi. 19, fig. 3). Specimens from a col- lection (USGS colln. 2603-CO) taken from strata lying midway between the strata from which the foregoing collections were taken have a poorly defined border, moderately well defined glabella, and a moderately strong surface pitting (pi. 19, fig. 7). Individuals in other collections of A. acuminata may have shallow pits barely apparent on the fixed sheeks and posterior limbs. Thus A. acuminata seems to be a direct descendant of A. punctata. The other species do not show such a simple relationship to A. punctata, which seems to be the oldest species, but part of the ornamentation on a few individuals consists of large shallow pits. Aphelotoxon acuminata (Palmer) Plate 19, figures 1, 3-6 Bynumiella'} acuminata Palmer, 1960a, p. 93, pi. 10, figs. 9, 10; text fig. 21. Diagnosis.—Glabella barely outlined by axial and preglabellar furrows. Glabellar furrows not apparent. Occipital furrow may be deep at distal ends. Occipital ring has median node. Frontal area downsloping, barely differentiated into narrow brim and acuminate border; sagittal length of border about twice that of brim. Posterior section of facial suture nearly straight; posterior limb subtriangular. Fixed cheeks narrow, flat, downsloping; width slightly less than one-third basal glabellar width. Border of free cheek about one-half width of ocular platform. Lateral margin very curved. Pygidium has two distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. External surfaces of all parts generally smooth; low granules present on occipital ring and posterior part of posterior limb on some specimens; shallow pits present on fixed cheeks and posterior limbs of some specimens. Discussion.—This species is characterized particularly by its acuminate anterior margin and poorly defined cranidial furrows. It is most similar to A. lim-bata n. sp. and A. marginata n. sp., from which it differs in the features just cited. Occurrence. Moderately common, lower half of Dunderbergia zone: Eureka, Bastian Peak, McGill, Cherry Creek, Ruby Range, and Yucca Flat, Nev.; Deep Creek and House Ranges, Utah. Aphelotoxon granulosus n. sp. Plate 19, figures 21, 22 Diagnosis.—Glabella well defined by axial furrows, less well defined across front. Two pairs of distinct short lateral glabellar furrows present. Border narrow, convex, well defined by narrow border furrow;80 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN sagittal length slightly less than length of downsloping brim. Width of fixed cheeks about one-third basal glabellar width. Free cheek narrow; lateral border moderately well defined. Other parts not known. External surfaces of all known parts covered with fine closely spaced granules. Discussion.—This species is most easily distinguished by its ornamentation from all other species in the genus. The only other species having a significant granular ornamentation is A. marginata, which has scattered fine granules only on the cra-nidium and has shallower glabellar furrows and broader fixed cheeks than A. granulosus. Occurrence. Rare, Dunderbergia zone: Arizona Peak, Nev. Aphelotoxon limbata n. sp. Plate 19, figures 8, 10, 11 Diagnosis.—Glabella moderately well defined; two pairs of short glabellar furrows apparent. Frontal area subequally divided into brim and border. Anterior margin gently rounded. Occipital ring has low median node. Fixed cheeks narrow, flat, downsloping; width about one-third basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes moderately defined on some specimens. Posterior section of facial suture moderately bowed forward; posterior limb broad. Pygidium has three or four distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. External surfaces of all parts smooth. Discussion.—This species is most like A. acuminata (Palmer), differing in its less acute anterior margin, better defined axial and glabellar furrows, broader posterior limbs on the cranidium, and greater number of ring furrows on the axis of the pygidium. Occurrence. Rare, lower part of Dunderbergia zone: McGill, Nev.; House Range, Utah. Aphelotoxon marginata n. sp. Plate 19, figures 14, 16 Pinctusl sp., Palmer, 1960a, p. 101, pi. 10, fig. 21. Diagnosis.—Glabella moderately well to poorly defined by axial and preglabellar furrows. Two pairs of shallow glabellar furrows may be present. Occipital ring has median node. Border of frontal area well defined; sagittal length of border about equal to that of brim. Anterior margin gently rounded. Fixed cheeks gently convex, downsloping; width about one-half basal glabellar width. Posterior section of facial suture moderately curved forward; posterior limbs broad. External surface covered with scattered fine granules, which are apparent only after whitening. Discussion.—The single cranidium referred with question to Pinctus (Palmer, 1960a.) has the characteristics of Aphelotoxon; it has a subtriangular glabella, short frontal area, and small anteriorly placed palpebral lobes. The nearly smooth surface, broad fixed cheeks, and lack of an occipital spine indicate its placement in A. marginata n. sp. This species is most like A. limhata n. sp., from which it differs principally by having significantly broader fixed cheeks. This is presently the youngest species assigned to the genus. Occurrence. Rare, upper part of Dunderbergia zone: Eureka, McGill, Pahranagat Range, Spring Mountains, and Snake Range, Nev. Aphelotoxon punctata Palmer Plate 19, figures 2, 7 Diagnosis.—Glabella well defined by axial and preglabellar furrows; two pairs of well-defined glabellar furrows present. Border well defined by narrow border furrow on front of glabella; sagittal length about twice length of brim. Anterior margin gently rounded. Fixed cheeks moderately convex, downsloping; width about one-half basal glabellar width. Posterior section of facial stuture gently curved forward; posterior limb moderately broad. External surfaces of all known parts coarsely pitted. Discussion.—The coarsely pitted ornamentation, well-defined glabella and glabellar furrows, and convex fixed cheeks are particularly characteristic of this species, which seems to be the oldest in the genus (p. 79). Occurrence. Rare, lower part of Dunderbergia zone: Ruby Range, Nev. Aphelotoxon spinosus n. sp. Plate 19, figures 9, 12, 13 Diagnosis.—Glabella moderately well defined by axial and preglabellar furrows. Two pairs of distinct shallow glabellar furrows present. Occipital ring has short median spine. Frontal area has well-defined border; sagittal length of border about twice length of brim. Fixed cheeks nearly flat, downsloping; width slightly less than one-half basal glabellar width. Posterior section of facial suture gently curved; posterior limb subtriangular. Free cheek narrow; lateral margin strongly curved; width of border slightly greater than width of ocular platform. External surfaces of all parts generally smooth or very finely pitted. Free cheek has low terrace lines on outer part of border.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 81 Discussion.—The short occipital spine distinguishes this species from all others in the genus. The free cheek is distinctly narrower than that of A. acuminata. Occurrence. Rare, lower part of Dunderhergia zone: House Range and Wah Wah Range, Utah. Genus Bromella n. gen. Type species.—Bromella veritas n sp. Description.—^mall ptychopariid trilobites (total length probably less than 20 mm). Glabella prominent, tapered forward, truncated anteriorly, moderately convex transversely, gently convex longitudinally, well defined by axial and preglabellar furrows. Anterolateral fossulae present on some specimens. Glabellar furrows shallow. Occipital furrow deep, nearly straight. Occipital ring has median node; short spine may also be present at posterior edge. Frontal area short, concave, divided into downsloping brim and prominent upturned border. Sagittal length of frontal area about one-half that of glabella. Sagittal length of border about one-half that of brim. Fixed cheeks narrow, horizontal, or slightly upsloping; width one-third to one-fourth basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes well defined by moderately arcuate palpebral furrow, situated opposite or slightly anterior to glabellar midlength. Length of palpebral lobe slightly less than one-half glabellar length. Posterior limbs triangular in outline. Posterior border furrow straight, deep. Course of anterior section of facial suture straight forward or slightly divergent anteriorly from palpebral lobe to border furrow and curved inward across border to cut anterior margin about in front of anterolateral corner of glabella. Ventral course not known. Course of posterior section of facial suture divergent, sinuous. Lateral border of free cheek well defined by border furrow that is deep anteriorly but disappears before reaching base of genal spine. Posterior border furrow deep, extended onto base of genal spine. Pygidium transversely subovate to subquadrate. Axis short, prominent, contains two or three ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow; anterior furrow deep; other furrows shallow. Length of axis about two-thirds that of pygidium. Pleural regions gently convex, have broad poorly defined border tapered towards axis. Pleural fields about as wide as border, crossed by one or two shallow pleural furrows. External surfaces pitted, smooth, or finely granular. Discussion.—This genus of small trilobites has affinities with Aphelaspis, Dytremacephalus, and Prehousia. It may belong in the Aphelaspidinae because of the Aphelaspis-\\k& glabella and pygidium and the well- defined cranidial border, but its evolutionary relationships to the three genera it most closely resembles are obscure. It differs from Aphelaspis in having an upturned cranidial border and in lacking a connection of the lateral and posterior border furrows on the free cheek. Also the fixed cheeks are somewhat narrower and the palpebral lobes shorter than comparable-sized specimens of Aphelaspis. These features relate the genus to Prehousia, and the possibility that Bromella, which is generally associated with Prehousia, may merely include small holaspids of the earlier Prehousia species cannot be entirely eliminated. A similar degree of difference was noted in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a, p. 88) between small and large holaspids of early species of Pterocephalia. However, the prominence of the glabella and lack of connection of the lateral and posterior border furrows on the free cheeks of Bromella, together with its occurrence in association with Dicanthopyge guadrata n. sp. in one older collection, make the possibility unlikely. The features that distinguish Bromella from Prehousia are the ones that indicate possible affinity with Dytremacephalus. However, the glabella of Bromella is less tapered anteriorly and the glabellar furrows less well defined than those of Dytremacephalus. The possibility that Bromella may be ancestral to Dytremacephalus is compatible with the known stratigraphic distribution of the two genera, but more information is needed before this relationship can be stressed. Bromella veritas n. sp. Plate 18, figures 1-9 Diagnosis.—This is the only species presently recognized in Bromella, and it has the characteristics of the genus. Discussion.—More than one species may be included in B. veritas. Some specimens have a short occipital spine formed from the back of the occipital ring, as well as an occipital node (pi. 18, fig. 7), and have cranidia ornamented with both pits and fine granules. The reason that such specimens are not recognized as separate species is that specimens having both ornamentation types and either having or lacking the occipital spine are present in USGS collection 1439-CO from the Snake Eange, Nev. Until more can be learned about this difficult little genus, all specimens referable to it are assigned to its type species. Occurrence. Rare, Dicanthopyge zone: Highland Range, Nev. Moderately common, lower part of Prehousia zone; Snake Range, Shingle Pass, Highland Range, McGill, and Spring Mountains, Nev.; House Range, Fish Springs Range, and Promontory Range, Utah. 735-610 0-65-882 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASEST Genus BYNUMINA Resser Bynumina Resser, 1942b, p. 58; Wilson, 1951, p. 628; Lochman, 1959, p. 286; Palmer, 1960a, p. 93. Description.-—Small ptychopariid trilobites (probably not exceeding 10 mm in total length). Cranidium subtrapezoidal in outline, moderately convex transversely and longitudinally, generally lacks distinct external furrows. Exfoliated specimens have well-defined anteriorly tapered glabella, slightly rounded at front. Last two pairs of glabellar furrows, if present, strongly curved posteriorly. Occipital furrow deep, straight. Occipital ring narrow, tapered laterally. Frontal area length slightly greater than one-third length of remainder of cranidium; shallow border furrow, if present, separates brim and border of nearly equal sagittal length. Fixed cheek gently convex, downsloping; width, including palpebral lobe, about one-half basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes not differentiated from remainder of fixed cheek; length between one-third and one-fourth that of glabella including occipital ring. Posterior limbs broad exsagittally; transverse length less than that of basal glabellar width; tips bluntly rounded or pointed; border furrow apparent only near axial furrow. Discussion.—This genus is represented in the Great Basin only by rare cranidia. A full description has been presented in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a, p. 93). The foregoing description of the cranidium is given only because the statements concerning the fixed cheeks and palpebral lobes were inadvertently omitted from the earlier description. Bynumina globosa (Walcott) Plate 18, figures 22, 23 Agraulos'l globosa Walcott, 1884, p. 61, pi. 9, fig. 23. Kingstonia globosa (Walcott). Resser, 1936, p. 24. Bynumina globosa (Walcott). Palmer, 1960a, p. 94, pi. 10, fig. 8. Diagnosis.—Cranidium has glabella nearly parallel sided, subquadrate in outline, moderately to strongly convex longitudinally, highest at or slightly anterior to midlength. Length of palpebral lobes about one-third of glabella including occipital ring. Discussion.—This small smooth trilobite is a rare but persistent element of the Elvinia zone fauna. Its convex cranidium lacking well-defined parts but having an elevated glabellar area distinguishes it from all associated forms. A single cranidium from the Shingle Pass section (pi. 18 fig. 23) has more slender posterior limbs and a better defined occipital ring than do most other specimens assigned to the species and may represent another form. Occurrence. Rare, Elvinia zone: Eureka, Bastian Peak, Snake Range, (?) Shingle Pass, and Cherry Creek, Nev.; House Range, Utah. Genus COMANCHIA Frederickson Comanchia Frederickson, in Wilson and Frederickson, 1950, p. 900; Lochman, 1959, p. 252. Type species.—Ptychopleurites amplooculata Frederickson, 1948, p. 802, pi. 123, fig. 9-11. Description.—Small ptychopariid trilobites (maximum length about 30 mm). Cranidium, exclusive of posterior limbs, elongate subquadrate; anterior margin broadly rounded. Glabella elongate, well defined at sides by narrow axial furrows, tapered forward, strongly rounded at front, moderately convex transversely and longitudinally. Two or three pairs of glabellar furrows present; posterior pair most distinct, diagonal. Occipital furrow narrow, deepest at sides of glabella. Occipital ring has small low median node. Frontal area short; sagittal length about one-fourth length of glabella. Border distinct, flat or slightly convex, of nearly constant breadth; sagittal length equal to or greater than that of brim. Fixed cheeks narrow and horizontal or slightly upsloping. Palpebral lobes large, arcuate, well defined by palpebral furrow, situated about opposite glabellar mid-length; breadth about equal to that of fixed cheek; length about one-half that of glabella. Width of fixed cheek, one-fifth or less than one-fifth basal glabellar width. Posterior limbs slender, have deep straight posterior border furrow. Course of anterior section of facial suture divergent forward from palpebral lobe to border furrow, curved sharply inward and then diagonally across border to cut anterior margin about opposite anterolateral corners of glabella. Rostral suture submarginal; transverse length about equal to breadth of anterior part of glabella. Course of connective sutures and shape of rostral plate not known. Course of posterior section of facial suture divergent, sinuous. Free cheek has narrow lateral and posterior border furrows, jointed at acute angle near base of genal spine. Lateral border flat or gently convex; breadth at anterior margin about equal to breadth of ocular platform. Ocular platform broadens posteriorly. Distinct infraocular ring present. Genal spine flat, sharp; length equal to or slightly greater than length of posterior section of facial suture.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 83 Hypostome and thorax not known. Pygidium subsemicircular, moderately convex transversely and longitudinally. Axis prominent, slightly tapered posteriorly to inner edge of border. Two or three ring furrows present posterior to articulating furrow. Articulating half-ring of second axial segment generally well defined. Pleural regions have gently convex downsloping pleural field crossed by two or three shallow pleural furrows. Border nearly flat, narrower than pleural fields, tapered towards axial line, well defined at inner edge by sharp change in slope. External surfaces of all parts smooth or covered with very fine closely-spaced granules that are only very slightly visible even on whitened specimens. Discussion.—This distinctive genus has been found in association with Irvingella major Ulrich and Kesser in Oklahoma, Texas, Wisconsin, and Nevada. The well-defined glabella, large palpebral lobes, narrow fixed cheeks, short frontal area, and straplike posterior limbs distinguish species of Comanchia from all other trilobites in the Pterocephaliid biofacies. The principal new information about Comanchia that is presented here, concerns the free cheek, which is described for the first time, and more accurate information about the course of the anterior sections of the facial sutures based on study of some silicified specimens from Mount Hamilton, Nev. Comanchia minus n. sp. Plate 19, figures 15, 17-20 Diagnosis. — Sagittal length of cranidial border about twice length of brim. Pygidium has only two distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Discussion.—Pygidia of Comanchia amplooculata (Frederickson) from Wisconsin, Oklahoma, and Texas consistently have a distinct third ring furrow posterior to the articulating furrow. This is the principal feature that distinguishes them from pygidia of C. minus. In all other feature the species are virtually the same, except that the palpebral lobes of the Nevada specimens seem to be characteristically slightly less than one-half the glabellar length, whereas those of the specimens from Oklahoma and Texas are slightly more than one-half the glabellar length. The relatively broad border distinguishes this species from Comanchia prior Kurtz (1952), which seems also to be a somewhat older species. Occurrence. Moderately rare, uppermost part of Elvinia zone: Cherry Creek, McGill, Snake Range, Ruby Range, and Mount Hamilton, Nev. Genus DELLEA Wilson Dellea Wilson, 1949, p. 34; 1951, p. 634; Lochman, 1959, p. 306. Type species.—Dellea wilbemsensis Wilson, 1949, p. 35, pi. 11, figs. 1, 2, 4-7,12. Diagnosis.—Small Elviniidae ? probably less than 30 mm in total length. Cranidium has prominent glabella, well defined by axial and preglabellar furrows, tapered forward, bluntly rounded anteriorly. Occipital ring narrow, well defined by occipital furrow. Border of frontal area narrower than brim. Border furrow narrow, parallels curved anterior margin of cranidium. Fixed cheeks gently convex; width about one-third basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes moderately well defined by shallow slightly curved palpebral furrow situated opposite middle third of glabella. Posterior limb moderately broad exsagit-tally, pointed. Course of anterior section of facial suture straight forward or slightly divergent from palpebral lobe to border furrow, then curved inward across border to cut anterior margin about opposite anterolateral corners of glabella. Course of posterior section strongly divergent laterally from palpebral lobes, then curved backward to posterior margin. Border of free cheek narrower than ocular platform; lateral and posterior border furrows well defined, connected at genal angle. Genal spine slender, tapered to point; length between one and two times length of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium has prominent axis that is tapered slightly posteriorly and reaches to inner edge of poorly defined moderately broad, slightly concave border having nearly constant width. Two or three ring furrows present posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural regions crossed by two or three shallow pleural furrows. Discussion.—This genus includes small simple pty-chopariid species from the Elvinia zone that are difficult to differentiate, if found out of stratigraphic context, from similar small simple ptychopariids in older and younger faunas. Specimens possibly representing Dellea are not common in the Great Basin faunas and have not contributed any significant new information about the genus. Wilson (1951, p. 636) placed the type species, D. wilbemsensis, in synonymy with Ptychoparia suada Walcott (1890, p. 274), even though the holotype of D. wilbemsensis has a granular outer surface while that of P. suada has a smooth surface. Knowledge gained in the study of the Dunderberg fauna about the significance of external ornamentation indicates that in the simple trilobites such intraspecific variation is84 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN unlikely. Although P. suada and D. wilbemsensis may be congeneric, they are probably not conspecific. Dellea? punctata n. sp. Plate 3, figure 8 Diagnosis.—Known only from cranidia. Glabella bluntly rounded anteriorly; distinct small pits in axial furrows at anterolateral corners of glabella. Brim downsloping; sagittal length nearly twice that of slightly convex nearly horizontal border. Fixed cheeks narrow, slightly downsloping; width between one-third and one-fourth basal glabellar width. External surface covered with moderately coarse pits. Discussion.—This species is characterized particularly by its pitted ornamentation and the anterolateral pits adjacent to the bluntly rounded anterior end of the glabella. The generic assignment is questioned because of the glabellar outline, which is more quadrate than most species assigned to Dellea and more nearly like that of Deadwoodia. The palpebral lobes of species of Deadwoodia are relatively larger and more arcuate than those of D ? punctata, however, and the species is here considered to be more likely a representative of Dellea than Deadwoodia. Occurrence. Rare, upper part of Elvinia zone: Eureka and Cherry Creek, Nev. Genus Dytremacephalus Palmer Dytremacephalus Palmer, 1954, p. 749; Lochman, 1959, p. 258. Type species.—Dytremacephalus granulosus Palmer, 1954, p. 750, pi. 85, figs. 5,6. Description.—Small Elviniidae( ?) (total length probably not exceeding 20 mm). Cranidium has glabella well defined by deep axial furrows and somewhat shallower preglabellar furrow, moderately tapered forward, bluntly rounded anteriorly, moderately convex transversely, gently to moderately convex longitudinally. Anterolateral corners generally marked by distinct pits in axial furrows; distance between pits about one-half basal glabellar width. Two or three short deep glabellar furrows generally present. Occipital furrow straight, deep. Occipital ring has distinct median node. Frontal area strongly depressed laterally. Border well defined by narrow generally shallow border furrow, convex; sagittal length generally less than length of convex brim. Anterior margin of cranidium gently to moderately rounded. Fixed cheeks narrow, convex, horizontal or slightly upslop-ing; width between one-third and one-half basal glabellar width. Distinct eye ridges generally present, directed nearly at right angles to axial line. Palpebral lobes well defined by nearly straight palpebral fur- rows, situated opposite or slightly anterior to glabellar midlength; exsagittal length slightly more than one-half glabellar length on specimens having glabellar length less than 2 mm, slightly less than one-half glabellar length on larger specimens. Posterior limbs subtriangular, sharp pointed. Posterior border furrow deep. Course of anterior section of facial sutures straight forward or slightly divergent from palpebral lobe to border furrow, turned inward across border to cut anterior margin about opposite anterolateral corners of glabella, then curved backward across doublure. Bostral plate subquadrate. Transverse width greater than sagittal length. Ends indented by sharp curve to fit anterior ends of doublure of free cheek. Lateral border furrow of free cheek shallow, disappears posteriorly before reaching base of genal spine. Posterior border furrow relatively deep, continued backward onto base of genal spine before disappearing. Genal spine short, sharp; length less than length of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium subsemicircular. Axis differentiated from pleural regions by sharp change in slope; axis moderately elevated anteriorly, becoming progressively lower posteriorly, reaching to inner edge of narrow poorly defined border. One or two ring furrows generally present posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural regions crossed by one or two shallow pleural furrows reaching to inner edge of border. Thorax and hypostome not known. Discussion.—Most of the definitive features of this genus of small trilobites and its included species are on the cranidium. The relatively large anteriorly tapered glabella having distinct glabellar furrows, the generally well-defined anterolateral pits in the axial furrows, and the well-defined narrow cranidial border are the most distinctive features. When the genus was first proposed (Palmer, 1954), the well-defined pits in the axial furrows at the anterolateral corners of the glabella seemed to be the most distinctive feature of the genus. This characteristic taken alone may be misleading, however (see Aphelas-pis haguei, pi. 9 fig. 24). Dytremacephalus was first believed to be related to Aphelaspis (Palmer, 1954, p. 750), principally because of the similarity of D. laevis Palmer, known only from cranidia, to some Aphelaspis cranidia. Although this relationship seems to be a reasonable possibility for D. laevis, D. granulosus and D. asperaxis n. sp., both represented by many silicified individuals in addition to limestone specimens, seem to be related to the Elviniidae. This relationship is shown particularlySYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY in the structure of the frontal area, which has a narrow convex border, and in the rostral plate, which is transversely subquadrate. When more is learned about the morphology of D. laevis, it may be removed from Dytremacephalus. Therefore, the genus is here tentatively related to the Elviniidae, although assignment to either of the common subfamilies, the Elvin-iinae or Dokimocephalinae, does not seem appropriate. Dytremacephalus granulosus Palmer Plate 18, figures 14, 16-19, 21 Dytremacephalus granulosus Palmer, 1954, p. 750, pi. 85, figs. 5, 6. Diagnosis.—Cranidium has moderately convex horizontal fixed cheeks; palpebral lobes situated slightly anterior to glabellar midlength. Line connecting anterior ends of palpebral lobes passes over frontal lobe of glabella on cranidia longer than 3 mm, tangent to front of glabella on smaller specimens. External surfaces of all parts covered with closely spaced fine granules. Surfaces of molds smooth. Discussion.—This is the oldest of the two named species from the Great Basin. It differs from D. as-peraxis, which is probably its direct descendant, by having granular ornamentation on all parts rather than confined to the top of the glabella. Several incomplete cranidia in USGS collection 2313-CO from the Prehousia zone at Shingle Pass, Nev., have a granular ornamentation and seem to belong to Dytre-macephalus. They differ from D. granulosus by having more posteriorly placed palpebral lobes and may represent an older species. Better material is needed before this older species can be characterized and illustrated, however. Occurrence. Moderately common, basal part of Dunder-bergia zone: Bastian Peak, Snake Range, Eureka(?), and Spring Mountains, Nev.; House Range, Utah. Dytremacephalus asperaxis n. sp. Plate 18, figures 10-13 Diagnosis.—Cranidium has moderately convex horizontal fixed cheeks. Palpebral lobes situated opposite or slightly anterior to glabellar midlength. External surface has distinct closely spaced granular ornamentation that is generally confined to top of glabella and a few scattered granules on other parts. Surface of mold smooth. Discussion.—This species is most easily recognized by the presence of a distinct ornamentation on the top of the glabella only. On some specimens, the granules 85 are somewhat merged so that the surface appears coarsely pitted rather than granular. Occurrence. Moderately common, lower and middle parts of Dunderbergia zones Bastian Peak, McGill, Cherry Creek, Grant Range and Eureka, Nev. Genus LISTROA Palmer Listroa Palmer, 1962b, p. 40. Tune species.—Listroa toxoura Palmer, 1962b, p. 41, pi. 6, figs. 5, 8-10. Diagnosis.—Pterocephaliinae ? (total length less than 40 mm). Cranidium has obscurely furrowed well-defined glabella; border moderately broad, flat, or slightly concave; fixed cheeks nearly horizontal; eye ridges moderately well defined, directed posterolat-erally from junction with dorsal furrow; anterior sections of facial sutures diverge forward from palpebral lobes and cut anterior margin at a distinct angle. Free cheek has broad poorly defined nearly flat border. Lateral and posterior border furrows joined, extend short distance onto genal spine. Pygidium has short prominent posteriorly tapered axis bearing two or three ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow; tip somewhat elevated. Pleural regions moderately to strongly convex. Broad poorly defined border downsloping or depressed. Posterior margin has moderate to strong median identation. Discussion.—The slightly flared frontal area and broad flat or only slightly convex border on the cranidium combined with the downsloping border and posterior median notch of the pygidium distinguish this genus from other pterocephaliid trilobites. It is closely related to Aphelaspis and the Aphelaspidinae through L. longifrons (Palmer), but the structure of the cranidial border of L. toxoura Palmer is more like that of the Pterocephalinae. For these reasons L. toxoura is considered to be a possible ancestor for the later genera of the Pterocephaliinae. Listroa toxoura Palmer Plate 11, figures 1-5 Listroa toxoura Palmer, 1962b, p. 41, pi. 6, figs. 5, 8-10. Diagnosis.—Cranidial border nearly flat, slightly downsloping, makes gentle angle with brim. Sagittal length of frontal area generally not greater than three-fourths length of glabella. Pygidium has two or three distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Discussion.—This species is characteristically associated with Aphelaspis subdiPus Palmer, A. haguei (Hall and Whitfield), and Olenaspella regularis Palmer in the upper part of the Aphelaspis zone. Rare86 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN occurrences of the species have been noted, however, from the younger Dicanthopyge zone. Variation in the degree of transverse convexity of the pygidium of this species (pi. 11 figs. 3, 4) is probably due to differential compaction. The combination of a median notch and a narrow pygidial doublure along the axis makes the axial line a line of weakness along which the pygidium was easily folded. Variable features that are not attributable to diagenetic distortion are the degree of definition of glabellar furrows and ring furrows on the pygidium. The only other species presently assigned to Listroa is L. longifrons (Palmer 1954) from the Aphelaspis zone in central Texas. It differs from L. toxoura by having a greater angle between the brim and border, a longer frontal area, and generally one less ring furrow on the axis of the pygidium. Occurrence. Moderately common, upper part of Aphelaspis zone: McGill, Cherry Creek, Tybo, Mount Hamilton district, and Highland Range, Nev. Rare, Dicanthopyge zone; Yucca Flat, Nev. Genus MINUPELTIS Palmer Minupeltis Palmer, 1960a, p. 98. Type species. — Minupeltis conservator Palmer, 1960a, p. 98, pi. 10, figs. 11, 12. Description.—Small trilobites (total length probably less than 10 mm). Cranidium subquadrate, gently convex transversely and longitudinally. Glabella prominent, tapered forward; axial furrows at sides bowed slightly outward. Glabellar furrows barely apparent. Occipital furrow straight, narrow. Occipital ring has low median node situated near occipital furrow. Frontal area downsloping; sagittal length slightly less than one-half that of glabella. Brim flat, downsloping. Border convex, nearly horizontal adjacent to shallow border furrow, depressed at margin. Sagittal length of border equal to or greater than length of brim. Fixed cheek gently convex, downsloping; width one-third or slightly more than one-third basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes barely differentiated from cheek, situated about opposite glabellar midlength; length about one-third that of glabella. Posterior limbs short, bluntly pointed; transverse length about two-thirds basal glabellar width. Posterior border furrow straight, shallow. Course of anterior section of facial suture nearly straight forward from palpebral lobe to border furrow, then curved abruptly inward across border to cut anterior margin between axial line and point opposite anterolateral corner of glabella. Posterior section nearly straight posterolaterally from palpebral lobe to border furrow, then curved backward to posterior margin. Free cheek, hypostome, thoracic segments, and pygidium not known. External surfaces of all parts smooth. Discussion.—This genus is characterized by its downsloping fixed cheeks and frontal area, poorly defined palpebral lobes, and short triangular posterior limbs. With the discovery of a second species, M. de-finita n. sp., the generic description has been rewritten to exclude those characteristics now known to pertain only to the type species, M. conservator Palmer. No other trilobite in the Peterocephaliid biomere of the Great Basin resembles this genus closely, and its su-prageneric affinities remain uncertain. Minupeltis conservator Palmer Plate 18, figure 15 Minupeltis conservator Palmer, 1960a, p. 98, pi. 10, figs. 11, 12. Diagnosis.—Glabella not defined at front. Frontal area has border furrow, if distinct, shallow, evenly curved, and more or less constant in depth. Sagittal length of border about equal to that of brim. Discussion.—This species differs most distinctly from M. dejinita n. sp. in the subequal relationship of the brim and border and the poor definition of the front of the glabella. Occurrence. Rare, middle part of Dunderhergia zone: Eureka and Ash Meadows, Nev.; Panamint Range, Calif. Minupeltis definita n. sp. Plate 18, figure 20 Diagnosis.—Glabella distinctly defined at front by shallow preglabellar furrow. Frontal area has border furrow distinctly shallower on axial line than at sides. Sagittal length of border nearly twice that of brim. Discussion.—This species is distinguished from M. conservator Palmer principally by its better defined glabella and relatively broader border. Occurrence. Rare, lower part of Dunderhergia zone: Cherry Creek and Spring Mountains, Nev. Genus M0R0SA Palmer Morosa Palmer, 1960a, p. 98. Type species.—Morosa longispina Palmer, 1960a, p. 99, pi. 10, figs. 15-17, text-fig. 22. Diagnosis.—Pterocephaliidae ? having axial length of frontal area between one-third and one-half length of glabella. Frontal area subequally divided into well-defined brim and border. Border tapered laterally to a point just before, or at, anterolateral corner ofSYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 87 cranidium. Anterior margin in front view nearly horizontal ; course of border furrow in front view strongly bowed upward. Glabella well defined; glabellar furrows barely visible. Fixed cheeks narrow, gently convex, nearly horizontal; width between one-third and one-fourth basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes prominent, situated about opposite or slightly anterior to glabellar midlength. Occipital ring has prominent node or short spine at posterior margin. Free cheek has narrow border. Lateral and posterior marginal furrows moderately well defined, not joined at genal angle, disappear into base of flat slender genal spine. Pygidium has prominent axis extending to inner edge of moderately wide slightly concave poorly defined border of nearly constant width. External surfaces of all parts except over glabellar muscle-attachment areas distinctly and moderately coarsely pitted. Surface of mold smooth or pitted. Discussion.-—When this genus was first proposed, its affinities with the Housiidae (here a subfamily of the Pterocephaliidae) were suggested because of the anteriorly situated palpebral lobes and the even width of the pygidial border. However, the structure of the frontal area was pointed out to be distinctly atypical of the Housiidae, and Morosa was not assigned to a su-prageneric taxon. The addition of more species, particularly Morosa extensa, has reaffirmed that the general glabellar structure indicates a possible relationship of the genus to the Peterocephaliidae, but no close relationship to any of the subfamilies is apparent. Cranidia of Morosa are best recognized by the even lateral taper of the convex anterior border that becomes nearly absent at the anterolateral cranidial corners. Morosa brevispina n. sp. Plate 20, figures 15, 16, 20 Diagnosis.—Crandium has glabella broad-based, moderately tapered forward; width of fixed cheeks between one-fourth and one-fifth basal glabellar width. Free cheek has lateral and posterior border furrows joined at genal angle; posterior part of ocular platform gently to moderately convex; length of genal spine about equal to length of posterior section of facial suture. Axis of pygidium slightly tapered posteriorly; border nearly flat, gently downsloping; terrace lines present only near margin. Discussion.—This species, although comparable in size to M. longispina Palmer, differs by having slightly narrower fixed cheeks, a distinctly shorter genal spine, less tumid posterior part of the ocular platform on the free cheek, and a less downsloping pygidial border that has terrace lines only on its outer part. It differs from M. extensa n. sp. by having much narrower fixed cheeks and a much shorter genal spine on the free cheek. Occurrence. Rare, Dunderbergia zone: Quartz spring area and Death Valley, Calif.; Tybo, Nev. Morosa extensa n. sp. Plate 20, figures 21-25 Diagnosis.—Cranidium has glabella slightly tapered forward; width of fixed cheeks about one-third basal glabellar width. Free cheek has shallow lateral and posterior border furrows; posterolateral part of ocular platform gently convex; length of genal spine about twice length of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium has axis gently tapered posteriorly; border gently downsloping. Discussion.—This species differs from M. longispina particularly by having wider fixed cheeks and by lacking a distinct hump at the posterolateral corner of the ocular platform of the free cheek. In addition, the axis of the pygidium is less tapered posteriorly, the border is less downsloping, and the distinct terrace lines characteristic of M. longispina are lacking. M. extensa is also a larger species. Cranidia have been observed that are nearly twice as large as any assigned to M. longispina. The small specimens of M. extensa illustrated show that differences between the species are not primarily those of size (refer to pi. 20, figs. 24, 25). This species superficially resembles Cemuolimbus depressus Palmer (p. 69). It differs, however, by having smaller more anteriorly placed palpebral lobes, a convex rather than concave border, and less anteriorly divergent facial sutures. Occurrence. Rare, lower part of Dunderbergia zone: Ruby Range and Yucca Flat, Nev. Morosa longispina Palmer Plate 20, figures 17-19 Morosa longispina Palmer, 1960a, p. 99, pi. 10, figs. 15-17, text figure 22. Diagnosis.—Cranidium has glabella broad based, moderately tapered forward. Width of fixed cheeks about one-fourth basal glabellar width. Free cheek has moderately well defined lateral and posterior border furrows; posterolateral corners of ocular platform distinctly humped; length of genal spine about twice length of posterior section of facial suture. Pygidium has axis moderately tapered posteriorly. Border mod-88 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN erately to steeply downsloping, covered with distinct terrace lines. Discussion.—The structure of the free cheek and the ornamentation of the pygidial border are the most distinctive features of this species. Differences between M. longispina and M. extensa n. sp. are discussed under M. extensa. Occurrence. Common, middle part of Dunderbergia zone: Eureka, Nev. Genus STENAMBON n. gen. Type species.—Stenambon megagranulus n. sp. Diagnosis.—Aphelaspidinae ? in which the cranid-ium has a well-defined narrow convex border; sagittal length distinctly less than length of brim. Glabella has two or three pairs of well-defined nearly straight glabellar furrows; posterior pair inclined backward at about 45° to axial furrow. Occipital furrow deep, narrow at sides of glabella, shallow on axial line. Fixed cheeks narrow, nearly horizontal; width one-third to one-fifth basal glabellar width, narrowest on large specimens. Eye ridges prominent, directed abruptly backward at about 30° to axial line. Palpebral lobes well defined, less than one-half glabellar length on larger specimens, situated slightly posterior to glabellar midlength. Posterior limbs slender, sharp-pointed. Pygidium subovate. Axis prominent, tapered, bears three or four ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Pleural regions crossed by three or four well-defined pleural furrows, curved abruptly backward near outer edge of pleural field and extended straight back nearly across broad nearly flat border. Posterior margin has moderately to well formed median notch. Description.—Small aphelaspinid ? trilobites (maximum estimated length 30 mm). Cranidium, exclusive of posterior limbs, elongate and subquadrate in outline, gently convex transversely and longitudinally. Glabella well defined at sides by axial furrows, less well defined anteriorly, tapered slightly forward, bluntly rounded at front. Two or three pairs of glabellar furrows present; posterior two pairs deep, narrow, nearly straight; posterior pair inclined at about 45 degree to axial furrow. Occipital furrow deep, narrow at sides of glabella, shallow on axial line. Frontal area gently downsloping. Brim flat. Border narrow, convex, constant in width, well defined by deep narrow evenly curved border furrow; sagittal length about one-half or less than one-half length of brim; border broadest on larger specimens. Fixed cheeks narrow, nearly horizontal; width between one-third and one-fifth basal glabellar width, narrowest on larger specimens. Eye ridges well defined, directed strongly backward, makes angle of about 30 degree with axial furrow. Palpebral lobes well defined, situated slightly posterior to glabellar midlength; length slightly less than one-half glabellar length, shortest on larger specimens. Posterior limbs slender, have broad shallow medially located posterior border furrow and narrow articulating flange along posterior margin. Anterior section of facial suture directed antero-laterally from palpebral lobe to border furrow, then curved inward across border to anterior margin near anterolateral corners of cranidium; remainder of course not known. Posterior section divergent, sinuous. Free cheek, thoracic segments and hypostome not known. Pygidium subovate. Axis prominent, tapered posteriorly, reaches to inner edge of border, bears three or four ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Slender, low postaxial ridge present. Pleural regions gently convex. Pleural fields separated from border by straight shallow furrow. Three or four pleural furrows extend laterally parallel to each other nearly to outer edge of pleural field, then curve abruptly backward and continue most of distance across border. Border broad, nearly flat; width at posterolateral margin about equal to greatest width of pleural field. Posterior margin has moderate to well-formed median notch. External surfaces of cranidium and pygidium partly or wholly covered with closely spaced granules. Discussion.—This genus differs from most Aphelaspidinae by having well-defined glabellar furrows, which, together with the narrow fixed cheeks and posteriorly placed palpebral lobes, are its most distinguishing characteristics. An unusual feature is the well-defined articulating flange along the posterior edge of the posterior limb (pi. 11, fig. 18). Stenambon. megagranulus n. sp. Plate 11, figures 17, 19 Diagnosis.—Cranidium and pygidium distinctly and generally fully covered by abundant moderate to coarse closely spaced granules. Pygidium has four distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow; median notch in border moderately deep. Discussion.—This species differs from 8. paucigra-nulus by having a much more distinct ornamentation and a deeper median notch on the pygidium. Occurrence. Rare, uppermost part of Elvinia zone: Eureka, McGill, and Ruby Range, Nev. Stenambon paucigranulus n. sp. Plate 11, figures 12, 16, 18 Diagnosis.—External surfaces of cranidium and pygidium obscurely ornamented by scattered granules.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 89 Some large cranidia have scattered large pits on glabella and cheeks, each pit having a small central granule. Pygidium has three distinct ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Posterior median notch broad, shallow. Discussion.—This species is a much less highly ornamented form than is S. megagranulus n. sp., has one less ring furrow on the pygidial axis, and has a shallower median notch. Occurrence. Rare, uppermost part of Elvinia zone: Cherry Creek and Snake Range, Nev. Genus TAENORA Palmer Taenora Palmer, 1960a, p. 84. Type species.—Taenora expansa Palmer, 1960a, p. 84, pi. 7, figs. 20-23. Diagnosis.—Aphelaspidinae? in which the cranid-ium has a well-defined flat or slightly concave border of nearly constant breadth. Fixed cheeks flat, horizontal ; width less than one-third basal glabellar width. Anterior course of facial suture moderately divergent forward from palpebral lobe to marginal furrow, intramarginal along most of anterior margin; it cuts anterior margin nearly imperceptibly near axial line. Free cheek has moderately broad and flat or slightly concave border; lateral and posterior marginal furrows joined at base of genal spine, extended for short distance onto spine. Genal spine relatively short; length less than that of ocular platform. Pygidium transversely subovate in shape and has poorly defined flat or concave border, either having or lacking slight median indentation. Axial lobe prominent, merged posteriorly with inner part of border. All furrows on pygidium shallow. Discussion.—This is another rare genus, like Lito-cephalus, that seems to be found in only the more westerly Cambrian sections of Nevada. It is characterized by its nearly flat cranidial border of almost constant breadth and by its simple generally transverse pygidium. Besides the occurrences in the Eureka district, specifically indeterminate specimens probably representing Taenora have been identified in collections from the upper part of the Dunderbergia zone at Cherry Creek, Nev. Taenora expansa Palmer Plate 11, figures 6, 10, 11 Taenora expansa Palmer, 1960a, p. 84, pi. 7, figs. 20-23. Diagnosis.—Sagittal length of border almost twice length of brim. Palpebral lobes relatively short, about one-third length of glabella. Glabella has moderately well defined glabellar furrows; posterior pair on many specimens Y-shaped. Border of free cheek moderately broad, well defined, distinctly narrowed near base of genal spine. Pygidium short, wide, has distinct median indentation. Discussion.—T. expansa is a rare element of the Dunderbergia zone faunas that can be distinguished from associated trilobites by its characteristic cranidial border and its transverse pygidium that has a slight median notch in the posterior margin. Occurrence. Rare, Dunderbergia zone: Eureka and Yucca Flat, Nev. Genus TUMICEPHALtrS n. gen. Type species.—Tumicephalus depressus n. sp. Diagnosis.—Housiinae ? having tumid brim on cephalon. Lateral and posterior border furrows on free cheeks not joined at genal angle. Pygidium short, broad, subtriangular; axis prominent, broad, tapered posteriorly, reaches nearly to posterior margin. Axial preglabellar border and occipital furrows on cranid-ium and border furrows on cheeks and pleural furrows of thoracic segments characteristically covered with fine to coarse pitted ornamentation, at least on larger specimens. Description. — Cranidium elongate subquadrate, moderately convex longitudinally, gently to moderately convex transversely. Glabella straight-sided, tapered forward, truncate anteriorly. Glabellar furrows not apparent on external surface. Occipital furrow deep on axial line, shallow or absent at sides of glabella. Occipital ring has low node situated slightly anterior to midlength on axial line. Frontal area divided intc brim and border by sharp change in slope, either has or lacks accompanying shallow border furrow. Brim tumid, causes border to be moderately bowed forward; length one-half or slightly less than one-half that of glabella. Border moderately convex; length between one-third and one-half length of brim. Fixed cheeks horizontal or slightly upslop-ing; width between one-third and one-half basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes poorly defined, arcuate, situated slightly anterior to glabellar midlength. Eye ridges lowq poorly defined. Posterior limbs subtriangular, broad-based, tapered to sharp point. Posterior border furrow broad, shallow. Course of anterior section of facial suture slightly divergent forward from palpebral lobe to border furrow, then turned abruptly inward to cross border and cut anterior margin near axial line. Rostral suture submarginal. Connective sutures convergent backward towards axial line. Course of posterior section of facial90 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN suture nearly straight from palpebral lobe to posterior margin of cephalon. Free cheek has gently curved lateral margin. Genal spine moderately long, straight, slender. Lateral border furrow shallow, disappears posteriorly. Posterior border furrow broad, moderately deep, disappears laterally. Tip of anterior extension of doublure truncate. Hypostome indistinguishable from that of Aphelas-pis. Thoracic segments have short, sharp posterolaterally directed tips. Pleural furrows broad, moderately deep, extended nearly to tip of segment. Number of segments not known. Pygidium subtriangular; length slightly less than one-half width. Axis prominent, broad, tapered posteriorly, reaches nearly to posterior margin. One to three shallow ring furrows present posterior to articulating furrow, impressed only on top of axis. Pleural regions gently convex. Border poorly defined, narrow, flat. Pleural furrows shallow or absent. External surfaces of all parts, except furrows of cephalon and thorax, generally smooth. Furrows on all parts except pygidium of many specimens covered with ornamentation of abundant fine to coarse pits. Surfaces of molds of all parts pitted. Discussion.—This genus is tentatively assigned to the Housiinae because of the character of the border furrows of the free cheek and the poor definition and anterior placement of the palpebral lobes. These features distinguish Tumicephalus from all genera of the Aphelaspidinae, although the relationship of the genus to trilobites of this subfamily of the Pterocephaliidae is apparent in the shapes of the glabella and pygidium. Tumicephalus differs most strikingly from other genera of the Housiinae by having a tumid brim. The small pygidium having a large prominent axis and a narrow border is also unlike pygidia of other genera in the subfamily. Two species are presently recognized: T. tumifrons (Resser) from the southern Appalachians and T. depressus n. sp. from the Great Basin region. Tumicephalus depressus n. sp. Plate 13, figures 19-23 Diagnosis.—Axial furrows along sides of glabella well defined, deepest opposite palpebral lobes. Pre-glabellar furrow moderately deep. Fixed cheeks consistently upsloping. Lateral border furrow of free cheek moderately well defined. Pygidium has axis bearing only one shallow ring furrow posterior to articulating furrow; pleural regions lack apparent pleural or border furrows. Discussion.—This species differs from T. tumifrons (Resser) in all the foregoing features. In addition, the pitted ornamentation of the furrows is generally better defined, when present, than it is on the eastern species. T. depressus is characteristically associated with species of Dicanthopyge throughout the Great Basin region. Occurrence. Common, Dicanthopyge zone: Snake Range, McGill, Cherry Creek, Shingle Pass, Ruby Range, and Muddy Mountains, Nev.; Deep Creek and House Ranges, Utah. Genus XEN0CHEIL0S Wilson Xenocheilos Wilson, 1949, p. 43; Lochman, 1959, p. 283. Type species.—Xenocheilos minutum Wilson, 1949, p. 44, pi. 9, figs. 11-13. Description.—Menomoniidae ? having prominent glabella well defined by axial and preglabellar furrows, subparallel sided or tapered slightly forward, generally appearing sunken below adjacent parts of fixed cheeks and frontal area. Two or three pairs of short glabellar furrows may be present adjacent to axial furrows; anterior pair only very slightly apparent on all specimens; posterior pairs shallow or deep. Occipital ring well defined, has median node or spine. Frontal area gently to strongly convex in sagittal profile, divided into distinct brim and border; sagittal length one-half or more than one-half length of glabella. Sagittal length of border less than length of brim. Fixed cheek gently convex, horizontal, or slightly upsloping and one-half or more than one-half basal glabellar width. Distinct eye ridges generally present. Palpebral lobes small, convex, prominent, well defined in posterior part only, situated on line through second pair of glabellar furrows. Posterior limbs long, slender, directed straight laterally or backswept; transverse length greater than basal glabellar width. Posterior border furrow deep. Course of anterior section of facial suture nearly straight forward or slightly convergent from palpebral lobe onto border, then turned inward across border to cut anterior margin about in front of anterolateral corners of glabella. Ventral course not known. Course of posterior section nearly straight posterolaterally, slightly curved backward distally. Free cheek has well-defined lateral and posterior border furrows joined at genal angle and extended onto base of long slender genal spine. Border convex; width about one-third width of ocular platform at anterior margin. Infraocular ring large, prominent; breadth nearly equal to height of surface of eye. Length of genal spine slightly less than twice length of posterior section of facial suture.SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY 91 External surfaces of most parts either smooth or have scattered coarse granules. Border of cranidium and free cheek may have distinct terrace lines. Discussion.—The glabellas of X. granulosus n. sp. and X. minutus Wilson, the type species, taper slightly forward and have short deep lateral furrows adjacent to the axial furrows; this form is characteristic of many genera of the Menomoniidae and is the reason for tentatively placing Xenocheilos in the family. Xenocheilos is unlike any other genus in the Ptero-cephaliid biomere. It is most similar to Bolaspidella, a Middle Cambrian genus that is one of the less specialized forms in the Menomoniidae. Xenocheilos differs from Bolaspidella most significantly in having a glabella slightly depressed below the inner parts of the brim and fixed cheeks and in having a wholly different course for the posterior section of the facial suture. In Bolaspidella, the posterior section of the facial suture curves around the tip of the posterior limb so that it is directed inward, where it cuts the posterior margin of the cephalon, resulting in a broad rounded notch in the free cheek. Xenocheilos granulosus n. sp. Plate 7, figures 6-8 Diagnosis.—Glabella tapered forward, slightly flared at base, has two deep short pairs of glabellar furrows adjacent to axial furrow. Occipital ring has well defined median spine curved upward and backward; length of spine slightly less than length of glabella. Fixed cheeks relatively narrow, slightly up-sloping; width about one-half basal glabellar width. Brim strongly convex in sagittal profile; anterior part nearly vertical. Border moderately convex, at right angles to brim in sagittal profile; sagittal length about one-half length of brim. Posterior limb slender, tapered to sharp point, not backswept. Free cheek, as described for genus. External surfaces of most parts have scattered low coarse granules. Border on cranidium and free cheek has distinct terrace lines. Discussion.—This species is most like X. minutum Wilson in general appearance. It differs by having an occipital spine, granular external ornamentation, narrower fixed cheeks, and posterior limbs that are not distinctly backswept. Wilson (1951, p. 649) reported that V. E. Kurtz found free cheeks of Xenocheilos in Missouri that have long slender genal spines. Kurtz’ specimens have not yet been illustrated, and comparison with specimens of X. granulosus cannot be made. Wilson’s report, indicates, however, that free cheeks of the general type described here for Xenocheilos on the basis of specimens associated with X. granulosus are probably characteristic of other species in the genus. Occurrence. Rare, upper part of Elvinia zone : Eureka and Shingle Pass, Nev. Genus and species undetermined 1 Plate 2, figure 15 Description.—Cranidium has prominent glabella moderately to strongly convex transversely, moderately convex longitudinally, well defined at sides by deep axial furrows and across front by slightly less deep preglabellar furrow. Two or three pairs of moderately deep lateral glabellar furrows present; posterior pair deepest and at distinct angle to axial furrow. Occipital furrow broad, deep; occipital ring moderately convex, has distinct median node. Frontal area subequally divided into gently convex brim and moderately convex border by moderately deep nearly straight border furrow; sagittal length about one half that of glabella. Fixed cheeks moderately convex; width about one-half basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes well defined by arcuate palpebral furrow, situated about opposite glabellar midlength; length about three-eighths that of glabella. Surfaces of all parts of mold covered with scattered coarse granules. Discussion.—This species is known from only a few incomplete exfoliated cranidia in two collections from the Aphelaspis zone. It seems to be most closely related to the Elviniidae, particularly the Dokimocepha-linae, in the form of the glabellar furrows fixed cheeks and border, and the ornamentation. Its presence in the Aphelaspis zone is further evidence that the Elviniidae was already a separate evolutionary stock from the Pterocephaliidae by the time the trilobites of the Pterocephaliid biomere first appeared in the Great Basin area. Occurrence. Rare, Aphelaspis zone: Tybo, Nev. Genus and species undetermined 2 Plate 3, figure 15 Description.—Pygidium subsemicircular, moderately convex transversely and longitudinally. Axis prominent, tapered strongly backward, bears two distinct rings and a distinct terminal piece of about equal sagittal length; sagittal length of axis about three-fourths length of pygidium. Pleural regions convex, about equal in width to axis, crossed by two moderately deep pleural furrows and two shallower interpleural furrows that disappear before reaching margin; margin nearly vertical. No distinct border. Surface covered with scattered coarse granules.92 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Discussion.—This distinctive pygidium cannot be associated with certainty with any identified trilobites. It is known from two collections of about the same age that lack any common species of granular trilobites. However, one collection has ApacMa butlerensis (Frederickson) and the other has Pseudosaratogia lep-togranulatal Palmer, both granular forms representing the Dokimocephalinae. Occurrence. Rare, uppermost part of Dunderbergia zone: Bastian Peak and Shingle Pass, Nev. Genus and species undetermined 3 Plate 3, figure 17 Description.—Cranidium, excluding posterior limbs, subquadrate; sagittal length only about two-thirds width at palpebral lobes. Glabella prominent, tapered forward, well defined by axial and preglabellar furrows, has three moderately distinct pairs of lateral glabellar furrows. Occipital furrow deep. Occipital ring has distinct median node. Frontal area short; sagittal length slightly less than half length of glabella ; area subequally divided into gently convex brim and strongly convex, nearly straight border. Border furrow deep, nearly straight. Fixed cheeks broad, moderately convex, nearly horizontal; width about two-thirds basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes situated about opposite glabellar midlength; form not known. Distinct straight ocular ridges present. Surface of mold covered with closely spaced moderately coarse granules. Discussion.—This species is represented by a single cranidium that differs from all others in the fauna by being much wider than long. Decker a (Frederickson, 1949) is a genus of somewhat similar trilobites that differ from the form described here by having steeply upsloping fixed cheeks and palpebral lobes that are situated opposite the posterior part of the glabella. Occurrence. Rare, Dunder'bergia zone: Bastian Peak, Nev. Genus and species undetermined 4 Plate 16, figures 11-13 Description.—Cranidium, excluding posterior limb, elongate, subquadrate, gently convex transversely and longitudinally; anterior margin broadly rounded. Glabella low, tapered forward, bluntly rounded anteriorly, moderately defined by axial and preglabellar furrows. Lateral glabellar furrows barely apparent. Occipital furrow distinct, shallow. Occipital ring has median node. Frontal area moderately long, has poorly defined concave border about equal in sagittal length to length of gently convex brim; sagittal length between two-thirds and three-fourths length of glabella. Fixed cheeks narrow, horizontal; width slightly less than one-third basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes poorly defined by palpebral furrow, short, situated slightly anterior to glabellar midlength. Pygidium has slender axis bearing two or three ring furrows posterior to articulating furrow. Length of axis slightly more than one-half sagittal length of pygidium. Pleural region broad. Border concave, wider than pleural field, not clearly defined. Posterior margin has distinct median inbend. External surfaces of all known parts covered with distinct pitted ornamentation. Discussion.—This species is the oldest unequivocal representative of the Pterocephalinae in the Petero-cephaliid biomere. It is most similar to Ptero-cephalid% punctata n. sp. (pi. 17, figs. 8, 12, 18), from which it differs by having a broadly rounded rather than pointed anterior cranidial margin and a median notch in the pygidium. Occurrence. Rare, Prehousia zone: Ruby Range, Nev. Genus and species undetermined 5 Plate 16, figure 19 Description.—Cranidium, exclusive of posterior limbs, elongate subquadrate; width between palpebral furrows less than three-fourths total cranidial length; anterior margin moderately rounded. Glabella elongate, slightly tapered forward, bluntly rounded anteriorly, bears two pairs of shallow lateral glabellar furrows. Occipital furrow distinct. Occipital ring has median node. Frontal area has broad concave border having sagittal length slightly more than three times that of nearly flat downsloping brim. Fixed cheeks slightly upsloping, narrow; width between one-half and one-third basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes long, well defined by arcuate palpebral furrows, situated slightly posterior to glabellar midlength; length almost two-thirds that of glabella; width about two-thirds that of fixed cheek. Posterior limbs long, slender. Surfaces of all parts of cranidium except palpebral lobe and border covered with fine closely spaced granules; granules apparent only after whitening. Border covered with fine transverse terrace lines. Discussion.—This is a distinctive species of the Pterocephalinae (?) represented by only a single cranidium. It differs from all others in the subfamily by having an extremely narrow cranidium that has steeply upsloping fixed cheeks and large palpebral lobes. The most similar described species belong toSTRATIGRAPHIC DATA AND LOCALITY REGISTER 93 Sigmocheilus, but more must be learned about the associated parts of this species before it can be confidently assigned to that genus. Occurrence. Rare, Dunderbergia zone: Ruby Range, Nev. Genus and species undetermined 6 Plate 18, figure 24 Description.—Cranidium small, moderately convex transversely and longitudinally. Glabella prominent, tapered forward, bluntly rounded anteriorly, well defined by deep axial furrows and moderately deep preglabellar furrow. Deep narrow anterolateral fos-sulae present. Glabellar furrows not apparent. Occipital furrow deep. Occipital ring has median node. Frontal area downsloping; border slightly narrower than brim; border furrow shallow distally, almost absent on axial line. Fixed cheeks convex, slightly upsloping, narrow; width about one-third basal glabellar width. Palpebral lobes small, barely defined by palpebral furrow, situated about opposite glabellar midlength. External surface smooth. Discussion.—This small trilobite is characterized particularly by the deep anterolateral fossulae in front of the glabella. Otherwise it is similar to other small generally nondescript forms that appear in the upper part of the Pterocephaliid biomere. Specimens assigned to this species are present in two collections. Occurrence. Rare, Elvinia zone: Eureka, Nev. STRATIGRAPHIC DATA AND LOCALITY REGISTER This paper discusses only a part of the total fauna of the Pterocephaliid biomere. The agnostids and brachiopods, particularly, should be reviewed and described at some later date, and much can be learned about details of the stratigraphy of the carbonate facies of the Upper Cambrian using the biostrati-graphic framework provided by study of the faunas. Some of this data has already been used for a preliminary synthesis of the more general aspects of the regional Upper Cambrian stratigraphy in White Pine County and vicinity, Nev. (Palmer, 1960b). However, this synthesis is only a beginning, and it is hoped that the data presented on the following pages can serve for continued intensive study of this important Upper Cambrian unit. Plates 22 and 23 summarize the rock successions of the principal measured sections from which trilobites were obtained for this study (fig. 1) and show the positions of all collections in these sections and the ranges of all identified trilobites. Locality data for additional collections from which illustrated specimens were obtained are also listed. BASTIAN PEAK SECTION Location.—Connors Pass quadrangle, White Pine County, Nev. Center of sec. 30 (unsurveyed), T. 15 N., R. 66 E. Measured southwestward along crest of prominent spur 2 miles south of Bastian Peak. (See pi. 22.) Remarks.—The Bastian Peak section is only a partial section in a badly faulted area. It begins in the uppermost beds of the Lincoln Peak Formation and continues through a varied sequence of limestones that correlate with the Johns Wash Limestone and Corset Spring Shale of the Snake Range. The Johns Wash Limestone in the Snake Range southeast of the Bastian Peak area is a cliff-forming unit consisting generally of thick-bedded limestones. In the Bastian Peak area, the lower part of the unit temporally correlated with the Johns Wash Limestone is composed of alternations of thick-bedded ledge-forming limestones and thinner bedded less resistant limestones. Further north at McGill, the entire Johns Wash interval is represented by an inter-bedded sequence of siltstones, shales, and thin-bedded to massive-bedded limestones that characterize the upper part of the Dunderberg Formation. Thus the relatively clean carbonate sediments represented by the Johns Wash Limestone are replaced to the northwest by more argillaceous sediments. The distribution of fos-siliferous beds indicates that the argillaceous sediments provided a more favorable environment for the faunas of the time than did the clean carbonate sediments. The more massive part of the Johns Wash equivalent in the Bastian Peak section is badly fractured, and a reliable thickness could not be obtained. However, above these beds a unit of thin-bedded rubbly weathering limestones correlates with the Corset Spring Shale of the Snake Range. Fine muds that resulted from the erosion of areas east of the present Wasatch Range in Utah after a major Upper Cambrian regression now constitute the Corset Spring Shale. These muds reached the Bastian Peak area probably in insufficient quantity to do more than dilute the carbonate sediment and form the less-resistant rock unit from which collection 3018-CO was obtained. CHERRY CREEK SECTION Location.—Unsurveyed area on the east side of the Cherry Creek Range north of the community of Cherry Creek, White Pine County, Nev. (See pi. 23.) The section can be reached by driving 7.1 miles west of U.S. Highway 93 on a paved road leading to Cherry Creek, then turning north on a graded road 735-610 0-65-994 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASEST for 4.0 miles to a jeep trail leading up a canyon to the west. Rocks of the Pterocephaliid biomere strike across the canyon about 1 mile west of the end of the jeep trail. The section was measured in the canyon bottom from the top of the Hamburg Limestone through the Dunderberg Formation and the Barton Canyon Limestone Member of Young (1960) of the overlying Windfall Formation. Remarks.—The Cherry Creek section is one of the best exposed sections of the Dunderberg Formation in east-central Nevada. The formation can be divided here into two members of approximately equal thickness that are also recognizable at McGill. The lower member is a slope-forming unit consisting of siltstones and grey fine-grained silty limestone in the form of numerous lenses and thin beds. The member is lithologically little different from contemporaneous parts of the Lincoln Peak Formation in the Snake Range and at Bastian Peak. The upper member is characterized by interbedded siltstone and nodular or massive ledge-forming limestone having a slightly lighter color and less silt than the underlying limestones. The varied lithologies come in consistent cyclic sequences, indicating frequent fluctuation of conditions between clean-carbonate and silty mud deposition. An ideal cycle begins with siltstone, which is followed by siltstone containing lenses of gray silty limestone; nodular argillaceous limestone occurs next and is overlain by a thick bed of relatively clean limestone containing only fine argillaceous partings. Many partial cycles are shown in the limestone ledges, where the upper and lower parts are formed of the limestone containing argillaceous partings and the middle part is formed of nodular limestone. Trilobites are most common in the more argillaceous limestones. The Barton Canyon Limestone Member of Young (1960) of the Windfall Formation is a distinctive cliff-forming nearly pure limestone that weathers nearly white; it represents a brief return of stable clean-carbonate sedimentation to the region. Its upper contact with thin-bedded grey silty and cherty limestones nearly coincides with the sudden annihilation of most of the elements of the Pterocephaliid biomere by a new invading fauna. Only the lower few inches of these darker limestones contain the distinctive Irvingella major fauna that is the terminal fauna of the Pterocephaliid biomere. EUREKA SECTION Location.—Eureka Mining district, Eureka County, Nev. The section (pi. 23) was measured eastward across the Dunderberg and lower part of the Windfall Formation on a low spur between the road fork in Wind- fall Canyon and mine shafts numbered 68 and 69, shown on the south part of the geologic map of the Eureka mining district (Nolan, 1962, pi. 1). Remarks.—The illustration given here shows only the locations of faunas found in the basal unit of the Windfall Formation that overlies the Dunderberg Shale. This basal unit is a distinctive thick-bedded noncherty limestone about 28 feet thick that is over-lain by thin-bedded dark-grey cherty limestones. The lower 18 feet of this unit contains a large fauna of the Elvinia zone. The upper 10 feet contains at least two different younger trilobite faunas unrelated to any of the faunas of the Pterocephaliid biomere. Exposures of the Dunderberg Shale are generally poor throughout the Eureka district, and the sequence of faunas that has been determined is given in an earlier paper (Palmer, 1960a, p. 57). The formation at Eureka contains considerably fewer interbedded limestones than occur in correlative parts of the formation at Cherry Creek and McGill. The limestones are mostly concentrated in an interval about 60 feet thick that is present about 100 feet below the top of the principal shale unit. The contact of the Dunderberg Shale with the underlying Hamburg Dolomite is a zone of disturbance throughout the area. The amount of section missing, if any, is uncertain because of lack of information about the age of the uppermost beds of the Hamburg Dolomite. McGILL SECTION Location.—Ely quadrangle, White Pine County, Nev. The McGill section (pi. 23) was measured on the top and east flanks of prominent north-trending spur on the west side of the Duck Creek Range; the locality is reached by driving 1.35 miles north of McGill Post Office, turning right onto abandoned section of U.S. Highway 93, continuing 0.6 mile to jeep trail leading up slope to the east, crossing a large pipeline, and continuing into a small canyon. White limestones at mouth of canyon are the Barton Canyon Limestone Member of Young (1960) of the Windfall Formation. The beds of the underlying Dunderberg Formation are exposed further up the canyon to the west of the road before the first switchback. Remarks.—Although the McGill section is broken into two parts by faults, it is still one of the strati-graphically most important and most, fossiliferous sections of the Pterocephaliid biomere. The lower part contains a considerable thickness of the Aphelaspis zone and includes trilobites from the basal 40 feet that are known elsewhere only at Mount Hamilton and the Osgood Mountains, Nev., and CedarSTRATIGRAPHIC DATA AND LOCALITY REGISTER 95 Bluff, Ala., where structural complications prevent description of a section. These lower beds are probably the temporal equivalents of the upper beds of the Crepicephalid biomere of the southern and eastern Great Basin (Palmer, 1962b, p. 8, 9). The remainder of the section is faunally and lithically comparable to the less faulted section at Cherry Creek. The absence of the lower beds of the Aphelaspis zone in the otherwise comparable section at Cerry Creek may be related to a possible topographic high point on the carbonate sediments of the older Hamburg Limestone (Palmer, 1962b, p. 10). In addition to the unusual occurrence of the Aphelaspis zone in the McGill section, the evolutionary sequence of five species, from Aphelaspis haguei (Hall and Whitfield) to Dieanthopyge reductus n. sp. (p. 15), can be documented from specimens occurring here. RUBY RANGE SECTION Location.—Jiggs quadrangle, "White Pine County, Nev. The Ruby Range section (pi. 22) was measured upslope on the west side of the southern Ruby Range along a spur in the SW^/4 sec. 36, T. 26 N., R. 56 E., beginning at the lowest limestone bed east of a saddle about half a mile east-southeast of hill 8093 and about 4 miles east of the headquarters of the Juaristi Ranch. Remarks.—The Ruby Range section is cut off in the Dunderhergia zone by a fault. Most of the upper beds of the Pterocephaliid biomere are exposed about half a mile north of the measured section, where a succession of nodular and crinkly bedded limestones is capped by a unit of thin-bedded, grey laminated limestones containing the Irvingella major fauna (USGS colln. 2587-CO) in the lower part. No other fossils were found in this upper segment. The lower part of this section is the most significant for regional stratigraphy. Below the limestones containing Dieanthopyge at the base of the measured part of the section is an apparently continuous unfossil-iferous sequence of siltstones and shales more than 1,000 feet thick, which appear to be conformable on the fossiliferous late Middle Cambrian limestones that form the crest of hill 8093. In the nearest known Cambrian sections of Eureka and Cherry Creek, contemporaneous beds of comparable thickness are clean carbonates of the Hamburg Dolomite or Limestone. SHINGLE PASS SECTION Location.—West side of Egan Range about 1 mile south of road crossing Shingle Pass, SEf/i, sec. 26, T. 8 N., R. 62 E. The Shingle Pass section (pi. 22) was measured up the lower part of prominent west-facing limestone outcrops, beginning where the lower massive cliff intersects the alluvium. Remarks.—The Shingle Pass section shows the magnitude of some of the facies changes in the central Great Basin during the time of the Pterocephaliid biomere. A similar section is present at Patterson Pass in the Schell Creek Range about 13 miles to the east. Almost the entire interval of deposits of the Pterocephaliid biomere is composed of clean carbonate sediments of many types. Small stromatolites, having a preserved algal microstructure, are present at several levels. The limestones between the beds from which USGS collections 2561-CO and 2313-CO were made are nearly all strongly crossbedded echinodermal cal-carenites. Crossbedded oolitic limestones are also common. Beds in the Snake Range, McGill, Cherry Creek, and Ruby Range sections and those at Mount Hamilton and Tybo that are contemporaneous with the lower 500-600 feet of the Shingle Pass section are dominantly silstones interbedded with silty limestones. Carbonate sediments similar to those in the Shingle Pass section are found in the Johns Wash Limestone of the Snake Range, which is contemporaneous only with the limestones just below the Corset Spring Shale in the Shingle Pass section. Thus the Johns Wash Limestone increases greatly in thickness between the Snake Range and Shingle Pass sections owing to the lateral shift in facies from silty sediments of the upper part of the Lincoln Peak Formation to clean carbonate sediments. The uppermost beds of the Shingle Pass section are also significant for regional stratigraphy. USGS collections 2566-CO and 2567-CO come from thin limestones interbedded with chert just above the Corset Spring Shale. Throughout the Great Basin, the limestones in the lower part of the Windfall Formation and its correlatives are characterized by abundant beds and lenses of chert. Generally, this is the first appearance of significant amounts of chert in the entire Cambrian section. However, the evidence in the Shingle Pass section indicates that the cherts do not appear at the same time over the central Great Basin region. In the Shingle Pass section, chert beds are present in the upper part of the Elvinia zone. At Eureka, chert appears first associated with trilobites that are at least two zones younger. SNAKE RANGE SECTION Location.—Wheeler Peak quadrangle, Lincoln County, Nev. The Snake Range section (pi. 22) was measured up the south side of Lincoln Canyon at the head of Johns Wash, about 1 mile southwest of Lincoln Peak on the west side of the Snake Range. Remarks.—The Snake Range section is the type section for the Lincoln Peak Formation, Johns Wash96 TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN Limestone and Corset Spring Shale (Drewes and Palmer, 1957). Supplemental faunal data for the lower part of the Corset Spring Shale is provided from USGS collections 3109-CO, 3110-CO, and 3114-CO, which come from a section comparable to the type section on the steep slope just east of Lincoln Peak. YUCCA FLAT SECTION Location.—Tippipah Spring NE quadrangle, Nye County, Nev. The Yucca Flat section (pi. 23) was measured in the saddle between the Bonanza King and Windfall Formations on the east side of Banded Mountain, east of Yucca Flat (Nevada grid square 690-868). Remarks.—The Yucca Flat section is one of the most fossiliferous sections of the Pterocephaliid bio-mere in southern Nevada. The general stratigraphy of the interval is characteristic for most localities in Nye and Clark Counties, Nev., and in the Death Valley region of California. The section contrasts markedly in thickness with the sections in White Pine County and vicinity. The Dunderbergia and Elvinia zones at Yucca Flat are only slightly thinner than in the central Great Basin. However, the Aphelaspis and Dicanthopyge zones are compressed into 35 feet of clean carbonate sediments at the top of the Bonanza King Formation, and no beds of the Prehousia zone have been found between the top of the Bonanza King Formation and the first limestone bed containing trilo-bites of the Dunderbergia zone, 25 feet above the base of the Dunderberg Formation. Trilobites of the Prehousia zone have been found, however, at localities in the Spring Mountains and Muddy Mountains in Clark County. The interval between the Dunderbergia zone and the base of the Aphelaspis zone is only 60 feet in the Yucca Flat section compared with more than 200 feet in the silty sequences of the McGill and Cherry Creek sections and more than 500 feet in the clean carbonate section at Shingle Pass. More work is needed on critical sections between White Pine County and southern Nevada to determine the events causing the contrasts in stratigraphy of the two regions. MISCELLANEOUS COLLECTIONS THAT YIELDED ILLUSTRATED SPECIMENS US OS collection Locality description and collector 756-CO_____California, Inyo County, Ubehebe Peak quad- rangle, lower Nopah Formation. Last Chance foothills, 2.8 miles S. 79° W. of Quartz Spring. J. F. McAllister, 1950. 795-CO_____Nevada, Eureka County, Pinto Summit quad- rangle, Dunderberg Shale. On road to Catlin shaft, about 250 ft from New York Canyon USOS collection 809-CO_________ 825-CO 864-CO 872-CO 873-CO 1268-CO____ 1271-CO____ 1297-CO____ 1471-CO____ 1478-CO____ 1479-CO____ 1993-CO____ 2316-CO____ Locality description and collector road. About 760 ft S. 29° E. of the Catlin shaft. Josiah Bridge, 1939. Nevada, Eureka County, Pinto Summit quadrangle, Dunderberg Shale. Southwest slope of Hoosac Mountain, east of high pinnacle of Hamburg Dolomite. East of spring in tributary of Secret Canyon. About 4,980 ft S. 5° E. of the Windfall shaft. Josiah Bridge, 1939. Nevada, Eureka County, Eureka quadrangle, basal Windfall Formation. Hill northeast of Richmond shaft, just above old railroad grade, 760 ft N. 40° E. of Richmond shaft. Josiah Bridge, 1939. Nevada, Eureka County, Eureka quadrangle, Dunderberg Shale. North side of Widewest Canyon. About 900 ft N. 55° E. of Cyanide shaft. Josiah Bridge, 1939. Nevada, Eureka County, Eureka quadrangle, Dunderberg Shale. Dump of prospect 1,350 ft N. 64° W. of U.S. Mineral Marker 10, near Bullwhacker mine (northern 1 of 2 prospects close together). Josiah Bridge, 1939. Nevada, Eureka County, Eureka quadrangle, Dunderberg Shale. Dump of prospect 1,300 ft S. 74° W. of U.S. Mineral Marker 10. Josiah Bridge, 1939. California, Inyo County, Ballarat quadrangle, basal Nopah Formation. North slopes of deep saddle at south end of the first long northtrending ridge west of the Quartz Springs fork of the Lippincotts road. Death Valley National Monument. J. F. McAllister, 1948. California, Inyo County, Ballarat quadrangle, basal Nopah Formation. From shales in sharp gully about 1,000 ft northwest of collection 1268—CO locality and about 2,000 ft almost due north of BM 5330. J. F. McAllister, 1948. Nevada, Eureka County, Pinto Summit quadrangle, Dunderberg Shale. East side of Ratto canyon; first baked shale outcrop seen after entering from south. Josiah Bridge, 1939. Nevada, Nye County, Tybo district, Hales Limestone. About 10 ft above base of Hales Limestone north of road to Hales mine. A. R. Palmer, 1953. Utah, Tooele County, Gold Hill quadrangle, Hicks Formation. NWK, sec. 33, T. 9 S, R. 18 W.; highest limestone coquina just below white-weathering dolomite. Alt. about 8,125 ft. A. R. Palmer, 1953. Utah, Tooele County, Gold Hill quadrangle, Hicks Formation. NW}1, sec. 33, T. 9 S., R. 18 W., lower beds of 70-ft limestone unit. A. R. Palmer, 1953. Nevada, Clark County, Las Vegas quadrangle, Dunderberg Formation. South side of Macks Canyon, SEJ4 sec. 27, T. 18 S., R. 56 E. C. R. Longwell, 1954. Nevada, Lincoln County, Highland Peak quadrangle, Mendha Formation. On northeast side of main road, southwest of Arizona Peak, SEK, NEK sec. 22, T. 1 N., R. 66 E. A. R. Palmer, 1957.REFERENCES 97 US OS collection 2318-CO________ 2432-CO____ 2457-CO____ 2612-CO____ 2977-CO____ 2996-CO____ 2997-CO____ 2998-CO____ 2999-CO---- 3000-00---- 3057-CO---- 3060-CO---- 3061-CO---- 3081-CO---- Locality description and collector Nevada, Lincoln County, Highland Peak quadrangle. North side of Anderson Canyon about 25 ft above road, NWH, NE%, sec. 34, T. 1 N., R. 66 E. A. R. Palmer, 1957. Nevada, Lincoln County, Highland Range, Mendha Formation. West side of middle row of hills in Highland Range about 5 miles north of U.S. Highway 93. C. M. Tschanz, 1957. Nevada, Nye County, Ash Meadows quadrangle, basal Nopah Formation. Lowest outcrop on east side of hill 23/t miles N. 20° W. from Devils Hole. Harald Drewes, 1958. Utah, Tooele County, unsurveyed part of Deep Creek Range, Hicks Formation. North side of Goshute Canyon on crest of ridge, about 20 ft below thin sandy interval at top of Hicks Formation. A. R. Palmer, 1958. Utah, Millard County, House Range, Orr Formation. North side of Granite Canyon; thin limestone in upper shaly member of Orr Formation. A. R. Palmer, 1959. Utah, Millard County, House Range, On-Formation. South side of unnamed canyon just south of Weeks Canyon, about 20 ft above algal stromatolites at top of lower limestone member of Orr Formation. A. R. Palmer, 1959. Utah, Millard County, House Range, Orr Formation. Same locality as for 2996-CO, about 100 ft below top of middle silty limestone and siltstone member of Orr Formation. A. R. Palmer, 1959. Utah, Millard County, House Range, Orr Formation. Same locality as for 2996-CO, about 20 ft below top of middle silty limestone member of Orr Formation. Utah, Millard County, House Range, Orr Formation. Same locality as for 2996-CO, about 5 ft below top of middle silty limestone member of Orr Formation. A. R. Palmer, 1959. Nevada, White Pine County, Schell Peaks quadrangle, Lincoln Peak Formation. Float on west slope of small knob just west of Cleve Creek, about 1.6 miles east-southeast of Kolcheck mine. A. R. Palmer, 1959. Nevada, Nye County, Tybo district, Swarbrick Formation. From upper 10 ft of Swarbrick Formation at east end of exposures, east side of gully entering Tybo Canyon about 350 ft north of Tybo Canyon road. A. R. Palmer, 1959. Nevada, Nye County, Tybo district, Tybo Shale. In eastern belt of Tybo Shale exposures, about middle of formation. Limestone bed near top of low shale knob about 1,000 ft north of Tybo Canyon road. A. R. Palmer, 1959. Nevada, Nye County, Tybo district, Tybo Shale. Same locality as for 3060-CO, about 300 ft to west. A. R. Palmer, 1959. Utah, Millard County, House Range, Orr Formation. Ey2, sec. 33, T. 19 S., R. 14 W., 2 miles south-southwest of Notch Peak. Upper shale member of Orr Formation. R. K. Hose, 1959. USOS collection Locality description and collector 3412-CO______Utah, Millard County, House Range, Orr Forma- tion. Same locality as for 3081-CO. Upper 6 ft of middle silty limestone and shale member of Orr Formation. R. K. Hose, 1959. 3473-CO______Utah, Millard County, House Range, Orr For- mation. Twenty feet below top of middle silty limestone member of Orr Formation. Same locality as for 3081. L. F. Hintze, 1960. 3820-CO______Nevada, White Pine County, Jiggs quadrangle, unnamed formation. Walker Creek area, near Ruby Range section. R. P. Sharp, 1942. 7j___________ Nevada, Nye County, Quinn Canyon Range, Dunderberg(?) Shale. One mile northwest of the Italian Ranch foothills. J. E. Spurr, 1899. 33d__________ Utah, Juab County, Fish Springs Range, Orr Formation. Thin-bedded blue limestone at the base of the first high point southwest of the J. J. Thomas ranch, east side of Fish Springs Range. L. D. Burling, 1905. 60 ___________Nevada, Eureka County, Eureka quadrangle, Dunderberg(?) Shale. Limestone across the canyon from the dump of the old Richmond mine shaft. C. D. Walcott, 1880. 61 _________Nevada, Eureka County, Pinto Summit quad- rangle, Dunderberg Shale. A little south of the Hamburg mine. C. D. Walcott, 1882. 62 ___________Nevada, Eureka County, Eureka quadrangle, Dunderberg Shale. In canyon just north of Adams Hill. C. D. Walcott, 1880. 63 ___________Nevada, Eureka County, Eureka quadrangle, Dunderberg(?) Shale. At the base of the Pogonip Group northeast of Adams Hill. Arnold Hague and J. P. Iddings, 1880. REFERENCES Bell, W. C., and Ellinwood, H. L., 1962, Upper Franconian and Lower Trempealeauan Cambrian trilobites and brachi-opods, Wilberns formation, central Texas: Jour. Paleontology, v. 36, no. 3, p. 385-423. Bell, W. C., and others, 1952, Trilobites of the Franconia formation, southeast Minnesota: Jour. Paleontology, v. 26, no. 2, p. 175-198. Berkey, C. P., 1898, Geology of the St. Croix Dalles: Am. Geologist, v. 21, p. 270-294. Bridge, Josiah, 1933, in Sellards, E. H., Adkins, W. S., and Plummer, F. B., Stratigraphy v. 1 of The geology of Texas: Texas Univ. Bull. 3232, p. 231-234. Bridge, Josiah, and Girty, G. H., 1937, A redescription of Ferdinand Roemer’s Paleozoic types from Texas: U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 186-M, p. 239-271. Butts, Charles, 1926, The Paleozoic rocks, in Adams, G. I., and others, Geology of Alabama: Alabama Geol. Survey Spec. Rept. 14, p. 41-230. Deland, C. R., and Shaw, A. B., 1956, Upper Cambrian trilobites from western Wyoming: Jour. Paleontology, v. 30, no. 3, p. 542-562. Drewes, Harold, and Palmer, A. R., 1957, Cambrian rocks of southern Snake Range, Nevada: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geologists Bull., v. 41, no. 1, p. 104-120. Ferguson, H. G., 1933, Geology of the Tybo district, Nevada: Nevada Univ. Bull., v. 27, no. 3, 61 p.TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN 98 Fisher, D. W., and Hanson, G. F., 1951, Revisions in the geology of Saratoga Springs, New York, and Vicinity: Am. Jour. Sci., v. 249, p. 795-814. Frederickson, E. A., 1948, Upper Cambrian trilobites from Oklahoma : Jour. Paleontology, v. 22, no. 6, p. 798-803. ------1949, Trilobite fauna of the Upper Cambrian Honey Creek formation: Jour. Paleontology, v. 23, no. 4, p. 341-363. Gaines, R. B., 1951, Statistical study of Irvingella, Upper Cambrian trilobite: Texas Jour. Sci., v. 3, no. 4, p. 606-615. Hall, James, and Whitfield, R. P., 1877, Paleontology: fossils of the Potsdam Group: U.S. Geol. Explor. 40th Parallel (King), v. 4, p. 199-231. Harrington, H. J., and others, 1959, Treatise on invertebrate paleontology, part O, Arthropoda 1: New York and Lawrence, Kans., Geol. Soc. America and Univ. Kansas Press, 560 p., 415 text figs. Hazzard, J. C., 1937, Paleozoic section in the Nopah and Resting Springs Mountains, Inyo County, California: California Jour. Mines and Geology, v. 33, p. 273-339. Henningsmoen, Gunnar, 1957, The trilobite family Olenidae: Norske vidensk.-akad. Oslo Skr., no. 1, 303 p. Howell, B. F., 1959, in Harrington, H. J., and others, 1959. Howell, B. F., and others, 1944, Correlation of the Cambrian formations of North America (chart 1) : Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 55, no. 8, p. 993-1003. Ivshin, N. K., 1956, Verkhnekembriyskiy trilobity Kazakhstana, chast’ I: Akad. Nauk Kazakhskoy SSR, Inst. Geol. Nauk, Alma-Ata, 119 p. Kobayashi, Teiichi, 1935, The Cambro-Ordovician formations and faunas of south Chosen; Palaeontology, pt. 3; Tokyo Univ. Fac. Sci. Jour., sec. 2, v. 4, p. 49-344. • ----1936, On the Pardbolinella fauna from province Jujuy, Argentina with a note on the Olenidae: Japanese Jour. Geology and Geography, v. 13, no. 1-2, p. 85-102. ------1938, Upper Cambrian fossils from British Columbia with a discussion on the isolated occurrence of the so-called Olenus beds of Mt. Jubilee: Japanese Jour. Geology and Geography, v. 15, no. 3-4, p. 151-192. ------1953, On the Kainellidae: Japanese Jour. Geology and Geography, v. 23, p. 37-61. ------1954, On the Komaspidae: Japanese Jour. Geology and Geography, v. 24, p. 23-44. ------1960, The Cambro-Ordovician formations and faunas of south Korea; pt. 6, Palaeontology V: Tokyo Univ. Fac. Sci. Jour., see. 2, v. 12, pt. 2, p. 217-275. * ----1962, The Cambro-Ordovician formations and faunas of south Korea; pt. 9, Palaeontology VIII: Tokyo Univ. Fac. Sci. Jour., sec. 2, v. 14, pt. 1, p. 1-152. Kobayashi, Teiichi, and Ichikawa, Takeo, 1955, Discovery of Proceratopyge in the Chuangia zone in Manchuria, with a note on the Ceratopygidae: Paleont. Soc. Japan Trans, and Proc., new ser., no. 19, p. 65-72. Kurtz, V. E., 1952, in Bell, W. C., and others, 1952. Lermontova, E. V., 1940, in Vologdin, A. G., and others, Cambrian, v. 1 of Atlas of the leading forms of the fossil faunas of the U.S.S.R.: Moscow, All-Union Sci. and Prosp. Inst., Geol. Comm., 194 p. Lochman, Christina, 1938a, Upper Cambrian faunas of the Cap Mountain formation of Texas: Jour. Paleontology, v. 12, no. 1, p. 72-85. ------1938b, Middle and Upper Cambrian faunas from western Newfoundland: Jour. Paleontology, v. 12, no. 5, p. 461—477. ------1940a, Fauna of the basal Bonneterre dolomite (Upper Cambrian) of southeastern Missouri: Jour. Paleontology, v. 14, no. 1, p. 1-53. ------1940b, Corrections to the basal Bonneterre fauna : Jour. Paleontology, v. 14, no. 5, p. 515. ------1950, Upper Cambrian faunas of the Little Rocky Mountains, Montana: Jour. Paleontology, v. 24, no. 3, p. 322-349. ------1953a, Notes on Cambrian trilobites—homonyms and synonyms: Jour. Paleontology, v. 27, no. 6, p. 886-889. ------1953b, Analysis and discussion of nine Cambrian trilobite families: Jour. Paleontology, v. 27, no. 6, p. 889-896. ------1956, The evolution of some Upper Cambrian and Lower Ordovician trilobite families : Jour. Paleontology, v. 30, no. 3, p. 445-462. ------1959, in Harrington, H. J., and others, 1959. Lochman, Christina, and Duncan, Donald, 1944, Early Upper Cambrian faunas of central Montana: Geol. Soc. America Spec. Paper 54, 179 p. Lochman, Christina, and Hu, C. H., 1960, Pt. 1 of Upper Cambrian faunas from the northwest Wind River mountains, Wyoming: Jour. Paleontology, v. 34, no. 5, p. 793-834. ------1962, An Aphelaspis zone faunule from Logan, Montana: Jour. Paleontology v. 36, no. 3, p. 431-441. Lochman, Christina, and Wilson, J. L., 1958, Cambrian biostratigraphy in North America: Jour. Paleontology, v. 32, no. 2, p. 312-350. Lu, Y. H., 1957, Pt. 3 of Index fossils of China, Invertebrate: Peking, Acad. Sinica, Inst. Paleontology, Geol. Press, p. 249-294. Mason, J. F., 1938, Cambrian faunal succession in Nevada and California: Jour. Paleontology, v. 12, no. 3, p. 287-294. Miller, B. M., 1936, Cambrian trilobites from northwestern Wyoming: Jour. Paleontology, v. 10, no. 1, p. 23-34. Morris, H. T., 1957, General geology of the East Tintic Mountains, Utah, in Utah Geol. Soc., Guidebook to the geology of Utah: no. 12, p. 1-56. Nelson, C. A., 1951, Cambrian trilobites from the St. Croix Valley : Jour. Paleontology, v. 25, no. 6, p. 765-784. Nolan, T. B., 1935, The Gold Hill mining district, Utah: U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 177, 172 p. ------1962, The Eureka mining district, Nevada: U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 406, 78 p. Nolan, T. B., and others, 1956, The stratigraphic section in the vicinity of Eureka, Nevada: U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 276, 77 p. Opik, A. A., 1961, Alimentary caeca of agnostids and other trilobites: Palaeontology, v. 3, no. 4, p. 410-438. ------1963, Early Upper Cambrian fossils from Queensland: Australia, Bur. Mineral Resources, Geology and Geophysics, Bull. 64, 124 p. Opik, A. A., and Pritchard, P. W., 1960, Cambrian and Ordovician, in Hill, Dorothy, and Denmead, A. K., eds., The geology of Queensland: Geol. Soc. Australia Jour., v. 7, p. 89-114. Palmer, A. R., 1953, Aphelaspis Resser and its genotype: Jour. Paleontology, v. 27, no. 1, p. 157. ------1954, The faunas of the Riley formation in central Texas: Jour. Paleontology, v. 28, no. 6, p. 709-786. ------1955, Upper Cambrian Agnostidae of the Eureka district, Nevada : Jour. Paleontology, v. 29, no. 1, p. 86-101. ------—1956, The type species of Litocephalus Resser, 1937 (Trilobita) : Jour. Paleontology, v. 30, no. 3, p. 608-610REFERENCES 99 Palmer, A. R., 1960a, Trilobites of the Upper Cambrian Dunder-berg shale in the Eureka district, Nevada: U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 334-C, p. 53-109. •--—1960b, Some aspects of the early Upper Cambrian stratigraphy of White Pine County, Nevada, and vicinity, in Intermountain Assoc. Petroleum Geologists, Guidebook to the geology of east central Nevada : Salt Lake City, Utah, p. 53-58. ------1962a, Comparative ontogeny of some opisthoparian, gonatoparian, and proparian Upper Cambrian trilobites: Jour. Paleontology, v. 36, no. 1, p. 87-96. ------1962b, Glyptagnostus and associated trilobites in the United States: U. S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 374-F, 49 p. ------1965, The biomere—a new kind of biostratigraphic unit: Jour. Paleontology, v. 39, no. 1. [In press.] Rasetti, Franco, 1943, New Lower Ordovician trilobites from Levis, Quebec: Jour. Paleontology, v. 17, no. 1, p. 101-194. ------1945, New Upper Cambrian trilobites from the Levis conglomerate: Jour. Paleontology, v. 19, no. 5, p. 462-478. ------1946, Early Upper Cambrian trilobites from western Gaspe [Quebec] : Jour. Paleontology, v. 20, no. 5, p. 442-462. ------1959, in Harrington, H. J., and others, 1959. ------1961, Dresbachian and Franconian trilobites of the Conococheague and Frederick limestones of the central Appalachians: Jour. Paleontology, v. 35, no. 1, p. 104-124. Raymond, P. E., 1937, Upper Cambrian and Lower Ordovician Trilobita and Ostracoda from Vermont: Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 48, no. 8, p. 1079-1146. Resser, C. E., 1933, Preliminary generalized Cambrian time scale: Geol. Soc. America Bull., vol. 44, no. 4, p. 735-756. ------1935, Nomenclature of some Cambrian trilobites: Smithsonian Misc. Colin., v. 93, no. 5, 46 p. ------1936, Second contribution to nomenclature of Cambrian trilobites: Smtihsonian Misc. Colin., v. 95, no. 4, 29 p. —-----1937, Third contribution to nomenclature of Cambrian trilobites: Smithsonian Misc. Colin., v. 95, no. 22, 29 p. ------1938a, Cambrian system (restricted) of the southern Appalachians: Geol. Soc. America Spec. Paper 15, 140 p. ------1938b, Fourth contribution to nomenclature of Cambrian fossils: Smithsonian Misc. Colin., v. 97, no. 10, 43 p. ------1942a, Fifth contribution to nomenclature of Cambrian fossils: Smithsonian Misc. Colin., v. 101, no. 15, 58 p. ------1942b, New Upper Cambrian trilobites: Smithsonian Misc. Colin., v. 103, no. 5, 136 p. Robison, R. A., 1960, Some Dresbachian and Franconian trilobites of western Utah: Brigham Young Univ. Research Studies, Geology Ser., v. 7, no. 3, 59 p. Roemer, Ferdinand, 1849, Texas, mit besondered Rucksicht auf deutsche Auswanderung und die physischen Verhaltnisse des Landes: Bonn, 464 p. ------1852, Die Kreidebildungen von Texas ihre organischen Einschlusse: Bonn, 100 p. Ross, R. J., Jr., 1951, Stratigraphy of the Garden City formation in northeastern Utah, and its trilobite faunas: Yale Univ., Peabody Mus. Nat. History Bull. 6, 155 p. Rusconi, Carlos, 1953, Trilobitas Ordovicios y Cambricos de Mendoza: Bol. Paleontologico de Buenos Aires, no. 25, 8 p. Sharman, George, 1886, On the new species Olenus nuneatonen-sis and Obolella granulata from the Lower Silurian (‘Cam- brian,’ Lapworth), near Nuneaton: Geol. Mag., new ser., decade 3, v. 3, p. 565-566. Shaw, A. B., 1951, New Late Cambrian trilobites, pt. 1 of The paleontology of northwestern Vermont: Jour. Paleon- tology, v. 25, no. 1, p. 97-114. ------1952, Fauna of the Upper Cambrian Rockledge conglomerate near. St. Albans, pt. 2 of Paleontology of northwestern Vermont: Jour. Paleontology, v. 26, no. 3, p. 458-483. ------1953, Miscellaneous Cambrian fossils, pt. 3 of Paleontology of northwestern Vermont: Jour. Paleontology, v. 27, no. 1. p. 137-146. ------1956, A Cambrian Aphelaspis fauna from Steele Butte, near Boulder, Wyoming: Jour. Paleontology, v. 30, no. 1, p. 48-52. Shimer, H. W., and Shrock, R. R., 1944, Index fossils of North America: New York, John Wiley, 837 p. Shumard, B. F., 1861, The primordial zone of Texas, with descriptions of new fossils: Am. Jour. Sci., 2d ser., v. 32, p. 213-221. Troedsson, G. T., 1937, On the Cambro-Ordovician faunas of western Qurug Tagh, eastern Tien-shan: Paleontologica Sinica, new ser. B, no. 2, whole ser. no. 106, 74 p. Walcott, C. D., 1884,, Paleontology of the Eureka district: U.S. Geol. Survey Mon. 8, 298 p. ------1899, Cambrian fossils of the Yellowstone National Park: U.S. Geol. Survey Mon. 32, p. 440-478. ------1908, Cambrian sections of the Cordilleran area: Smithsonian Misc. Colin., v. 53, p. 167-230. ------1912, New York Potsdam-Hoyt fauna: Smithsonian Misc. Colin., v. 57, no. 9, p. 251-304. ------1914, Dikelocephalus and other genera of the Dikeloce- phalinae: Smithsonian Misc. Colin., v. 57, no. 13, p. 345-412. ------1916, Cambrian trilobites: Smithsonian Misc. Colin., v. 64, no. 5, p. 303-456. ------1924, Cambrian and Lower Ozarkian trilobites, pt. 5, no. 2 of Cambrian geology and paleontology: Smithsonian Misc. Colin., v. 75, no. 2, p. 53-60. -----—1925, Cambrian and Ozarkian trilobites, pt. 5, no. 3 of Cambrian geology and paleontology: Smithsonian Misc. Colin., v. 75, no. 3, p. 61-146. Walcott, C. D., and Resser, C. E., 1924, Trilobites from the Ozarkian sandstones of the island of Novaya Zemlya: Kris-tiana [Olso], A. W. Br0ggers, 14 p. (Report of the scientific results of the Norwegian expedition to Novaya Zemlya 1921, no. 24. Pub. by Videnskapsselskapet i Kristiania.) Westergard, A. H., 1947, Supplementary notes on the Upper Cambrian trilobites of Sweden: Sveriges Geol. Under- sokning, ser. C, no. 489, p. 1-34. Whitehouse, F. W., 1939, The polymerid trilobites, pt. 3 of The Cambrian faunas of northeastern Australia: Queensland Mus. Mem., v. 11, p. 179-282. Wilson, J. L., 1948, Two Upper Cambrian Elvinia zone trilobite genera: Jour. Paleontology, v. 22, no. 1, p. 30-34. ------1949, The trilobite fauna of the Elvinia zone in the basal Wilberns limestone of Texas: Jour. Paleon- tology, v. 23, no. 1, p. 25-44. -—----1951, Franconian trilobites of the central Appalachians: Jour. Paleontology, v. 25, no. 5, p. 617-654. ——1954, Late Cambrian and Early Ordovician trilobites from the Marathon uplift, Texas: Jour. Paleontology, v. 28, no. 3, p. 249-285.TRILOBITES OF THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, GREAT BASIN 100 Wilson, J. L., 1956, Revisions in nomenclature and new species of Cambro-Ordovician trilobites from the Marathon uplift, West Texas: Jour. Paleontology, v. 30, p. 1341-1349. Wilson, J. L., and Frederickson, E. A., 1950, The Irvingella major (“Ptypchopleurites”) faunizone of the Upper Cambrian : Am. Jour. Sci., v. 248, p. 891-902. Young, J. C., 1960, Structure and stratigraphy in north central Schell Creek range [Nevada], in Intermountain Assoc. Petroleum Geologists, Guidebook to the geology of east central Nevada, 1960: Salt Lake City, Utah, p. 158-172.INDEX Page abnormis, Pseudosaratogia__________ 24,26,38,39; pi. 2 abrupta, Irvingella--------------------------- 48 accincta, Irvingella............................. 48 Acerocare tullbergi.............................. 56 Aciculolenus..................................... 54 peculiar is________________________ 25,54,55; pi. 7 Acknowledgments................................... 3 acuminata, Aphelotoion_____________26,75,80,81; pi. 19 Bynumiella_________________________—....78,79 adamsensis, Irvingella___________________________ 47 Adams Hill, Nev................................. 97 affinis, Berkeia-------------------------------- 37 Iddingsia................................... 37 Kindbladia......................... 24,37; pi. 3 Ptychoparia (Euloma)........................ 37 Agraulos globosa_________________________________ 82 agrestis, Irvingella............................. 48 Alabama........................................... 5 alata, Prthousia............9,14,16,26,87,68; pi. 13 alberta, Irvingella.............................. 48 Algae............................................ 22 alia, Irvingella_________________________________ 48 alienum, Erixanium_______________________________ 49 alt a, Irvingella................................ 48 amplooculata, Comanchia.......................... 83 Ptychopleurites_____________________________ 82 Anderson Canyon, Nev............................. 96 Anechocephalus-------------------------- 24,58,77 spinosus___________________________ 26,78; pi. 20 trigranulatus_________________ 26,77,78; pi. 20 Angulotreta...................................... 5 angustUimbatus, Irvingella-12,14,20,23,45,46; pi. 6 Irvingella (ParairvingeUa).................. 46 Parairvingella------------------------------ 46 anyta, Dunderbergia----------------9,26,58,41; pi. 4 anytus Crepicephalus (Loganellus)._......... 39 Liostracus 39 24,32,88 26,84,92; pi. 3 34 26,84; pi. 3 trigonis 33 73 Aphelaspidinae 16,17,22,57,58,62 Aphelaspis.............. 1,3,24,58,67,69,71,81,85,90 brachyphasis........... 6,15,27,58,59,60; pi. 8 buttsi............................. 27,59; pi. 8 convexima rginata_______________________ 68 haguei..... 6, 14, 15, 16, 27, 59, 60, 84, 85, 95; pi. 9 longispina......... 6, 14, 15, 27, 58, 59, 60, 62; pi. 9 subditus........... 6, 16, 27, 58, 59, 60, 85; pi. 8 walcotti.................................... 58 Aphelaspis zone.............-...........— 4, 5, 22 Aphelotoion__________________________________24, 78 acuminata_____________________ 26, 79, 80, 81; pi. 19 granulosus......................... - 26, 79; pi. 19 limbata...i............-...... 26, 79, 80; pi. 19 marginata..................... 26, 79, 80; pi. 19 punctata...............-...... 26, 79, 80; pi. 19 spinosus--------------------------- 26, 80; pi. 19 Appalachian region............................. 51, 90 arbucklensis, Irvingella........................ 48 [Italic page numbers indicate major references] Page arctica, Irvingella____________________________ 46 ardmorensis, Irvingella..................... 48 Argentina----------------------------------- 44,46 Arizona....................................... 51 Arizona Peak, Nev............................. 96 Asaphiscidae.................................. 28 asperazis, Dytremacephalus......... 27, 84, 85; pi. 18 Australia............................... 46,47,49, 56 B bacca, Irvingella............................ 48 Banded Mountain................................ 96 Barton Canyon Limestone Member, Windfall Formation......................... 94 Bastian Peak................................... 94 Bastian Peak section................. 3, 38, 39, 98 Bell, W. C., and others, credited_______________ 36 Berkeia affinis................................. 37 comes.................................... 37 nevadensis................................. 37 wichitaensis............................ 37 Bernicella.................................... 30, 31 minuta.....................................30, 31 Bibliography................................. 97 Bienvillia................................ - 56 bigranulosa, Dunderbergia............. 26, 40, 41; pi. 4 bUobata, Litocephalus-------------------------- 63 bUobatus, Dikellocephalus.......................62, 63 Litocephalus____________________ 27, 62; pi. 11 bilobus, Strigambitus________________ 28, 75, 77; pi. 16 Biomere, defined.............................. 4 blepharina, Strigambitus_________________ 25, 76; pi. 16 Blountia______________________________________ 28 bristolensis_______________—.... 6, 24, 29; pi. 1 nixonensis......................-....... 29 Blountiinae................................ - 28 Bolaspidella................................... 91 Bonanza King Formation__________________________ 96 borealis, Crepicephalus........................ 64 Brachiopods__________________________________ 5, 22 br achy ax is, Erixanium_____________ 24, 49, 50; pi. 17 br achy ops, Cheilocephalus.......... 23, 29; 32, 37 brachyphasis, Aphelaspis____ 6, 15, 27, 58, 59, 60; pi. 8 breviceps, Oligometopus.............. 25, 31, 82; pi. 1 Ptychoparia (Solenopleura)______________31, 32 Stenelymus................................. 32 brevifrons, Elvinia___________________________ 44 breviloba, Cheilocephalus----------------------- 30 Lisania____________________________________ 30 Pseudolisania.............................. 30 brevilobus, Cheilocephalus______ 5, 25, 80, 31; pi. 1 brevis, Terranovella_________________ 6, 24, 52; pi. 7 brevispina, Dunderbergia------------------------ 9, 17, 18, 26, 33, 39, 40, 42; pi. 5 Morosa__________________________ 26, 87; pi. 20 bridgei, Elvinia______________________________ 44 Pterocephalia.. ......................... 73 bristolensis, Blountia_______________ 6, 24, 29; pi. 1 MaryviUia________________________________ 29 British Columbia.....................-....... 71 Bromella________________________________________ 81 veritas_________________________24, 81; pi. 18 Bullwhacker mine, Nevada........................ 96 burn eten sis, IrvingeUa________________________ 48 butlerensis, Apachia Dellea......... buttsi, Aphelaspis... Cheilocephalus.. Proaulacopleura. Bynumiella__________ acuminata______ typicalis...... Bynumina............. globosa........ Page 26, 84, 92; pi. 3 ............. 34 .... 27, 59; pi. 8 ............. 30 ............. 59 ............. 79 .........78, 79 _____________ 79 .......... 82 12, 23, 82; pi. 18 calculosa, Dunderbergia____ 26, 33, 39, 40, 4L 42; pi. 5 California....................................... 96 Cambrian trilobites, classification of_________ 33 Canada_________________________________________ 53 canadensis, Housia............................. 65, 66 carinatum, Erixanium____________________25, 49; pi. 17 Catlin shaft, Nevada........................... 96 Cedar Bluff, Ala_________________________________ 95 Cer atopy ge___________________________________ 65 Ceratopygidae........................-........ 65 Cernuolimbus_________________________21, 25, 69, 73 depressus___________________ 25, 69, 70, 87; pi. 14 granulosus______________________ 28, 70, 71; pi. 14 laevifrons......................- 28, 70, 71; pi. 14 orygmatos_______________________ 28, 69, 70; pi. 14 semigranulosus------------------ 28, 70; pi. 14 Chariocephalus tumifrons_________________________ 46 Cheilocephalidae........................- 29, 31, 32 Cheilocephalus_________________________ 23, 29, 32, 37 br achy ops........................ 25, 80, 31; pi. 1 breviloba_________________________________ 30 brevilobus______________________ 5,25, 80, 31; pi. 1 buttsi____________________________________ 30 granulosus-------------------------25, 81; pi. 1 minutus................................... 30 omega...................................... 30, 31 st. croixensis______________________________ 29 sp__....................................... 30, 31 Cherry Creek, Nev................ 57 , 75, 78, 89, 95 Cherry Creek section.................3, 5, 6, 12, 93, 96 Chert________________________________________ 95 46 ....................- 96 ....................... 79 ....................... 97 ....................... 58 .................... 82 ....................... 83 ........... 12, 23, 83; pi. 19 ....................... 83 ....................... 37 ...14, 19, 20, 28, 72; pi. 17 China___________________ Clark County, Nev....... Clelandia............... Cleve Creek, Nev........ Clevelandella........... Coman chia______________ amplooculata........ minus--------------- prior_______________ comes, Berkeia.......... concava, Pterocephalia... Conocephalites (Pterocephalus) laticeps...... 72 Conodonts_______!---------------------------- 22 conservator, Minupeltis_______________ 28, 86; pi. 18 contractus, Oligometopus----------------25,31; pi. 1 constricta, Parahousia............. 26, 66, 67; pi. 12 convergens, Dicanthopyge...... 9, 14, 15, 27, 62; pi. 9 convex a, Apachia_______________________________ 34 conveximarginata, Aphelaspis___________________ 68 Labiostria.................................. 68 convexus, Komaspis (Parairvingella)............. 46 101102 INDEX Page Correlation, intercontinental......... 20, 46, 49, 66 Corset Spring Shale..........................93, 95 Crepicephalid biomere............................. 6 Crepicephalus borealis........................... 64 (Loganella) granulosus..................... 42 simulator............................... 41 unisulcata. ............................ 44 (Logancllus) anytus .................... 39 haguei.................................. 59 nitidus............................. 39, 41 Crepicephalus zone............................... 51 cuneifera, Norwoodina tenera..................... 54 Cyanide shaft, Nevada....................._ _. 96 D dakotensis, Elvinia............................... 44 Pterocephalia.,............................. 72 davisensis, Irvingella............................ 46 Deadwoodia........................................ 84 Death Valley, Calif............................... 96 Deckera........................................... 92 deckeri, Irvingella............................... 48 Pterocephalia............................... 73 Deep Creek Range, Utah......................... 3,97 definita, Minupeltis.................... 28, 86; pi. 18 Deland, C. R., and Shaw, A. B., credited ... 47 Dellea.......................................... 83 butlerensis................................. 34 punctata............................. 24, 84; pi. 3 wilbernsensis.............................. 83 Densonella........................................ 79 depressus, Cernudlimbus.......... 25, 69, 70, 87; pi. 14 Tumicephaius............... 6,9,24,57,89,90; pi. 13 Devils Hole, Nev.................................. 97 Dicanthopyge..................... 6,24,60,61,64,90,95 convergens_________________9,14,15,27,62; pi. 9 quadrata..............6,9,14,15,27,61,62,81; pi. 9 reductus______________ 9,14,15,16,27,62,95; pi. 10 Dicanthopyge zone.................................. 6 Dicellocephalus richmondensis__________________62,63 Dikellocephalus bilobatus....................... 62,63 flabeUifer................................73,74 multicinstus............................ 71,72 roemeri...................................43,44 Dimensions, description of........................ 23 diverta, Prqhousia................... 9,16,25,57; pi. 12 33,34,45 gregori 35 23,36; pi. 3 65 65,66 Dresbachia 79 Drumaspis. 46 94 74,93,94 Dunderberg Shale. ... 49,94,96,97 Dunderbergia________________ 3,21,24,32,35,39,42,66 anyta____________________________ 9,26,39,41; pi. 4 anytus.................................. 39 bigranuiosa______________________ 26,40,41; pi. 4 brevispina............ 9,17,18,26,33,39,40,42; pi. 5 calculosa............. 26, 33, 39, 40, 4U 42; pi. 5 granulosa................................... 42 nitida........................ 26, 36, 40, 41; pi. 4 polybothra........................... 26, 42; pi. 4 simplex..._________________-____________ 41 simulator................................. 41 variagranula..................... 26, 40, 41; pi. 5 (Megadunderbergia) granulosa________________ 43 Dunderbergia zone......................6, 9, 17, 22 Dytremacephalus____________________________24, 81, 84 asperazis........................ 27, 84, 85; pi. 18 granulosus_________________ 5, 9, 27, 84, 86; pi. 18 laevis...................................... 84 E Echinoderms..............................22, 95 Ecology, possible control on species distribution................ 22, 35, 42, 51, 54, 74, 89 Page Egan Range, Nev--------------------------------- 95 Elburgia.................. 18, 21, 24, 32, 33, 41, 43 granulosa........................18, 43, 43; pi. 5 intermedia...................17,18, 25, Ifi; pi. 6 quinnensis.......9, 12, 14, 18, 19, 25, 4S; pi. 6 elongata, Pterocephalia............... 28, 72; pi. 17 Elrathia.................................... 60 haguei.................................... 59 Elvinia................... 3, 23, 32, 33, 42, 43, 66 brevifrons--------------------------------- 44 bridgei................................. 44 dakotensis-...----------------------------- 44 granulata. ........................... 25, 44; pi. 3 gregalis----------------------------------- 44 intermedia________________________________ 42 longa..................................... 44 matheri------------------------------------ 44 missouriensis.........................—. 44 obliquoensis-------------------------------- 44 quinnensis.................................. 42 roemeri.......... 9, 12, 14, 17, 10, 25, 44, 45; pi. 3 ruedemanni.................................. 44 shumardi.................................... 44 tetonensis.................................. 44 teiana...................................... 44 utahensis................................... 44 vagans______________________________________ 44 Elvinia zone.............................4, 12, 22 Elviniella......................... 32, 33, 44, 47 laevis.................... 14, 20, 23, 44, 46; pi. 7 Elviniidae...................................22, 32 Elviniinae................................... 9, 39 England....................................... 46 Erixaniidae..................................... 48 Erixanium.....................................24,49 alienum.................................... 49 brachyaxis..................... 24,49,60; pi. 17 carinatum......................... 25,49; pi. 17 multisegmentus.................... 25,49; pi. 17 senium....................................... 49 sp........................................... 60 Eugonocare...................................... 64 (Euloma) affinis, Ptychoparia................... 37 Eureka, Nev..................................... 75 Eureka district................................. 62 Eureka section _ ...................3,5,12,94,95 eurekensis, Parairvingella...................... 47 evansi, ParabolineUa........................ 63,64 Evolution.............-. 33,56,58,69,75,79,81,85,91 Evolutionary series............................. 14 erotica, Pseudokingstonia.............. 23, 32; pi. l expansa, Taenora. 24, 57, 89; pi. 11 extensa, Morosa................ 24, 69, 87; pi. 20 F Fish Springs Range, Utah........................ 97 flabellifer, Apatokephalus..................... 73 Dikellocephalus......................... 73,74 Sigmocheilus_____________________ 28, 73; pi. 15 flabeUifer a, Parabriscoia..................... 73 Richardsonella.............................. 73 flohri, Irvingella.... 12,14, 20, 25, 45, 46, 47; pi. 6 Frederick, Md_____________________________________ 9 Frederickson, E. A., credited........ 30,31,35,37,46 Q Gaines, R. B., credited_______________________ 46,48 Gatesburg Formation .......................... 30 Genus and species undetermined, No. 1_____91; pi. 2 No. 2................................91; pi. 3 No. 3................................92; pi. 3 No. 4................................92; pi. 16 No. 5................................92; pi. 16 No. 6................................93; pi. 18 Georgina limestone, Australia.................... 49 gibba, Irvingella.............................. 48 glabrus, Holcacephalus (Hardyoides)............. 54 Page Olaphyraspis.................................60,52 occidental is............................. 51 ornata............................. 5, 24, 61; pi. 7 ovata..................................... 51 parva.................................... 51 globosa, Agraulos............................... 82 Bynumiella...................... 12, 23, 82; pi. 18 Kingstonia.............................. 82 Olyptagnostus.................................. 49 Goshute Canyon, Utah............................ 97 grandis, Moosia................................. 44 Granite Canyon, Utah. .......................... 97 granulata, Elvinia................... 25, 44; pi. 3 granulatus, Holcacephalus....................... 53 Olenus.................................... 56 Simulolenus_____________________ 27, 66; pi. 8 granulomarginatus, Litocephalus...... 27, 63; pi. 10 granulosa, Dunderbergia......................... 42 Dunderbergia (Megadunderbergia)............ 43 Elburgia........................ 18, 42, 43; pi. 5 granulosus, Aphdotoxon............... 26, 79; pi. 19 Cernuolimbus.................... 28, 70, 71; pi. 14 Cheilocephalus..................25,31; pi. 1 Crepicephalus (Loganella).................. 42 Dytremacephalus........... 5, 9, 27, 84, 86; pi. 18 Ptychoparia...___________________________ 42 XenocheUos___________________________ 24, 91; pi. 7 grata, Pterocephalina........................... 74 Sigmocheilus.................... 28, 72, 74; pi. 15 gregalis, Elvinia.............................. 44 gregori, Dokimocephalus......................... 35 H 6, 14,15, 16, 27, 69, 60, 84, 85, 95; pi. 6 Crepicephalus (LoganeUus). 59 Elrathia 59 Ptychoparia 59 96 96 66 94, 95, 96 hamburgensis, Parairvingella... 44 94, 95 97 24, 52, 54 9, 28, 54; pi. 7 minor . 6, 28, 52, 53, 541 pi. 7 tenerus 54 (Hardyoides) glabrus, Holcacephalus 54 71 71 96, 97 Highland Range, Nev. 15, 51, 52, 59, 97 Holcacephalinae 53 53, 54 granulatus — 53 (Hardy oides) glabrus 54 28 96 House Range, Utah 3,61,97 16,24,65,68 65,66 halli 66 ovata 65,66 26, 66; pi. 12 65 65,66 Hovsidla 65 17,57,87 22.65.90 Howell, B. F., and others, credited 12 I 24,33,35,41,45 affinis intermedia.................. 25,33,35,30,38; pi. 2INDEX 103 Page Iddingsia,—Continued nevadensis..................................... 36 quinnensis................................... 74 robusta__________________________ 25,35,55; pi. 2 simUis...................... 12,25,35,55,66; pi. 2 ulahensis..................... 25,35,36,57; pi. 2 impolita Prehousia............... 9,26,67,68,69; pi. 13 incerta, Parabolinella _ _........................55,56 indenta, Prehousia....... 9,14,16,25,67,58.69; pi. 13 intermedia, Elburgia_____________17,18,25,48; pi. 6 Elvinia...................................... 42 Iddingsia.................. 25,33,35,55, 38; pi. 2 Parairvingella_................................ 46 Irvingella......................... 1,20,24,32,33,45,49 abrupta....................................... 48 accincta...................................... 48 adamsensis_____________________________________ 47 agrestis_____________________________________ 48 alberta....................................... 48 alia........................................... 48 alta........................................... 48 angustUimbatus....... 12,14,20,23,45,45; pi. 6 arbucklensis................................... 48 arctica........................................ 46 ardmorensis.................................... 48 bacca.......................................... 48 burnetensis.................................... 48 davisensis................................. 46 deckeri........................................ 48 tlohri............... 12,14,20,25,45,46.47; pi. 6 gibba......................................... 48 jorusconti................................ _ 46,48 major______ 12,14,20,25,45,46,47,48,83,94, 95; pi. 6 media.......................................... 48 mesleri...................................... 48 nuneatonensis.................................. 46 obliquoensis............................... 46,48 oblong a....................................... 48 ottertailensis............................... 46 platycephala................................... 46 plena.......................................... 48 protuberant.................................... 46 recurva__...................................... 48 richmonden8i8.............................. 47,48 8eptentrionali8 _ ...........................46,48 8ilve8tri8..................................... 48 suecica......................................46,47 marginal a................................ 46 taUzehuensis................................. 46 transversa................. 25, 45, 46, 48; pi. 6 transversvt................................... 47 tropica......................................46,47 tumifront__________________________________ 46 (Irving eUa)................................... 45 major.................................... 66 (Parairvingella)............................... 45 angu8tilimbatU8............................ 46 eurekensis................................ 47 (Irvingella), Irving eUa............................. 45 major, Irvingella____________________________ 66 Italian Ranch foothills, Nevada...................... 97 Johns Wash Limestone........................93,95 joru8conii, Irvingella......................__ 46,48 K Kindbladia................................. 33,34,57 affinit............................. 24, 57; pi. 3 wichitaenti8._.............................. 37 Kingstonia....................................... 32 globosa..................................... 82 Kobayashi, Teiichi, credited..................... 53 Kolcheck mine, Nevada............................ 97 Komaspis (Parairvingella)__...................... 45 (Parairvingella) convexus................... 46 megalope............................... 46 Korea............................................ 46 L Page Labiostria______________________________________ 58 conveximarginata............................. 68 laevifrons, Cernuolimbvt_____________ 28, 70, 71; pi. 14 laevis, Dytremaeephalut.. _...................... 84 ElvinieUa................. 14, 20, 23, 44, 45; pi. 7 Last Chance foothills, California................ 96 laticeps, Conocephalites (Pterocephalus)__________ 72 leptogranulata, Pseudosaratogia................. 24, 26, 38, 89, 92; pi. 2 Levisatpis................................... 53,54 typicalis.................................. 53 limbata, Aphelotoion_________________ 26, 79, 80; pi. 19 Lincoln Canyon_________________________________ 95 Lincoln Peak..................................... 95 Lincoln Peak Formation.................. 93,94,95,97 Liostracut anytut................................. 39 parvus.................................... 50 Lisania breviloba................................. 30 Listroa........................................ 85 longifront............................... 85,86 toxoura...........—....... 6, 23, 57, 86, 86; pi. 11 Litocephalut.......................... 15,21,24,55,89 bilobata..................................... 63 bilobatus........................... 27, 55; pi. 11 granulomarginatus................... 27, 55; pi. 10 mag nut............................. 27, 55; pi. 10 verruculapeza....................... 27, 55; pi. 11, Locality register................................. 98 Lochman, Christina, credited......... 5,30,31,53,54 Loch man, Christina, and Duncan, Donald, credited............................. 6 Lochman, Christina, and Hu, C. H., credited. 31 Lochman, Christina, and Wilson, J. L., credited............................ 4,9 lLoganella) granulosus, Crepicephalus............. 42 simulator, Crepicephalus..................... 41 unisulcata, Crepicephalus.................... 44 anytut, Crepicephalus........................ 39 haguei, Crepicephalus_______________________ 59 nitidus, Crepicephalus.....................39,41 Lonchocephalidae.................................. 50 Lonchocephalus__________________________________ 51 longa, Elvinia.................................... 44 longi front, Listroa........................... 85,86 longispina, Aphelaspis......................... 6,14, 15, 27, 58, 59, 60, 62; pi. 9 Morosa________v................... 26, 86, 87; pi. 20 M McGill, Nev.......................... 15,35,51,93,94 McGill section................. 3,4,5,12,15,76,94,96 Macks Canyon, Nev------------------------------- 96 magna, Pseudosaratogia........................ 38,51 magnus, Litocephalut.................. 27, 55; pi. 10 major, Irvingella.............................. 12, 14, 20, 25, 45, 46, 47, 48, 83, 94, 95; pi. 6 Irvingella (Irvingella)..._________________ 66 marginata, Aphelotoion_______________ 26, 79, 80; pi. 19 Irvingella suecica._............................ 46 Maryvillia...................................... 30 bristolensis........................... 29 matheri, Elvinia............................. 44 Ptychoparia................................ 44 media, Irvingella................................ 48 (Megadunderbergia) granulosa, Dunderbergia.. 43 megagranulus, Stenambon.............. 25, 88; pi. 11 megalops, Komaspis (Parairvingella)______________ 46 Mendha Formation................................ 96, 97 Menomonia........................................ 79 Menomoniidae 53, 91 48 9, 28, 54; pi. 7 6, 28, 52, 53, 54; pi. 7 23, 86 28, 86; pi.18 deflnita 28, 86; pi. 18 12, 23, 55; pi. 19 minuta, Bernicella - 30,31 minutum, Xenocheilos...........................90, 91 Page minutus, Cheilocephalus........................ 30 Oligomdopus_________________________ 31,32 M iscellaneous collections, listed............ 96 Missouri____________________________________35, 91 missouriensis, Elvinia________________________ 44 Molluscs.................................... 22 Montana........................................ 51 Moosia...................................... 43 grandis................................ 44 Morosa____________________________________ 24, 58, 86 brevispina......................26,87; pi. 20 extensa.......................... 24, 69, 87; pi. 20 longispina....................... 26, 86, 87; pi. 20 Mount Hamilton, Nev....................... 60, 83, 94 Mount Hamilton district, Nev................... 48 Muddy Mountains_______________________________ 96 multicinctus, Dikellocephalus...............71, 72 Hederacauda______________________________ 71 multisegmentus, Erixanium.............25, 49; pi. 17 N Nericia.------------------------------------ 61 Nevada........................................ 83 nevadensis, Berkeia........................... 37 Iddingsia.............................. 36 nitida, Dunderbergia_ _.......... 26, 36, 40, 41; pi. 4 nitidus, Crepicephalus (Loganellus)......... 39, 41 Ptychoparia............................ 41 nixonensis, Blountia.......................... 29 Nolichucky Shale.............................. 6 Nopah Formation........................... 96,97 Norwoodia tenera__.......................... 53, 54 N or woodiidae................................ 52 Norwondina------------------------------------52, 54 tenera c until era_______________________ 54 Notch Peak, Utah............................. 97 not ha, Pterocephalina......~.............. 74 Sigmocheilut....................... 28,74; pi. 15 Novaya Zemlya................................. 46 nuneatonensis, Irvingella..................... 46 Nye County, Nev............................. 96 O obliquoensis, Elvinia.............................. 44 Irvingella--------------------------------- 46,48 oblong a, Irvingella------------------------------- 48 Occident, Pterocephalia........................... 72 occidentalis, Olaphyraspis....................... 51 ogilviei, Ole nut________________________________ 56 Oklahoma.........................................45,83 Ole nas pella...------------------------- 24,59,61,55 paucisegmenta....................... 27,64; pi. 10 regular is____________________ 6,27,60,64,85; pi. 10 separata---------------------------- 6,27,65; pi. 10 Olenidae........................................... 54 56 ogilviei truncatus wilsoni 56 - 59 55,56 23,29,30,81 25,31,82; pi. 1 25,81; pi. 1 31,32 omega, Cheilocephalus 30,31 Ontogeny, significance of— .. 19,47,48,56; pis. 6,12 . 49 Ore Hill Limestone Member, Gatesburg Formation 30 orient, Pterocephalia............................ 73 Ornamentation, significance of—.............. 21, 35,37,40,41,42,43,53,70,75,76,80,83 ornata, Glaphyraspis...................5,24,61; pi. 7 Raaschella................................. 51 Orr Formation................................... 97 orygmatos, Cernuolimbus............ 28,69,70; pi. 14 Osgood Mountains, Nev--------------------------- 94 ottertailensis, Irvingella---------------------- 46 ovata, Olaphyraspis...............-.......... 51 Housia____________________________ 26,65,66; pi. 12104 INDEX P Page Parabolinella evansi............................ 63,64 incerta__________________________________ 55,56 Parabriscoia flabeUifera-------------------------- 73 Parahousia--------------------------------- 24,66,68 constricta................... 26,66,67; pi. 12 subequalis_______________________ 26,66; pi. 12 Parairvingella__________________________________ 45,47 angustilimbatus----------------------------- 46 eurekensis___________________________________ 47 hamburgensis_________________________________ 44 intermedia................................. 46 (Parairvingella), Irvingella______________________ 45 Komaspis................................... 45 anguslUimbatus, IrvmgeUa_____________________ 46 convexus, Komaspis.......................... 46 eurekensis, Irvingella....................... 47 megalops, Komaspis........................... 46 Paranorwoodia___________________________________ 53 parva, Glaphyraspis............................... 51 parvus, Liostracus________________________________ 50 Pathology________________________30; ols. 1, 9,14,19 Patterson Pass.................................... 95 paucigranulus, Stenambon_______________25, 88; pi. 11 paucisegmenta, Olenaspella.............27, 6k pi. 10 peculiaris, Aciculolenus_______________ 25, 54, 66; pi. 7 Pennsylvania................................ 30 pernasuta, Dokimocephalus______________23, S6; pi. 3 pernasutus, Ptychoparia.....................34, 35 Pinctus_________________________________________ 80 platycephala, Irvingella.......................... 46 plena, Irvingella________________________________ 48 pogonipensis, Pterocephalina.................. 74 Sigmocheilus.....................27, 74; pi. 15 Pogonip Group..-................................... 97 Pogonlp Ridge, Nev................................. 60 Pokrovskaya, N. V., credited................ 46, 49, 64 polybothra, Dunderbergia............... 26, 42; d1. 4 Pomegranate limestone, Australia____________46,47,49 potosiensis, Pterocephalia........................ 73 Prehousia.............................. 24, 58, 67, 81 alata.................... 9, 14,16, 26,67,68; pi. 13 diverta.................... 9, 16, 25, 67; pi. 12 impolita................... 9, 26, 67, 68, 69; pi. 13 indenta...............9,14,16, 25, 67,68, 69; d1. 13 prima.................9,14,16, 17, 24, 67,68; pi. 13 semicircularis................... 25, 68, 69; pi. 12 Prehousia zone..................................... 9 prima, Apachia......................... 26, 34; pi. 3 Prehousia............. 9,14,16,17, 24, 67,68; pi. 13 prior, Comanchia................................ 83 Proaulacopleura.................................. 58 butt si...................................... 59 protuberans, Irvingella........................... 46 Pseudokingstonia.............................. 29,32 exotica................................ 23, 32; pi. 1 Pseudolisania...................................... 29 breviloba................................ 30 raaschi...................................... 30 texana..................................... 30 Pseudosaratog ia............................33,38 abnormis................... 24, 26, 38, 39; pi. 2 leptogranulata............... 24, 26,38,39,92; pi. 2 maqna.................................. 38,51 Pterocephalia...............................25,71,73 bridgei................................... 73 concava____________________ 14,19, 20,28, 72; pi. 17 dakotensis_________________________________ 72 deckeri..................................... 73 elongata......................... 28, 72; pi. 17 occidens................................... 72 oriens..................................... 73 potosiensis................................ 73 punctata__....................... 25, 71, 92; pi. 17 sanctisabae........... 14,19, 20, 28, 71, 72; pi. 17 73 73 6 .... 14 12 4 silvestris........................ vlrichi.......................... Pterocephaliid biomere, division of. evolution within................. physical stratigraphy of__________ scope, content, and concept of.. Page Pterocephaliidae .. 17,57 Page Sigmocheilus—Continued Pterocephalina . 62 utahensis 77 notha . 74 pogonipensis . . . .. 74 Pterocephalia . 73 similis, Iddingsia 12, 25, 35, 36, 66; pi. 2 (Pterocephalus) laticeps, Conocephalites 72 similis robustus, Ptychoparia 36 haguei 59 simulator, Crepicephalus (Loganella) 41 robustus 36 suada 83 (Euloma) affinis... 37 wilsoni 12, 27, 66; pi. 8 Snake Range, Nev .. 3,4,5,6,81,93,94 Snake Range section, Nevada 95 Ptychoparioid trilobites, key to 23 Specimens, preservation of 28 Pterocephalia.. 25, 71, 92; pi. 17 Spring Mountains, Nev .. 96 quadrata, Dicanthopyge__________________________ 6, 9, 14,15, 27, 61,62, 81; pi. 9 quadrisulcatus, Simvlolenus............ 12, 27, 56; pi. 8 Quartz Spring, Calif_____________________________ 96 quinnensis, Elburgia.. 9, 12, 14, 18, 19, 25, 43; pi. 6 Elvinia___________________________________ 42 Iddingsia--------------------------------- 74 Taenicephalus_______________________________ 43 Raaschella_____________________________________50, 51 ornata___________________________________ 51 raaschi, Pseudolisania-------------------------- 30 Ratto Canyon, Nev-------------------------------- 96 recurva, Irvingella______________________________ 48 reductus, Dicanthopyge.. 9, 14, 15, 16, 27,02,95; pi. 10 reqularis, Olenaspella_______ 6, 27, 60, 64, 85; pi. 10 Resser, C. E., credited....................... 12 Richardsonella flabeUifera_______________________ 73 richmondensis, Dicellocephalus________________ 62, 63 Irvingelta............................... 47, 48 Richmond mine, Nevada............................ 97 Richmond shaft, Nevada_________________________ 96 Robison, R. A., credited________________________ 3, 36 robusta, Iddingsia_________________ 25, 35, 36; pi. 2 robustus, Ptychoparia similis------------------- 36 roemeri, Dikellocephalus...................... 43, 44 Elvinia.......... 9, 12, 14, 17, 19, 25, 44, 45; pi. 3 Ruby Range, Nev__________________________________ 3, 79 Ruby Range section, Nevada---------------------76, 96 ruedemanni, Elvinia.......................... 44 Rusconi, Carlos, credited________________________ 44 Ruston, Adrian, credited_________________________ 46 S sanctisabae, Pterocephalia.. 14,19,20, 28, 71, 72; pi. 17 Schellbourne, Nev............................... 40 semicircularis, Prehousia__________ 25, 68, 69; pi. 12 semigranvlosus, Cernuolimbus............. 28, 70; pi. 14 senium, Eriianium-------------------------------- 49 separata, Olenaspella______________ 6, 27, 65; pi. 10 septentrionalis, Irvingella------------------- 46, 48 serratus, Sigmocheilus___________________ 73, 74, 75 Shaw, A. B., credited--------------------------- 53 Shell Creek Range, Nev--------------------------- 40 Shingle Pass, Nev.................. 3, 30, 51, 74, 85, 96 Shingle Pass section..................... 66, 82, 96 shumardi, Elvinia............................... 44 Siberia__________________________________ 46, 49, 64 Sigmocheilus................. 19, 20, 25, 69, 73, 76, 93 flabeUifer.......................... 28, 73; pi. 15 grata___________________________ 28, 72, 74; pi. 15 notha_______________________________ 28, 74; pi. 15 pogonipensis......—................. 27,74; pi. 15 st. croixensis, Cheilocephalus.................. 29 Stenambon................................ 23,58,88 megagranulus....................... 25, 88; pi. 11 paucigranulus___________________ 25, 88; pi. 11 Stenelymus breviceps.......................... 32 Stenocombus_____________________________________ 28 Stratigraphic data............................ 93 Strigambitus.................................25,76 bilobus......................... 28, 75, 77; pi. 16 blepharina...................... 25, 76; pi. 16 tiansversus_____________ 9, 28, 40, 75. 77; pi. 16 utahensis....................- 28, 76, 77; pi. 16 Stromatolites................................. 95 suada, Ptychoparia______________________________ 83 subditun, Aphelaspis____ 6, 16, 27, 58, 59, 60, 85; pi. 8 subequalis, Parahousia............... 26, 66; pi. 12 svecica, Irvingella___________________________46,47 suecica marginata, Irvingella.................. 46 Swarbrick Formation---------------------------- 97 Sweden....................................... 46 Systematic paleontology......................... 28 Taenicephalus quinnensis........................ 43 Taenora_________________________________________ 89 expansa___________________________ 24, 57, 89; pi. 11 taitzehuensis, Irvingella..........-.......... 46 tenet a cuneifera, Norwoodina_____________________ 54 tenera, Norwoodia............................ 53,54 tenerus, Hardyoides------------------------------ 54 Tennessee...................................... 6,9 Terranovella................................... 61 brevis____________________________ 6, 24, 52; pi. 7 texana, Elvinia.................................. 44 Texas.............................. 5,6,9,46,51,83,86 tetonensis, Elvinia......—....................— 44 texana, Pseudolisania..............-.......... 30 toxoura, Listroa.........— 6, 23, 57, 85, 86; pi. 11 transversa, Irvingella............ 25, 45, 46, 48; pi. 6 transversus, Irvingella___________________________ 47 Strigambitus_____________ 9, 28, 40, 75, 77; pi. 16 Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology......... 28.33 trigonis, Apachia........-.................... 33 trigranulatus, Anechocephalus______ 26, 77, 78; pi. 20 tropica, Irvingella...........-...............- 46,47 truncatus, Olenus_________________________________ 59 tuUbergi, Acerocare_______________________________ 66 Tumicephalus.............-....-............... 89 depressus________________ 6, 9, 24, 57, 89, 90; pi. 13 tumifrons.................................. 6,90 tumifrons, Chariocephalus......................... 46 Irvingella___________________________________ 46 Tumicephalus------------------------------- 6,90 Tybo, Nev_________________________________________ 47 Tybo Canyon, Nev.................................. 97 Tybo district, Nevada.........-...............45,46 Tybo Shale...............-.................... 97INDEX 105 Page 79 Levisaspis U 53 73 Unassigned trilobites, general discussion— 77 unisulcata, Crepicephalus (Loganella) 44 Utah 93 44 .... 25.35.36.37: Dl. 2 77 Sigmocheilus 77 28.76.77: Dl. 16 V vacuna, Housia ... 65,66 Page vagans, Elvinia___________________________ — 44 variagranula, Dunderbergia___________ 26,40,4/; pi. 5 varro, Dolichometopus (Housia)...............65,66 Housia........................... 26,66; pi. 12 veritas, Bromella____________________24,81; pi. 18 verruculapeza, Litocephalus..........- 27,63; pi. 11 Virginia...................................- 51 W walcotti, Aphelaspis-.......................... 58 Walker Creek, Nev.............................. 97 Wasatch Range, Utah__________________________ 93 Weeks Canyon, Utah............................. 97 White house, F. W., credited................... 65 White Pine County, Nev......................... 12 wichitacnsis, Berkeia........................ 37 Kindbladia................................. 37 Page Widewest Canyon, Nev. 55,56 12,27,66; pi. 8 Wilson, J. L., credited. 34,35,37,38,83 94 94,95,96 Wisconsin. ... Wyoming 83 51 X 90 24,91; pi. 7 90,91 Y Yucca Flat section. — . 6,12,96 O 735-610 0-65-10 CC CD (D OO ' Oi 00 «o SaifcSooawaPLATES 1-20PLATE 1 Figures 1, 2, 4. Blountia bristolensis Resser (p. 29), X 4. 1. Free cheek, USNM 141504. 2. Cranidium, USNM 141505. 4. Pygidium, USNM 141506. All from USGS colln. 2432-CO, Aphelaspis zone, Highland Range, Nev. 3. Oligometopus breviceps (Walcott) (p. 32), X 4. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 24577, USNM loc. 62, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 5. Oligometopus contractus n. sp. (p. 31), X 10. Holotype cranidium, USNM 141507, USGS colln. 2563-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Shingle Pass, Nev. 6-8. Cheilocephalus granulosus n. sp. (p. 31). 6. Holotype cranidium, X 4, USNM 141508, USGS colln. 2535-CO, Cherry Creek, Nev. 7. Pygidium, X 3, questionably assigned, USNM 141509, USGS colln. 2561-CO, Shingle Pass, Nev. 8. Small pygidium, X 6, USNM 141510, USGS colln. 2535-CO, Cherry Creek, Nev. All from Dicanthopyge zone. 9-11. Cheilocephalus brevilobus (Walcott) (p. 30). 9. Cranidium, X 2, questionably assigned, USNM 141511, USGS colln. 2557-CO, Elvinia zone, Cherry Creek Nev. 10. Stereogram of typical cranidium, X 3, USNM 141512. 11. Pygidium X 3, USNM 141513. 10 and 11 from USGS colln. 2315-CO, Aphelaspis zone, Shingle Pass, Nev. 12-15, 17. Cheilocephalus brachyops n. sp. (p. 30). 12. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 4, USNM 141514. 13. Stereogram of associated pygidium, X 3, USNM 141515. 14. Small cranidium, X 10, USNM 141516. 15. Pygidium, X 1, having incompletely formed right pleural region, USNM 141517. 17. Pygidium, X 3, USNM 141518. All from USGS colln. 2563-CO, highest part of Dunderbergia zone, Shingle Pass, Nev. 16, 18, 19. Pseudokingstonia exotica n. gen., n. sp. (p. 32). 16. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 10, USNM 141519. 18. Cranidium, X 10, front oblique view showing narrow striated border, USNM 141520. 19. Stereogram of pygidium, X 4, USNM 141521. All from USGS colln. 2977-CO, Elvinia zone, House Range, Utah.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 1 ASAPHISCIDAE AND CHEILOCEPHALIDAEPLATE 2 Figures 1-4. Iddingsia similis (Walcott) (p. 36). 1. Latex cast of free cheek, X 2, USNM 141522. 2. Cranidium, X 2, USNM 141523. 3. Pygidium, X 1, USNM 141524. All from USGS colln. 2579-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 4. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 1, USNM 24641, USNM loc. 60, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 5-8. Iddingsia intermedia n. sp. (p. 36). 5. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 4, USNM 141525, USGS colln. 3027-CO, Dunderbergia zone, McGill, Nev. 6. Exfoliated free cheek, X 2, USNM 141526. 7. Exfoliated cranidium, X 4, USNM 141527. 8. Pygidium, X 2, USNM 141528. All from USGS colln. 3033-CO, Dunderbergia zone, McGill, Nev. 9. Iddingsia utahensis Resser (p. 37), X 1.5. Cranidium, USNM 141529, USGS colln. 2513-CO, Elvinia zone, McGill, Nev. 10-11. Iddingsia robusta (Walcott) (p. 36). 10. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 2, USNM 24609, USNM loc. 61, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 11. Fragmentary cranidium, X 3, showing characteristic ornamentation, USNM 141530, USGS colln. 3109-CO, Elvinia zone, Snake Range, Nev. 12-14, 16, 17. Pseudosaratogia abnormis Palmer (p. 38). 12. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 5, USNM 136923, USGS colln. 955-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 13. Cranidium, X 4, USNM 141531. 14. Free cheek, X 6, USNM 141532. Both from USGS colln. 2312-CO, Elvinia zone, Shingle Pass, Nev. 16. Free cheek, X 4, USNM 141533. 17. Cranidium, X 4, USNM 141534. Both specimens questionably assigned from USGS colln. 3018-CO, Elvinia zone, Bastian Peak, Nev. 15. Genus and species undetermined 1 (p. 92), X 5. Exfoliated cranidium, USNM 141535, USGS colln. 3057-CO, Aphelaspis zone, Tybo, Nev. 18. Pseudosaratogia leptogranulata Palmer (p. 39), X 3. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 136922, USGS colln. 954-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 2 DOKIMOCEPHALINAEPLATE 3 Figures 1-4. 5-7. 8. 9, 11, 14, 16. 10, 13. 12. 15. 17. 18. Kindbladia affinis (Walcott) (p. 37). 1. Free cheek, X 10, USNM 141536. 2. Stereogram of cranidium, X 4, USNM 141537. Both from USGS colln. 2556-CO, Elvinia zone, Cherry Creek, Nev. 3. Cranidium, X 5, showing characteristic ornamentation, USNM 141538, USGS colln. 2565-CO, Elvinia zone, Shingle Pass, Nev. 4. Pygidium, X 6, USNM 141539, USGS colln. 3109-CO, Elvinia zone, Snake Range, Nev. Apachia prima n. sp. (p. 34). 5. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 4, USNM 141540. 6. Pygidium, X 6, USNM 141541. 7. Free cheek, X 6, USNM 141542. All from USGS colln. 3031-CO, Dunderbergia zone, McGill, Nev. Dellea? punctata n. sp. (p. 84), X 8. Holotype cranidium, USNM 141543, USGS colln. 2580-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. Elvinia roemeri (Shumard) (p. 44). 9. Stereogram of typical cranidium, X 2, USNM 141544, USNM colln. 2552-CO, Elvinia zone, Cherry Creek, Nev. 11. Cranidium, X 3, USNM 141545. 14. Small cranidium, X 6, showing characteristic relatively greater length of palpebral lobes, USNM 141546. Both from USGS colln. 2580-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 16. Immature cranidium, X 8, USNM 141547, USGS colln. 2564-CO, Elvinia zone, Shingle Pass, Nev. Apachia butlerensis (Freckerickson) (p. 34), X 4. 10. Stereogram of cranidium, USNM 141548, USGS colln. 3034-CO, Dunderbergia zone, McGill, Nev. 13. Cranidium, showing fine granular ornamentation, USNM 141549, USGS colln. 2563-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Shingle Pass, Nev. Elvinia granulata Resser (p. 44), X 3. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 108815, USNM loc. 63, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. Genus and species undetermined 2 (p. 91), X 5. Pygidium USNM 141550, USGS colln. 3018-CO, Elvinia zone, Bastian Peak, Nev. Genus and species undetermined 3 (p. 92), X 4. Exfoliated cranidium, USNM 141551, USGS colln. 3009-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Bastian Peak, Nev. Dokimocephalus pernasutus (Walcott) (p. 35), X 1. Stereogram of best known cranidium; anterior part is latex cast, USNM 141552, USGS colln. 3537-CO, Elvinia zone, Yucca Flat, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 3 DOKIMOCEPHALINAE, ELVINIINAEFigures 8, PLATE 4 1, 2, 5, 6. Dunderbergia nitida (Hall and Whitfield) (p. 41). 1. Stereogram of latex cast of nearly complete specimen, X 1, USNM 141553, USGS colln. 3011-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Bastian Peak, Nev. 2. Pygidium, X 5, USNM 136838a. 5. Stereogram of cranidium, X 4, USNM 136838c. 6. Free cheek, X 4, USNM 136838f. All from USGS colln. 2300-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 3, 4, 7. Dunderbergia polybothra Palmer (p. 42). 3. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 4, USNM 136845. 4. Pygidium, X 3, USNM 136844f. 7. Free cheek, X 4, USNM 136844b. All from USGS colln. 2296-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 10, 14-16. Dunderbergia? anyta (Hall and Whitfield) (p. 39). 8. Stereogram of cranidium, X 4, USNM 141554. 10. Stereogram of pygidium, X 3, USNM 141555. 15. Free cheek, X 3, USNM 141556. 16. Doublure of free cheek, X 2, showing course of connective suture, USNM 141557. All from USGS colln. 2998-CO, Dunderbergia zone, House Range, Utah. 14. Stereogram of latex cast of counterpart of holotype, X 2, USNM 24576. from Dunderbergia zone, Schellbourne, Nev. 9, 11-13. Dunderbergia bigranulosa Palmer (p. 40). 9. Stereogram of cranidium, X 4, USNM 136848a. 11. Pygidium, X 4, USNM 136848e. 12. Free cheek, X 4, USNM 136848b. All from USGS colln. 2295-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 13. Closeup of cranidial ornamentation, X 10, USNM 136849b, USGS colln. 2294-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 4 ELVINIINAEPLATE 5 Figures 1-5. Dunderbergia variagranula Palmer (p. 41). 1. Stereogram of cranidium, X 4, USNM 136840a. 2. Free cheek, X 4, USNM 136840b. Both from USGS colln. 2297-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 3. Stereogram of pygidium, X 4, USNM 136843, USGS colln. 809-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 4. Cranidium, X 3, USNM 141558. 5. Free cheek, X 3, USNM 141559. Both from USGS colln. 2457-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Ash Meadows, Nev. 6-10. Dunderbergia calculosa n. sp. (p. 41). 6. Cranidium, X 3, USNM 141560, USGS colln. 3024-CO, Dunderbergia zone, McGill, Nev. 7. Closeup of anterolateral part of holotype cranidium, X 8, showing ornamentation, USNM 141561. 8. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 3. 9. Free cheek, X 5, USNM 141562. 10. Stereogram of pygidium, X 5, USNM 141563. All from USGS colln. 2313-CO, Prehousia zone, Shingle Pass, Nev. 11-13, 15. Dunderbergia brevispina n. sp. (p. 40). 11. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 5, USNM 141564. 13. Stereogram of pygidium, X 5, USNM 141565. 15. Closeup of latex cast of cranidium, X 8, showing ornamentation, USNM 141566. All from USGS colln. 2559-CO, Dicanthopyge zone, Shingle Pass, Nev. 12. Free cheek, X 5, USNM 141567, USGS colln. 2314-CO, Dicanthopyge zone, Shingle Pass, Nev. 14, 16-19. Elburgia granulosa (Hall and Whitfield) (p. 42). 14. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 3, USNM 24573, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 16. Cranidium, X 2, USNM 141568, USGS colln. 2612-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Deep Creek Range, Utah. 17. Free cheek, X 2, USNM 141569, USGS colln. 3412-CO, Dunderbergia zone, House Range, Utah. 18. Cranidium, X 3, questionably assigned, USNM 141570, USGS colln. 2548-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Cherry Creek, Nev. 19. Pygidium, X 3, USNM 141571, USGS colln. 2612-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Deep Creek Range, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 5 ELVINIINAE 735-610 0-65-11PLATE 6 Figures 1-4. 5,6. 7, 8. 9-15. 16, 19, 20, 24. 17, 18, 21-23. Elburgia quinnensis (Resser) (p. 43). 1. Exfoliated free cheek, X 2, USNM 141572 USGS colln. 1271-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Quartz Spring area, Calif. 2. Cranidium, X 2, USNM 141573, USGS colln. 3011-CO. 3. Stereogram of latex cast of cranidium, X 2, USNM 141574, USGS colln. 3016-CO. Both from Dunderbergia zone, Bastian Peak, Nev. 4. Holotype, exfoliated cranidium, X 3, USNM 108838a, USNM loc. 7j, Dunderbergia zone, Quinn Canyon Range, Nev. Elburgia intermedia n. sp. (p. 43). 5. Cranidium, X 5, USNM 141575, USGS colln. 3028-CO, Dunderbergia zone, McGill, Nev. 6. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 3, USNM 141576, USGS colln. 3003-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Bastian Peak, Nev. Irvingella transversa n. sp. (p. 48). 7. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 2, USNM 141577. 8. Small cranidium, X 6, note faint border, USNM 141578. Both from USGS colln. 2587-CO, Elvinia zone, Ruby Range, Nev. Irvingella major Ulrich and Resser (p. 48). 9. Pygidium, X 6, USNM 141579. 10. Stereogram of characteristic cranidium, X 4, USNM 141580. 11. Stereogram of pygidium, X 4, note assymetry of pleural regions, USNM 141581. 12. Free cheek, X 3, USNM 141582. 13. Metaprotaspid, X 15, USNM 141583. 14. Meraspid cranidium, X 10, note well-defined border, USNM 141584. 15. Meraspid cranidium, X 8, note well-defined border, USNM 141585. All from USGS colln. 2587-CO, Elvinia zone, Ruby Range, Nev. Irvingella flohri Resser (p. 47). 16. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 3, USNM 108667, USNM loc. 60, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 19. Small cranidium, X 6, note faint border, USNM 141586. 20. Cranidium, X 5, USNM 141587. 24. Pygidium, X 5, USNM 141588. All from USGS colln. 2579-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. Irvingella angustilimbatus Kobayashi (p. 46). 17. Stereogram of cranidium, X 3, holotype of Parairvingella eurekensis Resser, USNM 108668, USNM loc. 61, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 18. Cranidium, X 4, USNM 141589, USGS colln. 1471-CO, Elvinia zone, Tybo, Nev. 21. Holotype cranidium, X 2, USNM 24643, USNM loc. 62, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 22. Cranidium, X 2, USNM 141590. 23. Variant cranidium, X 3 (= Irvingella tropica Opik?) USNM 141591. Both from USGS colln. 1471-CO, Elvinia zone, Tybo, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 6 ELVINIINAEPLATE 7 Figure 1. 2. 3-5, 9-11. 6-8. 12, 13. 14, 18, 19. 15-17, 20-22. Hardyoides mimicus n. sp. (p. 54), X 10. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 141592, USGS colln. 1996-CO, Dicanthopyge zone, Yucca Flat, Nev. Aciculolenus peculiaris n. gen., n. sp. (p. 55), X 10. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 141593, USGS colln. 2524-CO, topmost Elvinia zone, Cherry Creek, Nev. Hardyoides minor Kobayashi (p. 54), X 15. 3-5, 9. Silicified cranidium, free cheek, pygidium, and partially complete specimen, USNM 141594, 141595, 141596, 141597, USGS colln. 2486-CO, Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 10. Cranidium, USNM 141598, USGS colln. 2510-CO, Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 11. Paratype cranidium NMC 11941, Aphelaspis zone, Mt. Jubilee, British Columbia, Canada. Xenocheilos qranulosus n. sp. (p. 91), X 10. 6, 8. Free cheeks, USNM 141599, 141600. 7. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 141601. All from USGS colln. 2566-CO, Elvinia zone, Shingle Pass, Nev. Terranovella brevis n. sp. (p. 52). 12. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 10, USNM 141602. 13. Cranidium, X 15, USNM 141603. Both from USGS colln. 2432-CO, Aphelaspis zone, Highland Range, Nev. Elviniella laevis Palmer (p. 45). 14. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 5, USNM 136854a, USGS colln. 952—CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 18. Latex cast of free cheek, X 3, USNM 141604. 19. Latex cast of cranidium, X 4, USNM 141605. Both from USGS colln. 3061-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Tybo, Nev. Glaphyraspis ornata (Lochman) (p. 51). 15. Cranidium, X 10, USNM 141606, USGS colln. 2315-CO, Aphelaspis zone, Shjngle Pass, Nev. 16. 20, 21. Silicified cranidium, free cheek, and pygidium, X 15, USNM 141607, 141608, 141609, USGS colln. 2468-CO, Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 17. Cranidium, X 15, USNM 141610, USGS colln. 2996-CO, Aphelaspis zone, House Range, Utah. 22. Cranidium, X 15, USNM 141611, USGS colln. 2432-CO, Aphelaspis zone, Highland Range, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 7 ELVINIINAE, LONCHOCEPHALIDAE, NORWOODIILAE, OLENIDAEPLATE 8 Figures 1-4. Simuloenus quadrisulcatus n. sp. (p. 56). 1. Free cheek, X 6, USNM 141612. 2. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 5, USNM 141613. 4. Pygidium, X 5, USNM 141614. All from USGS colln. 2576-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 3. Small cranidium, X 10, questionably assigned, USNM 141615, USGS colln. 2524-CO, Cherry Creek, Nev. 5-8, 11, 12. Simulolenus wilsoni (Henningsmoen) (p. 56). 5. Hypostome, X 10, USNM 141616. 6. Cranidium, X 6, USNM 141617. 7. Cranidium, X 10, USNM 141618. 8. Free cheek, X 6, USNM 141619. All from USGS colln. 3060-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Tybo, Nev. 11. Crandium, X 6, USNM 141620. 12. Pygidium, X 10, USNM 141621. Both from USGS colln. 3061-CO, Dundergia zone, Tybo, Nev. 9, 10. Simulolenus granulatus Palmer (p. 56), X 10. 9. Holotype cranidium, USNM 136861, USGS colln. 2300-CO. 10. Pygidium, USNM 136860, USGS colln. 2299-CO. Both from Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 13, 17-21. Aphelaspis brachyphasis Palmer (p. 58). 13. Thorax and pygidium, X 2, USNM 143171, USGS colln. 2479-CO, Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 17. Silicified free cheek, X 6, USNM 143169m. 18. Stereogram of silicified holotype cranidium, X 6, USNM 143168. 19. 20. Silicified pygidia, X 8, showing range of variation, USNM 143169 i, e. 21. Silicified hypostome, X 6, USNM 143169k. All from USGS colln. 2466-CO, Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 14-16. Aphelaspis buttsi (Kobayashi) (p. 59). 14. Stereogram of cranidium, X 4, USNM 143176a. 15. Pygidium, X 3, USNM 143176b. 16. Free cheek, X 3, USNM 143176c. All from USGS colln. 2476-CO, Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 22-26. Aphelaspis subditus Palmer (p. 60). 22. Stereogram of cranidium, X 4, USNM 141622, USGS colln. 2510-CO, Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 23. Complete specimen, X 3, USNM 143175, Aphelaspis zone, Mt. Hamilton, Nev. 24. Silicified free cheek, X 4, USNM 141623. 25. Silicified cranidium, X4, USNM 141624. 26. Silicified pygidium, X 4, USNM 141625. All from USGS colln. 2506-CO, Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 8 OLENIDAE, APHELASPIDINAEPLATE 9 Figures 1, 4, 6. Dicanthopyge convergens n. gen., n. sp. (p. 62). 1. Stereogram of cranidium, X 4, USNM 141626. 4. Stereogram of holotype pygidium, X 4, USNM 141627. 6. Small pygidium, X 6, USNM 141628. All from USGS colln. 2496-CO, Dicanthopyge zone, McGill, Nev. 2, 3, 5, 7-11. Dicanthopyge quadrata n. gen., n. sp. (p. 62). 2. Nearly complete specimen, X 4, USNM 141629, USGS colln. 3820-CO, Dicanthopyge zone, Ruby Range, Nev. 3. Stereogram of silicified cranidium, X 4, USNM 141630. 5. Stereogram of silicified holotype pygidium, X 4, USNM 141631. 7. Silicified immature holaspid pygidium, X 6, USNM 141632. 8. 9. Small silicified pygidia, X 4, USNM 141633, 141634. 10. Free cheek, X 5, USNM 141635. 11. Pathologic free cheek, X 6, USNM 141636. All from USGS colln. 3000-CO, Dicanthopyge zone, Schell Creek Range, Nev. 12, 14, 18. 1 Aphelaspis haquei (Hall and Whitfield) (p. 59). 12. Cranidium, X 3, USNM 141637. 14. Pygidium, X 4, USNM 141638. 18. Free cheek, X 3, USNM 141639. All from USGS colln. 2318-CO, Aphelaspis zone, Highland Range, Nev. 13, 15-17. Aphelaspis longispina n. sp. (p. 60). 13. Stereogram of cranidium, X 4, USNM 141640. 15. Stereogram of holotype pygidium, X 4, USNM 141641. 16. Thoracic segment, X 3, USNM 141642. 17. Free cheek, X 4, USNM 141643. All from USGS colln. 2491-CO Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 19-26. Aphelaspis haguei (Hall and Whitfield) (p. 59). 19. Pygidium, X 3, and associated pygidium of A. subditus, USNM 141644, USGS colln. 2486-CO, upper part of Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 20. Latex cast of counterpart of holotype, X 2, USNM 24660, Aphelaspis zone, Mt. Hamilton, Nev. 21. Pygidium, X 3, USNM 141645. 22. Free cheek, X 4, USNM 141646. 23. Cranidium X 3, USNM 141647. All from USGS colln. 2478-CO, lower part of Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 24. Stereogram of cranidium, X 4, USNM 141648, USGS colln. 2486-CO, upper part of Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 25. Stereogram of cranidium, X 3, USNM 141649. 26. Free cheek, X 2, USNM 141650. Both from USGS colln. 2510-CO, upper part of Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 9 APHELASPIDINAEPLATE 10 Figures 1-3. Olenaspella paucisegmenta n. sp. (p 64). 1. Stereogram of cranidium, X 4, USNM 141651. 2. Stereogram of holotype pygidium, X 4, USNM 141652. Both from USGS colln. 2598-CO, Prehousia zone, Ruby Range, Nev. 3. Pygidium, X 5, USNM 141653, USGS colln. 1996-CO, Dicanthopyge zone, Yucca Flat, Nev. 4-6. Olenaspella regularis Palmer (p. 64), X 4. 4. Cranidium, USNM 141654. 5. Pygidium, USNM 141655. Both from USGS colln. 2510-CO, Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 6. Pygidium, USNM 141656, USGS colln. 2536-CO, Dicanthopyge zone, Cherry Creek, Nev. 7-11. Olenaspella separata Palmer (p. 65). 7. Holotype, X 2, USNM 143182, USGS colln. 3039-CO, Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 8. Small silicified cranidium, X 6, USNM 143185h. 9. Silicified pygidium, X 4, USNM 143185d. 10. Large silicified pygidium, X 4, USNM 143185f. 11. Free cheek, X 6, USNM 143185g. All from USGS colln. 2466-CO, Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 12, 15, 16. Litocephalus magnus n. sp. (p. 63), X 3. 12. Stereogram of cranidium, USNM 141657. 15. Stereogram of holotype pygidium, USNM 141658. 16. Free cheek, USNM 141659. All from USGS colln. 1471-CO, Elvinia zone, Tybo, Nev. 13, 14, 17, 18. Litocephalus granulomarginatus Palmer (p. 63). 13. Holotype cranidium, X 2, USNM 136883, USGS colln. 795-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 14. Detail of left anterolateral corner of holotype, X 5. 17. Free cheek, X 2, USNM 136884b. 18. Pygidium, X 2, USNM 136884a. Both from USGS colln. 2300-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 19, 20. Dicanthopyge reductus n. sp. (p. 62), X 2. 19. Stereogram of cranidium, USNM 141660. 20. Stereogram of holotype pygidium, USNM 141661. Both from USGS colln. 1438-CO, Dicanthopyge zone, Snake Range, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 10 APHELASPIDINAEPLATE 11 Figures 1-5. Listroa toxoura Palmer (p. 85). 1. Stereogram of cranidium X 5, USNM 141662. 2. Pygidium, X 5, showing variation in ring furrows; compare with fig. 3; USNM 141663. 3. Stereogram of small pygidium, X 5; compare transverse convexity with fig. 4; USNM 141664. 4. Stereogram of pygidium, X 4, USNM 141665. 5. Cranidium, X 5; note lack of glabellar furrows compared with specimen in fig. 1; USNM 141666. All from USGS colln. 2510-CO, Aphelaspis zone, McGill, Nev. 6, 10, 11. Taenora expansa Palmer (p. 89). 6. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 3, USNM 136872. 10. Pygidium, X 2, USNM 136874. Both from USGS colln. 954-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 11. Free cheek, X 2, USNM 136873a, USGS colln, 2301-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 7-9. Litocephalus verruculopeza Palmer (p. 63), X 3. 7. Free cheek, USNM 136882c. 8. Latex cast of cranidium, USNM 136882a. 9. Pygidium, USNM 136882d. All from USGS colln. 2299-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 12, 16, 18. Stenambon paucigranulus n. gen., n. sp. (p. 88). 12. Pygidium, X 4, USNM 141667. 16. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 2, USNM 141668. 18. Detail of ornamentation and of structure of posterior limb of holotype, X 10. All from USGS colln. 2524-CO, Elvinia zone, Cherry Creek, Nev. 13-15. Litocephalus bilobatus (Hall and Whitfield) (p. 63), X 2. 13. Free cheek, USNM 128324b. 14. Cranidium, USNM 128324a. 15. Pygidium, USNM 128324d. All from USGS colln. 1297-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 17, 19. Stenambon megagranulus n. gen., n. sp. (p. 88). 17. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 4, USNM 141669, USGS colln. 2576-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, 19. Stereogram of pygidium, X 3, USNM 141670, USGS colln. 825-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 11 18 19 APHELASPIDINAE, UNASSIGNED PTEROCEPHALIIDAE 735-610 0-65-12PLATE 12 Figures 1-7. Housia varro (Walcott) (p. 66). 1. Free cheek, X 6, USNM 141671. 2. Fragmentary cranidium, X 6, USNM 141672. 3. Holaspid pygidium, X 6, USNM 141673. 4-7. Meraspid pygidia, degrees 9, 8, and 6, showing macropleural last thoracic segment, X 10, USNM 141674, 141675, 141676, 141677. All from USGS colln. 3081-CO, Elvinia zone, House Range, Utah. 8-11. Housia ovata Palmer (p. 65). 8. Exfoliated cranidium, X 1, showing glabellar muscle scars, USNM 141678, USGS colln. 1194-CO, Elvinia zone, Snake Range, Nev. 9. Exfoliated pygidium, X 2, USNM 136864b. 10. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 2, USNM 136863. 11. Free cheek, X 1,USNM 136864a. All from USGS colln. 872-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 12, 14, 15. Parahousia constricta Palmer (p. 66), X 4. 12. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 136870. 14. Pygidium, USNM 136871b. 15. Free cheek, USNM 136871a. All from USGS colln. 955-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 13, 18, 19. Parahousia subequalis n. sp. (p. 67), X 5. 13. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 141679. 18. Pygidium, USNM 141680. 19. Cranidium, showing variability in appearance of anterolateral fossulae, USM 141681. All from USGS colln. 2563-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Shingle Pass, Nev. 16, 17, 20-23. Prehousia diverla n. sp. (p. 67). 16. Cranidium, X 3, USNM 141682. 17. Pygidium, X 3, USNM 141683. 21. Latex cast of free cheek, X 3, USNM 141684. All from USGS colln. 1478-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Deep Creek Range, Utah. 20. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 2, USNM 141685. 22. Stereogram of exfoliated pygidium, X 3, USNM 141686. 23. Free cheek, X 2, USNM 141687. All from USGS colln. 3001-CO, Dunderbergia zone Bastian Peak, Nev. 24—26. Prehousia semicircularis Palmer (p. 69). 24. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 8, USNM 136868. 25. Pygidium, X 3, USNM 136869a. 26. Free cheek, X 4, USNM 136869b. All from USGS colln. 2294-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 12 HOUSIINAEPLATE 13 Figures 1, 3, 4. Prehousia impolita n. sp. (p. 68). 1. Stereogram of holo-type cranidium, X 4, USNM 141688. 3. Stereogram of pygidium, X 2, USNM 141689. 4. Free cheek, X 2, USNM 141690. All from USGS colln. 2540-CO, Prehousia zone, Cherry Creek, Nev. 2, 5, 8, 9, 12, 13. Prehousia alata Palmer (p. 67). 2. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 3, USNM 136866. 5. Stereogram of pygidium, X 2, USNM 136876b. Both from USGS colln. 1441-CO, Prehousia zone, Snake Range, Nev. 8. Silicified pygidium, X 3, USNM 141691. 9. Ventral view of silicified pygidium, X 4, USNM 141692. 12. Silicified free cheek, X 6, showing doublure, USNM 141693. 13. Partially reconstructed cephalon, X 5, USNM 141694. All from USGS colln. 1436-CO, Prehousia zone, Snake Range, Nev. 6, 7, 10, 11, 14, 15. Prehousia indenta n. sp. (p. 68). 6. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 2, USNM 141695. 10. Stereogram of pygidium, X 2, USNM 141696. 14. Free cheek, X 2, USNM 141697. All from USGS colln. 2505-CO, Prehousia zone, McGill, Nev. 7. Cranidium, X 3, USNM 141698. 11. Pygidium, X 1.5, USNM 141699. 15. Closeup of surface of pygidium shown in fig. 11, X 6, showing pitted ornamentation. All from USGS colln. 1440-CO, Prehousia zone, Snake Range, Nev. 16-18. Prehousia prima n. sp. (p. 68), X 3. 16. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 141700. 17. Stereogram of pygidium, USNM 141701. 18. Free cheek and pygidium, USNM 141702. All from USGS colln. 2503-CO, Dicanthopyge zone, McGill, Nev. 19-23. Tumicephalus depressus n. gen., n. sp. (p. 90), X 4. 19. Free cheek, USNM 141703. 20. Thoracic segment, USNM 141704. 21. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 141705. 22. Pygidium, USNM 141706. 23. Hypostome, USNM 141707. All from USGS colln. 1479-CO, Dicanthopyge zone, Deep Creek Range, Utah.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 13 HOUSIINAEPLATE 14 Figures 1-3. 4-8. 9. 10-12, 18. 13-17. Cernuolimbms orygmatos Palmer (p. 70). 1. Stereogram of pygidium, X 3, USNM 136876c. 2. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 2, USNM 136875. 3. Free cheek, X 2, USNM 136876b. All from USGS colln. 2295-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. Cernuolimbus semigranulosus Palmer (p. 70). 4. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 3, USNM 136877. 5. Stereogram of pygidium, X 3, USNM 136878a. 8. Free cheek, X 3, USNM 136878b. All from USGS colln. 2294-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 6. Free cheek, X 3, USNM 141708. 7. Cranidium, X 2, USNM 141709. Both from USGS colln. 2457-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Ash Meadows, Nev. Cernuolimbus depressus Palmer (p. 69), X 5. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 5, USNM 136879, USGS colln. 2297-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. Cernuolimbus laevifrons n. sp. (p. 70). 10. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 3, USNM 141710. 11. Cranidium, X 2; note assymetry of front margin; USNM 141711. 12. Stereogram of pygidium, X 3, USNM 141712. 18. Free cheek, X 3, USNM 141713. All from USGS colln. 2540-CO, Prehousia zone, Cherry Creek, Nev. Cernuolimbus granulosus n. sp. (p. 70). 13. Free cheek, X 5, 141714. 14. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 5, USNM 141715. 15. Cranidium, showing inbend of border furrow, X 5, USNM 141716. 16. Stereogram of pygidium, X 5, USNM 141717. All from USGS colln. 2998-CO, Dunderbergia zone, House Range, Utah. 17. Cranidium, X 4, questionably assigned, having extensive granular ornamentation, USNM 141718, USGS colln. 1993-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Spring Mountains, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 14 PTEROCEPHALIINAEPLATE 15 Figures 7, 8 ., 3, 5, 6. Sigmocheilus flabellifer (Hall and Whitfield) (p. 15). 1. Stereogram of cranidium, X 3, USNM 136898a. 3. Stereogram of pygidium, X 3, USNM 136898b. Both from USGS colln. 955-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 5. Free cheek, X 3, USNM 136899, USGS colln. 864-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 6. Holotype pygidium, X 2, USNM 24569, Elvinia zone, Mt. Hamilton, Nev. 2, 4, 9. Sigmocheilus pogonipensis (Resser) (p. 74). 2. Stereogram of cranidium, X 3, USNM 136900a. 4. Stereogram of latex cast of pygidium, X 3, USNM 136900b. 9. Free cheek, X 3, USNM 136900c. All from USGS colln. 2301-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. , 10-15. Sigmocheilus notha (Resser) (p. 74). 7. Variant cranidium, X 5, nasute border having scattered granules, USNM 141719, USGS colln. 3007-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Bastian Peak, Nev. 8. Cranidium, X 2, holotype of Iddingsial quinnensis Resser, USNM 108802a, USNM loc. 7j, Quinn Canyon Range, Nev. 10. Stereogram of cranidium, X 4, USNM 141720. 11. Free cheek, X 4, USNM 141721. 12. Stereogram of pygidium, X 4, USNM 141722. 14. Latex cast of pygidium, X 2, USNM 141723. 15. Pygidium, X 5, USNM 141724. All from USGS colln. 3031-CO, Dunderbergia zone, McGill, Nev. 13. Holotype cranidium and associated pygidium, X 2, USNM 108781a, USNM loc. 7j, Quinn Canyon Range, Nev. 16-18. Sigmocheilus grata (Resser) (p. 74), X 3. 16. Stereogram of cranidium, USNM 136895c. 17. Free cheek, USNM 136895b. 18. Stereogram of latex cast of pygidium, USNM 136895a. All from USGS colln. 2299-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka. Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 15 PTEROCEPHALIINAE PLATE 16 Figures 1-3. 4, 5. 6-10. 11-13. 14-18. 19. Strigambitus bilobus n. gen., n. sp. (p. 76). 1. Free cheek, X 4, USNM 141725. 2. Stereogram of cranidium, X 5, USNM 141726. 3. Stereogram of holotype pygidium, X 5, USNM 141727. All from USGS colln. 2608-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Ruby Range, Nev. Strigambitus utahensis (Resser) (p. 77). 4. Stereogram of latex cast of paratype cranidium, X 2, USNM 108785c. 5. Stereogram of latex cast of paratype pygidium, X 1.5, USNM 108785b. Both from USNM loc. 33d, Dunderbergia zone, Fish Springs Range, Utah. Strigambitus transversus n. gen., n. sp. (p. 77). 6. Free cheek, X 4, USNM 141728. 7. Stereogram of cranidium, X 3, USNM 141729. 8. Pygidium, X 4, showing an extreme variation of shape, USNM 141730. 9. Stereogram of holotype pygidium, X 2, USNM 141731. 10. Free cheek, X 3, showing long genal spine, USNM 141732. All from USGS colln. 2612-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Deep Creek Range, Utah. Genus and species undetermined 4 (p. 92). 11. 12. Cranidia, X 5, USNM 141733, 141734. 13. Pygidium, X 3, USNM 141735. Both from USGS colln. 2598-CO, Prehousia zone, Ruby Range, Nev. Strigambitus? blepharina n. gen., n. sp. (p. 76). 14. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 3, USNM 141736. 15. Free cheek, X 2, USNM 141737. 16. Stereogram of pygidium, X 3, USNM 141738. 17. Small cranidium, X 4, USNM 141739. All from USGS colln. 756-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Quartz Spring area, California. 18. Free cheek, X 3, showing a variation in form, USNM 141740. USGS colln. 1268-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Quartz Spring area, California. Genus and species undetermined 5 (p. 92), X 3. Cranidium, USNM 141741, USGS Colln. 2607-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Ruby Range Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 16 4 5 PTEROCEPHALIINAEPLATE 17 Figures 1-3. Pterocephalia sanctisabae Roemer (p. 72). 1. Free cheek, X 2, USNM 136889b. 2. Stereogram of cranidium, X 3, USNM 136889a. Both from USGS colln. 2302-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 3. Stereogram of pygidium, X 3, USNM 136890, USGS colln. 2300-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 4-7. Pterocephalia concava Palmer (p. 72). 4. Small pygidium, X 2, USNM 136888h. 5. Latex cast of large pygidium, X 1, USNM 136888f. 6. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 2, USNM 136887. 7. Free cheek, X 1, USNM 136888e. All from USGS colln. 2297-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 8, 12, 13. Pterocephalia? punctata n. sp. (p. 71). 8. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 5, USNM 141742. 12. Stereogram of latex cast of pygidium, X 3, USNM 141743. 13. Latex cast of free cheek, X 8, USNM 141744. All from USGS colln. 2603-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Ruby Range, Nev. 9-11. Pterocephalia elongata Palmer (p. 72). 9. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 2, USNM 136891, USGS colln. 873-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 10. Free cheek, X 3, USNM 136893a. 11. Stereogram of pygidium, X 3, USNM 136893c. Both from USGS colln. 2300-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 14-16. Erixanium"! brachyaxis n. sp. (p. 50), X 5. 14. Cranidium, USNM 141745. 15. Pygidium, USNM 141746. Both from USGS colln. 3023-CO, Dunderbergia zone, McGill, Nev. 16. Stereogram of holotype pygidium, USNM 141747, USGS colln. 2608-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Ruby Range. Nev. 17, 18. ErixaniUm multisegmentus n. sp. (p. 49), X 5. 17. Cranidium, USNM 136915a. 18. Holotype pygidium, USNM 136916. Both from USGS colln. 2297-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 19-21. Erixanium carinatum n. sp. (p. 49). 19. Cranidium, X 4, USNM 141748. 20. Holotype pygidium, X 6, USNM 141749. 21. Free cheek, X 5, USNM 141750. All from USGS colln. 3535-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Yucca Flat, Nev. 22. Erixanium sp. (p. 50), X 5. Pygidium, USNM 141751, USGS colln. 2547-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Cherry Creek, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 17 PTERICEPHALIINAE POSITION UNCERTAIN 735-610 0-65-13PLATE 18 Figures 1-9. 10-13. 14, 16-19, 21. 15. 20. 22, 23. 24. Bromella veritas n. gen., n. sp. (p. 81). 1. Free cheek, X 6, USNM 141752. 2. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 6, USNM 141753. 5. Pygidium, X 6, USNM 141754. 6. Cranidium, X 6, USNM 141755. All from USGS colln. 2560-CO, Prehousia zone, Shingle Pass, Nev. 3. Cranidium, X 5, USNM 141756, USGS colln. 1439-CO, Prehousia zone, Snake Range, Nev. 4. Free cheek, X 5, USNM 141757. 8. Cranidium, X 6, USNM 141758. 9. Pygidium, X 6, USNM 141759. All from USGS colln. 2997-CO, Prehousia zone, House Range, Utah. 7. Cranidium, X 10, showing short occipital spine, USNM 141760, USGS colln. 1440-CO, Prehousia zone, Snake Range, Nev. Dytremacephalus asperaxis n. sp. (p. 85), X 10. 10. Sterogram of silicified holotype cranidium, USNM 141761. 11. Silicified free cheek, USNM 141762. 12. Silicified pygidium, USNM 141763. All from USGS colln. 3026-CO, Dunderbergia zone, McGill, Nev. 13. Cranidium, USNM 141764, USGS colln. 3012-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Bastian Peak, Nev. Dytremacephalus granulosus Palmer (p. 85). 14. Stereogram of cranidium, X 8, USNM 141765. 16. Free cheek, X 10, USNM 141766. 21. Pygidium, X 10, USNM 141767. All from USGS colln. 3473-CO, Dunderbergia zone, House Range, Utah. 17. Silicified free cheek, X 10, USNM 141768. 18. Silicified cranidium, X 10, USNM 141769. 19. Silicified pygidium, X 10, USNM 141770. All from USGS colln. 3003-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Bastian Peak, Nev. Minupeltis conservator Palmer (p. 86), X 8. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 136905, USGS colln. 2294-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. Minupeltis definita n. sp. (p. 86), X 8. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 141771, USGS colln. 2541-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Cherry Creek, Nev. Bynumina globosa (Walcott) (p. 82), X 10. 22. Cranidium, USNM 141772, USGS colln. 3109-CO, Elvinia zone, Snake Range, Nev. 23. Cranidium, questionably assigned, USNM 141773, USGS colln. 2563-CO Dunderbergia zone, Shingle Pass, Nev. Genus and species undetermined 6 (p. 93), X 8. Cranidium, USNM 141774, USGS colln. 2581-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 18 1 3 5 6 8 9 POSITION UNCERTAINPLATE 19 Figures 1, 3-6. 2, 7. 8, 10, 11. 9, 12, 13. 14, 16. 15, 17-20. 21, 22. Aphelotoxon acuminata (Palmer) (p. 79), X 10. 1. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 136903, USGS colln. 2296-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 3. Cranidium, USNM 141775, USGS colln. 2605-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Ruby Range, Nev. 4. Silicified free cheek, USNM 141776. 5. Silicified cranidium, USNM 141777. 6. Silicified pygidium, USNM 141778. All from USGS colln. 3003-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Bastian Peak, Nev. Aphelotoxon punctata n. sp. (p. 80), X 10. 2. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 141779, USGS colln. 2601-CO. 7. Cranidium, USNM 141780, USGS colln. 2603-CO. Both from Dunderbergia zone, Ruby Range, Nev. Aphelotoxon limbata n. sp. (p. 80), X 10. 8. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 141781, USGS colln. 2999-CO, Dunderbergia zone, House Range, Utah. 10. Cranidium, USNM 141782. 11. Pygidium, USNM 141783. Both from USGS colln. 3021-CO, Dunderbergia zone, McGill, Nev. Aphelotoxon spinosus n. sp. (p. 80), X 10. 9. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 141784. 12. Free cheek, USNM 141785. 13. Small cranidium, USNM 141786. All from USGS colln. 2998-CO, Dunderbergia zone, House Range, Utah. Aphelotoxon marginata n. sp. (p. 80), X 10. 14. Small pathologic cranidium; left side like that of A. limbata, USNM 141787. 16. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 141788. Both from USGS colln. 3034-CO, Dunderbergia zone, McGill, Nev. Comanchia minus n. sp. (p. 83). 15. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 5, USNM 141789. 17. Stereogram of pygidium, X 5, USNM 141790. Both from USGS colln. 2472-CO, Elvinia zone, McGill, Nev. 18. Free cheek, X 8, USNM 141791. 19. Cranidium, X 5, USNM 141792. 20. Pygidium, X 5, USNM 141793. All from USGS colln. 1193-CO, Elvinia zone, Snake Range, Nev. Aphelotoxon granulosus n. sp. (p. 79), X 10. 21. Free cheek, USNM 141794. 22. Holotype cranidium, USNM 141795. Both from USGS colln. 2316-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Arizona Peak, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 19 POSITION UNCERTAINPLATE 20 Figures 1-4, 6, 7, 11, 12. Anechocephalus spinosus n. sp. (p. 78). 1. Free cheek, X 5, USNM 141796. 2. Enlargement of ornamentation of holotype cranidium, X 10. 3. Stereogram of holotype crandium, X 5, USNM 141797. 4. Pygidium, X 5, USNM 141798. All from USGS colln. 2579-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 6. Cranidium, X 5, USNM 141799. 7. Pygidium, X 4, USNM 141800. Both from USGS colln. 2581-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 11. Cranidium, X 3, USNM 141801. 12. Pygidium, X 5, USNM 141802. Both from USGS colln. 956-CO, Elvinia zone, Eureka, Nev. 5, 8-10, 13, 14. Anechocephalus trigranulatus Palmer (p. 78). 5. Cranidium, X 6, USNM 141803. 8. Enlargement of cranidium shown in fig. 5, X 10, showing ornamentation. 10. Cranidium, X 6, USNM 141804. 14. Pygidium, X 6, USNM 141805. All from USGS colln. 2552-CO, Elvinia zone, Cherry Creek, Nev. 9. Cranidium, X 6, USNM 136886b. 13. Pygidium, X 5, USNM 136886a. Both from USGS colln. 952-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 15, 16, 20. Morosa brevispina n. sp. (p. 87), X 8. 15. Pygidium, USNM 141806. 16. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 141807. 20. Free cheek, USNM 141808. All from USGS colln. 1268-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Quartz Spring area, Calif. 18-19. Morosa longispina Palmer (p. 87), X 6. 17. Pygidium, USNM 141809. 18. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, USNM 136909. 19. Latex cast of free cheek, USNM 141810. All from USGS colln. 2299-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Eureka, Nev. 21-25. Morosa extensa n. sp. (p. 87). 21. Free cheek, X 3, USNM 141811. 22. Stereogram of holotype cranidium, X 5, USNM 141812. 23. Stereogram of pygidium, X 3, USNM 141813, 24. Small cranidium, X 6, USNM 141814. 25. Small pygidium, X 6, USNM 141815. All from USGS colln. 2605-CO, Dunderbergia zone, Ruby Range, Nev.GEOLOGICAL SURVEY PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 PLATE 20 POSITION UNCERTAINSfeM w w r is m ? w '#■ “ 5 2-o ° 8 5 Aphelaspis buttsi (Kobayashi) Olenaspella separata Palmer Aphelaspis brachyphasis Palmer Aphelaspis haguei (Hall and Whitfield) Cheilocephalus brevilobus (Walcott) Glaphyraspis omata (Lochman) Terranovella brevis Palmer Blountia bristolensis Resser Aphelaspis subditus Palmer Listroa toxoura Palmer Hardyoides minor Kobayashi Olenaspella regularis Palmer Aphelaspis longispina Palmer Cheilocephalus granulosus Palmer Dicanthopyge quadrata Palmer Tumicephalus depressus Palmer Bromella veritas Palmer Dicanthopyge convergens Palmer Hardyoides mimicus Palmer Olenaspella paucisegmenta Palmer Dunderbergia brevispina Palmer Dicanthopyge reductus Palmer Prehousia prima Palmer Prehousia indenta Palmer Cemuelimbus laevifrons Palmer Prehousia impolita Palmer Prehousia alata Palmer Cheilocephalus brachyops Palmer Dunderbergia calculosa Palmer Aphelotoxon spinosus Palmer Dunderbergia? anyta (Hall and Whitfield) Cernuolimbus granulosus Palmer Aphelotoxon limbata Palmer Elburgia granulosa (Hall and Whitfield) Minupeltis definita Palmer Strigambitus transversus Palmer Strigambitus utahensis (Resser) Aphelotoxon acuminata (Palmer) Dytremacephalus granulosus Palmer Prehousia diverta Palmer Elburgia intermedia Palmer Erixanium carinatum Palmer Dytremacephalus asperaxis Palmer Dunderbergia bigranulosa Palmer Pterocephalia concava Palmer Strigambitus bilobus Palmer Erixanium brachyaxis Palmer Sigmocheilus notha (Resser) Litocephcdus verruculapeza Palmer Pterocephalia elongata Palmer Apachia prima Palmer Dunderbergia nitida (Hall and Whitfield) Aphelotoxon granulosus Palmer Minupeltis conservator Palmer Cernuolimbus semigranulosus Palmer Prehousia semicircularis Palmer Iddingsia intermedia Palmer Aphelotoxon punctata Palmer Pterocephalia? punctata Palmer Cernuolimbus orygmatos Palmer Simulolenus ivilsoni (Henningsmoen) Dunderbergia variagranula Palmer Sigmocheilus grata (Resser) Dunderbergia polybothra Palmer Morosa longispina Palmer Morosa extensa Palmer Cernuolimbus depressus Palmer Litocephalus bilobatus (Hall and Whitfield) Erixanium multisegmentus Palmer Anechocephalus trigranulatus Palmer Elviniella laevis Palmer Elburgia quinnensis (Resser) Strigambitus? blepharina Palmer Morosa brevispina Palmer Taenora expansa Palmer Litocephcdus granulomarginatus Palmer Simulolenus granulatus (Palmer) Oligometopus breviceps (Walcott) Pseudosaratogia leptogranulata Palmer Pterocephalia sanctisabae Roemer Aphelotoxon marginata Palmer Sigmocheilus pogonipensis (Resser) Sigmocheilus flabellifer (Hall and Whitfield) Housia ovata Palmer Apachia butlerensis (Frederickson) Oligometopus contractus Palmer Parahousia subequalis Palmer Elvinia roemeri (Shumard) Parahousia constricta Palmer Bynumina globosa (Walcott) Kindbladia affinis (Walcott) Elvinia granulata Resser Iddingsia robusta (Walcott) Dokimocephalus pemasutus (Walcott) Pseudosaratogia abnormis Palmer Irvingella angustilimbatus Kobayashi Litocephalus magnus Palmer Pseudokingstonia exotica Palmer Iddingsia utahensis Resser Housia varro (Walcott) Irvingella flohri Resser Iddingsia similis (Walcott) Anechocephalus spinosus Palmer Stenambon megagranulus Palmer Stenambon paucigranulus Palmer Xenocheilos granulosus Palmer Irvingella transversa Palmer Irvingella major Ulrich and Resser Aciculolenus peculiaris Palmer Comanchia minus Palmer Dellea? punctata Palmer Simulolenus quadrisulcatus Palmer 3 S- S’ -□ § *8 iff*.'. : t' np> ~7* -a -CD CZD CD -CD £? X CL ifl! *< o- a 8. iD: :ni 3 CO (V a co ZZ 1 ■ Unnamed (equivalent to Lincoln Peak Formation) Dicanthopyge Ililil I :|: 11 i I: I; I: I: I; I Prehousia fO fO ro ro K) ro ro ro ro Ol cn U1 CJ1 (Ji cn U1 cn VO 00 VO VO VO VO VO VO CO o 00 y ro A cn 00 vo o o o o o O o O O o o o o o o o o o • Dunderbergia ro ro ro ro ro ro ro ro o> o o CTi — o o o o O O o o o o )—• ro CO -P* cn oo 'O Z r- o O O o o O o o zS o o o o o o o O o 9 |: . .1:1 ilil ;l; il; ;l ililil. i i il Ji: in Till !'!: 1 i 1:1 | M 1 li IH:1; .lI.'LIJ L: Dicanthopyge quadrata Palmer Tumicephalus depressus Palmer Dicanthopyge convergens Palmer Olenaspella paucisegmenta Palmer Prehousia indenta Palmer Prehousia impolita Palmer Cemuolimbus granulosus Palmer Dunderbergia ? anyta (Hall and Whitflield) Aphelotoxon punctata Palmer Pterocephalia? punctata Palmer Simulolenus wilsoni (Henningsmoen) Strigambitus utahensis (Resser) Aphelotoxon acuminata (Palmer) Morosa extensa Palmer Strigambitus bilobus Palmer Dunderbergia bigranulosa Palmer Erixanium brachyaxis Palmer Cemuolimbus orygmatos Palmer Cemuolimbus depressus Palmer Pterocephalia concava Palmer Dunderbergia variagranula Palmer Erixanium multisegmentus Palmer Sigmocheilus notha (Resser) Dunderbergia nitida (Hall and Whitfield) ililil lii-i i: mi I 11 mi- ls. nr K'-'frf Lincoln Peak Johns Wash Limestone (equivalent) Corset Spring Shale (equivalent) Unnamed limestones Dunderbergia CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO o o 8 O O o o o o o o o o o o o o O o o 1—* O •—* ro CO cn 00 VO o *— ro co cn (T> o n n o n o o o o o o o o o O o O o o o o o o O o o o o o o o o o o • • • • • • • • • • • • s>i i i .11 ilni h Prehousia diverta Palmer Elburgia granulosa (Hall and Whitfield) Dytremacephalus granulosus Palmer Strigambitus transversus Palmer Aphelotoxon acuminata (Palmer) Elburgia intermedia Palmer Pterocephalia concava Palmer Elburgia quinnensis (Resser) Sigmocheilus notha (Resser) Dytremacephalus asperaxis Palmer Apachia prima Palmer Dunderbergia nitida (Hall and Whitfield) Iddingsia intermedia Palmer Dunderbergia bigranulosa Palmer Dunderbergia variagranula Palmer Pterocephalia sanctisabae Roemer Bynumina globosa (Walcott) Pseudosaratogia abnormis Palmer Elvinia roemeri Shumard Kindbladia affinis (Walcott) Iddingsia similis (Walcott) ■ - ■■ V -m " m sp 1 Sp Sp (/> •O _ (/>_ ■O _ (/> ■o ■ ID — ■o cn o Elvinia s. 2 E Lincoln Peak CD Aphel ■ aspis Aphelaspis haguei (Hall and Whitfield) Cheilocephalus brevilobus (Walcott) Glaphyraspis omata (Lochman) Dicanthopyge quadrata Palmer Dicanthopyge reductus Palmer Tumicephalus depressus Palmer Dunderbergia brevispina Palmer Bromella veritas Palmer Prehousia indenta Palmer Prehousia alata Palmer Dunderbergia? anyta (Hall and Whitfield)-Strigambitus tranversus Palmer Dytremacephalus granulosus Palmer Parahousia subequalis Palmer Elviniella laevis Palmer Housia ovata Palmer Oligometopus contractus Palmer Aphelotoxon marginata Palmer tddingsia intermedia Palmer Cheilocephalus brachyops Palmer Pterocephalia sanctisabae Roemer Kindbladia affinis (Walcott) iddingsia robusta (Walcott) Bynumina globosa (Walcott) Dunderbergia variagranula Palmer Elvinia roemeri (Shumard) Dokimocephalus pemasutus (Walcott) Irvingella major Ulrich Re“*'r Comanctita minus Palmer Stenambon paucigranulus Palmer Dicanthopyge Prehousia Johns Wash Limestone Dunderbergia Corset Spring Shale Unnamed limestones Elvinia ro co co co ►—* t—• M •—“H O ID (O (O Ul I I I I I o oo o o o oo o o 11111 z E Lincoln Peak Johns Wash Limestone Aphelaspis Dicanthopyge 9? m Cheilocephalus brevilobus (Walcott) Glaphyraspis omata (Lochman) Dicanthopyge convergens Palmer Tumicephalus depressus Palmer Dunderbergia brevispina Palmer Prehousia prima Palmer Bromella veritas Palmer Cheilocephalus granulosus Palmer Prehousia alata Palmer Cheilocephalus brachyops Palmer Dunderbergia calculosa Palmer Housia ovata Palmer Sigmocheilus pogonipensis (Resser) Parahousia subequalis Palmer Pterocephalia sanctisabae Roemer Elburgia quinnensis (Resser) Bynumina globosa (Walcott) Apachia butlerensis (Frederickson) Oligometopus contractus Palmer Elvinia roemeri (Shumard) Pseudosaratogia abnormis Palmer Irvingella angustilimbatus Kobayashi Parahousia constricta Palmer Kindbladia affinis (Walcott) Sigmocheilus flabellifer (Hall and Whitfield) Xenocheilos granulosus Palmer Irvingella flohri Resser Iddingsia similis (Walcott) Prehousia Corset Spring Shale Dunderbergia i -TT Unnamed limestones Elvinia ro ro ro ro ro co cn co o> »—* ►—* ro cn CTi O O O O O o o o o o o o o o • • • z E UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR - TPROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY i */• .'1 . ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________.________________________ PLATE 22STRATIGRAPHIC OCCURRENCES OF IDENTIFIED SPECIES OF PTYCHOPARIOID TRILOBITES FROM THE PTEROCEPHALIID BIOMERE, WHITE PINE, NYE, AND EUREKA COUNTIES, NEVADA Hamburg Limestone Aphelaspis - - Dunderberg Windfall Barton Canyon Limestone ro ro ro ro ro ro ro CJl CJl CJl CJl CJl CJl CJl 00 00 00 00 00 00 4* 4* CJl Ol vl 00 vo o O O n O O O o o o o o o o o • • • o X m 30 30 < o 30 m m * (/) m O H o z H m TJ z m o O c z H Aphelaspis subditus Palmer Listroa toxoura Palmer Olenaspella regularis Palmer Cheilocephalus granulosus Palmer Dicanthopyge quadrata Palmer Dicanthopyge convergent Palmer Tumicephalus depressus Palmer Prehousia indenta Palmer Prehousia impolita Palmer Cernuolimbus laevifrons Palmer Morosa definita Palmer Aphelotoxon acuminata Palmer Elburgia granulosa Palmer Strigambitus utahensis (Resser) Cernuolimbus depressus Palmer Dytremacephalus asperaxis Palmer Dunderbergia bigranulosa Palmer Sigmocheilus notha (Resser) Pterocephalia concava Palmer Pterocephalia elongata Palmer Lithocephalus verruculapeza Palmer Dunderbergia nitida (Hall and Whitfield) Sigmocheilus grata (Resser) Erixanium brachyaxis Palmer Sigmocheilus flabellifer (Hall and Whitfieild) Sigmocheilus pogonipensis (Resser) Housia ovata Palmer Anechocephalus trigranulatus Palmer Elvinia roemeri (Shumard) Elviniella laevis Palmer Parahousia constricta Palmer Kindbladia affinis (Walcott) Pseudokingstonia exotica Palmer Bynumina globasa (Walcott) Cheilocephalus brevilobus? (Walcott) Stenambon paucigranulus Palmer Dellea? punctata Palmer Simulolenus quadrisulcatus Palmer Aciculolenus peculiaris Palmer Comanchia minus Palmer Irvingella major Ulrich and Resser Dicanthopyge tor Prehousia H iH'i'H'flH*i'H HIHI Dunderbergia ro ro ro ro ro roro ro ro CJl CJl CJl CJl CJl CJl CJl CJl 4* 4- 4> 4> 4*. 4>4> 4^ a ro CO 4* CJl Olvl 00 VO O O o O O on O O o o o o o oo o c • • • • • • • • N> CJl CJl H-* I o o ii I- i ill WH TO- - Elvina N> CJI CJI ro i O o N> CJI CJI CO I o o fO CJI o o N) CJI CJl CJI I o o CJI CT> I o o ro CJl CJl vi i O o UlifUTjT —i o II 03 ^ m 5 ;c 2 N o Z X o o o 2!= Z m o? -r ■■ o 3- ft * -MH Is 9 3 ft 09 B 3 ft H £ 5* cr S- CL ft CL B s p 3 09 D" EL ft JS? & *< EL 3. CL 3 , ft CL §• sr § g- (t 3 (D £j O 3 & § 3' 09 ft as & i m x -0 r > z > H 0 z mum w 3 3 a ■-i p £ ft c “0 T m 30 T > 30 H O T H X m O Q 0) m O H H m TJ z m o o c z H ■< I ro O m tj ? > I H H m O ~n li m m O ^ On z5 H r -< r cn m o H o z Dunderbergia? anyta (Hall and Whitfield) Aphelotoxon limbata Palmer Elburgia granulosa (Hall and Whitfield) Strigambitus transversus Palmer Strigambitus bilobus Palmer Pterocephalia concava Palmer Elburgia intermedia Palmer Dytremacephalus asperaxis Palmer Erixanium brachyaxis Palmer Dunderbergia calculosa Palmer Prehousia diverta Palmer Sigmocheilus notha (Resser) Dunderbergia nitida (Hall and Whitfield) Aphelotoxon acuminata (Palmer) Iddingsia intermedia Palmer Apachia prima Palmer Apachia butlerensis (Frederickson) Aphelotoxon marginalis Palmer Elviniella laevis Palmer Sigmocheilus flabellifer (Hall and Whitfield) Housia ovata Palmer Irvingella angustilimbatus Kobayashi Kindbladia affinis (Walcott) Iddingsia robusta (Walcott) Elvinia roemeri (Shumard) Pseudosaratogia abnormis Palmer Iddingsia utahensis Resser Iddingsia similis (Walcott) Irvingella flohri Resser Anechocephalus spinosus Palmer Irvingella major Ulrich and Resser Stenambon megagranulus Palmer Comanchia minus Palmer Simulolenus quadrisulcatus Palmer Aphelaspis buttsi (Kobayashi) Olenaspella separata Palmer Aphelaspis brachyphasis Palmer Aphelaspis haguei (Hall and Whitfield) Glaphyraspis ornata (Lochman) Aphelaspis subditus Palmer Listroa toxoura Palmer Olenaspella regularis Palmer Hardyoides minor Kobayashi Aphelaspis longispina Palmer Dicanthopyge quadrata Palmer Dicanthopyge convergens Palmer Tumicephalus depressus Palmer Dicanthopyge reductus Palmer Prehousia prima Palmer Bromella veritas Palmer Prehousia indenta Palmer Dunderberg Dicanthopyge ro ro ro rororo ro ro ro rororo ro ro ro ro ro 4* 4* 4> 4*4»4k 4* 4* 4» 4»4>CJ1 CJl CJl CJl CJl CJl 00 vo VO vovovo VO VO VO VOVOO o o o o o vo O i—* roco4* CJl Ol >0 00 COO »-* ro CO 4^ CJl O o O nno o O O ooo o o o o o o o o ooo o o o ooo o o o o o • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ¥1 m I mi In Pre: housia o z m X o o o *82 30 > Z o m ui •d CL ft (/> 3 X3 -< C O o > T1 r > H 0) m O H 0 z z m o o c z H -< Bonanza King Aphel- aspis Dican- thopyge Aphelaspis subditus Palmer Blountia bristolensis Resser Cheilocephalus brevilobus (Walcott) Listroa toxoura Palmer Dicanthopyge convergens Palmer Olenaspella paucisegmenta Palmer Hardyoides mimicus Palmer Cernuolimbus granulosus Palmer Pterocephalia? punctata Palmer Simulolenus uiilsoni (Henningsmoen) Aphelotoxon acuminata (Palmer) Dunderbergia polybothra Palmer Erixanium carinatum Palmer Elburgia granulosa (Hall and Whitfield) Morosa extensa Palmer Dunderbergia nitida (Hall and Whitfield) Aphelotoxon marginata Palmer Sigmocheilus pogonipensis (Resser) Taenora expansa Palmer Dokimocephalus pemasutus (Walcott) Elvinia roemeri (Shumard) Irvingella angustilimbatus Kobayashi Sigmocheilus flabellifer (Hall and Whitfield) Irvingella major Ulrich and Resser Pterocephalia sanctisabae Roemer Iddingsia robusta (Walcott) Anechocephalus spinosus Palmer ?Pre -housia u >-> oi io co vo co ai i i O O o o Dunderberg Dunderbergia co co CJl CJl co oo A CJl i i O O O O CO CJl 00 Ol O O ill 111 -U -f 'ITjTjT 1 hi |j |j jl- -1 1- ii WIWiWm III 1111111, 11111111111= Windfall Elvinia lilllllllilililil1 H CO CO 00 CJl CJl CJl CO CO CO ^1 00 VO o o o o o o H O *i X O o o ZK 33 > z o I ■ of 3 ■8 if) m O H O z m C > O O c z H C u T m 30 0 if) H T > 30 30 H m o -n H X m m c -< 30 m * > Dunderberg Shale Windfall Elvinia vo CJl vi ro ro ro CJl CJl CJl VI VI 00 Ol CJl o O O o o O O • • • d o ii > o z Z3 n o o zK Pterocephalia sanctisabae Roemer Irvingella flohri Resser Kindbladia affinis (Walcott) Anechocephalus spvnosus Palmer Xenocheilos granulosus Palmer Dunderbergia nitida (Hall and Whitfield) Elvinia roemeri (Shumard) Iddingsia similis (Walcott) Irvingella transversa Palmer Stenambon megagranulus Palmer Simulolenus quadrisulcatus Palmer Irvingella major Ulrich and Resser Dellea? punctata Palmer UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR PROFESSIONAL PAPER 493 GEOLOGICAL SURVEY _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________.____________ PLATE 23